Model DWL-2000AP / DWL-2000AP_revB / DWL-2000AP_revC
Question How do I change the wireless mode on my DWL-2000AP?
Answer The DWL-2000AP can be configured in four different modes:

Access Point Mode
Wireless Client Mode
Wireless Bridge Mode
Multi-Point Bridge Mode



Access Point Mode


The DWL-2000AP is set to Access Point (AP) mode by default. Access Point mode will allow the DWL-2000AP to communicate with wireless clients.

Step 1 Using a cross-over Ethernet cable connect the DWL-2000AP to your PC.

Step 2 Your computerīs IP address must be in the same range as the DWL-2000AP for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-2000AP is 192.168.0.50.

Windows 98/ME
Windows 2000
Windows XP
Macintosh

Step 3 To begin configuring the DWL-2000AP open a web browser and enter the IP address of the AP (192.168.0.50). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is left empty.



Step 4 Click on the Advanced tab and then the Mode button. Select the Access Point radio button.



Step 5 Click Apply and click Continue to save the changes.



Wireless Client Mode


AP Client or Wireless Client mode allows the DWL-2000AP to become a wireless client to another AP. In essence the AP has now become a wireless adapter card. You would use this mode to allow an AP to communicate with another AP. Wireless cards will not communicate with access points in AP Client / Wireless Client mode.

Note: The only Access Point the DWL-2000AP can be a Wireless Client to is another DWL-2000AP.

Step 1 Log into the DWL-2000AP that will be configured as the Access Point and obtain the Ethernet MAC address.



Follow steps 1-3 from Access Point Mode

Step 4 Click on the Advanced tab and the Mode button. Select the Wireless Client radio button.

Step 5 In the Remote AP MAC field enter in the Ethernet MAC Address of the other DWL-2000AP (the one configured as an AP).



Step 6 Click Apply and click Continue to save the changes.



Wireless Bridge Mode


Wireless Bridge mode allows you to connect two DWL-2000APīs together Wirelessly. You will need to enter in the MAC Address of each DWL-2000AP into the others configuration.

Follow steps 1-3 from Access Point Mode

Step 4 Click the Status tab and then the Device Info button. Write down the Ethernet MAC Address. You will need to input this on the other DWL-2000AP.



Step 5 Click the Home tab and then click the LAN button. Change the LAN IP Address (try using 192.168.0.51, 192.168.0.52, 192.168.0.53, etc..), so that each DWL-2000AP has a unique IP Address in the same subnet.



Repeat Steps 1-4 on the second Access Point

Step 6 Click the Advanced tab and then click the Wireless button. Click the radio button next to Wireless Bridge.



Step 7 In the Wireless Bridge MAC field type in the MAC Address of the other DWL-2000AP. Click on Apply and then click Continue to save the changes.

Follow Steps 6 & 7 on the second Access Point.

Note: When configured in Wireless Bridge Mode, the DWL-2000AP will not communicate with wireless clients such as computers with wireless adapters. The DWL-2000AP will only communicate with another DWL-2000AP when set to either of the Bridging modes.



Multi-Point Bridge Mode


Follow steps 1-3 from Access Point Mode

Step 4 Click on the Advanced tab and the Mode button. Select the Multi-Point Bridge radio button.



Click Apply and then click Continue to save the changes.

Model DWL-A520 / DWL-A650
Question How do I connect my DWL-A520/DWL-A650 to a wireless network?
Answer Note: Link Monitor cannot be used to configure the DWL-A520 and DWL-A650

To configure your wireless settings, please select your operating system:

Windows 98SE/ME
Windows 2000
Windows XP





Windows 98 Second Edition & ME


The configuration utility is located in the Control Panel.

Step 1 Go to Start>Settings>Control Panel. Double-click on the D-Link 802.11A Configuration Utility icon.



Step 2 Under the Settings tab highlight Default in the configuration list and click on the Modify button.



Step 3 Under the General tab enter the Network Name (SSID), Network Connection (AP if connecting to a wireless router or access point), and Turbo Mode settings.



Step 4 Select OK to save your settings.

Note: If you enable Turbo mode, make sure turbo mode is enabled on your access point or wireless router or you will not be able to connect wirelessly.





Windows 2000


Step 1 Right-click on the My Network Places icon and select Properties.



Step 2 Right-click the Local Area Connection for the DWL-A650/DWL-A520, select Properties, and click on the Configure button.



Step 3 Under the Settings tab highlight Default in the configuration list and click on the modify button.



Step 4 Under the General tab enter the Network Name (SSID), Network Connection (AP if connecting to a wireless router or access point), and Turbo Mode settings.







Windows XP


The Zero Configuration Utility built into Windows XP is different depending on if you have installed Service Pack 1.

Without Service Pack 1

Step 1 Right-click on the two computer monitor icons in the system tray, select View Available Wireless Networks.



Step 2 Highlight your wireless network which is the SSID of your wireless network (if you are connecting to a D-Link router it will be default), and click connect.

Step 3 If you do not see your wireless network in the available networks box click on the advanced button. Select add, type in the SSID of your router or access point, uncheck this computer is connected in and ad-hoc peer-to-peer network, and then click ok.





With Service Pack 1

Please read here regarding Service Pack 1 and disabling the SSID Broadcast.

Step 1 Right-click on the two computer monitor icons in the system tray, select View Available Wireless Networks.

Step 2 Uncheck the allow me to connect to this wireless network even though it is not secure box. Highlight your wireless network (if you are connecting to a D-Link router it will be default), and click connect.

Step 3 If you do not see your wireless network in the available networks box click on the advanced button. Select add, type in the SSID of your router or access point, uncheck this computer is connected in and ad-hoc peer-to-peer network, and then click ok.
Model ANT24-0230
Question What is the Yellow SMA connection on my ANT24-0230 used for?
Answer The Yellow SMA connection is for A Band routers and APs.
Model ANT24-0400 / ANT24-0401 / ANT24-0500 / ANT24-0700 / ANT24-0800 / ANT24-0801 / ANT24-1400 / ANT24-1500 / ANT24-1800 / ANT24-1801
Question I have a D-Link access point and an ANT24-xxxx antenna, what cable do I buy to connect them together?
Answer D-Link offers 3 lengths of low loss extension cables. 3, 6, and 9 meter long cable from D-Link have been made available. ANT24-CB03N (3 meters), ANT24-CB06N (6 meters), and ANT24-CB09N (9 meters)are the representitive part numbers.
Model ANT24-0400 / ANT24-0401 / ANT24-0500 / ANT24-0800 / ANT24-0801 / ANT24-1400 / ANT24-1500 / ANT24-1800 / ANT24-1801 / ANT24-CB03N / ANT24-CB06 / ANT24-CB09
Question What is Antenna Gain?
Answer The gain of an antenna is the measurement of the antennaīs ability to focus a signal in a particular direction. This is measured in dbi (isotropic).
Model ANT24-1801
Question What does the arrow indicate on the antenna?
Answer The arrow indicates the direction of the wireless coverage. The arrow should point in the direction of where you are trying to send the signal to.
Model DBT-120 / DBT-120_revC
Question Do Bluetooth devices support Alphanumeric Characters when pairing?
Answer Most bluetooth devices only support up to "16 Numeric characters", with a "minimum of 4 characters".
Model DBT-120 / DBT-120_revB3 / DBT-120_revB4
Question What is the difference between firmware version 1.42 Build 10 and 1.42 Build 10a?
Answer Firmware version 1.42 Build 10a is for DBT-120 Revisions A1, A2, B1, B2, and B3. These revisions use Registry Security, which means that you have to enter a security code.

Firmware version 1.42 Build 10 is for DBT-120 Revision B4 and above. Those revisions use Device Security, which means that you do not have to enter a security code because it is built-in to the device.
Model DBT-120 / DBT-120_revB3 / DBT-120_revB4
Question How do I connect my DBT-120 to my Motorola Phone via Bluetooth?
Answer Note: This FAQ applies to most Motorola Phone OSīs however has been fully tested with the Motorola E815, Motorola Cingular RAZR and Motorola T-Mobile RAZR.

Step 1: Open My Bluetooth Places on your desktop.

Step 2: If this is your first time opening My Bluetooth Places, the Bluetooth Setup Wizard will appear and walk you through setting up your first bluetooth device.



Step 3: Select your computer type and name then click on Next.



Step 4: Click on Next on the Initial Bluetooth Configuration screen.

Step 5: Choose the services you wish to install on your bluetooth device.



Step 6: Windows will now install the appropriate software for your DBT-120 Services.

Step 7: Once Windows has finished installing your services, click on Next to go to the Bluetooth Device Selection window. Place your phone in Find Me mode.



A. Go to Settings on your phone menu.
B. Select Connections.
C. Select Bluetooth.
D. Select Setup and click Find Me. *Make sure your phone has Bluetooth power ON.


Step 8: Once your device has been found, select it from the list and click on Next.

Step 9: Now enter your PIN code and click on Initiate Pairing.



Note: Minimum PIN Code length must be 4 numeric characters. Maximum allowed is 16.

Step 10: Your phone screen should now prompt you to bond with your PC. Click Yes and then enter the 4-16 Digit PIN Code that you entered in the DBT-120 Software.

Step 11: Your phone should now have verified and saved your PIN Code information. If it failed, you may have entered in the wrong PIN Number on your phone and will need to click on Initiate Pairing once more and try again.

Step 12: Now you must select the services on your phone you wish to use. Once you have done this click on Next.



Step 13: If you have another bluetooth device, you can go through the wizard once more. If not click on Skip.

Step 14: Click on Finish.

Step 15: Re-open My Bluetooth Places and your device should be listed with the available services.

Model DBT-120 / DBT-120_revB3 / DBT-120_revB4
Question How to transfer files from a Sony Ericsson P800 to a computer using a DBT-120?
Answer

Make sure the D-Link software and driver are installed from the CD-ROM.

Click here for Windows XP (service pack 2) installation instructions (PDF).

Step 1 Select Discoverable under the Bluetooth menu on your phone.

Step 2 Click on Add to find the PC. Your computer name will appear in the list. Click your computer name.

Step 3 Enter a pin code for the connection. Click on the pop-up text on your computer.

 

Step 4 Enter the same pin code into the PIN Code box.



Step 5 Open a picture under Sony Ericsson P800. Select Send as.



Step 6 Choose Send as: Bluetooth.

Step 7 Select your computer name under the available device list. The picture will transfer to the computer.


  • What is the difference between a Pin Code and Security Code?
    • Model DBT-120 / DBT-120_revB3 / DBT-120_revB4
    Question What is the difference between a Pin Code and Security Code?
    Answer When you first install the drivers for the DBT-120 you may be asked for a Security Code in order to continue the installation.

    After youīve installed the drivers and configured your DBT-120 you will be asked to create a Pin Code in order to pair the two Bluetooth devices.

  • Pin Code - This is something that you create. This is an authentication request. This notification appears automatically in a balloon over the Windows system tray if a Personal Identification Code is required before a connection can proceed. If the PIN code does not match the code entered on the remote device, the connection will not be allowed. Once the remote device has been authenticated this notification will not appear again, unless the paired relationship is broken and the devices must re-sync.

  • Security Code - A 32-digit security code that is included with the DBT-120 and is located on the back flap of the driver CD cover. If it is a rev.B4 then you shouldnīt be asked to input one.

    • Model DBT-120 / DBT-120_revB3 / DBT-120_revB4
    Question How do I get the DBT-120 to connect to my Ericsson T68 cell phone in Windows 98Se, ME, 2000, and XP?
    Answer Step 1 On your phone under the Bluetooth menu select Discoverable.

    Step 2 Double-click the My Bluetooth Places icon on your desktop and then double-click Entire Bluetooth Neighborhood

    Step 3 Once it has discovered your phone, right-click the icon for your phone and click on Pair Device. It will prompt you for a Passkey which needs to be the same on both the phone and on your computer.

    Step 4 On your phone under the Bluetooth menu, select Linked devices, select Add device, and then select Phone accepts. Your phone will then advise you that your computer is attempting to pair with it. Once you have acknowledged the Pair it will prompt you for a Passkey, which needs to be the same Passkey you entered on your computer.

    Step 5 When your computer and your phone have been successfully paired, the icon for your phone in My Bluetooth Places will have a checkmark by it and you will then be able to transfer data between the two devices.

    NOTE: In order for the DBT-120 to discover a Bluetooth enabled Ericsson T68 or T68i cell phone, the phone should be held so that the the face of the phone is pointed toward the DBT-120. The DBT-120 may not find your cell phone if it is laying face up.
    Model DBT-120 / DBT-120_revB3 / DBT-120_revB4 / DBT-120_revC
    Question I think there may be a hardware problem with the DBT-120. Who do I contact for technical support?
    Answer Assuming that you have installed the Bluetooth software with no problems, technical support of hardware will be handled by D-Link*.

    If you purchased your DBT-120 from Apple, then you must contact Apple for support. The drivers and software are built-in to OS X (10.2.x).

    For D-Link Tech Support information, please visit the DBT-120 Product Page or call our 24 hour tech support at 1-877-453-5465 (USA only).
    Model DBT-120 / DBT-120_revb3 / DBT-120_revb4 / DBT-120_revC
    Question How do I pair my cell phone with my DBT-120 in macintosh?
    Answer Step 1 Insert your DBT-120 into the USB port of your Macintosh.

    Step 2 Click on the Bluetooth icon in the OSX toolbar and then select Set up Bluetooth Device.



    Step 3 The introduction to the Bluetooth Setup Assistant will open. Click on Continue.



    Step 4 Select Mobile Phone and then click on Continue.



    Step 5 Select your mobile from from the list and then click on Continue.



    Step 6 Click on Continue to move onto the next part of the Bluetooth set up.



    Step 7 Your phone will now ask for a numerical code that is displayed on the Macintosh. This is the PIN number being used in this particular device pairing.



    Step 8 Select the services that you want bluetooth to allow between your computer and your mobile phone and then click on Continue.



    Step 9 Click on Quit to end the Bluetooth Setup Assistant.



    Step 10 Click on the Bluetooth icon in the OSX toolbar then select Browse Device.



    Step 11 Select your phone from the list and then click on Browse.



    Step 12 You can now browse through your phone using the services you had previously setup to be available.

    Model DBT-120 / DBT-120_revB3 / DBT-120_revB4 / DBT-120_revC
    Question What is the minimum and maximum pin length that can be used when pairing bluetooth devices?
    Answer The minimum pin length for pairing devices is 4 numeric characters.

    The maximum pin length for pairing bluetooth devices is 16 numeric characters.

    Note: Most bluetooth devices support numeric characters only.
    Model DBT-120 / DBT-120_revB3 / DBT-120_revB4 / DBT-120_revC
    Question Once my phone is paired with my DBT-120 how do I transfer a file from my phone to my PC
    Answer Once you have paired you phone and your PC transferring a file from your phone to your PC is simple.

    Step 1: Locate the file you would like to send, on your phone.

    Step 2: Go to the options for the file and select Move or Send to Bluetooth
    (options vary on different phones).

    Step 3: From your phone, select your computers name as a choice for your Bluetooth device.

    Step 4: Your computer will now ask you if you wish to receive this file and the location it will be transferred to. Click OK




    Your file will be transferred to the location Chosen in step 4
    Model DBT-120 / DBT-120_revB3 / DBT-120_revB4 / DBT-120_revC
    Question Once my phone is paired with the DBT-120, how do I transfer a file from my PC to my phone?
    Answer Once you have paired your phone with the DBT-120 transferring a file is simple.

    Step 1: Locate the file you would like to transfer on your PC.

    Step 2: Right click on the file and select to Bluetooth (this option will be available after installing the DBT-120), then select your phone.



    Step 3: Your phone will detect the DBT-120 trying to send a file and ask if you wish to accept the file. Click Yes and the file will transfer to your phone.
    Model DBT-120 / DBT-120_revC / DBT-120_revB3 / DBT-120_revB4
    Question Where do I locate the Model number, Serial Number, and hardware version of my adapter?
    Answer Printed on a sticker on the outer box, on the bottom panel, you will find the Model number, Serial number (S/N), Hardware version (H/W), shipping firmware version (F/W), and MAC address (MAC ID).

    You may also locate these numbers on the adapter itself.

    For PCMCIA (laptop) and USB adapters, there will be a printed sticker on the bottom of the unit, having that information.

    For PCI adapters, the numbers may be harder to locate, but will either be printed on a sticker on the metal sheild, or etched onto the circuit board.

      Identifying these numbers:
    • A serial number will be 13 alpa/numeric digits:
    • A model number will usually begin with a D, have a dash and include a number: DWL-G520
    • MAC addresses have six pairs of HEX digits, for a total of 12.
      Allowed HEX characters are from 0-9 and A-F: BA:02:01:E6:F9:3E or BA0201E6F93E
    Model DBT-120_revB3 / DBT-120
    Question I lost my Security code how do I obtain a new key?
    Answer Click here to obtain a new key.

    Before you can obtain your new key a short form must be filled out. You will need to enter the MAC address of the DBT-120, referred to as BD (Bluetooth Device) Address, in order to obtain a new key.

    Click here for instructions on finding the MAC address of your DBT-120.

    The key will be sent to the email address you are registering the product with so be sure to enter a valid email address. You can only request a key one time for each product that you have.

    ** This does not apply to revision B4 **
    Model DBT-120_revB4
    Question What do I do if I get error message Valid security code not found. or Your Bluetooth Software license does not include use with this Bluetooth device [6] after installing the Bluetooth software?
    Answer Step 1 Physically remove the DBT-120 rev B4 from your computers USB port.

    Step 2 Uninstall the current software for the DBT-120 in Add/Remove Programs.

    Step 3 Click here to download an updated driver.

    Step 4 Remove inactive Bluetooth devices from the Device Manager.

    Show Hidden Devices
    A. Click Start > All Programs > Accessories and then click Command Prompt.
    B. Type set devmgr_show_nonpresent_devices=1 in the Command Prompt and then press Enter.
    C. Type cd \Windows\system32 in the Command Prompt and then press Enter.
    D. Type start devmgmt.msc in the Command Prompt and then press Enter.
    E. Click View > Show hidden devices. This will display devices that are not connected to your computer.
    F. When you are finished troubleshooting, close the Device Manager.
    G. Type exit in the Command Prompt

    The above instructions can be found at http://support.microsoft.com/?id=315539.

    Note: During Step E you will need to go into the different ports and delete all the grayed out Bluetooth devices.



    Step 5 Remove all Bluetooth Devices.





    Step 6 Reboot your computer.

    Step 7 Execute the Inst.exe file from the version 3.5 drivers that were downloaded in Step 3.

    Step 8 Towards the end of the installation you will receive an error stating that no bluetooth device is present, select the cancel option and the software will continue installing.

    Step 9 Once the installation has finished, insert your DBT-120 rev B4 into your USB port and wait for windows to install the generic drivers.

    Step 10 Force the D-Link driver to replace the Generic Bluetooth drivers.
    • Right click on your My Computer icon and select properties.
    • Select the Hardware tab and open the Device Manager.
    • Click on the plus sign next to Bluetooth Radios and right-click on the Generic Bluetooth driver.
    • Select Update Driver
    • Once the wizard has opened you will be prompted to have Windows check online for updates, Select No, not at this time


    Step 11 Select Install from a list or specific location (Advanced) and then lick Next.



    Step 12 Select Don’t search. I will choose the driver to install and then click Next.



    Step 13 Select the D-Link DBT-120 driver and then click Next.



    Step 14 Once the driver files have been successfully copied, Click Finish.

    After the driver update double-click Bluetooth Places. This will begin a wizard that will walk you through the setup of your Bluetooth devices.
    Model DBT-120_revC
    Question How do I pair my phone or device with my DBT-120 revC?
    Answer Pair your Phone with the DBT-120:



    Step 1: Right click on the Bluetooth Manager and select Add New Connection



    Step 2: Select Express Mode for easy setup (Make sure your phone or device is set to Discoverable mode)



    Step 3: The DBT-120 will scan for discoverable devices and creat a list. Select your phone or device and click Next



    Step 4: The DBT-120 Manager will ask for a Bluetooth passkey (PIN) number if required. Here you will enter a pass key you choose to use and click OK (4 digets minimum)



    Once you click OK your phone will ask to connect to this device and prompt for a pass key. Enter the pass key (PIN) you chose in the Bluetooth Manager (4 digets minimum)



    Step 5: Click Next to skip Advanced Modem Settings (You do not need this to pair)



    Step 6: Click Finish to end the Pairing of the device (Or add a Username and Password)




    You are now paired for simple file transfers and Bluetooth operations between devices
    Model DBT-120_revC
    Question How Do I install my DBT-120 revC in Vista?
    Answer NOTE: The following steps are only a suggestion. D-Link cannot guarantee that the following steps will work in every situation.

    Step 1: Insert the DBT-120 USB device into you Vista PC

    Step 2: Boot the computer. Wait for Vista to recognize the new hardware. Once it prompts you to locate the driver. Click Locate And Install Driver Software (Recommended).

    Step 3: Allow Vista to locate and install drivers from the Internet.

    Step 6: After the drivers are installed, Vista will tell you the device has installed properly and is ready to use.

    DBT-120 is now installed and ready to use in Vista.
    Model DBT-320
    Question How do I configure my DBT-320 on Mac OS X?
    Answer Step 1 Open System Prefrences and click Print & Fax.

    System Prefrences

    Step 2 Click Set Up Printers.

    Print & Fax

    Step 3 Click Add.

    Add Printer...

    Step 4 Select Bluetooth and then select the bluetooth adapter and the printer.

    Select Bluetooth

    The printer will be listed in the printers list.

    Added!
    Model DBT-320
    Question What does my PDA need in order to print to my DBT-320?
    Answer To print from your PDA, be sure to have at least the following:
    • Bluetooth enabled PDA
    • Bluetooth Software supporting the Object Push Profile
    • Printing software (i.e. PrintPocket CE for PDAs running Pocket PC 2002 or 2000, BTPrint for Palms running Palm OS 4.x or OS 5.x, iPAQs running Pocket PC 2003)
    • PCL3 printer
    The Bluetooth printing procedure will vary depending on the manufacturer of your PDA and software that you are using. Please check your PDA manual or with your manufacturer for specific directions on how to print.
    Model DBT-320
    Question How do I print to a DBT-320 using my mobile phone?
    Answer To print from your mobile phone, be sure that you have at least the following:
    • Bluetooth enabled mobile phone supporting the Bluetooth Object Push Profile. This enables the printing of business cards from your mobile phone.
    • PCL3 printer
    The Bluetooth printing procedure will vary depending on the manufacturer of your mobile phone. Please check your mobile phone manual or with your manufacturer for specific directions on how to print.
    Model DBT-320
    Question Why canīt I print with my DBT-320?
    Answer Here are some troubleshooting steps that you can take if you are having trouble printing with the DBT-320.
    • Make sure your printer is turned on and the Ready LED on the DBT-320 is green. If the Ready LED is not green, check your USB connection to the printer.
    • Make sure the Bluetooth icon on the screen of your laptop, computer, mobile phone, or PDA is white. This means that the Bluetooth application is ready. If the Bluetooth icon is not white, try rebooting your Bluetooth mobile device and/or reinstalling your Bluetooth software. Check that your Bluetooth software supports the HCRP and SPP Bluetooth profiles for printing.
    • If the Bluetooth icon is red, the DBT-320 is not properly connected. Check the DBT-320 connection to your printer and your printer connection.
    • When printing, the Bluetooth icon will blink Green. If the Bluetooth LED is not flashing on, check your DBT-320 connection to the printer. Your printer may also not be configured correctly. Check your printer configuration.
    Model DCF-560M
    Question Why wonīt my DCF-560M modem work with Windows Pocket PC 2002?
    Answer Unfortunately the DCF-560M modem will only work with Windows CE 3.0. There are no current plans for Pocket PC 2002 support.
    Model DCF-650W
    Question How do I reinstall the DCF-650W’s drivers if the first attempt failed?
    Answer Perform the following steps:

    Step 1 Insert the DCF-650W’s installation CD into the CD-ROM drive of the computer to which the iPAQ’s cradle is connected. If the DCF-650W’s menu screen does not automatically appear then browse the CD for Autoun.EXE and double click on it.

    Step 2 On the DCF-650W’s menu screen select “Install Drivers.”

    Step 3 If you have attempted to install the drivers previously, you will be asked if you would like to remove them. Click OK then Finish when prompted. Afterwards select Install Drivers from the DCF-650W’s menu once again.

    Step 4 In the InstallShield Wizard window select Next.

    Step 5 Select Yes to install the driver files to the default directory.
    Model DCF-650W
    Question Why am I receiving a Not Enough Space On Device error?
    Answer If the iPAQ looses contact with the cradle and then is reconnected, the following error will occur, Not Enough Space On Device. Should this error occur click on Cancel, then refer to the How do I reinstall the DCF-650W’s drivers if the first attempt failed? FAQ.
    Model DCF-650W
    Question How do I address an Unrecognized Card prompt after installing the DCF-650W drivers?
    Answer If an Unrecognized Card window appears, select Cancel, power off the iPAQ, remove the DCF-650W then refer to the How do I reinstall the DCF-650W’s drivers if the first attempt failed? FAQ.
    Model DCF-650W
    Question How do I know which network type to select in the DCF-650W’s configuration utility?
    Answer
    Selecting the network type.

    Infrastructure: Only select when an access point is to be used.

    802.11 Ad-Hoc: Do not select this option if an access point is being used. 802.11 Ad-Hoc is recommended over Ad-Hoc, as far as an Ad-Hoc setup is concerned. Channels and ESSIDs on wireless devices within the same wireless network must match exactly for the devices to communicate.

    Ad-Hoc: When using Ad-Hoc, it is only necessary to set the channel. The ESSID is not required.
    Model DCF-650W
    Question How do I verify that I have connectivity with the rest of my wireless LAN?
    Answer
    Using the ping utility located on the Link tab of the DCF-650W’s configuration utility, enter the IP address of a network device located on the local network, for instance, another PC, router, gateway, etc. Once youīve entered the IP address of another device, click on the Start button. If you get a reply as shown in the image, you have verified connectivity with the wireless network.
    Model DCF-650W
    Question Is the DCF-650W supported in Palm OS?
    Answer Currently the DCF-650W is not supported in Palm OS nor are there any plans to develop Palm OS drivers in the future.
    Model DCF-650W
    Question With the Nyditot display software installed how can I view the DCF-650W utility’s icon in the system menu?
    Answer To view the DCF-650Wīs utility icon in the system menu go to Virtual Display Manager and select Disable Virtual Display. This will allow the icon to appear. Additional information and support on Nyditot may be found here: http://www.nyditot.com/.
    Model DCF-650W
    Question Why doesnīt the configuration utility for the DCF-650W show up in Settings>Control Panel>System after I installed the drivers?
    Answer The DCF-650 configuration utility will not show up until you reset your PDA. Please consult your PDA manual for specific instructions on resetting your device.
    Model DCF-650W
    Question When installing ActiveSync and the Install Shield process reaches 100 percent, why do I receive a TCP/IP error?
    Answer When you try to install ActiveSync and the Install Shield process reaches 100 percent, you may receive the following error message:

    "TCP/IP Protocol Required The TCP/IP Protocol must be installed on this computer before Microsoft ActiveSync can be installed. Click OK to quit Setup. Then, open Control Panel, double-click Network, and install the protocol".

    This issue can occur if the Winsock2 registry key is damaged or contains information that relates to a product that modified the key.

    Please refer to Microsoft Knowledge Base for solution.
    Model DCF-650W
    Question Will my DCF-650W work in my PDA using Pocket PC 2002?
    Answer This device is supported in Pocket PC 2002 but you will need to download the drivers from our support site.

    Download Pocket PC 2002 drivers now
    Model DCF-650W / DWL-500 / DWL-120 / DWL-500 / DWL-520 / DWL-1000 / DWL-900 / DWL-120a
    Question How do I configure my Apple Airport wireless product to work with my D-Link wireless product with encryption?
    Answer To use encryption with the 2 products, you must use a HEX key instead of using a passphrase. To enter a HEX key on the Apple product, enter a dollar sign ($) before the key. For example:

    For 64-bit encryption, enter $1234567890.

    64-Bit requires 10 Hex characters and 128-Bit requires 26 Hex characters. Valid characters are 0-9 and A-F.
    Model DCF-660W
    Question Does D-Link offer MicrosoftŪ Mobile 2003 drivers for the DCF-660W Compact Flash wireless adapter?
    Answer Currently, D-Link does not offer official MicrosoftŪ Mobile 2003 drivers for the DCF-660W. D-Link is working on development of drivers and will post them at http://support.dlink.com/products as soon as they are available.

    We now have BETA drivers posted. Please use these at your own risk and let us know your results (either below in the comments box or at the Contact page). Please include what model PDA you are using.

    The Pocket PC 2002 drivers have been successful in many cases. If the Pocket PC 2002 drivers work, do NOT install the BETA drivers.

    Download BETA drivers v2.11 here

    Thank you for your feedback. The BETA drivers have been successful on the following:
  • IPAQ 2210 / 2215
  • IPAQ 3970 / 3975
  • Dell Axim X5
  • Asus MyPal A620
  • Acer N10

    v2.11 drivers posted 2/17/2004
    • Model DCF-660W
    Question How do I connect my DCF-660W to an access point or wireless router?
    Answer To connect to a wireless router or access point:

    Step 1 Click on Start > Settings > System > DCF-660W.

    Step 2 In the DCF-660W utility in the lower right corner, click the right-arrow to scroll and click on ApBrowser.

    Step 3 Click Scan.

    Step 4 Select the ESSID of your network, click it, and then click Join. If you are showing multiple networks with the same ESSID, you may want to change the SSID on your router or access point.

    Note: You can verify that you are connecting by matching the BSSID to the MAC address on your router or access point.
    Model DCF-660W
    Question What can I do if I am receiving a WLAN Radio is off error when launching the DCF-660W Utility?
    Answer If you receive a WLAN radio is off error when launching the DCF-660W Utility, then the adapter is not properly installed or the card is not being detected by the Pocket PC.

  • Try removing card, turn off PDA, insert card, and turn on. Possibly the adapter was not fully seated in the slot.
  • Completely remove drivers/software and reinstall. There could be a driver corruption.
  • The D-Link adapter may be defective.
    • Model DCF-660W
    Question What operating systems can my DCF-660W adapter work in?
    Answer At this time, the DCF-660W will only work with the following:
  • Linux (built-in)
  • Windows CE 3.0 (Pocket PC 2000)
  • Pocket PC 2002

    To install drivers, you must use Microsoft ActiveSync 2.5 or higher (except Linux).

    We have no plans for development of drivers for the following:
  • DOS
  • Windows 3.1
  • Windows 95
  • Windows 98
  • Windows Me
  • Windows 2000
  • Windows XP
  • Palm OS

    We now have BETA drivers for Mobile 2003/Pocket PC 2003 posted. Please use these at your own risk and let us know your results (either below in the comments box or at the Contact page). Please include what model PDA you are using.

    Download BETA drivers here

    NOTE: Some users have been successful using the latest drivers with Mobile 2003. We have tested the drivers below and were successful using a Dell Axim X5.

    Download Drivers here
    • Model DCM-100
    Question How do I provision my DCM-100 with my ISP?
    Answer Call your ISP and tell them you have a D-Link DCM-100 cable modem. They will typically ask for the CMAC address and serial number from the modem. Also, you may need to register the MAC address for the residential gateway, if you are using one, or network card in the computer from which you wish to connect. Check with your ISP to see if this applies.
    Model DCM-100
    Question What operating systems are supported by the DCM-100?
    Answer The DCM-100 operates with any OS that is using TCP/IP to connect to the Ethernet port on the unit.
    Model DCM-100 / DCM-200
    Question I cannot complete AT&Tīs web registration process properly and AT&T will not input my modem information manually. What can I do?
    Answer The web-based configuration process used by AT&T will not work with the DCM-100 / DCM-200 modems. If you cannot complete AT&Tīs web registration process properly, and if AT&T will not input your modem information manually, use the CD that comes from AT&T that contains a program called Virtual Technician. This program can be used as an alternative way to complete the cable modem registration process.
    Model DCM-100 / DCM-200
    Question My ISP says that they will not provision my modem because it is not on their list of approved modems. What can I do?
    Answer The DCM-100 and DCM-200 are DOCSIS-compatible cable modems and will work with most cable providers. It is up to the ISP to provision (register the MAC address on the modem with the ISP so they can communicate with it) the modem before you will be able to go online with it. If your ISP wonīt provision the modem, unfortunately, there isnīt much that D-Link can do.

    One thing you can do is refer the ISP to Cable Labs in order to see that the D-Link cable modems have passed their tests and are DOCSIS certified. Hopefully, that will satisfy the ISP. This should be less of an issue as time goes on and ISP’s update their approved modems lists.
    Model DCM-100 / DCM-200
    Question What are the Status and Link lights on the DCM-100 and DCM-200 modems supposed to look like when connecting my computer/network correctly to my ISP?
    Answer The two LEDīs work as follows:

    Initially, the Status light will blink fast and slow, as the modem tries to connect to the ISP. The LED should then become solid, once connected. You will then plug your Ethernet/USB cable into the modem, whichever is applicable.

    The Link light should then become solid for Ethernet port connections. In some instances, the Link light will blink steadily. This condition is normal and is caused by broadcast packets sent from the ISP. This will not affect the operation or performance of the modem. For USB port connections, the Link LED will not light.

    * Please check our support site for the most up-to-date versions of D-Link QIGs and manuals. These versions may contain corrections and additions to the documentation that ships with the product.

    For the DCM-100

    For the DCM-200
    Model DCM-100 / DCM-200
    Question Where are the CMAC address and serial number located on the DCM-100 and DCM-200 cable modems?
    Answer The CMAC address is located on the rear panel of the unit and the serial number is located on the bottom panel.

    In addition, CMAC address and serial number labels are also located on both the inner box and outside packaging for both the DCM-100 and DCM-200 cable modems.

    The modem MAC address will look something like the example below. It will be in this form, twelve letters or numbers. All MAC addresses have twelve letters or numbers. The only letters used in a MAC address, however, are A-F. If what you think is the MAC address has any letters other than these, it is not a MAC address.

    Modem MAC Address Example taken from the label on the unit itself:

    CMAC 00303B0108E5
    By the same token, what is shown below is only the form of the serial number. Of course, your unitīs serial number will be different. It can be quite different, but it will be designated on a label on the unit as S/N, as in the example below.

    Modem Serial Number Example also taken from the label on the unit:

    S/N PCM2118006228
    Model DCM-100 / DCM-200
    Question What is a D-Link cable modem?
    Answer A D-Link cable modem sends and receives signals over a cable TV system network. A significant difference between telephone and cable TV system networks is capacity. Cable TV system networks were designed to deliver full motion video and, as a result, have much greater bandwidth. Cable TV system networks that use the D-Link cable modem can provide their customers with network connections capable of delivering the Internet and multimedia services at very high speeds.
    Model DCM-100 / DCM-200
    Question How does a D-Link cable modem work?
    Answer A D-Link cable modem receives digital information carried over the cable TV network and passes it through to the computer via an USB (DCM-100 does not include this port) or a standard 10BaseT Ethernet interface. Once connected, the D-Link cable modem tunes to the channel set aside for data transfer to access the Internet and other multimedia services offered by the cable TV operator.
    Model DCM-100 / DCM-200
    Question How do consumers benefit from using a D-Link cable modem?
    Answer The immediate benefit is extremely fast Internet access. Normally, cable modem users are seeing average speeds of 1.5 Mbps, depending on the service level provided by their provider and by the constraints and limitations of the Internet. Besides, in the cable modem environment, the WWW can include sites with full motion video, lively text and audio.
    Model DCM-100 / DCM-200
    Question What comes with my D-Link cable modem?
    Answer Normally, we offer everything essential for you to begin surfing the Web with your computer, including a D-Link Cable Modem, Modem Driver diskette, External Power Adapter, USB wire (depending on the models), Category 5 Ethernet Cable and Installation Guide.
    Model DCM-100 / DCM-200
    Question I have more than one computer. Do I need more than one D-Link cable modem?
    Answer Normally, you donīt. If your computers are connected via a network, a D-Link cable modem will support up to 15 computers. Since each computer must have its own unique IP address - which you can order through your cable provider or ISP - expect to pay a little extra each month for each additional computer you tie in.
    Model DCM-100 / DCM-200
    Question Is the D-Link modem compatible with cable modem equipment from other manufacturers?
    Answer Yes. All D-Link cable modems are now built to comply with the Data-Over-Cable-System-Interface-Specification (DOCSIS) standard or Euro-DOCSIS standard. In fact, D-Link received its first Cable Labs Certification in July 2000. D-Link was one of the first few companies to receive this certification, which indicates that the cable modem fully complies with the DOCSIS standard after passing an extensive battery of compliance tests.
    Model DCM-100 / DCM-200
    Question The packaging for my DCM-100 / DCM-200 cable modem states that it is "DOCSIS 1.0 Compliant, DOCSIS 1.1 Upgradeable". How can I upgrade my cable modem to the DOCSIS 1.1 specification?
    Answer Cable modems are not upgradeable by the end user. Upgrades are only performed, as needed, by the ISP over its network. The statement on the box is there just to let the customer know that the modem is capable of being upgraded to DOCSIS 1.1 as updates become available.

    The DCM-201 is DOCSIS 1.1 Compliant.
    Model DCM-100 / DCM-200 / DCM-201 / DCM-202
    Question Do D-Link cable modems have web page-based configuration utilities?
    Answer Newer D-Link cable modems do have a web-based configuration utility/status screen for service personnel, but it is not supported for end users. The DCM-100 and 200 do not have a utility. Below are instructions for the DCM-201 and 202.

    If you make changes and can no longer connect to the Internet, D-Link will NOT be held responsible. Use at your own risk.

    Step 1 If your cable modem is connected to a router, hub, or switch, connect it to your PC using an Ethernet cable.

    Step 2 You will need to configure your computer with the following static IP address settings:

    IP Address - 192.168.100.2
    Subnet Mask - 255.255.255.0
    Default Gateway - 192.168.100.1

    For help configuring the above settings click on your operating system below:

    Windows 98/ME
    Windows 2000
    Windows XP
    Macintosh

    Step 3 Open a web browser and type 192.168.100.1 in the address bar. Press Enter.

    Step 4 DCM-201 - The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is hitron (all lower case).

    DCM-202 - The default username is dlink (all lower case) and the default password is dlink (all lower case).

    Note: Firmware Version 2.01 - The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is hitron (all lower case).

    Click OK.

    DCM-201 login prompt (top) and DCM-202 login prompt (bottom).

    To the left you will see links to the following pages:

    System Info

    Click System Info to the left.



    The System Info page displays the following information:

    General Information - Model Name, Hardware Version, Software Version, MAC Address, System Time, System Up Time, and Standard Specification Compliant

    Cable Modem IP Information - IP Address, Subnet Mask, Gateway IP, and DHCP Lease Time

    Attached Devices - MAC Address/Attached Interface

    Cable Status

    Click Cable Status to the left.



    The Cable Status page displays information about the state of your modem.

    Signal

    DCM-201

    Click Signal to the left.



    Here you can view information about the frequency, channel, and power of your cable connection.

    Note: D-Link does not recommend changing the Default Downstream Frequency UNLESS instructed by your ISP. D-Link shall not be held liable for any damage to your cable Internet service or the DCM-201 as a result of it.

    DCM-202

    Click Signal to the left.



    Here you can view information about the frequency, channel, power, and speed of your cable connection.

    Note: D-Link does not recommend changing the Favorite Downstream Frequency, Start Downstream Frequency, or End Downstream Frequency UNLESS instructed by your ISP. D-Link shall not be held liable for any damage to your cable Internet service or the DCM-202 as a result of it.

    Event Log

    Click Event Log to the left.



    The event log displays information about your modem such as failed connection, successful connection, etc.

    To clear the event log click ClearLog.

    Maintenance

    Click Maintenance to the left.



    Here you can change the username and password used to access the web-based configuration of the cable modem.

    • New Username - To change the username enter the new username here.
    • Old Password - You must confirm the old password if you are changing it.
    • New Password - Enter the new password here.
    • Confirm Password - Confirm the new password here.
    Click Apply to save the new username/password.

    To cancel any changes that you have made or to logout click Cancel&Logout.

    In order for any changes that you have made to take effect you must click Save & Reboot.

    Note: When you are finished change Obtain IP and DNS Server Addresses back to automatic.
    Model DCM-200
    Question Can I use a residential gateway with my DCM-200’s USB connection?
    Answer This is not possible. D-Link residential gateways do not support USB ethernet connections.

    If possible, you can use the DCM-200’s Ethernet port to use a residential gateway. You will also need to notify the ISP any time you change port connection type, i.e. if you change from USB to Ethernet and vice versa.
    Model DCM-200
    Question Can I use the Ethernet and USB ports on the DCM-200 simultaneously?
    Answer This is not possible. You can only use one connection type at a time. You will also need to notify the ISP any time you change port connection type, i.e. if you change from USB to Ethernet and vice versa.
    Model DCM-200
    Question What operating systems are supported by the DCM-200?
    Answer The DCM-200 operates with any OS that is using TCP/IP to connect to the Ethernet port on the unit. If you are connecting to the unit via the USB port, then you will require drivers. The current USB drivers available support only Win 98, Me, 2000 and XP.
    Model DCM-200
    Question Why don’t you have Win NT USB drivers for the DCM-200?
    Answer Win NT does not support USB. You will only be able to use the Ethernet port with computers running Win NT.
    Model DCM-200
    Question Are DCM-200 USB drivers available for versions of Win 95 that have supplemental USB support?
    Answer We do not have USB drivers for any version of Windows 95 for the DCM-200. You will only be able to use the Ethernet port on the DCM-200 with computers running Win 95, including any version of OSR2 that has supplemental USB support.
    Model DCM-200
    Question How do I provision my DCM-200 with my ISP?
    Answer Call your ISP and tell them you have a D-Link DCM-200 cable modem. If you intend to connect to your modem via its Ethernet port, the ISP will ask for the CMAC address, along with the serial number from the modem. You may also need to register the MAC address for the residential gateway, if you are using one, or network card in the computer from which you wish to connect. Check with the ISP to see if this applies.

    If you intend to connect to your modem via its USB port, the ISP will typically ask for the UMAC address, along with the serial number from the modem. That is the only information the ISP needs for a USB-type connection.
    Model DCM-200
    Question The Windows 98 USB drivers for my DCM-200 cable modem do not load properly. What can I do to correct this?

    Answer Note: You must use Windows 98 Second Edition for USB driver support.

    If you are unable to load the USB drivers for the DCM-200 cable modem on your computer, you should be able to do so successfully by performing the following the steps:

    Step 1 Make sure the computer is powered up and the DCM-200 is plugged into the USB port of your computer.

    Step 2 On the Windows Desktop screen, click Start>Settings>Control Panel>System>Device Manager. In Device Manager, click the (+) sign to expand the Network Adapters and Universal Serial Bus categories, if they are not already expanded.

    Step 3 Look for and remove any lines with a yellow exclamation point or question mark that refer to the DCM-200 by highlighting the entry and hitting the Remove button. Such references may include DCM-200, Unknown Device, Unknown USB Device or USB Composite Device. Click No if Windows prompts you to restart the computer.

    Step 4 Insert the DCM-200 driver disk/CD. Please click Close in the lower left-hand corner of the disk’s menu screen if it appears due to the Windows AutoRun feature.

    Step 5 Unplug the DCM-200 USB cable from the port on the computer. After unplugging the cable, plug it back in again and let Windows re-detect the cable modem.

    Step 6 The Add New Hardware Wizard should now appear. A screen may pop up detecting a USB Composite Device (if this occurs, click Next). The device should then be detected as a DCM-200 or as a D-Link USB Cable Modem.

    Step 7 The Add New Hardware Wizard will now ask, "What do you want to install?" Choose The Updated Driver option and click Next.

    Step 8 Windows may now show it has found the location of the driver. If not, Windows will ask you to specify a driver location. Check only the Specify a Location box and browse the DCM-200 installation disk/CD. Point Windows to this location ---> x:\driver\win98se\netdlink.inf, then click Next. When the final screen appears, click Finish. Windows will now prompt you to restart the computer. Click Yes.

    Step 9 After the computer reboots, from the Windows Desktop screen, click Start>Settings>Control Panel>System>Device Manager. In Device Manager, click the (+) sign to expand the Network Adapters category. The DCM-200 should now be listed as a D-Link USB Cable Modem with no exclamation points or question marks. In addition, no other exclamation points or question marks should show up at all now in Device Manager relating to the DCM-200. If this is the case, the USB driver is now properly installed.

    Step 10 In conjunction with the USB driver installation, make sure you have provisioned the DCM-200 with your ISP and that you follow the Quick Install Guide to finish getting your modem online.
    Model DCM-201
    Question Can I connect the DCM-201 to my Windows 98 computerīs USB port?
    Answer No. The DCM-201 does not have Windows 98 USB drivers. D-link does not plan to release Windows 98 USB drivers in the near future.

    Some customers have been successful using the Me drivers on their Windows 98 Second Edition computer. In most cases it does not work. Use at your own risk.

    Note: Windows 98 will work with the DCM-201 with the Ethernet connection only.
    Model DCM-201
    Question How do I provision my DCM-201 with my ISP?
    Answer Call your ISP and tell them you have a D-Link DCM-201 cable modem. Depending on whether you use the Ethernet or the USB port, the ISP will need the corresponding MAC address. The Eth and USB MAC can be found of the label on the DCM-201.
    Model DCM-201
    Question Can I use a broadband router with my DCM-201’s USB connection?
    Answer This is not possible. D-Link routers do not support USB connections.

    You should use the DCM-201’s Ethernet port to use with a router. You will also need to notify the ISP any time you change port connection type, when you change from USB to Ethernet and vice versa. Each connection has a different Mac address which needs to be registered with your ISP.

    Note: You cannot connect the USB and the Ethernet connection at the same time.
    Model DCM-201
    Question What are the Status and Link lights on the DCM-201 modem supposed to look like when connecting my computer/network correctly to my ISP?
    Answer The Power, Cable, Status, and ETH / USB LEDīs should be green.



    If any of the LEDs are not green, please refer to the Quick Install Guide for proper troubleshooting steps.

    Read here for the DCM-201 Quick Install Guide
    Model DCM-201
    Question What is the reset button on the DCM-201 for?
    Answer If you suspect one of the LED is bad on the DCM-201, simply depress the reset button to verify. All of the LEDs should blink green once when the reset button is depressed.
    Model DCM-202
    Question How do I reset my DCM-202?
    Answer Step 1 Locate the hole on the back of the DCM-202 below the word RESET.



    Step 2 Using a paper clip, press and hold the Reset button for about 10 seconds and then release.

    Step 3 After the DCM-202 reboots and the status lights stabilize it will be reset.

    Note: You will only need to reset the DCM-202 if you have forgot the password to the web-based configuration or you need to clear the MAC address table.
    Model DCM-202
    Question Why can I not access my email or Internet service on my DCM-202?
    Answer
    1. Verify that the Power, Cable, Status, and Eth light-emitting diodes (LEDs) are lit and not blinking.

    2. Check all connections:
      • Make sure the coaxial cable is securely connected to the cable jack on the back of the cable modem.
      • Verify that the Ethernet cable is securely plugged into both the cable modem and the computer.
      • Make sure the power adapter is properly plugged into both the cable modem and a wall outlet or surge protector.


    3. Power cycle the cable modem by unplugging the power adapter from its electrical outlet and then plugging it back into the outlet. Then try accessing the Internet.

    4. Power cycle the computer
      • Power off the computer.
      • Unplug the computer from its electrical outlet or surge protector and then plug it back into the electrical outlet or surge protector.
      • Try accessing the Internet.


    5. Call your cable operator to verify that their service is two-way. This cable modem is designed for use with two-way cable plants.

    6. If you are using a cable line splitter so that you can connect the cable modem and a television at the same time, try removing the splitter and reconnecting the cables so that the cable modem is connected directly to the cable wall jack. Then try accessing the Internet.

    7. The NIC might be malfunctioning. Refer to its documentation for troubleshooting information.

    8. Check for a resource conflict (Windows users only). To do this:
      • Right-click the My Computer icon on the Windows desktop.
      • Click Properties.
      • Click the Device Manager tab and look for a yellow exclamation point or red X over the NIC in the Network adapters field. If you see either, you have an IRQ conflict. To correct this, refer to the manufacturer’s documentation that came with your NIC.


    9. Make sure that TCP/IP is the default protocol in use by your computer.
      • Release and renew the computer’s IP address.
    To release and renew the IP address for the Windows 95, Windows 98, and Windows Me operating systems:
    1. Click Start and click Run.
    2. Type winipcfg in the Open field and click OK. The IP Configuration screen appears.
    3. In the Ethernet Adapter Information group area, click the drop down arrow and select the D-Link USB/Ethernet Broadband Cable Modem.
    4. Click Release. The IP address changes to 0.0.0.0.
    5. Click Renew to refresh the IP address. The refreshed address may or may not be the same as the original IP address.
    To release and renew the IP address for the Windows XP, Windows 2000 and Windows NT 4.0 operating system:
    1. Click Start and select Programs, then Accessories.
    2. Click Command Prompt.
    3. At the command prompt (C:\), type ipconfig /release. Windows releases the IP address.
    4. At the command prompt type ipconfig /renew. Windows renews the IP address.
    5. At the command prompt (C:\), type exit and press Enter to return to the Windows desktop.
    Model DCM-202
    Question How do I use/configure the TurboDOX™ feature on my DCM-202?
    Answer TurboDOX™ is built-in to the DCM-202 and additional software is not required. Your ISP controls whether TurboDOX™ is used or not, so you will not be able to configure it.
    Model DCM-202
    Question What can I do if Iīm having trouble performing a firmware flash on my DCM-202 in hyperterminal?
    Answer If you are having trouble performing a firmware flash within hyperterminal, remove the coaxial cable from your DCM-202 before starting the hyperterminal session.
    Model DCM-202 / DCM-201 / DCM-200
    Question Why does my replacement cable modem not function with my Cable Internet Service?
    Answer When receiving your replacement cable modem, you may need to contact your ISP to register the new MAC address of that replacement cable modem. Once the MAC address is provisioned on their system, it should work with no issue to report.

    Note: The MAC address can be found on the lablel of your Cable Modem.
    Model DCS-1000
    Question How do set up the DCS-1000 for motion detection using IP view 3.3?
    Answer You will first need to have the latest version of IPview version 3.3 loaded on your computer.

    Download IPview 3.3

    Follow the steps below to set up Motion Detection on your camera.

    Step 1 Go to Start>Programs>IPview>IPview.

    Step 2 Select File>Add Camera. At this point you can enter the cameraīs IP address if you know it, otherwise click Browse>Search. The program will search for any cameras that are on the Network.

    Step 3 After the program finds the camera, click add.

    Step 4 Leave the username and password blank and click OK. This will add the camera to the list.

    Step 5 Double click on the camera and you will get the Camera Properties window.

    Step 6 Select the recording tab.



    Step 7 From this window make sure the boxed labeled Path1 is checked. This is the location of your saved files.

    Step 8 In the Recording Action Mode box, select the button for Motion Active Mode.

    Step 9 Click on the Advance Setting button.

    Step 10 From the Motion Settings window check the box labeled Motion Detection. Change your sensitivity settings by using the slide bar. Click Ok.



    Step 11 Click apply

    Step 12 Go to the Tools tab and click on the Reset Button. This will reboot the camera server. Your camera is now set up for Motion Detection.
    Model DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W
    Question I am having problems viewing my camera over the Internet. My provider is Cox Communications and I am using a residential gateway. Do I need to open any ports in the firewall?

    Answer Some ISPs block traffic on commonly used ports to conserve bandwidth. If your ISP does not pass traffic on port 80, you will need to change the service port the camera uses from 80 to something else, like 800. If you are behind a residential gateway, you will need to forward that port to the IP Address of the camera. Then when accessing the camera over the Internet, you need to specify the custom service port in the URL.

    Step 1: Open a Second Webserver port on the DCS-1000. Input 800 for the Webserver Port and 8482 for the Transfer Image Port. Save the changes.

    How do I allow others to view my camera over the Internet?

    Step 2: You will need to open those same ports in your Residential Gatewayīs Virtual Server settings. Not all Gateways are the same, so refer to your userīs manual for specific instructions on how to forward ports.

    DI-604 / DI-614+ Virtual Server Configuration

    DI-704P / DI-713P Virtual Server Configuration

    Step 3: Access the camera from a remote location by entering the WAN IP address of your Gateway, a colon, then the Webserver Port you configured on the camera.
    For example, http://123.45.67.89:800
    Model DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W
    Question Where can I get lenses and other accessories for the DCS-1000 and DCS-1000W?
    Answer D-Link currently does not sell accessories for the DCS-1000 camera. We recommend visiting http://www.securityideas.com/ or http://www.smarthome.com/ for your lens and accessory needs.
    Model DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W
    Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DCS-1000 /1000w?
    Answer Upgrading the firmware on the DCS-1000 /1000W can be accomplished by using the IPVIEW program that is on the shipping CD. Once you have installed the IPVIEW program on your computer follow the steps below to upgrade your firmware.

    Step 1 Go to Start>Programs>IPVIEW>IPVIEW.

    Step 2 Login in with your user name and password. By default the user name is admin and the password is blank.

    If you have changed the user name and password, use that information to login.

    Step 3 After logging in, the application will open, displaying a listing of installed cameras. Select the camera that you would like to upgrade the firmware on and double click on it. This will open the properties window for that camera.

    Step 4 In the camera properties window you will select the Tools tab. Use the Browse button to find the new firmware.

    Step 5 When you have selected the firmware click on the update button.

    Make sure the camera is connected at all times during update.

    Step 6 After the update has completed click on the Information tab. This page displays the firmware version, verifying that the firmware has been upgraded.

    Download firmware now

    Please check the version of firmware installed on your camera before you upgrade. The Information tab in IPVIEW will display the current firmware verion.

    Model DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W
    Question How do I keep my DCS-1000 from locking up?
    Answer If your DCS-1000 or DCS-1000W is having stability problems or frequently locking up, try downloading the latest firmware from our support site. This may correct the problems you are experiencing.

    How do I upgrade the firmware on the DCS-1000/1000w?
    Model DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W
    Question How do I add a camera in IPview 3.3?
    Answer First, make sure you have the latest version of IPview installed on your computer.

    Download IPview 3.3 here

    Step 1 Open the IPview program. The username is admin and there is no password.

    Step 2 From the Camera menu, select Add... (or press Shift + Insert). If you know the ip address of your camera, you may enter it now and click on Add.

    If you do not know the ip address of the camera, you may click on the Browse button, and then on the Search button. This will display a list of configurable cameras on your local network. Select the camera you wish to configure and click on Add. Click on Add again once you are returned to the previous screen.

    Step 3 You will now be prompted for a username and password. By default, there is no username or password assigned to the DCS-1000/1000W, so you may click Ok.

    You should now see your camera on the list.
    Model DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W
    Question How do I change the location I save my recordings to using IPview 3.3?
    Answer First, make sure you have the latest version of IPview, version 3.3, installed on your computer.

    Download IPview 3.3 here

    Your DCS-1000/1000W can record full motion video to any path you can browse to. Network drives are valid, but only if they are mapped to the computer you are running IPview from.

    Step 1 Before you can change recording options on your DCS-1000/1000W, you will need to add it in IPview.

    Click here for information on adding a camera in IPview 3.3

    Step 2 Double-click on the camera, and the Camera Properties window will open.

    Step 3 Select the Recording tab.

    Step 4 At the top of this window, you will have the Recording File Path box, with four file paths listed. You can double-click on any of the entries to bring up a dialogue box where you can browse to a new file path. Additionally, you can check/uncheck the path box to enable/disable the current selection.



    Note: Path 1 is always your primary recording path, and cannot be disabled. You can change its recording location, but it will always be enabled. Paths 2 - 4 are strictly backup recording paths. Recording will not be directed to a path until the previous path has reached its capacity.

    If you have trouble changing the recording path, you will need to disable file space recycling. You can find this option by going to to Tools menu and selecting Options. Click on the System Configuration tab and unselect Recycle. This will unlock the recording file paths.

    Model DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W
    Question What do the Output Trigger 1 and Output Trigger 2 buttons do for the DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W ?
    Answer These options are dependant upon additional hardware that is not included with the Internet Camera. If an external trigger (IR motion sensor or contact sensor for example) is physically attached to the I/O ports on the back of the Internet Camera, and the Output Trigger is set to ON, the Camera is capable of sending snapshots to an e-mail address when the external device is ītriggeredī.

    Where can I purchase external triggers for the DCS-1000 and DCS-1000W?
    Model DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W / DCS-1000W_revB / DCS-900 / DCS-900W / DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question What are the hot keys and what are the icons used for in IPView Lite?
    Answer
    1 Open a new file. Hot key is Ctrl+N.
    2 Open an existing file. Hot key is Ctrl+O.
    3 Save a file. Hot key is Ctrl+S.
    4 List view format. Hot key is Ctrl+F1.
    5 1 Camera view format. Hot key is Ctrl+F3.
    6 4 Camera view format. Hot key is Ctrl+F4.
    7 Refresh IPView Lite application. Hot key is F12.
    8 Add a camera. Hot key is Shift+Ins.
    9 Delete a camera. Hot key is Del.
    10 Property setting to configure the camera. Hot key is F2.
    11 Snapshot to capture a single still image. Hot key is F5.
    12 Start recording video image. Hot key is F7.
    13 Stop recording the video image. Hot key is F9.
    14 Modify username and password for IPView Lite. Hot key is F10.
    Model DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W / DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+
    Question Will the IP surveillance software work with the DCS-1000 and DCS-1000W?
    Answer No, the IP surveillance software is for use with the DCS-2000/2100+ and the DCS-5300/5300W only. The DCS-1000 and DCS-1000W can not be managed or viewed with this software. You must use the IP View software that was packaged with the DCS-1000/1000W.
    Model DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W / DCS-5220 / DCS-1000W_revB / DCS-2000 / DCS-2100 / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300W / DCS-900 / DCS-900_revB / DCS-900W / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question Why am I unable to view the live video of my Internet camera in Internet Explorer after upgrading to Service Pack 2?
    Answer Windows XP Service Pack 2 increases the security in Internet Explorer. You must "allow" the plug-in before you can view the live video of your Internet camera.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of your Internet camera in the address bar. Press Enter.

    Step 2 Enter your username and password and click OK (if applicable).

    Step 3 At the top click This site might require the following ActiveX Control: īName of ActiveX control hereī from īD-Link Corporationī. Click here to install....



    Step 4 Click Install ActiveX Control....



    Step 5 In the Security Warning window click Install.



    The live video will now be streamed.

    Model DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W / DCS-900 / DCS-900W
    Question How do I place the streaming video from the DCS-900 and DCS-1000 series cameras onto my own webpage?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DCS-900, DCS-900W, DCS-1000, and DCS-1000W cameras.

    Use the below example code for a webpage. If the camera is behind a NAT device such as a router, the IP must be edited to reflect the public address of the router (IE 24.45.76.223). In this example the cameraīs IP is 192.168.1.135.

    <html> <SCRIPT LANGUAGE="JavaScript"> function Init() { cvcs.RemoteHost = "192.168.1.135" cvcs.RemoteWeb = 80 cvcs.RemotePort = 8481 cvcs.Timeout = 5 cvcs.AuthType = 1 cvcs.PreviewFrameRate = 1 cvcs.PreviewWidth = 320 cvcs.PreviewHeight = 240 cvcs.DeviceSerialNo = "" window.setInterval("ShowFrameRate()", 1000) } function ShowFrameRate() { if (1) { var fFrameRate = cvcs.FrameRate window.status = "Frame:" + fFrameRate.toString() + " fps" } cvcs.Play() cvcs.GetRealTimeData() CurrentTime.innerHTML = cvcs.TimeString } </SCRIPT> <BODY text=white onload="Init()" onunload="cvcs.Stop()"> <OBJECT ID="cvcs" WIDTH=320 HEIGHT=240 CLASSID="CLSID:31150A86-0BBA-409f-BEB4-F3922D10BF34" CODEBASE="xplug.ocx#version=2,0,0,0"> </OBJECT> </html>
    Please understand that this is not a supported feature of the camera, and beyond providing this code, D-Link can not help design a custom webpage.
    Model DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W / DCS-900 / DCS-900W
    Question How do I turn off the LED indicator on my DCS-900 and DCS-1000 series camera?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DCS-900, DCS-900W, DCS-1000, and DCS-1000W cameras.

    Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration of the camera.

    Step 2 Click Setup to the left.

    Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click System to the left.



    Step 4 Click Off using the radio buttons next to LED Control.

    Step 5 Click Apply to save the settings.
    Model DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W / DCS-900 / DCS-900W
    Question How do I configure my DCS-900/1000 series camera to be viewed from the Internet when I am behind a router or firewall?
    Answer The following information will allow others to view your DCS-900/900W and DCS-1000/1000W camera over the Internet if you are using a router or behind a firewall.

    By default the ports used by the camera are as follows.

    Web Server port 80 (TCP)

    Transfer Image port 8481 (TCP)

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type in the IP address of your camera (192.168.0.20).

    Step 2 Click Setup on the left side.

    Step 3 Scroll down to the bottom of the page.



    Step 4 If you need to change ports then check the Yes button next to Open Second Port and type in the correct port numbers to be used by the camera. Click Apply. You choose the ports you want to use. For the Transfer Image port, it is best to use a port between 1024 and 65535.

    Step 5 You will now need to open ports (port forward) on your router or firewall. Use the same ports you chose in step 4.

    Multiple Cameras: If you have more than one camera that you would like to be viewed over the Internet, then you will have to open a second Web Server port and Transfer Image port for each additional camera.

    Example: If camera 1 is using the default port 80 for the Web Server and port 8481 for the Transfer Image, then camera 2 will need to be set to port 81 for the Web Server and port 8482 for the Transfer Image.

    To view camera from Internet, enter the WAN IP address of the router.

  • What are Virtual Servers?
  • Click here to open ports on your D-Link router
    • Model DCS-1000W
    Question How do I set up Encryption on my DCS-1000W using the IPView program?
    Answer The DCS-1000W supports both 64bit and 128bit encryption as well as ASCII and HEX. The following steps will show you how to set encryption on your DCS-1000W.

    Step 1 Go to Start>Programs>IPView>IPView.

    Step 2 From this window you will type in admin for the username and leave the password blank unless you have made any previous changes. Click OK

    Step 3 The camera properties window will have several tabs to choose from. Select the Wireless tab from this window.

    Step 4 Here you will enter the Connection Mode, ESS-ID, Channel, Encryption Wep Key and ASCII or Hex.

    Step 5 Once you have made your changes click on Apply and then OK at the bottom of the window. This will save the changes you have made to the DCS-1000W configuration, enabling encryption.

    To connect to the camera, you must configure your wireless network card with the same ESS-ID, Channel, Encryption Wep Key and specify either ASCII or Hex as you did when setting encryption for the camera.

    Note: You must set up encryption for the DCS-1000W first before trying to set encryption on your wireless network adapter cards.
    Model DCS-1000W
    Question How do I set up Encryption on my DCS-1000W using the Web Interface?
    Answer The DCS-1000W supports both 64bit and 128bit encryption as well as ASCII and HEX. The following steps will show you how to set encryption on your DCS-1000W.

    Step 1 Open your browser and type in the address of your DCS-1000w. Click Go.

    Step 2 When the webpage has opened select System Administration from the 3 choices listed in that window.

    Step 3 From the Systems page scroll down until you see Wireless Interface. Here you will enter the ESS-ID, Channel, Encryption Wep Key and ASCII or Hex.



    Step 4 Once you have made your changes click on Save at the bottom of the window. This will save the changes you have made to the DCS-1000W configuration, enabling encryption.





    Setting up encryption with IPVEW

    The DCS-1000W can be setup using either the web Interface or IPView program. The following steps will show you how to set encryption on your DCS-1000W using IPView.

    Step 1 Go to Start>Programs>IPView>IPView.

    Step 2 From this window you will type in admin for the username and leave the password blank unless you have made any previous changes. Click OK

    Step 3 The camera properties window will have several tabs to choose from. Select the Wireless tab from this window.

    Step 4 Here you will enter the information needed for your Connection Mode, ESS-ID, Channel, Encryption Wep Key and ASCII or Hex.

    Step 5 Once you have made your entries click on Apply and then OK at the bottom of the window. This will save the changes you have made to the DCS-1000W configuration, enabling encryption.

    To connect to the camera, you must configure your wireless network card with the same ESS-ID, Channel, Encryption Wep Key and specify either ASCII or Hex as you did when setting encryption for the camera.

    Note: You must set up encryption for the DCS-1000W first before trying to set encryption on your wireless network adapter cards.
    Model DCS-1000W
    Question What changes can I make on the wireless page on my DCS-1000W?
    Answer This window will allow you to select which way you would like to connect to your wireless network: Adhoc or Infrastructure.

    By default the Connection mode is Infrastructure, Network Name is ANY, Wireless channel is 11, Wep key is ASCII and there is no Encryption key set.

    To make changes, check the appropriate radio buttons and enter your information in the correct fields. As in any wireless network whether it be Infrastructure or Adhoc, all devices trying to connect to each other must have the same SSID and be on the same channel to make a connection.

    Example:
  • What is Ad-Hoc?
  • What is infrastructure?
  • What is a SSID?
  • What is WEP?
    • Model DCS-1000W
    Question What is the Information tab for?
    Answer Selecting the Information tab in the IPview program will give you information about your camera such as Model, IP Address, MAC Address, and Firmware version.

    Note: No changes can be made on this page.

    Example:
    Model DCS-1000W
    Question Why do I get the error "disk full" when trying to record with my camera?
    Answer If you are getting this error most likely you do not have enough space on your hard drive. The camera settings by default are 1000MB for recording. If you have less than 1000MB available you will have to go into the IP view program and change this setting.

    Follow these steps to make changes in the software.

    Step 1 Open IP view by going to Start> Programs> IP view> IP view.

    Step 2 When you have opened the program highlight your camera.

    Step 3 Select Tools> Options> System Configuration.

    Step 4 In this window you will be able to change the default settings to 500MB.

    Note: You must have a minimum 500MB available on your hard drive to allow you to record video.

    Example: This screan shot is from IP view version 3.2

    Model DCS-1000W / DCS-1000
    Question How do I change the path of where I want to save my recordings to?
    Answer You can do this through IPView.

    Step 1 Launch IPView and add a camera.

    Step 2 Right-click on the camera and choose Properties.

    Step 3 Click on the Recording tab.

    Step 4 Change the first file path to the desired location. The remaining three file paths are backup filepaths. They will only become active if the previous filepath is unreachable or full. The path labeled Working will be the current location where your recordings will be sent.



    Note: If all filepaths are greyed out and are unable to be selected or changed, please go to TOOLS > OPTIONS > SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and uncheck the box labeled Recycle.

    Model DCS-1000W / DCS-1000
    Question What is the Schedule tab used for in the IPview program?
    Answer This page will allow you to set Dates and Time or a Weekly schedule for which you would like to record certain events.

    First check the box labeled Recording Schedule.

    If you choose by Date, you will have to set a start time and stop time. This will start and stop the recording on a specific date and time.

    Selecting the by Week option allows you to set a schedule for different days of the week for at specific time.

    Note: Your computer must be on and the IPview program running to record events.

    Example:
    Model DCS-1000W / DCS-1000
    Question What algorithm (format) is used to compress the digital images?
    Answer Both styles of the camera utilize the JPEG image compression to provide high quality images. JPEG is a standard for Image compression and can be applied to various web browser and application software without the need to install extra software.
    Model DCS-1000W / DCS-1000
    Question How do I set up my DCS-1000w after taking it out of the box for the first time?
    Answer After you have unpacked all of the hardware for your DCS-1000w follow the steps below to get your camera connected.

    Installation

    Step 1 Attach the 2 external antennas to the rear panel of the camera.

    Step 2 On the rear panel there is a switch which has 3 settings to choose from, Lan, LAN/WLAN, WLAN. Choosing LAN/WLAN will allow you to connect to the camera wirelessly or using a Cat5 ethernet cable.

    Step 3 To configure the camera it is best to be hardwired directly to the device. So at this point take a Cat5 ethernet cable and connect one end to the RJ-45 port on the rear panel of the camera and connect the other end directly into your network.

    Note: If you are connecting directly to your computer you will need to use a crossover cable to make a connection to the camera.

    Step 4 Attach one end of the external power supply to the camera and then plug the other end it into a wall outlet or power strip.

    Note: Using other types of power supply units may cause damage to the DCS-1000w. Check your users manual for proper power supply voltage and amps.

    Step 5 To confirm your connection you will have to look at the front of the camera. Blue led light means you have power and Orange led light means you have a link. If neither of these 2 lights are on, check your power supply and cables.

    After you have completed the above steps, open the IPview program that you installed on your computer and begin configuring your new DCS-1000w.

    Important: You will not be able to use the IPview program to configure your camera if you are using a Macintosh computer. The IPview program is windows based.
    Model DCS-1000W / DCS-1000
    Question What changes can be made in the Misc window?
    Answer In this window you can control the Led lights, ActiveX control, and Server ports.

    Led controls have 3 settings Normal, Off, and Dummy. The Blue led is for power and the orange led is for link.
    • Normal: The power light is steady on, the link light will flash if activity is present, steadily.
    • Off: Power led indicator is off. Link indicator is off.
    • Dummy: Power led is steady On. Link indicator is on with random flashing


    ActiveX control: This is where you specify the location of the ActiveX file. Enter the information in .OCX format (http://www.your company.com/xplug/xplug.ocx). Your company name must be replaced with your companyīs DNS server.

    Server port: Checking this box will allow you to change your Web server and Transfer Image port settings. By defualt, the Web server port is 80 and the Transfer Image port is 8481. You may need to change these if your ISP has blocked them from hosting a web server or leave them with there default settings.

    Note: If you have more than one camera you will have to open the second port.

    Example:
    Model DCS-1000W / DCS-1000
    Question What options are available on the Image page?
    Answer The following options below are available to change on the Image page of the Ipview 3.0 program.

    • Resolution: By default is 320x240. Keep in mind the higher the resolution the slower the frame rate.
    • Frame Rate: To get the best frame rate possible leave the default settings to Auto.
    • Compression Rate: Making changes here will change the file size.
    • Light Frequency: There are two different standards to choose from. US is 60Hz and European is 50Hz. So depending on which country you are in, make the proper selection.
    • Date Display: Selecting either Opaque mode or Transparent mode will put a date stamp in the lower right corner of the camera.
    • Brightness: Should be left at default settings which is 64.
    • Contrast: Should be left at default settings which is 64.
    • Hue: Should be left at default settings which is 64. If your picture is washed out, try increasing the number for the Hue. This will add color and make the picture more pure.

    Example:
    Model DCS-1000W / DCS-1000
    Question How many users can I assign to the camera?
    Answer The Users tab allows the system administrator to assign up to 64 users to view and control certain features of the camera remotely.

    To add a user simply click on the user tab in the IPview program>Add> and then type in a username and password. Select the I/O box if you want the user to have control of the I/O ports. Then click OK

    This will add the entry into the box. As the administrator of the camera you can add or delete users at any time.

    Example:

    Model DCS-1000W / DCS-1000
    Question Can I set up my DCS-1000 camera as a webcam on my computer?
    Answer No. The DCS-1000 and DCS-1000w only operate on Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, and Wireless networks. You may not use them as a Webcam.
    Model DCS-1000W / DCS-1000
    Question How do I set up Motion Detection on my DCS-1000 or 1000W camera?
    Answer This FAQ is for IPView version 3.0.

    Read here if you have IPView version 3.3.

    Download IPView here

    Follow the steps below to set up Motion Detection on your camera.

    Step 1 Go to Start>Programs>IPview>IPview.

    Step 2 Select File>Add Camera. At this point you can enter the cameraīs IP address if you know it, otherwise click Browse>Search. The program will search for any cameras that are on the Network.

    Step 3 After the program finds the camera, click add.

    Step 4 Leave the username and password blank and click OK. This will add the camera to the list.

    Step 5 Double click on the camera and you will get the Camera Properties window.

    Step 6 Select the Motion Detection tab.



    Step 7 From this window select the boxes that you wish to enable and set the Sensitivity Level for your camera.

    Step 8 Apply the changes.
    Model DCS-1000W / DCS-1000
    Question How do I add and configure my DCS-1000/DCS-1000W using the IPview program?

    Answer Once you have installed the IPview program on your computer you can access it by going to Start>Programs>IPview>IPview



    Type in Admin for the default username and click OK

    From this window select Camera>Add>Browse>Search. When the program has found the camera click Add>Add again. A username and password window should come up again. By default both fields are blank. Just click OK.

    Note: If you know the IP address of the camera you can type it in after clicking on the first Add and continue through the windows.

    Once the camera is in the list, double click on it. This will get into the camera properties. From here you will be able make changes to the camera.



    Model DCS-1000W / DCS-1000
    Question What changes can be made on the General page of the Camera properties window?
    Answer In this window you will be able to change the camera name and location. You can also make changes to the Admin ID or username and password.

    By default there isnīt an Admin username and password, so it would be a good idea to put one on at this time. This will keep others from accessing your camera and making changes to it.

    Example:
    Model DCS-1000W / DCS-1000
    Question What is the IP assignment tab used for?
    Answer This window will allow you to decide on how you want your cameraīs IP address configured. By default the camera comes with an IP address of 192.168.0.20, subnet mask of 255.255.255.0, and no gateway address.

    You also have the options of letting the camera get an IP address from a DHCP server. Keep in mind that you will need some kind of DHCP client table to let you know what your new IP address is for the camera. D-link recommends setting a static address on the camera, this way you and others will always know the IP address.

    If you are using PPPOE you will need to input the correct information in the Service Name, User ID, and Password fields. You may also need to input DNS numbers, this is done by selecting the DNS tab and inputting the DNS numbers given to you by your provider.

    For any setting other than Manually Assign, click on the Automatic Assign radio button to make the appropriate changes.

    Example:
    Model DCS-1000W / DCS-1000
    Question What is the DNS tab used for?
    Answer This tab is used to manually assign DNS numbers to your camera. Most PPPOE accounts and static accounts use DNS numbers. This information should have been provided to you by your ISP. If you do not have this information contact your ISP.

    Example:
    Model DCS-1110
    Question How do I reset my DCS-1110 series camera to factory defaults?
    Answer Step 1: With the unit powered on, place a paper clip into the hole on the back on the unit labeled Reset.

    Step 2: Hold the paper clip down for approximately 10 seconds and then release it.

    Note: Do not unplug the power cord from the unit during this procedure.

    Step 3: The unit will now reboot on its own.

    Resetting the camera does not reset the firmware to an earlier version. It will change all other settings back to factory defaults for that firmware version.
    Model DCS-1110
    Question What is the default password for my DCS-1110 series camera?
    Answer The default password for the DCS-1110 is admin (all lower case). If you cannot remember the password you have later set on the camera, you will have to reset it to factory defaults to be able to log in.
    Model DCS-1110
    Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DCS-1110 camera?
    Answer Please read the following before upgrading your firmware:
    • Upgrading firmware (in most cases) will reset all the settings to factory defaults which means you will lose all your settings (including your password).
    • Do NOT upgrade firmware from a computer with a wireless connection. Use a computer that you can connect to the camera using an ethernet cable. You may damage the camera due to the increased chance for packet loss with a wireless connection.

    Step 1: Download the latest firmware, which you should be able to find here.

    Step 2: Once you’ve downloaded the firmware, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape and enter the IP address of your camera (192.168.0.20).

    Step 3: Enter your username and password (by default the username is admin and there is no password). Click on OK to enter the web configuration for the device.

    Step 4: Click on the Tools tab and then on the Firmware button on the lefthand side. Click on the Browse button and browse to the .bin file you downloaded in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click on Open.



    Step 5: Click on Apply. It may take up to 1 minute for the upgrade to complete. Click on the Continue button to complete the process.
    Model DCS-1110
    Question Can I capture still images from the DCS-1110?
    Answer Yes, you are able to capture still images using the snapshot feature on the Home page. When viewing this page, click on the Snapshot button on the page to capture the image and save it to your hard drive.

    You may also record snapshots with the snapshot function in the IPView SE application supplied with the Internet Camera CD-ROM.
    Model DCS-1110
    Question What is the maximum number of users that can be allowed to access DCS-1110 simultaneously?
    Answer The maximum number of users that can log into the DCS-1110 at the same time is 8. Please keep in mind the overall performance of the camera and the transmission speed will slow down when multiple users are logged on.
    Model DCS-1110
    Question Why are no images available through the web browser?
    Answer This can happen if ActiveX is disabled. If you are viewing the images from Internet Explorer make sure ActiveX has been enabled in the Internet Options menu. You may also need to change the security settings on your browser to allow the ActiveX plug-in to be installed.

    Note: If you are using Internet Explorer with a version number of lower than 5, then you will need to upgrade your web browser software in order to view the streaming video transmitted by the Internet Camera.
    Model DCS-1110
    Question How do I set up email notification on my DCS-1110 series camera?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your camera in the address bar. Enter your username (admin) and your password. Click OK to enter the web-based configuration for the device.

    Step 2 Click on the Tools tab and then the Trigger button on the left side.

    Step 3 Under Send E-Mail select By E-mail.

    Step 4 Select SMTP Login Name and fill out the SMTP information.

  • SMTP Login Name: The user name used to log into your e-mail account (e.g. jdoe or jdoe@yourisp.com depending on your ISP).

  • SMTP Password: The password used to log into your e-mail account. (The password will appear as dots instead of entered characters.)

  • SMTP (Mail) Server: The domain name or IP address of external mail server.

  • Return E-mail address: The return e-mail address to use if the snapshot or system log e-mail fails to send. (This address should be within the SMTP server’s domain for authentication purposes.)

  • Recipient E-mail address: The e-mail address of recipients for snapshots or a system log file.

  • SMTP Port: This is the port number for your SMTP server, the default is 25. If you use ports other than 25 you can change it here.



    Step 5 After you filled in the SMTP information you can test that the SMTP information was entered correctly. Click on Test. You will see the Test in progress window.



    If the e-mail test was successful you will see a Test Status: Success window pop up. Click Close to exit the test window.



    Step 6 Click Apply to save the settings.
    • Model DCS-1110
    Question How do I remotely view my DCS-1110 camera that is behind a router or gateway?
    Answer For each camera that resides behind a router or gateway, three ports must be forwarded by the router to obtain both audio and video.

    The three default ports are:
    • 80 (TCP) HTTP Port (allows access to web-configuration and transmits video if other ports are not forwarded)
    • 5000 (TCP & UDP) AV Control Port
    • 5001 (TCP & UDP) AV Streaming Port
    These port numbers will need to be changed in the camera configuration on each additional camera that is added behind the router.

    Port numbers can be changed from the Tools > Port screen.



    Practical Example: Two DCS-1110 cameras are behind a DI-624. The router has a public IP address (WAN) of 63.116.231.25 and an internal (LAN) IP address of 192.168.0.1.

    Camera 1 IP address: 192.168.0.210 Ports: 80, 5000 and 5001
    Camera 2 IP address: 192.168.0.208 Ports: 81, 5002 and 5003

    Each set of three ports must be forwarded to the respective IP address. Set-up for Camera 1 inside a DI-624īs configuration is shown below:

    Example for Port 80:

    Example for Port 5000 - 5001:

    This will need to be done for each camera and their respective ports.

    To contact these cameras from a remote location (across the Internet), use the Public IP address (WAN) of the router along with the appropriate web port. Using the above example:

    To remotely contact camera 1 with Internet Explorer, enter http://63.116.231.25:80
    To remotely contact camera 2 with Internet Explorer, enter http://63.116.231.25:81
    Model DCS-1110 / DCS-2000 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100G / DCS-2120 / DCS-30 / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-3420 / DCS-40 / DCS-5220 / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300G_revB / DCS-5300W / DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G / DCS-70 / DCS-900 / DCS-900_revB / DCS-900W / DCS-950 / DCS-950G / DCS-G900
    Question What Should my DCS camera box contain?
    Answer IP CAMERA PACKAGE CONTENTS:

    DCS-1000

    DCS-1000, CD, AC Power Adapter, Mounting Bracket, QIG, CD (Manual, QIG, IPView, Setup Wizard), Ethernet Cable

    DCS-1000W

    DCS-1000W , 2 Antennas, AC Power Adapter, Stand/Mounting Bracket, QIG, Ethernet Cable, CD(Manual, QIG, IPView, Setup Wizard)

    DCS-1110

    DCS-1110 device, Master CD with manual and software, QIG, 2.0dBm antenna, 5V 2.5A switching power adapter, Cat.5 RJ-45 cable, Stand and Mounting Bracket.

    DCS-2000

    DCS-2000, AC Power Adapter, CD (Drivers, Software, QIG, Manual), Camera Stand and Bracket, Ethernet Cable

    DCS-2100+

    DCS-2100+, Stand, CD, Manual,QIG, 2 Antennas, Bracket

    DCS-2100G

    DCS-2100G device, Master CD with manual, software, QIG, 5V 2A switching power adapter, Cat.5 RJ-45 cable, Stand and Mounting Bracket.

    DCS-2120

    DCS-2120 device, Master CD with manual software, QIG, 2.0dBm antenna, 5V 2.0A switching power adapter, Cat.5 RJ-45 cable, Stand and Mounting Bracket.

    DCS-30

    Enclosure

    DCS-3220

    DCS-3220 Device, CD with manual, QIG, 12V 1.5A Switching Power Adapter, Cat.5 RJ-45 Cable, Mounting Bracket.

    DCS-3220G

    DCS-3220G Device, CD with manual, QIG, 12v 1.5A Switching Power Adapter, Cat.5 RJ-45 Cable, 2.0 dBm Antenna, Mounting Bracket.

    DCS-3420

    DCS-3420 Device, Switching power adapter, Bracket, Antenna.

    DCS-40

    Enclosure, Bracket

    DCS-45

    Housing, Screws for housing, Cable Glands, Bracket, Screws for bracket

    DCS-50

    Camera Enclosure, Bracket

    DCS-5220

    DCS-5220 device, Master CD with Manual and Software, CAT-5 RJ-45 Cable, Mounting Kit, Power Adapter, Antenna, QIG.

    DCS-5300

    DCS-5300 device, 12V/1.5A Power Adapter, CAT5 Ethernet Cable, QIG, Master CD, A/V Cable, Remote Control, Stand

    DCS-5300G

    DCS-5300G Device, CD with manual, QIG, 12v 1.5A Switching Power Adapter, Cat.5 RJ-45 Cable, 2.0 dBm Antenna, AV Cable, Remote Control, Stand and Mounting Bracket

    DCS-5300W

    DCS-5300W Camera, 12V/1.5A Power Adapter, CAT5 Ethernet Cable, QIG, Master CD, A/V Cable, Remote Control, Stand

    DCS-60

    Camera Enclosure, Bracket

    DCS-6620

    DCS-6620 Device, Master CD with manual, software, QIG, 12V 1.5A switching power adapter, Cat.5 RJ-45 cable, Stand and Mounting Bracket Remote Control

    DCS-6620G

    DCS-6620G device, Master CD with manual, software, QIG, 2.0dBm antenna, 12V 1.5A switching power adapter, Cat.5 RJ-45 cable, Stand and Mounting Bracket, Remote Control

    DCS-70

    Camera Enclosure, Bracket

    DCS-900

    DCS-900 Internet Camera, Software in CD-ROM, QIG, Power Adapter(DC5V), Stand, Ethernet Cable

    DCS-900W

    DCS-900W Internet Camera, Power Adapter, QIG, CD-ROM, Ethernet Cable, Antenna, Swivel Stand

    DCS-950

    DCS-950 Device, Master CD with manual & software, QIG, 5V 2.5A switching power adapter, Cat.5 RJ-45 cable, Stand and Mounting Bracket.

    DCS-950G

    DCS-950G Device, Master CD with manual & software, QIG, 2.0dBm Antenna, 5V 2.5A Switching Power Adapter, Cat.5 RJ-45 Cable, Stand and Mounting Bracket.

    DCS-G900

    DCS-G900 device, Master CD with manual & software, QIG, 2.0dBm antenna, 5V 2.5A switching power adapter, Cat.5 RJ-45 cable, Stand and Mounting Bracket.
    Model DCS-1110 / DCS-2000 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100G / DCS-2120 / DCS-30 / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-3420 / DCS-40 / DCS-5220 / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300G_revB / DCS-5300W / DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G / DCS-70 / DCS-900 / DCS-900_revB / DCS-900W / DCS-950 / DCS-950G / DCS-G900
    Question What is an Internet Camera?
    Answer The Internet Camera is a stand-alone system connecting directly to an Ethernet or Fast Ethernet network.

    It differs from a conventional PC Camera, the Internet Camera is an all-in-one system with built-in CPU and Web-based solutions providing a low cost solution that can transmit high quality video images for monitoring.

    The Internet Camera can be managed remotely, accessed and controlled from any PC/Notebook over an Intranet or the Internet from a Web browser.
    Model DCS-1110 / DCS-2000 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100G / DCS-2120 / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-3420 / DCS-5220 / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300G_revB / DCS-5300W / DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G / DCS-900 / DCS-900_revB / DCS-900W / DCS-950 / DCS-950G / DCS-G900
    Question Why am I receiving a Windows error, when connecting the Internet Camera directly to a computer with a cross-over cable?
    Answer This WindowsŪ error will occur if the Internet Camera is connected to a computer that is not properly configured with a valid IP address.



    Turn off DHCP from the Network Settings in WindowsŪ and configure the computer with a valid IP address, assign the computer a Static IP address, or connect the camera to a router with DHCP enabled.
    Model DCS-1110 / DCS-2000 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100G / DCS-2120 / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-3420 / DCS-5220 / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300G_revB / DCS-5300W / DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G / DCS-900 / DCS-900_revB / DCS-900W / DCS-950 / DCS-950G / DCS-G900
    Question How can I improve the image quality of my Internet Camera?
    Answer If images appear to have poor image quality make sure the following settings are configured properly:

  • Make sure that your computer’s display properties are set above 256 colors. Using 16 or 256 colors on your computer will produce dithering artifacts in the image, making the image appear to be of poor quality.

  • Make sure the configuration on the Internet Cameras image display is correct. Under the Advanced tab of the Web management, click on Image Setting. Here you can adjust the image related parameters such as brightness, contrast, and hue. Adjusting these settings will improve image quality.

    • Model DCS-1110 / DCS-2000 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100G / DCS-2120 / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-3420 / DCS-5220 / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300G_revB / DCS-5300W / DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G / DCS-900 / DCS-900_revB / DCS-900W / DCS-950 / DCS-950G / DCS-G900 / DNS-120 / DNS-323 / DNS-G120 / DSM-G600_revA1 / DSM-G600_revB
    Question How do I see my UPnP devices on my network?
    Answer Step 1: Make sure UPnP is enabled on your PC.

    Step 2: Click Start.

    Step 3: Click My Network Places.



    Step 4: Click Show icon for UPnP devices.

    Step 5: You will get a prompt to open the firewall for UPnP devices click Yes to continue.



    You will now see UPnP devices on you network when browsing your Network Places and Workgroups.
    Model DCS-1110 / DCS-2000 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100G / DCS-2120 / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-3420 / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300G_revB / DCS-5300W / DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G / DCS-900 / DCS-900_revB / DCS-900W / DCS-950 / DCS-950G / DCS-G900
    Question Why can I not access my Internet Camera from a web browser?
    Answer One possible cause may be that the IP Address of the Internet Camera is already being used by another device.

    To correct this, you need to first disconnect the Internet Camera from the network. Then run the PING utility. If there is a reply, it indicates that there is another device on the network with the same IP address.
    You will need to run the Install Wizard again and change the IP address of the camera.

    Another possible problems may be due to the network cable.
    Try replacing your network cable. Then test the network interface of the product by connecting a local computer to the unit, utilizing a standard Crossover Cable. If the problem is not solved, the Internet Camera might be faulty.
    Model DCS-1110 / DCS-2000 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100G / DCS-2120 / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-3420 / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300G_revB / DCS-5300W / DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G / DCS-900 / DCS-900_revB / DCS-900W / DCS-950 / DCS-950G / DCS-G900
    Question What D-Link Cameraīs are supported on the D-view 1.20 surveillance software?
    Answer D-View 1.3 Surveillance software supports the following D-Link cameraīs with the following firmware version and above.

    DCS-900 rev_A 2.37

    DCS-900 rev_B 3.00

    DCS-900W 2.36

    DCS-G900 1.00

    DCS-950 1.06

    DCS-950G 1.06

    DCS-2000 1.02

    DCS-2100 1.00

    DCS-2100G 1.02

    DCS-2100+ 1.00

    DCS-2102 1.01

    DCS-3220 1.00

    DCS-3220G 1.00

    DCS-3220G rev_B 2.00

    DCS-5220

    DCS-5300 1.02

    DCS-5300W 1.03

    DCS-5300G 2.00

    DCS-6620 1.01

    DCS-6620G 1.01

    Model DCS-1110 / DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question How do I setup Dynamic DNS (DDNS) on my DCS-950, DCS-950G, and DCS-1110 series camera?
    Answer Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows remote administration of the camera using a domain name in situations where a static IP address is not available. Each time a new dynamic IP address is pulled, the camera updates the IP address with the DDNS service provider.

    Step 1 Log into the camera.

    Step 2 Click Setup to the left.

    Step 3 Click the Advanced tab then click DDNS to the left.



    Step 4 Select Yes under Dynamic DNS settings.

    Step 5 Enter the User Name, Password, and Domain Name (i.e. mycamera.dyndns.org) of your DDNS account, in the spaces provided.

    Step 6 Click Apply to save the settings.

    Note: After DDNS is configured, you will access the camera remotely using the domain name. For example, if the domain name that you registered is mycamera.dyndns.org, then you would type http://mycamera.dyndns.org in the address bar of your web browser to access the camera remotely.
    Model DCS-1110/ DES-1228P / DXS-3227P / DWS-3227P / DES-3828P / DWL-8200AP / DES-1316 / DES-1526 / DWL-2200AP / DWL-2210AP / DWL-2700AP/ DWL-3200AP / DWL-7200AP/ DWL-7700AP / DWL-P50 / DWL-P100 / DWL-P200 / DWL-7700AP
    Question What D-Link products support the 802.3af protocol?
    Answer 802.3af, also known as Power over Ethernet, defines the standard for building Ethernet power-sourcing equipment and powered terminals.

    The following D-Link products support the 802.3af protocol:

    Model DCS-2000
    Question How do I upload continuous snapshots from the DCS-2000 to an FTP server?
    Answer Step 1 Log into the web-based interface of the DCS-2000 by entering the IP address of the camera into the address bar of your web browser.

    Step 2 Click on the Configuration button.



    Step 3 Enter in the proper FTP settings. In the below example, all snapshots will go to the primary FTP server at 20.10.10.20 to the Recordings directory. JohnDoe will be the user account logging in. If the snapshots fail to send to 20.10.10.20, they will send to the backup FTP server at 20.10.10.30 to the Backup directory using an anonymous log-in.



    Step 4 Set a schedule. If you want to specify the time period that you do NOT want to upload during, check the box All the time except for the above schedule. The settings shown below will cause the uploading to run 24/7.



    Step 5 Check Sequential Operation and enter the frequency (in seconds) of how often a snapshot will be taken. Choose Send Snapshots by FTP. Check the box FTP put snapshots with date and time suffix if you want a cumulation of files with the date and time in the file name. Uncheck the box if you want a single file to be continuously overwritten with the latest image.

    Model DCS-2000
    Question How do I access my DCS-2000 for the first time?
    Answer Note: Make sure a solid green light is on the camera before running the IP Installer.

    Step 1 Put the DCS-2000 CD into your computer and let it autorun.

    Step 2 Click on IP Installer.



    Step 3 In the IP Installer window, the Mac address and IP address of the DCS-2000 camera will appear.



    Step 4 Highlight the Mac address and click on the Wizard button located on the left side of the window.



    Step 5 From the Setup Window, click Next.



    Step 6 Assign an IP address to the DCS-2000. The IP address must be in the same subnet as the computerīs network adapter card i.e, 192.168.0.x. Also enter a subnet mask i.e, 255.255.255.0. A default gateway or DNS address will not be needed at this time. If the camera is connected directly to a router that assigns DHCP, accept the IP address that the router has assigned to the camera. Add a default gateway and at least one DNS number (usually the IP address of your router).



    Step 7 Click Restart.



    Step 8 The IP Installer window will now show a Mac address along with the new IP address.



    Step 9 Click on the Link button on the left side of the IP Installer window. This will connect you directly to the Web configuration page for additional changes to the DCS-2000 camera.
    Model DCS-2000
    Question How do I view streaming video using Internet Explorer 5.1 for Macintosh?
    Answer Unfortunately, at this time, the plug-in we provide for MPEG4 Short Header Mode only supports Internet Explorer in Windows. You will still be able to configure the camera with a Macintosh but you will not be able to view the video.
    Model DCS-2000
    Question How do I setup my DCS-2000?
    Answer Step 1 Connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port located on the back of the DCS-2000 and connect the other end to a networking device such as a router or switch.



    Step 2 Attach the external power supply to the DC power input connector located on the back of the DCS-2000 labeled 12V DC and connect the other end to a wall outlet.



    When you have a proper connection, the LED will change from red to green. If you are directly connected to the camera via a crossover cable, the light may cycle on and off and your computer may show an intermittent loss of connectivity. This will stop once you have configured the camera from your computer.

    Step 3 Use the Install Wizard to detect the camera.

    Click here for help using the Installation Wizard.
    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100G / DCS-2120 / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-3420 / DCS-5220 / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300G_revB / DCS-5300W / DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G
    Question Why am I getting a message Could not initialize display device with DirectDraw, when running IP Surveillance?
    Answer It may be that your Video card does not support DirectDraw.

    If you are sure that your video card does support DirectDraw and is installed properly try lowering the colors of your Desktop to 16 bit colors.

    Follow these steps to change to 16 bit colors:

    Step 1: Right click on your Desktop and select Properties



    Step 2: Click the Settings Tab



    Step 3: Set Color quality to Medium 16 bit



    Step 4: Click Apply
    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100G / DCS-2120 / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-3420 / DCS-5220 / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300G_revB / DCS-5300W / DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G / DCS-900 / DCS-900_revB / DCS-900W / DCS-950 / DCS-950G / DCS-G900
    Question Does D-Link D-ViewCam support cameras that have motion detection capability?
    Answer Yes. Motion detection capability varies according to the number of connected cameras and the complexity of the tasks performed. Normally, you can have up to two motion detections. If your computer is equipped a powerful processor, it’s possible to have more motion detections.
    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-2100G / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300W / DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G / DCS-900 / DCS-900W / DCS-950 / DCS-950G / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question What is the FOV (Field Of View) for D-Link cameras?
    Answer The Field of View for D-Link cameras is listed below.

    • DCS-2100/G: 62 degrees
      • FOV (H): 42deg 7inch
      • FOV (V): 53deg 9inch
      • FOV (Diagonal): 64deg 31inch


    • DCS-3220/G: 50 degrees
      • FOV (H): 39deg 46inch
      • FOV (V): 34deg 11inch
      • FOV (Diagonal): 50deg 49inch


    • DCS-5300/G: 64 degrees
      • FOV (H): 53deg 5inch
      • FOV (V): 46deg 4inch
      • FOV (Diagonal): 66deg 97inch


    • DCS-6620/G: 66 to 5 degrees(Changes depending on optical Zoom setting)
      • FOV (H): 54deg 39inch to 5deg 55inch
      • FOV (V): 47deg 26inch to 5deg 2inch
      • FOV (Diagonal): 68deg 29inch to 7deg 46inch


    • DCS-2000/2100+: 62 degrees

    • DCS-900/W & DCS-950/G (A1)
      • FOV (diagonal): 45 degrees
      • FOV (V): 27 degrees
      • FOV (H): 34 degrees

    • DCS-950/G (A2)
      • FOV (diagonal): 54 degrees
      • FOV (V): 32.5 degrees
      • FOV (H): 40.6 degrees
    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100 / DCS-2100G / DCS-2100+ / DCS-3220/ DCS-3220G / DCS-3420 / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300W / DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question How do I configure Dynamic DNS (DDNS) on my camera?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DCS-2000, DCS-2100, DCS-2100G, DCS-2100+, DCS-3220, DCS-3220G, DCS-3420, DCS-5300, DCS-5300G, DCS-5300W, DCS-6620, DCS-6620G cameras.

    Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows remote administration of the camera using a domain name in situations where a static IP address is not available. Each time a new dynamic IP address is pulled, the camera updates the IP address with the DDNS service provider.

    Step 1 Register with one of the following DDNS providers:

    Write down the URL and login information you obtained after registering with one of the above DDNS providers.

    Step 2 Log into the web-based configuration of the camera.

    Step 3 Click Configuration to the left.

    Step 4 Click the Advanced tab and then click DDNS&UPnP to the left.



    Step 5 Click the Enable DDNS checkbox.

    Step 6 Select the provider that you registered with from the drop-down list next to Provider.

    Step 7 Using the information you obtained in Step 1 enter the domain name that you created (i.e. mycamera.dyndns.org) in the field by Host Name. Enter your login information for the account in the Username/Email and Password/Key fields.

    Step 8 Click Apply and then Continue to save the new settings.

    Note: After this is set up, you use the domain name that you registered to access the camera remotely. For example, if the domain name that you registered is mycamera.dyndns.org, then you would type http://mycamera.dyndns.org in the address bar of your internet browser to access the camera remotely.
    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+
    Question Which web browsers will allow me to view the video from a DCS-2000 or DCS-2100+?
    Answer Internet Explorer 5.x or higher running on a computer with Windows 98, ME, 2000 or XP is the only web-browser which will properly support the MPEG-4 plug-in required for viewing the video from a DCS-2000 or DCS-2100+.

    All other browsers (including handheld computer browsers and Internet Explorer for Mac) will not be able to view the video.
    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+
    Question Where can I get lenses and other accessories for the DCS-2000 and DCS-2100+?
    Answer D-Link currently does not sell accessories for the DCS-2000 and DCS-2100+ camera. We recommend visiting www.securityideas.com or www.smarthome.com for your lens and accessory needs.
    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+
    Question How do I reset the DCS-2000 or DCS-2100+ back to factory defaults?
    Answer There are two ways to reset the camera back to factory defaults.

    Step 1 The first way to reset the camera is to insert a paper clip into the reset hole on the back of the camera. Depress the button and let the LED lights on the front of the camera recycle twice and then release the buttton. You should then see a solid green LED light on the front of the camera.

    Step 2 The second way to reset the camera is to open a web browser and type in the IP address of the camera. Click on the Configuration tab > select Tools > and then the Default button from the left side of the window. Click the apply button in the lower right corner of the screen. This will restore the camera back to its default settings. Again you should have a solid green LED light on the front of the camera.

    Note: A solid green light on the front of the camera means it has power, a connection, and is ready to be configured.

    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+
    Question What do the red and green lights on the front of the DCS-2000 and DCS-2100+ camera mean?
    Answer
  • A solid red or Orange/Red flashing (amber) light on the camera means you have power only (no Ethernet/wireless connection).

  • A flashing green/red/green/red light means the camera is rebooting or resetting.

  • A solid green light means that you have power and a proper ethernet connection to your router, switch or computer. The camera is ready to be configured with the IP Installer.

  • A blinking green light means there is activity between devices and the camera has been configured and is accessible.
    • Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+
    Question How do I set a password on my DCS-2000 or DCS-2100+ camera?
    Answer The steps below will show you how to set up a password on your camera.

    Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and type in your IP address of the camera.

    How can I find the IP address of my camera?

    Step 2 Click on Configuration.

    Step 3 Select the Tools> Admin.

    Step 4 On the Administrators Settings page you can set your new password.

    Step 5 Under Admistrators Password, type in your new password and confirm it.

    Step 6 Make sure to click on the save button. It is located next to confirm password.

    Now when you try to access the cameras web configuration page you will have to type in your username and password. By default the username is admin all lower case.

    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+
    Question How do I setup motion detection on my DCS-2000 and DCS-2100+ cameras?
    Answer The DCS-2000 can have from 1 to 3 windows activated at any given time. The following steps will show you how to set them up.

    Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and type in the IP address of the your DCS-2000.

    How can I find the IP address of my camera?

    Step 2 Click on the Configuration button> Advanced tab> select Motion Detection.

    Step 3 Click the New button. A small window will appear on the main screen. You can move this window to the area you wish to monitor.

    Step 4 Make sure to name the window, set the sensitivity and percentage for each window, and click the save button. You will get a pop-up telling you the save is completed. Click OK

    Step 5 Follow steps 3 and 4 if you plan to have more than one window enabled for motion.

    Step 6 Check the box labled Enable Motion Detection, click Save

    Example:



    Once you have saved your settings in the web configuration pages you will need to enable the newly created windows in the IP surveillance program. Follow these steps:

    Step 1 Go to Start > Programs > Dlink > IP surveillance Software > Monitor

    Step 2 Type in your name i.e, admin and password click ok

    Step 3 Click on Function Menu> select Camera Configuration from the list.

    Step 4 Make sure you have selected the correct camera name and IP address to enable the motion detection.

    Step 5 In the Show Windows Options box select the Motion button, check radio button ON, and select one or all the boxes that are labeled win1, win2, win3.

    Step 6 From the Alert Settings box, next to Enable Motion Detection, check the box labeled rec.

    Step 7 Click on save to finish. Your motion detection should now be activated. There should be an amber light blinking above the selected camera

    Example:



    Note: All of the above mentioned can be configured by logging into the IP surveillance Program.
    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+
    Question How much space does the DCS-2000/DCS-2100+ take up when recording?
    Answer The file size depends on how the camera is configured for both video resolution and frame rate. It also varies with how many cameras you are recording and/or streaming.

    Step 1 Go to Advanced > Video.

    Step 2 Configure the Video Settings:

    • Color - You can choose the option of either color or monochrome video display.
    • Size - There are three selections to choose from. It is displayed out by the resolution of the screen from the camera. 160x120, 320x240 and 640x480 are three options to choose from.
    • Power line frequency (for fluorescent light) - Change this frequency setting to ensure optimal operation when camera is used under fluorescent lighting.
    • Maximum frame rate - Settings of the rate at which the video image is refreshed. Maximum frame rate depends on your network bandwidth.
    • Video quality control - These settings are used to optimize your camera performance with your available bandwidth.
    • Fixed bit rate - Select a fixed bandwidth for your camera operation. This option allows you to select a custom frame rate to suit your bandwidth and storage space needs. Below is a typical file size after 1 minute of recording at 30fpm (frames per second).

      This is only an average measurement. Your file size may differ due to lighting, b/w or color setting, and frame rate.

      Fixed Bit Rate 64Kbps 128Kbps 256Kbps 384Kbps 512Kbps 768Kbps 1000Kbps 1200Kbps
      File Size 496Kb 1.01MB 2.04MB 2.91MB 3.81MB 5.01MB 5.92MB 7.09MB
    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300W / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question How do I configure the date and time on my DCS-2000 and DCS-5300 series cameras?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DCS-2000, DCS-2100+, DCS-5300, DCS-5300G, and DCS-5300W cameras.

    Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration of the camera.

    Step 2 Click Configuration to the left.

    Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click System to the left.



    Step 4 Select one of the below options using the radio buttons:

    • Keep current date and time - Keep the current date and time that the camera currently is set to.
    • Sync with computer time - Set date and time with the current date and time of your PC.
    • Manual - Manually set the date and time.
    • Automatic - Sync time with a time server. Do not put anything in the field next to NTP Server if you want to use the default time server. Otherwise, enter a time server in this field. Select your time zone from the drop-down list next to Time Zone.
    Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300W / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question Why wonīt my snapshots upload at 640 x 480 resolution?
    Answer The default size for snapshots is 352 x 240. Only video images can be viewed at 640 x 480.
    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300W
    Question How can I delete user accounts from viewing my DCS-2000/5300 series cameras remotely?
    Answer You can delete user accounts from within the web-based interface of your camera.

    Step 1 Log into the camera.

    Step 2 Click on Tools and then click on Admin.

    Step 3 Choose the user name from the drop-down list and then click Delete.



    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300W
    Question How do I add user accounts to my DCS-2000/5300 series cameras?
    Answer You can add up to 20 users to view your camera remotely from within the web-based interface of your camera.

    Step 1 Log into the camera.

    Step 2 Click on Tools and then click on Admin.

    Step 3 Type in user name & password and then click Add. Check Permit to access DI/DO ONLY if you have an external sensor connected to the camera.



    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300W
    Question How many remote users can view my camera simultaneously?
    Answer You can add up to 20 users to view your camera remotely, but you can only have 10 simultaneous connections.

  • How do I add users?
  • How do I delete users?
    • Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300W
    Question How do I view the Internet Camera image with the IP surveillance software?
    Answer After you have added a camera, click and hold on the number of the camera (red arrow) you wish to view, then drag and drop to the window where you want the video to display. Itīs that simple!

    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300W
    Question How do I install the surveillance system software for my Internet Camera?
    Answer Step 1 Launch the CD that was packaged with your camera (or run setup.exe from a downloaded driver file). Click on Install surveillance software.



    Step 2 Click Next.



    Step 3 Click Yes.



    Step 4 Enter your name and company name. Click Next.



    Step 5 Choose the directory you wish to install the program to. Click Next.



    Step 6 Click Next.



    Step 7 Click Next.



    Step 8 Click Finish.



    The surveillance system software is now installed.
    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300W
    Question How do I add a camera to the list with the IP surveillance software?
    Answer Below are instructions for IP surveillance version 2.10 Build 11 which is available for download at our downloads page.

    Step 1 Click on the Configurations button.



    Step 2 Select Camera Configurations....



    Step 3 Click Yes. Be aware that all recording in progress will stop.



    Step 4 Click Insert.



    Step 5 Enter the IP address of the camera you wish to add. Click OK.



    Step 6 Changes can now be made to the camera itself without opening up Internet Explorer. Click Save.



    Step 7 Press OK.



    The camera has been added. Now the number one is highlighted to show there is a camera present. Drag and drop the camera into the viewing area.

    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300W
    Question What are the minimum system requirements for the IP surveillance Software?
    Answer The following system requirements may be needed to use the IP surveillance software on your PC:

  • Windows 98 Second Edition, Me, 2000, and XP.
  • Pentium III, 500 MHz or above. Using anything less may result in the shutting down of the program.
  • 64 MB of RAM
  • AGP Video Card
  • The message The IP surveillance program may not be restarted means that the computer does not meet the requirements listed above and can not run the program properly.
    • Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300W
    Question Why canīt I use the IP surveillance program on my Macintosh?
    Answer The IP surveillance program is a windows-based program and is not compatible with Macintosh. If you have IE 5.0 and above you can get into the web configuration pages of the camera by opening your browser and typing the IP address of the camera. Once here you will be able to make changes to IP address, Image, Date and Time, Etc. You will only be able to access one camera at a time.
    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300W
    Question Can I use the IP installer to find the Internet Camera across different subnets?
    Answer No. The IP Installer will only find cameras that are on the same subnet as your computer running the IP Installer program. If you are not on the same subnet there will be no MAC address entry in the Installer window.

    Example: If your computer is on 192.168.10.x, your camera will also have to be on the 192.168.10.x subnet. If it is on 192.168.1.x the IP Installer will not find the camera.
    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300W / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question How do I remotely view DCS-2000 or DCS-5300 series cameras that are behind a router or gateway?
    Answer For each camera that resides behind a router or gateway, four ports must be forwarded by the router to obtain both audio and video. If audio is not desired, only the HTTP port will need to be forwarded. The four default ports are as follows:
    • 80 (TCP) HTTP Port (allows access to web-configuration and transmits video if other ports are not forwarded)
    • 5001 (TCP/UDP) Control Channel Port (used to synchronize audio and video)
    • 5002 (TCP/UDP) Audio Channel Port (transmits synchronized audio)
    • 5003 (TCP/UDP) Video Channel Port (transmits synchronized video)
    These port numbers will need to be changed in the camera configuration on each additional camera that is added behind the router. Port numbers can be changed from the Advanced > Network screen.



    Practical Example: Three DCS-2000s are behind a DI-604. The router has a public IP address (WAN) of 63.116.231.25 and an internal (LAN) IP address of 192.168.0.1.

    Camera 1 IP address: 192.168.0.10 Ports: 80, 5001, 5002 and 5003
    Camera 2 IP address: 192.168.0.20 Ports: 81, 6001, 6002 and 6003
    Camera 3 IP address: 192.168.0.30 Ports: 82, 7001, 7002 and 7003

    Each set of four ports must be forwarded to the respective IP address. Set-up for Camera 1 inside a DI-604īs configuration is shown below:





    This will need to be done for each camera and their respective ports.

    To contact these cameras from a remote location (across the Internet), use the Public IP address (WAN) of the router along with the appropriate web port. Using the above example:

    To remotely contact camera 1 with Internet Explorer, enter http://63.116.231.25:80
    To remotely contact camera 2 with Internet Explorer, enter http://63.116.231.25:81
    To remotely contact camera 3 with Internet Explorer, enter http://63.116.231.25:82

    These cameras can also be contacted remotely with IP surveillance (included software).

    Step 1 Launch the Monitor application and choose Function Menu > Camera Configurations.



    Step 2 Enter the routers Public IP address and port number in the IP address field in the top left corner.



    Step 3 Click the Insert button directly above.

    Step 4 Click Save.
    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300W / DCS-5300G / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question How do I use the Install Wizard for my camera?
    Answer The Install Wizard will search for cameras connected to your network.

    Step 1 Please visit http://support.dlink.com/downloads/ and download the Install Wizard.

    Step 2 Navigate to the location where you downloaded the Install Wizard and double-click Installation Wizard.exe to launch the program.

    Step 3 Please wait while the Install Wizard searches for cameras.



    Step 4 Check the box next to the camera you want to configure and then click Setup.



    Step 5 Next to Camera Name enter a new name. The camera name will identify the camera.

    Step 6 Next to Admin password password enter the administrator password. Next to Confirm password, re-enter the password.

    Step 7 Configure the Date/Time settings using the options below:

    • Keep current date and time - Select this option to keep the current date and time.
    • Synchronize with computer time - Select this option to synchronize the time with your computer.
    • Manual - Select this option to manually set the time. Enter the date next to Date and the time next to Time.
    • Automatic - Select this option to automatically synchronize the time with an NTP time server. You configure the NTP time server settings in the web-based configuration of your camera.


    Step 8 Click Next to continue.

    Step 9 Uncheck Reset IP address at next boot and enter the cameras IP address settings. Click Next.



    Step 10 Click Apply to save the new settings and then click Exit.

    Model DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300W / DCS-5300G_revB / DCS-5300G
    Question How do I put the streaming video from my DCS-2000/5300 series cameras on to my own webpage?
    Answer Use the below example code for a webpage. If the camera is behind a NAT device such as a router, the IP must be edited to reflect the public address of the router (IE 24.45.76.223). In this example the cameraīs IP is 192.168.1.135.

    For the DCS-5300/5300W

    <script language="JavaScript"> <!-- if ((navigator.appName == "Microsoft Internet Explorer")&&(navigator.platform != "MacPPC")) { document.write("<OBJECT ID=\"VaCtrl\" WIDTH=362 HEIGHT=306"); document.write(" CLASSID=CLSID:A93B47FD-9BF6-4DA8-97FC-9270B9D64A6C"); document.write(" CODEBASE=\"http://24.45.76.223:5004/plugin/h263ctrl.cab#version=1,7,0,5\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"Url\" VALUE=\"http://24.45.76.223:5004/cgi-bin/video.vam\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"VSize\" VALUE=\"SIF\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"RemoteIP\" VALUE=\"24.45.76.223:5004\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"RemotePort\" VALUE=\"5001\">"); document.write("</OBJECT>"); } //--> </script>





    For the DCS-2000/2100+:

    <script language="JavaScript"> <!-- if ((navigator.appName == "Microsoft Internet Explorer")&&(navigator.platform != "MacPPC")) { document.write("<OBJECT ID=\"VACtrl\" WIDTH=330 HEIGHT=270"); document.write(" CLASSID=CLSID:A93B47FD-9BF6-4DA8-97FC-9270B9D64A6C"); document.write(" CODEBASE=\"http://24.45.76.223:202/plugin/h263ctrl.cab#version=1,7,0,1\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"Url\" VALUE=\"http://24.45.76.223:202/cgi-bin/video.vam\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"VSize\" VALUE=\"CMS\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"RemoteIP\" VALUE=\"http://24.45.76.223:202-899372864\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"RemotePort\" VALUE=\"5004\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"DisplayTimeFormat\" VALUE=\"1\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"DigitalZoomEdit\" VALUE=\"false\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"Language\" VALUE=\"EN\">"); document.write("</OBJECT>"); } //--> </script>
    Please understand that this is not a supported feature of the camera, and beyond providing this code, D-Link can not help design a custom webpage.
    Model DCS-2000, DCS-2100, DCS-2100+, DCS-2100G, DCS-2120, DCS-3220, DCS-3220G, DCS-5300, DCS-5300G, DCS-5300W, DCS-6620, DCS-6620G / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question Why am I getting an Invalid Password error in IP Surveillance?
    Answer There are two main reasons why a user would get an Invalid Password error in IP Surveillance. They are:

    1. Entering an incorrect password. Confirm that you are entering the correct password; it is case sensitive.

    2. Make sure you are using Admin as the user name. Other usernames will not allow you to log in with full (or possibly any) access and do not share the same password as your admin account.
    Model DCS-2000, DCS-3220, DCS-5300, DCS-6620
    Question What is the IP Rating of my outdoor storage enclosure?
    Answer The DCS-50, DCS-60, and DCS-70 all have an IP rating of IP66.

    The IP stands for Ingress Protection The rating’s first digit refers to the Ingress Protection against solid objects and the second digit refers to the Ingress Protection against liquids.

    Below is a breakdown of what each number means:

    Solid Objects (IP6*):
    0. No Protection.
    1. Protected against solid objects greater than 50 mm.
    2. Protected against solid objects greater than 12 mm.
    3. Protected against solid objects greater than 2.5 mm.
    4. Protected against solid objects greater than 1.0 mm.
    5. Protected against dust - limited ingress (no harmful deposits).
    6. Dust-tight (no dust can get in).

    Liquids (IP*6):
    0. No protection.
    1. Protected against dripping water.
    2. Protected against dripping water when tilted up to 15š.
    3. Protected against spraying water.
    4. Protected against splashing water.
    5. Protected against low pressure water streams.
    6. Protected against heavy water streams.
    7. Protected against the effects of temporary immersion between 15cm and 1m.
    8. Protected against submersion.
    Model DCS-2100 / DCS-2100G / DCS-2120 / DCS-3420 / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5220 / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300G_revB / DCS-5300W / DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G
    Question How do I record motion using IP surveillance?
    Answer To schedule video recording with motion detection, you must first enable this feature on the Internet camera. This can serve as a security device by recording only when motion is detected. The camera can have up to 3 motion detection windows activated at any given time.

    Web-based Configuration

    First, setup motion detection windows in the web-based configuration of the camera.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the camera in the address bar. Press Enter.

    Step 2 Click Configuration on the left.



    Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Motion Detection on the left.



    Step 4 Check the Enable Motion Detection checkbox.

    Step 5 Click New to create a window to monitor. A small window will appear on the main screen. Move this window to the area you wish to monitor.

    Step 6 Below Window Name enter a name for the motion detection window. Adjust the Sensitivity and Percentage for the new window.

    • Adjusting the Percentage allows you to require a certain amount of the screen to be filled with motion before an action will be triggered.
    • Adjusting the Sensitivity allows you to require a certain amount of motion before an action will be triggered.


    Step 7 Click Save to apply the new settings.

    Step 8 Repeat Step 3-4 if you plan to have more than one window enabled for motion detection.

    IP surveillance Configuration

    Once you have saved your settings in the web-based configuration of the camera you will need to enable the newly created windows in IP surveillance.

    Step 1 Go to Start > Programs > Dlink > IP surveillance Software > Monitor.

    Step 2 Enter the username and password. Click OK

    Step 3 Click Configurations (represented by the hammer, wrench, and screwdriver).



    Step 4 Select Scheduler.



    Step 5 Make sure that Disable recording schedule for this channel is unchecked.



    Step 6 In the Primary Schedule select Once (for one time recording) or Event Mode (for recording events) using the radio buttons.

    For example: If you would like to record events every day during a certain time frame, click on the beginning time and then drag your mouse to the ending time. Schedule recording can be configured by minutes, hours, days, weeks, or months.



    Step 7 If you are going to record using motion detected select Event Mode using the radio buttons and then select the Motion Detection Window you would like to record from using the checkboxes.

    Note: You must first create motion detection windows inside the web configuration page of the camera. Remember, the motion detection window names are arranged in the order that they were created.



    Step 8 If you want to continuously record during a set time schedule select Continuous Mode using the radio buttons.



    If you do not want to perform an all-time secondary schedule then click Save. You must do a Save As first in order to load the schedule again in the event IP surveillance is accidentally shut down.

    Step 9 If you would like to record outside the primary schedule select Event Mode or Continuous Mode using the radio buttons under Secondary Schedule.



    Step 10 Select Continuous Mode using the radio buttons to continously record outside the primary schedule.



    Step 11 Click Save and then click Close.

    To save any settings for later use click Save As and then click Save.



    Step 12 Click Configurations and select Camera Configuration.



    Step 13 Highlight the camera you wish to create a recording folder for. Under Recording Settings create a name for your recordings. This will be the name of the folder that your recordings will be saved to. Click Save.



    Step 14 Click OK.



    Step 15 Right-click the IP surveillance icon in the system tray (lower right-hand area of the screen) and select Playback to launch the Playback software.



    Step 16 Click Location using the drop-down list and select camera you would like to playback recording. If there is not a recording for that location you will receive a message stating that there isn’t any data available.



    Step 17 Select the Playback Method that you would like to use to review the recording.

    • Event Preview - Preview what motion detection has been recorded.



    • Time Period - Preview by specifying Period Start Time and Period End Time.



    • Full Range - View all recordings.

    Model DCS-2100 / DCS-2100G / DCS-2120 / DCS-3420 / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300G_revB / DCS-5300W / DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G
    Question How can I email snapshots based on motion from my camera?
    Answer Some SMTP servers will require various forms of authentication. One form is to authenticate based upon the sender’s e-mail address. This is the same as the Return Address. Therefore, it would be best to change the Return e-mail address to an address that matches the SMTP server’s domain. Another form of authentication is a user name and password.

    Step 1 Log into your camera and click on Configuration. Go to Advanced > Mail & FTP and fill out the SMTP information.

    • SMTP (mail) server 1 = address of the DESTINATION SMTP server (SMTP server that hosts the destination address). Example – smtp.west.cox.net
    • SMTP login name 1 = user name of a valid account on SMTP server
    • SMTP password 1 = password of the valid user name on SMTP server
    • Recipient e-mail address = destination e-mail address.
    • Sender e-mail address = who is sending the e-mail.
    Please note that SMTP #2 is for backup purposes. If the first address fails, the second will take over. Return e-mail address = e-mail address that will be notified in the event of a failed to send. If you do not want to enter a return e-mail address, put a fake address in this field. You MUST enter a valid e-mail address format (user@mymail.com) or the pictures will not send.

    In order for the SMTP authentication to work, the DNS fields must be from your ISP, not the routerīs IP address.



    Step 2 Go to Tools > Applications.

    Step 3 Set desired schedule for recording; ex. All the time except for the above schedule

    Step 4 Select Event Operation.

    Step 5 Under Trigger Condition select which window you want to Detect motion in: the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd motion detection boxes depending on how many you created from the motion detection screen.

    Step 6 Under Trigger Action select the box next to Upload snapshots while motion detected.

    Step 7 Select Send snapshots by e-mail.



    Step 8 Click Apply.
    Model DCS-2100 / DCS-2100G / DCS-2120 / DCS-3420 / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300W / DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my camera?
    Answer Download the latest firmware and Installation Wizard software.

    Click here to download the Installation Wizard and firmware

    Step 1 Launch the Installation Wizard software. The Install Wizard will search for cameras connected to your network.



    Step 2 Select the camera(s) you want to upgrade and then click Upgrade.

    Note: You can upgrade unlimited cameras at the same time provided that theyīre all the same model number.



    Step 3 You will get a message regarding the IP address of the camera. Click OK.



    Step 4 If you changed the HTTP port or administrator password, you will be prompted to input this information. Click Retry.



    Step 5 Navigate to the folder you downloaded the firmware to and then highlight the firmware file. Click Upgrade.

    Step 6 You will see the upgrade progress. It is important that you do not power cycle your camera during this process. The camera will reboot itself once the firmware upgrade is complete.



    Step 7 Click Done when firmware update is complete.

    Model DCS-2100+
    Question How do I setup my DCS-2100+?
    Answer Step 1 If you are connecting the DCS-2100+ to a wired network connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port located on the back of the DCS-2100+ and connect the other end to a networking device such as a router or switch.



    If you are connecting the DCS-2100+ to a wireless network connect the two antennas to the back of the DCS-2100+.



    Step 2 Attach the external power supply to the DC power input connector located on the back on the DCS-2100+ labeled 12V DC and connect the other end to a wall outlet.



    When you have a proper connection, the LED will turn from red to green. The light may cycle on and off and your computer may show an intermittent loss of connectivity. This is normal until you have configured your Internet Camera.

    Step 3 Use the Install Wizard to detect the camera.

    Click here for help using the Installation Wizard.
    Model DCS-2100+ / DCS-2000 / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300W / DCS-5300G / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question Why am I getting a DirectDraw error when launching IP surveillance?
    Answer If you get the following error after logging into IP Surveillance, click Yes to continue running GDI mode.



    GDI (Graphics Display Interface) is the standard graphics function provided by Windows. Use of these functions allows Windows to control how graphics are displayed on the screen.

    DirectDraw is a video memory manager. Your problem may be a video card or driver issue. Go to START > RUN and type in DXDIAG. This will run the DirectX diagnostics. The problem may be that your video card does not support DirectDraw. If this is the case, go to the manufacturerīs website and see if there are updates for your video card. If none are available, you might want to consider purchasing a new video card.
    Model DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300W / DCS-2000 / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question Why does the IP addresses that I have manually configured on my DCS-2000, 3220, and DCS-5300 series camera reset each time that the camera reboots?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DCS-2000, DCS-2100+, DCS-3220, DCS-3220G, DCS-5300, DCS-5300G, and DCS-5300W cameras.

    By default the camera is set to reset any IP addresses that you have configured manually to factory default values. To change this do the following:

    Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration of the camera.

    Step 2 Click Configuration to the left.

    Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Network to the left.



    Step 4 Uncheck the Reset IP address at next boot check box.

    Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
    Model DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300W / DCS-2000 / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question How do I view the activity log of my DCS-2100+ and DCS-5300 series camera?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DCS-2000, DCS-2100+, DCS-5300, DCS-5300G, and DCS-5300W cameras.

    Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration of the camera.

    Step 2 Click Configuration on the left.

    Step 3 Click the Status tab and then click Log on the left.

    Model DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300W / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question How do I turn off the LED indicator on my DCS-2100+ and DCS-5300 series camera?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DCS-2100+, DCS-5300, DCS-5300G, and DCS-5300W cameras.

    Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration of the camera.

    Step 2 Click Configuration to the left.

    Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click System to the left.



    Step 4 Check Turn off the LED indicator using the check box.

    Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
    Model DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300W / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question How do I configure my DCS-2000 and DCS-5300 series cameras to upload snapshots to an FTP server?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DCS-2000, DCS-2100+, DCS-5300, DCS-5300G, and DCS-5300W cameras.

    Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration of the camera.

    Step 2 Click on Configuration to the left.

    Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Network to the left.



    Step 4 Enter the FTP port number (default is 21) in the field next to Local FTP server port. Enter the URL (i.e. ftp.myftpserver.com) or IP address of the FTP server in the field next to 1st FTP server. Enter your user name and password in the fields next to 1st FTP user name and 1st FTP password. Enter the folder to upload files to in the field next to 1st FTP remote folder. To upload files to the root folder, enter /.

    Step 5 Select the check box next to Primary FTP passive mode if you are behind a router protected by a firewall.

    Repeat Steps 4-5 for 2nd FTP server if applicable.

    Step 6 Click Apply then click Continue to save the new settings.

    Step 7 Click the Tools tab then click Applications to the left.



    Step 8 To upload to the FTP server(s) on a weekly schedule select the days that you want to upload snapshots by selecting the check boxes next to the corresponding days under the Weekly Schedule section. Also, enter a starting and ending time to start and stop uploading snapshots.

    To upload snapshots every x minutes select the Sequential operation checkbox and enter the frequency converted to seconds that you would like snapshots uploaded to the FTP server(s).

    Step 9 Select Send snapshots by FTP using the radio buttons. Click the FTP put snapshots with date and time suffix check box to append the date and time that the snapshot was taken to the name of the file.

    Step 10 Click Apply then click Continue to save the new settings.
    Model DCS-2100+ / DCS-5300W
    Question Why canīt my DCS-2100+ or DCS-5300W camera connect to an 802.11g router (via wireless)?
    Answer The DCS-2100+ and DCS-5300W are set to 22Mbps by default, which is proprietary to D-Link AirPlus wireless products.

    We recommend locking down the TX rate to 11Mbps.

    Model DCS-2120
    Question How do I open Virtual Server Ports to Enable Remote Image Viewing?
    Answer The firewall security features built into the DI-624 router prevent users from accessing the video from the DCS-2120 over the Internet. The router connects to the Internet over a series of numbered ports. The ports normally used by the DCS-2120 are blocked from access over the Internet. Therefore, these ports need to be made accessible over the Internet. This is accomplished using the Virtual Server function on the DI-624 router. The Virtual Server ports used by the camera must be opened through the router for remote access to your camera. Virtual Server is accessed by clicking on the Advanced tab of the router screen.

    Follow these steps to configure your router’s Virtual Server settings:

    **In this example, we are using the DI-624. The Virtual Server interface may differ depending on your router**.

    Follow these steps to configure the Virtual Server settings of the DI-624:

    Step 1 Open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

    Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then the Virtual Server button on the left.

    Step 3 Click Enabled.

    Step 4 Enter a different name for each entry.

    Step 5 Enter your camera’s local IP Address Private IP field.



    Step 6: Select TCP for HTTP port and both (TCP and UDP) for RTSP port.

    Step 7 If you are using the default camera port settings, enter 80 into the Public and Private Port section, click Apply.

    Step 8 Scheduling should be set to Always so that the camera images can be accessed at any time.

    Repeat the above steps adding the port 554 to both the Public and Private Port sections. A check mark appearing before the entry name will indicate that the ports are enabled.

    Important: Some ISPs block access to port 80 and other commonly used Internet ports to conserve bandwidth. Check with your ISP so that you can open the appropriate ports accordingly. If your ISP does not pass traffic on port 80, you will need to change the port the camera uses from 80 to something else, such as 800. Not all routers are the same, so refer to your user manual for specific instructions on how to open ports.

    Enter valid ports in the Virtual Server section of your router. Please make sure to check the box next to the camera name on the Virtual Server List to enable your settings.

    Model DCS-2120 / DCS-5220
    Question How do i view my 3G camera, on my mobile phone, using RealPlayer?
    Answer
    Model DCS-2120 / DCS-5220
    Question How do I view my G3 camera on my modile phone using PVPlayer?
    Answer
    Model DCS-2120 / DCS-5220
    Question What Phones have 3G Compatible Players that will stream video from the DCS-2120 and DCS-5220?
    Answer Brand: Nokia
    Player used: RealPlayer
    N70
    N80
    6630
    6680
    9500
    9300
    9300i
    E61

    Brand: Sony Ericsson
    Player used: SE Built-in
    K750i
    W550i
    W810i
    P810i
    V600i

    Brand: Motorola
    Player used: Motorola Built-in
    Motorola V3X

    Brand: Pocket PC
    Player used: Platform 4 Philips
    02 XDA II Mini
    Dopod 818
    Dopod 818 pro

    Note: All these phones are loaded with RTSP + 3GPP player however any phone with a RTSP + 3GPP player should stream video from the DCS-2120 and DCS-5220
    Model DCS-30 / DCS-40
    Question Does the DCS-30 or the DCS-40 meet the NEMA enclosure ratings?
    Answer No, there is no NEMA certification for the DCS-30 or DCS-40.

    For more information on NEMA, please visit http://www.nema.org/.
    Model DCS-3220
    Question How do I view the network infomation about my DCS-3220?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DCS-3220 in the address bar. Press Enter.

    Step 2 Enter your username and password. Click OK.

    Step 3 Click the Status Tab and then click Device Info to the left.

    You can view the following information about your camera:

    • Firmware Version
    • MAC Address
    • IP Address
    • Subnet Mask
    • Default Gateway
    • Primary DNS Server
    • Secondary DNS Server
    Model DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G
    Question How do I configure the audio settings on my DCS-3220/DCS-3220G?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web broser and type the IP address of the DCS-3220/DCS-3220G in the address bar. Press Enter.

    Step 2 Enter your username and password. Click OK.

    Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Audio to the left.

    Step 4 Choose one of the following transmission modes using the radio buttons:

    • Full-duplex - Talk and listen simultaneously
    • Half-duplex - Talk or listen, but not at the same time
    • Simplex - Talk only
    • Simplex - Listen only
    • Disable - Disable audio
    If you are experiencing problems with audio (i.e. audio is choppy), check Improve audio quality in low bandwidth environment using the check box.

    Model DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G
    Question How do I view the event log of my DCS-3220/DCS-3220G?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DCS-3220/DCS-3220G in the address bar. Press Enter.

    Step 2 Enter your username and password. Click OK.

    Step 3 Click the Status tab and then click Log to the left.

    Model DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G
    Question How do I reset my DCS-3220/DCS-3220G to the factory default settings?
    Answer If you are not able to login to the DCS-3220/DCS-3220G or have forgot the password, you may reset the camera by doing the following:

    Step 1 With the unit on, place a paper clip into the hole on the back on the unit labeled Reset.

    Step 2 Hold the paper clip down for 10 seconds and release.

    Note: Do not repower unit during this procedure.

    Step 3 The unit will reboot on its own. Once the LAN/WLAN light stops blinking, the unit is reset.



    Note: Resetting the camera does not reset the firmware to an earlier version. It will change all settings back to factory defaults.


    If you are able to login to the camera, you can reset it using the web-based configuration.

    Step 1 Open a web-browser and type the IP address of the DCS-3220/DCS-3220G in the address bar. Press Enter.

    Step 2 Enter your username and password. Click OK.

    Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Default to the left.

    Step 4 Click Apply.

    Note: Do not repower unit during this procedure.



    Step 5 The unit will reboot on its own. Once the LAN/WLAN light stops blinking, the unit is reset.

    Note: Resetting the camera does not reset the firmware to an earlier version. It will change all settings back to factory defaults.
    Model DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G
    Question How do I change the administrative password of my DCS-3220/DCS-3220G?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DCS-3220/DCS-3220G in the address bar. Press Enter.

    Step 2 Enter you username and password. Click OK.

    Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Admin to the left.

    Step 4 Next to New Password enter the new password. Re-type the new password next to Confirm Password.



    Step 5 Click Save to apply the new password.

    Note: The username admin cannot be changed. Also, after saving the new password you will be prompted to log into the camera.
    Model DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G
    Question How do I view the streaming video from my DCS-3220/DCS-3220G on my webpage?
    Answer Use the below example code to view the streaming video from your DCS-3220/DCS-3220G on your webpage. If the camera is behind a NAT device such as a router, the IP must be edited to reflect the public address of the router. In this example the public IP address of the router is 24.45.76.223 and the port used to access the camera publicly is 888. You will also need to provide a username and password for the remote connection by adding username:password@ infront of the ip address of the Url Value as shown below.

    <script language="JavaScript"> <!-- if ((navigator.appName == "Microsoft Internet Explorer")&&(navigator.platform != "MacPPC")) { document.write("<OBJECT ID=\"VAtCtrl\" WIDTH=362 HEIGHT=310"); document.write(" CLASSID=CLSID:210D0CBC-8B17-48D1-B294-1A338DD2EB3A"); document.write(" CODEBASE=\"http://24.45.76.223:888/VatDec.cab#version=1,0,0,13\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"VSize\" VALUE=\"SIF\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"Language\" VALUE=\"EN\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"ClickEventHandler\" VALUE=0>"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"DigitalZoomEnableChk\" VALUE=\"false\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"DisplayTimeFormat\" VALUE=\"1\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"Deblocking\" VALUE=\"true\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"Url\" VALUE=\"http://admin:password@24.45.76.223:888/cgi-bin/control.cgi\">"); document.write("</OBJECT>"); } //--> </script>
    Please understand that this is not a supported feature of the camera, and beyond providing this code, D-Link can not help design a custom webpage.
    Model DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G
    Question How do I remotely view the DCS-3220 or DCS-3220G series cameras that are behind a router or gateway?
    Answer For each camera that resides behind a router or gateway, three ports must be forwarded by the router to obtain both audio and video. If audio is not desired, only the HTTP port will need to be forwarded.

    The three default ports are:
    • 80 (TCP) HTTP Port (allows access to web-configuration and transmits video if other ports are not forwarded)
    • 5002 (UDP) Audio Channel Port (transmits synchronized audio)
    • 5003 (UDP) Video Channel Port (transmits synchronized video)
    These port numbers will need to be changed in the camera configuration on each additional camera that is added behind the router. Port numbers can be changed from the Advanced > Network screen.



    Practical Example: Three DCS-3220 cameras are behind a DI-624. The router has a public IP address (WAN) of 63.116.231.25 and an internal (LAN) IP address of 192.168.100.1.

    Camera 1 IP address: 192.168.100.207 Ports: 80, 5002 and 5003
    Camera 2 IP address: 192.168.100.208 Ports: 81, 6002 and 6003

    Each set of three ports must be forwarded to the respective IP address. Set-up for Camera 1 inside a DI-624īs configuration is shown below:





    This will need to be done for each camera and their respective ports.

    To contact these cameras from a remote location (across the Internet), use the Public IP address (WAN) of the router along with the appropriate web port. Using the above example:

    To remotely contact camera 1 with Internet Explorer, enter http://63.116.231.25:80
    To remotely contact camera 2 with Internet Explorer, enter http://63.116.231.25:81
    Model DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G
    Question How much space does the DCS-3220/DCS-3220G take up when recording?
    Answer File size depends on how the camera is configured for both video resolution and frame rate. It also varies with how many cameras you are recording and/or streaming.

    Step 1 Go to Advanced > Video.

    Step 2 Configure the Video Settings:

  • Color - You can choose the option of either color or monochrome video display.
  • Size - There are three selections to choose from. It is display out by the resolution of the screen from the camera. 176x120/176x144, 352x240/352x288 and 704x480/704x576 are three options to choose from.
  • Maximum frame rate - This limits the maximum refresh frame rate, which can be combined with the "Video quality control" to optimize the bandwidth utilization and video quality. If you want to fix the bandwidth utilization, regardless of the video quality, choose "Fix bit rate" and select the desired bandwidth. MPEG4 video are composed of I frames and P frames as the following sequence:

    IPPPPPIPPPPPIPPPPĄK

  • Key frame interval - Determines how many repeated P frames will appear after one I frame. Large "Key frame interval" can reduce the bit rate, but cause image to be corrupted longer if there are packet loss while transmitting. The video quality may be poor due to the sending of maximum frame rate within the limited bandwidth when images are moving rapidly. Consequently, to ensure detailed video quality (quantization rate) regardless of the network, it will utilize more bandwidth to send the maximal frames when images change drastically.
  • Video quality control - These settings are used to optimize your camera performance with your available bandwidth.
  • Fix bit rate - Select a fixed bandwidth for your camera operation. This option allows you to select custom frame rate to suit his bandwidth and storage space. Below is a typical file size after 1 minute of recording at 30fps (frames per second).

    Note: These are only average measurements, your file size may differ due to lighting, b/w or color setting, and frame rate.

    Fixed Bit Rate 64Kbps 128Kbps 256Kbps 384Kbps 512Kbps 768Kbps 1000Kbps 1200Kbps
    File Size 562Kb 1.03MB 2.01MB 2.39MB 2.45MB 2.48MB 2.55MB 2.57MB

  • Fix quality - Selecting fixed quality will roughly select your image quality and will not be as accurate as setting by bit rate. This setting is easier to use for those where image quality does not have to be precise.

    Medium Standard Good Detailed Excellent
    696Kb 540Kb 762Kb 623Kb 880Kb
    • Model DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G
    Question How do I setup my DCS-3220 series camera?
    Answer Step 1 Connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port located on the back of the camera and connect it to a networking device such as a router or switch.



    If you are connecting the DCS-3220G to a wireless network connect the antennas to the back of the unit.

    Step 2 Attach the external power supply to the DC power input connector located on the back on the camera labeled 12V DC and connect the other end to a wall outlet.



    When you have a proper connection, the LED will change from red to green. If you are directly connected to the camera via a crossover cable, the light may cycle on and off and your computer may show an intermittent loss of connectivity. This will stop once you have configured the camera from your computer.

    Step 3 Use the Install Wizard to detect the camera.

    Click here for help using the Installation Wizard.
    Model DCS-3220G
    Question Why does my DCS-3220G have connectivity problems with my D-Link Access Point?
    Answer Currently, the following Access Points will not work the DCS-3220G. There is no ETA on if and when there will be a fix for this. At this time it is not known if its the camera or the AP.

    Access Points Firmware
    DWL-2000AP H/W: B2 2.06
    DWL-2100AP H/W: A1 1.03/2.00
    DWL-2210AP H/W: A1 1.0.2.8
    DWL-2200AP H/W: A1 1.00
    Model DCS-3420
    Question How do I reset my DCS-3420 to the factory default settings?
    Answer If you are not able to login to the DCS-3420 or have forgot the password, you may reset the camera by doing the following:

    Step 1 With the unit on, place a paper clip into the hole on the back on the unit labeled Reset.

    Step 2 Hold the paper clip down for 10 seconds and release.

    Note: Do not repower unit during this procedure.

    Step 3 The unit will reboot on its own. Once the LAN/WLAN light stops blinking, the unit is reset.

    Note: Resetting the camera does not reset the firmware to an earlier version. It will change all settings back to factory defaults.


    If you are able to login to the camera, you can reset it using the web-based configuration.

    Step 1 Open a web-browser and type the IP address of the DCS-3420 in the address bar. Press Enter.

    Step 2 Enter your username and password. Click OK.

    Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Default to the left.

    Step 4 Click Apply.

    Note: Do not repower unit during this procedure.

    Step 5 The unit will reboot on its own. Once the LAN/WLAN light stops blinking, the unit is reset.

    Note: Resetting the camera does not reset the firmware to an earlier version. It will change all settings back to factory defaults.
    Model DCS-5220
    Question How do I open Virtual Server Ports to Enable Remote Image Viewing?
    Answer The firewall security features built into the router prevent users from accessing the video from the DCS-5220 over the Internet. The router connects to the Internet over a series of numbered ports. The ports normally used by the DCS-5220 are blocked from access over the Internet. Therefore, these ports need to be made accessible over the Internet. This is accomplished using the Virtual Server function on the router. The Virtual Server ports used by the camera must be opened through the router for remote access to your camera.

    **In this example, we are using the DI-624. The Virtual Server interface may differ depending on your router**.

    Follow these steps to configure the Virtual Server settings of the DI-624:

    Step 1 Open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

    Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then the Virtual Server button on the left.



    Step 3 Click Enabled.

    Step 4 Enter a different name for each entry.

    Step 5 Enter your camera’s local IP Address in the Private IP field.



    Step 6 Select TCP for HTTP port, both (TCP and UDP) for RTSP and both (TCP and UDP) for 5556 - 5559 ports.

    Step 7 If you are using the default camera port settings, enter 80 into the Public and Private Port section, click Apply.

    Step 8 Scheduling should be set to Always so that the camera images can be accessed at any time.

    Repeat the above steps adding the port 554 to both the Public and Private Port sections. A check mark appearing before the entry name will indicate that the ports are enabled.

    Important: Some ISPs block access to port 80 and other commonly used Internet ports to conserve bandwidth. Check with your ISP so that you can open the appropriate ports accordingly. If your ISP does not pass traffic on port 80, you will need to change the port the camera uses from 80 to something else, such as 800. Not all routers are the same, so refer to your user manual for specific instructions on how to open ports.

    Enter valid ports in the Virtual Server section of your router. Please make sure to check the box next to the camera name on the Virtual Server List to enable your settings.

    Model DCS-5220 / DCS-900 / DCS-900_revB / DCS-900W / DCS-950 / DCS-950G / DCS-G900 / DCS-1110 / DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W
    Question Why does a series of broad vertical white lines appear throughout the image?
    Answer It could be that the CMOS sensor has become overloaded when it has been exposed to bright lights such as direct exposure to sunlight or halogen lights.

    Reposition the Internet Camera into a more shaded area immediately, as prolonged exposure to bright lights will damage the CMOS sensor.
    Model DCS-5300
    Question When is the maximum number of characters allowed for the FTP username?
    Answer The maximum characters allowed for the username that is setup when configuring the FTP server is 14.
    Model DCS-5300 / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question How much space does the DCS-5300/DCS-5300W/DCS-5300G take up when recording?
    Answer File size depends on how the camera is configured for both video resolution and frame rate. It also varies with how many cameras you are recording and/or streaming.

    Step 1 Go to Advanced > Audio/Video.

    Step 2 Configure the Video Settings:

    • Text on video - Text entered will be displayed in the black bar above the video window with a timestamp set in the date and time section.
    • Color - You can choose the option of either color or monochrome video display.
    • Size - Sets video display options to half (176 x 112 NTSC or 176 x 144 PAL), half x 2 (176 x 112 NTSC or 176 x 144 PAL same pixels but zoomed in so image quality is inferior to the regular half), and normal (352 x 240NTSC or 352 x 288 PAL).
    • Maximum frame rate Settings of the rate at which the video image is refreshed. Maximum frame rate depends on your network bandwidth.
    • Video quality control These settings are used to optimize your camera performance with your available bandwidth.
    • Fixed bit rate - Select a fixed bandwidth for your camera operation. This option allows you to select custom frame rate to suit his bandwidth and storage space. Below is a typical file size after 1 minute of recording at 30fpm (frames per second).

      Note: These are only average measurements, your file size may differ due to lighting, b/w or color setting, and frame rate.

      Fixed Bit Rate 64Kbps 128Kbps 256Kbps 384Kbps 512Kbps 768Kbps 1000Kbps 1200Kbps
      File Size 496KB 1.01MB 2.04MB 2.91MB 3.81MB 5.01MB 5.92MB 7.09MB


    • Fixed quality - Selecting fixed quality will roughly select your image quality and will not be as accurate as setting by bit rate. This setting is easier to use for those where image quality does not have to be precise.

      Medium Standard Good Detailed Excellent
      771Kb 789Kb 982Kb 1.37MB 3.98MB
    Model DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300W / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question How do I use the remote control on my DCS-5300 series camera?
    Answer Included with the DCS-5300 is an infrared remote control. You have the option of controlling the camera via the Pan/Tilt Controls using the IP surveillance software, Internet Explorer, or via the infrared remote. To use the remote, make sure that IR Control is enabled on the Camera Control page in the Configuration Menu under Advanced.



    Arrows - Use the Up, Down, Left and Right arrows to tilt/navigate the camera lens.

    Home - Returns the camera lens to the set home position.

    Auto-Patrol - Enables the Auto-Patrol function.

    Auto-Pan - Pans the camera one full cycle.

    Center - Centers the camera lens.

    Stop - Stops the movement of the camera during pan.
    Model DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300W / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question How do I setup my DCS-5300 series camera?
    Answer Step 1 Connect an Ethernet cable to the Ethernet port located on the back of the camera and connect it to a networking device such as a router or switch.



    If you are connecting the DCS-5300G/W to a wireless network connect the antenna to the back of the unit.

    Step 2 Attach the external power supply to the DC power input connector located on the back on the camera labeled 12V DC and connect the other end to a wall outlet.



    When you have a proper connection, the LED will change from red to green. If you are directly connected to the camera via a crossover cable, the light may cycle on and off and your computer may show an intermittent loss of connectivity. This will stop once you have configured the camera from your computer.

    Step 3 Use the Install Wizard to detect the camera.

    Click here for help using the Installation Wizard.
    Model DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300W / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question How do I reset my DCS-5300 series camera to factory defaults?
    Answer Step 1 Locate the hole on the right side of the camera.



    Step 2 Insert a paper clip into the hole and hold it down until the LED on the front of the camera blinks red and green for two cycles (about 5-7 seconds), and then release.

    The camera is now reset to factory defaults.
    Model DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300W / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question How do I recalibrate the home position to the default center on my DCS-5300 series camera?
    Answer Sometimes you may have to recalibrate the home position to the default center to recover the tolerance cased by some external forces.

    Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration of the camera.

    Step 2 Click Configuration to the left.

    Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Default to the left.



    Step 4 Click Apply below Calibrate.

    IMPORTANT: DO NOT CLICK THE APPLY BUTTON UNDER THE RESTORE FACTORY SETTINGS SECTION. DOING SO WILL SET ALL CAMERA SETTINGS TO FACTORY DEFAULT.
    Model DCS-5300 / DCS-5300W
    Question How do I configure my camera to continuously pan until I want it to stop?
    Answer Unfortunately the DCS-5300/DCS-5300W camera can only pan 270 degrees one time. You can not set a continous pan on either of these cameras.
    Model DCS-5300G / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question How do I view the streaming video from my DCS-5300G on my webpage?
    Answer Use the below example code to view the streaming video from your DCS-5300G on your webpage. If the camera is behind a NAT device such as a router, the IP must be edited to reflect the public address of the router. In this example the public IP address of the router is 24.45.76.223 and the port used to access the camera publicly is 888.

    <script language="JavaScript"> <!-- if ((navigator.appName == "Microsoft Internet Explorer")&&(navigator.platform != "MacPPC")) { document.write("<OBJECT ID=\"VaCtrl\" WIDTH=362 HEIGHT=306"); document.write(" CLASSID=CLSID:A93B47FD-9BF6-4DA8-97FC-9270B9D64A6C"); document.write(" CODEBASE=\"http://24.45.76.223:888/plugin/h263ctrl.cab#version=1,7,0,19\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"Url\" VALUE=\"http://24.45.76.223:888/cgi-bin/video.vam\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"VSize\" VALUE=\"SIF\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"RemoteIP\" VALUE=\"http://24.45.76.223-798709568\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"RemotePort\" VALUE=\"888\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"DisplayTimeFormat\" VALUE=\"1\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"DigitalZoomEnableChk\" VALUE=\"false\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"DigitalZoomEdit\" VALUE=\"true\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"Language\" VALUE=\"EN\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"Stretch\" VALUE=\"1\">"); document.write("</OBJECT>"); } //--> </script>
    Please understand that this is not a supported feature of the camera, and beyond providing this code, D-Link can not help design a custom webpage.
    Model DCS-5300G / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question Can I use WPA wireless security on my DCS-5300G?
    Answer No. This camera support 64 & 128 bit WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) wireless security only.
    Model DCS-5300G / DCS-5300W / DCS-6620G / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question How do I set up my DCS-5300G/W or DCS-6620G camera to connect to my network wirelessly?
    Answer Step 1: Log into the web-based configuration of the camera.

    Step 2: Click on Configuration on the lefthand side.



    Step 3: Click on Network, scroll down to WLAN Configuration, and enter the SSID of the router or access point you want the camera to connect to.



    Note: For best results copy the SSID from the interface of the router and then paste it into the SSID box of the cameras interface.

    Step 4: If you are using encryption on your wireless network, click the check box next to Data encryption. Then enter the Key length, Key format, and Network key in the spaces provided.

    Step 5: Click on Apply to save your settings.

    Step 6: Disconnect the ethernet cable and power cycle the camera.

    When the link light on the camera becomes steady after the reboot, you should be connected wirelessly.
    Model DCS-6620
    Question How do I reset my DCS-6620 to factory defaults?
    Answer Step 1 Locate the hole on the right side of the camera.



    Step 2 Insert a paper clip into the hole and hold it down until the LED on the front of the camera blinks red and green for two cycles (about 5-7 seconds), and then release.

    The camera is now reset to factory defaults.
    Model DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G
    Question How do I view the streaming video from my DCS-6620/DCS-66200G on my webpage?
    Answer Use the below example code to view the streaming video from your DCS-6620/DCS-66200G on your webpage.

    If the camera is behind a NAT device such as a router, the IP must be edited to reflect the public address of the router. In this example the public IP address of the router is 24.45.76.223 and the port used to access the camera publicly is 888.

    You will also need to provide a username and password for the remote connection by adding username:password@ infront of the IP address of the Url Value as shown below.

    <SCRIPT language=JavaScript> <!-- if ((navigator.appName == "Microsoft Internet Explorer")&&(navigator.platform != "MacPPC")) { document.write("<OBJECT ID=\"VAtCtrl\" WIDTH=362 HEIGHT=358 name=\"VAtCtrl\""); document.write(" CLASSID=CLSID:210D0CBC-8B17-48D1-B294-1A338DD2EB3A"); document.write(" CODEBASE=\"http://24.45.76.223:888/VatDec.cab#version=1,0,0,33\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"VSize\" VALUE=\"SIF\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"Language\" VALUE=\"EN\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"Deblocking\" VALUE=\"true\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"DisplayTimeFormat\" VALUE=\"1\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"DigitalZoomEnableChk\" VALUE=\"true\">"); document.write("<PARAM NAME=\"DigitalZoomEdit\" VALUE=\"true\">"); document.write ("<PARAM NAME=\"Url\" VALUE=\"http://admin:password@24.45.76.223:888/cgi-bin/control.cgi\">"); document.write("</OBJECT>"); } //--> </SCRIPT>


    Please understand that this is not a supported feature of the camera, and beyond providing this code, D-Link can not help design a custom webpage.
    Model DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G
    Question What algorithm is used to compress the digital image?
    Answer The Internet Camera utilizes MPEG-4 simple profile or MJPEG Mode image compression technology providing high quality images. MJPEG is a standard for image compression and can be applied to various web browser and application software without the need to install extra software.
    Model DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G
    Question How do I configure Motion Detection on my DCS-6620/DCS-6620G
    Answer Step 1 Log into your camera through the web interface.

    Step 2 Select Configuration on the left.

    Step 3 Click Motion Detection on the left.

    Step 4 Click Enable Motion Detection.

    Step 5 Click New and resize the motion detection window. Click the Window Name box and enter a name. Next, set sensitivity and percentage.



    Step 6 Click Apply.

    Step 7 Go to Tools and then select Applications on the left.

    Step 8 Select your desired schedule.

    Note: If you wish to set the schedule of motion detection for every day, select All the time except for the above schedule.

    Step 9 Click Event Operation.

    Step 10 Select the motion window(s) you would like the event to watch.

    Step 11 Select the trigger action.

    Step 12 Once you have selected the proper trigger action, choose where snapshots will be sent to, Email or FTP.



    Step 13 Click Apply.
    Model DCS-6620 / DCS-6620G
    Question After resetting my DCS-6620/DCS-6620G to defaults, the picture on my screen seems to be having problems adjusting to my environment. How can I adjust this?
    Answer Note: After resetting the DCS-6620/DCS-6620G to default, the Auto Electronic Shutter (AES) is set to Auto. Some environmental lighting may affect the DCS-6620/DCS-6620G to a point where the video is unrecognizable. To fix this the CCD Settings must be changed.

    Step 1: Log in to the web configuration of the DCS-6620/DCS-6620G.

    Step 2: Select Configuration from the left hand menu.

    Step 3: Click CCD on the left hand side.

    Step 4: Using the Auto Electronic Shutter drop down menu, select the appropriate shutter speed. You may need to test different shutter settings for your environment.



    Step 5 Use the references below to help you decide which settings your environment requires you to change.

    Help File References:

    Auto Electronic Shutter (AES) In this mode the AES will be fixed at 1/60 (1/50) second. The default setting of the CCD is in the auto-iris mode. If the shutter is selected to auto, the iris of the CCD will become fixed. Faster shutter speed will allow fast moving objects to be seen more clearly.

    Auto tracking white balance This is helpful if the camera is monitoring outdoor objects. There are 9 levels of white balance that can be adjusted that will help the camera to capture video with correct colors.

    White balance control Selecting this feature will disable the Auto tracking white balance. This is used mostly for monitoring indoor objects. Adjustments are from 3200K-8000K to get the correct colors.

    Auto switch to B/W in low lux mode Selecting this option and the low lux mode will automatically switch video to black and white if the environment became dark such as going from evening to night.

    Enable BLC This is for back light compensation. When object is in front of bright lights it is sometimes difficult to see, selecting this option and adjust sensitivity level can allow object to become clearer to see.

    BLC sens level Adjusting this will allow objects to be seen more clearly by adjusting BLC sensitivity detection.

    BLC area selection A selection window will pop up. The window is divided into 48 squares, select the squares that BLC is required; if no squares are selected there will be no differences in the video.
    Model DCS-6620 /DCS-6620G
    Question How do I upload snapshots to my email or ftp server with my DCS-6620/DCS-6620G?
    Answer
    EMAIL
    NOTE: The DCS-6620/G does not have the option to change SMTP options. You will be unable to connect to an email server that requires an SSL connection.

    Step 1 Log into your camera through the web interface.

    Step 2 Select Configuration on the left.

    Step 3 Scroll down to the SMTP settings area.



    Step 4 Click Apply.

    Step 5 Go to Tools > Applications and make sure Send Snapshots by email is selected.





    FTP


    Step 1 Log into your camera through the web interface.

    Step 2 Select Configuration on the left hand side.

    Step 3 Scroll down to the FTP settings area.



    NOTE: You must set a path in the remote folder text field. If your virtual path is /Videos then you would enter /Videos.

    Step 4 Click Apply.

    Step 5 Go to Tools > Applications and check that Send Snapshots by FTP is selected.

    Model DCS-6620G
    Question Why are there clicking sounds when I view my DCS-6620G remotely?
    Answer Positioning the antennas vertically may cause clicking sounds when viewing the camera remotely. Positioning the antennas horizontally should resolve this.
    Model DCS-6620G / DWL-7700AP
    Question Why does my DCS-6620G not connect to a DWL-7700AP when using WPA-PSK?
    Answer Please make sure the Cipher Type setting on the DWL-7700AP is set to TKIP.

    Model DCS-900 / DCS-900W
    Question How do I setup my DCS-900 series Internet camera?
    Answer Step 1 (DCS-900W only) Locate the antenna included with your DCS-900W and attach it to the antenna connector located on the back of the DCS-900W.



    Step 2 Locate the stand mount on the bottom of the Internet camera and screw on the swivel stand.



    Step 3 Connect the included Ethernet cable to the network cable connector located on the back panel of the Internet camera and attach the other end to your network.



    step 4 Attach the external power supply to the DC power input connector located on the rear panel of the Internet camera and connect the other end to your local power supply.



    Note: Power source is confirmed when the green LED Power Indicator located to the right of the lens on the Internet camera is illuminated.

    Network Connectivity is confirmed when the orange LED Indicator on the Internet camera located below the Power LED is illuminated.
    Model DCS-900 / DCS-900W / DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W
    Question How do I configure the date and time on my DCS-900 and DCS-1000 series camera?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DCS-900, DCS-900W, DCS-1000, and DCS-1000W cameras.

    Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration of the camera.

    Step 2 Click Setup to the left.

    Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Time to the left.



    Step 4 Select one of the below options to configure the date and time:

    • Syncronized with Time Server - To sync with a time server, enter the domain name or IP address of the time server in the field next to IP Address. Select the protocol (NTP or Time) and select your time zone.
    • Set Manually To set the time manually, input the date and time in the Date and Time fields.
    Step 5 Click Apply then Continue to save the settings.
    Model DCS-900 / DCS-900W / DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W
    Question How do I change the administrative username and password on my DCS-900 and DCS-1000 series camera?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DCS-900, DCS-900W, DCS-1000, and DCS-1000W cameras.

    Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration of the camera.

    Step 2 Click Setup.

    Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Admin on the left.



    Step 4 Enter the new administrative username in the field next to Admin ID. Enter and re-type the new password in the password fields.

    Step 5 Click Save to apply the new username/password.

    Note: You will be prompted to login after saving the new username/password.
    Model DCS-900 / DCS-900W / DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W / DCS-1000W_revB
    Question How do I configure Motion Trigger Recording in IPView and IPView Lite?
    Answer Step 1 Open IPView or IPView Lite and double-click the camera you want to configure.



    Step 2 Select the Recording tab and then select Motion Trigger Recording below Recording Options.



    Step 3 Click Sensitivity Setting and then select the sensitivity level.



    Step 4 Click OK.

    Step 5 When motion is detected a red button will appear next to the camera.

    Model DCS-900 / DCS-900W / DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W / DCS-1000W_revB
    Question How do I reset my DCS-900 and DCS-1000 series camera to the factory default settings?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DCS-900, DCS-900W, DCS-1000, and DCS-1000W cameras.

    To perform a reset, please follow steps below:

    Step 1 With the unit on, place a paper clip into the hole on the back on the unit labeled Reset.



    Step 2 Hold paper clip down for 10 seconds and release.

    Note: Do not repower unit during this procedure.

    Step 3 The unit will reboot on its own.

    Resetting the camera does not reset the firmware to an earlier version. It will change all settings back to factory defaults.
    Model DCS-900 / DCS-900W / DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W / DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-3200 / DCS-3220G / DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question What is the Lux Factor for my Internet camera?
    Answer Lux is a unit of illumination equal to one candle intensity or equal to one lumen per square meter.

    Note: Lower LUX value cameras work better in low light.

    DCS-900/DCS-900W
    2.5Lux @ F1.4

    DCS-950/DCS-950G
    0.5 Lux @ F1.4

    DCS-2000/DCS-2100+
    2.5Lux @ F1.4

    DCS-3220/DCS-3220G
    1.0Lux @ F2.0

    DCS-5300/DCS-5300W/DCS-5300G
    1.0Lux @ F2.0

    Model DCS-900 / DCS-900W / DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W / DWL-1000W_revB
    Question How do I setup Dynamic DNS (DDNS) on my DCS-900 and DCS-1000 series camera?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DCS-900, DCS-900W, DCS-1000, and DCS-1000W cameras.

    Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows remote administration of the DCS-900 and DCS-1000 series using a domain name in situations where a static IP address is not available. Each time a new dynamic IP address is pulled, the camera updates the IP address with the DDNS service provider.

    Step 1 Register with one of the following DDNS providers:

    Write down the URL and login information you obtained after registering with one of the above DDNS providers.

    Step 2 Log into the camera.

    Step 3 Click Setup to the left.

    Step 4 Click the Advanced tab then click System to the left.



    Step 5 Click Yes next to Dynamic DNS.

    Step 6 Select the provider that you registered with from the drop-down list next to Service Provider.

    Step 7 Using the information you obtained in Step 1 enter the domain name that you created (i.e. mycamera.dyndns.org) in the field by Host Name. Enter your login information for the account in the Username/Email and Password/Key fields.

    Step 8 Click Apply to save the settings.

    Note: After DDNS is configured, you will access the camera remotely using the domain name. For example, if the domain name that you registered is mycamera.dyndns.org, then you would type mycamera.dyndns.org in the address bar of your web browser to access the camera remotely.
    Model DCS-900_revB
    Question How do I turn off the LED indicator on my DCS-900 revB camera?
    Answer Step 1: Log into the web-based configuration of the camera.

    Step 2: Click on Setup on the lefthand side.

    Step 3: Click on the Advanced tab and then click on System on the lefthand side.



    Step 4: Select Off using the radio buttons next to LED Control.

    Step 5: Click on Apply to save your settings.

    Model DCS-900_revB
    Question How do I change the administrative username and password on my DCS-900 revB camera?
    Answer Step 1: Log into the web-based configuration of the camera.

    Step 2: Click on Setup on the lefthand side.

    Step 3: Click on the Advanced tab and then click on System on the lefthand side.



    Step 4: Enter the administrative username in the field next to Admin ID. Enter and re-type the new password in the Password fields.

    Step 5: Click on Apply to save the new username/password.

    Note: You will be prompted to login after saving the new username/password.
    Model DCS-900_revB
    Question How do I configure my DCS-900 revB camera to be viewed from the Internet when I am behind a router or firewall?
    Answer The following information will allow others to view your DCS-900 revB camera over the Internet if you are using a router or behind a firewall:

    The default port used by the camera the DCS-900 revB is 80.

    If this port is available for use, you DO NOT have to open a second port. You will only need to open Port 80 in your router or firewall.

    Click here to open ports on your D-Link router

    If port 80 is not available (for example, if you are already using port 80 to run a Web server or your ISP blocks access on port 80*) or are using multiple cameras, you MUST open a second port and designate a new Web server port.

    The ports that are opened must be unique for each camera in order to successfully view the images remotely.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type in the IP address of your camera (192.168.0.20).

    Step 2 Click Setup on the left side.

    Step 3 Click Network on the left side.

    Step 4 Click Enable, next to Open Second Port, and type in the port number you want to use.
    You can choose any port number that is not being used.

    Step 5 Click Apply.

    Step 6 You will now need to open the ports (port forward) on your router or firewall.

    Click here to open ports on your D-Link router

    To view a camera from Internet, enter the WAN IP address of the router, followed by a colon (:) and the port number. (For example 67.127.140.331:80)
    Model DCS-900_revB
    Question How do I setup Dynamic DNS (DDNS) on my DCS-900_revB series camera?
    Answer Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows remote administration of the camera using a domain name in situations where a static IP address is not available. Each time a new dynamic IP address is pulled, the camera updates the IP address with the DDNS service provider.

    Step 1 Register with one of the following DDNS providers:

    Write down the URL and login information you obtained after registering with one of the above DDNS providers.

    Step 2 Log into the camera.

    Step 3 Click Setup to the left.

    Step 4 Click the Advanced tab then click Network to the left.



    Step 5 Click Enable next to Dynamic DNS.

    Step 6 Select the provider that you registered with from the drop-down list next to Service Provider.

    Step 7 Using the information you obtained in Step 1, enter the domain name that you created (i.e. mycamera.dyndns.org) in the field by Host Name. Enter your login information for the account in the Username/Email and Password/Key fields.

    Step 8 Click Apply to save the settings.

    Note: After DDNS is configured, you will access the camera remotely using the domain name. For example, if the domain name that you registered is mycamera.dyndns.org, then you would type mycamera.dyndns.org in the address bar of your web browser to access the camera remotely.
    Model DCS-900_revB / DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W / DCS-900 / DCS-900W / DCS-1000W_revB
    Question How do I place the streaming video from the DCS-900 and DCS-1000 series cameras onto my own webpage?
    Answer Step 1 Log into the web based configuration of the camera by typing in the IP address of the camera (default:192.168.0.20) in your web browser.

    Step 2 Select the Java option from the menu on the left.



    Step 3 You will see a page with live video feed on it now. Right-click on the page (anywhere in the empty gray areas) and select View Source from the drop down menu. Do not right-click on the video image itself or select source from the toolbar.



    Step 4 Within the source screen, scroll down until you see the applet indicated in the picture below. Select and copy this portion of code.



    Step 5 Paste the applet code into your web page where you would like the video feed to appear.

    If your camera has a direct connection to the internet and has a public ip address, the live video stream will now be viewable from your webpage.


    If your camera is behind a router and has a non-public ip address, you will need to make the following changes.

    Step 1 In the applet code, you will need to change the codebase address (shown below) to the WAN ip address of your router.



    Read here for information on finding the WAN ip address for most D-Link routers

    Step 2 You will need to open ports to your camera in the router. By default these ports are 80 and 8481.

    Read here for information on forwarding these ports on most D-Link routers



    Additionally, some ISPs block port 80. If your camera does not work under this configuration, you may need to change the Web Server Port from its default of 80.

    Read here for information on adding second ports to your DCS camera

    After you add the secondary ports, you will need to modify the applet code once more. Change the portion of the codebase address (shown below) to the new Web Server Port you have set.

    Model DCS-900_revB / DCS-2120 / DCS-1110 / DCS-3420 / DCS-3220 / DCS-3220G / DCS-2000 / DCS-2100+ / DCS-5220 / DCS-5300 / DCS-5300G / DCS-5300W / DCS-1000 / DCS-1000W / DCS-5300G_revB / DCS-1000W_revB / DCS-900 / DCS-950 / DCS-950G / DCS-900W
    Question Is it illegal to record audio/video motion detection with my camera?
    Answer Use of audio or video equipment for recording the image or voice of a person without their knowledge and consent is prohibited in certain states or jurisdictions. Nothing herein represents a warranty or representation that the D-Link product provided herein is suitable for the end-user’s intended use under the applicable laws of his or her state. D-Link disclaims any liability whatsoever for any end-user use of the D-Link product which fails to comply applicable state, local or federal laws.
    Model DCS-900_revB / DCS-5220 / DCS-1110, DCS-900, DCS-900W, DCS-G900, DCS-950, DCS-950G, DCS-1000, DCS-1000W, DCS-2000, DCS-2100, DCS-2100+, DCS-2100G, DCS-2120, DCS-3220, DCS-3220G, DCS-3420, DCS-5300, DCS-5300G, DCS-5300W, DCS-6620, DCS-6620G / DCS-5300G_revB
    Question Which Surveillance software(s) will work with my camera?
    Answer IPView SE software supports:

    DCS-900
    DCS-900W
    DCS-G900
    DCS-950
    DCS-950G
    DCS-1110

    Click here to download IPView SE

    DView Cam software supports:

    Note: This FAQ applies to DView Cam 1.20 and above.

    DCS-900
    DCS-900W
    DCS-G900
    DCS-950
    DCS-950G
    DCS-1000
    DCS-1000W
    DCS-2000
    DCS-2100
    DCS-2100+
    DCS-2100G
    DCS-2120
    DCS-3220
    DCS-3220G
    DCS-3420
    DCS-5220
    DCS-5300
    DCS-5300G
    DCS-5300W
    DCS-6620
    DCS-6620G

    Click here to download DView Cam

    IP Surveillance software supports:

    DCS-1000
    DCS-1000W
    DCS-2000
    DCS-2100
    DCS-2100+
    DCS-2100G
    DCS-2120 (version 3.0 and above)
    DCS-3220
    DCS-3220G
    DCS-3420
    DCS-5220
    DCS-5300
    DCS-5300G
    DCS-5300W
    DCS-6620
    DCS-6620G

    Click here to download IP Surveillance
    Model DCS-950
    Question How do I use the Setup Wizard on my DCS-950?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and log into the web-based configuration of the DCS-950.

    Step 2 Click Wizard to the left.



    Step 3 Click Next.



    Step 4 Select Yes next to PPPoE and enter your username and password if you use PPPoE to authenticate to your ISP. If you are unsure, contact your ISP.

    Step 5 Select Yes next to DDNS and enter your username, password, and domain name if you have a DDNS account.

    If you have a dynamic IP address, DDNS will allow you to connect to your DCS-950 over the Internet by entering a domain name. The camera will update you IP address with your DDNS service provide each time your public IP address is renewed.

    Step 6 Click Next.

    Note: You will be prompted to login to the camera.

    Model DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question How do I take a snapshot with my DCS-950 series Internet camera?
    Answer Step 1 Login to the web-based configuration of your DCS-950/DCS-950G.

    Step 2 Click Snap Shot to the left.



    A window will pop up with the snap shot you just took.



    Step 3 To save the snapshot click File(F) > Save As(A) and navigate to the folder where you wish to save the snap shot to.

    Model DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question How do I reset my DCS-950 series camera to factory defaults?
    Answer Step 1 With the unit on, place a paper clip into the hole on the back on the unit above the word Reset.



    Step 2 Hold the paper clip down for 10 seconds and release.

    Note: Do not repower unit during this procedure.

    Step 3 The unit will reboot on its own.

    Resetting the camera does not reset the firmware to an earlier version. It will change all settings back to factory defaults.
    Model DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DCS-950 / DCS-950G camera?
    Answer Please read before upgrade:
  • Upgrading firmware (in most cases) will reset all the settings to default which means you will lose all your settings (including your password).
  • Do NOT upgrade firmware from a computer with a wireless connection. Use a computer that you can connect to the camera using an ethernet cable. You may damage the camera due to the increased packet loss with a wireless connection.

    Step 1 Download the latest firmware.

    Step 2 Once youīve downloaded the firmware, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape and enter the IP address of your camera (192.168.0.20).

    Step 3 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave the field blank). Click OK to enter the web configuration for the device.

    Step 4 Click on the Tools tab and then the Firmware button on the left side. Click on the Browse button and browse to the .bin file you downloaded in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click Open.

    Step 5 Click Apply. It may take a up to 30 seconds for the upgrade to complete. Click on the Continue button. The firmware is now upgraded.



    • Model DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question How do I setup my DCS-950 series camera?
    Answer Step 1 (DCS-950G only) Locate the antenna included with your DCS-950G and attach it to the antenna connector located on the back of the DCS-950G.



    Step 2 Attach the external power supply to the DC power input connector located on the rear panel of the camera and connect the other end to your local power supply.



    Note: Power source is confirmed when the orange LED power indicator located to the right of the lens on the camera is illuminated.

    Step 3 Connect the included Ethernet cable to the network cable connector located on the back panel of the camera and attach the other end to your network.



    Note: Network Connectivity is confirmed when the green LED indicator on the camera located below the Power LED is illuminated.

    Step 4 If you would like to mount the camera on a wall follow the steps below.

    Note: You need to attach the stand and mounting bracket before mounting the unit to a wall.
    1. Attach the mounting bracket to the base of the camera using the screws provided.
    2. Attach the mounting bracket to the mounting pivot.
    3. Select the stand extension you would like to use (or use both depending on the how far you want the camera mounted from the wall) and attach it to the other end of the mounting pivot.
    4. Attach the wall mount plate to the stand extension. The wall mount plate has three screw holes that will allow you to mount the camera stand to a wall.

    Model DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question How do I install/use the Setup Wizard software with my DCS-950 series camera?
    Answer
    Installation

    Step 1 Insert the installation CD into your CD-ROM drive.

    Step 2 Click Install Software.



    Step 3 Click Installation Wizard.



    Step 4 Click Next.



    Step 5 Read the License Agreement. If you agree click Yes. Otherwise, click No to exit the installation.



    Note: You must agree to the License Agreement in order to install the software.

    Step 6 Click Next.



    Step 7 Click Finish.




    Camera Configuration

    Step 1 Click Start > Programs or All Programs (Windows XP Start Menu) > DCS-950 Series Setup Wizard.

    Step 2 Select your camera (1) and then click Wizard (2).



    Step 3 By default the Admin ID and Password are both admin (all lower case).

    (1) To change the Admin ID select the checkbox next to Change, enter the new ID, and then confirm it.

    (2) To change the Password select the checkbox next to Change, enter the new password, and then confirm it.

    Click Next (3) to continue.



    Step 4 Enter your IP address information (1) and then click Next (2) to continue. If you are unsure, contact your ISP or network administrator.



    Step 5 If you are using the DCS-950, skip to Step 7.

    (1) Next to Wireless select Enabled to enable or Disabled to disable the wireless feature of the DCS-950G and enter your encryption settings.

    Click Next (2) to continue.



    Step 6 Enter you encryption key (1) and then click Next (2).



    Step 7 Review your settings. If you need to make any changes click Back. Otherwise, click Restart to apply and save the changes. This may take a few minutes.



    Note: You will only be able to review the wireless settings if you are using a DCS-950G.

    Step 8 Setup is now complete. Wait until the Link LED on the camera begins to flash and then select your camera (1) and click Link (2) to launch your web browser and connect to the camera.

    Model DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question What is the default password for my DCS-950 series camera?
    Answer The default password for the DCS-950/DCS-950G is admin (all lower case). If you cannot remember the password, you will have to reset the camera.

    Click here for instructions on resetting your DCS-950/DCS-950G.
    Model DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question How do I turn off the audio for my DCS-950 series camera?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DCS-950/DCS-950G in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.20). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click Apply.

    Step 3 Click Audio On on the left side.



    Step 4 When the button switches to Audio Off, the audio will be off.

    Model DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question What is the maximum number of users that can log onto the DCS-950/DCS-950G simultaneously?
    Answer The maximum number of users that can log onto the DCS-950/DCS-950G at the same time is 8. Please keep in mind the overall performance of the transmission speed will slow down when multiple users are logged on.
    Model DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question How do I set up email notification on my DCS-950 series camera?
    Answer Step 1 Enter your username (admin) and your password. Click OK to enter the web-based configuration for the device.

    Step 2 Click on the Tools tab and then the Trigger button on the left side.

    Step 3 Under Send E-Mail select By E-mail.

    Step 4 Select SMTP Login Name and fill out the SMTP information.

    • SMTP Login Name: The user name used to log into your e-mail account (e.g. jdoe or jdoe@yourisp.com depending on your ISP).
    • SMTP Password: The password used to log into your e-mail account. (The password will appear as dots instead of entered characters.)
    • SMTP (Mail) Server: The domain name or IP address of external mail server.
    • Return E-mail address: The return e-mail address to use if the snapshot or system log e-mail fails to send. (This address should be within the SMTP server’s domain for authentication purposes.)
    • Recipient E-mail address: The e-mail address of recipients for snapshots or a system log file.
    • SMTP Port: This is the port number for your SMTP server, the default is 25. If you use ports other than 25 you can change it here.



    Step 5 After you filled in the SMTP information you can test the SMTP information to see if it worked or not. Click on Test. You will see the Test in process window.



    If the e-mail test was successful you will see a Test Status: Success window pop up. Click Close to exit the test window.



    Step 6 Click Apply when done with SMTP information.
    Model DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question How do I remotely view the DCS-950 or DCS-950G series cameras that are behind a router or gateway?
    Answer For each camera that resides behind a router or gateway, three ports must be forwarded by the router to obtain both audio and video.

    The three default ports are:
    • 80 (TCP) HTTP Port (allows access to web-configuration and transmits video if other ports are not forwarded)
    • 5000 (TCP & UDP) Audio Channel Port (transmits synchronized audio)
    • 5001 (TCP & UDP) Video Channel Port (transmits synchronized video)
    These port numbers will need to be changed in the camera configuration on each additional camera that is added behind the router. Port numbers can be changed from the Tools > Port screen.





    Practical Example: Three DCS-950G cameras are behind a DI-624. The router has a public IP address (WAN) of 63.116.231.25 and an internal (LAN) IP address of 192.168.100.1.

    Camera 1 IP address: 192.168.100.210 Ports: 80, 5000 and 5001
    Camera 2 IP address: 192.168.100.208 Ports: 81, 5002 and 5003

    Each set of three ports must be forwarded to the respective IP address. Set-up for Camera 1 inside a DI-624īs configuration is shown below:





    This will need to be done for each camera and their respective ports.

    To contact these cameras from a remote location (across the Internet), use the Public IP address (WAN) of the router along with the appropriate web port. Using the above example:

    To remotely contact camera 1 with Internet Explorer, enter http://63.116.231.25:80
    To remotely contact camera 2 with Internet Explorer, enter http://63.116.231.25:81

    Model DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question How can I repair a video file from my DCS-950/DCS-950G that will not play on my computer?
    Answer If the AVI file you were recording to becomes corrupted or was cut off abruptly during recording, you will need to download AVIRenovator. AVIRenovator will fix the AVI file so that it is viewable again.

    Click here to download AVIRenovator

    Note: AVIRenovator allows you to fix AVI files recorded by D-link DCS-950 series cameras. It is not guaranteed to fix other AVI files which were NOT generated by our products.
    Model DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question When running my network share test on my DCS-950/DCS-950G I receive a Failure message. How do I fix this?
    Answer Note: When writing to a network share with the DCS-950/DCS-950G, Allow network users to change my files must be checked under sharing and security. To enable this please go through the following steps.

    Step 1: Navigate to your share folder. Right click and select Sharing and Security from the drop down menu.



    Step 2: Under the Properties window, verify that Allow network users to change my files is checked and then click OK.



    Step 3: Go back to your DCS-950G Recording tab and click the test button again. Your test should now come up Successful and after applying the page your recording schedule should be started.
    Model DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question How do I enable motion detection on my DCS-950/950G camera?
    Answer Step 1: Log into your camera through the web interface

    Step 2: Select Setup on the left

    Step 3: Click the Tools tab

    Step 4: Select Motion detection on the left

    Step 5: Click the Motion box to enable Motion Detection

    Step 6: Click Zone button and resize the motion detection window. Click the Zone Name box and enter a name. Next, set sensitivity and percentage

    Step 7: Check the Zone boxīs you wish to use for motion detection



    Step 8: Click Save
    Model DCS-950 / DCS-950G
    Question How do I setup recording from the web configuration?
    Answer Note: You must first set up motion detection on the camera.

    Click here for instructions on enabling motion detection.

    Step 1 Log into the camera.

    Step 2 Click Tools from the top.

    Step 3 Click the Recording tab to the left.

    Step 4 Under Remote Recording, click the box next to Upload image to Network share folder.

    Step 5 Next to Path, input the shared folder path. In this example, the address will be \\10.67.5.100\ShareDocs\DCS950



    Step 6 Press the Test button to test the path.

    Step 7 In the Recording method box, set up the desired schedule. You can choose from Always, Schedule, or Smart Recording option



    Step 8 Press the Apply button



    How do I save to a folder anywhere on my PC?

    Step 1: Open a folder and named it to DCS-950 on the C: drive of the PC (any other name can be used as long as it is under 12 characters long)



    Step 2:     Share the folder on the network

    On the sharing menu
    a.     Check the Share this folder on the network
    b.     Check the Allow network users to change my files
    c.     Then click OK



    Notice: The share folder name should not be longer than 12 characters

    Step 3:     In DCS-950 Tools > Recording menu input the share folder path. \\IP address of share folder located PC\folder path. In this case will be \\10.67.5.100\dcs-950

    Step 4:     Press the Test button to see if it successul or fail



    Step 5:     Now in Recording method Select the Always, Schedule, or Smart Recording option

    Step 6:     Press the Apply button

    Step 7:     Now activate the motion detection on the camera

    Success!!
    Model DCS-G900
    Question How do I connect to my DCS-G900 camera wirelessly?
    Answer Step 1: Open the Web configuration page of the camera and go to the Advanced tab and click Wireless on the left.

    Step 2: Click Site Survey.



    Step 3 Choose your SSID from the list and click Select.



    Step 3: If you are using wireless security click your security type below WEP or WPA and enter your preshared key in the space provided.

    WEP



    WPA





    Step 4:     Click Apply at the bottom and allow the settings to apply.

    Step 5:     Unplug the Ethernet cable from the camera and log into the camera.

    Note: If this does not work, power cycle the camera by unplugging the power cable. Wait 5 seconds and plug the power cable back in.
    Model DCS-G900
    Question How do I turn off the LED indicator on my DCS-G900 camera?
    Answer Step 1: Log into the web-based configuration of the camera.

    Step 2: Click on Setup on the lefthand side.

    Step 3: Click on the Advanced tab and then click on System on the lefthand side.



    Step 4: Select Off using the radio buttons next to LED Control.

    Step 5: Click on Apply to save the settings.
    Model DCS-G900
    Question How do I change the administrative username and password on my DCS-G900 camera?
    Answer Step 1: Log into the web-based configuration of the camera.

    Step 2: Click on Setup on the lefthand side.

    Step 3: Click on the Advanced tab and then click on System on the lefthand side.



    Step 4: Enter the administrative username in the field next to Admin ID. Enter and re-type the new password in the Password fields.

    Step 5: Click on Apply to save the new username/password.

    Note: You will be prompted to login after saving the new username/password.
    Model DCS-G900
    Question How do I setup Dynamic DNS (DDNS) on my DCS-G900 camera?
    Answer Dynamic DNS (DDNS) allows remote administration of the DCS-G900 using a domain name in situations where a static IP address is not available. Each time a new dynamic IP address is pulled, the camera updates the IP address with the DDNS service provider.

    Step 1 Register with one of the following DDNS providers:

  • DynDNS.org
  • TZO.com
  • DHS.org

    Write down the URL and login information you obtained after registering with one of the above DDNS providers.

    Step 2 Log into the camera.

    Step 3 Click Setup to the left.

    Step 4 Click the Advanced tab then click Network to the left.



    Step 5 Click Yes next to Dynamic DNS.

    Step 6 Select the provider that you registered with from the drop-down list next to Service Provider.

    Step 7 Using the information you obtained in Step 1, enter the domain name that you created (i.e. mycamera.dyndns.org) in the field by Host Name. Enter your login information for the account in the Username/Email and Password/Key fields.

    Step 8 Click Apply to save the settings.

    Note: After DDNS is configured, you will access the camera remotely using the domain name. For example, if the domain name that you registered is mycamera.dyndns.org, then you would type mycamera.dyndns.org in the address bar of your web browser to access the camera remotely.
    • Model DCS-G900
    Question How do I configure my DCS-G900 camera to be viewed from the Internet when I am behind a router or firewall?
    Answer The following information will allow others to view your DCS-G900 camera over the Internet if you are using a router or behind a firewall.

    The default port used by the camera the DCS-G900 is 80.

    If this port is available for use, you DO NOT have to open a second port. You will only need to open Port 80 in your router or firewall.

    Click here to open ports on your D-Link router

    If port 80 is not available (for example, if you are already using port 80 to run a Web server or your ISP blocks access on port 80*) or are using multiple cameras, you MUST open a second port and designate a new Web server port.

    The ports that are opened must be unique for each camera in order to successfully view the images remotely.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type in the IP address of your camera (192.168.0.20).

    Step 2 Click Setup on the left side.



    Step 3 Click Network on the left side.

    Step 4 Click Enable, next to Open Second Port, and type in the port number you want to use. You can choose any port number that is not being used.



    Step 5 Click Apply.

    Step 6 You will now need to open the ports (port forward) on your router or firewall.

    Click here to open ports on your D-Link router

    To view a camera from Internet, enter the WAN IP address of the router, followed by a colon (:) and the port number. (For example 67.127.140.131:80)
    Model DE-1824EI
    Question What is Intrusion Security Function on the DE-1824EI?
    Answer Intrusion security prevents unauthorized individuals from accessing the network. Through the network management software, Ethernet addresses or IP addresses that represent authorized users can be assigned to each port of the hub. If a packet using a source address other than those used by authorized users is received by a port, it will either partition the port, send a trap notification to the network manager, or both.
    Model DE-220PCT
    Question How can I setup a DE-220PCT on a non-Plug n Play system?
    Answer Please configure the DE-220PCT by running the supplied setup program (setup.exe) to disable the pnp function and specify an non-used IO, IRQ for the DE-220PCT.

    Download latest drivers and setup program here
    Model DE-220PCT
    Question Why canīt I install the DE-220PCT on Netware using Plug n Play mode?
    Answer In Novell 3.12, you have to set up the driver manually. Please follow the following installation procedure:

    1. Copy all provided NLM and LAN files into your DOS directory, which includes the SERVER.EXE file
      C:\>copy a:\netware\32bitlan\*.nlm c:\nw312

    2. In the Autoexec.ncf, you have to add the item below:
      LOAD C:\NW312\NBI31X.NLM
      LOAD C:\NW312\MSM31X.NLM
      LOAD C:\NW312\ETHERTSM.NLM
      LOAD C:\NW312\DE22X ISA PORT=300 INT=B FRAME=Ethernet_802.3
      NAME=DE22X_1_E83

    3. If you enable the DE-220īs PNP function and add the parameter "ISA" in the autoexec.ncf, the DE-220 wonīt work correctly. It will show the error message:
      "DE-22X-NW-050: The board cannot be found.
      Module initialization failed.
      Module DE22X.LAN NOT loaded."
    Model DE-220PCT
    Question What if the network card is not recognized by the installation Wizard?
    Answer This is normally caused by a resource conflict. Try the following steps:
      1. Verify that the card is firmly in the slot and seated properly.
      2. Verify that the ISA slot is working properly.
      3. Run the diagnostic to verify the card is working properly. Refer to IRQ Conflict steps 2 through 4 and choose Adapter Diagnostics.
      4. Check in the Device Manager under Network Adapters to see if the card installed itself. If it did, write down the IRQ and I/O address the card is using.
      5. Remove the driver and turn the computer off.
      6. Physically remove the adapter from the motherboard and restart the computer.
      7. Go to Device Manager and click on Computer.
      8. If another device is using the same IRQ, you have an IRQ conflict. Refer to the IRQ conflict section for instructions on what to do.
    Model DE-220PCT
    Question What if the driver is not found when installing the DE-220?
    Answer When loading the driver, make sure you type in the correct path to the driver files. First point the installation Wizard to the A:\ drive to load the drivers.

    After the driver is installed the operating system may need files from the Windows CD. Make sure you point the installation Wizard to the Win95 or Win98 folder and make sure you indicate the correct driver letter for the CD-ROM drive.

    You can use the Novell NE-2000 driver that is built-in to most operating systems.
    Model DE-220PCT
    Question What if there is an IRQ conflict when installing a DE-220PCT?
    Answer 1. Check for a free IRQ and I/O address to verify the card has room to install itself.
    2. You can use the D-Link Non-Plug and Play driver or the NE2000 compatible driver. Use the NE2000 compatible driver first. Disable Plug and Play on the card by restarting your computer and pressing F8 when you see "Starting Windows 95…" or "Starting Windows 98…". You will be in a Startup menu.
    3. Choose Safe Mode Command Prompt Only from the Startup menu.
    4. Place the driver disk in Drive A. Go to the A:\Setup directory and run setup.exe.
    5. If setup.exe is not in the Setup directory go to A:\ and type setup.exe. Choose Setup Configuration.
    6. Disable Plug and Play.
    7. Assign the NE2000 driver. The NE2000 driver should already be installed with Windows 95 or 98.
    8. Press Add > Adapter > under the manufacturer of Novell/Anthem choose NE2000 compatible driver and click Ok. The driver should now be in your network configuration.
    9. Select it and click on Properties. Set the IRQ and I/O to the same IRQ and I/O as those you have already assigned to the card.
    10. Using the D-Link Non-PnP driver everything will be the same, except you will only be able to assign the I/O address to the driver in the Networking Configuration.
    Model DE-220PCT
    Question What if I get an error message that says, "Files not found..." when installing a DE-220PCT?
    Answer Point the installation Wizard to the Windows CD, to the Win95 or 98 folder. Make sure you indicate the correct driver letter for your CD-ROM drive.

    Example:

    E:\Win98
    Model DE-220PCT/ DE-528CT
    Question When I install the DE-528 on Win95, it works fine. When I adjust the connection to FDX, the file transfer becomes very slow, and the device led will show a constant collision.
    Answer The DE-528 does not have N-way function, its default value is half duplex mode (HDX). If you change the connection mode to full duplex (FDX), the device will not change automatically. If this situation occurs, the network will not function correctly. The two network interfaces use different modes to connect ( FDX -> HDX ), and that could cause packet loss and degrade performance.

    If you adjust the connection for the DE-528, remember to adjust the deviceīs connection mode as well.
    Model DE-528CT
    Question I installed DE-528 on an HP Brio with Win98, but the network connection will not work correctly. What is the cause?
    Answer We recommend that you to use NDIS3 driver instead of the NDIS4 driver. Please remove the existing driver for the DE-528 by the following procedure:

    1. In Control Panel -> System -> Device Manager -> Network Adapters, remove D-Link DE-528

    2. Don't restart PC immediately and go to DOS prompt mode and do the following procedure.
      - cd \win98\system and del de528.sys
      - cd \win98\inf and del net528.inf
      - cd \ win98\inf\other and del MicrosoftNet528.inf

    3. Restart the PC. When it boots up, Windows will detect a PCI Ethernet Controller and ask for driver. Please specify the path of NDIS3 driver as "A:\WIN95".
    Model DE-530CT
    Question Two PCs with DE-530CTs installed running Win98, connected with a crossover cable, causes the PCs shut down abnormally.
    Answer 1. Go to Control Panel->Network->DE-530CT... ->Properties->Advanced->Connection Type

    2. Choose 10BASET_NO_LINK_TEST

    3. Click OK and reboot the PC.
    Model DES-1024D
    Question What switching method is used on my D-Link switch?
    Answer All D-Link switches use a technology called Store and Forward as their switching method.

    If you would like to learn more about this technology, please read our Store and Forward FAQ.
    Model DES-1024D / DES-105 / DES-108 / DES-1105 / DES-1108 / DGS-1004T / DGS-1005D / DGS-1008D / DGS-1008T / DGS-1008TL / DGS-1016D / DGS-1016TG / DGS-1024D / DGS-105 / DGS-108 / DGS-2205 / DGS-2208
    Question Why can I not pull a DHCP IP address from my switch?
    Answer Your switch has no built in DHCP server, meaning it does not have the capability to issue IP addresses. Please check your DHCP server to ensure that it is functioning properly. In most cases your router will act as your DHCP server.

    If you are sure that your DHCP server is functioning properly then please test DHCP with other PCs connected to your switch. Your PC or network card may be the cause of your problem.
    Model DES-1226G
    Question Does the DES-1226G Hardware revision A support 802.1Q VLANs?
    Answer No, The DES-1226G Revision A does not support 802.1Q VLANs.

    802.1Q VLANs are only supported on the DES-1226G Revision B.
    Model DES-1226G
    Question How do I create VLANīs on the DES-1226G?
    Answer Step 1 Open up a web browser to the IP address of the switch, 192.168.0.1 by default. Log into the switch with the password, "admin" by default.



    Step 2 Click on VLAN on the left menu, then click Add Group.



    Step 3 Give the VLAN a description, and then add the ports that will become part of the VLAN. Hit Apply.



    Step 4 Click on ID01 to edit the Default VLAN.



    Step 5 Uncheck the ports that are a part of vlan2, then hit Apply.



    Now there are two VLANīs configured. Default VLAN contains ports 1-12, and vlan2 contains 13-26.

    Model DES-1226G / DES-1226G_revB
    Question Can I prioritize my QoS settings from 1 to 7 on the DES-1226G Revision A in the same way as I can on the DES-1226G Revision B?
    Answer No, you can only set your QoS option on the DES-1226G Revision A to Normal or High, as opposed to setting between 1 and 7 on the DES-1226G Revision B.
    Model DES-1226G / DES-1250G / DES-1316 / DES-1526 / DGS-1216T / DGS-1224T / DGS-1248T / DES-1226G_revB / DES-1228 / DES-1252 / DGS-1216T_revC / DGS-1216T_revD / DES-1228P
    Question Why are my ping request slower when using D-Link Web SMART Switches?
    Answer Since the Web Smart switches are not as robust in features as fully managed switches, they have a slower CPU. Therefore, depending on what process Web Smart switch is currently running, the ping response time will be varied and longer.
    Model DES-1228P , DES-3828P , DWL-P100 , DWL-P200 , DWL-P50 , DES-1316 , DES-1526 , DXS-3227P
    Question Does my D-Link PoE switch or adapter support my PoE device?
    Answer When using a D-Link PoE adapter or Switch please ensure the device you are using is compliant with IEEE 802.3af standard.

    D-Link can not support any device used with a PoE switch or adapter that is not 802.3af compliant, using the switch or adapter with a device that is not 802.3af compliant may cause damange to your device and it is strongly reccommended that you disconnect the device and discontinue use of your PoE device with the D-Link PoE adapter or switch.
    Model DES-1250G
    Question How do I configure VLANS on my DES-1250G?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the DES-1250G in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is admin. Click Login.

    Step 3 Click VLAN on the left side.

    Note: By default, all ports are set to Untag Port. You will need to remove the ports that are to be added to another VLAN.

    Step 4 Select Add New VID.

    Step 5 Select the number that is to identify the second VLAN (2 in this example) and set ports 26-50 to Untag Port. Leave ports 1-25 set as Not Member. Click Apply.



    Step 6 Select Port VID Setting next to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

    Step 7 Change the PVID to 2 for ports 26-50. Click Apply.



    Step 8 Click VLAN on the left side.

    Step 9 Remove ports 26-50 from the Default VLAN and set ports 26-50 to Not Member. Click Apply.

    Model DES-1250G / DES-1316 / DES-1526 / DGS-1248T
    Question What D-Link Web Smart Switches currently support 802.1q VLANs?
    Answer Currently the only Web Smart Switches that support 802.1q VLANS are the
    DES-1316
    DES-1250G
    DES-1526
    DGS-1248T
    Model DES-1316
    Question How do I setup VLANīs on the DES-1316?
    Answer In this example two VLANīs will be created. The VLANīs will not be able to access each other, but will be able to get out to a gateway. The gateway is connected to port 1.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and log into the switch (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the password (admin by default) then hit Login.



    Step 2 Click on VLAN on the left hand side, then click Add new VID.



    Step 3 Create a new VID, and add Untagged Member Ports.



    Step 4 Go back to the VLAN menu and select Port VID Settings.



    Step 5 Change the PVID of the ports in the created VLAN, and hit Apply.



    Step 6 Remove the ports from the second VLAN, and hit Apply.



    Step 7 Select VID 10, then select Port VID Settings.




    Step 8 Change the PVID of the ports in the second VLAN, and hit Apply.

    Model DES-1316 / DES-1226G_revA / DES-1226G_revB / DES-1228 / DES-1228P / DES-1250G / DES-1252 / DGS-1216T_revA / DGS-1216T_revC / DGS-1216T_revD
    Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my Web smart switch?
    Answer Step 1 Please visit http://support.dlink.com/downloads and download the Web management utility and firmware.

    Step 2 Open the Web management utility.

    Step 3 Click Discovery to locate the Web smart switch and select the IP address of the switch and then click Add to monitor list.



    Step 4 Once you have added the switch to the monitor list, select the IP address of the switch and then click Firmware Upgrade.



    Step 5 Browse to where you downloaded the firmware to in Step 1. Once you have located the firmware, you will then need to enter the password that has been set up on the switch. Click Start.

    Step 6 Once the firmware upgrade has completed, you will see Upgrade successful.

    Model DES-1316 / DES-1526 / DES-1228P
    Question Why doesnīt my Cisco 7940G/7960G IP Phone power on when connected to my D-Link PoE compatible switch?
    Answer The Cisco 7940G and 7960G are pre-802.3af PoE devices. They will not be able to get power from the PoE switch.

    The following link is provided for refrence and may provide further information regarding the incompatiblity between 802.3af compliant devices and Cisco phones.

    This article is not provided by Cisco nor endorsed by D-Link: http://www.voip-info.org/wiki-Cisco+POE

    Note: This may include other Cisco IP Phones that are not 802.3af compliant. For further information on your Cisco IP Phone, please contact Cisco.
    Model DES-1526
    Question How do I configure VLANS on my DES-1526?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the DES-1526 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is admin. Click Login.

    Step 3 Click VLAN on the left side.

    Note: By default, all ports are set to Untag Port. You will need to remove the ports that are to be added to another VLAN.

    Step 4 Select Add New VID.

    Step 5 Select the number that is to identify the second VLAN (2 in this example) and set ports 13-24 to Untag Port. Leave ports 1-12 set as Not Member. Click Apply.



    Step 6 Select Port VID Setting next to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

    Step 7 Change the PVID to 2 for ports 13-24. Click Apply.



    Step 8 Click VLAN on the left side.

    Step 9 Remove ports 13-24 from the Default VLAN and set ports 13-24 to Not Member. Click Apply.

    Model DES-3010FA / DES-3010GA
    Question How do I setup an IP address and default gateway on my DES-3010FA/GA switch via the CLI?
    Answer Below is the syntax to configure an IP address and default gateway on the DES-3010FA/GA switch via the CLI.



    Note: The copy running-config startup-config comamnd will save all configuration changes.
    Model DES-3010FA / DES-3010PA / DES-3010GA
    Question How to create 2 separate Vlans on my switch?
    Answer Step 1: You need to connect your computer COM1 port to the console port of the switch with a
    RS-232 serial cable.

    Step 2: Setup hyperterminal on your computer to use these configuration settings:
    Baud rate 9600
    Com 1
    Terminal VT100
    Data bits 8
    Stop bits 1
    Parity no
    Flow Control none

    Launch the hyperterminal monitor and Power cycle the switch.
    When it boots up, log in using the default user name, admin, and no password.
    Press Enter to get the console# prompt.

    Step 3: Set an IP address on the switch.
    Note: The IP address needs to be on the same subnet as your computer.

    Click here for instructions on setting an IP address on your switch.

    Step 4: Open a web browser, such as Internet Explorer or Netscape, and enter the IP address, that you set in the previous step, in the address bar.
    eg. http://192.168.0.200 .

    Step 5: You will be prompted for a user name and password.
    The default user name is admin and there is no password. Select OK.



    Step 6: Select Basic Setup, from the top. Under Vlan, on the left side, select Properties.



    Step 7: Click the Create button and use the following configuration:
    VLAN ID: 2
    VLAN Name: VLAN2
    Click Submit.

    Step 8: Go back to Vlan, on the left side, and select Properties again. Select Show All. You should now see both your Vlans ie. 1 and 2



    Step 9: Under Vlan, select Membership. You should see Vlan 1 the default port settings.



    Step 10: Select the ports you wish to assign to Vlan 2. In this example we use ports 3, 4 and 5 for our Vlan 2.



    In the example port 5 is being configured for Vlan 2 by selecting Vlan ID 2 and selecting the number 5 just above the port 5. Select Untagged and Submit



    Step 11 Our VLAN 2 should now be configured.



    We have created 2 separate Vlans on the same subnet.
    Vlan 1 Ports 1,2,6,7,8.
    Vlan 2 Ports 3,4,5.
    Model DES-3224 / DS-510P / DS-510S
    Question I bought the DES-3224 10/100 Auto Negotiation Switch and the user guide states that the D-View, D-Link SNMP management program is included with the switch but my box did not contain this program. How can I get my copy?
    Answer Unfortunately, the manual incorrectly states that this product is included with the purchase of the switch. We apologize for any inconvenience this error might cause. The D-View platform software can be purchased directly from D-Link at 800 326-1688.

    Get Version 5.1 Trial here.
    Model DES-3226
    Question How do I configure MAC Filtering on the DES-3226 switch?
    Answer Follow the directions below to configure MAC Filtering on the DES-3226 switch.

    Note: MAC Filtering is used for intrustion protection by specifying a range of ports or a single port that will only allow access to the network based on static MAC address entries.

    Step 1 Open up a web browser such as Interent Explorer and enter the IP address of the switch (default: 10.90.90.90) and click OK.

    Step 2 Enter your username (blank by default) and password (blank by default). Click OK to enter the web configuration for your switch.

    Step 3 Click on Security Management and then click Port Security.



    Configure Port Security Settings:

  • Select a range of ports or a single port
  • Enable Admin State
  • Set Max Address to 0 (means MAC learning process is stopped on specified port)
  • Click Apply



    Step 4 Click on Static Filtering Table and then click Unicast Filtering.



    Configure Unicast Filtering Settings:

  • Add the allowed MAC Addresses into the Static Filtering Table
  • Set Type to Permanent
  • Specify Port to Allow-to-Go Port
  • Click Apply



    Changes take effect immediately, but will NOT be saved to N/V RAM until you Save Configurations under Maintenance > Save Changes.

    • Model DES-3226
    Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DES-3226?
    Answer The firmware upgrade process for all D-Link managed switches runs over TFTP. You will need TFTP software running on the computer that has the Firmware file on the local hardrive. If you do not have TFTP software, it is freely available on the Internet.

    The Firmware upgrade procedure requires an Ethernet connection between the switch and the TFTP server. You must be able to access the switch through Telnet or the Web based configuration from the computer that is running the TFTP software. Although there are many different ways to configure the switch, it is easiest for you to use the Web based configuration when upgrading the Firmware.

    The Web based configuration of any D-Link switch can be accessed by entering the IP address in the address bar of any Java-enabled browser. The default IP address of the DES-3226 is 10.90.90.90/255.0.0.0. If you are unable to access the web based configuration, connect to the switch through Hyperterminal and reset the switch to Factory default. If you have made configuration changes to the switch, make sure that your TFTP server is on the Management VLAN, and that it can PING the switch.

    Download DES-3226 Firmware here (Download the Run code, not the MIBs).

    Step 1 Open your Web browser and enter the IP address of the DES-3226 in the address bar (10.90.90.90). Select Login at the top of the web page. When prompted, enter the username/password that you have assigned to the switch. By default there is no username or password assigned to the switch.



    Step 2 From the folder tree on the left-side of the page select Maintenance>TFTP Services>Update Firmware.



    Step 3 Enter the IP address of the computer running the TFTP software in the field labeled Server IP Address. In the field labeled File Name, enter the path to the firmware file that is on the local hardrive of the computer running the TFTP software. Make sure that you include the file extension of the firmware file when specifying the directory path.



    Step 4 Make sure that there is TFTP software running on the computer whoīs IP address was entered in the Web based configuration. Click on the Apply button, and then click on Start.

    Step 5 During the upgrade process this is what you should see. The D-Link TFTP software is also shown in the below screenshot which will also display the firmware upgrade status.



    Step 6 After the Firmware upgrade is complete the switch will automatically reboot. Wait 1-2 minutes and then reconnect to the switch. Login and select Configuration>Switch Information. The field labeled Firmware Version should now display the Firmware Version that you just upgraded to.

    Model DES-3226 / DES-3226L / DES-3226SM / DES-3250TG / DES-3324SR / DES-3326SRM / DES-3350SR / DGS-3212SR / DGS-3224SR / DGS-3224TGR / DGS-3324SR / DGS-3324SRi
    Question What is Bandwidth Control and which D-Link switches support this feature?
    Answer Bandwidth Control is a feature that allows the Network Administrator to specify the allowed rate of incoming and outgoing traffic on a per port basis. All D-Link switches that support Bandwidth Control will allow you to limit the Tx and Rx rates to a minimum of 1 Megabit for 10/100 ports and 8 Megabits for Gigabit ports.

    Bandwidth Control Increments: 10/100Mbps port = 1-100 in multiples of 1, 10/100/1000Mbps port = 8-1000 in multiples of 8. The D-Link switches that support Bandwidth Control are listed below. Click on the model number of the switch for configuration instructions.
    Model DES-3226L
    Question What is the VLAN limitation for the DES-3226L?
    Answer The DES-3226L will not allow ports to be untagged members above VID 255. You can only assign untagged ports on the DES-3226L to VLANs with a VID of 1-255. When deploying the DES-3226L in a existing 802.1q environment, choose the VIDīs carefully or tag in the end device.

    Below is a description of the limitation information:

    1. If VLAN member consists of UNTAGGED port(s), the VID must be in the range of 1 to 255, for example, the first (default vid=1) and second (v255 vid=255) VLAN.

    2. If VLAN members are all TAGGED ports, the VID can be from 1 to 4094, for example, the third (v1000 vid=1000) and fourth (v4096 vid=4096) VLAN.

    3. If you want to add untagged port into VLAN from 256 to 4094, (eg, v1000 vid=1000), it will fail, because untagged port only can be added into vid=1 to 255.

    4. Number 1 is a restriction only on DES-3226L. Other switches (eg, DES-3226S, DES-3226, DES-3526, and many of others) have no such restriction, that is, untagged ports can be added to VLAN from vid=1 to vid=4094.
    Model DES-3226L_revB
    Question How do I reset the DES-3226L rev_B to factory defaults?
    Answer Note: This FAQ only applies to the DES-3226L Revision B.

    You can reset the unit to factory defaults using the following method:

    Facing the front of the switch, the Reset pin hole will be to the very right.

    Using a paperclip, press and hold the Reset button for 10 seconds.

    The DES-3226L should now be at factory defaults.
    Model DES-3226L_revB
    Question How do I configure Class of Service (CoS) on the DES-3226L switch?
    Answer Class of Service (CoS) is a way of managing traffic in a network by grouping similar types of traffic for example: streaming video,voice,etc... and treating each type as a class with its own level of service priority.

    Step 1: Open a web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape, and enter the IP address of the switch (Ex:192.168.20.223). Press Enter.

    Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default). Click Ok to access the Web Configuration.



    Step 3: Click on the plus sign (+) next to QOS, then the plus sign (+) next to Class of Service. Select Interface Queue Configuration.



    Step 4: Configure the following:

  • Slot/Port - Specifies all CoS configurable interfaces. The option Global represents the most recent global configuration settings.
    These may be overridden on a per-interface basis.

  • Queue ID - Specifies the queue ID.

  • Minimum Bandwidth - Specifies the minimum guaranteed bandwidth alloted to this queue. The value 0 means no guaranteed minimum.
    The total of individual minimum bandwidth values for all queues in the selected interface cannot exceed 100.

  • Scheduler Type - Specifies the type of scheduling used for this queue, it can only be either Strict or Weighted.

  • Queue Management Type - This is only used if the device supports independent settings per-queue, the default setting is Taildrop

    Step 5: Click Submit.
    • Model DES-3226L_revB
    Question How do I login to the DES-3226L Web Interface?
    Answer Make sure your PC is in the same subnet as the switch.

    Click here for instructions on statically assigning an IP address to your PC.

    Step 1: Open a web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape, and enter the IP address of the switch (Ex:192.168.20.223). Press Enter.

    Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default). Click Ok to access the Web Configuration.

    Model DES-3226L_revB
    Question How do I set an IP address on the DES-3226L switch?
    Answer Step 1 Click Start. Go to Run and type hyperterm in the Run window. Press Enter.



    Step 2 Below Name, enter a name for the new connection, and click OK.



    Step 3 Next to Connect Using select the COM port that the firewall is using to connect to the computer. Click OK.



    Step 4: Configure the Port Settings as follows:
  • Bits per second - 9600
  • Data bits - 8
  • Parity - None
  • Stop bits - 1
  • Flow control - None
    Click OK.



    Step 5: Change to Executable Mode in the Command Line Interface by typing Enable.



    Step 6: Type the command: network parms <desired ip address> <desired subnet mask> <desired default gateway>, then hit Enter.

    • Model DES-3226L_revB
    Question How do I configure Hyperterminal so I can access the CLI and view the default settings on my DES-3226L switch?
    Answer Step 1 Connect a Serial Cable from your PC to the Console port located on the front of the DES-3226L.

    Step 2 Click Start. Go to Run and type hyperterm in the Run window. Press Enter.



    Step 3 Below Name, enter a name for the new connection, and click OK.



    b>Step 4 Next to Connect Using select the COM port that the firewall is using to connect to the computer. Click OK.



    Step 5 Configure the Port Settings as follows:
  • Bits per second - 9600
  • Data bits - 8
  • Parity - None
  • Stop bits - 1
  • Flow control - None
    Click OK.



    Step 6 Click OK.

    Step 7 At the prompt, type Enable and press Enter. You will be prompted for your password (blank by default). Press Enter.



    Step 8 Type Show Running-config to view the default settings.
    • Model DES-3226L_revB
    Question How do I configure IP-DSCP and IP Precision Mapping on the DES-3226L Rev B Switch?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser, such as Internet Explorer or Netscape, and enter the IP address of the switch (Ex:192.168.20.223). Press Enter.

    Click here for instructions on assigning an IP address to your DES-3226L

    Step 2 Click on the plus sign (+) next to QOS, then click on the plus sign (+) next to Class of Service, select Mapping Table Configuration.



    Step 3 The Slot/Port drop down option specifies all CoS configurable interfaces. The Global setting represents the global configuration settings.
    These may be overridden on a per interface basis.

    Step 4 Select the Interface Trust Mode from the dropdown menu.



    Step 5 Select the Traffic Class Level, click Submit.

    Model DES-3226L_revB
    Question What is maximum number of source ports that can be added to the port mirror configuration?
    Answer Revision B versions, of the switch, limits the number of source ports that can be added to a maximum of 5 ports. At full duplex, this would mirror a maximum of 1000Mbps of traffic to a single destination port.

    Note: Revision A versions of the switch do not have a maximum source port limitation. Make note that the port mirroring feature may cause the overall transfer rate of the switch to decrease. A high amount of mirrored source ports may significantly affect the overall performance of the switch.
    Model DES-3226SM / DES-3326SM / DES-3250TG / DES-3350TG / DGS-3224SR / DGS-3224TGR / DGS-3212SR / DGS-3324SR
    Question How do I segment traffic on my network?
    Answer Most of the newer D-Link switches support Traffic Segmentation. This is a way to allow/disallow traffic across the switch on a per port basis. The Traffic Segmentation table should be thought of as an allow list of what ports can talk to each other.

    The following D-Link switches support Traffic Segmentation. Below are screen shots from the DES-3226SM configuration which can also be applied to the other switches that are listed below.
    • DES-3226SM
    • DES-3326SRM
    • DES-3250TG
    • DES-3350SR
    • DGS-3224SR
    • DGS-3224TGR
    • DGS-3212SR
    • DGS-3324SR
    Step 1 The Traffic Segmentation Table is the sixth option down under the Basic Setup directory.



    Step 2 After selecting Traffic Segmentation from the left pane, you will see the following table on the right.



    Step 3 Click the radio button for the port traffic you want to control and select Edit. By default all ports are checked, meaning that all ports can pass traffic to and from each other.

    Below is an example configuration where there is one Internet port, and all ports should be able to access the internet, but not each other. This is a common configuration for hotels, classrooms, business departments, etc.



    The configuration will consist of each port’s Traffic Segmentation rule being modified to have each port and the internet port selected. This is displayed below for ports 1-8. This port range can access the internet or any other resource off of port 1, but can not access each other.



    The below diagram is an example configuration utilizing Traffic Segmentation. The different colored computers represent the segmentation that was configured on the connected managed switches. All of these computers can only send/receive traffic from the same colored neighbors; however all computers still have access to the internet and File/Web/Application servers. Using Traffic Segmentation you can control exactly what computers can access which resources. The actual switch configuration for this example is the same as explained above.

    Model DES-3226SM / DES-3326SRM / DES-3226L
    Question How do I configure Bandwidth Control on the DES-3226L, DES-3226SM and DES-3326SRM?
    Answer The instructions below walk through the steps to configure Bandwidth Control on the DES-3226L, DES-3226SM, and DES-3326SRM.

    Step 1 Open up a web browser, enter the IP address of the switch (default: 10.90.90.90), and click OK. Click on Advanced Setup > Configure QoS > Bandwidth Control Table.



    Step 2 You will see the current bandwidth configuration for all ports. Click on the radio button next to the port you want to configure and then click Edit.

    Note: You can only configure Bandwidth Control for one port at a time through the Web-based configuration.



    Step 3 After selecting a port to edit, the Bandwidth Control Table - Edit screen will be displayed. This will allow you to specify in Megabits how much bandwidth is allowed per port. You will first need to deselect the box for No Limit, and then specify the amount in Megabits that you want to limit that port to. There are separate fields for Tx (Transmit) and Rx (Receive) that allows you to limit the inbound and/or outbound traffic for each port. These Tx and Rx values can also be referred to as Egress (Transmit/Outbound) and Ingress (Receive/Inbound). The example screen shot below has a 1 entered to allow 1 Mb of traffic for both Transmit and Receive traffic on port 1. After configuring the desired bandwidth limitations for that port, click Apply. The settings will be applied immediately, however will not be saved to NV-RAM until you select Save Changes from the main menu tree.

    Bandwidth Control Increments: 10/100Mbps port = 1-100 in multiples of 1, 10/100/1000Mbps port = 8-1000 in multiples of 8.



    Step 4 After applying the port bandwidth restrictions, the web-based configuration will take you back to the main Bandwidth Control Table view. The screen shot below shows the applied values of 1 and 1 for Tx and Rx bandwidth limitations.

    Model DES-3226SM / DES-3326SRM / DES-3250TG / DES-3350SR / DES-3212SR / DES-3312SR / DGS3224SR
    Question How do I configure port mirroring on my D-Link switch?
    Answer Follow the directions below to configure Port Mirroring on D-Link Managed Switch.

    This procedure will work for these following switches:
    • DES-3226SM
    • DES-3326SRM
    • DES-3250TG
    • DES-3350SR
    • DES-3212SR
    • DES-3312SR
    • DGS-3224SR
    • DGS-3324SR
    • DGS-3224TGR
    Port Mirroring through Web Management:

    Step 1 Open up a web browser such as Interent Explorer. Enter the IP address of the switch (default: 10.90.90.90) and click OK.

    Step 2 Enter your username (blank by default) and password (blank by default). Click OK to enter the web configuration for your switch.



    Step 3 Click on Configuration and then click Port Mirroring.

    Click image for larger view


    Port Mirroring Terms:

    Source Port: These are the ports to be monitored.

    Target Port: This port is where information will be duplicated and sent for capture and network analysis. This is the port where a network analyzer would be attached to capture packets duplicated from the source ports.

    None: Selecting this option prevents any packets from either being recieved or transmitted.

    Ingress: Selecting this option mirrors only incoming packets.

    Egress: Selecting this option mirrors only outgoing packets.

    Both: Selecting this option mirrors both incoming and outgoing packets.

    Status: This setting will allow you to globally enable or disable port mirroring without affecting the configured port mirroring group.

    Note: If the traffic from the source port(s) is greater than the available bandwidth on the Target port, the excess traffic will be dropped from the Target port.

    Changes take effect immediately, but will NOT be saved to N/V RAM until you Save Configurations under Maintenance > Save Changes.

    Model DES-3226SM / DES-3326SRM / DES-3250TG / DES-3350SR / DGS-3212SR / DGS-3324SR / DGS-3312SR / DGS3224SR / DGS-3224TGR
    Question How do I change the IP address of my D-Link Managed Switch through the CLI?
    Answer Follow the directions below to change the IP address of your D-Link Managed Switch using CLI.

    This procedure will work for these following switches:
  • DES-3226SM
  • DES-3326SRM
  • DES-3250TG
  • DES-3350SR
  • DGS-3212SR
  • DGS-3312SR
  • DGS-3224SR
  • DGS-3324SR
  • DGS-3224TGR


    Step 1 Connect to the switch using Telnet (Standard Port 23) or HyperTerminal (Port speed is listed beneath the console port on the front panel of the switch). Enter your username and password (default is blank for both). Press Enter to access the Command Line Interface (CLI).

    Step 2 Enter the following command for changing the default IP address (10.90.90.90).

    Syntax:
    config ipif System ipaddress x.x.x.x/x.x.x.x or x.x.x.x/x

    Note: All commands are case-sensitive. Please verify the syntax of the interface name before changing the IP address. You can view the interface settings by typing show switch.

  • x.x.x.x = ip address
  • /x = Subnet Mask

    Example:
    config ipif System ipaddress 192.168.10.115/24



    Step 3 Press Enter to initialize IP address change.



    Step 4 After performing the IP address change, connect back into the switch via Telnet using the new IP address. If you are using HyperTerminal, run show switch to verify the IP address on your switch.



    Note: All changes take effect immediately, but will NOT be saved to N/V RAM until you type the SAVE command.
    • Model DES-3250TG / DES-3350SR / DGS-3212SR / DGS-3224SR / DGS-3224TGR / DGS-3324SR / DGS-3324SRi / DES-3226L / DGS-1016TG / DGS-1024T / DES-1226G_revA / DES-1226G_revB / DES-1228 / DES-1228P / DES-1250G / DES-1252 / DES-3010FA / DES-3010GA / DES-3010PA / DES-3226L_revB / DES-3526 / DES-3526DC / DGS-1016TG / DGS-1216T_revA / DGS-1216T_revC / DGS-1216T_revD / DGS-3024 / DGS-3048 / DGS-3312SR / DGS-3612G / DWS-3227 / DWS-3227P / DWS-3250 / DXS-3227 / DXS-3227P / DCS-3250 / DXS-3326GSR / DXS-3350SR
    Question What is a Combo Port on an Ethernet Switch?
    Answer A Gigabit Ethernet Combo port is an Ethernet port and a Mini-GBIC port (also called SFPīs) that share the same switch fabric and port number. A Combo port is a way to provide different types of connectivity without taking up unused switch fabric. These Combo ports can also be labeled as tied, meaning two different physical ports that can only be used one at a time. A Gigabit Ethernet Combo port consists of one 1000Base-T Gigabit over Copper port (provided), and one Mini-GBIC port (empty port that requires Mini-GBIC module).

    Note: If a Mini-GBIC port is being used, then the corresponding 1000BASE-T copper port is automatically disabled and vice versa.

    Model DES-3526
    Question What is the default IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway?
    Answer The default IP settings for the device are:

  • IP Address: 10.90.90.90
  • Subnet Mask: 255.0.0.0
  • Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0

    Note: There can only be one IP Interface Address assigned to the device. The IP Interface Address will be assigned to the default VLAN.
    • Model DES-3526
    Question How do I login to the web management interface?
    Answer The procedures are in accordance assuming the following device information.
  • IP Address: 10.90.90.90
  • Subnet Mask: 255.0.0.0
  • Default Gateway: 0.0.0.0
  • All ports are untagged members of the default VLAN.

    The FAQ covers following procedures. Click on the appropriate option for the procedure.
  • A. Login to the Web Management Interface
  • B. Login to the Command Line Interface via Console
  • C. Login to the Command Line Interface via Telnet

    ___________________________________________________________________________________________
    A. Login to the Web Management Interface

    Step 1: Make sure the device is powered on. Connect your computer to one of the 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports located on the front panel using an Ethernet cable. Make sure the cable connections are secured.



    Step 2: Statically assign your IP address settings using the following parameters.
  • IP Address: 10.90.90.10
  • Subnet Mask: 255.0.0.0



    Step 3: Open a web browser and type in the address bar, type in the URL http://10.90.90.90 and press Enter on the keyboard. Click on Login at the top of the page. By default, there is no user name and password, click OK. You will now be logged into the Web Management Interface.





    ____________________________________________________________________________________________
    B. Login to the Command Line Interface via Console

    Step 1: Make sure the device is powered on. Connect one of the COM ports located on the rear panel of your computer to the RS-232 serial port located on the front panel of the device. Make sure the cable connections are secured.



    Step 2: If you are using the Windows operating system, click on Start and select the Run. Type in the Run field hypertrm and click OK.
    Note: For support on running the Terminal Emulation application on another operating system, consult your OS manufacturer.



    Step 3: For the Name, type in DES-3526. Click on OK.



    Step 4: For the Connect To window, select the appropriate COM port used in connecting to the device. Click on OK.



    Step 5: For the Port Setting, use the following paramters:
  • Bits per second: 9600
  • Data bits: 8
  • Parity: None
  • Stop bits: 1
  • Flow Contol: None

    Click on OK.



    Step 6: Make sure the Scroll Lock option is disabled on the keyboard. Press Enter on the keyboard and the Command Line Interface will appear. By default, there is no user name and password. You will now be logged into the command line interface.





    _____________________________________________________________________________________________
    C. Login to the Command Line Interface via Telnet

    Step 1: Make sure the device is powered on. Connect your computer to one of the 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports located on the front panel using an Ethernet cable. Make sure the cable connections are secured.



    Step 2: Statically assign your IP address settings using the following parameters.
  • IP Address: 10.90.90.10
  • Subnet Mask: 255.0.0.0

    Note: For instructions on statically assigning your IP address, click on the appropriate option.
  • Windows 2000/XP
  • Mac OS-X



    Step 4: If you are using the Windows operating system, click on Start and select the Run. Type in the Run field telnet 10.90.90.90 and click OK.
    Note: For support on running the Telnet application on another operating system, consult your OS manufacturer.



    Step 5: The Telnet screen will appear. By default, there is no user name and password. You will now be logged into the Command Line Interface.

    • Model DES-3526
    Question How do I use the reset the password on my DES-3526?
    Answer Note: The feature is only available through the Command Line Interface via Console.
    The feature is only available on firmware version 4.01 Build 19 and later.

    Step 1: Login to the device via Console. For the complete procedure on logging into the management interface via Console, click here. Power cycle the device by pulling the power cable located on the rear panel of the device and reconnecting the power cable.



    Step 2: At the boot sequence, immediately after the Please wait, loading Runtime image... process completes, press the Shift and 6 Shift+6 keys on the keyboard simultaneously. The device will now enter Reset Configuration Mode.



    Step 3: At the Reset Configuration command window, type the command reset password and press Enter on the keyboard. Press the Y key to proceed with the system save. Type the command restart and press Enter. Press Y to reboot the switch after saving the changes.

    Note: In the Reset Configuration Mode, you may also reset the device to factory defaults by executing the command reset factory.



    Step 4: All administrator account passwords will be deleted. You will now be able to login to the device without a password.

    Note: If you have reset the unit to factory defaults, there is no administrator user name and password by default.

    Model DES-3550 / DES-3226 / DES-3226SM / DES-3250TG / DES-3326 / DES-3326SRM / DES-3350SR / DES-6000 / DES-6300 / DGS-1024TG / DGS-3212SR / DES-1226G_revA / DES-1226G_revB / DES-1228 / DES-1228P / DES-1250G / DES-1252 / DES-3010FA / DES-3010GA / DES-3010PA / DES-3226L_revB / DES-3526 / DES-3526DC / DGS-1016TG / DGS-1216T_revA / DGS-1216T_revC / DGS-1216T_revD / DGS-3024 / DGS-3048 / DGS-3312SR / DGS-3612G / DWS-3227 / DWS-3227P / DWS-3250 / DXS-3227 / DXS-3227P / DCS-3250 / DXS-3326GSR / DXS-3350SR
    Question What are the specifications for D-Link GBICs and SFPs?
    Answer
    Click image for larger view
    Model DES-3550 / DGE-500SX / DGE-500T / DGE-550SX / DGE-550T / DES-1026G / DGS-3324Sri / DGS-3324SR / DGS-3224TGR / DGS-3224SR / DGS-3212SR / DES-3350SR / DES-3226L_revA / DES-1026G / DES-1226G_revA / DES-1226G_revB / DGS-1005D / DGS-1008D / DGS-1008T / DGS-1008TL / DGS-1016D / DGS-1024D / DGS-105 / DGS-108 / DGS-2205 / DGS-2208 / DES-1228 / DES-1228P / DES-1250G / DES-1252 / DES-3010FA / DES-3010GA / DES-3226L_revB / DES-3010PA / DES-3526 / DES-3526DC / DGS-1016TG / DGS-1216T_revA
    Question Why won’t my Gigabit connection get a link?
    Answer A common problem when connecting different gigabit devices is Auto-sensing between the two different ports. When connecting two Gigabit devices it is imperative that the port speed be set the same on both sides. Some Managed Gigabit products have the ability to have the port speed set at either 1000Mbps/Full duplex or Auto. Other Un-Managed products don’t have the ability to modify the port speed at all. If you are using an Unmanaged device, or a device that doesn’t have the ability to set the port speed at 1000Mbps/Full duplex, you may not be able to connect to a device whose port speed is set to 1000Mbps/Full duplex.
    Model DES-3550 / DSS-16+ / DSS-24+ / DSS-5+ / DSS-8+ / DSH-5 / DSH-8 / DFE-904 / DES-1024D / DES-1009G / DES-1026G / DES-105 / DES-108 / DES-1105 / DES-1108 / DES-1226G_revA / DES-1226G_revB / DES-3010FA/ DES-1228 / DES-1226P / DES-1250G / DES-1252 / DES-1316 / DES-1526 / DES-3010PA / DES-3010FA / DES-3226 / DES-3226L_revA / DES-3226L_revB / DES-3226SM / DES-3250TG / DES-3326 / DES-3326SRM / DES-3350SR / DES-3526DC
    Question Why canīt I share my Internet connection to multiple computers when using my D-Link switch or hub?
    Answer If you are connecting directly to a Cable or DSL modem, you will need a router to share your Internet connection or a computer using ICS (Internet Connection Sharing) or Proxy. Switches and hubs do not allow you to share a single IP address to multiple computers.

    Another alternative is to contact your ISP and purchase extra IP addresses for each additional computer.

    Read here for a list of D-Link Routers.
    Model DES-3550 / General Switches / DES-1024D / DES-1009G / DES-1026G / DES-105 / DES-108 / DES-1105 / DES-1108 / DES-1226G_revA / DES-1226G_revB / DES-3010FA/ DES-1228 / DES-1226P / DES-1250G / DES-1252 / DES-1316 / DES-1526 / DES-3010PA / DES-3010FA / DES-3226 / DES-3226L_revA / DES-3226L_revB / DES-3226SM / DES-3250TG / DES-3326 / DES-3326SRM / DES-3350SR / DES-3526DC /
    Question What is the maximum length of Category 3, 4 or 5 twisted pair cable that can be used between computers and other devices such as hubs, switches, other computers, etc.?
    Answer The maximum length of Category 3, 4 or 5 twisted pair cable that can be used between computers and other devices on a network is 100 meters or about 328 feet. Keep in mind that this is a theoretical limit. Usually, you will want to keep the distance between devices well below the limit.
    Model DES-3550 / General-Networking / DES-1024D / DES-1009G / DES-1026G / DES-105 / DES-108 / DES-1105 / DES-1108 / DES-1226G_revA / DES-1226G_revB / DES-3010FA/ DES-1228 / DES-1226P / DES-1250G / DES-1252 / DES-1316 / DES-1526 / DES-3010PA / DES-3010FA / DES-3226 / DES-3226L_revA / DES-3226L_revB / DES-3226SM / DES-3250TG / DES-3326 / DES-3326SRM / DES-3350SR / DES-3526DC
    Question How do I configure my network so I can share files, folders, and printers on my network?
    Answer The following links and sites will offer you information that will guide you in the setup of a network without the cost of a consultant or tutor.

    D-Link recommends Network Magic to easily configure printer and file sharing on your network. Click here for more information on Network Magic.

  • How can I share a drive or folder on my Windows 2000 machine?
  • How do I share and access a shared printer in Windows XP?
  • How do I create, access, and map shared drives/folders on my network in Windows XP?
  • How do I use the Network Setup Wizard in Windows XP?


    Home Networking References:

  • http://www.microsoft.com/windowsxp/using/networking/default.mspx
  • http://www.networkmagic.com/nmlp/dlinksupport.php
  • http://www.wown.com/
  • http://www.homenethelp.com/
  • http://www.homepcnetwork.com/
  • http://www.duxcw.com/digest/guides/network/index.html
  • http://compnetworking.about.com/compute/compnetworking
  • http://searchnetworking.techtarget.com/topics/0,295493,sid7_tax299248,00.html
    • Model DES-3624
    Question Is the DES-3624/3624i switch rack mountable?
    Answer Yes, the DES-3624/3624i is rack mountable and the mounting brackets come with the switch.
    Model DES-3828 / DES-3828P
    Question Why does TeraTerm SSH lock up my DES-3828/DES-3828P?
    Answer This only happens when using an older version of TeraTerm.

    Please ensure that your computer is running TeraTerm SSH version 3.1.3 or higher.

    You can download a free copy of TeraTerm SSH at http://www.ayera.com/teraterm/.
    Model DFB-A5
    Question How do I get 2.0 speeds with the DFB-A5 USB ports in Windows XP?
    Answer By default, Windows XP will automatically load a built-in USB 1.1 driver NEC PCI to USB Enhanced Host Controller (B1) for the DFB-A5. To load the appropriate 2.0 driver, please follow the steps below. These steps assume you have already gone through the installation process from the CD as directed by the included installation guide.

    Step 1 Go to Device Manager, right-click on NEC PCI to USB Enhanced Host Controller (B1) and choose Update Driver....



    Step 2 Choose Install from a list or specific location (advanced) and click Next.



    Step 3 Choose Donīt search. I will choose the driver to install. Click Next.



    Step 4 Highlight D-Link DFB-A5 USB 2.0 PCI Adapter and click Next.



    Step 5 Click Continue Anyway.



    Step 6 Click Finish.



    You should now have entries in device manager like the ones below. Notice that USB Root Hub from the beginning of this process has changed to USB 2.0 Root Hub Device.

    Model DFB-H7
    Question Is the DFB-H7 compatible with a MAC G5 system?
    Answer All versions of the DFB-H7 are compatible with a Power Mac system, except for Hardware revision A1.

    The capacitor on the A1 revision is incompatible with the Power Mac, as the Power Macīs firewire bus voltage will damage the unit when plugged in.
    Model DFE-2616iX / DFE-2616X / DFE-904 / DSH-5 / DSH-8 / DE-1824EI / DE-805TP-C / DE-809TC / DE-809TC / DE-816TP / DE-824TP
    Question Why canīt I connect to my hub at full duplex?
    Answer Hubs cannot connect at full duplex. If your adapter supports half duplex, go to the advanced settings for the adapter and lock down the duplex to half. If you must connect at full duplex, you will need a switch, not a hub.
    Model DFE-2624i / DFE-2624iX
    Question How can I upgrade the firmware of the DFE-2624i/ix?
    Answer Step 1 If your DFE-2624iX/DFE-2624i has no IP address or an IP address on a different subnet than your PC, you will need to assign an IP address to the hub in same subnet as your PC.

    Note: The IP addresses of your PC and hub should be in the same subnet because TFTP uses the TCP/IP protocol. Otherwise, a DHCP enabled router or switch is needed.

    Step 2 After configuring the IP address settings, restart the hub. After the hub is booted up, check that your PC and the hub can communicate by pinging it from your PC. If the replies time out, check your IP address settings.

    Step 3 Download 2600-215.exe. It is recommended to save the file to your desktop, as it will be easy to locate after the download completes.

    Step 4 Extract the file you downloaded in Step 3.

    How do I extract the file I downloaded?

    Step 5 Navigate to the location where you extracted the files in Step 4. Open 2600.CFG in a text editor program such as Notepad and edit the following line of code:

    2600h-image c:\dlink\2600.img
    Change c:\dlink\2600.img to the location of the 2600.img file. Be sure to include 2600.img in the file path.

    Step 6 Open D-View in TFTP server mode (Application > TFTP Server). If you do not have D-View, download and install D-Link TFTP Server.

    Step 7 Go to Start > Programs (or All Programs if you are not using the Classic Start Menu in Windows XP) > Accessories > Communications > HyperTerminal.

    Step 8 In the Connection Description window enter a name below Name. This will be used to identify the connection.



    Step 9 Click OK.



    Step 10 In the Connect To window select the COM port that your DFE-2624iX/DFE-2624i is connected to (COM1 or COM2) using the drop-down list next to Connect using.



    Step 11 Click OK.



    Step 12 In the COMX Properties window (where X represents the COM port number) configure the following parameters using the drop-down lists:

    • Bits per second - 9600
    • Data bits - 8
    • Parity - None
    • Stop bits - 1
    • Flow control - Hardware


    Step 13 Click OK.



    Step 14 Once HyperTerminal is connected to the hub select the Out of Band/Console Configuration menu and set Serial Port Type to Console.

    Step 15 Save the settings.

    Note: Out-of-band uses SLIP protocol for the firmware upgrade process. The process for this type of firmware upgrade is more complicated and will not be described in this FAQ. Instead of using the console port and HyperTerminal the firmware is upgraded using Telnet and the upgrade progress cannot be viewed.

    Step 16 Select the Software Update menu and configure the below settings:

    • Software Update - Enable
    • Software Update Mode - Network
    • Boot Protocol - TFTP ONLY
    • Boot Server IP Address - The LAN IP address of your PC (i.e. 192.168.0.105)
    • Boot File Name - C:\dlink\2600.cfg, where C represents the drive letter of your hard drive and dlink represents the directory where the 2600.cfg file is located
    Step 17 Save the settings.

    Step 18 Select Menu > System Reset. Select YES and then press Enter to reboot the hub.

    Step 19 The firmware update progress will be displayed in HyperTerminal. When the firmware upgrade is complete select the System Configuration menu and check the Software Version. It should match the version of firmware you just upgraded to. If not, repeat Steps 14-18.
    Model DFE-500TX
    Question Why is it that when I install the DFE-500TX into Windows 2000 using the built-in drivers, I get an intermittent connection?
    Answer There is a problem with the DFE500TX using the built in Windows 2000 drivers with AutoSense. This is solved by loading the latest drivers for the DFE500TX (Netdlpci.inf, Dlkpci.sys(ver 4.31.01). After this, AutoSense works, as does 10 Base and 100 Base.

    Download the latest DFE-500TX drivers for Windows 2000.
    Model DFE-500TX / DFE-530TX
    Question Why canīt I use the DFE-500TX and DFE-530TX to connect IBM AS/400 on Win98?
    Answer You have to use the NDIS 3 driver to install the DFE-500TX or DFE-530TX and bind necessary protocols and services provided by operating system or application to connect IBM AS/400. The following is the procedure to install NDIS3 driver on Win98.

    1. In the Control Panel -> Network. Remove all installed DFE-500TX or DFE-530TX drivers.
    2. Donīt restart PC, go to MS-DOS prompt:
    - cd \windows\system and delete DLKFET.SYS ( DLKPCI.SYS)
    - cd \windows\inf and delete NETDLFET.INF ( NETDLPCI.INF)
    - cd \windows\inf\other and delete MicrosoftNetdlfet.inf (MicrosoftNetdlpci.inf)
    - Exit MS-DOS prompt mode and restart PC
    3. Go into Win98, the system will detect PCI Ethernet Controller. Please specify the path of NDIS 3 driver

    The NDIS 3 driverīs path of DFE-500TX is A:\WIN95. The NDIS 3 driverīs path of DFE-530TX is A:\.
    Model DFE-530TX
    Question How do I install a DFE-530TX on Caldera Open Linux?
    Answer 1. In the KDE environment, click the KDE icon and a menu will pop up. Select "COAS" -> "Network" -> "Ethernet Interfaces"

    2. Select "New Device" -> "Show drivers". In this menu, you can choose the NIC driver to install. The DFE-530TX should use the VIA Rhine PCI Fast Ethernet driver.

    3. Assign an IP and choose "Init at Boot Time". The driver will be loaded every time you go into Linux.
    Model DFE-530TX
    Question I can install the DE-220 on Novell 3.12, but I canīt install the DFE-530TX on Novell 4.11. How do I accomplish this?
    Answer Because the DFE-530TX driver follows Novellīs ODI Driver Specification (ver3.3), NetWare versions 3.12 and 4.10 server must be patched to work with this driver. NetWare server versions 4.11 and above do not need to be patched. The patching method is described below:

    1. Copy LOADER.EXE and LSWAP.EXE to the NetWare 4.10 server directory.

    2. Execute LSWAP.EXE at MS-DOS prompt from server directory.
      Usage: LSWAP [loaderFilePath [serverFilePath]]
      Default loaderFilePath = C:\NWSERVER\LOADER.EXE
      Default serverFilePath = C:\NWSERVER\SERVER.EXE
    Model DFE-530TX
    Question How do I install my DFE-530TX on Redhat 5.x or above?
    Answer There are two ways to install a DFE-530TX in Redhat:

    1. Before you install Redhat, you can setup the NIC during the installation procedure. When the system asks you to setup the NIC, please select via-rhine for the DFE-530TX.

    2. After you install Redhat, you can execute netconf, in the Client Task -> Basic Host Information. Set up your IP and subnet mask, the important thing is the "kernel module". The following is the kernel module list of D-Link NIC:

      Tulip.C (built-in) = DE-530, DFE-500TX rev Cx
      Tulip.C (latest) = DFE-500TX rev Ex, DFE-540TX
      Via-rhine = DFE-530TX
      ne2k-pci = DE-528
      rtl8139 = DFE-538
      ne = DE-220 (I.E. IO: 0x300 IRQ:5)
    Model DFE-530TX
    Question How do I install the DFE-530TX in SCO Unix 3.2.4x?
    Answer This Installation Guide for SCO Unix 3.2.4x assumes that the user has a basic understanding of Unix commands, a knowledge of editing text files and an understanding of the basic file structure in the Unix environment and a knowledge of the network driver currenly being utilized.

    Introduction:

       This installation assumes that the adapter is working properly.
       Please consult \SETUP\README.TXT for help with setup of the DFE-530TX.
       Getting Started will describe the installation instructions.

    Requirements:

    SCO Unix 3.2.4x with TCP/IP v1.2x

    Getting Started:

    1. Login to the network as root. (On maintenance mode)

    2. Insert the driver diskette in Drive A or Drive B and use the doscp command to copy the SCOUNIX Driver into the UNIX directory.
       example: # cd /
                # doscp a:/scounix/setup setup
                (or # doscp b:/scounix/setup setup)
                # chmod +x /setup
                # ./setup a:/scounix
                (or # ./setup b:/scounix)

    3. Add a chain by executing the netconfig command
       example: #netconfig

    A menu similar to the following appears on the screen:
       1) Add a chain
       2) Remove a chain
       3) Reconfigure an element in a chain
       q) Quit

    4. Select option 1 "Add a chain".

    The following prompt appears:
       Select top level of chain to Add or q to quit.

    5. Select sco_tcp for SCO TCP/IP for UNIX.

    The following message appears:
       Select next level of chain to Add or q to quit.

    6. Select p30430. This value varies according to your card number.

    The following prompt appears:
       Add chain sco_tcp->p30430 (y/n).

    7. Type "y" for yes.

    The following message appears:

    Please select Driver Mode:
       (1) Auto
       (2) 100 Full
       (3) 100 Half
       (4) 10 Full
       (5) 10 Half
       Please input your select (1-5)

    8. Type in the media mode number. Ex: select 1 for Auto.

    The following message appears:    Input your PCI ID (ENTER is recommended, or 12 hex digits).

    9. Specify the internet address (IP address) of the interface.

    The following message appears:
       Enter the netmask for this interface:

    10. Specify the subnet mask for the interface. Please consult the systems administrator if it is unknown. Default mask is 255.255.255.0.

    The following message appears:
       Does the interface use a broadcast address of all 1's (y/n).

    11. Answer this question accordingly. Default is "y".

    The following message appears:
       Enter the broadcast address for this interface:

    12. Type in the broadcast address for the interface.

    The following message appears:
       Are these values correct ? (y/n)

    13. If all values are correct, type "y". Otherwise, answer "n" and repeat the process.

    The following message appears:
       XX Pseudo ttys are currently configured, do you want to:
       1) Add Pseudo ttys
       2) Remove Pseudo ttys
       Select an option or enter q to quit [q]

    14. Type "q".
    The main menu reappears on the screen:
       1) Add a chain
       2) Remove a chain
       3) Reconfigure a element in a chain
       q) Quit
       Select option:

    15 Select "q".

    The following message appears:
       Do you want to relink to kernel now ?

    16. Type "y" for yes.

    The following message appears:
       Do you want this kernel to boot by default (y/n)?

    17. Type "y" for yes.

    The following message appears:
       Do you want the kernel environment rebuilt (y/n)?

    18. Type "y" for yes.

    19. Reboot UNIX by typing the following:

       #shutdown -y -g0
    Model DFE-530TX
    Question What if the card is not found?
    Answer This is normally caused by a resource (IRQ) conflict.
      1. Verify that the card is firmly in the slot and seated properly.
      2. Verify that the PCI slot is working properly.
      3. Run the diagnostic to verify the card is working properly. Refer to IRQ Conflict steps 2 through 4 and choose Adapter Diagnostics.
      4. Check in the Device Manager under Network Adapters to see if the card installed itself. If it did, write down the IRQ and I/O address the card is using.
      5. Remove the driver and turn the computer off.
      6. Physically remove the adapter from the motherboard and restart the computer.
      7. Go to Device Manager and click on Computer.
      8. If another device is using the same IRQ, you have an IRQ conflict. Refer to the IRQ conflict section for instructions on what to do.
    Model DFE-530TX
    Question What if the driver for my DFE-530TX is not found in Windows 95?
    Answer When loading the driver, specify the location of the driver and point to A:\ or A:\Win95. Make sure the driver disk in your floppy drive.

    Download the latest driver here.
    Model DFE-530TX
    Question What if there is an IRQ Conflict?
    Answer 1. Check for a free IRQ and I/O address to verify the card has room to install itself.
    2. You can use the D-Link Non-Plug and Play driver or the NE2000 compatible driver. Use the NE2000 compatible driver first. Disable Plug and Play on the card by restarting your computer and pressing F8 when you see "Starting Windows 95…" or "Starting Windows 98…". You will be in a Startup menu.
    3. Choose Safe Mode Command Prompt Only from the Startup menu.
    4. Place the driver disk in Drive A. Go to the A:\Setup directory and run setup.exe.
    5. If setup.exe is not in the Setup directory go to A:\ and type setup.exe. Choose Setup Configuration.
    6. Go down to Plug and Play set it to disable.
    7. Assign the NE2000 driver. The NE2000 driver should already be installed with Windows 95 or 98.
    8. Press Add > Adapter > under the manufacturer of Novell/Anthm choose NE2000 compatible driver and click Ok. The driver should now be in your network configuration.
    9. Select it and click on Properties. Use the same IRQ and I/O settings as those you have already assigned to the card.
    10. Using the D-Link Non-PnP everything will be the same, except you will only be able to assign the I/O address to the driver in Networking Configuration.
    Model DFE-530TX
    Question What if I get a Windows Protection Error (95A/950) when installing the DFE-530TX?
    Answer This is caused by an older driver problem. Unfortunately, the DFE-530TX cannot work under the NDIS 4.0 driver in Win95 (950 and 95A). Based on the Microsoft specification, the Win95 (950 and (95A) requires the NDIS 3.0 driver. Windows 95 OSR2 and Windows 98 require the NDIS 4.0 driver.

    Follow the following steps to fix this bug:

    Step 1 Remove the DFE-530TX adapter in Network Configuration.

    Step 2 Delete the NETDLFET.INF file in the \WINDOWS\INF directory.

    Step 3 Delete the DLDFET.SYS fiel in the \WINDOWS\SYSTEM directory.

    Step 4 Restart the computer and allow Windows 95 to auto-detect the DFE-530TX. If using Win950 or Win95A, poin to the Netdlfet.inf file inside the Win95 folder on the driver diskette. If using Win95B or Win98, point to the Netdlfet.inf file on the root of the driver diskette.

    Step 5 Provide the Win95 or Win98 CD and make sure that all files are found on the CD or driver diskette.

    Step 6 Before restarting, check in Device Manager under Network Adapters that the DFE-530TX is using the available resources and check that the Network Configuration has the corrrect clients, protocols, and file and printer sharing.

    If this does not work, the only other problem is an IRQ conflict.
    Model DFE-530TX
    Question What if my PC Locks Up?
    Answer This is usually caused by an IRQ conflict.
    Follow these steps to resolve the conflict:

      1. Change slots. Different slots use different IRQs.
      2. Verify there is a free IRQ in Device Manager.
      3. If there are no free IRQs it is necessary to free up an IRQ by removing something. You must find a device that is not needed or is no longer in use. For example, an extra or unused LPT port or USB Controller. In either case you must get into the BIOS and disable the device. These two can usually be found in the Integrated Peripherals selection. Find the device and set it to DISABLE. Once this has been done Save and Exit. Once you have booted back up into Windows be sure the disabled device has been removed. If not, remove it. This should give you a free IRQ.

    Note: If none of the above work you might have a bad adapter. To test this you can press F8 when you see "Starting Windows 95" or "Starting Windows 98" in a black screen before Windows starts to load. Choose Safe Mode Command Prompt Only. Once you get to C:\ type in A: and press Enter. This will take you to the A:\ prompt. Type diag and press Enter. This will take you into the Diagnostic program.

    Step 1: Select Adapter Menu Verify the adapter is using a free IRQ. Verify the NODE ID starts with 00 80 C* ** ** ** and press Enter.

    Step 2: Choose Adapter Basic Diagnostic In the Items Setup Menu, make sure there is an 'X' in: NIC Register Test, MII Register Test and EEPROM Test.

    Step 3: Press Enter and verify it passes all tests If the adapter fails any portion it is considered a bad adapter and should be replaced. If the adapter passes, there may be a problem with the Windows Operating system. Reinstall Windows or Install a DE-220PCT adapter and restart the computer.
    Model DFE-530TX / DFE-550TX
    Question Whatīs the difference between a DFE-530TX and a DFE-550TX?
    Answer The major difference is that the DFE-550TX is a fully managed NIC. It provides Wake-On-LAN, DMI and PXE boot ROM, all the management features that the DFE-530TX does not provide. The DFE-530TX is an entry-level 10/100 PCI NIC, where the DFE-550TX is an Enhanced and Managed 10/100 PCI NIC.

    Model WOL DMI PXE VLAN Tagging
    DFE-530TX No No No No
    DFE-530TX+ Yes No Yes No
    DFE-538TX Yes No Yes No
    DFE-550TX Yes Yes Yes Yes
    Model DFE-530TX+
    Question How do I install the DFE-530TX+ (Rev. D) in Linux Red Hat?
    Answer Note: New Distributions of Linux support this card with built-in drivers and near auto-installation.

    Follow these instructions to install the DFE-530TX+ Rev. D1 and D2 in Red Hat 6.x.

    The Readme.txt file has excellent instructions for more advanced users in Red Hat 6.x and up.

    For novice users, the following step-by-step instructions should suffice, assuming the floppy is mounted.

    $ cd floppy
    $ cp rtl8139.c /root(or any temp directory)
    $ cd /root
    $ gcc -DMODULE -D__KERNEL__ -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes -O6 -c rtl8139.c `[ -f /usr/include/linux/modversions.h ] && echo -DMODVERSIONS`

    [Enter]

    $ insmod rtl8139.o

    At this point the drivers have been installed and inserted. Configure the network properties of the card according to your current network settings.



    For Red Hat 7.0 the install is a little trickier because of a known issue with the default install of the OS.

    The workaround is as follows:

    First, you must change the following file: /usr/include/linux/modversions.h Using any text editor such as PICO or vi, insert the following line into this file:

    #include   linux/modsetver.h

    Then continue with the compilation and install:

    cd floppy
    cp rtl8139.c /root(or any temp directory)
    cd /root
    gcc -I /usr/src/linux/include -DMODULE -D__KERNEL__ -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes -O6 -c rtl8139.c `[ -f /usr/include/linux/modversions.h ] && echo -DMODVERSIONS`

    [Enter]

    insmod rtl8139.o
    Model DFE-530TX+
    Question How do I install my DFE-530TX+ adapter on a Novell 4.1x server?
    Answer This FAQ describes the procedure to install the NetWare v4.1X server driver for D-Link DFE-530TX+ PCI Adapter.

    Before you start with the installation process, make sure that the Novell NetWare v4.1X server is properly installed.

    The location of the driver is \nwserver\41x\dlkrts.lan.

    Step 1 Insert the Driver Disk into CD-ROM driver and check the contents of subdirectory \NWSERVER\41X, It should contain the following files:
    DLKRTS.LAN - Novell NetWare V4.1X Server Driver
    DLKRTS.LDI - Novell NetWare V4.1X Server Driver Installation Information File.

    Step 2 At the NetWare prompt (indicated by the Server name), run the INSTALL.NLM program by typing:
    server name: LOAD INSTALL (Enter)

    Step 3 Select Maintenance/Selective Install and press Enter.

    Step 4 Select Driver Options (Configure/Load/...) and press Enter.

    Step 5 Press the Ins key to specify other drivers to install.

    Step 6 Press F3 and specify the driver path (EX: E:\NWSERVER\41X) and press Enter.

    Step 7 The DLKRTS.LAN driver should appear in your choice list for the Select a LAN Driver field. Choose this driver to start the driver loading and binding procedure. This will allow you to load and bind all 4 frame types supported by NetWare.

    Step 8 Add the LOAD and BIND statements you require to the serverīs AUTOEXEC.NCF file so that the LAN driver will load automatically each time the server starts up.


    Installation Notes:
    1. Installing Multiple LAN Adapters:
    The keyword SLOT is provided for multiple LAN adapters in a single server by the driver RTSSRV.LAN. So, add EtherID in LOAD commands. For example:

    LOAD DLKRTS SLOT=1 FRAME=Ethernet_802.2 NAME=LAN_A
    BIND IPX TO LAN_A NET=11
    LOAD DLKRTS SLOT=2 FRAME=Ethernet_802.2 NAME=LAN_B
    BIND IPX TO LAN_B NET=22

    2. The keyword MEDIUMTYPE is provided for specifying adapterīs speed (AUTO, 100FULL, 100HALF, 10FULL, 10HALF), add SPEED in LOAD commands.
    For example:

    LOAD DLKRTS SLOT=1 MEDIUMTYPE=100HALF FRAME=Ethernet_802.2 NAME=LAN_A
    BIND IPX TO LAN_A NET=11
    Model DFE-530TX+
    Question How do I install the DFE-530TX+ network adapter in MAC OSX ?
    Answer Step 1 Power down the computer and disconnect the power cable.

    Step 2 Remove the left side panel of the case.

    Step 3 Insert the DFE-530TX+ into an available PCI slot and tighten the screw until the DFE-530TX+ is securely in place.

    Step 4 Replace the side panel and turn computer on.

    Step 5 Insert the DFE-530TX+ installation CD into the CD-ROM drive.

    Step 6 Open the CD-ROM icon on the desktop that appears displaying DFE-530TX+ just below the icon.



    Step 7 Open the Macintosh folder.



    Step 8 Open the DFE-530TX+ driver for MAC OS.



    Step 9 Open the installer program.



    Step 10 Click on install to complete the installation process.

    Model DFE-530TX+ / DFE-538TX
    Question Why do I get an error message Cannot find DLKRTS.SYS while installing my DFE-530TX+?
    Answer When you load the drivers, you need to specify the Win98 folder on the D-Link floppy or CD.

    NOTE: Do not run the install.exe file when using Windows 95, 98, Me, 2000, or XP.

    For Windows 98, in the Driver Installation Wizard, you will get to a window with 4 check boxes. Uncheck all options except Specify Location and type a:\win98 in the box and click OK. It should then say Found Driver. Click Next to continue. Continue with installation. When finished, click Yes when prompted to restart computer. Make sure you remove floppy disk before rebooting.

    For Windows Me, in the Add New Hardware Wizard, choose Search for best driver... and Select a location. Type in a:\win98 in box and click Next. Continue through installation, accepting the default values. When finished, click Yes when prompted to restart computer. Make sure you remove floppy disk before rebooting.

    Windows Me screenshot:



    Download drivers for the DFE-538TX at D-Link Canada.
    Model DFE-530TX+ / DFE-540TX / DFE-550TX / DFE-538TX
    Question Why does my computer work incorrectly after I plugged in the WOL cable?
    Answer D-Link manufactures only three network cards that can support the Wake On Lan function. Each card has itīs own WOL cable. Do not swap cables from one card to another card. This can cause a blank screen, and your PC will not work.
    Model DFE-530TX+ / DFE-550TX / DFE-530TX / DFE-538TX
    Question Why arenīt there any lights lit on my D-Link PCI Network Adapter?
    Answer If you do not have any lights lit on your D-Link adapter, try the following:

  • Make sure drivers are loaded OK in device manager. If there is a yellow exclamation mark, then the drivers are not loaded properly.
  • Verify that the adapter is correctly seated all the way down in PCI slot.
  • Try a different PCI slot.
  • Try a different Ethernet cable. If you pinned the cable yourself, please try a store-bought cable.
  • Try a shorter Ethernet cable.
  • Disable any other network adapters.
    • Model DFE-530TX+ / DFE-550TX / DFE-538TX
    Question What is the 3 wire cable included with my Ethernet adapter?
    Answer The cable included with your NIC is a WOL or Wake On LAN cable. Wake on LAN is an optional feature of the card and is not required for the NIC to function properly. Some new motherboards do not need the WOL cable for Wake on LAN to work. The support is built into the PCI slot, and in this case the customer will have to reference the motherboard manual or manufacturerīs website for setup information.

    Both ends of the three wire cable are not the same. The connector with the large key way will connect to the motherboard, and the smaller connector will connect to the NIC. To use this optional feature you will need to have additional software installed on your computer such as Magic Packet.

    Download Magic Packet

    What is Wake On LAN?
    Model DFE-550TX
    Question How many network management platforms can manage the DFE-550TX DMI function?
    Answer The DFE-550TX supports basic levels of DMI (Desktop Management Interface) management capability. Currently, we have finished the testing between DFE-550TX with the more polular network management platforms, such as Intel LANDesk Client Manager, CA Unitcenter and HP OpenView. Through the DMI support of the DFE-550TX, the network management console not only can easily manage the network equipment, but manage desktop PC as well.
    Model DFE-550TX
    Question What are the benefits of the IP Multicasting feature in DFE-550TX?
    Answer The DFE-550TX uses MAC level address filtering to support IP Multicasting. This feature can decrease CPU utilization of the PC during multimedia applications (like voice and image transfer), and prevents the broadcast packets occupying CPU time on all the PCs in the network. The IP Multicasting feature can receive IP Multicasting packets and join the specific group to receive multimedia data more efficiently.
    Model DFE-550TX
    Question What is the benefit of the flow control feature in the DFE-550TX?
    Answer The flow control feature prevents packet lost in network congestion, especially in the connection between a Switch and a NIC. This feature will activate when both the Switch and the NIC enable the flow control feature. In full duplex mode, the packet process will follow standard IEEE 802.3x flow control algorithms In the half duplex mode, the Switch and NIC will use the "Jam back" method to communicate with each other. With this flow control feature, network data is secure to be sent to the destination without packet lose during network congestion.
    Model DFE-550TX
    Question Why is there an error message "Missing file name WCDMI.DLL" after I install the DMI driver?
    Answer Step 1 Install Network adapter driver.

    Step 2 Before installation, a DMI service provider should be installed. A DMI service provider can be download from Intelīs web site, or installed from LDCM.

    Step 3 Run setup of the D-Linkīs DMI Instrumentation Layer.

    Step 4 After installation, restart your computer.
    Model DFE-570TX
    Question Can I allow different workgroups to access the same file server using the Quad-MAC server NIC?
    Answer Yes, you can configure the port grouping function in the D-Link load balancing and failover software. This allows users to setup two different groups, 2-ports as one group.
    Model DFE-570TX
    Question Does the D-Link server NIC support load balancing and fault tolerance feature?
    Answer Yes, the DFE-570TX does support both features. The DFE-570TX provides both Load Balancing and Failover Software, which can be built onto Windows NT 4.0 network protocol stacks like TCP/IP, IPX or NetBEUI. Through this software, the network traffic will be distributed, balancing each network port. When the DFE-570TX loads this software, it will balance the network traffic over all four ports of the DFE-570TX, and also provide backup link functionality for all four links.
    Model DFE-570TX
    Question What is a Server Card?
    Answer The following are the features of DFE-570TX Server Card:

    1. There are 4 ports

    2. Increased bandwidth. It can provide 800 Mbps under full duplex mode.

    3. Support for Load Balancing and Failover function. It can prevent lost data by a wrong cable or a bad port. The DFE-570TX will detect the port status. If one port has failed, another port will take over.
    Model DFE-570TX
    Question What are the minimum hardware and OS requirements for the DFE-570TX?
    Answer The minimum requirements are as follows:
  • PC with 32MB of RAM
  • 2MB of hard drive space
  • Mother board with a 5-volt PCI v2.1 bus mastered slot
  • 4 available unshared IRQ’s
  • Windows NT 4.0 w/Service Pack 3 and NDIS HotFix, or Service Pack 4 with Roll-up HotFix
  • SP5 or higher recommended SNMP Services should be installed
  • Windows 2000 - SNMP Services should be installed
  • NetWare 5.0 with SP4 or NetWare 5.1
    • Model DFE-570TX
    Question What chipset is used on the DFE-570TX?
    Answer The chipset is an Intel 21143 ( older model may have DEC 21143 Digital Equipment Corp.) The chip sets are the same.
    Model DFE-650TX
    Question What if resources are not available?
    Answer Verify there is a free IRQ using the Device Manager. If all resources are in use, disable or remove any unused device to free an IRQ. Once this has been done you can add the adapter back into the system, making sure the card uses a free resource.
    Model DFE-650TX
    Question What if the drivers are not recognized?
    Answer 1. Download the latest drivers from ftp://ftp.dlink.com
    2. Check the Device Manager to verify that the PCMCIA sockets do not have a yellow exclamation mark or red "X."
    3. Run Diagnostics on the card. To run the Diagnostics you will have to restart the computer into Safe Mode Command Prompt Only. Restart the computer. Press F8 on bootup when the message "Starting Windows 95/98" then choose Safe Mode Command Prompt Only. Type in CD A:, with the driver disk in the A: drive, then type CD diag to get to the diag directory. Run the DFCD.exe program to initialize the PCMCIA sockets. This will give the card an IRQ and I/O address. Then run the Diag.exe program. Choose Adapter Diagnostics once you are past the welcome screen. Verify the card passes all tests. Loopback failure is OK since there is no loopback cable connected to the adapter.
    Model DFE-650TX
    Question What if the laptop locks up when installing the DFE-650TX?
    Answer This is usually caused by unavailable resources. Try deleting the PCMCIA sockets in the Device Manager. Then boot up with the adapter in the machine. The PCMCIA sockets should reinstall themselves and then the adapter will be found. If the adapter is not found let the machine reboot. This time it should install the adapter without a problem.
    Model DFE-650TX
    Question What if the coupler light is on when the cable is disconnected?
    Answer This is caused by a defective dongle.

    Please return your adapter to point of purchase or contact our RMA department.
    Model DFE-650TX
    Question What if the card is not recognized?
    Answer 1. Check the PCMCIA Sockets in the Device Manager. Be sure there are no exclamation marks on the adapter and no red "X".
    2. Try a different PCMCIA slot.
    3. The laptop may have a Cardbus (32bit) slot. Most of the time this can be configured for PCMCIA (16bit) cards and should be backward compatible. If other solutions do not work, check the BIOS for a setting to DISABLE Cardbus or set the Cardbus slot to PCMCIA. Then restart the computer.
    Model DFE-650TX
    Question When this card does Full Duplex, is it actually going 200 Mbps?
    Answer Yes it is, though the actual transmissions speeds may vary.
    Model DFE-650TX
    Question Where can I learn more about networking?
    Answer Go to this site http://www.helmig.com/
    Model DFE-650TX
    Question Are there any additional drivers for the DFE-650TX that will work with Windows 2000?
    Answer There were drivers written specifically for Win 2k, however, on some systems these drivers will fail to load. Download the driver files that are referenced below and then use the Update Driver Wizard in Win 2000 to update the drivers.

    Download Drivers Now
    Model DFE-670TXD
    Question How do I install the DFE-670TXD in Windows ME?
    Answer If you are getting a Cannot find win98/dfe670txd.sys error message, follow the steps below.

    Step 1 Double-click on My Computer and go to c:\windows\inf\other. Remove the dlinknet670.inf file. Close window.

    Step 2 Right-click on the My Computer icon on the desktop and select Properties. Click the Device Manager tab. Click on the plus sign next to Network Adapters, highlight the DFE-670TXD, and select Remove. Restart your computer.

    Step 3 When the hardware wizard appears select Specify a Location and browse to the winme folder on the D-Link driver CD. Continue through the wizard and reboot computer when prompted.
    Model DFE-690TXD
    Question How do I install the DFE-690TXD in Windows NT 4.0?
    Answer Windows NT 4.0 is not a plug and Play operating system therefore you must install it manually.

    Step 1 Insert the DFE-690TXD in the computer and boot up. Once Windows is loaded, right-click on Network Neighborhood and select Properties.

    Step 2 Select Adapters and then click Have Disk.

    Step 3 Type in the path to the drivers. Usually you will enter the drive letter of your CD-ROM drive (IE E:/). Click OK.

    Note: There isnīt a browse button, so you are going to need to know the whole path to the driver file (oemsetup.inf).

    Step 4 In the Select Option window, it will list the D-Link DFE-690TXD CardBus PC Card. Click OK.

    Step 5 Windows will ask you the connection type. Select the appropriate connection type (default is Auto-Negotiation).

    Step 6 The drivers should now be installed.

    Step 7 Click on the Bindings tab to save your changes.

    Step 8 Click on Protocols>TCP/IP>Add. This will bind TCP/IP to the DFE-690 adapter.

    Step 9 Once again click on the Bindings tab to save your changes.

    Step 10 Restart your computer.
    Model DFE-690TXD
    Question How do I install my DFE-690TXD in Linux?
    Answer Step 1 Compile the source code (for Kernel 2.2.xx only):

    Copy the source code dfe690.c (ver 1.11a above) to a directory and execute gcc -DCARDBUS -DMODULE -D_KERNEL_ -Wall -Wstrict-prototypes -O6 -c dfe690.c -o dfe690_cb.o -I/usr/src/linux/pcmcia-cs-3.0.9/include/pcmcia/

    Download DFE690.c here

    The directory pcmcia-cs-3.0.9 stands for the card service version you use. Please change it to the version on your system in order to include proper .h file. The final file is dfe690_cb.o.

    Download .h file here

    Step 2 Copy driver :

    Copy the file dfe690_cb.o to /lib/modules/2.2.14-5.0/pcmcia

    The directory 2.2.14-5.0 stands for the Linux kernel version you use.

    Step 3 Edit config:

    Add 5 lines to the file /etc/pcmcia/config

    #
    # Device driver definitions
    #
    device "dfe690_cb" (==>Add 1/5)
    class "network" module "cb_enabler", "dfe690_cb" (==>Add 2/5)
    :
    :

    #
    # CardBus Cards
    #

    card "D-Link DFE-690TXD CardBus PC Card" (==>Add 3/5)
    manfid 0x0149, 0x0000 (==>Add 4/5)
    bind "dfe690_cb" (==>Add 5/5)


    The values 0x0149, 0x0000 are JEDEC ID and can be read by typing "cardctl ident" on console with one card on socket.

    Step 4 Edit linuxconf

    Type linuxconf and choose Config>Networking>Client tasks>Basic host information.

    Select an adapter, enable it, and type "dfe690_cb" on "Kernel module" and "eth0" (or eth1, eth2) on "Net device". Click on Accept button and Act/change button.

    Step 5 Restart the computer.

    Step 6 More information about kernel compile: metalab.unc.edu

  • More information about install: man pcmcia
    • Model DFL-1100
    Question Will the settings on my DFL-1100 be erased when I upgrade the firmware?
    Answer The settings on the DFL-1100 will not be erased when the firmware is upgraded. However, it is recommended to back up the configuration before upgrading the firmware.
    Model DFL-1100
    Question What is High Availability?
    Answer
    What High Availibility Will Do For You

    D-Link High Availability will provide a redundant, state-synchronized firewalling solution. This means that the state of the active firewall, i.e., the connection table and other vital information, is continuously copied to the inactive firewall. When the cluster fails over to the inactive firewall, it knows which connections are active, and communication may continue to flow uninterrupted.

    The failover time is typically about one second; well in the scope for the normal TCP retransmit timeout, which is normally over one minute. Clients connecting through the firewall will merely experience the failover procedure as a slight burst of packet loss, and, as TCP always does in such situations, retransmit the lost packets within a second or two, and go on communicating.

    What High Availability Will Not Do For You

    Adding redundancy to your firewall setup will eliminate one of the single points of failure in your communication path. However, it is not a panacea for all possible communication failures.

    Typically, your firewall is far from the only single point of failure. Redundancy for your routers, switches, and your Internet connection are also issues that need to be addressed.

    D-Link High Availability clusters will not create a load-sharing cluster. One firewall will be active, and the other will be inactive.

    Multiple back-up firewalls cannot be used in a cluster. Only two firewalls, a "master" and a "slave", are supported.

    As is the case with all other firewalls supporting stateful failover, the D-Link High Availability will only work between two D-Link DFL-1100 Firewalls. As the internal workings of different firewalls, and, indeed, different major versions of the same firewall, can be radically different, there is no way of communicating "state" to something which has a completely different comprehension of what "state" means.
    Model DFL-1100 / DFL-200 / DFL-700
    Question How do I configure Windows clients to dial into the firewall over the VPN (PPTP)?
    Answer

    Configuration of DFL-200/700/1100

    Step 1: Make sure the firewall is using at least firmware 1.30 If the firmware is lower than 1.30 download and install the firmware from the support site.



    Step 2: Click on Firewall at the top then VPN on the left hand side.



    Step 3: Click on Add new PPTP Server. Give the server a friendly name, set the client IP pool outside of the DHCP scope, and enable proxy arp. Hit the apply button.



    Step 4: Click on Users on the left hand side.




    Step 5: Click on Add new in the Local User Database.

    Step 6: Create a username and password, then hit apply.





    Step 7: Click on the Activate Changes button in the lower left corner.



    Step 8: Click on the Activate Changes button in the middle of the screen.





    Configuration of Win2k/WinXP PPTP client

    Step 1: Right-click My Network Places and select Properties.



    Step 2: Create a New Connection.



    Step 3: The Network Wizard will appear. Click on Next to continue.



    Step 4: Choose your Network Connection Type (You will be connecting to a private network). Click Next.



    Step 5: Enter the Destination Address. This will be your public IP address found on the Status tab of the DFL.



    Step 6: Select All Users for the Connection Availability and click Next.



    Step 7: Add a shortcut to your desktop and click on Finish.



    Step 8: Enter your Username and Password to connect to the virtual private connection. Click the Connect button to authenticate to the DFL. You will see a balloon pop-up indicating that you have connection.







    Model DFL-1100 / DFL-200 / DFL-700
    Question How do I reset my firewall using a console connection?
    Answer Step 1: Click Start > Run and type hypertrm in the Run window. Press Enter.

    Run

    Step 2: Below Name enter a name for the new connection and click OK.

    New Connection

    Step 3: Next to Connect using select the COM port that the firewall is connected to the computer. Click OK.

    Select COM port

    Step 4: Configure the connection as followed:
    • Bits per second: 9600
    • Data bits: 8
    • Parity: None
    • Stop bits: 1
    • Flow control: None
    Click OK.

    Port Settings

    Step 5: When a connection is established to the firewall type shutdown next to Cmd> and press Enter.

    Reboot Firewall

    Step 6: After the firewall reboots, there is a timer to prevent the firewall from starting. Press any key to abort and load the boot menu.

    Boot menu

    Step 7: Enter 2 and Y to reset the firewall to factory defaults.

    Reset and Confirm

    Step 8: Enter 1 to start the firewall.

    Start Firewall

    Note: The default IP address of the firewall will be 192.168.1.1 after resetting it to factory defaults.
    Model DFL-1100 / DFL-300 / DFL-700 / DFL-80 / DI-804HV / DI-808HV / DI-824VUP
    Question What is NAT Traversal and which D-Link VPN products support it?
    Answer NAT traversal refers to the common problem in TCP/IP networking of establishing connections between hosts in private TCP/IP networks which use NAT devices

    Client-based IPsec VPN connections often do not work when passing through a NAT device as the IKE and IPsec protocols were not designed to work through NAT. NAT Traversal is an add-on to the IKE and IPsec protocols that allows them to work when being NATed.

    NAT traversal is only used if both endpoints support it. D-Link products that currently support NAT traversal include the DFL-200, DFL-700 and DFL-1100.

    Note: The DFL-80 and DFL-300 does not support NAT traversal.
    Model DFL-1600 / DFL-210 / DFL-800
    Question How do I configure port mapping using additional public IP addresses on the WAN port?
    Answer This FAQ will demonstrate adding a second public IP address to the WAN Port and then mapping it to a computer that has the remote desktop service running.

    Step 1: Open the web browser and type the IP address of the router into address bar (default is 192.168.1.1) and press Enter.

    Step 2: Click on the plus sign next to Objects, select Address Book, and then select Interface Addresses.

    Step 3: Click on Add and then select IP address from the dropdown menu and configure the IP address as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (private_ip in this example)
    • IP Address: enter the IP address of computer that have remote desktop service running
    Click on OK.



    Step 4: Click on Add and select IP address from the dropdown menu, and configure the IP address as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (public_ip in this example)
    • IP Address: enter the public IP address to be added
    Click on OK.



    Step 5: Click on the plus sign next to Interfaces, select ARP, click on Add to add an ARP entry and configure the ARP entry as followed:
    • Mode: Publish
    • Interface: wan
    • IP Address: click on the dropdown menu and select public folder created in step #4
    Click on OK.



    Step 6: Click on the plus sign next to Rules, select IP Rules, click on Add, and then select IP Rule Folder from the dropdown menu.



    Step 7: Name the IP Rule Folder as desired and then click on OK.



    Step 8: Click on Add and select IP Rule from the dropdown menu, and configure the IP rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: SAT
    • Service: rdp
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: any
    • Source network: all-nets
    • Destination interface: any
    • Destination network: public_ip (created in step 4)


    Step 9: Click on the SAT tab and then click on the dropdown menu under New IP Address, selecting private_ip (Created in step 3).
    • Check the box labeled All-to-One Mapping: rewrite all destination IPs to a single IP
    Click on OK.



    Step 10: Click on Add and create another IP Rule as configure it as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: rdp
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: any
    • Source network: all-nets
    • Destination interface: any
    • Destination network: public_ip (created in step 4)
    Click on OK.



    Step 11: Click on Configuration and then select Save and Activate from the dropdown menu. Click on OK to activate your changes.

    Model DFL-1600 / DFL-210 / DFL-800
    Question What does it mean if I see a Default_Access_Rule drop notice in the log message?
    Answer The traffic is dropped by the Default_Access_Rule which means that the source network isnīt routed on the lan interface.

    Set Section Rules/Access to allow the dropped network xxx.xxx.x.x/24 so the system will accept it as a sender address.
    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question How do I block access to web sites using the Content Filtering feature on the DFL-200/700/1100?
    Answer Note: This FAQ will demonstrate setting up Content Filtering to restrict computers on the LAN from accessing msn.com (all re-direction pages of msn.com) and yahoo.com (all-re-direction pages of yahoo.com).

    Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall into the address bar (default address is http://192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: Enter your username and password (By default the username is admin). Click on OK.

    Step 3: Click on Firewall and then select Content Filtering on the lefthand side.



    Step 4: Click on Edit the URL Blacklist to open it and then configure it as follows:

    • Asterisk, dot, msn.com, forward slash, asterisk (*.msn.com/*)
    • Asterisk, msn.com, forward slash, asterisk (*msn.com/*)
    • Asterisk, dot, yahoo.com, forward slash, asterisk (*.yahoo.com/*)
    • Asterisk, yahoo.com, forward slash, asterisk (*yahoo.com/*)
    Note: There are two entries for each URL.

    Click on Apply to save your settings.



    Step 5: Click on Firewall, select Policy, and then select LAN-WAN policy.



    Step 6: Click on Add New to create a new policy as follows:
    • Name: Name as desired
    • Position: 1
    • Action: Allow
    • Source Nets: Leave blank
    • Destination Nets: Leave blank
    • Service: http-outbound
    • Schedule: Always
    Click on Apply to save your settings.



    Step 7: Click the Activate button on the lefthand side.



    Step 8: Click on Activate Changes to activate your settings changes.



    Step 9: Open another web browser and type http://www.msn.com into the address bar. If your firewall is configured correctly as per this FAQ, the screen should come up as shown in the following picture.

    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question I have multiple public IP addresses. How do I configure them on the WAN Port of the DFL-200/700/1100 to allow services to work behind the LAN/DMZ port with private IP addresses?
    Answer Note: This FAQ will demonstrate adding a second public IP address to the WAN Port and then mapping it to a web server running on port 80 (http) on the LAN port with a private IP address of 192.168.1.10.

    Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall into the address bar (default address is http://192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: Enter the username and password (By default the username is admin). Click on OK.

    Step 3: Click on System, select Routing, and then click on Add New.



    Step 4: Create a new route for an additional public IP address on the WAN Port as followed:

    • Interface: LAN
    • Network: enter the public IP address that you want to add
    • Subnet Mask: click on the dropdown menu and select 255.255.255.255-1 Host[/32]
    • Proxy ARP: check the box to enable
    Click on Apply.

    Note: Repeat step 4 to add another public IP address.



    Step 5: Click on Edit for both existing WANīs routes, check the box to enable Proxy ARP, and then click on Apply. Repeat the same procedure to enable Proxy ARP in the second existing WAN route.



    Step 6: Click on Firewall, select Port Mapping and then click on Add New.



    Step 7: Create a new port mapping entry as followed:

    • Name: name as desired
    • Source Nets: leave this blank
    • Destination IP: enter the second public IP address that you created in step 4
    • Service: click on the dropdown menu and select the appropriate services
    • Pass To: enter the private IP address of a server on the LAN port (in this case, 192.168.1.10)
    Click on Apply.



    Step 8: Click on the Activate and Activate Changes to save your settings.

    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question How do I configure full PPTP VPN tunneling in DFL-200/700/1100 to allow PPTP clients to browse internet and remote networks after established PPTP VPN connection?
    Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall in the address bar (192.168.0.1 by default). Press Enter.

    Step 2: Enter the username (admin by default) and password (no password is set by default). Click OK.

    Step 3: Click on the Firewall tab and select VPN. Under L2TP/PPTP Server, select Add new PPTP server.



    Step 4: Configure the VPN as followed:
      Add PPTP tunnel
    • Name: enter a name as desired

      IP Pool and settings
    • Client IP Pool: enter a range of IP addresses, not conflicting with the DHCP range of the LAN interface.

      Authentication protocol
    • No authentication: unchecked by default
    • PAP: checked by default
    • CHAP: checked by default
    • MSCHAP: checked by default
    • MSCHAPv2: checked by default

    • MPPE encryption
    • None (Unencrypted): unchecked by default
    • 40Bit: checked by default
    • 56Bit: checked by default
    • 128Bit: checked by default
    Click Apply.



    Step 5: Click on the Firewall tab and select Policy. Click on Global policy parameters.



    Step 6: Uncheck the box labeled Allow all VPN traffic: internal->VPN,VPN->internal and VPN->VPN, and click Apply.



    Step 7: After unchecking the Global policy parameters the Custom policy option will become available.



    Step 8: Select LAN -> pptp from the dropdown menu and click Show.



    Step 9: Click Add new and configure the Firewall Policy rule as followed:

    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Source Nets: enter the source network or leave blank for īany netī
    • Destination Nets: enter the destination network or leave blank for īany netī
    • Service: All
    • Schedule: Always
    Click Apply.



    Step 10: Click on the Firewall tab and select Policy. In Custom policy select pptp -> LAN and click Show.



    Step 11: Click Add new and configure the Firewall Policy rule as followed:

    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Source Nets: enter the source network or leave blank for īany netī
    • Destination Nets: enter the destination network or leave blank for īany netī
    • Service: All
    • Schedule: Always
    Click Apply.



    Step 12: Click on the Firewall tab and select Policy. In Custom policy select pptp -> WAN and click Show.



    Step 13: Select the radio button Hide source addresses (many-to-one NAT) and click Apply.



    Step 14: Click Add new and configure the Firewall Policy rule as followed:

    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Source Nets: enter the source network or leave blank for īany netī
    • Destination Nets: enter the destination network or leave blank for īany netī
    • Service: All
    • Schedule: Always
    Click Apply.



    Step 15: Click on the Firewall tab and select Users.



    Step 16: Under Users in local database click Add new.



    Step 17: Configure the PPTP user as followed:
    • User name: enter a username
    • Password: enter a password for user
    • Retype password: re-enter a password for the user
    Click Apply.



    Step 18: Click Activate and Activate Changes to activate the settings.



    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question How do I configure the DFL-200/700/1100 for the remote users to authenticate to the DFL using HTTP and HTTPS before they can gain access to the web/mail server behind the DFL-200/700/1100?
    Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall in the address bar (default address is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: Enter username and password (By default the username is admin). Click OK.

    Step 3: Click the System tab and select Administration on the left. Under the Management web GUI port, change the default HTTP port and HTTPS port to other ports (example 800 and 4433). Click the Apply button.



    Step 4: Click the Firewall tab and select Users on the left, check the box labeled Enable User Authentication via HTTP / HTTPS. Click Apply.



    Step 5: Under the Users in the local database, on the bottom of the page, select Add new.

    Step 6: Configure the user as followed:
    • Name: name new user as desired
    • Password: create password for user
    • Retype password: retype password to confirm
    Note: If you want to put users in the group then you will also enter the group name in the box labeled Group membership.

    Step 7: Click on the Firewall tab, select Port Mapping on the left, and click Add new.



    Step 8: Configure Port Mapping entry as followed below:

  • Name: Name as desired
  • Users/groups: Enter username or group name that created in step 6
  • Service: Select appropriate service by clicking the service drop-down menu
  • Pass to: Enter the LAN IP of computer on the LAN
    Click Apply.



    Step 9: Click the Activate button to save the settings.

    Step 10: Click Activate Changes to activate the settings.

    Note: In order for remote users to authenticate to the web/mail server, the remote users will have to authenticate to the DFL first by entering the public IP address of the DFL-200/700/1100 in the web browser address bar before they can gain access to the web/mail server services.
    • Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question How do I create a custom service on my DFL-200/700/1100?
    Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DFL-700 in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.

    Step 3: Click the Firewall tab and then click Services to the left.

    Step 4: Click on Add new at the bottom of the screen.

    Step 5: Next to Name type a name to identify this service.

    Step 6: Select the type of service (TCP/UDP Service, ICMP Echo (Ping), IP Protocol, or Group) using the radio buttons.

    Note: When selecting TCP/UDP Service, select the protocol type (TCP or UDP) and enter the port for this custom service in the Destination Ports, the Source Ports should leave it blank.



    Step 7: Click Apply.

    Step 8: Click the Firewall tab then click Activate on the bottom left hand corner of the screen to apply all changes.

    Step 9: Click Activate Changes to restart the DFL-700 with the new settings.

    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question I have multiple public IP addresses. How do I configure my DFL-200/700/1100 to allow the services to work behind the DMZ port with public IP address?
    Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Enter the username (admin) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

    Step 2: Click System and then click Interfaces on the left. Click Edit next to DMZ.



    Step 3: Enter the public IP address you wish to use next to IP Address. Select the appropriate subnet mask of 255.255.255.255 - 1 host(/32) next to Subnet Mask. Click Apply.



    Step 4: Click System and then Routing on the left. Click Add new to add a new route for DMZ.



    Step 5: Configure the route as followed:

  • Interface: select DMZ
  • Network: enter the public IP address to be assigned to the server behind the DMZ port
  • Subnet Mask: select 255.255.255.255 - 1 host(/32)
  • Proxy ARP: select Publish network on all other interfaces via Proxy ARP



    Step 6: Click Apply.

    Step 7: Click on the System tab and select Routing on the left.

    Step 8: Click Edit to edit the existing route for the WAN interface.

    Step 9: Select Proxy ARP: Publish network on all other interfaces via Proxy ARP and then click Apply.



    Note: It is important to enable Proxy ARP on both routes WAN and DMZ to allow the firewall to respond to the public IP address behind the DMZ port.

    Step 10: Click Firewall and then click Policy on the left.

    Step 11: Select DMZ->WAN, then select No NAT, required public IP addresses on DMZ network and then click Apply.



    Step 12: Click Firewall and then click on Policy on the left.

    Step 13: Click WAN->DMZ and then click Add new to create a new inbound policies.



    Step 14 Configure the WAN->DMZ policy as followed:

  • Name: name as desired
  • Action: Allow
  • Source Nets: leave blank (nothing)
  • Destination Nets: enter the public IP address that will be assigned to the server behind the DMZ port
  • Service: select the appropriate service for the server



    Step 15: Click Apply.

    Step 16: Click Activate on the left to activate changes.



    Step 17: Click Activate Changes.



    Step 18: On the server behind the DMZ port, assign the same static public IP address as in step 5 and enter appropriate subnet mask and gateway information (Gateway IP address of the server should be the same as the gateway IP address on the DMZ interface settings of the DFL-700/200/1100).
    • Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question Why will the DMZ port on my firewall work with the default IP address of 127.0.0.1?
    Answer 127.0.0.1 is an IP address which loops to your computer. The LAN IP address of the DMZ port has to be changed to something other than 127.0.0.1. Otherwise, the DMZ feature of your firewall will not work.
    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DFL-200/700/1100 firewall?
    Answer WARNING: DO NOT UPGRADE THE FIRMWARE OF THE DFL FIREWALL OVER A WIRELESS CONNECTION. DOING SO MAY DAMAGE THE UNIT.

    Step 1: Download the firmware and save the file to your computer. You may want to save the file to your desktop. Do not try to run or launch the file - it will not work.

    Step 2: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 3: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.

    Step 4: Click the Tools tab at the top and then click Upgrade on the left.



    Step 5: Under Upgrade unitīs firmware click on Browse... and navigate to the .img file you downloaded in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click Open. Click Upload firmware image. It will take a few seconds for the upgrade to complete. When prompted, click Continue.

    Step 6: After the firewall reboots, close your web browser and re-open it. Enter the IP address of the firewall (default is 192.168.1.1) to reconnect with the web-based configuration. Enter username admin and password admin. Click OK. The firmware upgrade is now complete.

    Step 7: You can now reconfigure the firewall.
    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question How do I upgrade the IDS signature file on my DFL-200/700/1100 firewall?
    Answer The Intrusion Detection System (IDS) signature file is used to identify attacks that use "signatures" in order to detect patterns of misuse in network traffic.

    Step 1: Please visit http://support.dlink.com/downloads/ and download the latest IDS signature file.

    Step 2: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 3: The default username is admin (all lower case) and there is no default password. Click OK.

    Step 4: Click the Tools tab at the top and then click Upgrade on the left.



    Step 5: In the Upgrade unitīs signature-database section click Browse and navigate to the location where you saved the IDS signature file.

    Step 6: Click Upload signature database.
    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question How do I read the log on my DFL-200/700/1100?
    Answer
    How to Read the Logs

    Although the exact format of each log entry depends on how your syslog recipient works, most are very much alike. The way in which logs are read is also dependent on how your syslog recipient works. Syslog daemons on UNIX servers usually log to text files, line by line.

    Most syslog recipients preface each log entry with a timestamp and the IP address of the machine that sent the log data:

    Oct 20 2003 09:45:23 gateway
    This is followed by the text the sender has chosen to send. All log entries from the firewall are prefaced with "EFW:" and a category, e.g. "DROP:"

    Oct 20 2003 09:45:23 gateway EFW: DROP:
    Subsequent text is dependent on the event that has occurred.

    USAGE Events

    These events are sent periodically and provide statistical information regarding connections and amount of traffic.

    Example:

    Oct 20 2003 09:45:23 gateway EFW: USAGE: conns=1174 if0=core ip0=127.0.0.1 tp0=0.00 if1=wan ip1=192.168.10.2 tp1=11.93 if2=lan ip2=192.168.0.1 tp2=13.27 if3=dmz ip3=192.168.1.1 tp3=0.99
    The value after conns is the number of open connections through the firewall when the usage log was sent. The value after tp is the throughput through the firewall at the time the usage log was logged.

    DROP Events

    These events may be generated by a number of different functions in the firewall. The most common source is probably the policies.

    Example:

    Oct 20 2003 09:42:25 gateway EFW: DROP: prio=1 rule=Rule_1 action=drop recvif=wan srcip=192.168.10.2 destip=192.168.0.1 ipproto=TCP ipdatalen=28 srcport=3572 destport=135 tcphdrlen=28 syn=1
    In this line, traffic from 192.168.10.2 coming from the WAN side of the firewall, connecting to 192.168.10.1 on port 135 is dropped. The protocol used is TCP.

    CONN Events

    These events are generated if auditing has been enabled.

    One event will be generated when a connection is established. This event will include information about protocol, receiving interface, source IP address, source port, destination interface, destination IP address and destination port.

    Open Example:

    Oct 20 2003 09:47:56 gateway EFW: CONN: prio=1 rule=Rule_8 conn=open connipproto=TCP connrecvif=lan connsrcip=192.168.0.10 connsrcport=3179 conndestif=wan conndestip=64.7.210.132 conndestport=80
    In this line, traffic from 192.168.0.10 on the LAN interface is connecting to 64.7.210.132 on port 80 on the WAN side of the firewall (Internet).

    Another event is generated when the connection is closed. The information included in the event is the same as in the event sent when the connection was opened, with the exception that statistics regarding sent and received traffic is also included.

    Close Example:

    Oct 20 2003 09:48:05 gateway EFW: CONN: prio=1 rule=Rule_8 conn=close connipproto=TCP connrecvif=lan connsrcip=192.168.0.10 connsrcport=3179 conndestif=wan conndestip=64.7.210.132 conndestport=80 origsent=62 termsent=60
    In this line, the connection in the other example is closed.
    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question How do I configure a VPN tunnel between my DFL-200/700/1100 and Windows 2000/XP IPSec?
    Answer This FAQ prints out as 49 pages.

    Note: You are required to understand your network and Windows 2000/XP for this configuration. Please consult a Microsoft certified professional if you are unsure. The information provided here is for your reference only. D-Link will not be held liable for any damage that may arise from it.

    DFL-200/DFL-700/DFL-1100 Configuration


    Note: Win 2000K/XP clients must have public IP address in order to establish the IPSec connection.



    Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and there is no default password. Click OK.

    Step 3: Click on the Firewall tab and then click VPN to the left.



    Step 4: Click on Add new.



    Step 5 Enter the following details:

    • Name: roaming_user
    • Local Net:192.168.1.0/24
    • Authentication: PSK (Also, enter your pre-shared key in the text boxes.)
    • Tunnel Type: Roaming Users


    Step 6: Click Apply to save the settings.

    The new VPN profile is now added.



    Step 7: Click on Activate on the bottom left hand corner of the screen to apply the changes.



    Step 8: Click Activate Changes to reboot the firewall with the new settings.

    Top of Section
    Top of Page


    Windows 2000/XP Configuration


    Step 1: Click Start > Run. Type mmc in the Run window. Click OK.



    Microsoft Management Console will appear.



    Step 2: In the Console1 window add a new snap-in using the directions below for your operating system:

    Windows 2000 - Click Console > Add/Remove Snap-in

    Windows XP - Click File > Add/Remove Snap-in

    Step 3: In the Add/Remove Snap-in window click Add.



    Step 4: In the Add Standalone Snap-in window left-click IP Security Policy Management once to select it. Click Add.



    Step 5: In the Select Computer or Domain window select Local Computer using the radio buttons. Click Finish.



    Step 6: In the Add Standalone Snap-in window click Close.



    Step 7: In the Add/Remove Snap-in window click OK.



    Step 8: In the Console1 window right-click on IP Security Policies on Local Machine in Windows 2000 or IP Security Policies on Local Computer in Windows XP and select Create IP Security Policy from the drop-down menu.



    Step 9: In the IP Security Policy Wizard window click Next.



    Step 10: Enter DFL-200, DFL-700 or DFL-1100 Network to Single User Properties next to Name and enter a description for the new policy. Click Next.



    Step 11: Uncheck the Activate the default response rule checkbox. Click Next.



    Step 12: Make sure that the Edit Properties checkbox is checked. Click Finish.



    Step 13: In the DFL-200, DFL-700 or DFL-1100 Network to Single User Properties window uncheck the Use Add Wizard checkbox. Click Add.



    Step 14: In the New Rules Properties window click Add under the IP Filter List tab.



    Step 15: In the IP Filter List windows enter Left(DFL-200, DFL-700 or DFL-1100) to Right (Single User) next to Name and a description for the new IP Filter List. Uncheck the Use Add Wizard checkbox. Click Add.



    Step 16: In the Filter Properties window select A specific IP Subnet using the drop-down box below Source address. Next to IP Address enter the netmask and next to Subnet Mask enter the subnet mask for the LAN interface of the DFL-200/DFL-700/DFL-1100. Select My IP Address using the drop-down box below Destination address. Uncheck the Mirrored. Also match packets with the exact opposite source and destination addresses check box. Click OK.



    Step 17: In the IP Filter List window click Close in Windows 2000 or OK in Windows XP.



    Step 18: In the New Rule Properties window select the newly created IP Filter, Left(DFL-200, DFL-700 or DFL-1100) to Right(Single..., using the radio buttons.



    Step 19: Click on the Filter Action tab. Select Require Security using the radio buttons. Click Edit.



    Step 20: In the Require Security Properties window left-click on the 3DES/MD5 security method once to select it. Click Move up to the left until the 3DES/MD5 security method is listed at the top. Check the Session key Perfect Forward Secrecy checkbox and then click OK.



    Step 21: In the New Rule Properties window click on the Connection Type tab. Select All network connections using the radio buttons.



    Step 22: Click on the Tunnel Setting tab. Select The tunnel endpoint is specified by this IP Address using the radio buttons. Enter the tunnel endpoint as the Windows 2000 or Windows XP client IP address (10.0.0.2 in this example).



    Step 23: Click on the Authentication Methods tab. Left-click on Kerberos once to select it. Click Edit to the left.



    Step 24: In the Edit Authentication Method Properties window select Use this string to protect the key exchange (preshared key) using the radio buttons. Type the preshared key that you specified in Step 5 of the DFL-200/DFL-700/DFL-1100 Configuration section of this FAQ. Click OK.



    Step 25: In the New Rule Properties window click Close.



    Step 26: In the DFL-200, DFL-700 or DFL-1100 to Single User Properties window uncheck the Use Add Wizard checkbox. Left-click on the newly created rule, Left(DFL-200, DFL-700 or DFL-1100) to R..., once to select it, and then click Add.



    Step 27: In the New Rule Properties window click Add under IP Filter Lists.



    Step 28: In the IP Filter List window enter Right(Single User) to Left(DFL-200, DFL-700 or DFL-1100) next to Name and a description for the new IP filter list. Uncheck the Use Add Wizard checkbox, and then click Add.



    Step 29: In the Filter Properties window select My IP Address using the drop-down box under Source address. Select A specified IP Subnet using the drop-down box under Destination address. Enter the netmask next to IP Address and the subnet mask next to Subnet Mask for the LAN interface of the DFL-200/DFL-700/DFL-1100. Uncheck the Mirrored. Also match packets with the exact opposite source and destination addresses checkbox, and then click OK.



    Step 30: In the IP Filter List window click OK.



    Step 31: In the New Rule Properties window select the newly created IP filter, Right(Single User) to Left(DFL-200, DFL-700 or DFL-1100..., using the radio buttons.



    Step 32: Click on the Filter Action tab. Select Require Security using the radio buttons. You do not need to click Edit.



    Step 33: Click on the Connection Type tab. Select All network connections using the radio buttons.



    Step 34: Click on the Tunnel Setting tab. Select The tunnel endpoint is specified by this IP address using the radio buttons. Enter the tunnel endpoint as the WAN IP address of the DFL-200/DFL-700/DFL-1100 (10.0.0.1 in this example).



    Step 35: Click on the Authentication Methods tab. Left-click on Kerberos once to select it. Click Edit to the left.



    Step 36: In the Edit Authentication Method Properties window select Use this string to protect the key exchange (preshared key) using the radio buttons. Type the preshared key that you specified in Step 5 of the DFL-200/DFL-700/DFL-1100 Configuration section of this FAQ. Click OK.



    Step 37: In the New Rule Properties window click Close.



    Step 38: In the DFL-200, DFL-700 or DFL-1100 Network to Single User Properties window make sure that the check boxes next to Right(Single User)... and Left(DFL-200, DFL-700 or DFL-1100) to R... are checked. If not click on the check boxes by them to check them. Click Close.



    Step 39: In the DFL-200, DFL-700 or DFL-1100 Network to Single User Properties window click on the General tab. Click Advanced below Key Exchange using these settings.



    Step 40: In the Key Exchange Settings window check the Master key (Perfect Forward Secrecy check box. Click Methods below Protect identities with these security methods.



    Step 41: In the Key Exchange Security Methods window, left-click the IKE/3DES/MD5 security method once to select it. Click Move up to the left until the IKE/3DES/MD5 security method is listed at the top. When you are finished click OK.



    Step 42: In the Key Exchange Settings window click OK.



    Step 43: In the DFL-200, DFL-700 or DFL-1100 Network to Single User Properties window click Close.



    Step 44: In the Console1 window right-click on the new policy, DFL-200, DFL-700 or DFL-1100 Network to Single User, and select Assign from the drop-down menu to activate the policy.



    Step 45: Ping the internal LAN IP address on the DFL-200/DFL-700/DFL-1100 side (192.168.1.3 in this example) in the DOS prompt. It will then start Negotiating IP security and eventually you will get a reply.



    Top of Section
    Top of Page


    IP Security Monitor

    In Windows 2000 Professional, you can monitor the IPSec tunnels that your have by running IPSECMON.EXE in Start > Run. For more information on IPSec Monitor in Windows 2000 Professional, go to http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;231587.

    In Windows XP, you can add a snap-in in the MMC called IP Security Monitor.

    Step 1: In the MMC, click File > Add/Remove Snap-in.

    Step 2: In the Add/Remove Snap-in window click Add.

    Step 3: In the Add Standalone Snap-in window left-click on IP Security Monitor once to select it. Click Add.



    Step 4: In the Add/Remove Snap-in window click OK.



    Step 5: You computer will automatically be added to the IP Security Monitor snap-in for monitoring. If your computer is not listed, or you would like to monitor other computers, right-click on IP Security Monitor and select Add Computer from the drop-down menu.



    Step 6: In the Add Computer window select either This Computer or The Following Computer using the radio buttons. If you select The Following Computer you must then specify the IP address or computer name (if local). Click OK.

    The computer will now be listed under IP Security Monitor.



    Step 7: Right-click once on the computer that you want to monitor to select it. Right-click and select Statistics from the drop-down menu.



    The statistics for that computer will be listed in the IP Security Statistics window.



    Note: If you make any changes to the IPSec policy, you will need to Restart IPSec Policy Agent in Windows 2000 or IPSec Services in Windows XP in the Services Snap-in.

    Top of Section
    Top of Page

    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question How do I perform a factory reset on my DFL-200/700/1100?
    Answer Note: The DFL-1100 can only be reset using a console connection and via the web-based configuration.

    You can perform a factory reset using any of the three methods listed below:

    Reset Button


    To perform a factory reset using the reset button do the following:

    Step 1: Make sure that the DFL-200/DFL-700 is on.

    Step 2: Press and hold the button located on the back of the DFL-200/DFL-700 below the word Reset using a paper clip for 10 seconds.



    Step 3: Release the button.

    Web Configuration


    To preform a factory reset using the web-based configuration do the following:

    Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DFL-200/DFL-700/DFL-1100 in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and there is no default password. Click OK.

    Step 3: Click the Tools tab then click Reset to the left.



    Step 4: Below Restore to factory defaults click Restore to Factory Defaults.

    Note: On the next start up, the LAN IP address will be 192.168.1.1, and the web GUI will begin with the Setup Wizard. The DFL-200/DFL-700/DFL-1100 will not accept connections on any interface other than the LAN interface.

    Console Connection


    To perform a factory reset using a console connection do the following:

    Step 1: Connect one end of the supplied serial cable to the DFL-200/DFL-700/DFL-1100 and connect the other end to your PC. If a serial cable did not come with your DFL-200/DFL-700/DFL-1100 then contact Tech Support.

    Step 2: Run HyperTerminal from Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > HyperTerminal.

    Step 3: On the Connection Description window, enter a name for this connection. Click OK.

    Step 4: On the Connect To window, select the COM port that the serial cable is connected to using the drop-down box next to Connect Using. Click OK.

    Step 5: On the COMX Properties (X represents the COM port number) window, select the following settings using the drop-down boxes:

    • Bits per second - 9600
    • Data bits - 8
    • Parity - None
    • Stop bits - 1
    • Flow control - Hardware
    Click OK.

    You will now see a blank screen which shows Connected at the bottom left hand corner of the screen.

    Step 6: Power off for 5 seconds and then power on the DFL-200/DFL-700/DFL-1100.

    Step 7: You will now see the screen below. Press any key on your keyboard to load the boot menu.

    Step 8: At the Boot Menu screen select 1. Reset unit to factory defaults by pressing 1 on your keyboard. Press Enter.

    Step 9: When prompted, press Y then press Enter to reset the DFL-200/DFL-700/DFL-1100 back to factory defaults.
    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question Why are my new settings not saved on my DFL-200/700/1100?
    Answer When a change is made to the configuration, the Activate button will appear. When all changes have been made, click Activate > Activate Changes. The firewall will save the configuration, reboot, and then new changes will take effect.



    Note: For the change to become permanent, the admin needs to log in again. This needs to be done before the timeout has been reached.
    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question How do I configure an IPSec VPN tunnel between two DFL-200/700/1100?
    Answer Note: This example will demonstrate how to configure a LAN-to-LAN IPSec VPN tunnel between two DFL-200/700/1100.

    In this example:
    Local Network is on 192.168.1.0/24
    Remote Network is on 192.168.2.0/24


    Configuration of DFL-200/700/1100 A

    Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and there is no default password. Click OK

    Step 3: Click on the Firewall tab and then click VPN to the left.



    Step 4: Click Add new.



    Step 5: Configure the VPN tunnel as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Local Net: 192.168.1.0/24
    • Authentication: PSK
    • Pre-shared key: dlinktest

      Tunnel type
    • LAN-to-LAN tunnel: select to enable
    • Remote Net: 192.168.2.0/24
    • Remote Gateway: 195.74.119.181


    Step 6: Click Apply to save the settings.

    Step 7: Click Edit to the right of the newly created profile.



    Step 8: Click Advanced and configure the policy as followed:

    • IKE Mode: Main mode IKE
    • IKE DH Group: 2 - modp 1024-bit
    • PFS: Enable Perfect Forward Secrecy
    • NAT Transversal: On if supported and needed (NAT detected between gateways)


    Step 9: Click Apply to save the settings.

    Step 10: Click Activate on the bottom left hand corner of the screen.



    Step 11: Click on Activate Changes to apply the settings.


    Configuration of DFL-200/700/1100 B

    Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and there is no default password. Click OK

    Step 3: Click on the Firewall tab and then click VPN to the left.



    Step 4: Click Add new.



    Step 5: Configure the VPN tunnel as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Local Net: 192.168.2.0/24
    • Authentication: PSK
    • Pre-shared key: dlinktest

      Tunnel type
    • LAN-to-LAN tunnel: select to enable
    • Remote Net: 192.168.1.0/24
    • Remote Gateway: 195.74.119.180


    Step 6: Click Apply to save the settings.



    Step 7: Click Edit to the right of the newly created profile.



    Step 8: Click Advanced and configure the following:
    • IKE Mode: Main mode IKE
    • IKE DH Group: 2 - modp 1024-bit
    • PFS: Enable Perfect Forward Secrecy
    • NAT Transversal: On if supported and needed (NAT detected between gateways)


    Step 9: Click Apply to save the settings.

    Step 10: Click Activate on the bottom left hand corner of the screen.



    Step 11: Click on Activate Changes to apply the settings.

    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question How do I limit Internet access to web browsing (HTTP) and email only but block the rest of the traffic?
    Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and there is no default password. Press Enter.

    Step 3: Click the Firewall tab and then click Policy.



    Step 4: Click on the LAN->WAN option.



    Step 5: The firewall has 4 default LAN->WAN rules available. Leave the drop_smb-policy as it is because that policy only drops outgoing NetBIOS packets.



    Step 6: Click Edit next to Rule #2.



    Step 7: Scroll to the bottom of the page and check Delete this rule. Click Apply to save the settings. Repeat for Rules #3 and #4.



    Step 8: Next, you will need to create a policy that will allow allow DNS, which is needed to resolve domain names to IP addresses. Click the Firewall tab and then click Policy to the left.



    Step 9: Click on the LAN->WAN policy option.



    Step 10: Click on Add new.



    Step 11: Enter the following details:

    1. Name - allow_dns
    2. Action - Allow
    3. Service - dns-all
    4. Schedule - - Always -



    Step 12: Click Apply to save the settings.

    Repeat Steps 8-12 and create 3 more policies with the following settings:

    Policy 2 will allow HTTP requests.

    1. Name - allow_http
    2. Action - Allow
    3. Service - http-all
    4. Schedule - - Always -



    Policy 3 will allow SMTP requests.

    1. Name - allow_smtp
    2. Action - Allow
    3. Service - smtp
    4. Schedule - - Always -



    Policy 4 will allow POP3 requests.

    1. Name - allow_pop3
    2. Action - Allow
    3. Service - pop3
    4. Schedule - - Always -



    Step 13: Click Activate on the bottom left hand corner of the screen to apply all changes.



    Step 14: Click Activate Changes to reboot the firewall with the new settings.
    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question How do I use the Port Mapping feature on my DFL-200/700/1100?
    Answer This FAQ will demonstrate setting up Port Mapping for a web server running on port 80 (http) on the DMZ port with a private IP address of 10.0.0.2.

    Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and there is no default password. Click OK.

    Step 3: Click the Firewall tab and then click Port Mapping.



    Step 4: Click on Add new.



    Step 5: Configure the following for the new entry:

    1. Name - webserver
    2. Service - http-in
    3. Pass To - 10.0.0.2



    Step 6: Click Apply to save the settings.

    The new port mapping entry will show under the configured mappings.



    Step 7: Click Activate on the bottom left hand corner to apply all changes.



    Step 8: Click on Activate Changes to reboot the firewall with the new settings.
    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question How do I save/load the configuration of my DFL-200/700/1100?
    Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.

    Step 3: Click the Tools tab and then click Backup.



    Step 4: Under Backup unitīs configuration click the Download configuration button and save the backup.pkg file to any location on your computer.

    To load the configuration file, click Browse... under Restore unitīs configuration. Navigate to the backup.pkg file and select it by left-clicking it once. Once highlighted click OK and then click Upload configuration to complete the process.

    NOTE: Do not upload a configuration file that was saved using a different verson of firmware. Doing so may not work.
    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100 / DFL-80 / DFL-300
    Question How do I establish an IPSec VPN tunnel between a DFL-200/700/1100 and a DFL-80/300?
    Answer Configuration of DFL 200/700/1100

    Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall into the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and there is no default password. Click OK.

    Step 3: Select the Firewall tab and click on VPN to the left.



    Step 4: Click on Add new under IPsec Tunnels.



    Step 5: Create the IPsec tunnel as followed:

    • Name: name as desired (test in this example)
    • Local Net: the local area network (192.168.1.0/24 in this example)
    • PSK: enter the preshared key (must match with the DFL-300)
    • Retype PSK: retype the preshared key to avoid mistakes
    • Remote Net: the remote network (192.168.5.0/24 in this example)
    • Remote Gateway: enter the gateway of the remote side (12.130.125.123 in this example)




    Click Apply.

    Step 6: Click on Activate.



    Step 7: Click on Activate Changes.



    Note: Please wait until a success page appears.




    Configuration of DFL-80/300

    Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall into the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and there is default password. Click OK.

    Step 3: Click on VPN, select IPSec Autokey and click New Entry.



    Step 4: Configure the IPSec VPN tunnel as followed:
    • Name: name as desired (test in this example)
    • Source Subnet/Mask: enter the local network(192.168.5.0/255.255.255.0 in this example)
    • Destination Remote Gateway--Fixed IP: enter the gateway of the DFL-200 (12.130.125.123 in this example)
    • Preshared Key: enter the preshared key (must match with DFL-200)


    Click OK.



    Note: If the VPN tunnel does not establish right away send a Ping request to the gateway or PC on the remote side.
    Model DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100 / DS-601 / DS-605
    Question How do I configure the DS-601/605 VPN software client to connect to my DFL-200/700/1100?
    Answer

    Configuration of DFL-200/700/1100

    Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Enter the username (admin) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

    Step 2: Click on Firewall and then VPN on the far left. Select Add new under IPSec Tunnels.



    Step 3: Configure the VPN tunnel as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Local Net: 192.168.1.0/24
    • Authentication: PSK
    • Pre-shared key: create your pre-share key
    • Roaming Users: Single Host IPSec Clients
    Click Apply to save the settings.



    Step 4: Click Activate on the left.



    Step 5: Click Activate Changes to apply the settings.




    Configuration of DS-601/605 VPN client software

    Step 1: Click Configuration and then select Profile Settings.



    Step 2: Select the profile in available profile names and then click Configure.



    Step 3: Leave the default settings in Basic Settings as-is.



    Step 4: Select IPSec General Settings on the left.

    Step 5: Next to Gateway, enter the WAN IP address of the remote firewall.

    Step 6: In Policies, select Automatic Mode for IKE Policy.

    Step 7: Select Automatic Mode for IPSec Policy.

    Step 8: Select Policy lifetimes and change the IPSec policy to 1 hr.

    Step 9: In Advanced options, set the Exch. mode by seleting Main mode.

    Step 10: Set the PFS group by selecting DH-Group 2(1024Bit).



    Step 11: Select Identities on the left.

    Step 12: Enter the preshare key next to Shared secret and confirm the preshare key next to Confirm secret.

    Note: The Pre-shared Key needs to be identical to the one configured on the firewall.



    Step 13: Select IP Address Assignment on the left. Leave the default setting as-is.



    Step 14: Select Remote Networks on the left.

    Step 15: In the Network addresses and Subnet masks fields enter the network identifier for the firewalls LAN and the corresponding subnet mask.



    Step 16: Select Firewall Settings on the left and set Enable Stateful Inspection to when connected. Click OK to save the settings and then click OK again to go back to connection screen.



    Step 17: Click Connect to establishing VPN connection to the firewall.
    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800
    Question Scenario: How do I setup WAN failover redundancy with 2 internet connections (config file included)?
    Answer This configuration file is for WAN redundancy between 2 internet connections using policy based routing on the DFL-210 and DFL-800. If either WAN circuit fails, all services will be redirected to the other WAN interface. When the failed circuit returns to normal, these services will come back to the original WAN circuit.

    Download the configuration file here. Configuration specifics (LAN IP, administrative login, etc.) can be found in a text document located in the zip file.
    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800
    Question Scenario: How can I configure simultaneous and independent WAN usage with 2 internet connections, each servicing a seperate internal subnet (config file included)?
    Answer This configuration file is for simultaneous and independent WAN usage for 2 internet connections using policy based routing on the DFL-210 and DFL-800. LANNET traffic is only allowed to go through WAN1 and DMZNET (VLANNET on the DFL-210) traffic is only allowed to go through WAN2 for internet connection and other services.

    Download the configuration file here. Configuration specifics (LAN IP, administrative login, etc.) can be found in a text document located in the zip file.
    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800
    Question Scenario: How can I configure simultaneous and independent WAN usage with failover redundancy with 2 internet connections, each servicing a seperate internal subnet (config file included)?
    Answer This configuration file is for simultaneous and independent WAN usage with failover redundancy for 2 internet connections using policy based routing for the DFL-210 and DFL-800. Under normal circumstances, LANNET traffic is only allowed to go through WAN1 and DMZNET (VLANNET on the DFL-210) traffic is only allowed to go through WAN2 for internet connection and other services. If either WAN circuit fails, all services from both LANNET and DMZNET/VLANNET will be redirected to the functioning WAN interface. When the failed circuit returns to normal operation, the services for each private network will revert back to their original WAN circuit.

    Download the configuration file here. Configuration specifics (LAN IP, administrative login, etc.) can be found in a text document located in the zip file.
    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question What does it mean if I see Can not get QM policy in the log message?
    Answer You may see a message in one of your firewallīs log messages similar to:
    • Can not get QM policy for ipv4_subnet(any:0,[0..7]=192.168.x.x/24) <-> ipv4_subnet(any:0,[0..7]=192.168.x.x/24)"
    As part of an IKE phase-2, the pair of IPsec SAs are negotiated using the SAs from the first phase. The granularities of IPsec SAs can be negotiated for each network pair, host pair, combination of network and host, etc. If both Security Gateways have different settings regarding what the IPsec SAs should be, this phase will fail and be indicated by the above message. That is why it is very important to define the local and remote protected networks exactly the same at both ends.
    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question What is FWCore_N.cfg?
    Answer When you upload a new configuration to the firewall it will be temporarily stored as FWCore_N.cfg. The firewall will then load the contents of it. If you successfully reconnect to the firewall within 30 seconds (set by default), it will rewrite the new configuration over FWCore.cfg and delete FWCore_N.cfg.

    If you can not reconnect to the firewall within the set time limit (30 seconds by default), FWCore_N.cfg will be deleted and the firewall will load itself based on the original FWCore.cfg.
    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I Connect to the internet using Wan 1?
    Answer
    Note: These FAQs created for firmware version 2.05 and above.

    Click here for instructions on connecting using DHCP
    Click here for instructions on connecting using PPPoE
    Click here for instructions on connecting using a Static IP

    Note: You need to disable any pop up blockers on your computer.



    Connect using DHCP


    Step 1: Connect your computer to one of the LAN ports on the DFL.


    Step 2: Assign a static IP address on your computer as followed:
    • IP Address: 192.168.1.2
    • Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
    • Default Gateway: 192.168.1.1
    Click OK.



    Step 3: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DFL in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1) and press Enter.

    Step 4: Enter username and password. Default username and password is admin.



    Step 5: The web GUI will begin with the D-Link setup wizard. Click Next.



    Step 6: You can set a new password here by entering the new password and re-typing the password to confirm then click Next.



    Step 7: Select the appropriate time zone then click Next.



    Step 8: Select WAN1 in the dropdown then click Next.



    Step 9: Select DHCP-automatic configuration then click Next.



    Step 10: Select Enable DHCP Servers (Optional) and configure as followed:
    • IP range: enter desired range IP for DHCP clients
    • Subnet Mask: entered corresponding subnet mask
    • Default Gateway: enter LAN IP of the firewall
    • DNS Server: enter desired DNS IP address
    Click Next.



    Step 11: Configure the NTP Server as desired (Optional) then click Next.



    Step 12: Click Activate to save the configuration.






    Connect using PPPoE


    Step 1: Connect your computer to one of the LAN ports on the DFL.
    (By default the DFL-800 will not accept connections on any interface other than the LAN interface.)

    Step 2: Assign a static IP address on your computer as followed:
    • IP Address: 192.168.1.2
    • Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
    • Default Gateway: 192.168.1.1
    Click OK.



    Step 3: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DFL in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1) and press Enter.

    Step 4: Enter username and password. Default username and password is admin.



    Step 5: The web GUI will begin with the D-Link setup wizard. Click Next.



    Step 6: You can set a new password here by entering the new password and re-typing the password to confirm then click Next.



    Step 7: Select the appropriate time zone then click Next.



    Step 8: Select WAN1 in the dropdown then click Next.



    Step 9: Select the radio button labeled PPPoE-account details needed then click Next.



    Step 10: Enter your DSL account details provided by your ISP then click Next.



    Step 11: Select Enable DHCP Servers (Optional).
    • IP range: enter desired range IP for DHCP clients
    • Subnet Mask: entered corresponding subnet mask
    • Default Gateway: enter LAN IP of the firewall
    • DNS Server: enter desired DNS IP address
    Click Next.



    Step 12: Configure the NTP Server as desired (Optional) then click Next.



    Step 13:: Click activate to save the configuration.



    Step 14: Click Close after the firewall is done saving the configuration.






    Connect using a Static IP


    Step 1: Connect your computer to one of the LAN ports on the DFL.
    (By default the DFL-800 will not accept connections on any interface other than the LAN interface.)

    Step 2: Assign a static IP address on your computer as followed:
    • IP Address: 192.168.1.2
    • Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
    • Default Gateway: 192.168.1.1
    Click OK.



    Step 3: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DFL in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1) and press Enter.

    Step 4: Enter username and password. Default username and password is admin.



    Step 5: The web GUI will begin with the D-Link setup wizard. Click Next.



    Step 6: You can set a new password here by entering the new password and re-typing the password to confirm then click Next.



    Step 7: Select the appropriate time zone then click Next.



    Step 8: Select WAN1 in the drop-down then click Next.



    Step 9: Select Static-manual configuration then click Next.



    Step 10: Configure the WAN1 for static public IP address as followed:
    • IP address: enter public IP address provided by ISP
    • NetMask: enter appropriated subnet mask provided by ISP
    • Gateway: enter gateway IP address provided by ISP
    • Primary DNS: enter DNS IP address provided by ISP
    • Secondary DNS: enter DNS IP address provided by ISP
    Click Next.



    Step 11: Select enable DHCP Servers (Optional).
    • IP range: enter desired range IP for DHCP clients
    • Subnet Mask: entered corresponding subnet mask
    • Default gateway: enter LAN IP of the firewall
    • DNS Server: enter desired DNS IP address
    Click Next.



    Step 12: Configure the NTP Server as desired (Optional) then click Next.



    Step 13: Click Activate to save the configuration.



    Step 14: Click Close after the firewall is done saving the configuration.
    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question What is "core" vs "any"?
    Answer In the firewall, there are two logical interfaces named core and any respectively.

    Core locates, at the heart of the firewall, all traffic from the physical interfaces are forwarded to core to be controlled by security policies.

    Any represents all possible interfaces including core.
    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I configure the PPTP Server for remote users?
    Answer

    Configuration of DFL-210/800/1600

    Step 1: Open the web browser and type the IP address of the router in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1) and press Enter.

    Step 2: Click the plus sign next to Objects and select Address Book.



    Step 3: Click Add and select Address Folder from the dropdown menu.



    Step 4: Enter a name as desired (ip_pools in this example) and click OK.



    Step 5: Click Add and select IP address from the dropdown menu.



    Step 6: Configure the IP address as followed:

    • Name: name as desired (pptp_ippool in this example)
    • IP Address: assign range of IP
    Click OK.



    Step 7: Click on the plus sign next to User Authentication and select Local User Databases.



    Step 8: Click Add and select Local User Database from the dropdown menu.



    Step 9: Enter a name as desired (remoteusers in this example) and click OK.



    Step 10: Click Add and select User from the dropdown menu.



    Step 11: Configure the user as followed:

    • Name: test
    • Password: 1234
    • Confirm Password: 1234
    Click OK.



    Step 12: Click on the plus sign next to Interfaces and select PPTP/L2TP Servers.



    Step 13: Click Add and select PPTP/L2TP Servers.



    Step 14: Configure the PPTP Server as followed:

    • Name: pptp_server
    • Inner IP address: lan_ip
    • Tunnel Protocol: PPTP
    • Outer Interface Filter: wan
    • Server IP: wan_ip
    Note: If WAN is configured as DSL or DHCP, select “any” in the Outer Interface Filter and “ip_wan” in the Server IP.
    If WAN is configured as Static, select “wan” in the Outer Interface Filter and “wan_ip” in the Server IP.



    Step 15: Click PPP Parameters tab and in IP Pool and select pptp_ippool from the dropdown menu. Click OK.



    Step 16: Click on User Authentication Rules and select Add. Click on UserAuthRule.



    Step 17: Configure UserAuthRule as followed:

    • Name: pptp_rule
    • Agent: PPP
    • Authentication Source: local
    • Interface: pptp_server (the pptp server created in step 14)
    • Originator IP: all-nets
    • Terminator IP: wan_ip
    Note If WAN is configured as DSL or DHCP, select “ip_wan” in the Terminator IP.
    If WAN is configured as Static, select “wan_ip” in the Terminator IP.



    Step 18: Select the Authentication Options tab and select remoteusers (created in step 9) from the Local User DB dropdown menu. Click OK.



    Step 19: Click on the plus sign next to Rules and select IP Rules.



    Step 20: Click Add and select IP Rule Folder from the dropdown menu.



    Step 21: Enter a name as desired (remote_site in this example) and click OK.



    Step 22: Click Add and select IP Rule from the dropdown menu.



    Step 23: Configure the IP Rule as followed:

    • Name: fromPPtPclients
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: all_services
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: pptp_server
    • Source network: pptp_ippool
    • Destination interface: lan
    • Destination network: lannet
    Click OK.



    Step 24: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP Rule as followed:

    • Name: toPPtPclients
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: all_services
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: lan
    • Source network: lannet
    • Destination interface: pptp_server
    • Destination network: pptp_ippool
    Click OK.



    Step 25: Click Configuration and select Save and Activate. Click OK to save and activate changes.




    Configuration of Win2K/WinXP client

    Step 1: Right click My Network Places and select Properties.



    Step 2: Select Create New Connection on the left side of the screen. The network wizard will appear. Click Next.



    Step 3: Select Connect to the network at my work place then click Next.



    Step 4: Select Virtual Private Network Connection then click Next.



    Step 5: The Wizard will ask to enter a company name (optional), click Next.



    Step 6: Hostname or IP address: enter the public IP address of the DFL-210/800/1600 located in the Status > Interfaces >WAN page of the DFL-210/800/1600 web configuration.



    Step 7: Check the box next to Add shortcut to this connection to my desktop and click Finish.



    Step 8: Enter the PPTP username (test in this example) and password (1234 in this example)in the login window. Click Connect.



    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I create and configure a VLAN?
    Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall into the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is admin (all lower case). Click on OK.

    Step 3: Click on the plus sign next to Objects, click on Address Book, and then click on InterfaceAddresses. Click on Add and select IP address.



    Step 4: Configure the IP address as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (vlan1 in this example)
    • IP Address: enter desired IP address (10.10.10.1 in this example)
    Click on OK.



    Step 5: Click on Add and select IP address. Configure it as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (vlan1_net in this example)
    • IP Address: enter the corresponding subnet (10.10.10.0/24 in this example)
    Click on OK.



    Step 6: Click on the plus sign next to Interfaces, click on VLAN, and then click on Add to create the Vlan.



    Step 7: Configure the Vlan as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (vlan_1 in this example)
    • Interface: lan
    • VLAN ID: enter the appropriate VID
    • IP Address: select the IP address folder created in step 4
    • Network: select the IP address folder create in step 5
    • Default Gateway: None
    Click on OK.



    Step 8: Click on the Configuration dropdown menu and select Save and Activate. Click on OK to activate and save the changes.

    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I configure the bandwidth management/traffic shaping?
    Answer This FAQ will demonstrate setting up bandwidth management/traffic shaping on 1Mbps leased line upstream and downstream.

    For inbound and outbound http and https: Maximum bandwidth is 500 Kbps.
    For inbound and outbound pop3: Guaranteed bandwidth is 300 Kbps.
    For inbound and outbound other services: The remaining bandwidth will be used.

    Step 1: Open the web browser and type the IP address of the device in the address bar(default is 192.168.1.1) and press Enter.

    Step 2: Click on Traffic Management and click on Traffic Shaping, select Pipes. Click Add and select Pipe for inbound traffic. Configure the pipe limit as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (wan_in in this example)

      Precedences
    • Highest: 300 Kbps
    • Total: 1000 Kbps
    • Group: None
    Click OK.



    Step 3: Click Add and select Pipe for outbound traffic. Configure the pipe limit as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (wan_out in this example)

      Precedences
    • Highest: 300 Kbps
    • Total: 1000 Kbps
    • Group: None
    Click OK.



    Step 4: Click Add and select Pipe for http/https inbound traffic. Configure the pipe limit as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (http_https_in in this example)

      Precedences
    • Medium: 500 Kbps
    • Total: 500 Kbps
    • Group: None
    Click OK.



    Step 5: Click Add and select Pipe for http/https outbound traffic. Configure the pipe limit as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (http_https_out in this example)

      Precedences
    • Medium: 500 Kbps
    • Total: 500 Kbps
    • Group: None
    Click OK.



    Step 6: Click Add and select Pipe for Pop3 inbound traffic. Configure the pipe limit as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (pop3_in in this example)

      Precedences
    • Highest: 300 Kbps
    • Total: 300 Kbps
    • Group: None
    Click OK.



    Step 7: Click Add and select Pipe for Pop3 outbound traffic. Configure the pipe limit as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (pop3_out in this example)

      Precedences
    • Highest: 300 Kbps
    • Total: 300 Kbps
    • Group: None
    Click OK.



    Step 8: Click Pipe Rules on the left side of the configuration screen. Click on Add and select PipeRule for http/https. Configure the pipe rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (wan_http_https in this example)
    • Service: http-all
    • Schedule: None
    • Source Interface: lan
    • Source Network: lannet
    • Destination Interface: wan
    • Destination Network: all-nets
    Click OK.



    Step 9: Select the Traffic Shaping tab and configure as followed:
    • Forward Chain: Add desired pipe into Selected box in order to perform traffic shaping.(wan_out and http_https_out created in step 3 and 5)
    • Return Chain: Add desired pipe into Selected box in order to perform traffic shaping. wan_in and http_https_in created in step 2 and 4)
    • Precedence: select Use fixed precedence, click the dropdown menu and select desired precedence. (0 is selected in this example)
    Click OK.



    Step 10: Click Add and select PipeRule for Pop3. Configure the pipe rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (wan_pop3 in this example)
    • Service: pop3
    • Schedule: None
    • Source Interface: lan
    • Source Network: lannet
    • Destination Interface: wan
    • Destination Network: all-nets


    Step 11: Select the Traffic Shaping tab and configure as followed:
    • Forward Chain: Add desired pipe into Selected box in order to perform traffic shaping (pop3_out and wan_out created in step 7 and 3)
    • Return Chain: Add desired pipe into Selected box in order to perform traffic shaping(pop3_in and wan_in created in step 6 and 2)
    • Precedence: select Use fixed precedence, click the dropdown menu and select desired precedence (6 is selected in this example)
    Click OK.



    Step 12: Click Add and select PipeRule for other services. Configure the pipe rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (wan_others in this example)
    • Service: all_services
    • Schedule: None
    • Source Interface: lan
    • Source Network: lannet
    • Destination Interface: wan
    • Destination Network: all-nets


    Step 13: Select the Traffic Shaping tab and configure as followed:
    • Forward Chain: Add desired pipe into Selected box in order to perform traffic shaping(wan_out created in step 3)
    • Return Chain: Add desired pipe into Selected box in order to perform traffic shaping(wan_in created in step 2)
    • Precedence: select Use fixed precedence, click the dropdown menu and select desired precedence (0 is selected in this example)
    Click OK.



    Step 14: Click the plus sign next to Rules, select IP Rules, click Add, select IP Rule Folder and name the folder as desired.

    Click OK.



    Step 15: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: http-all
    • Schedule: None
    • Source Interface: lan
    • Source Network: lannet
    • Destination Interface: wan
    • Destination Network: all-nets
    Click OK.



    Step 16: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: pop3
    • Schedule: None
    • Source Interface: lan
    • Source Network: lannet
    • Destination Interface: wan
    • Destination Network: all-nets
    Click OK.



    Step 17: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: all_services
    • Schedule: None
    • Source Interface: lan
    • Source Network: lannet
    • Destination Interface: wan
    • Destination Network: all-nets
    Click OK.



    Step 18: Click on the Configuration tab and select Save and Activate from the dropdown menu Click OK.

    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I backup the firewallīs configuration?
    Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall into the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.

    Step 3: Click on the Maintenance tab and select Backup from the dropdown menu.



    Step 4: Click on the Download Configuration button, browse for the location you would like to save your configuration to, then click on Save to save the file to the specified location.



    Note: To ensure a successful upload of the saved configuration file, the file must be uploaded to a firewall that has the same firmware as the file.
    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I upload the configuration file?
    Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.

    Step 3: Click on the Maintenance tab and then select Backup from the dropdown menu.

    Step 4: Under Restore unitīs configuration, click on Browse and navigate to the .pkg file that you previously saved. Highlight the file by clicking on it once, click Open and then click on Upload Configuration. It will take a few seconds to a minute (Depending on the size of the file) for the configuration to completely upload.



    Step 5: Click on the Activate button to save and activate the changes.



    Note: To avoid any errors the firewall must have the same firmware as the configuration file. This will ensure that the file will successfully load.
    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I change the admin password?
    Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall into the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is admin (all lower case). Click on OK.

    Step 3: Click on the plus sign next to User Authentication, select Local User Databases, and then select AdminUsers.



    Step 4: Select the admin folder, enter your new password in the Password field and confirm the new password by re-entering it into the Confirm Password field. Click on OK.



    Step 5: Click on the Configuration tab and select Save and Activate from the dropdown menu. Click on OK to save and activate the changes. Log back into the unit with your new admin password when promted.

    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I change the LAN IP address of my firewall?
    Answer Note: You may consider binding a secondary IP address to one NIC that matches the new network segment for this configuration ahead of actual firewall configuration.

    Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall into the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is admin (all lower case). Click on OK.

    Step 3: Click on the plus sign next to Objects, select Address Book, and then select Interface Addresses.



    Step 4: Click on the lan_ip folder and edit the IP address as desired and then click OK.



    Note: You will also need to change the lan subnet and DHCP client pool (Only if a DHCP server is enabled on the firewall) to reflect the new IP subnet.

    Step 5: Click on the Configuration tab and select Save and Activatefrom the dropdown menu. Click on OK to save and activate your changes.

    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I create and configure a custom service?
    Answer Step 1: Open the web browser and type the IP address of the router into address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: Click on the plus sign next to Objects and then select Sevices.



    Step 3: Click on Add, and then select the type of service (TCP/UDP Service, ICMP Service, IP Protocol Service, Service Group) from the dropdown menu.



    Step 4: Configure the custom service as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired.
    • Type: select an appropriate type for this service (TCP, UDP, TCP/UDP).
    • Source: leave as is (By default 0-65535).
    • Destination: enter a port for this custom service.
    Click on OK.



    Step 5: Click the Configuration tab and select Save and Activate from the dropdown menu. Click on OK to save and activate the settings.

    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I configure remote management?
    Answer Note: This FAQ will demonstrate how to configure remote management using HTTP and HTTPS.

    Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall into the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is admin (all lower case). Click on OK.

    Step 3: Click on the plus sign next to System and then select Remote Management.



    Step 4: Click on Add and then select HTTP/HTTPS management from the dropdown menu.



    Step 5: Configure the remote management as followed:
    • Name: enter name as desired
    • HTTP: check to enable
    • HTTPS: check to enable
    • User Database: AdminUsers.
    • Access Level: Admin.
    • Interface: select the interface to be given remote management access to (wan in this example)
    • Network: select the corresponding network for the selected interface (all-nets in this example)
    Click on OK.



    Step 6: Click on the Configuration tab and select Save and Activate from the dropdown menu. Click on OK to activate and save the changes.

    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I upgrade the firmware?
    Answer WARNING: Do not upgrade the firmware of your DFL firewall over a wireless connection. Doing so may damage the unit. Additionally, you will need to disable any anti-virus software before you continue with this FAQ.

    Step 1: Download the current firmware and save the file to your computer. You may want to save the file to your desktop for easy access. Do not try to run or launch the file as this will not work.

    Step 2: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall into the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 3: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is admin (all lower case). Click on OK.

    Step 4: Click on the Maintenance tab and click on Upgrade from the dropdown menu.



    Step 5: Under Upgrade unitīs firmware click on Browse and navigate to the .img file you downloaded in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and then click on Open. Click on Upload firmware image. It will take about 2 minutes for the upgrade to complete from this point.



    Step 6: After the firmware has upgraded successfully, the firewall will prompt you to log in. It is recommended to log in again to verify that the firmware has upgraded successfully.

    Note: Do not power cycle or interrupt the unitīs operation during the firmware upgrade. Doing so will damage the unit permanently.
    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I reset the firewall to factory defaults?
    Answer You can perform a factory reset using any of the following three methods.

    Hardware Reset button


    Step 1: Make sure the unit is powered off.

    Step 2: Press and hold the reset button located on the back of the firewall. While continuing to hold the reset button, power on the firewall.

    Step 3: Continue to hold the reset button for 30 seconds after the unit is powered on.

    Step 4: Release the reset button and the firewall will be at factory default settings.

    Note: Only when the System light comes on solid will your firewall is ready for configuration.


    Console connection


    Step 1: Connect a console cable to the console port of the DFL-210/800/1600 amd open a Hyper Terminal window.

    Step 2: Name the new connection and click on OK.

    Step 3: On the Connect to window select the COM port that the serial cable is connected to using the dropdown box next to Connect Using and then click on OK.

    Step 4: On the COMX Properties (where X represents the COM port number) window, select the following settings using the dropdown boxes:
    • Bits per second: 9600
    • Data bits: 8
    • Parity: None
    • Stop bits: 1
    • Flow control: Hardware
    Click on OK.

    Step 5: Power off the firewall for 5 seconds and then power it back on.

    Step 6: When the Hyper Terminal screen comes up, select option number 1 to start the D-link firewall.

    Step 7: Immediately press the Enter key on keyboard twice to get to load menu.

    Step 8: Select option 2.

    Step 9: Enter Y (for yes) on the keyboard to begin the reset.


    Web configuration


    Step 1: Log into the DFLīs web configuration. By default the IP address is 192.168.1.1 and the username and password is admin (all lower case).

    Step 2: Click on the Maintenance tab at the top and select Reset from the dropdown menu.



    Step 3: Select Restore the configuration to factory default and click Reset to Factory Defaults.



    Step 4: Click on OK when prompted and the unit will begin to reset itself to default settings
    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I configure the content filtering to block URL web access?
    Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall into the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is admin (all lower case). Click on OK.

    Step 3: Click on the plus sign next to Objects and then select Application Layer Gateways.



    Step 4: Select http-outbound, click on Add, and then select HTTP ALG URL.



    Step 5: Create the Content Filtering list as followed:
    • Action: Blacklist
    • URL: Key in desired filter URL in the format of Asterisk,dot,yahoo.com, forward slash, asterisk (*.yahoo.com/* in this example)
    Click on OK.



    Step 6: Click on the plus sign next to Rules, select IP Rules, click on Add, and then select IP Rule Folder.
    • Name: name the folder as desired
    Click on OK.



    Step 7: Click on Add and select IP Rule and configure as followed:
    • Name: name as desired
    • Action: NAT
    • Service: http-outbound
    • Schedule: None
    • Source Interface: lan
    • Source Network: lannet
    • Destination Interface: wan
    • Destination Network: all-nets
    Click on OK.



    Step 8: Click on the Configuration tab and select Save and Activate from the dropdown menu. Click on OK to activate and save your changes.

    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I configure port mapping?
    Answer Note: This FAQ will demonstrate how to set up port mapping for remote desktop to a computer running on the LAN port with a private IP address of 192.168.1.2.

    Step 1: Open the web browser and type the IP address of the firewall into the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: Click on the plus sign next to Objects, select Address Book, and then select Interface Addresses.



    Step 3: Click on Add and select IP address from the dropdown menu.



    Step 4: Configure the IP address as followed:
    • Name: Name as desired (private_ip in this example).
    • IP Address: IP address of the computer that is going to be mapped.
    Click on OK.



    Step 5: Click on the plus sign next to Rules and then select IP Rules.



    Step 6: Click on Add and then select IP Rule Folder from the dropdown menu.



    Step 7: Enter a name as desired (port_mapping in this example) and then click on OK.



    Step 8: Click on Add and select IP Rule from the dropdown menu.



    Step 9: Create the IP Rule as followed:
    • Name: Name as desired
    • Action: SAT
    • Service: rdp
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: any
    • Source network: all-nets
    • Destination interface: core
    • Destination network: wan1_ip
    Note: If WAN1 is configured for DSL(PPPoE) or DHCP, select ip_wan1 as the Destination Network. If WAN1 is configured for Static, select wan1_ip as the Destination Network



    Step 10: Click on the SAT tab and under New IP Address select private_ip (as created in Step 4) from the dropdown menu. Check the box labeled All-to-One mapping: rewrite all destination IPs to a single IP and then click on OK.



    Step 11: Click on Add to create another IP Rule and configure it as followed:
    • Name: Name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: rdp
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: any
    • Source network: all-nets
    • Destination interface: core
    • Destination network: wan1_ip
    Click on OK.



    Step 12: Click on the Configuration tab and select Save and Activate from the dropdown menu. Click on OK to save and activate your changes.

    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question Does selecting FwdFast when setting up an IP Rule cause my data to move any faster than if I select Allow?
    Answer No, selecting FwdFast for your IP Rule is not any faster than Allow.

    What FwdFast does is immediately forward a given packet, bypassing the stateful inspection engine. This is indeed faster for the individual packet. However, since there is no state information regarding the connection the ruleset has to be consulted for each and every packet. This consumes more CPU time than state table lookups for established connections.
    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I configure local user authentication?
    Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall into the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username and password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.

    Step 3: Click on System and select Remote Management. Click on Modify Advanced Settings to edit/change remote management ports.



    Step 4: Under the Management Web GUI Port, change the default HTTP/80 and HTTPS/443 port (example 800 and 4433). Click OK.



    Step 5: Click on User Authentication, select Local User Databases, click on Add and select LocalUserDatabase.



    Step 6: Enter a name the new LocalDataBase folder (lannet_authen_users in this example) and click OK.



    Step 7: Click on Add and select User and configure as followed:
    • Name: name as desired
    • Password: enter password for the user
    • Confirm password: re-enter password
    • Groups: enter the group name this user belongs to (users in this example)
    Click OK.



    Step 8: Click on Objects, select Address Book, and then select InterfaceAddresses. Click on Add and select IP address to add a new IP address and configure as followed:
    • Name: name as desired (user_authen in this example)
    • IP address: enter desired IP address or range of IP addresses. For multiple IP addresses separate each IP by commas, using no spaces in between (whole local network in this example)


    Step 9: Select the User Authentication tab and enter the group name (should be the same group name as created in Step 7) in the box under Comma-separated list of user names and groups. Click OK.



    Note: Authentication of users from an IP address object can be enabled on IP address or IP4 group by attaching user names or user groups to the object. Once the firewall checks the traffic flow from an address object and finds the user name defined on it, it will prompt the user with an authentication request according to the User Authentication Rules.

    Step 10: Select User Authentication Rule, click on Add, select UserAuthRule.



    Step 11: Configure the user authentication rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Agent: HTTP
    • Authentication Source: Local
    • Interface: lan
    • Originator IP: lannet


    Step 12: Select the User Authentication tab. In the Local User DB click on the dropdown menu and select lannet_authen_users (the user folder created in Step 6). Click OK.



    Step 13: Click on Rules, select IP Rules, click Add, and then select IP Rule Folder.



    Step 14: Name the IP rule folder as desired. Click OK.



    Step 15: Click on Add to add a new IP Rule and configure as followed:
    • Name: name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: http
    • Schedule: None
    • Source Interface: lan
    • Source Network: lannet
    • Destination Interface: core
    • Destination Network: lan_ip
    Click on OK.



    Step 16: Click on Add to add another IP Rule and configure as followed:
    • Name: name as desired
    • Action: NAT
    • Service: dns-all
    • Schedule: None
    • Source Interface: lan
    • Source Network: lannet
    • Destination Interface: any
    • Destination Network: all-nets
    Click OK.



    Step 17: Click on Add to add another IP Rule and configure as followed:
    • Name: name as desired
    • Action: NAT
    • Service: all_services
    • Schedule: None
    • Source Interface: lan
    • Source Network: select the Object created in step 8
    • Destination Interface: any
    • Destination Network: all-nets
    Click OK.



    Step 18: Click on Add to add another IP Rule and configure as followed:
    • Name: name as desired
    • Action: SAT
    • Service: http
    • Schedule: None
    • Source Interface: lan
    • Source Network: lannet
    • Destination Interface: any
    • Destination Network: all-nets
    Click OK.



    Step 19: Click on the SAT tab and configure as followed:
    • New IP Address: select lan_ip from the dropdown
    • Check the box labeled “ All-to-One Mapping: rewrite all destination IPs to a single IP”
    Click OK.



    Step 20: Click on Add to add another IP Rule and configure as followed:
    • Name: name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: http
    • Schedule: None
    • Source Interface: lan
    • Source Network: lannet
    • Destination Interface: any
    • Destination Network: all-nets
    Click OK.



    Step 21: Click on the Configuration dropdown menu and select Save and Activate. Click OK to activate and save the changes.

    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question What does it mean if I see LogStateViolations in my log message?
    Answer If you are seeing DROP log entries with a rule of LogStateViolations, concerning a connection in SYN_SENT state, and the dropped packet is TCP with the ACK flag set, you can be fairly certain that you are witnessing the result of the RST cookie protection scheme.

    AN RST Cookie is a weak form of SYN flood protection that works by eliciting a bogus TCP ACK in response to a TCP SYN and expecting a TCP RST back. In theory, this should prevent people from lying about their source IP address since the attacker would have to see the bogus ACK packet in order to be able to reply to it.
    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question What does it mean if I see a Default_Access_Rule drop notice in the log message?
    Answer The traffic is dropped by the Default_Access_Rule which means that the source network is not routed on the lan interface.

    Set Section Rules/Access to allow the dropped network xxx.xxx.x.x/24 so the system will accept it as a sender address.
    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I configure transparent mode?
    Answer This FAQ will demonstrate setting up transparent mode for remote desktop for a computer running on the LAN port with a public IP address assigned.

    Note: You may consider binding a secondary IP address on one NIC that match the new network segment for this configuration.

    Step 1: Open the web browser and type the IP address of the router in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1) and press Enter.

    Step 2: On the left side, click on Objects, select Address Book, and select Interface Addresses.



    Step 3: Click on lan_ip and change the lan_ip to the public IP address you wish to use, click OK.



    Step 4: Click on lannet and change the lannet to the public network segment, click OK.



    Step 5: Click on Interfaces, select Ethernet and select Wan1 and configure as followed:
    • Name: wan1
    • IP address: Wan1_ip
    • Network: all-nets
    • Default Gateway: None
    • Enable Transparent Mode: check to enable
    Click OK.



    Step 6: Click on Interfaces, select Ethernet and select lan and configure as followed:
    • Name: lan
    • IP address: lan_ip
    • Network: all-nets
    • Default Gateway: None
    • Enable Transparent Mode: check
    Click OK.



    Step 7: Click on Rules, select IP Rules, select Add and choose IP Rule Folder.



    Step 8: Name the IP rule folder as desired. Click OK.



    Step 9: Click Add to add a new IP Rule and configure the new IP Rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: rdp
    • Schedule: None
    • Source Interface: Wan1
    • Source Network: all-nets
    • Destination Interface: lan
    • Destination Network: all-nets
    Click OK.



    Step 10: Click Add to add new IP Rule and configure the new IP Rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: all_services
    • Schedule: None
    • Source Interface: lan
    • Source Network: all-nets
    • Destination Interface: Wan1
    • Destination Network: all-nets
    Click OK.



    Step 11: Click on Configuration tab and select Save and Activate. Click OK to activate and save the changes.



    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I configure an IPSec LAN-to-LAN tunnel between two locations (Office A and Office B)?
    Answer Note: This FAQ will demonstrate setting up a Lan-to-Lan IPSec VPN tunnel between firewall A and B.

    In this example:
    Firewall A is on 192.168.1.0/24 network
    Firewall B is on 192.168.2.0/24 network


    Configuration of Firewall A

    Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the Firewall (192.168.1.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (admin by default), and then click OK.

    Step 2: Click the plus sign next to Objects and select Address Book.

    Step 3: Click Add and select Address Folder from the dropdown menu.



    Step 4: Enter a name for the folder and click OK.



    Step 5: Click Add and select IP address from the dropdown menu and configure as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (remote_net in this example)
    • IP Address: enter the remote subnet of the remote firewall (192.168.2.0/24 in this example)
    Click OK.



    Step 6: Click Add and select IP address from the dropdown menu and configure as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (remote_gateway in this example)
    • IP Address: enter the gateway of the remote location
    Click OK.



    Step 7: Click on Authentication Objects, click on Add and select Pre-shared key from the dropdown menu to add a Pre-shared key.



    Step 8: Configure the Pre-shared key as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (IPSec_psk in this example)

      Passphrase
    • Shared Secret: enter a desired key
    • Confirm Secret: re-enter the key
    Click OK.



    Step 9: Click the plus sign next to Interfaces and select IPsec. Click Add and select IPsec Tunnel from the dropdown menu.



    Step 10: Configure the IPsec Tunnel as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (ipsec_tunnel in this example)
    • Local Network: lannet
    • Remote Network: remote_net (created in step 5)
    • Remote Endpoint: remote_gateway (created in step 6)
    • Encapsulation Mode: Tunnel
    • IKE Algorithms: High
    • IKE Life Time: 28800 secs
    • IPsec Algorithms: High
    • IPsec Life Time: 3600 secs


    Step 11: Click on the Authentication tab and select the pre-shared key (created in step 8) from the Pre-Shared Key dropdown menu.



    Step 12: Click on the Routing tab and check the box labeled Dynamically add route to the remote network when a tunnel is established.



    Step 13: Click on the Keep-alive tab and select Auto.

    Click OK.



    Step 14: Click the plus sign next to Rules and select IP Rules. Click Add and select IP Rule Folder.



    Step 15: Enter a name for the folder and click OK.



    Step 16: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP Rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: all_services
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: lan
    • Source network: lannet
    • Destination interface: ipsec_tunnel (created in step 10)
    • Destination network: remote_net (created in step 5)
    Click OK.



    Step 17: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP Rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: all_services
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: ipsec_tunnel (created in step 10)
    • Source network: remote_net (created in step 5)
    • Destination interface: lan
    • Destination network: lannet
    Click OK.



    Step 18: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP Rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: ping-outbound
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: lan
    • Source network: lannet
    • Destination interface: ipsec_tunnel (created in step 10)
    • Destination network: remote_net (created in step 5)
    Click OK.



    Step 19: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP Rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: ping-outbound
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: ipsec_tunnel (created in step 10)
    • Source network: remote_net (created in step 5)
    • Destination interface: lan
    • Destination network: lannet
    Click OK.



    Step 20: Click Configuration and select Save and Activate. Click OK to activate changes.




    Configuration of Firewall B

    Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the Firewall (192.168.1.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (admin by default), and then click OK.

    Step 2: Click the plus sign next to Objects and select Address Book.

    Step 3: Click Add and select Address Folder from the dropdown menu.



    Step 4: Enter a name for the folder and click OK.



    Step 5: Click Add and select IP address from the dropdown menu and configure as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (remote_net in this example)
    • IP Address: enter the remote subnet of the remote firewall (192.168.1.0/24 in this example)
    Click OK.



    Step 6: Click Add and select IP address from the dropdown menu and configure as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (remote_gateway in this example)
    • IP Address: enter the gateway of the remote location
    Click OK.



    Step 7: Click on Authentication Objects, click on Add and select Pre-shared key from the dropdown menu to add a Pre-shared key.



    Step 8: Configure the Pre-shared key as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (IPSec_psk in this example)

      Passphrase
    • Shared Secret: enter a desired key
    • Confirm Secret: re-enter the key
    Click OK.



    Step 9: Click the plus sign next to Interfaces and select IPsec. Click Add and select IPsec Tunnel from the dropdown menu.



    Step 10: Configure the IPsec Tunnel as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (ipsec_tunnel in this example)
    • Local Network: lannet
    • Remote Network: remote_net (created in step 5)
    • Remote Endpoint: remote_gateway (created in step 6)
    • Encapsulation Mode: Tunnel
    • IKE Algorithms: High
    • IKE Life Time: 28800 secs
    • IPsec Algorithms: High
    • IPsec Life Time: 3600 secs


    Step 11: Click on the Authentication tab and select the pre-shared key (created in step 8) from the Pre-Shared Key dropdown menu.



    Step 12: Click on the Routing tab and check the box labeled Dynamically add route to the remote network when a tunnel is established.



    Step 13: Click on the Keep-alive tab and select Auto.

    Click OK.



    Step 14: Click the plus sign next to Rules and select IP Rules. Click Add and select IP Rule Folder.



    Step 15: Enter a name for the folder and click OK.



    Step 16: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP Rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: all_services
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: lan
    • Source network: lannet
    • Destination interface: ipsec_tunnel (created in step 10)
    • Destination network: remote_net (created in step 5)
    Click OK.



    Step 17: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP Rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: all_services
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: ipsec_tunnel (created in step 10)
    • Source network: remote_net (created in step 5)
    • Destination interface: lan
    • Destination network: lannet
    Click OK.



    Step 18: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP Rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: ping-outbound
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: lan
    • Source network: lannet
    • Destination interface: ipsec_tunnel (created in step 10)
    • Destination network: remote_net (created in step 5)
    Click OK.



    Step 19: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP Rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: ping-outbound
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: ipsec_tunnel (created in step 10)
    • Source network: remote_net (created in step 5)
    • Destination interface: lan
    • Destination network: lannet
    Click OK.



    Step 20: Click Configuration and select Save and Activate. Click OK to activate changes.

    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600 / DIR-130 / DIR-330
    Question How to I establish an IPSec lan-to-lan tunnel between a DFL-210/800/1600 and a DIR-130/330?
    Answer Note: This FAQ will demonstrate setting up a Lan-to-Lan IPSec VPN tunnel between a DFL-210/800/1600 and a DIR-130/330.

    In this example:
    DFL-210/800/1600 is on 192.168.2.0/24 network
    DIR-130/330 is on 192.168.0.0/24 network


    Configuration of DFL-210/800/1600

    Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the Firewall (192.168.1.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (admin by default), and then click OK.

    Step 2: Click the plus sign next to Objects and select Address Book.

    Step 3: Click Add and select Address Folder from the dropdown menu.



    Step 4: Enter a name for the folder and click OK.



    Step 5: Click Add and select IP address from the dropdown menu and configure as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (remote_net in this example)
    • IP Address: enter the remote subnet of the remote IPSec server (192.168.0.0/24 in this example)
    Click OK.



    Step 6: Click Add and select IP address from the dropdown menu and configure as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (remote_gateway in this example)
    • IP Address: enter the gateway of the remote location
    Click OK.



    Step 7: Click on Authentication Objects, click on Add and select Pre-shared key from the dropdown menu to add a Pre-shared key.



    Step 8: Configure the Pre-shared key as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (IPSec_psk in this example)

      Passphrase
    • Shared Secret: enter a desired key
    • Confirm Secret: re-enter the key
    Click OK.



    Step 9: Click the plus sign next to Interfaces and select IPsec. Click Add and select IPsec Tunnel from the dropdown menu.



    Step 10: Configure the IPsec Tunnel as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired (ipsec_tunnel in this example)
    • Local Network: lannet
    • Remote Network: remote_net (created in step 5)
    • Remote Endpoint: remote_gateway (created in step 6)
    • Encapsulation Mode: Tunnel
    • IKE Algorithms: Medium
    • IKE Life Time: 28800 secs
    • IPsec Algorithms: Medium
    • IPsec Life Time: 3600 secs


    Step 11: Click on the Authentication tab and select the pre-shared key (created in step 8) from the Pre-Shared Key dropdown menu.



    Step 12: Click on the Routing tab and check the box labeled Dynamically add route to the remote network when a tunnel is established.



    Step 13: Click on the IKE Setting tab, select PFS enabled and select DH group 2 (1024-bit).



    Step 14: Click on the Keep-alive tab and select Auto.

    Click OK.



    Step 15: Click the plus sign next to Rules and select IP Rules. Click Add and select IP Rule Folder.



    Step 16: Enter a name for the folder and click OK.



    Step 17: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP Rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: all_services
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: lan
    • Source network: lannet
    • Destination interface: ipsec_tunnel (created in step 10)
    • Destination network: remote_net (created in step 5)
    Click OK.



    Step 18: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP Rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: all_services
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: ipsec_tunnel (created in step 10)
    • Source network: remote_net (created in step 5)
    • Destination interface: lan
    • Destination network: lannet
    Click OK.



    Step 19: Click Configuration and select Save and Activate. Click OK to activate changes.




    Configuration of DIR-130/330

    Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

    Step 2: Click on SETUP and select VPN SETTINGS. Choose IPSec from the ADD VPN PROFILE dropdown menu and click Add.



    Step 3: Configure the IPSec VPN as followed:
    • Enable Settings: check box to enable
    • Name: enter a name for the VPN
    • Encapsulation Mode:: Tunnel
    • Remote IP: select Site to Site and enter the remote Gateway
    • Remote Local LAN Net /Mask: enter the remote LAN network and Subnet Mask
    • Authentication Protocol: enter a Pre-shared Key (must be the same as the Remote Side)
    • Phase 1 IKE Proposal List: leave as is
    • PFS: check to enable
    • Phase 2 IPSec Proposal List: leave as is


    Step 4: Click Save Settings.
    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 / DFL-1600 / DS-601 / DS-605
    Question How do I configure the DS-601/DS-605 VPN software client to connect to the DFL-210/800/1600?
    Answer


    Configuration of DFL-210/800/1600

    Step 1: Open the web browser and type the IP address of the router in address bar (default is 192.168.1.1) and press Enter.

    Step 2: On the left side, click on Objects, select Authentication Objects and click on Pre-shared key.



    Step 3: Configure the Pre-Shared Key as followed:

    • Name: enter a name as desired (preshared in this example)
    • Shared Secret: enter desired preshared key
    • Confirm Secret: re-enter the key
    Click OK.



    Step 4: Click on Interfaces and select IPsec. Click Add and select IPsec Tunnel.



    Step 5: Configure the IPsec Tunnel as followed:

    • Name: enter a name as desired (ipsec_roaming_tunnel in this example)
    • Local Network: lannet
    • Remote Network: all-nets
    • Remote Endpoint: None
    • Encapsulation Mode: Tunnel
    • IKE Algorithms: Medium
    • IKE Life Time: 28800 secs
    • IPsec Algorithms: Medium
    • IPsec Life Time: 3600 secs


    Step 6: Select the Authentication tab and select preshared (created in step 3) from the Pre-Shared Key dropdown option.



    Step 7: Select the Routing tab and check the box labeled Dynamically add route to the remote network when a tunnel is established and click OK.



    Step 8: Click on Rules and select IP Rules. Click Add and select IP Rule Folder.



    Step 9: Enter a name for the folder and click OK.



    Step 10: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP Rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: all_services
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: any
    • Source network: all-nets
    • Destination interface: ipsec_roaming_tunnel (created in step 5)
    • Destination network: lannet
    Click OK.



    Step 11: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP Rule as followed:

    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: all_services
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: ipsec_roaming_tunnel (created in step 5)
    • Source network: lannet
    • Destination interface: any
    • Destination network: all-nets
    Click OK.



    Step 12: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP Rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: ping-outbound
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: any
    • Source network: all-nets
    • Destination interface: ipsec_roaming_tunnel (created in step 5)
    • Destination network: lannet
    Click OK.



    Step 13: Click Add and select IP Rule. Configure the IP Rule as followed:
    • Name: enter a name as desired
    • Action: Allow
    • Service: ping-outbound
    • Schedule: None
    • Source interface: ipsec_roaming_tunnel (created in step 5)
    • Source network: lannet
    • Destination interface: any
    • Destination network: all-nets
    Click OK.



    Step 14: Select the Configuration tab and select Save and Activate. Click OK to save and activate the changes.




    Configuration of DS-601/605 VPN client software

    Step 1: Click Configuration and select Profile Settings .



    Step 2: Select DFL-800 in the profile settings and click on Configure. If the profile does not exist, click New Entry to create a new profile.



    Step 3: Select Basic Settings and configure as followed:

    • Profile name: enter a name for the profile (DFL-800 for simplicity)
    • Communication medium: select the type of internet connection on the client side


    Step 4: Select IPSec General Settings and configure it as followed:

    • Gateway: enter WAN IP of the remote firewall
    • IKE Policy: automatic mode
    • IPSec policy: automatic mode
    • Exch. Mode: Main mode
    • PFS Group: DH-Group 2 (1024Bit)


    Step 5: Select Identities and enter the pre-share key next to Shared secret and Confirm secret.



    NOTE: The Pre-shared key must be identical to the one configured on the Firewall.

    Step 6: Select IP Address Assignment and configure it according to your settings. It is recommended to keep the default settings.



    Step 7: Select Remote Networks and configure as followed:

    • Network addresses: enter the network of the remote Firewall
    • Subnet masks: enter the corresponding subnet mask of the remote Firewall


    Step 8: Select Firewall Settings and set the Enable Stateful Inspection to when connected. Click OK to save the settings and then click OK again to go back to connection screen.



    Step 9: Click Connect to establish the VPN connection.

    Model DFL-210 / DFL-800 DFL-1600
    Question What is the maximum size network that you can configure for the unit?
    Answer You can use up to the size of a class B network, any size greater than this will cause memory allocation issues.
    Model DFL-300
    Question What is the maximum number of mapped IPīs that can be configured on the DFL-300?
    Answer The maximum number of IPīs that can be mapped is 32.
    Model DFL-300
    Question Why canīt I access the firewall after upgrading to firmware 2.36?
    Answer After upgrading the firmware of the DFL-300 to version 2.36 the password gets truncated to 8 characters. If you type in the first 8 characters of your password you should be able to log into the DFL-300. Once logged into the DFL-300 you can reset you password without worry of it being truncated again.
    Model DFL-300
    Question I just upgraded my DFL-300īs firmware to version 2.2x. What does the new field content filtering do?
    Answer DFL-300 provides a number of ways in which you may selectively filter traffic.  You can prevent access to certain kinds of content from your LAN.

    ActiveX/Java blocking

    Some web sites contain small programs. Although some safety mechanisms exist, it can be inherently dangerous to run an unknown program on your machine. For this reason, DFL-300 can block these programs from being loaded from the Internet. Note that the programs are often compressed into archives; these are blocked too.

    Note: Some sites will not function properly if Java or ActiveX are blocked.  This is because these sites rely heavily on this technology.

    Cookie blocking

    When you use a web browser, servers have the ability to store small amounts of data, known as "Cookies", on your local hard  drive.  This information can then be retrieved later. Cookies are usually used to track visitors, and store information about their personal preferences.  You may wish to block Cookies in order to maintain a higher level of anonymity on the Web.  It will not be possible for web servers to set Cookies or retrieve Cookies when this feature is activated.

    Pop-up Windows blocking

    Pop-up Windows, itīs used as an advertising vehicle, but sometimes it can ask a surfer to fill out a survey, or will provide alert information. Web sites containing adult content are frequent abusers of popup window technology. Pop-ups are triggered by programming code embedded inside a Web page using a Web scripting language called JavaScript,  VBScript, or some other in-line web language. These Pop-ups are blocked when this feature is activated.
    Model DFL-300
    Question What speed are the ports on the DFL-300?
    Answer The LAN, the WAN, and the DMZ ports are all 10/100Mbps auto-sensing only.

    Note: The speed of these ports cannot be locked down.
    Model DFL-300
    Question Why do I not get a link light when I plug my computer directly to the LAN port, WAN port, or the DMZ port of my DFL-300?
    Answer If you are connecting your computer directly to the LAN port, WAN port, or DMZ port make sure that you are using a crossover cable.

    When connecting a Hub, Switch, or Router/Modem to the LAN port, WAN port, or DMZ port make sure that you are using a straight-through cable.
    Model DFL-300 / DFL-80
    Question How do I reset my DFL-80/300 firewall back to factory defaults?
    Answer Follow the steps below to reset the firewall to factory defaults.

    Step 1: Insert a paper clip into the small hole on the back of the unit labeled reset.



    Step 2: Watch the lights on the front of the firewall. When the status light begins to blink, let go of the reset button.

    Step 3: When the Status light stops blinking the firewall will be back to its factory settings.

    Step 4: To access the configuration menu, release and renew the IP address on your computer and then open Internet Explorer and type 192.168.1.1 in the address bar.

    Step 5: Login to the device with the Username admin and the Password admin as well, in order to reconfigure the device.

    Model DFL-300 / DFL-80
    Question How do I upgrade firmware on my DFL-80 or DFL-300?
    Answer Step 1 Download the software update to your hard disk, then connect to the DFL-300 firewall’s web configuation utility.

    Step 2 Go to Software Update on the Administration menu.

    Step 3 You can either type in the path to the upgrade file or browse for the file on your hard disk. Then click Ok.

    Step 4 The updating process won’t overwrite the system configuration, so it is not necessary to save it before updating the software.

    Do Not use your computer, turn off the DFL-300, or interrupt the update process in any way or you may render the device unusable.
    Model DFL-300 / DFL-80
    Question Can my computers that are connected to the DMZ interface receive DHCP from the DFL-80/300?
    Answer No. The DMZ port on the DFL-300 does not provide DHCP. You will need to statically assign IP addresses to all workstations and servers that are connected to the DMZ port. When assigning the IP information to your computers, enter the IP address of the DMZ port for your default gateway and your DNS server.

    Note: The subnet used on the DMZ interface must be different than the subnet of the internal and external interfaces of the DFL-300.
    Model DFL-300 / DFL-80
    Question I just upgraded my DFL-300īs firmware to version 2.2. What does transparent mode mean?
    Answer In Transparent mode, the DFL-300 device filters packets traversing the firewall without modifying any of the source or destination information in the IP packet header. All interfaces behave as though they are part of the same network, with the DFL-300 device acting much like a layer-2 switch or bridge. Because it does not translate addresses, the IP addresses on the protected network must be valid, routable addresses on the untrusted network, which might be the Internet. In Transparent mode (if you select Transparent mode in internal interface), the IP addresses for the internal and external interfaces are same. If you select Transparent mode in DMZ interface), the IP addresses for the DMZ and external interfaces are same.

    Transparent mode is a convenient means for protecting Web servers, or any other kind of server that mainly receives traffic from untrusted sources. Using Transparent mode offers the following benefits:

    * No need to reconfigure the IP settings of routers or protected servers
    * No need to create Mapped or Virtual IP addresses for incoming traffic to reach protected servers
    Model DFL-300 / DFL-80
    Question How do you back up the system configuration on a DFL-80/300?
    Answer To change system parameters settings without destroying the original system configuration, you can choose Export System Settings to Client in Settings under the Administration menu.

    Then if you want to upload the backup system configuration from hard disk to the DFL-300 firewall, go to Settings under the Administration menu to Import System setting from Client, click on the browse button and search for your back up configuration file you saved. Once you have selected the appropriate file click OK to upload.
    Model DFL-300 / DFL-80
    Question How do I setup a VPN tunnel between two DFL-80/300?
    Answer NOTE: This will not work if either DFL-300 is behind a router. Also, contact your ISP and verify that they do not block UDP port 500, as this will stop the VPN connection from establishing.


    Configuration DFL-300 (Local)

    Step 1: Access the configuration screen of the DFL-300 by opening a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type the IP address of the DFL-300 in the address bar (192.168.1.1).

    Step 2: Enter the username (admin) and the password (admin). Click OK.



    Step 3: Click on Configuration and take note of the IP address that your ISP has assigned you (10.10.10.10 in our example).



    Step 4: Click on Policy and verify that you have an Outgoing policy configured. If not, click on New Entry, accept the default values, and click OK.



    Step 5: Click on VPN on the left side and then click New Entry.



    Step 6: Give the VPN connection a name with no spaces.

    Step 7: Enter the network identifier and subnet mask of the Internal interface of your local network.

    Step 8: Select either Remote Gateway--Fixed IP or Remote Gateway--Dynamic IP. Enter the WAN (external) IP address of DFL-300 #2, if Remote Gateway--Fixed IP is selected.

    Step 9: Enter the network identifier and subnet mask of DFL-300 #2īs Internal interface.

    Step 10: Enter a Preshared Key.

    The Preshared Key needs to be identical on both of the DFL-300īs

    Step 11: Select Data Encryption + Authentication as the Encapsulation and click OK.




    Configuration of DFL-300 (Remote)

    Step 1: Access the configuration screen of the DFL-300 by opening a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type the IP address of the DFL-300 in the address bar (192.168.1.1).

    Step 2: Enter the username (admin) and the password (admin). Click OK.



    Step 3: Click on Configuration and take note of the IP address that your ISP has assigned you. Also make sure that the Internal interface of this DFL-300 is on a different subnet than DFL-300 #1īs Internal interface.



    Step 4: Click on Policy and verify that you have an Outgoing policy configured. If not, click on New Entry, accept the default values, and click OK.



    Step 5: Click on VPN and then click click New Entry.



    Step 6: Give the VPN connection a name with no spaces.

    Step 7: Enter the network identifier and subnet mask of the Internal interface.

    Step 8: Select either Remote Gateway--Fixed IP or Remote Gateway--Dynamic IP. Enter the WAN IP address of DFL-300 #1, if Remote Gateway--Fixed IP is selected.

    Step 9: Enter the network identifier and subnet mask of DFL-300 #1īs Internal interface.

    Step 10: Enter a Preshared Key.

    The Preshared Key needs to be identical on both of the DFL-300īs

    Step 11: Select Data Encryption + Authentication as the Encapsulation and click OK.



    Step 12: The tunnel should now be established. If not, open a command prompt and from a computer connected to the Internal interface of DFL-300 (Local) and ping the IP address of a computer that is connected to the Internal interface of DFL-300 (Remote), or vice versa.



    Step 13: Once you begin to receive replies, the VPN connection has been established.

    Step 14: To view the Status of the VPN on either DFL-300, click on VPN.

    Step 15: When the VPN connection has been established, the Status will be Connect.



    NOTE: You can also Connect and Disconnect the VPN connection from this screen.
    Model DFL-300 / DFL-80
    Question How do I open ports on the DFL-80/300?
    Answer Follow the steps below to open ports on the DFL-80/300:

    Step 1: Access the configuration screen of the DFL-300 by opening a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type the IP address of the DFL-300 in the address bar (192.168.1.1).

    Step 2: Enter the username (admin) and the password (admin). Click OK.



    Step 3: On the configuration screen, click on Virtual Server, located on the left column.

    Step 4: Click on Virtual Server 1.



    Step 5: Click on Click Here To Configure, choose the IP address assigned to you by your ISP as your Vitrual Server Real IP, and click OK.



    Step 6: Click on New Service.

    Step 7: In the drop down menu next to Service Name choose a pre-defined or custom service. If you created a custom service, it will be listed last in the list.



    Step 8: In the first box under Server Virtual IP, enter in the IP address of the computer you want the selected service forwarded to and click OK.



    Step 9: Click on Policy, located on the left column, and choose Incoming.



    Step 10: Click on New Entry.

    Step 11: Choose Virtual Server 1 for the Destination Address and choose the service you specified in Virtual Server 1 entry as the Service.



    Step 12: Verify the Action is set to Permit and click OK.
    Model DFL-300 / DFL-80
    Question How do I map one of my public IP addresses to a computer behind the DFL-80/ 300?
    Answer Public IP addresses are mapped to private addresses in a one-to-one fashion. Traffic will be routed from the specified public IP address to a private IP address on your LAN. After mapping the IP address, a policy must be configured to allow the services you are attempting to forward to that IP address. The DFL-80/300 is capable of mapping multiple public IP addresses to computers either on the Internal or DMZ interface. The maximum number of mapped IP addresses the DFL-300 can manage is dependant on what other services the DFL-300 is handling. Completely configure your mapped IP addresses one at a time until you find the limit for your DFL-80/300.

    Step 1: Open your browser and enter the IP address of the DFL-80/300 to access the web management (192.168.1.1). Both the default username and password are admin. Click OK.



    Please view the following FAQ if you have problems accessing the DFL-80/300 web management. The FAQ was written specifically for the DI-604, but can be applied to this part of the configuration for the DFL-80/300:
    How do I access the web management for my broadband gateway?

    Step 2: Click on Virtual Server located on the left side.

    Step 3: Select Mapped IP and then click the New Entry button.



    Step 4: From the dropdown menu, select the External IP address you want to map. Enter the private IP address of the computer you wish to map the external address to in the available field and click OK. The computer you are mapping the public IP address to may be on the Internal or DMZ interface.



    Step 5: Click on Policy located on the left column and choose Incoming if the External IP address is mapped to a computer on the Internal interface, or External To DMZ if the External IP address is mapped to a computer on the DMZ interface

    Step 6: Click on New Entry.



    Step 7: Choose Mapped IP for the Destination Address and choose a service from the dropdown menu as the Service. You may choose to leave the service as ANY to allow all services, or you may choose any one of the predefined or custom services from the list.



    Step 8: Verify the Action is set to Permit and click OK.



    Note: Once a policy is configured for the mapped IP address, you will not be able to edit or remove the mapped IP. You need to remove any policies that are applied to the mapped IP if you need to make adjustments to the mapped IP.
    Model DFL-300 / DFL-80
    Question The service I need to use is not listed in the group of pre-defined services. How do I create a custom service on the DFL-80/300?
    Answer When creating a custom service there are three fields that need to be configured: Name, Protocol, and Server Port. Follow these steps in order to configure your custom service properly:

    Step 1: Open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type the IP address of the DFL-300 (192.168.1.1).

    Step 2: Type in the username (admin) and password (admin) when prompted. Click OK.



    Step 3: Click on Service which is located on the left column and then click Custom.



    Step 4: Click on New Entry

    Step 5: In the Service NAME field enter a name for your custom service.

    Step 6: Under the protocol field next to #1 choose whether the service is to use TCP, UDP , or other. The other field should be used if the service uses a protocol other than TCP or UDP in which case you would need to enter the number for that protocol in the field provided.



    Step 7: The Client Port should be left at 1024:65535 as this range is used by the firewall and if modified will cause the custom service not to function properly.

    Step 8: The Server Port is where you need to specify the port or range of ports that is needed for this custom service. For example, if the service requires TCP ports 10-20 open then the entry would look as follows:



    Step 9: If the application that this custom service is being created for requires more than one port or a range of ports then repeat steps 6 through 8 but fill in the information on line #2.

    Step 10: When you have completed entering the needed port numbers click OK to save this information.


    Read more here for instructions on how to apply the newly created custom service.
    Model DFL-300 / DFL-80
    Question How do I configure the IPSec policy on my Windows 2000/XP PC so I can VPN to the DFL-80/300?
    Answer

    Configuration of IPSec Policy in Win2K and WinXP

    Step 1: Go to Start>Programs>Administrative Tools>Local Security Policy. You can also go to Start>Run and type secpol.msc and then click OK.

    Step 2: Right-click IP Security Policies on Local Computer and then click Create IP security Policy.



    Step 3: Click the Next button and name your policy. Ex. "VPN to DFL-300". Click Next.

    Step 4: Uncheck Activate the default response rule and then click Next.



    Step 5: Make sure the Edit properties box is checked and click Finish.




    Build Filter Lists

    Step 1: In the policy properties dialog box uncheck Use Add Wizard and click Add.



    Step 2: From the IP Filter List tab, click Add.



    Step 3: Type the name for the filter list “WinXP to DFL-300”, uncheck the Use Add Wizard and click Add.



    Step 4: In the Source Address field select My IP Address.

    Step 5: In the Destination Address field select A Specified IP Subnet and in the IP address field enter the IP address for the internal subnet of the DFL-300 (ex.192.168.1.0) and in the Subnet Mask field enter 255.255.255.0 then click OK (192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0 being the IP address and Subnet Mask on the internal interface of the DFL-300)..



    Step 6: Click OK on the IP Filter List window.

    Step 7: On the IP Filter List tab click Add.



    Step 8: Name the filter list. Ex. “DFL-300 to WinXP”. Uncheck Use Add Wizard and click Add.



    Step 9: In the Source Address field select A Specific IP Subnet and enter the IP address of 192.168.1.0 and a Subnet Mask of 255.255.255.0 (192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0 being the IP address and Subnet Mask on the internal interface of the DFL-300).



    Step 10: In the Destination Address field select My IP Address and then click OK.


    Configuration of Individual Rules

    Rule 1

    Step 1: From the IP Filter List tab select WinXP to DFL-300.

    Step 2: Click on the Filter Action tab and select Require Security and then click Edit.



    Step 3: Select Negotiate Security, uncheck Accept unsecured communication but always respond using IPSec. Click OK.



    Step 4: Click on the Authentication Method tab and click Edit.

    Step 5: Change the authentication method to Use this string (preshared key), enter the string 123456 and click OK. The preshared key will be displayed in the Authentication Methods tab.



    Step 6: Click the Tunnel Settings tab and select The tunnel endpoint is specified by this IP address and enter the WAN IP address of your DFL-300.



    Step 7: From the Connection Type tab select All network connections and click Apply. Click OK to save this rule.



    Rule 2

    Step 1: In the VPN to DFL-300 policy properties (VPN to DFL-300 being the name of your new policy) uncheck Use Add Wizard and click Add.



    Step 2: From the IP Filter List tab select DFL-300 to WinXP.



    Step 3: Click on the Filter Action tab and select Require Security.



    Step 4: Click on the Authentication Methods tab and click Edit.

    Step 5: Change the authentication method to Use this string (preshared key), enter the string 123456 and click OK. The preshared key will be displayed in the Authentication Methods tab.



    Step 6: Click the Tunnel Settings tab and select The tunnel endpoint is specified by this IP address and enter the IP address of your Windows XP PC.



    Step 7: From the Connection Type tab select All network connections and click Apply. Click OK to save this rule.



    Step 8: Click Close to close the properties window of the "VPN to DFL-300" policy.

    Assign IPSec Policy

    Step 1: In the Local Security Settings window click on IP Security Policies on Local Computer then right-click the policy named VPN to DFL-300 and click on Assign. You should see a green arrow on the folder icon for VPN to DFL-300 and Policy Assigned should now say Yes.



    Configuration of DFL-80/300

    Step 1: Login to the DFL-300. Open Internet Explorer and type inthe IP address of the DFL-300 (192.168.1.1). Enter the Username admin, the password admin, and then click OK. Click on VPN.



    Step 2: Name the VPN WinXP. On From Source, Internal should be selected. Subnet/Mask will be 192.168.1.0/255.255.255.0.

    Step 3: Under To Destination select Remote Client-Fixed IP or Dynamic.

    Step 4: For the Preshare Key enter 123456. Select Data Encryption and Authentication. Click OK.



    Step 5: To activate your VPN connection, ping a computer on the LAN side of the DFL-300 from your remote client.
    Model DFL-300 / DFL-80
    Question How do I configure the PPTP Server on my DFL-300 or DFL-80 so I can VPN using Network and Dial-up Connections?
    Answer


    Configuration of DFL-80/300

    Step 1: Login to the firewall. Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the firewall (192.168.1.1). Enter the username (admin) and your password (admin), and click OK.

    Step 2: Click on VPN and go to PPTP Server.



    Step 3: Click on Modify to enter and change the PPTP Server Design.

    Step 4: Select the radio button to Enable PPTP. Enable Encryption and change the Client IP Range scope to the same subnet as your internal LAN (local network). Set Auto-Disconnect to 0 and Schedule to None. Click OK to apply your changes.



    Step 5: To add a user click on New Entry. Enter the User Name and Password for the remote client. For Remote Client select Single Machine. Under Client IP assigned by, select IP Range to recieve DHCP from the PPTP server or select Fixed IP and enter the static IP Address for that specific user. Click OK to apply your changes.




    Configuration of Windows 2000/XP PPTP client

    Step 1: Click on Start Menu > Programs > Accessories > Communications > Network and Dial-up Connections.



    Step 2: Double-click on Make New Connection. You will now see the Network Connection Wizard. Click on Next to continue.



    Step 3: Select the radio button that allows you to Connect to a private network through the Internet. Click on Next to continue.



    Step 4: Enter the public IP Address of the external interface of the DFL-300 or DFL-80. Click on Next to continue.



    Step 5: Create this connection For All Users and click on Next to continue.



    Step 6: Check to box that allows you to create a shortcut on your desktop and click on Finish.



    Step 7: Double-click the Virtul Private Connection icon located on your desktop. Enter the Username and Password. Click the Connect button to establish connection.



    Step 8: You should now be connected. Once connected, you will need to browse by IP Address. Double-click Internet Explorer and type \\192.168.1.2 and click on Go (Enter an existing IP Address on the LAN side of the DFL-80 or DFL-300). You will now see the shared documents and folders for that existing machine.

    Model DFL-300 / DFL-80 / DI-804HV / DI-808HV
    Question How do I configure an IPSec VPN between a DI-804HV/808HV and a DFL-80/300?
    Answer

    Configuration of DI-804HV/DI-808HV

    Step 1: Log into the web based configuration of the router by typing in the IP address of the router (default: 192.168.0.1) in your web browser. By default the username is admin and there is no password.

    Step 2: Click the VPN button on the left column, select the checkbox to Enable the VPN, and then in the box next to Max. number of tunnels, enter the maximum numbers of VPN tunnels that you would like to have connected.

    Step 3: In the space provided, enter the Tunnel Name for ID number 1, select IKE, and then click More.



    Step 4: In the Local Subnet and Local Netmask fields enter the network identifier for DI-804HVīs LAN and the corresponding subnet mask.



    Step 5: In the Remote Subnet and Remote Netmask fields enter the network identifier for the DFL-300īs Internal interface and the corresponding subnet mask.



    Step 6: In the Remote Gateway field enter the WAN IP address of the remote DFL-300 and in the Preshared Key field, enter a key which must be exactly the same as the Preshared Key that is configured on the DFL-300.



    Step 7: Click Apply and then click on Select IKE Proposal...

    Step 8: Enter a name for proposal ID number 1 and select Group 2 from the DH Group dropdown menu.

    Step 9: Select 3DES as the Encryption Algorithm and SHA-1 as the Authentication Algorithm.

    Step 10: Enter a Lifetime value of 28800 and then select Sec. as the unit for the lifetime value.



    Step 11: Select 1 out of the Proposal ID drop-down menu and click Add To, which will add the proposal that was just configured to the IKE Proposal Index. Click Apply and then click Back.



    Step 12: Click on Select IPSec Proposal...

    Step 13: Enter a name for proposal ID number 1 and select None from the DH Group dropdown menu.

    Step 14: Select ESP as the Encapsulation Protocol.

    Step 15: Select 3DES as the Encryption Algorithm and MD5 as the Authentication Algorithm.

    Step 16: Enter a Lifetime value of 28800 and then select Sec. as the unit for the lifetime value.



    Step 17: Select 1 out of the Proposal ID drop-down menu and click Add To, which will add the proposal that was just configured to the IPSec Proposal Index. Click Apply and then click Restart.




    Configuration of DFL-80/300

    Step 1: Access the configuration screen of the DFL-80/300 by opening a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type the IP address of the DFL-300 in the address bar (192.168.1.1).

    Step 2: Enter the username (admin) and the password (admin). Click OK.



    Step 3: Click on Configuration and take note of the IP address that your ISP has assigned you.



    Step 4: Click on Policy and verify that you have an Outgoing policy configured. If not, click on New Entry, accept the default values, and click OK.



    Step 5: Click on VPN and then click New Entry.



    Step 6: Give the VPN connection a name with no spaces.

    Step 7 Enter the network identifier and subnet mask of the Internal interface.

    Step 8: In the To Destination section select either Remote Gateway--Fixed IP or Remote Gateway--Dynamic IP. Enter the WAN IP address of the DI-804HV if Remote Gateway--Fixed IP is selected.

    Step 9: Enter the network identifier corresponding subnet mask of the DI-804HVīs LAN.

    Step 10: Enter a Preshared Key.
    The Preshared Key needs to be identical to the one configured on the DI-804HV
    Step 11: Select Data Encryption and Authentication as the Encapsulation and click OK.



    Step 12: The VPN tunnel should now be established. If not, open a command prompt and from a computer connected to the Internal interface of the DFL-300 and ping the IP address of a computer that is on the internal LAN of the DI-804HV, or vice versa.



    Step 13: Once you begin to receive replies, the VPN connection has been established.
    Model DFL-300 / DI-804V / DFL-80
    Question How do I setup a VPN tunnel between a DFL-80/300 and a DI-804V?
    Answer NOTE: This will not work if the one or both are behind a router. Also contact your ISP and verify that they do not block UDP port 500, as this will stop the VPN connection from establishing.

    Configuring the DFL-300:

    Step 1: Access the configuration screen of the DFL-300 by opening a web browser such as Internet Explorer and type the IP address of the DFL-300 in the address bar (192.168.1.1).

    Step 2: Enter the username (admin) and the password (admin). Click OK.



    Step 3: Click on Configuration and take note of the IP address that your ISP has assigned you.



    Step 4: Click on Policy and verify that you have an Outgoing policy configured. If not, click on New Entry, accept the default values, and click OK.



    Step 5: Click on VPN and then click click New Entry.



    Step 6: Give the VPN connection a name with no spaces.

    Step 7: Enter the network identifier and subnet mask of the Internal interface.

    Step 8: Select either Remote Gateway--Fixed IP or Remote Gateway--Dynamic IP. Enter the WAN IP address of the DI-804V if Remote Gateway--Fixed IP is selected.

    Step 9: Enter the network identifier and subnet mask of the DI-804Vīs Internal network.

    Step 10: Enter a Preshared Key.
    The Preshared Key needs to be identical to the one configured on the DI-804V
    Step 11: Select Data Encryption and Authentication as the Encapsulation and click OK.




    Configuration of DI-804V

    Step 1: Access the router’s web configuration by entering the router’s IP address in your web browser. The default IP address is 192.168.0.1. Login using your password. The default username is "admin" and the password is blank.

    Help Accessing Web Management

    Step 2: Click on Basic Setup verify that your DI-804V is configure properly to allow you to access the internet.



    Step 3: Click on VPN Settings.

    Step 4: Name your VPN connection and click ADD.



    Step 5: Enter the network identifier of the DFL-300īs Internal interface.

    Step 6: Enter the subnet mask of the DFL-300īs Internal interface.

    Step 7: Enter the WAN IP address of the DFL-300.

    Step 8: Verify the Encryption Protocol is set to 3DES.

    Step 9: Enter a Preshared Key.
    The Preshared Key needs to be identical to the one configured on the DFL-300


    Step 10: Leave the rest of the configuration at their default levels and click SAVE.



    Step 11: Click Next and then click on Save & Restart



    Step 12: The VPN should now be established. If not, open a command prompt and from a computer connected to the Internal interface of the DFL-300 and ping the IP address of a computer that is on the internal LAN of the DI-804V, or vice versa.



    Step 13: Once you begin to receive replies, the VPN connection has been established.

    Step 14: To view the Status of the VPN on the DI-804V, click on Device Status.



    Step 15: From the Device Status screen click on VPN Status.

    Step 16: When the VPN has been established, the Status will be Active.



    Step 17: To view the Status of the VPN on the DFL-300, click on VPN.

    Step 18: When the VPN connection has been established, the Status will be Connect.

    NOTE: You can also Connect and Disconnect the VPN connection from this screen.
    Model DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question How do I limit all Internet access to a certain time using the Schedule function on my DFL-700/1100?
    Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DFL-700/DFL-1100 in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and there is no default password. Click OK.

    Step 3: Click the Firewall tab then click Schedules to the left.



    Step 4: Click on Add new.

    Step 5: Enter the following details for the new Schedule:

    1. Name - schedule_9am-6pm
    2. Active From - 01 Jan 2004 | Hour - 9
    3. Active To - 01 Jan 2005 | Hour - 18
    4. Check the Recurring scheduling check box to ensure that the schedule is active throughout the year.



    Step 6: Click on the Firewall tab then click Policy.



    Step 7: Click on the LAN->WAN policy option.



    Step 8: By default, there are 4 rules available. The below example will demonstrate applying the above schedule feature to allow_standard.

    Step 9: Next to Schedule select schedule_9am-6pm from the drop-down list.

    Step 10: Click on Activate on the bottom left-hand corner of the screen to save the changes.



    Step 11: Click Activate Changes to reboot the DFL-700/DFL-1100 with the new settings.
    Model DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question Can I make changes to my DFL-700/1100 if I am logged on the administrative account in more than one location simultaneously?
    Answer The DFL-700/1100 will not allow you to make changes to its settings if you are logged into the web-based configuration at more than one location simultaneously.

    Note: To make changes to the DFL-700/1100 you must be logged on to the administrator account. The user account will only allow you to view the settings of the firewall, but will not allow you to make any changes.
    Model DFL-700 / DFL-1100
    Question How do I limit outgoing web (HTTP) traffic using the Traffic Shaping feature of my DFL firewall?
    Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.

    Step 3: Click the System tab at the top and then click Interfaces on the left.



    Step 4: Next to WAN click Edit.

    Step 5: Check the Traffic Shaping check box. Set the Upstream bandwidth and the Downstream bandwidth in kbit/s for your Internet connection.



    Step 6: Click Apply to save the settings.

    Step 7: Click the Firewall tab at the top and then click Policy on the left.



    Step 8: Next to Show policy click LAN->WAN.



    Step 9: Click Edit next to the policy that you want to apply Traffic Shaping to. In this example, it is the allow_standard policy.

    Step 10: Check the Traffic Shaping check box and enter the speed that you would like the HTTP Downstream traffic limited to next to Downstream. In this example, it is 1500 kbit/s.



    Step 11: Click Apply to save the settings.

    Step 12: Click Activate on the bottom left hand corner of the screen to save the changes.



    Step 13: Click Activate Changes to reboot the firewall with the new settings.
    Model DFL-80
    Question What is the maximum number of mapped IPīs that can be configured on the DFL-80?
    Answer The maximum number of IPīs that can be mapped is 16.
    Model DFL-80 / DFL-300 / DS-601 / DS-605
    Question How do I configure the DS-601/605 VPN software client to connect to the DFL-80/300?
    Answer

    Configuration of DFL-80/300

    Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Enter the username and password (admin/admin by default). Click OK.

    Step 2: Click on VPN and select IPSec Autokey. Click New Entry.



    Step 3: Configure the IPSec VPN as followed:

    • Name: name as desired
    • Internal Subnet: enter the local subnet (192.168.1.0 in this example)
    • Internal Netmask: enter the local netmask (255.255.255.0 in this example)
    • Remote Client -- Fixed IP or Dynamic IP: select to enable
    • Authentication: select Preshare
    • Pre-shared key: enter the preshared key
    • Encapsulation: Data Encryption + Authentication
    • IPSec Lifetime: 28800
    • Schedule: None
    Click OK.




    Configuration of DS-601/605 VPN client software

    Note: A Public IP address is required on the client PC in order to establish an IPSec VPN because the DFL-80/300 does not support NAT Transversal.

    Step 1: Click Configuration and then select Profile Settings.



    Step 2: Select the DFL-300 profile and click Configure. If the profile does not exist, click New Entry to create a profile.



    Step 3: Select Basic Settings and configure as followed:
    • Profile name: enter a name for the profile (DFL-300 in this example)
    • Communication medium: select the type of internet connection


    Step 4: Select IPSec General Settings and configured as followed:
    • Gateway: enter the WAN IP address of the remote DFL-300.
    • IKE Policy: select DFL-300[3DES-SHA-DH2] from the dropdown menu
    • IPSec policy: select DFL-300[3DES-SHA] from the dropdown menu
    • Exch. mode: select Main mode
    • PFS group: select DH-Group 2 (1024Bit)


    Step 5: Select Identities and enter the pre-shared key next to Shared secret and Confirm secret.



    NOTE: The Preshared Key must be identical to the one configured on the firewall.

    Step 6: Select IP Address Assignment and configure it according to your settings. It is recommended to keep the default settings.



    Step 7: Select Remote Networks and configure as followed:
    • Network addresses: enter the reomte network (192.168.1.0 in this example)
    • Subnet masks: enter the remote subnet mask (255.255.255.0 in this example)


    Step 8: Select Firewall Settings and set the Enable Stateful Inspection to when Connected. Click OK to save the settings and then click OK again to go back to connection screen.



    Step 9: Click Connect to establish the VPN connection to the firewall.

    Model DFL-800 / DFL-1600
    Question How do I connect to the internet using Wan2?
    Answer
    Note: This FAQ was created for firmware version 2.05 or above.

    Note: You need to disable any pop up blockers on your computer.


    Click here for instructions on connecting using DHCP
    Click here for instructions on connecting using PPPoE
    Click here for instructions on connecting using a Static IP




    Connect using DHCP


    Step 1: Connect your computer to one of the LAN ports on the DFL.
    (By default the DFL-800 will not accept connections on any interface other than the LAN interface.)

    Step 2: Assign a static IP address on your computer as followed:
    • IP Address: 192.168.1.2
    • Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
    • Default Gateway: 192.168.1.1


    Step 3: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DFL in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1), press Enter.

    Step 4: Enter username and password. Default username is admin and default password is admin.



    Step 5: The web GUI will begin with the D-Link setup wizard, click Next.



    Step 6: Here you can set a new password, by entering the new password and re-typing the password to confirm, click Next.



    Step 7: Select the appropriate time zone and click Next.



    Step 8: Select WAN2 in the drop-down and click Next.



    Step 9: Select DHCP-automatic configuration and click Next.



    Step 10: Select Enable DHCP Servers (Opional). Configure as followed:
    • IP range: Enter desired range IP for DHCP clients
    • Subnet Mask: Entered corresponding subnet mask
    • Default Gateway: Enter Lan IP of the firewall
    • DNS Server: Enter desired DNS IP address
    Click Next.



    Step 11: Configure NTP Server as desired (Opional). Click Next.



    Step 12: Click activate to save the configuration.






    Connect using PPPoE


    Step 1: Connect your computer to one of the LAN ports on the DFL.
    (By default the DFL-800 will not accept connections on any interface other than the LAN interface.)

    Step 2: Assign a static IP address on your computer as followed:
    • IP Address: 192.168.1.2
    • Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
    • Default Gateway: 192.168.1.1


    Step 3: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DFL in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1), press Enter.

    Step 4: Enter username and password. Default username is admin and default password is admin.



    Step 5: The web GUI will begin with the D-Link setup wizard, click Next.



    Step 6: Here you can set a new password, by entering the new password and re-typing the password to confirm, click Next.



    Step 7: Select the appropriate time zone and click Next.



    Step 8: Select WAN2 in the drop-down and click Next.



    Step 9: Select the radio button labeled PPPoE-account details needed and click Next.



    Step 10: Enter your DSL account details provided by your ISP, click Next.



    Step 11: Select Enable DHCP Servers (Opional).
    • IP range: Enter desired range IP for DHCP clients.
    • Subnet Mask: Entered corresponding subnet mask.
    • Default Gateway: Enter Lan IP of the firewall.
    • DNS Server: Enter desired DNS IP address.
    Click Next.



    Step 12: Configure the NTP Server as desired (Opional). Click Next.



    Step 13: Click activate to save the configuration.



    Step 14: Click close after the firewall is done saving the configuration.






    Connect using a Static IP

    Step 1: Connect your computer to one of the LAN ports on the DFL.
    (By default the DFL-800 will not accept connections on any interface other than the LAN interface.)

    Step 2: Assign a static IP address on your computer as followed:
    • IP Address: 192.168.1.2
    • Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
    • Default Gateway: 192.168.1.1


    Step 3: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DFL in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1), press Enter.

    Step 4: Enter username and password. Default username is admin and default password is admin.



    Step 5: The web GUI will begin with the D-Link setup wizard, click Next.



    Step 6: Here you can set a new password, by entering the new password and re-typing the password to confirm, click Next.



    Step 7: Select the appropriate time zone and click Next.



    Step 8: Select WAN2 in the drop-down and click Next.



    Step 9: Select Static-manual configuration and click Next.



    Step 10: Configure the WAN2 for static public IP address as followed:
    • IP address: Enter public IP address provided by ISP
    • NetMask: Enter appropriated subnet mask provided by ISP
    • Gateway: Enter gateway IP address provided by ISP
    • Primary DNS: Enter DNS IP address provided by ISP
    • Secondary DNS: Enter DNS IP address provided by ISP
    Click Next.



    Step 11: Select enable DHCP Servers (Opional).
    • IP range: Enter desired range IP for DHCP clients.
    • Subnet Mask: Entered corresponding subnet mask.
    • Default gateway: Enter Lan IP of the firewall.
    • DNS Server: Enter desired DNS IP address.
    Click Next.



    Step 12: Configure NTP Server as desired (Opional). Click Next.



    Step 13: Click Activate to save the configuration.



    Step 14: Click close after the firewall is done saving the configuration.
    Model DFL-CP310
    Question How do I manually configure my Internet connection?
    Answer Note: If this is the first time logging into the deviceīs web management configuration, click Cancel at the Internet Setup Wizard.

    The FAQ covers the following connection types. Click on the appropriate option for the procedure.

    Dynamic IP
    Static IP
    PPPoE


    Dynamic IP Configuration

    Step 1: Connect an Ethernet cable from your modem to the WAN port located on the rear panel of the device. Make sure the cable connections are secured.



    Step 2: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 3: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the Internet tab. On the right-hand side, click Edit within the Primary Connection listing.



    Step 4: Next to Connection Type, click on the drop-down box and select Local Area Network(LAN).
    Check the following options:
    • Obtain IP Address automatically (using DHCP)
    • Obtain Domain Name Servers automaticallly


    Step 5: Click on the Apply button below to save and activate the changes.




    Static IP Configuration

    Step 1: Connect an Ethernet cable from your modem to the WAN port located on the rear panel of the device. Make sure the cable connections are secured.



    Step 2: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 3: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the Internet tab. On the right-hand side, click Edit within the Primary Connection listing.



    Step 4: Next to Connection Type, click on the drop-down box and select Local Area Network(LAN).
    Uncheck the following options:
    • Obtain IP Address automatically (using DHCP)
    • Obtain Domain Name Servers automatically


    Step 5: Manually enter the IP address, Default Gateway, DNS servers, and select the Subnet Mask all provided by your Internet Service Provider. Click on the Apply button below to save and activate the changes.




    PPPoE Configuration

    Step 1: Connect an Ethernet cable from your modem to the WAN port located on the rear panel of the device. Make sure the cable connections are secured.



    Step 2: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 3: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the Internet tab. On the right-hand side, click Edit within the Primary Connection listing.



    Step 4: Next to Connection Type, click on the drop-down box and select PPPoE.
    Check the following option:
  • Obtain Domain Name Servers automatically



    Step 5: Manually enter the Username and Password both provided by your Internet Service Provider. Re-Type the password next to the Confirm Password field. Click on the Apply button below to save and activate the changes.



    • Model DFL-CP310
    Question How do I enable remote management?
    Answer Note: The FAQ covers the following management types. Click on the appropriate option for the procedure.

    HTTPS
    SSH


    HTTPS Management

    Note: This will allow remote access to the web management interface of the device.

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Setup on the left-hand side and select the Management tab. Click on the dropdown menu next to the Access From field within the HTTPS listing and select Any.



    Step 3: Click on the Apply button below to save and activate the changes.




    SSH Management


    Note: This will allow remote access to the command line interface (CLI) of the device.

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Setup on the left-hand side and select the Management tab. Click on the dropdown menu next to the Access From field within the SSH listing and select Any.



    Step 3: Click on the Apply button below to save and activate the changes.



    Model DFL-CP310
    Question How do I allow unlimited access from the Internet to a designated computer?
    Answer Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Security on the left-hand side and select the Exposed Host tab. Next to Exposed Host, enter the IP address of the computer you would like to allow unlimited access.



    Note: A computer should only be configured as an Exposed Host if experiencing communication problems through the firewall. You may only configure one computer at a time as an Exposed Host.
    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I configure access for the MAC mail application?
    Answer Note: This FAQ applies to Mac OS-X users using the default Mac Mail application.

    The FAQ is in accordance assuming the following information.
  • LAN IP address: 192.168.10.1
  • LAN Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
  • LAN DHCP Server: 192.168.10.1-192.168.10.254

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Security on the left-hand side and select the Rules tab. Click on Add Rule.



    Step 3: For Rule Type, select Allow and Forward. Click on Next.



    Step 4: For Service, select Custom Service and for the Protocol select TCP. For the Port Range enter ports 143 - 143. Click on Next.



    Note: The port and protocol specified refer to IMAP (Internet Message Access Protocol) which is used by Mac Mail instead of POP3 (Post Office Protocol).

    Step 5: For Destination & Source, select Any for the Source and select Specified IP for the Destination. Enter the IP address of the computer or device you wish to forward the service to (192.168.10.29 in this example). Click on Next.



    Note: For the Destination, you can also choose the automatically-generated network object of the computer running the Mac Mail application.

    Step 6: Click on Finish to save the rule in the firewall configuration.



    Step 7: The newly created rule will appear in the list.

    • Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I log into the web management interface?
    Answer Step 1: Connect your computer to one of the four LAN ports located on the rear panel of the device using an Ethernet cable. Make sure the cable connections are secured.



    Step 2: Open a web browser and in the address bar, type in the following URL: http://my.firewall and press Enter on the keyboard.



    Step 3: At the login page, enter the appropriate user credentials. If this is the first time logging into the web management interface, you will be prompted to create an administrator password.

    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question What is the default user name and password to access the management interface?
    Answer The default user name is admin and there is no password. Upon initial access to the managment interface, you will be prompted to create an administrator password.
    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question What is the default LAN IP address?
    Answer The default LAN IP address of the device is 192.168.10.1. You may also access the management interface using the default LAN IP address instead of http://my.firewall.
    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I change the LAN IP address?
    Answer Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Network on the left-hand side. Select the My Network tab and on the right-hand side, click Edit within the LAN listing.



    Step 3: Next to IP address, manually enter the desired IP address and next to Subnet Mask select the desired netmask. Click on the Apply button below to save and activate the changes.



    Note: You may need to release and renew your IP address to regain access to the web management interface and establish connectivity.
    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I know if my Internet connection is supported?
    Answer The DFL-CP310/CPG310 firewall supports the following Internet connection types:
    • Static IP
    • Dynamic IP
    • PPPoE (Dynamic)
    • PPTP
    • Telstra (BPA)
    • Dial-Up (Serial RS-232)
    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question Why does the web management interface have problems functioning through the Safari web browser?
    Answer Note: This FAQ applies to Mac OS-X users using the default web browser Safari.

    The Safari web browser cannot be used to open or apply changes to the web management interface of the DFL-CP310/CPG310. This is due to an incompatibility with the method in which Safari uses to display the pages of the DFL-CP310/CPG310 web management interface.

    Known compatible web browsers for MAC OS-X users:
  • Internet Explorer
  • Mozilla Firefox
  • Camino
    • Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I change the administrator password?
    Answer Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Users on the left-hand side and select the Internal Users tab. On the right-hand side, click Edit within the admin listing.



    Step 3: In the User Details window, next to Password, manually enter in the new password and re-type the password in the Confirm Password field. Click on Next.



    Step 4: In the Set User Permissions window, click on Finish. The administrator password will now be changed.

    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I create users in the local user database for access to the management interface?
    Answer Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Users on the left-hand side and select the Internal Users tab. Click on the New User button below.



    Step 3: In the User Details window, manually enter the new Username and Password. Re-type the password in the Confirm Password field and click on Next.



    Step 4: In the Set User Permissions window, next to Administrator Level, select Read/Write or Read Only. After selecting the appropriate Administrator Level, click Finish.
    • Read/Write-Allows the user to view and modify the device configuration.
    • Read Only-Allows the user to only view the device configuration.


    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I set the system time?
    Answer Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Setup on the left-hand side. Select the Tools tab and on the right-hand side and click on Set Time within the Set Time listing.



    Step 3: Select the desired configuration option. After selecting the appropriate option, click Next.
    • Your computerīs clock: select to matches the clock settings on your computer
    • Keep the current setting: select to keeps the current time configuration
    • Use a Time Server: select to manually specify an available time server
    • Specify Date and Time: select to manually enter the date and time


    Step 4: After selecting the appropriate option and configuring the time and date settings, click on Finish at the succession window.

    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question What is the difference between the DFL-CP310 and the DFL-CPG310?
    Answer The DFL-CPG310 has two additional features which the DFL-CP310 does not have. These are the built-in 802.11b/g wireless capability and the integrated USB print server (Two USB 2.0 ports are added to the rear panel).

    DFL-CP310 Rear Panel



    DFL-CPG310 Rear Panel



    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I use the firewall Event Log?
    Answer Click on the appropriate option for the procedure:

    A. View the Event Log

    B. Save the Event Log

    C. Clear the Event Log

    Note: For a complete reference of the Log Messages, click here to download.


    ______________________________________________________________________________________

    View the Event Log

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Reports on the left-hand side and select the Event Log tab. Click on Refresh at the top right-hand corner to view a current listing of the log entries. There is a legend at the bottom left-hand corner of the screen corresponding to the color-coded log entries.




    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    Save the Event Log

    In the Event Log window, click on Save at the top right-hand corner. A save prompt will appear. Save the file to the desired location. The logs will be saved as a Microsoft Excel file (XLS).



    Note: with this method you can only save up to the 100 current displayed event log entries. In case you want to save all event logs entries, you can use the Syslog logging option.


    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    Clear the Event Log

    In the Event Log window, click on Clear at the top right-hand corner. At the prompt, click OK. The firewall log entries will now be cleared.

    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I backup or upload the firewall configuration?
    Answer Note: The FAQ covers the following:
  • A. Backup Configuration
  • B. Upload Configuration

    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    A. Backup Configuration

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Setup on the left-hand side and select the Tools tab. On the right-hand side, click on Export within the Export Settings listing.



    Step 3: A save prompt will appear. Save the configuration file to the desired location.
    Note: The configuration file will have a .cfg extension.





    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    B. Upload Configuration

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Setup on the left-hand side and select the Tools tab. On the right-hand side, click on Import within the Import Settings listing.



    Step 3: Click on Browse in the Import Settings window. Browse to the desired configuration file to upload to the device. After you have chosen the desired configuration file, click Upload.
    Note: The configuration file will have a .cfg extension.

    • Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I reset to factory defaults?
    Answer Note: The FAQ covers the following reset methods. Click on the appropriate option for the procedure.
  • A. Via the Hardware Reset Button
  • B. Via the Web Management Interface
  • C. Via the Command Line Interface (Console)

    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    Via the Hardware Reset Button

    Note: This does not require the use of a valid user name and password.

    Step 1: Make sure the unit is powered on. Using a thin, pointed object, press and hold the RESET button on the back of the NetDefend firewall in steadily until the PWR/SEC light turns solid red and then release it.



    Step 2: The PWR/SEC light on the physical hardware will flash red once and continue to flash green very rapidly. When the PWR/SEC begins to flash green at a slower steadier pace, you should be able to log back into the web interface. Upon logging into the web management interface, you will be prompted to create the administrator password. All device settings will be reset to defaults.



    Note: The procedure may take a few minutes.

    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    Via the Web Interface

    Note: This requires the use of a valid user name and password.

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Setup on the left-hand side. Select the Tools tab. On the right-hand side, click on Factory Settings within the Factory Settings listing.



    Step 3: In the confirmation box, you may choose to revert to the default firmware 6.0.46x by checking the option. If you would like to keep the current firmware version, make sure option is unchecked. Click on OK.



    Step 4: The Please Wait page will appear. Wait for the unit to reset and observe the PWR/SEC light on the front panel of the unit.



    Step 5: The PWR/SEC light on the physical hardware will flash red once and continue to flash green very rapidly. When the PWR/SEC begins to flash green at a slower steadier pace, you should be able to log back into the web interface. Upon logging into the web management interface, you will be prompted to create the administrator password. All device settings will be reset to defaults.



    Note: The procedure may take a few minutes.

    _______________________________________________________________________________________
    Via the Console (CLI)

    Note: This requires the use of a valid user name and password. The procedure will require the use of a software terminal emulation application. The procedure involves the use of Windows Hyperterminal application.

    Step 1: With the unit powered on, connect one end of an RS-232 Serial Cable Female/Female to the Serial Port located on the rear panel of the firewall. Connect the other end of the RS-232 cable to an available COM port on your computer.



    Note: Make sure the COM port is enabled in the BIOS of your computer. Please consult your computer manufacturer for details.

    Step 2: Open up a terminal emulation program on your computer such as the HyperTerminal application in MS Windows. In Windows, open Start/Run and type hypertrm into the Run field. Click on OK.



    Step 3: Name the connection. Click on OK.



    Step 4: Select the correct COM # port corresponding to the port on the back of the computer where the serial cable is connected. Click on OK.



    Step 5: Use the following settings for the terminal session:
  • Bits per second: 57600 bps
  • Data bits: 8
  • Parity: None
  • Stop bits: 1
  • Flow Control: None



    Note: Make sure the Scroll Lock function on your keyboard is disabled.

    Step 6: Login using the admin username and password. Type the following command at Console>, reset defaults.



    Step 7: When the following message appears on the console window, the unit has been successfully reset to factory defaults:

    Check Point serial terminal command line interface - SofaWare embedded
    Please Enter password for user admin!
    Password:

    Step 8: The PWR/SEC light on the physical hardware will flash red once and continue to flash green very rapidly. When the PWR/SEC begins to flash green at a slower steadier pace, you should be able to log back into the web interface. Upon logging into the web management interface, you will be prompted to create the administrator password. All device settings will be reset to defaults.



    Note: The procedure may take a few minutes.
    • Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I configure port forwarding?
    Answer The procedures are in accordance assuming the following information.
  • LAN IP address: 192.168.10.1
  • LAN Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
  • LAN DHCP Server: 192.168.10.1-192.168.10.254

    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    A. Port Forwarding using the available Pre-defined Services

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Security on the left-hand side and select the Servers tab. Under Allow, check the box for the appropriate service (Web Server in this example). Under Host IP, enter the IP address of the computer or device of which you want to forward the service (192.168.10.29 in this example).



    Step 3: Click on Apply to save and activate the changes.





    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    B. Port Forwarding using a Custom Service

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Security on the left-hand side and select the Rules tab. Click on Add Rule.



    Step 3: For Rule Type, select Allow and Forward. Click on Next.



    Step 4: For Service, select Custom Service. Select the appropriate protocol (TCP in this example) and enter the port range for the custom service (3389 in this example). Click on Next.



    Step 5: For Destination & Source, select Any for the Source and select Specified IP for Destination. Enter the IP address of the computer or device in which to forward the service (192.168.10.10 in this example). Click on Next.



    Step 6: Click on Finish to save the rule in the firewall configuration.



    Step 7: The newly created rule will appear in the list.



    • Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I use the firewall Traffic Monitor?
    Answer Note: Note: The FAQ covers the following. Click on the appropriate option for the procedure.
  • A. View the Traffic Monitor
  • B. Save the Traffic Monitor
  • C. Clear the Traffic Monitor
  • D. Change the Sample Rate Interval

    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    A. View the Traffic Monitor


    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Reports on the left-hand side and select the Traffic Monitor tab. Click on Refresh at the top right-hand corner to view a current listing of the log entries. There is a legend at the bottom left-hand corner of the screen corresponding to the color-coded chart. By clicking the drop-down box next to Traffic Monitor Report above will allow you to display the report from each interface (LAN,Primary-Internet,DMZ or Secondary-Internet).



    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    B. Save the Traffic Monitor

    In the Traffic Monitor window, click on Export at the top right-hand corner. A save prompt will appear. Save the file to the desired location. The traffic monitor report will be saved as a Microsoft Excel file (CSV).



    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    C. Clear the Traffic Monitor

    In the Traffic Monitor window, click on Clear at the top right-hand corner. The firewall traffic monitor reports will now be cleared.

    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    D. Change the Sample Rate Interval

    In the Traffic Monitor window, click on Settings at the top right-hand corner. Next to Sample Monitoring Data, enter in the desired value. The value will be measured in units of seconds. Click on the Apply button below to save and activate the changes.

    • Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I configure the firewall security level?
    Answer Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Security on the left-hand side and select the Firewall tab. In the Security Level window, click and drag the bar to choose the desired security level.



  • Low
    All outbound traffic is allowed, all inbound traffic is blocked except for ICMP echoīs ("pings").

  • Medium
    All outbound traffic is allowed except for Windows file sharing (NBT ports 137, 138, 139 and 445), all inbound traffic is blocked.

  • High
    Restrictions apply to outbound traffic, allowing only Web traffic (HTTP, HTTPS), Email (IMAP, POP3, SMTP), ftp, NNTP, Telnet, DNS, IKE, 2746 UDP and 256 TCP traffic out. All inbound traffic is blocked.

  • Block All (Available with the latest firmware upgrade)
    Blocks all traffic passing through the gateway unless firewall rules are specified. This is the highest security level and requires any access to be configured in the firewall rules.
    • Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I connect to the DFL-CP310/CPG310 using the Check Point SecuRemote/SecureClient VPN client?
    Answer Step 1: Double click on the SecuRemote icon in the system tray.



    Step 2: Click Yes to create a new site.



    Step 3: Enter the Remote Gateway then click Next to continue.



    Step 4: Select User name and Password then click Next to continue.




    Step 5: Enter the Username and Password created in the DFL-CP310/CPG310 then click Next to continue.



    Step 6: Select Standard then click Next to continue.



    Step 7: Wait for the CheckPoint client to connect to the Firewall.



    Step 8: Validate the Internal CA Certificate Fingerprint and Peer DN then click Next to continue.



    Step 9: Click Finish when the site has been created.



    Step 10: Click Yes to connect now.



    Step 11: Enter the Username and Password then click Connect.



    Step 12: The VPN should now be established.

    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question Who do I contact regarding my NetDefend Upgrades and Services?
    Answer If you have any issues concerning your Upgrades, please email Check Point at order@checkpoint.com.

    Email content should include the following:
    • Order Number
    • MAC Address of the unit
    • Your contact information
    • Brief description of the problem
    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I obtain the free 90-day trial for antivirus, software subscription, dynamic DNS and security reporting services?
    Answer Note: This FAQ involves obtaining the latest firmware version available without a purchase for subscription.

    Step 1: Please click here to go to the main page to activate your 90-day free trial.

    Step 2: Enter all of the required information on this page.



    Clicking on the link How to find my purchase code? next to the Purchase Code field will provide instructions on how to obtain the firewall MAC Address and Purchase Code. Please verify that all the information is correct and click on Send.



    Step 3: You will be brought to a success page and issued a reference ticket number. You should receive the corresponding activation confirmation email within 48 hours.



    Step 4: The first email will be confirmation that the activation request was received by the SofaWare Support Team. The first email should appear similar to the following:

    Note: For any inquiries regarding your activation request, you may create an account at www.sofaware.com and send inquiries by secure email.

    Dear Sir/Madam,

    We have accepted your purchase activation request.
    Please allow us up to 24 hours to process your activation request.
    Once the request is approved you will get a seaprate acknowledgement by email:

    * A product key string will be sent to you in case you ordered a product license upgrade
    * Service center information will be sent to you in case you required support services

    For further inquiries about this purchase activation request please open a support ticket onliner here: http://www.sofaware.com/getkey.aspx and mention this ticket reference number: XXX0000000000X.

    Best regards,
    The SofaWare Support Team

    ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
    Visit us at http://www.sofaware.com/support For documentation and live chat support


    STAY INFORMED -
    Register for the SofaWare Newsletter at
    http://www.sofaware.com/register.aspx
    ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

    Step 5: The second email received should be an activation confirmation. This email should appear similar to the following:

    Dear Sir/Madam,

    A new gateway was added to your security services account at SMP_D-link.
    The new details are:
    Gateway ID: gwxxx
    Registration Key:
    Service Center: netdefend.sofaware.com
    MAC Address: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx


    In order to take advantage of your subscription and begin using the services, please do the following:
    1. From a computer connected to your security appliance surf to http://my.firewall
    2. Click on the Services menu
    3. Click on the Connect link
    4. Check the Connect to a service center checkbox
    5. Choose to connect to netdefend.sofaware.com button
    6. Click Next
    For further technical support please contact Dlink technical support.

    Step 6: An additional email should also contain instructions on activating your subscription services.
    • Make sure the firewall is configured and connected for Internet access.
    • Log into the web based configuration of the firewall by typing http://my.firewall into the address bar of your web browser. Log in as an administrator.
    • Select Services from the lefthand column. Under the Service Account section, click on Connect next to Connect to a Service Center.



    • Make sure Connect to a Service Center is checked and select Specified IP. Enter the service center provided in the second email. Click on Next.



    • The Confirmation page will provide a list of services to which you are subscribed. Click on Next.



    • You are now done. Click on Finish.



    Step 7: Select Services from the lefthand column. The 90-day trial services should now be activated.


    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question Where can I download the Check Point SecuRemote/SecureClient VPN client?
    Answer The SecuRemote/SecureClient VPN client,for Microsoft Windows and Mac OS X, is a free download.

    Click here to download.
    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I create users for VPN access in the local database (VPN Topology User)?
    Answer Step 1: Log into the web based configuration of the firewall by typing http://my.firewall into the address bar of your web browser. Log in as an administrator.

    Step 2: Click on Users on the lefthand column. Select the Internal Users tab. Click on New User.



    Step 3: Enter a username and password for the VPN client. Click on Next.



    Step 4: Check the option for VPN Remote Access. Click on Finish.



    Step 5: The newly created user should now appear in the list.

    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question What is the OfficeMode Network on the firewall and how do I enable OfficeMode?
    Answer By default, VPN clients connect to the VPN Server using an Internet IP address locally assigned by an ISP. This may lead to the following:
    • VPN clients on the same network will be unable to communicate with each other via the NetDefend Internal VPN Server. This is because their IP addresses are on the same subnet, and they therefore attempt to communicate directly over the local network, instead of through the secure VPN link.
    • Some networking protocols or resources may require the clientīs IP address to be an internal one.
    OfficeMode solves these problems by enabling the NetDefend DHCP Server to automatically assign a unique local IP address to the VPN client, when the client connects and authenticates. The IP addresses are allocated from a pool called the OfficeMode Network.



    Step 1: Log into the web based configuration of the firewall by typing http://my.firewall into the address bar of your web browser. Log in as an administrator.

    Step 2: Click on Network along the lefthand side of the interface. Click on the My Networks tab. By default, OfficeMode is disabled. Click on Edit.



    Step 3: Under Edit Network Settings, select Enabled from the dropdown menu next to Mode. Click on Apply.

    Verify the following:
    • IP Address: 192.168.254.1
    • Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
    • Hide NAT: Enabled


    Step 4: At the prompt to verify that your network settings will be changed, click on OK.



    Step 5: You should see the following succeed page to indicate that the changes were activated.



    Step 6: Click on Network along the lefthand side. Click on the My Networks tab. Verify that OfficeMode is now enabled.

    Model DFL-CP310 / DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I obtain and activate the security services and upgrades for my DFL-CP310/CPG310?
    Answer Note: The names and IP addresses specified in this FAQ are used only as an example. This FAQ describes the procedure of obtaining and installing the Power Pack upgrade, however, the same procedure can be applied to other security service upgrades and subscriptions. Make sure you are able to access the internet through the firewall before proceeding.

    Step 1: Log into the web based configuration of the firewall by typing http://my.firewall into the address bar of your web browser. Log in as an administrator.

    Step 2: At the Welcome Screen, click on the Upgrades & Services button.



    Step 3: The NetDefend Upgrades & Services page provides you with a list of basic upgrade options you can choose. At the top of the page, click on Your Account.



    Step 4: Please sign in to your account first using your registration information. If you are not yet registered, please register first and then sign in to your new account. After you have signed into your account click on Store Home at the top of the screen.



    Step 5: On the main D-Link Shop page click on Security Service Packages & Upgrades.



    Step 6: The Security Services & Upgrades page provides you with a description of each security service upgrade.



    Step 7: Scroll to the bottom of the page and click on the Buy Now! Button.



    Step 8: The NetDefend Upgrades & Services page provides you with similar information to the page in Step 5. Notice at the top-right corner of the page there is a US$0.00 listed. This page will allow you to select upgrades to add to your cart.



    Step 9: Scroll to the bottom of the page and you will find the Product Options section. This section allows you to select from the full list of upgrades available for the DFL-CP310/CPG310 along with the prices. Enter the MAC Address of your product. The MAC Address is located physically on the bottom label of the actual hardware. Select the Power Pack upgrade as shown (or whichever upgrade you wish to purchase; the Power Pack upgrade is only being used as an example for this FAQ). Click on Add to Cart.



    Step 10: The What’s In My Cart? page shows the list of upgrades & services which you have selected to purchase. Click on Checkout.



    Step 11: Continue through the prompts and enter the required information to complete your purchase(s).

    Step 12: After completing your purchase, you will receive an immediately email providing you with receipt of your purchase; this first E-Mail (Purchase Confirmation) will contain a Purchase Order/Invoice #.

    Step 13: Next, you will receive second E-Mail (Upgrade Confirmation) with the following information:
    • Gateway ID
    • Registration Key
    • Service Center IP Address
    • MAC Address registered for upgrade


    Note: Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA) for the Second E-Mail can take "up to" 48 Hours. If a 48 hour time period has passed and you have not received the second E-Mail (Upgrade Confirmation), please contact Check Point by email at order@checkpoint.com.

    Step 14: In the DFL-CP310/CPG310 configuration, click on Services in the lefthand column. In the Service Account section, click on Connect next to Connect to a Service Center.



    Step 15: On the Service Center page, check Connect to a Service Center. If you were provided with a Service Center IP in your receipt email, select the Specified IP and enter the provided IP address. Otherwise, select the usercenter.sofaware.com option. Click on Next.



    The unit will then attempt to establish a connection to the service center.



    Step 16: At the Service Center Login window enter the Gateway ID and Registration Key provided in the email. Click on Next.



    Step 17: The confirmation page will display a list of the new subscription services added to your DFL-CP310/CPG310.



    Step 18: Click on Finish on the succeed page.



    Under the Services/Account page in the configuration you should now see which services you are currently subscribed to.

    Model DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I change the WLAN IP address?
    Answer Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Network on the left-hand side. Select the My Network tab and on the right-hand side, click Edit within the WLAN listing.



    Step 3: Next to IP address, manually enter the desired IP address and next to Subnet Mask select the desired netmask. Click on the Apply button below to save and activate the changes.



    Note: You may need to release and renew your IP address to re-gain access to the web management interface and establish connectivity.
    Model DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I manually configure the advanced WLAN settings?
    Answer Note: The FAQ covers the following.
  • A. Enable/Disable the SSID Broadcast
  • B. Enable/Disable MAC Filtering
  • C. Configure Transmission Rate
  • D. Configure Transmission Power
  • E. Configure Antenna Selection
  • F. Configure Fragmentation Threshold
  • G. Configure RTS Threshold
  • H. Configure Extended Range Mode (XR)
  • I. Configure the Multimedia QoS (WMM)

    Note: The advanced setting may only be configured if the WLAN has been enabled. For instructions on configuring the basic WLAN settings, click here.

    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    A. Enable/Disable SSID Broadcast

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the My Network tab. On the right-hand side click on Edit within the WLAN listing.



    Step 3 Click on Show Advanced Settings located at the bottom of the window.



    Step 4 Click on the drop-down box next to Hide the Network Name (SSID). After selecting the desired option, click on Apply to save and activate the changes.

    1. Yes - Hide visibility of your Network Name (SSID) to all client stations in the area.
      Note: You may need to manually enter the Network Name (SSID) in configuring the desired client stations for connectivity.

    2. No - Allow Network Name (SSID) to be visible to all client stations in the area.


    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    B. Enable/Disable MAC Filtering

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the My Network tab. On the right-hand side click on Edit within the WLAN listing.



    Step 3 Click on Show Advanced Settings located at the bottom of the window.



    Step 4 Click on the drop-down box next to MAC Address Filtering. After selecting the desired option, click on Apply to save and activate the changes.



    1. Yes - Blocks all communication from the WLAN unless the allowed computers are specified in the Objects table.

    2. No - Allow all communication from the WLAN without MAC Filtering.


    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    C. Configure Transmission Rate

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the My Network tab. On the right-hand side click on Edit within the WLAN listing.



    Step 3 Click on Show Advanced Settings located at the bottom of the window.



    Step 4 Click on the drop-down box next to Transmission Rate. After selecting the desired option, click on Apply to save and activate the changes.

    1. Automatic - Recommended Setting. Automatically assigns the transmission rate.

    2. Channel [1-54Mbps] - Assigns a specific transmission rate.
      Note: Assigning a specific transmission rate should only be used when experiencing connectivity problems.


    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    D. Configure Transmission Power

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the My Network tab. On the right-hand side click on Edit within the WLAN listing.



    Step 3 Click on Show Advanced Settings located at the bottom of the window.



    Step 4 Click on the drop-down box next to Transmission Power. After selecting the desired option, click on Apply to save and activate the changes.



    1. Full (100%) - Recommended Setting. Broadcast wireless signal using the maximum transmission power available.
    2. Half (50%) - Broadcast wireless signal using 50% of the maximum transmission power available.
    3. Quarter (25%) - Broadcast wireless signal using 25% of the maximum transmission power available.
    4. Eighth (12.5%) - Broadcast wireless signal using 12.5% of the maximum transmission power available.
    Note: Decreasing the transmission power should only be used when experiencing connectivity problems. The setting involves the range of the wireless signal.



    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    E. Configure Antenna Selection

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the My Network tab. On the right-hand side click on Edit within the WLAN listing.



    Step 3 Click on Show Advanced Settings located at the bottom of the window.



    Step 4 Click on the drop-down box next to Antenna Selection. After selecting the desired option, click on Apply to save and activate the changes.

    1. Automatic - Recommended Setting. Both antennas ANT1 and ANT2 will be used to transmit and receive data.
    2. ANT1 - Disables the functionality of ANT2. Only ANT1 will be used to transmit and receive data.
    3. ANT2 - Disables the functionality of ANT1. Only ANT2 will be used to transmit and receive data.
    Note: Selecting a specific antenna should only be used when experiencing connectivity problems.



    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    F. Configure Fragmentation Threshold

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the My Network tab. On the right-hand side click on Edit within the WLAN listing.



    Step 3 Click on Show Advanced Settings located at the bottom of the window.



    Step 4 Next to Fragmentation Threshold manually enter the desired fragmentation threshold value. Click on Apply to save and activate the changes.

    Fragmentation Threshold - The smallest IP packet size (in bytes) that requires the IP packet to be split into smaller fragments.



    Guidelines
    1. The default value is 2346.
    2. It is recommended not to change the threshold value if you are not experiencing wireless connectivity problems.
    3. If experiencing connectivity problems or wireless interference, lower the threshold value (approximately 1000) which reduces error penalty.
    4. Otherwise, increase the threshold value (approximately 2000) which reduces overhead.


    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    G. Configure RTS Threshold

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the My Network tab. On the right-hand side click on Edit within the WLAN listing.



    Step 3 Click on Show Advanced Settings located at the bottom of the window.



    Step 4 Next to RTS Threshold manually enter the desired RTS threshold value. Click on Apply to save and activate the changes.

    RTS Threshold - The smallest IP packet size (in bytes) for which a station must send an RTS (Request To Send) before sending the IP packet.



    Guidelines
    1. The default value is 2346.
    2. It is recommended not to change the threshold value if you are not experiencing wireless connectivity problems.
    3. If experiencing connectivity problems or wireless interference, lower the threshold value (approximately 500) which reduces network congestion.
    4. Otherwise, setting the RTS value equal to the Fragmentation Threshold value effectively disables RTS.


    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    H. Configure Extended Range Mode (XR)

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the My Network tab. On the right-hand side click on Edit within the WLAN listing.



    Step 3 Click on Show Advanced Settings located at the bottom of the window.



    Step 4 Click on the drop-down box next to Extended Range Mode (XR). After selecting the desired option, click on Apply to save and activate the changes.

    Extended Range Mode (XR) - Special feature that allows up to three times the range of regular 802.11g wireless access point. This feature enables long-range connections. The architecture delivers receive sensitivites of up to 105dBm which is over 20dB more than the 802.11 specification. To effectively implement the feature, the client stations are also required to support XR mode. (actual range may depend on environmental factors)

    1. Enabled - Default Setting. Automatically negotiated with XR-enabled wireless stations and used as needed.
    2. Disabled - Disables XR mode feature.


    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    I. Configure Multimedia QoS (WMM)

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the My Network tab. On the right-hand side click on Edit within the WLAN listing.



    Step 3 Click on Show Advanced Settings located at the bottom of the window.



    Step 4 Click on the drop-down box next to Multimedia QoS (WMM). After selecting the desired option, click on Apply to save and activate the changes.

    Multimedia QoS (WMM) - Wireless Multimedia Standard will prioritize traffic from WMM-compliant applications or devices. To effectively implement the feature, the client stations or applications are also required to support WMM.

    1. Disabled - Default Setting. Disables the WMM feature.
    2. Enabled - Automatically negotiates and prioritizes traffic to WMM-compliant and enabled wireless stations or applications.
    • Model DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I manually configure the basic WLAN settings?
    Answer Note: The FAQ covers the following. Click on the appropriate option for the procedure.
  • A. Enable/Disable the WLAN
  • B. Configure Network Name (SSID)
  • C. Configure the Operation Mode
  • D. Configure the Wireless Channel
  • E. Configure Wireless Security

    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    A. Enable/Disable the WLAN

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the My Network tab. On the right-hand side click on Edit within the WLAN listing.



    Step 3: Click on the drop-down box next to Mode and select Enabled. Selecting the Disabled option for the Mode will completely turn off all WLAN functionality. If enabling the WLAN, complete the final step. If disabling the WLAN, select Disabled for the mode and click Apply to save and activate the changes.



    Step 4: Below in the Wireless Settings section, click on the drop-down box next to Country and choose the appropriate country in which the device will be used. Click on Apply to save and activate the changes. The WLAN will now be enabled.



    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    B. Configure the Network Name (SSID)

    Note: The SSID is the network name broadcasted to be discovered by wireless client computers for establishing connection. SSID stands for Service Set Identifier. The SSID can be up to 32 alphnumeric characters long and is case-sensitve.

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the My Network tab. On the right-hand side click on Edit within the WLAN listing.



    Step 3 Manually enter the desired SSID next to Network Name (SSID) field. Click on Apply to save and activate the changes.



    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    C. Configure the Operation Mode

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the My Network tab. On the right-hand side click on Edit within the WLAN listing.



    Step 3 Click on the drop-down box next to Operation Mode and select the desired operation mode. Click on Apply to save and activate the changes.

    1. 802.11b (11Mbps) - Operates in 2.4GHz mode and offers a maximum theoretical rate of 11Mbps. When using this mode, only 802.11b client stations will be able to connect.

    2. 802.11g (54Mbps) - Operates in 2.4GHz mode and offers a maximum theoretical rate of 54Mbps. When using this mode, only 802.11g client stations will be able to connect.

    3. 802.11b/g (11/54Mbps) - Operates in 2.4GHz mode and offers a maximum theoretical rate of 54Mbps. When using this mode, both 802.11b and 802.11g client stations will be able to connect.

    4. 802.11g Super G (108Mbps) - Operates in 2.4GHz mode and offers a maximum theoretical rate of 108Mbps. When using this mode, only 802.11g Super G client stations will be able to connect.
      Note: For more information on Super G, click here.

    5. 802.11g Super G (11/54/108Mbps) - Operates in 2.4GHz mode and offers a maximum theoretical rate of 108Mbps. When using this mode, 802.11b, 802.11g, and 802.11g Super G client stations will be able to connect.




    Note: For more information on Super G, click here.

    Note: The actual data transfer speed is usually significantly lower than the maximum theoretical bandwidth and may degrade with distance and environmental factors. ______________________________________________________________________________________
    D. Configure the Wireless Channel

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the My Network tab. On the right-hand side click on Edit within the WLAN listing.



    Step 3 Click on the drop-down box next to Channel and select the desired radio channel for communication. Click on Apply to save and activate the changes.

    1. Automatic - Recommended Setting. Automatically assigns the wireless channel.
    2. Channel [1-11] - Assigns a specific wireless channel.
      Note: Assigning a specific wireless channel should only be used when experiencing connectivity problems.


    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    E. Configure Wireless Security

    Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Network on the left-hand side and select the My Network tab. On the right-hand side click on Edit within the WLAN listing.



    Step 3 Click on the drop-down box next to Security and select desired security method. Please select from the security methods described below. After properly configuring the security settings, click on Apply to save and activate the changes.

    Note: In configuring basic security encryption for your wireless network, use either WEP or WPA-PSK encryption methods. It is important to make sure your client stations support either of the encryption methods before applying the configuration.



    1. None - Selecting this option will not apply any type of security method to your wireless network. Anyone will be able to join your network. This setting is not recommended.



    2. WEP Encryption [Not Recommended] - Selecting this option will allow you to enter a total of four keys. Only one key may be used at any given time. Choose the desired key by clicking on the corresponding radio button [Key 1-4]. Click on the drop-down box next to the radio button to choose the key length. Manually enter in the key(s) using the formats below or on the right-hand side, you may click on Random to randomly generate a key.

      Note: Choosing WEP is not recommended due to known security flaws in the protocol.

      The key formats are:
      *64 Bits - 10 Hexadecimal Characters (0-9,A-F)
      *128 Bits - 26 Hexadecimal Characters (0-9,A-F)
      *152 Bits - 32 Hexadecimal Characters (0-9,A-F)



    3. 802.1x: RADIUS authentication, no encryption - Selecting this option requires a 802.1x RADIUS authentication server to be configured. The RADIUS configuration is located by clicking on Users in the left-hand column and selecting the RADIUS tab.

      Note: The security method requires the use of an external 802.1x RADIUS authentication server setup on a Windows 2003 Server machine, Linux, or third party application.



    4. WPA: RADIUS authentication, encryption - Selecting this option requires a WPA RADIUS authentication server to be configured. The RADIUS configuration is located by clicking on Users in the left-hand column and selecting the RADIUS tab. Enabling the option Require WPA2 (802.11i) will only allow client stations supporting WPA2 security to establish connection. Leaving the option disabled will allow both WPA and WPA2 client stations to establish connection.

      Note: The security method requires the use of an external WPA RADIUS authentication server setup on a Windows 2003 Server machine, Linux, or third party application.



    5. WPA-PSK: password authentication, encryption - Selecting does not require the use of an external of an external WPA RADIUS authentication server to be configured. Next to Passphrase, manually enter the passphrase using the format below or on the right-hand side, you may click on Random to randomly generate a passphrase. Enabling the option Require WPA2 (802.11i) will only allow client stations supporting WPA2 security to establish connection. Leaving the option disabled will allow both WPA and WPA2 client stations to establish connection.

      The passphrase format is:
      *Between 8-63 Characters Long - Any character
      *Can contain special characters, spaces, and is case-sensitive



    • Model DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I allow communication between the WLAN and the LAN?
    Answer Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Security on the left-hand side and select the Rules tab. Click on Add Rule.



    Step 3: For Rule Type, select Allow and then click on Next.



    Step 4: For Service, select Any Service and then click on Next.



    Step 5: For Destination & Source, select LAN for Source and select WLAN for Destination.



    Step 6: Click on Finish to save the rule.



    Step 7: The rule should now appear in the Rules list.



    Step 8: Create an additional rule similar to the first to allow communication from the WLAN to the LAN. For Destination & Source, select WLAN for Source and select LAN for Destination.



    Step 9: The two rules should now be listed under Rules, indicating full communication between the LAN and the WLAN.

    Model DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I use the integrated USB print server?
    Answer Note: The FAQ covers the following reset methods. Click on the appropriate option for the procedure.
  • A. Install a printer to the print server
  • B. Add and configure a printer (Windows XP)

    Note: The printer used in the FAQ is a Canon iP3000 printer. The procedure can be applied to all other compatible printers. For a compatibility listing, click here.
    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    A. Install a printer to the print server

    Step 1: Turn off the printer. Plug the USB cable from the printer to one of the USB 2.0 print server ports located on the rear panel of the unit. Turn on the printer.



    Step 2: Turn on the printer and make sure the USB status light located on the front panel is green.



    Step 3: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 4: Click on Setup on the left-hand side and select the Print Server tab. Your printer model, serial number, and status will be shown. The Print Server TCP port should be 9100. The status should be Ready. If the status is not Ready, click on Reset Server. Click on Apply to save and activate the settings.



    ______________________________________________________________________________________
    B. Add and configure a printer (Windows)

    The procedures are in accordance assuming the following information.
  • LAN IP address: 192.168.10.1
  • LAN Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
  • LAN DHCP Server: 192.168.10.1-192.168.10.254

    Note: For support on adding and configuring a printer using other operating systems, consult the OS manufacturer. MAC-OSX instructions can be found in the DFL-CP310/CPG310 user manual on page 431.

    When using computers with a Windows 2000/XP operating system, the NetDefend firewall supports connecting up to four USB-based printers to the appliance. When using computers with a MAC OS-X operating system, the NetDefend firewall supports connecting one printer.

    The NetDefend print server supports printing via "all-in-one" printers. Copying and scanning functions are not supported.

    Step 1: Make sure you have already installed the printer drivers on the computer (included with your printer). Click on Start and select Control Panel.
    Note: For support on installing your printer drivers, consult your printer manufacturer.



    Step 2: If your Control Panel window appears as Category View, click on Switch to Classic View on the left-hand side. Once your Control Panel window appears in Classic View, double-click on Printers and Faxes.



    Step 3: Please delete the printer in the Printers and Faxes window if it is the printer you are currently installing. Click on Add a printer on the left-hand side.



    Step 4: In the Add Printer Wizard window, click on Next.



    Step 5: Select the option Local Printer attached to this computer. Uncheck the option, Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer. Click on Next.



    Step 6: Select the option Create a new port. Next to the Type of port, select Standard TCP/IP Port. Click on Next.



    Step 7: In the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard window, click on Next.



    Step 8: Next to Printer Name or IP Address, type in the IP address 192.168.10.1. The Port Name will automatically be entered. Click on Next.



    Step 9: Select the option Custom. Click on Settings.



    Step 10: For the protocol, select Raw. In the Raw Settings section, next to Port Number, the port number should be 9100. Click on OK.



    Step 11: You will be brought back to the window where you selected the Custom option.



    Step 12: Click on Finish.



    Step 13: The Install Printer Software window will appear. If you have already installed the printer drivers, select the correct Manufacturer and Printer in the listing. If you have not yet installed the drivers, insert the CD-ROM included with your printer, click on Have Disk and find the driver location. Click on Next.

    Note: For further support on installing your printer drivers, consult your printer manufacturer.



    Step 14: If the printer drivers were already installed and selected from the listing in the previous step, the following window will appear. Select the option, Keep existing driver (Recommended). Click on Next.



    Step 15: In the Name Your Printer window, click on Next.



    Step 16: In the Print Test Page window, select the option Yes. Click on Next.



    Step 17: Click on Finish. If the installation and configuration of the printer was successful, the printer will now print a test page.



    Step 18: The printer will now be found in the Printers and Faxes window. The printer status should indicate Ready.

    • Model DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I allow access to the web management interface from the WLAN?
    Answer Step 1: Log into the web management interface of the device using the following address: http://my.firewall. Log in as an administrator.



    Step 2: Click on Security on the left-hand side and select the Rules tab. Click on Add Rule.



    Step 3: For Rule Type, select Allow. Click on Next.



    Step 4: For Service, select Custom Service and select the Protocol TCP. For the port range, enter 80-80. Click on Next.



    Step 5: For Destination & Source, select WLAN for the Source and select This Gateway for Destination. Click on Next.



    Step 6: Click on Finish to save the rule in the firewall configuration.



    Step 7: The newly created rule will appear in the list. You will now be able to access the web management interface from the WLAN using http://my.firewall.



    Model DFL-CPG310
    Question What is the default WLAN IP address?
    Answer The default LAN IP address of the device is 192.168.252.1. You may also access the management interface using the default WLAN IP address instead of http://my.firewall.

    By default, access to web management interface from the WLAN is blocked. For the complete procedure on allowing access to web management interface from the WLAN, click here.
    Model DFL-CPG310
    Question How do I know if my USB printer is compatible with the integrated print server?
    Answer The print server is compatible with most printers with a USB interface.

    Multifunction printers will operate as a printer only – scanner functionality in these printers is not supported.

    The following printers are known to operate correctly with the integrated print server:

  • Brother HL-2030
  • Brother HL-2040
  • Brother HL-5140
  • Brother HL-5240
  • Canon MF5750
  • Canon MF5770
  • Canon MP150
  • Canon MP390
  • Canon MP500
  • Canon MP700
  • Canon MP780
  • Canon S520
  • Canon i250
  • Canon i350
  • Canon i560
  • Canon i850
  • Canon i860
  • Canon i865
  • Canon i960
  • Canon iP1600
  • Canon iP3000
  • Canon iP4000
  • Canon iP4200
  • Canon iP8500
  • Dell Laser Printer 1700n
  • HP Color Inkjet CP1700
  • HP Color LaserJet 1500
  • HP Color LaserJet 2550
  • HP Color LaserJet 2600n
  • HP Color LaserJet 3500
  • HP Color LaserJet 3550
  • HP Deskjet 1220C
  • HP Deskjet 3600
  • HP Deskjet 3740
  • HP Deskjet 3840
  • HP Deskjet 460
  • HP Deskjet 5100
  • HP Deskjet 5400
  • HP Deskjet 5550
  • HP Deskjet 5600
  • HP Deskjet 5700
  • HP Deskjet 5900
  • HP Deskjet 810C
  • HP Deskjet 815C
  • HP Deskjet 830C
  • HP Deskjet 845C
  • HP Deskjet 920C
  • HP Deskjet 930C
  • HP Deskjet 940C
  • HP Deskjet 950C
  • HP Deskjet 960C
  • HP Deskjet 970C
  • HP Deskjet 980C
  • HP Deskjet 990C
  • HP LaserJet 1010
  • HP LaserJet 1012
  • HP LaserJet 1200
  • HP LaserJet 1300
  • HP LaserJet 1320
  • HP LaserJet 2300
  • HP LaserJet 3015
  • HP LaserJet 3200
  • HP LaserJet 3330
  • HP Officejet 4100
  • HP Officejet 4300
  • HP Officejet 5500
  • HP Officejet 5600
  • HP Officejet 6100
  • HP Officejet 6200
  • HP Officejet 7100
  • HP Officejet 7400
  • HP Officejet V40xi
  • HP Officejet d
  • HP Officejet4100
  • HP Officejet4200
  • HP Officejet5500
  • HP Officejet5600
  • HP Officejet6100
  • HP OfficejetV40xi
  • HP PSC 1200
  • HP PSC 1500
  • HP PSC 2100
  • HP PSC 2350
  • HP PSC 2400
  • HP PSC 2500
  • HP PSC 720
  • HP PSC 750
  • HP PSC 920
  • HP PSC 930
  • HP PSC 950
  • HP Photosmart 1218
  • HP Photosmart 3200
  • HP Photosmart 7150
  • HP Photosmart 7400
  • HP Photosmart 7550
  • HP Photosmart 7600
  • HP Photosmart 7700
  • HP Photosmart 7900
  • Lexmark C510
  • Lexmark E210 Laser Printer
  • Lexmark E232
  • Lexmark E238
  • Lexmark E323
  • Lexmark E330
  • Lexmark X1100
  • Lexmark X215
  • Lexmark X6100
  • Lexmark Z35
  • Lexmark Z45
  • Oki ML5590
  • Samsung CLP-510
  • Samsung ML-1450
  • Samsung ML-1650
  • Samsung ML-1710
  • Samsung ML-1740
  • Samsung ML-2010
  • Samsung SCX-4x16
  • Samsung SCX-4x21
  • Samsung SCX-5x12
  • Xerox Phaser 3117
  • Xerox Phaser 3120
  • Xerox Phaser 3121
  • Xerox Phaser 3130
  • Xerox Phaser 3150
  • Xerox Phaser 3210
  • Xerox Phaser 6100 Color Laser
  • Xerox WorkCentre PE16



    The following printers are known to be incompatible with the Print Server:

  • HP OfficeJet G85
  • HP OfficeJet K80xi
  • HP Laserjet 1020
  • Lexmark-6100
  • Lexmark-6150
    • Model DFL-M510
    Question What port should be opened on the firewall for Java Applet to run correctly when the DFL-M510 is located in front of a firewall?
    Answer The DFL-M510 management is administered by Java Applet. If the DFL-M510 is located in front of a firewall, please open the following ports to have Java Applet working smoothly:
    • TCP 22: SSH
    • TCP 25: SMTP
    • UDP 137: WINS Query
    • UDP 139: WINS POP
    • UDP 161: SNMP
    • UDP 162: SNMP Trap
    • TCP 8801: UI Real Time Monitor
    • TCP 8516: UI configuration setup to the M510
    Model DFL-M510
    Question How many groups/templates/user-defined patterns does the DFL-M510 support?
    Answer
    • Group: 10 groups
    • Template: 20 templates (built-in templates included)
    • User-defined rule: 512 rules
    Model DFL-M510
    Question Why are there only 9 Keyword filter entries available in the DFL-M510?
    Answer Keyword filters is an added feature on the DFL-M510. The main focus on the DFL-M510 is more on the IM/P2P management than content filtering.
    Model DFL-M510
    Question Why does the device memory usage exceeds 80% right after startup?
    Answer To achieve robustness and efficiency, we donīt allocate memory dynamically (runtime) in the DFL-M510. Instead, for the best device performance, we pre-allocate almost all necessary memory spaces for tables and data objects during boot up and then do the memory management using our own program, not the Operating System. Although the memory usage looks high right after boot up, it tends to keep stable (from 80% to 89%) without too much peaks.
    Model DFL-M510
    Question Why does D-Link strongly suggest not to manage the DFL-M510 remotely?
    Answer Since the communication between the DFL-M510 device and the Java GUI could be quite bandwidth-consumptive (especially in signature download or firmware upgrade), the GUI communication possibly affects the upstream bandwidth and introduces more latency to outbound traffic. Moreover, the administrator may not have smooth RTM transaction if the upstream bandwidth is limited.
    Model DFL-M510
    Question How do I upgrade the firmware for the DFL-M510?
    Answer Step 1: Log into the DFL-M510.

    Click here for instructions on logging into the unit

    Step 2: Click on Tools and select Upgrade.



    Step 3: Click on Browse and locate the firmware file (ī.imageī extension), then click on Upload.



    Step 4: Please wait while the firmware is being loaded. Do not interrupt the loading process. Doing so may damage the unit.



    Step 5: Click OK when prompted.

    Model DFL-M510
    Question Is it possible to identify the victim infected by malicious problem with RTM (Real Time Monitor)?
    Answer Yes, the victim information can be retrieved from the “Top 10 Health Concerns / Top 10 Users” and “Top 10 Users with Health Concern / Top 10 Health Concern”.

    This is found on the Real Time Monitor page, under the "Top Ten Answers/Top Ten Questions" dropdown menu, as shown below.

    Click here for instructions on logging into the device

    Model DFL-M510
    Question How do I log into the DFL-M510?
    Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the DFL-M510. (The default IP address is 192.168.1.1.)

    Step 2: Click on Click here to Log On, to log into the device.



    Step 3: Check the box Always trust content from this publisher, and click Run.



    Step 4: Enter the username and password (admin for both by default).

    Step 5: Click Login.

    Note: If you are on a different subnet you will need to assign a static IP address to the same subnet as the DFL-M510 (192.168.1.x).


    Model DFW-500
    Question How do I install the DFW-500 in my computer?
    Answer After physically installing the DFW-500 in your computer, Windows should detect that you have added new hardware. If the computer has problems booting, or does not detect the new hardware, then try moving the DFW-500 to another PCI slot in your computer. Windows 98, Me, 2000 and XP have the drivers built into the operating system for this card. Windows will detect the card as a Texas Instruments IEEE 1394 Host Controller. If the drivers do not automaticaly load, then you will get an Add New Hardware Wizard, that will walk you through installing the drivers. You will need to be connected to the Internet to install the drivers for this card.

    Step 1 The Add New Hardware Wizard will appear. Click Next.

    Step 2 Select Specify a location and then click Next.

    Step 3 Select Windows Update and deselect the other options. This will connect you to the internet to download the drivers from Microsoft. Click Next.

    Step 4 Once the drivers are installed, click on Finish, and restart your computer. This will complete the installation process.
    Model DFW-500
    Question Where is the serial number for my ULead software bundled with my DFW-500?
    Answer The serial number should be printed on a sticker included in the box. If you cannot find, or have lost the serial number, try using this one: 78302-94000-00391165.
    Model DFW-500
    Question Does the DFW-500 card support SBP-2?
    Answer Our DFW-500 does support SBP-2. Refer to the following section of the spec on the TI chipset that our DFW-500 uses.

    The TSB12LV23 provides physical write posting buffers and a highly tuned physical data path for SBP-2 performance. The TSB12LV23 also provides multiple isochronous contexts, multiple cache-line burst transfers, advanced internal arbitration, and bus holding buffers on the PHY/Link interface.

    Also provided is information from different sources on the subject of SBP-2.

    The SBP-2 protocol is used primarily in Firewire storage devices, although there is support for printers and scanners. Although Firewire adapters do not have built-in support for SBP-2, Microsoft Windows 98, Me and 2000 provide a driver that will allow operation with such devices. Please use the following link to Microsoftīs site for more information on IEEE 1394 Technology.

    IEEE 1394 Technology

    Mass storage:

    Although many mass storage devices have taken advantage of IEEE 1394a, the move to IEEE 1394b is particularly accommodating to hard-disk manufacturers, who need the higher data transfer rates. The principal specifications for mass storage are the Serial Bus Protocol 2 (SBP-2) and the Device Bay. In addition, there exist a variety of subspecifications, including the Reduced Block Commands (RBC) Command Set and a variety of AV/C descriptions.

    SBP-2:

    This spec describes a transport protocol for asynchronous commands or data and is widely adopted by computer peripherals manufacturers. SPB-2 is not just for disk drives—it’s also used for scanners and printers. Examples include the newly announced scanners from Epson, Umax and a printer from Epson.

    The specification is released through the T10, a technical committee of the National Committee of Information Technology Standards. Draft specifications are available at:

    ftp://ftp.t10.org/t10/drafts/sbp2/.

    SBP-2 defines standard ways of encapsulating device commands over 1394 and is essential for DVD players, printers, scanners, and other devices. Note that the critical pieces of OHCI, IEC61883, and SBP-2 are supported in the most recent versions of Microsoft Windows.

    More Info
    Model DFW-500
    Question Does my D-Link Firewire card work in Windows 2000 and XP?
    Answer Yes. The drivers are built-in to Windows 2000 and XP. The card will be detected as a Texas Instruments IEEE 1394 Host Controller or VIA OHCI Compliant IEEE 1394 Host Controller.

    Note: During installation of the firewire card, make sure nothing is plugged into it. Verify the card is installed properly before plugging in any firewire devices.

    If the card is NOT detected as a Texas Instruments IEEE 1394 Host Controller or a VIA OHCI Compliant IEEE 1394 Host Controller, but IS detected as an OHCI Compliant IEEE 1394 Host Controller, follow the steps below.

    Step 1 Right-click on My Computer and click properties.

    Step 2 Click the Hardware Tab, then click Device Manager.



    Step 3 Locate the OHCI Compliant IEEE 1394 Host Controller and double click on it.



    Step 4 Click on the Driver Tab, then click on Update Driver.



    Step 5 Click Next.



    Step 6 Choose "Display a list of the known drivers for this device so that I can choose a specific driver", then click Next.



    Step 7 Choose Texas Instruments IEEE 1394 Host Controller and click Next.



    Step 8 Click Next.



    Step 9 Click Finish.



    Step 10 Click Close.

    Model DG-102S
    Question I just installed the VoIP Gateway and there is no power getting to the device. How do I resolve this problem?
    Answer Confirm that you have a 120V AC 60Hz to 12V DC 1A power adapter. Be sure that the power adapter is plugged into a reliable power source with a surge protector integrated into it. Test Power source by plugging in another working electronic device.
    Model DG-102S
    Question The DG Residential Gateway is plugged in with the power light on and the status light blinking. What do I do next?
    Answer The DG Residential Gateway needs to be configured before Voice or Data can be sent or received.

    Refer to the manual for setup configuration.

    Manual
    Model DG-102S
    Question I need to configure the DG Residential Gateway, but the web interface can not be accessed. What do I do?
    Answer The gateway may be in a DHCP search loop. To clear the search, you must log on to the Command Line Interface.

    Step 1 First, confirm that you have a free com port with a 9-pin serial connection on your computer terminal. You will also need a DCE Serial Cable with a 9-pin connector.

    Step 2 Attach one end of the serial cable to the 9-pin com port on your computer terminal and the other end to the 9-pin serial diagnostic port on your DG Residential Gateway.

    Step 3 You will need to use a Terminal Emulation Program, like Windowsī Hyperterminal. To opern Hyperterminal go to Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Hyperterminal. On the first screen of Hyperterminal you must enter a name, any name will do. Click OK.

    Step 4 On the next screen select your COM port from the drop-down window at the bottom of the window and click OK. If you are not sure of which COM port you are connected to, just try COM1 and if that doesnīt work try COM2.

    Step 5 In the COM Properties window enter the settings as shown below. Click OK.



    Step 6 Strike any key to bypass the DHCP search. Close Hyperterminal. Confirm that you want to quit and will not need to save the session when prompted.

    Step 7 Go back to your browser and enter the IP address of the gateway, 192.168.0.1. You should now be able to access the web configuration interface.
    Model DG-102S
    Question What is the default Username and Password for the DG-102S?
    Answer The default Username and Password are blank. When asked for the Username and Password either click on the OK thumb tab or press the Enter key.
    Model DG-102S
    Question I now have the DG-102 / DG-104 Residential Gateway hooked into my system with the correct cables and I can not get an Internet connection. How can I resolve this problem?
    Answer Confirm that the RJ-45 connections are solid and properly engaged into the Cable / DSL Modem and the DG-102 / DG-104 Residential Gateway. The LEDs on the front panel of the gateway will indicate whether or not you have an Internet connection. If the LED Lights are not illuminated, double-check your IP address, subnet mask and default gateway configuration for the gateway. Confirm these addresses with your ISP.

    After you have confirmed these settings, recycle the power on your cable/dsl modem and then recycle the power on the D-Link gateway. To recycle the power, just turn the unit off for 15 to 20 seconds and then turn it back on again.
    Model DG-102S / DG-102SH / DG-102SP / DG-104S / DG-104SH
    Question How do I forward ports on my DG series gateway?
    Answer To forward ports on your DG series gateway, you will first need to enable NAT.

    Read here to enable NAT.

    Once NAT is enabled, then follow the steps below:

    Select your configuration method below:

    Web-based configuration interface
    HyperTerminal


    From the web-based configuration interface:

    Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your DG unit. By default, the WAN IP address is 10.1.10.4. The username and password are null.

    Step 2 Open the NAT Configuration menu and select Local Server Configuration. Click on the Edit button for the Local Server you wish to configure.



    • Select your Protocol (TCP or UDP).
    • Set the Local Port to the port the service is running at on your local machine (example: port 80 for a web server).
    • Set the Global Port to the port the service will be contacted at by remote machines. Usually this is the same as the Local Port.
    • Set the Server IP to the private IP address of the local machine the service will be running on.
    • Set State to Enabled and click Save.
    Note: The Index number indicates the Local Server you are currently configuring. Using the pulldown menu, you can switch between the 6 Local Servers directly, but unsaved changes will be lost when you switch.

    Step 3 Click on Save Changes from the menu on the left.


    From HyperTerminal:

    Step 1 Open a new HyperTerminal session.

    Note: If you have trouble establishing a HyperTerminal session to your DG series gateway,     click here.

    Step 2 To set your NAT server information, type in the following lines:

    • nat server [server] [protocol] [port] [IP]
      Where [server] is the NAT server you want to configure (1-6), [protocol] is the protocol you want to forward (TCP or UDP), [port] is the port number you want to forward (1-65535), and [IP] is the internal IP address of the computer you want to forward the port to.
    Step 3 To save your changes, type in the following line:

    • nwdbg save changes
    Model DG-102S / DG-102SH / DG-102SP / DG-104S / DG-104SH
    Question What can I do if I forgot the password to my DG series gateway?
    Answer If you have forgotten the password to your DG series gateway, you will need to perform a factory reset on the unit. DG series gateways do not have a physical reset button, but you can still reset the device from within HyperTerminal without providing a username and password. Connect a serial cable from your computer to the gateway and follow these steps.

    Step 1 Open a new HyperTerminal session.

    If you have trouble establishing a HyperTerminal session to your DG series gateway, read here.

    Step 2 Now recycle the power to the unit. Physically remove the power cable and then plug it back in.

    Step 3 As the unit boots, wait for it to start decompressing the Runtime Image. Once it begins to do this, press Ctrl + C to open the Boot Menu.

    Step 4 Select Factory Reset. You will be prompted to ensure you want to clear the current configuration. Select Yes. When the Message Area says "Loading Factory Default Parameters...ok", press Ctrl + T.



    Step 5 Select Restart System.

    Your DG series gateway will now be restored to itīs factory default settings. The username and password will both be null.
    Model DG-102S / DG-102SH / DG-102SP / DG-104S / DG-104SH
    Question What are the connection settings for the RS-232 port on my VoIP gateway/router?
    Answer To open HyperTerminal, click on Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications and select HyperTerminal. Your session name and icon can be anything you want. You must select the COM port that your serial cable is connected to. If your computer only has a single COM port, this will be COM1.

    The settings for your unitīs RS-232 console port are as follows:

    Bits per second: 9600
    Data bits: 8
    Parity: none
    Stop bits: 1
    Flow control: Hardware

    If you are having trouble establishing a HyperTerminal connection with your DG series gateway or DVG series router, make sure you are using the above settings as well as a DCE Serial Cable with 9-pin connector between the unit and your computer.
    Model DG-102S / DG-102SH / DG-102SP / DG-104S / DG-104SH
    Question How do I enable NAT on my DG series gateway?
    Answer To enable NAT on your DG series gateway, select your configuration method below:

    Web-based configuration interface
    HyperTerminal


    From the web-based configuration interface:

    Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your DG unit (10.1.10.4). The username and password are null.

    Step 2 From the menu on the left side, click on NAT Configuration and then select NAT Configuration. Set NAT Function to Enabled. Enter the NAT Interface IP Address and the NAT Interface Netmask as desired for your internal subnet (example: 192.168.0.1/255.255.255.0).



    Step 3 Click on Save.

    Step 4 Click on Save Changes from the menu on the left.


    From HyperTerminal:

    Step 1 Open a new HyperTerminal session.

    Step 2 To set your NAT information, type in the following lines:

    nat local_ip [x.x.x.x]
    Where [x.x.x.x] is the internal IP address of your DG gateway (such as 192.168.0.1).

    nat local_mask [x.x.x.x]
    Where [x.x.x.x] is the mask for your internal subnet (such as 255.255.255.0).

    nat state on

    Step 3 To save your changes, type in the following line:

    nwdbg save changes
    Model DG-102S / DG-102SH / DG-102SP / DG-104S / DG-104SH
    Question What type of Ethernet cables do I need to connect to my VoIP gateway/router?
    Answer Depending on the port you wish to connect to, and what you wish to connect with, you will need different types of Ethernet cables to connect to your VoIP gateway or router. In all cases, you will need at least Cat5 or better cabling with RJ-45 connectors.

    When connecting to the WAN port:

    • With a broadband modem, you will need a straight through cable.
    • With a switch or hub, you will need a straight through cable.
    • With a computer, you will need a crossover cable.
    When connecting to the LAN/Ethernet port:

    • With a switch or hub, you will need a crossover cable.
    • With a computer, you will need a straight through cable.
    Model DG-102S / DG-102SH / DG-102SP / DG-104S / DG-104SH
    Question How do I upgrade firmware on my DG series gateway?
    Answer Note: When upgrading firmware on your DG series gateway, you must first load Promcode and then load Runtime code.

    To upgrade firmware on your DG series gateway, you will need a computer running TFTP software to host the Runtime code and Prom code, and connectivity between the TFTP server and the DG unitīs WAN port.

    Download the TFTP software here.

    Select your configuration method below:

    Web-based configuration interface
    HyperTerminal


    From the web-based configuration interface:

    Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your DG unit (10.1.10.4 by default). Enter the username and password by default, both are blank).

    Step 2 Select Update Firmware from the left-hand menu.

    Step 3 You will need to then fill in the necessary fields to upload your firmware file. You will need to do this step twice: first for the promcode and second for the runtime code.



    • Set TFTP Server Address to the IP address of the computer running the TFTP software (also the machine with the firmware files on it).
    • Set Firmware Update to Enable.
    • Set the File Name to the exact name of the file you want to upload to your DG series gateway.
    • Once you have entered this information, click Save.
    The unit will load the specified file and then automatically reboot once you click on Save.


    From HyperTerminal:

    Step 1 Open a new HyperTerminal session.

    If you have trouble establishing a HyperTerminal session to your DG series gateway, read     here.

    Step 2 Set your TFTP server information. You will need to do this step twice; first for the promcode and second for the runtime code. Type in the following lines:

    • tftp srvip [x.x.x.x]
      Where [x.x.x.x] is the IP address of the computer running the TFTP software and hosting the firmware files.
    • tftp get [filename]
      Where [filename] is the exact name of the firmware file you want to upload.
    • tftp update
    When the tftp update command is issued, the currently uploaded firmware file will be flashed into the unitīs memory and the unit will then automatically be rebooted. The tftp update command must be issued before the next tftp get command.
    Model DG-102S / DG-102SH / DG-102SP / DG-104S / DG-104SH
    Question Why do I have a DSP not yet loaded message on the Device Information page of my VoIP gateway?
    Answer The DSP not yet Loaded message typically occurs for two reasons.
    • If the unit is functioning correctly, it will display this message directly after a fresh boot. If you lift the handset you should get dialtone and the DSP Version should change to reflect the unitīs DSP.

    • If you have performed a firmware upgrade on the unit and see this message, it typically indicates that the unit needs a factory reset. A factory reset is not always necessary after a firmware upgrade, but if you get the DSP not yet loaded message and fail to get dialtone from a connected handset, you will need to factory reset.
    Model DG-102S / DG-102SH / DG-102SP / DG-104S / DG-104SH / DPH-100H / DPH-100M / DPH-70 / DPH-80
    Question Is my VoIP device capable of point-to-point calling?
    Answer Some Voice over IP devices are capable of point-to-point calling, while others require the use of a call manager/gatekeeper/etc. This is mainly determined by the communication protocol supported by the unit you are using.

    • If you have an H.323 unit (DG-102SH, DG-104SH, DPH-70/80 with H.323 firmware loaded), you can make point-to-point calls, bypassing the need for any additional hardware, software, or services.
    • If you have an MGCP unit (DG-102S, DG-104S, DPH-100M, DPH-80 with MGCP firmware loaded), you will be unable to make point-to-point calls. MGCP units require the use of a call manager to make calls.
    • If you have a SIP unit (DG-102SP, DPH-70/80 with SIP firmware loaded), you can make point-to-point calls, bypassing the need for any additional hardware, software, or services.
    • The DPH-100H is an H.323 unit, but it is unable to make point-to-point calls. The DPH-100H requires the use of a gatekeeper to make calls.
    Note: All Voice over IP devices will require additional hardware and/or services to make calls to phones on the PSTN, regardless of communication protocol.
    Model DG-102S / DG-102SH / DG-102SP / DG-104S / DG-104SH / DPH-100H / DPH-100M / DPH-80
    Question Is my D-Link VoIP product compatible with Net2phoneīs voice services?
    Answer Currently D-Link VoIP products are not compatible with Net2Phoneīs voice services. Net2phone uses a proprietary communications protocol that D-Link is unable to provide support for.
    Model DG-102S / DG-104S
    Question How do I configure my DG-S series gateway for my broadband Internet connection?
    Answer Make sure you have a good physical connection between all devices. You will need one straight through Cat5E cable between your modem and the WAN port on your DG series gateway. You will need another straight through Cat5E cable between the LAN port on your DG series gateway and your switch, hub, and computer.

    Once you have established physical connectivity, you can access and configure the unit for your Internet connection.

    Select your configuration method below:

    Web-based configuration interface
    HyperTerminal
    PPPoE connection


    From the web:

    Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your DG unit. By default, the WAN IP address is 10.1.10.4 and the username and password are null.

    Step 2 Open the Config IP menu and select Config Device IP Address. Set Get IP From to match your WAN connection type.



    If you have a DHCP (Dynamic) IP connection:

    Select DHCP on the Get IP From menu and click Save.

    If you have a static IP connection:

    Select Manual on the Get IP From menu. Fill in your IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway as specified by your ISP. Click on Save.

    Step 3 Click on Save Changes from the menu on the left.


    From HyperTerminal:

    Step 1 Open a new HyperTerminal session.

    If you have trouble establishing a HyperTerminal session to your DG series gateway,     read here.

    Step 2 To set your WAN port information, type in the following lines:

    If you have a DHCP (Dynamic) IP connection:
    • nwdbg ip dhcp
    If you have a static IP connection:
    • nwdbg ip manual
    • nwdbg ip [x.x.x.x]
      Where [x.x.x.x] is the IP address assigned to you by your ISP.

    • nwdbg mask [x.x.x.x]
      Where [x.x.x.x] is the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP.

    • nwdbg gw [x.x.x.x]
      Where [x.x.x.x] is the default gateway assigned to you by your ISP.
    Step 3 To save your changes, type in the following line:
    • nwdbg save changes

    To configure a PPPoE connection:

    Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your DG unit. By default, the WAN IP address is 10.1.10.4. The username and password are null.

    Step 2 Open the Config IP menu and select Config Device IP Address.



    Set PPPoE State to Enabled. Enter your account username and password as specified by your ISP.

    If you have dynamic PPPoE, set Get IP From to DHCP and click Save.

    If you have static PPPoE, set Get IP From to Manual and enter IP address information as specified by your ISP.

    Step 3 Click on Save Changes from the menu on the left.

    Step 4 Open a new HyperTerminal session.

    If you have trouble establishing a HyperTerminal session to your DG series gateway,     read here.

    Step 5 To set your PPPoE information, type in the following lines:
    • pppoe myip [type]
      Where [type] is set to auto if you have a Dynamic PPPoE connection, or set to static if you have a Static PPPoE connection.
    • pppoe service [service name]
      Where [service name] is the service or host name, as specified by your ISP. If your ISP has not specified a service name for your connection, you can skip this line.

    • pppoe acname [ac name]
      Where [ac name] is the access concentrator, as specified by your ISP. If your ISP has not specified an access concentrator for your connection, you can skip this line.
    Step 6 To save your changes, type in the following line:
    • nwdbg save changes
    Step 7 Once the unit reboots, you will need to manually connect to your ISP. Type in the following line:
    • pppoe connect
    Model DG-102SH / DG-104SH
    Question How do I configure my DG-SH series gateway for my broadband Internet connection?
    Answer Note: This FAQ only applies to the DG-102SH and DG-104SH. Menu options for the DG-102S, DG-102SP, and DG-104S may look different.

    Make sure you have a good physical connection between all devices. You will need one straight through Cat5E cable between your modem and the WAN port on your DG series gateway and you will need another straight through Cat5E cable between the LAN port on your DG series gateway and your switch, hub, or computer.

    Once you have established physical connectivity, you can access and configure the unit for your Internet connection.

    Select your configuration method below:

    Web-based configuration interface
    HyperTerminal
    Users with a PPPoE connection, read here.


    From the web-based configuration interface:

    Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your DG unit. By default, the WAN IP address is 10.1.10.4. The username and password are null.

    Step 2 Open the Config IP & H.323 menu and select Config Device IP Address. Set Get IP From to match your WAN connection type.



    If you have a DHCP (Dynamic) IP connection:

    Select DHCP on the Get IP From menu and click Save.

    If you have a static IP connection:

    Select Manual on the Get IP From menu. Fill in your IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway as specified by your ISP. Click on Save.

    Step 3 Click on Save Changes from the menu on the left.


    From HyperTerminal:

    Step 1 Open a new HyperTerminal session.

    Note: If you have trouble establishing a HyperTerminal session to your DG series gateway,     read here.

    Step 2 To set your WAN port information, type in the following lines:

    If you have a DHCP (Dynamic) IP connection:

    • nwdbg ip dhcp
    If you have a static IP connection:

    • nwdbg ip manual
    • nwdbg ip [x.x.x.x]
      Where [x.x.x.x] is the IP address assigned to you by your ISP.
    • nwdbg mask [x.x.x.x]
      Where [x.x.x.x] is the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP.
    • nwdbg gw [x.x.x.x]
      Where [x.x.x.x] is the default gateway assigned to you by your ISP.
    Step 3 To save your changes, type in the following line:

    • nwdbg save changes

    To configure a PPPoE connection:

    Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your DG unit. By default, the WAN IP address is 10.1.10.4. The username and password are null.

    Step 2 Open the Config IP menu and select Config Device IP Address.



    Set PPPoE State to Enabled. Enter your account username and password as specified by your ISP.

    • If you have dynamic PPPoE, set Get IP From to DHCP and click Save.
    • If you have static PPPoE, set Get IP From to Manual and enter IP address information as specified by your ISP. Then click Save.
    Step 3 Click on Save Changes from the menu on the left.

    Step 4 Open a new HyperTerminal session.

    Note: If you have trouble establishing a HyperTerminal session to your DG series gateway,     read here.

    Step 5 To set your PPPoE information, type in the following lines:

    • pppoe myip [type]
      Where [type] is set to auto if you have a Dynamic PPPoE connection, or set to static if you have a Static PPPoE connection.
    • pppoe service [service name]
      Where [service name] is the service or host name, as specified by your ISP. If your ISP has not specified a service name for your connection, you can skip this line.
    • pppoe acname [ac name]
      Where [ac name] is the access concentrator, as specified by your ISP. If your ISP has not specified an access concentrator for your connection, you can skip this line.
    Step 6 To save your changes, type in the following line:

    • nwdbg save changes
    Step 7 Once the unit reboots, you will need to manually connect to your ISP. Type in the following line.

    • pppoe connect
    Model DG-102SH / DG-104SH
    Question How do I setup my DG-SH (H.323) series gateway for point-to-point calling?
    Answer Note: This FAQ only applies to the DG-102SH and DG-104SH. The DG-102S and DG-104S units do not have point to point capabilities.

    H.323 VoIP gateways can be set to work in a point to point configuration bypassing the need for a gatekeeper, call manager, etc. This requires both endpoints to have an H.323 TA (telephony adapter). Calls between your VoIP gateway and the PSTN still require the use of a gatekeeper, call manager, ect.

    Select your configuration method below:

    Web-based configuration interface
    HyperTerminal


    From the web-based configuration interface:

    Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your DG unit. By default, the WAN IP address is 10.1.10.4 and the username and password are null.

    Step 2 Open the Config IP & H.323 menu and select Config H.323. Set the Mode to No Gatekeeper and the End Point Register Type to Terminal. Click on Save.



    Step 3 Open the Dial Address Configuration menu. Open the Basic submenu and select Analog Port. Click on the Tcid for the phone port you wish to configure (Tcid 0 for port 1, Tcid 1 for port 2, ect.).

    • Set the Telephone No. as desired. This will be the number this phone port is reachable at. It must be greater than 9.
    • Set the Caller ID Name as desired.
    • Set Private Type to Private (hide caller ID) or Non-Private (display the Caller ID Name).
    • Click on Save.
    Step 4 From the Basic submenu, select Data Port and click on Add.

    • Set the Prefix Strip Dial No. to whatever number you wish to dial first, when dialing the opposite endpoint. Think of it as the area code. This number must be greater than 9.
    • Set the Destination IP Address to be the IP address of the endpoint the Prefix Strip Dial No. specifies.
    • Click on Save.
    Step 5 Click on Save Changes from the menu on the left.

    For an example of Dial Address Configuration setup and use,     read here.


    From HyperTerminal:

    Step 1 Open a new HyperTerminal session.

    Step 2 To set your gatekeeper information, type in the following lines:

    set h323 gk_mode off

    set h323 endpoint_reg_type terminal

    Step 3 To set your phone port information, type in the following lines:

    atpmb apset [tcid] telno [number]
    Where [tcid] is replaced by the phone port number (0 for port 1, 1 for port 2, ect.) and [number] is replaced by the number you wish this phone port to be reachable at (must be greater than 9).

    atpmb apset [tcid] callerid [private] [cid_name]
    Where [tcid] is replaced by the phone port number, [private] is replaced by your caller id setting (0 for non-private, 1 for private), and [cid_name] is replaced by the name you wish caller id to display (must be 16 characters or less).

    Step 4 To set your remote endpoint dialing information, type in the following lines.

    atpmb dpadd [prefix] [IP address]
    Where [prefix] is replaced with the number you wish to dial to reach the remote endpoint (must be greater than 9) and [IP address] is replaced with the IP address of the remote endpoint that [prefix] specifies.

    Step 5 To save your changes, type in the following lines:

    atpmb save

    nwdbg save changes



    For an example of Dial Address Configuration setup and use,     read here.


    Sample Configuration

    This example assumes two DG-104SH units, both only having a telephone plugged into phone port 1.

    Unit 1:

    IP Address is 20.10.10.1

    Go to Dial Address Configuration > Basic > Analog Port. Select Tcid0 and set the Telephone No. to 100 (From HyperTerminal, atpmb apset 0 telno 100).

    Go to Dial Address Configuration > Basic > Data Port. Click Add, Set Prefix Strip Dial No. to 10, and Destination IP Address to 20.10.10.2 (atpmb dpadd 10 20.10.10.2).

    Click Save Changes on the left (atpmb save, then nwdbg save changes).

    Unit 2:

    IP Address is 20.10.10.2

    Go to Dial Address Configuration > Basic > Analog Port. Select Tcid0 and set the Telephone No. to 200 (atpmb apset 0 telno 200).

    Go to Dial Address Configuration > Basic > Data Port. Click Add, Set Prefix Strip Dial No. to 20, and Destination IP Address to 20.10.10.1 (atpmb dpadd 20 20.10.10.1).

    Click Save Changes on the left (atpmb save and then nwdbg save changes).

    The grid below reflects how Dial Address Configuration settings have been entered on each unit.

    Unit# Unit IP Prefix Number Phone Number Prefix IP
    1 20.10.10.1

    10

    		 100 20.10.10.2
    2 20.10.10.2 20 200 20.10.10.1


    For Unit 1 to call Unit 2, you would dial 10200.
    For Unit 2 to call Unit 1, you would dial 20100.
    Model DG-102SP
    Question How do I configure my DG-SP series gateway for my broadband Internet connection?
    Answer Note: This FAQ only applies to the DG-102SP. Menu options for the DG-102S may look different.

    Make sure you have a good physical connection between all devices. You will need one straight through Cat5E cable between your modem and the WAN port on your DG series gateway and you will need another straight through Cat5E cable between the LAN port on your DG series gateway and your switch, hub, or computer.

    Once you have established physical connectivity, you can access and configure the unit for your Internet connection.

    Select your configuration method below:

    Web-based configuration interface
    HyperTerminal
    Users with a PPPoE connection, read here.


    From the web-based configuration interface:

    Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your DG unit. By default, the WAN IP address is 10.1.10.4. The username and password are null.

    Step 2 Open the Config IP menu and select Config Device IP Address. Set Get IP From to match your WAN connection type.



    If you have a DHCP (Dynamic) IP connection:

    Select DHCP on the Get IP From menu and click Save.

    If you have a static IP connection:

    Select Manual on the Get IP From menu. Fill in your IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway as specified by your ISP. Click on Save.

    Step 3 Click on Save Changes from the menu on the left.


    From HyperTerminal:

    Step 1 Open a new HyperTerminal session.

    Note: If you have trouble establishing a HyperTerminal session to your DG series gateway,     read here.

    Step 2 To set your WAN port information, type in the following lines:

    If you have a DHCP (Dynamic) IP connection:

    • nwdbg ip dhcp
    If you have a static IP connection:

    • nwdbg ip manual
    • nwdbg ip [x.x.x.x]
      Where [x.x.x.x] is the IP address assigned to you by your ISP.
    • nwdbg mask [x.x.x.x]
      Where [x.x.x.x] is the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP.
    • nwdbg gw [x.x.x.x]
      Where [x.x.x.x] is the default gateway assigned to you by your ISP.
    Step 3 Save your changes. Type in the following line.

    • nwdbg save changes

    To configure a PPPoE connection:

    Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your DG unit. By default, the WAN IP address is 10.1.10.4. The username and password are null.

    Step 2 Open the Config IP menu and select Config Device IP Address.



    Set PPPoE State to Enabled. Enter your account username and password as specified by your ISP.

    • If you have dynamic PPPoE, set Get IP From to DHCP and click Save.
    • If you have static PPPoE, set Get IP From to Manual and enter IP address information as specified by your ISP. Then click Save.
    Step 3 Click on Save Changes from the menu on the left.

    Step 4 Open a new HyperTerminal session.

    Note: If you have trouble establishing a HyperTerminal session to your DG series gateway,     read here.

    Step 5 To set your PPPoE information, type in the following lines:

    • pppoe myip [type]
      Where [type] is set to auto if you have a Dynamic PPPoE connection, or set to static if you have a Static PPPoE connection.
    • pppoe service [service name]
      Where [service name] is the service or host name, as specified by your ISP. If your ISP has not specified a service name for your connection, you can skip this line.
    • pppoe acname [ac name]
      Where [ac name] is the access concentrator, as specified by your ISP. If your ISP has not specified an access concentrator for your connection, you can skip this line.
    Step 6 To save your changes, type in the following line.

    • nwdbg save changes
    Step 7 Once the unit reboots, you will need to manually connect to your ISP. Type in the following line.

    • pppoe connect
    Model DGE-500T
    Question Are there DOS drivers available for my DGE-500T adapter?
    Answer Unfortunately we do not offer DOS drivers or support. The DGE-500T was developed for high bandwidth usage in areas such as network servers, data storage devices, and high-speed video conferencing.
    Model DGE-550T
    Question What is the difference between hardware revisions A2 and A3 for my DGE-550T adapter?
    Answer Revision A2 of this adapter worked only with a 32-bit PCI slot and may not have worked properly in a 64-bit PCI slot. Revision A3 has resolved issues with operability in a 64-bit PCI slot.
    Model DGL-3420
    Question How do I access the DGL-3420?
    Answer You will need to assign to your PC an IP address within the network of the DGL-3420.
    For example, you can assign a static IP address of 192.168.0.2 and a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 to the computer that you will use for configuration.

    Step 1 Click Start on the start menu, select Control Panel, then Network Connections.

    Step 2 Right-click on Local Area Connections.

    Step 3 Select Properties.

    Step 4 Click on Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), and select Properties.

    Step 5 Select Use the following IP address.

    Step 6 Enter an IP address that is within the range of the device/network. Example: 192.168.0.2
  • Enter the Subnet mask. Example: 255.255.255.0
  • Enter the Default Gateway. The Default Gateway is the LAN IP address of the wireless router. D-Link wireless routers have a LAN IP address of 192.168.0.1

    Step 7 Select Use the following DNS server address. Enter the LAN IP address of the wireless router. (D-Link wireless routers have a LAN IP address of 192.168.0.1)

    Step 8 Click OK.

    The Configuration Interface can be accessed from your Web browser. Open up your Web browser and type http://192.168.0.30 in the address field and press Enter. The Configuration Interface login screen will appear. The user name is admin. By default, there is no password. Click on the Log In button to access the Configuration main screen.



    How do I assign a static IP address in Macintosh OSX?

    Step 1 Go to the Apple Menu and select System Preferences.

    Step 2 Click Network.

    Step 3 Select Built-in Ethernet in the Show pull-down menu.

    Step 4 Select Manually in the Configure pull-down menu.

    Step 5 Input the static IP address, the subnet mask and the router IP address in the appropriate fields.

    Step 6 Click Apply Now.

    You have completed the assignment of a static IP address in Macintosh OS X!
    • Model DGL-3420
    Question Why does my wireless connection drop?
    Answer The below are possible causes for a wireless connection drop:

    Antenna orientation – try different antenna orientations for the DGL-3420. Try to keep the antenna at least 6 inches away from the wall or other objects.

    If you are using 2.4GHz cordless phones, X-10 equipment or other home security systems, ceiling fans, and lights, your wireless connection will degrade dramatically or drop altogether.

    Try changing the channel on your router, access point and all other devices on the network to avoid interference.

    Keep your product away (at least 3-6 feet) from electrical devices that generate RF noise, like microwaves, monitors, electric motors, etc.
    Model DGL-3420
    Question Why can’t I connect to an access point or wireless router?
    Answer Try the following if you are unable to connect to an access point or wireless router:

  • Make sure that the SSID on the DGL-3420 is exactly the same as the SSID on the access point or wireless router.
  • Move the DGL-3420 and access point or wireless router into the same room and then test the wireless connection.
  • Disable all security settings (WEP, MAC Address Control, WPA, etc.) Turn off your access point and the device connected to the DGL-3420. Turn on the access point, and the device connected to the DGL-3420.
  • Make sure that the DGL-3420 is set to Infrastructure mode.
    • Model DGL-3420 / DWA-130 / DWL-AG132 / DIR-330 / DWL-AG530 / DWL-AG660 / DWL-G120 / DWL-G122 / DWL-G132 / DWL-G510 / DWL-G520 / DWL-G520M / DWL-G550 / DWL-G630 / DWL-G650 / DWL-G650M / DWL-G680 / DWL-G710 / DWL-G820 / WDA-1320 / WDA-2320 / WNA-1330 / WNA-2330 / WUA-1340 / WUA-2340 / DWL-P100 / DWL-P200 / DWL-P50 / DWA-142 / DWA-542 / DWA-552 / DWA-556 /DWA-642 / DWA-643 / DWA-645 / DWA-652 / DWL-M60AT / DWL-R60AT / DVG-G1402S / WBR-1310 / WBR-2310
    Question What can I do if I am having wireless connection problems?
    Answer Signal strength drop or fluctuation are common causes of RF interference.

    Try these basic troubleshooting steps:
    • Change the channel on your access point or wireless router.
    • Change the location of your wireless products. Subtle changes (2-3 feet) can make a big difference. Do not put the access point or wireless router in a cabinet or enclosure.
    • 2.4GHz phones, X-10, and bluetooth devices will interfere with your wireless network. Change the location of the base for your phone, or downgrade to 900Mhz phones, or upgrade to 5.8GHz phones.
    • The wireless signal will degrade (or die completely) when going through brick (fireplace), metal (file cabinet), steel, lead, mirrors, water (fish tank), large appliances, glass, etc.
    If your wireless connection is only dropping during large file transfers or when a large number of wireless clients are connecting, change the preamble on all wireless devices to short.
    Model DGL-3420 / DWA-130 / DWL-AG132 / DWL-AG530 / DWL-AG660 / DWL-G120 / DWL-G122 / DWL-G132 / DWL-G510 / DWL-G520 / DWL-G520M / DWL-G550 / DWL-G630 / DWL-G650 / DWL-G650M / DWL-G680 / DWL-G710 / DWL-G820 / WDA-1320 / WDA-2320 / WNA-1330 / WNA-2330 / WUA-1340 / WUA-2340 / DWL-P100 / DWL-P200 / DWL-P50 / DWA-142 / DWA-542 / DWA-552 / DWA-556 /DWA-642 / DWA-643 / DWA-645 / DWA-652 / DWL-M60AT / DWL-R60AT / DVG-G1402S / WBR-1310 / WBR-2310
    Question How do I renew my IP address(DHCP) for my network adapter?
    Answer Note: The following FAQ demonstrates the usage of the Command Prompt in Windows XP.

    Step 1: Click Start and select Run.



    Step 2: In the Run command box, type cmd and click OK.



    Step 3: In the command prompt, type ipconfig/release.



    Step 4: After the IP addresses are released, type ipconfig/renew.



    Step 5: Your adapter will send a request for a DHCP (automatically) obtained IP address, netmask, gateway, and DNS if auto-DNS is enabled.

    If you are having problems obtaining an IP address using DHCP, you may want to try to static (manual) the IP address. Click here for assistance.

    Note: Verify that you have a DHCP server on your network, such as a router. Most routers have a setting to disable or enable DHCP.
    Model DGL-3420 / DWA-130 / DWL-AG132 / DWL-AG530 / DWL-AG660 / DWL-G120 / DWL-G122 / DWL-G132 / DWL-G510 / DWL-G520 / DWL-G520M / DWL-G550 / DWL-G630 / DWL-G650 / DWL-G650M / DWL-G680 / DWL-G710 / DWL-G820 / WDA-1320 / WDA-2320 / WNA-1330 / WNA-2330 / WUA-1340 / WUA-2340 / DWL-P100 / DWL-P200 / DWL-P50 / DWA-142 / DWA-542 / DWA-552 / DWA-556 /DWA-642 / DWA-643 / DWA-645 / DWA-652 /DWL-M60AT / DWL-R60AT / DVG-G1402S / WBR-1310 / WBR-2310
    Question How do I assign a static IP address to my adapter?
    Answer Step 1: Click Start>Settings>Control Panel>Network Connections>Network Connections, or otherwise open the Network Connections window.

    Step 2: Right click the adapter, left click Properties

    • For Ethernet (hardwired) adapters, use the item listed as Ethernet Adapter Local Area Connection.
    • For Wireless adapters, use the item listed as Ethernet Adapter Wireless Area Connection.

    Step 3: Scroll down the list of items and select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), then click Properties.

    Step 4: Select the round button near Use the following IP address:
    You will now need to enter your adapterīs IP address, the netmask, default gateway and DNS IP.

    Important note on IP addresses:
    A valid IP address must contain four octets (segments separated by decimals) having values that fall between zero and 255. Each IP address in your network must be unique; no two devices should have the same IP address. Zero and 255 should not be used in a valid IP addressī last octet. They are used as placeholders and for network utilities. (Do not use 192.168.0.0 or 192.168.0.255 for a deviceīs IP address)

    Your IP address must match the first three octets of your Gateway IP, when using the default netmask of 255.255.255.0. You may pick any number for the last octet of your IP address that falls between zero and 255.

    For example, if your Gateway IP address is 192.168.0.1, your adapterīs IP may be 192.168.0.2 or 192.168.0.254.

    The "Subnet mask" feild sets your netmask. You will be using 255.255.255.0, unless a network technician has set up an advanced network.

    The "Default Gateway" field sets the gateway IP address your adapter will use for Internet access. By defining the gateway, you are directing your data to the device that has Internet access. If you are using a router, the routerīs IP address would be your gateway. If you have no router and connect directly to your cable or DSL modem for internet access, you will use that modemīs IP address as your gateway IP. If you are using Internet connection sharing, use the IP address of the adapter that was set up to share the Internet connection.
    • Most D-Link routers use a default IP address of 192.168.0.1
    • Most LinkSys routers use 192.168.1.1
    • Many VoIP routers use 192.168.15.1
    • Internet Connection Sharing default: 192.168.0.1


    Step 5: You must now set your adapterīs DNS (Domain Name Services) server address. Your ISP may have a specific DNS server that they want you to use. Inquire with your ISP what DNS IP address you should use. Otherwise, you may refer to your router or modemīs IP address if that device supports DNS relay. The secondary DNS server is not required, it is used as a backup.

    Step 6: Click OK at the bottom of the Internet Protocol window to save the settings.

    Step 7: Click OK at the bottom of the adapterīs Properties window to save the settings.

    Your adapter is now assigned a static (manual) IP address, netmask, gateway IP and DNS server IP.
    Model DGL-3420 / DWL-AG132 / DWA-130 / DWL-AG530 / DWL-AG660 / DWL-G120 / DWL-G122 / DWL-G132 / DWL-G510 / DWL-G520 / DWL-G520M / DWL-G550 / DWL-G630 / DWL-G650 / DWL-G650M / DWL-G680 / DWL-G710 / DWL-G820 / WDA-1320 / WDA-2320 / WNA-1330 / WNA-2330 / WUA-1340 / WUA-2340 / DWA-142 / DWA-542 / DWA-552 / DWA-556 /DWA-642 / DWA-643 / DWA-645 / DWA-652 /DWL-M60AT / DWL-R60AT / DVG-G1402S / WBR-1310 / WBR-2310
    Question How do I install my network adapter in Windows Vista?
    Answer Note: The following steps are only a suggestion. D-Link cannot guarantee that the following steps will work in every situation.

    Step 1: Physically install the network adapter.

    Step 2: Boot the computer. Wait for Vista to recognize the new hardware. Once it prompts you to locate the driver. Click Locate And Install Driver Software (Recommended).



    Step 3: If Vista fails to locate the drivers internally or online, it will prompt you to insert the Driver Disk.



    Step 4: Once the disk is inserted the Vista will locate the driver from the CD and install it. Click Next to continue.



    Step 5: After the drivers are installed, Vista will tell you the card has installed properly and is ready to use. You should not have to reboot.






    Alternate Installation Method:

    Step 1: Click Start then Control Panel .



    Step 2: Locate the Device Manager.

    The control panel will be laid out one of two ways.





    Step 3: Click the plus sign next to the Other Devices. This will display a sub-menu.



    Step 4: Right click the Network Controller, and select Update Drivers.



    Step 5: Select Search Automaticly For Updated Driver Software. Ensure that the driver CD is inserted in your machine as Vista will automaticly check for it there.



    Step 6: After the driver is installed, click Close.



    Note: Vista requires that you use its utility for wireless management. You cannot use the D-Link utility.
    Model DGL-3420 / DWL-AG132 / DWL-AG530 / DWL-AG660 / DWL-G120 / DWL-G122 / DWL-G132 / DWL-G510 / DWL-G520 / DWL-G520M / DWL-G550 / DWL-G630 / DWL-G650 / DWL-G650M / DWL-G680 / DWL-G710 / DWL-G820 / WDA-1320 / WDA-2320 / WNA-1330 / WNA-2330 / WUA-1340 / WUA-2340 / DWL-P100 / DWL-P200 / DWL-P50 / DWA-142 / DWA-542 / DWA-552 / DWA-556 /DWA-642 / DWA-643 / DWA-645 / DWA-652 // DWL-M60AT / DWL-R60AT / DVG-G1402S / WBR-1310 / WBR-2310
    Question How can I find the IP address of my network card?
    Answer The following FAQ applies to Windows XP:

    You can get information regarding your Network Interface Cardīs IP address by using the IPCONFIG command.

    Step 1: Click Start then Run.



    Step 2: In the Run command box, type cmd and click OK.



    Step 3: In the Command Prompt, type ipconfig and press Enter.



    Step 4: Locate the Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection. Under this header, you will find the IP address of your adapter.



    Note: A wireless adapter will display as Ethernet Adapter Wireless Area Connection.

    You can get more network information by typing ipconfig/all
    Model DGL-3420 / DWL-G120 / DWL-G122 / DWL-G132 / DWL-G510 / DWL-G520 / DWL-G520M / DWL-G550 / DWL-G630 / DWL-G650 / DWL-G650M / DWL-G680 / DWL-G710 / DWL-G820 / WDA-1320 / WDA-2320 / WNA-1330 / WNA-2330 / WUA-1340 / WUA-2340 / DGL-4100 / DGL-4300 / DI-524 / DI-604 / DI-624 / DI-624M / DI-624S / DI-634M / DIR-450 / DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-655 / EBR-2310 / KR-1 / WBR-1310 / WBR-2310 / DWA-142 / DWA-542 / DWA-552 / DWA-556 / DWA-642 / DWA-643 / DWA-645 / DWA-652 / DWL-M60AT
    Question How do I find my Routerīs IP address in Windows XP?
    Answer Step 1: Click Start and select Run.



    Step 3: Type: cmd and press Enter.



    Step 4: Type: ipconfig and press Enter.



    The IP Address of your router will be listed under Default Gateway.



    Note: The default IP address for most D-Link routers is 192.168.0.1.
    Model DGL-3420 / DWL-G120 / DWL-G122 / DWL-G132 / DWL-G510 / DWL-G520 / DWL-G520M / DWL-G550 / DWL-G630 / DWL-G650 / DWL-G650M / DWL-G680 / DWL-G710 / DWL-G820 / WDA-1320 / WDA-2320 / WNA-1330 / WNA-2330 / WUA-1340 / WUA-2340 / DI-524 / DI-604 / DI-624 / DI-624M / DI-624S / DI-634M / EBR-2310 / KR-1 / WBR-1310 / WBR-2310 / DWA-142 / DWA-542 / DWA-552 / DWA-556 / DWA-642 / DWA-643 / DWA-645 / DWA-652 / DWL-M60AT
    Question How do I perform a manual driver installation in Windows XP?
    Answer Make sure you download the correct driver for your operating system, productīs model number and the specific hardware version (if there are multiple HW revisions).

    Step 1 After you have attempted to install the drivers at least once, Right-click My Computer and select Manage



    Step 2 Select Device Manager on the left panel, and expand the Network adapters section and locate your adapter. The adapter might instead be listed under Other or USB devices.



    Step 3 Right click the adapter and select Update Driver... to start the Driver installation wizard.



    Step 4 Select No, not at this time. Do not search the Internet. Click Next.



    Step 5 Select Install from a list or specific location. Click Next.



    Step 6 Select Donīt search, I will choose the driver to install.
    If the wizard does not detect the proper driver, click back and instead select Search for the best driver in these locations, selecting Include this location in the search, and specifying the location of the unzipped, downloaded driver file(s).



    Step 7 Select the closest match resembling your productīs exact model number. Click Next.
    In this example we are installing a DFE-550TX adapter, so we selected the driver corresponding most closely to that model number.



    Step 8 The driver will install the required files, this may take from four seconds to two or more minutes.



    Step 9 Click Finish. The driver is now installed. At this point you should test the adapter. In some cases, you may need to reboot your PC after a driver installation.



    Model DGL-3420 / General Wireless
    Question What environmental variables might cause my wireless products to lose reception?
    Answer D-Link products let you access your network from virtually anywhere. However, the positioning of the products within your environment will effect the wireless range. Please refer to Installation Considerations in the Wireless Basics section of the product manual for further information about the most advantageous placement of your D-Link wireless products.
    Model DGL-4100 , DGL-4300 , DI-524 , DI-604 , DI-624 , DI-624M , DI-624S , DI-634M , DI-704P , DI-707P , DI724GU , DI-724U , DI-804HV , DI-808HV , DI-824VUP , DI-LB604 , DIR-450 , DIR-615 , DIR-625 , DIR-635 , DIR-655 , EBR-2310 , WBR-1310 , WBR-2310
    Question How do I open ports in my firewall?
    Answer To open ports in the routers firewall, you will need to do the following;

    Step 1 Access the UI of the router. Steps for doing this can be found here.

    Step 2 After a successful log in attempt, you will navigate to the ADVANCED tab. Here you will need to locate VIRTUAL SERVER or PORT FOWARDING. For information regarding the differences between VIRTUAL SERVER and PORT FOWARDING, please click here.

    Virtual Server:

    The first step in configuring the Virtual Server is to give the new rule a name and place a check mark in the box next to the name.
    This check mark tells the router that the rule is active. Once this is done, you will need to determine what ip address on your LAN is going to be affected by this rule.

    (NOTE: In the more advanced routers, there are options for application name and computer name. You can find more information on what those do here.)

    Now that you have input the NAME and IP Address, you will need to decide what ports you want to redirect. This means that you can take a camera that normally would be accessed on port 80 and redirect it to a public port of your choosing, assuming that the port is not already being used by another PC or service.

    All that is left after the PUBLIC and PRIVATE ports have been configured, is to determine the traffic type and schedule. The most common traffic types would be TCP (Transmission Control Protocal) and UDP (User Datagram Protocal), if you are unsure of the protocal you require, simply selecting "BOTH" is acceptable.
    Unless you have a specific time frame that you want this rule to be active, the schedule should be set to "ALWAYS". Donīt forget to click "Save Settings".

    (Note: In the more advanced routers there are options to define manual schedules and inbound filters. These options are explained here.)

    DIR-655 Virtual Server section shown


    Port Fowarding:
    Just like the Virtual Server, the first step of creating a port foward rule is to create a name and place a check mark in the box on the left.
    Now, you will want to determine that LAN IP address the rule is for, and then you will enter ports in various formats including, Port Ranges (100-150), Individual Ports (80, 68, 888), or Mixed (1020-5000, 689).

    This can be done for both UDP and TCP ports at the same time.
    This is useful for gaming and Media Streaming. These types of applications usually require a large amount of ports to be opened to a single IP Address, Virtual Server would not be able to provide a service of this type.
    As with Virtual Server, the port fowarding section has the option to apply a schedule to the rule if you wish. It also has the ablility to apply an inbound filter.
    DIR-655 Port Forwarding section shown
    Model DGL-4100 , DGL-4300 , DI-524 , DI-604 , DI-624 , DI-624M , DI-624S , DI-634M , DI-704P , DI-707P , DI724GU , DI-724U , DI-804HV , DI-808HV , DI-824VUP , DI-LB604 , DIR-450 , DIR-615, DIR-625 , DIR-635 , DIR-655 , EBR-2310 , WBR-1310 , WBR-2310
    Question How do I find my routers IP Address, in Windows XP?
    Answer Step 1: Ensure that the computer you are using is connected to the router, by an ethernet cable.

    Step 2: Click Start and select Run.



    Step 3: In the Run command box, type cmd and click OK.



    Step 4: In the Command Prompt, type ipconfig and press Enter.



    Step 5 Locate the Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection. Under this header find the Default Gateway. The address displayed here, should be the address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default).



    Model DGL-4100 , DIR-330 / DIR-130 / DGL-4300 , DI-524 , DI-604 , DI-624 , DI-624M , DI-624S , DI-634M , DI-704P , DI-707P , DI724GU , DI-724U , DI-804HV , DI-808HV , DI-824VUP , DI-LB604 , DIR-450 , DIR-615 , DIR-625 , DIR-635 , DIR-655 , EBR-2310 , WBR-1310 , WBR-2310
    Question How do I log into my router?
    Answer Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

    If you do not know the IP address of your router, click here for assistance.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DGL-4100/DGL-4300?
    Answer Step 1 Select your product below to check for the latest version of firmware:

  • DGL-4100
  • DGL-4300

    Step 2 Download the firmware file.

    Step 3 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DGL-4100/DGL-4300 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 4 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.



    Step 5 Click Tools at the top and then click Firmware on the left side.



    Step 6 Next to Upload click Browse and navigate to the bin file you downloaded. Click Open.

    Step 7 Click Upload to upgrade the firmware.

    Step 8 The firmware upgrade process is complete when the gaming router reboots. To confirm that the firmware was upgraded, click Status at the top.

    The firmware version listed in the GENERAL section should reflect the new firmware version. If the version listed does not match the new version repeat steps 5-8 again.

    • Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I login to the web-based configuration of my DGL-4100/DGL-4300?
    Answer This FAQ will demonstrate how to login to the web-based configuration of the DGL-4100/DGL-4300 out-of-the box using the factory default IP address and password.

    The web-based configuration will allow you to configure your DGL-4100/DGL-4300.

    Step 1 Turn off your computer. Connect it to one of the LAN ports on the router with an Ethernet cable. Once connected, turn on your computer.

    Step 2 Open a web-browser and type 192.168.0.1 in the address bar. Press Enter.

    Step 3 By default there is no password. Click Log In to access the web-based configuration of the gaming router.




    Related Links

  • Why canīt I access the web-based configuration?
  • How do I statically assign an IP address to my computer?
    • Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure Virtual Server rules on my DGL-4100/DGL-4300?
    Answer The Virtual Server feature allows access to services on your LAN from the Internet. This feature is useful for hosting online services such as FTP, web, or game servers.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DGL-4100/DGL-4300 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.



    Step 3 Click Advanced at the top and then click Virtual Server on the left side.



    Step 4 Configure the following:
    • Enable - Select the checkbox to enable this rule.
    • Name - Enter a name to identify this rule or select a pre-defined rule using the drop-down list to the right.



    • IP Address - Enter the LAN IP address of the computer that is hosting the service.
    • Protocol - Select the protocol (TCP or UDP).

    • Private Port - Enter the port on the LAN interface that the service is running on.
    • Public Port - Enter the public port that will be forwarded to the private port from the WAN interface. The public and private port(s) are usually the same.
    • Schedule - Select Always.

    Step 5 Click Save Settings at the top to save this rule.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I view the traffic statistics on my gaming router?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Status at the top and then click Statistics on the left side.

    Traffic Statistics

    NOTE: Wireless traffic statistics will be displayed on the DGL-4300 only.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I enable the Syslog option on my gaming router?
    Answer The Syslog option will allow you to log events with a Syslog server.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Tools at the top and then click Syslog on the left side.

    Syslog

    Step 4 Select the checkbox next to Archive to Syslog and enter the IP address of the syslog server next to Syslog Server IP Address.

    Step 5 Click Save Settings to save the new settings.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I permit access to certain websites?
    Answer The Web Filter feature will allow you to only permit access to websites you specify. All sites will be denied except for the sites you enter in the list.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (all lower case). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Advanced at the top and then click Web Filter on the left side.

    Web Filter

    Step 4 Select the checkbox next to Enable and enter the domain names you want to allow access to next to Web Site and click Save.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I reset my gaming router to factory default settings?
    Answer The DGL-4100/DGL-4300 can be reset via the web-based configuration and by using the reset button.

    NOTE: YOU WILL LOSE ALL SAVED SETTINGS BY PERFORMING A FACTORY RESET.

    Select the reset method:

  • Reset Button
  • Web-Based Configuration


    Reset Button

    If you are unable to login to the web-based configuration (i.e. you do not remember your password) you need to reset the gaming router using the reset button.

    Step 1 Locate the hole on the back of the gaming router below the word Reset. Unplug the power to your router.

    Step 2 Insert a paper clip into the reset hole and plug the router back in. Hold it down for 5 seconds and then release.

    Step 3 Factory reset is complete when the status lights on the front of the gaming router stabilize.


    Web-Based Configuration

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Tools at the top and then click System on the left side.

    Step 4 Click Restore all Settings to the Factory Defaults.

    Factory Reset
    • Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I enable remote administration on my gaming router?
    Answer Remote administration will allow access to the web-based configuration of your gaming router from the Internet.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Tools at the top and then click Admin on the left side.



    Step 4 Configure the following under Administration:
    • Enable Remote Management - Check this box to enable remote administration.
    • Remote Admin Port - Enter the remote administration port.
    • Admin Idle Timeout - Enter a timeout, in minutes, in which the remote administration session will timeout when there is no activity for this ammount of time.
    Step 5 Click Save Settings to apply the new settings.

    To access the web-based configuration type http://WAN IP Address:Port in the address bar of your web browser, where IP Address is your WAN IP address and Port is the port number you specified in Step 4.

    Click here to find your WAN IP address.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I set or change the administrative password on my gaming router?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Tools at the top and then click Admin on the left side.



    Step 4 In the Admin section enter your new password next to Password and enter it again next to Verify Password.

    Step 5 Click Save Settings at the top to save the new password.

    NOTE: If you forget your password you will have to reset the gaming router.

    How do I reset my gaming router?
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure a static DHCP client on my gaming router?
    Answer Static DHCP will allow you to assign a static IP address to a computer using the DHCP server on the gaming router.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is nothing (blank). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click DHCP on the left side.



    Step 4 In the Add Static DHCP Client selection select the checkbox next to Enable and configure the following:
    • IP Address - Enter the IP address of the computer or select it using the drop-down list to the right.
    • MAC Address - Enter the MAC address of the computer. If the computer you are using is the computer you want to configure a static DHCP IP address, click Clone Your Computers MAC Address.
    • Computer Name - Enter the name of your computer.

      Add Static DHCP Client
    Step 5 Click Save to apply the changes.

    Step 6 When prompted, click Reboot the Device.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I reboot my gaming router?
    Answer The DGL-4100/DGL-4300 can be rebooted via the web-based configuration and using the reset button.

  • Reset Button
  • Web-Based Configuration


    Reset Button

    Step 1 Locate the hole on the back of the gaming router below the hole labeled Reset.

    Step 2 Insert a paper clip into the hole, press the button, and then remove the paper clip.


    Web-Based Configuration

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Tools at the top and then click System on the left side.

    Step 4 In the System Commands section click Reboot the Device.

    • Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure routing on my gaming router?
    Answer Routing will allow you to define static routes between your gaming router and other network devices.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Advanced at the top and then click Routing on the left side.

    Step 4 In the Add Route section select the checkbox next to Enabled and configure the following:
    • Destination Address - Enter the IP address of the device that you are configuring the static route to.
    • Netmask - Enter the netmask of the static route.
    • Gateway - Enter the gateway of the static route.
    • Interface - Select the interface (LAN or WAN).
    • Metric - Enter the metric.

      Please visit http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;299540 for more information on metric.

    Step 5 Click Save to apply the new changes.

    NOTE: To disable a static route uncheck the enabled checkbox in the Routers List section.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I enable email notification on my DGL-4100 or DGL-4300 router?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Tools at the top and then click Email on the left side.

    Step 4 Select the checkbox next to Enable Email Notification and configure the following:
    • From Email Address - Enter the from email address. When you receive an email notification this will appear as the from address.
    • To Email Address - Enter the email address that you want email notifications sent to.
    • SMTP Server Address - Enter the address of your ISPīs SMTP server.*
    • Enable Authentication - Select this checkbox if your ISP requires SMTP authentication.*
    • Account Name - If your ISP requires SMTP authentication enter your username that you use to authenticate.*
    • Password - If your ISP requires SMTP authentication enter your password.*
    • Verify Password - Confirm the password you entered next to Password.

      *If you are unsure of these settings, contact your ISP or network administrator.

      Email Notification
    Step 5 To email the log when it is full select the checkbox next to On Full Log. To email the log on a schedule select the checkbox next to On Full and select the frequency next to Schedule.

    Step 6 Click Save Settings at the top to apply the new settings.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I view active sessions on my gaming router?
    Answer The Active Session page displays full details of all connections to your router.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Status at the top and then click Active Sessions on the left side.

    Active Sessions
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure my DGL-4100 or DGL-4300 router for Xbox Live?
    Answer GameFuel does not need to be enabled to use Xbox Live. If you have GameFuel enabled, then Dynamic Fragmentation must be disabled since Xbox Live does not support IP fragmentation.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Advanced at the top and then click GameFuel on the left side.

    GameFuel

    Step 4 Check Enable GameFuel and make sure that Dynamic Fragmentation is unchecked. Xbox live will not work if this box is checked.

    Step 5 Click Save Settings at the top to save the new settings.

    Xbox and Xbox Live are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I set static routes on my DGL-4100 or DGL-4300?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Advanced at the top and then click Routing on the left side.



    Step 4 Below Add Route select Enable and configure the following:
    • Destination IP - Enter the IP address of the computer
    • Netmask - Enter the netmask of the computer
    • Gateway - Leave the Gateway value as 0.0.0.0
    • Interface - Select LAN
    • Metric - Enter 1
    Step 5 Click Save

    Step 6 Click Reboot the Device to apply the new settings.



    Step 7 Change the IP address on your computer to match the destination IP and subnet specified above. Make sure the default gateway matches the LAN IP address of the router.

    How do I statically assign an IP address to my computer when using a D-Link router?
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure and view the activity log on my gaming router?
    Answer The activity log will display events logged by the gaming router.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Status at the top and then Logs on the left side.

    Logs

    Step 4 In the Log Options section select the events that you want the gaming router to log.

    Step 5 Click Apply Settings Now to save the changes.

    Step 6 The Log Details section will list events logged by the gaming router.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure the time settings on my DGL-4100 or DGL-4300?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Tools at the top and then click Time on the left side.

    Time Configuration

    Step 4 Configure the following:
    • Time Zone - Select your time zone.
    • Daylight Saving Enabled - Select this option to enable Daylight Saving Time.
    • Daylight Saving Offset - Select the offset (+ or -) if you selected the Daylight Saving Enabled option.
    • Enable NTP Server - Select this option to sync the time with an NTP server.
    • NTP Server Used - Enter the IP address or domain name of the NTP server, or select it using the drop-down list to the right.
    Step 5 Click Save Settings at the top to save the new settings.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I create a custom schedule on my gaming router?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Tools at the top and then click Schedules on the left side.

    Schedules

    Step 4 In the Add Schedule Rule section configure the following:
    • Name - Enter a name to identify the rule
    • Days - Select All Days to always apply the scedule or Select Day(s) to specify the day(s) using the checkboxes.
    • All Day - 24 hrs - Select this option to apply the schedule to the selected day(s) all day
    • Start Time - Specify the time that the schedule will begin
    • End Time - Specify the time that the schedule will end
    Step 5 Click Save to apply the new rule.

    Note: Saved rules will be listed in the Schedule Rules List section.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure DDNS on my DGL-4100 or DGL-4300 router?
    Answer DDNS will allow you to access your public IP address by domain name. The DDNS feature updates your public IP address with the DDNS provider each time it renews.

    Step 1 Register with one of the following DDNS providers. If you already have an account with a DDNS provider listed below, skip to Step 2.

  • ChangeIP.com
  • DynDNS.org
  • EuroDynDNS.org
  • hn.org
  • no-ip.com
  • ods.org
  • ovh.com
  • regfish.com
  • tzo.com

    Step 2 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 3 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 4 Click Tools at the top and then click Dynamic DNS on the left side.

    Dynamic DNS

    Step 5 Select the Dynamic DNS Enabled checkbox and configure the following:
    • Server Address - Select the DDNS provider that you registered with
    • Host Name - Enter the domain name that you registered (i.e. mydomain.provider.org)
    • Username or Key - Enter the username for your DDNS account
    • Password or Key - Enter the password for your DDNS account
    • Verify Password or Key - Confirm the password for your DDNS account
    • Timeout - Enter the timeout (in hours) in which the gaming router will update your DDNS account if your IP address has not changed
    Step 6 Click Save Settings at the top to apply the DDNS settings.
    • Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure the LAN settings on my gaming router?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click LAN on the left side.

    LAN Settings

    Step 4 Configure the following:
    • IP Address - Enter the IP address. This will be used to access the gaming router on your network.
    • Default Subnet Mask - Enter the subnet mask
    • RIP Announcement - Select this option if there are other routers on the network.
    • Metric - Enter the metric.
    Please visit http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;299540 for more information on metric.

    Step 5 Click Save Settings at the top to save the new settings.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure DHCP server on my gaming router?
    Answer DHCP server automatically assigns IP addresses to computers on a network.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click DHCP on the left side.

    Step 4 By default DHCP server is enabled. To disable the built-in DHCP server, uncheck DHCP Server Enabled.

    To change the DHCP server range, enter new values next to DHCP IP Address Range. If you enter 100 and 150, and your IP address starts with 192.168.0.x then the DHCP scope (range) will be 192.168.0.100-192.168.0.150.

    To change the lease time, enter a new value (in minutes) next to DHCP Lease Time. The lease time is the amount of time before the DHCP server renews the IP address of clients.



    Step 5 Click Save Settings at the top to save the new settings.

    Note: Associated DHCP clients will be listed in the Number of Dynamic DHCP Clients section.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure the Special Applications feature on my DGL-4100 or DGL-4300?
    Answer Some applications use a series of ports that change each time the application is used. Special Applications will open all ports for an application when a port is triggered.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Advanced at the top and then click Special Applications on the left side.

    Step 4 Pre-defined applications will be listed in the Application Level Gateway (ALG) Configuration section. To disable any of the pre-defined applications, uncheck them.

    To add a Special Application rule select the Enable checkbox in the Add Special Applications Rule section and configure the following:
    • Name - Enter a name to identify the rule or select a rule using the drop-down list to the right.



    • Trigger Port Range - Enter the port or a range of ports that will trigger the rule.
    • Protocol - Select the protocol (TCP, UDP, or Both).



    • Input Port Range - Enter the LAN port or range of ports.
    • Input Protocol - Select the protocol for the LAN interface (TCP, UDP, or Both).



    • Schedule - Select Always

    Step 5 Click Save to apply the new settings.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure the gaming (port forwarding) option on my DGL-4100 or DGL-4300?
    Answer The Gaming (port forwarding) option allows you to open ports and forward them to an IP address on your LAN.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Advanced at the top and then click Gaming on the left side.



    Step 4 In the Add Game Rule section select Enable and configure the following:
    • Name - Enter a name to identify the rule or select one using the drop-down list to the right.



    • IP Address - Enter the IP address of the computer on the LAN that traffic will be forwarded to.
    • TCP Ports to Open - Enter the TCP ports that you want to open
    • UDP Ports to Open - Enter the UDP ports that you want to open
    • Schedule - Select Always

    Step 5 Click Save to add the new rule.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure the Inbound Filter (firewall) rules on my DGL-4100 or DGL-4300?
    Answer Inbound Filter (firewall) rules will allow you to control incoming traffic from the Internet.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Advanced at the top and then click Inbound Filters on the left side.

    Step 4 In the Add Inbound Filter Rule section select Enable and configure the following:
    • Name - Enter a name to identify the rule.
    • Action - Select Allow to allow the traffic to pass or Deny to block the traffic.
    • Source IP Range - Enter LAN IP address or a IP address range
    • Protocol - Select the protocol (TCP or UDP)
    • Source Port Range - Enter the LAN port or a range of ports
    • Public Port Range - Enter the WAN port or a range of ports
    • Schedule - Select Always using the drop-down list.
    • Log - Select this option to log this traffic.

    Step 5 Click Save to apply the new rule.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure MAC filters on my DGL-4100 or DGL-4300?
    Answer MAC filters will allow you to allow/deny access to wired and wireless clients based upon the clients MAC address.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Advanced at the top and then click MAC Address Filter on the left side.

    Step 4 In the Filter Settings section select MAC Filter Enabled and configured the following:
    • Mode - Select only allow listed machines to only allow listed computers to connect to the gaming router or only deny listed machines to allow all computers to connect, except for those listed.
    • Filter Wireless Clients - (DGL-4300) Select this option to apply the MAC filter settings to the wireless interface.
    • Filter Wired Clients - (DGL-4300) Select this option to apply the MAC filter settings to the wired interface.

    Step 5 In the Add MAC Address section select Enabled and enter the MAC address of the computer, select it using the drop-down list to the right, or click Clone Your PCīs MAC Address to add the MAC address of the computer you are using.



    Step 6 Click Save to save the new settings.


    Related Links:
  • What is a MAC address?
  • How do I find the MAC/Adapter Address in Windows 98 or Windows Me?
  • How do I find the MAC/Adapter Address in Windows NT, 2000 and XP?
  • How do I find the MAC/Adapter Address in Macintosh?
    • Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure my WAN settings on my gaming router?
    Answer Select your Internet connection type. If you are unsure, contact your ISP or network administrator.

  • DHCP
  • PPPoE
  • Static


    DHCP

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click WAN on the left side.



    Step 4 In the Modes section configure the following:
    • WAN Mode - Select DHCP
    • Use these DNS Servers - Select this option to manually enter DNS servers. DNS servers translate domain names (i.e. dlink.com) to IP addresses (i.e. 64.7.210.130).
    • Primary DNS Server - If you selected Use these DNS Servers enter the domain name or IP address of your primary DNS server.
    • Secondary DNS Server - If you selected the Use these DNS Server enter the domain name or IP address of your secondary DNS server (optional).

    Step 5 Click Advanced and configure the following:
    • MTU - The MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) determines the largest packet size (in bytes). Contact your ISP for your MTU. Typical values are 1500 bytes for an Ethernet connection and 1492 bytes for a PPPoE connection. If the MTU is set too high, packets will be fragmented downstream. If the MTU is set too low, the router will fragment packets unnecessarily and in some cases may be unable to establish connections.
    • Use the default MTU - Select this option to use the default MTU for your WAN connection type.
    • WAN Port Speed - It is recommended leaving this at the default value of Auto.



    • Respond to WAN Ping - Select this option if you want the WAN interface to respond to pings.
    • MAC Cloning Enabled - Select this option if you want to clone the MAC address of the WAN port with your computer.
    • MAC Address - If you selected the MAC Cloning Enabled option enter the MAC address or click Clone Your PCīs MAC Address to clone the MAC address of your PC.

    Step 6 In the DHCP WAN Mode section enter a host name next to Host Name if this is required by your ISP.



    Step 7 Click Save Settings at the top to save the new settings.

    Step 8 Click Reboot Device.

    Reboot Device

    Step 9 In the DHCP WAN Mode section click Renew next to DHCP Connection.



    You should now be able to connect to the Internet.


    PPPoE

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click WAN on the left side.



    Step 4 In the Modes section configure the following:
    • WAN Mode - Select PPPoE
    • Use these DNS Servers - Select this option to manually enter DNS servers. DNS servers translate domain names (i.e. dlink.com) to IP addresses (i.e. 64.7.210.130).
    • Primary DNS Server - If you selected Use these DNS Servers enter the domain name or IP address of your primary DNS server.
    • Secondary DNS Server - If you selected the Use these DNS Server enter the domain name or IP address of your secondary DNS server (optional).

    Step 5 Click Advanced and configure the following:
    • MTU - The MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) determines the largest packet size (in bytes). Contact your ISP for your MTU. Typical values are 1500 bytes for an Ethernet connection and 1492 bytes for a PPPoE connection. If the MTU is set too high, packets will be fragmented downstream. If the MTU is set too low, the router will fragment packets unnecessarily and in some cases may be unable to establish connections.
    • Use the default MTU - Select this option to use the default MTU for your WAN connection type.
    • WAN Port Speed - It is recommended leaving this at the default value of Auto.



    • Respond to WAN Ping - Select this option if you want the WAN interface to respond to pings.
    • MAC Cloning Enabled - Select this option if you want to clone the MAC address of the WAN port with your computer.
    • MAC Address - If you selected the MAC Cloning Enabled option enter the MAC address or click Clone Your PCīs MAC Address to clone the MAC address of your PC.

    Step 6 In the PPPoE WAN Mode section configure the following. If you are unsure about any of the below settings contact your ISP or network administrator.
    • Username - Enter your username
    • Password - Enter your password
    • Verify Password - Confirm your password
    • Service Name - Enter a service name if required by your ISP
    • Reconnect Mode - Select Always On to keep a connection to the Internet, On demand to automatically connect whenever a request is sent to access the Internet, or Manual to connect manually.
    • Maximum Idle Time - Enter the maximum idle time (in minutes). The maximum idle time is the amount of time when there is no activity in which the Internet connection will disconnect. Enter 0 to always stay connected.

    Step 7 Click Save Settings at the top to save the new settings.

    Step 8 Click Reboot Device.

    Reboot Device

    Step 9 In the PPPoE WAN Mode section click Connect next to PPPoE Connection.



    You should now be able to connect to the Internet.


    Static

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click WAN on the left side.



    Step 4 In the Modes section configure the following:
    • WAN Mode - Select Static
    • Use these DNS Servers - Select this option to manually enter DNS servers. DNS servers translate domain names (i.e. dlink.com) to IP addresses (i.e. 64.7.210.130).
    • Primary DNS Server - If you selected Use these DNS Servers enter the domain name or IP address of your primary DNS server.
    • Secondary DNS Server - If you selected the Use these DNS Server enter the domain name or IP address of your secondary DNS server (optional).

    Step 5 Click Advanced and configure the following:
    • MTU - The MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) determines the largest packet size (in bytes). Contact your ISP for your MTU. Typical values are 1500 bytes for an Ethernet connection and 1492 bytes for a PPPoE connection. If the MTU is set too high, packets will be fragmented downstream. If the MTU is set too low, the router will fragment packets unnecessarily and in some cases may be unable to establish connections.
    • Use the default MTU - Select this option to use the default MTU for your WAN connection type.
    • WAN Port Speed - It is recommended leaving this at the default value of Auto.
    • Respond to WAN Ping - Select this option if you want the WAN interface to respond to pings.
    • MAC Cloning Enabled - Select this option if you want to clone the MAC address of the WAN port with your computer.
    • MAC Address - If you selected the MAC Cloning Enabled option enter the MAC address or click Clone Your PCīs MAC Address to clone the MAC address of your PC.

    Step 6 In the Static WAN Mode configure the following. If you are unsure about any of the settings contact your ISP or network administrator.
    • IP Address - Enter your IP address
    • Subnet Mask - Enter your subnet mask
    • Default Gateway - Enter your default gateway

    Step 7 Click Save Settings at the top to save the new settings.

    You should now be able to connect to the Internet.
    • Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure the firewall on my DGL-4100/DGL-4300?
    Answer A firewall protects your network from the outside world. The D-Link Gaming Router offers a built-in firewall. The SPI feature helps prevent cyber attacks. Sometimes you may want a computer exposed to the outside world for certain types of applications. If you choose to expose a computer, you can enable DMZ. DMZ is short for Demilitarized Zone. This option will expose the chosen computer completely to the outside world.

    NOTE: You can enable DMZ for only one computer.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Advanced at the top and then click Firewall on the left side

    Step 4 Configure the following:
    • Enable SPI - Select this option to protect your internal network from attacks.
    • Enable DMZ - Selecting this option will exclude a computer on your LAN from being protected by the built-in firewall of the gaming router.
    • DMZ IP Address - If DMZ is enabled, enter the LAN IP address of the computer that you would like DMZ to apply to.

      Firewall Settings
    Step 5 Click Save Settings at the top to apply the new settings.
    Model DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
    Question What is GameFuel™ and how do I configure it on my DGL-4100/4300?
    Answer The GameFuel™, or QoS (Quality of Service), is a feature that helps improve your network gaming performance by prioritizing network traffic from applications. By default the GameFuel™ settings are disabled and application priority is not automatically classified.

    GameFuel™ Configuration

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DGL-4100/DGL-4300 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.



    Step 3 Click Advanced at the top and then click GAMEFUEL on the left side.



    Step 4 Select Enable GAMEFUEL and configure the following:
    • Automatic Classification - Enabled by default when GameFuel™ is enabled. This option will allow the gaming router to automatically determine which programs should have network priority.
    • Dynamic Fragmentation - Select this option to reduce the impact that large low priority network packets can have on more urgent ones.
    • Max. IP Fragment Size - By default the maximum fragment size is 576. You can only modify the fragment size when Dynamic Fragmentation is enabled. Select a smaller size if you have a slow uplink and VoIP quality is not optimal or select a larger size for faster uplinks.
    • Uplink Speed This is the speed at which data can be transferred from the gaming router to your ISP and is determined by your ISP. Usually your ISP issues a speed as a download/upload. For example, if your connection speed 1.5Mbits/284Kbits enter 284.


    Step 5 Click Save Settings at the top to apply the settings.


    Adding a GameFuel™ Rule

    After GameFuel™ is enabled you will be able to add GameFuel™ rules.

    Step 1 In the ADD GAMEFUEL RULE section configure the following:
    • Enabled - Select the checkbox next to Enabled to enable the rule.
    • Name - Enter a name to identify the rule.
    • Priority - Network traffic from rules with a lower priority number will have priority over rules with a higher priority number. Enter a value between 0 (highest priority) - 255 (lowest priority).
    • Protocol - Select the protocol (TCP or UDP).
    • Source IP Range - Enter the LAN IP address(es) of the computer(s) that traffic will originate from.
    • Source Port Range - Enter the port(s) on the LAN interface that traffic will originate from.
    • Destination IP Range Enter the WAN IP address(es) that traffic will be routed to.
    • Destination Port Range Enter the port(s) that traffic will be routed to on the WAN interface.


    Step 2 Click Save to save the rule.
    Model DGL-4100 /DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure the access control filter on my gaming router?
    Answer The access control filter allows you to control incoming and outgoing network traffic.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Advanced at the top and then click Access Control on the left side.

    Step 4 In the Enable section select Enable Access Control.

    Enable Access Control

    Step 5 In the Add Access Control Rule section select Enabled and configure the following:
    • Policy Name - Enter a name to identify the policy.
    • Machine IP Address - Enter the LAN IP address of the computer or select it using the drop-down list to the right.
    • Schedule - Select Always.
    • Web Filter - Select this option to apply the settings configured on the Web Filter page.
    • Log Internet Access - Select this option to log Internet traffic for this policy in the log.

    Step 6 Click Filter Ports.

    Step 7 Configure the following:
    • Enabled - Select Enabled to enable this rule.
    • Name - Enter a name to identify this rule.
    • Dest IP Start - Enter the first WAN IP address that you want to control access to.
    • Dest IP End - Enter the last WAN IP address that you want to control access to.
    • Protocol - Select the protocol (TCP or UDP).
    • Dest Start Port - Enter the first WAN port that you want to control access to.
    • Dest End Port - Enter the last WAN port that you want to control access to.

      Repeat Step 7 if you wish to add more rules.

    Step 8 Click Save Settings at the top to save the new settings.
    Model DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure the wireless settings on my DGL-4300?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DGL-4300 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Log In

    Step 3 Click Wireless on the left side.

    Step 4 Configure the following:
    • Wireless Radio Enabled - Select On to enable the wireless feature of the DGL-4300 or select Off to disable it.
    • Wireless Network Name - Enter the name for your wireless network. The wireless name, or SSID (Service Set Identifier), is case sensitive and must be the same on all clients connecting wireless.
    • Visibility Status - Select Visible to broadcast your SSID or Invisible to hide it. If this is set to invisible, then your SSID will not appear in a site survey.
    • Channel - Select a wireless channel. If you notice wireless interference, change the channel to a non-overlapping channel of 1, 6, or 11.
    • Transmission Rate - Select the maximum data rate. It is recommended to leave this at Best (automatic).
    • 802.11 Mode - Select 802.11 g only to allow only 802.11g clients to connect, Mixed 802.11g and 802.11b to allow both 802.11 b and 802.11g clients to connect, or 802.11b to allow only 802.11b clients to connect.
    • Super G™ Mode - Select one of the following modes:

      • Disabled
      • Super G without Turbo
      • Super G with Dynamic Turbo
      • Super G with Static Turbo

      Which mode should I use?

    Step 5 Click Save Settings at the top to save the new settings.
    Model DGL-4300
    Question How do I configure the advanced wireless settings on my DGL-4300?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DGL-4300 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Advanced at the top and then click Advanced Wireless on the left side.

    Step 4 Configure the following:

    • Fragmentation Threshold - This setting should remain at its default setting of 3200. If you experience a high packet error rate, you should slightly adjust your fragmentation threshold. Setting the Fragmentation value too low may result in poor performance.
    • RTS Threshold - This setting should remain at its default setting of 3200. If you encounter inconsistent data flow, only minor modifications to the value are recommended.
    • Beacon Period - Beacons are packets sent by a wireless router to synchronize wireless devices. Specify a Beacon Period value between 20 and 1000 (milliseconds). The default value is set to 100 milliseconds.
    • DTIM Interval - A DTIM is a countdown informing clients of the next window for listening to broadcast and multicast messages. When the wireless router has buffered broadcast or multicast messages for associated clients, it sends the next DTIM with a DTIM Interval value. Wireless clients hear the beacons and awaken to receive the broadcast and multicast messages. The default value is set to 1. Valid settings are between 1 and 255.
    • 802.1d Enable - This enables 802.11d mode. 802.11d is a wireless specification developed to allow implementation of wireless networks in countries that cannot use the 802.11 standard. This feature should only be enabled if you are in a country that requires it.
    • WDS Enable - When WDS is enabled, the DGL-4300 functions as a wireless bridge and is able to wirelessly communicate with other AP’s via WDS links.

      Why wonīt WDS work when WPA encryption is enabled?

    • WDS AP MAC Address - Specifies one-half of the WDS link. The other AP must also have the MAC address of this AP (the router) to create the WDS link back to the router.

      Advanced Wireless
    Step 5 Click Save Settings at the top to save the new settings.
    Model DGL-4300
    Question How do I setup WDS on my DGL-4300?
    Answer WDS is used to bridge two networks across a wireless link. A single Internet connection can be shared in this fashion. The DGL-4300 will only work in WDS with other DGL-4300īs.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the gaming router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click on Advanced on the top and then Advanced Wireless on the left hand side.



    Step 4 Click the checkbox next to WDS Enable and enter the remote wireless MAC address of the other DGL-4300.



    Step 5 For the other DGL-4300(s), repeat steps above entering the wireless MAC address(es) of the DGL-4300(s). In a setup with 3 DGL-4300īs A,B, and C; A will need the MACs of B and C entered, B will need the MACs of A and C, and C will need the MACs of A and B.

    Note: Make sure all wireless settings including SSID, Channel, and encryption are the same on all DGL-4300s in WDS. To make configuring the routers simpler, the LAN IP addresses of the routers should be unique within the WDS.
    Model DGL-4300
    Question How do I enable wireless encryption on my DGL-4300?
    Answer Wireless encryption will only allow wireless clients to connect to your DGL-4300 that have the correct encryption key.

    The DGL-4300 supports the below methods of wireless encryption:

  • None
  • WEP
  • WPA
  • WPA-PSK


    None

    NOTE: None is the default setting.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DGL-4300 in the address (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Wireless Security on the left side.

    Step 4 In the Wireless Security Mode section select None.



    Step 5 Click Save Settings at the top to save the new settings.


    WEP

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DGL-4300 in the address (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Wireless Security on the left side.

    Step 4 In the Wireless Security Mode section select WEP.

    Step 5 In the WEP section configure the following:

    • WEP Key Length - Select the key length (64- or 128- bit).
    • WEP Key 1-4 - Enter the WEP Key in one of the 4 WEP key text boxes. WEP keys are case sensitive and must be the same on all wireless clients.
    • Default WEP Key - Select the WEP Key that you want to use to secure your wireless network. If you select WEP Key 1, then you need to configure all wireless clients to use WEP Key 1.
    • Authentication - Select Open or Shared Key. An open key will allow all wireless clients to communicate with each other. A shared key will only allow wireless clients with that share the same WEP key to communicate with each other.

      WEP Encryption
    Step 6 Click Save Settings at the top to save the new settings.


    WPA

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DGL-4300 in the address (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Wireless Security on the left side.

    Step 4 In the Wireless Security Mode section select WPA-Enterprise.

    WPA Security

    Step 5 In the WPA section select TKIP or AES next to Cipher Type and enter the Group Key Interval Update (in seconds).

    Step 6 Enter the settings for your radius server in the EAP (802.1X) section.

    Step 7 Click Save Settings at the top to save the new settings.


    WPA-PSK

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DGL-4300 in the address (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Wireless Security on the left side.

    Step 4 In the Wireless Security Mode section select WPA-Personal.

    WPA-PSK Encryption

    Step 5 In the WPA section select TKIP or AES next to Cipher Type and enter the Group Key Interval Update (in seconds).

    Step 6 In the Pre-Shared Key section, enter the pre-shared key.

    Step 7 Click Save Settings at the top to save the new settings.
    • Model DGL-4300
    Question How do I view the wireless clients connected to DGL-4300?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DGL-4300 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default password is blank (nothing). Click Log In.

    Login

    Step 3 Click Status at the top and then click Wireless on the left side.

    Active Wireless Sessions

    This page will list any wireless clients connected to the DGL-4300 by MAC address and IP address.
    Model DGL-4300
    Question How do I get the Sony PSP™ to connect wirelessly to the DGL-4300?
    Answer Upgrade the firmware on the DGL-4300 to at least version 1.2

    Click here for an FAQ on upgrading the firmware on the DGL-4300.

    Make sure the wireless settings on the DGL-4300 and the PSP match (SSID, channel, security settings).

    Model DGS-1004T / DGS-1005D / DGS-1008D / DGS-1008T / DGS-1016D / DGS-1016TG / DGS-1024D / DGS-1024T / DGS-1024TG / DGS-105 / DGS-108 / DGS-1216T_revA / DGS-1216T_revB / DGS-1216T_revC / DGS-1216T_revD / DGS-2205 / DGS-2208DGS-3024 / DGS-3048 / DGS-3212SR / DGS-3224SR / DGS-3224TG / DGS-3224TGR / DGS-3308FG / DGS-3308TG / DGS-3312SR / DGS-3324SR / DGS-3324SRi / DGS-3612G / DWS-3227 / DWS-3227P / DWS-3250 / DXS-3227 / DXS-3227P / DXS-3250 / DXS-3326GSR / DXS-3350SR
    Question Why canīt I share my Internet connection to multiple computers when using my D-Link switch or hub?
    Answer If you are connecting directly to a Cable or DSL modem, you will need a router to share your Internet connection or a computer using ICS (Internet Connection Sharing) or Proxy. Switches and hubs do not allow you to share a single IP address to multiple computers.

    Another alternative is to contact your ISP and purchase extra IP addresses for each additional computer.

    Read here for a list of D-Link Routers.
    Model DGS-1004T / DGS-1005D / DGS-1008D / DGS-1008T / DGS-1016D / DGS-1016TG / DGS-1024D / DGS-1024T / DGS-1024TG / DGS-105 / DGS-108 / DGS-1216T_revA / DGS-1216T_revB / DGS-1216T_revC / DGS-1216T_revD / DGS-2205 / DGS-2208DGS-3024 / DGS-3048 / DGS-3212SR / DGS-3224SR / DGS-3224TG / DGS-3224TGR / DGS-3308FG / DGS-3308TG / DGS-3312SR / DGS-3324SR / DGS-3324SRi / DGS-3612G / DWS-3227 / DWS-3227P / DWS-3250 / DXS-3227 / DXS-3227P / DXS-3250 / DXS-3326GSR / DXS-3350SR
    Question How do I configure my network so I can share files, folders, and printers on my network?
    Answer The following links and sites will offer you information that will guide you in the setup of a network without the cost of a consultant or tutor.

    D-Link recommends Network Magic to easily configure printer and file sharing on your network. Click here for more information on Network Magic.

  • How can I share a drive or folder on my Windows 2000 machine?
  • How do I share and access a shared printer in Windows XP?
  • How do I create, access, and map shared drives/folders on my network in Windows XP?
  • How do I use the Network Setup Wizard in Windows XP?


    Home Networking References:

  • http://www.microsoft.com/windowsxp/using/networking/default.mspx
  • http://www.networkmagic.com/nmlp/dlinksupport.php
  • http://www.wown.com/
  • http://www.homenethelp.com/
  • http://www.homepcnetwork.com/
  • http://www.duxcw.com/digest/guides/network/index.html
  • http://compnetworking.about.com/compute/compnetworking
  • http://searchnetworking.techtarget.com/topics/0,295493,sid7_tax299248,00.html
    • Model DGS-1004T / DGS-1005D / DGS-1008D / DGS-1008T / DGS-1016D / DGS-1016TG / DGS-1024D / DGS-1024T / DGS-1024TG / DGS-105 / DGS-108 / DGS-1216T_revA / DGS-1216T_revB / DGS-1216T_revC / DGS-1216T_revD / DGS-2205 / DGS-2208DGS-3024 / DGS-3048 / DGS-3212SR / DGS-3224SR / DGS-3224TG / DGS-3224TGR / DGS-3308FG / DGS-3308TG / DGS-3312SR / DGS-3324SR / DGS-3324SRi / DGS-3612G / DWS-3227 / DWS-3227P / DWS-3250 / DXS-3227 / DXS-3227P / DXS-3250 / DXS-3326GSR / DXS-3350SR
    Question What is the maximum length of Category 3, 4 or 5 twisted pair cable that can be used between computers and other devices such as hubs, switches, other computers, etc.?
    Answer The maximum length of Category 3, 4 or 5 twisted pair cable that can be used between computers and other devices on a network is 100 meters or about 328 feet. Keep in mind that this is a theoretical limit. Usually, you will want to keep the distance between devices well below the limit.
    Model DGS-1004T / DGS-1005D / DGS-1008D / DGS-1008T / DGS-1016D / DGS-1016TG / DGS-1024D / DGS-1024T / DGS-1024TG / DGS-105 / DGS-108 / DGS-1216T_revA / DGS-1216T_revB / DGS-1216T_revC / DGS-1216T_revD / DGS-2205 / DGS-2208DGS-3024 / DGS-3048 / DGS-3212SR / DGS-3224SR / DGS-3224TG / DGS-3224TGR / DGS-3308FG / DGS-3308TG / DGS-3312SR / DGS-3324SR / DGS-3324SRi / DGS-3612G / DWS-3227 / DWS-3227P / DWS-3250 / DXS-3227 / DXS-3227P / DXS-3250 / DXS-3326GSR / DXS-3350SR
    Question What is the difference between Store-and-Forward switching and Cut-Through switching?
    Answer Store-and-Forward: Store-and-Forward switching will wait until the entire frame has arrived prior to forwarding it. This method stores the entire frame in memory. Once the frame is in memory, the switch checks the destination address, source address, and the CRC. If no errors are present, the frame is forwarded to the appropriate port. This process ensures that the destination network is not affected by corrupted or truncated frames.

    Cut-Through: Cut-Through switching will begin forwarding the frame as soon as the destination address is identified. The difference between this and Store-and-Forward is that Store-and-Forward receives the whole frame before forwarding. Since frame errors cannot be detected by reading only the destination address, Cut-Through may impact network performance by forwarding corrupted or truncated frames. These bad frames can create broadcast storms wherein several devices on the network respond to the corrupted frames simultaneously.
    Model DGS-1024T / DES-1250G / DGS-1216T / DGS-1224T / DGS-1248T / DES-1316 / DES-1526 / DES-1226G_revA / DES-1226G_revB / DES-1228 / DES-1228P / DES-1252 / DGS-1216T_revC / DGS-1216T_revD
    Question Why does my Web Smart switch always log me out when moving from page to page or link to link?
    Answer Please ensure that you are using Internet Explorer 6.0.x or higher when configuring D-Link Web Smart switches, as other browsers or earlier versions of IE may cause some minor problems. You will not be logged out of your switch when using Internet Explorer 6.0.x or higher.
    Model DGS-1216T_revC / DGS-1216T_revD / DGS-3024 / DGS-3048 / DGS-3312SR / DGS-3612G / DWS-3227 / DWS-3227P / DWS-3250 / DXS-3227 / DXS-3227P / DCS-3250 / DXS-3326GSR / DXS-3350SR
    Question Why won’t my Gigabit connection get a link?
    Answer A common problem when connecting different gigabit devices is Auto-sensing between the two different ports. When connecting two Gigabit devices it is imperative that the port speed be set the same on both sides. Some Managed Gigabit products have the ability to have the port speed set at either 1000Mbps/Full duplex or Auto. Other Un-Managed products don’t have the ability to modify the port speed at all. If you are using an Unmanaged device, or a device that doesn’t have the ability to set the port speed at 1000Mbps/Full duplex, you may not be able to connect to a device whose port speed is set to 1000Mbps/Full duplex.
    Model DGS-1248T
    Question How do I setup Port Based VLANs on my DGS-1248T switch?
    Answer This FAQ will cover how to setup Port Based VLANS on Web Smart switches. This configuration guide will setup your switch with two VLANs.

    Note: You can setup more than two VLANs. Please follow this guide and repeat from Step 3 for each new VLAN.

    For this FAQ we will use a DGS-1248T, but this FAQ can be used to configure any Web Smart switch.

    The examples given are using the following Test Lab setup:
    1x DI-624: IP address 192.168.20.1
    1x DGS-1248T: IP address 192.168.20.154
    1x Windows XP PC (PC1): IP address 192.168.20.220
    1x Windows XP PC (PC2): IP address 192.168.20.221
    (Browser used for both PCs: Internet Explorer 6.0.x)

    PC 1 will be plugged into port number 1 of the DGS-1248T.
    PC 2 will be plugged into port number 10 of the DGS-1248T.
    DI-624 (Ethernet port number 4) will be plugged into port number 48 of the DGS-1248T.

    We will be using the default VLAN and one additional VLAN, (VLAN ID 2).

    NOTE: The Internet connection MUST be a port that is a member of the default VLAN. Please do not change the PVID of the Internet connection.

    Step 1 Log into the DGS-1248T from PC 1. Click on the VLAN link located on the left hand side.



    Step 2 Click on the Add New VID button.



    Step 3 Type in the new VID number. This must be a number between 2-4094.
    For this FAQ we will use the number 2. Check mark the ports you want in your new VLAN, including your Internet connection and click Apply. For this FAQ we will check mark port number 10 (PC2) and port number 48 (Internet Connection). Click Apply, this will bring you back to the main VLAN page.



    Step 4 From the main VLAN configuraiton page use the top drop down menu and select the Port VID setting option.

    Step 5 Here you can change the PVID numbers for your physical ports.
    For this FAQ we will change the PVID of port 10 to have a PVID of 2, since "2" is the PVID number we gave to the new VLAN. This will prevent the two VLANs from passing traffic but still allow for Internet Connection.



    PLEASE NOTE: Do not change the PVID number for the Internet connection. Leave the Internet Connection on the Default PVID.

    Step 6 As you can see from our picture, we can no longer ping PC 2 from PC 1 but we can ping www.google.com.



    We can also no longer ping PC 1 from PC 2 but we can ping www.google.com.



    Model DGS-1248T
    Question How do I update the firmware on my DGS-1248T switch?
    Answer In this FAQ we will be using the DGS-1248T Web Smart switch. However this FAQ can be used to update the firmware for any Web Smart switch.

    Before you can begin to update your Web Smart firmware you will need to a copy of the D-Link Web Management software installed on your PC. Click here to download a copy from our support site.

    You will also need to download a copy of the latest firmware for your specific model of Web Smart switch. Click here to download the firmware from our support site.

    Use the following steps to upload the firmware:

    Step 1 Launch the Web Management Utility.



    Step 2 Click on the Discovery button. The Discovery List window, on the top, will populate with any Web Smart switches on your network. Double click on your Web Smart, this will add the switch to the Monitor List window, on the bottom. In this FAQ we will select the DGS-1248T.



    Step 3 Click on the switch in the Monitor List window to select it. Once it is selected press the Firmware Upgrade button.



    Step 4 From the Firmware Upgrade window, click on the Browse button. Select your firmware file and press Open. Enter your password in the password field.

    Note: The default password is Admin



    Step 5 Press the Start button.
    Do not power cycle the switch while the firmware is upgrading. Your PCs network card may show as disconnected for a second or two.



    Step 6 After your switch finishes updating you will get a pop up window showing that the upgrade was Successful. Press Ok.

    Your switch is now updated with the latest firmware.

    Note: At this time there is currently NO Macintosh or Linux version of the Web Management software. You will need to use a Windows PC for your upgrades.
    Model DGS-1248T
    Question How do I setup VLANs on my DGS-1248T
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and login to the web-based configuration of the DGS-1248T.

    Step 2 Click VLAN on the left.



    Step 3 Click Add New VID.



    Step 4 Enter the VID number. This must be a number between 2 and 4095. Select the ports that you want in the new VLAN and then click Apply.



    Step 5 Select Port VID Setting using the drop-down list next to IEEE 802.10 VLAN.



    Step 6 Enter the VID next to the corresponding ports and then click Apply.



    Step 7 Uncheck the ports you configured with the new VID from the default VLAN and then click Apply.

    Model DGS-3208F
    Question What is the size of the backplane on the DGS-3208F?
    Answer The size of backplane for the DGS-3208F is 21.6 Gig.
    Model DGS-3324SR / DGS-3224SR
    Question How do I enable Jumbo Frames on my D-Link switch?
    Answer Follow the directions below to enable Jumbo Frames for the DGS-3324SR and DGS-3224SR using Web-based Management and CLI.

    Step 1 Open up your web browser. Enter the IP address of the switch (default: 10.90.90.90) and click OK.

    Step 2 Enter your user name (blank by default) and password (blank by default). Click OK to enter the web-based configuration for your switch.



    Step 3 Click on Configuration on the left side and then click on Advanced Settings.

    Step 4 In the Advanced Settings menu, select Enable on the Jumbo Frame drop down box. Click Apply to save your settings.



    Enable Jumbo Frames through CLI

    Step 1 Connect to the switch through Telnet (Standard Port 23), or Hyperterminal (8, N, 1). Enter your user name and password (default is blank for both). Press Enter to access the Command Line Interface (CLI).

    Step 2 Enter enable jumbo_frame to enable Jumbo Frames in CLI.



    Step 3 To verify if Jumbo Frame is enabled, type show jumbo_frame.



    The settings will be applied immediately, however will not be saved to NV-RAM until you select Save Changes from the main menu tree.
    Model DGS-3324SR / DGS-3324SRi / DXS-3326GSR / DXS-3350SR
    Question How do I upgrade the PROM code on an xStack series (DGS-3324SR, DGS-3324SRi, DXS-3326GSR, DXS-3350SR) switches?
    Answer Step 1 Run HyperTerminal from Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications > HyperTerminal.

    Step 2 On the Connection Description window, enter a name for this connection. Click OK.

    Step 3 On the Connect To window, select the COM port that the serial cable is connected to using the drop-down box next to Connect Using. Click OK.

    Step 4 On the COMX Properties (X represents the COM port number) window, select the following settings using the drop-down boxes:

    * Bits per second - 115200
    * Data bits - 8
    * Parity - None
    * Stop bits - 1
    * Flow control - Hardware

    Click OK

    You will now see a blank screen which shows Connected at the bottom left hand corner of the screen.

    Step 5 Log into the switch and then reboot the switch.

    Step 6 Press "#" (Shift + 3) before the POST runs to 100%.



    Step 7 After a short delay, the switch will attempt to establish a connection to the Z-Modem, as shown below.



    Step 8 Click Transfer -> Send File, which will open the "Send File" window:





    Step 9 Choose the PROM file to be upgraded by utilizing the Browse button and pressing "Send." After the file transfer has completed, the device will reboot automatically.
    IMPORTANT: During the reboot process, DO NOT power off the switch. Doing so will cause a boot failure and the device cannot be rebooted. The RMA (Return Material Authorization) process will be needed for recovery.



    Step 10 After rebooting, the PROM version will be changed.

    Model DGS-3324SRi
    Question How do I enable Jumbo Frames on my D-Link switch?
    Answer Follow the directions below to enable Jumbo Frames for the DGS-3324SRi and DGS-3224SRi using Web-based Management and CLI.

    Enable Jumbo Frames through Web-based Management

    Step 1 Open up your web browser. Enter the IP address of the switch (default: 10.90.90.90) and click OK.

    Step 2 Enter your user name (blank by default) and password (blank by default). Click OK to enter the web-based configuration for your switch.



    Step 3 Click on Configuration on the left side and then click on Advanced Settings.

    Step 4 In the Advanced Settings menu, select Enable on the Jumbo Frame drop down box. Click Apply to save your settings.





    Enable Jumbo Frames through CLI

    Step 1 Connect to the switch through Telnet (Standard Port 23), or Hyperterminal (8, N, 1). Enter your user name and password (default is blank for both). Press Enter to access the Command Line Interface (CLI).

    Step 2 Enter enable jumbo_frame to enable Jumbo Frames in CLI.



    Step 3 To verify if Jumbo Frame is enabled, type show jumbo_frame.



    The settings will be applied immediately, however will not be saved to NV-RAM until you select Save Changes from the main menu tree.
    Model DGS-3324SRi
    Question What do the LED Indicators on my switch mean?
    Answer The Switch supports LED indicators for Power, Master, Console, RPS, SIO (stacking indicators) and Port LEDs. The following shows the LED indicators for the Switch along with an explanation of each indicator.



    Power: This LED will light green after powering the Switch on to indicate the ready state of the device. The indicator is dark when the Switch is powered off.

    Master: This LED will light solid green when the Switch is configured to be a master switch of a switch stack in a ring topology or when it is in use as a stand-alone switch. This LED will remain dark if the Switch is not configured to be a master switch of a switch stack or as a standalone switch.

    Console: This LED should blink during the Power-On Self Test (POST). When the POST is finished successfully, the LED goes dark. This indicator will light solid green when the Switch is being logged into via out-of-band/local console management through the RS-232 console port in the front of the Switch using a straight-through serial cable.
    This LED will light solid amber if the Power-On-Self-Test has failed.

    RPS: This LED will light when the internal power has failed and the RPS has taken over the power supply to the Switch. Otherwise, it will remain dark.

    Port LEDs: One row of LEDs for each port is located above the ports on the front panel. The first LED is for the top port and the second one is for the bottom ports. A solid light denotes a valid link on the port while a blinking light indicates activity on the port. These LEDs will remain dark if there is no link/activity on the port.

    Stacking Ports (SIO): There are six LEDs in the front of the DGS-3324SRi marked SIO 1-6, and they relate to the six 10-gigabit stacking ports at the rear of the Switch. For the DGS- 3324SR, DXS-3326GSR and the DXS-3350SR, there are only two stacking ports and therefore only two SIO LEDs, marked 1 and 2. These LEDs will light solid green to denote a valid link on the port.

    Stack ID: These two seven segment LEDs display the current switch stack order of the Switch while in use. Possible numbers to be displayed range from 1-12.
    Model DGS-3324SRi
    Question How do I setup the Switchīs IP Address?
    Answer Each switch must be assigned its own IP Address, which is used for communication with an SNMP network manager or other TCP/IP application (for example BOOTP, TFTP).
    The Switch’s default IP address is 10.90.90.90.

    The default switch IP address can be changed to meet the specification of your networking address scheme.

    The Switch is also assigned a unique MAC address by the factory. This MAC address cannot be changed, and can be found on the initial boot console screen – shown below.



    The IP address for the Switch must be set before it can be managed with the Web-based manager.
    The Switch IP address can be automatically set using BOOTP or DHCP protocols, in which case the actual address assigned to the Switch must be known.

    The IP address may be set using the Command Line Interface (CLI) over the console serial port as follows:

    Step 1 Starting at the command line prompt, enter the commands config ipif System ipaddress xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/yyy.yyy.yyy.yyy. (Where the x’s represent the IP address to be assigned to the IP interface named System, and the y’s represent the corresponding subnet mask.)

    Step 2 Alternatively, the user may enter config ipif System ipaddress xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/z. (Where the x’s represent the IPaddress System and the z represents the corresponding number of subnets in CIDR notation.)

    The IP interface named System on the Switch can be assigned an IP address and subnet mask which can then be used to connect a management station to the Switch’s Telnet or Web-based management agent.

    Example: The Switch was assigned an IP address of 10.53.13.144 with a subnet mask of 255.0.0.0. The system message, Success, indicates that the command was executed successfully.

    The Switch can now be configured and managed via Telnet and the CLI or via the Web-based management agent using the above IP address to connect to the Switch.

    Model DGS-3324SRi
    Question How do I access the switch via serial port?
    Answer Accessing the Switch via the Serial Port

    The Switch’s serial port’s default settings are as follows:

    • 115200 baud
    • no parity
    • 8 data bits
    • 1 stop bit

    A computer running a terminal emulation program capable of emulating a VT-100 terminal and a serial port configured as above is then connected to the Switch’s serial port via an RS-232 DB-9 cable.
    With the serial port properly connected to a management computer, the following screen should be visible.



    If this screen does not appear, press Ctrl+ R to refresh the console screen.

    There is no initial username or password.
    Just press the Enter key twice.
    To display the CLI input cursor − DGS-3324SRi:4#.
    This is the command line where all commands are input.
    Model DGS-3324SRi
    Question How do I upgrade the Firmware, on my DGS-3324SRi, through the Command Line Interface?
    Answer Note: Make sure your TFTP server software is running during the firmware update.

    Click here to download D-Link TFTP.

    Do NOT power off the switch during the upgrade procedure or the unit will be damaged.

    Step 1 Connect to the switch through Telnet (Standard Port 23). Enter your username and password (the default is blank for both). Press Enter to access the Command Line Interface (CLI).

    Step 2 Enter the Command for updating the firmware for the switch through the CLI.

    The command for updating the firmware is as follows download firmware ipaddr path

  • ipaddr = the IP Address
  • Path = the location of the firmware file on your computer.

    For Example:

    download firmware 192.168.10.33 c:\des3226SM_firmware_401B21.had



    Step 3 Press Enter to initialize the firmware update.



    Step 4 When the firmware upgrade is finished, the DES-3226SM will reboot.



    Step 5 After firmware upgrade, type show switch and press Enter, to verify the new firmware update is on your switch.



    • Model DHN-1000
    Question Why are the LEDs on my DHN-1000 not lighting up?
    Answer Below are some possible reasons as to why the LED lights are not lighting up:
    • Make sure the DHN-1000 bridge is plugged into a power strip.
    • Make sure that your HPNA network does not exceed 1,000 feet. If your HPNA PCīs are more than 1,000 feet apart, your network performance may be diminished, which may result in data loss.
    • Make sure that your RJ-45 cable is properly inserted into the DHN-1000īs Ethernet port as well as your router or switch.
    Model DHN-1000
    Question Why is my DHN-1000 not working?
    Answer
    • Make sure the Cat5 cable from the router or switch to the DHN-1000 is in good condition.
    • When connecting the bridge to your PC, Switch or router, make sure all your network devices are off. Connect all cables to your devices, then power on.
    • Make sure your PNA adapters are on the same phone line (circuit) as the DHN-1000.
    Model DHN-520 / DHN-910
    Question What is the maximum length of telephone wiring that you can have between any two nodes (network adapters) in a HomePNA network?
    Answer The maximum length between any two nodes (network adapters) is 500 feet. This is the length of the telephone wire from the first network adapter card to the first wall jack, plus the length from the first wall jack to the second wall jack, plus the length from the second wall jack to the second network adapter card. In some instances, the length of the cable running between two wall jacks may be longer than the physical distance between the two jacks, especially if excess cable has been stored in loops behind the wall.

    Note: Some users of the DHN-520 network adapter claim reliable data transfers using line lengths up to 1,000 feet between nodes. D-Link, however, specifies 500 feet as the maximum length for reliable data transfers. This is based on tests performed in our labs.
    Model DHN-520 / DHN-910
    Question My network adapter card appears to be firmly seated in its slot and there are no resource conflicts displayed in Device Manager; however, neither the Link light nor the Activity light is illuminated. Is this normal?
    Answer The Link light illuminates when you connect the computer to another active HomePNA device, such as a HomePNA network adapter card in another PC. This tells you that you have a "good" connection between the two devices. The Activity light illuminates whenever the network adapter card senses network "traffic," as defined by the HomePNA specification. If, for instance, you turn off power to all the devices on your network, except of course your PC, the lights on the network adapter card will turn off.
    Model DHP-301 / DHP-100 / DHP-300
    Question Why canīt my two powerline adapters connect?
    Answer 1. The two adapters must be connected to power outlets and electrical wiring which belong to the same electrical system.

    2. Connect the adapter directly to the wall socket instead of a powerstrip/surge protector. Filtering circuits in the surge protector can interfere with power line technology.
    Model DHP-301 / DHP-100 / DHP-300
    Question Why is my power-line ethernet adapter slower than 200Mbps?
    Answer 200Mbps is the theoretical physical rate. Actual throughput will vary. Network conditions and environmental factors, including volume of network traffic, and network overhead affects actual throughput rate.

    Specific factors which may reduce your effective speeds are power fluctuations EM interference from induction motors such as refrigerators, washer/dryer, microwaves, hair dryers, etc.and poor grounding.
    Model DI-102
    Question How do I access the web-based configuration of my DI-102?
    Answer The default login info for the DI-102 is listed below:

  • URL: http://192.168.229.61
  • Username: admin
  • Password: Blank (nothing)

    Note: If your network connection is configured properly, you will be able to access the web-based configuration from any IP address on your LAN.
    • Model DI-106 / DI-300
    Question When did support for the DI-106 and DI-300 end?
    Answer The support of the product ended on August 1, 2001. D-Link has already supported the product for a time period beyond the productīs lifetime. That period has expired. Manufacturer support for these units is still discontinued. Please visit D-Linkīs product description page for assistance with manuals and factory defaults. If support is needed, D-Linkīs website may still contain troubleshooting tips in the FAQ section. Your Reseller may also offer support. Distributors have been notified of this change in status.
    Model DI-106W
    Question Why canīt I get both B channels to appear?
    Answer First check menu 4 and verify that "multilink" is set to "always".

    Also check in menu 11-2. Edit PPP Options and set the base and max trans rate to 128. Change the target utility to 128- 128.
    Model DI-106W
    Question The connection on my DI-106W will drop after 5 mins. What can I do about it?
    Answer Check in menu 11. In the bottom right corner where it says "Idle timeout", try setting the value to 0.
    Model DI-106W
    Question How do I know what firmware am I running, and what is the latest firmware for my DI-106W?
    Answer To check the firmware on the DI-106W, go into menu 24.2.1. "RAS S/W Version" is the firmware. The latest firmware for this unit is 1.50, as of 9/07/99.
    Model DI-106W
    Question How do I set the idle time on my DI-106 so my call will disconnect?
    Answer This issue is similar to "I can’t get both B channels to come up". This is usually an issue for customers that get charged by the call and not by the minute.
    Try setting the idle timeout to 30 seconds.
    Try setting up a call filter to stop packets from triggering the call.
    Set the destination IP Address to 0.0.0.0. This way it will filter all packets.
    Model DI-106W
    Question When I run the Internet setup test I get the error "IP Mismatch".
    Answer This usually means that an invalid static global IP address was entered.

    The other possibility is that you have a dynamic IP address. If this is the case, set the IP address to 0.0.0.0 in menu 4.
    Model DI-106W
    Question When ever I run the Internet setup test on menu 4, I get an error message that say the numbers dialed are blacklisted.
    Answer Blacklisted numbers are tricky. It can be the fault of the DI-106 or the ISDN provider. First thing to check is to see if the DI-106 blacklisted the numbers. To do so go to menu 24.9 "call control". Then from there go to menu 24.9.2 "blacklist". If you ISPīs phone number appear on this list, there’s your problem. Try removing the number from the list. Then reboot the unit and run the Internet setup test on menu 4 again. If it still gives you the same error the problem may be with the ISP’s number. (Contact your ISP, make sure everything is working properly, and maybe ask for a different number.)
    Model DI-514
    Question How do I enable WPA-PSK on my DI-514?
    Answer This FAQ applies only to the DI-514 revision B with firmware 1.02 or higher.

    Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

    Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

    Step 3 Click on the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left hand side.

    Step 4 Select WPA-PSK from the drop-down menu next to Network Authentication. Once you select it, the screen will refresh.



    Step 5 Enter a key (passphrase). The key is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. The password can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless clients. You will have an option to use HEX or PassPhrase. We strongly recommend using passphrase since most devices do not offer HEX.



    Step 6 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.

    Note: If you are configuring your router from a wireless adapter, you will lose connectivity as soon as you click Apply. You must enable WPA-PSK on your adapter and enter the same exact key as you entered on your router.
    Model DI-514 / DI-514_revC
    Question How do I configure my DI-514 router?
    Answer Click on the links below for specific configuration instructions.

    Connect to the Internet: Basic Configuration:

    Wireless Settings: Advanced Features: Troubleshooting:
    Model DI-514 / DI-514_revC / DI-524 / DI-524_revA / DI-524_revC / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-604 / DI-604_revE / DI-614 / DI-614 _revB / DI-624 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624_revD / DI-624_revE / DI-624M / DI-624S / DI-634M / DI-704P / DI-704P_revB / DI-704P_revC / DI-704P_revD / DI-704UP / DI-707P / DI-707P_revC / DI-714P
    Question What do I do if I receive an E-mail from No-IP.com telling me that I can no longer use my Dynamic DNS client?
    Answer If an updated version of your firmware is available on http://support.dlink.com/ please try updating your firmware.

    If you are using the latest version of the firmware and you still can not use the routers No-IP.com client please use the software based No-IP.com updater.
    Model DI-514 / DI-514_revC / DI-604 / DI-604_revE / DI-614+ / DI-614+_revB / DI-624 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S
    Question How do I use a Zipit Wireless Messenger device with my D-Link router?
    Answer The following FAQ is for the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624S, DI-774, and DI-784.

    Zipit only supports an open authentication and a long preamble. Follow the steps below to setup your router.

    Note: If you are using WEP encryption, your network will be less secure when using an Open Authentication. You must also set your wireless clients to an Open Authentication (or Auto).

    Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

    Step 2 Enter the username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

    Step 3 Click on Advanced and then click Performance on the left side.

    Step 4 Set the Preamble Type to Long and the Authentication to Open System. Click Apply to save your settings.



    Note: Depending on your firmware version, one or both of these options may be in a different location (Home > Wireless).
    Model DI-514 / DI-524 / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-774 / DI-784
    Question How do I save/load the configuration file of my wireless router?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624M, DI-624S, DI-774, and DI-784.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the wireless router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

    Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click System to the left.



    Step 4 To save the configuration settings of your wireless router, click the Save button next to Save Settings To Local Hard Drive.

    To load a previously saved configuration file, click the Browse... button next to Load Settings From Local Hard Drive. Once you have located the file (config.bin) on your hard drive, click the OK button and then click Load.

    Note: If the firmware on your wireless router has been upgraded/downgraded, do not load configuration files that were saved using a different version of firmware then you currently have installed. This will not work and could damage the unit.
    Model DI-514 / DI-524 / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-774 / DI-784 / DI-514_revC / DI-604_revE / DI-614+_revB / DI-774_revB
    Question How do I configure DHCP server on my wireless router?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624S, DI-774, and DI-784.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the wireless router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

    Step 3 Click on the Home tab and then click on DHCP to the left.



    Note: If you are connecting to a DHCP server, the DHCP server on the wireless router should be set to Disabled.

    Step 4 By default, DHCP Server is set to Enabled. To disable it, click the Disabled radio button. To enable it, click the Enabled radio button.

    Step 5 Enter the Starting IP Address and Ending IP Address. To change the lease time, select a value from the drop-down list next to Lease Time.

    Note: The value for Starting IP Address must be less than the value for Ending IP Address.

    Step 6 Click on Apply then click Continue to save the settings.
    Model DI-514 / DI-524 / DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-774 / DI-784
    Question How do I find the MAC address of my wireless router?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624M, DI-624S, DI-774, and DI-784.

    The MAC address is listed on the label located on the bottom of the router, below the serial number.

    The LAN/Wireless and WAN MAC address can be obtained by logging into the web-based configuration of the wireless router. Follow the steps below for this method.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the wireless router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

    Step 3 Click the Status tab and then click Device Info to the left.

    This page will list the WAN, LAN, and Wireless MAC address.




    Related Links:
  • What is a MAC address?
    • Model DI-514 / DI-524 / DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-774 / DI-784
    Question How do I view the activity log on my wireless router?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624S, DI-774, and DI-784.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the wireless router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

    Step 3 Click the Status tab and then click Log to the left.



    This page displays the activity log for your wireless router. The buttons located above the log can be used to perform the below actions:

    • First Page - View the first page of the log.
    • Last Page - View the last page of the log.
    • Previous - View the previous page of the log.
    • Next - View the next page of the log.
    • Clear - Clear (delete) the entire log.
    • Log Settings - Configure advanced options for the activity log.
    Model DI-514 / DI-524 / DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-774 / DI-784
    Question How do I setup filters on my wireless router?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624 Rev. A, DI-774, and DI-784.

    There are 4 different filters that can be configured:

  • IP Filters
  • URL Blocking
  • MAC Filters
  • Domain Blocking


    IP Filters

    IP filters block access to ports or a series of ports from an IP address on the LAN. For example, if you did not want the computer with IP address 192.168.0.100 to access the Internet, then you would block that IP address from accessing port 80.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the wireless router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

    Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Filters to the left.



    Step 4 Select IP Filters using the radio buttons.

    Step 5 Select the Enabled radio button.

    Step 6 In the first field next to IP enter the IP address you want to block access from. If you want this to apply to a range of IP addresses, then enter the ending IP address in the second field.

    Step 7 In the first field next to Port enter the port you want to block. To block a range of ports, enter the ending port number in the second field. Then select the protocol type (TCP, UDP, or Both) using the drop-down list next to Protocol Type.

    Step 8 Next to schedule select Always using the radio buttons to continuously enable this filter, or select the From radio button to set a schedule using the time and day drop-down boxes below.

    Step 9 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.


    URL Blocking


    URL Blocking is used to block web sites that contain certain keywords.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the wireless router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

    Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Filters to the left.



    Step 4 Select URL Blocking using the radio buttons.

    Step 5 Select Enabled using the radio buttons.

    Step 6 In the text box below enter a keyword to block. To delete a keyword, select it from the box below the text box, and click Delete.

    Step 7 Click Apply to add the keyword to the list.


    MAC Filters


    MAC Filters allow you to allow or deny access to the LAN by specifying MAC addresses.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the wireless router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the (default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

    Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Filters to the left.



    Step 4 Select MAC Filters using the radio buttons.

    Step 5 In the section MAC Filters, select the radio button for the mode you would like to use.

    • Disabled - Disables this feature and will allow all wireless clients to connect.
    • Allow - Blocks all clients except for what you enter in the list.
    • Deny - Allows all clients except for what you enter in the list.
    Step 6 Enter the name used to identify the entry next to Name.

    Step 7 Enter the Ethernet MAC address that you wish to Allow or Deny next to MAC Address.

    Step 8 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.


    Domain Blocking


    Domain blocking lets you allow or deny access to certain websites.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the wireless router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

    Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Filters to the left.



    Step 4 Select Domain Blocking using the radio buttons.

    Step 5 In the section Domain Blocking, select the radio button for the mode that you would like to use.
    • Disabled - Disable this feature and will allow all clients on the LAN to access any website.
    • Allow - Permits access to all websites except domains specified in the Blocked Domains section.
    • Deny - Allows access only to domain specified in the Permitted Domains section.
    Step 6 In the Permitted Domains section, enter a domain to permit.
    In the Blocked Domains section, enter a domain to block.

    - or

    To delete a keyword, select it and click the Delete button.

    Step 7 Click Apply to add the domain the list.
    • Model DI-514 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-524 / DI-524_revC / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-514_revC / DI-714P+ / DI-614+_revB
    Question How do I change the preamble on my wireless router?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DI-514, DI-524, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624S, and DI-714P+.

    It is recommended to configure the preamble on your wireless router before your wireless adapters. You may need to set the preamble on all wireless clients.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the wireless router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

    Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Performance to the left.



    Step 4 Select Short or Long next to Preamble Type. If you experience lock-ups when transferring large files, then select Short preamble. You must also match your other wireless devices with the same preamble setting.

    Note: The preamble defines the length of the CRC block for communication between the wireless access point and the roaming wireless network adapters. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is a common technique for detecting data transmission errors.

    Note: High network traffic areas should use Short preamble.

    Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
    Model DI-524 / DI-524_revC / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE
    Question How do I configure my DI-524 router?
    Answer Click on the links below for specific configuration instructions.

    Connect to the Internet: Basic Configuration:

    Wireless Settings: Advanced Features: Troubleshooting:
    Model DI-524 / DI-524_revC / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE
    Question How do I disable the SSID broadcast on my DI-524?
    Answer Step 1 Open your Internet browser and type the IP address of the router in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.1. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

    Step 2 Click on the Home tab at the top and then click the Wireless button on the left side.

    Step 3 Click on Disable next to the SSID Broadcast field.



    Step 4 Click on Apply. Wait about 15 seconds to allow the router to save the changes and then click on Continue.

    Windows XP users click here.

    In a home network, the SSID broadcast feature serves no useful purpose. You should disable this feature to improve the security of your wireless network. You will need to manually configure your wireless clients with the same SSID as your access point or wireless router.

    Note: The Site Survey feature on your wireless adapter will no longer work since the SSID is not being transmitted.
    Model DI-524 / DI-624 / DI-784 / DI-614+ / DI-624M
    Question How do I make my DynDNS service work on my DI series router?
    Answer As of October 31, 2005 DynDNS will no longer update systems identified as client/1.0. The following provides a step-by-step procedure for users who wish to use their DynDNS account on their DI series router.

    Click here to download DynDNS Updater and to learn more about its features.

    Note: The computer with the DynDNS Updater program must always be kept on and connected to the router in order for DynDNS to update.

    Step 1: Download and install DynDNS on the desired computer.

    Step 2: Prior to completion of installation, check the box for Launch DynDNS Updater and click on Finish.

    The DynDNS Updater Wizard window should now open. Click on Next.



    Step 3: Select the Local Area Network radio button and click on Next.



    Step 4: Click on Detect My IP and verify if a public IP address is being detected and click on Next.



    Step 5: Enter a created group name in the blank box and click on Next.



    Step 6: Enter valid DynDNS account information (should be the same information you had previously entered into your router) and click on Next.



    Step 7: Select the Yes, do automatic download radio button and click on Next.



    Step 8: Select desired host name and click on Next.



    Step 9: Check Enable automatic update and click on Next.



    Step 10: This completes the installation. Click on Finish. Your DynDNS account should now automatically update itself as it did prior to DynDNS disabling your routerīs ability to update to their service.

    Model DI-524_revA
    Question How can I wirelessly connect my Nintendo DS to my DI-524 revision A?
    Answer Even though revision A of the DI-524 is listed on Nintendoīs website as incompatible with the Nintendo DS and itīs Wi-Fi service, it is possible to make it work.

    Step 1: Log into the web management of your DI-524. By default the IP address is 192.168.0.1, the username is admin, and there is no password.

    Step 2: Click on the Advanced tab and then click on Performance on the lefthand side.

    Step 3: Change TX Rates from Auto to 54. Make sure Mode Setting is set to Mix Mode.

    Step 4: Click on Apply. Your Nintendo DS should now be able to connect to the DI-524 wirelessly and make a connection to their Wi-Fi gaming service.
    Model DI-524_revC
    Question How do I configure the ZoneAlarm feature on my DI-524?
    Answer With the ZoneAlarm feature enabled, users without ZoneAlarm Pro installed will not be able to access the Internet.

    NOTE: The ZoneAlarm feature is only available on the DI-524 Revision C with firmware version 3.01 and above.

    If you are unsure which revision of the DI-524 you have locate H/W Ver. on the label located on the bottom of the unit.



    Click here to download the latest firmware.
    How do I upgrade the firmware?


    Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-524 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

    Step 3 Click Advanced at the top and then click ZoneAlarm on the left side.



    Step 4 Select Enabled next to ZoneAlarm Pro and configure the following:
    • ZAP License Number - Enter the license number (with no hyphens) for ZoneAlarm Pro or click Buy ZoneAlarm Pro Now! to purchase a license.
    • ZAP Security Level - Select High Security to check for computers running ZoneAlarm frequently or Medium Security to check less frequently.
    • Exempt LAN Clients Option - Select Enabled to permit certain IP addresses without ZoneAlarm Pro installed to access the Internet.
    • Starting IP Address - Enter the last octet of the first IP address of the computer on the LAN that will be will be allowed to access the Internet without ZoneAlarm Pro installed.
    • Ending IP Address - Enter the last octet of the last IP address of the computer on the LAN that will be will be allowed to access the Internet without ZoneAlarm Pro installed.
    Step 5 Click Apply to save the new settings.
    Model DI-524_revC / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-774 / DI-784 / DI-774_revB / DI-604_revE / DI-614+_revB
    Question How do I set or change the administrative password on my router?
    Answer This FAQ is for the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624M, DI-624S, DI-774, and DI-784.

    Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the wireless router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

    Step 2 The default username is admin and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

    Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Admin to the left.



    Step 4 To change the administrative password, enter a new password in the Admin section.

    To change the user password, enter a new password in the User section.

    Step 5 Click Apply then click Continue to save the settings.
    Model DI-604
    Question I installed the Network Magic CD and now my Internet connection will not work.
    Answer Out of the box, Network Magic needs to be configured for use on your network. For configuration help with Network Magic go to

    http://www.networkmagic.com/nmfaq/smartfaq.cgi?cat=1081377997

    If you want to completely remove Network Magic from your computer system follow the directions below.

    How to uninstall NetworkMagic
    1. Click the windows "Start" button in the lower left of your screen. Bring up the "All Programs" menu by hovering your mouse cursor over it or clicking on it. Next find the "Network Magic" group in the list. You can bring up the contents of the "Network Magic" group by hovering your mouse cursor over it or by clicking on it. There you will find an item labeled "Uninstall Network Magic." Click on it to start the uninstaller and follow the prompts to uninstall Network Magic.

    2. Network Magic can also be removed via the "Add/Remove Programs" tool in the Windows "Control Panel."
    Model DI-604 / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-614+_revB / DI-604_revE / DI-774_revB / Di-784 / DI-514
    Question What is NTP and how do I setup Time Settings on my D-Link router?
    Answer Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol that is used to synchronize computer clock times in a network of computers. In common with similar protocols, NTP uses Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) to synchronize computer clock times to a millisecond, and sometimes to a fraction of a millisecond. This feature is only available on the WAN port.

    Step 1: Log into the routerīs web utility and click on Tools and select Time.

    How do I log into the web utility?



    Step 2: You will need to set the time zone corresponding to your location.

    Step 3: If you set the time manually, select the date/time and set Daylight Saving (if applicable), click Set Time, click Apply, and click Continue.

    Step 4: If you have the IP of an NTP server, enter that IP address in the default NTP server box, click Apply and click Continue.

    If you leave the box empty, the router will use its default NTP servers.

    Note: Time Setting is a feature of the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-714p+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, and DI-784. Depending on the model, you may need to click on Sync, then Apply and Continue.

    Click here for a list of time servers
    Model DI-604 / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-784 / DI-514 / DI-624 / DI-604_revE / DI-614+_revB / DI-774_revB
    Question How do I find the Public (WAN) IP Address on my router?
    Answer Step 1 Open a web browser (Internet Explorer for example) and type in the LAN IP Address of the router (default:192.168.0.1). The username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).

    Step 2 Click the Status tab and click the Device Info button.

    Step 3 The Public IP address will be listed under the WAN heading in the IP Address field.



    Model DI-604 / DI-614+
    Question Which DDNS providers do the DI-604 and DI-614+ support?
    Answer Currently the only DDNS provider that the DI-604 and DI-614+ support is DynDNS.org.   When configuring these routers to work with DynDNS.org, please use members.dyndns.org as the Server Address.
    Model DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-624 / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-604_revE / DI-614+_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-774_revB / DI-704UP / DI-714P+ / DI-624S
    Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my router?
    Answer Follow the directions below to upgrade the firmware for the D-Link DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624M, DI-624S, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP routers from any operating system including Windows, Linux, and Macintosh with a java-enabled web browser (Internet Explorer, Netscape, Mozilla, Firefox, Safari, Opera, etc).

    Please read before upgrade:
  • Upgrading firmware (in most cases) will reset all the settings to default which means you will lose all your settings (including your password).
  • You do not have to upgrade Incrementally. You can upgrade the newest version.
  • You cannot use the backup settings feature and apply it to the newer firmware.
  • Do NOT upgrade firmware from a computer with a wireless connection. Use a computer that you can connect to the router using an ethernet cable. You may damage the router due to the increased packet loss with a wireless connection.
  • If your DI-604 was purchased in Europe, this upgrade will not work. For an office near you, click here.


      Step 1 Download the latest firmware.

      Click here for step-by-step instructions for downloading firmware.

      Step 2 Once youīve downloaded the firmware, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1).

      Step 3 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave the field blank). Click OK to enter the web configuration for the device.

      Step 4 Click on the Tools tab and then the Firmware button on the left side. Click on the Browse button and browse to the .bin (or .dlf) file you downloaded in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click Open.

      Step 5 Click Apply. It may take a up to 30 seconds for the upgrade to complete. Click on the Continue button. The firmware is now upgraded.



      Step 6 If you get a Page cannot be displayed or similar error after clicking Continue, close your browser and re-open it. Enter 192.168.0.1 and press Enter. You should now be prompted for your username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

    • How do I upgrade firmware on my DFL-80 or DFL-300?
    • How do I upgrade the firmware for the DI-704, DI-704P, DI-707, DI-713, and DI-713P?
    • How do I upgrade firmware on my DI-711, DI-714, or DI-804?
    • How do I upgrade the firmware on my DI-804V?
    • How do I upgrade the firmware on my DGL-4100 or DGL-4300?



      To download the latest firmware, follow the instructions below:

      Step 1 Visit http://support.dlink.com. Select your product in the drop-down menu and then click Go!.



      Step 2 You may be prompted to select a revision. The revision is listed on the bottom of the unit next to H/W:. Click on the revision that applies to you.

      Step 3 In the center of the screen, click on the Download Now button next to the firmware version you want.



      Step 4 Make sure you remember the name of the file. Click Save.



      Step 5 Next to Save in, click the down-arrow and select Desktop. Click Save. The file will be saved to your desktop.



      Step 6 Once the file is downloaded, click Close. Do not open or try to run this file. It will not work.



      Step 7 Connect your computer to the device you want to upgrade (if not already connected).

      Click here to continue the upgrade procedure (continue with Step 2 at the top).
      • Model DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-604_revE / DI-614+_revB / DI-514 / DI-514_revC / DI-524 / DI-524_revC
      Question What is Gaming Mode on my D-Link router?
      Answer Gaming Mode allows a form of pass-through for certain Internet games. If you are using XBOX, Playstation2, or a PC and have problems with your Internet games, make sure you are using the latest version of the firmware and that Gaming Mode is enabled.

      If you are not using an application that requires this type of pass-through, it is recommended that you disable Gaming Mode. Gaming Mode basically changes the way the gateway inspects the packets destined for your LAN and should be not used unless necessary.


    • How do I enable/disable Gaming Mode?
    • How do I upgrade the firmware?
      • Model DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-604_revE / DI-614+_revB / DI-514 / DI-514_revC / DI-524 / DI-524_revD
      Question How do I enable/disable Gaming Mode on my D-Link router?
      Answer Step 1 Access the web-based configuration by entering the IP address of your router in your web browser. The default IP address is 192.168.0.1. Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

      Help Accessing Web Management

      Step 2 Click the Tools tab and then click the Misc. button on the left side.



      Step 3 On the Miscellaneous page, select the Enabled or Disabled radio button under Gaming Mode. Click Apply to save your changes.
      Model DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-604E1 / DI-614+revB
      Question Why do I get an error message Invalid Upgrade File when upgrading my firmware from version 1.6x?
      Answer If your D-Link router has firmware version 1.6x, you have a European version and will not work with firmware listed at this site. Please contact D-Link International for a office near you.

      D-Link USA will NOT support the European version of this device.
      Model DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-604E1 / DI-614+revB
      Question What is VCT?
      Answer The Virtual Cable Tester feature verifies the link status on each port. It will determine if link activity is active on each of the ports and also verify if the cable is faulty.

      The following routers have VCT support:

      • DI-604 rev. E1
      • DI-614+ rev. B1 (Single Antenna)


      Step 1 Click on the Tools tab and go to Cable Test. This will display the link status for each of your ports.



      Step 2 Click on the Refresh button to refresh the link status to the LAN devices on the network.
      Model DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-604E1 / DI-614+revB / DI-514 / DI-514_revC / DI-524 / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-624 / DI-624_revC / DI-624_revB / DI-624S / DI-754 / DI-764
      Question How can I configure my router to use my Nortel Contivity VPN client?
      Answer This FAQ is for the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624S, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, and DI-784 routers.

      Nortel Contivity will work with the your D-Link router, however its functionality depends on the authentication type (AH will not work), NAT compatibilty mode, and disabling keep alives on the server. Contact your Network Administrator to find out how your VPN is configured.

      Step 1 Verify that you are using the latest version of firmware on your router.

      How do I update the firmware on my router?

      Step 2 Login to the Web Management for your router by entering its IP address (192.168.0.1) in your web browser. The default username is admin, and the password is blank.

      Step 3 Click the Advanced Tab to access the Virtual Server Settings. There is a list of pre-defined Virtual Server Rules towards the bottom of the page. Find the IPSec Rule. Click the pen and paper icon to edit its settings. Enable the rule, enter the IP address of the computer attempting to connect to the VPN in the Private IP field, then Apply the changes.

      Windows98/ME IP Configuration
      Windows2000/XP IP Configuration



      Step 4 Create a new Virtual Server entry. Name the Virtual Server, "NortelVPN". Enter the IP address of the computer attempting to connect to the VPN in the Private IP field. For the Protocol Type, select Both. Enter 9550 for both the Public and Private Ports. Set the Schedule to always, then Apply the settings.



      Step 5 Access the Tools Page, then click the Misc button. Disable IPSec Pass-through, then click Apply.



      If the VPN Server is properly configured to work with clients behind NAT routers you should be able to connect to the VPN.
      Model DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-604_revE / DI-614+_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-774_revB / DI-707P_revC / DI-704P_revb / DI-707P / DI-714P+ / DI-704 / DI-704P_revA
      Question What port or ports do I have to open for my application to work behind my router?
      Answer Please visit practicallynetworked.com for a list of applications and their ports.

      Below is a list of common applications. Click on the application for instructions on setting up your D-Link router. Make sure you restart the application (in some cases reboot computer) after you configure your router.

      P2P Apps
      Azureus
      BearShare
      BitTorrent
      DC++
      eDonkey
      eMule
      Gnutella
      Grokster
      KaZaA
      LimeWire
      Morpheus
      Overnet
      Piolet
      Shareaza
      Soulseek
      WinMX

      Miscellaneous
      DCS-900/900W Camera
      DCS-1000/1000W Camera
      DCS-2000/2100+ Camera
      DCS-5300/5300W Camera
      DVC-1000/1100 VideoPhone
      FTP Server
      pcAnywhere
      WinXP Remote Desktop
      Model DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-604_revE / DI-614+revB / DI-624C / DI-774B / DI-514 / DI-784 / DI-514_revC
      Question Why canīt I connect to certain sites or send and receive emails when connecting through my router?
      Answer The current firmware allows the maximum transmission unit to be changed if needed. If you are having a problem sending or receiving email, or connecting to secure sites such as eBay, banking sites, and Hotmail, we suggest lowering the MTU in increments of ten (Ex. 1492, 1482, 1472, etc).

    • Click here to find out what your MTU is
    • What is MTU?

      Note: AOL DSL+ users must use MTU of 1400.

      To change the MTU rate follow the steps below:

      For the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, and DI-784:

      Step 1 Open your browser, enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1) and click OK.

      Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and password (blank by default). Click OK to enter the web configuration page for the device.

      Step 3 Click on the Home tab and go to the WAN tab.



      Step 4 The default MTU is 1500, to change this enter the number in the MTU field and click the Apply button to save your settings.

      Step 5 Test your email. If changing the MTU does not resolve the problem, continue changing the MTU in increments of ten.

      Note: If you have the European version of the DI-604, this procedure will not work.

      Please click here to contact a D-Link office near you.

      If you do not have an MTU option, please upgrade your firmware.


    • How do I upgrade my firmware?
    • How do I change the MTU on my DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P?
    • What is MTU?
      • Model DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-604E1 / DI-614+revB / DI-624C / DI-774B
      Question What will happen if I telnet from the LAN side into my DI-604 or DI-614+ and enter 40 to 100 return characters?
      Answer The device will lock-out inbound and outbound transmission until you physically reset the unit. It is suggested that if you are doing this, STOP. If someone is getting onto your LAN side without permission you need to increase your network security methods. Using the MAC filter under Advanced > Filters can be the first and last step towards stopping annoying intruders.
      Model DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-604E1 / DI-614+revB / DI-624C / DI-774B
      Question How do I upgrade the firmware on the DI-604 and the DI-614+ using a Macintosh computer.
      Answer Step 1. Create a Folder on the Desktop Screen:
      From a blank spot the Desktop Screen, press and hold the Control key on the keyboard and click the mouse button. Release the Control key, click New Folder, and name it firmware.
      Step 2. Retrieve Firmware from Website:
      Click link below and download file to the folder created in step 1.

      Download DI-604 Firmware here

      Download Di-614+ Firmware here

      Step 3. Upgrade the Firmware:
      A. From the Main Desktop Screen, launch Internet Explorer or Netscape.

      B. Type 192.168.0.1 in the Address bar and click Go.

      C. For the User ID, type admin and click OK.

      D. Click Tools on the top and then click Firmware on the left side.

      E. Click Browse>Desktop>firmware, double click di6xx_firmware_203.bin and click Apply. Wait for approx. 15 seconds or until the M2 light stops flashing on the DI-6xx unit then click Continue.

      F. This takes you back to the Tools page. Check the Current Firmware Version on the Tools page to confirm that the firmware loaded successfully.
      Model DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-604E1 / DI-614+revB / DI-624C / DI-774B
      Question How do I configure my DI-604 or DI-614+ router to use my Nortel Extranet VPN using ESP IPSec?
      Answer To use your Nortel Extranet VPN software, please follow steps below:

      Step 1 Go into the web-based configuration on the router (enter 192.168.0.1 in your web brower). Enter username (admin) and password (blank).

      Step 2 Click on Advanced at the top and then click on Applications on the left side.

      Step 3 Check Enable

      Step 4 Enter a name (i.e. Nortel).

      Step 5 Enter 500 for Trigger Port (500 - 500).

      Step 6 Select Both for Trigger Type.

      Step 7 Enter 500 for Public Port.

      Step 8 Select Both for Public Type.

      Step 9 Click Apply and then click on Continue when prompted.

      Read here if you are using Nortel Contivity VPN.
      Model DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-604E1 / DI-614+revB / DI-624C / DI-774B
      Question How do I configure the firewall on my DI-604 to forward a single port to one of my PCs?
      Answer You can use the Virtual Server to forward an individual port to one of your computers. You cannot forward the same port to multiple computers. In order to configure the Virtual Server you need to know the IP address of the computer that needs the port opened and the service port number. The links below will help you find the IP address of your machine. If you don’t know which port needs to be opened, try checking the software manufacture’s support website for information on use behind firewall.

      How do I find the IP address of my Win2000 / XP computers?

      How do I find the IP address of my Win9X / ME computers?

      Configuring the Virtual Server:
      Step 1 Access the device configuration by entering 192.168.0.1 in your web browser. Login with your username and password. The default username is admin and the password is blank.

      Step 2a If the port you need to forward is a common port, it will be under the predefined virtual server list at the bottom of the page. Click the pad and paper icon next to the virtual server entry you want to use. The Protocol Type and Service Port fields are preconfigured. Click the Enable radio button to use the virtual server. Enter the private IP address of the computer that will use the service port. Configure the Schedule as needed, then Apply your settings.



      Step 2b If the port you need to forward is not listed under the predefined virtual server list at the bottom of the page, you can create a new entry for your application. Click the Enable radio button to use the virtual server. Give your virtual server a name. Next, enter the private IP address of the computer that will use the service port. Then, select the Protocol Type and enter the Service Port. If you don’t know how to use Private and Public port assignment, then just enter the same port number in both fields. Configure the Schedule as needed and Apply your settings.



      Model DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-604E1 / DI-614+revB / DI-624C / DI-774B / DI-704P/revC / DI-514 / DI-514_revC
      Question How do I make a primary connection with WinMX through my D-Link router?
      Answer Start up WinMX and go to Settings, then press the Setup Wizard button. When prompted to clear all previous settings, select No. Now you can click next through the screens (your previous information will still be there) until you get to this screen:



      Click on Cancel Test / Manually Configure.



      Click No. Do not use a proxy server for outgoing connections and then click Next.



      Enter 8888. Click Next.



      Enter 9999. Click Next.

      Finish the setup wizard. You will need to open (forward) 2 ports on your D-Link router. After you configure your router, you must restart the WinMX software.


      How can I find the IP address of my computer?

      Click on your router below for configuration steps:
    • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
    • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
    • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
    • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
    • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP

      Unfortunately we do not support the European versions of the DSL-302G, DSL-502G, DWL-500 (gen2), or the DSL-504 (gen2) since they are not sold in the United States.


      For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

      Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

      Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Virtual Server.

      Step 3 Create a new entry:
    • Click Enabled.
    • Enter a name (winmx).
    • Private IP - Enter the IP address of the computer you are running WinMX from.
    • Select TCP for Protocol Type
    • Enter 8888 for both Private Port and Public Port
    • Click Always or set a schedule.

      Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue.



      Step 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 but name it winmx2, select UDP for Protocol Type, and enter 9999 for both Private Port and Public Port.

      Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.


      For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

      Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

      Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

      Step 3 Enter the following information:
      • Check the enable box
      • Next to Service Ports, enter 8888.
      • Next to Server IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run WinMX from.
      • Click Always or set a schedule.
      • Click Apply and then click Restart to save changes.
      Step 4 Repeat step 3 but enter 9999 for the service port.

      Step 5 Click Save and then Restart.





      For the DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711, DI-713, and DI-713P:

      Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

      Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

      Step 3 Create a new entry:
      • Enter 8888 in the box under Service Ports.
      • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run WinMX from.
      • Check the box under Enable.
      • In the next box down, enter 9999 under Service Ports.
      • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run WinMX from.
      • Check the box under Enable.
      Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.



      NOTE: If you can only enter a single port (not a range) and/or are limited to 10 entries, upgrade your firmware to the latest version at       support.dlink.com/downloads.
      • Model DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-614+_revB / DI-604_revE
      Question How can I configure my router to email me the Status log?
      Answer The Log settings option allows you to save and email status logs to an administrator’s email address.

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the router (default:192.168.0.1). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing)

      Step 2 Click on the Status tab and click the Log button.



      Step 3 Click on the Log Settings button. Enter the SMTP Server or IP Address in the field provided.

      Example:
    • SMTP server > smtp.email.msn.com
    • IP address > 207.46.181.11

      Step 4 Enter E-mail Address in which you want the logs to be sent to.



      Step 5 Select the Log type you wish to send to your SMTP server.

      System Activity
      Debug Information
      Attacks
      Dropped Packets
      Notice

      Step 6 Click on Apply and then click Continue to save the changes.

      Click the Send E-mail Now button to send the log to the e-mail address specified.


      Some examples of SMTP servers are listed below:

    • Adelphia
      mail.dc2.adelphia.net

    • Ameritech DSL
      mailhost.chi.Ameritech.net

    • AT&T
      mailhost.worldnet.att.net

    • Earthlink.net
      mail.earthlink.net

    • Interlink
      mail.your-net.com

    • MSN DSL
      smtp.email.msn.com

    • Road Runner (Time Warner)
      smtp-server.Columbus.rr.com
      • Model DI-614 / DI-614+_revB
      Question How do I configure my DI-614+ router?
      Answer Click on the links below for specific configuration instructions.

      Connect to the Internet: Basic Configuration:

      Wireless Settings: Advanced Features: Troubleshooting:
      Model DI-614+
      Question How do I enable/disable 4X Mode on the DI-614+?
      Answer To enable/disable 4X Mode follow the steps below:

      Step 1 Open you web browser and type the IP Address of the router (Default IP Address 192.168.0.1).

      Step 2 Click the Advanced tab and then click Performance.



      Step 3 Select the radio button to disable or enable 4X Mode.

      Note: If using non-4X wireless adapters when the router has 4X enabled, the wireless connection may degrade or drop completely with those adapters. If using a mixed environment, it is recommended not to use 4X.

    • What is 4X mode?
    • Why does my wireless connection drop after upgrading to 2.18 firmware on my DI-614+ router?
      • Model DI-614+ / DI-614+_revB
      Question How do I disable the wireless segment on the DI-614+?
      Answer Step 1 Open your Internet browser and type the IP address of the DI-614+ in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.1. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

      Step 2 Click on Home tab at the top and then click the Wireless button on the left side.

      Step 3 At the top click on the Disable radio button.



      Step 4 Click on Apply. Wait about 15 seconds to allow the DI-614+ to save the changes and then click on Continue.

    • How do I disable the SSID broadcast?
      • Model DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-774 / DI-614+_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-774_revB / DI-514 / DI-514_revC
      Question How do I disable the Broadcast SSID on my DI-514, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624S, and DI-774?
      Answer In a home network, the SSID broadcast feature serves no useful purpose. You should disable this feature to improve the security of your wireless network. You will need to manually configure your wireless clients with the same SSID as your access point or wireless router.

      Step 1 Open your Internet browser and type the IP address of the router in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.1. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

      Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab at the top of the configuration page and then click the Performance button on the left side.

      Step 3 At the bottom of the Performance page, click on Disable next to the SSID Broadcast field.



      Step 4 Click on Apply. Wait about 15 seconds to allow the router to save the changes and then click on Continue.

      XP users click here.

      Note: The Site Survey feature on your wireless adapter will no longer work since the SSID is not being transmitted.
      Model DI-614+ / DWL-900+ / DWl-650+ / DWL-520+ / DWL-650 / DWL-120 / DWL-120a / DWL-120d / DWL-1000AP / DWL-900AP / DWL-650H / DCF-650W
      Question Iīm confused, some of the D-Link devices say they are using 40 bit encryption, others say they are using 128 bit and/or 64 bit. Are these encryption levels compatible with each other?
      Answer 128 bit WEP devices can be used with 40 or 64 bit WEP devices as long as the device driver has a way to set the lower encryption level. The encryption level is determined by the encryption key length. If a device is capable of 128 bit encryption, it is inherently capable of 40 bit, unless the vendor decides for some reason not allow the lower encryption level.

      64 bit WEP is the same as 40 bit WEP!

      The lower level of WEP encryption uses a 40 bit 10 hex character secret key set by the user and a 24 bit Initialization Vector which is not under user control. Some vendors refer to this level of WEP as 40 bit, others as 64 bit. Either way, theyīre the same encryption level and can interoperate.

      The higher level of WEP encryption, commonly referred to as 128 bit WEP, actually uses a 104 bit , 26 hex character, secret key , set by the user and a 24 bit Initialization Vector which is not under user control.

      How do I enable encryption on my D-Link product?
      Model DI-624
      Question How do I change my password on the DI-624 router?
      Answer You may change the password for the admin and user username by going into the web-based configuration of the DI-624.

      Step 1 Open a web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape and enter the IP address of the DI-624 (192.168.0.1).

      Step 2 Enter admin for the username and keep the password blank. Click OK.

      Step 3 Click on the Tools tab and then click on Admin on the left side.



      Step 4 You can change the admin or the user password. The admin login can make changes to the settings where as the User login can only view the settings.

      Step 5 Enter the new password (twice) and click Apply. When the settings are saved, click Continue.

      What if I forgot my password?
      Model DI-624 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S
      Question How do I configure my DI-624/DI-624S router?
      Answer Click on the links below for specific configuration instructions.

      Connect to the Internet: Basic Configuration:

      Wireless Settings: Advanced Features: Troubleshooting:
      Model DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC
      Question How do I enable Super G™ Mode on my DI-624 router?
      Answer Note: Super G™ is only available on revisions B and C of the DI-624. Unfortunately Super G™ is not available for revision A of the DI-624.

      How do I know what revision of the DI-624 I have?

      Note: These instructions apply only to the most recent versions of firmware. If these instructions do not match your DI-624īs interface, please refer to this FAQ.

      Step 1: Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

      Step 2: Enter username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

      Step 3: Click on the Home tab and then click on Wireless on the lefthand side.

      Step 4: Next to Super G Mode, select the mode you would like to use from the dropdown menu.
      • Disabled
      • Super G without Turbo
      • Super G with Dynamic Turbo
      What mode should I use?



      Step 5: Click on Apply and then click on Continue to save your settings.


      What is Super G™ Mode?
      Model DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-784 / DWL-2000AP_revC / DWL-2000AP_revB / DWL-2100AP / DWL-7100AP
      Question Why canīt I change the channel on my wireless router or access point?
      Answer If you cannot change the channel on your router or access point (set to channel 6), this means that Super G is enabled. Super G will always be set to channel 6 but it actually uses most of the channel range between 1 and 11, which allows increased bandwidth. If you do not want to use Super G, then disable it and this will allow you to use a specific channel.

      To disable Super G, follow the steps below:

      Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router or access point (Router - 192.168.0.1, AP - 192.168.0.50).

      Step 2 Enter username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

      Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Performance on the left side.

      Step 4 Next to Super G Mode, select Disabled from the drop-down menu.



      Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.



      Related Links:
    • What is Super G™ and Super A/G™ mode?
    • What D-Link products are compatible with Super G™ and Super AG™?
      • Model DI-624_revC
      Question What is Jumpstart?
      Answer Jumpstart is a tool used to make adding security (privatizing) to your wireless network easier. It simplifies the authentication of clients by using a password instead of Hex keys.

      D-Link currently has not released any wireless client drivers to support this function. Beta drivers are available but not supported via email or phone.

      Please note: This is not the same as the set-up of WEP encryption and as ASCII key. Jumpstart is for ease of set-up.

      What products have drivers that support Jumpstart?
      What is WMM?
      Model DI-624_revC / DWL-G650_revB
      Question What is XR Mode?
      Answer XR (eXtended Range) technology allows a wireless signal to connect at signal rates lower than 1Mbps. In previous wireless; when the wireless signal rate (the speed at which the wireless signal is able to connect between two nodes) was not able to connect at at least 1Mbps the wireless connection would drop. In an XR network the when signal rates dip lower then 1Mbps the connection is maintained.

      XR Mode is available on the following products:

      DWL-G650 Revision B (driver version 2.53 and higher)
      Download the XR drivers for the DWL-G650 revision B here

      DI-624 Revision C (firmware version 2.45 and higher).
      Download the XR firmware here



      Note: When using XR Mode:
    • Super G Mode is not available, the option will be grayed out
    • The SSID Broadcast cannot be disabled
    • XR Mode is recommended for use in residential areas only

      What is Super G Mode?
      • Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-514 / DI-514_revC / DI-524 / DI-524_revC / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-614+ / DI-614+_revB / DI-624 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S
      Question How do I change the channel on my wireless router?
      Answer The following FAQ is for the DI-514, DI-524, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624M, DI-624S, DI-714P+, DI-774, DI-784, and DI-824VUP.

      In the 802.11b/g (2.4Ghz) standard there are 11 channels (US) to choose from, all but three are overlapping channels. Channels 1, 6, and 11 are the only non-overlapping channels. The channels can be changed to avoid interference from other wireless devices that run on the 2.4 Ghz frequency range (I.E. 2.4Ghz cordless phones, bluetooth, and X-10).

      Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the router in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.1. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

      Step 2 Click on the Home tab at the top of the configuration page and then click the Wireless button on the left side.

      Step 3 Select a channel from the drop-down menu. For best results, use channel 1, 6, or 11.



      Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.

      In most cases, you only need to change the channel on the router. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the router, and then will automatically lock onto the channel of the router.



      Related Links:
    • Why canīt I change the channel on my wireless router (only displays ch.6)?
    • How do I change the SSID?
      • Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-514 / DI-514_revC / DI-524 / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-604 / DI-604_revE / DI-614+ / DI-614+_revB / DI-624 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-774 / DI-774_revB / DI-784
      Question How do I change the IP address on my wireless router?
      Answer This FAQ is for the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624S, DI-774, and DI-784.

      Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the wireless router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click on the Home tab then click LAN to the left.



      Step 4 Next to IP Address enter the new IP address. Next to Subnet Mask enter the correct subnet mask for the IP address entered. Enter a Local Domain Name if applicable.

      Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the settings.
      Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-514 / DI-514_revC / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-614+ / DI-614+_revB / DI-624 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-774 / DI-774_revB / DI-784 / DI-524
      Question How do I change the SSID on my D-Link wireless router?
      Answer This FAQ applies to the DI-514, DI-524, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624S, DI-774, and DI-784.

      Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the router in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.1. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

      Step 2 Click on the Home tab at the top of the configuration page and then click the Wireless button on the left side.

      Step 3 Next to SSID, type in a new SSID.

      The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.



      Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.
      Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-514 / DI-524 / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-624S / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-784 / DWL-900AP+ / DWL-1000AP+ / DWL-6000AP / DI-804V / DI-514_revC / DWL-900AP+_revC / DWL-800AP+_revB / TM-G5240
      Question What can I do if I forgot my password?
      Answer The following reset procedure will completely restore the default settings on your D-Link device including your password. This procedure applies to the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624M, DI-624S, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804V, DWL-700AP, DWL-800AP+, DWL-900AP+, DWL-1000AP+, DWL-2000AP, DWL-2100AP, DWL-6000AP, DWL-7000AP, and DWL-7100AP.

      Step 1 Locate the reset pinhole on the back of the unit.

      Step 2 With the unit powered on, press and hold the Reset button.

      Step 3 Hold the Reset button for about 10 seconds.

      Step 4 Release the Reset button.

      Step 5 The unit will reboot. Allow 20-30 seconds before reconnecting.

      Step 6 The device is now at factory defaults.

      Note: Do not recycle power during the reset procedure.

      The default user name for most D-Link devices is admin and the password is left blank.
    • How do I reset my DFL-300?
    • How do I reset my DI-704, DI-704P, DI-713, DI-713P, and DI-714P+?
    • How can I reset my DI-707, DWL-900AP, or DWL-5000AP?
    • How can I reset my DWL-810 or DWL-810+ Wireless Bridge?
      • Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-524 / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-774 / DI-784 / DI-524_revC / DI-714P+
      Question How do I configure UPnP™ on my router?
      Answer This FAQ is for the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624S, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, and DI-808HV.

      Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) allows discovery of UPnP enabled devices in a network environment. UPnP is only available on Windows Me and XP. If you are not using either operating system on any of your computers, or do not want to use UPnP, then it is recommended to disable UPnP on the router.

      Click here for more info on UPnP.

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the wireless router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click the Tools tab then click Misc. to the left.



      Step 4 Under the UPnP Settings section, select Enabled using the radio buttons to enable UPnP on the wireless router, or select Disabled using the radio buttons to disable it.

      Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.

    • Click here to enable UPnP on your computer
    • Click here to start the required services for UPnP
      • Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-524 / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-774 / DI-784 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-774_revB / DI-614+_revB / DI-524_revC
      Question How do I enable WPA-PSK on my wireless router?
      Answer Click here for a list of D-Link products that support WPA (with specific hardware and firmware versions).

      Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click on the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left hand side.

      Step 4 Select WPA-PSK using the radio buttons.

      Step 5 Enter a key (passphrase). The key is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. The password can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless clients.



      Step 6 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.

      Note: If you are configuring your router from a wireless adapter, you will lose connectivity as soon as you click Apply. You must enable WPA-PSK on your adapter and enter the same exact passphrase as you entered on your router.
      Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-604 / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-624S / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-604_revE / DI-614+_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-774_revB
      Question How do I use the Remote Management feature on my router?
      Answer Remote Management allows the device to be configured through the WAN (Wide Area Network) port from the Internet using a web browser.

      Step 1 Log into the web based configuration of the router by typing in the IP address of the router (default:192.168.0.1) in your web browser. The username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).

      Step 2 Click the Tools tab and click the Admin button.

      Step 3 Select the Enabled button to enable Remote Management. In the IP Address field type in the public IP address you wish to manage the router.

      Note: If you donīt know the IP address or wish to allow more than one IP address to manage the router then put an asterisk (*) in the IP Address field. You cannot enter an IP range.

      Step 4 By default the port used to Remote Manage the router is set to 8080. Change the port number by selecting the down arrow next to the Port Number drop down menu.



      Step 5 Click on Apply and then click Continue to save the changes.

      To Remote Manage the router you will need to type in the Public IP Address of the router in your web browser along with the Port Number (separated by a colon) you selected in Step 4.

      Example: 68.53.123.2:8080

      Related Links

      How do I find the Public IP address on my router?
      Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-604 / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-604_revE / DI-614+_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-774_revB / di-524_revC
      Question How do I configure the DMZ Host on my Router?
      Answer The DMZ feature allows you to forward all incoming ports to one computer on the local network. The DMZ, or Demilitarized Zone, will allow the specified computer to be exposed to the Internet. DMZ is useful when a certain application or game does not work through the firewall. The computer that is configured for DMZ will be completely vulnerable on the Internet, so it is suggested that you try opening ports from the Virtual Server or Firewall settings before using DMZ.

      You will need to know the IP address of the computer you want to use as the DMZ host.

      How do I find the IP address of my computer?

      Click on your router below for configuration steps:
    • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624
    • DI-704P (revB), DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-707P, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
    • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP
    • DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
    • DI-711 (revB), DI-714, DI-804
      Related FAQs:
    • What is DMZ?
    • What port or ports do I have to open for my application to work behind my router?
    • How do I open ports on my router?


      For the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-704P (revB), DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-707P, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

      Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

      Step 2 Click the Advanced tab and then click on the DMZ button.

      Step 3 Select Enable and type in the IP address of the computer you want to use as DMZ host.



      Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue to save the changes.



      For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

      Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank). If you have only 1 box, enter admin.

      Step 2 At the bottom, click Advanced and then click Misc Items.

      Step 3 Type in the IP address of the computer you want to use as DMZ host. Click the box to enable DMZ.



      Step 4 Click Save and then Yes when prompted to reboot router.


      For the DI-711 (revB), 714, and 804:
      Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

      Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and password (blank) and click Log in.

      Step 3 Click on Advanced Settings on top and then click Virtual Server Settings on the left side.

      Step 4 Next to Internal IP, enter the last number of the IP address of your computer that you want to use (i.e. 192.168.0.100). Next to Service, click the down arrow and select ALL(DMZ).

      Step 5 Click Submit and then Save and Restart to save settings.

      • Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-624 / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-604_revE / DI-614+_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-614+_revB / DI-784
      Question How do I open a range of ports on my router using Firewall rules?
      Answer You will need to get the IP address from your computer that you want to open ports to.

      How do I find the IP address of my computer?

      Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your D-Link router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

      Help Accessing Web Management

      Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab at the top and then click Firewall on the left side.

      Step 3 Click on Enabled and type in a name for the new rule.

      Step 4 Choose WAN as the Source and enter a range of IP addresses out on the internet that you would like this rule applied to. If you would like this rule to allow all internet users to be able to access these ports, then put an Asterisk in the first box and leave the second box empty.

      Step 5 Select LAN as the Destination and enter the IP address of the computer on your local network that you want to allow the incoming service to. This will not work with a range of IP addresses.

      Step 6 Enter the port or range of ports that are required to be open for the incoming service.

      Step 7 Select Always for the Schedule or specify a range of Day and time that you would like this rule to be active.



      Step 8 Click Apply and then click Continue.

      Because our routers use NAT (Network Address Translation), you can only open a specific port to one computer at a time. For example: If you have 2 web servers on your network, you cannot open port 80 to both computers. You will need to configure 1 of the web servers to use port 81. Now you can open port 80 to the first computer and then open port 81 to the other computer.

    • How do I open a single port?
    • What port or ports do I have to open for my application to work behind my router?
    • What is DMZ?
    • What is Virtual Server?
      • Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-624 / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-604_revE / DI-614+_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-774_revB
      Question How do I reset my router back to the factory default settings?
      Answer The following is for the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624S, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, and DI-784 routers.

      To perform a reset, please follow steps below:

      Step 1 With the unit on, place a paper clip into the hole on the back on the unit labeled Reset.



      Step 2 Hold paper clip down for 10 seconds and release.

      Note: Do not repower unit during this procedure.

      Step 3 The unit will reboot on its own. Once the WLAN light stops blinking, the unit is reset.

      Resetting the router does not reset the firmware to an earlier version. It will change all settings back to factory defaults.

      If you have the European version of this router, this procedure may not work. Please consult the D-Link office near you. D-Link USA does not support the European version.

    • How do I reset my DFL-80 and DI-300?
    • How do I reset my DI-704, DI-704P, DI-707P, DI-711, DI-713, DI-713P, DI-714, and DI-714P+?
    • How can I reset my DI-707?
      • Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-624 / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-604_revE / DI-614+_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-774_revB / DI-514 / DI-514_revC
      Question How can I configure my router to work with a DSL (PPPoE) connection?
      Answer Make sure you disable or uninstall any PPPoE software such as WinPoet, Broadjump, or Enternet 300 from your computer or you will not be able to connect to the Internet. Do not disable until youīve downloaded the firmware in Step 1. Please make sure that your modem is not also a router. If it is or you do not know, please contact your ISP and change the modem to Bridge mode.

      Note: In some areas, BellSouth and Verizon may not use PPPoE. If you receive a dynamic IP address, please click here for setup instructions.

      Step 1 Upgrade to the latest firmware.

      How do I upgrade my firmware?

      Step 2 Take a paperclip and perform a hard reset. With unit on, use a paperclip and hold down the reset button on the back of the unit for 10 seconds. Release it and the router will recycle, the lights will blink, and then stabilize.

      Step 3 After the router stabilizes, open your web browser (Internet Explorer, Netscape, etc), enter 192.168.0.1 into the address window, and hit the Enter key. When the password dialog box appears, enter the username admin and leave the password blank. Click OK.

      If the password dialog box does not come up repeat Step 2.

      Note: Do not run Wizard.

      Step 4 Click on the WAN tab on left-hand side of the screen. Select PPPoE.

      Step 5 Select Dynamic PPPoE (unless your ISP supplied you with a static IP address).

      Step 6 For Earthlink users, under the username field enter ELN/username@earthlink.net and your password, where username is your own username (some Earthlink users may not need the ELN/ in front of username).

      For SBC Global users, enter username@sbcglobal.net.
      For Ameritech users, enter username@ameritech.net.
      For BellSouth users, enter username@bellsouth.net.**
      For most other ISPs, enter username.

      **Note: In some areas, BellSouth may not use PPPoE. If you receive a dynamic IP address, please read here for setup instructions.

      Ameritech users: If you cannot connect, try entering just the username (without the @ameritech.com) and then put ameritech.net in the Service Name box.

      Step 7 Maximum Idle Time should be set to zero. Set MTU to 1492, unless specified by your ISP, and set Autoreconnect to Enabled.

      Note: If you experience problems accessing certain websites and/or email issues, please set the MTU to a lower number such as 1472, 1452, etc. Contact your ISP for more information and the proper MTU setting for your connection.

      Step 8 Click Apply. When prompted, click Continue. Once the screen refreshes, unplug the power to the D-Link router.

      Step 9 Turn off your DSL modem for 2-3 minutes. Turn back on. Once the modem has established a link to your ISP, plug the power back into the D-Link router. Wait about 30 seconds and log back into the router.

      Step 10 Click on the Status tab in the web configuration where you can view the device info. Under WAN, click Connect. Click Continue when prompted. You should now see that the device info will show an IP address, verifying that the device has connected to a server and has been assigned an IP address.

      Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-624 / DI-624S / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI-774 / DI-604_revE / DI-614+revB / DI-624_revC / DI-774_revB / DI-704P_revb / DI-707P / DI-714P+ / VDI-604 / VDI-624
      Question Will scheduled Firewall, Virtual Server, or IP Filters, used for denying access to the Internet, stop active connections?
      Answer Unfortunately not. Active connections must be stopped before the rules take effect.

      For Example: If you have an active FTP download when the schedule takes effect, the session will not be terminated until the download is complete. Once the schedule is effective and the FTP download has completed, you will not be allowed to initiate another FTP connection until the scheduling permits.
      Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-604 / DI-614+ / DI-754 / DI-764 / DI514 / DI-524 / DI-514_revC / DI-604_revE / DI-614+_revB / DI-774 / DI-774_revB / DI-624 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / VDI-604 / VDI-624
      Question How do I use the Special Applications feature on my router?
      Answer Some applications require multiple connections, such as Internet gaming, video conferencing, Internet telephony, VPNs, and others. These applications have difficulties working through NAT (Network Address Translation). If you need to run applications that require multiple connections, specify the port normally associated with an application in the Trigger Port field, select the protocol type as TCP (Transmission Control Protocol, UDP (User Datagram Protocol), or both, then enter the public ports associated with the trigger port to open them for inbound traffic.

      The Trigger port is an outgoing port (from LAN to WAN) that the application will send out.

      Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1).

      Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and password, if any.

      Step 3 Click on Advanced tab on the top and then Applications on the left side.



      Name - This is the name referencing the special application.

      Trigger Port - This is the port used to trigger the application. It can be either a single port or a range of ports.

      Trigger Type - This is the protocol used to trigger the special application.

      Public Port - This is the port number on the WAN side that will be used to access the application. You may define a single port or a range of ports. You can use a comma to add multiple ports or port ranges.

      Public Type - This is the protocol used for the special application.

      At the bottom of the screen, there are already defined well-known special applications. To use them, click on the edit icon and enable the service.

      Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-604_revE / DI-614+_revB / DI-514 / DI-514_revC / DI-524 / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-774 / DI-774_revC / DI-784 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S
      Question How do I configure Static DHCP on my router?
      Answer NOTE: When creating a Static DHCP entry, the IP address that you choose to have assigned needs to be in the range of the DHCP scope. Entries created with IP addresses outside of this range will not take effect.

      Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your D-Link router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

      Step 2 Click on the Home tab and then click DHCP on the left column.

      Step 3 Under the Static DHCP section next to DHCP Client, select one of the DHCP clients from the list and click Clone.

      Step 4 Select Enabled and enter the IP address you would like this client to always obtain.

      Step 5 Verify that the Name and MAC Address fields have the correct Hostname and MAC address for the client and click Apply.   If the Hostname or MAC address is not correct, Release and Renew the IP address on the client and then refresh the DHCP page.

    • How do I release and renew the IP address on my Win 95, 98, or Me computer?
    • How do I release and renew the IP address on my Win NT, 2000, or XP computer?
      • Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-614+ / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-624 / DI-614+_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-774 / DI-774_revB / DI-514 / DI-514_revC / DI-784
      Question How do I enable WEP Encryption on my wireless router?
      Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless router before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

      Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

      Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the router by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

      Click here if you cannot access the web-based configuration.

      Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default). Click OK . Click the Home tab and click the Wireless button on the left hand side of the screen.



      Step 3 Select Enable next to the WEP radio buttons. For WEP encryption select 64, 128, or 256-bit encryption. For the Key type select HEX. If you have an option for Authentication type, select Shared Key.

      Step 4 Select Key 1. Enter a Hex encryption key that you make up. The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption.

    • 64-bit encryption 10 characters
    • 128-bit encryption 26 characters
    • 256-bit encryption 58 characters (available on DI-614+ only)

      The encryption key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters. For example, A4583DFF1A (64-bit HEX key).

      Step 5 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.

      Note: If using non-D-Link adapters, please refer to the manufacturerīs documentation on enabling encryption.

      How do I enable encryption on my D-Link adapters?
      • Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-614+ / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-774 / DI-784
      Question How do I enable WPA (Radius) on my wireless router?
      Answer This FAQ is for the DI-614+ (RevB), DI-624, DI-774, and DI-784.

      It is recommended to configure WPA on your wireless router before your wireless network adapters.

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the wireless router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click Wireless to the left.



      Step 4 Next to WEP select WPA using the radio buttons.

      Step 5 Under 802.1X enter the IP Address, Port and Shared Secret for RADIUS Server 1. Repeat for RADIUS Server 2 if applicable.

      Step 6 Click Apply and then Continue to save the new settings.
      Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DWL-G520 / DWL-G650_revB / DWL-G520_revB / DWL-2000AP_revB / DWL-G650_revC
      Question What is Super G™ and Super A/G™ mode?
      Answer Super G™ and Super A/G™ is a group of performance enhancement features that increase the end user application throughput in an 802.11b/g and 802.11a/g network. These features include:
      • Dynamic Packet Bursting
      • Fast Frames
      • Hardware Compression and Encryption
      • Multi-channel 108 Mbps Turbo Mode.
      These four capabilities operate independently to enhance the throughput of a network in different ways.

      Actual performance will vary according to the network environment, but the actual delivered performance should be significantly better than designs that implement any single performance feature, such as bursting-only. Super G™ and Super A/G™ are supported in chipsets that are fully interoperable with other 802.11a, b, or g products. The features operate transparently to the user, the network, and the operating system, providing increased network and device performance on demand. A wireless node can communicate on a link-by-link basis with both products that support and that do not support these features.

      Packet Bursting

      Packet bursting is a transmission technique supported by the draft 802.11e QoS specification. The advantage of packet bursting is that it can increase throughput when communicating with 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g standards-compliant devices. Packet bursting increases the throughput of any 802.11a, 802.11b, or 802.11g link by reducing the overhead associated with the wireless transmission. In a standard transmission, transmissions are separated by a Distributed Interframe Space (DIFS) time period, after which all products must contend for the wireless medium. After a successful data transmission, this process repeats. In a burst transmission, the interframe spacing is reduced and a new data frame is sent immediately. The overhead of contending for the medium and the interframe space is reduced.

      Fast Frames

      Fast frames, also referred to as dynamic transmit optimizations, enhance data throughput by increasing the number of bits sent per data frame and accelerating the timing of the data frame. Packet bursting enables more packets to be sent in a given amount of time by changing the transmission and contention algorithms. Fast frames operate by changing the algorithms that determine how the actual data frame is structured. The fast frames effect is additive to the packet bursting effect. Note that most others’ bursting implementations do not provide for fast frames. The fast frames technique is also based on the 802.11e draft standard and is permitted by the PLCP header compliance that is now required by all Wi-Fi testing. One component of fast frames is aggregating multiple packets within an 802.11 frame instead of sending only a single 1500 byte Ethernet packet within each 802.11 frame. This technique doubles the number of bits sent during each frame. Because fast frames function within existing timing parameters and do not interfere with frame spacing, timing, or contention window parameters, this technique scales better for more networks than bursting alone.

      Data Compression and Encryption

      Full hardware data compression and encryption engines are embedded in Super G/AG hardware. The hardware data compression engine implements the royalty-free Lempel Ziv algorithm that is used in popular programs such as Pkzip, Winzip, and the Windows OS. This engine compresses prior to transmission and decompresses it after reception. The obvious effect is to increase the data throughput of the compressed link. The less obvious one is that, because a compressed link requires less airtime to transmit its packet, the effective throughput of other links in the network is increased because they now have more airtime.

      Turbo Mode

      The multi-channel 108Mbps Turbo Mode capability operates by using the spectrum offered by two radio channels to overcome the RF physics limitations of Shannon’s Limit, which dictates the number of bits that may be transmitted per MHz of spectrum. The data rate doubling is the most obvious effect of using multiple radio channels. By providing an optional capability that uses multiple radio channels simultaneously, Super G Turbo mode can double the data rates offered by any single radio channel techniques. The multi-channel mode give multi-channel devices high bandwidth on demand, but also to check for and fall back to single-channel operation if necessary because of the presence of legacy devices.

      When Turbo mode is set to enabled, Channel 6 is used and cannot be changed to any other channels.

      Note: Ad hoc is not currently supported in multi-channel mode.

        Dynamic Turbo

      • Backwards compatible with non-Turbo (legacy) devices
      • Turbo mode only enabled when all nodes on the wireless network is Super G with Turbo enabled
      • Occasionally drops down from Turbo mode to 11g mode to allow association of legacy devices.
      • Any wireless device on network not Turbo capable causes entire network not to be Turbo capable.

        Static Turbo

      • Not backwards compatible with non-Turbo (legacy) devices
      • Turbo mode is always on
      • Only Turbo mode devices can talk to each other, meaning all devices must be set to Turbo.


      Related Links:
    • How do I enable Super G™ mode on my DI-624/DI-624S router?
    • What D-Link products are compatible with Super G™ and Super AG™?
    • Why canīt I change the channel (only channel 6)?
      • Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / General Router / DI-604_revE / DI-614 _revB / DI-774_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-514_revC / DI-707P / DI-707P_revC / DI-524 / DI-524_revC / DI-624S
      Question Can I use my D-Link Broadband Router to share my Internet connection provided by AOL DSL Plus?
      Answer AOL DSL+ now uses PPPoE for authentication bypassing the client software.

      To set up your router:

      Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration of your router by opening a web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for username and then your password (blank by default). Configure the WAN side to use PPPoE. Please consult your manual for login instructions since all routers are not the same.

      Step 2 Enter your screen name followed by @aol.com for the user name. Enter your AOL password in the password box.

      Step 3 You will have to set the MTU to 1400. AOL DSL does not allow for anything higher than 1400.

      Step 4 Apply settings.

      Step 5 Unplug (turn off) the power to the modem and router. Wait 1 minute and then power on only the modem. Wait about 1 minute and then power on the router.

      NOTE: If you connect to the Internet with a different Internet service provider and want to use the AOL software, you can do that without configuring the router’s firewall settings. You need to configure the AOL software to connect using TCP/IP (LAN). Contact AOL for more specific configuration information of their software.
      Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / General Router / DI-784 / DI-514 / DI-524 / DI-514_revC / DWL-900AP _revB / DWL-900AP _revC / DI-624_revC / DI-624_revB / DWL-G800AP / DWL-G810 / DI-624S / DI-524_revC
      Question Why canīt I access the web-based configuration for my D-Link router, print server, or access point?
      Answer Note: Not all D-Link routers, print servers and access points have a web-based configuration utility. Please check the manual for your particular product. In particular, the DWL-900AP does not have a web utility while the DWL-900AP+ does have a web utility. You cannot gain web-based configuration utility functionality for the DWL-900AP by installing the DWL900AP+ utility.

      When entering the IP address of the D-Link device (192.168.0.1 for example), you are not connecting to a website on the Internet or have to be connected to the Internet. The device has the utility built-in to a ROM chip in the device itself. Your computer must be on the same IP subnet to connect to the web-based utility.

      Make sure you have Java enabled and are using an updated web browser. We recommend the following:
    • Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher
    • Netscape 6 or higher
    • Mozilla 1.2.1 (5.0) or higher
    • Opera 6.0 or higher
    • Safari 1.0 or higher (with Java 1.3.1 or higher)
    • Camino 0.7 or higher
    • Firefox 0.8 or higher

      Internet Explorer 6 (SP1) users:
      If you continue to receive Error 500 when trying to connect to the web-based configuration of your D-Link device, make sure you have the latest Windows update for Explorer 6.

      Click here for more information

      If you have Windows XP or Server 2003, you must download the latest Java patch from www.java.com.
      Click here to download patch.

      To resolve difficulties accessing a D-Link model that has a web utility, please follow the steps below.

      Step 1 Verify physical connectivity by checking for solid link lights on the device. If you do not get a solid link light, try using a different cable or connect to a different port on the device if possible. If the computer is turned off, the link light may not be on.

      What type of cable should I be using?

      Step 2 Disable any internet security software running on the computer. Software firewalls such as Zone Alarm, Black Ice, Sygate, Norton Personal Firewall, and Windows XP firewall may block access to the configuration pages. Check the help files included with your firewall software for more information on disabling or configuring it.

      Step 3 Configure your Internet settings. Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel. Double-click the Internet Options Icon. From the Security tab, click the button to restore the settings to their defaults.



      Click the Connection tab and set the dial-up option to Never Dial a Connection. Click the LAN Settings button.



      Nothing should be checked. Click OK.



      Go to the Advanced tab and click the button to restore these settings to their defaults.



      Click OK out to the desktop and close any open windows.

      Step 4 Check your IP address. Your computer must have an IP address in the same range of the device you are attempting to configure. Most D-Link devices use the 192.168.0.X range.

      Click here to find your IP Address on your computer

      If you are attempting to configure a D-Link router, then make sure you take note of your computerīs Default Gateway IP address. The Default Gateway is the IP address of the D-Link router. By default, it should be 192.168.0.1.

      If you are attempting to configure an Access Point or Print Server, you may need to configure your computer with a Static IP Address in the appropriate range.

      Click here to set a static IP address on your computer

      Step 5 Access the web management. Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your D-Link device in the address bar. This should open the login page for your the web management. Use the instructions provided with your product to login and complete the configuration. There are several more FAQs that cover the configuration of the different D-Link routers, Access Points and Print Servers.
      • Model DI-624_revE / DI-624_revD / DI-724GU / DI-724U / General Wireless / DI-614 / DI-614 _revB / DI-514 / DI-514_revC / DI-524 / DI-524_revC / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-624M / DI-624S / DI-784 / DWL-G650 DWL-G520 DWL-G630 / DWL-G510 / VDI-604 / VDI-624/ WUA-2340 / DWL-AG132 / DWL-AG530 / DWL-AG660 / DWL-G120 / DWL-G122 / DWL-G132 / DWL-G510 / DWL-G520 / DWL-G520M / DWL-G550 / DWL-G630 / DWL-G650 / DWL-G650M / DWL-G680 / WDA-1320 / WDA-2320 / WNA-1330 / WNA-2330 / WUA-1340 / WUA-2340
      Question What variables may cause my wireless product not to receive signals at the maximum advertised distance?
      Answer D-Link Air lets you access your network from anywhere you want. However, keep in mind, that range is limited by the number of walls, ceilings, or other objects that the wireless signals must pass through. Typical ranges vary depending on the types of materials and background RF noise in your home or business. The key to maximizing range is to follow these basic principles:

      1. Keep the number of walls and ceilings to a minimum - Each wall or ceiling can rob your D-Link Air Wireless product of 3-90 ft. of range. Position your Access Points, Residential Gateways, and computers so that the number of walls or ceilings is minimized.

      2. Be aware of the direct line between Access Points, Residential Gateways, and Computers - A wall that is 1.5 feet thick, at a 45 degree angle, appears to be almost 3 feet thick. At a 2-degree angle it looks over 42 feet thick! Try to make sure that the Access Point and Adapters are positioned so that the signal will travel straight through a wall or ceiling for better reception.

      3. Building Materials make a difference - A solid metal door or aluminum studs may have a negative effect on range. Try to position Access Points, Residential Gateways, and Computers so that the signal passes through drywall or open doorways and not other materials.

      4. Make sure that the antenna is positioned for best reception by using the software signal strength tools included with your product.

      5. Keep your product away (at least 3-6 feet) from electrical devices that generate RF noise, like microwaves, Monitors, electric motors, UPS units, etc.

      6. If you are using 2.4GHz cordless phones or X-10 (wireless products such as ceiling fans, lights, and home security systems), your wireless connection will degrade dramatically or drop completely. Anything using the 2.4Ghz frequency will interfere with your wireless network.

      For the average home, range should not be a problem. If you experience low or no signal strength in areas of your home that you wish to access, consider positioning the Access Point in a location directly between the Residential Gateways.

      What external antennas are available?
      Model DI-624M
      Question How do I configure the wireless settings on my DI-624M?
      Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click the Home tab at the top and then click Wireless on the left side.



      Step 4 Configure the following:
      • Wireless Radio - Select On to enable the wireless interface or Off to disable it
      • SSID - Enter the SSID.

        The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.

      • Channel - Select the wireless channel
      • Super G Mode - Select Disabled to disable Super G or select one of the three Super G modes.

        What are the 3 modes available when enabling Super G™ and Super A/G™?

      • SSID Broadcast - Select Enabled to enable SSID broadcast or Disabled to disable it.

        In a home network, the SSID broadcast feature serves no useful purpose. You should disable this feature to improve the security of your wireless network. You will need to manually configure your wireless clients with the same SSID as your access point or wireless router.

      • Authentication - Select Open System (communicate across the network with all clients) or WPA-PSK (Wi-Fi Protected Access without a RADIUS server).

        Open System

      • WEP - Select Enabled to enable WEP encryption or Disabled to disable it.
      • WEP Encryption - Select 64Bit or 128Bit using the drop-down list.
        • 64-bit encryption 10 characters
        • 128-bit encryption 26 characters
      • Key Type - Select Hexadecimal or ASCII using the drop-down list if the wireless network requires encryption.
        • Hexadecimal digits consist of the numbers 0-9 and the letters A-F. Best used if using with other brands of wireless products.
        • ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) is code that represents English letters as numbers from 0-127. You can use any character including (!@#$%*).
      • Keys 1-4 - Select the key number using the radio buttons.

        WPA-PSK



      • Passphrase - Enter the passphrase
      • Confirmed Passphrase - Confirm the passphrase
      The passphrase is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. The password can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless clients.

      Step 5 Click Apply to save the settings.
      Model DI-624M
      Question How do I configure the WAN settings on my DI-624M?
      Answer Select your WAN connection:

    • Dynamic IP Address
    • Static IP Address
    • PPPoE (Dynamic) | PPPoE (Static)
    • PPTP
    • L2TP


      Dynamic IP Address

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click the Home tab at the top and then click WAN on the left side.



      Step 4 Select Dynamic IP Address.

      Step 5 If your ISP requires a host name enter it next to Host Name. If you want to use another MAC address other than the MAC address of the WAN port enter it next to MAC Address and select Use MAC.

      Step 6 Click Apply to save the new settings.


      Static IP Address

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click the Home tab at the top and then click WAN on the left side.



      Step 4 Select Static IP Address.

      Step 5 Enter the IP address, subnet mask, ISP gateway address, and primary DNS and secondary (optional) DNS server addresses.

      Step 6 Click Apply to save the new settings.


      PPPoE (Dynamic)

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click the Home tab at the top and then click WAN on the left side.



      Step 4 Select PPPoE.

      Step 5 Select Dynamic PPPoE and configure the following:
      • User Name - Enter your username
      • Password - Enter your password
      • Retype Password - Confirm your password
      • Service Name - Enter a service name if required by your ISP (optional)
      • Maximum Idle Time - Enter the amount of time (in minutes) in which the DI-624M will disconnect your Internet connection after inactivity
      • MTU - Enter the MTU. This is usually 1492.
      • Dial on Demand - Select Enabled to connect to the Internet automatically
      • Auto-reconnect - Select Enabled to automatically reconnect to the Internet after the DI-624M reboots or the Internet connection is disconnected
      Step 6 Click Apply to save the new settings.


      PPPoE (Static)

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click the Home tab at the top and then click WAN on the left side.



      Step 4 Select PPPoE.

      Step 5 Select Static PPPoE and configure the following:
      • User Name - Enter your username
      • Password - Enter your password
      • Retype Password - Confirm your password
      • Service Name - Enter a service name if required by your ISP (optional)
      • IP Address - Enter the IP address
      • Network Mask - Enter the subnet mask
      • Maximum Idle Time - Enter the amount of time (in minutes) in which the DI-624M will disconnect your Internet connection after inactivity
      • MTU - Enter the MTU. This is usually 1492.
      • Dial on Demand - Select Enabled to connect to the Internet automatically
      • Auto-reconnect - Select Enabled to automatically reconnect to the Internet after the DI-624M reboots or the Internet connection is disconnected
      Step 6 Click Apply to save the new settings.


      PPTP

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click the Home tab at the top and then click WAN on the left side.



      Step 4 Select PPTP and configure the following:
      • IP Address - Enter the IP address
      • Network Mask - Enter the subnet mask
      • Server IP - Enter the server IP address
      • Account - Enter the account
      • Password - Enter your password
      • Retype Password - Confirm your password
      • Maximum Idle Time - Enter the amount of time (in minutes) in which the DI-624M will disconnect your Internet connection after inactivity
      • MTU - Enter the MTU. This is usually 1452.
      • Dial on Demand - Select Enabled to connect to the Internet automatically
      • Auto-reconnect - Select Enabled to automatically reconnect to the Internet after the DI-624M reboots or the Internet connection is disconnected
      Step 5 Click Apply to save the new settings.


      L2TP

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click the Home tab at the top and then click WAN on the left side.



      Step 4 Select L2TP and configure the following:
      • IP Address - Enter the IP address
      • Network Mask - Enter the subnet mask
      • Server IP - Enter the server IP address
      • L2TP Account - Enter the account
      • L2TP Password - Enter your password
      • L2TP Retype Password - Confirm your password
      • Maximum Idle Time - Enter the amount of time (in minutes) in which the DI-624M will disconnect your Internet connection after inactivity
      • MTU - Enter the MTU. This is usually 1452.
      • Dial on Demand - Select Enabled to connect to the Internet automatically
      • Auto-reconnect - Select Enabled to automatically reconnect to the Internet after the DI-624M reboots or the Internet connection is disconnected
      Step 5 Click Apply to save the new settings.
      • Model DI-624M
      Question How do I configure the LAN settings on my DI-624M?
      Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click the Home tab at the top and then click LAN on the left side.



      Step 4 Enter the LAN IP address of the DI-624M next to IP Address and the subnet mask next to Subnet Mask.

      Step 5 Select Enabled below DNS Relay to enable it or Disabled to disable it.

      When DNS relay is enabled, the router assigns the clients itīs IP address as their DNS server. The router accepts all of the DNS requests and then relays them to the real DNS servers on the Internet.

      When this option is disabled, the DNS servers assigned by the ISP are assigned to the clients and then any DNS requests are sent directly to the servers.

      Step 6 Click Apply to save the settings.
      Model DI-624M
      Question What do the LED indicators mean on the DI-624M?
      Answer LED stands for Light-Emitting Diode. The DI-624M has the following LEDs for monitoring its operation:

      LEDs Location Activity
      Power Far left A solid green light indicates a proper connection to the power supply.
      Status Right of Power LED A blinking orange light indicates that the DI-624M is ready.
      WAN Right of Status LED A solid green light indicates connection on the WAN port. This LED blinks during data transmission.
      WLAN Right of WAN LED A solid orange light indicates that the wireless interface is ready. This LED blinks during wireless data transmission.
      Local Network Right of WLAN LED A solid green light indicates a connection to an Ethernet enabled computer on ports 1-4. This LED blinks during data transmission.
      Model DI-624M
      Question How do I configure DDNS on my DI-624M?
      Answer Dynamic DNS (Domain Name Service) is a method of keeping a domain name linked to a changing (dynamic) IP address. With most Cable and DSL connections, you are assigned a dynamic IP address and that address is used only for the duration of that specific connection. To properly configure the DDNS feature follow the steps below:

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click the Tools tab at the top and then click DDNS on the left side.



      Step 4 Next to DDNS select enabled and configure the following:
      • Server Address - Select your DDNS service provider.

      • Host Name - Enter the domain name that you registered with your DDNS service provider (IE mydomain.dyndns.org)
      • User Name - Enter the username for your DDNS account
      • Password - Enter the password for your DDNS account
      Step 5 Click Apply and then Continue to save the changes.
      Model DI-624M
      Question How do I configure the time on my DI-624M?
      Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click the Tools tab at the top and then click Time on the left side.



      Step 4 Select Automatic to automatically sync the time with an NTP server, and enter the NTP server next to Customized NTP.

      Select Manual to set the time manually. Click Computer Clock to sync the time with your computer.

      Step 5 Select your time zone using the drop-down list next to Time Zone.

      Step 6 Click Apply to save the settings.
      Model DI-624M
      Question How do I configure URL Blocking on my DI-624M?
      Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.



      Step 3 Click the Advanced tab at the top and then click Parental Control on the left side.

      Step 4 Select Enabled below URL Blocking and configure the following:
      • URL String - Enter a domain name (such as microsoft.com)
      • Start IP - Enter the first IP address to apply URL Blocking to
      • End IP - Enter the last IP address to apply URL Blocking to
      Step 5 Click Apply to save the new settings.
      Model DI-624M
      Question How do I configure MAC filters on my DI-624M?
      Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click the Advanced tab at the top and then Filters on the left side.



      Step 4 Select the radio button for the mode that you would like to use.
      • Disabled - Disables this feature and will allow all clients to connect.
      • Allow - Blocks all clients except for what you enter in the list.
      • Deny - Allows all clients except for what you enter in the list.
      Step 5 Enter a name to identify this MAC filter next to Name.

      Step 6 Enter the MAC address of the computer or select it using the drop-down list next to DHCP Client and click Clone.

      Step 7 Click Apply to save the settings.
      Model DI-624M
      Question How do I configure the Remote Management feature on my DI-624M?
      Answer Remote Management allows the device to be configured through the WAN (Wide Area Network) port from the Internet using a web browser.

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click Tools at the top and then click Admin on the left side.



      Step 4 In the Remote Management section select Enabled and configure the following:
      • IP Address - Enter the IP address or * to allow any IP address to manage the DI-624M remotely
      • Subnet Mask - Enter the subnet mask or * to allow any subnet mask
      • Port - Select the port number that the DI-624M will be used to access the DI-624M remotely
      Step 5 Click Apply to save the new settings.

      To Remote Manage the router you will need to type in the Public IP Address of the router in your web browser along with the Port Number (separated by a colon) you selected in Step 4.

      Example: 68.53.123.2:8080

    • What is my WAN IP address?
      • Model DI-624M
      Question How do I disable SSID broadcast on my DI-624M?
      Answer In a home network, the SSID broadcast feature serves no useful purpose. You should disable this feature to improve the security of your wireless network. You will need to manually configure your wireless clients with the same SSID as your access point or wireless router.

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click the Home tab at the top and then click Wireless on the left side.



      Step 4 Select Disabled next to SSID Broadcast.

      Step 5 Click Apply to save the new settings.

      Note: The Site Survey feature on your wireless adapter will no longer work since the SSID is not being transmitted.

    • Why canīt I connect my Windows XP machine to my wireless router or access point after I disabled the SSID Broadcast?
      • Model DI-624M
      Question How do I change the SSID on my DI-624M?
      Answer The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click the Home tab at the top and then click Wireless on the left side.



      Step 4 Enter the new SSID next to SSID.

      Step 5 Click Apply to save the new settings.

    • How do I disable SSID broadcast on my DI-624M?
      • Model DI-624M
      Question How do I enable DMZ on my DI-624M?
      Answer DMZ will open all ports to a computer on the LAN.

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click Advanced at the top and then click DMZ on the left side.



      Step 4 Select enabled and enter the last octet of the IP address of the computer on the LAN that you are assigning DMZ to.

      Step 5 Click Apply to save the DMZ settings.
      Model DI-624M
      Question How do I change the admin/user password on my DI-624M?
      Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click Tools at the top and then click Admin on the left side.



      Step 4 To change the admin password enter the new password next to New Password and confirm it next to Confirm Password in the Administrator section.

      To change the user password enter the new password next to New Password and confirm it next to Confirm Password in the User section.

      Step 5 Click Apply to save the new password.

      NOTE: You may be prompted to login to the web-based configuration after saving the new administrative password. Enter the new administrative password to login.
      Model DI-624M
      Question How do I view the log on my DI-624M?
      Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click the Status tab at the top and then click Log on the left side.

      • First Page - View the first page of the log
      • Last Page - View the last page of the log
      • Previous - View the previous page of the log
      • Next - View the next page of the log
      • Clear - Clear (delete) the entire log
      • Log Settings - Configure advanced settings
      Note: If other logs are enabled you will be able to view them using the radio buttons.


      Log Settings


      Step 1 Select the logs that you want to record activity for.



      Step 2 Click Apply to save the settings.
      Model DI-624M
      Question How do I create a Virtual Server entry for the DI-624M?
      Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-624M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click on Advanced on the top and then Virtual Server on the left.



      Step 4 Click on the trash can to delete one of the built-in Virtual Server entries.



      Step 5 Click on the Enabled radio button and give the Virtual Server a name. Specify the Private IP address, Protocol Type, Public Port, Private Port, and Schedule. Apply the settings.
      Model DI-624M
      Question How do I configure my DI-624M?
      Answer Click on the links below for specific configuration instructions.

      Connect to the Internet: Basic Configuration: Security: Wireless Settings: Advanced Features: Troubleshooting:
      Model DI-624S
      Question How can I access the shared folders on my USB drive, connected to my DI-624S router.
      Answer This FAQ is for the DI-624S.

      Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the wireless router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.



      Step 2 The default username is admin and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Select Advanced and Folder.



      Step 4 If you have your USB drive in USB port 1, then you can Share Whole Disk, individually share files or create a new file to share. To share a folder you check the box share



      Step 5 You can access the shared folder on your USB device on your DI-624S router by using the internet explorer, and in the address bar, by entering \\DI-624S or the ip address of the router,
      eg. default \\192.168.0.1

      Model DI-624S
      Question How do I enable Super G™ Mode on my DI-624S router?
      Answer Step 1: Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

      Step 2: Enter username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

      Step 3: Click on the Advanced tab and then click on Performance on the lefthand side.

      Step 4: Next to Super G Mode, select the mode you would like to use from the dropdown menu.
      • Disabled
      • Super G without Turbo
      • Super G with Dynamic Turbo
      • Super G with Static Turbo
      What mode should I use?



      Step 5: Click on Apply and then click on Continue to save your settings.


      What is Super G™ Mode?
      Model DI-624S / DNS-120 / DNS-G120
      Question What formats can I write when using the DI-624S/DNS-120/DNS-G120?
      Answer NTFS formats can be read only and can not written to. The DI-624S/DNS-120/DNS-G120 can use the FAT32 format, which has the ability to read and write. These products were written under Linux GPL. Microsoft holds the rights for NTFS (New Technology File System). NTFS is a proprietary format.
      Model DI-634M
      Question How do I enable StreamEngine on my DI-634M?
      Answer Note: StreamEngine improves your online experience by ensuring that important traffic is prioritized over other network traffic, such as FTP or http Web traffic.

      Step 1: Log into the web configuration of the router by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

      Click here if you cannot access the web-based configuration.

      Step 2: Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default). Click OK.

      Step 3: Click on Advanced above. Click on StreamEngine on the lefthand side.



      Step 4: Click on Enable. Ensure Dynamic Fragmentation and Automatic Uplink Speed are checked. The Connection Type from the drop down selection should be set to Auto-Detect.

      Step 5: Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
      Model DI-634M
      Question How do I configure the time on my DI-634M?
      Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-634M into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click on the Tools tab at the top and then click on Time on the left side.



      Step 4 Select Automatic to automatically sync the time with an NTP server, and enter the NTP server next to Customized NTP.

      Note: NTP servers can be designated by either IP address or domain name, but most NTP server operators suggest you utilize the domain name as server addresses are subject to change.

      Select Manual to set the time manually. Click on Computer Clock to sync the time with your computer.

      Step 5 Select your time zone using the drop-down list next to Time Zone.

      Step 6 Click on Apply to save your settings.
      Model DI-634M
      Question How do I disable SSID broadcast on my DI-634M?
      Answer In a home network, the SSID broadcast feature is useful for identifying your network for ease of connectivity, but it can also leave you open to network intrusion. You should disable this feature to improve the security of your wireless network. You will need to manually configure your wireless clients with the same SSID as your access point or wireless router once SSID broadcast is disabled.

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-634M into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click on the Home tab at the top and then click on Wireless on the left side.



      Step 4 Select Disabled next to SSID Broadcast.

      Step 5 Click on Apply to save your settings.

      Note: The Site Survey feature on your wireless adapter will no longer work since the SSID is not being transmitted.

    • Why canīt I connect my Windows XP machine to my wireless router or access point after I disabled the SSID Broadcast?
      • Model DI-634M
      Question How do I configure the Remote Management feature on my DI-634M?
      Answer Remote Management allows the device to be configured through the WAN (Wide Area Network) port from the Internet using a web browser.

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-634M into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click on Tools at the top and then click on Admin on the left side.



      Step 4 In the Remote Management subsection, select Enabled.

      Step 5 Select the port desired and Admin Firewall Rule from the drop down selections.

      Step 6 Click on Apply to save your settings.

      To Remote Manage the router you will need to type in the Public IP Address of the router in your web browser along with the Port Number (separated by a colon) you selected in Step 4.

      Example: 68.53.123.2:8080

    • What is my WAN IP address?
      • Model DI-634M
      Question How do I change the admin/user password on my DI-634M?
      Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-634M into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

      Step 2 The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

      Step 3 Click on Tools at the top and then click on Admin on the left side.



      Step 4 To change the admin password enter the new password next to New Password and confirm it next to Confirm Password in the Administrator section.

      To change the user password enter the new password next to New Password and confirm it next to Confirm Password in the User section.

      Step 5 Click Apply to save your new password.

      NOTE: You may be prompted to login to the web-based configuration after saving the new administrative password. Enter the new administrative password to login.
      Model DI-634M
      Question How do I configure MAC filters on my DI-634M?
      Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-634M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

      Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab at the top and then on Filters to the left side.



      Step 4 Select the radio button for the mode that you would like to use.
      • Disabled - Disables this feature and will allow all clients to connect.
      • Allow - Blocks all clients except for what you enter in the list.
      • Deny - Allows all clients except for what you enter in the list.
      Step 5 Enter a name to identify this MAC filter next to Name.

      Step 6 Enter the MAC address of the computer or select it using the drop-down list next to DHCP Client and click on Clone.

      Step 7 Click on Apply to save the settings.
      Model DI-634M
      Question What do the LED indicators mean on the DI-634M?
      Answer LED stands for Light-Emitting Diode. The DI-634M has the following LEDs for monitoring its operation:

      LEDs Location Activity
      Power Far left A solid green light indicates a proper connection to the power supply.
      Status Right of Power LED A blinking orange light indicates that the DI-624M is ready.
      WAN Right of Status LED A solid green light indicates connection on the WAN port. This LED blinks during data transmission.
      WLAN Right of WAN LED A solid orange light indicates that the wireless interface is ready. This LED blinks during wireless data transmission.
      Local Network Right of WLAN LED A solid green light indicates a connection to an Ethernet enabled computer on ports 1-4. This LED blinks during data transmission.
      Model DI-634M
      Question How do I configure the LAN settings on my DI-634M?
      Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-634M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

      Step 3 Click on the Home tab at the top and then click on LAN on the left side.



      Step 4 Enter the LAN IP address of the DI-634M next to IP Address and the subnet mask next to Subnet Mask.

      Step 5 Select Enabled below DNS Relay to enable it or Disabled to disable it.

      When DNS relay is enabled, the router assigns the clients itīs IP address as their DNS server. The router accepts all of the DNS requests and then relays them to the real DNS servers on the Internet.

      When this option is disabled, the DNS servers assigned by the ISP are assigned to the clients and then any DNS requests are sent directly to the servers.

      Step 6 Click Apply to save the settings.
      Model DI-634M
      Question How do I configure my DI-634M?
      Answer Click on the links below for specific configuration instructions.

      Connect to the Internet: Basic Configuration: Security: Wireless Settings: Advanced Features: Troubleshooting:
      Model DI-634M
      Question How do I enable DMZ on my DI-634M?
      Answer The DMZ (or De-militarized Zone) will open all ports to a computer on the LAN.

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-634M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

      Step 2 The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

      Step 3 Click on the Advancedtab at the top and then click on DMZ on the left side.



      Step 4 Select enabled and enter the last octet of the IP address of the computer on the LAN that you are assigning to the DMZ.

      Step 5 Click on Apply to save the DMZ settings.
      Model DI-634M
      Question How do I configure DDNS on my DI-634M?
      Answer Dynamic DNS (Domain Name Service) is a method of keeping a domain name linked to a changing (dynamic) IP address. With most Cable and DSL connections, you are assigned a dynamic IP address and that address is used only for the duration of that specific connection. To properly configure the DDNS feature follow the steps below:

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-634M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

      Step 3 Click on the Tools tab at the top and then click on DDNS on the left side.



      Step 4 Next to DDNS select enabled and configure the following:
      • Server Address - Select your DDNS service provider.
      • Host Name - Enter the domain name that you registered with your DDNS service provider (IE mydomain.dyndns.org)
      • User Name - Enter the username for your DDNS account
      • Password - Enter the password for your DDNS account


      Step 5 Click on Apply to save your changes.
      Model DI-634M
      Question How do I configure the WAN settings on my DI-634M?
      Answer Select your WAN connection:

    • Dynamic IP Address
    • Static IP Address
    • PPPoE
    • PPTP
    • L2TP
    • BigPond Cable


      Dynamic IP Address

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-634M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

      Step 3 Click on the Home tab at the top and then click on WAN on the left side.



      Step 4 Select Dynamic IP Address.

      Step 5 If your ISP requires a host name enter it next to Host Name. If you want to use another MAC address other than the MAC address of the WAN port enter it next to MAC Address and select Use MAC.

      Step 6 Click on Apply to save your settings.


      Static IP Address

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-634M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

      Step 3 Click on the Home tab at the top and then click on WAN on the left side.



      Step 4 Select Static IP Address.

      Step 5 Enter the IP address, subnet mask, ISP gateway address, and primary DNS and secondary (optional) DNS server addresses.

      Step 6 Click on Apply to save your settings.


      PPPoE

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-634M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

      Step 3 Click on the Home tab at the top and then click on WAN on the left side.



      Step 4 Select PPPoE.

      Step 5 Select PPPoE and configure the following:
      • User Name - Enter your username
      • Password - Enter your password
      • Verfify Password - Confirm your password
      • Service Name - Enter a service name if required by your ISP (optional)
      • MAC Address Enter a MAC address if required by your ISP (optional)
      • Primary DNS Server - The IP address of the Domain Name Server. Your ISP will provide this information if it is required; otherwise, leave this box set to 0.0.0.0.(optional)
      • Secondary DNS Server - The IP address of the Domain Name Server. Your ISP will provide this information if it is required; otherwise, leave this box set to 0.0.0.0.(optional)
      • Maximum Idle Time - Enter the amount of time (in minutes) in which the DI-634M will disconnect your Internet connection after inactivity
      • MTU - Enter the MTU. This is usually 1492.
        Connection Mode Select
      • Always on - A connection to the Internet is always maintained.
      • Manual - You have to open up the Web-based management interface and click the Connect button manually any time that you wish to connect to the Internet.
      • Connect on demand - A connection to the Internet is made as needed; and the connection is dropped after "Maximum Idle Time" minutes of no activity.
      Step 6 Click on Apply to save your settings.


      PPTP

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-634M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

      Step 3 Click on the Home tab at the top and then click on WAN on the left side.



      Step 4 Select PPTP and configure the following:
      • IP Address - Enter the IP address
      • Subnet Mask - Enter the subnet mask
      • Default Gateway - Enter the Default Gateway IP address
      • Server IP address - Enter the Server IP address
      • Username - Enter your Username
      • Password - Enter your password
      • Verify Password - Confirm your password
      • Maximum Idle Time - Enter the amount of time (in minutes) in which the DI-634M will disconnect your Internet connection after inactivity
      • MTU - Enter the MTU. This is usually 1452.
        Connection Mode Select
      • Always on - A connection to the Internet is always maintained.
      • Manual - You have to open up the Web-based management interface and click the Connect button manually any time that you wish to connect to the Internet.
      • Connect on demand - A connection to the Internet is made as needed; and the connection is dropped after "Maximum Idle Time" minutes of no activity.
      Step 5 Click on Apply to save your settings.


      L2TP

      Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-634M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

      Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

      Step 3 Click on the Home tab at the top and then click on WAN on the left side.



      Step 4 Select PPTP and configure the following:
      • IP Address - Enter the IP address
      • Subnet Mask - Enter the subnet mask
      • Default Gateway - Enter the Default Gateway IP address
      • Server IP address - Enter the Server IP address
      • Username - Enter your Username
      • Password - Enter your password
      • Verify Password - Confirm your password
      • Maximum Idle Time - Enter the amount of time (in minutes) in which the DI-634M will disconnect your Internet connection after inactivity
      • MTU - Enter the MTU. This is usually 1452.
        Connection Mode Select
      • Always on - A connection to the Internet is always maintained.
      • Manual - You have to open up the Web-based management interface and click the Connect button manually any time that you wish to connect to the Internet.
      • Connect on demand - A connection to the Internet is made as needed; and the connection is dropped after "Maximum Idle Time" minutes of no activity.
        Step 5 Click on Apply to save your settings.


        BigPond Cable
        Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-634M in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

        Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

        Step 3 Click on the Home tab at the top and then click on WAN on the left side.



        Step 4 Select BigPond Cable and configure the following:
        • Username - Enter the Username
        • Password - Enter the Password
        • Verify Password - Re-enter password
        • Auth Server - Enter the Authentication Server address
        • MAC Address - Enter your MAC address
        Step 5 Click on Apply to save your settings.
        • Model DI-634M
        Question I am unable to connect to my VPN server and the log entries on the DI-634M state ALG: Packet Dropped. What can I do?
        Answer ALG stands for Application Layer Gateway and it prevents packets that donīt conform to the correct protocol or are fragments from being passed through the DI-634M. It is a safety measure against malicious attacks using packet fragments. However when a VPN server or client uses a proprietary version of the standard protocol it can be viewed by the DI-634Mīs ALG as being bad and be dropped. To prevent this you may need to:
        • Turn off any extraneous features such as NAT Transversal that can cause some VPN software to use non-standard packets.
        • Attempt using a different VPN client or server that does not conflict with the protocol.
        Model DI-634M
        Question What is the reason for changing Parental Control on firmware 2.01?
        Answer D-Link has changed the Parental Control feature of this router from filtering websites based on a customer generated list of "blocked sites" to filtering them based on a customer generated list of "allowed sites". This change was made because we feel that there are many unwanted websites that may not make it onto a manually generated "blocked sites" list, and also because there are typically fewer sites that customers would like to allow then there are sites that they would like to block, which in turn will cut down on the time it takes and the complexity of configuring this feature of the router.
        Model DI-634M
        Question How do I view the activity logs on my DI-634M?
        Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-634M into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

        Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

        Step 3 Click on the Status tab at the top and then click on Log on the left side.


        Log Settings


        Step 1 Check the types of logs that you want to record activity for.

        Step 2 Click on Apply to save the settings.
        Model DI-634M
        Question How do I enable WEP/WPA-PSK encryption on my DI-634M?
        Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless router before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

        Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

        Step 1: Log into the web configuration of the router by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

        Click here if you cannot access the web-based configuration.

        Step 2: Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default). Click OK. Click on the Home tab and then click on the Wireless button on the left hand side of the screen.



        WEP Encryption



        Step 3: For Security Mode, select WEP. For Authentication, select Open or shared Authentication. For WEP encryption select 64bit, or 128bit.

        Step 4: Select Key 1. Enter a Hex encryption key that you make up. The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption from the drop down menu. The key must match between your router and your wireless clients.

      • 64-bit encryption 10 characters
      • 128-bit encryption 26 characters

        The encryption key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters. For example, A4583DFF1A (64-bit HEX key) would be a valid key.

        Step 5: Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.



        WPA-PSK Encryption



        Step 3: For Security Mode, select WPA-PSK. For WPA mode, select WPA, WPA2 or WPA2 Only. For Cipher Type select TKIP, AES or TKIP and AES.

        Step 4: On Passphrase, type in your desired key. Re-type this key in the Confirm Passphrase field.

        Step 5: Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.

        Note: If using non-D-Link adapters, please refer to the manufacturerīs documentation on enabling encryption.

        How do I enable encryption on my D-Link adapters?
        • Model DI-701
        Question I have a DI-701 and my ISP is Prolog, but I can't get the DI-701 to connect with Prolog. Do you have any suggestions?
        Answer Some Prolog customers have had success by downgrading the firmware on the DI-701 to a previous version, namely version 2.23.

        Download the 2.23 firmware now

        Model DI-701
        Question How do I upgrade to the 3.37 firmware on the DI-701?
        Answer Getting Started:

        Create a new folder on your computer and name it "DI-701 v337 firmware". Download the v337 firmware from our ftp site by clicking on the link below and save it to the new folder you just created. Unzip the files into the same folder.

        Download the 3.37 firmware now.

        The program used to configure the DI-701 must also be upgraded after upgrading the firmware. This program is called the GUI or Graphical User Interface. The updated GUI is version v330 which is included in the firmware download files.

        Step 1 Disconnect all of the Ethernet cables from the DI-701.

        Step 2 Using the RS-232 cable that came with the DI-701, connect one end to the DI-701 and the other end to your computer's serial port. If you have two serial ports and don't know which ports are COM1 and COM2 it won't really matter at this point since the firmware upgrade has an option to upload through either port.

        Step 3 Making sure the DI-701 is powered up, double click on the COMinst1.bat file which is in the folder with the unzipped firmware files. This will start the upgrade using the COM1 port.

        A DOS window will open displaying the message, "Waiting for device power on . . . ". At this point recycle the power on the DI-701 by uplugging the power adapter from the DI-701 and immediately plugging it back in. Make sure you do nothing on your computer while the upload is taking place. You run the risk of damaging the device if you do.



        The files will upload automatically. You will see this message, "OK FIRMWARE.BIN succeeded", indicating that the upgrade was successful. Close the DOS window.



        If you get the error message below in your DOS window, close it. Go back to your upgrade files and double-click on the COMinst2.bat file since you're probably connecting through the COM2 port.



        Step 4 Recycle the power on the DI-701 again to set the firmware in the device. Reconnect the Ethernet devices.

        Step 5 This will complete the firmware upgrade, but to be able to configure the device using the new firmware you will have to uninstall the GUI(Graphical User Interface) that you are currently using and install the v330 GUI. The v330 GUI software is included in the firmware zip file that you downloaded or you can dowload it from the D-Link ftp site(ftp.dlink.com). To install the v330 GUI just double click on the Setup.exe file.

        Note:

        If you are using a non-Microsoft operating system, you will have to configure the DI-701 using telnet. For Mac users there is a program called MacTelnet which can be found for free on the Internet.

        Click here to download MacTelnet

        Telnet connects to the DI-701 through the ethernet cable. To telnet to the DI-701 open a DOS window and enter the IP address of the DI-701, followed by a space and then the numbers 333, which is the port number the DI-701 uses for telnet. In the Mac telnet program there is a place to enter the IP address and port number.

        The default IP address for the DI-701 is 192.168.0.1 but is 192.168.1.254 for firmware upgrades 2.23 and up, which means that after upgrading to the 337 firmware, the default IP address of the DI-701 will be 192.168.1.254. Unless you changed the default IP address of the DI-70, use the default IP address to make the telnet connection.

        Open a DOS prompt and type the following:

        192.168.1.254 333

        Then hit the Enter key. This will open the connection to the DI-701.

        For the complete list of telnet commands for the DI-701, please consult your manual. Act accordingly.

        Model DI-701
        Question Can I use my Mac to configure the DI-701?
        Answer Yes, you can configure the DI-701 with a Macintosh computer. The configuration software that comes with the DI-701 is not compatible with non-Windows computers, however you can telnet into the Gateway to configure it. With Macintosh OS 9.1 and above, Mac Telnet version 3.0 is suggested, which you can download from the Macintosh Knowledge base. If you are using 9.1 you will need Mac telnet 2.6. If you are using Mac OS X you can use the built-in telnet utility.

        Step 1 After the Telnet application has been installed, you can open the software, go to File>Open New Session.

        Step 2 A white box will appear. In the host name you will type in the IP address of the gateway.

        If you have set your network card to Using DHCP Server and booted up your computer while connected to the DI-701, you can find the IP address of the DI-701 by opening the TCP/IP control panel, Apple Menu>Control Panels>TCP/IP. The IP address of the DI-701 will be listed as the Router address. In the image below we can identify the IP address of the DI-701 as 192.168.0.1.



        After you obtain the IP address of the DI-701, enter that IP address as the Host Name in the Mac Telnet program. Use 333 as the port number.

        Step 3 Then click on the ADD button on the right hand side.

        Step 4 The IP address you entered will appear in the box below.

        Step 5 Highlight the IP address of the DI-701 and then click CONNECT.

        Step 6 A new white box will now appear. It will ask you for your administrator password. Just click Enter.

        Step 7 You can then type in SET. This will allow you to go one by one through the settings on the DI-701. If you agree with the default setting press Enter. If not, here is where you can change it according to your internet providerīs settings.

        Step 8 When you are done click Save and Restart. If you are connecting to your ISP with a dynamic connection you can see whether or not you have gotten an IP address from your ISP by typing in the show command at the telnet prompt. Verify that you have gotten an IP address by looking at the entry for WAN IP address.
        Model DI-701
        Question What comes with the DI-701?
        Answer The DI-701 comes with everything you need to set it up and install it on your network.
        The following is a list of items included in the box:

        - DI-701 iShare Router
        - Power adapter
        - DI-701 iShare Router Setup Program Floppy Disk
        - User Guide
        - Category 5 Cross-Over Cable
        - RS-232 serial cable

        No additional items are needed to attach the DI-701 to your computer. The DI-701 has one port for connection to your computer. Additional items are needed to connect to additional computers. The DI-701 supports up to 32 network connections. You will need an Ethernet or Fast Ethernet hub or switch to connect to more than one computer. The User Guide explains multiple connections. If you want to create a home network check out the D-Link DFE-910 10/100 Dual Speed Network Kit.
        Model DI-701
        Question What do I need to use the DI-701?
        Answer You need a DSL modem, cable modem, or other Ethernet based connection to the Internet to use the DI-701. The DI-701 acts as a barrier between you and hackers on the Internet. The DI-701 has two ports: Global and Local. Connect the DSL or cable modem to the Global port. Then use the cable that comes with the DI-701 to connect your computer and the Local port. Once you configure the DI-701, you can surf the net.
        Model DI-701
        Question Will the DI-701 work with my Internet Connection?
        Answer The DI-701 is designed to be compatible with DSL and cable modems. It is designed for easy configuration and use. Most external Cable and DSL modems use an Ethernet NIC in your computer as a connection. The DI-701 is placed in line between the NIC and the External modem. As long as your Internet Access device has an Ethernet port you can use the DI-701.
        Model DI-701
        Question Will the DI-701 work with Linux or a Mac?
        Answer Any client capable of using a dynamically assigned IP address via DHCP can be used. This means that computers running any network capable operating system can benefit from the security and Internet sharing capabilities of the DI-701. The DI-701īs GUI setup interface requires Windows 95, 98, NT or 2000. Telnet and Terminal setup are operating system independent.
        Model DI-701
        Question Why do Computers using a Cable Modem or DSL Modem get attacked more often?
        Answer Cable and DSL Internet connections provide a couple of key benefits. They are fast and they are always on. Both of these facts make them attractive to hackers as well. A fast connection means that the hacker can access your files faster. The always on connection allows them to access your machine at times when you are less likely to notice. Large blocks of IP addresses used for Cable and DSL Internet access are well known to hackers and are targeted frequently as a result.
        Model DI-701
        Question Will the DI-701 work with PPPoE?
        Answer Yes. The new firmware supports PPPoE. The new firmware is available on D-Linkīs web site at Technical Support > Downloads > Internet Servers > DI-701
        Model DI-701
        Question How can I tell if I am using PPPoE?
        Answer If you have a DSL broadband connection and have to login to your provider with a user name and password in a similar fashion to how you would dial in with a modem, you are probably using PPPoE. Software such as WinPoet and Enternet 300 are common PPPoE login applications. If you are simply connected to the Internet when you turn on your computer, you probably are not. The safest way to check is to call your provider, or read the documentation provided with your Internet service to determine if you currently use PPPoE. Download the new firmware provided on our web site if you use PPPoE.

        Popular ISPs that use PPPoE:
      • Earthlink
      • Mindspring
      • SBC Global (Pac Bell & Ameritech)
      • SW Bell
      • Verizon
      • Bell South
      • Frontier (Citizens)
        • Model DI-701
        Question Is PPPoE a standard?
        Answer No. PPPoE is a proprietary method of creating a virtual connection between an ISP's network and a client machine. Currently it has not been endorsed or accepted by any relevant Internet standards bodies. The new revision of the DI-701's firmware enables it to support PPPoE. The new firmware is now available for download.
        Model DI-701
        Question Why does my provider use PPPoE?
        Answer PPPoE emulates a Dial-Up Network (DUN) connection. It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration with newer broadband technologies. The new firmware available for download, supports PPPoE.
        Model DI-701
        Question How many Virtual Services/Port Maps can I set up?
        Answer The DI-701 will support up to 12 simultaneous Virtual Services/Port Maps.
        Model DI-701
        Question How many computers can use the DI-701 simultaneously?
        Answer The DI-701 can support up to 32 simultaneous connections to the Internet. We do not recommend that you connect more than 5 simultaneous users to maintain high performance.
        Model DI-701
        Question What configuration methods can I use to configure the DI-701?
        Answer The DI-701 uses three secure methods for configuration:
      • Configuration Utility for Windows
      • HyperTerminal Setup via a Serial cable
      • Telnet (port 333).

        The Windows GUI provides the simplest and most intuitive interface. Telnet and HyperTerminal are available for users more comfortable with those two methods. Using Telnet, the unit can be configured and monitored remotely.

        Download latest firmware and configuration utility here.

        Note: The configuration software is bundled in the same ZIP file as the drivers.
        • Model DI-701
        Question How do I configure the DI-701 for HomePNA?
        Answer The DI-701 can be configured for use with HomePNA by using a computer with two Network Interface Cards (NICs) in it. The first card is an Ethernet or Fast Ethernet card that connects your DI-701 to your computer. The second must be a HomePNA card to allow you to connect your computers together into a network.
        Set up your network as follows:
        Connect the Cable modem or DSL modem to the Global port on the DI-701. Then connect the Local port on the DI-701 to the Ethernet or Fast Ethernet card in the PC. Configure as outlined in the DI-701 Quick Starter Guide.
        The Ethernet or Fast Ethernet card must be going to the Local port on the DI-701 and the HomePNA card (or D-Link DHN-520 10Mb Phoneline NIC) can connect to other computers with HomePNA support. The computer with the Ethernet/ Fast Ethernet card and the HomePNA (or D-Link DHN-520 card) needs software to act as a router. For Windows 98 Second Edition you can use ICS, for other versions use Sygate or similar Internet sharing software.
        The DI-701 will provide firewall protection for the connected computer and all the other computers attached to it. The computer attached to the DI-701 will route the file between the Ethernet/ Fast Ethernet and the HomePNA (or DHN-520) network adapters using Internet sharing software.
        Model DI-701
        Question How do I use HyperTerminal to configure the DI-701?
        Answer You can use either Windows Hyper Terminal or a third party terminal emulation program to configure the DI-701.

        Getting started:

        Step 1 Connect an RS-232 cable from one serial COM port on your PC to your DI-701's Serial Console port.

        Step 2 Go to Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Hyper Terminal folder. Double-click on the Hypertrm.exe file. This will open the Connection Description window. Here, you must enter a name. Any name will do. Then click OK.
                        
        Step 3 In the Connect To dialog box, select the COM port that connects to your DI-701. If you are not sure what port you are connected to, just select COM1. If you do not connect using COM1, repeat the previous steps and select COM2.
                             
        Step 4 In the COM properties window, set the "Bits per second" rate at 38400, and "Flow control" at None. Click OK to complete the setting.
                          
        Step 5 Power up the DI-701 and wait for it to completely boot up. By default there is no password. Just hit the Enter key to log in when prompted for Administrator password.
                       

        Please refer to your manual for a complete list of commands.
        Model DI-701
        Question How do I configure the DI-701 in terminal program mode via Hyperterminal?
        Answer You can use terminal emulation on your PC for the initial and future configuration of your DI-701. Windows Hyperterminal or other terminal emulation applications can be used as well.

        Getting started:
        1.Connect an RS-232 cable from one Serial COM port on your PC to your DI-701's Serial Console port.
        2.Go to start ->program ->Accessories ->Communications ->Hyperterminal
        3.In the Connect To dialog box, select the COM port that connects to your DI-701.
        4.When the dialog box shown, set the "Bits per second" rate at 38400, and "Flow control" at None. Click OK to complete the setting .
        5.Power up the DI-701.
        Model DI-704
        Question Why wonīt my DI-704 accept the default password when using Netscape?
        Answer Some versions of Netscape have difficulty translating some of the Java functions written to the prom code in the DI-704. To resolve this issue either use Internet Explorer or upgrade the firmware on the DI-704 to 256b20 or higher.

        Download Firmware
        Model DI-704 / DI-704P / DI-707 / DI-713 / DI-713P
        Question Why canīt I connect through my 3COM Home Connect modem with the DI-7XX?
        Answer Note: This FAQ does not apply to all D-Link gateways. Use this FAQ to resolve this issue on D-Link gateways DI-704, DI-704P, DI-707, DI-713 and the DI-713P.

        To connect to the 3COM Home Connect modem you must upgrade the DI-704 to firmware 255b15 or higher.

        Download Now

        Step 1 Download the firmware to your computer.

        Step 2 Double-click on this self-extracting file. A window will open allowing you to select a destination folder for the file. It really doesnīt matter in which folder you unzip this file as long as you can find the file after you click the Unzip button. If you donīt want to use the default folder, click on the Browse button to select a folder, click OK and then click Unzip.



        Step 3 After the files have unzipped, go to that folder and double-click on the firmware file which will look like the image below. Make sure the DI-704 is powered up and connected to your computer.



        Step 4 This will open the following window. Enter your password and click OK . This will be the same password that you use to enter the web configuration.



        Step 5 You will be prompted to confirm that you want to continue with the upgrade if there are other computers connected to the DI-704. Click OK to continue with the upgrade.



        Step 6 You will then see a progress bar.



        Step 7 Once it has reached 100% you will be notified that the upgrade was successful. Click OK to close this window. Your DI-704īs firmware has now been upgraded. To set the firmware upgrade, recycle the power on the DI-704 by turning it off, waiting for a few seconds and then turning it back on again.


        Model DI-704 / DI-704P / DI-707 / DI-713 / DI-713P
        Question How do I upgrade firmware on my DI-704, DI-704P, DI-707, DI-713, and DI-713P on my Macintosh or Linux computer?
        Answer To upgrade from a Macintosh or Linux machine, or an alternate upgrade procedure for Windows, follow the steps below to upgrade the firmware.

        Step 1 Download the firmware to your computer from our FTP site.

        Step 2 Select your model gateway and click on the firmware folder. Download the firmware file that ends with .BIN.

        Step 3 Open your browser, enter the address for the DI-7xx in the browser window and hit the Enter key.

        Step 4 Log into the DI-7xxīs configuration page. Click on Tools>Upgrade Firmware.

        Step 5 Click on the Browse button and navigate to the file that you downloaded.

        Step 6 Select the file by clicking on it and then click the Open button

        Step 7 Click the Upgrade button. The firmware will automatically be uploaded to the DI-7xx.

        Step 8 Log out of the web configuration for the DI-7xx. Upgrading the firmware is now complete.
        Model DI-704 / DI-704P / DI-707 / DI-713 / DI-713P
        Question How do I set up the DI-704, DI-707, or DI-713P to connect to Roadrunner, Cox.net, AT&T-BI, Charter, Adelphia, or any other ISP that uses MAC Address authentication?
        Answer Note: Even though this FAQ is specifically for the DI-704, the steps and concepts are the same for all other D-Link gateways. If you have a modem with a USB connection only, it will not work with any broadband router due to the need of drivers to operate the modem.

      • Read here if you have a DSL PPPoE Connection

        The key to this type of connection is recycling the power on the cable modem after physically connecting the modem to the D-Link gateway.

        Before you start:
        When first setting up the DI-704, only connect the computer that was used when you originally set up your broadband connection. Do not use hubs or switches for initial setup. Once the gateway is up and running, you can easily add additional computers, hub, and switches to set up a more complicated LAN.

        Summary:
        Physically set up the DI-704 by connecting your computer to a LAN port and your modem to its WAN port. From the Network Properties Control Panel, make sure your network card is set to "Obtain an IP Address Automatically". Restart your computer. From the Setup page of the DI-704īs web configuration, set the WAN type to Dynamic and check the box to Enable Renew IP Forever. Click Save. From the Tools page click the button to Clone MAC, then click Reboot to apply the changes. Power down both the modem and the DI-704. Power on the modem first, letting it stabilize, then power on the DI-704. Go Online!

        Thatīs the quick, down and dirty explanation. For more detailed setup information use the following step-by-step approach below.

        Step-by-Step Configuration:

        Step 1 Connect your broadband modem to the WAN port on the DI-704. Use the same cable that was used to connect your computer to the modem. The WAN light on the DI-704 should illuminate, verifying a good physical link.

        Step 2 Connect the same computer that was originally connected to the modem to an open LAN port on the DI-704. The corresponding port light will illuminate verifying that you have a good physical connection.

        Step 3 Release and Renew the IP address for your computer. The address you renew should be in the 192.168.0.100 to 192.168.0.199 range.

        Use the directions below to Release and Renew your IP address.

        For Windows 95, 98 and Me:
        Go to Start>Run and enter winipcfg. Click OK.



        In the IP Configuration control panel, select your network adapter from the drop-down menu. Click theRelease button, then the Renew button to obtain an IP address from the DI-704.



        The IP configuration information shows an IP address of 192.168.0.104 and Default Gateway address of 192.168.0.1, which is the default IP address of the DI-704. This information verifies the network adapter is properly configured and the computer is communicating with the DI-704

        For Windows 2000 and XP:
        Go to Start>Run and enter cmd. Click OK.



        At the DOS prompt enter, ipconfig/release and then hit the Enter key to release your IP address. Then enter, ipconfig/renew and hit Enter to renew an address from the DI-704.



        The IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway information will be returned with this command. Notice in this example that the IP address is 192.168.0.104 and that the default gateway is 192.168.0.1. This information verifies the network adapter is properly configured and the computer is communicating with the DI-704.

        For Windows NT:
        Click Start>Run and enter command, then click OK. At the DOS prompt, enter ipconfig/release and hit the Enter key to release your IP address. Then enter ipconfig/renew and hit Enter to renew an IP address from the DI-704.

        Note:
        If you receive any error messages at this point, you may either have a problem with the functionality of your network card, or it may not be configured to obtain an address automatically in the TCP/IP properties.

        Step 4 Open your browser and type 192.168.0.1 in the Address window, then hit the Enter key. You do not need to type http://, only the IP address of the DI-704. This will connect you to the web configuration utility that lets you manage the DI-704. You are not on the Internet at this point. Type admin for the System Password, then click the Login button to login.

        Step 5 Select the Setup menu option from the bottom of the screen. Make sure the WAN type is set to Dynamic. Check box to enable Renew IP forever.

        If the WAN configuration is not set to Dynamic, click the Change button and select Dynamic. Next, click the Save button and then the Reboot button on the bottom of the screen. Click OK when prompted to Reboot right now?

        Step 6 Next, we need to do something called cloning the MAC address. This will insure that you can connect through your modem in the event that the MAC address, or physical address, of your network card has been registered with your ISP.

        Cloning the MAC copies the MAC address of your ethernet card to the WAN port of the DI-704. In other words, it will appear to your ISP will that it is your computer connected to the modem, not the gateway. That is why it is necessary to configure the DI-704 from the same computer that was originally setup with your modem. Otherwise, the gateway may copy the wrong MAC address to the WAN port.

        From the Device Information page, click on the Tools menu option at the bottom of screen. This will take you to the Useful Tools menu. Click the Clone MAC button, then click OK when prompted to "Change MAC address right now?".



        New MAC address will take effective after rebooting! will be displayed and the Clone MAC button will change to a Restore MAC button.

        Click the Reboot button, then click OK when prompted to "Reboot right now?". This will take you back to the Device Information page. Click the Logout button and then close your browser.



        Step 7 Power down the DI-704. Either turn it off from the power switch, or unplug the AC power cord from the gateway. With the DI-704 turned off, recycle the power on the cable modem. Again, turn it off it has a switch or just unplug it from the wall outlet. Wait 30 seconds and then power up the modem only. Wait until all of the lights on the modem have stabilized. After you are sure that the modem has stabilized, power up the DI-704.

        Step 8 At this point you should be able to open your browser and browse the Internet. If you are using special applications through the gateway, you may need to open ports in the Virtual Server or Special Apps configuration menus.
        • Model DI-704 / DI-704P / DI-707 / DI-713 / DI-713P
        Question How do I set up NetMeeting using a DI-704, DI-704P, DI-707 or a DI-713P?
        Answer The audio portion of a NetMeeting call uses dynamic port assignment. This means that when the NetMeeting call is made the program will randomly pick one of the ports within the range of 1024-65535. Since it is not possible to open the continuous range of ports from 1024-65535 with a D-Link Gateway, you must use the DMZ option, which will open all of the ports to the specified computer. The DMZ function can only be assigned to one computer on your network at a time. Furthermore, you cannot use the Virtual Server and the DMZ Host simultaneously. The gateway is only capable of forwarding service ports to an individual IP address.

        To open the DMZ to one computer on your network to enable a NetMeeting call, follow the steps below.

        Step 1 Identify the IP address of the computer you want to use with NetMeeting.

        Step 2 Open your web browser and log in to the gatewayīs web configuration utility. The default address for the gateways is 192.168.0.1.

        Step 3 Select the Advanced menu option at the bottom of the Device Information screen. Then click on the Misc Items menu option.

        Step 4 On the Miscellaneous Items screen enter the IP address of the computer using NetMeeting and select the check box to the right, enabling the DMZ.

        Step 5 Click on the Save button and then the Reboot button. Click OK when prompted to "Reboot right now?".

        Step 6 This will bring you back to the Device Information screen. If you have the gateway set for Dynamic or PPPoE, you will have to either click on the Renew button or the Connect button to re-establish the connection to your ISP.

        Use the IP address from this page when a remote PC attempts to make a NetMeeting call to your PC behind the firewall.

        Step 7 If you have difficulty in getting your Internet connection back, turn off both your broadband modem and the D-Link gateway for about 5 minutes. Power the modem on first and let it stabilize. Once the modem is ready, then power the gateway back on.

        Log back into the web configuration to verify your internet connection and to find the IP address needed to make the NetMeeting call to connect to your computer.

        How do I open DMZ host on my DI-704P (Silver Case) router?

        How do I configue the DMZ Host on my DI-604, DI-614+, DI-764, or DI-624?

        Model DI-704 / DI-704P / DI-707 / DI-713 / DI-713P
        Question Why does my D-Link DI-704 display, Modem not ready in the device configuration?
        Answer The modem status displayed on the Device Information page only reflects the status of an external dial-up modem connected to the COM port on the DI-704. If you connect to the internet using a Cable or DSL modem, it should say "Modem not ready."
        Model DI-704 / DI-704P / DI-707 / DI-713 / DI-713P
        Question How do I set up the DI-704, DI-704P, DI-707, or DI-713P to connect to Earthlink, Mindspring, or any other ISP that uses PPPoE?
        Answer Please make sure you know your username and password. Also, you will need to disable or uninstall the PPPoE software (i.e. WinPoet, Macpoet, Enternet 300) on your computers. PPPoE is built-in to your D-Link router and is not needed on the computer.

        NOTE: About 90% of our calls and emails regarding PPPoE are solved by recycling power to the modem and the gateway(see step 7 below).

        Also, once you have confirmed that your configuration is correct it could take five minutes or longer to connect.

        Step-by-Step Configuration:

        Step 1 Connect your DSL modem to the WAN port on the D-Link gateway. Use the same cable that was used to connect your computer to the modem. The WAN light on the gateway should illuminate, verifying a good physical link.

        Step 2 Connect the same computer that was originally connected to the modem to an open LAN port on the gateway. The corresponding port light will illuminate verifying that you have a good physical connection.

        Step 3 Release and Renew the IP address for your computer. The address you renew should be in the 192.168.0.100 to 192.168.0.199 range.

        Use the directions below to Release and Renew your IP address.

        For Windows 95, 98 and Me:
        Go to Start>Run and enter winipcfg. Click OK.



        In the IP Configuration control panel, select your network adapter from the drop-down menu. Click theRelease button, then the Renew button to obtain an IP address from the D-Link gateway.



        The IP configuration information shows an IP address of 192.168.0.104 and Default Gateway address of 192.168.0.1, which is the default IP address of the gateway. This information verifies the network adapter is properly configured and the computer is communicating with the gateway.

        For Windows 2000 and XP:
        Go to Start>Run and enter cmd. Click OK.



        At the DOS prompt enter, ipconfig/release and then hit the Enter key to release your IP address. Then enter, ipconfig/renew and hit Enter to renew an address from the gateway.



        The IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway information will be returned with this command. Notice in this example that the IP address is 192.168.0.104 and that the default gateway is 192.168.0.1. This information verifies the network adapter is properly configured and the computer is communicating with the gateway.

        For Windows NT:
        Click Start>Run and enter command, then click OK. At the DOS prompt, enter ipconfig/release and hit the Enter key to release your IP address. Then enter ipconfig/renew and hit Enter to renew an IP address from the D-Link gateway.

        Note:
        If you receive any error messages at this point, you may either have a problem with the functionality of your network card, or it may not be configured to obtain an address automatically in the TCP/IP properties.

        Step 4 Open your browser and type 192.168.0.1 in the Address window, then hit the Enter key. You do not need to type http://, only the IP address of the gateway. This will connect you to the web configuration utility that lets you manage the D-Link gateway. You are not on the Internet at this point. Type admin for the System Password, then click the Login button to login.

        Step 5 Select the Setup menu option from the bottom of the screen. Next to WAN Type, click Change. Select PPP Over Ethernet. Click Save.

        Step 6 Next, enter your PPPoE information.

        PPPoE Account: Enter your user name.
      • Earthlink users - Enter ELN/username@earthlink.net
      • Mindspring users - Enter username@mindspring.com
      • SBC Global users - Enter username@sbcglobal.net
      • SW Bell and others - Enter username

        PPPoE Password
        Enter your password. Remember it is case-sensitive.

        PPPoE Service Name: Keep blank.

        Maximum Idle Time: Set to 999 seconds and check Auto-reconnect.

        Assigned IP address: This is for PPPoE users with a static IP address.

        Click Save. Click the Reboot button, then click OK when prompted to "Reboot right now?". This will take you back to the Device Information page. Keep this browser page open.

        Step 7 Power down the D-Link gateway. Either turn it off from the power switch, or unplug the AC power cord from the gateway. With the gateway turned off, recycle the power on the DSL modem. Again, turn it off if it has a switch or just unplug it from the wall outlet. Wait 2-3 minutes and then power up the modem only. Wait until all of the lights on the modem have stabilized. After you are sure that the modem has stabilized, power up the gateway.

        Step 8 Allow 30 seconds for the gateway to power up. Click refresh on your browser and it may ask to enter your password again. From the device information page, click Connect. If an IP address appears, click Log Out and you should be able to connect to the internet.

        NOTE: It may take a few minutes to make a connection to your ISP. Please be patient. If you have configured your gateway according to this FAQ, your configuration is correct.
        • Model DI-704 / DI-704P / DI-713 / DI-713P / DI-707
        Question How do I change the MTU setting on the DI-704?
        Answer Most users should not change this setting. Only change the MTU size if instructed by your ISP or a D-Link technician. Record the original values for the MTU size before you make any changes. If the router does not perform properly after configuring the MTU size, change it back to the default settings.

        To access the MTU configuration page, enter 192.168.0.1/sysp.htm in your web browser. Adjust the MTU size as needed.

        Model DI-704 / DI-704P / DI-713 / DI-713P / DI-714P+ / DI-804HV / DI-808HV
        Question What is the proper procedure to reset the DI-704, DI-704P, DI-713P, DI-804HV, and DI-808HV to factory settings?
        Answer This reset procedure applies to the following devices:
      • DI-704
      • DI-704P
      • DI-713
      • DI-713P
      • DI-714P+
      • DI-804HV
      • DI-808HV

        Step 1 Power the unit off by unplugging its power adapter.

        Step 2 Insert a paper clip in to the reset pinhole. Press and hold the reset button with light pressure.



        Step 3 Power the device back on by plugging it in. Continue to hold the reset button.

        Step 4 Watch the lights on the front of the router. The M1 & M2 should come on solid. When the M1 & M2 begin to blink slowly, release the reset button.

        The unit will reboot itself and should be at factory defaults. If the M1 light is not blinking about once per second, unplug the power on the router and plug it back in.

        If the M1 & M2 continue to blink rapidly, you held the reset button for too long. Power the device off and repeat the reset procedure.

        The default IP address is 192.168.0.1. The default username for our routers is admin. The password is blank. If your router asks only for a password, use admin (lower-case).
        • Model DI-704 / DI-704P / DI-713P
        Question Why canīt I upgrade the firmware on the DI-704 to the latest version?
        Answer Note: If all of the features of your gateway are operational, do not upgrade the firmware. It will not make your gateway run better and may even disable some features that you are currently using. If itīs not broken, donīt fix it.

        If you have a version of firmware prior to 2.56b6 on your DI-704, you may have a problem updating to the latest version. To get to the latest version, perform the upgrade in increments. First update the firmware to version 2.56b20 from ftp://ftp.dlink.com/Gateway/. Once this version has successfully loaded, you should be able to upgrade to 2.57b3.

        If you need more information on the firmware upgrade procedure, please read this FAQ:

        How do I upgrade the firmware for the DI-704?
        Model DI-704 / DI-704P/revA / DI-707 / DI-713 / DI-713P
        Question How do I configure the DI-704 to connect to the Internet?
        Answer Step 1 Make sure that your physical connections are correct. There should be a WAN, LAN, and link light on the port that your PC is connected to. The M1 light should be blinking.

        Step 2 Make sure that your browser is not set to dial out. Open Internet Explorer and click Tools>Internet Options. Click the Connections tab and make sure the dial-up setting is set to Never Dial a Connection. Click the LAN Settings button to make sure that nothing is selected. Click OK.

        Step 3 For Windows 9x/Me:
        Goto Start>Run type in winipcfg. Click OK.



        Select your local adapter from the drop-down menu. Click Release and then Renew. You should get an IP address of 192.168.0.x.



        Step 3a For Windows 2000/NT/XP:
        Goto Start>Run and enter cmd. Click OK.



        From the command prompt, type ipconfig /release. After the adapterīs address has been released, type in ipconfig /renew. You should get an IP address of 192.168.0.x.



        Step 4 Configure the routerīs WAN Type for your ISP. Open your browser and enter 192.168.0.1 in the address bar to access the routerīs configuration page. Use the default password, admin, to login to the router. From the Device Information page, click the Setup link at the bottom of the page. Configure the WAN Type for your ISP. If the WAN Type is configured for a Dynamic IP Address, check the box to Enable Renew IP Forever. If your ISP requires a computer name, like @HOME, then type in the computer name that your ISP gave you in the Host Name field. If your ISP uses a username and password, configure the WAN Type for PPPoE. Enter the PPPoE Account Name and Password just as you would to logon from your computer. Configure the WAN Type for Static if your ISP gave you the IP addresses to use. Fill in the WAN IP information with the addresses specified by your ISP.
        Make sure you save your settings and reboot the device when prompted.

        Step 5 Goto the DHCP page by clicking the link at the bottom of the page. DHCP should be enabled. You do not need to change the DHCP Pool. Save your settings and reboot the device when prompted.

        Step 6 If your ISP registerd the computerīs ethernet MAC address to authenticate you, then goto the Tools page and click the Clone MAC button. This step must be performed from the PC that normally makes the internet connection. Save your settings and Reboot the device when prompted.

        Step 7 After the router reboots and you are back at the Device Information page, close the browser and power down the router. Recycle the power on your cable/dsl modem. When your cable/dsl modem is stable, then power on the router.

        Step 8 Open your browser and go back to the routerīs configuration page, 192.168.0.1. The Device Information Page should show your WAN IP address. If it doesnīt, then there should be a Renew or Connect button. Click that button to obtain an IP address. Click Logout after the router pulls an IP address.

        Step 9 Test the connection. Goto Start>Run enter command, then click OK. From the MS DOS Prompt, enter ping 66.218.71.113

        Note: 66.218.71.113 was the IP address for Yahoo.com at the time this FAQ was written. This IP address may change periodically. The important thing is to test your connection first with a known good IP address and not by name as in ping yahoo.com since that would not only test the connection but also it would test the name resolution ability of your connection.

        Next, enter ping dlink.com. That should also reply. Testing your connection by pinging with a name of a web site tests the ability of your connection to resolve names. Any problems encountered here will point to a DNS problem and not directly to connection problems only.

        Step 10 Go online!

        Model DI-704 / DI-704P/revA / DI-707 / DI-713 / DI-713P
        Question How do I upgrade the firmware for the DI-704, DI-704P, DI-707, DI-713, and DI-713P?
        Answer Note: Perform firmware upgrade from a wired connection only. If you use a wireless connection, you may get packet loss and damage the router.

        To upgrade the firmware on the gateway download the latest firmware from the downloads page and follow the directions below.

        Click here for Macintosh and Linux users, or an alternate Windows upgrade procedure (.bin file).

        Click here for upgrade instructions for the DI-704P (Silver Case).

        Note: If all of the features of your gateway are operational, do not upgrade the firmware. It will not make your gateway run better and may even disable some features that you are currently using. If itīs not broken, donīt fix it.

        Step 1 Download the firmware to your computer.

        Step 2 Double-click on this self-extracting file. A window will open allowing you to select a destination folder for the file. It really doesnīt matter where this folder is as long as you can find the file after you click the Unzip button.

        Select a destination and click on the Unzip button.

        Step 3 Navigate to the destination folder and double-click on the firmware file which will look like the image below.



        Step 4 This will open the following window. Enter your password and click OK . This will be the same password that you use to enter the web configuration.



        Step 5 You will be prompted to confirm that you want to continue with the upgrade if there are other computers connected to the gateway. Click OK to continue with the upgrade.



        Step 6 You will then see a progress bar.



        Once it has reached 100% you will be notified that the upgrade was successful. Click OK to close this window. Your gatewayīs firmware has now been upgraded.

        Step 7 Recycle the power on the gateway by shutting it off for 20 to 30 seconds and then turning it back on again. After upgrading the firmware, it may be necessary to reconfigure your settings. Please check your configuration settings before trying to connect to the Internet.


        Read here for Macintosh and Linux users, or an alternate Windows upgrade procedure (.bin file).
        Model DI-704 / DI-704P/revA / DI-707 / DI-713 / DI-713P
        Question How do I change my password on my DI-704, DI-704P, DI-707, DI-713, or DI-713P?
        Answer To change your password:

        Step 1 Go into the web configuration utility. Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your D-Link gateway (192.168.0.1).

        Step 2 Enter your password (admin).

        Step 3 Click on Tools at the bottom of the screen.

        Step 4 Next to Change Password, enter Old Password and enter your New Password. Then enter it again next to Reconfirm.

        Step 5 Click OK. You password has now been changed.

        Model DI-704 / DI-707 / DI-704P / DI-713 / DI-713P
        Question How do I configure my DI-704 router to use my Nortel VPN?
        Answer To use your Nortel Extranet VPN software, please follow steps below:

        Step 1 Go into the web-based configuration on the router (enter 192.168.0.1 in your web brower).

        Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click on Special Apps.

        Step 3 Enter 500 for Trigger Port.

        Step 4 Enter 500 for Incoming Ports.

        Step 5 Check the Enable box.

        Step 6 Click Save and then click Reboot when prompted.

        Note: Nortel Contivity VPN may not work with our routers. Try following the steps above and disable the Keep Alive feature on your Nortel Contivity client software. Please contact your IT department with information regarding your VPN if it can be used with NAT (Network Address Translation).
        Model DI-704 / DI-707 / DI-711 / DI-713 / DI-713P / DI-714
        Question I have Macintosh computers running OS 8.6 and up. What versions of IPNetMonitor can perform traceroute out to the Internet through D-Link Gateways/Internet Routers?

        Answer Only IPNetMonitor 2.5 or higher can perform a traceroute through all D-Link routers.

        Get the latest version of IPNetMonitor here.
        Model DI-704P / DI-713P / DI-714P+
        Question How can I print to my DI-704P, DI-713P, or DI-714P+ router using Linux?
        Answer The D-Link router is a port redirector. For Linux you should be printing to the IP of the router (192.168.0.1) and the port named "lp" (lower case L and P).

        Unfortunately this configuration is not supported by D-Link Tech Support. Please visit the open-source community for more information on port based printing.
        Model DI-704P/revA
        Question How do I configure MAC Address Control on my D-Link DI-704P Gateway?
        Answer

        MAC Address Control

        This device provides two features in MAC Address Control: Fixed IP Mapping and Connection Control. Both these features are MAC level. You can enable these features by checking the "Enable" box.


        Fixed IP Mapping

        This feature let you assign the MAC address and IP address mappings. Each client in the "Control table" will get the IP address mapping to its MAC address. If you donīt want to assign a fixed IP to a specific client, please leave the IP address blank.


        Connection control

        Connection control allows you to allow or deny the clients to connect to this device and the Internet. Check "Connection control" to enable the controlling. If a client is denied to connect to this device, it means that the client canīt access the Internet and some network resources . Choose "allow" or "deny" to allow or deny clients whose MAC addresses are not listed in the "Control table".

        • When a client CAN "Connect" to this device, it means that it can have full access to the Internet and network resources.

        • When a client CAN NOT "Connect" to this device, it means that it CAN:
          1. Communicate with the other clients on the LAN
          But CAN NOT:
          1. Connect to the Internet
          2. Use the Print Server function
          3. Use the Web configuration


        Control table

        "Control table" is at the bottom of the "MAC Address Control" page. Each row of this table indicates the MAC address and the mapped IP address of a client. The columns in this table are:
          MAC Address Indicates a specific clientīs MAC address.
          IP Address Expected IP address of the corresponding client. Leave it blank if you donīt want to assign a specified IP address to the corresponding client.
          C When "Connection control" is enabled, checking "C" will allow the corresponding client to "Connect" to this device.


        Previous page, Next page

        To make this setup page simple and clear, we have divided the "Control table" into several pages. You can use these buttons to navigate to different pages.


        Example:

          Item Setting
          MAC Address Control Enable
          Connection control Clients with C checked can connect to this device; and unspecified MAC addresses to connect.

          ID MAC Address IP Address C
          1 192.168.50.
          2 192.168.50.
          3 192.168.50.
          4 192.168.50.


        Description:

        In this scenario, there are two clients listed in the Control Table.
        1. The "MAC Address Control" function is enabled.

        2. "Connection control" is enabled, and all of the clients not listed in the "Control table" are "allowed" to connect to this device.

        3. Client 1 has a fixed IP address either from the DHCP server of this device or manually assigned:
          ID 1 - "00-12-34-56-78-90" --> 192.168.50.100
          Client 2 will obtain its IP address from the IP Address pool specified in the "DHCP Server" page or can use a manually assigned static IP address.
          If, for example, client 1 tries to use an IP address different from the address listed in the Control table (192.168.50.100), it will be denied to connect to this device.

        4. Clients 2 and other clients with a MAC address unspecified in the Control table are all allowed to connect to this device. But client 1 is denied to connect to this device.
        Model DI-704P/revB
        Question Why wonīt my browser access the DI-704P online web configuration?
        Answer For the DI-704P (Revision B) you will need to download and install the Java Plug-in for your Operating System.

        To download and install the Java Plug in now click the link below.

        Windows XP, Me, NT, 2000, 98, or 95 and Internet Explorer

        An alternative is to upgrade your browser to the following:
      • Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher (with SP1)
      • Internet Explorer 5.x (Mac)
      • Netscape 6.0 or higher
      • Mozilla 1.2.1 (5.0) or higher
      • Firefox 0.8 or higher
      • Opera 6.0 or higher
      • Safari (with Java 1.3.1 or higher)
      • Camino 0.7 or higher
        • Model DI-704P/revB
        Question How do I connect to the Internet using DSL (PPPoE) with my DI-704P (Silver Case) router?
        Answer Please make sure you know your username and password. Also, you will need to disable or uninstall the PPPoE software (i.e. WinPoet, Macpoet, Enternet 300) on all your computers. PPPoE is built-in to your D-Link router and cannot be used on your computers.

        Step 1 Connect your DSL modem to the WAN port on the D-Link router. Use the same cable that was used to connect your computer to the modem. The WAN light on the router should illuminate, verifying a good physical link.

        Step 2 Power off your computer. Plug your computer into the router (Port 1-4) with a straight-through Ethernet cable. Turn on computer. Once your computer is booted up, verify you have a link light above the corresponding number on the front panel of the router. If you do not have a link light, try a different Ethernet cable (straight through).

        Step 3 Release and Renew the IP address for your computer. The address you renew should be in the 192.168.0.100 to 192.168.0.199 range.

        How do I release and renew on Windows 95, 98, and ME?

        How do I release and renew on Windows NT, 2000, and XP?

        How do I find my IP address on my Macintosh?

        Step 4 Open your browser and type 192.168.0.1 in the Address window, then hit the Enter key. You do not need to type http://, only the IP address of the gateway. This will connect you to the web configuration utility that lets you manage the D-Link router. You are not on the Internet at this point. Type admin for the Password, then click Log In.

        Why canīt I get into the web-based configuration?



        Step 5 Click on Home at the top and then WAN on the left side. Click Change next to WAN Type.



        Step 6 Select PPP Over Ethernet and then click Apply. Do not click Restart



        Step 7 Enter the PPPoE settings:
        PPPoE Account: Enter your username from your PPPoE software.

        Earthlink users - Enter ELN/username@earthlink.net
        Mindspring users - Enter username@mindspring.com
        SBC Global users - Enter username@sbcglobal.net
        Ameritech users - Enter username@ameritech.net
        SW Bell and others - Enter username

        Note: Verizon users from the West coast most likely will have a dynamic connection, not PPPoE. Please verify with Verizon before setting the router up.

        PPPoE Password: Enter your password. Remember, it is case-sensitive.
        Primary and Secondary DNS: Enter your DNS information supplied by your ISP. If you do not have this information, set to 0.0.0.0.
        Maximum Idle Time: Set to 999 seconds and check Auto-reconnect.
        PPPoE Service Name: Keep blank unless specified by your ISP.
        Assigned IP address: This is for PPPoE users with a static IP address.

        Step 8 Click Apply and then click Restart.

        Step 9 Power down the D-Link router by unplugging the AC power cord from the router. With the router turned off, recycle the power on the DSL modem. Again, turn it off if it has a switch or just unplug it from the wall outlet. Wait 2-3 minutes and then power up the modem only. Wait until all of the lights on the modem have stabilized. After you are sure that the modem has stabilized, power up the router.

        Step 10 Allow 30 seconds for the router to power up. Close your web browser and reopen it. You should now be connected to the Internet.
        Model DI-704P/revB
        Question How do I change the password on my DI-704P (silver case) router?
        Answer To change your password:

        Step 1 Go into the web configuration utility. Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your D-Link router (192.168.0.1).

        Step 2 Enter your password (either admin or left blank depending on your firmware version).



        Step 3 Click on Tools at the top and click Admin on the left.

        Step 4 Next to Old Password, enter old password (admin). Enter your new password and enter it again next to reconfirm.

        Step 5 Click OK. Your password has now been changed.

        Note: If your log in box requires a username, it is always admin. You cannot change the username information, only the password.
        Model DI-704P/revB
        Question How do I open DMZ host on my DI-704P rev B router?
        Answer You may open DMZ Host to only 1 computer on your private network. This will allow any incoming requests to be forwarded to that computer. Certain applications such as NetMeeting and MSN Messenger require a router to enable DMZ to work.

        Warning: Opening the DMZ host will expose your computer to the internet and to hackers.

        How can I find the IP address of my computer?

        Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

        Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and password (admin) and click Log in.



        Step 3 Click on Tools on top and then click Misc on the left side.

        Step 4 Next to IP Address of DMZ Host, enter the IP address of your computer that you want to use (i.e. 192.168.0.100). Check the box under Enable.

        Step 5 Click Apply to save settings.

      • What is DMZ?
      • How do I configue the DMZ Host on my DI-604, DI-614+, DI-764, or DI-624?
        • Model DI-707 / DWL-5000AP / DWL-900AP
        Question What can I do if I lost my password for my DI-707, DWL-5000AP, or DWL-900AP?
        Answer Unfortunately these devices are secure and cannot be reset without the password. The unit will have to be sent to D-Link in order to be reset. Please contact our technical support department to be issued a Case ID and instructions to obtain an RMA number for warranty repair. Technical support may be reached 24/7 by calling 877-45D-Link (US only).

        This does not apply to the DI-707P or the DWL-900AP+.
        Model DI-711 / DI-714 / DI-804
        Question How do I upgrade firmware on my DI-711, DI-714, or DI-804?
        Answer To upgrade firmware on your DI-711, DI-714, or DI-804, please follow directions below:

        Note: If all of the features of your gateway are operational, do not upgrade the firmware. It will not make your gateway run better and may even disable some features that you are currently using. If its not broken, donīt fix it.

        If your DI-804 has firmware version 2.xx, you have a non-USA version and this firmware upgrade will not work.

        Please contact the D-Link office near you here.

        Step 1 Download the latest firmware at our Downloads page to your hard drive.

        Step 2 Double-click on this self-extracting file. A window will open allowing you to select a destination folder for the file. It really doesnīt matter where this folder is as long as you can find the file after you click the Unzip button.

        Select a destination and click on the Unzip button.

        Step 3 Open your web browser and go into the web configuration (192.168.0.1 by default).

        Step 4 Select System Tools>Upgrade Firmware.

        Step 5 Click Browse and locate the .bin file. Highlight and click Open.

        Step 6 Click Upgrade or Start and wait until status bar at the bottom reaches 100%. After the firmware is finished uploading you will be brought back to the main configuration page.

        Do not turn unit off during firmware upgrade. This will damage gateway.
        Model DI-711 / DI-714 / DI-804
        Question How do I set up the DI-804, DI-711, or DI-714 to connect to Roadrunner, Cox.net, AT&T-BI, Charter, Adelphia, or any other ISP that uses MAC Address authentication?
        Answer Note: Even though this FAQ was written for the DI-804, the process will be the same for the DI-711 and DI-714:

        @Home Upgrade Users: Unlike @home which used the host name to assign the IP address, Cox.net uses the MAC address of the NIC on the computer where the conversion CD is run.

        Before you start:

        First of all, we will need to get the MAC or physical address of the network card on your computer.

        Finding your network adapterīs MAC Address.

        For Windows 98/ME.

        Click on Start>Run, then type in winipcfg and click OK.



        This will bring up the IP Configuration window. Select your network adapter from the drop-down menu. The MAC address is the Adapter Address.




        For Windows NT/2000/XP

        Click on Start>Run, then type in cmd and click OK.



        This will bring up an MSDos prompt. At the command line type in ipconfig /all and hit the Enter on your keyboard. This will display Windows IP Configuration. Under Ethernet Adapter Loacal Area Connection, look for the Physical Address.



        Step 1 Make sure that your DI-804, modem and computer are correctly connected and powered-up. Open your browser and type http://192.168.0.1 in the Address window, then hit the Enter key on your keyboard. This will connect you to the Web Configuration Utility inside the DI-804. You are not on the Internet at this point. Click on Basic Setup. Then you will be prompted for the DI-804īs Username and Password.



        By default, the Username is admin and no Password is required, unless you have configured one, otherwise leave the Password field blank.

        Step 2 In the Basic Setup menu, click on ISP Additional Settings. Click on Your ISP requires you to input the WAN Ethernet MAC address.



        Step 3 Enter the MAC address of the network card. Remember this must be the MAC address that is registered with Cox. Once the MAC address is enterned click Next. Then Next again through Modem Settings. Now you need to click on Save & Restart.



        Please wait a moment while the DI-804 restarts.

        Step 4 Once the DI-804 is restarted click on Device Status. You should now have a link between the DI-804 and your modem. Now you are ready to surf the net.


        Troubleshooting Note:

        Recycling the power on your cable modem, the DI-804 and your computer will usually resolve any connectivity problems as long as you are sure that you have entered the correctly registered MAC address and your physical connections are secured.

        Start by shutting down the cable modem and the DI-804 and waiting for at least thirty seconds. Power up the cable modem, waiting for it to completely stabilize and then turn on the DI-804. Once the DI-804 is powered up you can either release and renew your IP address if you know how to do that, or you can just simply restart your computer.

        It may take up to five minutes to establish an Internet connection, so itīs best to be a little patient at this point.

        Upgrade firmware now

        UPnP Support
        Model DI-711revB1 / DI-714 / DI-804 / DI-804V
        Question How do I configure my DI-711 or DI-714 to connect to a cable modem?
        Answer This FAQ is for a Dynamic and Static Cable connection (I.E. ATnT-BI, Cox, Adelphia, Rogers, Roadrunner, Charter, and Comcast).

        Note: Please configure the router with the computer that was last connected directly to the cable modem.

        Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by typing in the IP address of the router (default:192.168.0.1) in your web browser. The username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).

        Step 2 Click on the Basic Setup tab. Dynamic IP Address is the default value, however, if Dynamic IP Address is not selected as the WAN type, select Dynamic IP Address by clicking on the radio button. Click Save and Restart.



        Step 3 Click on the Device Status tab and verify that you have a solid link between the router and the modem.

        If you do not have a solid link between the modem and the router follow the steps below:

      • Turn the cable modem off (first)
      • Turn the router off
      • Leave them off for 2 minutes**
      • Turn the cable modem on (first)
      • Wait until you get a solid cable light on the cable modem
      • Turn the router on
      • Wait 30 seconds

        ** If you have a Motorola (Surf Board) modem, leave off for at least 5 minutes.

        Step 4 Follow Step 1 again and log back into the web configuration. Click the Device Status tab . If you do not already have a public IP address under the WAN Ethernet heading, click on the DHCP Release and Renew buttons.




        Setup Static Cable Connection

        Step 1 Log into the web based configuration by typing in the IP address of the router (default:192.168.0.1) in your web browser. The username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).

        Step 2 Click the Basic Setup tab. Select the Static IP Address radio button and enter in your static settings obtained from the ISP in the fields provided.

        Note: If you do not know your settings, you must contact your ISP.

        Step 3 Click on Save and Restart.

        Step 4 Click on the Device Status tab and verify that you have a solid link between the router and the modem.

        If you do not have a solid link between the modem and the router follow the steps below:
      • Power cycle the cable modem and router.
      • Turn the cable modem off (first)
      • Turn the router off
      • Leave them off for 2 minutes**
      • Turn the cable modem on (first)
      • Wait until you get a solid cable light on the cable modem
      • Turn the router on
      • Wait 30 seconds

        ** If you have a Motorola (Surf Board) modem, leave off for at least 5 minutes.
        • Model DI-711revB1 / DI-714 / DI-804 / DI-804V / DI-711b
        Question How do I reset the DI-711, DI-714, DI-804, or DI-804V?
        Answer There are two ways to reset the unit back to the factory default settings.

        Through the web-based interface:
        Step 1 Log into the web based configuration by typing in the IP address of the router (default:192.168.0.1) in your web browser. The username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).

        Step 2 Click on the System Tools tab and go to the Load Default Settings tab on the left.



        Step 3 Click on the Start button to proceed. This will now load the unit back to factory settings.

        Note: The Device IP Address will be reset to 192.168.0.1 after loading the default settings.


        Perform a hard reset:
        Step 1 Power the unit off by unplugging its power adapter (from the unit, not the wall).

        Step 2 Insert a paper clip into the reset pinhole. Press and hold the reset button with light pressure.

        Step 3 Power the device back on by plugging it in. Continue to hold the reset button.

        Step 4 Watch the lights on the front of the gateway. The status light and wireless light will power off. Once both lights are powered off release the reset button.

        Step 5 The unit will reboot and now will be reset to default settings.
        Model DI-713P
        Question Does my Ximeta Netdisk work with a DI-713P (via wireless)?
        Answer Unfortunatley no. The Ximeta Netdisk uses a protocol that the DI-713P does not support. The DI-713P has reached its end of life and will no longer be developed by D-Link.
        Model DI-713P
        Question How do I configure MAC Address Control on my D-Link DI-713P?
        Answer The DI-713P provides three features in MAC Address Control: Fixed IP Mapping, Connection Control, and Association Control. You can enable these features by checking the "Enable" box on the MAC Address Control Page of the device configuration.

        Fixed IP Mapping:
        This feature lets you map an IP address to a client computer based on an adapterīs MAC address. Each client in the Control Table will get the IP address mapping to its MAC address.

        *If you donīt want to assign a fixed IP to a specific client, just leave the IP address blank.*

        Connection Control:
        This feature lets you to allow or deny wired and wireless clients the ability to connect to this device and the internet. Check "Connection Control" to enable this type of control.

        If a client is denied the ability to connect to this device, it means that the client can not access the internet and network resources. Choose "Allow" or "Deny" to allow or deny clients whose MAC addresses are not listed in the Control Table.

        Association Control:
        The association process is the exchange of information between wireless clients and this device to establish a link between them. A wireless client is capable of transmitting and receiving data to this device only after the association process is successfully completed.

        Association control lets you to allow or deny the ability of wireless clients to link up to this device. Check "Association Control" to control which of the wireless clients will be able to associate to the wireless LAN. If a client is denied the ability to associate to the wireless LAN, it means that the client canīt send or receive any data through this device. Choose "Allow" or "Deny" to allow or deny clients whose MAC addresses are not listed in the Control Table.



        Control Table:
        The Control Table is at the bottom of the MAC Address Control page. Each row of this table indicates the MAC address and the mapped IP address of a client. There are four columns in this table:

        MAC Address:
        Indicates a specific clientīs MAC address.

        IP Address:
        Expected IP address of the corresponding client. Leave it blank if you donīt want to assign a specified IP address to the corresponding client.

        C:
        When Connection Control is enabled and set to Allow, checking "C" will allow the corresponding client the ability to connect to this device. If Connection Control is enabled and set to Deny, checking "C" will deny the corresponding client the ability to connect to this device.

        A:
        When Association Control is enabled and set to Allow, checking "A" will allow the corresponding wireless client the ability to associate with the LAN. If Association Control is enabled and set to Deny, checking "A" will deny the corresponding wireless client the ability to associate with the LAN. No wireless conneciton will be made.

        Previous Page / Next Page
        To make this setup page simple and clear, we have divided the "Control Table" into several pages. You can use these buttons to navigate to different pages.

        Example:



        Description:
        In this scenario, there are three clients listed in the Control Table. Clients 1 and 2 are wireless, and client 3 is wired.

        The MAC Address Control function is enabled.

        Connection Control is enabled, and all of the wired and wireless clients not listed in the Control Table are allowed to connect to this device.

        Association Control is enabled, and all of the wireless clients not listed in the Control Table are denied the ability to associate to the wireless LAN.

        Clients 1 and 3 have fixed IP addresses either from the DHCP server of this device or manually assigned:
        ID 1 - 00-12-34-56-78-90 --> 192.168.1.100
        ID 3 - 00-98-76-54-32-10 --> 192.168.1.101

        Client 2 will obtain its IP address from the IP Address pool specified on the DHCP Server page of the device configuration, or can use a manually assigned static IP address.

        If, for example, client 3 tries to use an IP address different from the address listed in the Control Table (192.168.1.101), it will be denied to connect to this device.

        Clients 2 and 3 and other wired clients with a MAC address unspecified in the Control Table are all allowed to connect to this device. But client 1 is denied to connect to this device.

        Clients 1 and 2 are allowed to associate to the wireless LAN, but a wireless client with a MAC address not specified in the Control Table is denied the ability to associate to the wireless LAN. Client 3 is a wired client and so is not affected by Association Control.
        Model DI-713P
        Question I have a DI-713P and Iīm using both wired and wireless computers. Why can my wired computers connect to the Internet but my wireless computers cannot?
        Answer If your wired computers can connect to the Internet but your wireless computers cannot, upgrade the firmware to version 2.56b6a or higher.

      • How do I upgrade the firmware? (Linux and Macintosh)
      • How do I upgrade the firmware? (Windows)
        • Model DI-713P
        Question How do I enable Encryption on the DI-713p wireless router?
        Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless router before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

        Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

        Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DI-713P by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

        Step 2 Type in the password in the System Password field (default: admin) and click on the Log In button. Select the wireless link at the bottom.



        Step 3 Under Security select either 64 or 128-bit WEP encryption. Select ID 1. Enter a random Hex encryption key that you make up. The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption.

      • 64-bit encryption 10 characters
      • 128-bit encryption 26 characters

        The encryption key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters.



        Step 4 Click on Save and then click Reboot.

        Note: Make sure you use the same Hex encryption key on all your wireless devices.
        • Model DI-713P
        Question Why do I receive an error when trying to upgrade firmware on the DI-713P from 2.57b3a1 to 2.60b6a?
        Answer You cannot upgrade to 2.60b6a from 2.57b3a. You must upgrade to 2.60b2 first. Visit http://support.dlink.com/products/view.asp?productid=DI-713P for links to firmware download and revision information.
        Model DI-713P / DI-704P / DI-707P / DI-707P_revC / DI-704P_revB / DI-704P_revC
        Question If the D-Link print server is bi-directional why then is my printer unable to report its status information back to my PC?
        Answer D-Linkīs print servers are IEEE1284 bi-directional compatible. This means that data can be sent and received in both directions between the printer and the D-Link print server. Toner status, paper level, and etc. will not be communicated back to the PC. In order to get printer status information, the proprietary printer driver has embedded code that needs to be passed on to the print server, decoded, then interpreted by the print server. Embedded driver codes are not supported by D-Link print servers. D-Linkīs print servers, whether in Gateways or StandAlone, are plain TCP/IP print servers.
        Model DI-713P / DI-704P / DI-707P / DI-707P_revC / DI-704P_revB / DI-704P_revC
        Question Iīm sure all my settings are correct and my printer is compatible, but I canīt print through the router print server. What can I do?
        Answer

        Try changing the Spool Data Format setting in the printers control panel from EMS to RAW.

        Step 1 Go to Start>Settings>Printers.

        Step 2 Right click your printer icon and select Properties.

        Step 3 From the properties screen, select the Details tab. Click on the Spool Settings button at the bottom of the window.

        Step 4 From the Spool data format: select RAW from the drop-down menu. Click OK to close out of Spool Settings and OK again to close out of the printer properties screen. Close the Printers control panel and try printing to the DI-713P with these new settings.



        In some cases, you may need to disable bidirectional printing.

      • What printers are compatible with my print server?
      • Why is my printer unable to report its status information back to my PC?
        • Model DI-713P / DI-704P / DI-714P+/ DI-707P / DWL-704P / DI-704P_revB / DI-704P_revC / DI-704UP / DI-707P_revC
        Question How do I configure my Windows 2000 and Windows XP computers to print to the DI-704P, DI-714P+, DI-707P, DI-704UP, or DI-713P?
        Answer You may print without the D-Link Printer software in Windows 2000/XP. Hereīs how:

        Step 1 Go to Start>Settings>Printers>Add New Printer (WinXP - Start>Printers and Faxes>Add a Printer).

        Step 2 Select Local Printer. Make sure to uncheck Automatically detect and install my plug and play printer. Click Next.



        Step 3 Select Create a New Port and select Standard TCP/IP port. Click Next.



        Step 4 Enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Leave the port name with the default name. Click Next.



        Step 5 You will get a message saying that additional port information required.

        Step 6 Select Custom and then click Settings.



        Step 7 Set Protocol to LPR.

        Step 8 For the LPR Settings, queue name is lp. It is case sensitive! (LP lower-case). In most cases, check LPR Byte Counting Enabled. If you cannot print, then try unchecking this.



        Step 9 Select OK > Finish.

        Step 10 Continue with the Add Printer Wizard. Choose your printer from the list or click Have Disk and point to your printer driver disk.



        Model DI-713P / DI-704P/revA DI-704P/revB / DI-714P+
        Question What printers are compatible with the D-Link gateway/print servers like the DI-704P, DI-713P, or the DI-714P+?
        Answer Compatibility list for the DI-704P, DI-713P, and DI-714P+. If you are using a multi-function printer, you may not be able to use functions other than printing.

        If your printer is not on the list or you are having problems with your printer, please contact the printer manufacture for an up-to-date list of print server compatible printers.

        The list below has older printers that are compatible. If your printer was purchased in the last few years, it should work with our print server. Newer models are most likely designed to work in a network environment. Please check with the printer manufacture for compatibility with a print server.



        *1-----------------For Epson Stylus Color Series:--------------------
        In the Epson Spool check Use Print Manager for this port.



        *2----------------------- Fujitsu DL-1100:---------------------------
        1. Add the new printer driver: Start>Settings>Printers.
        2. Choose the printer port, Print to the following port to PRTMate (All-in-one).
        3. Use the IP Address of the print server in the Port Settings...configuration.

        *3--------------------For Lexmark OPTRAE:-------------------------
        1. Add the new printer driver: Start>Settings>Printers.
        2. Choose the printer port, Print to the following port to PRTMate (All-in-one).
        3. Use the IP Address of the print server in the Port Settings... configuration.
        4. Choose the Disable bi-directional support for this printer option in the Spool Settings.

      • Read more regarding Lexmark printers here.

        *4-----------------Using Windows 2000 Built-in LPR Port----------------

        Step 1 Go to Start>Settings>Printers. Right click on your printer icon and select Properties.

        Step 2 From the printer Properties window select the Ports tab and click on Add Port.



        Step 3 Select Lpr Ports from the Printer Ports window and click on New Port.



        Step 4 Enter the IP address of the print server(gateway IP address) and the queue name of lp. This is case sensitive. Make sure that you use lower case "lp". Click OK once you have configured this information.



        Step 5 In the printer properties window make sure that you select the new port you just created before closing the printer properties window. This completes the configuration of lpr.

      • Why wonīt my Hewlett-Packard printer work with my D-Link print server?
      • How can I print from my Windows 2000 or XP machine?
      • Why is my printer unable to report its status information back to my PC?
      • Can I print from my Macintosh?
      • Why wonīt my Lexmark printer work with my D-Link print server?
        • Model DI-713P / DI-704P_revA / DI-704_revB / DI-704P_revC / DI-704UP / DI-824VUP / DI-707P / DI-714P+
        Question Is the print server software that is included with my router supported in Macintosh operating systems?
        Answer There are no plans to have Macintosh software for the print server feature of our routers.

        If you can perform port-based printing (OSX), you do not need printer software. Just print to the IP of the router (default is 192.168.0.1) and the Print Queue Name is lp (a lower case "L" and a lower case "P"). Use the current drivers for your printer. In some cases you made need postscript drivers for your printer from the manufacturer (if available). This feature is not supported by D-Link, as per packaging.

        Please visit http://gimp-print.sourceforge.net/MacOSX.php3 for 3rd party drivers that may work with your D-Link router. D-Link does not and will not support these drivers. Use at your own risk.

        Please do not keep the product in anticipation of Macintosh compatibility. Please return your product to your reseller.

        Our apologies and thank you for considering D-Link products.
        Model DI-713P / DI-713 / DI-704P_revA / DI-704 / DI-704P
        Question My DI-713P will not respond, how do I crash recover my router?
        Answer Note: If your DI-713P is working properly, DO NOT upgrade the firmware or use crash recovery mode. Only update the firmware if it specifically addresses your problem. Never apply a firmware update over a wireless connection.

        Although this FAQ was written for the DI-713P, it also applies to the DI-704 and DI-704P (revA).

        Step 1 Download the firmware for your DI-713P and save it to your Desktop. Below are links to the recomended firmware version for Crash Recovery Mode.

        Download the firmware for your DI-713P here

        Download the firmware for your DI-704P (revA) here

        Download the firmware for your DI-704 here

        Step 2 Unzip the firmware files to your desktop so they are ready and accessible.

        How I extract the firmware?

        Step 3 Assign the Network Card a static IP address of 192.168.0.10 with a Subnet Mask of 255.255.255.0 and a Default Gateway of 192.168.0.1.

        How do I assign my computer a static IP address?

        Step 4 Power off the DI-713P. With the device powered off, press and hold the reset button using a paper clip or similar object. With the reset button still depressed, power on the DI-713P. Continue to hold the reset button. When the M1 & M2 begin flashing rapidly, release the reset button.

        Step 5 Go to the firmware executable file you unzipped and double click on it. The DI-713P’s IP address should be found in the Firmware Upgrade window with crash next to it. You will not need to enter a password. Click on Upgrade and once the device has been successfully upgraded you will see Crash Recover Successful.



        Step 6 The DI-713P should now reboot itself and be working properly.

        Step 7 If the DI-713P is accessible, you can set the Network Card back to Obtain IP Address Automatically.
        Model DI-714P+
        Question How do I enable WEP encryption on my DI-714P+ wireless router?
        Answer It is recommended to enable WEP encryption on your wireless router before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

        Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

        Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DI-714P+ by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

        Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click on the OK button. Select the Home tab and then the Wireless button on the left hand side of the screen.



        Step 3 Select Enable next to the WEP radio buttons. For WEP encryption select 64, 128, or 256-bit encryption. For the Key type select HEX.

        Step 4 Select WEP Key 1 and enter a Hex encryption key that you make up. The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption.

      • 64-bit encryption 10 characters
      • 128-bit encryption 26 characters
      • 256-bit encryption 58 characters

        The encryption key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters (IE 67D3AF4978).

        Step 5 Click on the Apply button and then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
        • Model DI-714P+
        Question The M2 light is on solid on my DI-714P+, but I can still connect to the Internet. Is the router really broken like the quick install guide implies?
        Answer No the gateway is not broken. The information on page 3 of the QIG relating to the M1 and M2 lights is incorrect. The M1 light should be blinking about once a second indicating the device is ready. The M2 light will come on solid when the device gets authenticated by the ISP and goes online.
        Model DI-714P+
        Question Does my Ximeta Netdisk work with a DI-714p+ (via wireless)?
        Answer Yes, but the DI-714P+ must have firmware version 1.31.

        Download firmware here.
        Model DI-724GU
        Question What steps can I take to improve the speed of my Internet connection, when using the DI-724GU?
        Answer By default the Stream Engine is enabled and set to prioritze certian types of traffic. You can try disabling the Stream Engine to see if it improves your browsing speeds.

        Step 1 Open a web browser, such as Internet Explorer or Netscape, and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1).

        Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (there is no password by default). Click Log In to enter the web configuration for the device.



        Step 3 Click the Advanced tab, and Stream Engine. Select Disable and click Apply.

        Model DI-724GU / DI-724U
        Question How do I setup the print server on my DI-724GU router?
        Answer Step 1 Log into the router and select the Run Printer Wizard button.
        By default, the routerīs IP is 192.168.0.1 and the username is admin, and no password (leave blank).



        You will now proceed on with the printer wizard.

        Step 2 Click Next to proceed.



        Step 3 Make sure that the router/print server recognizes your printer. If it does proceed by selecting Next. If itīs not listed, select the refresh button.

        *Note: If itīs not listed after many attempts to refresh, it could be possible that your printer is not compatible with this Router/Print Server.

        Step 4 Select the Next button after youīve confirmed that the printer is recognized.



        Step 5 Select Next to start the download of the PrinterSetup.exe.



        Step 6 Insert the driver CD that came with your printer.



        Step 7 Select the destination that youīd like to save the executable to.
        It would be suggested to save to your desktop to find it easier.



        Step 8 Once the file has been downloaded, double click on the Printer_setup.exe file to start the configuration process.



        A screen will pop up, showing you the status of the install.



        In the event that the printer drivers do not install, it will ask for the location of the drivers.



        Once youīve found the drivers and it finishes the install process you will be prompted to print a test page.



        You should now be able to print through the network.



        If youīre still experiencing problems printing, use the following steps:.

        Step 1 Click Tools and Print Server. Make sure that both LPR and RAW are enabled.



        Step 2 Verify if the printer status says "ready."



        If all of the above steps were attempted and youīre not able to print, it could be possible that your printer and this print server are not compatible.
        Model DI-724U / DI-624S
        Question How do I use Windows Connect Now (WCN) to configure my USB drive to be available on my network via my DI-624S/DI-724U?
        Answer Note: You must be running Windows XP with SP2 and you must have functioning USB ports on the computer, compatible access points and any wireless client computers.

        Step 1: Click on Start / Program / Accessories / Communication / Wireless Setup Wizard.

        Note: Do not plug your flash drive into the USB port at this time.



        Step 2: The Welcome to the Wireless Network Wizard screen will appear. Click on Next.



        Step 3: For the first time setup select Set up a new wireless network and then click Next.



        Step 4: In the Network name SSID window give your network a name. You have 3 options for configuring your wireless network; Automatically assign a network key, Manually assign a network key, Use WPA encryption instead of WEP.

        Select Automatically assign a network key(recommended)



        Step 5: If you select Automatically assign a network key it will select a 128 bit key. If you wish to use 64-bit encryption select Manually assign a network key. Click on Next.



        Step 6: Select Use a USB flash drive and then click Next.



        Step 7: Windows will prompt you to plug in your USB drive. It will detect the drive name and give it a drive letter.

        Click on Next and the wireless configuration file will be saved on your USB drive.



        Step 8: Properly remove the USB drive from the PC and plug it into the USB port of the DI-724U or DI-624S. Log into the router with the default IP address of http://192.168.0.1. The username is admin and there is no password. Click on the Home tab and then on the Wizard button to the left. Locate WCN Wizard and click on Configure Now Using WCN.



        Step 9: Click on Reboot.



        Step 10: Click on the Home tab and then on the Wireless button to the left to confirm the wireless settings have changed. It will upload the configuration to your USB drive itself.

        Wireless security settings will be determined by the security you select when using the Wireless Network Setup Wizard.



        Step 11: After configuring your DI-724U or DI-624S remove the USB drive and follow the previous steps to transfer your settings to your other computers or wirless access points. Replace the USB drive to the PC and click on OK.



        Step 12: Select Add new computer or device and then click on Next.



        Step 13: Click on OK.



        Step 14: Remove the USB drive and follow the previous steps to transfer your settings to your other computers or wirless access points. Replace the USB drive to the PC and click on OK.
        Model DI-724U / DI-724GU
        Question Which printers are compatible with the DI-724U and DI-724GU for printing only?
        Answer The following lists the printers that have been successfully tested for compatibility with the DI-724U and DI-724GU Routers. An independent laboratory performed the tests for printer compatibility.

        Each test environment consisted of the following components:

        • PC operating under below network operating systems
        • Windows XP – NetBUI, TCP/IP
        • Windows 2000 – NetBUI, TCP/IP
        • The above PC is equipped with an 802.11g wireless network adapter and a 10/100BASE – TX Ethernet interface.
        • 802.11g wireless access point and/or router.
        • 10/100BASE – TX Ethernet switch.
        • D-Link DPR-1260 Multifunction Wireless USB Print Server
        • Printer under test.

        Choose a manufacturer below for a complete list of supported models:

        Brother
        Canon
        Epson
        Hewlet Packard
        Samsung




        Brother

        DCP-1400
        HL-1050
        HL-1250
        HL1400
        HL-1435
        HL-1440
        HL-1850
        HL-2040
        HL-2460
        HL-3745
        HL-5040
        HL-5140
        HL-5150
        HL-5240
        HL-6050
        MFC-210C
        MFC-240C
        MFC-3220
        MFC-3240C
        MFC-3420
        MFC-420
        MFC-4800
        MFC-7220
        MFC-7420
        MFC-8220
        MFC-8440
        MFC-8840



        Canon

        i30
        i70
        i80
        i250
        i320
        i350
        i450
        i455
        i470
        i475
        i550
        i560
        i850
        i860
        i900D
        i950
        i960
        i965
        i3000
        i6100
        i6500
        i9100
        i9900
        LBP-350
        LBP-4
        LBP-430
        LBP-460
        LBP-465
        LBP-8II
        LBP-8III
        LBP-8SX
        LBP-860
        LBP-1260
        LBP-1310
        LBP-1510
        LBP-1610
        LBP-1810
        LBP-1910
        LBP-2050
        LBP-2300
        LBP-2510
        LBP-2710
        LBP-3200
        PIXMA iP90
        PIXMA iP1000
        PIXMA iP1500
        PIXMA iP1600
        PIXMA iP1700
        PIXMA iP2000
        PIXMA iP3000
        PIXMA iP4000
        PIXMA iP4200
        PIXMA iP5000
        PIXMA iP5200
        PIXMA iP6000
        PIXMA iP6210
        PIXMA iP6220
        PIXMA iP6600
        PIXMA iP8500
        PIXMA MP130
        PIXMA MP150
        PIXMA MP160
        PIXMA MP170
        PIXMA MP180
        PIXMA MP390
        PIXMA MP450
        PIXMA MP460
        PIXMA MP500
        PIXMA MP530
        PIXMA MP630
        PIXMA MP730
        PIXMA MP750
        PIXMA MP760
        PIXMA MP780
        PIXMA MP800
        PIXMA MP830
        PIXMA MP950
        PIXMA Pro9000
        PIXMA Pro9500



        Epson

        850PT
        Stylus CX1500
        Stylus CX3800
        Stylus CX4200
        Stylus CX4600
        Stylus CX5100
        Stylus CX5200
        Stylus CX5400
        Stylus CX5800
        Stylus CX6600
        Stylus CX7800
        Stylus C20UX
        Stylus C40S
        Stylus C40UX
        Stylus C42UX
        Stylus C44UX
        Stylus C44
        Stylus C45
        Stylus C60
        Stylus C62
        Stylus C63
        Stylus C64
        Stylus C66
        Stylus C80
        Stylus C82
        Stylus C84
        Stylus C86
        Stylus C88
        Stylus Photo
        Stylus Photo EX
        Stylus Photo 700
        Stylus Photo 750
        Stylus Photo 780
        Stylus Photo 785EPX
        Stylus Photo 800
        Stylus Photo 810
        Stylus Photo 820
        Stylus Photo 825
        Stylus Photo 830
        Stylus Photo 850
        Stylus Photo 860
        Stylus Photo 870
        Stylus Photo 875
        Stylus Photo 880
        Stylus Photo 890
        Stylus Photo 895
        Stylus Photo 900
        Stylus Photo 925
        Stylus Photo 960
        Stylus Photo 1200
        Stylus Photo 1270
        Stylus Photo 1280
        Stylus Photo 2000P
        Stylus Photo 2200
        Stylus Photo 2400
        Stylus Photo R200
        Stylus Photo R220
        Stylus Photo R300
        Stylus Photo R310
        Stylus Photo R320
        Stylus Photo R340
        Stylus Photo R800
        Stylus Photo R1800
        Stylus Photo R2400
        Stylus Photo RX500
        Stylus Photo RX620
        Stylus Photo RX700



        Hewlet Packard

        Color LaserJet 1500 DeskJet 3420
        DeskJet 3520
        DeskJet 3550
        DeskJet 3650
        DeskJet 3745
        DeskJet 3820
        DeskJet 3848
        DeskJet 3915
        DeskJet 3930
        DeskJet 3940
        DeskJet 450 cbi
        DeskJet 5150
        DeskJet 5440
        DeskJet 5650
        DeskJet 5740
        DeskJet 5850
        DeskJet 5940
        DeskJet 6122
        DeskJet 640C
        DeskJet 6540
        DeskJet 6840
        DeskJet 7260
        DeskJet 822
        DeskJet 840C
        DeskJet 890C
        DeskJet 948C
        DeskJet 970Cxi
        DeskJet 9800
        DeskJet 990Cxi
        DeskJet D2330
        DeskJet D2360
        DeskJet D4100
        DeskJet D4160
        DeskJet F380
        InkJet 1100D
        InkJet 1200D
        InkJet 2300
        Color LaserJet 1600
        LaserJet 1018
        LaserJet 1012
        LaserJet 1020
        LaserJet 1022
        LaserJet 1150
        LaserJet 1160
        LaserJet 1200
        LaserJet 1300
        LaserJet 1315
        LaserJet 1320
        LaserJet 2200/D
        LaserJet 2420
        LaserJet 3015
        LaserJet 3020
        LaserJet 3030
        LaserJet 3050
        LaserJet 3052
        LaserJet 3055
        LaserJet 3380
        LaserJet 4250
        LaserJet 5100
        LaserJet 5200
        OfficeJet 6310
        OfficeJet Pro K850
        Photosmart 145
        Photosmart 245
        Photosmart 325
        PhotoSmart 330
        PhotoSmart 335
        PhotoSmart 375
        PhotoSmart 380
        PhotoSmart 385
        Photosmart 425
        PhotoSmart 428
        PhotoSmart 470
        PhotoSmart 475
        PhotoSmart 1000
        PhotoSmart 1215
        PhotoSmart 7150
        Photosmart 7260
        PhotoSmart 7350
        Photosmart 7450
        PhotoSmart 7550
        PhotoSmart 7620
        Photosmart 7660
        Photosmart 7755
        PhotoSmart 7760
        PhotoSmart 7850
        Photosmart 7960
        PhotoSmart 8000
        PhotoSmart 8050
        Photosmart 8150
        PhotoSmart 8200
        PhotoSmart 8250
        PhotoSmart 8450
        Photosmart 8750
        PhotoSmart A432
        PhotoSmart A434
        PhotoSmart A510
        PhotoSmart A516
        PhotoSmart A610
        PhotoSmart A616
        PhotoSmart A710
        PhotoSmart A716
        PhotoSmart Pro B9180
        PhotoSmart C3180
        PhotoSmart D7300
        PhotoSmart D7360
        PSC 750
        PSC 950
        PSC 2210
        PSC 2610
        PSC 6840
        PSC 7410



        Samsung

        ML-1710
        ML-1740
        ML-2010
        Model DI-754
        Question How do I enable Encryption on the DI-754 wireless router?
        Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless router or access point before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

        Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

        Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DI-754 by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

        Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case), and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK. Select the Home tab and then click on the Wireless button on the left side.

        Step 3 Under wireless settings select either 802.11a or 802.11b+. Select enable for the WEP settings.

      • 802.11a -- Choose 64, 128, or 152-bit encryption and HEX for the key type. Select key 1. Enter a Hex encryption key that you make up. The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption. The encryption key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters.

      • 64-bit encryption 10 characters
      • 128-bit encryption 26 characters
      • 152-bit encryption 32 characters

      • 802.11b+ -- Choose 64, 128, or 256-bit encryption and HEX for the key type. Select key 1. Enter a hex encryption key that you make up. The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption. The encryption key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters.

      • 64-bit encryption 10 characters
      • 128-bit encryption 26 characters
      • 256-bit encryption 58 characters

        Step 4 Click on the Apply button then click on the continue button to save your settings.
        • Model DI-764
        Question How do I upgrade the firmware on the DI-764?
        Answer Follow the directions below to upgrade the firmware for the D-Link DI-764 router.

        Please read before upgrade:
      • Do not upgrade firmware unless you are having specific problems ("If it ainīt broke, donīt fix it").
      • Upgrading firmware will reset the settings to default which means you will lose all your settings.
      • You cannot use the backup settings feature and apply it to the newer firmware.
      • Do NOT upgrade firmware with a wireless connection. You will damage the router.


        Mac users read here

        Getting Started:

        Note: You must use Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher to successfully apply the firmware upgrade. Netscape users you must use version 4.79 or higher.

        There are security issues with earlier browsers that will prevent the firmware upgrade from successfully updating.

        Internet Explorer 6 Download Now
        Netscape 6 Download Now



        Step 1 Download the firmware and save the file to your computer. Extract the .BIN file to a folder where you can find it. An easy place to find it is your desktop. If you download the .bin file, you do not have to extract it.

        Download firmware for DI-764 here.
        How do I extract a file?

        Step 2 Connect your modem to the WAN port on the router. Verify the link light is lit. Connect your computer to port #1 on the router. Again verify a link light.

        Step 3 Release and Renew the IP address on your computer. Your new IP address will be in the 192.168.0.100 to 192.168.0.199 range.

        How do I release and renew on Windows 95, 98, or Me?
        How do I release and renew on Windows NT, 2000, or XP?
        How do I statically assign an IP address?

        If you receive any error messages at this point, you may either have a problem with the functionality of your network card, or it may not be configured to obtain an address automatically in the TCP/IP properties.


        WARNING: DO NOT upgrade the firmware with a wireless connection. You will damage the router.


        Step 4 Open your browser, enter the IP address of the DI-764 router (192.168.0.1) and click OK.



        Step 5 For username enter admin and leave the password field blank, which is the default password. Click OK to enter the web configuration for the device.





        Step 6 Click on the Tools button and then Firmware. Click on the Browse button and browse to the .bin file you extracted in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click Open. Click Apply. It will take a few seconds for the upgrade to complete. Click on the Continue button.

        Step 7 After the router reboots, close your web browser and reopen it. Enter 192.168.0.1 to reconnect with the web configuration. Enter username admin and again leave the password blank. Click OK. The firmware upgrade is now complete.

        Step 8 If you cannot access the web configuration at this point, unplug the power to the router, wait 10 seconds, and plug back in. Repeat step 7. If this did not help, perform a hard reset on the router. To perform a hard reset, use a paperclip and hold down the reset button on the back of the unit for 10 seconds. Release it and the router will reboot, the lights will blink, and then stabilize. Repeat Step 7.

        Step 9 You can now reconfigure the router for your WAN connection type.

        • Model DI-764
        Question How do I enable Encryption on the DI-764 wireless router?
        Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless router before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

        Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

        Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DI-764 by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

        Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK. Select the Home tab and then click the Wireless button on the left hand side of the screen.

        Step 3 Under Wireless Settings select either 802.11a or 802.11b+. Select enable for the WEP settings.



      • 802.11a -- Choose 64, 128, or 152-bit encryption and HEX for the key type. Select key 1. Enter a Hex encryption key that you make up. The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption.

      • 64-bit encryption 10 characters
      • 128-bit encryption 26 characters
      • 152-bit encryption 32 characters

      • 802.11b+ -- Choose 64, 128, or 256-bit encryption and HEX for the key type. Select key 1. Enter a Hex encryption key that you make up. The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption.

      • 64-bit encryption 10 characters
      • 128-bit encryption 26 characters
      • 256-bit encryption 58 characters

        Step 4 The encryption key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters.

        Step 5 Click on the Apply button and then click on the continue button to save your settings.
        • Model DI-764
        Question How do I upgrade the firmware on the DI-764 using a Macintosh or Linux computer?
        Answer Warning: When updating firmware, you will lose all your settings. Also, you will not be able to save a backup file and load it to the new firmware.

        Step 1. Create a Folder on the Desktop Screen:
        From a blank spot the Desktop Screen, press and hold the Control key on the keyboard and click the mouse button. Release the Control key, click New Folder, and name it firmware.
        Step 2. Retrieve Firmware from Website:
        Click link below and download file to the folder created in step 1.

        Download DI-764 Firmware here

        Step 3. Upgrade the Firmware:

        A. From the Main Desktop Screen, launch Internet Explorer or Netscape.

        B. Type 192.168.0.1 in the Address bar and click Go.

        C. For the User ID, type admin and click OK.

        D. Click Tools on the top and then click Firmware on the left side.

        E. Click Browse>Desktop>firmware, double click di764_firmware_xxx.bin and click Apply. Wait for approx. 15 seconds or until the M2 light stops flashing on the unit then click Continue.

        F. This takes you back to the Tools page. Check the Current Firmware Version on the Tools page to confirm that the firmware loaded successfully.
        Model DI-764
        Question How do I reset my DI-764 back to the factory default settings?
        Answer To perform a reset, please follow steps below:

        Step 1 With the unit on, place a paper clip into the hole on the back on the unit labeled Reset.

        Step 2 Hold paper clip down for 10 seconds and release.

        Note: Do not repower unit during this procedure.

        Step 3 The unit will reboot on its own. Once the WLAN light stops blinking, the unit is reset.

        Resetting the router does not reset the firmware to an earlier version. It will change all settings back to factory defaults.
        Model DI-774 / DI-774_revB
        Question How do I configure my DI-774 router?
        Answer Click on the links below for specific configuration instructions.

        Connect to the Internet: Basic Configuration:

        Wireless Settings: Advanced Features: Troubleshooting:
        Model DI-784
        Question How do I configure my DI-784 router?
        Answer Click on the links below for specific configuration instructions.

        Connect to the Internet: Basic Configuration:

        Wireless Settings: Advanced Features: Troubleshooting:
        Model DI-804
        Question How can I change my MTU setting on my DI-804?
        Answer Download and unzip the latest firmware from our Support Site to your computer.

        Step 1: Open your web browser and connect to the DI-804īs web configuration utility by entering 192.168.0.1 into the Address window of your browser and hitting the Enter key.

        Step 2: Click Advanced Settings. Enter your username and password to continue (username=admin, no password).

        Step 3: Click System Parameters on the left side.

        Step 4: Enter value of your choice

        Step 5: Click Submit

        Step 6: Click Save and Restart

        If you do not have a specific MTU setting from your ISP, DO NOT change the value.
        Model DI-804
        Question I am unable to access the DI-804īs web configuration, however, I can access the internet through the device, why?
        Answer Sometimes the Dial-up settings can interfere with accessibility to the DI-804īs web configuration. Follow the steps below to modify your dial-up settings.

        Step 1 From the main desktop screen on your computer go to Start>Settings>Control Panel.

        Step 2 Double-click Internet Options. Select the Connections tab. Remove any or all dial-up settings that may be present in the Dial-up Settings box. If there arenīt any dial-up settings entered, please proceed to Step 3.

        Step 3 Click the LAN Settings button, uncheck all check boxes.

        Step 4 Click OK twice, closing the Internet Explorer Properties, bringing you back to Control Panel.

        Step 5 Close out of Control Panel, back to the main desktop screen.

        Step 6 Make sure to disable any firewall software such as Black Ice, Zone Alarm, etc. Firewall software will interfere with the accessibility to the DI-804.

        Please contact the firewall software manufacturer for instructions on how to disable it.

        Step 7 Open Internet Explorer.

        Step 8 Type in 192.168.0.1 in the address bar and click Go. Donīt type in http:// before the 192.168.0.1.

        Step 9 You should now be able to get into the web configuration of the DI-804.

        Note: For browsers other than Internet Explorer, you need to find the corresponding control panels or preferences configuration files and make the same changes as outlined in this FAQ.
        Model DI-804
        Question How do I use the System Logging option in the DI-804?
        Answer The DI-804 offers two methods of logging, an internal logging mechanism, which is available to view from the browser, as well as support for syslog daemon logging. Syslogd is available on Linux/Unix platforms, however to function in a Windows environment, this must be added as a third party application. There are several free/shareware versions available on the Internet.



        The process is enabled by clicking the Enable box from the DI-804 Administration Settings, and inputting the IP address of the workstation that is running the SysLog service.



        This is a capture from a third party utility, which displays in real time the effect of a port scan on the WAN port. This particular utility also allows the data to be exported to a text file for further analysis.
        Model DI-804 / DI-804V / DI-714 / DI-711revb
        Question How do I open ports on my DI-711 (revB), DI-714, DI-804, and DI-804V router?
        Answer To forward a specific application port please follow the steps below:

        Step 1: Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your D-Link router (192.168.0.1).

        Step 2: Click on the Advanced Settings tab and then select Virtual Server from the left side.



        Step 3: Enter the last three digits of your IP address on the field provided and then enter the range of ports that would like to allow in. If you would only like one port to be opened, then enter the same number in each box.

        Step 4: Click Submit and then Save and Restart when prompted.

        Note: If your router does not allow you to enter ports, please upgrade the firmware at support.dlink.com/downloads.
      • What is DMZ?
      • What is Virtual Server?
      • What port or ports do I have to open?
        • Model DI-804HV / DI-808HV / DI-824VUP / DS-601 / DS-605
        Question How do I configure the DS-601/605 VPN software client to connect to the DI-804HV/808HV/824VUP?
        Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter the username (admin) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

        Step 2: Click on the Home tab and select the VPN button and configure as followed:
        • VPN: check to Enable
        • Max. number of tunnels: enter the number of tunnels
        Click Apply to save the settings.



        Step 3: Select Dynamic VPN Settings and configure as followed:
        • Name: name the VPN tunnel
        • Dynamic VPN: check box labeled enable
        • Local Subnets and local Netmask: enter the network identifier for the routers LAN and the corresponding subnet mask.
        • Preshare Key: enter preshare key as desired
        Click Apply to save the settings and then click Continue when prompted.



        Step 4: Click Select IKE Proposal and configure as followed:

        • Proposal Name: enter a name for the Proposal ID Number 1
        • DH Group: Group 1
        • Encrypt algorithm: 3DES
        • Authentication Algorithm: SHA1
        • Life Time: 28800
        • Life Time Unit: Sec
        • Proposal ID: select 1 and then click Add To
        Click Apply and then click Back.



        Step 5: Click Select IPSec Proposal and configure as followed:

        • Proposal Name: enter a name for Proposal ID Number 1
        • DH Group: Group 1
        • Encapsulation Protocol: ESP
        • Encryption Algorithm: 3DES
        • Authentication Algorithm: SHA1
        • Life Time: 3600
        • Life Time Unit: Sec.
        • Proposal ID: select 1 and then click Add To
        Click Apply and then click Continue when prompted.



        CONFIGURING THE DS-601/605 client VPN software

        Step 1: Click Configuration and then select Profile Settings.



        Step 2: Select the DI-804hv profile and click Configure. If the profile does not exist, click New Entry to create a profile.



        Step 3: Select Basic Settings and configure as followed:

      • Profile name: enter a name for the profile (DI-804HV for simplicity)
      • Communication medium: select the type of internet connection


          Step 4: Select IPSec General Settings and click on Policy lifetime.



          Step 5: Change the IPSec Policy lifetime to 1 hour to correspond with 3600 sec. specified in the routerīs configuration.

          Click OK.



          Step 6: Click on Policy editor.



          Step 7: Expand the IKE Policy.



          Step 8 : Select the first policy and configure as followed:

          • Name: change name as desired (DI-804hv in this example)
          • Encryption: Triple DES
          • Hash: SHA
          • DH Group: DH-Group 1 (768 Bit)
          Click OK.



          Step 9: Expand the IPSec Policy and select the first policy.



          Step 10: Configure the IPSec policy as followed:

          • Name: change name as desired (DI-804hv in this example)
          • Transform: Triple DES
          • Authentication: SHA
          Click OK and Close.



          Step 11: Configure the IPSec General Settings as followed:

        • Gateway: enter the WAN IP address of the remote router
        • IKE policy: select the policy you created from the dropdown menu
        • IPSec policy: select the policy you created from the dropdown menu
        • Exch. mode: select Main mode
        • PFS group: select DH-Group 1 (768 Bit)
        • Disable DPD (Dead Peer Detection): check


            Step 12: Select Identities and enter the pre-shared key next to Shared secret and Confirm secret.



            NOTE: The Preshared Key must be identical to the one configured on the router.

            Step 13: Select IP Address Assignment and configure it according to your settings. It is recommended to keep the default settings.



            Step 14: Select Remote Networks and configure as followed:

          • Network addresses: enter the remote network (192.168.0.0 in this example)
          • Subnet masks: enter the remote subnet mask (255.255.255.0 in this example)



            Step 15: Select Firewall Settings and set the Enable Stateful Inspection to OFF. Click OK to save the settings and then click OK again to go back to the connection screen.



            Step 16: Click Connect to establish the VPN connection to the router.

            • Model DI-804HV / DI-804V / DI-808HV
            Question How do I configure an IPSec VPN between a DI-804HV/808HV and a DI-804V using IKE?
            Answer


            Configuration the DI-804HV/DI-808HV

            Step 1: Log into the web based configuration of the router by typing in the IP address of the router (default: 192.168.0.1) in your web browser. By default the username is admin and there is no password.

            Step 2: Click the VPN button on the left column, select the checkbox to Enable the VPN, and then in the box next to Max. number of tunnels, enter the maximum numbers of VPN tunnels that you would like to have connected.

            Step 3: In the space provided, enter the Tunnel Name for ID number 1, select IKE, and then click More.



            Step 4: In the Local Subnet and Local Netmask fields enter the network identifier for DI-804HVīs LAN and the corresponding subnet mask.



            Step 5: In the Remote Subnet and Remote Netmask fields enter the network identifier for the DI-804Vīs LAN and the corresponding subnet mask.



            Step 6: In the Remote Gateway field enter the WAN IP address of the remote DI-804V and in the Preshared Key field, enter a key which must be exactly the same as the Preshared Key that is configured on the DI-804V.



            Step 7: Click Apply and then click on Select IKE Proposal...

            Step 8: Enter a name for proposal ID number 1 and select Group 2 from the DH Group dropdown menu.

            Step 9: Select 3DES as the Encryption Algorithm and SHA-1 as the Authentication Algorithm.

            Step 10: Enter a Lifetime value of 28800 and then select Sec. as the unit for the lifetime value.



            Step 11: Select 1 out of the Proposal ID drop-down menu and click Add To, which will add the proposal that was just configured to the IKE Proposal Index. Click Apply and then click Back.



            Step 12: Click on Select IPSec Proposal...

            Step 13: Enter a name for proposal ID number 1 and select None from the DH Group dropdown menu.

            Step 14: Select ESP as the Encapsulation Protocol.

            Step 15: Select 3DES as the Encryption Algorithm and MD5 as the Authentication Algorithm.

            Step 16: Enter a Lifetime value of 3600 and then select Sec. as the unit for the lifetime value.



            Step 17: Select 1 out of the Proposal ID dropdown menu and click Add To, which will add the proposal that was just configured to the IPSec Proposal Index. Click Apply and then click Restart.




            Configuration the DI-804V

            Step 1: Access the router’s web configuration by entering the router’s IP address in your web browser. The default IP address is 192.168.0.1. Login using your password. The default username is admin and the password is blank.

            Help Accessing Web Management

            Step 2: Click on Basic Setup and then select Device IP Settings on the left.

            Step 3: Change the LAN IP address so that it is on a different subnet than the LAN of the DI-804HV (ie 192.168.1.1).



            Step 4: Click Next until you reach the Save & Restart screen. Click Save & Restart and then click Basic Setup once the unit has rebooted.

            Step 5: Click on VPN Settings.

            Step 6: Name your VPN connection and click ADD.



            Step 7: In Remote IP Network and Remote IP Netmask fields enter the network identifier and corresponding subnet mask of the DI-804HVīs LAN.

            Step 8: In the Remote Gateway IP field enter the WAN IP address of the DI-804HV and make sure that the Network Interface is set to WAN Ethernet.

            Step 9: Verify that Secure Association is set to IKE and that Perfect Forward Secure is Disabled.

            Step 10: Verify the Encryption Protocol is set to 3DES and enter in your Preshared Key.

            The Preshared Key needs to be identical to the one configured on the DI-804HV

            Step 11: Leave the Key Life and IKE Life Time values at their default levels and click SAVE.

            Step 12: Click Next and then click on Save & Restart



            Step 13: If the tunnel should now be established. If not, open a command prompt (Start > Run and type CMD) and from a computer on the internal LAN of the DI-804HV, ping the IP address of a computer that is on the internal LAN of the DI-804V, or vice versa.



            Step 14: Once you begin to receive replies, the VPN connection has been established.

            Step 15: To view the Status of the VPN on the DI-804V, click on Device Status.



            Step 16: From the Device Status screen click on VPN Status.

            Step 17: When the VPN has been established, the Status will be Active.
            Model DI-804HV / DI-808HV
            Question How do I configure a VPN tunnel between two DI-804HV/808HV using IKE?
            Answer Step 1: Log into the web based configuration of the router by typing in the IP address of the router (default: 192.168.0.1) in your web browser. By default the username is admin and there is no password.

            Step 2: Click the VPN button on the left column, select the checkbox to Enable the VPN, and then in the box next to Max. number of tunnels, enter the maximum numbers of VPN tunnels that you would like to have connected.



            Step 3: In the space provided, enter the Tunnel Name for ID number 1, select IKE, and then click More.



            Step 4: In the Local Subnet and Local Netmask fields enter the network identifier for the local DI-804HVīs LAN and the corresponding subnet mask.



            Step 5: In the Remote Subnet and Remote Netmask fields enter the network identifier for the remote DI-804HVīs LAN and the corresponding subnet mask.



            Step 6: In the Remote Gateway field enter the WAN IP address of the remote DI-804HV and in the Preshared Key field, enter a key which must be exactly the same as the Preshared Key that is configured on the remote DI-804HV.



            Step 7: Click Apply and then click on Select IKE Proposal...

            Step 8: Enter a name for proposal ID number 1 and select Group 1, 2, or 5 from the DH Group dropdown menu.



            Step 9: Select DES or 3DES as the Encryption Algorithm and either SHA-1 or MD5 as the Authentication Algorithm.



            Step 10: Enter 28800 as the Lifetime value and then select Sec. for the lifetime value.



            Step 11: Select 1 out of the Proposal ID dropdown menu and click Add To, which will add the proposal that was just configured to the IKE Proposal Index.   Click Apply and then click Back.



            Step 12: Click on Select IPSec Proposal...

            Step 13: Enter a name for proposal ID number 1 and select Group 1, 2, 5, or None from the DH Group dropdown menu.



            Step 14: Select ESP or AH as the Encapsulation Protocol.



            Step 15: Select DES or 3DES as the Encryption Algorithm and either SHA-1, MD5, or None as the Authentication Algorithm.



            Step 16: Enter 3600 as the Lifetime value and select Sec. as the unit for the lifetime value.



            Step 17: Select 1 out of the Proposal ID dropdown menu and click Add To, which will add the proposal that was just configured to the IPSec Proposal Index.   Click Apply and then click Restart.



            Step 18: Follow these instructions to configure your Other DI-804HV using the exact same settings for the             IKE Proposal and the IPSec Proposal.   Also make sure that Step 4 is configured to reflect the LAN settings for what is now the Local DI-804HV and that Steps 5 & 6 are configured to reflect the Subnet and WAN IP of what is now the Remote DI-804HV.

            Step 19: To establish the connection, open a command prompt and ping an IP address of a computer on the remote LAN. Once you receive replies the tunnel has been established.

            Model DI-804HV / DI-808HV / DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
            Question How do I setup an IPSec VPN tunnel between a DI-804HV/808HV and DFL-200/700/1100?
            Answer Note: In this FAQ scenario the DI-804HV/808HV is on 192.168.2.0/24 and the DFL-200/700/1100 is on 192.168.1.0/24.


            Configuration of DI-804HV/808HV

            Note: This FAQ is for firmware version 1.43 or later.

            Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-804HV/808-HV into the address bar (default address is http://192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

            Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

            Step 3: Click on the Home tab and then click on VPN.

            Step 4: Configure the VPN tunnel as follows:

            • VPN: select Enable
            • NetBIOS Broadcast: leave this unchecked
            • Max. number of tunnels: enter the maximum number of VPN tunnels that can be established simultaneously
            • ID 1: enter a name to identify the VPN tunnel
            Click on Apply and then Continue to save this configuration.



            Step 5: Clck on More next to Tunnel name ID 1 and configure the IPSec tunnel as followed:
            • Name: enter a name as desired
            • Aggressive Mode: leave this unchecked
            • Local Subnet: enter the network identifier for the local DI-804HV/808HV
            • Local Netmask: enter the corresponding subnet mask
            • Remote Subnet: enter the network identifier for the remote DFL-200/700/1100
            • Remote Gateway: enter the WAN IP address of the remote DFL-200/700/1100
            • Preshare Key: enter a key which must be exactly the same as the Preshared Key that is configured on the remote DFL-200/700/1100
            Click on Apply and then Continue to save this configuration.



            Step 6: Select IKE Proposal and configure as followed:
            • Proposal ID number 1: enter name as desired
            • DH Group: 2
            • Encryption Algorithm: 3DES
            • Authentication Algorithm: SHA1
            • Life Time: 28800 secs
            • Proposal ID: select 1 and click on Add To
            Click on Back.



            Step 7: Select IPSec Proposal and configure the IPSec Proposal as followed:
            • Proposal ID number 1: enter a name as desired
            • DH Group: 2
            • Encapsulation Protocol: ESP
            • Encryption Algorithm: 3DES
            • Authentication Algorithm: SHA1
            • Life Time: 3600 secs
            • Proposal ID: select 1 and click on Add To
            Click on Apply and then click on Continue.




            Configuration of DFL-200/700/1100

            Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall into the address bar (default is http://192.168.1.1). Press Enter

            Step 2: Enter username and password (By default the username is admin). Click on OK.

            Step 3: Click on the Firewall tab and then click on VPN on the lefthand side. Click on Add New under IPSec Tunnels.



            Step 4: Configure the IPSec Tunnel as follows:
            • Name: enter a name as desired
            • Local Net: 192.168.1.0/24 (created by default)
            • Pre-Shared Key: enter the same Pre-Shared key created in your DI-804HV/808HV Tunnel Type: select LAN-to-LAN tunnel
            • Remote Net: enter the entire network identifier of the DI-804HV/808HVīs Internal interface
            • Remote Gateway: enter the WAN (external) IP address of the DI-804HV/808HV
            • Route: Check this box (by default)
            • Proxy ARP:Leave as unchecked
            Click on Apply to save this configuration.



            Step 5: Click on Activate and Activate Changes to activate and save the settings.

            Model DI-804HV / DI-808HV / DI-824VUP / DFL-300 / DFL-80
            Question How can I connect to the Internet while using the built-in Windows VPN client and connected to the PPTP server of my router?
            Answer
            Click here to visit Microsoft.com for setup instructions.
            Model DI-804HV / DI-808HV DI-824VUP
            Question How do I configure the PPTP Server on my DI-804HV/808HV/824VUP so I can VPN using Network and Dial-up Connections on a WinXP or Win2k machine?
            Answer

            Configuration of DI-804HV/808HV/824VUP

            Step 1: Login to the router. Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter the username (admin) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Click on VPN and then click PPTP Server Setting.



            Step 3: Check the box to Enable PPTP server. Insert the Virtual IP of the PPTP Server (IE 192.168.2.1). This must be different from the LAN IP Address. Select the Authentication Protocol by selecting the appropriate radio button. Name your tunnel and insert a User Name and Password for your PPTP client.



            Step 4: Click the Apply button to save your changes.


            Configuration of Win2k/WinXP PPTP client

            Step 1: Right-click My Network Places and select Properties.



            Step 2: Create a New Connection.



            Step 3: The Network Wizard will appear. Click on Next to continue.



            Step 4: Choose your Network Connection Type (You will be connecting to a private network). Click Next.



            Step 5: Enter the Destination Address. This will be your public IP address found on the Status tab of the DI-804HV.



            Step 6: Select All Users for the Connection Availability and click Next.



            Step 7: Add a shortcut to your desktop and click on Finish.



            Step 8: Right-click the Virtual Private Connection and go to Properties.



            Step 9: Click on the Security tab. Select the Advanced radio button and then click on Settings.



            Step 10: Select Optional encryption from the Data encryption drop down menu. Select the Authentication Protocol by checking the appropriate box and click OK (In this case we will select MS-CHAP).



            Step 11: Enter your Username and Password to connect to the virtual private connection. Click the Connect button to authenticate to the DI-804HV. You will see a balloon pop-up indicating that you have connection.







            Step 12: You should now be connected. To test your connection, go to the command prompt and ping an existing IP Address behind the DI-804HV.

            Model DI-804V
            Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DI-804V?
            Answer To upgrade the firmware on a DI-804V follow the steps below:

            Step 1: Download firmware from our support site. Save and unzip it to your desktop.

            Download Firmware here.

            Step 2: Access the configuration page by entering 192.168.0.1 in your web browser.

            Step 3: Click on the System Tools tab and then click Upgrade Firmware on the left side.



            Step 4: Click the Browse button and locate the firmware file that you have downloaded and unzipped. Highlight this file, click Open, and then click Start.

            Note: When upgrading the firmware, do not try to access the Internet and do not turn the power off. Doing so may cause the firmware upgrade process to abort, which will damage router.
            Model DI-804V
            Question How can I establish a VPN connection between 2 DI-804V routers?
            Answer This example will demonstrate how to create a Virtual private Network (VPN) between two remote locations through the Internet. The VPN policy will use 3DES IPSec to securely send/receive encrypted data over the Internet. When the VPN tunnel is enabled, the two offices will virtually appear to be on the same local network.

            This example will consist of two DI-804V VPN Routers with a simple setup. The two remote offices in this example will be known as Office A and Office B. Both VPN Routers must already be set up and able to access each other. This is only an example, your setup will vary using the WAN IP address provided by your ISP.

            Please note the differences in the IP addresses for each office.

            We will begin by configuring the DI-804V at Office A. Start by going into VPN Settings under the Basic Setup menu.

            Step 1: In the Connection Name field, type in OfficeA. Click ADD.

            Step 2: A properties screen will appear for the new connection you have made. Fill in the appropriate information for Office A:
            • Connection Name: OfficeA
            • Local IPSEC Identifier: Local
            • Remote IPSEC Identifier: Remote
            • Remote IP Network: 192.168.1.0
            • Remote IP Netmask: 255.255.255.0
            • Remote Gateway IP: 192.170.0.2
            • Network Interface: WAN ETHERNET
            • Secure Association: IKE
            • Perfect Forward Secure: Enabled
            • PreShared Key: enter key (123456 in this example)
            • Key Life: 28800
            • IKE Life Time: 3600
            Step 3: Click SAVE. There should now be a VPN policy created for Office A. Now you will want to Save & Restart the DI-804V.

            Note: PreShared Key must be the same on both routers.

            Office A setup is now complete, we will now configure Office B with the other DI-804V, Follow the same steps previously with Ofice A to create a VPN policy.

            Step 1: Please change the appropriate information.

            • Connection Name: OfficeB
            • Local IPSEC Identifier: Local
            • Remote IPSEC Identifier: Remote
            • Remote IP Network: 192.168.0.0
            • Remote IP Netmask: 255.255.255.0
            • Remote Gateway IP: 192.170.0.1
            • Network Interface: WAN ETHERNET
            • Secure Association: IKE
            • Perfect Forward Secure: Enabled
            • PreShared Key: enter desired key (123456 in this example)
            • Key Life: 28800
            • IKE Life Time: 3600
            Step 2: Click SAVE. There should now be a VPN policy created for Office B. Now you will want to Save & Restart the DI-804V.

            After the VPN policies have been created for the two Offices, the two remote locations should authenticate and connect. To view the status of the VPN connection, go to the Device Status menu. On the bottom-left side of the menu, click on the VPN Status icon.

            A VPN Status pop-up screen will appear showing VPN connection status. If a VPN tunnel is active, the State should indicate Q-Estab.

            Go to a DOS prompt and ping the internal IP address of the remote network.
            Model DI-824VUP
            Question How do I install a printer that is connected to my DI-824VUP?
            Answer Printers connected to the DI-824VUP cannot be configured using the standard Windows TCP/IP port configuration wizard. You must install the PRTmate software that ships with the unit.

            Software Installation

            Step 1: Insert the installation CD into your CD-ROM drive.

            If you have lost your installation CD, click here.

            Step 2: Click Install Print Server Software.

            Step 3: Select your operating system.

            Step 4: Please wait while the InstallWizardŪ Wizard prepares the setup.

            Step 5: Click Next.



            Step 6: Click Browse if you wish to specify the folder to install the program. Click Next.

            Step 7: Please wait while the print server software is installed.

            Step 8: When setup is complete click Finish.



            Step 9: Click OK and restart your computer.




            Printer Configuration



            Windows 98SE / Me

            Step 1: Go to My Computer > Printers.

            Step 2: Right-click the printer you want to configure and select Properties.



            Step 3: Click the Details tab, select PRT (Print Server) from the drop-down menu below Print to the following port, and then click Port Settings.



            Step 4: Select the interface (Parallel or USB) and then enter the IP address of the DI-824 below All-in-1 IP Sharerīs IP. Click OK.



            Step 5: Click OK.







            Windows 2000 / XP

            Step 1: In Windows 2000 go to My Computer > Control Panel > Printers.

            In Windows XP click Start > Control Panel > Printers and Faxes.

            Step 2: Right-click the printer you want to configure and select Properties.



            Step 3: Click the Port tab, select PRT (Print Server), and then click Configure Port.



            Step 4: Select the interface (Parallel or USB) and then enter the IP address of the DI-824 below All-in-1 IP Sharerīs IP. Click OK.



            Step 5: Click OK.

            Model DI-824VUP
            Question How do I setup a VPN tunnel between two DI-824VUP?
            Answer NOTE: The local and remote side must be on different subnet.

            Configuration of DI-824VUP Local Side

            Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Select the Home tab and click VPN on the left side.

            Step 3: Configure the VPN Settings as followed:
            • VPN: check to enable
            • NetBIOS broadcast: leave uncheck
            • Max. number of tunnels: enter the maximum number of VPN tunnels that can be established
            • ID 1: enter a name to identify the VPN tunnel under Tunnel Name and select IKE under Method.
            Click Apply.



            Step 4: Select Home and click on VPN to go back to the previous page and select More next to Method.



            Step 5: Configure the VPN tunnel as followed:
            • Name: should already be entered from step 3
            • Aggressive Mode: leave unchecked
            • Local Subnet: enter the local subnet (192.168.1.0 in this example)
            • Local Netmask: enter the local netmask (255.255.255.0 in this example)
            • Remote Subnet: enter the remote subnet (192.168.0.0 in this example)
            • Remote Netmask: enter the remote netmask(255.255.255.0 in this example)
            • Remote Gateway: enter the remote gateway
            • IKE Keep Alive(Ping IP Address): enter the default gateway of the remote location
            • Preshare Key: enter a key (The preshare key must be the same on both side.)
            Click Apply.



            Step 6: Select Home, VPN, More and click on Select IKE Proposal.



            Step 7: Configure the IKE Proposal ID 1 as followed:
            • Proposal Name: enter a name as desired
            • DH Group: select Group 1
            • Encrypt algorithm: select 3DES
            • Auth algorithm: select SHA1
            • Life Time: select 28800
            • Life Time Unit: select Sec.
            • Proposal ID: use the dropdown list and select 1 and click Add to so that the name of the proposal appears in the IKE Proposal index.
            Click Apply.



            Step 8: Select Home, VPN, More and click on Select IPSec Proposal.



            Step 9: Configure the IPSec Proposal ID 1 as followed:

            • Proposal Name: enter a name as desired
            • DH Group: select Group 1
            • Encap protocol: select ESP
            • Encrypt algorithm: select 3DES
            • Auth algorithm: select SHA1
            • Life Time: select 3600
            • Life Time Unit: select Sec.
            • Proposal ID: use the dropdown list and select 1 and click Add to so that the name of the proposal appears in the IPSec Proposal index.
            Click Apply.




            Configuration of DI-824VUP Remote Side

            Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Select the Home tab and click VPN on the left side.

            Step 3: Configure the VPN Settings as followed:
            • VPN: check to enable
            • NetBIOS broadcast: leave uncheck
            • Max. number of tunnels: enter the maximum number of VPN tunnels that can be established
            • ID 1: enter a name to identify the VPN tunnel under Tunnel Name and select IKE under Method.
            Click Apply.



            Step 4: Select Home and click on VPN to go back to the previous page and select More next to Method.



            Step 5: Configure the VPN tunnel as followed:
            • Name: should already be entered from step 3
            • Aggressive Mode: leave unchecked
            • Local Subnet: enter the local subnet (192.168.0.0 in this example)
            • Local Netmask: enter the local netmask (255.255.255.0 in this example)
            • Remote Subnet: enter the remote subnet (192.168.1.0 in this example)
            • Remote Netmask: enter the remote netmask(255.255.255.0 in this example)
            • Remote Gateway: enter the remote gateway
            • IKE Keep Alive(Ping IP Address): enter the default gateway of the remote location
            • Preshare Key: enter a key (The preshare key must be the same on both side.)
            Click Apply.



            Step 6: Select Home, VPN, More and click on Select IKE Proposal.



            Step 7: Configure the IKE Proposal ID 1 as followed:
            • Proposal Name: enter a name as desired
            • DH Group: select Group 1
            • Encrypt algorithm: select 3DES
            • Auth algorithm: select SHA1
            • Life Time: select 28800
            • Life Time Unit: select Sec.
            • Proposal ID: use the dropdown list and select 1 and click Add to so that the name of the proposal appears in the IKE Proposal index.
            Click Apply.



            Step 8: Select Home, VPN, More and click on Select IPSec Proposal.



            Step 9: Configure the IPSec Proposal ID 1 as followed:

            • Proposal Name: enter a name as desired
            • DH Group: select Group 1
            • Encap protocol: select ESP
            • Encrypt algorithm: select 3DES
            • Auth algorithm: select SHA1
            • Life Time: select 3600
            • Life Time Unit: select Sec.
            • Proposal ID: use the dropdown list and select 1 and click Add to so that the name of the proposal appears in the IPSec Proposal index.
            Click Apply.



            Step 10: Select the Status tab and click on VPN Status. Click Refresh if the tunnel has not established.

            Model DI-824VUP
            Question How do I set an Administration Password on the DI824VUP?
            Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the wireless router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

            Step 2: The default username is admin and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

            Step 3: Click the Tools tab and then click Admin to the left.



            Step 4: Enter a password in the Admin section.

            Step 5: Click Apply then click Continue to save the settings.
            Model DI-824VUP / DFL-200 / DFL-700 / DFL-1100
            Question How do I setup an IPSec VPN tunnel between a DI-824VUP and a DFL-200/700/1100?
            Answer Note: In this FAQ scenario the DI-824VUP is on 192.168.0.0/24 and the DFL-200/700/1100 is on 192.168.1.0/24.


            Configuration of DI-824VUP

            Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-824VUP into the address bar (default is http://192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

            Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

            Step 3: Click on the Home tab at the top and then click on VPN on the left hand side.

            Step 4: Configure the VPN Tunnel as followed:
            • VPN: Enable
            • NetBIOS Broadcat: leave this unchecked
            • Max. number of tunnels: enter the maximum number of VPN tunnels that can be established simultaneously
            • ID 1: enter a name to identify the VPN tunnel
            Click Apply and Continue when prompted.



            Step 5: Click on More next to Tunnel name ID 1 and configure the IPSec tunnel as followed:
            • Name: enter the name of the tunnel
            • Aggressive Mode: leave this unchecked
            • Local Subnet: enter the network identifier for the local DI-824VUP LAN
            • Local Netmask: enter the corresponding subnet mask
            • Remote Subnet: enter the network identifier for the remote DFL-200/700/1100 LAN
            • Remote Gateway: Enter the WAN IP address of the remote DFL-200/700/1100
            • Preshare Key: Enter a key which must be exactly the same as the Pre-Shared Key that will later be entered on the remote DFL-200/700/1100
            Click Apply and Continue when prompted.



            Step 6: Select IKE Proposal and configure the IKE Proposal as followed:
            • Proposal ID number 1: enter name as desired
            • DH Group: 2
            • Encryption Algorithm: 3DES
            • Authentication Algorithm: SHA1
            • Life Time: 28800 secs
            Select 1 from the Proposal ID dropdown menu and click on Add To which will add the proposal that was just configured to the IKE Proposal Index. Click Apply and Continue when prompted. Then click on Back.



            Step 7: Select IPSec Proposal and configure the IPSec Proposal as followed:
            • Proposal ID number 1: enter a name as desired
            • DH Group: 2
            • Encapsulation Protocol: ESP
            • Encryption Algorithm: 3DES
            • Authentication Algorithm: MD5
            • Life Time: 3600 secs
            Select 1 from the Proposal ID dropdown menu and click on Add To which will add the proposal that was just configured to the IPSec Proposal Index. Click Apply and Continue when prompted.




            Configuration of DFL-200/700/1100

            Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the firewall into the address bar (default is http://192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

            Step 2: Enter your username and password (By default the username is admin). Click on OK.

            Step 3: Click on the Firewall tab and then click on VPN on the left hand side. Click on Add New under IPSec Tunnels.



            Step 4:Configure the IPSec Tunnel as followed:
            • Name: enter a name as desired
            • Local Net: 192.168.1.0/24 (created by default)
            • Pre-Shared Key: enter the same Pre-Shared Key that was created for the DI-824VUP
            • Tunnel Type: select LAN-to-LAN tunnel
            • Remote Net: enter the entire network identifier of DI-824VUPīs internal interface
            • Remote Gateway: enter the WAN (external) IP address of DI-824VUP
            • Route: check box (By default)
            • Proxy ARP: leave unchecked
            Click on Apply to save your settings.



            Step 5: Click Activate.



            Step 6: Click Activate Changes to activate your settings.



            Model DI-LB604
            Question What types of internet connections are supported for use with the DI-LB604?
            Answer The DI-LB604 is designed for use only with cable or DSL broadband connections that provide an RJ-45 ethernet connection from the modem. If your broadband internet connection does not use RJ-45 ethernet, such as USB based modems or enterprise level connections (T-1, OC-3, etc.), the DI-LB604 is not supported for use with your internet connection.
            Model DI-LB604
            Question How do I enable Backup Mode on one of the WAN ports for the DI-LB604?
            Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-634M into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

            Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

            Step 3 Click on the Home tab at the top and then click on WAN on the left side.



            Step 4 Select the WAN port you desire to be in backup mode. Set Connect Mode to Backup.

            Step 5 Click on Apply to save your settings.

            Note: Upon completion of the following steps, when the primary WAN connection fails your backup connection will enable itself. If the primary WAN port is connected, the backup port will remain disconnected. The backup WAN port will only be enabled if the Primary WAN port it is backing up is disconnected. Load balance will not work if a WAN port is set to backup mode.
            Model DI-LB604
            Question How do I configure the Load Balance option on the DI-LB604?
            Answer Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Click on the Home tab and select Load Balance.



            Step 3: Configure the Load Balance Configuration as followed:
            • Enable: checked by default
            • Load Balance Base on: choose one of the option from the dropdown menu
            • Loading Share: enter the percentage WAN Port 1 will have over WAN Port 2 (By default, it is set to 50% for both WAN ports.)

            Step 3: Click Apply.
            Model DI-LB604
            Question What is Multi DMZ mode, and how do I enable this feature on my DI-LB604?
            Answer Multi DMZ (De-Militarized Zone):

            This special function allows multiple Hosts on your LAN to be exposed to the Internet without any restrictions. This is useful for some network games, net meeting, or special applications. In order to enable these functions, you have to map one LAN IP address to one WAN IP address. However, because of the security risk, you should activate these functions only if they are necessary.

            Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-LB604 into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

            Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

            Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab at the top and then click on Multi DMZ on the lefthand side.



            Step 4 Check the box for Enable.

            Step 5 Select the WAN port you wish to use for the current DMZ entry.

            Step 6 Enter a name to identify the current DMZ entry.

            Step 7 Enter the IP address of your server in DMZ.

            Step 8 Select your Access Group from the drop down.

            • None - Is the default value which grants no access restriction.
            • Default - Applies the access rules for default group.
            • Group1~Group4 - Applies the access rules for Group1~Group4.
            Step 9 Select the Direction from the drop down menu to specify which direction the Access Group policy will be applied in.

            • Outgoing
            • Incoming
            • Both
            Step 10 Click on Apply to save your settings.

            Related Links:
            What is DMZ?
            How do I configure the DMZ Host on my Router?
            Model DI-LB604
            Question How do I configure Dynamic DNS Service with the DI-LB604?
            Answer Dynamic DNS (Domain Name Service) is a method of keeping a domain name linked to a changing (dynamic) IP address. With most Cable and DSL connections, you are assigned a dynamic IP address and that address is used only for the duration of that specific connection. To properly configure the DDNS feature follow the steps below:

            Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-LB604 into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

            Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

            Step 3 Click on the Tools tab at the top and then click on DDNS on the lefthand side.



            Step 4 For service, select your DDNS service provider from the drop-down and configure the following:

            • Server Name - The name of the DDNS server.
            • User Name - Enter the username for your DDNS account.
            • Password - The password for your DDNS account.
            • Verify Password - Re-enter the password to prevent any typing errors.
            • Domain Name - The complete hostname to be updated.
            Additional Settings:

            • Enable Wildcard: If enabled, all subdomains of your domain name map to your current IP address. If disabled, no subdomains of your domain name have an IP address.
            • Enable Backup MX: If enabled, all subdomains of your domain name map to your current IP address. If disabled, no subdomains of your domain name have an IP address.
            • Mail Exchanger: Define mail exchanger for the domain name. If omitted, the mail exchanger will be set to the domain name.
            WAN Port Binding: If bound on the WAN port, the domain name will be mapped to the IP address of the WAN port.

            Step 5 Click on Apply to save your settings.

            Model DI-LB604
            Question How do I open ports on the DI-LB604?
            Answer This feature allows the servers (web server, mail server, FTP server, DNS, ... etc) on your LAN to be accessed from the internet.

            Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-LB604 into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

            Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

            Step 3: Click on the Advanced tab at the top and then click on Virtual Server on the lefthand side.



            Step 4: Enter the following information:
            • Enable: - To activate or deactivate current entry.
            • Server Name: - A unique name to identify the virtual server.
            • Private IP: - Enter the IP address of the server on the deviceīs LAN side.
            • Protocol Type: - Select the protocol (either TCP or UDP) used by the server software.
            • Private Port Range: - Enter the range of port numbers used by the server. If only one port number is used, fill the same number in both starting and ending fields. (Example: LAN port range From 9 To 9)
            • Interface Binding: - Select the WAN port that the virtual server is bound on.
            • Public Port Range: - Enter the range of port numbers that clients on the internet will use to access the virtual server. If only one port number is used, fill the same number in both starting and ending fields. (Example: LAN port range From 9 To 9)
            • Allowed Remote IP: - Enter the range of IP addresses that are allowed to access the virtual server.
            Step 4: Click on Apply to save your settings.
            Model DI-LB604
            Question How do I configure static DHCP on my DI-LB604?
            Answer This feature will cause the DI-LB604īs DHCP server to always assign certain computers the same IP address based on MAC address.

            Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DI-LB604 into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

            Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

            Step 3: Click on the Home tab at the top and then click on DHCP on the lefthand side.



            Step 4: Click on the Assign Static DHCP button. Enter the following information:
            • Host Name - Enter in the Host Name (computer name).
            • MAC address - Enter in the MAC address of your computer.(You can find this address by typing ipconfig /all under the command prompt mode of window NT /2000/XP, or winipcfg under window/95/98/Meīs command prompt mode.)
            • Reserved IP Address - The IP address you wish to assign to this host.
            Step 5: Click on Apply to save your settings.
            Model DI-LB604
            Question How do I configure an IPSec VPN tunnel between two DI-LB604?
            Answer Note: In this FAQ scenario, the Local DI-LB604 is on 192.168.3.0/24 and the Remote DI-LB604 is on 192.168.0.0/24.


            Configuration of DI-LB604 (Local)

            Note: This FAQ if for firmware version 1.01 or later. The current firmware version 1.01 does not support an IPSec VPN Server for roaming users.

            Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (no password by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Select the Home tab and click on IPSec.



            Step 3: Configure the IPSec VPN client as followed:
            • Tunnel Name: enter a name for the VPN
            • Tunnel State: check to enable
            • Connection Type: select Static
            • WAN Binding: select the WAN source
            • Local IP / Subnet: enter the local IP and subnet of the DI-LB604 (192.168.3.0/255.255.255.0 in this example)
            • Remote IP / Subnet: enter the remote IP and subnet of the remote device (192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0 in this example)
            • Remote Gateway: enter the remote gateway (172.68.140.140 in this example)
            • Key Method: AutoKey (IKE)
            • Preshared Key: enter the preshared key (This key must match with the IPSec Server.)
            • Local ID (Option): leave as NONE
            • Remote ID (Option): leave as NONE
            Click Apply and click Continue.



            Step 4: Click Continue Setup and configure the Proposals as followed:
              Phase 1
            • Negotiation Type: Main Mode
            • DH Group: DH Group 2 (1024-bit)
            • Encryption Method: 3DES
            • Authentication Method: SHA1
            • SA Lifetime: 28800 (default)

              Phase 2
            • Encapsulation Format: ESP
            • Encryption Method: 3DES
            • Authentication Method: SHA1
            • Perfect Forward Secrecy: DH Group 2 (1024-bit)
            • Key Lifetime: 3600 (default)

              Advanced
            • NetBIOS Broadcast: enabled by default
            • NAT Traversal: check to enable
            • Auto Reconnected: check to enable
            • IKE Keep Alive (Ping): enter the default gateway of the IPSec Server
            Click Apply and click Continue.




            Configuration of DI-LB604 (Remote)

            Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (no password by default), and then click OK. Step 2: Select the Home tab and click on IPSec.



            Step 3: Configure the IPSec VPN client as followed:
            • Tunnel Name: enter a name for the VPN
            • Tunnel State: check to enable
            • Connection Type: select Static
            • WAN Binding: select the WAN source
            • Local IP / Subnet: enter the local IP and subnet of the DI-LB604 (192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0 in this example)
            • Remote IP / Subnet: enter the remote IP and subnet of the remote device (192.168.3.0/255.255.255.0 in this example)
            • Remote Gateway: enter the remote gateway (172.140.140.140 in this example)
            • Key Method: AutoKey (IKE)
            • Preshared Key: enter the preshared key (This key must match with the IPSec Server.)
            • Local ID (Option): leave as NONE
            • Remote ID (Option): leave as NONE
            Click Apply and click Continue.



            Step 4: Click Continue Setup and configure the Proposals as followed:
              Phase 1
            • Negotiation Type: Main Mode
            • DH Group: DH Group 2 (1024-bit)
            • Encryption Method: 3DES
            • Authentication Method: SHA1
            • SA Lifetime: 28800 (default)

              Phase 2
            • Encapsulation Format: ESP
            • Encryption Method: 3DES
            • Authentication Method: SHA1
            • Perfect Forward Secrecy: DH Group 2 (1024-bit)
            • Key Lifetime: 3600 (default)

              Advanced
            • NetBIOS Broadcast: enabled by default
            • NAT Traversal: check to enable
            • Auto Reconnected: check to enable
            • IKE Keep Alive (Ping): enter the default gateway of the IPSec Server
            Click Apply and click Continue.



            Step 5: Click Tunnel test. The tunnel should now be connected. To verify, click on the Status tab and click on IPSec Stats.



            Note: The unit that initiates the connection will have Initiator (Quick): established as the Negotiation Status.

            Model DI-LB604
            Question How do I configure the DI-LB604 as an IPSec VPN client?
            Answer Note: In this FAQ scenario the DI-LB604 (IPSec Client) is on 192.168.3.0/24 and the DFL-200/700/1100 (IPSec Server) is on 192.168.0.0/24.


            Configuration of DFL-200

            Note: This FAQ is for firmware version 1.34 or later.

            Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.1.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (no password setup by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Select the Firewall tab and click on VPN. Click on Add New under IPSec Tunnels.



            Step 3: Configure the IPSec VPN as followed:

            • Name: enter a name for the VPN
            • Local Net: by default this field is automatically filled

              PSK - Pre-Shared Key
            • PSK: enter the preshared key
            • Retype PSK: re-enter the preshared key
            • Roaming Users: select the radio button to select the client to server feature
            Click Apply to save the settings.



            Note: The IPSec Server can be configured as a site-to-site VPN and the DI-LB604 will still connect. However, the DI-LB604 cannot be configured as the IPSec Server.



            Step 4: Click on Activate and Activate Changes.





            Configuration of DI-LB604

            Note: This FAQ if for firmware version 1.01 or later. The current firmware version 1.01 does not support a IPSec VPN Server for roaming users.

            Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (no password by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Select the Home tab and click on IPSec.



            Step 3: Configure the IPSec VPN client as followed:
            • Tunnel Name: enter a name for the VPN
            • Tunnel State: check to enable
            • Connection Type: select Static
            • WAN Binding: select the WAN source
            • Local IP / Subnet: enter the local IP and subnet of the DI-LB604 (192.168.3.0/255.255.255.0 in this example)
            • Remote IP / Subnet: enter the remote IP and subnet of the remote device (192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0 in this example)
            • Remote Gateway: enter the remote gateway (172.68.140.140 in this example)
            • Key Method: AutoKey (IKE)
            • Preshared Key: enter the preshared key (This key must match with the IPSec Server.)
            • Local ID (Option): leave as NONE
            • Remote ID (Option): leave as NONE
            Click Apply and click Continue.



            Step 4: Click Continue Setup and configure the Proposals as followed:
              Phase 1
            • Negotiation Type: Main Mode
            • DH Group: DH Group 2 (1024-bit)
            • Encryption Method: 3DES
            • Authentication Method: SHA1
            • SA Lifetime: 28800 (default)

              Phase 2
            • Encapsulation Format: ESP
            • Encryption Method: 3DES
            • Authentication Method: SHA1
            • Perfect Forward Secrecy: DH Group 2 (1024-bit)
            • Key Lifetime: 3600 (default)

              Advanced
            • NetBIOS Broadcast: enabled by default
            • NAT Traversal: check to enable
            • Auto Reconnected: check to enable
            • IKE Keep Alive (Ping): enter the default gateway of the IPSec Server
            Click Apply and click Continue.



            Step 5: Click Tunnel test. The tunnel should now be connected. To verify, click on the Status tab and click on IPSec Stats.

            Model DIR-130 / DIR-330
            Question How do I configure MAC filtering on a DIR-130/330 router?
            Answer The MAC (Media Access Controller) Address filter option is used to control network access based according to the MAC Address of the network adapter. A MAC address is a unique ID assigned by the manufacturer of the network adapter. This feature can be configured to ALLOW or DENY Network/Internet access.

            Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Click on the ADVANCED tab and select NETWORK FILTER.

            Note: The following screenshot depicts the DIR-330. The steps are the same for both routers, however the interface differs in color.



            Step 3: Select from one of the following options under Configure MAC Filtering below dropdown menu:

            • Turn MAC Filtering OFF
            • Turn MAC Filtering ON and ALLOW computers listed to access the network
            • Turn MAC Filtering ON and DENY computers listed to access the network
            Step 4: Select your computer from the DHCP Client List dropdown menu, or you can enter your computerīs MAC address manually.

            How do I find the MAC/Adapter Address in Windows NT, 2000 and XP?

            Step 5: Click Save Settings.
            Model DIR-130 / DIR-330
            Question How do I enable remote management on my DIR-130/330 router?
            Answer Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Click on the TOOLS tab and select ADMIN.

            Note: The following screenshot depicts the DIR-330. The steps are the same for both routers, however the interface differs in color.



            Step 3: Check the box Enable Remote Management to enable this feature. When enabling remote management, you can specify a specific public IP address on the internet that you want to have access to your router or you can enter an asterisk (*) to allow access from anywhere on the internet.

            Step 4: Select a port from the Port dropdown menu to specify the destination port for the remote management.

            Step 5: Click on Save Settings.
            Model DIR-130 / DIR-330
            Question How do I set an administrative password on my DIR-130/330 router?
            Answer Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Click on the TOOLS tab and select ADMIN.

            Note: The following screenshot depicts the DIR-330. The steps are the same for both routers, however the interface differs in color.



            Step 3: Under ADMINISTRATOR (THE DEFAULT LOGIN NAME IS "ADMIN"), enter a new password and confirm the password in the appropriate area.

            Step 4: Click Save Settings.

            Model DIR-130 / DIR-330
            Question How do I configure a full tunnel PPTP Server on my DIR-130/330 so I can establish a VPN using a WinXP, Win2K, or Vista machine?
            Answer

            Configuration of DIR-130/330

            Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Click on VPN SETTINGS and select PPTP/L2TP from the ADD VPN PROFILE dropdown list and click Add.



            Step 3: Configure the PPTP server as followed:
            • Enable Settings: check box to enable
            • Name: enter a VPN name
            • Connection type: select PPTP
            • VPN Server IP: enter an IP address for the VPN Server (It is recommended to use the LAN IP of the DIR-130.)
            • Remote IP Range: assign a range of IP to be assigned to the PPTP client (The range must be on the same subnet as the VPN Server IP.)
            • Authentication Protocol: select desired authentication protocol (PAP/CHAP/MSCHAP v2)
            • MPPE Encryption Mode: select desired level of encryption (40 bit/128 bit)
            • Authentication Sources: Local
            • User Name 1: enter a desired username
            • Password 1: enter a desired password
            Click Save Settings.



            Note: For full tunneling, enter LAN IP address as the Server IP.


            Configuration of Virtual Private Network

            Note: These instructions are for WinXP

            Step 1: Click on Start and right-click My Network Places. Select Properties.



            Step 2: Select Create a new connection.



            Step 3: Click Next on the New Connection Wizard.



            Step 4: Select Connect to the network at my workplace and click Next (notice the keyword VPN).



            Step 5: Select Virtual Private Network connection and click Next.



            Step 6: Enter a Company Name (optional) and click Next. The connection name will be Virtual Private Network by default if this field is left blank.



            Step 7: Enter the remote gateway and click Next. This is the WAN IP address of the VPN Server.



            Step 8: Check the box Add a shortcut to this connection to my Desktop (optional) and click Finish.




            Configuring the PPTP client

            Step 1: Open the PPTP VPN client and click Properties.



            Step 2: Click on the Security tab and select Advanced (custom settings), then select Settings.



            Step 3: Under Data encryption, select Required encryption (disconnect if server declines) and check Microsoft CHAP Version 2 (MS-CHAPv2), then select OK.



            Step 4: Select the Networking tab and select PPTP VPN under Type of VPN. Click OK.



            Step 5: Enter the username and password that was created on the PPTP server and click Connect.





            Step 6: After the connection has been established, go to the command prompt and ping a client behind the PPTP server.

            Model DIR-130 / DIR-330
            Question How do I configure an IPSec VPN tunnel between two DIR-130/330?
            Answer Note: This example will demonstrate how to configure a LAN-to-LAN IPSec VPN tunnel between two DIR-130/330.

            In this example:
            Local Network is on 192.168.0.0/24
            Remote Network is on 192.168.1.0/24


            Configuration of Local Network

            Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Click on SETUP and select VPN SETTINGS. Choose IPSec from the ADD VPN PROFILE dropdown menu and click Add.



            Step 3: Configure the IPSec VPN as followed:
            • Enable Settings: check box to enable
            • Name: enter a name for the VPN
            • Encapsulation Mode:: Tunnel
            • Remote IP: select Site to Site and enter the remote Gateway
            • Remote Local LAN Net /Mask: enter the remote LAN network and Subnet Mask
            • Authentication Protocol: enter a Pre-shared Key (must be the same as the Remote Side)
            • Phase 1 IKE Proposal List: leave as is
            • PFS: check to enable
            • Phase 2 IPSec Proposal List: leave as is


            Step 4: Click Save Settings.


            Configuration of Remote Network

            Note: Both sides cannot be on the same subnet.

            Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Click on SETUP and select VPN SETTINGS. Choose IPSec from the ADD VPN PROFILE dropdown menu and click Add.



            Step 3: Configure the IPSec VPN as followed:
            • Enable Settings: check box to enable
            • Name: enter a name for the VPN
            • Encapsulation Mode:: Tunnel
            • Remote IP: select Site to Site and enter the remote Gateway
            • Remote Local LAN Net /Mask: enter the remote LAN network and Subnet Mask
            • Authentication Protocol: enter a Pre-shared Key (must be the same as the Remote Side)
            • Phase 1 IKE Proposal List: leave as is
            • PFS: check to enable
            • Phase 2 IPSec Proposal List: leave as is


            Step 4: Click Save Settings.

            Step 5: The tunnel should be established. To verify connection, open a command prompt and ping to a client on the other network.

            Model DIR-130 / DIR-330
            Question Does the DIR-130/330 support full tunnel or split tunnel?
            Answer The DIR-130/330 only support full tunnel.

            Full tunnel: Clients connected to the tunnel will use the Remote gateway for all traffic.

            In this example:
            The DIR-130/330 is on 192.168.0.0/24 network

            For full tunnel, enter an IP address in the same subnet as the LAN.

            Model DIR-130 / DIR-330
            Question How do I open ports on the DIR-130/330 router?
            Answer To allow traffic from the internet to enter your local network, you will need to open up ports or the router will block the request.

            Note: Due to NAT (Network Address Translation), you can only open a specific port or ports to one computer at a time, using our routers. For example: If you have 2 web servers on your network, you cannot open port 80 to both computers. You will need to configure 1 of the web servers to use port 81 (or any other non-80 port). Now you can open port 80 to the first computer and then open port 81 to the other computer.

            Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Click on the ADVANCED tab and select VIRTUAL SERVER.



            Step 3: Check the box beside the rule to enable the rule. For pre-defined applications, use the Application Name dropdown menu and click on the arrow button next to the dropdown menu to auto-fill the appropriate field. For non pre-defined applications not specified in the router, please enter the desired port.

            Step 4: Select the computer or device from the list of DHCP clients in the Computer Name dropdown menu or manually enter the IP address of the device you want to open the specified port for.

            How can I find the IP address of my computer?

            Step 5: Click on Save Settings.
            Model DIR-130 / DIR-330 / DI-804HV / DI-808HV
            Question How do I configure an IPSec LAN-to-LAN tunnel between a DIR-130/330 and DI-804HV/808HV?
            Answer In this example:

            DIR-130/330 is on 192.168.1.0/24 network
            DI-804HV/808HV is on 192.168.0.0/24 network


            Configuration of DIR-130/330

            Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Click on SETUP, select VPN SETTINGS, and select IPSec from the ADD VPN PROFILE dropdown list and click Add.



            Step 3: Configure the IPSec VPN as followed:
              IPSEC SETTING
            • Enable: check box to enable
            • Name: enter a name for the VPN
            • Encapsulation Mode:: Tunnel
            • Remote IP: select Site to Site and enter the remote gateway
            • Remote Local LAN Net /Mask: enter the remote network and remote subnet mask
            • Authentication: enter a Pre-shared Key (Pre-share key must match remote side)

              PHASE 1
            • IKE Proposal List: leave at default (3DES, SHA1)

              PHASE 2
            • PFS: uncheck to disable
            • IPSec Proposal List: leave at default (3DES, SHA1)
            Click Save Settings.




            Configuration of DI804HV/808HV

            Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Click on the Home tab and select the VPN button and configure as followed:
            • VPN: check to enable
            • Max. number of tunnels: enter the number of tunnels

              ID 1
            • Tunnel Name: enter a name of the VPN
            • Method: select IKE
            Click Apply to save the settings.



            Step 3: Click on More under Method and configure as followed:
            • Tunnel Name: the name of the tunnel should already be entered if done in the previous step
            • Local Subnet: enter the local subnet (192.168.0.0 in this example)
            • Local Netmask: enter the local subnet mask(255.255.255.0 in this example)
            • Remote Subnet: enter the remote subnet (192.168.1.0 in this example)
            • Remote Netmask: enter the remote subnet mask(255.255.255.0 in this example)
            • Remote Gateway: enter the remote gateway (172.68.140.140 in this example)
            • IKE Keep Alive (Ping IP Address): enter an IP address of a client on the remote side (192.168.1.100 in this example)
            • Preshare Key: enter preshare key as desired (Pre-share key must match remote side)
            • IPSec NAT Traversal: check to enable
            • Auto-reconnect: check to enable
            Click Apply to save the settings and click Continue when prompted.



            Step 4: Click on Select IKE Proposal and configure as followed:

            • Proposal Name: enter a name for the Proposal ID Number 1
            • DH Group: Group 2
            • Encrypt algorithm: 3DES
            • Authentication Algorithm: SHA1
            • Life Time: 28800
            • Life Time Unit: Sec
            • Proposal ID: select 1 and click on Add To to add to the IKE Proposal index
            Click Apply and then click Back.



            Step 5: Click on Select IPSec Proposal and configure as followed:

            • Proposal Name: enter a name for Proposal ID Number 1
            • DH Group: Group 2
            • Encapsulation Protocol: ESP
            • Encryption Algorithm: 3DES
            • Authentication Algorithm: SHA1
            • Life Time: 3600
            • Life Time Unit: Sec.
            • Proposal ID: select 1 and click on Add To to add to the IPSec Proposal index
            Click Apply and then click Continue when prompted.



            Step 6: Click on the Status tab and select the VPN Status button. The VPN should be established. If the tunnel has not been established, click on the Refresh button or ping to an IP address on the remote side. When replies are sent back, the tunnel has been established.

            Model DIR-130 / DIR-330 / DS-601 / DS-605
            Question How do I configure the DS-601/605 VPN software client to connect to the DIR-130/330?
            Answer


            Configuration of DIR-130/330

            Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

            Step 2: Click on SETUP and select VPN SETTINGS. Choose IPSec from the ADD VPN PROFILE dropdown menu and click Add.



            Step 3: Configure the IPSec VPN as followed:
            • Enable Settings: check box to enable
            • Name: enter a name for the VPN
            • Encapsulation Mode:: Tunnel
            • Remote IP: select Remote User
            • Authentication: enter a Pre-shared Key
            • Phase 1 IKE Proposal List: leave as is
            • PFS: check to enable
            • Phase 2 IPSec Proposal List: leave as is
            Click Save Settings.




            Configuration of DS-601/605 client VPN software

            Step 1: Click Configuration and select Profile Settings.



            Step 2: Click New Entry to create a profile for the DIR-130.



            Step 3: Name the profile DIR-130 and click Next.



            Step 4: Select the type of Communication media for the Local side and click Next.



            Step 5: Enter the Remote Gateway and click Next.



            Step 6: Enter the Pre-shared Key in both the Shared secret and Confirm secret and click Finish.



            Step 7: Select the DIR-130 profile and click Configure.



            Step 8: Select IPSec General Settings and select DH-Group 2 (1024 Bit ) from the dropdown menu under Advanced options / PFS group.



            Step 9: Select Policy editor, expand the IKE Policy list and select New Entry.



            Step 10: Configure the IKE Policy as followed:

            • Name: enter a name for the policy (DIR-130 in this example)
            • Encryption: Triple DES
            • Hash: SHA
            • DH Group: DH-Group 2 (1024 Bit)
            Click OK.



            Step 11: Expand the IPSec Policy and select New Entry.



            Step 12: Configure the IPSec policy as followed:

            • Name: entry a name for the policy(DIR-130 in this example)
            • Transform: Triple DES
            • Authentication: SHA
            Click OK and Close.




            Step 13: The IPSec General Settings should be configured as followed:

          • Gateway: WAN IP address of the remote router
          • IKE policy: select DIR-130 from the dropdown menu
          • IPSec policy: select DIR-130 from the dropdown menu
          • Exch. mode: select Main mode
          • PFS group: select DH-Group 2 (1024 Bit)


              Step 14: Select Identities and enter the pre-shared key next to Shared secret and Confirm secret.



              NOTE: The Preshared Key must be identical to the one configured on the router.

              Step 15: Select IP Address Assignment and configure it according to your settings. It is recommended to keep the default settings.



              Step 16: Select Remote Networks and configure as followed:

            • Network addresses: enter the remote network (192.168.0.0 in this example)
            • Subnet masks: enter the remote subnet mask (255.255.255.0 in this example)



              Step 17: Select Firewall Settings and set the Enable Stateful Inspection to when connected. Click OK to save the settings and then click OK again to go back to the connection screen.



              Step 18: Click Connect to establish the VPN connection to the router.

              • Model DIR-330
              Question Why doesnīt the USB port on my DIR-330 work?
              Answer Currently, the state of the USB port on the DIR-330 is inactive. It is reserved for future projects.
              Model DIR-330
              Question How do I enable WEP encryption on my DIR-330 router?
              Answer WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) is a basic security measure to implement on your wireless network to keep unknown and/or unwanted users out.

              If your wireless adapter supports WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access), which is a stronger form of encryption, click here.

              Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

              Step 2: Click on the Setup tab and click on Wireless Settings.



              Step 3: Configure the WEP as followed:
                Wireless Security Mode
              • Security Mode: select WEP

                WEP
              • Authentication: select Open
              • WEP Encryption: select 64Bit
              • Key Type: select HEX
              • Default WEP Key: select WEP Key 1
              Click on Save Settings.



              Model DIR-330
              Question How do I enable WPA security on my DIR-330 router?
              Answer Note: WPA (Wi-Fi Protected Access) is a strong form of wireless encryption, however not all wireless adapters support this feature.

              If you wireless adapter only supports WEP, please click here for WEP configuration.

              Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

              Step 2: Click on the SETUP tab and select WIRELESS SETTINGS.



              Step 3: Configure the WPA security as followed:
                WIRELESS SECURITY MODE
              • Security Mode: select WPA-Personal

                WPA
              • WPA Mode: select WPA Only or WPA2 Only (if supported by wireless adapter)

                PRE-SHARED KEY
              • Pre-Shared Key: enter a passphrase from 8-63 characters long
              Click Save Settings.



              Model DIR-330 / DIR-130
              Question How do I upgrade my firmware on my DIR-130/330 router?
              Answer Step 1: Download the latest firmware.

              Click here for step-by-step instructions for downloading firmware.

              Step 2: Once you have downloaded the firmware, log into your router.

              Step 3: Click on the TOOLS tab and select FIRMWARE. Click on Browse and locate the .bin (or .dlf) file you downloaded in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click on Open.

              Note: The following screenshot depicts the DIR-330. The steps are the same for both routers, however the interface differs in color.



              Step 4: Click on Save Settings to upgrade firmware. This process may take up to 30 seconds or more for the upgrade to complete. Click on Continue when it is available. The firmware is now upgraded.


              To download the latest firmware, follow the instructions below:

              Step 1: Visit http://support.dlink.com. Select your product from the dropdown menu and click on go!.



              Step 2: You may be prompted to select a revision. The revision is listed on the bottom of the unit next to H/W:. Click on the revision that applies to your device.

              Step 3: In the center of the screen, click on Download Now next to the firmware version you want.



              Step 4: Make sure you remember the name of the file. Click on Save.



              Step 5: It is recommended that you save the file to your Desktop. To do this next to the Save in dropdown menu, select Desktop. Click on Save. The file will be saved to your desktop.



              Step 6: Once the file is downloaded, click on Close. Do not open or try to run this file as your computer will not be able to do this.



              Step 7: Connect your computer to the device you want to upgrade (if not already connected).

              Click               here to continue the upgrade procedure.
              Model DIR-330 / DIR-130
              Question How do I enable DMZ on a DIR-130/330 router?
              Answer The DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) provides you with an option to set a single computer on your network outside of the routerīs firewall. If you have a computer that cannot run internet applications successfully from behind the router, then you can place the computer into the DMZ for unrestricted Internet access.

              Note: Putting a computer in the DMZ may expose that computer to a variety of security risks. Usage of this option is only recommended as a last resort.

              Step 1: Open your web browser and type in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1 by default). Enter the username (admin by default) and password (blank by default), and then click OK.

              Step 2: Click on the ADVANCED tab and select FIREWALL SETTINGS.

              Note: The following screenshot depicts the DIR-330. The steps are the same for both routers, however the interface differs in color.



              Step 3: Check the box Enable DMZ Host and select your computer from the Computer Name dropdown menu or enter the IP address of the device that will be exposed manually.

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Step 4: Click on the Save Settings
              Model DIR-330 / DIR-130 / DGL-3420 / DWL-AG132 / DWA-130 / DWL-AG530 / DWL-AG660 / DWL-G120 / DWL-G122 / DWL-G132 / DWL-G510 / DWL-G520 / DWL-G520M / DWL-G550 / DWL-G630 / DWL-G650 / DWL-G650M / DWL-G680 / DWL-G710 / DWL-G820 / WDA-1320 / WDA-2320 / WNA-1330 / WNA-2330 / WUA-1340 / WUA-2340 / DWL-P100 / DWL-P200 / DWL-P50 / DWA-142 / DWA-542 / DWA-552 / DWA-642 / DWA-645 / DWA-652 / DWL-M60AT / DWL-R60AT / DVG-G1402S / WBR-1310 / WBR-2310
              Question How do I enable DHCP on my adapter?
              Answer Step 1: Open the Control Panel on your PC. Select Network Connections

              Using Classic view:



              Using Category view:



              You will then need to select Network Connections if you are using Cagegory view:



              Step 2: Right click the adapter and select Properties

              • For Ethernet (hardwired) adapters, use the item listed as Ethernet Adapter Local Area Connection.
              • For Wireless adapters, use the item listed as Ethernet Adapter Wireless Area Connection.


              Step 3: Scroll down the list of items and select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP), then click Properties.



              Step 4: Select the radio button labeled Obtain an IP address automatically



              Step 5: Click OK on the Internet Protocol properties window to save settings.

              Step 6: Click OK on the adapterīs properties window to save settings.



              Your adapter is now set to obtain its IP address using DHCP. You may have to right-click the adapter and select Repair to request the new IP using DHCP.
              Model DIR-450
              Question Why does my card not show up in the drop-down menu, or my service and card model do not match up in the drop-down?
              Answer Ensure you are using the latest firmware version. Newer firmwares may add support for more card models, or more cross-support for models/providers.

              Click here for a list of EV-DO cards that are supported in the newest firmware
              Model DIR-450
              Question Why can’t I get my EV-DO card to sync with my DIR-450?
              Answer To ensure proper function of the DIR-450, verify that the power is disconnected from the router before inserting the EV-DO card.

              After the card is properly seated, then reconnect the power to the DIR-450. Wait for the DIR-450 to display a solid blue LED on the Internet (EV-DO) light, the 3rd light from the left.
              Model DIR-450
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DIR-450?
              Answer Step 1 Click here to download the latest firmware for your DIR-450.

              Click here for step-by-step instructions for downloading firmware.

              Step 2 Unplug the power from the DIR-450, and remove the EV-DO card.

              Step 3 Re-connect the power to the DIR-450 and wait for it to boot.

              Step 4 Once the router is fully booted, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1).

              Step 5 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave the field blank). Click on OK to enter the web configuration for the device.

              Step 6 After you have logged in to the interface of the unit, click Tools and then Firmware. Click the Browse button and locate the firmware file.



              Note: The router can take up to 15 minutes to completely upload the firmware.

              Step 7 After the firmware upgrade is complete, disconnect the power once again and re-insert the EV-DO card in to the back of the DIR-450. After the card is firmly seated, reconnect the power to the DIR-450 and wait for it to boot.




              To download the latest firmware, follow the instructions below:

              Step 1: Visit http://support.dlink.com. Select your product from the dropdown menu and then click on Go!.



              Step 2: You may be prompted to select a revision. The revision is listed on the bottom of the unit next to H/W:. Click on the revision that applies to you.

              Step 3: In the center of the screen, click on the Download Now button next to the firmware version you want.



              Step 4: Make sure you remember the name of the file. Click on Save.



              Step 5: Next to Save in, click the down-arrow and select Desktop. Click on Save. The file will be saved to your desktop.



              Step 6: Once the file is downloaded, click on Close. Do not open or try to run this file as your computer will not be able to do this.



              Step 7: Connect your computer to the device you want to upgrade (if not already connected).

              Click here to continue the upgrade procedure (continue with Step 2 at the top).
              Model DIR-450
              Question How do I Crash Recover my DIR-450 router?
              Answer If you are experiencing router reboots, try using the crash recovery method and reflashing an earlier firmware.

              Use the following steps to crash recover your DIR-450:

              Step 1 Download the firmware you wish to use from our support site.

              Click here for step-by-step instructions for downloading firmware.

              Step 2 Unplug the power from the router. Hold in the reset button and plug the power back in. Continue holding for 10 seconds and then release.

              Step 3 Statically assign an IP address to your computer in the same IP subnet range: 192.168.0.x (where x is any number between 2 and 254). Your Subnet Mask should be 255.255.255.0.

              Step 4 Open a web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape and enter the IP address of the DIR-450 (192.168.0.1).

              Step 5 You should see the crash recovery page. Browse to the location of the firmware on your hard-drive and click the Send button.

              Your router should now be stable and ready to configure.
              Model DIR-450
              Question How long does it take for the firmware to update on my DIR-450 Router?
              Answer It may take up to 10 minutes for the firmware update to complete.

              You will see a Flashing Red Light on the left hand side of the router and on your browser you will see the Progress bar moving slowly. When the process is complete you will see a message that says The Router is restarting.

              Click on the Continue button to proceed.

              Important: Do Not interrupt this process!!
              Doing so my cause the router to hang. In that case you will need to run through the crash recovery steps to regain access to the WEB GUI interface.
              Model DIR-450
              Question Can I install and uninstall my wireless card while the router is powered on?
              Answer No, You must have the router powered off at all times while installing and uninstalling your wireless card .
              Model DIR-450
              Question How do I setup my PCMCIA (EVDO) manually?
              Answer Note:Before you setup internet for your DIR-450, please make sure you are able to connect to the internet with the PCMIA card in your laptop/desktop, without the DIR-450 being in the configuration.

              Connect to your Network
              Note: Ensure that the power to your DIR-450 mobile router is not connected before performing the installation steps below:

              32-bit PCMCIA(EVDO)card connection.

              Step 1. Attach the antenna to the router.
              Once secured, position the antenna upward in its connecting joint. This will ensure optimal reception.

              Step 2 Insert your wireless 32-bit PCMCIA (EVDO) card into the internet slot on the back of the router.

              Step 3 Insert the ethernet cable into the LAN port 1 on the back panel of the DIR-450 mobile router, and an available ethernet port on the network adapter, in the computer you will use to configure the unit.

              Step 4 Connect the power adapter to the receptor on the back panel of your DIR-450 Mobile Router. Then plug the other end of the power adapter into a wall outlet or power strip.

            • The Power LED will turn ON to indicate power has been applied.
            • Other LEDs will flash ON and OFF as the DIR-450 Mobile Router performs initialization and internet connection processes. This will take a few minutes.
            • When complete, the following LEDs will illuminate Blue: Power, Status, Internet, WLAN and LAN port 1 (or your specific LAN port connection)

              Step 5 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your DIR-450 Mobile Router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (blank by default).



              Note: You will need to set a static ip address on the computer, on the same subnet, for example, 192.168.0.20/24)

              Click here for instructions on assigning a static IP address on your PC.

              Step 6 Under Setup, click Internet on the left. Select Manual Configure from the bottom of the page.



              Step 7 Under WWAN, select your PCMCIA card from the drop down menu.



              Step 8 Enter your WWAN Username, Password, Server Name, and Dial Number.



              Step 9 Click Save Settings to save your settings. Once the router has finished rebooting, click Continue.
              Please allow 1-2 minutes to connect.

              • Model DIR-450
              Question What EV-DO cards are currently compatible with the DIR-450?
              Answer The following EV-DO cards are currently compatible with the DIR-450:

              Note: The following list applies to firmware version 1.01 and above.
              • CAT - SCD100 1XRTT
              • CAT - Sierra AC 580
              • Huawei EC3X1
              • Hutch TechFaith
              • Mobile-8 MiniMax MM5500U
              • Mobile-8 ZTE MY39
              • Sierra AC555
              • Sprint - Kyocera KPC 650
              • Sprint - Novatel Merlin S720
              • Sprint - Novatel V620
              • Sprint - Sierra AC 5220
              • Sprint - Sierra AC 580
              • Sprint - Sierra AC595
              • Sprint - Sprint PCS Connection Card PC-5740
              • Verizon - Kyocera KPC 650
              • Verizon - Novatel V620
              • Verizon - PC-5740
              • Verizon - Sierra AC 580
              • VIVO - Yiso C893
              Model DIR-615 / DIR-655 / DIR-625 / DGL-4300 / DGL-4100 / General Networking
              Question What is a Ping test and how do I perform one?
              Answer Ping is a computer network tool used to test whether a particular host is reachable across an IP network.

              The following FAQ demonstrates running a ping test on a Windows XP machine.
              The IP address used in the example is 192.168.0.1

              Step 1: Click the Start button.

              Step 2: Select Run.



              Step 3: Type cmd



              Step 4: Press Enter

              Step 5: Type: ping 192.168.0.1
              (replacing 192.168.0.1 with the IP address of the device you want to test)



              Step 6: Press Enter

              If the ping times out or the host or net are unreachable, the test failed. This means the device is not communicating with the PC.



              If the IP address you sent the pings to replies, the test passed and the device is properly communicating with the PC.


              Keep in mind that you can also ping a domain (such as www.dlink.com). If you cannot ping a domain, but you can ping an IP address that is on the internet (such as 4.2.2.2), your DNS is misconfigured. In this case, try to set a static DNS entry in your routerīs WAN configuration page, or your PCīs network adapter:

              How do I set a static IP to my adapter?
              Model DIR-615 , DIR-625 , DIR-635 , DIR-655
              Question What can I do if my game console will not connect to my online service or allow me to host/join online games?
              Answer It is recommended that you disable UPnP and create a large port forward to the ip address of the game console. To do this, use the following steps:

              NOTE: This is only a suggestion, it is not guaranteed to work in every situation.

              Step 1 Log in to the router.
              Click here for instructions on logging into the router.

              Step 2 Click the ADVANCED tab and then ADVANCED NETWORK from the lefthand side.

              Step 3 Uncheck the Enable UPnP button. Click SAVE SETTINGS from the top.
              Please Note: Doing this may cause issues with other applications on your PC’s.



              Step 4 Click the PORT FOWARDING button from the lefthand side.

              Step 5 Now you will need to input the IP Address of the game console as well as provide a name for the entry.

              If you do not know what the IP Address of you game console is, you may need to refer to it’s user manual. Also providing the console with a static address will ensure that the rule will be applied to the proper IP Address.



              Step 6 After you have input the IP Address you will need to provide the ports that you wish to forward to the game console.

              In this case it would be all ports or 0-65535. This will be for UDP as well as TCP.



              Step 7 Now ensure that you have placed a green check in the box on the left side of the rule by the name. You will need to also need set a schedule for that rule. Always is suggested.
              As for the inbound filter, that should be set to allow all. Click SAVE SETTINGS.



              NOTE: This is only a suggestion, it is not guaranteed to work in every situation.
              Model DIR-615 / DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-655
              Question How do I upgrade my firmware on my DIR series router?
              Answer Step 1: Download the latest firmware.

              Click here for step-by-step instructions for downloading firmware.

              Step 2: Once youīve downloaded the firmware, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1).

              Step 3: Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave the field blank). Click on OK to enter the web configuration for the device.

              Step 4: Click on the Tools tab and then click on Firmware on the lefthand side. Click on the Browse button and browse to the .bin (or .dlf) file you downloaded in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click on Open.



              Step 5: Click on Save Settings to upgrade firmware. It may take a up to 30 seconds for the upgrade to complete. Click on Continue when it appears. The firmware is now upgraded.



              To download the latest firmware, follow the instructions below:

              Step 1: Visit http://support.dlink.com. Select your product from the dropdown menu and then click on Go!.



              Step 2: You may be prompted to select a revision. The revision is listed on the bottom of the unit next to H/W:. Click on the revision that applies to you.

              Step 3: In the center of the screen, click on the Download Now button next to the firmware version you want.



              Step 4: Make sure you remember the name of the file. Click on Save.



              Step 5: Next to Save in, click the down-arrow and select Desktop. Click on Save. The file will be saved to your desktop.



              Step 6: Once the file is downloaded, click on Close. Do not open or try to run this file as your computer will not be able to do this.



              Step 7: Connect your computer to the device you want to upgrade (if not already connected).

              Click here to continue the upgrade procedure (continue with Step 2 at the top).
              Model DIR-615 / DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-655
              Question How do I change the LAN IP address of a DIR series router?
              Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the WBR router into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Setup tab along the top and then click on Network Settings on the lefthand side.



              Step 4: Under Router Settings, type in the routerīs new IP address and default subnet mask. The IP Address that is configured here is the IP Address that you use to access the Web-based management interface. If you change the IP Address here, you may need to adjust your PCīs network settings to access the network again.

              Step 5: Click on the Save Settings button to save your settings.
              Model DIR-615 / DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-655
              Question How do I enable WEP encryption on my DIR series router?
              Answer Note: Enabling WEP on a DRAFT N connection will cap the speed to 54mbps. To gain the Draft N possible speeds, WPA2 is reccomended. However WPA will also work.

              WEP is only available on 1.07 firmware or above.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DIR series router into the address bar (default is http://192.168.0.1).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Setup tab at the top and then click on Wireless Settings on the lefthand side.





              Step 4 From the Wireless Security Mode dropdown menu, select WEP encryption. WEP is the wireless encryption standard. To use it you must enter the same key(s) into the router and all wireless clients you wish to connect.

              For 64 bit keys you must enter 10 hex digits into each key box. For 128 bit keys you must enter 26 hex digits into each key box. A hex digit is either a number from 0 to 9 or a letter from A to F. For the most secure use of WEP set the authentication type to Shared Key when WEP is enabled.

              You may also enter any text string into a WEP key box, in which case it will be converted into a hexadecimal key using the ASCII values of the characters. A maximum of 5 text characters can be entered for 64 bit keys, and a maximum of 13 characters for 128 bit keys.

              Step 5 Click on Save Settings to save your settings.
              Model DIR-615 / DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-655
              Question Why wonīt my PSP (PlayStationŪ Portable) connect to my router when I’m using WPA/Auto?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DIR series router into the address bar (default is http://192.168.0.1).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Setup tab at the top and then click on Wireless Settings on the lefthand side.

              Step 4 From the Wireless Security Mode dropdown menu, select WPA-Personal.

              Step 5 From the WPA dropdown menu, select WPA Only.



              Step 6 Under Pre-shared Key, enter the desired Pre-Shared Key.

              Click here for further instructions on enabling WPA encryption.

              Step 7 Click on Save Settings to save your settings.
              Model DIR-615 / DIR-655 / DIR-635 / DIR-625
              Question How do I reset my router back to the factory default settings?
              Answer To perform a reset, please follow steps below:

              Step 1 With the unit on, place a paper clip into the hole on the back on the unit labeled Reset.

              Step 2 Hold paper clip down for 10 seconds and release.

              Note: Do not repower unit during this procedure.

              Step 3 The unit will reboot on its own. Once the WLAN light stops blinking, the unit is reset.

              Resetting the router does not reset the firmware to an earlier version. It will change all settings back to factory defaults.

            • How can I reset my DI-524, DI-604, DI-624?
            • How do I reset my DFL-80 and DI-300?
            • How do I reset my DI-704, DI-704P, DI-707P, DI-711, DI-713, DI-713P, DI-714, and DI-714P+?
            • How can I reset my DI-707?
              • Model DIR-615 /DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-655
              Question What is the best way to position the antennas on my DIR series router for optimal performance?
              Answer The following image illustrates the configuration of each DIR series router antenna on both recommended positions:




              These positions will allow for optimal transmission to and reception from, your wireless clients.
              Model DIR-615 /DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-655
              Question How do I enable WPA-Personal encryption on my DIR series router?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DIR series router into the address bar (default is http://192.168.0.1). Press Enter

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Setup tab at the top and then click on Wireless Settings on the lefthand side.



              Step 4 From the Wireless Security Mode dropdown menu, select WPA-Personal encryption.

              Step 5 From the WPA Mode dropdown, Under WPA, select the form of WPA you would like to use.

              Use WPA or WPA2 mode to achieve a balance of strong security and best compatibility. This mode uses WPA for legacy clients while maintaining higher security with stations that are WPA2 capable. Also the strongest cipher that the client supports will be used.

              For best security, use WPA2 Only mode. This mode uses AES(CCMP) cipher and legacy stations are not allowed access with WPA security.

              For maximum compatibility, use WPA Only. This mode uses TKIP cipher. Some gaming and legacy devices work only in this mode. To achieve better wireless performance use WPA2 Only security mode (or in other words AES cipher).

              Step 6 In the Pre-Shared Key box, enter the desired Pre-shared key.

              This is the “password” that allows communication between you’re encrypted client (e.g. the PSP or your wireless computer) and the encrypted wireless signal coming from the router. This password must contain at least 8 characters, the characters can be anything you can create from your keyboard.

              Step 7 Click on Save Settings to save your settings.
              Model DIR-625
              Question What additional equipment might I need to complete my network?
              Answer Once configured, your wireless router will distribute wireless Internet access to compatible devices such as wireless laptops or desktops. You will need a Wireless Network Interface Card (WNIC) to connect wirelessly to your wireless router. Before you buy an adapter check to see if your computer already has one. Many laptops come with built-in wireless capabilities. If your laptop has a Centrino sticker, rest assured you have built-in wireless.

              You may also connect up to four of your computers directly to the router via Ethernet cable in order to connect to the internet simultaneously. A hard-wired Internet connection will be faster and more reliable, and is advised whenever possible. We reccomend Cat-5e Ethernet cable. Cat-5, Cat-5e, and Cat-6 are all compatible.
              Model DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-615 / DIR-655
              Question How do I configure my DIR Series router to work with a Cable modem connection?
              Answer The following FAQ is for for most Cable connections such as Adelphia, AOL (Earthlink), ATnT, Cox, Comcast, Charter, Knology, Optimum Online (Cablevision), RCN, RoadRunner (Time Warner), and Rogers.

              Note: Configure the router with the computer that was previously connected directly to the cable modem. Also, you can only use the Ethernet port on your modem. If you were using the USB connection before using the router, then you must turn off your modem, disconnect the USB cable and connect an Ethernet cable to the WAN port on the router, and then turn the modem back on. In some cases, you may need to call your ISP to change connection types (USB to Ethernet).

              If you have trouble connecting to your modem, you may need to lock the speed down on the WAN port of your router to 10Mbps. Within the web-based configuration utility for the router, go to Tools > Misc and the option to select the WAN speed will be towards the bottom. Not all routers have this option.

              Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by typing in the IP address of the router (default:192.168.0.1) in your web browser. The username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Note: The address 192.168.0.1 is NOT on the Internet. The web-based configuration is built-in to the router.

              Step 2 Click the Setup tab and then click the Internet button.



              Step 3 Dynamic IP Address is the default value, however, if Dynamic IP Address is not selected as the WAN type, select Dynamic IP Address from the drop down menu. Click Clone Mac Address. Click on Save Settings to save the changes.



              Step 4 Click on Status. Under WAN, Click DHCP Renew. If it does not get an IP address or times out, then continue with Step 5.

              Step 5 Power cycle the cable modem and router using the following steps:

            • Turn the cable modem off (first)
            • Turn the router off
            • Leave them off for 2 minutes**
            • Turn the cable modem on (first)
            • Wait until you get a solid cable light on the cable modem
            • Turn the router on
            • Wait 30 seconds
              ** If you have a Motorola (Surf Board) modem, leave off for at least 5 minutes.

              Step 6 Follow Step 1 again to log back into the web configuration. Click the Status tab and click the Device Info button. If you do not already have a public IP address under the WAN heading, click on the DHCP Renew button.
              • Model DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-655
              Question How do I connect my NintendoŪ DS to the DIR Series routers?
              Answer The NintendoŪ DS is an 802.11b device. In order to connect your NintendoŪ DS to a DIR series, Draft N, router, you will need to confirm that the router is in Mixed Mode.

              Use the following steps to set your router to mixed mode:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DIR series router into the address bar (default is http://192.168.0.1).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Under Setup, click Wireless Settings on the left hand side.

              Step 4 From the 802.11 Mode drop down menu, select Mixed 802.11ng, 802.11g and 802.11b.



              Step 5 Click on Save Settings to save your settings.

              Note: The NintendoŪ DS does not support any version of WPA.
              Model DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-655
              Question How do I utilize DHCP reservation in my DIR series router?
              Answer DHCP Reservation is used to assign a specific IP address to a specific MAC address on the LAN.

              To do so, use the following steps:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DIR series router into the address bar (default is http://192.168.0.1).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Setup tab at the top and then click on Network Settings on the lefthand side.

              Step 4 Scroll down to Add DHCP Reservation.



              Step 5 Input a desired name and address. Click the Copy Your PC’s MAC ADDRESS button.

              If the Reservation address you’re creating is not for the machine that you are working from you’ll need to obtain the MAC address of that machine.

              Step 6 Click on Save Settings to save your settings.
              Model DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-655
              Question How do I configure my QoS on DIR series router?
              Answer QoS (Quality of Service) is designed to “shape” and prioritize your internet traffic among the computers on your LAN. This allows for an optimized internet experience.

              To set up QoS in your router, use the following steps:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DIR series router into the address bar (default is http://192.168.0.1).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab at the top and then click on QOS Engine on the left hand side.



              Step 4 Ensure the Enable QoS Engine box is checked. Also ensure that the Automatic Classification and Automatic Uplink Speed boxes are checked as well as.

              Step 5 Under QOS Engine Rules, fill in the required information for the QoS rule as follows:
              Make sure to click the check mark next to the rule to enable it.

            • Name - Create a name for the rule that is meaningful to you. (this identifies, to the user, which rule is being configured)

            • Priority - Assign the rule a priority. (1 being highest and 255 being lowest).

            • Protocol - Define a protocol number and/or type. (e.g. for streaming media you would use UDP and for FTP you would use TCP)

            • Source IP Range - Assign the local IP address range. (This tells the router what IP addresses on the LAN are to use the given QoS rule)

            • Source Port Range - Define the ports that you want prioritized. (e.g. Web traffic (http) operates on port 80.)

            • Remote IP range - Assign a remote IP address range. (Unless you are positive of the remote IP address range you want prioritized, leave this at it’s default setting. 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255)

            • Destination Port Range - Assign a remote port range. (Unless you are positive of the remote port range you want prioritized, leave this at it’s default setting. 0 to 65535)

              Step 6 Click Save Settings.
              • Model DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-655
              Question How do I setup my QoS to work with BitTorrent clients?
              Answer If you are using a BitTorrent client, you will want to make sure that the IP address and Port address range for the computer, that is hosting the BitTorrent client, has a QoS rule with a extremely low priority (e.g. 255). This is due to the high number of incoming connections BitTorrent can create.

              This will allow your “web traffic” computers to browse the internet smoothly.

              You may also want to give the computers on your LAN a much lower priority for web traffic so that web traffic is always given priority.

              Click here for step by step instructions on configuring QoS.
              Model DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-655
              Question How do I enable remote management on my DIR series router?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the EBR/WBR series router into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Tools tab at the top and then click on Admin on the lefthand side.



              Step 4 Check the box to Enable Remote Management. When enabling remote management, you can specify the IP address of the computer on the internet that you want to have access to your router or you can enter an asterisk (*) to allow access to any computer on the internet.

              Step 5 Enter the desired port in the Remote Admin Port dialoge box.

              Step 6 Click on Save Settings to save your settings.

              Model DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-655
              Question How do I configure MAC filtering on a DIR series router?
              Answer The MAC (Media Access Controller) Address filter option is used to control network access based on the MAC Address of the network adapter. A MAC address is a unique ID assigned by the manufacturer of the network adapter. This feature can be configured to ALLOW or DENY network/Internet access.

              Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DIR series into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Advanced tab along the top and then on Network Filter on the lefthand side.



              Step 4: From the Configure MAC Filtering drop down selection select your method of MAC filtering.
              • Turn MAC Filtering OFF
              • MAC Filtering ON and ALLOW computers listed to access the network.
              • MAC Filtering ON and DENY computers listed to access the network
              Step 5: Select your computer from the DHCP Client List dropdown or you can enter your computerīs MAC address manually.

              How do I find the MAC/Adapter Address in Windows NT, 2000 and XP?

              Step 6: Click Save Settings to save your settings.
              Model DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-655
              Question How do I create schedules on my DIR series router?
              Answer The schedule configuration option is used to manage schedule rules for various firewall and parental control features. This will allow you to set a time restriction on when firewire filters will take effect.

              Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DIR series router into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Tools tab at the top and then click on Schedule on the lefthand side.



              Step 4: Configure the following:
              • Name - Give your schedule a name
              • Day(s) - Check the box for All Week or select the desired time frame.
              • All Day 24hrs - Enabling this will have the rule active for a period of 24hrs.
              • Start and End time - If 24hrs is not checked you will need to configure your start and end time.
              Step 5: Click on Save Settings to save your configuration.
              Model DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-655 / DI-604 / DI-624 / DI-634M / DI-724GU / DI-724U / DI-804HV / DI-808HV / DI-825VUP / DI-LB604 / DIR-450 / DIR-130 / DIR-330 / DIR-615 / WBR-2310
              Question What is the difference between VIRTUAL SERVER and PORT FORWARDING?
              Answer Virtual Server - is used to forward a specific external port to an internal port. This would mean that a device that is connected to the LAN of your router, (e.g. a network camera), could be accessed from the WAN (internet) by forwarding the port it’s normally accessed at to a custom port of your choice.
              This can be useful when using camera’s and other devices that are accessed on port 80 by default and the ISPīs network doesn’t allow incoming traffic on port 80.

              Port Forwarding - is used to allow data to come from the WAN (Internet) and pass through the firewall to the destination ip address(s). This is used when a device or application behind the firewall of your router needs access to a range of ports to function properly. (E.g. online games or gaming consoles, FTP servers and network cameras.)

              This type of firewall rule can be made for multiple ip addresses on the LAN with a single rule. This is designed to allow multiple machines or devices to utilize this firewall rule without having to reconfigure the router for each new machine.

              However, no two devices or machines on the LAN side of the router can use the same port number at the same time. This is a crucial factor when setting up gaming machines and network cameras.
              Model DIR-655
              Question What is difference between the DIR-655 version A1 and A2?
              Answer The only difference, between the A1 and A2 revisions, is that the A2 revision has blue LEDs on the front panel.
              Model DIR-655 , DIR -635 , DIR-625 , DIR-615 , WBR-2310 , WBR-1310 , EBR-2310 , DGL-4100 , DGL-4300
              Question What are the Application Name & Computer Name options, under Port Forwarding, used for?
              Answer These features are designed to make it easier to open ports in the routers firewall.

              Below is a description of each option:

              APPLICATION NAME:
              Application Name is a list of predefined applications with the ports that they require. This is designed to allow you to open the ports for those applications quickly and easily.
              This can be useful for Gaming and FTP servers.



              COMPUTER NAME:
              Computer Name is a list of the computers connect to the router and thier MAC addressīs. This list is designed to streamline the process of configuring the firewall to specific LAN machines. It is based on the units MAC address table which is stored in the router when a LAN machine is connected.

              Model DIR-655 , DIR-625 , DIR-635 , DGL-4300 , DGL-4100, DIR-615
              Question Why am I unable to get online after setting up my DGL or DIR Series router?
              Answer The DGL and the DIR series routers will measure the available bandwidth coming from your modem upon initial boot.

              This process can take several moments.

              To check the status of this sequence, you can simply log in to the routers interface and click the STATUS TAB.

              If this sequence never fully completes or doesn’t complete properly, try power-cycling both the modem and the router at the same time. Please remember to reconnect the power to the modem first and then the router. Please allow a few moments for the devices to initialize and “sync” up.

              For help logging in to your router, click here.
              Model DIR-655 , DIR-635 , DIR-625
              Question What is the INBOUND FILTER, and how can it be used?
              Answer When you use the Virtual Server, Port Forwarding, or Remote Administration features to open specific ports to traffic from the Internet, you could be increasing the exposure of your LAN to cyberattacks from the Internet.

              In these cases, you can use Inbound Filters to limit that exposure by specifying the IP addresses of internet hosts that you trust to access your LAN through the ports that you have opened. You might, for example, only allow access to a game server on your home LAN from the computers of friends whom you have invited to play the games on that server.

              Inbound Filters can be used for limiting access to a server on your network to a system or group of systems. Filter rules can be used with Virtual Server, Gaming, or Remote Administration features. Each filter can be used for several functions; for example a "Game Clan" filter might allow all of the members of a particular gaming group to play several different games for which gaming entries have been created. At the same time an "Admin" filter might only allows systems from your office network to access the WAN admin pages and an FTP server you use at home. If you add an IP address to a filter, the change is effected in all of the places where the filter is used.

              Below is a list of each option with a description of its use:


              Add/Edit Inbound Filter Rule
              Here you can add entries to the Inbound Filter Rules List below, or edit existing entries.

              Name
              Enter a name for the rule that is meaningful to you.

              Action
              The rule can either Allow or Deny messages.

              Source IP Range
              Define the ranges of Internet addresses this rule applies to. For a single IP address, enter the same address in both the Start and End boxes. Up to eight ranges can be entered. The Enable checkbox allows you to turn on or off specific entries in the list of ranges.

              Save
              Saves the new or edited Inbound Filter Rule in the following list. When finished updating the Inbound Filter Rules List, you must still click the Save Settings button at the top of the page to make the changes effective and permanent.

              Inbound Filter Rules List
              The section lists the current Inbound Filter Rules. An Inbound Filter Rule can be changed by clicking the Edit icon, or deleted by clicking the Delete icon. When you click the Edit icon, the item is highlighted, and the "Edit Inbound Filter Rule" section is activated for editing.

              In addition to the filters listed here, two predefined filters are available wherever inbound filters can be applied:

              Allow All
              Permit any WAN user to access the related capability.

              Deny All
              Prevent all WAN users from accessing the related capability. (LAN users are not affected by Inbound Filter Rules.)

              Model DIR-655 , DIR-635 , DIR-625 , DIR-615 , DGL-4100 , DGL-4300
              Question How do I create custom schedules with my DGL or DIR series router?
              Answer First you will need to log into the router.

              Click here for instructions on logging into the router.

              For the DIR model routers, the schedules can be found under the TOOLS tab.

              DIR image



              For the DGL models the schedule option can be found under the ADVANCED tab.

              DGL image



              Schedules can be created for use with enforcing rules. For example, if you want to restrict web access to Mon-Fri from 3pm to 8pm, you could create a schedule selecting Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, and Fri and enter a Start Time of 3pm and End Time of 8pm.

              Add/Edit Schedule Rule
              In this section you can add entries to the Schedule Rules List below or edit existing entries.

              Name
              Give the schedule a name that is meaningful to you, such as "Weekday rule".

              Day(s)
              Place a checkmark in the boxes for the desired days or select the All Week radio button to select all seven days of the week.
              All Day - 24 hrs
              Select this option if you want this schedule in effect all day for the selected day(s).

              Start Time
              If you donīt use the All Day option, then you enter the time here. The start time is entered in two fields. The first box is for the hour and the second box is for the minute. Email events are normally triggered only by the start time.

              End Time
              The end time is entered in the same format as the start time. The hour in the first box and the minutes in the second box. The end time is used for most other rules, but is not normally used for email events.

              Save
              Saves the new or edited Schedule Rule in the following list. When finished updating the Schedule Rules, you must still click the Save Settings button at the top of the page to make the changes effective and permanent.

              Schedule Rules List
              This section shows the currently defined Schedule Rules. A Schedule Rule can be changed by clicking the Edit icon, or deleted by clicking the Delete icon. When you click the Edit icon, the item is highlighted, and the "Edit Schedule Rule" section is activated for editing.
              Model DIR-655 / DIR-625 / DIR-635 / DIR-450
              Question How do I set an administrative password on my DIR router?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Admin to the left.



              Step 4 To change the administrative password, enter a new password in the Admin Password section.

              Step 5 Click Save Settings to save the settings.
              Model DIR-655 / DIR-635 / DIR-625 / DIR-615 / DGL-4300 / DGL-4100
              Question What are the INBOUND FILTER and SCHEDULE used for in my routers Port Forward or Virtual Server sections?
              Answer SCHEDULE:
              The schedule is used to either ALWAYS ALLOW or DENY any given rule. It can also be used with user defined Schedules that can be created in the access control portion of the advanced tab.
              Help with the schedule section can be found here.



              INBOUND FILTER:
              The inbound filter would be used to allow or deny any given user defined rule. It too can also be used with custom inbound filter rules.
              Help with creating custom inbound filter rules can be found here.



              The DIR-615 has the schedule feature only.
              Model DIV-140
              Question How do I save my configuration files on the DIV-140
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the DIV-140. (The default IP address is 10.0.0.1). The default username is admin and the password is password.

              Step 2 Click on Device management.

              Step 3 Next click on the General tab.

              Step 4 Right click on the highlighted Backup configuration link. Select "Save target as" from the pop up menu.



              Step 5 Select the location where you want to save the files to, and name the file intuitively (i.e DIV-140config file.)

              Step 6 Save the config file as a text document.

              Model DIV-140
              Question What is the login username and password for the DIV-140.
              Answer The default username is admin and the password is password. Both the username and password are case sensitive and must be in lower case.
              Model DIV-140 / DVX-1000
              Question How do I add the DIV-140 to the DVX-1000?
              Answer In this example we will be setting up a DIV-140 Trunk Gateway. This gateway will allow the DVX-1000 to make calls out of and receive calls from PSTN lines. This setup proceedure involves two parts; configuring the DIV-140 to interface with the DVX-1000 and configuring the DVX-1000 to accept the connection.


              Configuring the Trunk Gateway (DIV-140)

              Step 1: First the network interface will need to be setup. The default IP address of the DIV-140 is 10.0.0.1 with a subnet mask of 255.0.0.0. You can setup the trunk gateway in one of two ways.
              • The first method is to use the console cable, make a connection via Hypeterminal. The Hyperterminal settings are 115200 8-N-1-N. Once you are logged into the command line interface, issue the following command: Set nw ip < IP address > < netmask > < default gateway ip > < dns server ip >. This will assign the IP address and subnet mask allowing you to connect from a local PC.
              • The second method is to reconfigure your PCīs IP address to be on the same subnet as the trunk gateway.
              Step 2: Once you have configured the DIV-140 to work within your computerīs subnet, you can access the deviceīs web interface at Https://x.x.x.x where x.x.x.x is the currently assigned IP address of the trunk gateway.

              Step 3: You will receive a security alert window regarding certificates. Click on Yes to proceed.

              Step 4: The login dialog box will now appear. Login using a username of admin and a password of password. The D-Link welcome page should now appear.

              Step 5: Click on the plus sign next to System Configuration along the lefthand side and then click on Device. Change the setting for Country via the dropdown menu to match whichever country you are in and then click on Apply.

              Step 6: Click on the plus sign next to Network Configuration along the lefhand side and then click on General. Configure your IP settings as follows:
              • IP Mode: Select the Mode based on your network. (For Static IP (Recommended) enter the IP Address for your network. In this example we will use 192.168.0.100)
              • Net Mask: Enter the Subnet Mask for your network.
              • Gateway: Enter the Gateway IP.
              • DNS Server: Enter the Primary and Secondary DNS server IP for your network.
              • Time Configuration: Enter the time manually or use NTP settings based on an available NTP Server.
              Click on Apply.

              Step 7: Click on VoIP Configuration along the lefthand side and then configure your VoIP settings as follows (For this example, the IP address of the DVX-1000 IP PBX is 192.168.0.50):
              • Under Primary Server:
              • Server Address: Enter the IP of the DVX-1000.
              • Server Port: Enter 5060 (Default SIP).
              • Under Secondary Server:
              • Server Address: This can be left blank.
              • Registration Timeout: This can be left at 3600.
              • Authentication Parameters: This can be left blank since we will be setting up Authentication Parameters for each channel separately. This is due to having to add each port as a gateway on the DVX-1000 with separate Authentication Parameters.
              • Under Outbound Proxy:
              • Server Address: Enter the IP of the DVX-1000.
              • Server Port: Enter 5060 (Default SIP).
              • Under Local Settings:
              • Local Port: Enter 5060 (Default SIP).
              Note: For inbound calls, the DIV-140 must be setup to route the incoming calls to the Auto Attendant of the DVX-1000. This will be configured below.

              Step 8: Click on the plus sign next to Call Routing along the lefhand side and then click on Destination. Click on Add New and then configure your settings as follows:
              • Destination Name: This name can be anything but it is typically best to use it to identify the corresponding IP PBX. It will be used in the next step.
              • Select VoIP Number. Enter the extension of the DVX-1000 Auto Attendant (it can be found on the DVX-1000 at Auto Attendant/Configuration) of the DVX-1000 in the Phone Number field.
              Click on Apply.

              Step 9: Click on Phone Book along the lefhand side, which can be found under Call Routing, and then configure your settings as follows:
              • Phone Number: Enter the extension of the Auto Attendant (it can be found in the DVX-1000 configuration under Auto Attendant/Configuration) of the DVX-1000.
              • Destination: Select the destination you specified in step 8 from the dropdown menu.
              Click on Add.

              Step 10: Now you will be setting up authentication information to authorize the IP PBX to send and receive calls with the DVX-1000. The SIP User ID, Authentication Username, and Authentication Password are setup on the DIV-140 and then added to the DVX-1000 as gateways for each port.

              Click on the plus sign next to Port Configuration along the lefthand side and then click on General. Configure your settings as follows:
              • Phone Number (aka. SIP User ID): Enter 001 for port 1.
                Note: When assigning the Phone Number you must make sure that this number is not matching any extension on the DVX-1000. For example, the default Operator extension is 1003. In most cases it is easiest to assign 001 - 004 for the Phone Numbers. Write this down for later use.
              • Display Name: Enter a display name. This can be whatever you like.
              • Authentication User ID: Enter an Auth User ID. This can be any number. For this document we will use 001. Write this down for later use.
              • Authentication Password: Enter an Auth Password. This can be any number. For this document we will use 001. Write this down for later use.
              • Under Features click on the checkbox for Hotline. This will reroute the incoming calls to the IP PBX Auto Attendant.
              • Caller ID: Enter the Caller ID you would like displayed.
              Click on Apply. You will then need to repeat this step for ports 2-4.

              Step 11: You will now need to save all of your changes on the DIV-140. Click on Save Changes along the lefthand side and then click on the Save Changes button to save all settings. This completes the DIV-140 portion of the setup.


              Configuring the IP PBX (DVX-1000)

              Step 1: Open a web browser and connect to the web interface of the DVX-1000.

              Step 2: Click on Call Server and then select Gateways. Click on Add New and then configure your settings as follows:
              • Gateway ID: This can be any name you decide.
              • Gateway Type: For the DIV-140 we will select PSTN.
              • Domain Name: Enter the IP of the DIV-140.
              • Port: 5060
              • Max Calls Supported: Uncheck unlimited and enter 1
              • Session Refresh Required: Leave unchecked.
              • Outbound Proxy Parameters: Check the Enabled option.
              • Domain Name: Enter the IP of the DIV-140
              • Port: 5060
              • Registration Required: Leave this unchecked.
              • SIP User ID: This will be the same as the Phone Number set in the DIV-140. For our example we used 001 for Port 1.
              • Username: This will be the same as the Authentication User ID set in the DIV-140.
              • Password & Retype Password: This will be the same as the Authentication Password set in the DIV-140.
              Click on Apply.

              Step 3: Click on the plus sign next to Call Server along the lefthand side and then click on Routes. Click on Route View for the LocalRouteGroup. Click on Add New and then configure your settings as follows:
              • Route Group Name: LocalRouteGroup is selected by default.
              • Select the Duration Parameters based on your desired schedule.
              • Route Name: This can be any name you desire.
              • Destination Type: For the DIV-140 we will select PSTN.
              • Destination ID: The DIV-140_Line-1 should drop down by default when PSTN is selected as Destination Type.
              • Priority: Select a free priority. Outbound calls will be made through the gateways on the basis of priority. In this example we use 1.
              • Min Digits: Enter the minimum number of digits to be dialed to use this gateway. In this example we will use 7 for local numbers.
              • Max Digits: Enter the maximum number of digits to be dialed to use this gateway. In this example we will use 19 for international calling.
              • Number of Masked Digits: This will be based on the dialed digit. The masked digit will remove the Dialed Digit when sending calls to the DIV-140. For example, if you dial 9 + 18003261688 the DVX-1000 will strip off the 9 and send only 18003261688 to the DIV-140, which forwards to the PSTN line. In this example we use 1.
              • Dialed Digit: The Dialed Digit is the number that must be dialed to select this gateway. If 9 is used on all subsequent gateways the DVX-1000 will roll over outbound calls to each gateway based on priority and current usage. In this example we use 9.
              • Prefix: Enter the same as the Phone Number in the DIV-140. For our example, we used 001 for Port 1.
              Click on Apply.

              This completes the setup of the DIV-140 with the DVX-1000. You should now be able to dial 9 + < Phone number > and the call will be routed out the DIV-140 to the PSTN line connected to Port 1. You can repeat the process for additional ports.
              Model DKVM-16
              Question Will my DKVM-16 work without the power supply?
              Answer The DKVM-16 draws power from the power adapter and the PC’s PS/2 port. Some PC’s PS/2 port can support enough power for the switch, but some PS/2 ports (such as those on laptops) are unable to supply enough power for the switch. In order to make sure the system works properly, please do not turn the power switch off or remove the power adapter from the switch.

              Although the PCs connected to the DKVM-16 are able to support enough power to the switch, the DKVM-16 requires a power adapter to daisychain more banks.
              Model DKVM-16
              Question Why is my keyboard not being detected or I receive a keyboard error during boot-up?
              Answer Please try the following tips to correct this issue. If you continue to have problems, please contact tech support at 1-877-453-5465 (USA only).
              • Check the cables and make sure that they are connected properly to the correct ports.
              • Check to make sure that the power adapter is plugged in and is working properly. Make sure the power switch is on.
              • Do not press any keys on the keyboard while the selected computer is booting up. This applies to any PC, whether it is standalone or connected to a DKVM-16.
              Model DKVM-16
              Question Why does my computer boot up correctly, but my mouse does not work?
              Answer Please try the following tips to correct this issue. If you continue to have problems, please contact tech support at 1-877-453-5465 (USA only).
              • Check the cables and make sure that they are connected properly to the correct ports.
              • Make sure that the mouse works when plugged into the computer. Rebooting is necessary when trying this. If the mouse pointer still does not move, then either your PS/2 mouse port or the mouse itself has a problem.
              • Try using a different mouse to verify the port on the KVM switch is working.
              • Make sure that the mouse is a true PS/2 mouse. A combo mouse will work just as long as it is set for the PS/2 mode with the correct adapter. A serial-only mouse with a combo mouse adapter WILL NOT work.
              • Check to make sure that the power adapter for your KVM switch is plugged in and is working properly. Make sure that the power switch is on.
              Model DKVM-16
              Question Why is my mouse not detected during boot-up?
              Answer
              • Check the cables and make sure that they are connected properly to the correct ports.
              • Check your computer/motherboard documentation to make sure that the PS/2 mouse port (or IRQ) is enabled.
              • Make sure that the mouse is directly plugged into the computer (bypassing the KVM switch). Rebooting is necessary when trying this. If the computer still does not detect the mouse, then there is a problem with your computer’s PS/2 mouse port.
              Model DKVM-16
              Question When I am cascading the MASTER unit on my DKVM-16, why does it not see the slave unit(s)?
              Answer
              • Refer to the Installation section of the DKVM-16 Product Manual for information on how to properly connect the daisy-chain cable.
              • Make sure you are using the correct daisy-chain cable. Using any other cable will not guarantee proper operation or video quality.
              • Reset all the slave units first and then reset master unit to recover the lost slave unit.
              • Although a power supply is not necessary to make the slave unit work, try adding a power supply.
              Model DKVM-16
              Question Why am I getting ghost shadowing or fuzzy images on my monitor when connected to my DKVM-16?
              Answer
              • Check the cables and make sure that they are connected properly.
              • Make sure the cables are not too long.
              • Replace your VGA cables with coaxial, double-shielded cables.
              • Your resolution and/or refresh rate may be extremely high.
              • Check to make sure that the power adapter is plugged in and is working properly. Make sure the power switch is on.
              • Lower your refresh rate and/or screen resolution settings.
              Model DKVM-16 / DKVM-2 / DKVM-2K / DKVM-2U / DKVM-4 / DKVM-4K / DKVM-8 / DKVM-8E
              Question How do I get my mouse to come back online after switching between computers?
              Answer Press the Scroll Lock key twice then "m" (no quotes) to reset the mouse.
              Model DKVM-16 / DKVM-2 / DKVM-2K / DKVM-2U / DKVM-4 / DKVM-4K / DKVM-8 / DKVM-8E
              Question What are the hotkeys for my DKVM series KVM switch?
              Answer
              DKVM Hot Key Menu

              • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + 1 - Switches to PC 1
              • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + 2 - Switches to PC 2
              • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + S - Activates Auto Scan Mode. Each computer will be scanned every 10 seconds. Press the space bar to exit auto scan mode.
              • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + B - Turns beeper ON/OFF
                NOTE: The DKVM-2K does not support turning on and off the beeper.
              • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + M - Resets the mouse and keyboard
              Note: The right and left key’s can also be used to toggle through each port one-by-one. To activate this feature press Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock and select either the right or left key.


              Troubleshooting Tips

              Keyboard: If your keyboard is not functional, not detected, or there is a keyboard error, check the following:
              • Make sure that the keyboard is properly connected to the computer and to the KVM switch. Check that the keyboard is plugged into the correct USB/PS2 keyboard port and not the USB/PS2 mouse port.
              • Verify that the keyboard works when plugged into the computer directly.
              • If you have multiple operating systems installed on your computer, please contact your motherboard/computers manufacture for information on enabling USB/PS2 support on your system.
              Mouse: If your mouse is not functional, not detected or there is a mouse error, check the following:
              • Make sure that the mouse is properly connected to the computer and to the KVM switch. Check that the mouse is plugged into the correct USB/PS2 mouse port and not the USB/PS2 keyboard port.
              • Verify that the mouse works when plugged into the computer directly.
              • Try using a different mouse.
              • If you are having trouble with the mouse movement, try resetting the switch by pressing Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + M.
              • Do not move the mouse or press any mouse buttons when switching from one PC to another.
              • Try resetting the mouse by unplugging it from the DKVM for about 3 seconds and reconnection it.
              Video: If the image on your monitor is not clear, check the following:
              • Verify that the video monitor cables are inserted properly.
              • Try lowering the resolution and refresh rate of your monitor.
              • Try using a shorter video cable.
              Model DKVM-2
              Question What operating systems does the DKVM-2 support?
              Answer The DKVM-2 supports the following operating systems:
              • DOS
              • Linux
              • Windows NT 4.0
              • Windows 95
              • Windows 98
              • Windows ME
              • Windows 2000
              • Windows XP
              Model DKVM-2
              Question How do I use the Hot Keys on my DVKM-2?
              Answer
              • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + 1 - Switch to first computer
              • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + 2 - Switch to second computer
              • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + Up Arrow - Switch to previous computer
              • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + Down Arrow - Switch to next computer
              • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + 0 - Auto scan (Scans all ports connected).
              Note: Space bar stops the auto scan. Auto scan lasts 10 seconds before changing to the next port.
              Model DKVM-2 / DKVM-2K / DKVM-2U / DKVM-4 / DKVM-4K / DKVM-8 / DKVM-8E / DKVM-16
              Question Where can I purchase additional DKVM cables?
              Answer D-Link Shop sells DKVM cables and AT-to-PS/2 converters. These cables are 6 feet long.

              Please visit D-Link Shop for more information.
              Model DKVM-2K
              Question Why after replacing my keyboard, mouse, or monitor on my DKVM-2K switch they will not respond?
              Answer If you change keyboard, mouse, or monitor, your KVM switch may need to be reset. To reset the switch, you will need to do the following steps.

              Step 1 Shut Down both computers and disconnect the power from both computers by turning off the A/C power to each computer for at least 30 seconds. Note: The KVM switch receives power from the computers even if the computers are Turned off

              Step 2 Turn the A/C power back on for both computers. Then turn on both computers. The KVM switch will now be reset and the new keyboard, mouse, or monitor will now respond properly.
              Model DKVM-2U
              Question What steps can I take if my KVM is not working?
              Answer
            • Using a DVI-to-analog adapter is not recommended.

            • If there is a setting within the monitor to set the display frequency in Hz, try altering that setting.

            • Try using the shortest possible cable to connect from the monitor to the KVM. If the cable is tangled or coiled, uncoil the cable as this may cause EMI (electromagnetic interference), degrading the signal quality to unacceptable levels.

            • The distance between a KVM switch and a server computer can be up to 15 feet with video resolution up to 1600 x 1200 pixels. Greater distances or resolutions have shown to cause increasing video distortion.
              • Model DKVM-4 / DKVM-8
              Question What are the distance limitations for the DKVM-4 and DKVM-8?
              Answer The distance between a KVM switch and a server computer can be up to 15 feet with video resolution up to 1600 x 1200 pixels. Greater distances have shown to cause increasing video distortion.
              Model DKVM-8E
              Question What is the default password of my DKVM-8E?
              Answer The default password to the DKVM-8E is eight zeros (00000000).
              Model DKVM-8E
              Question How do I turn on the OSD (On Screen Display)?
              Answer This answer applies to the DKVM-8 and DKVM-8E only.

              To enable the OSD press Scroll Lock twice, followed by the Space Bar.

              To exit the OSD or the secondary OSD screen press the ESC key.
              Model DMC-700SC
              Question How do I connect 2 DMC-700SC together via ethernet?
              Answer Step 1: Unscrew and pull out the media converter board.



              Step 2: Locate the DIP switch.



              Step 3: Adjust the DIP switch accordingly:

              Media Converter A
              • Switch 1: Off (Auto Negotiation Mode)
              • Switch 2: On (LLR enable)

              Media Converter B
              • Switch 1: Off (Auto Negotiation Mode)
              • Switch 2: Off (LLR disable)
              Model DMC-700SC
              Question How do I connect 2 DMC-700SC together via fiber?
              Answer Step 1: Unscrew and pull out the media converter board.



              Step 2: Locate the DIP switch.



              Step 3: Adjust the DIP switch accordingly:

              Media Converter A
              • Switch 1: On (Forced Mode)
              • Switch 2: On (LLR enable)

              Media Converter B
              • Switch 1: On (Forced Mode)
              • Switch 2: Off (LLR disable)


              Note: You must connect the media converter to a gigabit port on the switch.
              Model DMF-560TXD
              Question What PCMCIA specifications does the DMF-560TXD follow?
              Answer The DMF-560TXD follows the PC Card specification. It relies on a PCMCIA slot that supports 16-Bit 5 Volt PC Cards. The 32-Bit PC CARDBUS slot found on newer computers is backward compatible to this standard in most situations. Please contact your notebook computer or BIOS manufacturer for more information the specifications for your particular computer.
              Model DMF-560TXD
              Question Does the DMF-560TX or DMF-560TXD have distinctive ring support?
              Answer Unfortunately no. There is no distinctive ring support with these products.
              Model DMP-110
              Question How can I erase a single Voice/DVR track on the DMP-110?
              Answer Step 1Turn the player on by pressing the Play/Pause button.

              Step 2 Use the Select button on the left side of the player to select DVR mode. DVR will be displayed in the LCD screen.

              Step 3 Select the track you want to erase by using the Forward or Rewind buttons.

              Step 4 Press the Play/Pause button to start playing the track you want to erase.

              Step 5 While the track is playing press and hold the Erase button on the top of the player.

              Step 6 When Erase starts to flash press the rewind button once. The track is erased.
              Model DMP-110 / DMP-120
              Question How do I set up the utility to listen to my voice recordings from the DMP-110 or DMP-120?
              Answer Download the latest drivers/utility here.

              Download the Zip file to a folder, unzip and click on setup. Make sure that the old Music Manager is removed first in add/remove programs otherwise the player will not be detected when the new Manager is opened.

              To convert just click on voice recorder and then translate to wav. The file can be played by double clicking on it.
              Model DMP-120
              Question How do I download songs to my DMP-120 player?
              Answer After you have installed the drivers and software for you DMP-120, you will need to follow the steps below. These steps will allow you to download MP3 songs to your player.

              Step 1 Make sure the player is turned on and connected to your computer.

              Step 2. Click on the D-Link manager Icon that is on your desktop.

              Step 3. If this is the first time you have used the player, please format the Internal memory at this time.

              Step 4. Once formatted you may now start to download songs to the player.

              Step 5. Select file type "MP3" and type of memory "Internal" on the DMP-120.

              Step 6. Choose the folder which has all of your MP3 files.

              Step 7. Highlight the songs you wish to download.

              Step 8. Click on the download Icon button.

              Step 9. The progress window will appear and downloading will begin.

              Step 10. Once completed, close the program, disconnect the player from the computer, and playback your songs.

              Note: Depending on the software you are using the steps above may vary. Make sure the DMP-120 is on and the memory has been formatted before trying to download songs.
              Model DMP-210 / DMP-220 / DMP-90 / DMP-100 / MP-105 / DMP-110 / DMP-120 / DMP-110b
              Question What Smart Media cards can I use with my D-Link MP3 player?
              Answer D-Link MP3 players are compatible with 3.3V Smart Media cards. The maximum memory size for each player is predefined and is not further expandable. Unfortunately, once the media is formatted for the MP3 player, you will not be able to reformat it for use with other smart media readers, such as a digital camera. The DMP-210 and DMP-220 is shipped with software that will allow you to reformat the memory card back to their original state so that it can be used in a digital camera and other multimedia devices.

              MP3 Player Maximum Memory Upgrade
              MP-105 Up to 32MB
              DMP-90 Up to 16MB
              DMP-100 Up to 32MB
              DMP-110/INT Up to 32MB
              DMP-110/Rec Up to 64MB
              DMP-120 Up to 64MB
              DMP-210 From 32MB - 128MB
              DMP-220 From 32MB - 128MB


              Note: Smart Media cards must be 3.3v compliant and cannot be a digital media card.
              Model DMP-90
              Question How do I install the DMP-90 on to my computer?
              Answer Make sure the parallel port is set to ECP. You will need to enter the BIOS setup for your computer and change the printer port option to ECP.

              Install the Music Manager by selecting start>run> and type [cd drive letter]:\setup.exe and follow the setup program through the installation. The installation program will put a shortcut icon for the music manager on your destop.

              Connect cable to the parallel port.

              Connect the Mp3 player to the cable and turn it on, "conn" should appear in the LCD window.

              Open the DMP manager by double clicking on the shortcut icon on your desktop. Click on the "Detect" button and then on the "Initialize" button. "HI" or "LOW" quality format will appear. Choose "HI".

              When finished, internal memory will show up at the bottom of the manager window.

              Select the music files from the mp3 folder, drag and drop files into music manager. The "Check Msg" must be displayed to drag & drop songs. If this button is not displayed, click the "Check Song" button, which will change to a "Check Msg" button.

              The "Downloading Progress" bar will appear at the bottom of the manager.

              When finished, close the manager and you can play back the music on the player.
              Model DMP-90 / DMP-100 / DMP-110 / DMP-120
              Question Once I format my Smart Media card for use with the D-Link MP3 player can it be used in any other device? Can it be unformatted afterwards so that I may use it in any other device?
              Answer Once the Smart Media card is formatted for use with the D-Link MP3 player, it may not be able to be used in or formatted by other devices.
              Model DMP-90 / MP-105
              Question Can I install the DMP-90 or the MP-105 in Windows 2000 or Windows XP?
              Answer Unfortunately no. Both of these MP3 players are to be used in Windows 95, 98 and Me operating systems. We do not have or offer support for Windows 2000 or Windows XP.

              Note: Drivers for both the DMP-90 and MP-105 are compatible with each other.

              Read here for drivers
              Model DMP-90 / MP-105
              Question Do the DMP-90 and MP-105 use the same type of cable?
              Answer Yes. Both of these players use the same type cable.

              Connecting your cable:

              Step 1 Connect one end of the cable to the parallel port on your computer.

              Step 2 Connect the smaller end of the cable, which has 15 pins, to your player.

              Step 3 Turn the player on.
              Model DMP-HD610
              Question Where can I get a replacement battery for the DMP-HD610?
              Answer The type of battery used in the DMP-HD610 is a 1400mAh LI-ION rechargeable battery. You can get a replacement battery directly from D-Link. However this type of battery will cost you around $40.00. For further information please contact D-linkīs RMA department at 1-888-499-9945.

              Note: RMA hours are from 6am-5:30pm Pacific time.
              Model DMP-HD610
              Question How do I get my Macintosh computer to recognize the DMP-HD610?
              Answer The DMP-HD610 will not recognize MacOS Extended / Standard (HFS+ or HFS) volumes (as noted by Cannot Find FAT16 or FAT32 error message upon booting DMP-HD610). If prompted by the Finder to format the DMP-HD610, be sure to choose DOS as the initialization method.

              If you have already formatted the drive as HFS or HFS+, you will need to reinitialize the volume. To do this follow the steps below

              Step 1 Back-up any information already copied to the drive

              Step 2 Highlight the drive on the desktop

              Step 3 Go to the Special menu and choose the Erase option

              Step 4 Click on MacOS Extended and choose DOS as the initialization method

              Step 5 Click on Erase

              The drive should now be formatted as a DOS volume.
              Model DMP-HD610
              Question How do I use Musicmatch Jukebox to create, save and play a playlist on my DMP-HD610?
              Answer Getting Started:

              If you do not already have the Musicmatch Jukebox software, you can download it directly from Musicmatch. Once you have Musicmatch installed follow the steps below to create, save and play you playlists.

              Download Musicmatch Now

              Creating a playlist:

              You must already have songs uploaded to the DMP-HD610 to create playlists. Basically, to upload songs to the DMP-HD610, just drag and drop the songs from your computer to the DMP-HD610.

              Step 1 Click on the Musicmatch Icon on your Desktop.

              Step 2 Click on the Open button beneath the Playlist window. This will open a window where you can select different locations for selecting songs for your playlist. If you are creating songs from your computer to put on the playlist, select My Computer.

              Step 3 After selecting the My Computer icon you will be able to select the drive letter for the DMP-HD610. Click on the driver letter for the DMP-HD610 to select it.

              Step 4 Choose the songs you wish to add to the playlist by browsing the folders and double-clicking on the song. Everytime you save a song, make sure to uncheck the clear current playlist box. If not unchecked when selecting songs from different folders it will overwrite the songs in the playlist window.

              Step 5 Once you have all of the songs needed for your playlist, click Save. A save window will come up and you will be able to name your new playlist. Clicking on Save will save your playlist to a default folder in the Program Files\MusicMatch\MusciMatch Jukebox\Playlist\Default folder on your hard drive. You cannot change this path, however, it will always be in a sub folder of MusicMatch.

              The path to the folder is:

              C:\Program Files\MusicMatch\MusicMatch Jukebox\Playlist\Default

              Note: The drive letter may vary depending on which drive letter your operating systemis installed. On most computers this drive letter is C: as in the example above. If you do not know which drive letter you operating system is on, search for the Program Files folder

              Copying the playlist to the DMP-HD610:

              Step 1 With your DMP-HD610 connected to your USB port right-click on the My Computer Icon on your desktop.

              Step 2 Select Explore from the list.

              Step 3 Go to the folder where your playlists were saved. C:\Program Files\MusicMatch\MusicMatch Jukebox\Playlist\Default When you finally open the Default folder, your new playlist will be listed.

              Step 4 You can then Drag and Drop the playlist into your DMP-HD610 drive letter.

              How do I play my list once I have copied it to my DMP-HD610?

              Step 1 Disconnect the DMP-HD610 from your computer. Make sure the DMP-HD610 is powered-up and the display screen is visible.

              Note: Remember to remove the unit the proper way or you may damage it.
              • Win 98: You can just remove the DMP-HD610
              • Win Me / 2000 / XP: First go to the Task bar and click on the icon with the green arrow. The task bar is the small window in the lower right-hand corner of you computer screen where the time is displayed
              • Mac: Find the No_Name drive on your desktop.This is the actual name of the new drive that will appear on the desktop once the DMP-HD610 is installed. Hold the Control key and click on the drive. Choose Eject from the popup menu. You can now safely remove the DMP-HD610 from your computer
              Step 2 On the DMP-HD610 push the Browse button and then the Back arrow button until a down arrow is displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the display window. This will bring you back to the root of the drive

              Step 3 The new play list that you copied to the DMP-HD610 will be at the bottom of the list. Use the Down arrow button to scroll to the bottom of the list or if your list is very long use the Up arrow button

              Step 4 Once the small arrow is aligned with your playlist, push the play button

              Step 5 You should see PL.LIST at the bottom of the LCD window. This indicates that you are playing a list. All playlists will be indicated by PL.LIST, no matter what the name of the playlist

              Enjoy.
              Model DMP-HD610
              Question I have charged the battery for the DMP-HD610 for the full 8 hours. How much playing time should I expect to get?
              Answer After you have fully charged the battery on the DMP-HD610 you will get approximately 4 to 6 hours of continous play. If you want to get maximum play time from the DMP-HD610 D-Link recommends that you use the following settings and devices.

            • Make sure to use the headphones that were shipped with the DMP-HD610.
            • Set the volume level to 16.
            • Set the LCD Level to half.
            • Set the bass and treble to half.
            • Leave Backlight turned off.

              Note: Making changes to any of these settings may reduce the amount of play time that you would normally get from a fully charged battery.
              • Model DMP-HD610
              Question Will the DMP-HD610 create its own playlist without using Musicmatch or Winamp?
              Answer If you would like the DMP-HD610 to create a playlist containing all the files within a folder and all of the folders within the folder, please follow these steps below.

              Step 1 Turn the DMP-HD610 on by using the Power switch on the top of the player.

              Step 2 Push the Browse button and then the Back button. This will get you to the root of your drive and the top of the LCD window should read Hard Disk. All of the folders will have Down arrows to the left of them.

              Step 3 You may use the UP and Down arrows on the DMP-HD610 to select the folder that you will be using to create your playlist.

              Step 4 When you have made your selection press and hold down the play button,the DMP-HD610 will start reading all of the tracks in that folder and begin creating your list. This may take a few moments.

              Note: If you have folders within folders the list will be created using all of them.

              Step 5 Once the DMP-HD610 has finished creating the list, it will then start playing the list automatically.

              Step 6 If you would like to listen to your songs in no particular order press the program button on the DMP-HD610 one time. This will start playing your songs in a random sequence. To make sure you have selected random mode look in the LCD window on the player and in the bottom right hand corner you will see the following, PL.Rand. In this mode the DMP-HD610 will play the list in no particular order.

              ATTENTION: This playlist can not be edited by the user. The DMP-HD610 creates the list on its own. Changing the sequence of songs to Random is the only change you can make.
              Model DMP-HD610
              Question How do I create and play a playlist for the DMP-HD610 using Winamp?
              Answer You can create a playlist using Winamp by following the steps below.

              Step 1 Click on the Winamp icon on your desktop.

              Step 2 Click on the ADD button and then ADD FILE. Browse to your DMP-HD610 drive letter and select the files you wish to add to your playlist.

              Note: You may need to repeat this process if you are adding mp3īs from different folders.

              Step 3 Once you have added the songs to the playlist window click on LIST OPTS, then SAVE LIST. You will then be prompted to name and save your playlist, make sure that you are saving your list to the DMP-HD610

              Once you have the playlist saved to your player follow these steps to play it.

              Step 1 Disconnect the DMP-HD610 from your computer. Make sure the HD610 is powered-up and the display screen is visible.

              Note: Remember to remove the unit the proper way or you may damage it.
              • Win 98: You can just remove the HD610
              • Win Me / 2000 / XP: First go to the Task bar and click on the icon with the green arrow. The task bar is the small window in the lower right-hand corner of you computer screen where the time is displayed
              • Mac: Find the No_Name drive on your desktop. Hold the Control key and click on the drive. Choose Eject from the menu. You can now safely remove the DMP-HD610 from your computer


              Step 2 On the DMP-HD610 push the browse button and then the Back arrow button until a down arrow is displayed in the upper left-hand corner of the display window. This will bring you back to the root of the drive

              Step 3 The new play list that you copied to the DMP-HD610 will be at the bottom of the list. Use the Down arrow button to scroll to the bottom of the list or if your list is very long use the Up arrow button

              Step 4 Once the small arrow is aligned with your playlist, push the play button

              Step 5 You should see PL.LIST at the bottom of the LCD window. This indicates that you are playing a list. All playlists will be indicated by PL.LIST, no matter what the name of the playlist




              You can download Winamp by following the link below.

              Download Winamp
              Model DMP-HD610
              Question How long should I charge the batteries for my DMP-HD610 for the first time, right out of the box?
              Answer When you take the DMP-HD610 out of the box, you should charge the battery for a minimum of 8 hours before trying to download any MP3 songs onto the player. This will ensure that the battery is charged to 100%, otherwise playing time and battery life will be reduced dramatically.
              Model DMP-HD610
              Question Sometimes the recharge light on my DMP-HD610 is bright, then becomes dim, then hours later it goes out completely. When dimly lit, is recharging complete, or must I wait until the light is completely out?
              Answer If the light on the DMP-HD610 is dim, the battery is not fully charged. It is best to wait until the light goes out completely. Itīs only when the light goes out that the battery is completely charged.
              Model DMP-HD610
              Question Should I run the battery down completely on the DMP-HD610 before recharging?
              Answer Rechargeable batteries have a tendency to remember if you donīt let them run down completely before recharging. If you do this often without letting the battery drain completely you may lower the capacity of the battery to take a full charge.

              In most cases, the memory degradation will only show several years after you buy the device.

              D-Link recommends that you let the batteries discharge completely before recharging.
              Model DMP-HD610
              Question Where can I get the power cable for my DMP-HD610 that goes from the car cigarette lighter to the unit?
              Answer D-Link does not provide a certified car adapter for the DMP-HD610 10GB USB external drive.
              Model DMP-HD610
              Question When I finish downloading files to the DMP-HD610, should I keep the AC Adaptor connected to the unit for the full three hour recharge time or disconnect it at that time?
              Answer If this is the first time that you operate the DMP-HD610, it is best to leave the battery in and the AC adapter connected for the entire charge period. Make sure you wait until the charge light goes out completely before disconnecting the AC adapter.

              If it is not the first use, then it doesnīt matter if you leave it in for the 3 hour period.
              Model DMP-HD610
              Question Does the battery for the DMP-HD610 recharge at the same time that the files are being downloaded?
              Answer The battery will recharge any time that the AC adapter is plugged in. This means that the battery will recharge while downloading files from the computer.
              Model DMP-HD610
              Question Why are my browse button and my settings button on the DMP-HD610 reversed?
              Answer The browse and settings buttons are reversed, however they work fine. To browse; simply press settings. To check the settings; simply press browse.
              Model DMP-HD610
              Question How do I reformat the DMP-HD610?
              Answer If you are having problems with the DMP-HD610 and you need to reformat the player, please follow the steps below.

              Windows operating systems:

              Step 1 Connect the DMP-HD610 to the computer.

              Step 2 Move all the files from the player over to the computer as the reformat is going to erase all the files on the DMP-HD610.

              Step 3 Double-click on the My Computer icon on the desktop. Highlight the DMP-HD610 Removable drive. Click on File > Format > select Quick Format and click Start.

              Step 4 Reload the files onto your DMP-HD610 and verify you can see the files.

              Macintosh operating systems:

              Step 1 Connect the DMP-HD610 to the computer.

              Step 2 Move all the files from the player over to the computer as the reformat is going to erase all the files on the DMP-HD610.

              Step 3 Click on the Untitled Disk Drive on your desktop. Go to Special > Erase.

              Step 4 Reload the files onto you DMP-HD610 and verify you can see the files.
              Model DNS-120
              Question How do I view the device information on my DNS-120?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DNS-120 in the address bar. Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click Config.



              Step 3 Click the Status tab and then click Device Info to the left.



              Basic Status will display information such as the IP address and subnet mask of the DNS-120.

              Device Status will display the Workgroup, Name, and Description of the DNS-120.

              Folder Status will display information about the folders on the hard drive(s) attached to the DNS-120.
              Model DNS-120
              Question How do I configure the time settings on my DNS-120?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DNS-120 in the address bar. Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click Config.



              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Time to the left.



              Step 4 To sync the time on the DNS-120 with an NTP time server, enter the URL or IP address of the NTP time server next to Default NTP Server and then click Set Time.

              To sync the time with your computer click Set Time next to Set time from my computer.

              To set the time manually select the day, time, and time zone and then click Set Time.
              Model DNS-120 / DNS-G120
              Question How do I change the administrator password on my DNS-120/G120?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DNS-120 in the address bar. Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click Config.



              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Admin to the left.



              Step 4 Next to Password enter the current password. Next to New Password enter the new password and then confirm it next to Confirm Password.

              Step 5 Click Apply to save the new password.

              Note: You will be prompted to login to the web-based configuration after saving the new password. Be sure to login using the new password.
              Model DNS-120 / DNS-G120
              Question How do I configure the device settings on my DNS-120/G120?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DNS-120 in the address bar. Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click Config.



              Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click Device to the left.



              Step 4 Configure the following:

              • Workgroup - The workgroup identifies a group of computers on a network. All computers should use the same workgroup name.
              • Name - The name will identify the DNS-120 on the network.
              • Description - The description will provide additional information about your DNS-120 to users who access it via the network.
              Step 5 Click Apply to save the new settings.
              Model DNS-120 / DNS-G120
              Question How do I configure the LAN IP address on my DNS-120/G120?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DNS-120 in the address bar. Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click Config.



              Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click LAN to the left.

              Step 4 The LAN IP address is set to DHCP Client by default.



              To change the LAN IP address to static select Static IP using the radio buttons and configure the following:

              • IP Address - Enter the LAN IP address of the DNS-120.
              • Subnet Mask - Enter the subnet mask of the network that the DNS-120 is connecting to.
              • Gateway IP Address - Enter the gateway.
              • DNS1 - A DNS server resolves domain names to IP addresses. Enter the IP address of the primary DNS server.
              • DNS2 - Enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server.


              Step 5 Click Apply to save the new settings.
              Model DNS-120 / DNS-G120
              Question How do I reset my DNS-120/G120 to factory defaults?
              Answer Step 1 Locate the hole on the back of the DNS-120 below the word RESET.



              Step 2 Using a paper clip, press and hold the Reset button for about 5 seconds and then release.

              Step 3 After the DNS-120 reboots it will be reset to the factory default settings.
              Model DNS-120 / DNS-G120
              Question How do I map a network drive to my DNS-120/G120?
              Answer Step 1 From the desktop, right-click on My Computer and select Map Network Drive.



              Step 2 Select the drive letter you wish to assign to the network drive and then click Browse to select the drive or folder you wish to map to.



              Step 3 Navigate to the drive or folder and click OK.



              Step 4 Select Reconnect at login so when computer boots up the mapping will reconnect automatically. Select Different Username to enter in the username and password you created in the DNS-120 setup.

              Model DNS-120 / DNS-G120
              Question Will my NTFS formatted hard drive work with the DNS-120/G120?
              Answer Yes. NTFS is supported in firmware version 1.17 (read-only).
              Model DNS-120 / DNS-G120
              Question How do I enable the FTP server on my DNS-120/G120?
              Answer Step 1: Log into the web based configuration of the DNS-120/G120 by launching the Easy Search Utility or by opening a web browser and entering http://dns-120 into the address bar.

              Step 2: Click on Advanced and then click on FTP Server.

              Step 3: Select a user from the dropdown menu or check the box for All Accounts.

              Step 4: Click on Open to select the folder you want to allow FTP access to.

              Note: Check Root to assign access to both USB drives at once.



              Note: If Root is not checked, select the folder and click OK. Click on the plus sign to expand the folder tree.

              Step 5: Select Read Only or Read/Write depending on your needs. Click on Add.



              Note: The rule will be listed under Path. The rule shown will allow an Anonymous user access to the root folder on the drive with Read-Only permissions.

              If you are behind a router, you will need to forward the FTP port to the DNS-120. Once the port is forwarded to the DNS-120, users from the Internet will enter ftp:// followed by the WAN IP address of the router (e.g.ftp://64.56.23.111).

              Click here for instructions on opening ports on your D-Link router
              Model DNS-323
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DNS-323?
              Answer Step 1 Download the latest firmware.

              Step 2 Once youīve downloaded the firmware, open a web browser and log into your DNS-323.

              Step 3 Enter your username (admin) and your password. Click Config to enter the web configuration for the device.

              Step 4 Click on the Tools tab and then the Firmware button on the left side. Click on the Browse button and browse to the .bin (or .dlf) file you downloaded in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click Open.



              Step 5 Click Save Settings. It may take a up to 30 seconds for the upgrade to complete. Click on the Continue button. The firmware is now upgraded.

              Model DNS-323
              Question How do I create Users in the DNS-323?
              Answer Step 1 Log into the DNS-323. The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on Config.

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab at the top and then click on Users on the lefthand side.



              Step 2 Under Create A User, configure the following:

            • Group - Select a previously created Group for the user to join or none if there are no groups assigned.

            • User Name - Set a unique name for the user.

            • Password - Set a unique password for the user.

            • Confirm Password - Confirm the assigned password for the user.

              Step 3 Click on the Apply button to save your settings.
              • Model DNS-323
              Question How do I set up Disk Quotas in the DNS-323?
              Answer The DNS-323 supports storage quotas for both groups and individual users. Assigning a quota to a group or user will limit the amount of storage they are allocated. By default, users and groups do not have a quota.

              Step 1 Log into the DNS-323. The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on Config.

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab at the top and then click on Quotas on the lefthand side.



              By default, all users and groups are displayed on the Quota Settings page. Users and groups are automatically listed on this page, and cannot be deleted. The default quota setting is “Unlimited”.

              Step 3 Click the notepad icon of the user you want to add a quota to.



              Step 4 Set a quota amount (MB) for the user and click Apply.

              The user, their amount of storage used, and their storage limit will noe be displayed under User Quota Settings.

              Step 5 Click Start at the bottom of the page to start the service.
              Model DNS-323
              Question Why canīt I see my files, on the first drive, after adding a second drive?
              Answer If you start with one drive, and it is in the left bay, it will be Volume 1. And when you add the second drive it will become Volume 2 and the right drive will become Volume 1.

              At this point, when the user accesses Volume 1, it will appear as if all of the information is gone, but itīs actually on Volume 2.

              If you switch the physical position of the first drive to the Right bay, you will be able to access the files.

              The reason this happens is:

              There are logical volumes and physical volumes.

              A physical volume refers to the actual hard drive.
              A logical volume refers to a formatted partition.

            • In Standard mode with one disk , the physical volume is irrelevant and the logical volume is Volume 1 regardless of which bay the drive is in.

            • In Standard mode with two disks, the physical location of the disks will determine which volume is which drive. Volume 1 is always on the right and Volume 2 is always on the left.

              • Model DNS-323
              Question Will the DNS-323 work with my DSM-320/320RD/510/520?
              Answer Yes, the DNS-323 has a built-in UPnP AV server which allows it to serve content directly to a UPnP AV compliant media adapter.

              Because you will be connecting directly to the DNS-323 from your media adapter you will not need to run the Media Server Software on a PC.
              Model DNS-323
              Question What SATA hard drives have been tested with the DNS-323?
              Answer Below is a list of SATA hard drives that the DNS-323 has been successfully tested with.

              You are NOT required to use these drives for successful operation. Most other SATA drives will also be compatible.

              Hitachi
              HDT722525DLA380 250GB
              HDS725050KLA360 500GB
              HDS722580VLSA80 80GB

              Maxtor
              6V080E0 80GB
              6L300S0 300GB
              6Y120M0 120GB

              Samsung
              SP1213C 120GB

              Seagate
              ST380810AS 80GB
              ST3200826AS 200GB
              ST3400832AS 400GB
              ST3400833NS 400GB
              ST3400633NS 400GB
              ST3750640NS 750GB *

              Western Digital
              WD800JD-00LSA0 80GB
              WD1600JS 160GB
              WD2000JS 200GB
              WD4000KD 400GB

              *Requires 1.01 or later firmware.
              Model DNS-323
              Question How do I restore my RAID settings if a drive has failed?
              Answer Note: If a RAID drive has failed, the DNS-323 will display the HDD LED light, of the corresponding drive, in Amber.

              If this happens, follow these steps to restore the RAID settings:

              Step 1 Power down the DNS-323.

              Step 2 Remove the failed drive from the DNS-323.

              Step 3 Insert the new drive into the DNS-323.

              Step 4 Power on the DNS-323.

              Step 5 After a minute log into the DNS-323 web interface.

              Step 6 You will be prompt to format and resync on entry, click OK.

              Note: This action will format the the replaced drive only and sync the two hard drives in RAID.

              Step 7 Wait for format and resync to complete. The DNS-323 is now ready for use.
              Model DNS-323
              Question How do I setup E-mail alerts on my DNS-323?
              Answer Step 1: Log into the DNS-323 configuration web interface and click the Tools tab and select E-Mail Alerts on the left side.



              Step 2: Select either Account or Anonymous.

              Note: Anonymous does not require a User Name or Password to be entered however you must check with your ISP or Email service if anonymous emailing is allowed.

              Step 3: Enter the appropriate user name and password for your e-mail account.

              Step 4: Enter the IP address or domain name of your outgoing mail server in the SMTP Server field. If you are unsure of this value, contact your e-mail provider.

              Step 5: Enter the from e-mail address (e.g. alerts@dns323.com) in the Sender E-Mail field. This field does not require a valid e-mail address. However, if your e-mail client is filtering spam, make sure you allow this address to be received.

              Step 6: Enter the e-mail address you want to send the alerts to in the Reciever E-Mail field . This address must correspond with the SMTP server configured above.

              Step 7: Test the E-Mail Alert by clicking the Test E-Mail button and confirm your settings are correct.



              Step 8:               Select your E-Mail Alert Types you want to be sent to you and click Save Settings at the top of the menu.

              Model DNS-323
              Question How do I setup an FTP server behind a router on the DNS-323?
              Answer Step 1: Log into the DNS-323 configuration and click on the Advanced tab and select FTP Server.

              Step 2: Setup you users FTP Server Settings For user access and Save settings.

              Step 3: Start the FTP server.




              If you are behind a router, you will need to forward the FTP port from the router to the DNS-323. Additional filtering and firewall settings may need to be modified on your router to allow FTP Access to the DNS-323 from the Internet. Once the port has been forwarded on the router, users from the internet will access the FTP server through the WAN IP address of the router.

              Step 4: Setup Port Forwarding rule.

              **If you are using a D-Link router, such as the WBR-2310 used in the example below, your port forwarding rule should be similar to the following:

              Name -Name the DNS-323 FTP server rule.
              IP Address -Enter the IP address of the DNS-323.
              Public Port               -Enter the public FTP port. By default, the port is 21.
              Private Port               -Enter the private FTP port. By default, the port is 21.
              Traffic               -Type Set the traffic type to TCP.

              Step 5:               Save settings.



              If you use an FTP port other than 21, then users accessing the FTP server using an FTP client will have to specify the non-standard port, and users who are using a browser will have to specify the port in the URL (e.g. ftp://ftp.dns323.com:3000).
              Model DNS-323
              Question What is RAID?
              Answer RAID, short for Redundant Array of Independent Disks, is a combination of two or more disks with the aim of providing fault tolerance and improving performance. There are several different levels of RAID, with each providing a different method of sharing or distributing data amongst the drives. The DNS-323 supports RAID levels 0 and 1.

              RAID 0 provides data striping, which spreads out blocks of data over both drives, but does not provide data redundancy.

              Although performance is improved, the lack of fault tolerance means that if one drive fails, all data in the array will be lost.



              RAID 1               provides mirroring over both disks, with the same read/write speed of a single disk. A RAID 1 array can only be as large as it’s smallest member disk.

              Because the data is stored on both disks, RAID 1 provides fault tolerance and protection, in addition to performance advantages.

              Model DNS-323 / DSM-G600_revB
              Question How do I store files that have non-English characters on the DNS-323 and DSM-G600, and what languages are supported?
              Answer Languages supported:

              Traditional Chinese
              Simplified Chinese
              Western European
              Japanese SJIS
              Korean Hangul
              Cyrillic

              Storing non-English Character Files

              If you are storing non-English character files, you will need to change the Language setting from the Easy Search Utility to ensure full compatibility with those files.

              Step 1: Insert the DNS-323 or DSM-G600 CD into your CD-ROM drive and click Easy Search Utility (You can also download this program from the support website)



              Step 2: Highlight an available DNS-323 or DSM-G600 and click Language



              Step 3: Select the appropriate language from the drop-down menu and click OK



              Step 4: The DNS-323 will restart



              Note: Changing the language setting will NOT change the display language of the user interface. It is only for supporting non-English character file names.
              Model DP-100 / DP-101P+ / DP-300 / DP-301P+ / DP-303 / DP-313 / DP-301U / DP-311P / DP-311U / DP-311U_revB
              Question How do I configure my D-Link print server for Windows 2000 and Windows XP?
              Answer Getting Started

              This FAQ was designed specifically for installing the DP-313 wireless print server using Windows 2000. However, the process is exactly the same for the other D-Link print server models DP-100, DP-101, DP-300, DP-301, and DP-303. This configuration also applies to Windows XP.

              Read here if using the DI-704P, DI-713P, or DI-714P+.

              If you are using a Windows 2000 computer to do the initial configuration of the print server, you will you need to first install Client Services for Netware. This network service is installed through the Network Properties control panel.

              To print to the print server, it needs to have an IP address in the same range as your computers. Be sure you check the IP address and port name in PS-Admin and make a note of it before you start your configuration. You will need this information to complete the setup.

              More information on configuring the print server using PSAdmin can be found in this FAQ:

              Installation and configuration of PSAdmin

              Adding a New Printer

              Step 1 Go to Start>Settings>Printers and double-click the Add Printer icon to open the Add Printer Wizard.

              Step 2 Select Local Printer and click Next.



              Step 3 Select Create a New Port and choose Standard TCP/IP Port from the drop-down menu and click Next.



              Step 4 This will bring up the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard. Click Next.



              Step 5 Enter the IP address of the print server and the port name and click Next.



              Step 6 The next window will prompt you for the Device Type. Select the Standard radio button and use Generic Network Card from the drop-down window.



              Step 7 Click Finish to close the port configuration wizard.



              Step 8 This will bring you back to the Add Printer Wizard. Step through the remaining windows of the Add Printer Wizard, accepting the default values to complete configuration.

              Still having problems printing?

              If the above steps did not solve your printing problems, try this workaround.

              Step A Reconfigure the printer to print using LPR. Right-click the instance of your printer and select Properties. From the printer properties, click the Ports tab.

              Step B Select the printer port you just added and then click Configure Port

              Step C Change the Protocol from RAW to LPR. The LPR Queue Name is the name of the print server port you are trying to print to. Check the box to Enable LPR Byte Counting. Click OK

              Step D Print a test page. Click to the General tab and then click the button to Print a Test Page. Your test page should successfully print to the proper port.

              If you had to use this workaround to successfully print and have additional Windows 2000 or XP clients to configure, you can select LPR from Step 6 listed above. Choose the Custom radio button and then click the Settings button to configure the LPR settings as in Step C above.
              Model DP-100 / DP-101+ / DP-300 / DP-303 / DP-301 / DP-313 / DI-704P / DI-713P / DSB-P36
              Question Why wonīt my Lexmark printer work with my D-Link print server or router?
              Answer Certain Lexmark printers may not work with print servers because they do not have command interpreters built in to the printer. Here is a list of Lexmark printers that may not work with printer servers:

            • All Z series*
            • X73
            • X83
            • E210 laser
            • 5x00
            • 3200
            • 7x00
            • Any other (new) Lexmark printer without a built-in command interpreter.

              * Some users have been successful using their Z series printer. Try disabling bi-directional printing.

              To contact Lexmark directly for any questionable printer you can email them at Lexmark Support
              • Model DP-100 / DP-101P+ / DP-300 / DP-301P / DP-303 / DP-313
              Question What is the buffer size of my D-Link print server?
              Answer ALL D-Link print servers have a 128k buffer.
              Model DP-100 / DP-101P+ / DP-300 / DP-301P+ / DP-313 / DP-303
              Question How do I configure my print server in Windows 98?
              Answer Summary: Install Client for NetWare Networks and the LPR print utility. Install PS-Admin and use it to configure the print server. Configure the printers on the client computers.

              The LPR print utility will enable your computer to print to a network printer. The IPX/SPX protocol will be installed when you install Client for NetWare Networks. It must be installed for PS-Admin to find the print server on the network.

              Since there are basicaly three parts to installing this device, these three sections are covered separately. Follow the links below to install and configure the DP-313 on a Win 98 computer.

              Step 1 Installing Client for NetWare Networks and the LPR Utility

              Step 2 Installing and Configuring PS-Admin

              Step 3 Configuring the Printer

              Model DP-100 / DP-101P+ / DP-300 / DP-301P+ / DP-313 / DP-303
              Question When installing the DP-313 wireless print server how do you install and configure PS-Admin for Windows 98?
              Answer Note: The setup for PS-Admin will also be the same for these print servers: DP-100, DP-101, DP-300 and the DP-301, minus the steps for the wireless setup.

              Step 1 Install the PS-Admin software from the DP-313 installation CD. Insert the DP-313 installation disk into your CD-ROM drive. When the auto-run screen comes up, click on the Install PS-Admin Program button and accept the default values for the installation.

              If the auto-run screen does not come up, browse to the CD, double-click on the PS-Admin folder, double-click on Disk 1 and then double-click on the Setup.exe icon to start the installation. Accept the default values for the installation.

              Step 2 Once the installation is complete, open PS-Admin. When you open PS-Admin it will automatically search the network for all installed D-Link print servers. Found print servers will be listed in the column on the left hand side. The name of the print server is WLANPS.

              Step 3 To configure the printers on the client computers you need to know the Port Name for the print server.

              From the PS-Admin main page click on Server Device in the Configuration section.

              You can change the name of the print server in this screen if you would like. This is also where you access the Port Settings configuration screen and the Wireless configuration screen.

              Click on LPT1 to open the Port Settings configuration screen.

              Make note of the Port Name. You may also rename the port name in this screen. After confirming and making note of the Server Name and Port Name click OK to close the Parallel Port Configuration screen and OK again to close the Server Device configuration screen.

              Step 4 Assign an IP address to the print server. From the PS-Admin main page click on the link to TCP/IP Protocol.

              In the TCP/IP Configuration screen, configure your IP address, subnet mask and default gateway. When finished click OK to close this window. 

              Note your IP address. You will need it to verify the printer configuration on your client computers.

              The example below is configured to work on a network with a D-Link gateway. The IP address of 192.168.0.2 is an IP address that is out of the scope of the DHCP server, or the IP addresses that are given out by the gateway. The subnet mask is the default subnet mask for this network. The default gateway of 192.168.0.1 is the IP address of the D-Link gateway itself. 

              Step 5 To finish configuring the print server, verify and/or configure the wireless settings by again opening the Server Device option from the Configuration section of PS-Admin.

              Click on the Wireless button under Network Interface.

              You do not need to change the settings in this window unless you have configured your wireless network cards to connect to a different ESS-ID and different channel. Use the same ESS-ID that you are using on your network cards. Click OK to close out of all of the windows in PS-Admin. The print server is configured. Follow the steps below to configure your computer to print to the print server.

              Step 6 Now that the print server is configured and we know its IP address and port name we can configure the computer to print to the print server. Open the Network control panel, the path is Start>Settings>Control Panels and double-click on the Network icon.

              Highlight the entry for LPR for TCP/IP Printing and click the Properties button.

              Click on the Add Port button to configure the port settings.

              Enter the IP address you used when configuring the print serverīs TCP/IP properties in Step 9 and the Port Name that you used in Step 8. Click OK to close the Add Port window, OK again to close the LPR for TCP/IP Printing Properties window and OK a third time to close the Network control panel.

              If you have been following the links to this page to install and configure the DP-313 on a Windows 98 computer, click on the link below to finish up the installation by installing the printer.

              Installing a Network Printer in Windows 98
              Model DP-100 / DP-101P+ / DP-300 / DP-301P+ / DP-313 / DP-303
              Question If the D-Link print server is bi-directional why then is my printer unable to report its status information back to my PC?
              Answer D-Linkīs print servers are IEEE1284 bi-directional compatible. This means that data can be sent and received in both directions between the printer and the D-Link print server.

              Toner status, paper level, etc., will not be communicated back to the PC. In order to get printer status information, the proprietary printer driver has embedded code that needs to be passed on to the print server, decoded, then interpreted by the print server. Embedded driver codes are not supported by D-Link print servers. D-Linkīs print servers, whether in Gateways or StandAlone, are plain TCP/IP print servers.
              Model DP-101 / DP-100 / DP-300 / DP-301 / DSB-P36 / DI-704P / DI-713P / DP-303 / DP-313 / DI-714P+ / DI-707P
              Question Why wonīt my HP Printer work with my D-Link Print Server or Router?
              Answer The printers listed in this FAQ are older models. If you have purchased a printer in the last 2 years, your printer most likely will work with a print server.

              If your printer is not mentioned in this FAQ, it may work.

              If you are using a multi-function printer, only the printing function will work through the print server.

              Several kinds of printers are not supported on a network. These include host-based (sometimes referred to as GDI printers), and PPA printers. There are also printers designed for home use that are not intended for support on a traditional network, but that may work in a Home PNA network. In addition, several HP Officejets are not designed for or supported on networks.

              Host-based (sometimes referred to as GDI printers). A printer that relies on the computerīs processor to rasterize the print job. Most host-based printers use the GDI interface built into Windows (hence the "GDI printer" term), so there is no need to convert the data to PostScript, PCL, or other printer language.
              Some HP Deskjet printers are PPA (Printing Performance Architecture) printers. With this new printing system, the printer handles only basic printer functions while the printer software on the computer handles the formatting. All formatting, such as color matching and correction, half-toning, edge enhancement, tone correction, and ink management, are handled by the software driver.

              Furthermore, some of the printers listed below may work on a network, but only when they are connected to the parallel port of a Windows computer that has the correct printer driver installed and printer sharing properly configured. Contact the support group for you specific printer for details.

              Hewlett-Packard PPA or host-based printers:
            • HP Deskjet 710C printer
            • HP Deskjet 712C printer
            • HP Deskjet 720C printer
            • HP Deskjet 722C printer
            • HP Deskjet 820Cxi or 820Cse printer
            • HP Deskjet 825C
            • HP Deskjet 1000C printer
            • HP Deskjet 1000Cxi printer
            • HP Deskjet 1000Cse printer
            • HP Original Photosmart photo printer (C3804A)
            • HP LaserJet 3100 product
            • HP LaserJet 1000 product family

              The following printers are not supported on traditional networks:

              HP Deskjet 900 series
            • 930C
            • 932C
            • 935C
            • 940C
            • 950C
            • 952C
            • 959C

              HP Deskjet 800 series
            • 810C
            • 812C
            • 830C
            • 832C
            • 840C
            • 842C
            • 880C
            • 882C

              NOTE: HP does not recommend the use of the HP Deskjet, HP Deskjet Plus, HP Deskjet 300, 400, 500, and 600 series printers, or the HP Deskjet 850C series printers for shared, high volume printing. These printers have a low duty cycle and are not designed for high volume network printing.

              The models listed below are not designed or supported on networks.
            • HP Officejet 300
            • HP Officejet 500
            • HP Officejet 600
            • HP Officejet 700
            • HP Officejet K60
            • HP printer/scanner/copier 370/380
            • HP printer/scanner/copier (HP PSC) 700/900
            • HP Officejet V

              • Model DP-101 / DP-101P / DP-300U / DP-301P / DP-301U / DP-311P / DP-311U / DP-311U_revB / DP-313 / DP-G310 / DP-G321
              Question How do I reset my Print Server to factory defaults using PS Admin?
              Answer Step 1 Open the PS Admin software, select the print server you wish to reset to factory defaults, and then click Factory Reset.

              factory reset

              Step 2 Click Yes.

              Confirmation screen

              Step 3 Once the reset procedure has been completed, you will see the following screen:



              Step 4 Click OK. The device is now set to factory default settings.
              Model DP-101 / DP-101P / DP-300U / DP-301U / DP-303 / DP-311P / DP-311U / DP-313 / DP-G310
              Question How do I setup my Windows 98/ME PC when printing to my print server?
              Answer Even if you have had a printer installed on your computer, it is best to completely remove the printer from the Printers Folder in the Control Panel and start fresh.

              In Windows 98/Me you will need to install the LPR client.

              Click here to download LPR.

              For Windows 98/ME you will also need to know the port name that you are printing to (I.E. PS-12345-P1). You can obtain this by logging into your print server.

              Installing LPR:

              Step 1 Once the file is downloaded and extracted, Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel > double-click on Networks. Click on Add



              Step 2 Highlight Client and click on Add.



              Step 3 Click on Have Disk > Browse. Browse to the location of the extracted LPR Client.



              Step 4 Click OK 3 times.

              Step 5 From the list highlight LPR For TCP/IP and click on Properties



              Step 6 Click on Add Port



              In the top field type in the IP address of your print server. In the bottom field type in the port name of your print server (I.E. PS-12345-P1). Click on OK



              Step 7 Click on OK. Windows will ask you to restart. Click Yes.

              LPR is now properly installed on your computer.

              Printer Installation

              Step 1 Open your printers folder. Go to Start > Settings > Printers.

              Step 2 Double-click on the Add Printer icon which will launch the Add Printer Wizard.



              Select Network Printer and click on Next.



              Step 3 Click on the Browse button and browse to the print server.



              Highlight the Print Server and click on OK to return to the Add Printer Wizard.



              Click on Next. If you are unable to do this you can manually enter the Print Server by using two backlashes, the IP address, one backlash and the port name (IE \\192.168.0.30\PS-12345-P1).

              Step 4 You will now be asked to select a printer to install.



              If you can not find your printer from the list, click on Have Disk button and browse to the printer drivers for your printer (floppy, CD, or downloaded).

              Step 5 If you find your printer in the list, click on it and then click on OK. Windows will install the drivers.

              Step 6 Once the drivers have been installed, click Finish to complete the installation. You may be prompted for your Windows CD. If you are prompted for the CD, browse to the Win98 folder on the Windows CD and click on OK

              Step 7 After the drivers have been installed for your printer, you will be prompted to print a test page. Select Yes and click on Finish.
              Model DP-300U
              Question How do I determine if my printer is compatible with my DP-300U?
              Answer Step 1 Turn off your printer and connect it to the DP-300U.

              Step 2 Power on the printer.

              Step 3 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DP-300U in the IP address bar (default it is 192.168.0.10). Press Enter.

              Step 4 Click Tools.

              Step 5 Select the port the printer is connected to and click Test.



              If the unit prints, then it should work when properly configured on your Operating System. If the unit does not print, verify that all physical connections and LEDs are correct. Power cycle both the print server and printer. If the units still does not print, the printer is most likely not compatible with the print server.
              Model DP-300U
              Question What does the blinking light status on my DP-300U indicate?
              Answer Normal boot light status:

              Upon power-up, all five of the green LEDs should illuminate steadily for several seconds. Then the USB, LPT1 and LPT2 LEDs should flash ON simultaneously three times. Irregularity of any of the three LEDs during these LED tests may mean there is a problem with the LEDs themselves.

              Other light status:

              If the Self-Test routine traps any component error, following the LED tests the Self-Test will halt and the LEDs will continuously signal the error according to the following information table below:

              LED Name Faulty Component
              Low speed flashing Need to reload firmware
              1 long 2 short Timer INT error
              1 long 3 short Flash Protected
              1 long 5 short Flash Erase/Program error
              1 long 6 short LAN Controller error
              1 long 8 short LPT1 Controller error
              1 long 9 short LPT1 error
              1 long 12 short LPT2 Controller error
              1 long 13 short LPT2 error
              1 long 14 short MII error
              1 long 18 short USB error
              Model DP-300U / DP-301P+ / DP-301U / DP-311U / DP-G310 /
              Question Where do I find the Port name for my printer after I connect it to DP series print server?
              Answer Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by typing in the IP address of the print server in the address bar (the default IP address is 192.168.0.10). The username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 2 Click on Configuration at the top. Click the System button on the left. The Port name will be listed under Port Setting.

              Model DP-300U / DP-301P+ / DP-301U / DP-311U / DP-G310 / DP-G321
              Question What printers are compatable with my D-Link print server?
              Answer The following list of printers have been tested by D-Link and will work with the DP-300U, DP-301P+, DP-301U, DP-311U, DP-G310, and DP-G321. Please click on a brand below to view the list of compatible printers.

              Parallel Port Printer List

              Canon
              • BJC-255SP
              • BJC-330
              • BJC-600
              • BJC-620
              • BJC-720
              • BJC-740
              • BJC-2000SP
              • BJC-4100
              • BJC-4300
              • BJC-4500
              • BJC-4550
              • BJC-6000
              • BJC-6500
              • BJC-7000
              • BJC-8200
              • Bubble Jet S520
              Epson
              • Stylus 5700
              • Stylus 5700L
              • Stylus 5800
              • Stylus C60
              • Stylus EPL-5500
              • Stylus EPL-N2000
              • Stylus EPL-N2010
              • Stylus LQ-100
              • Stylus LQ-300
              • Stylus LQ-550
              • Stylus LQ-570+
              • Stylus LQ-1070C+
              • Stylus LQ-2070
              • Stylus LQ-2170C
              • Stylus Color 400
              • Stylus Color 440
              • Stylus Color 460
              • Stylus Color 480
              • Stylus Color 600
              • Stylus Color 640
              • Stylus Color 660
              • Stylus Color 740
              • Stylus Color 800
              • Stylus Color 850
              • Stylus Color 860
              • Stylus Color 900
              • Stylus Color 1160
              • Stylus Color 1500
              • Stylus Color 1520
              • Stylus Color 3000
              • Stylus Photo 700
              • Stylus Photo 710
              • Stylus Photo 750
              • Stylus Photo 870
              • Stylus Photo 1200
              • Stylus Photo 1270
              • Stylus Photo EX
              • Stylus Pro XL
              Fujitsu
              • 10V
              • 14V
              • DL-700
              • DL-3800
              HP
              • DesignJet 350C
              • DesignJet 600C
              • DeskJet 400
              • DeskJet 420
              • DeskJet 500
              • DeskJet 550C
              • DeskJet 560C
              • DeskJet 670C
              • DeskJet 695C
              • DeskJet 720C
              • DeskJet 810C
              • DeskJet 890C
              • DeskJet 920C
              • DeskJet 930C
              • DeskJet 970CXI
              • DeskJet 1120C
              • DeskJet 1125C
              • LaserColorJet 8500
              • LaserJet 4P
              • LaserJet 4L
              • LaserJet 4V
              • LaserJet 5L
              • LaserJet 6P
              • LaserJet 6L
              • LaserJet 1100
              • LaserJet 1100 Series
              • LaserJet 1100A
              • LaserJet 1200
              • LaserJet 1300 Series
              • LaserJet 2100
              • LaserJet 2100M
              • LaserJet 2100 Series
              • LaserJet 2200
              • LaserJet 3150
              • LaserJet 4000
              • LaserJet 5000
              • LaserJet 4150
              • LaserJet III
              • 710
              • T47
              IBM
              • 16L
              • 4039
              • 5577
              • Infor Printer 20
              • InfoPrint 32
              Lexmark
              • 4039 10R
              • 5700
              • Optra C710
              • Optra Color 45
              • Optra E
              • Optra E+
              • Optra E310
              • Optra K1220
              • Optra M410
              • Optra M412
              • Optra N
              • Optra R+
              • Optra S1250
              • Optra S1855
              • Optra SC-1275
              • Optra SE-3455
              • Optra T614
              • Optra W810
              • Z53
              NEC
              • P2200
              • P3200
              • P5300
              • P6300
              • P7300
              Other
              • Brother HL-1260
              • CD T120
              • Citizen GSX-230
              • Futek 84+
              • Kyocera FS-1000
              • Kyocera Mita FS-1000+
              • OKI ML-391
              • OKIdata OL-400
              • Olivetti JP450
              • Pannsonic 2023
              • Panasonic KX-P1624
              • Printtec PR856C
              • Star NX-2420
              • Tektronix Phraser 350

              USB Port Printer List

              Canon
              • BJC55
              • BJC85
              • I850
              • PIXUS 850i
              • S100SP
              • S200SP
              • S300
              • S330
              • S400
              • S400SP
              • S450
              • S520
              • S600
              • S750
              • S4500
              • S6300
              • S9000
              Epson
              • 900
              • 1160
              • 2200
              • CC-600PX
              • LP-1200
              • LP-1300
              • LP-1400
              • LP-1500C
              • LP-2000C
              • LP-2400
              • LP-2500
              • LP-6100
              • LP-7000C
              • LP-7500
              • LP-7700
              • LP-7800
              • LP-7900
              • LP-8900
              • LP-9000B
              • LP-9000C
              • LP-9100
              • LP-9400
              • LP-9500C
              • LP-9800C
              • PM-A850
              • PX-G900
              • PX-V500
              • PX-V600
              • PX-V700

                Photo
              • 720
              • 810
              • 820
              • 830
              • 830U
              • 890
              • 900
              • 1280
              • 1290
              • CC-550L
              • CC-570L
              • CL-750
              • CL-760
              • E-100
              • MC-2000
              • PM-680C
              • PM-720C
              • PM-730C
              • PM-740C
              • PM-740DU
              • PM-D750
              • PM-780CS
              • PM-790PT
              • PM-800C
              • PM-800DC
              • PM-820C
              • PM-820DC
              • PM-830C
              • PM-840C
              • PM-850PT
              • PM-860PT
              • PM-870C
              • PM-890C
              • PM-920C
              • PM-930C
              • PM-940C
              • PM-950C
              • PM-970C
              • PM-980C
              • PM-2200C
              • PM-3300C
              • PM-3500C
              • PM-3700C
              • PM-4000PX
              • PM-A850
              • PM-D750
              • PM-D1000
              • PM-G700
              • PM-G800
              • PM-G900
              • R310

                Stylus
              • C41UX
              • C42UX
              • C60
              • C61
              • C80
              • C405
              • RX510
              HP
                DeskJet
              • 640C
              • 656C
              • 845C
              • 920C
              • 948C
              • 960C
              • 990CXI
              • 995C
              • 125C
              • 1180C
              • 1220C
              • 3320
              • 3420
              • 3425
              • 5625

                InkJet
              • CP1700
              • DeskJet 5610
              • DeskJet 5650
              • DeskJet 5850
              • PSC2310
              • PSC2450
              • PSC2550

                LaserJet
              • 1200
              • 1500 (USB 2.0)
              • 2200
              • 2200D

                OfficeJet (All-in-One)
              • 7710
              • PSC750
              • PSC950
              • PSC2150
              • V40
              Lexmark
              • 4039 10R
              • 5700
              • Optra C710
              • Optra Color 45
              • Optra E
              • Optra E+
              • Optra E310
              • Optra K1220
              • Optra M410
              • Optra M412
              • Optra N
              • Optra R+
              • Optra S1250
              • Optra S1855
              • Optra SC-1275
              • Optra SE-3455
              • Optra T614
              • Optra W810
              • Z13
              • Z25
              • Z33
              • Z35
              • Z43
              • Z45
              • Z53
              Model DP-300U / DP-311U / DP-301U / DI-704UP / DI-824VUP / DP-311U_revB
              Question What printers are compatible with my USB Print Server?
              Answer Please read this before leaving comments.

              The list below has older printers we have tested with this print server. If your printer is not on the list, or purchased in the last 3 years, the printer still may work. Please contact the printer manufacturer for compatibility with print servers. Most new printers are network friendly and will work with a print server.

              Print servers will only allow you to share the printer function of multifunction printers. You cannot "share" the scanner function.

              Model DP-301P +
              Question What is the throughput from Ethernet to the centronics port on my DP-301P+?
              Answer The throughput from Ethernet to the centronics port on the DP-301P+ is ~720KBytes/second.
              Model DP-301U / DP-311U / DP-311U_revB / DP-G310
              Question How do I reset my print server to factory defaults?
              Answer Step 1 Locate the hole on the back of the print server above the word RESET.



              Step 2 Using a paper clip, press and hold the Reset button for about 5 seconds and then release.

              Step 3 After the print server reboots it will be reset to the factory default settings.
              Model DP-311P
              Question How do I determine if my printer is compatible with my DP-311P?
              Answer Do the following to determine if your printer is compatible with the DP-311P:

              Step 1 Set the DP-311P to Factory settings.

              Step 2 Turn off your printer and connect it to the DP-311P.

              Step 3 Power on the printer.

              Step 4 Open a web-browser and type the IP address of the DP-311P in the address bar. Press Enter.

              Step 5 Click Tools and then click Print Test.



              If the unit prints, the printer should work when properly configured on your Operating System. If the printer does not print, verify all physical connections and LEDs are correct. Power cycle both the print server and printer. If the units still does not print, the printer is most likely not compatible with the print server.
              Model DP-311U / DP-311U_revB / 300U / 301P+ / 301U
              Question How do I upgrade firmware on my 300U/301P+/301U/311U?
              Answer Step 1 Install and open the PS Admin utility, available from http://support.dlink.com/. Click on Download Firmware.

              PS Admin

              Step 2 The Download Firmware dialog box will appear. Click Browse.

              Upload

              Step 3 Browse to the location where the firmware was saved and click OK.

              Browse

              Note: Do not interrupt the firmware upgrade process.

              Step 4 Click OK once you recieve the confirmation prompt.

              DO NOT INTERRUPT!

              Step 5 The firmware file will start transfering to the print server.

              Transfering

              Step 6 After the file has been uploaded, the Status page in the print server will reflect the version of the file that was just uploaded (in this example a DP-311U is used).

              Success
              Model DP-602 / DU-H4 / DU-H7 / DSL-604 / DMF-5601S+ / DMF-560S+ / DFM-560E / DU-560m / DMF-336E / DI-304 / DSL-300i / DMI-128
              Question The product you are searching for is not supported in the United States. Where can I find support?
              Answer Contact D-Link International for the D-Link office near you.

              If you are inquiring about the DI-614+ or DI-604 (not the DSL-614+ or DSL-604+ - different product), please read here and select your product under Broadband > Router.

              Product

              Support Location

              DFE-530TXS

              Canada

              DFE-540TX

              Canada

              DFM-560IS+

              UK

              DFM-560E

              UK

              DFM-560EL

              UK

              DI-304 UK
              DMI-128 Series UK
              DP-602 Canada
              DSL-300I Sweden
              DSL-300G Sweden
              DSL-300G+ UK
              DSL-300+ Australia
              DSL-604+ UK
              Model DP-G310
              Question How do I determine if my printer is compatible with my DP-G310?
              Answer Step 1 Set the DP-G310 to Factory settings.

              Step 2 Connect the printer to the DP-G310’s USB port.

              Step 3 Power on the printer.

              Step 4 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DP-G310 in the address bar. Press Enter.

              Step 5 Enter your username and password. Click OK.

              Step 6 Click Tools.

              Step 7 In the Print Test section click Apply to test your printer’s compatibility.



              If the print job completes, the printer should work when properly configured on your Operating System. If the printer does not print, verify all physical connections and LEDs are correct. Power cycle both the print server and printer for 30 seconds. If the units still does not print, the printer is most likely not compatible with the printer server.
              Model DP-G321
              Question How do I reset my DP-G321 to factory defaults?
              Answer Step 1 Locate the hole on the back of the DP-G321 above the word RESET.



              Step 2 Using a paper clip, press and hold the Reset button for about 5 seconds and then release.

              Step 3 After the DP-G321 reboots it will be reset to the factory default settings.
              Model DPG-2000W
              Question Why am I not able to connect or establish a session to my DPG-2000W?
              Answer If you are unable to connect or establish a session to your DPG-2000W try the following:

              • Verify the SSID of the wireless adapter matches the SSID of the DPG-2000W displayed on the banner page on boot up.

              • Ensure the computerīs wireless network adapter is set for Infrastructure mode.

              • If the DGP-2000Wīs default encryption settings were modified, verify that the computer is using the same encryption settings.

              • Try disconnecting power to the unit and then reconnecting it.

              • Some DHCP-enabled wireless network adapters may take a while to obtain a valid OS-assigned IP address. To verify whether a valid IP address has been assigned:

                In Windows 2000 and XP, go to Start > Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt. In the Command Prompt type IPCONFIG. Then press Enter.

                In Windows 98SE and Me, go to Start > Run. In the Run window type WINIPCFG. Then click OK.

                Make sure the wireless network adapter connecting to the DPG-2000W does not show an IP address of 0.0.0.0. If so, try releasing the IP address and then renewing it. If the IP address remains 0.0.0.0, it may be necessary to assign your wireless network adapter a static IP address. Please check with your network administrator to assign the appropriate wireless settings.

              • With certain brands of 802.11g cards, it might take a bit longer to link with the DPG-2000W than with other brands of wireless cards. The reason for this is that the drivers and features set of each brand might cause the link up time between the DPG-2000W and the computer to take longer. Retry establishing a session with the DPG-2000W using the PSM.
              Model DPG-2000W
              Question Why does the presentation screen appear frozen during a presentation?
              Answer This indicates that the DPG-2000W has detected a link-loss. The DPG-2000W and DPG-2000W PSM have an intelligent built-in mechanism to detect the link-loss and can automatically restore the connection. When a link-loss has been detected, DPG-2000W PSM will display a message box and attempt to automatically restore the connection. If the auto-reconnection attempt is successful, the user does not need to do anything. In this case, the auto-reconnection is transparent to the user. However, if the cause of the link-loss is due to a physical disconnection, for instance, the wireless card was pulled out, the user needs to restore the physical connection so that the auto-reconnection attempt can proceed. The presentation screen will not be updated once the link is lost, unless a reconnection is re-established. However, if link-loss occurs for an extended period, the DPG-2000W will terminate the reconnection waiting state and display the banner page indicating that a fresh presentation session is ready to be established.

              The default duration for a link-loss is 8 seconds. The DPG-2000W will retry 3 periods of this duration. If no re-connection is established before the reconnection time runs out, the DPG-2000W returns itself to the banner page.
              Model DPG-2000W
              Question Can I change the IP address of my DPG-2000W?
              Answer Unfortunately the IP address of the DPG-2000W cannot be manually changed.
              Model DPG-2000W
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DPG-2000W?
              Answer Upgrading firmware will reset the settings to default, which means you will lose all your settings.

              Step 1 Download the firmware and save the file to your computer. You may want to save the file to your desktop. Do not double-click the file or extract the files.

              Click here to download firmware.

              Step 2 Open a web browser and type 192.168.0.1 in the address bar. Press Enter.

              Step 3 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.



              Step 4 Click the Options tab.

              Step 5 Next to Upload options click the Full Firmware upload radio button.



              Step 6 Next to File/path name click Browse... and navigate to the .tar.gz file that you downloaded in Step 1. Left-click the file once to select it and then click Open. The path to the firmware file will now be displayed in the text box next to the Browse... button.

              Step 7 Click Apply to start the firmware upgrade.

              Step 8 You will receive the warning message below. Click OK when you are ready to proceed.



              Note: During the upgrade process you will lose wireless connection to the DPG-2000W. This is normal. DO NOT REBOOT THE DPG-2000W DURING THE FIRMWARE UPGRADE. DOING SO COULD DAMAGE THE UNIT AND VOID THE WARRANTY.

              Step 9 Log back into the DPG-2000W.

              Step 10 Click the Status tab.

              Step 11 The information next to Firmware version should reflect the new version of firmware. If not, repeat Steps 4-8 again.



              Note: After upgrading to firmware version 1.10 the default SSID will be changed to DPG-2000W. You must configure you wireless client to connect to that SSID before you can log back into the DPG-2000W.

              You will not be able to connect to the DPG-2000W with PSM v1.00 or Web Admin v1.00 after upgrading to firmware version 1.10. You need to upgrade to PSM and Web Admin v1.10.

              Click here to download the new software (v1.10).
              Model DPG-2000W
              Question How do I perform a factory reset on my DPG-2000W?
              Answer Step 1 Turn on or reboot the DPG-2000W.

              Step 2 During the boot-up screen, wait for a Reset to factory default timer starts message to appear.

              Step 3 Place a paper clip in the hole labeled Reset before the timer ends (10 seconds), and the DPG-2000W will revert back to factory default settings.



              Note: Do not repower unit during this procedure. Doing so may damage the unit and void the warranty.

              Step 4 During the next boot-up screen, a Reset to Factory Default message should appear next to the Timer message, indicating a successful hardware reset.

              Note: Resetting the DPG-2000W does not reset the firmware to an earlier version. It will only change all settings back to factory defaults.
              Model DPG-2000W
              Question Why am I not able to connect to my DPG-2000W after upgrading my firmware?
              Answer If you have upgraded to firmware version 1.10, then the default SSID has changed to DPG-2000W. You must connect to that SSID after upgrading to firmware version 1.10 in order to access the DPG-2000W from the wireless interface.

              You will not be able to connect to the DPG-2000W with PSM v1.00 or Web Admin v1.00 after upgrading to firmware version v1.10. You will need to download and install PSM v1.10 and Web Admin v1.10.

              Click here to download PSM v1.10 and Web Admin v1.10.
              Model DPG-2100
              Question Will the DPG-2100 work with an external wireless bridge such as the DWL-G820?
              Answer No, the DPG-2100 requires a notebook or desktop to be using a Non-Ethernet wireless adapter such as the WNA-1330 (ExpressCard), WUA-1340 (USB), or WDA-1320 (PCI). A notebook with internal wireless capabilities will also work with the DPG-2100.
              Model DPH-100M
              Question What service providers can I use with my DPH-100M phone?
              Answer The DPH-100M operates on the MGCP standard and should be usable with any Voice over IP service that uses MGCP v1.0 with NSC v1.0. If you are unsure of which provider supports this standard, try LD Telecom. D-Link has been successful when testing the DPH-100M with this Voice over IP service provider.

              Visit LD Telecom here
              Model DPH-140S
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on the DPH-140S?
              Answer In order to successfully upgrade the firmware on the DPH-140S, you will need a TFTP server installed on your computer. It is paramount to have the TFTP-Root folder on the root of the C:\ drive on the computer. If you do not have a TFTP server installed, you can download one from http://www.solarwinds.net.

              Step 1: Download the desired firmware for the DPH-140S from the D-Link support site and save it to your computer.

              Step 2: Move the downloaded file to the TFTP-Root folder. The file should be named something similar to P104S-DLINK-010101-2006-04-12(DPH-140S).azf.

              Step 3: Open the TFTP server and confirm that you have the above file listed.



              If the file is listed in the TFTP-Root folder then you can leave the TFTP running.

              Step 4: Open the command prompt and go the root of C:\ directory(C:\). Change the directory to C:\TFTP-Root by typing cd TFTP-Root into the command prompt.

              Step 5: The file above must be uploaded by typing the following command on the TFTP-Root prompt(C:\TFPT-Root>): TFTP -i {IP address of the phone} PUT P104S-DLINK-010101-2006-04-12.azf.

              Note: This command is case sensitive, so take care when entering it into the command prompt.



              After the upgrade the phone will reboot and reset itself to its factory default settings.

              Step 6: The firmware upgrade should now be finished. You can confirm the firmware upgrade on the DPH-140īs screen. Click on the Menu button and then press the up arrow once. This should display the currently loaded firmware version.
              Model DPH-140S
              Question How do I retrieve my messages or access the Voice Mail server on the DVX-1000 using the DPH-140S?
              Answer To access the Voice Mail server on the DVX-1000 or retrieve messages using the DPH-140S, a voice message account must be set on both the DPH-140S and DVX-1000.

              If this is the first time you are setting up the voice mail, click here for steps on how to set up the voice message account on both units. Otherwise, proceed to the Step 1.

              Step 1 Dial the Voice Message account number from the DPH-140S.
              By default, the voicemail account number is 350.

              Step 3 Enter the PIN number when prompted.
              By default, the PIN number is the user extension assigned to the phone.

              If you have enabled a new feature password, enter it when prompted .

              Step 4 Press 1 to listen to the messages.

              Step 5 Follow the prompts to setup the rest of the Voice Mail features.
              Model DPH-140S
              Question How do I access the web interface (GUI) of the DPH-140S?
              Answer By default, the DPH-140S does not ship with an IP addresss. In order to log into the configuration page of the DPH-140S, you will have to assign it an IP address. You can assign an IP address to the DPH-140S in two ways:

              Assigning an IP Address using Static IP

              Step 1. Press Menu on the DPH-140S.

              Step 2. Press the down arrow on the 4-way control pad until you see DHCP. Press the right arrow button once to change Enabled to Disabled.

              Step 3. Press the down arrow until you see IP address. Using the numeric keypad and the right arrow to shift the cursor, enter the IP address you would like to assign the DPH-140S.

              Step 4. Press the down arrow again to set the Subnet Mask, Router IP address, and the DNS server address.

              Step 5. Press Menu when completed. Press OK to save the changes.

              Step 6. To connect to the web interface of the DPH-140S, open the browser and type the IP address of the phone followed by :9999.
              Example: http://x.x.x.x:9999, where x.x.x.x is the IP address of the phone and 9999 is the port number.


              Assigning an IP Address using DHCP

              For DHCP configurations, a DHCP server in the network must be configured and ready to assign IP addresses to clients.

              Step 1. Connect the DPH-140S to the network using an ethernet cable.

              Step 2. Once the phone finishes intializing, Press the Menu button.

              Step 3. Press the down arrow on the 4-way control pad until you see IP address.

              Step 4. Type the IP address assigned to the DPH-140S from Step 3 above on the web browser using this format: http://x.x.x.x :9999. Press Enter.

              Step 5. There is no username and password if you are installing the phone for the first time. (By default the username and password are blank).

              Step 6. Press OK to log into the web configuration page of the DPH-140S.

              Model DPH-140S
              Question What is the default IP address of the DPH-140S?
              Answer The DPH-140S does not ship with a default IP address.

              To assign an IP address to the DPH-140S, connect it to a network with an active DHCP server.

              After intializing, the DPH-140S will automatically obtain an IP address from the DHCP server.

              To view the IP address, press Menu on the DPH-140S. Then press the down arrow on the 4-way pad until you see an IP Address on the LCD.
              Model DPH-140S
              Question How do I access and configure the DPH-140S for my SIP provider?
              Answer Determine and/or Assign the IP Address of the DPH-140S:
            • For DHCP enabled Networks
            • To setup the DHP-140S with static IP addresses

              Input the Information for your current Network and SIP Provisioning:
            • During the procedure of setting up a static IP Address
            • Through the Web Based Management URL

              Setup Advanced Features:
            • Through the Web Based Management URL


              NOTE: Some Advanced features must be supported by your SIP Provider and/or the branded PBX for your topology.

              For DHCP enabled networks. You should also plan to use Static DHCP entries on your DHCP server if available. This would negate any possibility of the IP address changing for WebUI Management purposes.

              Step 1: Press Menu on the DPH-140S.

              Step 2: Press the down arrow on the 4-way pad until IP Address is seen on the LCD.

              Note: Annotate the IP Address displayed on the LCD of the DPH-140S

              Step 3: Open a web browser to http://x.x.x.x:9999.

              Note: The x.x.x.x is the IP address that was annotated in step #2.

              To setup the DHP-140S with a static IP address. This is for a network that does not have a DHCP Server available.

              Step 1: Press Menu on the DPH-140S.

              Step 2: Press the down arrow on the 4-way pad until DHCP is seen on the LCD.

              Step 3: Press the right arrow once so the LCD displaying Enabled is changed to Disabled.

              Step 4: Press the down arrow once or until the LCD displays IP Address.

              Note: Using the number keys and the right arrow, enter in the IP address you would like to assign to the phone.

              Step 5: Press the down arrow again to display and set the Subnet Mask.

              Step 6: Proceed to follow steps 4-5 to set up each of the following options; all options below can be manually inputted through a web browser using the IP address that you assigned in step #4. To do so proceed to step 8:
              • Router IP
              • DNS Server IP
              • Registration Server IP (IP of PBX)
              • Registration Port (default 5060)
              • Outbound Server "OB" IP (IP of PBX)
              • Outbound Server "OB" Port (default 5060)
              Step 7: The SIP User ID SIP UID will be the same as the extension being assigned to the user.

              Note: When proceeding to enter SIP Username and SIP Password the number keys will take on a new ability; the ability to enter letters. For example, the letter x could be entered by pressing 9 until lowercase x is reached. The sequence should look like: 9WXYZwxyz then repeat. So 9 would need to be pressed 7 times.

              Step 8: Press Menu when completed and then click on OK to save changes.

              Step 9: Open a web browser to the following URL of http://x.x.x.x:9999

              Note: The x.x.x.x is the IP address that that you assigned in step 4.

              Login to the WebUI Management page

              Step 1: Once an IP address has been assigned through or obtained from the LCD display of the DPH-140Sļ open a web browser to http://x.x.x.x:9999.

              Note: The username and password will both be blank. Simply hit enter on the login screen and you will be taken to the main menu.



              Step 2: To manually input your SIP Credentials through the WebUI, click on SIP Settings and then enter all information in for the following:
              • Registrar server (use IP of PBX)
              • Outbound Proxy Server (also use IP of PBX)
              • Message Server (also use IP of PBX
              • For Voice Message Account enter the extension of Voicemail setup on PBX).
              The rest can remain on default settings. Click Submit to save.



              Step 3: After entering the SIP information you will need to setup the SIP Account Settings.
              • For Account 1 Setting enter the Display Name.
              • For the SIP User Name and Authentication User Name you will use the extension of the user.
              • If a password was entered when the user was created this will be entered here also.
              Click Submit at the bottom of the page to Save.

              Step 4: Once all information has been entered click on Restart System on the left hand side to reboot the IP phone and allow the DPH-140S to register with the PBX.

              • Model DPH-140S
              Question What is the default username and password for my DPH-140S?
              Answer There is no default username or password for the DPH-140S.
              Model DPH-140S
              Question How do I change the time format on my DPH-140S.
              Answer The function key on the phone has many options. One of which will allow you to change the time format from 24 to 12hr.

              Step 1: Press the Cancel button, then Mute/Func. Then press 2 on the keypad, this will display the current time format.

              Step 2: From here, you can press left or right on the directional pad to switch between formats. Once you have selected the format you wish to use press Ok.
              Model DPH-140S
              Question How do I reset the DPH-140S If I forgot my password?
              Answer Note: You must be using firmware version 1.01.08 or above in order for this procedure to work.

              Step 1 Pick up the receiver/handset.

              Step 2 On the dial pad, dial 255*000 and hit OK.

              Step 3 The LCD screen will display Restore Default Setting. Press OK.

              Step 4 You will then get a message asking, Are you sure? Press OK.

              Step 5 The phone will then reboot, resetting itself to factory defaults.

              If you are currently using an earlier firmware version you will have to call D-Link technical support at 877-D-LINK55 to request a generated password. It is recommended that you upgrade the firmware at that time to prevent any further issues with lost or forgotten passwords.

              Please have the unitīs MAC address available when calling Technical Support.

              Note: Technical Support, for this issue, is available Mon-Fri, 8-5 pst.
              Model DPH-140S / DVX-1000
              Question How do I setup the Voice Message account on the DPH-140S and the DVX-1000?
              Answer
              The Voice Mail setup on the DVX-1000 and the DPH-140S is a two Part Process:

              Part I: Voice Mail setup on the DPH-140S.

              Step 1 Open up a browser and type the IP address of the DPH-140S in the address bar.
              Click here for step by step instructions on how to assign an IP address to the DPH-140S.

              Step 2 The default username and password is blank. Press OK to log into the DPH-140S.

              Step 3 Click on SIP Settings.



              Step 4 Under the Message server subheading, enter a voice message account number, or you may choose to leave it at default settings. (By default, the voice message account is 350.) Click on Submit to save the changes.

              Step 5 Click on Voice Settings and set the DTMF method to Out Band.



              Step 6 Click on Submit to save the changes. Restart the System for the changes to take effect.


              Part II: Voice Mail Setup on the DVX-1000.

              Step 1 Open the browser and type the IP address of the DVX-1000. The default IP address is 10.0.0.1. Your computer must be in the same subnet in order to access the DVX-1000.

              Step 2 By default, the username is ippbx and the password is ippbx.

              Step 3 Select Admin from the drop down menu. Click on Login.

              Step 4 Click on Voice Mail from the Main Menu. Select the configuration option.

              Step 5 Specify the Voice Mail ID (The voice mail ID has to match the message account number used on the DPH-140S).



              Step 6 You can specify the maximum recorded file under Mail Box Size.

              Step 7 Click on Apply to save the changes.

              Step 8 Click on Call Server and Select Users.

              Step 9 Click on the Feature option corresponding to each user/extension.



              Step 10 Check the box next to Change Feature Password. Type the new voicemail (feature ID) password and retype to confirm it.



              Step 11 Click on Apply to save the changes. Click on Restart the system for the changes to take effect.

              Step 12 Test your voice mail by dialing the message account number/Voice Mail ID from the DPH-140.

              Model DPH-50U
              Question What are the minimum system requirements for my DPH-50U?
              Answer You must have a PC with:

            • Windows XP SP2 or Windows 2000 SP4

            • Skype software version 1.1.079 or higher.

            • 25mb of hard drive space available.

            • A CD-ROM drive

            • An available USB port.

            • Broadband Internet connection.


              For additonal information about Skype™, please visit the Skype™ knowledge base.
              • Model DPH-50U
              Question How do I check my voice mail using my DPH-50U.
              Answer Step 1: Pick up the attached telephone handset.

              Step 2: Press ## to get a VoIP dial tone.

              Step 3: If a new Skype voice message exists the VoIP dial tone will have an intermittent beep.

              Step 4: Press * to access the IVR system.

              Step 5: Follow the menus to access Skype voice mail mode.

              Step 6: Once in voice mail mode the first message is played automatically.

              Step 7: At the end of each message a trailing ‘beepī is played. At the end of the last messages a trailing ībeep-beep-beep’ is played.

              Step 8: During the playing of current message, and within 5 seconds following the end of the message, you can press the 1, 2, 3, 9 keys in order to perform the following actions:

              User Action Key

            • Repeat current message: 1
            • Delete current message, move to next: 2
            • Keep current message, move to next: 3
            • Delete all messages: 9

              Step 9: If you don’t enter any valid key within 5 seconds after the message has ended, the system will behave as if you had pressed 3.
              • Model DPH-50U
              Question Why does my DPH-50U not appear to be responding to incoming calls?
              Answer There are several reasons why the DPH-50U may not function correctly for incoming calls:

            • DPH-50U may not work properly with some 4 wire (multiline) phones.

            • Make sure the DPH-50U is connected to the PC and DPH-50U software is running (blue phone icon in the System Tray).
            • Make sure the handset is connected to the phone jack on the DPH-50U and not the line jack

            • If the Skype™ application was terminated for any reason while the DPH-50U software was running, you will need to exit the DPH-50U software and then restart it.

            • Some telephone handsets require a battery to be installed in order to ring. If your handset supports a battery, make sure there is a battery installed and that the battery is not depleted.


              For additonal information about Skype™, please visit the Skype™ knowledge base.
              • Model DPH-50U
              Question How do I make a SkypeOut™ call, using an external phone, that is connected to the DPH-50U?
              Answer Note: You must have SkypeOut™ credit to make SkypeOut™ calls.

              Step 1: Press ## on the handset to indicate to the DPH-50U that this will be a Skype™ call.

              Note: If the DPH-50U is already in VoIP mode, pressing ## first is not required.

              Step 2: Using the handset, dial the number as per the SkypeOut™ recommended dialing sequence ( 00 + country code + telephone number).

              Step 3: Press the Star (*) key to indicate you are finished dialing.


              Example:
              • PSTN mode: 001 617 555 1212 * (star)
              • VoIP mode: ## 001 617 555 1212 *(star)
              For additonal information about Skype™, please visit the Skype™ knowledge base.
              Model DPH-50U
              Question How do I configure my DPH-50U to use my telephone handset?
              Answer You need to specify the audio output/input devices or also the audio device used for ringing within the Skype application.

              Step 1: Open the Skype interface.

              Step 2: Open Skype options. Under Tools, select Options



              Step 3: Open the Sound Devices tab in the left panel.

              Step 4: In the right panel, choose the D-Link Audio Device for the Audio In, Audio Out, and Ringing devices.

              In this screenshot, SoundMAX Digital Audio is selected, but you will need to instead select D-Link Audio Device.



              Step 5: Click Save to save the settings.
              Model DPH-50U
              Question How do I setup the Toll Bypass feature for my DPH-50U?
              Answer The Toll Bypass feature allows you to call in from your mobile phone to the computer that the DPH-50U is connected to and make a low cost SkypeOut™ international call. It also allows you to Skype™ to the computer that the DPH-50U is connected to and make a low cost local call over the PSTN line. This is useful if you are traveling abroad and want to make a low cost local call (in the geographical location that the DPH-50U is in).

              Step 1 Right-click on the Skype™ Agent (blue telephone icon in the System Tray) and select Configure as shown below.



              Step 2 Click the Call Forwarding tab to see the Call Forwarding parameters.

              Step 3 In order to enable toll bypass of incoming PSTN calls, under Phone Line to VoIP settings, check the Enable Call Forward and Enable Toll Bypass checkbox.



              Step 4 Enter your PIN. Click Apply and then click Quit to save your settings.


              You may also refer to Page 21 of the PDF manual, available here:

              Click here to download the manual

              You will need to unzip the file containing the PDF manual. If you cannot read a PDF file, you will need to install a PDF reader application, such as Adobe PDF Reader.
              Model DPH-50U
              Question Can I make calls using my DPH-50U Skype adapter, when my computer is turned off?
              Answer No, The computer, that the DPH-50U is connected to, must be powerd on and the Skype software must be running to be able to make calls.
              Model DPH-50U / DIV-140 / DVG-3004S
              Question Why does my VoIP device not recognize calls outgoing or incoming on line two of my two-line phone system?
              Answer This VoIP device will only recognize line one. This is due to the physical location of the wires in the plug. Line one is carried on the inner two wires, line two is carried on the outer two wires. The device does not recognize the outer pair. Your phone company may be able to separate the two lines, so you would have two separate phone cables, each using the middle pair.
              Model DPH-540
              Question Does the DPH-540/DPH-541 support text messaging ?
              Answer No, the DPH-540/DPH-541 will not support text messaging.

              Text messaging is a form of SMS( short message service ). At the present time the phone does not support SMS.

              The product will support E-mail text messaging.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Is my DPH-540/DPH-541 a UMA compliant phone?
              Answer No, the DPH-540/DPH-541 is an IP/SIP compliant phone.

              Click here for more details on UMA.
              Model DPH-540 , DPH-541
              Question Does the DPH-540 work with Speakeasy.net?
              Answer Yes, however, you must have a valid Speakeasy account.

              If you do have an account already, use the following steps :

              Please setup the wireless connection from your phone to the access point per the Quick Install Guide, section Setting Up Your Phone.

              Step 1: Obtain the IP address of the phone by selecting Status from the initial display.

              Step 2: In a web browser enter the IP address of the phone into the address bar.

              Step 3: Enter your username and password. By default, the username is admin and the password is also admin.



              Step 4: Click on SIP Settings on the lefthand side of the menu



              Step 5: Click on Configure to the right of the desired SIP Access List.

              Step 6: Enter the following SIP Setting parameters:

              SIP Account Name: Speakeasy
              Phone Number: xxxxx_xxxxxxxxxx_xxxx (enter your Speakeasy phone number)
              Authentication ID: xxxxxxxxxx (enter your Speakeasy phone number)
              Authentication Password: xxxxxxxx (enter your Speakeasy Authentication Password, this can be provided to you by Speakeasy. Please remember that the password is case sensitive.)
              SIP Domain: speakeasy.net
              Proxy Address: sfo-remote.voice.speakeasy.net
              Port: 5060
              Outbound Proxy: 64.81.79.173
              Port: 5060
              Local Port: 5060
              Register Timer: 3600
              Codec: G711.u
              Pkt. Time: Default
              Out of Band DTMF: On



              Step 7: Select Save. If everything was successfully entered a message stating Settings Saved Successfully will be displayed at the top to the screen.

              If the phone has successfully registered to Speakeasy the phone number will be displayed on the screen after several minutes.



              If the phone number is not displayed you may need to bind the network profile to the SIP account. To bind a network profile to the SIP account:

              Step 1: Select Menu and then Profile on the phone itself.

              Step 2: Enter your profile password.

              Step 3: Select a network profile and then select the profile name and options.

              Step 4: Select Edit and then select Account Choice.

              Step 5: Select the Speakeasy account and press Set.

              Step 6: Select On and then select Set.

              Step 7: Back out to the main screen. If the phone has successfully registered to Speakeasy the phone number will be displayed on the screen after several minutes.
              Model DPH-540 , DPH-541
              Question What pinout does the Headset on my DPH-540/541 use?
              Answer The Pin assignment is as follows:

              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Does my DPH-540/DPH-541 support SMS?
              Answer No, the DPH-540/DPH-541 does not support SMS.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Does my DPH-540/DPH-541 support web browsing?
              Answer No, the DPH-540/DPH-541 does not support web browsing.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Does my DPH-540/DPH-541 support Bluetooth?
              Answer No, the DPH-540/DPH-541 does not support Bluetooth.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question How do I configure my SIP BYOD (Bring Your Own Device) account to work with my DPH-540/541 WiFi phone?
              Answer Note: The configurations in this FAQ are not actual configurations but examples of how to configure the phone. This is designed to give the customer an idea of where the parameters that you get from your ITSP should go. All of these providers have been tested and work.

              These options are for SIP providers that support BYOD service. They may work with providers that don’t support BYOD service. They are not guaranteed to work with all providers.


              Broadvoice




              SIPPhone




              TelTel




              Vonage

              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question What is the difference between the DPH-540 and DPH-541?
              Answer The only difference between the DPH-540 and the DPH-541 is the color of the phone.

              The DPH-540 is black and the DPH-541 is silver.

              The optional chargerbase is black.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Will the DPH-540/DPH-541 work behind NAT (Network Address Translation)?
              Answer Yes, the DPH-540/DPH-541 supports STUN (Simple Traversal of UDP through NAT) and Keep-Alive (session controller) Mechanism.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Does the DPH-540/DPH-541 support Caller-ID?
              Answer Yes, however the exact implementation and display may vary between service providers.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question What is meant by the DPH-540/DPH-541 being "unlocked"?
              Answer It is a term that comes from the cell phone industry. In the United States, Europe, and Australia many operators lock the phones they sell to prevent them from working on other operatorsī networks. This is done because the price of the mobile phone is typically subsidized with revenue from subscriptions and operators want to try to avoid subsidizing a competitorīs phone.

              The DPH-540/DPH-541 VoIP SIP settings are unlocked so the user can select a provider that best meets their needs.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Does my DPH-540/DPH541 support GSM/GPRS or any 3G (UTMS/EVDO) services?
              Answer No, the DPH-540/DPH-541 does not support GSM/GPRS or any 3G (UTMS/EVDO) services.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Does my DPH-540/DPH-541 support SIM chip/card for authentication?
              Answer No, the DPH-540/DPH-541 does not support SIM chip/card for authentication.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Do you offer Apple Macintosh drivers for the DPH-540/DPH-541?
              Answer At the current time we do not offer a sync program for any operating systems. The DPH-540/DPH-541 operates via a web and keypad interface, independent of a PC or Mac.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Can I use the DPH-540/DPH-541 on any Wi-Fi Network?
              Answer Yes, both the DPH-540 and DPH-541 are Wi-Fi Certified.

              Both of these products can utilize WEP, WPA, and WPA2 standards to connect to encrypted Wi-Fi networks.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Can I use the DPH-540/DPH-541 at any Hot Spot?
              Answer In addition to different Wi-Fi encryption settings, some Wi-Fi Hot Spots require you to login for authentication.

              At the present time the DPH-540/DPH-541 does not support a web browser or Java, which may be required in order to log-in.

              If you know the encryption or security settings of the Hot Spot and the Hot Spot does not use log-in authentication, you can use the DPH-540/541.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Is the DPH-540/DPH-541 an open platform for Open Source or does D-Link offer an API for development?
              Answer At the current time the DPH-540/541 is not an open platform for developers.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question How do I "roam" using my DPH-540/541?
              Answer Roaming is a feature that gives you the ability to connect to various wireless networks that you have pre-configured into your phone when you come within range of a wireless access point that broadcasts the SSID. The phone will automatically connect to the preferred network that you have a profile configured for.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Can I utilize any SIP-Proxy I have access to?
              Answer Yes this is an unlocked phone and these options are user configured.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Does the DPH-540/DPH-541 work with MSN, YIM, AIM, or Googletalk?
              Answer No, these service do not currently utilize SIP for communication and as such the DPH-540/541 will not work with them.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Does the DPH-540/DPH-541 work with AT&T CallVanage, Primus Lingo, Packet8, or Skype?
              Answer No, at the present time these are locked providers which require you to utilize their certified products to use their voice networks.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Can I use my DPH-540/DPH-541 with my Asterisk PBX?
              Answer Yes, the DPH-540/DPH-541 is an unlocked phone and these options are user configured.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Can I use my DPH-540/DPH-541 with my Business IP PBX?
              Answer Yes, the DPH-540/DPH-541 is an unlocked phone and these options are user configured.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Does the DPH-540/DPH-541 work with Vonage?
              Answer Yes. However, you must have a valid Vonage Softphone account. Here is how to configure the phone if you do have an account already:

              The following screen images represent a recommended configuration of the D-Link DPH-540/ 41 Version 1 phone for use with the Vonage Softphone VoIP service. These parameters need to be manually entered using the device’s web server GUI.

              Please setup the wireless connection from your phone to the access point per the Quick Install Guide, section Setting Up Your Phone.

              Step 1: Obtain the IP address of the phone by selecting Status from the initial display.

              Step 2: In a web browser enter the IP address of the phone into the address bar.



              Step 3: If you have not changed the default username and password enter admin for the username and admin for the password. If the default username and password has been modified enter the modified values into the username and password fields.

              Step 4: Click on SIP Settings on the lefthand side of the menu.



              Step 5: Click on Configure to the right of the desired SIP Access List.



              Step 6: Enter the following SIP Setting parameters:
              • SIP Account Name: Vonage
              • Phone Number: xxxxxxxxxx (enter your Vonage phone number)
              • Authentication ID: xxxxxxxxxx (enter your Vonage phone number)
              • Authentication Password: xxxxxxxx (enter your Vonage Authentication Password, this can be Provided to you by Vonage. Please remember that the password is case sensitive.)
              • SIP Domain: leave blank
              • Proxy Address: sphone.vopr.vonage.net
              • Port: 5061
              • Outbound Proxy: sphone.vopr.vonage.net
              • Port: 5061
              • Local Port: 5061
              • Register Timer: 3600
              • Codec: Auto
              • Pkt. Time: Default
              • Out of Band DTMF: On
              Step 7: Select Save. If everything was successfully entered a Settings Saved Successfully will be displayed at the top to the screen.

              Step 8: If the phone has successfully registered to Vonage the phone number will be displayed on the screen after several minutes. If the phone number is not displayed you may need to bind the network profile to the SIP account.

              Step 9: To bind a network profile to the SIP account, select Menu and then Profile on the phone itself. Enter your profile password. Select anetwork profile and then select the profile name and options. Select Edit and then select Account Choice. Select the Vonage account and select Set. Select On and then select Set. Back out to the main screen. If the phone has successfully registered to Vonage the phone number will be displayed on the screen after several minutes.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Does the DPH-540/DPH-541 work with Broadvoice?
              Answer Yes, you can use the DPH-540/541 with Broadvoice by using the Broadvoice Bring-your-own-box service.

              Click here for more info on the Bring-your-own-box service.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question Does the DPH-540/DPH-541 work with SIPPhone?
              Answer Yes, the DPH-540/DPH-541 will work with SIPPhone.

              Click here for more information on SIPPhone.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on the DPH-540/541?
              Answer In order to upgrade the firmware of the DPH-540/541 you must first log into the web interface of the phone. This can only be done if you have a wireless access point that the phone has connected to and received an IP address from the DHCP server on your network.

              Step 1 To check the IP status on your phone, from the main menu screen select Status. It will show you the IP address if you have one. Open a web browser. In the address bar type the IP address of the phone. (Example http://x.x.x.x)

              Step 2 To upload firmware you must log-in to the device with the username and password of sadmin.
              If you use admin the phone will not upload the firmware.



              Step 3 Once you have logged into the phone select Upgrade Software.

              Step 4 On the screen, once you have downloaded the available firmware and saved it to a specific location, select the Browse button to browse to the location of the firmware.



              Step 5 Once the New Image field is populated with the firmware, select the Upgrade button to upgrade the firmware.
              This process should take about 3 minutes.
              When the process is complete you should see on the screen saying, Software Upgraded Successfully.



              Step 6 On the phone, the LCD will read, Firmware Upgrade Done Restart? Select OK. The phone will restart.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question How do I reset the DPH-540/541 back to factory defaults?
              Answer Step 1 From the main menu screen select Menu.

              Step 2 Scroll left to Tools and press Select.

              Step 3 Scroll down to option number 7, Back to Default, and press Select.

              This gives you 4 options to choose from that you can clear.

              Step 4 To reset to defaults select Clear All. When prompted to clear all select Yes.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question What do the Roaming parameter options mean and what are they for?
              Answer These are the Roaming options and description of the option:

            • Roam Metric
              The threshold of current RSSI below which a roaming scan is initiated.

            • Roam Delta
              After scan is done, only target BSSIDs with RSSI that are at least roam_delta above current RSSI will be kept as join targets.
              For example, if current RSSI is -75dBm, a BSSID with RSSI of -50dBm in the scan results will be kept, while a BSSID with RSSI of -60dBm will be removed from list of join targets.

            • NProbes
              Number of probes to be sent per channel during scan.

            • Active Time
              Amount of time spent on each channel scan.

            • Home Time
              Amount of time spent on home channel between scans of each channel in scan channel list.
              • Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question How do I get my DPH-540/541 to automatically detect and register network changes in standby mode?
              Answer If the power is on and the DPH-540/541 is closed, it is in standby mode.
              The phone can’t automatically detect a new network in standby mode . You have to take the phone out of standby mode for it to detect the network and attempt SIP registration.
              Model DPH-540 / DPH-541
              Question How do I make a peer-to-peer call, by IP address, using two DPH-540/541s?
              Answer Calling by IP address can’t be done using the DPH-540/DPH-541. It does not support dialing by IP address.
              Model DPH-541 / DPH-540
              Question Does the DPH-540/DPH-541 require a phone adapter ("ATA") on the network?
              Answer No, the DPH-540/DPH-541 is a self-contained VoIP phone and does not require an additional phone adapter on the network to function.
              Model DPR-1260
              Question How do I access my DPR-1260 on a Windows 2000 operating system without universal plug and play?
              Answer You will need to write down the MAC address located on the bottom of the print server (E.G. 00-54-23-45-f5-b6).

              Open a web browser and enter the following:
              http://dlinkps-XXXXXX where XXXXXX is the last six characters of your MAC address.

              Note: If you are using firmware version 1.20 or greater, the printer friendly name is http://dlink-xxxxxx.
              Model DPR-1260
              Question How can I make my HP Laserjet 1022 work with the printserver?
              Answer To make the HP Laserjet 1022 work with the DPR-1260 you will need to disable SNMP support in itīs driver properties. Even after you do this, the DPR-1260īs status page will show the Laserjet 1022 as Offline but it will print correctly.
              Model DPR-1260
              Question Which multifunction printers are compatible with the DPR-1260 for printing and scanning?
              Answer The following lists the printers that have been successfully tested for compatibility with the D-Link DPR-1260 Multifunction Wireless USB Print Server. An independent laboratory performed the tests for printer compatibility.

              Each test environment consisted of the following components:

            • PC operating under below network operating systems
            • Windows XP – NetBUI, TCP/IP
            • Win2000 – NetBUI, TCP/IP
            • The above PC is equipped with an 802.11g wireless network adapter and a 10/100BASE – TX Ethernet interface.
            • 802.11g wireless access point and/or router.
            • 10/100BASE – TX Ethernet switch.
            • D-Link DPR-1260 Multifunction Wireless USB Print Server
            • Printer under test.

              For a list of printers that are supported for printing only, please take a look at this FAQ.

              Epson

              Stylus CX3810

              Epson

              Stylus CX4800

              Epson

              Stylus CX5100

              Epson

              Stylus CX6400

              Epson

              Stylus Photo RX600



              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet4110

              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet4215

              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet4315

              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet5510

              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet5505

              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet5610

              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet6110

              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet6122

              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet6127

              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet6210

              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet7130

              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet7110

              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet7210

              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet7200

              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet7300

              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet7310

              Hewlett Packard

              OfficeJet7410

              Hewlett Packard

              Photosmart 3310

              Hewlett Packard

              Photosmart 3210

              Hewlett Packard

              Photosmart 2575

              Hewlett Packard

              Photosmart C4180

              Hewlett Packard

              PSC1210

              Hewlett Packard

              PSC1311

              Hewlett Packard

              PSC1350

              Hewlett Packard

              PSC1315

              Hewlett Packard

              PSC1410

              Hewlett Packard

              PSC1510 AIO

              Hewlett Packard

              PSC1610 AIO

              Hewlett Packard

              PSC1600

              Hewlett Packard

              PSC2175

              Hewlett Packard

              PSC2510

              Hewlett Packard

              PSC2410

              Hewlett Packard

              PSC2710

              Hewlett Packard

              PSC2355

              Hewlett Packard

              PSC2350

              • Model DPR-1260
              Question Why am I unable to access the DPR-1260, at its default IP Address, after upgrading the firmware?
              Answer After firmware version 1.12, the DPR-1260 is defaulted to DHCP unless the unit was previously configured for a Static IP Address.

              DHCP means the router is dynamicly assigning an IP Address to the DPR-1260. There are a few ways to access the device in this configuration.

            • Option 1:
              You can invoke the unit with its UPnP icon in My Network Places. If you do not see a UPnP icon for the DPR-1260 in your Network Places, you may need to click the Show UPnP Icons In Networked Devices under the Network Tasks window in the upper left of the My Network Places window.




            • Option 2:
              If your router provides a DHCP client list, you could confirm itīs IP Address by referencing itīs MAC Address and locating the IP Address that the router is assigning to the unit.
              Note: Not all routers support this option.


              Note: DIR-655 DHCP table used in this image.


            • Option 3:
              The DPR-1260 also has a "Friendly" name. This can be used to gain access to the DPR-1260 when itīs IP Address is not known.
              Click here for instructions on using the "Friendly" name.
              Note: the "Friendly" name the DPR-1260 uses depends on the version of the frimware it has loaded.



              Note: Firmware 1.21 "friendly" name used in this image.
              • Model DPR-1260
              Question What is the Default password to my DPR-1260.
              Answer By default, there is no password for the DPR-1260.
              Model DPR-1260
              Question Where do I find the Queue name for my printer after I connect it to my DPR-1260?
              Answer Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by typing in the IP address of the DPR-1260 in the address bar (the default IP address is 192.168.0.10). The username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 2 Click on STATUS at the top. Click the DEVICE INFO button on the left. The Queue name will be listed under ATTACHED DEVICES.

              Model DPR-1260
              Question What can I do if my printer does not work with my D-Link print server?
              Answer Some issues with printers that are not on the supported list may be fixed by upgrading the firmware on the printer.

              Note: D-Link does not guarantee that upgrading the firmware on your printer will make it work with the DPR-1260.

              Please consult your printer manufacture for information regarding upgrading your firmware and the risks involved with upgrading your firmware before you try to upgrade the firmware on your printer.

              Note: Not all printers have new firmware or firmware that is upgradeable.

              Disclaimer: D-Link does not take any responsibility and cannot be held responsible for anything that may happen to your printer by upgrading the firmware.
              Model DPR-1260
              Question Which printers are compatible with the DPR-1260 for printing only?
              Answer The following lists the printers that have been successfully tested for compatibility with the D-Link DPR-1260 Multifunction Wireless USB Print Server. An independent laboratory performed the tests for printer compatibility.

              Each test environment consisted of the following components:

            • PC operating under below network operating systems
            • Windows XP – NetBUI, TCP/IP
            • Win2000 – NetBUI, TCP/IP
            • The above PC is equipped with an 802.11g wireless network adapter and a 10/100BASE – TX Ethernet interface.
            • 802.11g wireless access point and/or router.
            • 10/100BASE – TX Ethernet switch.
            • D-Link DPR-1260 Multifunction Wireless USB Print Server
            • Printer under test.

              For a list of multifunction printers that are supported for both printing and scanning, please take a look at this FAQ.

              Brother

              DCP-1400
              HL-1050
              HL-1250
              HL1400
              HL-1435
              HL-1440
              HL-1850
              HL-2040
              HL-2460
              HL-3745
              HL-5040
              HL-5140
              HL-5150
              HL-5240
              HL-6050
              MFC-210C
              MFC-240C
              MFC-3220
              MFC-3240C
              MFC-3420
              MFC-420
              MFC-4800
              MFC-7220
              MFC-7420
              MFC-8220
              MFC-8440
              MFC-8840
              Canon

              i30
              i70
              i80
              i250
              i320
              i350
              i450
              i455
              i470
              i475
              i550
              i560
              i850
              i860
              i900D
              i950
              i960
              i965
              i3000
              i6100
              i6500
              i9100
              i9900
              LBP-350
              LBP-4
              LBP-430
              LBP-460
              LBP-465
              LBP-8II
              LBP-8III
              LBP-8SX
              LBP-860
              LBP-1260
              LBP-1310
              LBP-1510
              LBP-1610
              LBP-1810
              LBP-1910
              LBP-2050
              LBP-2300
              LBP-2510
              LBP-2710
              LBP-3200
              PIXMA iP90
              PIXMA iP1000
              PIXMA iP1500
              PIXMA iP1600
              PIXMA iP1700
              PIXMA iP2000
              PIXMA iP3000
              PIXMA iP4000
              PIXMA iP4200
              PIXMA iP5000
              PIXMA iP5200
              PIXMA iP6000
              PIXMA iP6210
              PIXMA iP6220
              PIXMA iP6600
              PIXMA iP8500
              PIXMA MP130
              PIXMA MP150
              PIXMA MP160
              PIXMA MP170
              PIXMA MP180
              PIXMA MP390
              PIXMA MP450
              PIXMA MP460
              PIXMA MP500
              PIXMA MP530
              PIXMA MP630
              PIXMA MP730
              PIXMA MP750
              PIXMA MP760
              PIXMA MP780
              PIXMA MP800
              PIXMA MP830
              PIXMA MP950
              PIXMA Pro9000
              PIXMA Pro9500
              Epson

              850PT
              Stylus CX1500
              Stylus CX3800
              Stylus CX4200
              Stylus CX4600
              Stylus CX5100
              Stylus CX5200
              Stylus CX5400
              Stylus CX5800
              Stylus CX6600
              Stylus CX7800
              Stylus C20UX
              Stylus C40S
              Stylus C40UX
              Stylus C42UX
              Stylus C44UX
              Stylus C44
              Stylus C45
              Stylus C60
              Stylus C62
              Stylus C63
              Stylus C64
              Stylus C66
              Stylus C80
              Stylus C82
              Stylus C84
              Stylus C86
              Stylus C88
              Stylus Photo
              Stylus Photo EX
              Stylus Photo 700
              Stylus Photo 750
              Stylus Photo 780
              Stylus Photo 785EPX
              Stylus Photo 800
              Stylus Photo 810
              Stylus Photo 820
              Stylus Photo 825
              Stylus Photo 830
              Stylus Photo 850
              Stylus Photo 860
              Stylus Photo 870
              Stylus Photo 875
              Stylus Photo 880
              Stylus Photo 890
              Stylus Photo 895
              Stylus Photo 900
              Stylus Photo 925
              Stylus Photo 960
              Stylus Photo 1200
              Stylus Photo 1270
              Stylus Photo 1280
              Stylus Photo 2000P
              Stylus Photo 2200
              Stylus Photo 2400
              Stylus Photo R200
              Stylus Photo R220
              Stylus Photo R300
              Stylus Photo R310
              Stylus Photo R320
              Stylus Photo R340
              Stylus Photo R800
              Stylus Photo R1800
              Stylus Photo R2400
              Stylus Photo RX500
              Stylus Photo RX620
              Stylus Photo RX700
              Hewlet Packard

              Color LaserJet 1500
              DeskJet 3420
              DeskJet 3520
              DeskJet 3550
              DeskJet 3650
              DeskJet 3745
              DeskJet 3820
              DeskJet 3848
              DeskJet 3915
              DeskJet 3930
              DeskJet 3940
              DeskJet 450 cbi
              DeskJet 5150
              DeskJet 5440
              DeskJet 5650
              DeskJet 5740
              DeskJet 5850
              DeskJet 5940
              DeskJet 6122
              DeskJet 640C
              DeskJet 6540
              DeskJet 6840
              DeskJet 7260
              DeskJet 822
              DeskJet 840C
              DeskJet 890C
              DeskJet 948C
              DeskJet 970Cxi
              DeskJet 9800
              DeskJet 990Cxi
              DeskJet D2330
              DeskJet D2360
              DeskJet D4100
              DeskJet D4160
              DeskJet F380
              InkJet 1100D
              InkJet 1200D
              InkJet 2300
              Color LaserJet 1600
              LaserJet 1018
              LaserJet 1012
              LaserJet 1020
              LaserJet 1022
              LaserJet 1150
              LaserJet 1160
              LaserJet 1200
              LaserJet 1300
              LaserJet 1315
              LaserJet 1320
              LaserJet 2200/D
              LaserJet 2420
              LaserJet 3015
              LaserJet 3020
              LaserJet 3030
              LaserJet 3050
              LaserJet 3052
              LaserJet 3055
              LaserJet 3380
              LaserJet 4250
              LaserJet 5100
              LaserJet 5200
              OfficeJet 6310
              OfficeJet Pro K850
              Photosmart 145
              Photosmart 245
              Photosmart 325
              PhotoSmart 330
              PhotoSmart 335
              PhotoSmart 375
              PhotoSmart 380
              PhotoSmart 385
              Photosmart 425
              PhotoSmart 428
              PhotoSmart 470
              PhotoSmart 475
              PhotoSmart 1000
              PhotoSmart 1215
              PhotoSmart 7150
              Photosmart 7260
              PhotoSmart 7350
              Photosmart 7450
              PhotoSmart 7550
              PhotoSmart 7620
              Photosmart 7660
              Photosmart 7755
              PhotoSmart 7760
              PhotoSmart 7850
              Photosmart 7960
              PhotoSmart 8000
              PhotoSmart 8050
              Photosmart 8150
              PhotoSmart 8200
              PhotoSmart 8250
              PhotoSmart 8450
              Photosmart 8750
              PhotoSmart A432
              PhotoSmart A434
              PhotoSmart A510
              PhotoSmart A516
              PhotoSmart A610
              PhotoSmart A616
              PhotoSmart A710
              PhotoSmart A716
              PhotoSmart Pro B9180
              PhotoSmart C3180
              PhotoSmart D7300
              PhotoSmart D7360
              PSC 750
              PSC 950
              PSC 2210
              PSC 2610
              PSC 6840
              PSC 7410
              Samsung
              ML-1710
              ML-1740
              ML-2010
              • Model DPR-1260 , DP-300U , DP-301P+ , DP-301U , DP-311U , DP-G310
              Question How do I manually install my printer using a D-Link print server in Microsoft Windows Vista?
              Answer Step 1 Locate the Queue name, or Port name, of your printer.

              Click here for instructions on locating the Queue name if you are using a DPR-1260.

              Click here for instructions on locating the Port name if you are using a DP series print server.

              Step 2 After you locate the Queue or Port name, you will want to write it down. (You can also highlight it with your cursor, and copy the info. This will allow you to paste it in to the wizard later on.)

              Step 3 Click Start and then Control Panel. Locate the Printers icon. Click the Add A Printer icon.



              Step 4 Click Add a Local Printer. Use this option only if you don’t have a USB printer. (Windows automatically installs USB printers when you plug them in).



              Step 5 Select Create New Port. For the port type, select standard TCP/IP Port. Click Next.



              Step 6 Click the drop down menu for Device Type and choose TCP/IP Device.

              In the Hostname or IP Address field, input the ip address of your print server. (The default address for most of D-Link’s print servers is 192.168.0.10).

              The PORT NAME field is purely for identification purposes. This allows you to discern the port you’ve created later on for configuration.



              Step 7 Windows will attempt to detect the printer. Please allow a few moments for the operating system to do this.



              Step 8 Highlight the radio button labeled Custom and press the Settings button.



              Step 9 Click the radio button labeled LPR.

              The LPR Queue Name field will now become available. Here you will need to enter the Queue or Port name that you acquired in Step 1.

              Check the box labeled LPR Byte Counting Enabled. Click OK.



              Step 10 At this point, you’ll be brought back to the previous window. Click Next.



              Step 11 Windows will now attempt to detect and install the printer driver. If Windows is unable to detect the printer and find a matching driver, you will be given the option of selecting a printer from a list of available printer drivers.



              Step 12 In the left window you have a list of manufacturers, and on the right side you have the various models. Select the model that pertains to your printer. Click Next.



              Step 13 Next you will be prompted to give the printer a name. You can leave the default Windows name, or you can create your own if you wish. Click Next.



              Step 14 Once the printer successfully installs you will be given the option to print a test page. If the test prints then the print server is configured properly. Click Finish.

              Model DS-510P / DS-510S
              Question What are the differences between the Trial, Standard, and Professional edition of D-View 5.1?
              Answer
              Features
              D-View 5.1 Trial Edition (Free of Charge)
              D-View 5.1 Standard Edition (DS-501S)
              D-View 5.1 Professional Edition (DS-501P)
              Advanced MIB Utilities (Standard MIB
              supported)
              • MIB-II (RFC1213)
              • 802.1D (RFC1493)
              • RMON (RFC1757)
              • Entity (RFC2737)
              • IF MIBs (RFC2233)
              • MIB-II (RFC1213)
              • 802.1D (RFC1493)
              • RMON (RFC1757)
              • Entity (RFC2737)
              • IF MIBs (RFC2233)
              • MIB-II (RFC1213)
              • 802.1D (RFC1493)
              • RMON (RFC1757)
              • Entity (RFC2737)
              • IF MIBs (RFC2233)
              • VLAN (RFC2674)
              Layer 3 Utilities:
              • IP Forwarding (RFC2096)
              • PIM (RFC2934)
              • OSPF (RFC1850)
              • DVMRP (RFC1075)
              • IP Mroute (RFC2932)
              • RIP2 (RFC1724)
              Network Management Protocol
              • SNMPv1
              • SNMPv1
              • D-Link DIAP
              • SNMPv1-v3
              • D-Link DIAP
              Port based accounting capability No No Yes
              Automatic company grouping Yes Yes (D-Link brand only) Yes
              Expiry Date 60 days (No after-sales support) Unlimited Unlimited
              MIB Browser & MIB Complier
              • Get only
              • MIB Editor (read only)
              • SNMPv1
              • Loadable MIBs - 15
              • Get only
              • MIB Editor (read/write)
              • SNMPv1
              • Loadable MIBs - 30
              • Get/Set
              • MIB Editor (read/write)
              • SNMPv1-v3
              • Loadable MIBs - Unlimited
              Managed IP Nodes number (max.) 64 256 Unlimited
              No. of Topology Map 5 Unlimited Unlimited
              Internet Tools No Yes
              • TFTP Server
              • BOOTP
              • Ping
              		Yes
              • TFTP Server
              • BOOTP
              • Ping
              Alarm / Trap Manager
              • Advance filter and alarm / trap list view
              • Trap editor allows manager to add / modify trap items
              • History log support
              • Advance filter and alarm / trap list view
              • Trap editor allows manager to add / modify trap items
              • History log support
              • Alarm / trap message notification by e-mail
              • Advance filter and alarm / trap list view
              • Trap editor allows manager to add / modify trap items
              • History log support
              • Alarm / trap message notification by e-mail
              Model DSA-3100
              Question How do I configure the settings on the Authentication page on my DSA-3100?
              Answer
              Logging Into the DSA-3100 and Accessing the Authentication Page


              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DSA-3100 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.40). Be sure to include https:// followed by the IP address. Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab then click Authentication.

              Interface Configuration - Authentication


              Mode - Select NAT, NAT_IP_PNP, or Router from the drop-down list next to Mode.

              • NAT - This mode protects the identity of the devices within the LAN from those devices outside the network.
              • NAT_IP_PNP - All devices, regardless of their IP address, can gain access to the Internet through the DSA-3100 in this mode.
              • Router - In this mode, the DSA-3100 will not protect the identity of the connected devices by translating their IP addresses and shielding them from detection outside the LAN.


              IP Address - Enter the IP address for the Authentication interface (e.g., the RADIUS server in the network).

              Subnet Mask - Enter the subnet mask for the Authentication interface.

              Disable DHCP Server - Make this selection if you do not wish to use the built-in DHCP feature of the DSA-3100.



              Enable DHCP Server - Selecting this option activates the device’s built-in DHCP server. Configure the DHCP server with the following properties:

              • DHCP Pool Start IP Address - Enter the starting IP address, from which group of addresses the DHCP server will assign IP addresses to the DHCP-enabled devices (clients) on the network.
              • DHCP Pool End IP Address - Enter the last IP address in the sequence of addresses from which the DHCP server will assign addresses.
              • Lease Time - Select the length of time during which the DHCP assigned address will be in effect.
              • Domain Name - Enter the domain name.
              • WINS IP Address - Enter the WINS server’s IP address.
              • Preferred DNS Server - Enter the IP address of the preferred DNS server.
              • Alternate DNS Server - Enter the IP address of the alternate DNS server.


              Enable DHCP Relay - If you would like to use an external DHCP server to assign IP addresses to the DSA-3100, then enter its IP address next to Server IP.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to apply the new settings.
              Model DSA-3100
              Question Do I have to setup any firewall rules to protect my LAN from the Authentication Network on my DSA-3100?
              Answer You do not have to create any firewall rules to protect the LAN (local area network) from the Authentication network. The DSA-3100 has a default firewall rule that blocks all traffic from passing from the Authentication network to the LAN.
              Model DSA-3100
              Question How do I configure the settings on the Local Network page on my DSA-3100?
              Answer
              Logging Into the DSA-3100 and Accessing the Local Network Page


              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DSA-3100 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.40). Be sure to use https:// followed by the IP address. Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click Local Network.


              Interface Configuration - Local Network


              Mode - Select NAT or Router from the drop-down list next to Mode.

              • NAT - This mode protects the identity of the devices within the LAN from those devices outside the network.
              • Router - In this mode, the DSA-3100 will not protect the identity of the connected devices by translating their IP addresses and shielding them from detection outside the LAN.


              IP Address - Enter the IP address for the LAN interface.

              Subnet Mask - Enter the subnet mask for the LAN interface.

              Disable DHCP Server - Make this selection if you do not wish to use the built-in DHCP feature of the DSA-3100.



              Enable DHCP Server - Selecting this option activates the device’s built-in DHCP server. Configure the DHCP server with the following properties:

              • DHCP Pool Start IP Address - Enter the starting IP address, from which group of addresses the DHCP server will assign IP addresses to the DHCP-enabled devices (clients) on the network.
              • DHCP Pool End IP Address - Enter the last IP address in the sequence of addresses from which the DHCP server will assign addresses.
              • Lease Time - Select the length of time during which the DHCP assigned address will be in effect.
              • Domain Name - Enter the domain name.
              • WINS IP Address - Enter the WINS server’s IP address.
              • Preferred DNS Server - Enter the IP address of the preferred DNS server.
              • Alternate DNS Server - Enter the IP address of the alternate DNS server.


              Enable DHCP Relay - If you would like to use an external DHCP server to assign IP addresses to the DSA-3100, then enter its IP address next to Server IP.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to apply the new changes.
              Model DSA-3100
              Question Why can I not connect to my DSA-3100 using a straight through connection?
              Answer If you are connecting your computer directly to the DSA-3100 and your LAN status shows up as Disconnected or Network Cable Unplugged then you are not using a cross-over cable. If you are using a cross-over cable then check the connection or replace the cross-over cable.
              Model DSA-3100
              Question How do I configure the settings on the System page on my DSA-3100?
              Answer
              Logging Into the DSA-3100 and Accessing the System Page

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DSA-3100 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.40). Be sure to use https:// followed by the IP address. Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin and the password is admin. Click Enter.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab then click System.



              System Configuration

              System Name - DSA-3100 is the default system name. You may wish to rename it to indicate your company, department, or the service you would like to provide.

              Admin Detail - You can edit the System Administrator’s information here (e.g., name, phone number, and e-mail). If a user encounters a problem connecting to the WAN Port of the DSA-3100, the System Administrator’s information will be shown on the user login page.

              Succeed Page - Enter a URL for all users to be directed to after successful login, typically defined as the home page of the host company, for instance: http:// www.dlink.com. No matter which URL a user originally attempts to connect to, he/she will be directed to the URL defined here first.

              SSH Manage IP - Specify a public IP address that will be allowed to configure the DSA-3100 via the WAN port. For instance, if 10.2.3.1 is specified, then ONLY that IP address will be allowed to configure the DSA-3100 by connecting to the WAN port.

              Access History IP - Specify an IP address to be used by the billing system to connect to the DSA-3100 to get billing history information.

              SNMP - Simple Network Management Protocol is a system for managing complex networks. The DSA-3100 provides SNMP v2 Read-only (RO) management.
              • Manager IP - A trap manager is a management station that receives and processes traps. When you configure a trap manager, assign the IP address to the management station.
              • Community - Community strings serve as passwords for SNMP messages. The DSA-3100 allows Read-only (RO) as a password.
              If you Enable SNMP, you must specify the Manager IP and the Community.

              User Login SSL - Enable this feature if you want users to log in using Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTPS).

              Time - The DSA-3100 supports NTP (Network Time Protocol). The time zone of the DSA-3100’s internal clock is UTC (Coordinated Universal Time, formerly known as GMT, Greenwich Mean Time).
              • Enable NTP - Update date and time using a NTP Timeserver.
              • Set Device Date and Time - Set the date and time manually.
              External Syslog Server - This feature allows you to route system information to a remote server. Specify the IP address and the Port of the external syslog server.

              Proxy Server - Specify the IP address and Port of the external proxy server.

              History Email - The DSA-3100 keeps traffic history in its volatile memory. Use this feature to have logs emailed to you automatically.
              • Send from - The email address that will appear in the To field of the Traffic History Log when it is emailed.
              • Send to - The email address that the Traffic History Log will be sent to.
              • Interval - How often the Traffic History Log will be sent.
              Admin Email - The DSA-3100 keeps system logs in its volatile memory. Use this feature to have system logs emailed to the administrator.
              • Send from - The email address that will appear in the To field of the system log when it is emailed.
              • Send to - The email address that the system log will be sent to.
              • Interval - How often the system log will be sent.
              DNS - Specify the primary (required) and secondary (optional) DNS servers that the DSA-3100 will use to resolve domain names.

              DoS protection for user - Use this feature to protect users against various hacker attacks such as:
              • NMAP FIN/URG/PSH
              • Xmas Tree
              • SYN/RST
              • Ping of Death
              • Null Scan
              • SYN/FIN
              Model DSA-3100
              Question How do I create a local user account on the DSA-3100?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser (Internet Explorer) and enter the IP address of the DSA-3100 into the address bar (https://192.168.0.40). Enter your username (admin) and your password (admin).



              Note: You may be prompted with a certificate message indicating the certificate is not trusted. This certificate is from the DSA-3100 and must be accepted in order to proceed. Click OK to accept the certificate.

              Step 2 Click Home and then click User Manager. Make sure Local is selected for Management Type and click on Local User List.



              Step 3 Click on Add Users. Enter the desired username, password, MAC address, and group number for the new user. You do not need to enter a MAC address to create a user account. The MAC address field is optional.



              Step 4 Once you have configured all desired user accounts click on Apply.

              This change takes effect immediately. To add additional user accounts, repeat steps 1-4.
              Model DSA-3100
              Question What code do I need to display images that I upload on my DSA-3100?
              Answer To display an image that has been uploaded to your DSA-3100 on any of the custom web pages, use the below code, replacing pic.extension with the file name of the image (IE picture.gif):

              <img src="images/pic.extension">
              Model DSA-3100
              Question How do I upload files (images and custom web pages) to my DSA-3100?
              Answer Note: Images uploaded must be .jpg, .png, or .bmp, and must not exceed 512Kb in size.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the DSA-3100 in the address bar (default is https://192.168.0.40). Be sure to include https:// followed by the IP address. Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Upload on the left.

              Step 4 Locate the section that corresponds with the file you want to upload. Enter the path to the file or click Browse to navigate to the file. Click Apply to upload the file.

              Model DSA-3100 / DSA-3200 / DSA-5100
              Question Why canīt MAC OS users authenticate with the DSA HotSpot Gateway through the Safari web browser?
              Answer Note: This FAQ applies to Mac OS-X users using the default web browser Safari.

              The Safari web browser cannot be used to open or apply changes to the web management interface of the hotspot gateway, nor can On-demand users/Users authenticate when using the Safari web browser. This is due to an incompatibility with the method in which Safari uses to display the pages of the DSA-xxxx HotSpot Gateway web management interface.

              Known compatible web browsers for MAC OS-X users:
            • Internet Explorer
            • Mozilla Firefox
            • Camino
              • Model DSA-3100 / DSA-3100_revB
              Question How do I configure LDAP authentication on the DSA-3100?
              Answer ** This example uses a Windows 2000 Domain Controller as the LDAP server. The domain is a.b.c **



              Step 1 Open up a web browser and enter the IP address of the DSA-3100 (192.168.0.40 by default on the local/private port).

              Step 2 Enter the username and password of the DSA-3100 (admin/admin by default).



              Step 3 Go to the User Management button on the lower left hand side and change the Management Type to LDAP. Point the server IP to the IP address of the LDAP server, and set the Base DN accordingly. CN=Users,DC=a,DC=b,DC=c



              Step 4 Now users in Active Directory Users and Computers can log into the public/authentication port.

              Model DSA-3100 / DSA-3100_revB
              Question How do I configure DMZ on my DSA-3100?
              Answer DMZ will map a public IP address to a computer on the LAN and open all ports to that computer.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DSA-3100 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.40). Be sure to include https:// followed by the IP address. Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click Enter.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab at the top and then click DMZ on the left side.



              Step 4 Below Private IP Address enter the LAN IP address of the computer and below Public IP Address enter the public (WAN) IP address that you are mapping to that computer.

              Step 5 Click Apply to save the new settings.
              Model DSA-3100 / DSA-3100_revB
              Question How can I view what users are connected to my DSA-3100?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the DSA-3100 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.40). Be sure to include https:// before the IP address. Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Status tab and then click Current Users on the left.



              Users currently connected to the DSA-3100 will be displayed in the Current Users table.
              Model DSA-3100 / DSA-3100_revB
              Question How do I save/load the configuration file of my DSA-3100?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the DSA-3100 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.40). Be sure to include https:// before the IP address. Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click System on the left.



              Step 4 To save the configuration file, click Create below Create Backup Image and specify where you want to save the configuration file.

              To load the configuration file, click Browse... below Restore Settings From File and navigate to the location where you saved the configuration file. Select that file and click Open. Click Restore to load the configuration file.
              Model DSA-3100 / DSA-3100_revB
              Question How do I use the Monitor IP List on my DSA-3100?
              Answer The DSA-3100 can monitor up to 20 IP addresses. The system periodically sends out packets to check the status of the selected network nodes by pinging them every 30 minutes. If the node cannot be reached, the DSA-3100 will send an email to the administrator every 30 minutes. For example: If you specify a node which can’t be reached, the DSA-3100 will send an E-mail to the administrator at 1:00, 1:30, 2:00, 2:30, 3:00, etc., until the problem is fixed.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DSA-3100 in the address bar (default is https://192.168.0.40). Remember to include https before the IP address. Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Tools tab and then click Monitor IP List on the left.

              Step 4 You can enter up to 20 IP addresses.



              Step 5 Click Apply to save the new settings.
              Model DSA-3100 / DSA-3100_revB
              Question What code do I need to customize the Logout Page on my DSA-3100?
              Answer To make a custom Logout Page, embed the code below into a web page, save it as a .shtml file, and upload it to the DSA-3100.

              <form action="userlogout.shtml" method="post" name="Enter"> <input type="text" name="myusername"> <input type="password" name="mypassword"> <input type="submit" name="submit" value="Logout"> <input type="reset" name="clear" value="Clear"> </form>
              Model DSA-3100 / DSA-3100_revB
              Question How do I configure my DSA-3100 to connect to the Internet?
              Answer Note: Please configure the DSA-3100 with the computer that was last connected directly to the modem. Also, you can only use the Ethernet port on your modem. If you were using the USB connection before using the DSA-3100, then you must turn off your modem, disconnect the USB cable and connect an Ethernet cable to the WAN port on the DSA-3100, and then turn the modem back on. In some cases, you may need to call your ISP to change connection types (USB to Ethernet).

              Step 1 Connect the Ethernet cable from your modem into the WAN port on the back of the DSA-3100.

              Step 2 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the DSA-3100 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.40). Be sure to include https:// followed by the IP address. Press Enter.

              Step 3 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.

              Step 4 Click the Home tab and then click WAN on the left.

              Step 5 Select your connection type using the radio buttons.
              • Static IP Address - If your ISP issued you a static IP address, choose this option and enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.



              • Dynamic IP Address - If you connect to the Internet without having to authenticate with a username and password, then choose this option.



              • PPPoE Client - If you connect to your DSL connection using a PPPoE connection, then choose this option. Be sure to enter your username and password. Contact your ISP if you are unsure of what to enter. Choose Enabled using the radio buttons next to Dial on demand. Enter a value next to Maximum Idle Time if you want your connection to terminate after x minutes of inactivity.



              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Restart to apply the new settings.
              Model DSA-3100 / DSA-3100_revB
              Question How can I configure my DSA-3100 from a remote location?
              Answer To setup the DSA-3100 for remote management follow the steps below:

              Step 1 Open a web browser (Internet Explorer) and enter the IP address of the DSA-3100 into the address bar (https://192.168.0.40). Enter your username (admin) and your password (admin).



              Note: You may be prompted with a certificate message indicating the the certificate is not trusted. This certificate is from the DSA-3100 and must be accepted in order to proceed. Click OK to accept the certificate.

              Step 2 Once you are logged into the DSA-3100, click on the Home tab and then click System. Fill in the SSH Manage field with the IP address of the remote location you will be managing the DSA-3100 from. You may enter a single IP address or an entire subnet.

              To define an entire subnet enter the network identifier followed by the subnet mask. (ex. 192.168.0.0/24).

              To specify a single IP address enter the IP of the remote location (ex. 192.168.0.10).



              Step 3  Once you have verified that the settings are correct click Apply.

              Step 4 In order to save the settings the DSA-3100 must restart. Click Restart then click Yes to confirm that you would like to restart the DSA-3100.

              Model DSA-3100 / DSA-3100_revB
              Question How do I reset the DSA-3100 to the factory default settings?
              Answer The DSA-3100 can be reset to factory defaults using either the Web-based Interface or through the console port using a terminal emulation program.

            • Reset using web-based configuration.
            • Reset using Hyperterminal


              Using the Web Interface

              To reset the DSA-3100 to factory defaults using the Web Interface follow the steps below.

              Step 1 Open a web browser (Internet Explorer) and enter the IP address of the DSA-3100 into the address bar (https://192.168.0.40). Enter your username (admin) and your password (admin).



              Note: You may be prompted with a certificate message indicating the certificate is not trusted. This certificate is from the DSA-3100 and must be accepted in order to proceed. Click "OK" to accept the certificate.

              Step 2 Click on Tools > System and then click Reset to reset the DSA-3100 to factory defaults.



              Step 3 Click Yes to confirm that you would like to reset the DSA-3100 to factory defaults.





              Using Hyperterminal

              To reset the DSA-3100 to factory defaults using HyperTerminal follow the steps below.

              Step 1 Connect one end of the RS-232 cable to the Console port on the back of the DSA-3100 and the other end to Com1 on your PC.

              Step 2 Start a Terminal Emulation program like HyperTerminal. Configure HyperTerminal settings as follows and then click OK.

            • Bits per Second: 9600
            • Data Bits: 8
            • Parity: None
            • Stop Bits: 1
            • Flow Control: None

              Note: If you are using a firmware version before 1.36b4 or you have not reset the DSA-3100 to factory defaults after upgrading from a firmware version before 1.36b4, the Baud rate will be set to 115200.

              Step 3 Press Enter to begin the HyperTerminal session. From the Main Menu select Reset. This will reset the unit to factory defaults.

              Step 4 Confirm the factory reload by selecting Yes.

              Step 5 After the DSA-3100 has fully rebooted, the unit should be reset to factory defaults.
              • Model DSA-3100 / DSA-3100_revB
              Question How do I access the web-based configuration on my DSA-3100?
              Answer The DSA-3100īs web management uses SSL for protected access to the administration interface and user authentication interface.

              Make sure you are typing "https://192.168.0.40" (192.168.0.40 being the DSA-3100īs Local Network IP address) in the address bar of your Internet Browser rather than "http://....". If you are still having difficulty, unplug the power to the DSA-3100 and plug back in, and then try to access the web based configuration again.

              Model DSA-3100 / DSA-3100_revB
              Question How do I disable DHCP on the Private Network on my DSA-3100?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the DSA-3100 into the address bar (https://192.168.0.40). Enter your username (admin) and your password (admin).

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab and go to Private Network.

              Step 3 Select the radio button next to Disable DHCP Server and click Apply.

              Model DSA-3100 / DSA-3100_revB / DSA-3200
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on the DSA-3100/DSA-3200?
              Answer Step 1 Download the most recent firmware version available at http://www.support.dlink.com/products/view.asp?productid=DSA%2D3100 and save it to the Desktop.

              Step 2 Open a web browser (Internet Explorer) and enter the IP address of the DSA-3100 into the address bar (https://192.168.0.40). Enter your username (admin) and your password (admin).



              Step 3 Click on the Tools tab and then click Firmware.



              Step 4 Click on Browse and locate the .rom file the you downloaded from step 1.

              Step 5 Double-click on the .rom file so that the path to the file will appear in the file name field on the Firmware page. Click Apply.

              Step 6 Once the firmware upgrade has been completed, click Restart.



              Step 7 Confirm that you would like to restart by clicking Yes.



              In order to verify that all new features are working properly you must reset the DSA-3100 to factory defaults after upgrading to a newer version of firmware. When resetting to defaults you will lose all previously configured settings.
              Model DSA-3100 / DSA-3100_revB / DSA-3200
              Question How do I access a device that is connected to public LAN from the Internet?
              Answer In this sample, a DCS-6620 camera is connected to the Public LAN port.

              • IP Address of the camera : 192.168.1.199
              • Ports needs to be opened : 800(TCP), 5002- 5003(UDP)
              • WAN IP : 24.23.155.2
              Step 1 Log into the DSA-3100 from Private LAN side.

              Step 2 Go to Advanced > Virtual Server. Enter the port forwarding entry for the camera.



              NOTE: For DSA-3200, the virtual server and pass through are under Tools tab instead of Advanced tab.

              Step 3 Go to Advanced > Pass Through. Enter the cameraīs IP Address.



              Now the camera is able to be viewed by using the WAN IP Address of DSA-3100 with the port number (http://24.23.155.2:800).

              NOTE: For the DSA-3200, the virtual server and pass through are under Tools tab instead of Advanced tab.
              Model DSA-3100 / DSA-3100_revB / DSA-3200 / DSA-5100
              Question What code do I need to customize the Login Page on my HotSpot Gateway?
              Answer To make a custom Login Page, embed the code below into a web page, save it as a .shtml file, and upload it to the HotSpot Gateway.

              <form action="userlogin.shtml" method="post" name="Enter"> <input type="text" name="myusername"> <input type="password" name="mypassword"> <input type="submit" name="submit" value="Enter"> <input type="reset" name="clear" value="Clear"> </form>
              Model DSA-3100_revB
              Question Why do I get an error while uploading User accounts from a text file to my DSA-3100 (rev.B)?
              Answer If you receive an error while uploading user accounts from a text file, the text file is not properly formatted.



              Be sure you have one user account per line and there are no spaces between the text and commas.

              Below is an example of a properly formatted user account text file:



              The last line in the example above is for an account without an associated MAC address.

              NOTE: The above file needs to conform to the UNIX file format. Usernames in the text file should not exist in the local users list at the time of import. Also, you cannot use the username guest or anything that begins with guest, such as guest1, or guest2.
              Model DSA-3200
              Question Why is there no login page when Layer 2 Authentication is enabled?
              Answer Layer 2 authentication mechanisms override any Layer 3 (local user or RADIUS) mechanisms already configured, making them null and void.
              Model DSA-3200
              Question How do I remotely manage the DSA-3200 from any external IP Address?
              Answer To remotely manage the device from any external IP Address set the Remote Manage IP to 0.0.0.0/0.0.0.0.
              Model DSA-3200
              Question What is the wireless output power of the DSA-3200?
              Answer The wireless output power of the DSA-3200 is 34dBm (ą 2dBm).
              Model DSA-3200
              Question How do I add one Local User that can be used for all Public Users.
              Answer Step 1: Log into the DSA-3200.

              Step 2: Click on the Advanced tab and then click on Authentication Policies on the lefthand side. Next to Policy Status select Enable.



              Step 3: Click on the link for Local Users List. Click on Add User.



              Step 4: In Item 1 enter Username and Password. From the dropdown menu under Group, select Local.



              Step 5: Click on Apply to save your settings.
              Model DSB-500 / DSB-500/Rev/A-1
              Question Will my DSB-500 work in Windows 95?
              Answer The DSB-500 will work only with Windows 95 OSR2 with USB support. Most versions of Windows 95 do not support USB. If you have Windows 95 version B, download and install the patch from Microsoft to add USB support.

              Download patch here.

              The DSB-500 is USB 1.1 Compliant.
              Model DSB-560
              Question Is the DSB-560 compatible with Mac computers?
              Answer The DSB-560 is not supported for the Macintosh operating system.

              Model DSB-650TX
              Question Can I use the DSB-650TX to connect to my Playstation 2?
              Answer Yes, the DSB-650TX can be used to connect to Playstation 2. The PS2 games that are network ready have the drivers and support for the DSB-650TX built into them. No extra software is required to use the DSB-650TX in PS2. The card will show as the D-Link DSB-650TX. You will configure the DSB-650TX the same as the PS2 Ethernet card.

              Note: This adapter will not work with SOCOM 2. SOCOM 2 will only work with the Sony network adapter.
              Model DSB-650TX
              Question How do I install the DSB-650TX?
              Answer The installation for the DSB-650TX is the same in Windows 98, ME, 2000, and XP.

              Step 1 Place the D-Link CD into the CD-rom when the autorun screen appears close the window. You can also download the drivers from D-Linkīs support site.

              DSB-650TX drivers

              Step 2 Connect the USB side of the DSB-650TX to an available USB port on your computer.

              Step 3 When Windows comes up with the found new hardware wizard select the advanced option and click next.

              Step 4 In Windows 98, ME, and 2000 select specify a location and click on the browse button. In Windows XP select include this location in search and click on the next button.

              Step 5 Select the location of your drivers (drivers on the CD or the drivers downloaded from the Internet, then click on the ok button. Click on the next button.

              Step 6 After Windows has found a suitable driver click on the finish button, reboot the PC when prompted.

              Step 7 The DSB-650TX is now installed and ready to use.
              Model DSB-C100Clear
              Question How do I launch the AMCAP utility in Windows 2000 or Windows XP?
              Answer Step 1 Click on the Start button.

              Step 2 Click on Run.

              Step 3 Type in AMCAP.

              Step 4 Click OK.
              Model DSB-C100Clear
              Question Why won’t my DSB-C100 camera work in Mac OS X?
              Answer The DSB-C100 will only work in Mac OS 8.X thru 9.1, providing you have the proper USB support for your system. The drivers on the shipping CD, along with the drivers from our support site, include support for these operating systems. There are no plans to release a driver for OS X since this product has reached its EOL (End of Life) and is no longer being developed.
              Model DSB-C100Clear
              Question On my Mac, which extension files do I remove to uninstall the DSB-C100?
              Answer You can do this by going into the Extensions Folder, finding all files related to USB Camera and then dragging them into the trash can.

              Files to be removed:
              • USBCamera
              • USBCamerap
              If you need further assistance, please contact Apple for support.

              Model DSB-C100Clear / DSB-C100White / DSB-C300Clear / DSB-C300White
              Question Why doesnīt the software supplied with my D-Link camera work with Mac?
              Answer The bundle software that is shipped with our DSB-C100/C300 is only supported on Windows platforms. Our product is supported under Macintosh 8.6 and above, but you will have to download software from the internet or purchase it at your local computer store. You can go to the Website below and find a lot of different software programs to work with both Macintosh systems and our device. Some programs you can use are Quick Editor, QuickTimePro, ISPQ , and Photoshop to name a few.

              Model DSB-C100Clear / DSB-C100White / DSB-C300white / DSB-C300clear
              Question Why am I not able to connect to the Conex server?
              Answer The Conex server is no longer online. Contact Smith Micro for further information.
              Model DSB-C110
              Question How do I install the drivers for the DSB-C110 in Windows XP?
              Answer Step 1 Download the drivers for the DSB-C110 from http://support.dlink.com/products/view.asp?productid=DSB-C110

              Step 2 Open the file you downloaded in Step 1 and extract the drivers.







              Step 3 Plug the DSB-C110 into an available USB Port on your PC.

              Step 4 Select Install from a list of specific location (Advanced) in the Found New Hardware Wizard window and then click Next.

              Note: If Windows does not prompt you with Found New Hardware Wizard, please skip to Step 10.



              Step 5 Unselect Search removable media (floppy, CD-ROM...) and select Include this location in the search.



              Step 6 Click Browse and navigate to the folder where you extracted the files in Step 1, click OK, and then click Next.





              Step 7 Please wait while Windows searches for drivers.



              Step 8 Click Continue Anyway.



              Step 9 Please wait while Windows copies the drivers.





              Step 10 Setup is complete. If Windows did not prompt you with the New Hardware Installation Wizard, right-click My Computer and select Properties.



              Step 11 Click on the Hardware tab and then click Device Manager.





              Step 12 Under Device Manager click Imaging deviecs , right-click USB Devices , and then select Update Driver.





              Step 13 After selecting Update Driver, please start at step 4 again.
              Model DSB-C110 / DSB-C310
              Question How do I install ArcSoftīs VideoImpression for the DSB-C110 and DSB-C310?
              Answer Step 1 Insert the included CD into the CD-ROM Drive. The CD should automatically launch. If it does, skip to Step 3.

              Step 2 If the CD does not automatically launch, double click on My Computer, then double click on the CD-ROM icon. If you see a collection of folders and files at this point, look for Autorun and double click on it.

              Step 3 Click on Install D-Link CIF Webcam. If you have the DSB-C310 camera, click Install D-Link VGA Webcam.

              Step 4 Click on Install ArcSoft VideoImpression.



              Step 5 Click Next to start installation.



              Step 6 Click Yes to continue.



              Step 7 Choose destination folder and click Next.



              Step 8 Select a program folder and click Next.



              Step 9 Click Finish. Installation is now complete.



              Step 10 Launch VideoImpression.

              Step 11 Click on New.



              Step 12 Click on Capture Video.



              You will now get your camera image on the screen.

              For further support and information on this software, please visit the ArcSoft Video Impression website.
              Model DSB-C300Clear
              Question How do I install the DSB-C300 Clear case?
              Answer If you are having trouble installing the DSB-C300 Clearcase in any operating system, download the latest drivers and extract the files to an easily accessable folder. A good location would be on the desktop.

              Download drivers here
              How do I extract a file?

              For further installation instructions, follow the link for your operating system below:

              Windows XP
              Windows 2000
              Windows ME
              Windows 98/98SE
              Macintosh


              For Windows XP:

              Step 1 Plug your DSB-C300 Clear case into the computer. Windows should detect it and start the New Hardware Wizard.

              Step 2 You will be prompted to select an installation method. Choose Install from a list or specific location (Advanced). Click Next.

              Step 3 On the next screen, select the last option, Donīt search. I will choose the driver myself. Click Next.

              Step 4 Select the D-Link USB Video Camera from the list. Click Next.

              If you do not see D-Link USB Video Camera on the list, or if the list is blank, click on Have Disk and browse to the folder you have unzipped the driver files to.

              Step 5 As the installation begins, you will receive a message regarding Microsoft logo testing and driver compatibility with Windows XP. Click Continue Anyway.

              Step 6 The New Hardware Wizard will now tell you it has finished installing drivers for the D-Link USB Video Camera. Click Finish.


              The green light on your DSB-C300 Clearcase webcam will now be on, and the camera is now ready for use.


              For Windows 2000:

              Step 1 Plug your DSB-C300 Clear case into the computer. Windows should detect it and start the New Hardware Wizard.

              Step 2 You will be prompted to select an installation method. Choose to Search for a suitable driver for my device (recommended). Click Next.

              Step 3 On the Locate Driver Files screen, choose to Specify a location. Click Next and you will be prompted for the driver file location. Click Browse and select the folder you have unzipped the driver files to.

              Step 4 The New Hardware Wizard will now search in the specified location and display the driver it finds. Verify this is the correct driver and click Next.

              Step 5 Once the installation begins, you will be prompted with Digital signature not found. Click Ok.

              Step 6 The New Hardware Wizard will now inform you that installation is complete. Click Finish.


              The green light on your DSB-C300 Clear case webcam will now be on, and the camera is now ready for use.


              For Windows ME/98/98SE:

              Step 1 Plug your DSB-C300 Clear case into the computer. Windows should detect it and start the New Hardware Wizard. Click Next.

              Step 2 Choose the option to Search for the best driver for your device (recommended). Click Next.

              Step 3 On the next screen, choose the option to Specify a location. Click on Browse and select the folder you have unzipped the driver files to. Click Next.

              Step 4 The New Hardware Wizard will now search in the specified location and display the driver it finds. Verify this is the correct driver and click Next.

              You may be prompted for your Windows CD at this point. Place it in your CD-ROM drive and click Ok.

              Step 5 The New Hardware Wizard will now inform you that installation is complete. Click Finish.


              The green light on your DSB-C300 Clear case webcam will now be on, and the camera is now ready for use.


              For Macintosh:

              Step 1 Double click on the USB Camera installer.

              Step 2 Click Continue on the welcome screen.

              Step 3 After the files are installed, you will be prompted that the installation was successful. Click Quit.


              Note: You will need to have USB support installed and enabled for the camera to function properly. If the green light on the DSB-C300 Clearcase does not come on after installation, you may not have USB support installed on your computer. You can download the patch directly from Apple.

              Download the USB support patch from Apple
              Model DSB-C310 / DSB-C110
              Question How do I install ArcSoftīs PhotoImpression for the DSB-C110 and DSB-C310?
              Answer Step 1 Insert the included CD into the CD-ROM Drive. The CD should automatically launch. If it does, skip to Step 3.

              Step 2 If the CD does not automatically launch, double-click on My Computer and then double-click on the CD-ROM icon. If you see a collection of folders and files at this point, look for Autorun and double-click on it.

              Step 3 Click on Install D-Link CIF Webcam.



              Step 4 Click on Install ArcSoft PhotoImpression.



              Step 5 Click Next to continue.



              Step 6 Click Yes to continue.



              Step 7 Click Browse to choose the destination folder or Next to install in the default folder.



              Step 8 Check the components you would like to install. Click Next to continue.



              Step 9 Click Next to continue.



              Step 10 Click Finish. Installation is complete.


              Launch PhotoImpression.

              Click on Camera/Scanner.



              Click on the Aquire button. You will now get your camera image on the screen.




              For screenshots, manual, free content, and further support on this software, please visit the ArcSoft Photo Impression website.
              Model DSB-C310_revB
              Question How do I take a snapshot with my DSB-C310 in Windows XP?
              Answer The following steps are for Windows XP:

              Step 1 Press the button on top of the DSB-C310.

              Step 2 From the Amcap window select Options.



              Step 3 Choose Preview from the drop-down menu.

              Step 4 Point the DSB-C310 at the subject and press the button on top of the camera to take the picture.

              Step 5 From the Still Image Capture window, select File > Save.

              Step 6 Change the file name to x.bmp where x is a name of your choice.

              Step 7 Under Directories, select the folder you wish to send the file too.



              Step 8 Click on the OK button.

              Note: If you wish to capture a new frame, select Capture New Frame from the Still Image Capture window or you can press the button on top of the camera. Follow steps 4-8 to save the file.
              Model DSB-H4 / DSB-H7
              Question I cannot find the drivers for the DSB-H4 or DSB-H7 on you web site. How can I get them?
              Answer Make sure you do not plug any USB devices in the hub during hub installation. In most cases, Windows is asking for drivers for devices plugged into the hub, not the hub itself.

              The driver for this USB hub and all other D-Link USB hubs is part of the installed driver set for the USB controller on your computer. This means that the drivers are supplied (built-in) by the operating system. If you have been using USB devices on your computer the drivers are already installed. However, it is possible that your OS may request drivers when installing the hub. In that case you must point the installation wizard to the Windows CD. Since these drivers are supplied by the operating system, D-Link is not allowed to distribute these files. If you continue to have problems installing drivers for your USB controller, please contact Microsoft for assistance.

              It is basically the same story with Macintosh. You can also get the USB drivers or a patch as the case may be from the Apple web site.
              Model DSB-H4 REV D1
              Question Why wonīt my computer start up with the DSB-H4 attached?
              Answer With the power adapter always on, when the PC is shut down and then restarted, some motherboards will not boot up.

              Reasons: The USB 5V is being fedback, sinking to the motherboard.

              Symptoms: Some motherboards will exhibit power LED staying on or HDD LED staying on. With 5Vs feeding back into the computer from the DSB-H4, the power good signal on the motherboard is always on. In some motherboard designs, a power good signal is delayed , so the motherboards will not boot up until the USB cable or power cable is removed from the DSB-H4. Some motherboards do not have this issue because the USB port has diode protection.

              Fix: To fix the problem you will have to remove the power supply along with the USB cable and restart your computer. Once restarted you can then plug everything back in.
              Model DSB-P36
              Question How can I tell if I have a DSB-P36 with the Lucent chipset or with the Gensys chipset?
              Answer The best way to tell the difference between the DSB-P36 Lucent and Genesys chipset is by looking at the chipset through clear plastic case.

              Chipset Chipset Shape Driver Disk Label
                 Lucent    1/2" x 1/2" Square Chip    DSB-P36 ver 2.10L
                 Gensys    Larger Rectangular Chip    DSB-P36 ver:4.5


              Only the DSB-P36 Lucent chipset is compatible with and supported by Windows 2000 and Windows XP, which both have built-in drivers for this model.
              Model DSB-S25
              Question Iīm having trouble installing the DSB-S25. Iīm getting an error message that says the driver is incorrect. What is the problem?
              Answer The chipset on the S25 has been released with two different chipsets, one by Intel and one from Phillips. The chipsets can be identified by looking at the chipset through the clear case of the device.

              Intel chipset:

              The Intel chipset is about 1" square. Intel is written on this chipset but may be difficult to read because it is printed with brown ink.

              Download the Win 2000 Intel driver now.

              Download the Win 98 Intel driver now.

              Phillips chipset:

              The Phillips chipset is also square, but much smaller, only about 5/8" of an inch. Some of the Phillips chipsets have a round white sticker with the letters "QC" . If the sticker is not present, it is plain to see the word Phillips written on the chipset in white ink.

              Download the Phillips Win 2000 driver now.

              Download the Phillips Win 98 driver now.
              Model DSB-T100
              Question I have upgraded to Windows XP and now my DSB-T100 wonīt work?
              Answer Development for this product was discontinued before the release of Windows XP and are no plans for XP support. Unfortunately the current drivers do not include support for Windows XP. The system requirements found on the packaging, online at www.dlink.com and support.dlink.com outline the operating systems that are supported.
              Model DSB-T100
              Question What are some of the features of the DSB-T100?
              Answer Features of the DSB-T100.

              1. The resolution for the DSB-T100 is 352x288 and up to 30fps.

              2. This device will work under the NTSC and PAL standards.

              3. When recording from a device to the computer, the DSB-T100 will capture and save the file in .AVI format. Using other software will allow you to change this. By default it is .AVI format.

              4. With the NSTC standard 83 channels are available for tuning.

            • More Info
            • Product Specifications
              • Model DSB-T100
              Question What are the general specifications for the DSB-T100?
              Answer General Specifications

            • Microsoft Windows 98 / Windows 98 Second Edition
            • Windows Millennium Edition (Me) or Windows 2000
            • 300MHz Processor and Above
            • 48MB RAM
            • 500MB Hard Drive Space
            • CD-ROM Drive
            • 16-bit SoundBlaster Compatible Sound Card
            • Video Adapter that supports 24 Bit (16.7 Million Colors) or greater color
            • USB Port

              Note: The DSB-T100 is not compatible with Macintosh or Windows XP.
              • Model DSB-T100
              Question What are some general troubleshooting tips I can try for my DSB-T100?
              Answer Troubleshooting Tips

              The video is fine but there is no sound.
              • Make sure that the Black RCA connector is connected from the audio stereo out on the DSB-T100 to the Line In on your sound card. Also in the settings window select the device process tab. Check and see if you sound card is selected. Check your cable connection.
              I have sound but no video.
              • Make sure you have made the proper selections on the remote control pad. (i.e.) If you were using a VCR with RCA cables then you would choose the AV button from the remote control panel. Check your cable connection.
              My video is choppy.
              • Check your video card. Reinstall drivers if necessary. Make sure your computer meets the specifications listed above. Anything less may cause problems.
              My VCR is from Europe, is it compatible with the DSB-T100?
              • The DSB-T100 operates under the NTSC standard for the US. But it does support both PAL which covers Europe and the UK, SECAM covers France
              I cannot view my video from my Camcorder.
              • Again make sure that you are choosing the correct standard (i.e. NTSC) from the tuner control tab in the settings window. Also if you are using S-Video for a connection, choose SV from the remote control pad when you start to view from this device.
              Why can’t I send Video from my computer to a VCR?
              • The DSB-T100 is a Capture Device as well as a TV Tuner. It will only allow you to capture from a device such as a VCR or Camcorder to the computer. You will not be able to go from computer to device.
              Note: The DSB-T100 is not compatible with Macintosh or Windows XP
              Model DSB-V100
              Question Why is my DSB-V100 not producing a picture in the Amcap Utility?
              Answer First, please check to see that you are using the latest driver package for the device. The install disk should be dated 11-1-2000. If it is dated earlier, please uninstall the earlier driver software and download the file entitled "dsbv100_driver_102901.zip" by clicking on this link:

              DSB-V100 Driver

              This file package works with Windows 98 First and Second Editions, Windows Me and Windows 2000.

              Note: If you are running Windows 98 First Edition and still experiencing problems with your installation, please read Microsoft Knowledge Base article #Q192112.

            • Amcap Troubleshooting
              • Model DSB-V100
              Question Is there a specs sheet for the DSB-V100?
              Answer DSB-V100 USB Video Grabber

              The magic box is a powerful interface between desktop PC / Notebook PC and Analog Camera / Camcorder / VCR. To have this video converter with Analog Camera / Camcorder, the user can do Videoconference, Video mail, Surveillance, Periodic long time recorder, etc. Of course, you can also take a picture through the box by pushing the snapshot switch on it.

              Features
              • Analog to digital video converter.
              • Input: RCA S video connector
              • Output: USB connector
              • Up to 30 Frames/s in CIF
              • No additional power adapter needed.
              • Support Windows 98
              • Bundle software: PowerVideo
              Configuration Diagram









              DSB-V100 USB Digital Video Capture Device
              Technical Specifications
                Standards       USB Specification version 1.1
                Connector       One upstream (USB Type A)
                Operating Temperature       0šC ~ 50šC
                Storage Temperature       -10šC ~ 60šC
                Operating humidity       10% ~ 90 % non-condensing
                Power Requirements       Bus Powered - 2.5 W, 0.5 A @ 5 VDC
                Compliances       CE, FCC Class B, VCCI
                Safety       UL
              Model DSB-V100
              Question I followed the FAQ for capturing video with the DSB-V100 but I still canīt see any video on my computer. What could be wrong?
              Answer The Amcap Utility defaults to the PAL_B video standard (used mostly in Europe) and needs to be changed to the NTSC_M video standard (used in the U.S.). Several other settings should also be checked and changed, if necessary, as indicated in the following screen shots.

              Step 1 Select the D-Link USB Video Capture Device from the Devices menu.



              Step 2 Select Preview from the Options Menu.



              Step 3 Again, from the Options menu, select Video Capture Filter and change the video standard to NTSC_M under the Video Decoder tab.



              Step 4 Under the Advanced tab, check to see that the video standard selected is also NTSC_M, as in Step 3. Initially, leave the settings under the Camera Control and Video Proc Amp tabs at their default values.



              Step 5 Click on the Options menu one final time and select Video Crossbar. For your initial settings, choose Composite In or S-Video In as the video input source. The video output selection should be left on the default Decoder Out setting.



              Model DSB-V100
              Question Using the DSB-V100, how do I perform a video capture in Windows Kodak Imaging?
              Answer Step 1 Go to Start > Programs > Accessories and select Imaging to open the Kodak Imaging program.

              Step 2 Go to File > Select Scanner.



              Step 3 Next, choose the D-Link USB Video Capture Device under TWAIN Scanners.



              Step 3 Then, click on Scan New from the lower button bar.



              Step 4 The capture window will then open showing D-Link USB Video Capture Device in the title bar. Click on the Capture Still Image button or press the button located on the top of the case of the DSB-V100 to start the video capture. Press the ESC key to stop capturing video. Use either of the two capture methods just mentioned to resume.



              Model DSB-V100
              Question Using the DSB-V100, how do I perform a video capture in the Windows Me program, Windows Movie Maker?
              Answer Step 1 Go to Start>Programs>Accessories and select Windows Movie Maker to open the program.

              Step 2 Go to the File menu and choose Record.



              Step 3 Choose the D-Link USB Video Capture Device as the Video Device. If the Video Device shown is not the D-Link USB Video Capture Device, click the Change Device button and choose it from the drop-down menu under Video on the resulting screen. Click OK and video from the DSB-V100 will then appear in the application window.



              Step 4 For further instructions on using Windows Movie Maker, please use the programīs Help menu or contact Microsoft for assistance.

              Model DSB-V100
              Question How do I start a video capture in Amcap?
              Answer Step 1 First, go to the File menu and select Set Capture File. You can then name the file to which you will save captured video.



              Step 2 Next, go to the Capture menu and select Start Capture. Press the ESC key to stop the capture. Select Start Capture again to resume.




            • Amcap Troubleshooting
            • Why canīt I get a picture?
              • Model DSB-V100
              Question I am using the DSB-V100 to capture video. How will I configure my system to include sound along with my captured video?
              Answer Use the sample diagram below as a guide to configure the audio portion of your A/V capture. The source shown is a VCR, but the same setup will apply when using a video camera as the A/V source.

              Model DSB-V100
              Question In the Ulead VideoStudio software, I clicked on the G (Global Commands) button, but it doesnīt show the D-Link USB Video Capture Device (as it did in Amcap) as an available capture device choice. What can I do to change this?

              Answer Click on the G button in the Ulead program and select Change Capture Plug-In. In the resulting window, select the Ulead DirectShow Capture Plug-In and click OK. The D-Link USB Video Capture Device will now be included as an available capture device option. For further questions on using the Ulead Software, or for other Ulead general product support issues, please visit the Ulead web site.

            • Visit ULead
              • Model DSC-350
              Question My camera will not power on.
              Answer Try the following suggestions.
              · Press "Mode/Power" button for 3 seconds to power on the DSC-350.
              · Battery may not be properly installed. Reinsert the batteries.
              · Battery is low or empty. Please replace batteries.
              Model DSC-350
              Question Why doesnīt my DSC-350 digital camera power on after unplugging the USB cable?
              Answer Please wait 10 seconds and then power on again. If this doesn’t help, remove and reinsert the batteries. Make sure you follow the diagram on the battery cover to align the batteries correctly.
              Model DSC-350
              Question My PC is asking me to insert the Windows 98 or Windows 2000 Installation diskette.
              Answer Please insert the Windows 98/Me/2000 installation CD into your CD-ROM or locate the CAB files and press the "OK" button.
              Model DSC-350
              Question Windows doesnīt detect my camera when I plug it into the USB port.
              Answer When you plug in the camera after installing the drivers and software, Windows will detect your camera and begin to install the drivers for the D-Link DSC-350. If you are getting no response from Windows when you plug in the DSC-350, this can be a sign that your USB port is not configured properly, disabled, or has malfunctioned. If your motherboard requires a cable to connect the USB port, make sure that it is plugged in correctly. If you are unsure of the proper configuration, please contact your system or motherboard manufacturer. If your USB Host Controller is not listed in the Device Manager, enable it in your system BIOS. Try using the camera on another system to verify that the camera is working properly. [Additional Note for users of Windows 98SE] If you are using Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition with the D-Link DSC-350 camera, the camera may not work properly if the following hardware components are installed on the computer: An AMD processor (running at 350 MHz or faster) A VIA Technologies USB controller This is caused by a timing-specific problem in the Universal Host Controller driver (Uhcd.sys), which may prevent USB devices from enumerating under specific timing conditions. To fix the problem, you will need to download a patch file available from Microsoft. More information and the available patch can be found on Microsoftīs web page at:
              http://support.microsoft.com/support/kb/articles/Q240/0/75.asp
              Model DSC-350
              Question My battery LED is blinking and the power cuts off after 10 seconds.
              Answer The battery power is too low to run the DSC-350. Please replace with new batteries.
              Model DSC-350
              Question Why is FULL shown on the LCD screen on my DSC-350 digital Camera?
              Answer The memory is full on the DSC-350. Please transfer your photos to your PC and delete them from your DSC-350 to allow more pictures to be taken.
              Model DSC-350
              Question My video is choppy and the Frame Rate is low.
              Answer Try the following.
              · Make sure there is enough light.
              · Make sure your computer meets system requirements.
              · Make sure your camera is plugged straight into the root USB port on your computer. Do not use a USB hub.
              · Disconnect any other USB devices from your computer. Other USB devices use up necessary bandwidth that is crucial to receiving top performance from your DSC-350. This is the nature of USB and your Camera is not defective.
              Model DSC-350
              Question When I use Kodak’s Imaging for Windows that installs with Microsoft Windows, the color is wrong. How do I fix this?
              Answer Imaging for Windows has two transfer settings for downloading pictures from Digital Cameras and Scanners. The default setting is set to Best Performance. In order to get the correct color in your photo, please follow the following steps:

                1. Open Imaging for Windows by clicking on Start > Programs > Accessories > Imaging.
                2. The Imaging toolbar appears. Click on Tools > select Scan Options > Advanced.
                3. Change Compression to Smallest File Size.
                4. Click Advanced and change transfer mode to Least Memory. Click OK, and then click OK again.
                5. Click on File > Scan New, and use the TWAIN software as usual.
                6. Your photos will now have the correct colors.
              Model DSC-350
              Question Why should I run the installation CD before connecting the DSC-350 to my computer?
              Answer Running the installation CD before connecting the DSC-350 camera installs the TWAIN software and drivers at the same time. If you plug in the camera first, your system will detect the camera as an unknown device because the driver is not installed yet.
              Model DSC-350
              Question What should I do if I connected the DSC-350 before I ran the installation CD?
              Answer First, make sure you have run the installation CD for the DSC-350. Go to control panel, system, device manager, and check if you have an "Unknown Device". If you have an unknown device, highlight the unknown device and click the remove button, then click on the refresh button. Your System should now detect the D-Link DSC-350 camera and install the drivers for Windows. Restart the computer and try using the camera again.
              Model DSC-350
              Question How do I remove the DSC-350 drivers from Windows 98 if I am using driver version 7-20-2000:
              Answer 1. Disconnect the DSC-350, and shut down Windows.
              2. Wait a few seconds and turn the computer back on.
              3. When booting in Windows 98, press and hold the Ctrl key or press F8 when the "Starting Windows" to initiate the boot menu.
              4. Select Boot into Safe Mode.
              5. Click OK if it tells you that you are running in Safe Mode.
              6. When in Windows, go to Start, Control Panel, System, Click on Device Manager.
              7. Remove the following items from the Sound, Video and Game controllers: D-Link, WDM Video Capture.
              8. Remove the following items from the Universal Serial Bus controllers: D-Link Dual Mode Camera, D-Link SDM Still Image Capture.
              9. Click OK and restart the computer.
              10. The Drivers are now deleted. You can shut your computer down and begin the installation process from the beginning.
              Model DSC-350
              Question How do I remove the DSC-350 drivers from Windows 98 if I am using driver version 10-10-2000?
              Answer 1. Disconnect the DSC-350 from your computer.
              2. Open the Control Panel by clicking on Start, Settings, then Control Panel.
              3. Double-click on Add/Remove Programs.
              4. Select the DSC-350 from the list and click Remove.
              5. Follow the on-screen instructions to remove the DSC-350 TWAIN software and drivers.
              6. Close the Add-Remove Software window and Control Panel windows.
              Model DSC-350
              Question Why wonīt the Video and WebCam mode work on my DSC-350 camera?
              Answer This will happen if you have an improper installation of Windows or the installation procedure for the DSC-350 was not followed. Follow these steps to determine the problem:
                1. Click Start, Settings, Control Panel, System, Device Manager.
                2. Check to see if any devices have a Yellow Exclamation Point next to it.
                3. If a device does have a Yellow Explanation Point, select it and click Properties.
                4. Look under Device Status, if there is a NTKERN.VXD error, please see question #2 to troubleshoot this problem.
                5. If there is a different error, please remove the device, and install it again.
              Model DSC-350
              Question I installed all of the key system files and my camera still will not work or the NTKERN.VXD file is corrupted. How can I fix this?
              Answer Your ntkern.vxd file may be corrupted or missing. To install or restore this file, please follow these steps:
                1. Go to Start, Programs, Accessories, System Tools, and click System Information.
                2. Click on Tools, and then System File Checker.
                3. Select Extract One File From Installation Disk.
                4. Type ntkern.vxd in the box and click Start.
                5. Click the down arrow and select D:\WIN98 from the drop down list or browse for the installation files and click OK.
                6. Click OK 64576. Click OK when asked to back up the current file.
                7. Click Yes to create the backup folder.
                8. Click OK; click Close, and Exit Microsoft System Information.
                9. Restart Windows. Note: You many also follow these steps to restore any of the missing files.
              Model DSC-350
              Question I have followed the previous instructions to fix the NTKERN.VXD problem, but nothing helps.
              Answer Try the following.
                1. Update your system BIOS.
                2. Update USB drivers for your motherboard and USB to PCI adapter. Especially if using an AMD processor and/or using a VIA USB chipset. · Contact the manufacture of your computer or USB controller, or contact Microsoft Technical Support.
                3. Get all updated drivers from Microsoft for your version of Windows.
              Model DSC-350
              Question How do I install the DSC-350 in Windows XP?
              Answer Note: Do not plug the camera in your computer until step 8.

              Step 1 Download XP drivers from the DSC-350 page on our support site. Un-zip the files into a folder of your choice.

              Step 2 Double-click on the file named Setup.exe



              Step 3 Click Continue.



              Step 4 Click Start.



              Step 5 Click Continue Anyway.



              Step 6 Click No to All.



              Step 7 Click OK.



              Step 8 Plug the DSC-350 into an available USB port on your computer. The next screen will launch shortly.

              Step 9 Choose Install the software automatically (Recommended). Click Next.



              Step 10 Click Continue Anyway.



              Step 11 Click Finish.



              The DSC-350 installation for Windows XP is now complete. There should be two entries in device manager for the camera.

              D-Link, WDM Video Capture under Sound, video and game controllers and D-Link, WDM Still Image Capture under Universal Serial Bus controllers.

              Model DSC-350 / DCF-350F
              Question Why do my pictures turn out blurry when I download them to my computer?
              Answer Here are some reasons why your pictures may be turning out blurry:
              • You are moving to much when taking pictures with the camera. Try keeping the camera steady at all times.
              • The lens may have come loose on the inside of the camera. If this is the case, return the camera to point of purchase. li>Make sure there is sufficient lighting.
              • Wipe the lens gently with a soft, lint-free cloth or an untreated lens-cleaning tissue.
              • Making the wrong selection for your enviroment can cause the pictures to turn out blurry.

                Note: On the side of the camera there is a switch from which you can choose either Standard or Macro modes. Standard mode is used for most shooting enviroments. Macro mode should only be used when you are taking a close up.

                If you are having trouble locating the switch on the DSC-350F camera, please refer to page 5 of your userīs manual.
              Model DSC-350 / DSC-350F
              Question The Setup program does not start automatically when I insert the D-Link DSC-350 Installation CD.
              Answer Please double click My Computer, double click your CD-ROM Drive, and double click "Setup". The installation program will be executed.
              Model DSC-350F
              Question How do I download the pictures from my DSC-350F camera to my computer?
              Answer After you have taken pictures with the DSC-350F camera, open the ArcSoft’s Photo Impression 2000 program and follow the steps below.

              Step 1 Open Photo Impression 2000 by clicking on the desktop Icon.

              Step 2 Click the Get Photo button.

              Step 3 Click the Camera/Scanner button.

              Step 4 Select D-Link DSC-350F from the Select Source list.

              Step 5 Choose the destination album for your pictures from the Select Album list.

              Step 6 Click the Acquire button. The Camera Twain software window will open and the pictures you have taken will automatically start downloading in the Twain window.

              Step 7 Choose the individual pictures that you want to save or click Select All , then click the Transfer button.

              Step 8 The pictures will now be transferred from your camera to the folder/ album that you have selected.

              Note: D-Link offers minimum support on any third party software programs shipped with our products. If you are having trouble with one of the programs, please contact your specific vendor for further support.
              Model DSC-350F
              Question Can the DSC-350F camera work on my Windows 95, NT 4.0, or Macintosh computer?
              Answer Unfortunately no. The DSC-350F can only be installed on a computer that has USB support and running Windows 98 or higher.

              We do not offer drivers for Windows 95 or Macintosh. Windows NT does not support USB at all.
              Model DSC-350F
              Question I am receiving a Camera not Found error and my camera is plugged into my computer. How do I correct this error?
              Answer If you are getting this error check all of the following:

              • Check to see if the USB cable is connected to both the camera and USB port.
              • Look in device manager to see if you have USB support. There should be an entry for Universal Serial Bus Controllers at the bottom of the list.
              • Disconnect other USB devices that may be using a Twain driver such as a scanner or another digital camera.
              • Try a different USB port. If you are using a USB hub with other devices, then connect the camera directly to the computer to test connection. Possibly the hub has too many devices plugged in.
              • Reinstall the drivers for the camera, restart your computer, and then plug in the camera.
              Model DSC-350F
              Question What type of software is shipped with the DSC-350F camera?
              Answer The DSC-350F camera is shipped with programs from ArcSoft. These software programs supplied with D-Link products are Windows-based and cannot be installed on a Macintosh computer. The Photo Impression and Video Impression software will allow you to edit photographs as well as video clips.

              Note: D-Link offers minimum support on third party software programs shipped with our products. If you are having trouble with one of the programs, please contact your specific vendor for further support.

            • PhotoImpression
            • Video Impression
              • Model DSC-350F
              Question How do I record video with my DSC-350F camera?
              Answer The DSC-350F camera does not have the capability to record video directly to the camera. You can record from the camera to your computer. Create an AVI file by following the steps below:

              Step 1 Select Continuous Capture Mode from the LCD screen on your DSC-350F camera.

              Step 2 Connect your camera to the PC with the USB cable.

              Step 3 Go to Start> Programs> DSC-350F and then choose AVI Maker.

              Step 4 AVI Maker will automatically read the pictures from the camera and a Compression window will pop up.

              Step 5 At this window you will select the desired Compression Quality and then click the Create button.

              Step 6 You will now be at the Save as Window. Select a name and location for your AVI file and click the Save button.

              Step 7 After you have saved the file, you can view it through Windows Media Player (or the default program for your AVI video files).

              Note: D-Link offers minimum support on any third party software programs shipped with our products. If you are having trouble with one of the programs, please contact your specific vendor for further support.
              Model DSC-350F
              Question I have lost my Installation CD. How do re-install the drivers for my DSC-350F camera?
              Answer You will have to download the latest drivers. Once there make sure you are selecting the correct operating system for your DSC-350F camera. Selecting the wrong driver can create problems.

              Download drivers here

              Unzip the files to a folder on your desktop and follow the steps below.

              How do I unzip files?

              Step 1 From the new folder, click on the DSC-350F Icon.

              Step 2 Select your language (English) and then click Ok.

              Step 3 From the DSC-350F window click Next.

              Step 4 The Install Shield window will appear. Click Next.

              Step 5 Select Yes, I would like to restart my computer.

              Step 6 Click Finish.

              Step 7 After your computer has restarted, attach one end of the USB cable to your computer and attach the other end to your camera.

              Step 8 Windows should find the camera and finish the installation of drivers.

              Step 9 After installation is completed look in device manager for the following entries.
              • Fashion Cam Dual-Mode DSC (Controller)
              • Fashion Cam 21 Dual-Mode DSC (Video Camera)
              • Fashion Cam 21 Dual-Mode DSC (Still Camera)
              Step 10 If the above entries are not present, disconnect camera and reinstall the drivers.

              Note: The above steps are too be used on all operating systems when installing drivers for the DSC-350F. Do not connect the camera to the computer before installing drivers.
              Model DSD-150
              Question Iīve made changes to my Security Settings through the Management Interface, why havenīt they taken effect?
              Answer The DSD-150 Securespot device may not have received the latest policy configuration.

              The changes need to be activated after they are made. To activate the settings:

              Step 1: Click on OK after making the change and then choose Apply to save the settings.



              Step 2: Reboot the DSD-150. This will force the device to download the latest security policy.

              The changes should take effect after activating and rebooting the DSD-150.
              Model DSD-150
              Question If I am unable to call technical support does D-Link have chat support for my Securespot?
              Answer Yes we do! Please follow these step-by-step instructions below in order to use chat support for the Securespot (DSD-150) device.

              Step 1: Open your web browser and type http://securespot.bsecure.com/ into the address bar. Click on Support.

              Step 2: Click on Chat Now!



              Step 3: Enter your first and last name along with your e-mail address.



              Step 4: Click on Run to install the software necessary for chat support.



              Step 5: You will be placed in a queue for the next available agent.



              Step 6: Once the next available agent is ready you will be placed in a live chat session with a support agent.

              Model DSD-150
              Question After installing the DSD-150 my Xbox no longers connects to the internet. How can I fix this?
              Answer If your SecureSpot Client Security settings are set to either Medium or High, the connectivity of other devices in your network (such as an Xbox with Live! service) may be affected. Changing the Client Security level to Low will allow these devices to function normally.
              Model DSD-150
              Question What is a thin client?
              Answer The thin client is software that loads additional protection components onto your individual computer(s). These components include the following:

            • IDS: Provides intrusion notification for internet applications.
            • Identity Protection: Protects your sensitive and personal data.
            • Popup Blocker: Provides BHO (browser helper object) blocking, Allow lists, and an Override switch.
            • Anti-Virus and Anti-Spyware: Virus spyware control center, virus definition updates, scheduled and one-time virus scans.
            • Profiles Customization: Allows users to define user-level policies behind the Securespot DSD-150.
              • Model DSD-150
              Question I just purchased my Securespot device, how long is my subscription?
              Answer When you purchase the D-Link Securespot DSD-150 you receive a 1 year subscription for free for up to 4 machinces. To purchase addition services or to renew your subscrition please click here.
              Model DSD-150
              Question What is Client Security?
              Answer Client Security provides an option to allow (or disallow) network computers to attach to the internet without needing the thin client software. The Securespot DSD-150 offers 3 levels of Client Security.

            • Low Security: Allow computers to attach to the network without requiring a thin client install for AV and Spyware. This works well in public areas and hotspots where many users come and go. If Parental Controls are enabled, it is possible to bypass protection by removing the securespot™ device or attaching to another network.

            • Medium Security: (default) Automatically requires all computers to have a thin client install for AV and Spyware, but does allow computers to roam outside the local network. If Parental Controls are enabled, it is possible to bypass protection by removing the securespot™ device or attaching to another network.

            • High Security: Automatically prompt new computers with a registration page that requires a thin client install for AntiVirus and Spyware protection. If Parental Controls are enabled, this ensures that children can NOT circumvent the filtering protection by removing the device from the network. If computers roam outside the network, they require the admin password to connect to the Internet.
              • Model DSD-150
              Question Can I use a computer running Windows 98 to configure my Securespot DSD-150?
              Answer Unfortunately, no, the Securespot DSD-150īs configuration only supports the following operating systems at this time:
              • Windows 2000 SP4
              • Windows XP SP2
              • Mac OS X (v10.3/10.4)
              The Securespot DSD-150 also requires either Internet Explorer 6 or Mozilla Firefox for configuration.
              Model DSD-150
              Question How do I determine the correct firmware version to download for my DSD-150?
              Answer When selecting the firmware version you will need to know what version is currently on the DSD-150 in order to download and upgrade to version 1.02.


              Step 1 Open a Web Browser to the following URL of http://192.168.229.61, click the ENTER key.


              Step 2 Type “admin” and leave the password blank (this is the default unless you have changed it); then click the ENTER key


              Step 3 You will be on the "INFO" Screen, take note of the “Firmware Version” that is being displayed; it will be used to determin the following the posted firmware version that needs to be selected from the support site to complete the upgrade procedure.


              NOTE: For further instruction on the actual upgrade procedure click here.
              Model DSD-150
              Question How do I reset my SecureSpot device back to its factory settings?
              Answer Step 1: Unplug the SecureSpotīs power supply.

              Step 2: Hold in the reset button on the back of the SecureSpot device while powering it back on.

              Step 3: Continue to hold the reset button in for 5 to 10 seconds to be sure that the reset takes effect.
              Model DSD-150
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DSD-150?
              Answer Step 1: Open a web browser to your SecureSpot Control Center login page (http://securespot.bsecure.com/Login.aspx).

              Step 2: Click on the Support link.

              Step 3: Click on the Firmware link.

              Step 4: Click on the Save button to download the firmware update file to your computer. When the Save As dialog box appears, download the file to a location where you can easily access it later (e.g., your desktop). If a Download Complete dialog appears, close it.

              Step 5: Open your web browser and type http://192.168.229.61 into the address bar (This site can only be reached from the LAN side of the DSD-150). The username is Admin and the password is blank.



              Step 6: Once you have logged into the DSD-150 click on the Admin tab and then click on the Browse button under Firmware Upgrade. Browse to the firmware file you have downloaded to your desktop and then click on Ok. Click on Upload to begin the firmware upgrade process.



              Step 7: Once the upgrade is complete a window will appear confirming the firmware uploaded properly.



              Step 8: Verify the firmware upgrade by clicking on the Info tab.



              Model DSD-150
              Question For additional FAQs concerning the DSD-150, click here.
              Answer For any additional questions regarding the configuration of the DSD-150, you may search through Securespotīs website by clicking the following link:

              Securespotīs DSD-150 knowledge base
              Model DSD-150
              Question How do I login to my Securespot Web Control Center?
              Answer Open your web browser and type http://securespot.bsecure.com/Login.aspx into the address bar to access the Securespot Web Control Center.
              Model DSD-150
              Question My VPN is having conflicts with the Securespot device. What should I do?
              Answer In some instances, your VPN client may experience periodic conflicts with the SecureSpot Internet Protection Services if they are set to either Medium or High Security. We recommend setting the Client Security level to Low while using VPN to alleviate these conflicts.
              Model DSD-150
              Question I am receiving a message that the services are not running, on my Windows Vista PC. What should I do?
              Answer Note: Windows Vista is not yet fully supported; however, please use the following steps to enable the Bsafe Filter to run:


              Click here if you are running Windows Vista Ultimate edition.

              Click here if you are running Windows Vista Home edition.




              Windows Vista Ultimate edition

              Step 1 Browse to C:\Windows\System32\InetCntrl\

              Step 2 Right-click on InetCntrl.exe.

              Step 3 Choose Properties on the menu.

              Step 4 Select the Compatibility tab.

              Step 5 In the Privilege Level section, select the check box marked Run this program as an administrator.

              Step 6 Click Apply and OK.

              Step 7 Click the Vista Start menu button (Windows Logo at the bottom-left of your desktop).

              Step 8 In the window marked Start Search (directly above the Start Menu button), type run and press ENTER.

              Step 9 The Run dialogue box appears. Type secpol.msc and press ENTER. This opens the Local Security Policy admin window.

              Note: If Vista is running in classic mode, use the Start Menu and select Run; then type secpol.msc and press ENTER.

              Step 10 In the navigation pane on the left, expand the Local Policies folder and select the Security Options folder.

              Step 11 In the main panel, scroll down and double-click User Account Control: Run all administrators in Admin Approval Mode.

              Step 12 Select the Disabled radio button. Step 13 Click Apply and OK. Step 14 Reboot the computer.





              Windows Vista Home edition

              Step 1 Browse to C:\Windows\System32\InetCntrl\

              Step 2 Right-click on InetCntrl.exe.

              Step 3 Choose Properties on the menu.

              Step 4 Select the Compatibility tab.

              Step 5 In the Privilege Level section, select the check box marked Run this program as an administrator.

              Step 6 Click Apply and OK.

              Step 7 Click the Vista Start menu button (Windows Logo at the bottom-left of your desktop).

              Step 8 Select Control Panel.

              Step 9 Click the User Account and Family Safety link.

              Step 10 Select User Accounts.

              Step 11 Select Turn User Account Control on or off.

              Step 12 If you see the Windows needs your permission to continue window, click Continue.

              Step 13 Clear the Use User Account Control (UAC) to help protect your computer check box.

              Step 14 Click OK and restart your computer.

              Note: If you receive a Windows has blocked some startup programs message when you restart your computer, click on the system tray icon below this window and select Run blocked program Bsecure Internet Protection Services. Also, it is recommended that you disable your Windows Firewall, as it may prevent the Bsafe Filter from running properly. The Bsafe Filter package has its own firewall; therefore it is not necessary to run another simultaneously.
              Model DSD-150
              Question Why do I receive an Unable to load the engine error when I run a virus scan on the Documents and Settings directory, after upgrading to Windows Vista?
              Answer All files and folders that were previously located in the Documents and Settings directory have been migrated to the new Users directory under Windows Vista. By selecting both the Users AND Documents and Settings folders, the A-V scan will run normally.
              Model DSD-150
              Question I received the following error "Microsoft Visual C++ Runtime Library" while installing in Vista. What should I do?
              Answer It is recommended that the Windows Firewall be disabled before installing the SecureSpot Thin Client, or the Retail Filter.

              With all native Vista (Home/Business) security settings enabled, the following error *may* display during download/install:



              Click OK.

              The following dialog appears:



              Click Reinstall using recommended settings. Select Run, then Continue (if UAC is active)
              The installer will finish normally & force reboot.

              If you use the This program installed correctly option, you must start InetCntrl.exe manually after rebooting.

              After installation, disable Vista’s UAC (User Account Control) to allow A-V updates.
              Model DSD-150 / VTA-VR
              Question How do I make the VTA-VR Vonage Telephone Adapter function correctly behind the DSD-150 SecureSport device?
              Answer Step 1: Login to your DSD-150īs web control center, located at http://securespot.bsecure.com/Login.aspx.

              Step 2: Click on the Home tab and then click on Firewall on the lefthand side.



              Step 3: Click on Security Settings.



              Step 4: Select Port Templates.



              Step 5: Check the box for Vonage under the VoIP category.



              Step 6: Click on Ok and then click on Apply Settings to save your changes.

              Model DSH-16
              Question What type of cable do I use from my computer to the DSH-16 hub?
              Answer You use a straight through cable from your computer to the DSH-16.
              Model DSH-5
              Question What does the switch on the back of the DSH-5 rev. A2 do?
              Answer There have been questions as to the function of the switch next to the uplink port of the hub. This switch in "EXP" mode will allow the uplink port to function in full duplex if it is cable-connected to another DSH-5 or to another switch. The cable should not exceed 5 meters in length between the two devices. All the other ports will still be at half duplex (2x-5x). Please remember that if the uplink is connected to another regular hub the connection will only be half duplex even when the switch is set to "EXP".
              Model DSH-5
              Question What kind of power supply does the DSH-5 use?
              Answer There are newer power supplies for the DSH-5. Rev c2 & c3 should be 5volts and 2.4 amps.

              Rev A1 & A2 use 12volts and 1.2amps
              Model DSH-8
              Question This unit was working for a while now all the lights flash and there is no connectivity through the hub, what can I do?
              Answer Please call D-Link Technical Support to obtain information on what to do.

              Click on the Products link on the menu bar on this page and click on the link for the DSH-8 to get the number for technical support on this product.
              Model DSH-8
              Question Are there different versions of the DSH-8 and if so, what are the differences?
              Answer DSH-8 Versions:

              There are a few different models of the DSH-8. On the bottom of each one, there is a silver label with the following information:

              MODEL NO. :
              Serial No.:
              Ver:

              Here are some of the versions of the hub:

              a. MODEL NO. : DSH-8 II
              Serial No.:
              Ver: B2


              Comments: Does not have a fan and uses a power supply (5V, 2.5A), Has one row of ports (eight ports), plus an additional Uplink port. Labeled on the front "DSH-8"

              b. MODEL NO. : DSH-8 II
              Serial No.:
              Ver: A1

              Comments: Has a fan and uses a power supply (5V, 2.5A), Has one row of ports (eight ports), plus an additional Uplink port. Labeled on the front "DSH-8"

              c. MODEL NO. : DSH-8
              Serial No.:
              Ver: A1

              Comments: Has a fan and uses a power cable (no power supply), Has two rows of ports (four ports each), plus an additional Uplink port. Labeled on the front "DSH-8"
              Model DSH-8
              Question Are there different versions of the DSH-8 and if so, what are the differences?
              Answer DSH-8 Versions:

              There are a few different models of the DSH-8. On the bottom of each one, there is a silver label with the following information:

              MODEL NO. :
              Serial No.:
              Ver:

              Only the Model NO. and Ver: are pertinent to identifying the hub version.
              • MODEL NO.: DSH-8 I
              • Ver: B2
              • Comments:
                • Does not have a fan and uses a power supply (5V, 2.5A).
                • Has one row of ports (eight ports), plus an additional Uplink port.
                • Label on the front: "DSH-8"
              • MODEL NO. : DSH-8 II
              • Ver: A1
                  Comments:
                • Has a fan and uses a power supply (5V, 2.5A).
                • Has one row of ports (eight ports), plus an additional Uplink port.
                • Labeled on the front "DSH-8"
              • MODEL NO. : DSH-8
              • Ver: A1
              • Comments:
                • Has a fan and uses a power cable (no power supply).
                • Has two rows of ports (four ports each), plus an additional Uplink port.
                • Labeled on the front "DSH-8"
              Model DSH-8
              Question What power supply does the DSH-8 use?
              Answer The DSH-8 uses a 5V 2.5AMP power supply.
              Model DSH-8
              Question How do I configure my network with the DSH-8 so I can share files and folders on my network?
              Answer These sites will offer you information that will guide you in the setup of a network without the cost of a consultant or tutor.

              Home Networking References:

              http://www.wown.com/
              http://www.homenethelp.com/
              http://www.homepcnetwork.com/
              http://www.duxcw.com/digest/guides/network/index.html
              http://compnetworking.about.com/compute/compnetworking
              http://searchnetworking.techtarget.com/
              Model DSH-8 / DSS-8
              Question What kind of FCC information is there regarding the DSH-8?
              Answer The DSS-8 and DSH-8 can just pass UTP class A, including STP class B.
              Model DSL-100D
              Question How do I perform a clean install of the DSL-100D in Windows 98?
              Answer
              1. We recommend that you use driver version 2.23 and above. Download the drivers and extract them to a temp directory on your hard drive.

                Download the latest driver now.

              2. Delete all references to the DSL-100D from prior installs via:

                1. The uninstall program (depends on what file package was used to install the card).
                2. Device Manager
                3. Network Properties
                4. Remove all relevant .INF and .SYS files from C:\WINDOWS\INF and C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS folders, respectively

              3. Finish removing prior DSL-100D install references by doing the following:

                1. Restart the system and press F8 to go to the Win 98 Startup Menu
                2. Choose "Safe Mode, Command Prompt Only"
                3. Type the following command: SCANREG/RESTORE
                4. A DOS program interface will appear where you can restore one of the five registry backup cab files
                5. Choose a registry cab file to restore with the most recent date that is prior to any DSL-100D install
                6. Restore the chosen file and shut down the system (do not re-boot at this time)

              4. Disconnect power from the PC and remove the DSL-100D

              5. Re-connect power and reboot the system - ensure it comes up cleanly with no errors

              6. After the system comes up cleanly, shut it down and disconnect power from the PC and re-install the DSL-100D

              7. Power up the system

              8. The Hardware Wizard will detect the DSL-100D - when Windows asks for drivers, point to the temp directory to which they were saved

              9. After the DSL-100D installs, reboot the system and configure the card settings per the instructions in the DSL-100D Quick Install Guide
              Model DSL-100D
              Question How do I perform a clean install of the DSL-100D in Windows XP?
              Answer
              1. There is no dedicated WinXP driver at this time, therefore, we recommend that you use the Win2K driver version 2.23 at this time. Download the drivers and extract them to a temp directory on your hard drive

                Download the latest driver now

              2. Delete all references to the DSL-100D from prior installs via:

                1. The uninstall program (depends on what file package was used to install the card)
                2. Device Manager
                3. Network Properties
                4. Remove all relevant .INF and .SYS files from C:\WINDOWS\INF and C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS folders, respectively

              3. Finish removing prior DSL-100D install references by doing the following:

                1. Restart the system and select Start>Programs>Accessories>System Tools>System Restore to bring up the System Restore Utility
                2. In the utility, select Restore my computer to an earlier time and click Next
                3. A calendar will appear showing system restore checkpoint dates in bold numerals
                4. Choose a checkpoint to restore with the most recent date that is prior to any DSL-100D install and click Next
                5. Click OK on the resulting dialog box, then click Next to begin the restore process
                6. Click Finish, say No to a reboot, and shut down the system

              4. Disconnect power from the PC and remove the DSL-100D

              5. Re-connect power and reboot the system - ensure it comes up cleanly with no errors

              6. After the system comes up cleanly, shut it down and disconnect power from the PC and re-install the DSL-100D

              7. Power up the system

              8. The Hardware Wizard will detect the DSL-100D - when Windows asks for drivers, point to the temp directory to which they were saved

              9. After the DSL-100D installs, reboot the system and configure the card settings per the instructions in the DSL-100D Quick Install Guide
              Model DSL-100D / DSL-100CZ
              Question Is DSL-100D compatible with Megabit Gear DSLAM CU/3?
              Answer Yes, the DSL-100D is compatible with Sumitomo Electric Industryīs Megabit Gear DSLAM CU/3 (except the Annex C standard in Japan).
              Model DSL-100D / DSL-100D/CZ
              Question What does the color of the Diagnostic Icon of the DSL-100D represent?
              Answer
              COLOR STATUS
              red/red No connection.
              black/yellow Making connection
              black/black Connection established, line is idle
              black/green Connection established, data being recieved
              green/black Connection established, data being sent
              green/green Data being sent and recieved
              icon PCI Modem is disconnected or there is a problem with the driver
              Model DSL-100D / DSL-100D/CZ
              Question How do I install PPPoA drivers for the DSL-100D?
              Answer Step 1 After physically installing the DSL-100D into an open PCI slot in your computer, start your computer. Windows will detect new hardware and the Hardware Wizard will open.

              Step 2 It will find a PCI Network Controller, click Next.

              Step 3 Select “Search for the best driver for your device (Recommended)” and click Next.

              Step 4 Select “Specify location” click Browse.

              Step 5 Browse through the CD drive that contains the DSL-100D CD.

              Step 6 Select the 2364 driver that suites your operating system.

                 2364w95 = Windows 95.

                 2364w98 = Windows 98.

                 2364nt4 = Windows NT.

                 2364w2k = Windows 2K.

              Step 7 After selecting the correct folder, click OK.

              Step 8 Continue to click Next to install the drivers, accepting the default values.

              Step 9 When a “Service Option” pop-up screen appears, click Advance.

              Step 10 Click on all three Modes (T1.413, G.lite, G.dmt), click Set/OK.

              Step 11 Restart the computer if prompted.

              Step 12 After the computer restarts, go back into the Device Manager and check to see that there are no errors on the D-Link DSL-100D adapter.

              Model DSL-100D / DSL-100D/CZ
              Question How can I uninstall the DSL-100D?
              Answer Step 1 Go to Start>Settings>Control Panel.

              Step 2 Double Click on System.

              Step 3 Click on Device Manager (for Win 2K, go to Hardware tab first).

              Step 4 Expand the Network Adapters by click on the (+) sign.

              Step 5 Right click on D-Link DSL-100D and choose Remove/Uninstall.

              Step 6 Follow the procedures to remove the adapter, restart the computer when prompted.
              Model DSL-100D / DSL-100D/CZ
              Question How do I create a PPPoA connection for my DSL-100D?
              Answer Step 1 Go to Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Dial-Up Networking.

              Step 2 Double Click on “Make New Connection”.

              Step 3 Give it any connection name you like.

              Step 4 Under “Select a device”, choose D-Link DSL-100D and click Next.

              Step 5 Leave the Area Code blank.

              Step 6 For Telephone Number, put in a 0 (zero) and click next.

              Step 7 There will be an icon created in Dial Up Networking with the connection name you used. You can click and drag this icon onto the desktop as a shortcut.

              Step 8 Double Click that icon.

              Step 9 Enter your username and password provided from your ISP for the PPPoA connection.

              Step 10 Make sure the phone number is 0 (zero).

              Step 11 Click "Connect" to log on.
              Model DSL-100D / DSL-100D/CZ
              Question How do I perform a clean install of the DSL-100D in Windows Me?
              Answer
              1. We recommend that you use driver version 2.23 and above. Download the drivers and extract them to a temp directory on your hard drive.

                Download the latest driver now.

              2. Delete all references to the DSL-100D from prior installs via:

                1. The uninstall program (depends on what file package was used to install the card)
                2. Device Manager
                3. Network Properties
                4. Remove all relevant .INF and .SYS files from C:\WINDOWS\INF and C:\WINDOWS\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS folders, respectively

              3. Finish removing prior DSL-100D install references by doing the following:

                1. Restart the system and select Start>Programs>Accessories>System Tools>System Restore to bring up the System Restore Utility
                2. In the utility, select Restore my computer to an earlier time and click Next
                3. A calendar will appear showing system restore checkpoint dates in bold numerals
                4. Choose a checkpoint to restore with the most recent date that is prior to any DSL-100D install and click Next
                5. Click OK on the resulting dialog box, then click Next to begin the restore process
                6. Click Finish, say No to a reboot, and shut down the system

              4. Disconnect power from the PC and remove the DSL-100D

              5. Re-connect power and reboot the system - ensure it comes up cleanly with no errors

              6. After the system comes up cleanly, shut it down and disconnect power from the PC and re-install the DSL-100D

              7. Power up the system

              8. The Hardware Wizard will detect the DSL-100D - when Windows asks for drivers, point to the temp directory to which they were saved

              9. After the DSL-100D installs, reboot the system and configure the card settings per the instructions in the DSL-100D Quick Install Guide
              Model DSL-100D / DSL-100D/CZ
              Question Iīm receiving an NDIS WAN error when installing the DSL-100D in my system. What could be the problem?
              Answer This error typically occurs on Windows 95 systems with older versions of Microsoft DUN (Dial-up Networking) installed. To correct the problem, please install the Microsoft DUN 1.3 and Winsock2 Year 2000 Update.

              Download Microsoft DUN 1.3 now

              After installing the DUN update, download drivers (version 2.23 and above) for the DSL-100D (if applicable). After downloading the drivers, extract them to a temp directory on your hard drive.

              Download the latest driver now

              In order to re-install the DSL-100D properly, please un-install it first. Click Start>Programs>D-Link DSL-100D>Un-Installer. The un-install program will remove all DSL-100D references on your system, then it will ask for a re-boot. Upon re-boot, the DSL-100D will be re-detected. When prompted for drivers, point to the temp directory where the extracted drivers are located. Then, follow the installation screens, as referenced in the DSL-100D Quick Install Guide. Finally, re-boot the system, when prompted, to complete the installation process.
              Model DSL-100D / DSL-100D/CZ
              Question How do I perform a clean install of the DSL-100D in Windows 2000?
              Answer
              1. We recommend that you use driver version 2.23 and above. Download the drivers and extract them to a temp directory on your hard drive.

                Download the latest driver now.

              2. Delete all references to the DSL-100D from prior installs via:

                1. The uninstall program (depends on what file package was used to install the card).
                2. Device Manager
                3. LAN Connection Properties
                4. Remove all relevant .INF and .SYS files from C:\WINNT\INF and C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\DRIVERS folders, respectively

              3. Finish removing prior DSL-100D install references by doing the following:

                1. Restart the system and select Start>Programs>Settings>Control Panel. Double-click on Add/Remove Hardware to bring up the Add/Remove Hardware Wizard
                2. On the Welcome screen, click Next
                3. Select Uninstall/Unplug a Device and click Next
                4. Select Uninstall a Device and click Next
                5. Check Show Hidden Devices and select the reference to the DSL-100D and click Next
                6. Select Yes to Install and click Next
                7. Click Finish to complete the uninstall process
                8. Repeat Steps A-G if more than one reference to the DSL-100D is listed in the wizard
                9. Shut down the system (do not re-boot at this time)

              4. Disconnect power from the PC and remove the DSL-100D

              5. Re-connect power and reboot the system - ensure it comes up cleanly with no errors

              6. After the system comes up cleanly, shut it down and disconnect power from the PC and re-install the DSL-100D

              7. Power up the system

              8. The Hardware Wizard will detect the DSL-100D - when Windows asks for drivers, point to the temp directory to which they were saved

              9. After the DSL-100D installs, reboot the system and configure the card settings per the instructions in the DSL-100D Quick Install Guide
              Model DSL-200
              Question Does the DSL-200 support Full Rate ADSL or G-Lite (Splitterless) ADSL?
              Answer The D-Link DSL-200 is an external ADSL modem designed for high-speed Internet access and/or remote connection to a home or office LAN. Designed with the user in mind, the DSL-200 comes with a built in USB 1.1 compliant interface for easy plug and play connectivity and break neck download speeds. It allows a Windows based PC to connect via G.lite or G.dmt ADSL to a DSL provider.
              Model DSL-2320B / DSL-2540B / DSL-2640B
              Question What can I do if I forgot the password of my DSL series modem?
              Answer If you forgot your password, you must reset your modem.

              Note: This process will change all your settings back to the factory defaults.

              To reset the modem:

              Step 1 Locate the Reset button on the rear panel of the unit.



              Step 2 With the modem powered on, use a paperclip to hold the button down for 10 seconds.

              Step 3 Release the button and the modem will go through its reboot process.

              Step 4 Wait about 30 seconds to access the modem.
              Model DSL-2320B / DSL-2540B / DSL-2640B
              Question Why can’t I access the web-based configuration utility of my DSL series Modem?
              Answer When entering the IP address of the D-Link modem (192.168.1.1 for example), you are not connecting to a website on the Internet or have to be connected to the Internet. The device has the utility built-in to a ROM chip in the device itself.

              Note: Your computer must be on the same IP subnet to connect to the web-based utility.

              Here are a a few steps to try if you are unable to access the web-based configuration utility:

              1. Make sure you have an updated Java-enabled web browser.
              We recommend the following:
              • Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher
              • Netscape 8 or higher
              • Mozilla 1.7.1 (5.0) or higher
              • Opera 8.5 or higher
              • Safari 1. or higher (with Java 1.3.1 or higher)
              • Camino 0.8.4 or higher
              • Firefox 1.5 or higher

              2. Verify physical connectivity by checking for solid link lights on the device. If you do not get a solid link light, try using a different cable or connect to a different port on the device if possible. If the computer is turned off, the link light may not be on.

              3. Disable any internet security software running on the computer. Software firewalls such as Zone Alarm, Black Ice, Sygate, Norton Personal Firewall, and WindowsŪ XP firewall may block access to the configuration pages.

              Note: Check the help files included with your firewall software for more information on disabling or configuring it.

              4. Configure your Internet settings using the following steps:

              Step 1 Go to Start > Settings > Control Panel.

              Step 2 Double-click the Network and Internet Connections Icon.



              Step 3 Click on the Internet Options Icon.



              Step 4 From the Security tab, click the Default Level button to restore the settings to their defaults.



              Step 5 Click the Connection tab and set the dial-up option to Never Dial a Connection.



              Step 6 Click the LAN Settings button. Make sure nothing is checked. Click OK.



              Step 7 Go to the Advanced tab and click the Restore Defaults button to restore these settings to their defaults. Click OK.



              Step 8 Close your web browser (if open) and open it.

              Step 9 Access the web management. Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your D-Link modem in the address bar. This should open the login page for your the web management.

              Step 10 If you still cannot access the configuration, unplug the power to the modem for 10 seconds and plug back in. Wait about 30 seconds and try accessing the configuration. If you have multiple computers, try connecting using a different computer.
              Model DSL-2320B / DSL-2540B / DSL-2640B
              Question How do I log into my DSL series modem?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the modem in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 A login screen will be displayed after you connect to the user interface. Enter your user name and password, and then click OK to display the user interface.

              Note: There are three account types, each requiring a different username and password.
            • The user account provides limited access to certain configurations (username/password: user/user).
            • The admin account can perform all functions (username/password: admin/admin).
            • The support account is for ISP technicians for maintenance purposes (username/password: support/support).

              Note: Passwords can be changed at any time.
              • Model DSL-300
              Question Does the DSL-300 support Full Rate ADSL or G-Lite ADSL?
              Answer The D-Link DSL-300 is an external ADSL modem designed for high-speed Internet access and/or remote connection to a home or office LAN. The DSL-300 comes with 1 RJ-11 port for ADSL connection, one half-duplex RJ-45 port for a 10Mb Ethernet LAN connection and 2Mb Flash memory. The DSL-300 will support a full range of download speeds up to 8 Mbps for G.dmt and 1.5 Mbps for G.lite providing a faster and easier connection.
              Model DSL-300G / DSL-300G+ / DSL-300+ / DSL-614+ / DSL-604+
              Question Where can I find support for the DSL-604+, DSL-300+, DSL-300G, or DWL-2000AP+?
              Answer These products are not supported in the USA. Please contact the D-Link office closest to you.

              D-Link International

              If you have the DI-604 or DWL-2000AP (not +), D-Link USA does support it. Please search for DI-604 or DWL-2000AP.

              NOTE: The DSL-300G will soon be implemented in the USA. Please contact your ISP for support.

              DSL-604+ users: Some companies may be selling this product in the United States. We do not distribute or support this product in the US or have ever sold DSL modems directly to customers - only to the Internet providers. Please leave where you purchased this in the comments below.
              Model DSL-302G
              Question How do I factory reset the DSL-302G?
              Answer The Modem can be reset to the factory default settings using the reset button located on the rear panel. To reset the Modem, gently depress the reset button with a paper clip while the unit is powered on for 10 seconds.
              Model DSL-302G
              Question What is the default VPI and VCI settings of the DSL-302G?
              Answer The default VPI is "0" and VCI is "35". If your DSL service provider uses different numbers, change these numbers on the modem to match those of your provider.

              If you are unsure of the VPI/VCI numbers, check all documentation provided by your DSL provider or contact them to get this necessary information. The DSL modem will not work unless the VPI and VCI numbers exactly match those of your DSL provider.
              Model DSL-302G / DSL-300G
              Question How do I change the VPI and VCI settings of the DSL-302G?
              Answer Make sure you have installed the drivers/utility for the DSL-302G. If you do not have the driver/utility software CD-ROM, you can download it.

              Download here

              Step one: Double click on the DSL-302G Family Configuration Utility icon on the desktop to launch the utility. You can also launch the utility by going to Start>Programs>D-Link DSL Family>DSL-302G Family Configuration Utility.

              Step Two: Double-click on the MAC address of the DSL-302G or highlight it and press the Enter or Return key. You should be prompted for a password. The default password is "admin".

              Step Three: Click on the General ADSL Information tab. The new menu lists 8 channels available for configuration. You need to change settings for only one channel in order to use the ADSL modem. Click on the first channel listed to highlight it, this is the default channel used by the modem.

              Step Four: Click Update.

              Step Five: In the new menu screen you must enter new values for the VPI and VCI settings. You also must choose the Encapsulation method used (LLC or VC Mux) from the pull-down menu. Your service provider will supply this information.

              Step Six: Click Set, OK, then Yes on the following screens to exit and save the changes.
              Model DSL-500 / DSL-500CZ / DSL-504 / DSL-504CZ
              Question How do I find my username and password on my DSL-500 or DSL-504?
              Answer You must use the RS-232 serial cable using terminal emulation software such as Microsoft HyperTerminal. Connect the cable from your computer to the console port on the DSL-500 or DSL-504.

              Step 1 Go to Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Hyperterminal.

              Step 2 Enter a name for your connection and choose the default icon selected.



              Step 3 Select a COM port (usually 1 or 2) and click OK.



              Step 4 The terminal parameters will need to be set to as follows:



              Step 5 At the command prompt type isfs cat inituser and press enter. You will now see the username and password.

              Model DSL-500 / DSL-504
              Question Can Netscape browsers be used to configure D-Link DSL routers?
              Answer Yes, Netscape 6.2 will work properly with the web page-based interface used in D-Link DSL routers, however, due to problems the browser has loading Java applets and working with Java scripts all of the features may not be visible.

              Netscape 4.7 does work with the interface, but is extremely slow in loading the various configuration pages.

              For these reasons, it is recommended to use Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.x or 6.0 to configure D-Link DSL routers. Internet Explorer loads the pages faster and Java applets work properly, as shown below. Note the tree in Fig. 1 (using Internet Explorer), representing the routerīs various configuration pages and in Fig. 2, the PPP Connection information. Using Netscape 6.2 as shown in Fig. 3, the configuration tree is missing and in Fig. 4 the PPP Connection Information is not displayed.

              Fig. 1 Internet Explorer Fig. 2 Internet Explorer
              Fig. 3 Netscape Fig. 4 Netscape
              Model DSL-G604T
              Question Can I use wireless channels 12 and 13 on my DSL-G604T?
              Answer No. You can only use wireless channels 1-11 in the United States. It is a violation of United States federal law to use wireless channels 12 and 13. These channels are wideband channels and are reserved for use by government agencies.
              Model DSM-120
              Question How do I set up a playlist for my DSM-120?
              Answer Note: The DSM-120 only supports .m3u and .pls playlists.

              Step 1: Create a playlist with the desired songs.

              Click here for instructions on creating a playlist in Windows Media Player

              Note: Make sure that you save the playlist as a .m3u. To do this, select the dropdown menu labeled Save as type: in the Save As box in Step 11 of the above FAQ. Select M3U Playlist (*.m3u) as the file type.

              Step 2: Save the playlist in the desired folder.

              Step 3: Share the folder in the media server.

              Model DSM-120
              Question Why does my DSM-120 not recognize my 2.5" internal hard drive?
              Answer You must partition your 2.5” hard drive before you can use it in your DSM-120.

              Note: The DSM-120 only supports a 2.5" hard drive with a FAT or FAT32 file system.

              Note: Make sure your 2.5” hard drive is set to “Master” mode. If you leave the settings in “Cable Select” or “Slave” mode the DSM-120 will be unable to detect your hard drive.

              Step 1: Plug the DSM-120 into an available USB port using the provided cable.

              Step 2: Right click on the My Computer icon on your desktop (or in the Start Menu for some Windows XP users) and choose Manage.



              Step 3: Under Storage on the left pane, select Disk Management.



              Step 4: Locate your hard drive in the bottom right pane. Right click on the area with a status bar and choose New Partition.



              Step 5: Follow the directions of the Partition Wizard. The recommended partition type is primary and the recommended file system is FAT32.



              Please note that Windows XP/2000 limits FAT32 partitions to 32GB.

              Step 6: Once you’ve finished with the wizard your DSM-120 will now recognize the drive.
              Model DSM-120
              Question How do I select a different media server?
              Answer Step 1: From the main menu highlight Setup and press enter.



              Step 2: Highlight System, and press enter.



              Step 3: Highlight Music Server, and press enter.



              Step 4: The DSM-120 will now search for available servers. When the list is displayed, highlight the desired server, and press enter.
              Model DSM-120 / DSM-320 / DSM-320RD / DSM-510 / DSM-520
              Question How do I use Windows Media Player 11 as a media server for my DSM?
              Answer Follow these steps to allow Your DSM-120, 320, 320RD, 510, or 520 in you Windows Media Player 11. This will allow you to find Windows Media Player 11 as a media server on your device.

              Step 1: Open Windows Media Player 11 and click Library. Go down the column and click Media Sharing



              Step 2: Select your device and click Allow



              Step 3: Your device will now have a green check mark. Now click Apply and OK



              Step 4: Now you need to add the folders containing media you want shared with your DSM-120, 320, 320RD, 510, or 520. Click on Library go down the column and click on Add to Library



              Step 5: Now click Add and choose the folders with media you wish to be shared with the DSM-120, 320, 320RD, 510, or 520 once you have added the folder you want to share click OK



              Step 6: Windows Media PLayer 11 will now search for supported media files in the folders chosen to share



              Step 7: Click Close and you are ready to use Windows Media Player 11 as your server



              Windows Media Player 11 will now when show as a server on your DSM-120, 320, 320RD, 510, or 520.
              Model DSM-120 / DSM-320 / DSM-320RD / DSM-520
              Question Why I am unable to access Rhapsody™ content?
              Answer STEP 1: Make sure Rhapsody™ is running on a computer connected to the network and check your network connections.

              STEP 2:Verify that the UPnP Server has been started in Rhapsody™. Within the Rhapsody™ application on your computer, go to Options, select User Settings, and go to the UPnP tab. If the Status is stopped, click on the Start button. Be sure to check Start UPnP server once logged in.

              STEP 3: Make sure you are able to play audio from within the Rhapsody™ application on the computer. If you are unable to play Rhapsody™ content from the computer, check your network and Internet connection. If your Internet connection is ok but you are still unable to play Rhapsody™ content, please contact Rhapsody™ support. To contact Rhapsody™ support, go to http://www.listen.com/dlink and click on Contact Us at the bottom of the page.
              Model DSM-120 / DSM-320 / DSM-320RD / DSM-520
              Question Why am I getting a No Server Found error?
              Answer There are several reasons that the DSM-320/320RD/520/120 may not find the media server.
              You must first ensure that your DSM is connected to your network and on the same subnet as the computer that is running the Media Server software.

              Below is a list of some common troubleshooting steps:

              1.If you are running Windows XP service pack 2, you will need to disable the Windows Firewall.
              Click here for instructions on disabling the firewall

              2.You may need to allow the Media Server to get through any Antivirus software you are running.
              Click here if you are running Norton™ Internet Security 2005
              Click here if you are running Norton™ Antivirus 2005

              3.The D-Link Media Server is a UPnP media server. You may need to enable UPnP on your PC.
              Click here for instructions on enabling UPnP

              4.If you are running Yahoo Music Engine you will have to enable the Turn On Network Music option.
              Click here for instructions on enabling the Turn On Network Music option
              Model DSM-320
              Question Why doesnīt my DSM-320 recognize the Yahoo! Music Engine server?
              Answer You must first enable the Turn On Network Music option before continuing with this FAQ.

              Note: Yahoo! Music Engine is only supported in firmware version 1.07 and above.

              Step 1: Click on Edit and choose Preferences.



              Step 2: Choose the Network Music option from the tabs on the lefthand side.

              Step 3: Check the box next to Turn On Network Music and then click on Apply.



              Step 4: Your DSM-320 will now be able to detect the Yahoo! Music Engine server.
              Model DSM-320
              Question Does Live365 offer free Radio Stations and do I need to have my computer running the media server to run Live365?
              Answer Yes, Live365 offers free radio stations and does not require the D-Link Media Server or a computer to operate.
              Model DSM-320
              Question How do I enable the Video Jump feature on my DSM-320?
              Answer Step 1 Press Setup on the DSM-320 remote control.

              Step 2 Scroll to General and then press Enter.



              Step 3 Scroll to Audio/Video and then press Enter.



              Step 4 Scroll to Video Seek Mode and then press Enter. Use the up and down arrows on the remote control to switch between Jump or FF/Rew mode. Press Enter.





              Step 5 Highlight OK and then press Enter.

              Step 6 To activate the Jump feature press Search on the DSM-320 remote control while playing a video.
              Model DSM-320
              Question Why am I unable to view/play my files after upgrading the D-Link Media Server?
              Answer You will need to uninstall and reinstall the Media Server software using the following steps:

              Step 1 Click on the Start Menu and then open the Control Panel.

              Step 2 In Control Panel, click on Add or Remove Programs and then click Remove next to D-Link Media Server.

              Step 3 After the removal is completed, open My Computer. Open C:\, then WINDOWS, and then open the SYSTEM32 folder. Then locate and delete the MediaServerDump folder.

              Step 4 Go to C:\Program Files and confirm that the D-Link Media Server folder is gone. If it is still there, manually delete it.

              Step 5 You can now reinstall the Media Server software.
              Model DSM-320
              Question Why does playback stop after one song when using Windows Media Connect?
              Answer The problem only occurs if you try to play a file that was encoded by using the Windows Media Audio (WMA) codec and a variable bit rate (VBR). You might have VBR WMA files on your computer if you have purchased any songs from MSN Music or you have ripped tracks from CDs by using the Windows Media Audio (variable bit rate) option in Windows Media Player. By default, Windows Media Player is configured to rip tracks from CDīs by using a constant bit rate (on the Rip Music option tab, the constant bit rate format is listed simply as Windows Media Audio).
              Model DSM-320
              Question Does the DSM-320 support WPA wireless security?
              Answer No. The DSM-320 only supports WEP wireless security.
              Model DSM-320
              Question Why am I not able to use the new features in firmware version 1.05 or higher with the D-Link Media Server software?
              Answer You must use D-Link Media Server v1.03 or higher in order to use the new features of firmware v1.05 and higher with the D-Link Media Server software.

              Click here to download the latest Media Server software.
              Model DSM-320
              Question Why is my TV screen black after upgrading the firmware on my DSM-320?
              Answer If your TV screen is black after upgrading the firmware on your DSM-320, you will need to perform a hard reset by doing the following:

              Step 1 Turn off the DSM-320.

              Step 2 In the back of the case, there is a reset hole. Insert a paper clip into the reset hole and turn the unit on.

              Step 3 Continue to hold the reset button for about 10 seconds.
              Model DSM-320
              Question How do I play my Playlist on the DSM-320?
              Answer Step 1 Point the remote control at the DSM-320 and select Music. Press Enter.



              Step 2 Select Playlist and press Enter.



              Step 3 Select the Playlist that you would like to play and press Play.

              Model DSM-320
              Question How do I change the aspect ratio on the DSM-320?
              Answer Step 1 Point the remote control towards the DSM-320 and press Setup.

              Step 2 Go to General and press Enter.

              Step 3 Go to Audio/Video and then press Enter.

              Step 4 Select Aspect Ratio and scroll to either 4:3 Letter Box, 4:3 Pan Scan, or 16:9. and then press Enter.



              4:3 Letter Box – Full widescreen image is displayed leaving black bars at the top and bottom of the screen.



              4:3 Pan Scan – Widescreen movie is displayed as a 4:3 image which is narrower than the original image.



              16:9 – Only suitable for a widescreen TV display, where a 16:9 image is displayed full screen. Also called anamorphic widescreen and is used on newer TV sets.
              Model DSM-320
              Question How do I create a custom Radio Station in Rhapsody?
              Answer Step 1 Click on the Radio icon to access Rhapsodyīs Radio features.

              Step 2 Click My Stations under Radio Stations.



              Step 3 Enter the name of your station and the artists name you would like to hear. Click Continue.



              Step 4 If there is more than one artist by the name you entered in Step 3 then you will need to select the correct artist from the drop-down list.



              Step 5 Click Continue after you have selected the correct artist.



              Step 6 To add more artists click add more artists. Click Save Station when you are finished.



              Step 7 After creating and saving your custom Radio Station you will need to add the station to your Library by clicking Save to Library.



              Step 8 To play the station, double-click the station name in your Library or right-click on the station name and select Play Now.

              Model DSM-320
              Question How do I switch from Composite Video to S-Video on my DSM-320?
              Answer When you have multiple video output connections, you can select one by clicking on Video Out. You must press the Video Out button on the remote control to switch to component video. This button must be pressed again to switch back to S-Video.

              Model DSM-320
              Question What changes have been done to the latest firmware for my DSM-320?
              Answer Release Notes:

              Version 1.09:
              • Revised on-line media zone.
              • Changed the slide show interval default.
              Version 1.08:
              • Online Media Screens have been reorganized.
              • Radio@AOL service has been removed.
              • Improved playlist behavior when a playlist attempts to play a DRM-protected file.
              Version 1.07:
              • Fixed photo scaling support
              • Fixed video aspect ratio support
              • Fixed issues with MSN Music files
              • Added border display for subtitle displays to make it easier to read on TV
              • Enhanced file codec library
              • Modified code structures to work with DLNA-compliant media servers
              • Added Yahoo Music Engine music files support
              • Added Nero Recode CE promotional messages
              Version 1.06:
              • Added support for My Kids Tunes online service
              • Added support for SRT sub-title format files
              • Added support for "Now Playing" feature. Allows user to view currently playing music when in browse mode via DISPLAY button
              • Screensaver now works while in Music Player screen
              • Fixed video aspect ratio issue
              • Fixed Windows Media Connect issues with downloaded music from MSN Music
              • Fixed issue with VOB files displaying "File not supported" message when there is network packet drops.
              • Fixed issue with Comcast Rhapsody
              • Added photo scaling feature.
              • Changed on screen keyboard from single page display to overlay on UI for better user experience.
              • Updated file codec library, fixing several problem files.
              Version 1.05:
              • Added Editable Playlist feature
              • Added Check Internet Connection (ping) ability
              • Improved audio/video out of sync issues
              • Improved video codec library
              • Improved audio codec library
              • Added support for Live365 worldwide internet radio service
              • Added video jump feature for quick seek
              • Enhanced background music support from one song to full list of songs
              • Improved stability in certain configurations and various UI changes
              Version 1.04:
              • Added support for Rhapsody
              • Added support for Napster
              • Added support for Windows Media Connect. Windows Media Connect requires Windows XP with SP2. You can download WMC software via Windows Update.
              • Added support for WMDRM. By supporting this, the DSM-320 can now stream protected content from Napster or other online music services using WMDRM. To use this, you need to have Windows Media Connect running at the PC side.
              • Fixed issue with WEP using ASCII
              Version 1.03:
              • Added support to allow playing of all files in a folder
              • Added OGG support
              • Improved FF/RWD of a video file
              • Enhanced media codec base
              • Added display of total track time when playing music
              • Fixed display of metadata information in tiff, jpg, and j2k
              • Fixed issue with track bar when playing WMA
              • Fixed issue with displaying color depth and resolution information when playing a slideshow
              • Fixed video out-of-sync issue
              • Fixed video time-display problem
              • Fixed issue with shuffle
              • Improved UPnP AV support with 3rd party media servers
              • Fixed device hang / freeze issues
              • Made mute a global setting
              • DSM-320 no longer disconnects from server due to idle time / screensaver
              • Added Zoom/Pan/Rotate control of Photos
              • Allow music to play in the background so user can exit the music playback screen while music continues to play
              • Added new search support. User can search by "starts with" or "contains"
              • īView all presetsī and īClear all presetsī added
              • Setup Page revised
              • Added video aspect ratio control (4:3 LB, 4:3 Pan/Scan & 16:9)
              • Added ability to select audio output in setup
              • Added ability to select video output in setup
              • Added ability to select Interlaced/Progressive Scan video
              • Added support for thumbnails from Photos on a CD
              • Improved Setup Wizard
              • Fixed bug when no SSID broadcast exists in the setup wizard
              • Enabled 5.1 (AC3) passthrough
              • Corrected ID3 (meta-data) display for MP3 playback
              • Corrected display of īNextī track
              Version 1.02:
              • Updated the Codec engine and fixed bugs to allow additional mp3 and mpg files to play. This version of the codec engine is enhanced to play a lot of the problem files we gathered (ex. MusicMatch). The new engine has improved performance in file decoding.
              • Updated new AOL trial date and background image.
              • Fixed AOL screensaver bug.
              • Fixed AOL time counter bug.
              • Fixed volume issues between DMA and AOL section.
              • Fixed issue with some MP3 files causing device to hang/lock up.
              • Site survey now updates every 2 seconds.
              • Fixed issue with search feature.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DSM-320 or DSM-320RD?
              Answer Step 1 Point the remote control towards the DSM-320 or DSM-320RD and then press Setup.

              Step 2 Go to Version and then press Enter.

              Step 3 Highlight Check For Updates and then press Enter. You will be prompted if there is an update available or not.

              Step 4 Click OK when it prompts you that a firmware update is available.

              The unit downloads the firmware before performing the upgrade. There is a point when the unit appears to hang when it is almost finished upgrading itself. This is a normal part of the upgrade process. It is imperative that you DO NOT turn off the unit during this process.

              Step 5 The unit will restart upon completing upgrade process.

            • Click here for release notes for the latest firmware for the DSM-320
            • Click here for release notes for the latest firmware for the DSM-320RD
              • Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question How can I switch from List display to Thumbnail view on my DSM-320 or DSM-320RD?
              Answer Step 1 Point the remote control towards the DSM-320 or DSM-320RD and then press Setup.

              Step 2 Go to General and then press Enter.

              Step 3 Highlight Additional Settings and scroll to Photo Display or Thumbnails.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question How do I install the D-Link Media Server software for my DSM-320 or DSM-320RD?
              Answer Step 1 Insert the Installation CD into your CD-ROM. Click on D-Link Media Server Installer and then click which operating system you are using.



              Step 2 Click Next



              Step 3 Select which directory you would like to install the Media Server software. Click Next.



              Step 4 Select which folder you would like to add the Program Shortcut. Click Next.



              Step 5 Click Install to begin the installation process.



              Step 6 Click Finish.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question How do I setup which files I want to stream through my DSM-320 or DSM-320RD from the Media Server software?
              Answer Step 1 Right-click the D-Link Media Server floating icon on your desktop and select Show Media Server.



              Step 2 Click on Add.



              Step 3 Select a folder containing the media files you would like to stream. Click OK.



              Step 4 Select the media file types to stream or click Select All. Click Apply to continue.



              Step 5 After the folder is added, click OK.

              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question How do I reset my DSM-320 or DSM-320RD back to the factory default settings?
              Answer There are two methods to reset your DSM-320 or DSM-320RD:

              Hard Reset:

              Step 1 Turn off the unit.

              Step 2 Locate the reset button on the back of the unit. Insert a paper clip into the reset hole and turn the unit on.

              Step 3 Continue to hold the reset button for about 10 seconds.





              Soft Reset:

              Step 1 Point the remote control towards the unit and then press Setup.

              Step 2 Go to System and then press Enter.

              Step 3 Go to System Reset and then press Enter.

              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question How do I change the device name for my DSM-320 or DSM-320RD?
              Answer Step 1 Point the remote control towards the DSM-320 or DSM-320RD and then press Setup.

              Step 2 Go to System and then press Enter.

              Step 3 Highlight Device Name and then press Enter.

              Step 4 Input new device name using the remote control as your keyboard.

              Step 5 Press OK.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question How do I view multiple Media Servers that are available on the network?
              Answer Step 1 Press Setup on the remote.

              Step 2 Go to System.

              Step 3 Scroll down to View All Servers.

              Step 4 Once it lists the server on your PC, press Enter.

              If your server is not showing in your list, verify your network settings.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question Why canīt the DSM-320 or DSM-320RD detect the Media Server that is running on Windows XP?
              Answer Since you are using Windows XP, you may have the XP Firewall enabled. This will prevent incoming connections to your PC.

              Note: If you are connected behind a router, it is recommended that you disable this firewall.

              Step 1 Click Start and select Control Panel.



              Step 2 Select Network and Internet Connections.



              Step 3 Select Network Connections.



              Step 4 The Network Connections window will open. Right-click the network adapter that is connected to the internet and select Properties.



              Step 5 Click the Advanced tab. Check the Internet Connection Firewall checkbox and then click Settings. If you want to disable the firewall, then uncheck the box and click OK.



              Step 6 Click OK twice to save your settings.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question Why is there a blue tint on my screen when I turn on the DSM-320 or DSM-320RD?
              Answer A blueish tint screen is the result of having the wrong video output selected. By default, the unit is set for Composite/S-Video outputs. If you are using the Component outputs, press the Video Out button on your remote control to make the switch. Press it again to switch back to Composite/S-Video.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question Why am I unable to update the Firmware on my DSM-320 or DSM-320RD while behind a Zyxel router?
              Answer The Parental Control feature on the Zyxel router may prohibit you from upgrading the firmware of the DSM-320 or DSM-320RD. If you are having problems upgrading the firmware of the DSM-320 or DSM-320RD D-Link suggests disabling Parental Control on the Zyxel router.

              Please contact Zyxel for further support in disabling this feature.

              How do I upgrade the Firmware on the DSM-320 or DSM-320RD?

              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question When hooking up my DSM-320 or DSM-320RD to an HDTV with component output, what will the resolution be?
              Answer The DSM-320 component output resolution is 480i.

              The DSM-320RD component output resolution is 480p.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question Does the DSM-320 or DSM-320RD support Apple iTunes?
              Answer No, the DSM-320 and DSM-320RD do not support Apple iTunes. The Digital Rights Management (DRM) that Apple iTunes uses is Apple Fairplay . The DSM-320 and DSM-320RD do not support the Apple Fairplay DRM. The DSM-320 and DSM-320RD only support Microsoftīs Plays For Sure DRM.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question Why am I unable to upgrade the firmware on my DSM-320 or DSM-320RD to the latest version listed on support.dlink.com if I purchased it outside of the United States?
              Answer If you have an international version of firmware, you will not be able to upgrade to US firmware. You will only be able to upgrade to the latest version of firmware available in your region. Please contact your the D-Link office in your region for support.

              Firmware Version Location
              X.XX D-Link United States

              http://support.dlink.com/
              X.XXca D-Link Canada

              http://support.dlink.ca/
              X.XXeu D-Link United Kingdom

              http://www.dlink.co.uk/
              X.XXtw D-Link Taiwan

              http://tsd.dlink.com.tw/
              X.XXww D-Link International

              http://www.dlink-intl.com/
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question How do I use the remote on my DSM-320 or DSM-320RD?
              Answer

              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question What codecs are supported with Microsoftīs DRM?
              Answer The following link has the list of supported audio/video codecs that can utilize Microsoft DRM.

              Codecs Supported by Windows Media DRM
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD / DSM-510 / DSM-520
              Question How do I convert an earlier WMV file to a WMV9?
              Answer There are many variations of video files (including WMV files) which may affect playback on the DSM-510. To alleviate this issue, there are software tools available on the web to check the properties of a video file and to convert an earlier WMV file into WMV9.

              If you have WindowsŪ XP or ME, your Windows comes with a tool from Microsoft called Movie Maker. With this tool, you can create and edit video files into Windows Media Video 9 (WMV9) format. Here is an example of converting a WMV8 file into WMV9:

              Step 1: Verify your WMV file codec using a validation tool. In the Video field, it tells you the selected video file is a WMV8 instead of a supported WMV9 by your HD media player. Therefore, we need to convert this file into a WMV9 format in order for you to play it.

              Step 2: Open Windows Movie Maker. Import the video you wish to convert.



              Step 3: Select the video file.



              Step 4: Movie Maker will start importing the file.

              Step 5: The video file you selected will show up in display.



              Step 6: Drag and drop the video into the bottom panel for editing.



              Step 7: Select Save to my computer on the left panel.



              Step 8: Give the new file a name and select the desired location to save it.



              Step 9: Select the quality of your new video file.



              Step 10: Once selected, Movie Maker will start creating your new video file.





              Step 11: Once completed, this screen will show up.



              Your file is now converted to WMV9.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD / DSM-510 / DSM-520
              Question Why does my DSM not display all of my MP3 and WMA files?
              Answer The DSM-520 supports the most common music file formats. However, there are almost an infinite variety of bit rates and sample rates. If a file does not appear on the receiver, it most likely uses an unsupported rate.

              The files may be copy protected. To share your files, turn copy protection off when you rip them.
              Note: WMA DRM files can be played by using WindowsŪ Media Connect Server software.

              The following MP3 sample rates are supported: 4, 8, 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2 and 96 kHz. For best results, rip your MP3 files at 128 kbps or higher, with a sample rate of 44.1 kHz.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD / DSM-510 / DSM-520
              Question Why is my DSM unable to play certain media files?
              Answer The DSM-320, DSM-320RD, DSM-520, and DSM-510 support most industry standard file formats. However, even "supported" file formats can be encoded in ways that are not supported.

              Try exporting media with different encoding settings or using different software applications to encode your files.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD / DSM-510 / DSM-520
              Question I am running Windows Vista and my Dlink Media Server software will not add or remove new folder or files to the Media Server.
              Answer Step 1: Right click on the Dlink Media Server icon on your desktop or Start menu.

              Step 2: Click Properties.




              Step 3: Click the Compatibility tab on the top.




              Step 4: Mark the box that states Run this program in compatibility mode for:.




              Step 5: Click the drop down menu below and choose Windows XP (service pack2).

              Step 6: Click Apply.

              Step 7: Now run the Dlink Media Server program.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD / DSM-520
              Question How do I make the subtitles display, when playing a video?
              Answer The DSM series media players supports the display of the SRT subtitle file format. To use it, make sure that it is in the same folder as your movie file and that they are both named exactly the same.



              Simply start the video file and the subtitles will show at the bottom of the screen

              Note: Tools to generate SRT files can be found online
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD / DSM-520
              Question How do I configure Norton™ Internet Security 2005 to allow access to the Media Server software?
              Answer To allow the DSM-320/DSM-320RD/DSM-520 Media Server software to work behind Norton™ Internet Security 2005, the Media Server software will need to be added to the Personal Firewall Rules of Norton™ Internet Security 2005.

              Step 1 Open Norton™ Internet Security 2005 and click Personal Firewall.



              Step 2 Click Configure to the right.



              Step 3 Click the Programs tab and then click Add.



              Step 4 Navigate to the location of the D-Link Media Server program folder (default location is localdrive:\Program Files\D-Link Media Server\) and double-click it.



              Step 5 Click MediaServer.exe and then click Open.



              Step 6 Below What do you want to do? select Permit and click OK.

              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD / DSM-520
              Question Why canīt I find any music, photos, or video?
              Answer
              • Make sure your computer is powered on and that it has not entered standby/hybernation mode. You may need to change your computer’s power settings if you want the media content to be available at all times.
              • Make sure the Media Server software is running on your computer. Look for the Media Server icon in your system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock). If necessary, start the Media Server software again.
              • Click on the Media Server icon and select Show Media Server to verify you are sharing the correct directories.
              • If using a wired network, verify the Ethernet cable is properly attached to your DSM-320/320RD/520 and to a network switch, hub, or router. Verify that the switch, hub, or router is powered on.
              • If you are using static IP addresses, verify the IP address and netmask are in the same range as other addresses on your network. Verify that the address is not already in use by another PC or device.
              • Make sure the files you are sharing use a supported file format and encoding scheme.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD / DSM-520
              Question Why wonīt my Napster downloads stream through my DSM-320, DSM-320RD, or DSM-520?
              Answer In order to listen to protected content, such as Napster, itīs required to have Microsoft Windows Media Connect software installed. This software is available via Windows Update.

              Click here to learn more about Windows Media Connect
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD / DSM-520
              Question How to set permissions on Norton Antivirus 2005 to allow my DSM-320, DSM-320RD, or DSM-520 to find the Media Server?
              Answer Step 1 Open Norton AntiVirus



              Step 2 Select Norton AntiVirus under Options.



              Step 3 Click General Rules under Internet Worm Protection.



              Step 4 Click Add.



              Step 5 Select Permit and then click Next.



              Step 6 Select Any computer and then click Next.



              Step 7 Select TCP and UDP and add local port 1900 and local port 5643. Click OK.



              Step 8 Click Next.



              Step 9 Rename the rule and then click Next.



              Step 10 Click Finish to complete the configuration.



              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD / DSM-520
              Question I have disabled any firewalls and antivirus software but I still receive the No Server Found error. Why?
              Answer Make sure UPnP is enabled. To enable UPnP follow these steps:

              Step 1 Click on the Start Menu and then click on Control Panel.

              Step 2 In Control Panel, click on Add or Remove Programs and then click on Add/Remove Windows Components.



              Step 3 In the Components list, click on the Networking Services check box (unless it is already selected) and then click on Details.



              Step 4 In the Networking Services dialog box, click on the Internet Gateway Device Discovery and Control Client check box (unless it is already selected) and then click to select the UPnP User Interface check box. Click on OK.



              Step 5 Click on Next.

              Step 6 Click on Finish.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD / DSM-520
              Question How do I play photos in a slideshow on my DSM-320, DSM-320RD, or DSM-520?
              Answer Step 1 Go to Photos and then press Enter.



              Step 2 Select Folders and then press Enter.



              Step 3 Highlight folder with photos you wish to view in a slide show and then press Play on the remote control.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD / DSM-520 / DSM-G600rev_B / DSM-G600rev_A
              Question Why doesnīt my playlist file (.m3u, .pls), that is stored on my DSM-G600, play on my DSM-320/320RD/520?
              Answer The DSM-G600 media server is treating itself as the root source of the content. The DSM-G600 does not acknowledge that its data is at any particular IP address or network source. It simply reports a local path. The network location identification and communication is handled by a different process.

              Therefore, your file paths within the M3U file will look like this:

              If the M3U is located in the same directory as the files:

              song1.mp3
              song2.mp3
              song3.mp3

              If the M3U is located in the album folder (where we assume the folder structure is Genre/Artist/Album/files):

              /album1/song1.mp3
              /album1/song2.mp3
              /album1/song3.mp3

              If the M3U is located in the artist folder (where we assume the folder structure is Genre/Artist/Album/files):

              /artist1/album1/song1.mp3
              /artist1/album1/song2.mp3
              /artist1/album1/song3.mp3

              You can use this same logic to compensate for whatever folder structure you may have.
              Model DSM-320 / DSM-320RD /DSM-520
              Question How do I preset a song or playlist on my DSM-320, DSM-320RD, or DSM-520?
              Answer Step 1 Find a song or playlist that you wish to run in the background.

              Step 2 Highlight the song and then hold down a number (between 1-9) for about 5 seconds. A number will appear in the top right corner of the screen which indicates that a preset has been set.
              Model DSM-320RD
              Question What changes have been done to the latest firmware for my DSM-320RD?
              Answer Release Notes:

              Version 1.04:
              • Changes to appearance of Online Media section
              • Front panel display messages updated.
              • Live365 player screen changed to display correct metadata.
              Version 1.03:
              • Radio@AOL service removed.
              • Online Media section in firmware revised.
              • Support added for Yahoo Music Engine server.
              Version 1.02:
              • Added AOL Youīve Got Pictures Service to AOL Services in Online Media
              • Bug fixes in Radio@AOL service
              Version 1.01:
              • Improved support for DVD trick modes
              • Fixed LED display issues while in DVD mode
              • Improved compatibility with the Comcast version of Rhapsody
              • Increased the firmware upgrade performance
              Version 1.00:
              • Shipping firmware
              Model DSM-510
              Question Why can I not see anything when I turn on my DSM-510 player for the first time?
              Answer If you cannot see anything when you turn on the DSM-510 for the first time, try the following steps:

            • Make sure your TV is displaying the appropriate video source. You may need to use the AV Input, Source, Select, or TV/Video button on your TV or TV remote to change video sources. If you are having trouble changing the video source, refer to the instructions that came with your TV.

            • If you did not connect the player directly to your TV, but are instead passing the signal through your VCR, make sure your VCR is displaying the appropriate video source. You may need to use the Input or Source button on your VCR or VCR’s remote control. Some VCRs only pass the signal through when they are turned off. If you are having trouble displaying the correct video source, refer to the instructions that came with your VCR.

            • Make sure cables are connected to the IN jacks on your TV or VCR, not the OUT jacks.

            • The cables you are using to connect your receiver to your TV or other equipment may be damaged or defective. Try exchanging the cables connected to the receiver with other cables that you know are working properly.

            • Make sure you have firmly attached the power adapter plug to the back of the player. Also, verify the power adapter is plugged into a working power outlet and that the outlet is not controlled by a light switch.
              • Model DSM-510
              Question What file types are supported by the DSM-510?
              Answer The DSM-510 supports the following file types:

              Audio - MP3, WMA*, WAV, AIFF, OGG

              Video - WMV9, MPEG 1, 2, and 4, AVI, XVID, DVR-MS

              Images - JPEG, PNG, BMP, GIF, TIFF

              * The following low bit rate WMA files may fail to play:
              WMA 9.1 Quality 10 44kHz Stereo VBR
              WMA 9.1 Lossless Quality 100 @ 96kHz 2channel 24bit VBR
              WMA 9.1 Voice Quality 4kbps 8kHz mono
              WMA 9.1 Voice Quality 20kbps 22kHz mono
              WMA 9.1 Quality 98 44kHz Stereo
              WMA 9.1 Lossless Quality 100 @ 44kHz 2channel 16 bit VBRnetwork.
              Model DSM-510
              Question Can I connect the DSM-510 directly to a PC without using a router or a hub?
              Answer Yes, You can connect the DSM-510 directly to a PC.

              Please make note of the following:

              Wireless Users: Set the Mode to Ad-Hoc in the wireless settings.

              Wired Users: Connect an Ethernet cable directly from the DSM-510’s Ethernet port to the Ethernet port on your PC. The DSM-510’s Ethernet port is Auto MDI/MDI-X, so a special Ethernet cable is not required.

              All Users: If DHCP software isn’t running on your computer, you will need to assign a static IP address to the DSM-510 by changing the network settings from automatic to manual.

              Note: The Viiv™ Zone and firmware upgrades are not available without an Internet connection.
              Model DSM-510
              Question I created a playlist on my computer, but it doesn’t appear on my media player.
              Answer Make sure the playlist file is located in a folder shared by your media player. Copy the playlist to your shared music folder or click on the Media Server icon to add or change your folder options.
              Model DSM-510
              Question How do I find what version of firmware I have on my DSM-510?
              Answer From the main home screen, press the SETUP button and select Device Information. The firmware version will be listed here.

              Model DSM-510
              Question How does the D-Link DSM-510 get its files from my computer?
              Answer If you have an IntelŪ Viiv™ ready PC, the IntelŪ Viiv™ Media Server software on your PC will launch, allowing you to add media files.

              You may then select folders that contain music, photos, and videos that you want to play.

              If you do not have have an IntelŪ Viiv™ PC, and are running WindowsŪ XP/2000, the Media Server software that supports the DSM-510 will be installed after you insert the autorun CD that is included.
              Model DSM-510
              Question Why dont some of my MP3 and WMA files appear?
              Answer The DSM-510 supports the most common music file formats. However, there are almost an infinite variety of bit rates and sample rates. If a file does not appear on the receiver, it most likely uses an unsupported rate.

              The files may be copy protected. To share your files, turn copy protection off when you rip them.

              The following MP3 sample rates are supported: 4, 8, 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48, 88.2 and 96 kHz.

              For best results, rip your MP3 files at 128 kbps or higher, with a sample rate of 44.1 kHz.
              Model DSM-510
              Question Why am I not able to play certain media files?
              Answer The DSM-510 supports most industry standard file formats but even supported file formats can be encoded in ways that are not supported. Try exporting media with different encoding settings or using different software applications to encode your files.
              Model DSM-510
              Question The DSM-510 will not play my WMV files.
              Answer Make sure that your WMV files are not burned at a resolution up to 1080i. Playback of WMV files will only work if the resolution is up to 720p.
              Model DSM-510
              Question Can I use my Universal remote control?
              Answer No, the DSM-510 is not compatible with a universal remote but you can use a remote with learning ability.
              Model DSM-510
              Question Why can’t I find any of my music, photos, or video?
              Answer
              Step 1 If using a wired network, verify the Ethernet cable is properly attached to your DSM-510 and to a network switch, hub or router. Verify that the switch, hub or router is powered on.

              Step 2 If you are using static IP addresses, verify the IP address and netmask are in the same range as other addresses on your network. Verify that the address is not already in use by another PC or device.

              Step 3 Make sure the files you are sharing use a supported file format and encoding scheme.

              Step 4 Verify the folder is shared in the Media Libary of the media server software
              Model DSM-510
              Question Why can’t I hear any sound when I’m playing music?
              Answer Step 1 Make sure the audio cables are properly connected.

              Step 2 If the audio cables are connected to your TV, the TV must be on to hear any music.

              Step 3 If the audio cables are connected to your stereo, make sure the stereo is on and you have the correct stereo input source selected. If you are having trouble selecting the correct audio source, refer to the instructions that came with your stereo.
              Model DSM-510
              Question How do I reset my DSM-510?
              Answer Under normal circumstances, you should not need to reset your media player. However, to fully reset the media player, press the SETUP button and select Reset Settings.
              Model DSM-510
              Question What version of firmware do I have?
              Answer From the main home screen, press the SETUP button and select Device Information. The firmware version will be listed.
              Model DSM-510
              Question Can the DSM-510 play protected content?
              Answer The most common method of copy protection is WMA DRM (Digital Rights Management) .

              The DSM-510 can play copy protected WMA files from a PC with DRM Streaming software for example, Windows Media Player or Windows Media Connect
              Model DSM-510
              Question How do I upgrade my firmware through the USB?
              Answer To obtain the firmware you must first go to Dlinkīs support website of the DSM-510 and download the firmware

              Step 1: Extract updater.zip to your PC.

              Step 2:               Copy the Entire updater folder to your USB device.

              Step 3:               Plug USB device into DSM-510.

              Step 4:               Go to options/setup, select Software update. Choose Update from USB, and hit next. New firmware should be detected, hit next again to install.

              Step 5:               Allow DSM-510 time to update device and when prompted, hit OK to reboot.
              Model DSM-510 / DSM-520 / DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question How do I check the bit and sample rates of a file?
              Answer Step 1 Locate the file you wish to find the bit rate of.

              Step 2 Right click on the file and select Properties.

              Step 3 Select the Summary tab and click the Advanced button. Scroll to the bottom of the list under audio.
              The bit and sample rates will be displayed here.

              The sample rate does not matter unless you come across a file that will not play or appear on your player. Use the above procedure to check the file settings for supported rates.



              Supported bit rates:

              MP3 (.mp3) - Up to 320kbps
              MPEG-1 (.mp1, mpeg, or .mpg) - Up to 8Mbps
              MPEG-2 (.mp2, mpeg,or .mpg) - Up to 8Mbps
              Model DSM-510 / DSM-520 / DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question My DSM-510/520/320/320RD will not play my WMA Pro files.
              Answer WMA Pro files are currently not supported. The DSM line will play WMA files, but not WMA Pro files.
              Model DSM-510 / DSM-520 / DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question Why do my AVI files fail to play?
              Answer The DSM-510 will only support MPEG-4 encoded AVI files. You may need to re-encode your AVI files with a video encoding software program, such as Nero Recode.

              Click here for a free 30 day trail of Nero Recode.
              Model DSM-510 / DSM-520 / DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question Why does volume and mute buttons on the remote control not work when playing content that was encoded in 5.1 surround?
              Answer The volume can only be adjusted on your digital stereo receiver. The DSM-510 can pass-through the audio signal to a compatible audio receiver for multi-channel decoding.
              Model DSM-510 / DSM-520 / DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question The DSM-510/520/320/320RD will not play my AVI files.
              Answer Make sure that your AVI files are smaller than 2GB. AVI files have a limitation of 2GB. This is a limitation set in the AVI standard.
              Model DSM-510 / DSM-520 / DSM-320 / DSM-320RD
              Question I downloaded .m4v audio files from Itunes and they do not play on my DSM-320, DSM-320RD, DSM-520, or DSM-510.
              Answer Files downloaded from Itunes are not supported due to copyright laws. The Digital Rights Management (DRM) that Apple iTunes uses is Apple Fairplay. The DSM-320/320RD/510/520 do not support the Apple Fairplay DRM.
              Model DSM-520
              Question Why can I not hear audio on my WMV HD file with WMA 9.1 PRO HD audio?
              Answer The WMV HD files use WMA 9.1 PRO Video and WMA 9.1 PRO Audio.

              Since WMA PRO is a form of digital audio, it is passed through directly to the receiver so that it can be used in its original quality (Not decoded by the DSM-520 like the Video).

              It may be that the receiver can not receive WMA PRO audio.

              The easiest way to test this, is to connect the device directly to the television. If it is connected to the television the Audio signal should be converted (losing quality) into a form of analog audio instead of the digital audio that was going to the receiver. You should then hear audio from your speakers on the television.
              Model DSM-520
              Question How do I reset my DSM-520 back to the factory default settings?
              Answer There are two methods to reset your DSM-320 or DSM-320RD:

              Hard Reset:

              Step 1 Turn off the unit.

              Step 2 Locate the reset button on the back of the unit. Insert a paper clip into the reset hole and turn the unit on.

              Step 3 Continue to hold the reset button for about 10 seconds.





              Soft Reset:

              Step 1               Point the remote control towards the unit and then press Setup.

              Step 2               Go to System and then press Enter.

              Step 3 Go to System Reset and then press Enter.

              Model DSM-520
              Question Does the DSM-520 support Apple iTunes?
              Answer No, the DSM-520 does not support Apple iTunes. The Digital Rights Management (DRM) that Apple iTunes uses is Apple Fairplay. The DSM-520 does not support the Apple Fairplay DRM. The DSM-520 only supports Microsoftīs Plays For Sure DRM.
              Model DSM-520
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DSM-520?
              Answer Step 1: Point the remote control towards the DSM-520 and then press Setup.

              Step 2: Go to Version and then press Enter.

              Step 3: Highlight Check For Updates and then press Enter. You will be prompted if there is an update available or not.

              Step 4: Click OK when it prompts you that a firmware update is available.

              The unit downloads the firmware before performing the upgrade. There is a point when the unit appears to hang which is when it is almost finished upgrading itself. This is a normal part of the upgrade process. It is imperative that you DO NOT turn off the unit during this process.

              Step 5: The unit will restart upon completing upgrade process.
              Model DSM-520
              Question How do I view multiple Media Servers that are available on the network?
              Answer Step 1: Press Setup on the remote.

              Step 2: Go to System.

              Step 3: Scroll down to View All Servers.

              Step 4: Once it lists the server on your PC press Enter.

              Note: If your server is not showing in your list, verify your network settings.
              Model DSM-520
              Question What changes have been done to the latest firmware for my DSM-520?
              Answer Release Notes:

              Version 1.02:
              • Online Media screens have been reorganized.
              • Added support for Yahoo Music Engine.
              • Added support for the vTuner Internet radio service.
              • Radio@AOL service has been removed.
              • Support for UPnP AV Control Point that allows a compliant server to gain playback control of the DSM-520.
              • Picture-in-Picture (PIP) can be enabled/disabled from the Setup menu.
              • Improve Live365 playback quality.
              • Improved Wireless Site Survey performance.
              • Improved support for DLNA-compatible media servers.
              Version 1.01:
              • Fix potential compatibility issues with HDMI.
              • Fixed WMV file playback issues with TotalVid video files.
              • Fixed Rhapsody radio bug which during radio station playback, pressing Next goes to the next track instead of next station.
              • Fix bug with timebar which playing very short audio clip.
              • Fixed bug with MSN music.
              • Fixed DHCP bug so the correct device name will be displayed in routerīs DHCP table.
              Version 1.00:
              • Shipping firmware
              Model DSM-602H / DSM-604H
              Question How do I access my DSM-604H/DSM-602H when ZoneAlarm is enabled?
              Answer Step 1 Connect an Ethernet cable from your DSM-604H to your router.

              Step 2 Connect the power adapter to your DSM-604H and power it on.

              Step 3 Open a web browser and login to the web-based configuration of your router.

              Step 4 Go to the DHCP feature of your router and look at the DHCP Client Table. There, you should see the entry DSM-604H and its IP address.



              Note: This may take several moments to appear and may require you to refresh the page several times before it shows up. To refresh your browser hit F5 on your keyboard.

              Step 5 Open ZoneAlarm. Go to the Firewall menu and click the Zones tab.

              Step 6 Click Add and select IP Address.

              Step 7 Select Trusted using the drop-down list next to Zone. Next to IP Address type the IP address of the DSM-604H as it is listed in the DHCP Client Table of your router. Type a name to identify the firewall rule next to Description. Click Apply.



              Step 8 Go to Start > Run. In the Run window type \\192.168.0.101. Replace 192.168.0.101 with the IP address of your DSM-604H.



              Step 9 ZoneAlarm will prompt you with a message that says svchost.exe is trying to access the Internet. Check Remember this setting using the check box and then click Allow.



              Note: ZoneAlarm may also prompt you that spoolsv.exe is trying to access the Internet. Allow this also.

              Step 10 Log into the web-based configuration of your DSM-604H with the IP address you used above (i.e. 192.168.0.101) and configure the LAN IP address as static. Make sure that the LAN IP address that you specify is the one used above.

              Model DSM-602H / DSM-604H
              Question How do I reset my DSM-602H/DSM-604H to factory defaults?
              Answer Step 1 Locate the hole on the back of the device above the word RESET.



              Step 2 Using a paper clip, press and hold the Reset button for about 5 seconds and then release.

              Step 3 After the device reboots it will be reset to the factory default settings.
              Model DSM-602H / DSM-604H
              Question How do I delete files from my DSM-602H/DSM-604H?
              Answer Follow the steps below to delete unwanted files from your DSM-602H/604H Network drive.

              Step 1 In order to delete files from a folder, you must have write/share permissions checked on that specific folder. Log into the web-based configuration, select Advanced, and then click on the Folder button. Check both boxes next to the folder.



              Step 2 Click on the My Network Places Icon on your desktop. If you are using Windows XP, then click Start > Control Panel > Network Connections.

              Step 3 Double-click on Computers Near Me.



              Step 4 Click on the DSM-602H/604H to open. If you have renamed the Network drive then you will have to select the appropriate Icon.



              Step 5 Open the folder that has the files you wish to delete.



              Step 6 Right-click on the file and select delete from the list. If you receive the following warning Are you sure you want to delete the file, choose Yes.



              Note: The error message below means that you do not have write permissions for that folder. If you wish to delete the file, you will have to put a check mark in the appropriate box on the Web configuration page (see step 1 above).

              Model DSM-602H / DSM-604H
              Question How do I change the IP address on my DSM-602H or DSM-604H?
              Answer The following steps will allow you to change the IP address of the DSM-602H/604H Network drive.

              Step 1 Log into the web-based interface by typing in the IP address of the Network drive into a web browser such as Internet Explorer.

              Step 2 Click on LAN from the left menu.

              Step 3 Click the radio button next to Static IP.

              Step 4 In the box next to Fixed IP, type in your new address.

              Step 5 Next to Subnet Mask, type in the correct subnet for your network.

              Step 6 After you have made these changes, click Apply at the bottom of the page.

              Model DSM-602H / DSM-604H
              Question How do I upgrade the Firmware on the DSM-602H or DSM-604H?
              Answer The following steps will allow you to upgrade the firmware on your DSM-602H/604H.

              Step 1 Log into the web-based interface by typing in the IP address of the Network drive into a web browser such as Internet Explorer.

              Step 2 Click on the Tools tab.

              Step 3 Click on Firmware on the left side.

              Step 4 If you have not already downloaded the firmware file, click on the URL in the middle of the page and it will take you to D-Linkīs support site. Here you will be able to search for a firmware update. Once you download the file, continue with step 5. Do not try to open or run the downloaded file.

              Step 5 Select the Browse button to search for the file.

              Step 6 Highlight the file and click Open. The file path will now appear in the box next to the browse button.

              Step 7 Click the Apply button to start the upgrade.



              Note: Do not turn off the DSM-602H/604H during the upgrade process. Doing so will damage the unit.
              Model DSM-602H / DSM-604H
              Question How do I change the password on my DSM-602H or DSM-604H?
              Answer The following steps will allow you to change the administratorīs password on the DSM-602H/604H>.

              Step 1 Log into the web-based interface by typing in the IP address of the Network drive into a web browser such as Internet Explorer.

              Step 2 Click on the Tools tab.

              Step 3 Click the Admin button on the left side.

              Step 4 This window is where you will change the Administratorīs password. Maximum length is 15 characters.

              Step 5 Click Apply to save the new password.

              Model DSM-602H / DSM-604H
              Question How do I create folders on my DSM602H or DSM-604H?
              Answer The following steps will allow you to create new folders on the DSM-602H/604H.

              Step 1 Log into the web-based interface by typing in the IP address of the Network drive into a web browser such as Internet Explorer.

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab.

              Step 3 Click on the Folder button on the left side.

              Step 4 Type in your new folder name in the box labeled New Folder Name.

              Step 5 Click Create.

              Step 6 Your new folder name will appear under Current folders.

              Step 7 If you want to allow sharing/writing privileges, make sure to put a check mark in the appropriate boxes.

              Step 8 Click on Apply to save your settings.

              Model DSM-602H / DSM-604H
              Question How do I know how much space I have left on the DSM-602H or DSM-604H?
              Answer Follow the steps below to show you how much space is left on your DSM-602H/604H.

              Step 1 Log into the web-based interface by typing in the IP address of the Network drive into a web browser such as Internet Explorer.

              Step 2 Click on the Status tab.

              Step 3 Click the Stats button on the left side. This window will show you the amount of disk space used and how much you have left.

              Model DSM-602H / DSM604H
              Question How do I delete folders on my DSM-602H or DSM-604H?
              Answer The following steps are for deleting a folder which you have created through the web management of the DSM-602H/604H.

              Step 1 Log into the web interface of the DSM-602H/604H by typing in the IP address of the Network drive into your web browser.

              Step 2 Click the Advanced tab and then click on Folder.

              Step 3 Highlight the folder you wish to delete. Click on the Trash can to the right of the folder.

              Step 4 Click OK to delete the folder.



              Step 5 Click Continue.



              Your folder is now deleted.
              Model DSM-604H/602H
              Question How do I format the DSM-602H/604H?
              Answer The following steps will allow you to format the DSM-602H/604H. Formatting will erase all data (files and folders).

              Step 1 Log into the web-based interface of the DSM-602H/604H by typing in the IP address of the Network drive into your web browser.

              Step 2 Click the Advanced tab and then click on Disk.



              Step 3 Click Format and then click OK to continue.



              Step 4 Click Continue.
              Model DSM-910BT
              Question What can I do to improve my signal or if I am getting no signal at all?
              Answer To ensure the best wireless signal, please try the following:
              • You will need to adjust the antennas on both the DSM-100BT and the DSM-110BT to get the best possible audio quality.

              • To avoid interference problems when streaming audio to your speakers make sure that there are no objects blocking the DSM-110BT and the DSM-100BT. Do not put the wireless devices in a cabinet or an enclosure. Also, Bluetooth transmits on the 2.4GHz frequency. 2.4 GHz phones and other wireless (802.11b/g) networking products will interfere.

              • The DSM-100BT and the DSM-110BT will automatically pair with each other and immediately begin to stream audio wirelessly. If a connection is not established (indicated by a rapidly blinking Link LED), simply reset the DSM-100BT and the DSM-110BT by pressing the reset button located on the rear panels. Once the Link LED light is a steady green, a successful connection has been made and the pairing process has been completed.
              Model DSM-910BT
              Question What do the LED indicators mean on my DSM-910BT?
              Answer Both the DSM-100BT Speaker Adapter and the DSM-110BT Stereo Adapter feature 2 LED indicators, the Power LED Indicator and the Link LED Indicator.
              • The Power LED indicator will light green to indicate that the DSM-100BT and the DSM-110BT are powered on.
              • The Link LED indicator will light a steady green when pairing has been established between the DSM-100BT and the DSM-110BT.
              • The Link LED indicator will blink rapidly when there is no longer a connection between the DSM-100BT and the DSM-110BT.
              Model DSM-910BT / DSM-100BT
              Question How do I install my DSM-910BT?
              Answer Installing the DSM-100BT Speaker Adapter

              Step 1 Connect the included antenna to the antenna connector located on the rear panel of the DSM-100BT.

              Step 2 Connect one end of the power adapter to the power connector located on the rear panel of the DSM-100BT and the other end to an available power strip or wall outlet. The Power LED indicator will light green to indicate that the DSM-100BT is powered on.

              Step 3 Connect your speaker’s audio cable to the Audio Out connector located on the rear panel of the DSM-100BT. For connection to a speaker system with RCA outputs, you can use the included RCA to 3.5mm audio converter connector for installing the DSM-100BT.

              Installing the DSM-110BT Bluetooth Stereo Adapter

              Step 4 Connect the included antenna to the antenna connector located on the rear panel of the DSM-110BT.

              Step 5 Connect one end of the power adapter to the power connector located on the rear panel of the DSM-110BT and the other end to an available power strip or wall outlet. The Power LED indicator will light green to indicate that the DSM-110BT is powered on.

              Step 6 Connect your audio player’s audio cable to the Audio In connector located on the rear panel of the DSM-110BT using the included 3.5mm cable. For connection to a stereo system with RCA outputs, you can use the included RCA to 3.5mm audio converter connector for installing the DSM-110BT.
              Model DSM-920BT
              Question What can I do to improve my signal or if I am getting no signal at all?
              Answer To improve your wireless signal, please try the following:
              • You will need to adjust the antennas on both the DSM-100BT and the DSM-120BT to get the best possible audio quality.
              • To avoid interference problems when streaming audio to your speakers, make sure that there are no objects blocking the DSM-120BT and the DSM-100BT.
              • The DSM-100BT and the DSM-120BT will automatically pair with each other and immediately begin to stream audio wirelessly. If a connection is not established (indicated by a rapidly blinking Link LED), simply reset the DSM-100BT by pressing the reset button located on the rear panel. Once the Link LED light is a steady green, a successful connection has been made and the Bluetooth pairing process has been completed.
              Model DSM-920BT
              Question What do the LED indicators mean on my DSM-920BT?
              Answer The DSM-100BT Speaker Adapter features 2 LED indicators, the Power LED Indicator and the Link LED Indicator. The DSM-120BT Stereo Adapter features 2 LED indicators, the Power LED Indicator and the Activity LED Indicator.
              • The Power LED indicator will light to indicate that power is being supplied to the adapter.
              • The Link/Activity LED indicator will light a steady green when pairing has been established between both the DSM-100BT and the DSM-120BT.
              • The Link/Activity LED indicator will blink rapidly when there is no longer a connection between the DSM-100BT and the DSM-120BT.
              Model DSM-920BT
              Question How do I install my DSM-920BT?
              Answer Installing the DSM-100BT Speaker Adapter

              Step 1 Connect the included antenna to the antenna connector located on the rear panel of the DSM-100BT.

              Step 2 Connect one end of the power adapter to the power connector located on the rear panel of the DSM-100BT and the other end to an available power strip or wall outlet. The Power LED indicator will light green to indicate that the DSM-100BT is powered on.

              Step 3 Connect your speaker’s audio cable to the Audio Out connector located on the rear panel of the DSM-100BT. For connection to a speaker system with RCA outputs, you can use the included RCA to 3.5mm audio converter connector for installing the DSM-100BT.

              Installing the DSM-120BT USB Stereo Adapter to your Windows based PC

              Step 4 Connect the smaller end of the included mini USB cable to the mini USB connector on the DSM-120BT.

              Step 5 Connect the flatter, larger end of the included mini USB cable to an available Type A USB slot on the rear panel of your computer. The Power LED indicator will light green to indicate that the DSM-120BT is powered on.
              Model DSM-G600
              Question Why doesnīt my DSM-G600 revA1 recognize my USB drive?
              Answer The DSM-G600 revA1 will only recognize USB drives that are formatted as FAT32, EXT2 or EXT3.

              If your USB drive is formatted with NTFS it will not be recognized by the DSM-G600.
              Model DSM-G600
              Question When I first install a IDE hard drive into the DSM-G600 revA1 then press the power button, why does the power light blink for so long?
              Answer When you first install the IDE hard drive the DSM-G600 revA1 will format the drive. This process can take several minutes.

              Note: The exact amount of time will depend on the size of the hard drive.
              Model DSM-G600 / DSM-G600_revB
              Question How do I map my DSM-G600 after setting up network access on the device?
              Answer Step 1: Locate your My Computer icon on your desktop or start menu. Double click on it.

              Step 2: Once you have My Computer opened, select Tools and then Map Network Drive.



              Step 3: Select the drive letter you would like to assign to your DSM-G600. Click Browse, select Work Group, and then select your coresponding workgroup name. Now select your device name(default is DSM-G600) and then click on the OK button.

              Step 4: Now that you have found your device, if you are using Network Access(usernames and passwords), you will need to click on the link that says, Connect using a different username. After selecting this, type in the username and password you setup for network access on your DSM-G600.



              Step 5: Click on Finish and your newly mapped drive should appear under My Computer as the drive letter you have selected.
              Model DSM-G600 / DSM-G600_revB
              Question Why do I get this error message when I connect to the DSM-G600: The Finder cannot complete the operation because some of the data in smb://........ could not be read or written. (Error code -36)?
              Answer This error can occur if your Mac OS X 10.4 client is trying to connect to a Samba or Windows (SMB/CIFS) server that only supports plain text passwords.

              Unlike Mac OS X 10.3, the Mac OS X 10.4 SMB/CIFS client by default only supports encrypted passwords. Most modern Samba or Windows (SMB/CIFS) servers use encrypted passwords by default, while some Samba servers might have to be reconfigured.

              You should consider contacting the owner or system administrator of the Samba or Windows (SMB/CIFS) server to which you are trying to connect and encourage them to disable plain text passwords and start using encrypted ones. If the server cannot be reconfigured to support encrypted passwords, you can configure Mac OS X 10.4 SMB/CIFS client to send plain text passwords.

              Step 1 Make sure that you are not currently connected to any Samba or Windows (SMB/CIFS) servers and that you do not have any Samba or Windows-related error messages open.

              Step 2 Open the Terminal (/Applications/Utilities/).

              Step 3 At the prompt, type: sudo pico /etc/nsmb.conf

              Step 4 Press Return.

              Step 5 Enter your password when prompted, then press Return again.

              Step 6 You should see an empty file and a "New File" notice at the bottom of the pico window. If you do not see the "New File" notice, this file already exists.

              Step 7 Enter the following into the file so that it appears as follows:

              [default]
              minauth=none

              Step 8 Save the file (press Control + O), press Return, then exit pico (Control + X).

              Step 9 Type in: sudo chmod a+r /etc/nsmb.conf

              Step 10 Press Return.

              Step 11 Restart your computer.

              Model DSM-G600_revA1
              Question Iīve installed a hard drive in my DSM-G600 A1, why does it say it only has a few megabytes of space on it?
              Answer The internal drive has previously been formatted to a format that the DSM-G600 revA1 does not support. The unit is writing to the hard drive’s flash buffer and not to the actual disk. You will need to connect the drive as a secondary drive on a PC and delete all partitions. Then you can reinstall the drive in the DSM-G600 revA1 and utilize it to itīs full capacity.
              Model DSM-G600_revA1 / DSM-G600_revB
              Question Is the DSM-G600 revision A1 upgradeable to revision B?
              Answer No, revision A1 of the DSM-G600 cannot be upgraded to revision B.
              Model DSM-G600_revA1 / DSM-G600_revB
              Question I’ve installed an IDE hard drive. Why isnīt the DSM-G600 detecting it?
              Answer Check both connections of the IDE cable. During installation, it is possible that the cable may have come loose from the circuit board. Verify that the jumper is set to Master or Cable Select. Verify that the drive is working by connecting it to a PC or some other device to see if it can be found and used.
              Model DSM-G600_revA1 / DSM-G600_revB
              Question What should the IDE hard drive’s jumper setting be set to before I install it into the DSM-G600?
              Answer The jumper should be set to either Master or Cable Select.
              Model DSM-G600_revA1 / DSM-G600_revB
              Question How do I create a user on my DSM-G600?
              Answer Step 1 Log into the DSM-G600 using the Easy Search Utility or open a web browser and enter the IP address of the DSM-G600 or //dsm-g600 into the address bar.

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and select Users.

              Step 3 Enter the desired user name in the User Name input field.

              Step 4 Enter the desired user password in the Password input field.

              Step 5 Enter the password again to confirm, in the Confirm Password input field.



              Step 6 Click Apply. The User name will be displayed in the Users List.



              Created users will now be available to setup for Network access and FTP Server access.
              Model DSM-G600_revA1 / DSM-G600_revB
              Question How do I setup an FTP server behind a router on the DSM-G600?
              Answer Step 1: Log into the DSM-G600 configuration and click on the Advanced tab and select FTP Server.

              Step 2: Setup you users FTP Server Settings and Save settings.

              Step 3: Start the FTP server.




              If you are behind a router, you will need to forward the FTP port from the router to the DSM-G600. Additional filtering and firewall settings may need to be modified on your router to allow FTP Access to the DSM-G600 from the Internet. Once the port has been forwarded on the router, users from the internet will access the FTP server through the WAN IP address of the router.

              Step 4: Setup Port Forwarding rule.

              **If you are using a D-Link router, such as the WBR-2310 used in the example below, your port forwarding rule should be similar to the following:

              Name -Name the DSM-G600 FTP server rule.
              IP Address -Enter the IP address of the DSM-G600.
              Public Port               -Enter the public FTP port. By default, the port is 21.
              Private Port               -Enter the private FTP port. By default, the port is 21.
              Traffic               -Type Set the traffic type to TCP.



              If you use an FTP port other than 21, then users accessing the FTP server using an FTP client will have to specify the non-standard port, and users who are using a browser will have to specify the port in the URL (e.g. ftp://ftp.dsmg600.com:3000).
              Model DSM-G600_revB
              Question Why am I unable to write to my USB drive when it is connected to my DSM-G600 revB?
              Answer Your USB drive is formatted with the NTFS file system. The DSM-G600 revB is not able to write to a NTFS formatted USB drive.

              You can use the format utility in the web based configuration of the DSM-G600 to format the USB drive to FAT32. If you choose FAT32 for your USB drive, it will have read and write functions with the DSM-G600 revB and it will also be useable with a Windows based PC.

              Note: All data will be lost when you format a drive.
              Model DSM-G600_revB
              Question Can I install an IDE hard drive into the DSM-G600 revB without formatting it?
              Answer No, you will not be able to save data on an unformatted IDE hard drive. The DSM-G600 B1 can only use an IDE hard drive that has been formatted with either the EXT3 or EXT2 format. By default, the DSM-G600 B1 will format your drive with EXT3.

              A FAT32 or NTFS formatted IDE drive will not be functional inside the DSM-G600 B1 until it is reformatted to use either EXT3 or EXT2.

              Note: All data will be lost when you format a hard drive in the DSM-G600_revB.
              Model DSM-G600_revB
              Question Will the DSM-G600 revB work with my DSM-320/320RD/520?
              Answer Yes, the DSM-G600 revB has a built-in UPnP AV server which allows it to serve content directly to a UPnP AV compliant media adapter.

              Because you will be connecting directly to the DSM-G600 revB from your media adapter you will not need to run the Media Server Software on a PC.
              Model DSM-G600_revB
              Question Will the DSM-G600 revB work with Mac OS X?
              Answer The DSM-G600 will work on Macintosh networks with some limitations.

              The Easy Search Utility that is included with your DSM-G600 will not work with Mac. In order to install your DSM-G600 on a Mac, follow these steps:

              Step 1: Install your hard disk drive as instructed in the Install Guide. (Note: you will not be offered to format your hard drive)

              Step 2: Connect the DSM-G600 directly to the Macintosh.

              Step 3: Go to your Network Preferences and create a New Location; name it DSM-G600.



              Step 4: Select Built in Ethernet from the Show dropdown menu.



              Step 5: Under Configure Ipv4, select Using DHCP with manual address.



              Setp 6: For the IP Address enter 192.168.0.1. (This is to put your Mac on the same subnet as the factory default setting of the DSM-G600 so they can communicate during setup)



              Step 7: The subnet will automatically fill in as 255.255.255.0.

              Step 8: Click on the Apply Now button; The LAN and HDD ledīs on the front of the DSM-G600 will blink for a few minutes while it connects.

              To monitor your ethernet connection during setup, select Network Status from the Show dropdown menu. You should see at least Ethernet and perhaps Airport and Modem depending on your particular setup. The little dot to the left turns red for no connection, yellow if there are issues, and green for connected without issues. Wait for your status indicator to turn green before you attempt the next step.



              Step 9: Open your web browser and enter the IP address for the DSM-G600. (it should be 192.168.0.101)

              Step 10: You will now be prompted to format the drive.

              Note: The drive you installed will be formatted in EXT3 format, not the standard Mac format, and you will NOT be able to remove it and use it in a Mac.

              Step 11: Youīll get a warning stating: Formatting the drive will cause all info to be lost. Would you like to continue? Click on Ok to continue.

              Step 12: When the DSM-G600 is finished formatting you will be prompted to restart. Click on Restart and then Next to continue.

              Step 13: You will now be taken to the log in screen.



              Step 14: Enter admin for the User Name and leave the Password field blank. Click on Config.

              Step 15: Click on the LAN tab on the lefthand side. Here you can change the IP address of the DMS-G600 to match your network.



              Step 16: Connect the DSM-G600 to your network hub, switch, or router.

              Step 17: You can now log back into the DSM-G600 using the IP address you assigned it.
              Model DSM-G600_revB
              Question What can I try if the Maximum Storage capacity, of my Hard Drive, is not being fully detected by the DSM-G600 revB?
              Answer Note: The minimum firmware required for larger hard drives is version 1.02.

              Click here for typical step-by-step instructions for downloading firmware.

              Try wiping out all partitions on your Hard Drive, by connecting it to a PC first.

              Once cleared, it should format properly under firmware version 1.02, in the DSM-G600 revB.
              Model DSM-G600_revB
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware for my DSM-G600?
              Answer Please read before upgrade:

              Upgrading firmware (in most cases) will reset all the settings to default which means you will lose all your settings (including your password). You do not have to upgrade Incrementally. You can upgrade the newest version. You cannot use the backup settings feature and apply it to the newer firmware. Do NOT upgrade firmware from a computer with a wireless connection. Use a computer that you can connect to the device using an ethernet cable. You may damage the DSM-G600 due to the increased packet loss with a wireless connection.

              Step 1 Download the latest firmware.

              Click here for step-by-step instructions for downloading firmware.

              Step 2 Once youīve downloaded the firmware, Log into the DSM-G600 using the Easy Search Utility or open a web browser and enter the IP address of the DSM-G600 or //dsm-g600 into the address bar

              Step 3 Enter your username (admin) and your password. Click Config to enter the web configuration for the device.



              Step 4 Click on the Tools tab and then the Firmware button on the left side. Click on the Browse button and browse to the .bin (or .dlf) file you downloaded in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click Open.



              Step 5 Click Apply. It may take a up to 30 seconds for the upgrade to complete. Click on the Continue button. The firmware is now upgraded.

              Note: If you get a Page cannot be displayed or similar error after clicking Continue, close and reopen your browser, then log into the device again.
              Model DSM-G600_revB
              Question I keep receiving the error, An īAllow all usersī rule and a īSpecific Userī rule can not both be applied to the same folder. How do I fix this error?
              Answer By default, the DSM-G600_revB sets user privileges to All Accounts.

              To remove this rule do the following:

              Step 1 Log in to the DSM-G600_revB web configuration.

              Step 2 Click Advanced and then click Network Access on the left.

              Step 3 Click Modify next to the drive you are creating users for.



              Step 4 Uncheck All Accounts, select the primary user for the drive, and then click Apply.



              Step 5 Now that the main user account has been set for the drive, you can add specific folder permissions for each user you have created for that drive.
              Model DSM-G600_revB
              Question I have just powered my DSM-G600 revB on. How do I access and configure my Network Storage Enclosure?
              Answer Step 1: If you have not done so, plug the ethernet cable from the LAN port on your DSM-G600 into an available LAN port on your router or PC.

              Step 2: If your router has DHCP, the DSM-G600 should obtain an IP Address from it automatically.

              Note: If this is a direct connection to a computer, you will need to statically assign an IP address on your computer to allow you to connect to the DSM-G600. The default IP address for the DSM-G600 is 192.168.0.99.

              How do I assign a static IP address to my computer?

              Step 3: Locate the Easy Search Utility on your CD or download it from http://support.dlink.com/downloads/. Run the Easy Search Utility.

              Step 4: After you have opened the Easy Search Utility, your DSM-G600 should be discovered automatically. If it is not discovered, press the refresh button on the utility.



              Step 5: Select the DSM-G600 from the Adapter list.

              Step 6: In the LAN section, make sure that DHCP Client is set to disabled. This will allow your DSM-G600 to keep the same IP address all the time.

              Step 7: Click Apply to confirm that DHCP is selected.

              Step 8: Wait until the power light is solid and the LAN light is flickering. At that time, click Configuration.

              Step 9: The DSM-G600 login prompt should come up. Type in admin for the username and then click Config.

              Note: If the login does not come up but a large Format button does, you will need to format the internal drive before proceeding to the DSM-G600 configuration.

              Step 10: You can now proceed with using the wizard. This will guide you through setting up a password, wireless connection and adding the DSM-G600 to your workgroup.
              Model DSM-G600_revB
              Question How do I configure my DSM-G600 revB as an Access Point for my wireless clients?
              Answer Step 1: Login to the DSM-G600 Web Configuration.

              Step 2: Select Wireless on the Home tab.



              Step 3: Select Access Point in the Mode section.

              Step 4: Select Enable.

              Step 5: Enter a name next to SSID.

              Step 6: Select the channel you wish to broadcast your wireless signal on.

              Note: Auto Select is enabled by default. If you wish to choose a specific channel, uncheck Auto Select and select the channel that you want to use.

              Step 7: Select the type of wireless security you are going to use or select none for unsecured access to your wireless AP.

              Step 8: Click Apply.
              Model DSM-G600_revB / DSM-G600_revA
              Question What size hard drive sizes are supported by the DSM-G600?
              Answer The DSM-G600 supports hard drive sizes up to and including 250GB.
              Model DSN-3200
              Question I have followed the link to install java on my computer, but i still cannot log on to the DSN-3200 GUI.
              Answer You need to use Java 1.4 to properly use the GUI of the DSN-3200.

              Click here to download Java 1.4.
              Model DSN-3200 / DSN-3400
              Question How do I change the IP address of the DSN-3200/3400 SAN Array?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, and enter the IP address of the DSN-3200/3400. (192.168.1.1)

              Step 2 The Enter your username (admin) and your password (admin). Click OK to enter the web configuration for the device.



              Step 3 Click on the X Stack icon at the top of the Physical Resources tab. On the File menu, click Configure Out of Band port.

              Step 4 Complete the fields in the dialog box:

            • IP Address/Subnet Mask after restart - Enter the desired IP address.
            • Hostname/Gateway after restart - Enter the Gateway IP address.



              Step 5 On the File menu, click Restart. When the Confirmation Prompt appears, click Yes.
              • Model DSN-3200 / DSN-3400
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on the DSN-3200/3400 Series SAN arrays?
              Answer Step 1 Download the latest firmware.

              Click here for the latest firmware

              Step 2 Once youīve downloaded the firmware, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape and enter the IP address of the device.

              Note: Please make sure that you operating systemīs, or third party softwareīs firewall is disabled. If it is not disabled firmware upgrade may not complete properly.

              Step 3 Enter your username (admin) and your password (admin). Click on OK to enter the web configuration for the device.



              Step 4 Click on View, then select Firmware Upgrade.



              Step 5 Highlight the firmware file, click Open.



              Step 6 When the Device Restart Prompt appears, click OK.



              Model DSN-3200 / DSN-3400 / DSN-3200-10 / DSN-3200-20 / DSN-3400-10 / DSN-3400-20
              Question What hard drives are recommended for the DSN-3000 series SAN arrays?
              Answer The following Seagate Barracuda ES family of enterprise class SATA hard drives are all recommended for use with the DSN-3000 series SAN arrays. Hard drives not on this list will not be supported by D-Link.
              • ST3250620NS 250GB
              • ST3400620NS 400GB
              • ST3500630NS 500GB
              • ST3750640NS 750GB
              For more information on Seagate drives, please take a look at the information provided at http://www.seagate.com/cda/products/discsales/enterprise/family/1,1086,775,00.html.
              Model DSN-3200 / DSN-3400 / DSN-3200-10 / DSN-3200-20 / DSN-3400-10 / DSN-3400-20
              Question How do I launch the management console of my DSN series SAN array?
              Answer Step 1: Make sure your computerīs NIC card is in the same IP subnet of 192.168.1.x as the management port of the DSN SAN array.

              Step 2: Open an internet browser and type the IP address of the DSN SAN array into the address bar. By default, this IP address is 192.168.1.1. The management console login screen should appear like this:



              Step 3: Type in your username and password and then click on Ok. By default, the username is admin and the password is admin.
              Model DSN-3200 / DSN-3400 / DSN-3200-10 / DSN-3200-20 / DSN-3400-10 / DSN-3400-20
              Question What do I do if I have a hard drive failure while using my DSN-3000 series SAN array?
              Answer Hard drives are covered under their manufacturerīs warranty.
              Model DSS-16+
              Question I recently purchased a D-Link DSS-16+, 16-Port 10/100Mbps switch. According to the specs on your website this switch is fan cooled. The unit shipped to me is not fan cooled although the catalog number appears to match. Is this a misprint?
              Answer There are different versions of the DSS-16+ switch. Earlier versions, A1 & A2, with a power input voltage of 5v/5.0A have a cooling fan inside. A later version, E1, with the first digits of the serial number fixed at 0140E1, have a power input voltage of 3.3V/3A and do not have a cooling fan inside. Version E1 also has one uplink port rather than two and has the same dimensions and performance as the earlier models.
              Model DSS-24
              Question Is the DSS-24 RFC 1542 compliant?
              Answer RFC 1542 is "Clarifications and Extensions for the Bootstrap Protocol". The DSS-24 is an unmanaged switch. It doesnīt support any BOOTP function.
              Model DSS-24+
              Question Is there an uplink port on the DSS-24+?
              Answer The DSS-24+’s ports can automatically detect MDI/MDIX connection.
              Model DSS-5 , DSS-8 , DSS-16 , DSS-24
              Question How do I configure my DSS switch?
              Answer The DSS series are unmanaged switches. There are no configurations needed for these devices.
              Model DSS-5+
              Question Does the DSS-5+ switch have an uplink port?
              Answer There are different revisions of the DSS-5+. Revisions A-F have one uplink port and Revisions G and above have Auto-MDI ports which automatically sense the type of cable being used (e.g. Straight-through or Crossover) and adjust themselves accordingly to pass data over the network.

              The revision will be listed on the bottom of the switch.
              Model DUB-A2
              Question How do I know what hardware revision my DUB-A2 has?
              Answer The version is printed on the left top corner of the card. Also, capacitors were added in the upper right corner on revision A2. Drivers are not interchangeable between the two versions. Click picture to download drivers, manual, and quick installation guides.


              Revision A1

              Revision A2
              Model DUB-C2
              Question Why am I not getting USB 2.0 speeds from my DUB-C2?
              Answer You will not be able to acheive the speeds USB 2.0 provides because Windows XP will try to install its built-in drivers for the DUB-C2 PCMCIA adapter. To correct this problem follow the steps below:

              Step 1 Put the Device Driver CD into the selected drive. If you download the drivers from the web, you will need to extract and locate the following 3 files:
              • OUSB2.INF
              • OUSB2HUB.SYS
              • OUSBEHCI.SYS
              Click here to download drivers

              Step 2 Insert the DUB-C2 PCMCIA card into its slot on the computer.

              Step 3 Windows XP (SP1) will automatically discover and install the following USB related drivers. These can be located in Device Manager under Universal Serial Bus Controllers.
              • NEC PCI to USB Enhanced Host Controller B1
              • NEC PCI to USB Open Host Controller
              • NEC PCI to USB Open Host Controller
              • USB Root Hub
              • USB Root Hub
              • USB Root Hub
              Step 4 Right-click on My Computer and select Properties. Click the Hardware tab and then click on Device Manager.

              Step 5 Click on the + next to Universal Serial Bus Controllers. Double-click on the following:
              • NEC PCI to USB Enhanced Host Controller B1
              Step 6 Select the Update Driver button.

              Step 7 Select the Install from a list or a specific location (Advanced) Radio Button. Click Next.

              Step 8 Select the Donīt search. I will choose the driver to install radio button.

              Step 9 Click the Next button.

              Step 10 Click Have Disk... Browse for the location of the .inf file select the file and click Open.

              After window has finished copying the correct files to your computer you should then see the following entries located under Universal Serial Bus Controllers in Device manager.

              • D-Link DUB-C2 USB 2.0 2-Port Card Bus
              • USB 2.0 Root Hub Device
              Model DUB-CR200
              Question Which memory cards work with the DUB-CR200?
              Answer The DUB-CR200 will work with the following memory cards:

            • Secure Digital (SD)
            • Multi Media Card (MMC)
            • Compact Flash (Type I & II)
            • Smart Media (SM)
            • IBM Micro Drive
            • Memory Stick (MS)
            • Memory Stick Pro (MS Pro)
              • Model DUB-H4 / DUB-H7
              Question How do I install my DUB-H4 or DUB-H7 USB hub?
              Answer Note: Do NOT plug any devices in the ports of the USB hub until installation is complete. Once the hub installs, plug in your USB devices one at a time. In most cases, you will need to reinstall your USB product since Windows will detect it as a new device.

              Step 1 Plug the AC adapter into the receptor located on the back panel of the hub, then plug the other end into a power strip or wall outlet.

              Step 2 Plug the USB type B connector (the smaller end of the cable) into the back of the hub.

              Step 3 Plug the USB type A connector (the flatter, narrow end of the cable) into an available USB 2.0 port on your computer (or USB 1.1 if you do not have USB 2.0).

              Your computer will automatically detect and install the USB hub. You installation is now complete. You may now connect USB 2.0 or USB 1.1 devices to an available USB port on the front end of the USB hub.
              Model DUB-H4 / DUB-H7
              Question Every time I try to restart my USB device, my DUB-H4/H7 will not recognize it. Why?
              Answer If you have a CD-Writer or any other USB 2.0 device and are running into the problem of the DUB-H4 not detecting your devices after they have been powered off and then back on, install Service Pack 1 for Windows XP. After the installation of this Service Pack, you should now be able to power on and off your devices that are connected to the DUB-H4 2.0 hub normally.

              Download Service Pack 1 here.
              Model DUB-H7
              Question What are the minimum system requirements for installing my DUB-H7?
              Answer Before you install the DUB-H7, make sure your computer meets the below minimum requirements:
              • Pentium 233-MHz or faster with 32 MB RAM
              • Available USB 1.1 port for USB 1.1 operation
              • Available USB 2.0 port for USB 2.0 operation
              • Windows XP, 2000, Me, 98 Second Edition, Mac OS X (10.1 and above)
              Model DUB-H7 / DUB-CR200 / DUB-H4 / DSB-H3E
              Question Why are my USB 2.0 devices not getting the full speed through my USB hub?
              Answer Connecting a USB 1.0 device to the hub will force all other devices to 1.0 speeds. If you have USB 2.0 and USB 1.0 devices connected, they would all operate at USB 1.0 speed.

              Also, If several devices are connected to the hub and working in parallel (for example, a DBT-120, DWL-G122 and USB printer), then the USB bandwidth and available power will be divided.
              Model DVC-1000
              Question What has been changed in the latest firmware 3.0.0.221?
              Answer Release notes:

            • A "Save Recent Calls" checkbox in the Recent Calls screen that allows recently called phone numbers to be saved only when the checkbox is checked. Unchecking the box erases all numbers from the Recent Calls list.

            • In the Video Settings screen "Automatically adjust video contrast" was changed to "Automatically adjust video brightness". This was based upon analysis of what the CMOS sensor was actually doing.

            • The 3.0.0.221 firmware also adds code to support a new model of CMOS sensor for hardware version A2 (this results in different Video Settings screens depending on the hardware version of the DVC-1100.) The "Automatically adjust video brightness" checkbox does NOT appear in hardware with the new CMOS sensor.
              • Model DVC-1000
              Question What has been changed in the latest firmware?
              Answer Release notes for firmware version 3.0.0.221:

            • A "Save Recent Calls" checkbox in the Recent Calls screen that allows recently called phone numbers to be saved only when the checkbox is checked. Unchecking the box erases all numbers from the Recent Calls list.

            • In the Video Settings screen "Automatically adjust video contrast" was changed to "Automatically adjust video brightness". This was based upon analysis of what the CMOS sensor was actually doing.

            • The 3.0.0.221 firmware also adds code to support a new model of CMOS sensor for hardware version A2 (this results in different Video Settings screens depending on the hardware version of the DVC-1100.) The "Automatically adjust video brightness" checkbox does NOT appear in hardware with the new CMOS sensor.
              • Model DVC-1000
              Question My remote control is defective. How do I get a replacement remote control?
              Answer Step 1 Verify that the remote control is defective.
              • Check to make sure the batteries have been inserted correctly into the remote.
              • Replace the batteries.
              • Be sure to aim the remote directly at the front of the DVC-1000 from short range, not the TV.

              Step 2 If you are unable to make the remote control function, please return the product to your point of purchase.

              Step 3 If you are unable to return the DVC-1000 to the point of purchase, please contact our 24 hour technical support line (1-800-934-2393) to obtain a case number from a technician.

              Step 4 Once you have a case number, please contact our RMA department (1-888-499-9945) to arrange for an exchange. Give your case number and be sure to ask for a remote control exchange only. You may not need to exchange the DVC-1000 itself.

              Note: A remote control exchange is only available if the RMA department has additional remote controls. If the RMA department does not have additional remote controls, the DVC-1000 will need to be exchanged as well.
              Model DVC-1000
              Question How do I adjust the contrast on the DVC-1000?
              Answer There are two methods of adjusting the contrast on the DVC-1000.

              Method One (automatic contrast adjustment): From the main screen, click Settings > General and check the box Automatically Adjust Video Contrast. Un-check the box if you do not wish to have the contrast adjusted automatically.

              Method Two (manual contrast adjustment): Press the B button on the remote control for a one time contrast adjustment.
              Model DVC-1000
              Question How large will the image be?
              Answer As large as the TV screen. i2eye supports three screen formats. The first is a picture-in-picture mode that has the incoming video covering about half the television screen and the outbound video in a smaller window. The second is full screen mode. This mode displays the incoming video across the entire television screen. The third is connection status mode. This mode displays the picture-in-picture mode and gives you an idea of the upload and download speed.
              Model DVC-1000
              Question Can i2eye be used with a phone or answering machine?
              Answer Yes, i2eye connects directly to a standard handset telephone, wired or wireless. Using the handset ensures a more private conversation and will allow for full duplex audio (two way simultaneous conversation) which is not available when using speakerphone mode. i2eye is not connected to the standard phone service, so it cannot be used to make standard phone calls.

              If you connect i2eye to a standard phone with an integrated answering machine, the machine will be able to relay outgoing messages for missed videophone calls and can record incoming messages for videocallers. Since i2eye is connected to a broadband connection and not a standard phone line, the answering machine will work only with i2eye and cannot record messages from standard phone calls.
              Model DVC-1000 , DVC-1100
              Question How do I hook up a phone flasher to the DVC-1000/1100?
              Answer Step 1 You will need to make sure that you have a flasher that hooks up to a standard RJ-11 Phone jack.

              Step 2 Make sure that your phone cord is long enough to connect the flasher from the DVC-1000/1100 to the wall socket that your wanting to use your flasher with.

              Step 3 Plug the phone cable into the back on the DVC-1000/1100.

              Step 4 Plug your flasher into the power socket.

              Step 5 Plug your phone line into your flasher.

              Step 6 Set your flasher to flash during incoming calls (see manufactures instructions on how to do this).

              Step 7 Go to Settings > General and uncheck Always answer incoming calls and then click OK to return to Settings.

              Step 8 Have someone give you a call on your DVC-1000/1100, you should then have your flasher working appropriately as the call is coming in.

              Note: You do not need to use a phone to make the flasher work. But if you want to use a phone and flasher at the same time and your flasher or phone doesnīt have an in and out port you will need to get a RJ-11 splitter (with 1 male connection and 2 female connections) and plug that into the back on the DVC-1000/1100. Then plug the phone into one port and the flasher into the other.
              Model DVC-1000 / DSA-3100
              Question How do I configure my DSA-3100 for a DVC-1000?
              Answer Step 1 Locate the IP address of your DVC-1000.

              Click here for step-by-step instructions on locating the IP address of your DVC-1000.

              Step 2 Connect the DVC-1000 to the Private LAN port on the DSA-3100 and the Internet connection to the WAN port.

              Step 3 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DSA-3100 in the address bar (default is https://192.168.0.40). Remember to include https before the IP address. Press Enter.



              Step 4 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click Enter.



              Step 5 Click the Home tab at the top and then click WAN on the left side.

              Step 6 Select Static IP Address and enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway for your WAN connection. Click Apply.



              Step 7 Click Private Network on the left side and enter the primary DNS server of your ISP. Click Apply



              Step 8 Click the Advanced tab at the top and then click Virtual Server on the left side.



              Step 9 Configure the following:
              • External Service Port - Enter 1720
              • Local Server IP address - Enter the IP address of the DVC-1000
              • Local Service Port - Enter 1720
              • Type - Select TCP
              • Select Enable
              Step 10 Click Apply.

              Step 11 Click Firewall on the left side.

              Step 12 Select an available firewall rule.



              Step 13 Configure the following:
              • Name - Enter i2eye1
              • Select Check to enable this rule
              • Action - Select Pass
              • Protocol - Select TCP
              • Source IF - Select WAN
              • Source Subnet Mask - Select the subnet mask of your WAN connection
              • Destination IF - Select PriLN
              • Destination Address - Enter the IP address of the DVC-1000
              • Destination Subnet Mask - Select the subnet mask of your network
              • Destination Start Port - Enter 15328
              • Destination End Port - Enter 15333


              Step 14 Click Apply.

              Step 15 Click Firewall on the left side.

              Step 16 Select an available firewall rule.



              Step 17 Configure the following:
              • Name - Enter i2eye2
              • Select Check to enable this rule
              • Action - Select Pass
              • Protocol - Select UDP
              • Source IF - Select WAN
              • Source Subnet Mask - Select the subnet mask of your WAN connection
              • Destination IF - Select PriLN
              • Destination Address - Enter the IP address for the DVC-1000
              • Destination Subnet Mask - Select the subnet mask of your network
              • Destination Start Port - Enter 15328
              • Destination End Port - Enter 15333


              Step 18 Click Apply.

              Step 19 Check that Use Private IP Address is checked on the DVC-1000:
              • Step 1 Go to Settings and then press Enter.
              • Step 2 Go to Network and then press Enter.
              • Step 3 Go to Public IP and select Use Private IP Address. Click OK.
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100
              Question How do I setup my DVC-1000/DVC-1100 out-of-box?
              Answer Step 1 Make sure that the power switch is in the Off position.

              Step 2 Connect an Ethernet cable to the ETHERNET port on the back of the unit.

              Step 3 If you are using an external mic connected it to the MIC port on the back of the unit.

              Step 4 Connect your telephone to the PHONE port on the back of the unit.

              Step 5 Connect the audio (white) cable to the Audio In port on the back of your TV or VCR and then to the AUDIO OUT port on the back of the unit.

              Step 6 Connect the video (yellow) cable to the Video In port on the back of your TV or VCR and then to the VIDEO OUT port on the back of the unit.

              Step 7 DVC-1100 ONLY (skip to Step 8 if you have a DVC-1000): Connect the antenna to the      colored connector on the back of the unit.

              Step 8 Connect the power adaptor to the POWER port on the back of the unit and then to a wall outlet.

              Out-of-box setup is now complete. Put the power switch in the On position to turn the unit on.

              The below diagram illustrates the initial setup of the DVC-1000/DVC-1100, which is described above:

              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100
              Question What do the LEDs (lights) on the DVC-1000 and DVC-1100 mean?
              Answer LED stands for Light-Emitting Diode. The DVC-1000/1100 has the following LEDs for monitoring its operation:

              LEDs Location Activity
              Power Front - Far right

              A green light indicates the DVC-1000/1100 is on.

              Status Front - Left of power light

              This light turns on briefly at power up. It is then off during normal operation.

              Call Monitor Front - Left side of lens

              Steady red light indicates video is being sent.
              Link Status Back - Left (ethernet port)

              Steady Amber light indicates the network connection is good.
              Activity Back - Right (ethernet port)

              Steady or blinking Green light indicates the DVC-1000/1100 is transmitting data.

              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100
              Question How do I use an external microphone with the DVC-1000 and DVC-1100?
              Answer The DVC-1000 (hardware revision A2 and higher) and DVC-1100 have an external microphone input (3.5MM Mini Mono plug). For proper functionality with an external microphone, connect the microphone before the unit is powered on.
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100
              Question Can the DVC-1000 or DVC-1100 be used outside the United States (with PAL televisions)?
              Answer There are two types of DVC-1000/1100: NTSC and PAL.

            • NTSC units can be purchased in the United States and will ONLY work with NTSC televisions.
            • PAL units can be purchased outside of the United States and will ONLY work with PAL televisions.

              Both units are able to call each other normally.

              Please visit our International Directory to find a D-Link office near you that can direct you to a supplier of PAL Videophones.

              Note: Power supplies are not sold seperately.
              • Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100
              Question How do I use the remote control on my DVC-1000/1100?
              Answer


              1 - Use the number keys when numeric input is required, (e.g., a telephone number or IP address). Enter numbers by pressing the number keys.

              2 - The * (asterisk - sometimes called a star key) is used to enter a . (period, also called a dot.)

              3 - The # (pound) key is used to enter the # character.

              4 - The Cancel key is used to cancel a command.

              5 - When entering alphanumeric information, the left arrow key performs a backspace, deleting the character to the left of the on-screen cursor. Use the other arrows to navigate in the direction that the arrow points.

              6 - ENTER key

              7 - Speakerphone mode

              8 - Adjust contrast

              9 - Toggle (switch) between full screen and picture-in-picture

              10 - Toggle (switch) between self view and remote view

              11 - Turn audio on/off

              12 - Turn video on/off
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question What type of lens do the DVC-1000, DVC-1100 and DVC-2000 use and where can I purchase alternate lenses?
              Answer The DVC-1000/1100/2000 uses a 6.5mm miniature glass lens for board cameras.

              Click here for information on alternate lenses offered by D-Link

              Please use extreme caution when changing a lens. The threads on the inside of the lens-housing are very delicate and can not be repaired once they have been stripped.
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question How can I find the IP address of my DVC-1000/1100/2000 VideoPhone?
              Answer To find what your IP address is, please follow steps below:

              Step 1 From the Home screen on the unit, select Settings and then select Network.

              Step 2 Select Address and the IP address will be in the grey box marked IP Address.



              Note: If you are behind a NAT router or firewall, de-select Obtain an IP address automatically from the Address screen once youīve obtained a proper address. By de-selecting this option, the IP address will always stay the same. Since this is the address that you will need to enter into your port forwarding rules on the router, it is best if the address does not change.
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question Can I use the DVC-1000, DVC-1100 or DVC-2000 with a dial-up (56k) Internet connection?
              Answer No. The DVC-1000/1100/2000 is designed to work with IP-based broadband Ethernet connections only. Examples of IP-based broadband Ethernet connections are: Cable, DSL, Satellite and T1.
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question I am unable to obtain an internal IP address. What can I do?
              Answer Step 1 Verify a proper Ethernet connection is made and that a link light is present.

              Step 2 Confirm that a DHCP server is active and serving your internal network.

              Step 3 Replace the Ethernet cable if necessary (use the included cable).

              Step 4 If steps one through three do not resolve the problem, consider statically assigning an IP address to the DVC-1000/1100/2000.
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question Which selection should I make in the Public IP screen on my DVC-1000/1100/2000?
              Answer Use Auto-detect public IP address when:
              • Making calls over the internet.

              Use Use Private IP address when:
              • Making calls over the local network
              • Not connected to the internet
              • Connecting over a VPN

              Use Specify public IP when:
              • Making calls over the internet with a public IP address that is NOT the WAN address of your gateway/router. This would be a situation where multiple public IP addresses are available and are being mapped to internal IP addresses.
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question Why canīt I receive a call and/or make a call?
              Answer I can make calls but cannot receive calls:

              Most likely the problem is that you are behind a router and do not have the correct or all the ports open (forwarded).

              The DVC-1000, DVC-1100 and DVC-2000 require port 1720 (TCP) and ports 15328-15333 (TCP and UDP) open to function properly. Consult your router’s documentation or your network administrator for help with doing this.

              Click here if you are using a D-Link router


              I can receive calls but cannot call out:

              Most likely the problem is that the person your are trying to call is behind a router and does not have the correct or all the ports open (forwarded).

              The DVC-1000, DVC-1100 and DVC-2000 require port 1720 (TCP) and ports 15328-15333 (TCP and UDP) open to function properly.
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DVC-1000/1100/2000?
              Answer The firmware download process for the DVC-1000/1100/2000 is automatic by default. When properly connected to the Internet, the DVC-1000/1100/2000 will automatically check for firmware updates. If an update is found, the user will be prompted to download it and will be given the option to do it later or not at all.

              If updating the firmware for the DVC-1000/1100/2000, make sure the device is hard-wired to the router or modem. Do not update firmware wirelessly.

              DVC-1000/DVC-2000 FIRMWARE UPGRADE

              Step 1 From the Home screen on the unit, select Settings and then select Update.

              Step 2 Select Check Now. You will be prompted if there is an update available or not.



              Step 3 Click Yes to Restart.


              DVC-1100 FIRMWARE UPGRADE

              Step 1 From the Home screen on the unit, select Settings and then select Network.

              Step 2 Select Wireless and then de-select Enable Wireless. Click Yes to Restart.



              Step 3 After youīve hard-wired the DVC-1000/1100/2000 and it is fully restarted select Settings and then select Update.

              Step 4 Select Check Now. You will be prompted if there is an update available or not.



              Step 5 Click Yes to Restart.
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question When connecting my DVC-1000, DVC-1100 or DVC-2000 behind a router or firewall, what ports do I need to open and how do I open them?
              Answer The DVC-1000, DVC-1100 and DVC-2000 require port 1720 (TCP) and ports 15328-15333 (TCP and UDP) open to function properly. Consult your router’s documentation or your network administrator for help with doing this.

              Note: You will need the IP address of your i2eye to forward ports. Read here for instructions.

              The following is the configuration for the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, and DI-784 routers:

              This configuration is different than the one presented in the QIG and manual. It is a great alternative to use if the standard procedure does not work.

              Step 1 Open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then the Virtual Server button on the left.

              NetMeeting users: Be aware that NetMeeting and the i2eye cannot co-exist behind the same router simultaneously. If you want to use NetMeeting AND the i2eye behind the same router at different times, skip to step 3. You will need to disable the Netmeeting entry while you are using the i2eye and disable the i2eye entries (created in steps 5 and 6) while using NetMeeting.

              Look in the Virtual Servers List for an entry called NetMeeting. Click on the trash can to the right and delete this entry. If you do not have this entry, continue to the next step.



              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then the Virtual Server button on the left.

              Look in the Virtual Servers List for an entry called DVC-1000. Click on the trash can to the right and delete this entry. If you do not have this entry, continue to the next step.



              Step 4 Click on the Advanced tab and then the Firewall button on the left.

              Step 5 Create a new firewall rule:
              • Click Enabled
              • Enter a name (video1)
              • Click Allow
              • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the IP range start box, enter an *. Leave the IP range end box empty.
              • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the i2eye in the IP range start box. Leave the IP range end box empty. Under Protocol, select TCP. In the port range boxes, enter 1720 in the first box and leave the second box blank.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              • Click Apply and then Continue.


              Step 6 Create another new firewall rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (video2).
              • Click Allow.
              • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the IP range start box, enter an *. Leave the IP range end box empty.
              • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the i2eye in the IP range start box. Leave the IP range end box empty. Under Protocol, select *. In the port range boxes, enter 15328 in the first box and then 15333 in the second box. (The boxes are not big enough to display the whole number but as long as you typed carefully they will be in there).
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              • Click Apply and then Continue.
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question I am unable to detect the public IP address automatically but everything else seems to be working. What can I do?
              Answer You will need to restore your unit to factory defaults and re-configure.

              This will allow the DVC-1000/1100/2000 to automatically detect the public IP address again. You should only need to do this if youīve just recently upgraded the firmware or if youīve chosen a different selection on the PUBLIC IP screen and are unable to re-select Auto-detect public IP address.

              Go to Settings > Update and press Set Defaults to restore to factory defaults.
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question Does D-Link have test units that I can call to verify functionality of my DVC-1000 , DVC-1100 or DVC-2000?
              Answer Yes, we have two units that you can connect to for testing purposes.

              Unit 1:

            • Phone Number: 1-714-885-1212

              Unit 2:

            • Phone Number: 1-714-885-1213

              Note: These units are usually running 24/7. However, occasionally they are taken down for internal testing or may be busy due to other customers calling in to test their units.
              • Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question Can I record my videocalls?
              Answer Yes, videocalls are recordable using a VCR or DVD-R. You can connect the RCA output cable to a VCR or DVD-R that is in turn connected to the television, which enables recording of your videocalls.
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question What standards does i2eye support?
              Answer i2eye is based on the following standards:
              • H.323 (version 4) - industry standard video streaming over IP protocol
              • H.263 - Video
              • H.723 - Audio (default)
              • H.711 - Audio
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question What is the D-Link Directory Service?
              Answer The D-Link Directory Service is a D-Link hosted server which will allow you to register a phone number with your DVC-1000/1100/2000 VideoPhone. When someone with a DVC-1000/1100/2000 dials this phone number, your unit will ring and you will be able to accept a call. In the same manner you can call others by dialing their phone number. This allows you to contact another DVC-1000/1100/2000 without knowing itīs IP address. All DVC-1000/1100/2000s that have access to a broadbrand Internet connection will have the capability of using the D-Link Directory Service.

            • Can I register with the D-Link Directory Service if I do not have a DVC-1000/1100/2000?
            • Can I use the DVC-1000/1100/2000 with a non-D-Link gatekeeper or directory service?
              • Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question Can I register with the D-Link Directory Service if I do not have a DVC-1000, DVC-1100 or DVC-2000?
              Answer No. Only DVC-1000/1100/2000 videophones will be able to connect to and register with the D-Link Directory Service. Calls to and from all other devices must be made using an IP address.

            • What is the D-Link Directory Service?
            • Can I use the DVC-1000/1100/2000 with a non-D-Link gatekeeper or directory service?
              • Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question Can I use the DVC-1000/1100/2000 with a non-D-Link gatekeeper or D-Link directory service?
              Answer No. The DVC-1000/1100/2000 is designed to automatically connect to the D-Link Gatekeeper and Directory Service. This is a free service and is available to anyone with a DVC-1000/1100/2000.
            • What is the D-Link Directory Service?
            • Can I register with the D-Link Directory Service if I do not have a DVC-1000/1100/2000?
            • What if I am behind a NAT router or a firewall?
              • Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question What devices can I connect to with the DVC-1000, DVC-1100 or DVC-2000?
              Answer With the DVC-1000/1100/2000 you can connect to any hardware or software that is IP based and H.323 (version 4) compatible. If you are not sure if your hardware or software is IP based and H.323 (version 4) compatible, please contact the manufacturer/developer. If you are using a PC with a Windows operating system, you can use NetMeeting with any webcam to connect to the DVC-1000/1100/2000. NetMeeting is a common IP based and H.323 (version 4) compatible software application.

              Note: The DVC-1000/1100/2000 does not support SIP.
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question Can I use the DVC-1000, DVC-1100 or DVC-2000 with a computer and monitor instead of a TV?
              Answer Yes. The DVC-1000/1100/2000 can be used with a computer and monitor instead of a TV. However, you will need a TV Tuner / Video Capture device or a video card that accepts video input from an RCA jack.
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question Why do I see a black screen when I try to call out to another videophone unit?
              Answer There are several reasons why you would see a black screen while trying to make outbound calls on the DVC-1000/1100:

            • Make sure the lens cap is off.
            • Make sure port forwarding is configured correctly on your router.

              Click here for directions on connecting your DVC-1000 or DVC-1100 behind a router or firewall.
              • Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question Can I use two I2eye video phones behind my router?
              Answer I2Eye products from D-Link use h.323 to allow purchasers to see and talk over an IP connection. D-Link also provides a free service to allow you to give you phone a name for your callers to dial instead of a more complex Public IP address. This service only works for one device per Public IP address.

              Since the ports used cannot be changed, then only one device can be configured to be reached from the Internet. On the local side, the two phones can call each other.
              Model DVC-1000 / DVC-1100 / DVC-2000
              Question When I attempt to register my phone number through my i2eye device I receive an error stating that the phone number is already registered. What can I do to correct this?
              Answer If the phone number you are trying to use has already been registered and you replaced your device or you registered an incorrect phone number, please contact D-link Technical Support via email or call (877) 453-5465, and request to have the phone number removed from the directory server. Once this has been done you will be able to re-register your i2eye device with the proper phone number.
              Model DVC-1100
              Question What has been changed in the latest firmware?
              Answer Release notes for firmware version 4.0.0.221:

            • A "Save Recent Calls" checkbox in the Recent Calls screen that allows recently called phone numbers to be saved only when the checkbox is checked. Unchecking the box erases all numbers from the Recent Calls list.

            • In the Video Settings screen "Automatically adjust video contrast" was changed to "Automatically adjust video brightness". This was based upon analysis of what the CMOS sensor was actually doing.

            • The 4.0.0.221 firmware also adds code to support a new model of CMOS sensor for hardware version A2 (this results in different Video Settings screens depending on the hardware version of the DVC-1100.) The "Automatically adjust video brightness" checkbox does NOT appear in hardware with the new CMOS sensor.
              • Model DVC-1100
              Question How do I connect my DVC-1100 to a wireless network?
              Answer Enter the setup for the unit.

              Step 1 From the Home screen on the unit, select Settings and then select Network.

              Step 2 Select Wireless and then put an X in the Enable Wireless box. If there is already a X in the box, then skip step 3.

              Step 3 Click Yes when asked to restart unit. Once restarted, select Settings > Network > Wireless.

              Step 4 Select the SSID of the wireless device youīre trying to connect to and then press Enter on your remote (or select Settings). If you have SSID Broadcast disabled on your wireless router or access point, it will not show up in this list.



              Step 5 If you are not using WEP encryption, then select the following:
              • Auth Type = Open System
              • WEP Type = Disabled
              • Key ID = None




              If you are using WEP encryption, then select the following:
              • Auth Type = Shared Key
              • Key Length = select key length, (IE 64 bits, 128 bits, etc).
              • Key ID = select which Key ID number youīll be using (usually #1).
              • Keys = enter your WEP key next to the Key ID you selected.


              Step 6 Select Apply and then select OK to save your settings.
              Model DVC-2000
              Question How do I get back into the DVC-2000 options once I get the Ready for a Call screen on my DVC-2000?
              Answer When the DVC-2000 is not in an active call or has not had one placed recently, the DVC-2000 automatically switches back to the PSTN line. In order to change this press the Broadband button on the phone and you should receive your DVC-2000 menus.
              Model DVG-1120M
              Question Why doesnīt my second phone port work on my DVG-1120M?
              Answer When service is activated on the DVG-1120M, you are paying to have one phone port active. In order to have the second port activated, you will need to contact your VoIP service provider to inquire about premium package service plans.
              Model DVG-1120M
              Question How do I connect a DVG–1120M behind a D-Link router?
              Answer Step 1: Connect the ISP modem to the WAN port of the D-Link Router.

              Step 2: Ensure you have configured your Modem to work with your D-Link router. Ensure you can connect to the internet from a PC connected to your D-Link Router.

              For Cable Modem setup, click here.
              For DSL Modem setup, click here.

              Step 3: Connect an Ethernet cable from the LAN port of the D-Link router to the WAN port of DVG-1120M.

              Step 4: Connect your phone it to the DVG-1120M. Your phone should now properly work behind a D-Link Router.

              Note: If the following instructions do not work. Power cycle your Router and the DVG-1120M for 30 seconds. Plug in the Router first, wait 10 seconds then plug in the DVG-1120M.
              Model DVG-1120M / DVG-1402S_L
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DVG-1120M or 1402S/L?
              Answer Firmware upgrades are done automatically. The firmware cannot be upgraded via the web-based configuration.
              Model DVG-1402S
              Question How do I access the VoIP configuration page of my DVG-1402S?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DVG-1402S in the address bar (default is 192.168.15.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 Click on Login into the web-based management module.

              Step 3 From the left side, click on the Advanced button.



              Step 4 You will be prompted for a username and password.

              Step 5 Enter admin for the username and admin for the password. Click OK.



              Step 6 From the left side, click on SIP Configuration to access the SIP settings as shown below.



              Step7 From here, you can configure the SIP settings as provided by your VoIP Provider.

              Model DVG-1402S / DVG-1402S_L
              Question How do I change the LAN IP address on my DVG-1402S or DVG-1402S/L?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DVG-1402S in the address bar (default is 192.168.15.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 Click Login to the web-based management module.



              Step 3 On the left side click Configure WAN/LAN Access > Configure LAN Port > Configure LAN Port.



              Step 4 Below LAN IP Settings, enter the new IP address next to LAN IP Address.



              Step 5 Click Save, but do not restart the device. The DHCP server of the DVG-1402S will not be updated with the new LAN IP information automatically. It will have to be updated manually.



              Step 6 On the left side click Configure WAN/LAN Access > Configure LAN Port > DHCP Configuration > Dynamic IP Assignment.



              Step 7 Change the settings on the Dynamic IP Assignment page to match those saved in Step 4.



              Step 8 Click Save.



              Step 9 On the left side click Save and Restart System.



              Step 10 Select Yes next to Do you want to save the settings? and then click Restart.



              Step 11 Release/renew the IP address on your computer. Reboot your computer if you are unable to renew the IP address.

              Click on your operating system below for instructions on how to release/renew your IP address.
              Model DVG-1402S / DVG-1402S_L
              Question What is the username/password for the Advanced section of the web-based configuration?
              Answer Unfortunately, the Advanced section of the DVG-1402S and DVG-1402S/L web-based configuration is for service personnel only, and is not supported for end users.

              Please do not send any requests for the username and password for the Advanced section of the web-based configuration.
              Model DVG-1402S / DVG-1402S_L
              Question How do I reset my DVG-1402S to the factory default settings?
              Answer Step 1 Locate the reset on the back of the unit below the word RESET.



              Step 2 With the unit powered off, press and hold the Reset button with a paper clip.

              Step 3 Hold the Reset button and plug the power back in with the reset button still pressed.

              Step 4 Wait about 6 seconds then release the Reset button.

              Step 5 The unit will reboot. Allow 20-30 seconds before reconnecting.

              Step 6 The device is now at factory defaults.
              Model DVG-1402S_L
              Question Why doesnīt my second phone port work on my DVG-1402S/L?
              Answer When service is activated on the DVG-1402S/L, you are paying to have one phone port active. In order to have the second port activated, you will need to contact your VoIP service provider to inquire about premium package service plans.
              Model DVG-1402S_L / DGL-4100 / DGL-4300
              Question How do I get my DVG-1402S/L to work behind a Gaming Router?
              Answer In the configuration of your gaming router, under Advanced > Special Applications, uncheck the checkbox next to SIP and then save the settings and reboot the router.
              Model DVG-3004S / DVX-1000
              Question How do I add the DVG-3004S to a DVX-1000?
              Answer In this example we will be setting up a DVG-3004S Trunk Gateway. This gateway will allow the DVX-1000 to make calls out of and receive calls from PSTN lines. This setup proceedure involves two parts; configuring the DVG-3004S to interface with the DVX-1000 and configuring the DVX-1000 to accept the connection.


              Configuring the Trunk Gateway (DVG-3004S)

              Step 1: First the network interface will need to be setup. The default IP address of the DVG-3004S is 10.1.1.3 with a subnet mask of 255.0.0.0. You can setup the trunk gateway in one of two ways.
              • The first method is to use the console cable, make a connection via Hypeterminal, and issue the following commands: īifaddr -ip x.x.x.xī and īifaddr -mask x.x.x.xī. This will assign the IP address and subnet mask allowing you to connect from a local PC.
              • The second method is to reconfigure your PCīs IP address to be on the same subnet as the trunk gateway.
              Once you have configured the DVG-3004S to work within your computerīs subnet, access the deviceīs web interface. The administrative username is root with there is no password. You can also login with a username of administrator but this will grant you limited access.

              Step 2: Once you are logged into the web interface, click on Network Configuration. Complete the setup of the Network Interface by populating the IP, Subnet Mask, Gateway, and DNS fields.

              Step 3: Click on SIP Configuration. On this page we will begin to setup the trunk gateway to register with the IP PBX. You will need to fill in the following fields:
              • Mode: Select Proxy.
              • Primary Proxy IP Address: Enter the IP of the IP PBX.
              • Primary Proxy Port: This will be the typical SIP TCP port 5060.
              • Skip Secondary Proxy IP and Secondary Proxy Port.
              • Outbound Proxy: Enter the IP of the IP PBX.
              • Outbound Proxy Port: This will be the typical SIP TCP port 5060.
              • Prefix string can stay set to īnullī.
              • Line 1 - Line 4 Number.
              Note: When assigning the line number you must make sure that these numbers are not matching any extensions on the DVX-1000. For example, the default operator extension is 1003. There must be no Line Number with 1003. In most cases it is easiest to assign 001 through 004 for the line numbers. When setting up the trunk gateway on the DVX-1000 we will use the Line Number as the SIP User ID. Please write down these Line Numbers for future reference.

              Click on OK.

              Step 4: Click on Security Configuration. In this section we will be setting the SIP authentication requirements. This offers some security to prevent just any device from registering with the DVG-3004S.

              These numbers will be entered as the User Name and Password when setting up the gateway in the DVX-1000 IP PBX. Please write these down for future reference.
              • Enter an account number for lines 1 - 4.
              • Enter a password for lines 1-4.
              • Click on OK.
              In the examples above we used 001 through 004 to match the Line Numbers for ease of setting up.

              Step 5: Click on Line Configuration. In this section we will use the Hot Line to redirect incoming calls to the Auto Attendant and to see whether the DVG-3004S has registered with the DVX-1000.

              To setup the Hot Line:
              • Enter the extension of the Auto Attendant on the DVX-1000. This can be found under Auto Attendant->Configuration on the DVX-1000.
              • Click on OK.
              Step 6: Click on System Configuration. Verify that Keypad Type is RFC2833.

              Step 7: Click on Commit Data. This will commit the changes to memory.

              Step 8: Click on Reboot System. Click on Reboot to restart the DVG-3004S with appropriate changes. The DVG-3004S is now setup and ready to go. Plug the PSTN lines into the DVG-3004S.



              Configuring the IP PBX (DVX-1000)

              Step 1: Open a web browser and connect to the web interface of the DVX-1000.

              Step 2: Click on Call Server and then select Gateways. Click on Add New.

              Step 3: Enter the trunk gateway information. Fill in the following fields:
              • Gateway ID: This can be any name you decide.
              • Gateway Type: For the DVG-3004S we will select PSTN.
              • Domain Name: Enter the IP of the DVG-3004S.
              • Port: 5060
              • Max Calls Supported: Uncheck unlimited and enter 1
              • Session Refresh Required: Leave unchecked
              • Outbound Proxy Parameters: Check the Enabled option
              • Domain Name: Enter the IP of the DVG-3004S.
              • Port: 5060
              • Registration Required: Check
              • SIP User ID: This will be the same as the ‘Line1 Number’ in the DVG-3004S.
              • For our example we used 001 for Port 1. Each port will be entered individually as a gateway.
              • Username: This will be the same as the ‘Line1 Account’ found in the DVG-3004S.
              • Password & Retype Password: This will be the same as the ‘Line1 Password’ found in the DVG-3004S.
              Click on Apply when all information has been added.

              Step 4: Click on Routes under the Call Server menu. Click on the blue circular button under Route View and then click on Add New. Enter the trunk gateway information into the LocalRouteGroup.

              Step 5: After you have entered the gateway information into the DVX-1000 you will now add that gateway to the LocalRouteGroup to allow the phones to route calls out to the trunk gateway. Fill in the following fields:
              • Route Group Name: This will default to the LocalRouteGroup.
              • Duration Parameters: Choose the time, date and days of the week this gateway will be used.
              • Route Name: Enter a name for this new route.
              • Destination Type: Choose PSTN.
              • Destination ID: This should show the newly added route. If you’ve created other routes find the route for the DVG-3004S that you just created.
              • Priority: Choose a priority which is not in use. Outbound calls will be made through the gateways based on order of priority.
              • Min Digits: For basic calling you can enter 7 for the minimum of a 7 digit phone number.
              • Max Digits: For International calling you can enter 19 for the maximum of a 19 digit phone number.
              • Number of Masked Digits: This will drop the Dialed digit which will be needed to choose the gateways for outbound calls. Example: Using a dialed digit of 9 and dialing 9+17148856000 the PBX will drop the 9 and send 17148856000 to DVG-3004S then forwarded to the attached PSTN line.
              • Dialed Digit: By using 9 for the Dialed Digit on all gateways added to the system the DVX-1000 will automatically rollover to the next unused gateway in the PBX based on order of priority.
              • Prefix: Leave this empty.
              Repeat this step for each port of the DVG-3004S.
              Model DVG-5102S
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DVG-5102S?
              Answer Firmware upgrades are done automatically. The firmware cannot be upgraded via the web-based configuration.
              Model DVG-5102S
              Question How do I connect a DVG–5102S behind a D-Link router?
              Answer Step 1: Connect the ISP modem to the WAN port of the D-Link Router.

              Step 2: Ensure you have configured your Modem to work with your D-Link router. Ensure you can connect to the internet from a PC connected to your D-Link Router.

              For Cable Modem setup, click here.
              For DSL Modem setup, click here.

              Step 3: Connect an Ethernet cable from the LAN port of the D-Link router to the WAN port of DVG-5102S.

              Step 4: Connect your phone it to the DVG-5102S. Your phone should now properly work behind a D-Link Router.

              Note: If the following instructions do not work. Power cycle your Router and the DVG-5102S for 30 seconds. Plug in the Router first, wait 10 seconds then plug in the DVG-5102S.
              Model DVG-5102S
              Question Why doesnīt my second phone port work on my DVG-5102S?
              Answer When service is activated on the DVG-5102S, you are paying to have one phone port active. In order to have the second port activated, you will need to contact your VoIP service provider to inquire about premium package service plans.
              Model DVX-1000
              Question Why do I have greyed out options under the call server configuration?
              Answer Your DVX-1000 may have no licenses installed.

              Please contact D-Link technical support for the default 5 user license. A valid MAC address of the DVX-1000 is required inorder to issue the default 5 user License.

              The MAC address can be obtained by logging into the web-based configuration page of the DVX-1000.

              Follow the steps below to obtain the MAC address.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DVX-1000 in the address bar (default is 10.0.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is ippbx (all lower case) and the default password is ippbx. Select admin from the drop down menu. Click Login.

              Step 3 Click on System configuration option.
              The MAC address is listed under Device ID as shown below.

              Model DVX-1000 / DPH-140S
              Question How do I install my DPH-140S with the DVX-1000.
              Answer When installing the DPH-140S to the DVX-1000, it is recomended to add the users/phone extension on the PBX first before proceeding to configure the DPH-140S.

              Installing the DPH-140S on the DVX-1000.

              Step 1 Open up a web browser and type the IP address of the DVX-1000 (by default the IP address is 10.0.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The Username and password are ippbx (all lower case).

              Step 3 Select Admin from the drop down menu. Click on Login ("user" type does not have access to SIP Server configurations).

              Step 4 Click on SIP Server.

              Step 5 Select Users. Click on Add New User.



              Step 6 Enter the user information as follows:

              • Username (Disply name as entered on the DPH-140S)
              • User extension (same as User ID/phone extension already assigned or to be assigned to the DPH-140).
              • Email ID (optional).
              • User Group ID (Select the group you want to add the user to)
              • SIP Authentication (Enter SIP authentication if enabled on the DPH-140S). In this setup, leave it blank.
              • User type (Select Admin if you want the username to have that privilege).
              • Set Login password (check the box to enable a log in password).In this setup, leave the box unchecked.
              • Type the password and retype it. Leave it blank for this set up.
              Step 7 Click on Apply. Restart the system for the changes to take effect.

              Step 8 Click on Call server. Click on Registrations to verify that the user extensions are registered with the PBX. The extensions are listed in blue if registered.



              Note: Verify the phone registration after configuring the DPH-140S.



              Configuring the DPH-140S:

              There are two ways you can configure the DPH-140S:

              Using the Web Browser (GUI) :

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DPH-140s in the address bar.

              Click here for instructions on how to access the web interface of the DPH-140S for the first time

              Step 2 By default, the username and password is blank. Click OK to log into the phone.

              Step 3 Click on SIP settings.



              Step 4 Enter the following SIP settings:

              • Register server(use IP of PBX)
              • Outbound Proxy Server (use IP address of PBX)
              • Message Server(use IP of PBX).
              • Voice mail account(Enter the extension of voicemail found on the PBX at Voice Mail>configuration>Voice Mail ID).
              • Register with Proxy (Select Enable).

              Step 5 Click on Submit to save the changes.

              Step 6 Next click on SIP Account Settings and enter the account settings:



              • On Account Active, select Enable.
              • For account 1 setting, enter the Display name(any name).
              • For the SIP username and Authentication User Name, enter the phone extension of the user.
              • Enter the Authorization password if one was created when the user was added on the DVX-1000. For this setup, leave it blank.

              Step 7 Click on submit to save the changes.

              Step 8 Click on Restart system on the left hand side to reboot the IP Phone.

              Step 9 Confirm that the DPH-140S has registered with the DVX-1000 by verifying that the extension is showing on the LCD below the date and time.



              Using the Control (Key) pad:

              Step 1 Press Menu on the DPH-140S.

              Step 2 Enter the SIP Information as follows:

              • Dispaly name (same as the one used on the PBX box).
              • Registration Server(IP address of the PBX).
              • Registration Server port(Enter 5060).
              • OB Server ( enter the IP of the PBX).
              • OB server Port(enter port 5060)
              • SIP username (enter the user/phone extension)
              • SIP UID (enter the extension assigned to the user)
              • SIP password(Enter the password if it was entered when the user was created on the PBX) Leave it blank for this setup.
              Step 3 Press Menu and press OK to save the changes.

              Step 4 Reboot the phone by powering it off & back on.

              Step 5 Confirm that DPH-140S has registered with the DVX-1000 by verifying that the extension is showing up on the LCD below the time and date.

              Model DWA-130 / DGL-3420 / DWL-AG132 / DWL-AG530 / DIR-330 / DWL-AG660 / DWL-G120 / DWL-G122 / DWL-G132 / DWL-G510 / DWL-G520 / DWL-G520M / DWL-G550 / DWL-G630 / DWL-G650 / DWL-G650M / DWL-G680 / DWL-G710 / DWL-G820 / WDA-1320 / WDA-2320 / WNA-1330 / WNA-2330 / WUA-1340 / WUA-2340 / DWL-P100 / DWL-P200 / DWL-P50 / DWA-142 / DWA-542 / DWA-552 / DWA-556 /DWA-642 / DWA-643 / DWA-645 / DWA-652 / DWL-M60AT / DWL-R60AT / DVG-G1402S / WBR-1310 / WBR-2310
              Question How do I use my D-Link wireless utility in Windows XP?
              Answer Select your version of Windows XP:

            • Windows XP Service Pack 1 (or no service pack)
            • Windows XP Service Pack 2


              WindowsŪ XP/WindowsŪ XP SP1

              Step 1 Right-click My Computer and select Manage.



              Step 2 In the left pane, double-click Services and Applications and select Services.

              Step 3 In the right pane, double-click Wireless Zero Configuration.



              Step 4 In the Wireless Zero Configuration Properties window click the General tab at the top. Next to Startup type select Manual. Below Service Status, click Start and then click OK.



              Step 5 Right-click the two computer monitor icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks

              Step 6 In the Local Area Connection window click Advanced.



              Step 7 In the Wireless Network Connection Properties window, uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and then click OK.



              Step 8 Right-click My Computer and select Manage.



              Step 9 In the left pane, double-click Services and Applications and select Services.

              Step 10 In the right pane, double-click Wireless Zero Configuration.



              Step 11 In the Wireless Zero Configuration Properties window, click the General tab at the top. Next to Startup Type select Disabled. This will prevent the WindowsŪ wireless utility from launching when you reboot your computer. Under Service Status click Stop and then click OK.






              WindowsŪ XP SP2

              Step 1 Right-click My Computer and select Manage.



              Step 2 In the left pane, double-click Services and Applications and select Services.

              Step 3 In the right pane, double-click Wireless Zero Configuration.



              Step 4 In the Wireless Zero Configuration Properties window click the General tab at the top. Next to Startup type select Manual. Below Service Status, click Start and then click OK.



              Step 5 Right-click the wireless icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.





              Step 6 In the Wireless Network Connection window click Change advanced settings on the right side below Related Tasks.



              Step 7 In the Wireless Network Connection Properties window, uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and then click OK.



              Step 8 Right-click My Computer and select Manage.



              Step 9 In the left pane, double-click Services and Applications and select Services.

              Step 10 In the right pane, double-click Wireless Zero Configuration.



              Step 11 In the Wireless Zero Configuration Properties window, click the General tab at the top. Next to Startup Type select Disabled. This will prevent the WindowsŪ wireless utility from launching when you reboot your computer. Under Service Status click Stop and then click OK.

              • Model DWA-142
              Question Can I use the DWA-142 as a hockey puck?
              Answer No, regardless of the shape, you cannot use the DWA-142 as a hockey puck. The impact to the case could cause damage to the internal components, as well as damage the external casing of the DWA-142. Doing so will void the warranty.
              Model DWA-142
              Question How do I install my DWA-142?
              Answer Warning: Do NOT install the DWA-142 USB Adapter into your computer before installing the driver software from the D-Link CD.

              Step 1 Turn on the computer and Insert the D-Link DWA-142 Driver CD in the CD-ROM drive.
              The step-by-step instructions that follow are shown in Windows XP. The steps and screens are similar for the other Windows operating systems.

              Step 2 When the autorun screen appears, click Install Drivers.



              Step 3 The InstallShield Wizard window will appear. Click Next.



              Step 4 By default setup will install to the default location: C:\Program Files\D-Link\DWA-142, where C: represents the drive letter of your hard drive. To install to a different location click Browse and specify the location. Click Next.



              Step 5 Select the Program Files folder location. Click Next.



              Step 6 Insert the adapter into an available USB port on your computer. Click Next.
              If the Found New Hardware Wizard appears, click Cancel.

              Step 7 The D-Link Configuration Wizard will now appear.
              If you are using WindowsŪ XP (SP2), you will have the option to use either the D-Link utility or the built-in WindowsŪ Wireless utility. Click Next.



              Step 8 Enter the network name (SSID) manually. If you enter the SSID incorrectly, you will automatically be brought to the site survey page. Click Scan to display the site survey page. Click Next.



              Step 9 Click on the desired network name (SSID) and click Next.



              Step 10 Click Finish to continue.
              If you are prompted to reboot your computer, select Yes, I want to restart my computer now.

              Model DWA-142
              Question How do I use WPA-2 with my DWA-142?
              Answer After properly installing the DWA-142, you will want to ensure that you are using the D-Link Wireless Management utility.

              Using the D-Link Wireless Management utility will also allow you to ensure you are connecting to your router, via the MAC (BSSID) address, as it is shown next to the SSID.

              Model DWA-142
              Question Why is my DWA-142 USB adapter slower than my DWA-542 desktop PCI adapter?
              Answer Any device connected to your computerīs PCI slot will operate faster than an equivalent device connected by USB. The PCI interface is much faster than even high speed USB 2.0.

              For the best speed, you will want PCI adapters whenever possible.
              Model DWA-142
              Question Can I connect my DWA-142 to a wireless-G (802.11g), wireless-B or wireless-a network?
              Answer Yes this device is backwards compatible with 802.11n, 802.11g or 802.11b. However, it is not compatible with 802.11a networks.

              Also, keep in mind that if you connect a slower 802.11g device to your wireless N router, the router must accomidate the G device and will slow down to G speeds.
              For a full specifications listing for this product click here:
              http://www.dlink.com/products/resource.asp?pid=527&rid=2013&sec=0
              Model DWA-142
              Question I lost the CD that came with my DWA-142. How do I proceed with setup?
              Answer You will need only the driver software, which is available on the DWA-142 support page.

              You can download the driver software from the DWA-142 support page, just click the check box under Drivers appropriate for your operating system.

              Follow the installation FAQ on the DWA-142 support page.
              Model DWA-142
              Question I need to ensure Iīm connecting to my own SSID. How do I check my SSID on my D-Link Router?
              Answer You will need to access the routerīs configuration to check the SSID it is broadcasting.

              A freshly reset D-Link router will usually broadcast "default".

              To check or change the SSID of most routers using Windows XP:

              Step 1 Click Start.

              Step 2 Click Run.

              Step 3 Type: cmd.

              Step 4 Press Enter key.

              Step 5 Type: ipconfig.

              Step 6 Press Enter key.

              Step 7 You are looking for the Default Gateway IP address.


              Step 8 Enter the Gateway IP adress in a browserīs address bar, preferrably Internet Explorer, and press Enter key. The address will look like: http://192.168.0.1

              Step 9 You will be prompted to provide login credentials. For most D-Link routers, the username is admin and the password is left blank.

              Step 10 Once you have logged into the routerīs configuration page, you will need to access the Wireless radio options. Most older D-Link routers will place these options on the Wireless button on the left under the Home tab. Newer D-Link routers will place these options under the Manual Configure button of the Wireless page.

              For more specific instructions on finding your SSID, go to the support page for your router.

              Model DWA-142
              Question Do I need to reconnect to my SSID each time I turn on my computer?
              Answer No. If you are using the Windows Zero Configuration utility (Windows Default) or the D-Link wireless utility to connect, attempts will be made to reconnect to the last known working SSID upon startup.
              Model DWA-142
              Question Where do I locate the serial number (SN), hardware version(HW ver), MAC address and model number?
              Answer The serial number will be located both on the outer box, and on the adapter itself, on the bottom of the unit.



              Model DWA-142
              Question Can I use the DWA-142 as a coaster?
              Answer No, regardless of the shape, you cannot use the DWA-142 as a coaster. This could cause overheating, damaging the unit. Also, the risk of moisture or liquid spilling on the unit could render the DWA-142 inoperable. Doing so will void the warranty.
              Model DWA-142 / DWA-542 / DWA-552 / DWA-556 /DWA-642 / DWA-643 / DWA-645 / DWA-652
              Question How do I change my security settings?
              Answer Step 1 Right click the Wireless status Icon in the task bar, to open the Wireless Manager.



              Step 2 Select Wireless Manager.



              Step 3 Click on My Wireless Networks.



              Step 4 Select Modify on the right.



              Step 5 Select your Network Type and Security Type for the selected network profile.



              Step 6 Click OK.
              Model DWA-142 / DWA-130 / DWA-542 / DWA-552 / DWA-556 /DWA-642 / DWA-643 / DWA-645 / DWA-652
              Question Why shouldnīt I use WEP encryption on my Draft N device?
              Answer WEP encryption is not part of the proposed 802.11n standard, it is not possible to communicate at Draft N speeds while using WEP encryption.
              Model DWA-142 / DWA-542 / DWA-552 / DWA-556 /DWA-642 / DWA-643 / DWA-645 / DWA-652
              Question What happens when I connect a Wireless B, B+, G, or Super G device to my Draft N network?
              Answer Your network will operate at the speed of the slowest host, therefore if a slower hosts connects, every host will drop speeds to match.
              (i.e. If a G host joins, the network changes to allow 54Mbps maximum.)
              Model DWA-142 / DWA-542 / DWA-552 / DWA-556 /DWA-642 / DWA-643 / DWA-645 / DWA-652
              Question How do I connect to a Wireless Network?
              Answer Step 1 Right click the Wireless status Icon in the task bar, to open the Wireless Manager.



              Step 2 Select Wireless Manager.



              Step 3 Highlight the SSID you wish to connect to.
              (if your SSID is not visible, press the Refresh key)



              Step 4 Click Connect.
              Model DWA-142 / DWL-G520M / DWL-G650M / DWL-G132 / WUA-2340
              Question Which network adapters do not currently have Windows Vista compatible drivers?
              Answer There are currently no Beta Windows Vista compatible drivers for the following products:

              DWA-142 RangeBooster N USB Adapter
              DWL-G520M Wireless 108G MIMO Desktop Adapter
              DWL-G650M Super G with MIMO Wireless Notebook Adapter
              DWL-G132 AirPlus Xtreme G Wireless 108G USB Adapter
              WUA-2340 RangeBooster G USB Adapter

              Click here for a list of network adapters that have Beta Windows Vista compatible drivers.
              Model DWB-120M
              Question What are the minimum system requirements to install the DWB-120M on my Macintosh computer?
              Answer The DWB-120M and the AppleŪ BluetoothŪ software require an available USB port on your Macintosh computer or laptop running Mac OS X 10.1.3 and the AppleŪ BluetoothŪ software available from www.apple.com.
              Model DWB-120M
              Question I have Mac OS X. How do I find out what version it is?
              Answer Go to the Apple menu and select About this Mac and an information box will appear showing the version of Mac OS X that you have.
              Model DWB-120M
              Question If I do not have the right version of Mac OS X, how can I go about getting the right version?
              Answer You need to make sure that your Mac is able to get to the Internet. Go to the Apple menu and select System Preferences>System>Software Updates. At this point, any updates necessary will be done automatically for you to get your Mac ready for Bluetooth software installation.
              Model DWB-120M
              Question Where do I get the DWB-120M drivers/software for my Mac?
              Answer The drivers are built-in to Mac OS 10.2 (Jaguar) and 10.3 (Panther). Visit http://www.apple.com/bluetooth/ for more information.

              Model DWB-120M
              Question When I try to install the driver, it asks for the administrator’s password. I do not know my password. What do I do now?
              Answer If you are the owner of the computer then you need to call Apple support. If you are not the owner you need to get the owner to supply you with the password so you can install the driver.
              Model DWB-120M
              Question I’m trying to install the driver for my DWB-120M but the hard drive is grayed out, what is wrong?
              Answer The update is not complete, you will need to do another software update by going to the Apple menu>System Preferences>System>Software Updates.
              Model DWB-120M
              Question How can I tell if the driver for the DWB-120M is installed?
              Answer Upon reboot (after the driver is installed, the OS will ask you to reboot), if you go back to System Preferences, you should see Bluetooth under Other, verifying a successful installation.
              Model DWB-120M
              Question I have purchased the DWB-120M from Apple’s store, but I am not happy with it. How do I return the product for a refund?
              Answer All returns and refunds will be handled by Apple directly. D-Link cannot refund or return your product because it was sold to you by Apple.
              Model DWB-120M
              Question I think there may be a problem with the Bluetooth software. Who do I contact for technical support?
              Answer Technical support of the Bluetooth software provided by Apple will be handled by Apple.

              Model DWB-120M
              Question I think there may be a hardware problem with the DWB-120M. Who do I contact for technical support?
              Answer Assuming that you have updated your computer to the latest version of Mac OS X and you have installed the Bluetooth software with no problems, technical support of hardware will be handled by D-Link.

              Model DWB-120M
              Question Where can I get Windows drivers for my DWB-120M adapter?
              Answer We do not offer Windows support or drivers for this adapter. It is designed and marketed for Macintosh only. The requirements on the box clearly state for Macintosh.

              We do offer the DBT-120 bluetooth adapter which will work with Windows and Mac.
              Model DWL-1000AP
              Question How can I find the IP address for my DWL-1000AP access point? What is Kickstart?
              Answer Note: This is for the DWL-1000AP only not the DWL-1000AP+

              The DWL-1000AP does not have a default IP address. Everytime the access point is reset (not repowered), it will receive a random IP address in the 192.168.0.x subnet.

              Note: The IP address is ONLY to configure the access point. It does not have to be in the same subnet as your network to operate.

              Step 1 Click here to download the Kickstart application.

              Step 2 Double-click on downloaded file and extract files to a folder you specify. Go to that folder and double-click on setup.exe. Follow instructions to install software.

              Step 3 Go to Start>Programs>D-Link Wireless Lan>Kickstart.



              Step 4 When the Wecome screen appears, click Next.



              Step 5 Kickstart will scan for any access points on the network. If it doesnīt detect one on the first attempt, click Rescan. Once it finds the access point, it will display the name of the access point, MAC address, IP Address, and the SSID.

              If Kickstart does not find the access point, verify connectivity to the access point. You may want to reset the access point and run Kickstart again.

              Step 6 Highlight the access point you want to configure and click Next.



              Step 7 Click Finish. This will launch your web browser and load the web-based configuration.

              Note: If you receive a Cannot Display Page error, then you do not have the latest firmware which will add the web-based configuration and 128-bit encryption support.

              Download firmware here.

              How do I configure my DWL-1000AP?
              Model DWL-1000AP
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my D-link DWL-1000AP?
              Answer This firmware upgrade will add 128-bit encryption and a web-based configuration utility to the DWL-1000AP. Do NOT upgrade firmware unless you want to use 128-bit encryption.

              Before you Start

              It is recommended that this upgrade process be done through the Ethernet connection, not a wireless connection.

              IMPORTANT

              The computer (client) must be within the same Subnet range as the Access Point or there is a chance that the program will lock up. For example, if the Access Point has an assigned IP address of 192.168.0.50 with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0, then the computer must be assigned a different IP address of 192.168.0.55 with the same subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.

              Installing the Upgrade Software

              Step 1 Download firmware here.

              Step 2 Extract files to a folder and double-click on Setup.exe.

              How do I extract files?

              Step 3 Click Next 3 times and then click Finish.

              Step 4 Go to Start > Programs > D-Link Wireless LAN > Upgrade.

              Step 5 Select button 1 (Load Firmware ver: 3.2.31) and Click Upgrade.

              Note: It might take 1-2 minute for the Access Point to reboot.

              Step 6 Select button 2 (Load Web File Set ver: 1.0.0) and Click Upgrade.

              Step 7 Once the upgrade is complete, click Exit to close the program.

              Once the upgrade is complete, you do not need the AP Manager program anymore unless you are configuring multiple access points in your network.

              To configure the access point, please install the Kickstart application .
              Model DWL-1000AP
              Question How do I configure the DWL-1000AP with the web-based configuration?
              Answer Make sure you have the latest firmware for your DWL-1000AP. You no longer need the AP Manager software for configuration.

              Download latest firmware here.

              Step 1 If you do not know the IP address of the DWL-1000AP, download the Kickstart application.

              Step 2 Run Kickstart or open your web browser and enter the IP address of the DWL-1000AP.

              Note: The computer you are using to configure the DWL-1000AP with must be on the same subnet as the access point.



              Step 3 The Settings Summary page will be displayed. Use the navigation buttons on the left side to configure your DWL-1000AP access point.

              This page will display information regarding your DWL-1000AP such as the IP address, firmware version, MAC address, and SSID.



              Step 4 Click Wireless Settings to make changes to your wireless network.

              Step 5 Enter the SSID. This is the name of your wireless network. It can be up to 32 numbers and/or letters (no spaces, dashes, underscores, etc). The SSID is CaSe-SeNsItIvE and must be exactly the same on all wireless clients.

              Select the desired channel. The range is from 1-11. Channels 1, 6, and 11 are non-overlapping channels and are recommended. If you experience interference or a fluctuation of your wireless signal, try a different channel. Click Apply to save settings.

              Note: The DWL-1000AP is only supported in Access Point Mode.

              How do I enable WEP Encryption on my DWL-1000AP?
              Model DWL-1000AP
              Question How do I enable encryption on my D-Link DWL-1000AP access point?
              Answer Make sure you have the latest firmware for your DWL-1000AP. You no longer need the AP Manager software for configuration.

              Download latest firmware here.

              Step 1 If you do not know the IP address of the DWL-1000AP, download the Kickstart application.

              Step 2 Run Kickstart or open your web browser and enter the IP address of the DWL-1000AP.

              Note: The computer you are using to configure the DWL-1000AP with must be on the same subnet as the access point.



              Step 3 The Settings Summary page will be displayed. Use the navigation buttons on the left side to configure your DWL-1000AP access point.


              Step 4 Click WEP Encryption on the left side.



              Step 5 To enable WEP, click WEP.



              Step 6 Select either 64-bit or 128-bit WEP. Enter a HEX key that you choose using only numbers (0-9) and letters (A-F) seperated by colons (i.e. 00:50:23:ff:a4). Make sure you enter the same key on your wireless clients. Click OK.

              Step 7 Click Apply to save the settings.

              Note: If you are configuring the DWL-1000AP with a wireless connection, you will drop connection at this point. Configure your wireless adapter using the same WEP key to gain access back into the DWL-1000AP.

              How do I change the SSID or Channel?
              Model DWL-1000AP
              Question Where is the MAC address for the DWL-1000?
              Answer The MAC address for the DWL-1000 is on the label on the back of the access point directly under the bar code. The first six digits of the MAC address are 004005 and is preceded by S/N, which normally stands for serial number but in this case is the MAC address.
              Model DWL-1000AP
              Question Every time I try to assign an IP address to the DWL-1000AP I get an error message that the IP address is already in use by another device. How do I get the DWL-1000AP to take an IP address?
              Answer There are a few different things you can do in this situation.

              Reset the access point

              Step 1 Connect the access point to your network with the appropriate cable. If you are connecting the access point to a switch, hub or internet gateway, use a straight through cable. If you are connecting the access point directly to a computer, use a cross over cable.

              Step 2 Insert a paper clip in to the tiny hole in the back of the access point as shown in the illustration. Hold the paper clip firmly in the hole. The ACT light will go out. Wait until the ACT light comes back on and remove the paper clip. The access point is now reset.



              Isolate the AP on your network

              Either use a cross over cable to connect the access point directly to your computer or try connecting only the access point and one other computer through your hub or switch. Reset the access point and reinstall the AP Manager. Then try scanning for the access point by going to the File menu and selecting the Build from network option. If the AP Manager still does not find the access point, try assigning the IP address by using the Add Manually option.

              Enter the IP address that you want to assign to the access point and use the MAC address from the label on the back of the access point. The first four numbers of the MAC address are 00-40-05 and may be labeled with an S/N.
              Model DWL-1000AP
              Question How many PCs will the DWL-1000AP support?
              Answer The theoretical limit to the number of computers that can connect to an access point is quite high. Theoretically, it is basically the same question as, "How many computers can I have on my network?" It is possible to have 16,777,214 computers in a network using a Class A network address, so its not so much what is the theoretical limit but what is the practical limit.

              Practically, connecting ten to twelve computers to an access point is a realistic number. The reason for this is that the access point is capable of transmitting data at a rate of 11 Mbps. Computers connecting through an access point will share bandwidth, dividing the bandwidth by the number of computers using the access point at any one time. Keeping the number of computers at ten will provide each computer with approximately 1Mbps of bandwidth, which is an acceptable bandwidth for typical network data transfers.
              Model DWL-1000AP / DWL-900AP
              Question How do I configure the Apple Airport card to work with my D-Link access point?
              Answer Look under the Apple menu for the Airport icon and open the Airport Control Panel. Go to the Network option and make sure that default is selected. The D-Link access point is preconfigured to default. Using default in the configuration for the Airport card will automatically connect the Airport card to the D-Link access point.

              Make sure that in both the TCP/IP and the Apple Talk control panels the Airport card is selected for the "Connect Via" option.
              Model DWL-1000AP / DWL-900AP
              Question Is the DWL-1000 or DWL-900 a DHCP server?
              Answer The DWL-1000 and DWL-900 are not DHCP servers in and of themselves, but they work in conjunction with DHCP servers distributing dynamic IP addresses to wireless clients. In other words, the DWL-1000 and DWL-900 will pass Boot-P requests to the DHCP server on your network.
              Model DWL-1000AP / DWL-900AP / DWL-5000AP
              Question Can the Access Point connect to a PC computer directly?
              Answer Yes, you can connect the Access Point to a PC by UTP cross-over cable. The LAN port of the access point is a 10Base-T port, it is equal to a NIC port. If you have a good connection, the link light will be lit on the access point and your network card.
              Model DWL-1000AP / DWL-900AP / DWL-900+
              Question I want to extend the range of my wireless network by using the DWL-1000 or DWL-900 as a repeater and have one access point connecting to the other access point. Is this possible?
              Answer This configuration will not work with the DWL-1000. However, you can extend the area of coverage for your wireless network by adding access points and connecting them directly to your LAN. This way your wireless clients will pick up the signal from each of the access points as they roam throughout your coverage area.

              The DWL-900 and DWL-900+ can bridge with other access points via wireless. This will allow the ability to connect existing LANs together without using cables.

              Note: When the DWL-900 or DWL-900+ are in Bridge mode (either Point to Point or Point to Multipoint), wireless clients (ie computers with wireless adapters) will not be able to communicate with them. Wireless clients can only communicate with access points in AP mode.
              Model DWL-1000AP / DWL-900AP / DWL-900AP+ / DWL-5000AP / DWL-6000AP / DWL-1000AP+ / DWL-800AP+
              Question When I connect my Access Point directly to my DSL or Cable modem, why canīt I connect to the Internet?
              Answer In most cases, connecting an Access Point directly to a broadband modem (not a router) will allow you to connect a wireless computer to the Internet. If you are having problems, please read the following:

            • Do not give the Access Point an IP address from your ISP. Access Points are transparent to the network and can be on a different subnet. Your computer will get a (public) IP address from your ISP.

            • You can only connect 1 computer to the Internet unless you have multiple IP addresses from your ISP or connect your modem to a router. Access Points do not have NAT and cannot share a single IP address.

            • After connecting the Access Point to the modem, reset your modem by turning it off for at least 3 minutes. If you have a Motorola (Surf Board) modem, turn off for at least 5 minutes.
              • Model DWL-1000AP+
              Question How do I upgrade the Firmware of the DWL-1000AP+?
              Answer Follow the directions below to upgrade the firmware for the D-Link DWL-1000AP+.

              Please read before upgrade:
            • Do not upgrade firmware unless you are having specific problems ("If it ainīt broke, donīt fix it").
            • Upgrading firmware will reset the settings to default which means you will lose all your settings.
            • You cannot use the backup settings feature and apply it to the newer firmware.
            • Do NOT upgrade firmware with a wireless connection. You will damage the Access Point.





              Getting Started:

              Note: You must use Internet Explorer 5.5 or higher to successfully apply the firmware upgrade. Netscape users you must use version 4.79 or higher.

              There are security issues with earlier browsers that will prevent the firmware upgrade from successfully updating.

              Internet Explorer 6 Download Now
              Netscape 6 Download Now



              Step 1 Download the firmware and save the file to your computer. Extract the .BIN file to a folder where you can find it. An easy place to find it is your desktop. If you download the .bin file, you do not have to extract it.

              Download firmware for DWL-1000AP+ here.
              How do I extract a file?

              Step 2 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-1000AP+ for configuration.

              Windows 98/ME
              Windows 2000
              Windows XP
              Macintosh

              Step 3 To begin configuring the DWL-1000AP+ open a web browser and enter in the APīs default IP address (192.168.0.50). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).



              Step 4 Click the Tools Tab and click the Firmware button. Click on the Browse button and browse to the .bin file you extracted in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click Open. Click Apply. It will take a few seconds for the upgrade to complete. Click on the Continue button.



              WARNING: DO NOT upgrade the firmware with a wireless connection. You will damage the access point.

              Upgrading the firmware will take the AP back to factory default settings you will need to reconfigure the DWL-1000AP+.
              • Model DWL-1000AP+
              Question What does the Load Balancing feature on the DWL-1000AP+ do?
              Answer Load Balancing can only be used when the Access Points are set to AP Mode.

              The Load Balancing feature on the DWL-1000AP+ allows you to connect several DWL-1000AP+īs together to īshareī the wireless network traffic. D-Link suggests using three Access Pointīs because there are 3 non-overlapping channels (as specified in the 802.11b standard).



              All DWL-1000AP+īs need to have the same Group Name and the same SSID. Assign each AP a different non-overlapping channel (e.g. 1, 6, 11).

              Step 1 Your computer needs to be in the same range as the DWL-1000AP+ for configuration.

              Windows 98/ME
              Windows 2000
              Windows XP
              Macintosh

              Step 2 Log into the web based configuration of the DWL-1000AP+ by typing in the IP address of the AP (default:192.168.0.50) in your web browser. The username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).



              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and click the Mode button. After selecting the Load Balancing radio button you will be prompted to enter in a Group Name. The Group Name needs to be the same for all APīs.



              Step 4 Click on Apply and then click Continue to save the changes.

              What is the Dynamic Channel Select option for on the DWL-1000AP+?
              Model DWL-1000AP+
              Question What is the Dynamic Channel Select option for on the DWL-1000AP+?
              Answer Dynamic Channel Select automatically selects the fastest and least populated channel available for the DWL-1000AP+ when it is a part of Load Balancing Group of four or more access points and when the three non-overlapping channels have already been selected (1,6, and 11).

              What does the Load Balancing feature on the DWL-1000AP+ do?
              Model DWL-1000AP+
              Question How do I disable the Broadcast SSID on the DWL-1000AP+?
              Answer This is for the DWL-1000AP+ not the DWL-1000AP

              Step 1 Using an Ethernet cable connect the DWL-1000AP+īs to your PC.

              Step 2 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-1000AP+ for configuration (192.168.0.x).

              Windows 98/ME
              Windows 2000
              Windows XP
              Macintosh

              Step 3 To begin configuring the DWL-1000AP+ open a browser and enter in the APīs default IP address (192.168.0.50). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).



              Step 4 Click the Advanced tab and then click the Performance button. Scroll down to the bottom of the screen and select Disabled next to the Broadcast SSID field.



              Step 5 Click on Apply and then click Continue to save the changes.

              How do I connect my DWL-520+ or DWL-650+ wireless card to an Access Point that has the Broadcast SSID disabled?

              What is SSID?

              If your wireless adapter is installed on a Windows XP machine, please read here.
              Model DWL-1000AP+
              Question How do I change my password on a DWL-1000AP+ Access Point?
              Answer To change your password:

              Step 1 Go into the web configuration utility. Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of your DWL-1000AP+ (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and password (blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Tools tab and then click on Admin on the left side.

              Step 4 Enter your new password and type it again to confirm it.

              Step 5 Click Apply to save your new settings.

              Note: The user name will always be admin. You can only change the password.

              What if I forgot my password?
              Model DWL-1000AP+
              Question How do I enable WEP encryption on my DWL-1000AP+?
              Answer It is recommended to enable WEP encryption on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-1000AP+ by opening up a web browser such as Internet Explorer and typing in the IP address of the access point (192.168.0.50).

              Why canīt I get into the web-based configuration?

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case), and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK . Select the Home tab and click the Wireless button on the left hand side of the screen.



              Step 3 Select enable next to the WEP radio buttons. For WEP encryption select 64, 128, or 256-bit encryption. For the Key type select HEX.

              Step 4 Select Key 1. Enter a Hex encryption key that you make up. The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption.

              64-bit encryption 10 characters
              128-bit encryption 26 characters
              256-bit encryption 58 characters


              The encryption key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.

              How do I enable encryption on my D-Link adapters?
              Model DWL-1000AP+
              Question What can the DWL-1000AP+ communicate with when set to repeater mode?
              Answer The DWL-1000AP+ will repeat the wireless signal of:

              • DWL-800AP+
              • DWL-900AP
              • DWL-900AP+
              • DWL-1000AP
              • DWL-1000AP+
              • DWL-2000AP
              • DI-614+
              • DI-711
              • DI-713
              • DI-714
              • DI-714P+
              • DI-764
              Currently this unit will not repeat the DI-624, DI-713P, or DI-774.

              Unfortunately we can not guarantee compatibility with other manufacturerīs devices. Repeater mode is not part of the Wi-Fi certification and may not repeat devices other than those listed above.
              Model DWL-1000AP+
              Question How do I configure the DWL-1000AP+
              Answer The following FAQ is for the DWL-1000AP+, not the DWL-1000AP.

              The DWL-1000AP+ can be configured in five different modes:

              Access Point Mode
              Access Point Client Mode
              Wireless Bridge Mode
              Multi-Point Bridge Mode
              Repeater Mode



              Access Point Mode


              The DWL-1000AP+ is set to Access Point (AP) mode by default. Access Point mode will allow the DWL-1000AP+ to communicate with wireless clients.

              Step 1 Using an Ethernet cable connect the DWL-1000AP+ to your PC.

              Step 2 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-1000AP+ for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-1000AP+ is 192.168.0.50.

              Windows 98/ME
              Windows 2000
              Windows XP
              Macintosh

              Step 3 To begin configuring the DWL-1000AP+ open a browser and enter in the APīs default IP address (192.168.0.50). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).



              Step 4 Click on the Advanced tab and the Mode button. Select the Access Point radio button. If you wish to use the Load Balancing or Dynamic Channel Select features enable them now.



              Step 5 Click Apply and click Continue to save the changes.



              Wireless Client Mode


              AP Client or Wireless Client mode allows the DWL-1000AP+ to become a wireless client to another AP. In essence the AP has now become a wireless adapter card. You would use this mode to allow an AP to communicate with another AP. Wireless cards will not communicate with access points in AP Client / Wireless Client mode.

              Step 1 Log into the Access Point / Wireless Router the DWL-1000AP+ will be a wireless client to and obtain the LAN or Ethernet MAC address.

              Follow steps               1-3 from Access Point Mode

              Step 4 Click on the Advanced tab and the Mode button. Select the Access Point Client radio button.



              Step 5 Click on the Site Survey button and select the SSID of the Access Point / Wireless Router the DWL-1000AP+ is going to be client to. Click on the Connect button and click on the Close button to establish connection.



              Step 6 Click Apply and click Continue to save the changes.



              Wireless Bridge Mode


              Wireless Bridge mode allows you to connect two DWL-1000AP+īs together Wirelessly. You will need to enter in the MAC Address of each DWL-1000AP+ into the others configuration.

              Follow steps               1-3 from Access Point Mode

              Step 4 Click the Status tab and then the Device Info button. Write down the Ethernet MAC Address. You will need to input this on the other DWL-1000AP+.



              Step 5 Click the Home tab and click the LAN button. Change the LAN IP Address (try using 192.168.0.51, 192.168.0.52, 192.168.0.53, etc..), so that each DWL-1000AP+ has a unique IP Address in the same subnet.



              Repeat Steps 1-4 on the second Access Point

              Step 6 Click the Advanced tab and then click the Wireless button. Click the radio button next to Wireless Bridge.

              Step 7 In the Wireless Bridge MAC field type in the MAC Address of the other DWL-1000AP+. Click on Apply and then click Continue to save the changes.



              Follow Steps 6-7 on the second Access Point.

              Note: When configured in Wireless Bridge Mode, the DWL-1000AP+ will not communicate with wireless clients such as computers with wireless adapters. The DWL-1000AP+ will only communicate with another DWL-1000AP+ when set to either of the Bridging modes.



              Multi-Point Bridge Mode


              Follow steps               1-3 from Access Point Mode

              Step 4 Click on the Advanced tab and the Mode button. Select the Multi-Point Bridge radio button. Click Apply and click Continue to save the changes.





              Repeater Mode


              As a Wireless Repeater, the Access Point extends the range of the wireless network by repeating the wireless signal of the remote AP (Access Point). The Ethernet MAC address of the remote AP is required for the Access Point to act as a wireless range extender.

              Follow steps               1-3 from Access Point Mode

              Step 4 Select Repeater and then enter the MAC address of the access point or wireless router you are connecting to next to Remote AP Mac. Click Apply and then click Continue.



              Note: When connecting to a wireless router, use the LAN (Ethernet) MAC address, not the wireless MAC address.

              Once the DWL-1000AP+ is set to repeater mode, it becomes a transparent device and will no longer be able to be configured from a wireless connection. You must use a computer that is wired into the network or directly to the DWL-1000AP+.

            • What is an Access Point?
            • What can the DWL-1000AP+ communicate with when set to Client or Repeater mode?
              • Model DWL-1000AP+
              Question How do I configure WPA (Radius) on my DWL-1000AP+?
              Answer It is recommended to configure WPA on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-1000AP+ by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click 802.1X on the left hand side.



              Step 4 Select the Enabled radio button.

              Step 5 Next to Encryption Key select the Length by selecting the corresponding radio buttons. Select the Lifetime from the drop-down box.

              Step 6 Enter the IP, Port (1812) and Shared Secret for Radius Server 1. Do the same for Radius Server 2 if applicable.

              Step 7 Click Apply then Continue to save the settings.
              Model DWL-1000AP+
              Question How do I enable 4X Mode on my DWL-1000AP+?
              Answer Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-1000AP+ by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (default is 192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click on the Performance button.

              Step 4 Scroll to the bottom of the Performance page and click the Enabled radio button next to 4X Mode.



              Step 5 After enabling 4X Mode click on Apply and then click on Continue to save the settings.

              Note: 4X Mode is now enabled on the DWL-1000AP+. You must enable 4X on all your clients to get the higher throughput.


              What is 4X Mode?
              Model DWL-1000AP+
              Question How do I disable SSID broadcast on my DWL-1000AP+?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-1000AP+ in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Advanced tab and then click Performance on the left side.

              Step 4 Next to SSID Broadcast, select the radio button Disable.



              Step 5 Click Apply to save your settings.
              Model DWL-1000AP+
              Question How do I change the data rate on my DWL-1000AP+?
              Answer It is recommended to configure data rate on your wireless access point before your wireless adapters. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the data rate of the access point.

              Note: It is strongly recommended to keep this setting at its default value.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-1000AP+ by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (default is 192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Performance on the left side.



              Step 4 Select a fixed speed from one of the radio buttons for the TX Rate.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-1000AP+
              Question How do I enable MAC Filter on my DWL-1000AP+?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click the Advanced tab and then click Filters on the left side.

              Step 3 In the section MAC Filters, select the radio button for the mode you would like to use.
              • Disabled - Disables this feature and will allow all wireless clients to connect.
              • Allow - Blocks all clients except for what you enter in the list.
              • Deny - Allows all clients except for what you enter in the list.




              Step 4 Enter the Ethernet MAC address that you wish to Allow or Deny.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-1000AP+
              Question How do I change the IP address on my DWL-1000AP+?
              Answer To change or obtain an IP address automatically for the DWL-1000AP+ access points follow the steps below:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab and then click LAN.



              Step 3 Click the Dynamic IP Address radio button if you want the access point to receive an IP address automatically from a DHCP server or router, otherwise change the IP address manually (Static IP Address).

              We strongly suggest using a static IP address. The IP address is not used for networking, only for configuration. Make sure the IP address is within the same IP range as your network.

              Step 4 Click the Apply button and click Continue to restart the access point.
              Model DWL-1000AP+
              Question How do I configure DHCP server on my DWL-1000AP+?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser. Enter the IP address of the DWL-1000AP+ (default is 192.168.0.50) and press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Home tab at the top of the page and then click DHCP on the left.



              Note: If you are connecting to a router or a DHCP server, the DHCP server on the DWL-1000AP+ should be disabled.

              Step 4 By default, DHCP Server is set to Disabled. To enable it, click the Enabled radio button. To disable it, click the Disabled radio button.

              Step 5 To change the Starting and Ending IP Addresses, enter the new values in the corresponding text boxes. To change Lease Time select a value from the drop down box.

              Note: The value for Starting IP Address must be less than the value for Ending IP Address.

              Step 6 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-1000AP+
              Question How do I change the preamble on my DWL-1000AP+?
              Answer It is recommended to configure the preamble on your wireless access point before your wireless adapters. You may need to set the preamble on all wireless clients.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-1000AP+ by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Advanced tab and click Performance on the left hand side of the screen.



              Step 4 Select either Short or Long. The Preamble defines the length of the CRC block for communication between the wireless access point and the roaming wireless network adapters. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is a common technique for detecting data transmission errors.

              Note: High network traffic areas should use Short preamble.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button and then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-1000AP+ / DWL-2000AP / DWL-2000AP_revB / DWL-2000AP_revC
              Question How do I change the SSID on my DWL-1000AP+ and DWL-2000AP access points?
              Answer This FAQ is for the DWL-1000AP+ and DWL-2000AP access points.

              Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab at the top of the page then Wireless to the left.

              Step 3 Next to SSID, type in a new SSID.

              The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-120 / DWL-120a
              Question What is the current draw of the DWL-120?
              Answer 400 mA peak.
              Model DWL-120 / DWL-120a / DWL-120d / DWL-650 / DWL-650H / DCF-650W
              Question How can I roam to different areas at my work place, connecting to different Access Points?
              Answer In order to stay connected when roaming from AP to AP it may be necessary to update the configuration utility.

              Step 1 Open the configuration utility. Double-click the wireless icon in the system tray to open the utility. If you do not have the icon in the system tray, go to Start>Programs> and find the D-Link wireless entry.

              For the DWL-120, click on DWL-120 Wireless Configuration to open the utility.



              Step 2 Select the Configuration tab.

              Step 3 Click the Change Configuration check box.

              Step 4 Click the Update button. The NIC will re-scan finding the access point with the strongest signal, reconnecting you to the network.

              For the DWL-650, click on Configuration Utility to open the utility.



              Step 5 For the DWL-650, click on the Link Info tab and click the Rescan button.
              Model DWL-120+
              Question How do I connect my DWL-120+ to a wireless network?
              Answer To configure your wireless settings please select one of the following:

            • Site Survey (Win98/Me/2000)
            • Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)
            • Windows XP SP2
            • Not Showing in Site Survey


              Site Survey

              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 2 Click Site Survey on the left side and select the SSID of your wireless access point or router on the right side and then click Connect.



              Step 3 Click Apply.



              Step 4 You will be able to view your link status in the Link Info window.





              Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)

              Step 1 Right-click the two computer monitors icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.

              Step 2 Click Advanced.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and click OK.



              Step 4 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 5 Click Site Survey on the left side and select the SSID of your wireless access point or router on the right side and then click Connect.



              Step 6 Click Apply.



              Step 7 You will be able to view your link status in the Link Info window.



              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               click here.



              Windows XP SP2

              Step 1 Right-click the wireless icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.





              Step 2 In the Wireless Network Connection window click Change advanced settings on the right side below Related Tasks.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings.



              Step 4 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 5 Click Site Survey on the left side and select the SSID of your wireless access point or router on the right side and then click Connect.



              Step 6 Click Apply.



              Step 7 You will be able to view your link status in the Link Info window.



              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               click here.



              If your wireless network is not showing in Site Survey


              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 2 Click Configuration on the left side.

              Step 3 Type the SSID of your wireless access point or router next to SSID. Next to Wireless Mode select Infrastructure and then click Apply to save your settings.




            • What is SSID?
            • What is Infrastructure?
            • How do I enable Encryption (WEP)?
              • Model DWL-120+
              Question How do I enable WEP encryption on the DWL-120+?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless router or access point before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              To configure your wireless settings please select one of the following:

            • Site Survey (Win98/Me/2000)
            • Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)
            • Windows XP SP2
            • Not Showing in Site Survey


              Site Survey

              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select Site Survey.



              Step 2 Select your SSID in the Available Networks Authentication section for the auth. mode. Click Connect.

              Step 3 Enable encryption and configure the settings below Auth. mode. to match those configured on your access point or wireless router.



              Step 4 Click OK.



              Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)

              Step 1 Right-click the two computer monitors icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.

              Step 2 Click Advanced.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and click OK.



              Step 4 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select Site Survey.



              Step 5 Select your SSID in the Available Networks Authentication section for the auth. mode. Click Connect.

              Step 6 Enable encryption and configure the settings below Auth. mode. to match those configured on your access point or wireless router.



              Step 7 Click OK.

              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               click here.



              Windows XP SP2

              Step 1 Right-click the wireless icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.





              Step 2 In the Wireless Network Connection window click Change advanced settings on the right side below Related Tasks.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and click OK.



              Step 4 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select Site Survey.



              Step 5 Select your SSID in the Available Networks Authentication section for the auth. mode. Click Connect.

              Step 6 Enable encryption and configure the settings below Auth. mode. to match those configured on your access point or wireless router.



              Step 7 Click OK.

              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               click here.



              If your wireless network is not showing in Site Survey


              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select Encryption.



              Step 2 Select Data Encryption and then select Shared Authentication next to Auth. mode. Select 64, 128, or 256-bit encryption for the key length. Next to Key 1 type in the Hex encryption key that was entered into the wireless router/access point.



              Step 3 Click Apply to save your settings.

              • Model DWL-120+
              Question How do I install the DWL-120+?
              Answer If you have any problems installing the DWL-120+ from the shipped CD, download the latest drivers from our Support Site




              CD Installation


              Important: Make sure you run the CD before you physically connect the DWL-120+ to your computer

              Step 1 Insert the D-Link Air DWL-120+ Driver CD into the CD-ROM drive. When the installation screen appears click Install Driver/PC Utility.



              Step 2 Click Next on the following two screens to install the utility in the default location. Select No, I will restart my computer later, then click on the Finish button to complete the installation.

              Step 3 Shut down the computer and connect the DWL-120+ to an available USB slot on the computer. Turn on the computer.

              Step 4 Select Install From List or Specified Location (Advanced) and click on the Next button.

              Step 5 Select Search For The Best Drivers and Include This Location in the Search. Click the Browse button and select the DWL-120+ folder. Click OK and then Next.

              Step 6 Click Next when Windows finds the driver and click Finish to complete installation. Restart the computer to finalize the installation

              Note: In Windows 2000 and XP you may receive the Digital Signature Not Found message. If so, click on the Continue Anyway button to continue with the installation.





              Step 7 Windows may detect the DWL-120+ a second time, if so, follow steps               4-6





              Downloaded Driver Installation


              Important: Make sure you run the EXE file before you physically connect the DWL-120+ to your computer

              Step 1 Right-click on the desktop, select New > Folder and name the folder DWL-120+.

              Step 2 Download the latest drivers for the DWL-120+ and unzip the files to the DWL-120+ folder you created in Step 1.

              How do I extract or unzip files that I download from your Support site?

              Step 3 Navigate to the DWL-120+ folder and double-click on the SETUP.EXE file to begin the installation.

              Step 4 Click Next on the following two screens to install the utility in the default location. Select No, I will restart my computer later, and then click on the Finish button to complete the installation.

              Step 5 Shut down the computer and connect the DWL-120+ to an available USB slot on the computer. Reboot the computer.

              Step 6 Select Install Software Automatically (Recommended) and click on the Next button.

              Step 7 Click Next when Windows finds the drivers and then click Finish to install them. Reboot the computer to finalize the installation

              Note: In Windows 2000 and XP you may receive the Digital Signature Not Found message. If so, click on the Continue Anyway button to continue with the installation.
              Model DWL-120+
              Question After installing my DWL-120+, my Windows 98/Me machine will not boot up properly. What can I do to resolve this?
              Answer A simple solution is to disconnect the DWL-120+ from the computer until the computer is completely booted up and then reconnect. You can disconnect the cable from the unit itself, not the back of the computer.

              The problem may be solved by the following:
              • Upgrade the BIOS on your computer.
              • Make sure you have the latest Windows updates
              • Verify you have the latest drivers for your USB Controller (usually solved by #1 and 2).
              • Connect the DWL-120+ directly to the back of the computer. Do not use the USB ports on a keyboard or the front of the computer, or connect to an USB hub.
              • If you have an Intel 82801 USB Controller, please visit and load the Intel INF update which has corrected this issue. Make sure you uninstall the DWL-120+ AND any other wireless utilities before running this update. When update is complete, then reinstall the DWL-120+.
              Model DWL-120+ / DWL-120e / DWL-122 / DWL-520+ / DWL-520D / DWL-650+ / DWL-650M / DWL-A520 / DWL-A650 / DWL-AB520 / DWL-AB650 / DWL-AG520 / DWL-AG650 / DWL-G520 / DWL-G650 / DWL-G650B1
              Question How do I connect my wireless card to a wireless network?
              Answer Click on the yellow check-mark for instructions:

              Model DWL-120+ / DWL-520+ / DWL-650+
              Question When I attempt to run the D-Link AirPlus Utility I get an error message AIRPLUS.EXE: File is linked to missing export MFC42.DLL:6905 and the program will not run. How can I fix this?

              Answer This is not caused by a bug in the AirPlus D-Link utility, but is due to the fact that the program is attempting to use an older version of the file MFC42.DLL (a system file required by the program) than the version needed by the AirPlus Utility.

              There are two common causes for this problem:

              1.  The first cause is that Windows is using an older version of the file from the \Windows directory on your machine. The AirPlus installer correctly attempts to put the files MFC42.DLL and MSVCRT.DLL in the \Windows\System directory, but some software applications may incorrectly place older versions of these same files in the \Windows directory, where Windows will find them when you try to run the AirPlus Utility.

              To see if this is the case:

              Step 1  Go to Start > Find Files and search your entire hard disk for the files MFC42.DLL and MSVCRT.DLL.

              Step 2  If you see a copy of these files in the \Windows directory, delete or rename the files.

              The AirPlus Utility should now run correctly, finding the correct version of the files in \Windows\System.


              2.  If you donīt find duplicate copies of MFC42.DLL and MSVCRT.DLLin the\Windowsdirectory, you almost certainly have the second cause of this error - the fact that another application was using these files when the AirPlus Utility installer attempted to replace them, resulting in it being unable to do so.

              Step 1  Use Windows Explorer to look at your \Windows\System directory and locate the file MFC42.DLL.

              Step 2  Right-click on the file and select Properties from the popup menu-a dialog box will appear showing you information about the file.

              Step 3  Click the Version tab at the top of the dialog and you will see a page showing Version information.

              Step 4  At the top of the page youīll see a File version number - this should be 6.00.8447.0 or higher. If you see a lower version number (e.g.5.xx.xxxx) the installer hasnīt been able to replace the file because it was in use by another program at the time.

              If this is the case, proceed as follows:

              Step 5  Uninstall the AirPlus Utility.

              Step 6  Rename or delete the files MFC42.DLL and MSVCRT.DLL in the \Windows\System directory.

              Step 7  Reinstall the AirPlus Utility.
              Model DWL-120a / DWL-120
              Question How do I enable Encryption on my DWL-120 (Rev. A and B)?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Windows XP users read here.

              Step 1 Open the D-Link wireless utility by double-clicking on the monitor icon in the system tray.



              Step 2 Select the encryption tab. In the Encryption (WEP) drop down box select 64 or 128-bit encryption.

              Step 3 Under Wep Key Entry, select Manual Key. Type in the same encryption key that was entered into your wireless router/access point. The length of the key will depend on the selection under the encryption (WEP) field.

            • 64-bit 10 characters
            • 128-bit 26 characters

              The key is HEX, meaning A-F and 0-9.

              Step 4 For Mode, select Mandatory and for Authentication Type select shared key. Click on Apply Change to save the changes.
              • Model dwl-120d
              Question How do I install the DWL-120d in Windows 98/ME/2000?
              Answer There are four versions of the DWL-120. Make sure you are using the correct drivers for the DWL-120d.

              Download drivers here.

              Step 1 Without the DWL-120d connected to your computer, put the D-Link DWL-120 driver CD in the CD drive. When the Autorun screen appears, click on Install Drivers 2000/ME/98.

              Step 2 The Welcome screen will appear. Click on the Next button. When the Next screen appears, click on Yes to accept the License Agreement. Click Finish.

              Important: Please Restart the computer before you go on to Step 3.

              Step 3 When the computer has restarted, plug the DWL-120d to one of the USB ports on your computer. Windows will see new hardware and automatically install the driver. Click on Yes when prompted to restart your computer. Windows 2000 users will need to restart the computer manually.
              Model DWL-120d / DWL-520 / DWL-650
              Question Why do I receive a File Locked error when trying to install my wireless adapter?
              Answer The wireless utility is still running and needs to be removed before re-installing drivers.

              Step 1 Go to Control Panel>Add/Remove Programs and remove the D-Link Wireless Utility. Close any open windows.

              Step 2 Press CTRL-ALT-Delete once, click PRISMSTA.EXE, and click End Task. Close window.

              Step 3 Insert CD and install drivers.

              Step 4 Re-insert wireless card into computer. If installing the DWL-520, reboot computer.

              Step 5 The drivers should now install.

              How do I install my DWL-650 in XP?.
              Model DWL-120e
              Question How do I enable Encryption for the DWL-120 (revision E)?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Windows XP users read here.

              Step 1 Open the D-Link DWL-120 utility by double-clicking on the D icon in the system tray.



              Step 2 Select the configuration tab and click the WEP settings button.



              Step 3 For the WEP type select either 64 or 128-bit encryption. The Default Key ID should be set to 1. In the key 1 box type in the encryption key that was entered on the wireless router/ access point. The length of the key will depend on what was selected as the WEP type.

            • 64-bit 10 characters
            • 128-bit 26 characters

              The key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F.

              Step 4 Click on OK and then apply to save the changes.
              • Model DWL-120e
              Question How do I connect my DWL-120 (revision E) to a wireless network?
              Answer To configure your wireless settings please select one of the following operating systems:

            • Site Survey (Win98/Me/2000)
            • Windows XP (no service pack)
            • Windows XP SP1
            • Windows XP SP2


              Site Survey

              Step 1 Double-click the D icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).

              Step 2 Click the Configuration tab and enter the SSID of your wireless router or access point next to SSID and then click Apply to save the changes.



              Step 3 If you do not know the SSID of your wireless network click the Site Survey tab. Click Scan to show all the avaliable wireless networks.



              Windows XP (no service pack)


              Step 1 Right-click the two computer monitors icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.



              Step 2 Highlight the SSID of your wireless network and click Connect.

              Step 3 If your SSID is not listed in the Available Networks section click Advanced > Add, type in the SSID next to Network name (SSID) and uncheck This is a computer-to-computer (ad-hoc) network.... Click OK.



              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               click here.



              Windows XP SP1

              Step 1 Right-click the two computer monitors icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.

              Step 2 Click Advanced.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and click OK.



              Step 4 Double-click the D icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).

              Step 5 Click the Configuration tab and enter the SSID of your wireless router or access point next to SSID and then click Apply to save the changes.



              Step 6 If you do not know the SSID of your wireless network click the Site Survey tab. Click Scan to show all the avaliable wireless networks.

              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               click here.



              Windows XP SP2

              Step 1 Right-click the wireless icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.





              Step 2 In the Wireless Network Connection window click Change advanced settings on the right side below Related Tasks.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings.



              Step 4 Double-click the D icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).

              Step 5 Click the Configuration tab and enter the SSID of your wireless router or access point next to SSID and then click Apply to save the changes.



              Step 6 If you do not know the SSID of your wireless network click the Site Survey tab. Click Scan to show all the avaliable wireless networks.

              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               click here.


              Related Links

            • Why canīt I connect my Windows XP machine to my wireless router or access point after I disabled the SSID Broadcast?
              • Model DWL-120e / DWL-120f / DWL-G120b / DWL-G120c / DWL-122 / DWL-120 / DWL-120d / DWL-g120b / DWL-g120c / DWL-g120 / DWL-120+ / DWL-g122
              Question Which adapters will work with my TiVo-manufactured DVR?
              Answer The following adapters will work with TiVo DVRs having service numbers ending in 230, 240, 264, 275, 540, 565, 590, 595, or 649:

              Adapters that have been tested and certified by TiVo:
              • D-Link DWL-120 ver. E
              • D-Link DWL-120 ver. F (TiVo Software Version 7.1 or later required)
              • D-Link DWL-G120 ver. B2 (TiVo Software Version 7.1 or later)
              • D-Link DWL-G120 ver. C (TiVo Software Version 7.1 or later required)
              • D-Link DWL-122
              • D-Link DWL-G122 ver. A2 (TiVo Software Version 7.1 or later required)
              Adapters that have been reported to work, but have not been fully tested:
              • D-Link DWL-120 ver. A
              • D-Link DWL-120 ver. D
              Some of the above listed adapters will not work with older TiVo service numbers.

              Adapters that will not work for service numbers ending in 110, 130, or 140:
              • D-Link DWL-120 ver. D
              • D-Link DWL-120 ver. F (TiVo Software Version 7.1 or later required)
              • D-Link DWL-122
              • D-Link DWL-G120 ver. B2 (TiVo Software Version 7.1 or later)
              • DLink DWL-G120 ver. C (TiVo Software Version 7.1 or later required)
              • DLink DWL-G122 ver. A2 (TiVo Software Version 7.1 or later required)
              Adapters that will not work with the TiVo DVR:
              • D-Link DWL-120+ (AirPlus)
              • D-Link DWL-G120 ver. B1
              • DLink DWL-G122 ver. A1
              • DLink DWL-G122 ver B1
              Model DWL-120f
              Question How do I enable WEP encryption on my DWL-120 (rev.F)?
              Answer The following is for revision F only.

            • Click to manually configure WEP
            • Click to use Site Survey


              Step 1 Launch the D-Link Air USB Utility by double-clicking on the D icon in the system tray (lower-right corner). You can also go to Start > Programs > D-Link Air USB > D-Link Air Utility.



              Step 2 Click on Configuration.

              Step 3 Select the following:
              • Data Encryption: Enabled
              • Authentication: Shared
              • Key Length: 64-bit Hexidecimal, 128-bit Hexidecimal, 64-bit ASCII, or 128-bit ASCII
              Step 4 Enter your key next to 1. If selecting HEX, you must use HEX characters (0-9, A-F). ASCII allows you to use all numbers and letters. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless devices.



              Step 5 Click OK.



              Using Site Survey

              Step 1 Launch the D-Link Air USB Utility by double-clicking on the D icon in the system tray (lower-right corner). You can also go to Start > Programs > D-Link Air USB > D-Link Air Utility.



              Step 2 Click on Site Survey. Select the network you want to connect to under Available Network and click Configure.



              Step 3 The configuration window will appear. Select the following:
              • Data Encryption: Enabled
              • Authentication: Shared
              • Key Length: 64-bit Hexidecimal, 128-bit Hexidecimal, 64-bit ASCII, or 128-bit ASCII
              Enter your key next to 1. If selecting HEX, you must use HEX characters (0-9, A-F). ASCII allows you to use all numbers and letters. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless devices.



              Step 4 Click OK.

              Step 5 The SSID you selected will show up in the bottom box under Profile. Click the SSID and click Connect. The screen will refresh and you now should be connected. Click on Link Info to see if you are connected.

              • Model DWL-120f / DWL-520E / DWL-650P
              Question How do I enable WPA-PSK on my DWL-120 (rev.F), DWL-520 (rev.E), and DWL-650 (rev.P)?
              Answer The following is for the DWL-120 revision F, DWL-520 revision E, and the DWL-650 revision P only.

            • Click to manually configure WPA-PSK
            • Click to use Site Survey


              Step 1 Launch the D-Link Air Utility by double-clicking on the D icon in the system tray (lower-right corner). You can also go to Start > Programs > D-Link Air > D-Link Air Utility.



              Step 2 Click on Configuration. Next to Authentication, select WPA-PSK and click the Authentication Config button.



              Step 3 Enter your passphrase. The passphrase is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. The passphrase can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless devices.



              Step 4 Click OK.



              Using Site Survey

              Step 1 Launch the D-Link Air Utility by double-clicking on the D icon in the system tray (lower-right corner). You can also go to Start > Programs > D-Link Air > D-Link Air Utility.



              Step 2 Click on Site Survey. Select the network you want to connect under Available Network and click Configure.



              Step 3 The configuration window will appear. Next to Authentication, select WPA-PSK and click the Authentication Config button.



              Step 4 Enter your passphrase. The passphrase is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. The passphrase can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless devices.



              Step 5 Click OK.

              Step 6 The SSID you selected will show up in the bottom box under Profile. Click the SSID and click Connect. The screen will refresh and you now should be connected. Click on Link Info to see if you are connected.

              • Model DWL-122
              Question Why do I get a USB Low Power Notice error when I plug my DWL-122 into my Macintosh?
              Answer The USB Low Power Notice Error will occur when the USB Plug on your Macintosh does not have enough current to power the DWL-122. Plugging the DWL-122 into an USB keyboard commonly causes this error. To correct the error, plug the DWL-122 directly into the USB controller built into the Macintosh.
              Model DWL-122
              Question How do I enable WEP encryption on the DWL-122?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless router or access point before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              To configure your wireless settings please select one of the following:

            • Site Survey (Win98/Me/2000)
            • Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)
            • Windows XP SP2
            • Macintosh OS X 10.2.X


              Site Survey

              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 2 Click Site Survey on the left side and select the SSID of your wireless access point or router on the right side and then click Configure.



              Step 3 Change the Data Encryption field to Enabled. Authentication Mode should be set to Shared Authentication. Under Key Length, select 64 or 128. Click on Default Key 1 and enter the Hex encryption key that was entered into the wireless router or access point. The key length will depend on the selection made under the key length. The key is HEX, meaning A-F and 0-9.

            • 64-bit 10 characters
            • 128-bit 26 characters



              Step 4 The SSID of your wireless network will appear below Profile. Highlight your SSID and click Connect.





              Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)

              Step 1 Right-click the two computer monitors icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.

              Step 2 Click Advanced.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and click OK.



              Step 4 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 5 Click Site Survey on the left side and select the SSID of your wireless access point or router on the right side and then click Configure.



              Step 6 Change the Data Encryption field to Enabled. Authentication Mode should be set to Shared Authentication. Under Key Length, select 64 or 128. Click on Default Key 1 and enter the Hex encryption key that was entered into the wireless router or access point. The key length will depend on the selection made under the key length. The key is HEX, meaning A-F and 0-9.

            • 64-bit 10 characters
            • 128-bit 26 characters



              Step 7 The SSID of your wireless network will appear below Profile. Highlight your SSID and click Connect.



              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               click here.



              Windows XP SP2

              Step 1 Right-click the wireless icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.





              Step 2 In the Wireless Network Connection window click Change advanced settings on the right side below Related Tasks.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings.



              Step 4 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 5 Click Site Survey on the left side and select the SSID of your wireless access point or router on the right side and then click Configure.



              Step 6 Change the Data Encryption field to Enabled. Authentication Mode should be set to Shared Authentication. Under Key Length, select 64 or 128. Click on Default Key 1 and enter the Hex encryption key that was entered into the wireless router or access point. The key length will depend on the selection made under the key length. The key is HEX, meaning A-F and 0-9.

            • 64-bit 10 characters
            • 128-bit 26 characters



              Step 7 The SSID of your wireless network will appear below Profile. Highlight your SSID and click Connect.



              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               click here.



              Macintosh 10.2.X

              Step 1 Click Apple and select System Preferences.



              Step 2 Double-click the Wireless Adaptor icon below Other.



              Step 3 If you do not see any wireless networks in the Available Wireless Networks box click on the Start Scan button to search for a wireless signal.

              Note: If you still do not see any wireless networks, check the settings on your wireless AP or router. Make sure the SSID Broadcast is Enabled.

              Step 4 Click on the Show My Networks button and highlight your SSID from the My Networks box and click on the Properties button.

              Step 5 Put a check in the Enable WEP box and select 40 or 104 HEX characters. In the field below and enter the Hex encryption key that was entered into the wireless router or access point. The key length will depend on the selection made under the key length. The key is HEX, meaning A-F and 0-9.

            • 40-bit 10 characters
            • 104-bit 26 characters

              Step 6 Highlight the SSID of your wireless network below Available Wireless Networks and then click connect.

              Related Links

            • Where do I get the encryption key on my D-Link wireless device?
            • Iīm confused, some of the D-Link devices say they are using 40 bit encryption, others say they are using 128 bit and/or 64 bit. Are these encryption levels compatible with each other?
              • Model DWL-122
              Question How do I install the DWL-122 in Macintosh and Windows?
              Answer Windows Installation
              Macintosh OS X Installation

              Important Make sure you run the installation CD before you physically connect the DWL-122 computer.



              Windows Installation
              Windows 98 SE, Me, 2000, and XP


              Step 1 Insert the D-Link Air DWL-122 Driver CD into the CD-ROM drive and click on Install Driver/PC Utility.

              Step 2 Follow the Install Shield Wizard, by clicking Next, to install the D-Link utility in the default locations.

              Step 3 When the Install Shield Wizard is complete select No, I will restart my computer later and click the Finish button.

              Step 4 Shut down computer completely. When off connect the DWL-122 to an available USB port and then turn the computer back on.

              Step 5 When the Found New Hardware Wizard appears select Install the software automatically (Recommended) and click on the Next button.

              Note: In Windows 2000 and XP you may see the Digital Signature Not Found message, click Continue Anyway to continue with the installation.

              Step 6 After Windows finds and installs the drivers click on the Finish button to complete the installation.



              Macintosh 10.2.x Installation


              Step 1 Insert the D-Link Air DWL-122 Driver CD into the CD-ROM drive and double-click on D-Link CD icon that will appear on the desktop.

              Step 2 To start the installation double-click on the Mac Folder, then double-click on the DLinkUsbDriver.dmg file. Double-click on the DLinkUsbDriver.pkg installation package when it appears.

              Note: Your system may require you to enter your Username and Password to begin the installation of the utility.

              Step 3 When the Welcome installation screen appears click on the Continue button.

              Step 4 When you are prompted for a destination for the installation files double-click on the Hard Disk Drive and click Continue.

              Step 5 Click Continue Installation and Restart to complete the installation. Connect the DWL-122 to an available USB slot when the computer has rebooted.

            • How do I connect to a wireless network with the DWL-122?
              • Model DWL-122
              Question How do I connect to a wireless network with the DWL-122?
              Answer To configure your wireless settings please select one of the following:

            • Site Survey (Win98/Me/2000)
            • Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)
            • Windows XP SP2
            • Macintosh OS X 10.2.X
            • Not Showing in Site Survey


              Site Survey

              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 2 Click Site Survey on the left side and select the SSID of your wireless access point or router on the right side and then click Configure.



              Step 3 Click OK.



              Step 4 The SSID of your wireless network will appear below Profile. Highlight your SSID and click Connect.





              Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)

              Step 1 Right-click the two computer monitors icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.

              Step 2 Click Advanced.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and click OK.



              Follow steps               1-4 in the Site Survey section.

              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP click here.



              Windows XP SP2

              Step 1 Right-click the wireless icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.





              Step 2 In the Wireless Network Connection window click Change advanced settings on the right side below Related Tasks.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings.



              Follow steps               1-4 in the Site Survey section.

              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP click here.



              Macintosh 10.2.X


              Step 1 Click Apple and select System Preferences.



              Step 2 Double-click the Wireless Adaptor icon below Other.



              Step 3 Highlight the SSID of your wireless network below Available Wireless Networks and then click connect.



              Step 4 If you do not see any wireless networks in the Available Wireless Networks section click Start Scan to search for a wireless signal.

              Step 5 If you have a pre-configured network click Show My Networks, highlight your SSID in the My Networks section, and click Connect.

              Step 6 You can view the wireless link status in the Current Wireless Network section.



              If your wireless network is not showing in Site Survey


              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 2 Click Configuration on the left side.

              Step 3 Configure the following:

            • SSID - The SSID is case-sensitive
            • Wireless Mode - Infrastructure or Ad Hoc.
            • Data Encryption - Disabled by default. Enable if WEP is configured on your wireless network.

              Step 4 Click Apply.



              Related Links

            • How do I enable Encryption on the DWL-122?
              • Model DWL-1700AP
              Question How many users can my DWL-1700AP support at one time?
              Answer The maximum associated stations for the DWL-1700AP are 256 users, but for performance consideration, the appropriate associated users must be less than 16.
              Model DWL-1700AP
              Question What are the differences between Local and Remote authentication settings in 802.1x function?
              Answer Local – refers to the user that is authenticated by the DWL-1700AP. The DWL-1700AP only supports EAP-MD5 for the 802.1x security. If you select Local in 802.1x settings, you need to enable the 802.1x function and type the appropriate Username and Password in the user settings.

              Remote RADIUS – refers to the user that is authenticated by the RADIUS Server. When you select Remote RADIUS server, the Local user parameters settings will become useless. You will need to configure the RADIUS Server settings and type the appropriate RADIUS Server IP and RADIUS Share Key in the Advanced > 802.1x screen in the DWL-1700AP’s configuration utility, matching the settings in the Remote RADIUS Server.
              Model DWL-1700AP
              Question How do I configure DHCP server on my DWL-1700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-1700AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.50 wireless and 192.168.0.50:2000 wired). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is root (all lower case). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click DHCP to the left.



              Note: If you are connecting to a DHCP server, the DHCP server on the DWL-1700AP should be disabled.

              Step 4 By default, DHCP Server is set to Disabled. To enable it, click Enable using the radio buttons. To disable it, click Disable using the radio buttons.

              Step 5 Enter the default gateway, net mask, and the starting and ending IP address in the corresponding fileds. To change the lease time, select a value using the drop-down list next to Lease Time.

              Note: The value for DHCP Start IP must be less than the value for DHCP End IP.

              Step 6 Click on Apply then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-1700AP / DWL-1750
              Question How do I change the administrative password on my DWL-1700AP and DWL-1750?
              Answer This FAQ is for the DWL-1700AP and DWL-1750?

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the device in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.50 wireless and 192.168.0.50:2000 wired). Press Enter

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case). The default password for the DWL-1700AP is root (all lower case). The default password for the DWL-1750 is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Admin to the left.



              Step 4 Enter your new password and re-type it in the space provided.

              Step 5 Click Apply to save the new password..

              Note: You cannot change the username. The username will always be admin. Also, you may be prompted to login to the device after saving the new password.
              Model DWL-1700AP / DWL-1750
              Question How do I change the SSID on my DWL-1700AP and DWL-1750?
              Answer This FAQ is for the DWL-1700AP and DWL-1750.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the device in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.50 wireless and 192.168.0.50:2000 wired). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case).The default password for the DWL-1700AP is root (all lower case). The default password for the DWL-1750 is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 2 Click the Home tab and then click Wireless to the left.

              Step 3 Next to SSID enter the new SSID.

              The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-1700AP / DWL-1750
              Question How do I disable remote management on my DWL-1700AP and DWL-1750?
              Answer This FAQ is for the DWL-1700AP and DWL-1750.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the device in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.50 wireless and 192.168.0.50:2000 wired). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case). The default password for the DWL-1700AP is root (all lower case). The default password for the DWL-1750 is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Admin to the left.



              Step 4 Click the Disable Remote Manager from WAN Side check box.

              Step 5 Click Apply and to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-1700AP / DWL-1750
              Question How do I save/load the configuration of my DWL-1700AP and DWL-1750?
              Answer This FAQ is for the DWL-1700AP and DWL-1750.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the device in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.50 wireless and 192.168.0.50:2000 wired). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case). The default password for the DWL-1700AP is root (all lower case). The default password for the DWL-1750 is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab then click System to the left.



              Step 4 To save the configuration, click Backup.

              To load the configuration click Browse and navigate to the backup file. Left-click the file once to select it and click Open. Then click Restore to load the configuration file.
              Model DWL-1700AP / DWL-1750
              Question How do I disable ping from the WAN side on my DWL-1700AP and DWL-1750?
              Answer This FAQ is for the DWL-1700AP and DWL-1750.

              When you block WAN ping, the public WAN IP address will not respond to ping commands. Pinging public WAN IP addresses is a common method used by hackers to test whether your WAN IP address is valid. Certain applications such as mIRC and ICQ may not work if the WAN IP address does not respond to ping commands.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the device in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.50 wireless and 192.168.0.50:2000 wired). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case). The default password for the DWL-1700AP is root (all lower case). The default password for the DWL-1750 is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Admin to the left.



              Step 4 Click the Disable PING from WAN Side checkbox.

              Step 5 Click Apply to save the new setting.
              Model DWL-1700AP / DWL-1750
              Question How do I configure WEP encryption on my DWL-1700AP or DWL-1750?
              Answer This FAQ is for the DWL-1700AP and DWL-1750.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the device in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.50 wireless and 192.168.0.50:2000 wired). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case). The default password for the DWL-1700AP is root (all lower case). The default password for the DWL-1750 is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click Wireless to the left.

              Step 4 Next to WEP click the Enabled radio button.

              Step 5 Next to WEP Encryption select the level of encryption (64 or 128 bit) from the drop-down list.

              Step 6 Next to Key Type select HEX or ASCII from the drop-down list. You will need to use the same key on all your wireless devices.

            • HEX - use 0-9 and A-F only.
            • ASCII - All numbers and letters.

              Step 7 You can enter up to 4 different keys. Select the encryption key using that will be used on all wireless devices using the radio buttons. The key index on all wireless device much also match.

              If you would like to generate the encryption keys, enter a phrase next to Passphrase. You make this up yourself. If you selected HEX, then enter a key made up of a combination of numbers (0-9) and letters (A-F). For example - A4572BCC19 (HEX). Click Generate.



              Step 8 Click Apply to save the new settings.

              Note: If you are configuring the device from a wireless adapter, you will lose connectivity as soon as you click Apply. You must enable WEP on your adapter and enter the same exact key as you entered on your device.
              • Model DWL-1700AP / DWL-1750
              Question How do I open ports on my DWL-1700AP and DWL-1750?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the device in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.50 wireless and 192.168.0.50:2000 wired). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case). The default password for the DWL-1700AP is root (all lower case). The default password for the DWL-1750 is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Virtual Server to the left.



              Step 4 Assign a name to identify the virtual server entry in the text box next to Name. Enter the private or LAN IP address of the device in the text box next to Private IP Address. Choose the protocol type using the drop-down list (TCP or UDP) next to Protocol Type. Enter the private port that the device is using next to Private Port. If it were for a web server that is using port 81 on the LAN side, then you would enter the value 81. Next, enter the public port next to Public Port. If it were for a web server, then you would use port 80. This will take all incoming traffic from public port 80 and transfers it to the private IP address on port 81.

              Step 5 Select OFF to disable scheduling or select ON to have this virtual server entry run on a schedule.

              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-1700AP / DWL-1750
              Question What is the default Telnet username and password for my DWL-1700AP/DWL-1750?
              Answer Use the below username and password to Telnet into the DWL-1700AP and DWL-1750:

              Username: user1
              Password: test
              Model DWL-1700AP / DWL-1750
              Question How do I reset my DWL-1700AP or DWL-1750?
              Answer Step 1 Connect the included RS-232 cable to the serial port on the back of your computer and then connect the other end to the unit.

              NOTE: Contact your reseller if your DWL-1700AP or DWL-1750 did not come with a RS-232 cable.

              Step 2 Click Start > Run and type hypertrm in the Run window.

              Step 3 In the Connection Description window type a name to identify the connection next to Name. Click OK.

              New Connection

              Step 4 In the Connect To window select the COM port that the RS-232 cable is connected to next to Connect Using. Click OK.

              Select Port

              Step 5 In the COM Properties window select 115200 next to Bits per second and None next to Flow control. Click Apply and then click OK.

              COM Properties

              Step 6 Once a connection is established unplug the power from the unit and then power it back on. The device should then perform its startup procedures and outputting information.

              Step 7 Press D to reset the device to factory defaults.

              Device Options

              Step 8 Confirm your selection.

              Confirm

              Step 9 When reset is complete the default IP address will be 192.168.0.50.

              Complete
              Model DWL-1750
              Question How do I configure DHCP server on my DWL-1750?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-1750 in the address bar (default is 192.168.1.50 wireless and 192.168.0.50:2000 wired). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click DHCP to the left.



              Note: If you are connecting to a DHCP server, the DHCP server on the DWL-1750 should be disabled.

              Step 4 By default, DHCP Server is set to Disabled. To enable it, click the Enable radio button.

              Step 5 Enter the default gateway, net mask, and the starting and ending IP address in the corresponding fileds. To change the lease time, select a value using the drop-down list next to Lease Time.

              Note: The value for DHCP Start IP must be less than the value for DHCP End IP.

              Step 6 Select the interface that you want DHCP server to dynaically assign IP addresses to by selecting either the Wireless or Ethernet radio button.

              Step 7 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-2000AP
              Question How do I change the data rate on my DWL-2000AP?
              Answer It is recommended to configure data rate on your wireless access point before your wireless adapters. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the data rate of the access point.

              Note: It is strongly recommended to keep this setting at Auto.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-2000AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Performance on the left side.



              Step 4 Select a fixed speed from the dropdown list next to TX Rates.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-2000AP / DWL-2000AP_revB
              Question How do I change the IP address on my DWL-2000AP?
              Answer To change or obtain an IP address automatically for the DWL-2000AP follow the steps below:

              Step 1 Log into the web based configuration by typing in the IP address of the DWL-2000AP (default:192.168.0.50) in your web browser. The username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).




              Step 2 Click on the Home tab and then click LAN.



              Step 3 Select the radio button for Dynamic IP Address if you want the access point to receive an IP address automatically from a DHCP server or router, otherwise change the IP address manually.

              We strongly suggest using a static IP address. The IP address is not used for networking, only for configuration.

              Step 4 Click the Apply button and click Continue to restart the DWL-2000AP.

              Model DWL-2000AP / DWL-2000AP_revB
              Question How do I change my password on my DWL-2000AP?
              Answer You can change the password within the web-based configuration utility that is built-in to the DWL-2000AP.

              Step 1 Open your web browser. Enter the IP address of the DWL-2000AP (default is 192.168.0.50) and press Enter.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin), leave the password blank, and click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Tools tab at the top.



              Step 4 Enter your new password and click Apply. After the DWL-2000AP restarts, click Continue.

              Note: You can only change the password, not the user name. The user name will always be admin.
              Model DWL-2000AP / DWL-2000AP_revB / DWL-2000AP_revC
              Question How do I change the preamble on my DWL-2000AP Access Point?
              Answer It is recommended to configure the preamble on your wireless access point before your wireless adapters. You may need to set the preamble on all wireless clients.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-2000AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Advanced tab and click Performance on the left hand side of the screen.



              Step 4 Select either Short or Long. The Preamble defines the length of the CRC block for communication between the wireless access point and the roaming wireless network adapters. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is a common technique for detecting data transmission errors.

              Note: High network traffic areas should use Short preamble.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-2000AP / DWL-2000AP_revB / DWL-2000AP_revC
              Question How do I change the channel on my DWL-2000AP Access Point?
              Answer It is recommended to configure channel on your wireless router before your wireless adapters. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the channel of the access point.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-2000AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Home tab and click Wireless on the left hand side.



              Step 4 Next to Channel, select the channel you would like to use from the drop-down menu. It is recommended to use Channel 1,6, or 11. If you have 2.4GHz phones or experience interference, simply changing the channel may solve the issue.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.


            • What channel should I use on my 802.11b Wireless devices?
              • Model DWL-2000AP / DWL-2000AP_revB / DWL-2000AP_revC
              Question How do I enable WPA-PSK on my DWL-2000AP Access Point?
              Answer It is recommended to configure WPA on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-2000AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left hand side.



              Step 4 Select WPA-PSK using the radio buttons.

              Step 5 Enter a Pre-shared Key. The key is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. The password can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless clients.

              Step 6 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.

              Step 7 If you have not enabled 802.11X a dialog box will pop up and ask you to do so, click OK. You do not have to set up an 802.11x/RADIUS server.

              Model DWL-2000AP / DWL-2000AP_revB / DWL-2000AP_revC
              Question How do I enable WEP encryption on my DWL-2000AP wireless Access Point?
              Answer It is recommended to enable WEP encryption on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-2000AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK. Select the Home tab and click Wireless on the left hand side of the screen.



              Step 3 Select enabled next to the WEP radio buttons. For WEP Encryption select 64 or 128-bit encryption. For the Key Type select HEX.

              Step 4 Select Key 1. In the box, enter a HEX key (a random encryption key that you make up). The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption. The Hex key must be exactly the same on all your wireless products.

            • 64-bit encryption - 10 characters
            • 128-bit encryption - 26 characters

              The encryption key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
            • What is WEP?
            • How do I enable encryption on my other D-Link products?
            • Where do I get the encryption key on my D-Link wireless device?
              • Model DWL-2000AP / DWL-2000AP_revB / DWL-2000AP_revC
              Question How do I configure my DWL-2000AP?
              Answer Click on the links below for specific configuration instructions.

              Wireless Mode:

              Basic Configuration:

              Wireless Settings: Security Settings: Troubleshooting:
              Model DWL-2000AP / DWL-2000AP_revB / DWL-2000AP_revC
              Question How do I set up WPA (Radius) on my DWL-2000AP?
              Answer It is recommended to configure WPA on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-2000AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click 802.1X on the left hand side.



              Step 4 Select the Enabled radio button.

              Step 5 Select strength of encryption (64 or 128 bit) by using one of the radio buttons next to Length and select a value from the drop-down list next to Lifetime.

              Step 6 Input values for IP, Port and Shared Secret for Radius Server 1. Repeat for Radius Server 2 if applicable.

              Step 7 Click Apply then Continue to save the settings.

              Step 8 Click the Home tab and then click Wireless.



              Step 9 Select the WPA radio button next to Authentication

              Step 10 Click Apply then Continue to save the settings.
              Model DWL-2000AP / DWL-2000AP_revB / DWL-2000AP_revC
              Question How do I enable DHCP server on my DWL-2000AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser. Enter the IP address of the access point (default is 192.168.0.50) and press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Home tab and then click on DHCP to the left.



              Note: If you are connecting to a router or a DHCP server, the DHCP server on the access point should be disabled.

              Step 4 By default, DHCP Server is set to Disabled. To enable it, select the Enabled radio button next to DHCP Server. To disable it, select the Disabled radio button.

              Step 5 To change the Starting and Ending IP Address, enter the new values in the corresponding text boxes. To change Lease Time select a value from the drop down box. Inputing a value in the field next to DNS Server is optional.

              Note: The value for Starting IP Address must be less than the value for Ending IP Address.

              Step 6 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-2000AP_revB / DWL-2000AP_revC
              Question How do I enable Super G™ Mode on my DWL-2000AP Access Point?
              Answer Note: Super G™ is only available on revisions B and C. Unfortunately Super G™ is not available for revision A. You can download the latest firmware at support.dlink.com. Check the label on the bottom of the router for revision information (H/W:).

              How do I know what revision I have?

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 Enter username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Performance on the left side.



              Step 4 Next to Super G, select the mode you would like to use from the drop-down menu.
              • Disabled
              • Super G without Turbo
              • Super G with Dynamic Turbo
              • Super G with Static Turbo
              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.


            • What is Super G™?
              • Model DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I change the channel on my DWL-2100AP Access Point?
              Answer It is recommended to configure the channel on your wireless router before your wireless adapters. Most wireless adapters will find your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the channel of the access point.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-2100AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Home tab and click Wireless on the left hand side.



              Step 4 Next to Channel, select the channel you would like to use from the drop-down menu. It is recommended to use Channel 1,6, or 11. If you have 2.4GHz phones or experience interference, simply changing the channel may solve the issue.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I change the data rate on my DWL-2100AP Access Point?
              Answer It is recommended to configure data rate on your wireless access point before your wireless adapters. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the data rate of the access point.

              Note: It is strongly recommended to keep this setting at Auto.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-2100AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Performance on the left side.



              Step 4 Select a fixed speed from the drop-down menu.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I set my DWL-2100AP to obtain an IP address automatically (DHCP)?
              Answer To change or obtain an IP address automatically for the DWL-2100AP follow the steps below:

              Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by typing in the IP address of the DWL-2100AP (default:192.168.0.50) in your web browser. The username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab and then click LAN.

              Step 3 Select Dynamic IP Address from the drop down box if you want the access point to receive an IP address automatically from a DHCP server or router, otherwise change the IP address manually (static).

              We strongly suggest using a static IP address. The IP address is not used for networking, only for configuration.

              Step 4 Click the Apply button and click Continue to restart the DWL-2100AP.

              Model DWL-2100AP
              Question What devices can the DWL-2100AP repeat?

              Answer
              Routers Firmware
              DI-524 (revA) 1.02 and higher
              DI-624 (revB) 1.28 and higher
              DI-624 (revC) 2.28 and higher
              DI-774 (revA) 1.25 and higher
              Access Points Firmware
              DWL-800AP+ (revA) 2.00 and higher
              DWL-900AP+ (revC) 3.07 and higher
              DWL-2000AP (revA) 1.56 and higher
              DWL-2000AP (revC) 3.10 and higher
              DWL-2100AP (revA) 1.01 and higher
              DWL-7000AP (revA1) 1.04 and higher
              DWL-7000AP (revA2) 1.04 and higher
              DWL-7100AP (revA) 1.00u and higher
              DWL-G800AP (revA) 1.02 and higher
              Model DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I configure Telnet on my DWL-2100AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-2100AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Tools tab and then click Misc. on the left side.



              Step 4 To enable Telnet, check the Enabled check box next to Status. Select the timeout from the drop-down list.

              Step 5 Click Apply then Continue to save the settings.

              Advanced users can use Telnet to configure this unit. Go to Start > Run and type in telnet 192.168.0.50 and press enter. Enter the username (admin) and your password (just press enter by default). Telnet commands are not supported by D-Link Tech Support. Use at your own risk.

              To prevent users from using Telnet, next to Status, uncheck the Enabled box (see above).
              Model DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I save/load the configuration file on my DWL-2100AP?
              Answer Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by typing in the IP address of the access point (default is 192.168.0.50) in your web browser. The default username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 2 Click on the Tools tab at the top of the page, and then click Cfg File to the left.



              Step 3 To save the configuration settings of your access point, click the OK button next to Load settings to Local Hard Drive.

              To load a previously saved configuration file, click the Browse button next to Update File. Once you have located the file (config.bin) on your hard drive, click the OK button.

              Note: If the firmware on your access point has been upgraded/downgraded, do not load configuration files that were saved using a different version of firmware then you currently have installed. This will not work and could damage the unit.
              Model DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I configure the WLAN Partition (filter) on my DWL-2100AP?
              Answer The DWL-2100AP allows you to select whether or not either wireless band can pass information, via the Internal Station Connection option. If this feature is not enabled, that particular wireless band will not be able to pass any information through the Access Point. This feature effectively segregates the wireless band of your choice from the rest of the Network. With Ethernet-to-WLAN Access disabled, information sent from the Ethernet side will not be passed to the Wireless Clients. However, wireless clients will still be able to transmit across Ethernet for browsing, etc.

              Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-2100AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Advanced tab and then click Filters on the left side.

              Step 4 Click on WLAN Partition.



              Step 5 There are 2 different filters you can use to control traffic on your network. Select Enabled from the corresponding drop down box to enable the feature.

              Internal Station Connection
              • Enabled - this will allow wireless clients to communicate with each other (within the same wireless band).
              • Disabled - wireless clients are not allowed to exchange data with each other (within the same wireless band).
              Ethernet to WLAN Access
              • Enabled - Ethernet devices can exchange data with wireless devices using the Access Point.
              • Disabled - Ethernet devices are not allowed to send data to wireless devices associated with the Access Point. However, wireless devices can still send data to the Ethernet devices.
              Step 6 Click Apply to save your settings
              Model DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I enable WPA-PSK on my DWL-2100AP?
              Answer Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the access point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Encryption on the left hand side.

              Step 4 Click on the WPA radio button and then click Apply.



              Step 5 Select PSK and then enter a key (passphrase). The key is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. The password can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless clients. Keep the Group Key Update Interval set to 1800.



              Step 6 Click on the Apply button to save your settings.

              Note: If you are configuring your access point from a wireless adapter, you will lose connectivity as soon as you click Apply. You must enable WPA-PSK on your adapter and enter the same exact key as you entered on your access point.
              Model DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I change the channel on my DWL-2100AP Access Point?
              Answer In most cases, you only need to change the channel on the access point. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the channel of the access point.

              Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-2100AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left side.



              Step 4 Next to Channel, select the channel you would like to use from the drop-down menu. It is recommended to use Channel 1, 6, or 11. If you have 2.4GHz phones or experience interference, simply changing the channel may solve connection dropping issues.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I disable the SSID broadcast on my DWL-2100AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-2100AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left side.

              Step 4 Next to SSID Broadcast, select Disable.



              Step 5 Click Apply to save your settings.


              XP users please click here.
              Model DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I configure my DWL-2100AP?
              Answer Click on the links below for specific configuration instructions.

              Wireless Mode:

              Basic Configuration:

              Wireless Settings: Security Settings: Troubleshooting:
              Model DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I set my DWL-2100AP to repeater mode?
              Answer You will need the MAC address of the device you want to repeat. If you are repeating a wireless router, then you must use the LAN or Ethernet MAC address, not the wireless address.

              Step 1 Connect the DWL-2100AP to your PC using an Ethernet cable. You cannot configure the DWL-2100AP wirelessly when in repeater mode.

              Step 2 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range as the DWL-2100AP for configuration. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 3 Open a web browser and enter in the IP address of the access point (192.168.0.50). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 4 Click on Advanced at the top and then click Mode on the left side. At the bottom, click the AP Repeater button. Enter the MAC address of the device you want to repeat (IE 50:23:AB:D4:56:E1).



              Step 5 Click Apply to save your settings.

              Once the DWL-2100AP is set to repeater mode, it becomes a transparent device and will no longer be able to be configured from a wireless connection. You must use a computer that is wired into the network or directly to the DWL-2100AP.
              Model DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I set my DWL-2100AP to client mode?
              Answer Client Mode allows the DWL-2100AP to become a wireless client to another AP or wireless router. Client mode allows any device with an Ethernet connection to connect to your wireless network, such as a printer, gaming console (Xbox, PS2), or a computer.

              Note: Wireless adapters (clients) will not be able to communicate with an access point that is in Client mode.

              You will need the MAC address of the device you want to be a client to. If you are connecting to a wireless router, then you must use the LAN or Ethernet MAC address, not the wireless address.

              Step 1 Connect the DWL-2100AP to your PC using an Ethernet cable. You cannot connect to the DWL-2100AP wirelessly when in client mode.

              Step 2 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range as the DWL-2100AP for configuration. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 3 Open a web browser and enter in the IP address of the access point (192.168.0.50). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 4 Click on Advanced at the top and then click Mode on the left side. At the bottom, click the AP Client button. Enter the MAC address of the device you want to repeat (IE 50:23:AB:D4:56:E1).



              Step 5 Click Apply to save your settings.
              Model DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I configure the wireless modes on the DWL-2100AP?
              Answer The DWL-2100AP can be configured in five different modes:


              Access Point Mode

              The DWL-2100AP is set to Access Point (AP) mode by default, which allows the DWL-2100AP to connect to wireless clients.

              Step 1 Using an Ethernet cable connect the DWL-2100AP to your PC.

              Step 2 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-2100AP for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-2100AP is 192.168.0.50.

              Select your Operating System for instructions on how to configure a static IP address.

              Windows 98/ME
              Windows 2000
              Windows XP
              Macintosh

              Step 3 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2100AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 4 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 5 Select the Advanced tab and the Mode button.

              Step 6 Select Access Point using the radio buttons.



              Step 7 Click Apply and then click Continue to save new settings.


              Point-to-Point Bridge

              As a wireless bridge the DWL-2100AP allows you to connect two wireless LANs together.

              Step 1 Log into the Access Point or Wireless Router that the DWL-2100AP is going to bridge and write down the Ethernet MAC Address or LAN Mac Address.

              Step 2 Using an Ethernet cable connect the DWL-2100AP to your PC.

              Step 3 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-2100AP for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-2100AP is 192.168.0.50.

              Select your Operating System for instructions on how to configure a static IP address.

              Windows 98/ME
              Windows 2000
              Windows XP
              Macintosh

              Step 4 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2100AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 5 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 6 Select the Advanced tab and the Mode button.

              Step 7 Select PtP Bridge using the radio buttons.

              Step 8 In the Remote AP MAC Address field enter the MAC Address you obtained in Step 1.



              Step 9 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.


              Multi-Point Bridge

              As a multi-point bridge the DWL-2100AP allows you to connect multiple wireless LANs together.

              Step 1 Log into the Access Points or wireless routers that the DWL-2100AP is going to bridge and write down the Ethernet MAC Address or LAN Mac Address of each device.

              Step 2 Using an Ethernet cable connect the DWL-2100AP to your PC.

              Step 3 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-2100AP for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-2100AP is 192.168.0.50.

              Select your Operating System for instructions on how to configure a static IP address.

              Windows 98/ME
              Windows 2000
              Windows XP
              Macintosh

              Step 4 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2100AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 5 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 6 Select the Advanced tab and the Mode button.

              Step 7 Select PtMP Bridge using the radio buttons.

              Step 8 In the 1-8 Remote AP MAC Address fields enter the MAC Addresses you obtained in Step 1.



              Note: The DWL-2100AP can bridge with up to eight other DWL-2100APīs in PtMP Bridge mode.

              Step 9 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-2100AP
              Question What is the effective range/distance of the DWL-2100AP?
              Answer Indoors:

            • 98ft (30m) @ 54Mbps
            • 105ft (32m) @ 48Mbps
            • 121ft (37m) @ 36Mbps
            • 148ft (45m) @ 24Mbps
            • 197ft (60m) @ 18Mbps
            • 223ft (68m) @ 12Mbps
            • 253ft (77m) @ 9Mbps
            • 295ft (90m) @ 6Mbps

              Outdoors:

            • 312ft (95m) @ 54Mbps
            • 951ft (290m) @ 11Mbps
            • 1378ft (420m) @ 6Mbps Antenna Type
            • Dipole antenna with 2dBi gain Operating Voltage
            • 5VDC +/- 10%

              Wireless Transmit Power

              Typical RF Output Power at each Data Rate

              For 802.11g:

            • 31mW (15dBm) @ 54 and 108Mbps
            • 40mW (16dBm) @ 48Mbps
            • 63mW (18dBm) @ 36, 24, 18, 12, 9, and 6Mbps For 802.11b:

            • 63mW (18dBm) @ 11, 5.5, 2, and 1Mbps

              Receiver Sensitivity

              For 802.11g:

            • 1Mbps: -94dBm
            • 2Mbps: -91dBm
            • 5.5Mbps: -89dBm
            • 6Mbps: -91dBm
            • 9Mbps: -90dBm
            • 11Mbps: -86dBm
            • 12Mbps: -89dBm
            • 18Mbps: -87dBm
            • 24Mbps: -84dBm
            • 36Mbps: -80dBm
            • 48Mbps: -76dBm
            • 54Mbps: -73dBm

              For 802.11b:

            • 1Mbps: -94dBm
            • 2Mbps: -90dBm
            • 5.5Mbps: -88dBm
            • 11Mbps: -85dBm
              • Model DWL-2100AP / DWL-2100AP_LU / DWL-2200AP / DWL-2210AP / DWL-2700AP / DWL-7100AP / DWL-7200AP / DWL-7700AP / DWL-900AP+ / DGL-4300 / DWL-3200AP / DWL-8200AP / DWL-1000AP+
              Question What D-Link devices support WDS?
              Answer Currently, the following D-Link access points support WDS (Wireless Distribution System):

            • DWL-900AP+
            • DWL-1000AP+
            • DWL-2100AP
            • DWL-2200AP
            • DWL-2210AP
            • DWL-2700AP
            • DWL-3200AP
            • DWL-7100AP
            • DWL-7200AP
            • DWL-7700AP
            • DWL-8200AP
            • DGL-4300

              Note: WDS is not completely specified in WiFi or IEEE standards. Communication with other vendorīs access points is not guaranteed.


            • What is WDS?
            • Why wonīt WDS work when WPA encryption is enabled?
              • Model DWL-2100AP / DWL-2200AP / DWL-2700AP / DWL-3200AP / DWL-7100AP / DWL-7700AP / DWL-8200AP
              Question What Access Points can bridge with each other?
              Answer The DWL-2100AP, DWL-2200AP, DWL-2700AP, DWL-3200AP, DWL-7100AP, DWL-7200AP and DWL-7700AP can bridge with itself or with each other in PTP or PTMP mode. The Access Points have to use the following:

              Access Points Firmware
              DWL-2100AP 2.00
              DWL-2200AP 1.00
              DWL-2700AP 1.02
              DWL-3200AP 2.00
              DWL-7100AP 2.00
              DWL-7700AP 1.00
              DWL-8200AP 1.00
              Model DWL-2100AP / DWL-7100AP
              Question How do I configure static pool settings on my access point?
              Answer This FAQ is for the DWL-2100AP and DWL-7100AP access points.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click DHCP Server.

              Step 4 Click Static Pool Settings.



              Step 5 By default this feature is disabled. To enable it select Enabled from the drop-down list next to Function Disable/Enable.

              Step 5 Enter the IP address that you want to assign to the device in the text box next to Assigned IP. Enter the deviceīs MAC address in the text box next to Assigned MAC Address. Also, input the Subnet Mask and Gateway. All other fields are optional.

              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the settings.
              Model DWL-2100AP / DWL-7100AP
              Question How do I configure DHCP server on my access point?
              Answer This FAQ is for the DWL-2100AP and DWL-7100AP access points.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click DHCP on the left side.

              Note: If you are connecting to a router or a DHCP server, the DHCP server on the access point should be disabled.

              Step 4 By default, DHCP Server is set to Disabled. To enable it, select Enabled using the drop-down list next to Function Enable/Disable. To disable it, select disabled using the drop-down list.

              Step 5 Next to Starting IP Address enter the beginning IP address of your range. Next to Ending IP Address enter the ending IP address of your range. By default, the range is 100-199, meaning your clients will receive an IP address between 192.168.0.100 and 192.168.0.199.

              Step 6 Enter a DNS server to assign to your clients. If you are behind a router or gateway, enter itīs IP address here.

              Step 7 Select a lease time from the drop-down list.

              Step 8 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-2100AP DWL-2100AP_LU / DWL-2200AP / DWL-2210AP / DWL-2700AP / DWL-7100AP / DWL-7200AP / DWL-7700AP / DWL-900AP+
              Question What is WDS?
              Answer WDS (Wireless Distribution System) allows access points to communicate with one another wirelessly in a standardized way. It can also simplify the network infrastructure by reducing the amount of cabling required. Basically the access points will act as a client and an access point at the same time.

              Note: WDS is not completely specified in WiFi or IEEE standards. Communication with other vendorīs access points is not guaranteed.
              Model DWL-2100AP_LU / DWL-2000AP
              Question How do I configure my DWL-2100AP/DWL2000AP with LucidLink software version 1.5.1?
              Answer Note: This FAQ is for the DWL-2100AP with firmware 1.01 - 1.03 and the DWL-2000AP revision C1 with firmware 3.10.

              Server

              Note: When configuring your Access Point, ensure the LucidLink server computer is on the same IP subnet as the Wireless Access Point.

              Windows 98/ME
              Windows 2000
              Windows XP
              Macintosh

              Step 1 Install the LucidLink server software on your computer.

              Step 2 Click on Configure Access Point and select the Manufacturer and Model (D-Link, DWL-2100AP, DWL-2000AP) from the drop-down menu. Click Next.



              Step 3 Once the Access Point is detected, you can change the IP address and password of the Access Point. To change the IP address, type it in the field next to IP Address. To change the password type it next to Password and then re-type it next to Confirm Password. Click Next.



              Step 4 Next to Network Name enter your SSID (Service Set Identifier), and select the security method (Maximum Security or Maximum Compatibility) using the radio buttons below Choose The Security Method. Click Configure Access Point.

              Note: If you select Maximum Security (WPA) the Shared Secret must be a minimum of 8 characters.



              Step 5 Please wait while LucidLink completes the configuration process with the Access Point. This will take about 3-5 minutes. Do not disconnect the Ethernet cable or power cycle the unit during this process. If directly connected onto the Access Point, the Local area network status will switch between disconnected and connected. This is normal.

              Step 6 Click Settings and enter a shared secret password next to Shared Secret. Also, enter your identification and contact information. To launch the LucidLink Management Console when Windows starts click the check box next to Automatically open the LucidLink Management Console whenever Windows starts. Click Save Settings to finish setup.



              Note: The shared secret configured on the server must match the Shared Secret configured on every Access Point that communicates with the server. Configure the Shared Secret in the web-based configurations of the Access Points.

              If you would like to verify your settings on the Access Point do the following:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the Access Point in the address bar (i.e. http://192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 2 Enter your user name and password. Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Encryption to the left. The configuration of the Access Point will match the settings you configured using LucidLink.

              Note: When using WPA authentication, click Apply to access the WPA configuration screen. EAP will be selected by default, and the Cipher type will be TKIP. Group key interval will be 1800. The radius server IP address will be specified (the IP address of computer running the LucidLink Server Software). The radius port is 1812 by default and cannot be changed. LucidLink software can only function while the port is set to 1812. The Radius Secret should be filled in.


              Client

              Note: The client computer must meet the following minimum requirements:

              • Windows XP Home/Professional
              • 1.5 MB available hard disk space
              • Wireless NIC that supports 802.1X/EAP
              Step 1 Install the client software onto the computer with the wireless network adapter.

              Step 2 Select the wireless network that was configured using the LucidLink Server software and click Connect.

              Step 3 The request will be sent to the LucidLink server computer. The server administrator will need to click Authorize or Don’t Authorize to allow or disallow connectivity to the network. The authorization time frame can then be setup for that user thru the LucidLink Server software.

              Step 4 Once the authorization has been allowed, your wireless client will be granted access to the network.
              Model DWL-2130AP
              Question How do I login to the DWL 2130AP?
              Answer You cannot login to this device directly, it must first be connected to an X-Stack Switch, then it can be managed through the switch interface.
              Model DWL-2130AP / DWL-2230AP
              Question What is the difference between the DWL-2130AP and DWL-2230AP?
              Answer The DWL-2130AP requires an external power adapter in order to provide power to the wireless access point. The DWL-2230AP supports Power Over Ethernet (PoE) as well as the ability to connect an external power adapter which allows power to be supplied to the wireless access point from a PoE midspan or endspan.

              PoE endspan xStack switches functional with the wireless access point:
            • DXS-3227P
            • DWS-3227P

              PoE midspan for use with non-PoE capable switches:
            • DWL-P1012

              For a complete listing of all the xStack Series switches that are functional with the wireless access point, click here.
              • Model DWL-2130AP / DWL-2230AP / DWL-7130AP / DWL-7230AP
              Question What is the difference between the DWL-2130AP/2230AP and the DWL-7130AP/7230AP wireless access points?
              Answer The DWL-2130AP/2230AP wireless access points support the 802.11b/g WLAN standards.

              The DWL-7130AP/7230AP wireless access points support the 802.11a/b/g WLAN standards.
              Model DWL-2130AP / DWL-2230AP / DWL-7130AP / DWL-7230AP
              Question Which xStack Series switches will function with the wireless access point?
              Answer The access point is functional with the following switches:

            • DWS-3227
            • DWS-3227P
            • DWS-3250
            • DXS-3227
            • DXS-3227P
            • DXS-3250

              Note: The DWS xStack Series switches already have the wireless functionality activated included with a 10-node access point license. The DXS xStack Series switches require the purchase of a license key to activate the wireless functionality.

              For contact information on purchasing additional licenses, click here.

              For a complete procedure on upgrading the DXS xStack Series switches to activate the wireless functionality after purchasing a license key, click here.
              • Model DWL-2130AP / DWL-2230AP / DWL-7130AP / DWL-7230AP
              Question Is there firmware available for my AP?
              Answer No, The firmware is pushed out from the switch automatically. No configuration from the user is necessary, the update is done in the background.
              Model DWL-2130AP / DWL-2230AP / DWL-7130AP / DWL-7230AP
              Question Can I configure my Access Point from my computer?
              Answer No, all the configuring, for this Access Point, is done from the switch.
              Model DWL-2200AP
              Question How do I configure two DWL-2200AP in Point to Point mode?
              Answer You will need the remote MAC address of the DWL-2200AP you are bridging to.

              Step 1: Connect the DWL-2200AP to your PC using an Ethernet cable.

              Step 2: Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range as the DWL-2100AP for configuration. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 3: Open a web browser and enter in the IP address of the access point (http://192.168.0.50). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 4: Click on the Advanced tab and then click on Mode on the left side. At the top, click the PtP Bridge radio button. Enter the remote MAC address of the device you want to bridge to (IE 50:23:AB:D4:56:E1). Then click on Apply to save your changes.



              Step 5: Repeat the instructions for the remote access point. Click Apply to save your settings.

              Note: If you have encryption enabled, ensure the key matches on both access points. Also, ensure that both access points do not have the same IP address. By default, the IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              What D-Link devices support WDS?
              What Access Points can bridge with each other?
              Model DWL-2200AP
              Question How do I set my DWL-2200AP to repeater mode?
              Answer You will need the MAC address of the device you want to repeat. If you are repeating a wireless router, then you must use the LAN or Ethernet MAC address, not the wireless address.

              Step 1: Connect the DWL-2200AP to your PC using an Ethernet cable. You cannot configure the DWL-2200AP wirelessly when in repeater mode.

              Step 2: Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range as the DWL-2200AP for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-2200AP is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 3: Open a web browser and enter in the IP address of the access point (http://192.168.0.50). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 4: Click on the Advanced tab and then click Mode on the left side. At the bottom, click the AP Repeater button. Click on the site survey button and select the wireless signal you would like to repeat. Ensure the MAC address of the device you want to repeat is in the Root AP MAC address field (IE 50:23:AB:D4:56:E1).



              Step 5: Click on Apply to save your changes.

              Note: If you have encryption enabled, ensure the key matches on both units.
              Model DWL-2200AP
              Question How do I reset my DWL-2200AP to factory defaults?
              Answer Step 1 Locate the hole on the back of the DWL-2200AP below the word RESET.



              Step 2 Using a paper clip, press and hold the Reset button for about 5 seconds and then release.

              Step 3 After the DWL-2200 reboots (this may take a few minutes) it will be reset to the factory default settings.
              Model DWL-2200AP / DWL-3200AP / DWL-7200AP / DWL-8200
              Question How do I set or change the administrative password on my Access Point?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the Access Point in the address bar. Press Enter.

              Step 2 Enter your username and password in the proper fields. Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Admin to the left.



              Step 4 To change the administrative password, enter a new password in the Admin section.

              Step 5 Click Apply then click Continue to save the settings.
              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question What does the green check and the red x indicate on my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer A is displayed when there is no problem with text entered into a field (i.e. passwords match, etc.).

              A is displayed when there is a problem with the text entered into a field (i.e. passwords do not match, no text entered into a required field, etc.).

              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question What is the use of the indicator icons on my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer

              Clusters (TOP), Access Points (MIDDLE), User Account (BOTTOM)

              When one or more APs on your network are available for service, the Wireless Network Available icon is shown. The clustering icon indicates whether the current access point is clustered or not clustered (standalone).

              The number of access points available for service on the network is indicated by the Access Points icon.

              The number of client user accounts created and enabled on the network is indicated by the User Accounts icon.
              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I reset my DWL-2210AP to factory defaults?
              Answer Step 1 Locate the hole on the back of the DWL-2210AP below the word RESET.



              Step 2 Using a paper clip, press and hold the Reset button for about 5 seconds and then release.

              Step 3 After the DWL-2210AP reboots it will be reset to the factory default settings.
              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I change the wireless mode of my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Advanced and then click Wireless.



              Step 4 Next to Mode select either IEEE 802.11b or IEEE 802.11g from the drop-down list.

              • IEEE 802.11b supports data rates ranging from 1 to 11 Mbps.
              • IEEE 802.11g supports data rates ranging from 1 to 54 Mbps.

              Step 5 Click Update to save the new setting.
              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I configure DNS server settings on my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer DNS servers translate domain names to IP addresses.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Advanced and then click Ethernet.

              Step 4 To obtain DNS server addresses automatically select Dynamic next to DNS Nameservers using the radio buttons.



              Select Manual using the radio buttons to specify the IP address(es) of the DNS server(s).



              Step 5 Click Update to save the DNS settings.
              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I view the general settings for the interfaces of my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Status and then click Interfaces.

              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I enable/disable guest access on my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer Guest access allows users to connect to the Guest Interface of the DWL-2210AP.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Advanced and then click Ethernet.



              Step 4 Next to Guest Access select Enabled to enable it or Disabled to disable it using the radio buttons.

              Step 5 Under Guest Interface Settings enter the VLAN ID for the Guest Interface.

              Note: In order to enable guest access you must have the VLAN ID configured for the guest interface. Otherwise, you will receive the below error:



              Step 6 Click Update to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer Please read before upgrading:

            • Upgrading firmware will reset the settings to default which means you will lose all your settings.
            • Do NOT upgrade firmware over a wireless connection. You may damage the DWL-2210AP.

              Step 1 Download the firmware and save the file to your computer. You may want to save the file to your desktop. Do not try to run or launch the file - it will not work.

              Click here to download firmware

              WARNING: DO NOT upgrade the firmware over a wireless connection. You may damage the DWL-2210AP. Also, doing so could void the warranty.

              Step 2 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 3 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 4 On the left side, click Advanced and then click Upgrade.



              Step 5 Below Firmware Upgrade click Browse and navigate to the .bin or .tfp file you downloaded in Step 1. Left-click the file once to select it and then click Open.

              Step 6 Click Update. It will take a few seconds for the firmware upgrade to complete.

              Step 7 After the DWL-2210AP reboots, close your web browser and re-open it. Enter the IP address of the DWL-2210AP (default is 192.168.0.50) to reconnect to the web-based configuration. Enter username admin and password admin. Click OK.

              Step 8 Click Advanced to the left and then click Upgrade to the left. If next to Firmware Version the new version is displayed then the firmware upgrade is now complete. If the firmware version has not changed then start over again from Step 2.

              Step 9 If you have problems with the web-based configuration at this point, unplug the power to the DWL-2210AP, wait 10 seconds, and plug it back in. Repeat Step 7. If this did not help, perform a hard reset on the DWL-2210AP. To perform a hard reset, use a paperclip and hold down the reset button on the back of the unit for 10 seconds while the device is powered on. Release it and the DWL-2210AP will reboot, the lights will blink, and then stabilize. Repeat Step 7.

              Step 10 You can now reconfigure the DWL-2210AP.
              • Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I add user accounts to my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Cluster and then click Users.



              Step 4 Enter the following information in the Add a user... section:

              • Username - The username will be used to login to the access point.
              • Real Name - The full name of the person (i.e. John Smith).
              • Password - Enter password
              • Password (again for safety) - Re-type password.


              Step 5 Click Add Account to add the new user.
              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I reset my DWL-2210AP to factory defaults?
              Answer If you are not able to log into the DWL-2210AP or forgot the password, you may reset the access point by doing the following:

              Step 1 With the unit on, place a paper clip into the hole on the back of the unit labeled Reset.

              Step 2 Hold the paper clip down for 10 seconds and release.

              Note: Do not repower unit during this procedure.

              Step 3 The unit will reboot on its own. Once the WLAN light stops blinking, the unit is reset.

              Note: Resetting the access point does not reset the firmware to an earlier version. It will change all settings back to factory defaults.


              If you are able to login to the access point, you can reset it using the web-based configuration.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Advanced and then click Reset.



              Step 4 Click Reset to set the DWL-2210AP to factory defaults.

              Note: Do not repower unit during this procedure.

              Step 5 The unit will reboot on its own. Once the WLAN light stops blinking, the unit is reset.

              Note: Resetting the access point does not reset the firmware to an earlier version. It will change all settings back to factory defaults.
              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I view transmit and receive statistics on my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Status and then click Statistics.

              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I view what clients are connected to my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Status and then click Associations.

              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I configure my DWL-2210AP to sync with a NTP time server?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Advanced and then click Time Protocol.



              Step 4 Next to Network Time Protocol (NTP) select either Enabled or Disabled.

              Step 5 Next to NTP Server enter either the domain name (i.e. time.sample.com) or IP address (i.e. 12.345.67.8) of the NTP time server. For a list of NTP time servers go to http://www.ntp.org/.

              Step 6 Click Update to apply the NTP settings.
              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I view the event log on my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Statistics and then click Events.

              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I obtain a EAP-TLS certificate for a client?
              Answer You should already be familiar with networking, RADIUS server, PKI, and CA server. If you need help, please contact Microsoft or a certified professional. This FAQ is provided as-is and D-Link shall not be held liable for any consequences that arise from use of it. Use at your own risk.

              If you want to use IEEE 802.1x mode with EAP-TLS certificates for authentication and authorization of clients, you must have an external RADIUS server and a Public Key Authority Infrastructure (PKI), including a Certificate Authority (CA) server configured on your network. It is beyond the scope of this FAQ to describe the configuration of RADIUS server, PKI, and CA server. Consult the documentation for assistance.

              For more information go to http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;EN-US;231881 and http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;enus;318710#3.

              Wireless clients configured to use either WPA with RADIUS or IEEE 802.1x security modes with an external RADIUS server that supports TLS-EAP certificates must obtain a TLS certificate from the RADIUS server.

              This is an initial one-time step that must be completed on each client that uses either of these modes with certificates. MicrosoftŪ Certificate Server is used in the example below.

              To obtain a certificate for a client, follow these steps:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type https://x.x.x.x/certsrv in the address bar. Replace x.x.x.x with the IP address of the RADIUS/Certificate Authority server. Press Enter.

              Step 2 In the Security Alert window click Yes.



              Step 3 In the Welcome screen click Request a certificate.



              Step 4 Enter a valid username/password to access the RADIUS/Certificate Authority server.



              Step 5 In the Request a Certificate screen click User Certificate.



              Step 6 Click Yes in the Security Warning dialog to install the certificate.



              Step 7 In the User Certificate screen click Submit to complete the request.



              Step 8 In the Potential Scripting Violation dialog click Yes to confirm the request.



              Step 9 In the Certificate Issued screen click Install this certificate.



              Step 10 In the Potential Scripting Violation dialog click Yes to install the certificate.



              Step 11 In the Root Certificate Store dialog click Yes to confirm the installation.



              Installation is now complete.

              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I configure MicrosoftŪ Internet Authentication Service (IAS) to recognize my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer You should already be familiar with networking and MicrosoftŪ Internet Authentication Service. If you need help, please contact MicrosoftŪ or a certified professional. This FAQ is provided as-is and D-Link shall not be held liable for any consequences that arise from use of it.

              Step 1 Logon to the system hosting MicrosoftŪ Internet Authentication Service.

              Step 2 Open Internet Authentication Service.

              Step 3 In the left pane right-click on Radius Clients node and select New > Radius Client from the popup menu.



              Step 4 On the first screen of the New RADIUS Client wizard provide the following information about the D-Link DWL-2210AP to which you want your clients to connect:

              • A logical (friendly) name for the access point. (You might want to use DNS name or location.)
              • IP address for the access point.
              Click Next to continue.



              Step 5 Next to Shared secret enter the RADIUS Key that will be used to authenticate the access point. Retype the key to confirm.



              Step 6 Click Finish. The DWL-2210AP is now listed as a client of the authentication server.

              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question What is the default IP address of my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer The default IP address of the DWL-2210AP is 192.168.0.50. You will need this IP address to login to the web-based configuration.
              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question What methods of security does the DWL-2210AP support?
              Answer The DWL-2210AP supports the following methods of security:

              • Plain Text
              • Static WEP
              • IEEE 802.1x
              • WPA with Radius
              • WPA-PSK
              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I change the SSID of the guest/internal interface on my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Advanced and then click Wireless.



              Step 4 Next to SSID under the interface you want to change, enter the new SSID. The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.

              Step 5 Click Update to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I change the wireless channel on my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Advanced and then click Wireless.



              Step 4 Next to Channel select a channel from the drop-down list. It is recommended to use a non-overlapping channel of 1, 6, or 11. If you have 2.4GHz phones or experience interference, simply changing the channel may fix the issue.

              Step 5 Click Update to save the new setting.
              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I configure my DWL-2210AP using the KickStart application?
              Answer In order to configure the DWL-2210AP using the KickStart application, your computer and the DWL-2210AP must be connected to a DHCP enabled device such as a switch or router. The DWL-2210AP cannot be directly connected to your PC.

              Step 1 Insert the KickStart CD into your CD-ROM drive. The application should launch automatically.

              Step 2 Click KickStart (DHCP Networks Only).



              Step 3 Please wait while KickStart initializes.



              Step 4 Make sure that the DWL-2210AP is powered on and then click Next.



              Step 5 Please wait while KickStart searches for Access Points.



              Step 6 If no Access Points are found the below screen will appear:



              Verify that the Access Point is powered on and that it is connected to a DHCP enabled device. Repeat Steps 4 and 5.

              If KickStart discovers Access Points the below screen will appear:



              Step 7 Click Next to continue or let KickStart finish scanning and it will navigate to the next step automatically.

              Step 8 The Access Points that KickStart discovered will be displayed. Click Next to continue.



              Step 9 Click Administration Console to launch the web-based configuration.

              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I enable/disable AP Detection on my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer AP detection will scan for and list SSIDs in range of the DWL-2210AP.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Status and then click Neighbors.



              Step 4 Select Enabled to enable AP Detection or Disabled to disable it using the radio buttons.

              Step 5 Click Update to save the settings.

              If AP Detection is enabled the access points within range will be displayed.

              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I configure the LAN IP address on my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Advanced and then click Ethernet.



              Step 4 Next to Connection Type select DHCP or Static IP using the drop-down list.

              • DHCP - Obtain IP address settings automatically
              • Static IP - Manually specify IP address settings

              Step 5 If you select Static IP enter the static IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

              Step 6 Click Update to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I configure the basic settings on my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side click BASIC SETTINGS.



              Step 4 Configure the following:

              • Location - Enter the location of the device (i.e. Phone Room, Accounting, etc.).
              • Password - Here you can change the administrator password (recommended).
              • Network Name (SSID) - The SSID will identify your DWL-2210AP on the network.
              • New Access Points - Select either are configured automatically or are configured manually using the drop-down list. When set to Automatic access points will automatically join the cluster.
              Step 5 Click Update to apply the new settings.
              Model DWL-2210AP
              Question How do I configure the wireless authentication settings on my DWL-2210AP?
              Answer The DWL-2210AP supports the following wireless modes:


              Plain-text

              Plain text does not require users to authenticate to the DWL-2210AP.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Advanced and then click Security.



              Step 4 Next to Security Mode select Plain-text using the drop-down list.

              Step 5 Click Update to save the new settings.

              Top of Section
              Top of Page


              Static WEP

              Users authenticate to the DWL-2210AP using a WEP key.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Advanced and then click Security.



              Step 4 Next to Security Mode select Static WEP using the drop-down list.

              Step 5 Next to Transfer Key Index select the key index. This must be the same on all wireless devices.


              Step 6 Next to Key Length select either 64 bits or 128 bits using the radio buttons.

              • 64 bits - 10 characters in length
              • 128 bits - 26 characters in length
              Step 7 Next to Key Type select either ASCII or HEX using the radio buttons.

              • HEX - 0-9 and A-F only
              • ASCII - All numbers and letters
              Step 8 The read-only text box next to Characters Required represents the number of characters your WEP key must contain. Since this text box is read-only you will not be able to input any characters in it. It is for reference purposes.

              Step 9 Next to WEP Keys enter your WEP key in next to the key index number you specified in Step 5. The WEP key must be configured on all wireless devices.

              Step 10 Next to Authentication Algorithm select the either Shared Key, Open Key, or Both using the drop-down list.

              • Shared Key - Only devices with the same key will be allowed to communicate over a network with devices that share the same key.
              • Open Key - Wireless devices will be able to communicate with all devices on a network.
              • Both - Let clients specify if they want to use the WEP key as shared or open.

              Step 11 Click Update to save the new settings.

              Top of Section
              Top of Page


              WPA-PSK

              Users authenticate using a pre-shared key.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Advanced and then click Security.



              Step 4 Next to Security Mode select WPA-PSK using the drop-down list.

              Step 5 Next to Cipher Suites select TKIP, AES, or BOTH using the drop-down list.


              Step 6 Next to Key enter a pre-shared key. The key is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. The password can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless clients.

              Step 7 Click Update to save the new settings.

              Top of Section
              Top of Page


              WPA with RADIUS

              WPA with RADIUS authenticates users using a RADIUS server.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2210AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.



              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is admin (all lower case). Click OK.



              Step 3 On the left side, click Advanced and then click Security.



              Step 4 Next to Security Mode select WPA with RADIUS using the drop-down list.

              Step 5 Next to Cipher Suites select TKIP, AES, or BOTH using the drop-down list.


              Step 6 Next to Authentication Server select Built-in or External using the drop-down list.

              • Built-in - Use RADIUS server that is built-in to the DWL-2210AP
              • External - Use an external RADIUS server

              Step 6 If you selected External enter the IP address and key of the external RADIUS server.

              Step 7 To enable accounting for billing purposes check Enable radius accounting (available only in External mode). To allow users not authenticating with WPA to authenticate to the DWL-2210AP check Enable non-WPA IEEE 802.1x clients

              Step 8 Click Update to save the new settings.

              Top of Section
              Top of Page

              Model DWL-2230AP
              Question How do I login to the DWL-2230AP?
              Answer You cannot login to this device directly. The device must first be connected to an XStack Switch and then it can be managed through the switchīs interface.
              Model DWL-2700AP
              Question What type of cable do I need to connect the DWL-2700AP directly to my Computer or Laptop to configure my Access Point.
              Answer To connect your DWL-2700AP direclty to your Computer or Laptop you will need a Crossover cable.

              If you try and use a standard Cat5E cable you will not be able to ping or login to the Access Point for configuring or troubleshooting.
              Model DWL-2700AP
              Question What devices will my DWL-2700AP repeat?
              Answer The DWL-2700AP will only repeat the signal of another DWL-2700AP.
              Model DWL-2700AP
              Question How do I reset my DWL-2700AP?
              Answer Note: The DWL-2700AP does not have a reset button. Restoration of factory defaults must be done within the Graphical User Interface (GUI).

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type in the IP address of your DWL-2700AP. By default it should be http://192.168.0.50. The username is Admin, the password should be blank (nothing).

              Step 2 Click on Tools tab and then System on the left hand side.



              Step 3 Click on the Restore button. This will restore your DWL-2700AP to Factory Default Settings. A message box will appear that will read, "Device will reboot and web will be disconnected! Continue?". Click on Ok. Your DWL-2700AP has now been reset to factory defaults.

              Model DWL-2700AP
              Question Can I use a site survey tool to scan Guest SSIDs?
              Answer Guest SSIDs cannot be scanned by site survey tools. Guest SSIDs can only be associated by users who know the exact SSID and security settings.
              Model DWL-2700AP
              Question How do I configure the WLAN Partition (filter) on my DWL-2700AP?
              Answer The DWL-2700AP allows you to select whether or not either wireless band can pass information, via the Inter-Wireless Client Connect option. If this feature is not enabled, that particular wireless band will not be able to pass any information through the Access Point. This feature effectively segregates the wireless band of your choice from the rest of the Network. With Ethernet to WLAN Access disabled, information sent from the Ethernet side will not be passed to the Wireless Clients. However, wireless clients will still be able to transmit across Ethernet for browsing, etc.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2700AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Filters.

              Step 4 Click WLAN Partition.



              Step 5 Two filters are available to control traffic on your network. Check Enabled using the check boxes to enable the features below:

              Inter-Wireless Client Connect
              • Enabled - this will allow wireless clients to communicate with each other (within the same wireless band).
              • Disabled - wireless clients are not allowed to exchange data with each other (within the same wireless band).
              Ethernet to WLAN Access
              • Enabled - Ethernet devices can exchange data with wireless devices using the Access Point.
              • Disabled - Ethernet devices are not allowed to send data to wireless devices associated with the Access Point. However, wireless devices can still send data to the Ethernet devices.
              Step 6 Click Apply to save the settings.
              Model DWL-2700AP
              Question How do I change the wireless channel of my DWL-2700AP?
              Answer In most cases, you only need to change the channel on the access point. Most wireless adapters will find your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the channel of the access point.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2700AP in the Address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Performance to the left.



              Step 4 Next to Channel, select the channel using the drop-down list. It is recommended to use channel 1, 6, or 11. If you have 2.4GHz phones or experience interference, simply changing the channel may solve connection dropping issues.

              Step 5 Click on Apply to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-2700AP
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DWL-2700AP?
              Answer WARNING: DO NOT DOWNGRADE THE FIRMWARE ON THE DWL-2700AP TO AN OLDER VERSION. DOING SO WILL DAMAGE THE UNIT.

              Please read before upgrading:

            • Upgrading firmware will reset the settings to default. This means you will lose all your settings.
            • Do NOT upgrade firmware over a wireless connection. You may damage the DWL-2700AP.

              Step 1 Download the firmware and save the file to your computer. You may want to save the file to your desktop. Do not try to run or launch the file - it will not work.

              Click here to download firmware.

              Step 2 If you are connecting the DWL-2700AP directly to your PC you will need a cross-over cable. If you are connecting to a switch or router you will need to use a straight-through cable.

              WARNING: DO NOT upgrade the firmware with a wireless connection. You may damage the DWL-2700AP.

              Step 3 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2700AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 4 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 5 Click the Tools tab and then click Firmware to the left.

              Step 6 Click the Browse... button and navigate to the .bin or .tfp file you downloaded in Step 1. Select the file by left-clicking it once. Click Open and then click OK. It will take a few seconds for the upgrade to complete.



              Step 7 After the DWL-2700AP reboots, close your web browser and reopen it. Enter 192.168.0.50 to reconnect with the web configuration. Enter username admin and again leave the password blank. Click OK. The firmware upgrade is now complete.

              Step 8 If you have problems with the web configuration at this point, unplug the power to the access point, wait 10 seconds, and plug back in. Repeat Step 6.

              Step 9 You can now reconfigure the access point.
              • Model DWL-2700AP
              Question How do I change the SSID of my DWL-2700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2700AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click Wireless to the left.

              Step 4 Next to SSID enter the new SSID.

              The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.



              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-2700AP
              Question How do I check the operating temperature of my DWL-2700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2700AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Status tab and then click Indication to the left.



              The operating temperature of the DWL-2700AP will be displayed in both Celsius and Fahrenheit.
              Model DWL-2700AP
              Question How do I disable SSID broadcast on my DWL-2700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2700AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click Wireless to the left.

              Step 4 Next to SSID Broadcast select Disable using the drop-down list.



              Step 5 Click Apply to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-2700AP
              Question How do I change the LAN IP address of my DWL-2700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2700AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click LAN to the left.



              Step 4 Next to Get IP From select Dynamic (DHCP) using the drop-down list if you want the access point to receive an IP address automatically from a DHCP server or router. Otherwise, select Static (Manual) using the drop-down list.

              We strongly suggest using a static IP address. The IP address is not used for networking, only for configuration. Make sure the IP address is within the same IP range as your network.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-2700AP
              Question How do I configure Telnet on my DWL-2700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2700AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Misc. to the left.



              Step 4 To enable Telnet, check Enabled using the check box next to Status. Select a timeout using the drop-down list next to Timeout.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.

              Advanced users can use Telnet to configure the DWL-2700AP. Go to Start > Run and type telnet 192.168.0.50 in the Run window and then press Enter. Enter the username (default is admin) and the password (default is blank [nothing]). Telnet commands are not supported by D-Link Tech Support. Use at your own risk.

              To prevent users from using Telnet, uncheck the Enable check box next to Status.
              Model DWL-2700AP
              Question How do I change the data rate of my DWL-2700AP?
              Answer It is recommended to configure the data rate on your wireless access point before configuring your wireless adapters. Most wireless adapters will find your wireless network by the SSID assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the data rate of the access point.

              Note: It is strongly recommended to keep this setting at Auto.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2700AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Performance to the left.



              Step 4 Select a fixed speed using the drop-down list next to Data Rate.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-2700AP
              Question How do I enable MAC Filtering on my DWL-2700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2700AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (default password is blank). Click OK to continue.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Filters to the left.

              Step 4 Next to Access Control select one of the following modes using the drop-down list:
              • Disabled - Disables this feature and will allow all wireless clients to connect.
              • Accept - Blocks all clients except for what you enter in the list.
              • Reject - Allows all clients except for what you enter in the list.


              Step 5 Enter the MAC address of the wireless adapter(s) that you wish to Accept or Reject.

              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-2700AP
              Question How do I use the AP Grouping Settings on my DWL-2700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2700AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Grouping to the left.

              Step 4 Next to Load Balance select Enabled using the drop-down list.



              When you Enable Load Balance you allow several access points to balance wireless network traffic and wireless clients among the access points with the same SSID. All the APs that share Load Balancing must have the same SSID. Assign each Access Point a different non-overlapping channel (e.g., 1, 6, 11).

              Step 5 Next to Link Integrate select Enabled using the drop-down list.



              Note: When Link Integrate is Enabled, the wireless segment associated with the AP will be disconnected whenever the connection between the AP and the LAN is dropped.

              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-2700AP / DWL-3200AP / DWL-7700AP / General Wireless
              Question How do I determine the ideal radius for my wireless bridge?
              Answer
              RF Fresnal Zone Calculator

              The purpose of calculating the Fresnel Zone is to help determine the RF (Radio Frequency) propagation area. This helps users avoid wireless signal degradation and interference by choosing a better site to set up their wireless bridges.

              Distance (d): Miles
              Frequency (f): GHz
               
              Example: Suppose two 2.4GHz wireless bridges five miles apart are trying to link together. The Fresnel Zone in this situation would be a radius of 31.25 feet. If there are objects interfering with the transmission, then the ideal radius would be reduced by 20%, resulting in an actual radius of 25 feet.


              Fresnel Zone - The area around the visual line-of-sight between transmitter and receiver. Radio waves disperse as they leave the antenna. This area must only have 0~20% obstruction of the total coverage or else the signal strength will be weakened.

              *Actual data throughput will vary. Network conditions and environmental factors lower actual data throughput rate.
              Model DWL-2700AP / DWL-7700AP
              Question How do I change the user name and password on my DWL-2700AP?
              Answer You can change the user name and password within the web-based configuration utility that is built-in to the DWL-2700AP.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-2700AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Admin to the left.



              Step 4 To change the administrative user name, enter the new user name in the field next to User Name.

              To change the administrative password, enter your old password, your new password, and then re-type your new password.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-3200AP
              Question How do I configure WDS on two DWL-3200AP bridged to each other?
              Answer You will need the MAC address of the remote AP to configure your wireless bridge.

              Step 1: Connect the DWL-3200AP to your PC using an Ethernet cable. Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range as the DWL-3200AP for configuration. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2: Open a web browser and enter in the IP address of the access point (http://192.168.0.50). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).



              Step 3: Click on the Home tab and then click on Wireless on the left side. For Mode, select WDS. You can also select WDS with AP if you would like to create a wireless bridge and keep the AP functionality. Enter the Remote AP MAC Address(IE 50:23:AB:D4:56:E1). Click Apply to save your settings.

              Step 4: Repeat the instructions for the remote access point. Click Apply to save your settings.

              Note: If you have encryption enabled, ensure the key matches on both access points. Also, ensure that both access points do not have the same IP address. By default, the IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              What D-Link devices support WDS?
              What access points can bridge with each other?
              How do I determine the ideal radius for my wireless bridge?
              What is WDS?
              Model DWL-3200AP
              Question How do I configure the DWL-3200AP using D-View 5.1
              Answer Step 1: Download and install the D-View module for the DWL-3200AP to the PC with the D-View software installed. The module can be downloaded here.

              Step 2: Make sure the DWL-3200AP has been configured with the appropriate IP address, subnet mask, default gateway of your IP network.



              Step 3: In the DWL-3200AP web configuration, click on Tools and check the Status option under SNMP Settings. Click on Apply to activate the changes.



              Step 4: Open the D-View application. Click on the Discovery button. This button can be found on the toolbar to the right of the button labeled MIB.



              Step 5: Type the IP address of the access point into both From IP address and To IP address fields, considering you are only searching for the access point. Click on Start on the righthand side. Once the access point is found it will be added to the list. Click on Save & Exit.



              Step 6: You will prompted to insert the device into TreeView. Click on Yes.



              Step 7: In the main application page, click on Ethernet on the lefthand side. Click on the appropriate IP subnet of your network. This will display a list of the devices configured with SNMP. Click on the IP address and icon for the DWL-3200AP. Doubleclick the DWL-3200AP icon in the main window to access the configuration settings.



              Step 8: An image of the access point will appear. Use the toolbar across the top to view and configure the settings of the DWL-3200AP. The access point can now be configured using D-View.

              Model DWL-500
              Question Does my D-Link DWL-500 work in Windows XP?
              Answer Note: We do NOT claim XP support for the DWL-500 on the box or website. Use the following instructions at your own risk.

              Make sure you DO NOT use the built-in drivers for the Ricoh controller. You must use the older drivers from the D-Link CD. There isnīt a download for this adapter on our website.

              Installation for DWL-500 (PCI card holder only):

              Do NOT install PCI card in computer until loading drivers. If you already put in PCI card, make sure the DWL-650 in not in holder.

              Step 1 Go to Start>Control Panel>System>Hardware>Device Manager. Select PCMCIA Adapters and remove the Ricoh Controller and any services if listed.

              Step 2 Close all windows. Insert the D-Link CD. When the autorun menu appears, click Install Drivers. You will have 2 options. ONLY install the first - PCI Holder Drivers. DO NOT INSTALL THE DWL-650 DRIVERS. This will crash your system.

              Step 3 After installation, close all windows. If you are prompted to reboot computer, click Yes. After the computer boots into Windows, follow instructions below for the DWL-650 wireless adapter.


              Note: For the DWL-650, do not use the driver CD. Download the XP drivers and extract to your computer. Do not run any file from this file package. Get the driver at support.dlink.com.

              To install the Windows XP driver, you will need to first uninstall the old drivers/configuration utility. Insert the DWL-650 card into the PCI card holder while the computer is on. If the computer detects the DWL-650 as a new card, skip to step 4 below.

              Step 1 Go to Start>Settings>Control Panel>Add/Remove Programs. Remove the D-Link wireless configuration utility. After the software has been removed, double-click the System Icon in Control Panel and select the Hardware tab. Select Device Manger.

              Step 2 Right-click the DWL-650 listed under Network Adapters and select Uninstall.

              Step 3 When finished, shut down computer, insert the DWL-650 card into PCI card holder, and then turn computer on.

              Step 4 After restarting the computer Windows will detect New Hardware. Specify the location that you extracted the downloaded drivers to.

              Step 5 Windows should bring up an error message saying that the drivers havenīt passed Windows Logo Testing, click Continue Anyway. The drivers should install properly.

              Windows XP has a built in Wireless utility that will located in your System Tray next to your Clock. DO NOT load the D-Link Configuration Utility from the CD. It will not run on XP properly.
              Model DWL-500
              Question How do I prevent my PC from detecting the DWL-500 as a "PCMCIA MTD-0002" device?
              Answer If you have a motherboard which uses the Intel 815EEA chipset and have Windows 2000 installed this issue can be resolved with the latest Intel BIOS upgrade, version P10. Intel has made this upgrade available at http://support.intel.com/. After the BIOS is flashed the DWL-500 will be identified correctly thereby allowing its drivers to be found and installed correctly.

              IMPORTANT NOTE: Upgrading the BIOS is an advanced procedure and can cause unrecoverable damage to data, your PCīs configuration, and / or other associated components. Please contact Intel or your local computer service center to ensure that your BIOS is flashed properly by a qualified Technician. Otherwise, doing so on your own will be done at your own risk. D-Link is not liable for any damages which may result from such a BIOS flash.
              Model DWL-5000AP
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DWL-5000AP?
              Answer NOTE: Do not upgrade firmware over a wireless connection.

              Please read all the steps before upgrading firmware. You will need the serial (RS232) cable that came with the DWL-5000 and your Windows CD. This FAQ is 2 pages long. If you are printing these instructions, make sure you click the Page 2 link at the bottom and print it as well.

              Download the firmware

              Step 1 Download the DWL-5000AP firmware here.

              Step 2 Save the file to your desktop.

              Verify your connection to the DWL-5000AP

              Note: Before you start make sure you can log into your DWL-5000AP.

              Step 1 You must be on the same subnet as the DWL-5000AP. The default IP address of the DWL-5000AP is 192.168.0.50. If your IP address is not 192.168.0.X you will need to set a static IP address of 192.168.0.X with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.

              How do I assign a static IP Address?

              Step 2 Open your Internet browser and type in the IP address of your DWL-5000AP. The default IP address of the DWL-5000AP is 192.168.0.50. Log into the DWL-5000AP. The default login is Username: Admin with no password.

              Step 3 After you confirm that you are able to log in you may close your browser.

              Setup an FTP Server

              Step 1 Using Windows 2000 or Windows XP, create an FTP server. Make sure you have Internet Information Services (IIS) installed. You can install IIS from Start>Settings>Control Panel>Add/Remove Programs. Click on Add/Remove Windows Components and select Internet Information Services (IIS). Windows may prompt you for the Original installation CD. Insert the Windows 2000 installation CD at this time.



              Step 2 Once you have IIS installed you will need to create a user account on the PC. To do this go to Start>Settings>Control Panel>Administrative Tools>Computer Management. Double-click on Local Users and Groups and then click on Users.



              Step 3 Click on the Action menu at the top of the window and select New User.



              Step 4 In the User Name field type in dlink. In the Password and Confirm Password field type in dlink. Uncheck User must change password at next Logon and check Password Never Expires. Click Create then click Close to close this window. You now have a user account with the username of dlink and a password of dlink.



              Step 5 Verify you can log into the ftp server. Go to Start>Run and type in cmd. Once you are the command prompt type in ipconfig to display your current IP information. Now ftp to your IP address. (Ex.ftp 192.168.0.10). When prompted for the User type in dlink. You should now be prompted to input a password, type in dlink. Once you are logged in you should see:

              user dlink logged in
              ftp>



              Extracting the Firmware

              Download the latest version of WinZip at Winzip.com. You may use the evaluation version. Please check with WinZip for terms of use.

              Step 1 After installing WinZip, double-click on the file that you downloaded from our support site.

              Step 2 WinZip will open. Click I Agree.



              Step 3 The contents of the .ZIP file will be displayed. In our example, there are two. Click Extract at the top.



              Step 4 You will need to select the destination of the zipped files. For this procedure extract the files to C:\Inetpub\ftproot. Make sure you select All Files under the heading Files on the left side. Also select Use Folder Names. When you have selected the destination location, click Extract.



              Step 5 The files will then copy to the destination location. Once there is a green dot in the lower right corner, the files are done extracting. You may now close WinZip.



              Login to the DWL-5000AP

              Step 1 Open your browser and enter the IP address of the DWL-5000AP in the address bar. The default IP address of the DWL-5000AP is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Once you have successfully logged in to the DWL-5000AP, minimize your internet browser. DO NOT CLOSE THE BROWSER.

              DO NOT CLOSE YOUR INTERNET BROWSER OR REBOOT THE DWL-5000AP FROM THIS POINT ON UNTIL YOU ARE INSTRUCTED TO!

              Hyperterminal into the DWL-5000AP

              Step 1 Connect the RS-232 cable to the console port on the back of the DWL-5000AP, then connect the other end to COM1 on your PC. Go to Start>Programs>Accessories>Communications>Hyperterminal.



              Step 2 Name the new connection DWL-5000AP and click OK.



              Step 3 Select the com port you are connected to and click OK.



              Step 4 Change the Bits per second to 9600 and leave all other settings at the default values. Click OK.



              Step 5 At this point unplug the DWL-5000AP and immediately plug it back in. You will now see the DWL-5000AP go through POST. When the DWL-5000AP is done going through POST you will see Ready in the Hyperterminal window.



              Step 6 Press the Enter key to bring up the AP login. Type Admin in the for the AP login then press Enter. Leave the password blank and press Enter.



              Step 7 Type in ls (LS) then press Enter to display the contents of the DWL-5000AP.



              Step 8 Type in admin then press Enter. When prompted for the password type in dlink then press Enter.



              Step 9 Type in format then press Enter.



              Step 10 Type ls then press Enter. The DWL-5000AP will be null.



              Continue to Page 2
              Model DWL-5000AP
              Question How do I enable Encryption on the DWL-5000AP wireless Access Point?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-5000AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the access point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is Admin (capital A, lowercase dmin), and the password is blank (nothing). Select the configuration button.



              Step 3 Check the Enable Encryption box, and for Authentication Type, select Shared Key. Click Update to save settings. Do not reboot yet. Scroll up and select the Shared Keys link.



              Step 4 Under Default, select 1. Enter a random Hex encryption key that you make up. For the key length select 64, 128, or 152-bit encryption. The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption.

            • 64-bit encryption 10 characters
            • 128-bit encryption 26 characters
            • 152-bit encryption 32 characters

              The encryption key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters.

              Step 5 Click on the update button and then click Reboot to save the changes.
              • Model DWL-5000AP
              Question Does my DWL-5000 Access Point support 802.1x?
              Answer Unfortunately, at this time, the DWL-5000 does not support 802.1x authentication and key management. We will implement this feature in a future firmware upgrade.

              What is 802.1x?
              Model DWL-5000AP
              Question Can I hyperterminal into my DWL-5000AP?
              Answer Yes. We supply a serial cable in the packaging of the DWL-5000AP.

              Note: D-Link Tech Support currently will not support any hyperterminal functions.

              Step 1 Connect the DWL-5000AP to your computer, then open up the Hyperterminal program. Select 9600 as the bit rate, and select what com port you are using (1 or 2).

              Step 2 Once you have opened the program you are going to hit any key, and the AP login will appear. Type in the DWL-5000’s Login name, and hit enter. * The default login name is Admin (with a capital A).

              Step 3 The password is blank by default, just click on enter if you have not changed the password.

              Step 4 To get a list of commands type in Help, then hit enter. This will bring up a list of every command that you can use to change the configuration of the DWL-5000AP. Here is a list of commands:

              Command Function
              Del acl Delete access control list
              Del bridge Delete bridge link
              Del key Delete WEP key
              Find bss Finds BSS-ID
              Find channel Find available channel
              ftp Software update via FTP
              get acl Display access control list
              get aifs Display AIFS
              get association Display association table
              get authentication Display Authentication type
              get autochannelselect Display auto channel select
              get beacon interval Display Beacon interval
              get bridge Display Bridge links
              get channel Display radio channel
              get Config Display current AP configuration
              get cwmin Display minimum contention window
              get dtim Display data beacon rate
              get fragmentthreshold Display fragment threshold
              get gateway Display gateway IP address
              get hardware Display hardware revision
              get ipaddr Display IP address
              get ipmask Display IP subnet mask
              get key Display WEP key
              get login Display login user name
              get power Display transmit power setting
              get qos Display QOS mode
              get rate Display data rate
              get retrylimit Display transmit retry limit
              get rtsthreshold Display RTS/CTS threshold
              get snmp Display SNMP community name
              get snmpserver Display SNMP/NTP server IP address
              get ssid Display Service Set ID
              get station Display Station status
              get systemname Display access point system name
              get turbo Display turbo mode setting
              get uptime Display uptime
              get version Display firmware version
              get wep Display WEP mode
              help Display CLI command list
              ping ping
              reboot Reboot access point
              run run command file
              quit Logoff
              set acl Set access control list
              set getsnmp Modify Get SNMP community name
              set gateway Assign gateway IP address
              set hostipaddr Assign IP address
              set ipaddr Assign IP address
              set ipmask Assign subnet mask
              set key Assign WEP key
              set login Modify login user name
              set password Modify password
              set power Modify transmit power
              set qos Modify QOS mode
              set rate Set data rate
              set regulatorydomain Set regulatory domain
              set retrylimit Set Transmit Retry Limit
              set setsnmp Set SNMP/NTP server IP address
              set ssid Assign Service Set ID
              set systemname Set access point system name
              set tzone Set time zone
              set turbo Set turbo mode
              set wep Set WEP mode
              timeofday Display current time of day
              version Display software version
              Model DWL-5000AP
              Question How do I reset my DWL-5000AP to factory defaults?
              Answer The DWL-5000AP cannot be reset to factory defaults. Pressing the reset button will only restart the device.
              Model DWL-5000AP / DWL-A520 / DWL-A650 / DI-754 / DI-764 / DWL-AB520 / DWL-AB650 / DWL-6000AP
              Question How do I use 152-bit encryption with my Windows XP machine?
              Answer Currently, Windows XP does not support 152-bit encryption when using the Wireless Zero Configuration utility that is built in. You must disable the Zero Configuration in order to use 152-bit encryption.

              Note: Microsoft has released Service Pack 1 for Windows XP which adds 152-bit encryption. If you do not have Service Pack 1, then follow directions below.

              Step 1 Click on Start and right-click on My Computer. Select Manage.

              Step 2 In the left pane, double-click on Services and Applications. Select Services.

              Step 3 In the right pane, scroll down and double-click on Wireless Zero Configuration to open the properties window.



              Step 4 In the properties window, click on the General tab at the top. Next to Startup Type, click the down arrow and select Disabled. This will prevent the utility from running when you reboot your computer. Under Service Status, click Stop. Click OK to close the properties window.



              Step 5 Close remaining windows. Click on Start>Connect To and select Show All Connections.

              Step 6 Right-click on the Wireless Network Connection for the D-Link wireless adapter and select Disable.

              Step 7 Right-click on the Wireless Network Connection for the D-Link wireless adapter and select Properties. Under Connect Using, click Configure.



              Step 8 From the Settings tab, highlight Default under Configuration List and select Modify.



              Step 9 Under the General tab, configure your wireless card to match the settings on your Access Point. Enter SSID (case-sensitive), Network Connection (Infrastructure if using an Access Point), and set turbo mode on or off to match your Access Point.



              Step 10 Click on the Security tab and enter your encryption information to match your Access Point. Click OK to save settings and click OK to close window.



              Step 11 Repeat steps 6 and 7 but select Enable to activate your new settings.
              Model DWL-520
              Question How do I install the DWL-520 in Windows XP?
              Answer Download our Quick Installation Guide to assist you with installation process.

              Step 1 With your computer off and the power cord disconnected, insert the DWL-520 Wireless adapter. Once the card is firmly seated in a PCI slot, turn your computer on.

              Step 2 Place the DWL-520 CD into the CD drive. Windows will detect new hardware and come up with the Welcome screen. Select Install from a list or specific location then click on the Next button.

              Step 3 On the next screen select Search For The Best Drivers, and Include This Location in the Search. Click the Browse button and select your CD drive. Click the OK button.

              Step 4 Click Next. A notice regarding Windows Logo testing will appear. Click Continue Anyway. Windows will copy the needed files. Click Finish.

            • Download Drivers Here
            • Download Manual Here
            • What can interfere with my wireless connection?
              • Model DWL-520
              Question Why didnīt my operating system discover new hardware after I installed the DWL-520? What are the PCI specifications for the DWL-520?
              Answer The DWL-520 requires a PCI 2.2 compliant motherboard in order to function. If your PCI slot is 2.1 compliant, then the card wonīt be detected by Windows and unfortunately will not work. Contact your computer manufacture for information on your motherboard.
              Model DWL-520
              Question Will the DWL-520 work in my Windows NT 4.0 computer.
              Answer The DWL-520 is not supported in any release of Windows NT (3.x/4.0), The box does not claim support and drivers are not available. This adapter will work on Windows 2000 and XP.
              Model DWL-520
              Question How do I install the DWL-520 in Windows 98, Me, or 2000?
              Answer Download our Quick Installation Guide to assist you with the installation process.

              Note: Before you physically install the DWL-520 into your computer, you need to install the D-Link CD first.

              Step 1 Turn the computer on. Once the computer is on insert the DWL-520 Wireless PCI Adapter CD into your CD drive. When the autorun screen appears, click Install Config Utilities.

              Step 2 The Welcome screen will appear. Click on the Next button.

              Step 3 Click on Yes to accept the License Agreement. Click Finish to complete the installation of the configuration software.

              IMPORTANT: Before you install the DWL-520 to your computer, TURN OFF your computer and unplug the power cord.

              Step 4 Install the DWL-520 into your computer. Turn your computer back on.

              Step 5 Once the computer is back on Windows should detect the DWL-520 and install the appropriate drivers for the Wireless card. Click on the Yes button to restart your computer if prompted.

            • Download latest driver here.
            • Download manual here
            • What can interfere with my wireless connection?
              • Model DWL-520+
              Question With my DWL-520+ installed in my Compaq computer I get an NMI Parity Error when I shutdown. How do I fix this?

              Answer Note: D-Link has found that changing a BIOS setting may resolve this issue. D-Link DOES NOT support or encourage end users going into the BIOS to make any changes. Making changes in the BIOS may cause your computer not to function properly. It is recommended that you consult with your PC manufacturer before attempting to make any changes in the BIOS. D-Link will not be liable for any damage resulting from changes made in the BIOS.

              If you have Bus Mastering>PCI Serial Number Generation enabled in the BIOS you may have to disable this. Please contact your PC manufacturer before making any chages to your BIOS.

              Contact Compaq here
              Model DWL-520+ / DWL-650+
              Question How do I find help for the Boingo software that shipped with my D-Link wireless adapter?
              Answer D-Link does not directly support third-party software shipped with its products. From our experience, the fastest way to resolve Boingo issues is by requesting support via e-mail, support@boingo.com.

              You can find more information about Boingo on their home page, Boingo.com.

              To contact Boingo Technical Support by phone, call 800-880-4117 Option 3.

              NOTE: Using software that is not necessarily needed to operate a D-Link product is done at your own discretion.
              Model DWL-520+ / DWL-650+
              Question How do I enable WEP encryption on the DWL-520+ / DWL-650+?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless router or access point before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              To configure your wireless settings please select one of the following:

            • Site Survey (Win98/Me/2000)
            • Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)
            • Windows XP SP2
            • Not Showing in Site Survey


              Site Survey

              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select Site Survey.



              Step 2 Select your SSID in the Available Networks Authentication section for the auth. mode. Click Connect.

              Step 3 Enable encryption and configure the settings below Auth. mode. to match those configured on your access point or wireless router.



              Step 4 Click OK.



              Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)

              Step 1 Right-click the two computer monitors icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.

              Step 2 Click Advanced.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and click OK.



              Step 4 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select Site Survey.



              Step 5 Select your SSID in the Available Networks Authentication section for the auth. mode. Click Connect.

              Step 6 Enable encryption and configure the settings below Auth. mode. to match those configured on your access point or wireless router.



              Step 7 Click OK.

              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               click here.



              Windows XP SP2

              Step 1 Right-click the wireless icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.





              Step 2 In the Wireless Network Connection window click Change advanced settings on the right side below Related Tasks.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and then click OK.



              Step 4 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select Site Survey.



              Step 5 Select your SSID in the Available Networks Authentication section for the auth. mode. Click Connect.

              Step 6 Enable encryption and configure the settings below Auth. mode. to match those configured on your access point or wireless router.



              Step 7 Click OK.

              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               click here.



              If your wireless network is not showing in Site Survey


              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select Encryption.



              Step 2 Select Data Encryption and then select Shared Authentication next to Auth. mode. Select 64, 128, or 256-bit encryption for the key length. Next to Key 1 type in the Hex encryption key that was entered into the wireless router/access point.



              Step 3 Click Apply to save your settings.

              • Model DWL-520+ / DWL-650+
              Question How do I connect my DWL-520+/DWL-650+ to a wireless network?
              Answer To configure your wireless settings please select one of the following:

            • Site Survey (Win98/Me/2000)
            • Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)
            • Windows XP SP2
            • Not Showing in Site Survey


              Site Survey

              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 2 Click Site Survey on the left side and select the SSID of your wireless access point or router on the right side and then click Connect.



              Step 3 Click OK.



              Step 4 You will be able to view your link status in the Link Info window.





              Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)

              Step 1 Right-click the two computer monitors icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.

              Step 2 Click Advanced.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and click OK.



              Step 4 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 5 Click Site Survey on the left side and select the SSID of your wireless access point or router on the right side and then click Connect.



              Step 6 Click OK.



              Step 7 You will be able to view your link status in the Link Info window.



              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               click here.



              Windows XP SP2

              Step 1 Right-click the wireless icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.





              Step 2 In the Wireless Network Connection window click Change advanced settings on the right side below Related Tasks.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings.



              Step 4 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 5 Click Site Survey on the left side and select the SSID of your wireless access point or router on the right side and then click Connect.



              Step 6 Click OK.



              Step 7 You will be able to view your link status in the Link Info window.



              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               click here.



              If your wireless network is not showing in Site Survey


              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 2 Click Configuration on the left side.

              Step 3 Type the SSID of your wireless access point or router next to SSID. Next to Wireless Mode select Infrastructure and then click Apply to save your settings.





            • What is SSID?
            • What is Infrastructure?
            • How do I enable Encryption (WEP)?
              • Model DWL-520+ / DWL-650+
              Question How do I connect my DWL-520+ or DWL-650+ wireless card to an Access Point that has the Broadcast SSID disabled?
              Answer When you disable the Broadcast SSID on your Access Point (AP) or wireless router, you will no longer be able to view the SSID in Site Survey. The only way to reconnect is to manually configure the wireless card.

              Step 1 Log into the configuration by double-clicking on the bar graph icon in the system tray. You can also access the configuration by double-clicking on the blue D-Link icon on the desktop.

              Step 2 Select the Configuration link from the left hand menu. Enter in the SSID of the AP, change the mode to Infrastructure, and click Apply.



              Step 3 You can view your link quality and signal strength from the Link Info page.



              How do I disable the SSID broadcast on my DWL-900AP+?
              Model DWL-520D / DWL-650M
              Question How to I connect my DWL-520 (revD) / DWL-650 (revM) to a wireless network?
              Answer To configure your wireless settings please select one of the following:

            • Site Survey (Win98/Me/2000)
            • Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)
            • Windows XP SP2
            • Not Showing in Site Survey


              Site Survey

              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 2 Click Site Survey on the left side, select the SSID of your wireless network on the right side, and then click Configure.



              Step 3 Click OK.



              Step 4 Select your SSID in the Profile section and click Connect.





              Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)

              Step 1 Right-click the two computer monitors icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.

              Step 2 Click Advanced.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and click OK.



              Step 4 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 5 Click Site Survey on the left side, select the SSID of your wireless network on the right side, and then click Configure.



              Step 6 Click OK.



              Step 7 Select your SSID in the Profile section and click Connect.



              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               read here.



              Windows XP SP2

              Step 1 Right-click the wireless icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.





              Step 2 In the Wireless Network Connection window click Change advanced settings on the right side below Related Tasks.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and click OK.



              Step 4 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 5 Click Site Survey on the left side, select the SSID of your wireless network on the right side, and then click Configure.



              Step 6 Click OK.



              Step 7 Select your SSID in the Profile section and click Connect.



              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               read here.



              If your wireless network is not showing in Site Survey

              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 2 Click Configuration on the left side.

              Step 3 Type the SSID of your wireless access point or router next to SSID. Next to Wireless Mode select Infrastructure and then click Apply to save your settings.

              • Model DWL-520D / DWL-650M
              Question How do I install the DWL-520 (rev D) or DWL-650 (rev M)?
              Answer Important: Make sure you run the CD before you physically connect your wireless card in your computer.

              Step 1 Insert the D-Link Air DWL-520D/DWL-650M Driver CD into the CD-ROM drive. When the installation screen appears click Install Drivers.



              Step 2 Click Next on the following three screens to install the utility in the default location.



              Step 3 Select No, I will restart my computer later, then click on the Finish button to complete the utility installation.



              Step 4 Shut down the computer and insert the card into an available slot. Once installed, turn on the computer.

              Note: If installing the DWL-520, make sure you unplug the power to the computer before placing the adapter into the PCI slot.

              Step 5 Select Install Software Automatically (Recommended) and click on the Next button.



              Step 6 Click Next when Windows finds the driver and click Finish to complete installation. Restart the computer to finalize the installation.



              Note: In Windows 2000 and XP you may receive the Digital Signature Not Found message. If so, click on the Continue Anyway button to continue with the installation.

              Model DWL-520D / DWL-650M
              Question How do I enable encryption on my DWL-520 (rev D) and DWL-650 (rev M)?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless access point or router before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Step 1 Access the D-Link configuration by double-clicking on the bar graph icon in the system tray.



              Step 2 Select the Site Survey link from the menu on the left. Highlight the SSID of your wireless Access Point or wireless Router and click on the Configure button.



              Step 3 Change the Data Encryption to Enabled and change the Authentication Mode to Shared. Select 64 or 128 Encryption for the Key Length. The amount of characters you enter will depend on what you selected as the key length.

            • 64-bit 10 characters
            • 128-bit 26 characters

              Click OK to save the settings.





              What if I donīt see my wireless network in Site Survey?

              Step 1 Access the configuration by double-clicking on the bar graph icon in the system tray.

              Step 2 Select the Configuration link from the left hand menu. Enter in the SSID of your wireless network into the SSID field. Select the type of wireless network you are using from the Wireless Mode drop down menu.
            • Ad Hoc Mode
            • Infrastructure Mode



              Step 3 Change the Data Encryption to Enabled and change the Authentication Mode to Shared. Select 64 or 128 for the Key Length. The amount of characters you enter will depend on what you selected as the key length.

            • 64-bit 10 characters
            • 128-bit 26 characters

              Step 4 Click Apply to save the settings.



              • Model DWL-6000AP
              Question How do I configure 802.1x (Radius) on my DWL-6000AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-6000AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Encryption to the left.



              Step 4 Next to Authentication select 802.1x using the radio buttons.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.

              Step 6 Select the strength of encryption by selecting a value (64 or 128 bit) using the drop-down list next to WEP Key Size.

              Step 7 Select either Local to authenticate locally or Radius Server to authenticate via a radius server using the drop-down list next to Authentication From.



              Click the method of authentication you will be using:

              Local Authentication


              Step 8 Enter the user ID assigned to you in the User ID field. Enter your password in the Password field and type it in again in the Confirm Password field. Select Valid from the drop-down list next to Status to enable the user.



              Step 9 Click Apply then Continue to save the settings.

              Repeat Steps 8-9 for multiple users if applicable.


              Radius Server


              Step 8 Select First from the drop-down list next to Succession

              Step 9 Enter the IP address of the radius server, authentication and accounting ports, and the secret key. Then retype the secret key in the field next to Confirm Key. Select Valid from the drop-down list next to Status to enable this entry.



              Step 10 Click Apply then Continue to save the settings

              Repeat Steps 8-10 for Second and Third Successions if applicable.
              Model DWL-6000AP
              Question How do I enable Encryption on the DWL-6000AP wireless access point?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-6000AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the access point (192.168.0.50).

              Why canīt I get into the web-based configuration?

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case), and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK. Select the Home tab and click the Wireless button on the left hand side of the screen.

              Step 3 Select either 802.11a or 802.11b. Set Authentication to Shared Key and set WEP to Enable.



            • 802.11a -- Choose 64, 128, or 152-bit encryption and HEX for the key type. Select First under Valid Key. In the box next to First Key, enter a HEX key (a random encryption key that you make up). The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption. The Hex key must be exactly the same on all your wireless products.

            • 64-bit encryption 10 characters
            • 128-bit encryption 26 characters
            • 152-bit encryption 32 characters



            • 802.11b -- Choose 64, 128, or 256-bit encryption and HEX for the key type. Select First under Valid Key. In the box next to First Key, enter a HEX key (a random encryption key that you make up). The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption. The Hex key must be exactly the same on all your wireless products.

            • 64-bit encryption 10 characters
            • 128-bit encryption 26 characters
            • 256-bit encryption 58 characters

              Step 4 The encryption key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click on continue to save your settings.
              • Model DWL-6000AP
              Question How do I find the MAC address of my DWL-6000AP?
              Answer The MAC address of your access point is listed on the sticker located on the bottom of the access point. It is listed below the serial number.

              The LAN/Wireless and WAN MAC address can be obtained by logging into the web-based configuration of the router. Follow the steps below for this method.

              Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by typing in the IP address of the access point (default is 192.168.0.50) in your web browser. The default username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 2 Click on the Status tab at the top of the page then click Device Info to the left. You will see different categories listed in the right side of the page and their MAC address where applicable.
              Model DWL-6000AP / DWL-6000AP_revB
              Question How do I enable access control filters on my DWL-6000AP?
              Answer The DWL-6000AP has two methods of access control.


              MAC Access Filter


              MAC Access Filters work by allowing or blocking access to the access point based upon the MAC address of the device.

              What is a MAC address?

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-6000AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the deault password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Filters.

              Step 4 Next to Access Control select one of the below options from the drop-down:

              • Disabled - Disables this feature and will allow all wireless clients to connect.
              • Allow - Blocks all clients except for what you enter in the list.
              • Deny - Allows all clients except for what you enter in the list.


              Step 4 Enter the Ethernet MAC address that you wish to Allow or Deny in the field(s) below MAC Address.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.


              WLAN Partition


              WLAN Partition allows you to select whether or not either wireless band can pass information, via the Internal Station Connection option. If this feature is not enabled, that particular wireless band will not be able to pass any information through the Access Point. This feature effectively segregates the wireless band of your choice from the rest of the Network. With Ethernet-to-WLAN Access disabled, information sent from the Ethernet side will not be passed to the Wireless Clients. However, wireless clients will still be able to transmit across Ethernet for browsing, etc.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-6000AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Filters.

              Step 4 Click WLAN Partition.



              Step 5 There are 3 different filters you can use to control traffic on your network. Check the box to enable the feature.

              Internal Station Connection
              • Enabled - this will allow wireless clients to communicate with each other (within the same wireless band).
              • Disabled - wireless clients are not allowed to exchange data with each other (within the same wireless band).
              Ethernet to WLAN Access
              • Enabled - Ethernet devices can exchange data with wireless devices using the Access Point.
              • Disabled - Ethernet devices are not allowed to send data to wireless devices associated with the Access Point. However, wireless devices can still send data to the Ethernet devices.
              Internal Station Connection Between 802.11a & 802.11g
              • Enabled - devices on the 802.11a network are able to exchange data with devices on the 802.11g network through the Access Point.
              • Disabled - devices on the 802.11a network are not allowed to exchange data with devices on the 802.11g network through the Access Point.
              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-6000AP / DWL-6000AP_revB
              Question How do I change the SSID on my DWL-6000AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank). Click OK.

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab at the top and then click the Wireless button on the left side.

              Step 3 Select the wireless band (802.11a or 802.11b). The SSIDs for each band do not have to be the same. Next to SSID, type in a new SSID.

              The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-6000AP / DWL-6000AP_revB
              Question How do I disable SSID Broadcast on my DWL-6000AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-6000AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left side.

              Step 4 Select the wireless band (802.11a or 802.11b). Next to SSID Broadcast, select Disabled from the drop-down list.



              Step 5 Click Apply to save your settings.
              Model DWL-6000AP / DWL-6000AP_revB
              Question How do I change the IP address on my DWL-6000AP?
              Answer To change or obtain an IP address automatically for the DWL-6000AP follow the steps below:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank). Click OK.

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab then click LAN to the left.



              Step 3 Select the Dynamic (DHCP) from the drop down list next to Get IP From if you want the access point to receive an IP address automatically from a DHCP server or router, otherwise change the IP address manually (static). The default gateway is normally the IP address of your router/gateway.

              We strongly suggest using a static IP address. The IP address is not used for networking, only for configuration. Make sure the IP address is within the same IP range as your network.

              Step 4 Click the Apply button and click Continue to restart the access point.
              Model DWL-6000AP / DWL-6000AP_revB
              Question How do I change the data rate on my DWL-6000AP?
              Answer It is recommended to configure data rate on your wireless access point before your wireless adapters. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the data rate of the access point.

              Note: It is strongly recommended to keep this setting at its default value.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-6000AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Performance on the left side.



              Step 4 Select a fixed speed from the drop down list next to Data Rate.

              Step 5 Click Apply then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-6000AP / DWL-6000AP_revB
              Question How do I change the password on my DWL-6000AP?
              Answer You can change the password within the web-based configuration utility that is built-in to the DWL-6000AP.

              Step 1 Open your web browser. Enter the IP address of the DWL-6000AP (default is 192.168.0.50) and press Enter.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Tools tab at the top and then click Admin to the left.



              Step 4 Enter your new username, old password, and new password.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue.
              Model DWL-6000AP / DWL-6000AP_revB
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DWL-6000AP?
              Answer Please read before upgrading:

            • Upgrading firmware will reset the settings to default which means you will lose all your settings.
            • Do NOT upgrade firmware over a wireless connection. You may damage the access point.

              Step 1 Download the firmware and save the file to your computer. You may want to save the file to your desktop. Do not try to run or launch the file - it will not work.

              Click here to download firmware.

              Step 2 If you are connecting the access point directly to your PC you will need a cross-over cable. Connecting to a switch or router you will use a straight through cable.

              WARNING: DO NOT upgrade the firmware with a wireless connection. You may damage the access point.

              Step 3 Open your web browser, enter the IP address of your access point (192.168.0.50) and click OK.

              Step 4 Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default). Click OK to enter the web configuration for the device.

              Step 5 Click on the Tools tab and then click Firmware on the left side. Click Browse... and navigate to the .bin or .tfp file you downloaded in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click Open. Click OK. It will take a few seconds for the upgrade to complete. Click on the Continue button.



              Step 6 After the access point reboots, close your web browser and reopen it. Enter 192.168.0.50 to reconnect with the web configuration. Enter username admin and again leave the password blank. Click OK. The firmware upgrade is now complete.

              Step 7 If you have problems with the web configuration at this point, unplug the power to the access point, wait 10 seconds, and plug back in. Repeat Step 6. If this did not help, perform a hard reset on the access point. To perform a hard reset, use a paperclip and hold down the reset button on the back of the unit for 10 seconds while the device is powered on. Release it and the access point will reboot, the lights will blink, and then stabilize. Repeat Step 6.

              Step 8 You can now reconfigure the access point.
              • Model DWL-6000AP / DWL-6000AP_revB
              Question How do I configure Telnet settings on my DWL-6000AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-6000AP in the address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Tools tab and then click Misc. on the left side.



              Step 4 To enable Telnet, check the Enabled check box next to Status. Select the timeout from the drop-down list.

              Step 5 Click Apply then Continue to save the settings.

              Advanced users can use Telnet to configure this unit. Go to Start > Run and type in telnet 192.168.0.50 and press enter. Enter the username (admin) and your password (just press enter by default). Telnet commands are not supported by D-Link Tech Support. Use at your own risk.

              To prevent users from using Telnet, next to Status, uncheck the Enabled box (see above).
              Model DWL-6000AP / DWL-6000AP_revB
              Question How do I change the channel on my DWL-6000AP?
              Answer In most cases, you only need to change the channel on the access point. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the channel of the access point.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the DWL-6000AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left side.

              Step 4 Next to Wireless Band, select either 802.11a or 802.11b.

              Step 5 For 802.11a, select a channel between 36 and 161 (lower number better for indoor use).



              For 802.11b it is recommended to use Channel 1, 6, or 11. If you have 2.4GHz phones or experience interference, simply changing the channel may solve connection dropping issues.



              Step 6 Click on the Apply button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-650
              Question What does it mean when the Link light on my DWL-650 wireless adapter is blinking?
              Answer This FAQ is for the DWL-650 only, not the DWL-G650, A650, AB650, or AG650.

              The DWL-650 has an indicator or link light that can give you information about your network traffic and help you determine problems when troubleshooting.

              Solid Light - A steady green light indicates a good connection with the network.

              Blinking Light - A steady flashing indicates that the adapter is scanning for an available access point or wireless adapter. Usually the computer is either out of range or there is a configuration issue. Verify that the SSIDs are the same on all your wireless nodes and the encryption keys are exactly the same on all nodes.

              Flickering Light - When you have a good connection, the light may flicker or blink at random intervals. This indicates that the adapter is sending or receiving data.
              Model DWL-650
              Question How do I install my DWL-650 in Windows XP?
              Answer Note: This FAQ applies to the DWL-650 only. Please visit the Products page for installation for the DWL-650H, 650+, 650K1, DWL-A650, and 650L1.

              Depending on when you purchased your DWL-650 you may not have the XP compatible drivers on the CD that ships with the unit. To make sure that you have the XP compatible drivers, you can download a fresh copy from the D-Link ftp site.

              Before you start:
              Uninstall the old drivers and configuration utility by going to Start>Settings>Control Panel>Add/Remove Programs. Highlight the D-Link wireless configuration utility and click Remove. After the software has been removed, double-click the System Icon in Control Panel and click Hardware>Device Manager. Right-Click the DWL-650 listed under Network Adapters and select Uninstall. Close any open windows.

              Step 1 Download the latest drivers and extract to your hard drive.

              Download the DWL-650 drivers for Windows XP here.

              Step 2 To download, click link above and then click Save. Next to Save in, click the down arrow and select your C drive. Click Open to start download.



              Step 3 Once finished, click Open.



              Step 4 The Winzip Self-Extractor window will open. Under Unzip to folder, enter c: and click Unzip. Click OK to the message and then click Close.



              Step 5 Click on the Start button and double-click on My Computer. Double-click on the C-Drive and double-click the DWL-650 folder. Double-click on the setup.exe file. This will begin the installation process.

              Step 6 When the install shield wizard appears click on Next. Select Yes to agree with the license agreement.



              Step 7 Select No to restart your computer and then click on the finish button. Shut down your computer. Insert the DWL-650 card into the PCMCIA slot. Turn on computer.



              Step 8 When the found new hardware wizard appears select Install the Software Automatically and then click on next. When the digital signature message comes up click on Continue Anyway.



              Step 9 Click on the finish button to complete the installation process.

              Model DWL-650
              Question On the Advanced tab of the properties for the DWL-650 there are quite a few configuration options. What are they and what functions to they control?
              Answer *NOTE: The optimal configuration is set at default. Once changes are made to the advanced properties the DWL-650 may not function properly. If any changes are made to these properties you are at risk of degrading throughput or losing all communication.


              Authentication algorithm - must use shared key with WEP.

              Channel - shows the selected channel.

              Driver based IBSS - Independent Basic Service Set that communicates without an access point or 802.11 adhoc mode.

              Fragmentation threshold - improves efficiency when large files are transmitted over the wireless network, will split large packets.

              Infrastructure STA - Listen Interval - specifies a time period for stations to "wake up" in order to receive or transmit data.

              Network type - station (infrastructure) or PsIBSS (ad-hoc).

              Power save mode - conserves battery energy, however, it may degrade performance.


              Preamble mode:

              Long - allows interoperation with the current 1Mbps and 2Mbps specification.

              Short - intended where maximum throughput is desired and interoperability with legacy and non-short preamble capable equipment is not a consideration.


              RTS threshold - provides a solution to prevent data collisions, enable on a suspect hidden station (can cause overhead and negatively affect throughput).

              SSID - displays the current SSID setting of the D-Link Air adapter product.

              Transmit rate - fully auto, fixed 1Mbps, fixed 2Mbps, fixed 5.5Mbps, fixed 11Mbps, auto select 1 or 2.

              Use WEP - enabled

              WEP passphrase - alphanumeric characters "a-z", "A-Z", "0-9".

              Driver Polling - CPU checks the status of the device connected to the system. Disadvantage: possibility of data loss and CPU may check the same status multiple times.
              Model DWL-650
              Question How do I enable encryption on my DWL-650 wireless adapter?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless access point or router before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Windows XP users read here

              Step 1 Open the D-Link DWL-650 Air Control Utility by either double clicking on the icon in the System Tray or under the Program files from the Start menu. Select the Encryption tab in the DWL-650 Configuration Utility.

              Step 2 Choose 64-bit or 128-bit from the drop down menu.

              Step 3 Choose the Manual Entry option. Do not use Passphrase.

              Step 4 Use the same key that you used to configure the wireless access point or router and enter the key into the encryption key field. Make sure that the corresponding Default Tx Key is selected from the drop down menu.



              Step 5 Click on the Apply button to save the changes.

              Step 6 The DWL-650 will automatically scan for the access point or router. It may take a few minutes before the connection is made.

              Note:
              When disabling encryption on the DWL-650 the changes do not actually take place until you click on the OK button to exit the configuration utility.

              How do I enable encryption on my other D-Link products?

              Where do I get the encryption key?
              Model DWL-650
              Question How can I connect the DWL-650 with the Apple Airport Base Station using encryption?
              Answer Go to the Airport Administration Utility and select your Base Station. It will ask you for the Base Station password. Enter the password. Then the Configure Base Station window will come up. At the top, select the Base Station Menu. Then select Equivelent Network Password. This is the entry you will put in as the manual hex key for the DWL-650. Do not enter it as the passphrase.
              Model DWL-650 / DWL-120 / DWL-1000AP
              Question What do I need to do to get my wireless network card working in Windows Me?
              Answer In the TCP/IP properties for the wireless network card there is an option called Detect connection to network media. This option must be deselected for a wireless network card to function in Windows Me. When this option is selected Windows Me attempts to detect a connection to the physical media, confirming that the installed network card actually has a physical connection to the network. Since there is no physical connection present with a wireless network card, the operating system does not start networking services, effectively disabling card. In some cases, however, a wireless card will connect with this option selected, so it seems that this utility is not one hundred per cent accurate. Your best bet though is to deselect this option.

              To enable wireless networking in Windows Me, please follow the steps below to disable the Detect connection to network mediaoption in the TCP/IP properties youīre your network card.

              Step 1 Go to Start>Settings>Control Panel and double-click on the Network applet.

              Step 2 Scroll down the list on the Configuration tab, until you find the TCP/IP entry for your network adapter. Double-click on the entry to open the TCP/IP properties for the card.



              Step 3 On the lower left of the IP Address tab, deselect the check box next to the Detect connection to network media option.



              Step 4 Click OK to exit the TCP/IP properties screen and OK again to exit the Network Properties page. Click Yes when prompted to restart your computer.

              Note: Make sure that the SSID and channels on all connecting wireless devices are the same. The SSID and channel must be exactly the same or your devices will not connect. Please check for typos in your SSIDs as this is a common cause for wireless connectivity failure.

              It is probably best to confirm basic wireless connectivity before enabling encryption as this may cloud connectivity issues. Start with the basics.
              Model DWL-650 / DWL-120 / DWL-120a / DWL-120d
              Question How do I configure the DWL-650 to connect to a DWL-120 in a peer-to-peer network without an access point?
              Answer Step 1 On the Configuration tab in the D-Link Air DWL-650 Configuration utility set the Mode to 802.11b AdHoc.

              Step 2 Make sure that the SSID is the same on both the DWL-650 and the DWL-120.

              Step 3 Click on the Apply Changes button on the lower right.
              Model DWL-650 / DWL-120 / DWL-520
              Question What do the options in my wireless configuration utility mean?
              Answer

              Link Info Tab

              State -
            • Associated - Means that the wireless adapter is connected to another wireless adapter, access point, or wireless gateway/router. The MAC address of the wireless adapter or access point will be displayed in hex format i.e. BSS ID=00:40:05:45:A5:32.
            • Scanning - Means that the node is searching for an available access point and trying to detect the SSID of an access point within range.

              Rescan - Pressing the rescan button will cause the wireless adapter to look for a connection.

              Ad Hoc - When the wireless card is set to Ad Hoc mode, the wireless adapter will scan for 5 seconds looking for an existing Ad Hoc network using the same SSID. If one is not found the driver will "Start" its own Ad Hoc network.

              Current Channel and Current Tx Rate - Shows the selected channel and transmit rate that are currently used by the wireless adapter.

              Throughput - These 2 fields display the instantaneous wireless Receive and Transmit throughput displayed in bytes per second. These values are updated every 2 seconds.

              Link Quality - The Link Quality bar graph is only active when the node is in Infrastructure mode. The graph displays the quality of the link between the node and its access point.

              Signal Strength - The bar graph is only active when the node is in Infrastructure mode. The bar graph displays normalized signal strength as reported by the radio, averaged over all frames over 100 bytes long that are received from the access point.

              Configuration Tab

              Mode -
            • 802.11 Ad Hoc - This is the 802.11b peer-to-peer mode of operation. All communication is done from client to client without the use of an access point or wireless gateway/router.
            • Ad Hoc - A "non-compliant" mode that will allow Prism2 (and only Prism2) adapters to communicate with one another without the use of an access point or wireless gateway/router.
            • Infrastructure - This mode of operation requires the presence of an 802.11b access point or wireless gateway/router. All communication is done through the access point which relays packets to other wireless clients as well as to nodes on a wired network.

              SSID - (Service Set Identification) This field allows the user to set the identification by typing the name for a particular group of connected wireless adapters and access point. The SSID must up to 32 characters long and is case-sensitive.

              Tx Rate - The transmission rate is set to Fully Automatic (recommended) by default. However, the setting has options for 1 Mb, 2 Mb, 5.5 Mb, and 11 Mb.

              PS Mode - PS (Pseudo Set) mode is by default set to Disabled. When the node is set to Ad Hoc or 802.11 Ad Hoc, then the PS mode will need to be set to Enabled.

              Channel - The option for channel selection is available in Ad Hoc mode only. Channels range from 1 through 11.

              Restore Defaults - Pressing this button restores each field to its default value. Apply Changes or OK must be pressed before the default values are restored.

              Undo Changes - Pressing this button will reverts all fields in the panel back to the previous saved values.

              Apply Changes - This button becomes active only when one of the fields has been modified. Pressing this button applies the changed settings and saves the settings to the registry.

              Encryption Tab

              Encryption (WEP) - WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) encrypts each frame transmitted from the wireless adapter using one of the keys entered in the WEP Key Entry field. The access point or wireless adapter will accept only encrypted frames that is can decrypt correctly. This will only happen if the receiver has the WEP Key used by the transmitter.
            • 64-Bit WEP - The panel allows the entry of four keys for 64 bit encryption. Each key must consist of 10 Hex characters which means that only digits 0-9 and letters A-F are valid entries.
            • 128-Bit WEP - The panel allows the entry of one key for 128 bit encryption. The key must consist of 26 Hex characters which means that only digits 0-9 and letters A-F are valid entries.

              Passphrase - Alternatively, a passphrase can be entered which is used as a seed to randomly generate the four keys.

              Manual Entry - (Keys 1-4) These four keys can be used to manually enter the encryption keys.

              Default Tx Key - The button updates the wireless adapter with the four keys entered in Key 1 through Key 4. Once the Apply button is selected, the keys are updated for the wireless adapter. This option is not available when 128-Bit is enabled.

            • What can cause interference with my wireless connection?
              • Model DWL-650 / DWL-520 / DWL-120 / DWL-A650 / DWL-A520 / DWL-120E1
              Question How do I enable Encryption using Windows XPīs Wireless Zero Configuration utility?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Step 1 Right-click on the computer monitor icon in the system tray, select View Available Wireless Networks.



              Step 2 Highlight the SSID of your wireless network in the available networks box. The Network Key field will then become available. Enter in the same encryption key that was set in the wireless router/access point.



              Step 3 Click on the connect button.



              If your wireless network is not showing in available wireless networks:

              Step 1 Right-click on the computer monitor icon in the system tray and select view available wireless networks.

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced button and then click Add. Type in the SSID of your wireless router/access point. Put a check in the Data Encryption (WEP enabled) box, and uncheck the the key is provided for me automatically box. The Network Authentication (Shared Mode) must be checked.



              Step 3 Select either 40 or 104-bits for the key length. Select hexadecimal digits for the Key Format. In the Network Key field type in the encryption key you entered into the wireless router/access point. The length of the key will depend on what you selected for the key length.

            • 40 (same as 64-bit encryption) 10 characters
            • 104 (same as 128-bit encryption) 26 characters

              The key is HEX, meaning A-F and 0-9.

              Step 4 Select OK to save your settings.
              • Model DWL-650 / DWL-650H / DWL-650+ / DWL-650K1 / DWL-650L1
              Question Can I use my DWL-650 or DWL-650+ wireless adapter in a PDA or Palm Pilot?
              Answer Unfortunately D-Link does not support the DWL-650, DWL-650+, DWL-AB650, DWL-AG650, or DWL-G650 with Palm, Windows CE, or Pocket PC 2002 OS.

              We only offer the DCF-650W and DCF-660W wireless adapters for Windows CE/Pocket PC platform.
              Model DWL-650 / DWL-650H / DWL-650+ / DWL-650K1 / DWL-650L1 / DWL-A650 / DWL-AB650
              Question Why wonīt my D-Link wireless adapter install in my laptop?
              Answer Please follow the steps below if you are having problems installing your D-Link wireless adapter:

              Step 1 BIOS upgrades for Dell and Toshiba laptops may resolve wireless installation issues. Even if your laptop was purchased recently it may not have the latest BIOS.

              Go to Dell Support for upgrade information and instructions.
              Go to Toshiba Support for upgrade information and instructions.

              Step 2 Verify that your laptop has a Cardbus controller (32-bit). If your laptop has a 16-bit PCMCIA slot, then the wireless card will not work.

              How do I know if I have a Cardbus Controller?

              Step 3 Disable or uninstall any other network adapter you may have in your laptop.

              Step 4 Please visit our products page for Quick Installation guides.

              If you continue to have installation problems, please contact our 24 hour support group at 1-877-45D-Link (453-5465).
              Model DWL-650+ / DWL-520+ / DWL-G630 / DWL-G510 / DWL-AG520 / DWL-AG650 / DWL-G630_revB / DWL-G630_revC
              Question Why canīt I get the advertised speed and performance when in Ad-Hoc mode?
              Answer This FAQ applies to 802.11b, 802.11g, and Super G™ products.

              D-Link wireless products follow the IEEE 802.11 standards. The 802.11b and 802.11g standards specify that Ad-Hoc mode only needs to support up to 11Mbps. For best results, use an access point or wireless router and set your adapters to Infrastructure (station) mode.
              Model DWL-650+ / DWL-650H / DWL-650K1 / DWL-A650 / DWL-650 / DWL-650L1
              Question When I roam from wireless access point to wireless access point, why wonīt my D-Link wireless adapter connect to the strongest/closest signal?

              Answer The DWL-650H, DWL-650K1, DWL-650L1, DWL-650+, and DWL-A650 wireless adapters are designed to hold the first signal received until it drops completely. Once the first (original) signal is dropped, the wireless adapter will scan and pick up the strongest signal available.

              The DWL-650 (rev. A-J3) will hold on to the first signal it receives until the signal strength drops to about 10 percent. At that point it will search for and connect to the strongest available signal.

              What is Roaming?
              Model DWL-650H
              Question Can I install the Plus Pack Utilities on my Windows XP computer?
              Answer No. Windows XP uses the Zero Configuration Utility that is built-in. If you install the Plus Pack, it may conflict with the Zero Configuration utility and the DWL-650H may not operate properly.
              Model DWL-650H
              Question Does my DWL-650H wireless network adapter work in Windows 95?
              Answer Unfortunately, this D-Link product is not supported in Windows 95.
              Model DWL-650L1
              Question How do I connect my DWL-650L1 to a wireless network?
              Answer To configure your wireless settings please select one of the following:

            • Site Survey (Win98/Me/2000)
            • Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)
            • Windows XP SP2
            • Not Showing in Site Survey


              Site Survey

              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 2 Click SiteSurvey on the left side and select the SSID of your wireless access point or router on the right side and then click Connect.



              Step 3 Click OK.



              Step 4 You will be able to view your link status in the Link Info window.





              Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)

              Step 1 Right-click the two computer monitors icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.

              Step 2 Click Advanced.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and click OK.



              Step 4 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 5 Click SiteSurvey on the left side and select the SSID of your wireless access point or router on the right side and then click Connect.



              Step 6 Click OK.



              Step 7 You will be able to view your link status in the Link Info window.



              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               click here.



              Windows XP SP2

              Step 1 Right-click the wireless icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.





              Step 2 In the Wireless Network Connection window click Change advanced settings on the right side below Related Tasks.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and click OK.



              Step 4 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 5 Click SiteSurvey on the left side and select the SSID of your wireless access point or router on the right side and then click Connect.



              Step 6 Click OK.



              Step 7 You will be able to view your link status in the Link Info window.



              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP               click here.



              If your wireless network is not showing in Site Survey


              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 2 Click Configuration on the left side.

              Step 3 Type the SSID of your wireless access point or router next to SSID. Next to Wireless Mode select Infrastructure and then click Apply to save your settings.




            • How do I enable WEP encryption on my DWL-650L1?
              • Model DWL-650L1 / DWL-650L2
              Question How do I enable Encryption on the DWL-650 Rev.L1 and L2?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless router or access point before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Windows 98/ME/2000
              Windows XP
              Not Showing in Site Survey





              Windows 98/ME/2000


              Step 1 Open the D-Link AirPlus wireless utility by double-clicking on the bar graph icon in your system tray (lower-right corner of screen). Select Site Survey.

              Step 2 Highlight your SSID in the Available Networks Authentication for the auth. mode. Click Connect.

              Step 3 The Data Encryption box should be checked and greyed-out. If not, then enable encryption on your access point or wireless router first. Auth. Mode should be set to Shared Authentication. Under Key Length, select 64, 128, or 256-bits . Click on Default Key 1 and enter the Hex encryption key that was entered into the wireless router or access point. The key length will depend on the selection made under the key length. The key is HEX, meaning A-F and 0-9.

            • 64-bit 10 characters
            • 128-bit 26 characters
            • 256-bit 58 characters



              Step 4 Click on the OK button to save your settings.





              Windows XP


              Step 1 Right click on the two computer monitor icon in the system try and select View Available Wireless Networks.

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced button. Uncheck the Use Windows to configure my Wireless Networks box and click on the OK button.

              Follow steps 1-4 from the Windows 98SE/ME/2000 configuration.





              If your wireless network is not showing up under site survey


              Step 1 Open the D-Link AirPlus wireless utility by double-clicking on the bar graph icon and select Encryption.

              Step 2 Put a check in the Data Encryption box and select Shared Authentication in the auth. mode menu. Select 64, 128, or 254-bit encryption for the key length. Under key 1 type in the Hex encryption key that was entered into the wireless router/access point. The key length will depend on the selection made under the key length. The key is HEX, meaning A-F and 0-9.

            • 64-bit 10 characters
            • 128-bit 26 characters
            • 256-bit 52 characters



              Step 4 Click on the Apply button to save your settings.
              • Model DWL-7000AP
              Question How do I enable Turbo Mode on the DWL-7000AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-7000AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Performance.



              Step 4 Under IEEE802.11a, click on the Turbo Setting drop-down box and select Enable.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.

              Make sure you enable Turbo mode on your wireless adapters. You will not be able to make a connection unless the Turbo modes are the same on all wireless devices.
              Model DWL-7000AP
              Question How do I change my password on my DWL-7000AP?
              Answer You can change the password within the web-based configuration utility that is built-in to the DWL-7000AP.

              Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer. Enter the IP address of the DWL-7000AP (default is 192.168.0.50) and press Enter.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Tools tab at the top and then click Admin.



              Step 4 Enter the old password. If it was blank, then remove the dots in the password box. Enter your new password and click Apply. After the DWL-7000AP restarts, click Continue.

              Note: You can only change the password, not the user name. The user name will always be admin.


              What if I forgot my password?
              Model DWL-7000AP
              Question How do I change the channel on my DWL-7000AP Access Point?
              Answer In most cases, you only need to change the channel on the access point. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the channel of the access point.

              Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-7000AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left side.



              Step 4 Next to Channel, select the channel you would like to use from the drop-down menu. It is recommended to use Channel 1,6, or 11. If you have 2.4GHz phones or experience interference, simply changing the channel may solve connection dropping issues.

              Do the same for the 802.11a portion if needed.



              Step 5 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-7000AP
              Question How do I configure the wireless access settings and WLAN partition (filters) on my DWL-7000AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-7000AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Advanced tab and then click Filters on the left side.

              Step 4 Next to Access Control, select the mode you would like to use from the drop-down menu.
              • Disabled - Disables this feature and will allow all wireless clients to connect.
              • Accept - Blocks all clients except for what you enter in the list.
              • Reject - Allows all clients except for what you enter in the list.


              Step 5 Enter the Ethernet MAC address that you wish to Accept or Reject.



              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.




              WLAN Partition


              The DWL-7000AP allows you to select whether or not either wireless band can pass information, via the Internal Station Connection option. If this feature is not enabled, that particular wireless band will not be able to pass any information through the Access Point. This feature effectively segregates the wireless band of your choice from the rest of the Network. With Ethernet-to-WLAN Access disabled, information sent from the Ethernet side will not be passed to the Wireless Clients. However, wireless clients will still be able to transmit across Ethernet for browsing, etc.

              Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-7000AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Advanced tab and then click Filters on the left side.

              Step 4 Click on WLAN Partition.



              Step 5 There are 3 different filters you can use to control traffic on your network. Check the box to enable the feature.

              Internal Station Connection
              • Enabled - this will allow wireless clients to communicate with each other (within the same wireless band).
              • Disabled - wireless clients are not allowed to exchange data with each other (within the same wireless band).
              Ethernet to WLAN Access
              • Enabled - Ethernet devices can exchange data with wireless devices using the Access Point.
              • Disabled - Ethernet devices are not allowed to send data to wireless devices associated with the Access Point. However, wireless devices can still send data to the Ethernet devices.
              Internal Station Connection Between 802.11a & 802.11g
              • Enabled - devices on the 802.11a network are able to exchange data with devices on the 802.11g network through the Access Point.
              • Disabled - devices on the 802.11a network are not allowed to exchange data with devices on the 802.11g network through the Access Point.
              Step 6 Click Apply to save your settings.
              Model DWL-7000AP
              Question How do I configure my DWL-7000AP?
              Answer Click on the links below for specific configuration instructions.

              Wireless Mode:

              Basic Configuration:

              Wireless Settings: Advanced Features: Troubleshooting:
              Model DWL-7000AP
              Question How do I disable the SSID Broadcast on my DWL-7000AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your Internet browser and type the IP address of the DWL-7000AP in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab at the top of the configuration page and then click the Wireless button on the left side.

              Step 3 Under the wireless band you want the SSID disabled (802.11a or 802.11g), select Disable next to the SSID Broadcast field.



              Step 4 Click on Apply and then click on Continue to save your settings.

              Step 5 You have now disabled the SSID Broadcast.

              If your wireless adapter is installed on a Windows XP machine, please read here.
              Model DWL-7000AP
              Question How do I change the IP address of my DWL-7000AP?
              Answer To change or obtain an IP address automatically for the DWL-7000AP follow the steps below:

              Step 1 Log into the web based configuration by typing in the IP address of the DWL-7000AP (192.168.0.50) in your web browser. Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab and then click LAN.



              Step 3 Select Static or Dynamic from the drop-down next to Get IP From. If you want the access point to receive an IP address automatically from a DHCP server or router, select Dynamic.

              We strongly suggest using a static IP address. The IP address is not used for networking, only for the web-based configuration.

              Step 4 Click the Apply button and click Continue to save your settings.

              If you changed the IP address to something other than 192.168.0.50, use the new IP address to access the web-based configuration.
              Model DWL-7000AP
              Question How do I enable WPA-PSK on my DWL-7000AP?
              Answer Make sure you have firmware 1.05 or higher. Older versions do not offer WPA or WPA-PSK.

              Click here to upgrade your firmware.

              It is recommended to configure WPA-PSK on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-7000AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Encryption on the left hand side.



              Step 4 The 802.11a and 802.11g bands are independent from each other. Select WPA-PSK using the radio buttons under the wireless band that you want to encrypt.

              Step 5 Enter a PassPhrase. The passphrase or key is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. The password can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless clients.

              Step 6 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-7000AP
              Question How do I set my DWL-7000AP to repeater mode?
              Answer You will need the MAC address of the device you want to repeat. If you are repeating a wireless router, then you must use the LAN or Ethernet MAC address, not the wireless address.

              Step 1 Connect the DWL-7000AP to your PC using an Ethernet cable. You cannot configure the DWL-7000AP wirelessly when in repeater mode.

              Step 2 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range as the DWL-7000AP for configuration. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 3 Open a web browser and enter in the IP address of the access point (192.168.0.50). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 4 Click on Advanced at the top and then click Mode on the left side. At the bottom, click the AP Repeater button. Select either Static or Dynamic Key and then enter the MAC address of the device you want to repeat (IE 50:23:AB:D4:56:E1).



              Use Static Key is using WEP Encryption. Dynamic Key is used for all other Authentication modes (Open System, WPA, 802.1X, and WPA-PSK).

              Note: The DWL-7000AP authentication must be set up the same as your wireless network. If you are using WEP, you must configure the DWL-7000AP with the same WEP key as your other devices.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.

              Step 6 Remove the Ethernet cable from the LAN port of the DWL-7000AP.

              Note: Both devices may need to be power cycled in order to establish a connection. To power cycle, simply unplug the power for 10-15 seconds and plug back in.
              Model DWL-7000AP
              Question How do I change the data rate on my DWL-7000AP?
              Answer It is recommended to configure data rate on your wireless access point before your wireless adapters. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the data rate of the access point.

              Note: It is strongly recommended to keep this setting at Auto.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-7000AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (default is 192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Performance on the left side.



              Step 4 Select a fixed speed from the drop down list next to Data Rate.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-7000AP
              Question How do I configure Telnet on my DWL-7000AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-7000AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Tools tab and then click Misc. on the left side.



              Step 4 To enable Telnet, check the Enabled check box next to Status. Select the timeout from the dropdown list.

              Step 5 Click Apply then Continue to save the settings.

              Advanced users can use Telnet to configure this unit. Go to Start > Run and type in telnet 192.168.0.50 and press enter. Enter the username (admin) and your password (just press enter by default). Telnet commands are not supported by D-Link Tech Support. Use at your own risk.

              To prevent users from using Telnet, next to Status, uncheck the Enabled box (see above).
              Model DWL-7000AP
              Question How do I change the SSID on my DWL-7000AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-7000AP in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab at the top of the page then click Wireless to the left.

              Step 3 Next to SSID, type in a new SSID.

              The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-7000AP
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DWL-7000AP using AP Manager?
              Answer Please read before upgrading:

            • Upgrading firmware will reset the settings to default which means you will lose all your settings.
            • Do NOT upgrade firmware over a wireless connection. You may damage the access point.

              Step 1 Download the firmware and save the file to your computer. You may want to save the file to your desktop. Do not try to run or launch the file - it will not work.

              Click here to download firmware.

              Step 2 Open AP Manager.

              Step 3 Click the Upgrade Firmware Buttonbutton.

              Step 4 Navigate to the firmware file that you downloaded in Step 1. Left-click it once to select it and then click Open.



              Step 5 When the Start to upgrade firmware window appears click OK.



              Step 6 Next, the firmware will upgrade and you will see a progress window. When it is complete you will be returned to the main window of AP Manager.



              WARNING: DO NOT UNPLUG OR RESTART THE DWL-7000AP DURING THE FIRMWARE UPGRADE PROCESS. DOING SO WILL DAMAGE THE UNIT.
              • Model DWL-7000AP / DWL-7000AP_revB
              Question How do I enable WEP on my DWL-7000AP?
              Answer The DWL-7000AP supports three levels of WEP on each band:

              • 64-bit
              • 128-bit
              • 152-bit
              Please select the band you would like to enable WEP on:
              802.11A
              802.11G


              802.11A Configuration:

              Step 1               Using a Crossover Ethernet cable connect the DWL-7000AP to your PC. Verify that the link lights are lit on both the DWL-7000AP and the PC.

              Step 2 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-900AP+ for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-7000AP is 192.168.0.50 (set your computer to 192.168.0.3).

              Windows 98/ME
              Windows 2000
              Windows XP
              Macintosh

              Step 3 To begin configuring the DWL-7000AP open a web browser and enter in the APīs default IP address (192.168.0.50). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 4 Click on the Advanced tab and then click the Encryption button. Select the WEP Enabled radio button for 802.11A. Click the drop-down box to select the level of encryption you wish to use. Fill in the appropriate key field with the correct length key. Click Apply and then click Continue to save the changes.



              • 64-bit = 10 HEX characters
              • 128-bit = 26 HEX characters
              • 152-bit = 32 HEX characters




              802.11G Configuration:

              Step 1               Using a Crossover Ethernet cable connect the DWL-7000AP to your PC. Verify that the link lights are lit on both the DWL-7000AP and the PC.

              Step 2 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-900AP+ for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-7000AP is 192.168.0.50 (set your computer to 192.168.0.3).

              Windows 98/ME
              Windows 2000
              Windows XP
              Macintosh

              Step 3 To begin configuring the DWL-7000AP open a web browser and enter in the APīs default IP address (192.168.0.50). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 4 Click on the Advanced tab and then click the Encryption button. Select the WEP Enabled radio button for 802.11g. Click the drop-down box to select the level of encryption you wish to use. Fill in the appropriate key field with the correct length key. Click Apply and then click Continue to save the changes.



              • 64-bit = 10 HEX characters
              • 128-bit = 26 HEX characters
              • 152-bit = 32 HEX characters
            • How do I enable WEP on my other D-Link products?
            • Where do I get the encryption key on my D-Link wireless device?
            • What is WEP?
              • Model DWL-7000AP / DWL-7100AP
              Question How do I use the AP Grouping Settings on my DWL-7000AP and DWL-7100AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the access point in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your user name (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Grouping on the left side.

              Step 4 Next to Load Balance, select Enabled from the drop-down box.



              When you Enable Load Balance you allow several access points to balance wireless network traffic and wireless clients among the access points with the same SSID. All the APs that share Load Balancing must have the same SSID. Assign each Access Point a different non-overlapping channel (e.g., 1, 6, 11).



              Step 5 Next to Link Integrate, select Enable from the drop-down box.

              When Link Integrate is Enabled, the wireless segment associated with the AP will be disconnected whenever the connection between the AP and the LAN is dropped.

              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-700AP
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DWL-700AP?
              Answer Please read before upgrading:

            • Upgrading firmware will reset the settings to default which means you will lose all your settings.
            • Do NOT upgrade firmware over a wireless connection. You may damage the access point.

              Step 1 Download the firmware and save the file to your computer. You may want to save the file to your desktop. Do not try to run or launch the file - it will not work.

              Click here to download firmware.

              Step 2 If you are connecting the access point directly to your pc you will need a cross-over cable. Connecting to a switch or router you will use a straight through cable.

              WARNING: DO NOT upgrade the firmware with a wireless connection. You may damage the access point.

              Step 3 Open your web browser, enter the IP address of your access point (192.168.0.50) and click OK.

              Step 4 Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default). Click OK to enter the web configuration for the device.

              Step 5 Click on the Tools tab and then the Firmware button on the left side. Click on the Browse button and browse to the .bin, .dlf, or .tfp file you extracted in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click Open. Click Apply. It will take a few seconds for the upgrade to complete. Click on the Continue button.



              Step 6 After the access point reboots, close your web browser and reopen it. Enter 192.168.0.50 to reconnect with the web configuration. Enter username admin and again leave the password blank. Click OK. The firmware upgrade is now complete.

              Step 7 If you have problems with the web configuration at this point, unplug the power to the access point, wait 10 seconds, and plug back in. Repeat Step 6. If this did not help, perform a hard reset on the access point. To perform a hard reset, use a paperclip and hold down the reset button on the back of the unit for 10 seconds while the device is powered on. Release it and the access point will reboot, the lights will blink, and then stabilize. Repeat Step 6.

              Step 8 You can now reconfigure the access point.
              • Model DWL-700AP
              Question How do I change the SSID on my DWL-700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab at the top of the configuration page and then click the Wireless button on the left side.

              Step 3 Next to SSID, type in a new SSID.

              The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-700AP
              Question How do I change the channel on my DWL-700AP?
              Answer In most cases, you only need to change the channel on the access point. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the channel of the access point.

              Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-700AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left side.



              Step 4 Next to Channel, select the channel you would like to use from the drop-down menu. It is recommended to use Channel 1, 6, or 11. If you have 2.4GHz phones or experience interference, simply changing the channel may solve connection dropping issues.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-700AP
              Question How do I change the IP address on my DWL-700AP?
              Answer To change or obtain an IP address automatically for the DWL-700AP follow the steps below:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab and then click LAN.



              Step 3 Click the Dynamic IP Address radio button if you want the access point to receive an IP address automatically from a DHCP server or router, otherwise change the IP address manually (Static IP Address).

              We strongly suggest using a static IP address. The IP address is not used for networking, only for configuration. Make sure the IP address is within the same IP range as your network.

              Step 4 Click the Apply button and click Continue to restart the access point.
              Model DWL-700AP
              Question How do I disable SSID broadcast on my DWL-700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-700AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Advanced tab and then click Performance on the left side.

              Step 4 Next to SSID Broadcast, select the radio button Disable.



              Step 5 Click Apply to save your settings.
              Model DWL-700AP
              Question How do I configure my DWL-700AP to repeater or client mode?
              Answer The DWL-700AP can be configured in three different modes:

            • Access Point Mode
            • Wireless Client Mode
            • Repeater Mode



              Access Point Mode


              The DWL-700AP is set to Access Point (AP) mode by default, which allows the DWL-700AP to connect to wireless clients.

              Step 1 Use an Ethernet cable connect the DWL-700AP to your PC.

              Step 2 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-700AP for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-700AP is 192.168.0.50.

              Windows 98/ME
              Windows 2000
              Windows XP
              Macintosh

              Step 3 To begin configuring the DWL-700AP open a browser and enter in the APīs default IP address (192.168.0.50). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 4 Click the Advanced tab and click the Mode button.

              Step 5 Select the Access Point radio button.



              Step 6 Click Apply and click Continue to save the changes.



              Wireless Client Mode


              AP Client or Wireless Client mode allows the DWL-700AP to become a wireless client to another AP or wireless router. Wireless adapters (clients) will not communicate with access points in AP Client or Wireless Client mode.

              Log into the Access Point or Wireless Router that the DWL-700AP will be a wireless client to and obtain the LAN or Ethernet MAC Address.

              Step 1 Use an Ethernet cable connect the DWL-700AP to your PC.

              Step 2 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-700AP for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-700AP is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 3 To begin configuring the DWL-700AP open a browser and enter in the APīs default IP address (192.168.0.50). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 4 Click on the Advanced tab and then click the Mode button. Select the Wireless Client radio button.



              Step 5 Click on the Site Survey button and select the SSID of the Access Point or Wireless Router that the DWL-700AP is going to be client to. Click on the Connect button and then click Close to establish a connection.



              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the changes.



              Repeater Mode


              As a wireless repeater, the DWL-700AP extends the range of the wireless network by repeating the wireless signal of the remote AP (Access Point or Wireless Router)

              Step 1               Log into the Access Point or wireless router that the DWL-700AP is going to repeat and write down the Ethernet MAC Address or LAN Mac Address. Also, make sure write down the SSID, channel, and encryption information (if any) since it will have to be the same on the repeater.

              Step 2 Using an Ethernet cable connect the DWL-700AP to your PC.

              Step 3 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-700AP for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-700AP is 192.168.0.50.

              Windows 98/ME
              Windows 2000
              Windows XP
              Macintosh

              Step 4 To begin configuring the DWL-700AP open a browser and enter in the APīs default IP address (192.168.0.50). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Note: Each Access Point should be configured to have a different LAN IP Address.

              Step 5 Click the Advanced tab and click the Mode button. In the Remote AP MAC field enter in the MAC Address you obtained in Step 1.



              Step 6 Click Apply and click Continue to save the changes.

              When in repeater mode:
              • You will not be able to view or change the settings of the DWL-700AP wirelessly. The DWL-700AP will be transparent to the network. You must configure the unit through the Ethernet port. The Ethernet port will only allow you to configure the unit, not pass network data.
              • The unit will not respond (reply) to ping requests. If you want to test the connection, ping a computer on the other side of the repeater or ping the device you are repeating the signal of.
              • Model DWL-700AP
              Question How do I change the password on my DWL-700AP
              Answer You can change the password within the web-based configuration utility that is built-in to the access point. The username will always be admin.

              Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer. Enter the IP address of the access point (default is 192.168.0.50) and press Enter.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Tools tab at the top and then click Admin.



              Step 4 Enter your new password in both boxes and click Apply. After the access point restarts, you will be required to enter your username (admin) and your new password.

            • What if I forgot my password?
              • Model DWL-700AP
              Question How do I configure my DWL-700AP wireless access point?
              Answer Click on the links below for specific configuration instructions.

              Wireless Mode:

              Basic Configuration:

              Wireless Settings: Security Settings: Troubleshooting:
              Model DWL-700AP
              Question How do I change the data rate on my DWL-700AP?
              Answer It is recommended to configure data rate on your wireless access point before your wireless adapters. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the data rate of the access point.

              Note: It is strongly recommended to keep this setting at its default value.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-700AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Performance on the left side.



              Step 4 Select a fixed speed from one of the radio buttons for the TX Rate.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-700AP
              Question How do I enable MAC Filter on my DWL-700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click the Advanced tab and then click Filters on the left side.

              Step 3 In the section MAC Filters, select the radio button for the mode you would like to use.
              • Disabled - Disables this feature and will allow all wireless clients to connect.
              • Allow - Blocks all clients except for what you enter in the list.
              • Deny - Allows all clients except for what you enter in the list.




              Step 4 Enter the Ethernet MAC address that you wish to Allow or Deny.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-700AP
              Question How do I enable WEP encryption on my DWL-700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the access point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left side.

              Step 4 Click the Enabled radio button.

              Step 5 Next to WEP Encryption, select the level of encryption (64 or 128 bit).

              Step 6 Next to Key Type, select HEX or ASCII. You will need to use the same key on all your wireless devices.

            • HEX - use 0-9 and A-F only.
            • ASCII - All numbers and letters.

              Step 7 You can enter up to 4 different keys. Select the key you want to use by clicking on the corresponding radio button.

              Step 8 Enter your encryption key. You make this up yourself. If you selected HEX, then enter a key made up of a combination of numbers (0-9) and letters (A-F). For example - A4572BCC19 (HEX).



              Step 9 Click Apply to save settings.

              Note: If you are configuring your access point from a wireless adapter, you will lose connectivity as soon as you click Apply. You must enable WEP on your adapter and enter the same exact key as you entered on your access point.
              • Model DWL-700AP
              Question How do I configure DHCP server on my DWL-700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser. Enter the IP address of the DWL-700AP (default is 192.168.0.50) and press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Home tab at the top and then click on DHCP to the left.



              Note: If you are connecting to a router or a DHCP server, the DHCP server on the DWL-700AP should be disabled.

              Step 4 By default, DHCP Server is set to Disabled. To enable it, click the Enabled radio button. To disable it, click the Disabled radio button.

              Step 5 To change the Starting and Ending IP Addresses, enter the new values in the corresponding text boxes. To change Lease Time select a value from the drop down box.

              Note: The value for Starting IP Address must be less than the value for Ending IP Address.

              Step 6 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-700AP
              Question How do I change the preamble on my DWL-700AP?
              Answer It is recommended to configure the preamble on your wireless access point before your wireless adapters. You may need to set the preamble on all wireless clients.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-700AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Advanced tab and click Performance on the left hand side of the screen.



              Step 4 Select either Short or Long. The Preamble defines the length of the CRC block for communication between the wireless access point and the roaming wireless network adapters. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is a common technique for detecting data transmission errors.

              Note: High network traffic areas should use Short preamble.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button and then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-700AP / DWL-800AP+ / DWL-900AP+ / DWL-1000AP+ / DWL-2000AP / DWL-2100AP / DWL-6000AP / DWL-7000AP / DWL-7100AP / DWL-G800AP
              Question How do I reset my access point back to factory default settings?
              Answer The following is for the DWL-700AP, DWL-800AP+, DWL-900AP+, DWL-1000AP+, DWL-2000AP, DWL-2100AP, DWL-6000AP, DWL-7000AP, DWL-7100AP, and DWL-G800AP access points.

              To perform a reset, please follow the steps below:

              Step 1 With the unit on, place a paper clip into the hole on the back on the unit labeled Reset.



              Step 2 Hold paper clip down for 10 seconds and release.

              Note: Do not repower unit during this procedure.

              Step 3 The unit will reboot on its own. Once the WLAN light stops blinking, the unit is reset.

              Note: Resetting the router does not reset the firmware to an earlier version. It will change all settings back to factory defaults.
              Model DWL-700AP / DWL-900AP+ / DWL-1000AP+ / DWL-2000AP / DWL-2000AP_revB / DWL-2000AP_revC
              Question How do I save/load the configuration of my access point?
              Answer The following is for the DWL-700AP, DWL-900AP+, DWL-1000AP+, and DWL-2000AP access points.

              Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by typing in the IP address of the access point (default is 192.168.0.50) in your web browser. The default username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 2 Click on the Tools tab at the top of the page, and then click System to the left.



              Step 3 To save the configuration settings of your access point, click the Save button.

              To load a previously saved configuration file, click the Browse button, which is located directly next to the text box entitled Load Settings From Local Hard Drive. Once you have located the file (config.bin) on your hard drive, click the Load button.

              Note: If the firmware on your access point has been upgraded/downgraded, do not load configuration files that were saved using a different version of firmware then you currently have installed. This will not work and could damage the unit.
              Model DWL-700AP / DWL-900AP+ / DWL-1000AP+ / DWL-2000AP / DWL-2100AP / DWL-7000AP / DWL-7100AP
              Question Where can I find the MAC address of my access point?
              Answer The following is for the DWL-700AP, DWL-900AP+, DWL-1000AP+, DWL-2000AP, DWL-2100AP, DWL-7000AP, and DWL-7100AP access points.

              The MAC address of your access point is listed on the sticker located on the bottom of the access point. It is listed below the serial number.

              The LAN/Wireless and WAN MAC address can be obtained by logging into the web-based configuration of the router. Follow the steps below for this method.

              Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by typing in the IP address of the access point (default is 192.168.0.50) in your web browser. The default username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).



              Step 2 Click on the Status tab at the top of the page. You will see different categories listed in the right side of the page and their MAC address where applicable.
              Model DWL-700AP / DWL-900AP+ / DWL-1000AP+ / DWL-2000AP / DWL-900AP+_revC / DWL-2000AP_revB / DWL-2000AP_revC
              Question How do I view the activity log of my access point?
              Answer The following is for the DWL-700AP, DWL-900AP+, DWL-1000AP+, and DWL-2000AP access points.

              Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click the Status tab at the top of the page and then click on the Log button at the left of the page.



              This displays the activity log for your access point. The buttons located above the log can be used to perform certain actions.

              • First Page: View the first page of the log.
              • Last Page: View the last page of the log.
              • Previous: View the previous page of the log.
              • Next: View the next page of the log.
              • Clear: Clear (delete) the entire log.
              Model DWL-7100AP
              Question How do I change the IP address on my DWL-2100AP and DWL-7100AP?
              Answer To change or obtain an IP address automatically for the DWL-2100AP and DWL-7100AP follow the steps below:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab and then click LAN.



              Step 3 Select Dynamic (DHCP) from the drop-down list if you want the access point to receive an IP address automatically from a DHCP server or router, otherwise change the IP address manually (static).

              We strongly suggest using a static IP address. The IP address is not used for networking, only for configuration. Make sure the IP address is within the same IP range as your network.

              Step 4 Click the Apply button and click Continue to restart the access point.
              Model DWL-7100AP
              Question How do I change the data rate on my DWL-7100AP?
              Answer It is recommended to configure data rate on your wireless access point before your wireless adapters. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the data rate of the access point.

              Note: It is strongly recommended to keep this setting at its default value.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-7100AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (default is 192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Performance on the left side.



              Step 4 Select a fixed speed from the drop down list next to Data Rate.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-7100AP
              Question How do I configure WLAN Partition (filter) on my DWL-7100AP?
              Answer The DWL-7100AP allows you to select whether or not either wireless band can pass information, via the Internal Station Connection option. If this feature is not enabled, that particular wireless band will not be able to pass any information through the Access Point. This feature effectively segregates the wireless band of your choice from the rest of the Network. With Ethernet-to-WLAN Access disabled, information sent from the Ethernet side will not be passed to the Wireless Clients. However, wireless clients will still be able to transmit across Ethernet for browsing, etc.

              Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-7100AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Advanced tab and then click Filters on the left side.

              Step 4 Click on WLAN Partition.



              Step 5 There are 3 different filters you can use to control traffic on your network. Check the box to enable the feature.

              Internal Station Connection
              • Enabled - this will allow wireless clients to communicate with each other (within the same wireless band).
              • Disabled - wireless clients are not allowed to exchange data with each other (within the same wireless band).
              Ethernet to WLAN Access
              • Enabled - Ethernet devices can exchange data with wireless devices using the Access Point.
              • Disabled - Ethernet devices are not allowed to send data to wireless devices associated with the Access Point. However, wireless devices can still send data to the Ethernet devices.
              Internal Station Connection Between 802.11a & 802.11g
              • Enabled - devices on the 802.11a network are able to exchange data with devices on the 802.11g network through the Access Point.
              • Disabled - devices on the 802.11a network are not allowed to exchange data with devices on the 802.11g network through the Access Point.
              Step 6 Click Apply to save your settings.
              Model DWL-7100AP
              Question How do I configure Telnet on my DWL-7100AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-7100AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Tools tab and then click Misc. on the left side.



              Step 4 To enable Telnet, check the Enabled check box next to Status. Select the timeout from the dropdown list.

              Step 5 Click Apply then Continue to save the settings.

              Advanced users can use Telnet to configure this unit. Go to Start > Run and type in telnet 192.168.0.50 and press enter. Enter the username (admin) and your password (just press enter by default). Telnet commands are not supported by D-Link Tech Support. Use at your own risk.

              To prevent users from using Telnet, next to Status, uncheck the Enabled box (see above).
              Model DWL-7100AP
              Question How do I save/load the configuration file on my DWL-7100AP?
              Answer Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by typing in the IP address of the access point (default is 192.168.0.50) in your web browser. The default username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 2 Click on the Tools tab at the top of the page, and then click Cfg File to the left.



              Step 3 To save the configuration settings of your access point, click the OK button next to Load settings to Local Hard Drive.

              To load a previously saved configuration file, click the Browse... button next to Update File. Once you have located the file (config.bin) on your hard drive, click the OK button.

              Note: If the firmware on your access point has been upgraded/downgraded, do not load configuration files that were saved using a different version of firmware then you currently have installed. This will not work and could damage the unit.
              Model DWL-7100AP
              Question How do I configure WPA (Radius) on my DWL-7100AP?
              Answer It is recommended to configure WPA on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-7100AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Encryption on the left hand side.

              Step 4 Select the WPA radio button next to Authentication.



              Step 5 Click Apply.

              Step 6 Select the WPA mode by clicking EAP. PSK is used for passphrase authentication.



              Note: You do not need to configure anything under the WPA Settings section.

              Step 7 Under Security Server Settings, enter values for Domain Name Server IP address, Domain Name Server, RADIUS Server, RADIUS Port, and RADIUS Secret.

              Step 8 Click Apply then click Continue to save the settings.
              Model DWL-7100AP
              Question What devices can the DWL-7100AP repeat?
              Answer

              Routers Firmware
              DI-624 (revA) 1.24
              DI-624 (revB) 1.28
              DI-624 (revC) 2.50
              Access Points Firmware
              DWL-2000AP (revA) 1.56
              DWL-2000AP (revB) 2.06
              DWL-2000AP (revC) 3.10
              DWL-2100AP (revA) 1.00
              DWL-7000AP (revA1) 1.04
              DWL-7000AP (revA2) 1.04
              DWL-7100AP (revA) 1.00u
              Model DWL-7100AP
              Question How do I change the channel on my DWL-7100AP Access Point?
              Answer In most cases, you only need to change the channel on the access point. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the channel of the access point.

              Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-7100AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left side.



              Step 4 Next to Channel, select the channel you would like to use from the drop-down menu. It is recommended to use Channel 1,6, or 11. If you have 2.4GHz phones or experience interference, simply changing the channel may solve connection dropping issues.

              To change the 802.11A channel, select 802.11A from the drop-down menu next to Wireless Band.



              Step 5 Click on the Apply button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-7100AP
              Question How do I disable the SSID broadcast on my DWL-7100AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-7100AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left side.

              Step 4 The 802.11A and 802.11G bands are independent from each other. Select which band you want to disable the SSID from the drop-down box next to Wireless Band.

              Step 5 Next to SSID Broadcast, select Disable.



              Step 6 Click Apply to save your settings.


              XP users please click here.
              Model DWL-7100AP
              Question How do I enable WPA-PSK on my DWL-7100AP?
              Answer Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the access point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Encryption on the left hand side.

              Step 4 Click on the WPA radio button and then click Apply.



              Step 5 Select PSK and then enter a key (passphrase). The key is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. The password can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless clients. Keep the Group Key Update Interval set to 1800.



              Step 6 Click on the Apply button to save your settings.

              Note: If you are configuring your access point from a wireless adapter, you will lose connectivity as soon as you click Apply. You must enable WPA-PSK on your adapter and enter the same exact key as you entered on your access point.
              Model DWL-7100AP
              Question How do I configure my DWL-7100AP?
              Answer Click on the links below for specific configuration instructions.

              Basic Configuration:

              Wireless Settings: Advanced Features: Troubleshooting:
              Model DWL-7100AP
              Question How do I configure my DWL-7100AP?
              Answer The DWL-7100AP can be configured in four different modes:


              Access Point Mode

              The DWL-7100AP is set to Access Point (AP) mode by default, which allows the DWL-7100AP to connect to wireless clients.

              Step 1 Using an Ethernet cable connect the DWL-7100AP to your PC.

              Step 2 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-7100AP for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-7100AP is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 3 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-7100AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 4 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 5 Click the Advanced tab and then click Mode to the left.

              Step 6 Select Access Point using the radio buttons.



              Step 7 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.


              Point-to-Point Bridge

              As a wireless bridge, the DWL-7100AP allows you to connect two wireless LANs together.

              Step 1 Log into the Access Point or wireless router that the DWL-7100AP is going to bridge and write down the Ethernet MAC Address or LAN Mac Address.

              Step 2 Using an Ethernet cable connect the DWL-7100AP to your PC.

              Step 3 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-7100AP for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-7100AP is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 4 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-7100AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 5 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 6 Click the Advanced tab and then click Mode to the left.

              Step 7 Select PtP Bridge using the radio button buttons.

              Step 8 In the Remote AP MAC Address field enter in the MAC Address you obtained in Step               1.



              Step 9 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.


              Point to Multi-Point Bridge

              As a multi-point bridge, the DWL-7100AP allows you to connect multiple wireless LANs together.

              Step 1 Log into the Access Points or wireless routers that the DWL-7100AP is going to bridge and write down the Ethernet MAC Address or LAN Mac Address of each device.

              Step 2 Using an Ethernet cable connect the DWL-7100AP to your PC.

              Step 3 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-7100AP for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-7100AP is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 4 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-7100AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 5 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 6 Click the Advanced tab and then click Mode to the left.

              Step 7 Select PtMP Bridge using the radio buttons.

              Step 8 In the Remote AP MAC Address field enter in the MAC Addresses you obtained in Step               1.



              Step 9 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.


              Repeater Mode

              As a wireless repeater, the DWL-7100AP extends the range of the wireless network by repeating the wireless signal of the remote AP (Access Point or Wireless Router)

              Step 1               Log into the Access Point or wireless router that the DWL-7100AP is going to repeat and write down the Ethernet MAC Address or LAN Mac Address. Also, make sure write down the SSID, channel, and encryption information (if any) since it will have to be the same on the repeater.

              Step 2 Using an Ethernet cable connect the DWL-7100AP to your PC.

              Step 3 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-7100AP for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-7100AP is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 4 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-7100AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.50). Press Enter.

              Step 5 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK

              Note: Each Access Point should be configured to have a different LAN IP Address.

              Step 6 Click the Advanced tab and then click Mode to the left.

              Step 7 Select AP Repeater using the radio buttons.

              Step 8 In the Root AP MAC Address field enter in the MAC Address you obtained in Step               1.



              Step 9 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.

              When in repeater mode:
              • You will not be able to view or change the settings of the DWL-7100AP wirelessly. The DWL-7100AP will be transparent to the network. You must configure the unit through the Ethernet port. The Ethernet port will only allow you to configure the unit, not pass network data.
              • The unit will not respond (reply) to ping requests. If you want to test the connection, ping a computer on the other side of the repeater or ping the device you are repeating the signal of.
              Model DWL-7100AP / DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I change the SSID on my DWL-2100AP and DWL-7100AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab at the top of the configuration page and then click the Wireless button on the left side.

              Step 3 Next to SSID, type in a new SSID.

              The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-7100AP / DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I enable WEP Encryption on my DWL-2100AP and DWL-7100AP?
              Answer Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the access point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Encryption on the left side. Select the Wireless Band (DWL-7100AP only).

              Step 4 Click the radio button next to Shared Key and then click Enabled next to Encryption. Make sure your other wireless devices are set to Shared Key.

              Step 5 Next to Key Type, select HEX or ASCII. You will need to use the same key on all your wireless devices.

            • HEX - use 0-9 and A-F only.
            • ASCII - All numbers and letters.

              Step 6 Next to Key Size, select the level of encryption (64, 128, or 152-bit).

              Step 7 You can enter up to 4 different keys. Select the key you want to use from the Valid Key drop-down.

              Step 8 Enter your encryption key. You make this up yourself. If you selected HEX, then enter a key made up of a combination of numbers (0-9) and letters (A-F). For example - A4572BCC19 (HEX).



              Step 9 Click Apply to save settings.

              Note: If you are configuring your access point from a wireless adapter, you will lose connectivity as soon as you click Apply. You must enable WEP on your adapter and enter the same exact key as you entered on your access point.
              • Model DWL-7100AP / DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I change my user name and password on my DWL-2100AP and DWL-7100AP?
              Answer You can change the user name and password within the web-based configuration utility that is built-in to the access point.

              Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer. Enter the IP address of the access point (default is 192.168.0.50) and press Enter.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Tools tab at the top and then click Admin.



              Step 4 Enter your new user name and then enter the old password (if any). Enter your new password and click Apply. After the access point restarts, you will be required to enter your new user name and password.




              What if I forgot my username and/or password?
              Model DWL-7100AP / DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I enable Super G™ Mode on my DWL-2100AP and DWL-7100AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Performance on the left side.



              Step 3 Next to Super Mode, select the mode you would like to use from the drop-down menu.
              • Disabled
              • Super G without Turbo
              • Super G with Dynamic Turbo
              • Super G with Static Turbo
              What mode should I use?

              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.


            • What is Super G™?
              • Model DWL-7100AP / DWL-2100AP
              Question How do I enable MAC address filter on my DWL-2100AP and DWL-7100AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click the Advanced tab and then click Filters on the left side.

              Step 3 Next to Access Control, select the mode you would like to use from the drop-down menu.
              • Disabled - Disables this feature and will allow all wireless clients to connect.
              • Accept - Blocks all clients except for what you enter in the list.
              • Reject - Allows all clients except for what you enter in the list.


              Step 4 Enter the Ethernet MAC address that you wish to Accept or Reject.



              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-7130AP
              Question How do I login to the DWL-7130AP?
              Answer You cannot login to this device directly. The device must first be connected to an XStack Switch and then it can be managed through the switchīs interface.
              Model DWL-7130AP / DWL-7230AP
              Question What is the difference between the DWL-7130AP and the DWL-7230AP?
              Answer The DWL-7130AP requires an external power adapter in order to provide power to the wireless access point. The DWL-7230AP supports Power Over Ethernet (PoE) as well as the ability to connect an external power adapter which allows power to be supplied to the wireless access point from a PoE midspan or endspan.

              PoE endspan xStack switches functional with the wireless access point:
            • DXS-3227P
            • DWS-3227P

              PoE midspan for use with non-PoE capable switches:
            • DWL-P1012

              For a complete listing of all the xStack Series switches that are functional with the wireless access point, click here.
              • Model DWL-7230AP
              Question How do I login to the DWL-7230AP?
              Answer You cannot login to this device directly. The device must first be connected to an XStack Switch and then it can be managed through the switchīs interface.
              Model DWL-7700AP
              Question How do I reset my DWL-7700AP?
              Answer Note: The DWL-7700AP does not have a reset button. Restoration of factory defaults must be done within the Graphical User Interface (GUI).

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type in the IP address of your DWL-7700AP. By default it should be http://192.168.0.50. The username is Admin, the password should be blank (nothing).

              Step 2 Click on the Tools tab and then click on System on the left hand side.



              Step 3 Click on the Restore button. This will restore your DWL-2700AP to Factory Default Settings. A message box will appear that will read, "Device will reboot and web will be disconnected! Continue?". Click Ok. Your DWL-2700AP has now been reset to factory defaults.

              Model DWL-800AP+
              Question What wireless routers and access points can the DWL-800AP+ be a repeater to?
              Answer The DWL-800AP+ will repeat the wireless signal of:

              • DWL-800AP+
              • DWL-900AP
              • DWL-900AP+
              • DWL-1000AP
              • DWL-1000AP+
              • DWL-2000AP
              • DI-614+
              • DI-711
              • DI-713
              • DI-714
              • DI-714P+
              • DI-764
              Currently (firmware up to 1.30) this unit will not repeat the DI-624, DI-713P, or DI-774.

              Unfortunately we can not guarantee compatibility with other manufacturerīs devices. Repeater mode is not part of the Wi-Fi certification and may not repeat devices other than those listed above.

              How do I configure my DWL-800AP+ as a repeater?
              Model DWL-800AP+ / DWL-800AP+_revB
              Question How do I enable Encryption on the DWL-800AP+?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-800AP+ by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.30).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK, then select the Wireless tab.

              Step 3 Under the WEP field select enabled. For the WEP Encryption select 64, 128, or 256-bit encryption. The WEP mode will be HEX.

              Step 4 Select Key 1. In the box, enter a HEX key (a random encryption key that you make up). The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption. The Hex key must be exactly the same on all your wireless products.

            • 64-bit encryption 10 characters
            • 128-bit encryption 26 characters
            • 256-bit encryption 58 characters

              The encryption key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters.

              Step 5 Click Apply then continue to save your settings.

              Note: You will now need to use the same encryption key on all other wireless devices you wish to communicate on this wireless network.
              • Model DWL-800AP+ / DWL-800AP+_revB
              Question How do I change the SSID on my DWL-800AP+?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-800AP+ in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.30. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Wireless button at the top of the page.

              Step 3 Next to SSID, type in a new SSID.

              The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-800AP+ / DWL-800AP+_revB
              Question How do I change the channel on my DWL-800AP+?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.30. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on Wireless.

              Step 3 Select a new channel from the drop-down menu next to Channel.

              Step 4 Click Apply to save your settings.

              Model DWL-800AP+ / DWL-800AP+_revB
              Question How do I change the IP address on my DWL-800AP+?
              Answer To change or obtain an IP address automatically for the DWL-800AP+ follow the steps below:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.30. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Network tab.



              Step 3 Select the Dynamic IP Address radio button if you want the access point to receive an IP address automatically from a DHCP server or router, otherwise change the IP address manually (static).

              We strongly suggest using a static IP address. The IP address is not used for networking, only for configuration. Make sure the IP address is within the same IP range as your network.

              Step 4 Click the Apply button and click Continue to restart the access point.
              Model DWL-800AP+ / DWL-800AP+_revB
              Question How do I change the data rate on my DWL-800AP+?
              Answer It is recommended to configure data rate on your wireless access point before your wireless adapters. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the data rate of the access point.

              Note: It is strongly recommended to keep this setting at 1-2-5.5-11-22(Mbps).

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-800AP+ by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.30).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Wireless tab.



              Step 4 To the right of TX Rate select a fixed speed from one of the radio buttons.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-800AP+ / DWL-800AP+_revB
              Question How do I change the password on my DWL-800AP+?
              Answer You can change the password within the web-based configuration utility that is built-in to the DWL-800AP+.

              Step 1 Open your web browser. Enter the IP address of the DWL-800AP+ (default is 192.168.0.30) and press Enter.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Admin tab at the top.



              Step 4 Enter your new password and click Apply. After the DWL-800AP+ restarts, click Continue. You cannot change the username. The username will always be admin.

              What if I forgot my password?
              Model DWL-800AP+ / DWL-800AP+_revB
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DWL-800AP+?
              Answer Please read before upgrading:

            • Upgrading firmware will reset the settings to default which means you will lose all your settings.
            • Do NOT upgrade firmware over a wireless connection. You may damage the access point.

              Step 1 Download the firmware and save the file to your computer. You may want to save the file to your desktop. Do not try to run or launch the file - it will not work.

              Download Firmware here.

              Step 2 If you are connecting the access point directly to your PC you will need a cross-over cable. Connecting to a switch or router you will use a straight through cable.

              WARNING: DO NOT upgrade the firmware with a wireless connection. You may damage the access point.

              Step 3 Open your web browser, enter the IP address of your access point (default is 192.168.0.30) and press Enter.

              Step 4 Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default). Click OK to enter the web configuration for the device.

              Step 5 Click on the Admin tab. Under Firmware Upgrade click on the Browse button and browse to the .bin or .tfp file you downloaded in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click Open. Click Load. It will take a few seconds for the upgrade to complete. Click on the Continue button.



              Step 6 After the access point reboots, close your web browser and reopen it. Enter the IP address of the access point (default is 192.168.0.30) to reconnect with the web-based configuration. Enter username admin and again leave the password blank. Click OK. The firmware upgrade is now complete.

              Step 7 If you have problems with the web-based configuration at this point, unplug the power to the access point, wait 10 seconds, and plug it back in. Repeat Step 6. If this did not help, perform a hard reset on the access point. To perform a hard reset, use a paperclip and hold down the reset button on the back of the unit for 10 seconds while the device is powered on. Release it and the access point will reboot, the lights will blink, and then stabilize. Repeat Step 6              .

              Step 8 You can now reconfigure the access point.
              • Model DWL-800AP+ / DWL-800AP+_revB
              Question How do I save/load the configuration of my DWL-800AP+?
              Answer Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by typing in the IP address of the access point (default is 192.168.0.30) in your web browser. The default username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 2 Click on the Admin tab at the top of the page.

              Step 3 To save the configuration settings of your access point, click the Save button, located under System Settings.

              To load a previously saved configuration file, click the Browse button. Once you have located the file (config.bin) on your hard drive, click the Load button.



              Note: If the firmware on your access point has been upgraded/downgraded, do not load configuration files that were saved using a different version of firmware then you currently have installed. This will not work and could damage the unit.
              Model DWL-800AP+ / DWL-800AP+_revB
              Question Where can I find the MAC address of my DWL-800AP+?
              Answer The MAC address of your access point is listed on the sticker located on the bottom of the access point. It is listed below the serial number.

              The LAN and Wireless MAC addresses can be obtained by logging into the web-based configuration of the access point. Follow the steps below for this method.

              Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by typing in the IP address of the access point (default is 192.168.0.30) in your web browser. The default username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).



              Step 2 By default, the access point will go to the Home page when you log in. If you are not on the Home page, click on the Home tab at the top. You will see different categories listed and their MAC address where applicable.
              Model DWL-800AP+ / DWL-800AP+_revB
              Question How do I configure the DWL-800AP+?
              Answer The DWL-800AP+ can be configured in two different modes:
            • Repeater Mode
            • Access Point Mode



              Repeater Mode


              The DWL-800AP+ is set to Repeater mode by default. As a wireless repeater, the DWL-800AP+ extends the range of the wireless network by repeating the wireless signal of the remote AP (Access Point or Wireless Router).

              What wireless routers and access points can the DWL-800AP+ be a repeater to?

              Step 1 Log into the Access Point or wireless router that the DWL-800AP+ is going to repeat and write down the Ethernet MAC Address or LAN Mac Address.



              Step 2 Using an Ethernet cable connect the DWL-800AP+ to your PC.

              Step 3 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-800AP+ for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-800AP+ is 192.168.0.30.

              Windows 98/ME
              Windows 2000
              Windows XP
              Macintosh

              Step 4 To begin configuring the DWL-800AP+ open a browser and enter in the APīs default IP address (192.168.0.30). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Note: Each Access Point should be configured to have a different LAN IP Address.

              Step 5 Click the Wireless tab and in the Remote AP MAC field enter in the MAC Address you obtained in Step 1.

              Step 6 Click Apply and click Continue to save the changes.


              Note: You will not be able to view the settings of the DWL-800AP+ wirelessly when set to Repeater mode. The DWL-800AP+ will be transparent to you. You will still be able to configure the DWL-800AP+ when wired. Also, the Ethernet port will only allow you to configure the unit, not pass network data.

              When the DWL-800AP+ is in repeater mode, the unit will not respond (reply) to ping requests. If you want to test the connection, ping a computer on the other side of the repeater or ping the device you are repeating the signal of.



              Access Point Mode


              The DWL-800AP+ can be configured in Access Point (AP) mode to connect to wireless clients.

              Step 1 Use an Ethernet cable connect the DWL-800AP+ to your PC.

              Step 2 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-800AP+ for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-800AP+ is 192.168.0.30.

              Windows 98/ME
              Windows 2000
              Windows XP
              Macintosh

              Step 3 To begin configuring the DWL-800AP+ open a browser and enter in the APīs default IP address (192.168.0.30). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 4 Click the Wireless tab and select the AP mode radio button. You will need to enter in the SSID and your Encryption settings.

              Step 5 Click Apply and click Continue to save the changes.
              • Model DWL-800AP+ / DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+_revC / DWL-800AP+_revB
              Question Why do I have a problem repeating the signal when using MAC Filtering?
              Answer If you are going to enable MAC Filtering on your Wireless Access Point/Router, you must enter the MAC Address of the repeater.

              For the DWL-900AP+ enter the Ethernet MAC Address, which can be found on the Status tab:



              For the DWL-800AP+ enter the Ethernet MAC Address, which can be found on the Home tab:

              Model DWL-810
              Question How do I configure the wireless settings on my DWL-810 wireless bridge?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the DWL-810 (192.168.0.30). Enter your username (admin) and your password (nothing) if any. Click OK.

              Why canīt I get to the web-based configuration utility?



              Step 2 Click on Wireless.



              Operation Mode: Use Ad-Hoc if connecting to another DWL-810 or a wireless network adapter. If connecting to an access point or a wireless router, use Infrastructure (default).

              SSID: Enter the SSID (Service Set Identifier). The SSID can be up to 32 numbers and/or letters and is case-sensitive. The SSID must be the same on all wireless nodes on the wireless network. The default SSID is default.

              Channel: If in Ad-Hoc mode, make sure the channel is the same as the other wireless nodes. You do not have to set the channel if in Infrastructure mode.

              Transmission Rate: Select the speed (transfer rate). For best results, use Automatic.

              WEP Enabled: Check if using WEP encryption.

              How do I enable WEP encryption?

              WEP Key Length: If using encryption, choose what level - 64-bit or 128-bit.

              Deny Unencrypted Data: If using encryption, check this box to deny any request that is not encrypted.

              Shared Key Authentication: Check box only when using encryption.

              Step 3 Click Apply to save settings.
              Model DWL-810
              Question How do I change the password on my DWL-810 wireless bridge?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the DWL-810 (192.168.0.30). Enter the username (admin) and the password (blank). Click OK.



              Step 2 Click on Admin.

              Step 3 You can change the username and password to create multiple accounts. Enter your new password (twice) and click Save. If you change the admin username to something else, the username (admin) with a blank password is still a means to enter the web configuration. You may want to change the admin password to secure your wireless bridge.



              Step 4 Click Reboot when prompted.

              Model DWL-810
              Question How do I set up encryption on the DWL-810 wireless bridge?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless router or access point before your wireless bridge. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the DWL-810 (192.168.0.30). Make sure your computer has an IP address within the same subnet (192.168.0.x) as the DWL-810.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and password (blank). Click OK to continue.



              Step 3 Click on Wireless. Make sure you have set encryption on your wireless access point or router first.

              Step 4 Check the box next to WEP Enabled. Choose the WEP Key Length, either 64 or 128-bit. Enter the Hex WEP key that you entered on your wireless access point or router. If you are in an Ad-Hoc network, make up a Hex key and enter the same key on your other wireless nodes. Check the boxes next to Deny Unencrypted Data and Shared Key Authentication.



              Step 5 Click Apply to save settings. Click Reboot when prompted.

              Model DWL-810 / DWL-810+
              Question How do I reset my DWL-810 or DWL-810+ wireless bridge back to default settings including my password?
              Answer To reset your DWL-810/810+ back to factory settings or if you lost your password, follow the steps below:

              Step 1 With the DWL-810 powered on, insert a paperclip into the reset hole next to the antenna on the back of the unit.

              Note: Do not remove power during reset procedure.

              Step 2 Hold for 3 to 5 seconds. The ACT light on the front will go out. Release paperclip and the unit will now reboot (about 3 seconds). Once the ACT light is on, the DWL-810 is rebooted.

              Step 3 Once the unit is reset, the default username is admin and the password is blank. The IP address will be 192.168.0.30.


              An alternate way to reset unit is through the web-based configuration. If you lost your password, use the method above.

              Step 1 Open web browser and enter the IP address of the DWL-810 (192.168.0.30). Enter username (admin) and password (blank). Click OK.



              Step 2 Click on Admin and click the Factory Reset button at the bottom. This will reset all the settings including password to the default settings.



              Step 3 Click Reboot when prompted.

              Model DWL-810+ / DI-810+B
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DWL-810+?
              Answer Step 1 Login to the unit by opening a web browser and typing its IP address (192.168.0.30) in the address bar.

              Step 2 When prompted to, enter the username and password and click OK. By default the username is admin and there is no password.

              Step 3 Click on the Admin tab.

              Step 4 Underneath where it says Firmware Upgrade, click the browse button, locate the firmware file that you downloaded, highlight the file, and click Open.

              Step 5 Click Apply and the firmware upgrade process will begin. Click Continue when prompted.
              Model DWL-810+ / DWL-810+_revB
              Question How do I reset my DWL-810+ back to default settings?
              Answer To reset the DWL-810+ back to default settings, or if you forgot your password, please do the following:

              Step 1 Locate the reset button on the back of the DWL-810+.



              Step 2 Using a paper clip or an object similar in size, gently push and hold the reset button in for approximately 10 seconds while the unit is powered on.

              Step 3 Release the reset button and allow the DWL-810+ to reboot itself.

              The DWL-810+ should now be reset with the default settings. The default password is blank (nothing) and the default IP address is 192.168.0.30.
              Model DWL-810+ / DWL-810+_revB / DWL-G810
              Question How do I configure a DWL-810+ or DWL-G810 to work with my Xbox™?
              Answer The DWL-810+/G810 can be configured in two different Operating Modes; Infrastructure and Ad-hoc.

              Infrastructure:

            • Configure the DWL-810+/G810 for Infrastructure mode when connecting through a wireless router or access point to Xbox™ Live.



              Note: In order for the DWL-810+/G810 to connect to Xbox™ Live, the unit must have at least firmware version 1.30.
              How do I upgrade the firmware on the DWL-810+?
              Step 1 Set a static IP address on your computer of 192.168.0.20 with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
              How do I set a static IP address on my computer?
              Step 2 Connect the DWL-810+/G810 to your computer with the cable that was provided.

              Step 3 Open your web browser and type 192.168.0.30 into the URL address box and then press Enter. At the login type admin for the username and leave the password field blank. Click OK. Once you have logged in, the Home screen will appear.

              Step 4 Click on the Wireless tab.

              Step 5 Select Infrastructure as the Operating Mode and click on Site Survey.

              Step 6 Select the SSID that matches the one configured on your wireless router or access point and click Connect.

              Step 7 Make sure, only if the network that you are connecting to is using WEP, that Enabled is selected for WEP and that you enter in the appropriate key in the space provided for Key 1.

              Step 8 Click Apply and then click Continue when prompted to.

              Step 9 Disconnect the ethernet cable from your computer and plug it into the ethernet port on your Xbox™. You are now ready to play on Xbox™ Live.


              Ad-hoc:

            • Configure the DWL-810+/G810 in Ad-hoc mode for peer-to-peer LAN gaming with other Xbox™ consoles (no access point.)



              Step 1 Set a static IP address on your computer of 192.168.0.20 with a subnet mask of 255.255.255.0.
              How do I set a static IP address on my computer?
              Step 2 Connect the DWL-810+/G810 to your computer with the cable that was provided.

              Step 3 Open your web browser and type 192.168.0.30 into the URL address box and then press Enter. At the login type admin for the username and leave the password field blank. Click OK. Once you have logged in, the Home screen will appear.

              Step 4 Click on the Wireless tab.

              Step 5 Select Ad-hoc as the Operating Mode and enter in the SSID of your Ad-hoc network in the field provided.

              Step 6 Select the Channel, out of the drop down menu, which is associated with the SSID for the Ad-hoc network that you are connecting to.

              Note: All devices connecting to this Ad-hoc network need to be configured with the same SSID and Channel

              Step 7 If the Ad-hoc network you are connecting to is configured to use WEP, make sure Enabled is selected for WEP and that you enter in the appropriate key in the space provided for Key 1.

              Step 8 Click Apply and then click Continue when prompted to.

              Step 9 Disconnect the ethernet cable from your computer and plug it into the ethernet port on your Xbox™.

              Step 10 Configure the ethernet adapter on your Xbox™ with a static IP address on the same subnet as the other devices connecting to this network and you should now be connected to the other consoles on this network.


              D-Link is a registered trademark of D-Link Systems Inc. Xbox and Xbox Live are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. All other company names mentioned herein may be trademarks of their respective owners. Copyright Đ 2003 D-Link, All Rights Reserved.
              • Model DWL-810+ / DWL-810+B
              Question How do I configure my DWL-810+ in ad-hoc mode?
              Answer Step 1 From a computer that is hard-wired to the DWL-810+, open your internet browser and enter the IP address of the DWL-810+ (http://192.168.0.30).

              How do I connect to the DWL-810+ with an Ethernet cable?

              Step 2 The DWL-810+ logon screen should come up. Type the username (admin) and the password will remain blank.

              Step 3 Once you are logged in click on the Wireless tab. From the Wireless settings page select Ad-hoc as the operation mode and enter an SSID for the Ad-hoc network.

              Step 4 Click Apply to save the settings and Continue to return to the DWL-810+ configuration.

              Note: Be sure that any device that will be associating with this Ad-hoc network is configured with the same channel and have the exact same SSID as the DWL-810+.

            • What is Ad-Hoc mode?
            • What is SSID?
            • How do I reset the DWL-810+ back to default settings?
              • Model DWL-810+ / DWL-810+B
              Question How do I change my password on my DWL-810+?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the DWL-810+ (192.168.0.30). Enter the username (admin) and the password (blank). Click OK.

              Step 2 Click on Admin.

              Step 3 You cannot change the username. Enter your new password (twice) and click Apply.

              Step 4 Click Continue when prompted.
              Model DWL-810+ / DWL-810+B
              Question How do I view the web configuration on my DWL-810+?
              Answer You will need to set a static IP address on your PC in the range of the DWL-810+ to get into the configuration. Once you configure the DWL-810+, you can change your computer back to a dynamic IP address (obtain from DHCP Server).

              How do I set a static IP on my computer?

              Step 1 Open your web browser and type 192.168.0.30 into the URL address box and then press Enter.

              Step 2 At the login type admin for the username and leave the password field blank. Click OK. Once you have logged in, the Home screen will appear.
              Model DWL-810+ / DWL-810+B
              Question How do I enable encryption on my DWL-810+?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type 192.168.0.30 into the URL address box and then press Enter.

              Step 2 At the login type admin for the username and leave the password field blank. Click OK. Once you have logged in, the Home screen will appear.

              Step 3 Click on the Wireless tab.

              Step 4 Select Enabled next to the WEP radio buttons. For WEP Encryption select 64, 128, or 256-bit encryption. For the Key Type select HEX.

              Step 5 Select Key 1. In the box, enter a HEX key (a random encryption key that you make up). The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption. The Hex key must be exactly the same on all your wireless products.

              64-bit encryption 10 characters 128-bit encryption 26 characters 256-bit encryption 58 characters

              The encryption key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters.

              Step 6 Set the Authentication to Shared Key. Make sure your other wireless products are set to Shared Key.

              Step 7 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-8220AP
              Question Can I configure my Access Point from my computer?
              Answer No, All the configurations, for this Access Point, are done from the switch.
              Model DWL-8220AP
              Question Is there firmware available for my Access Point?
              Answer No, The firmware is pushed out from the switch automatically. No configuration from the user is necessary, the update is done in the background.
              Model DWL-900AP
              Question How do I disable the SSID broadcast on my DWL-900AP?
              Answer This FAQ is for the DWL-900AP Access Point. If you have the DWL-900AP+, please read here. Make sure you have the latest firmware and software for your DWL-900AP.

              Download latest firmware/software here.

              I want to disable the SSID broadcast with the USB utility.

              I want to disable the SSID broadcast with the SNMP utility.


              Using USB

              Step 1 Open the USB utility by going to Start>Programs>Dlink Wireless Access Point>USB Config Utility.



              Step 2 Enter the password of the DWL-900AP to access the USB utility (the default password is public) then click on Advanced Settings.



              Step 3 Click on the Wireless Setting tab then click on the Advanced button.



              Step 4 In the SSID Broadcasting field click on the drop down arrow and select Disable.



              Step 5 Once you have selected Disable click on OK to save changes. Click OK to exit the USB configuration utility.



              Using SNMP

              Step 1 Open the USB utility by going to Start>Programs>Dlink Wireless Access Point>SNMP Utility.



              Step 2 When the D-Link Wireless Access Point Utility window comes up click on the Search button to find your access point.

              Note: Make sure your computer is on the same subnet as the DWL-900AP or the access point will not be found.

              Step 3 Click on your DWL-900AP then click on the Setup button.



              Step 4 In the configuration utility click on the Wireless Setting tab then click on the Advanced button.



              Step 5 In the SSID Broadcasting field click on the drop down arrow and select Disable.



              Step 6 Click on OK then click on Apply to save the changes.

              Model DWL-900AP
              Question How Do I configure the DWL-900 using the SNMP configuration?
              Answer This is for the DWL-900AP not the DWL-900AP+

              There are two ways to configure the DWL-900AP; the USB configuration utility and the SNMP configuration utility. The DWL-900AP does NOT have a web-based utility.

              Download the latest management utilities for the DWL-900AP

              Step 1 Put in the D-Link CD and click on Install Configuration Utilities. Follow the instructions in the wizard to install the utilities. If you are using the updated configuration utility from the web, double-click on the Setup.exe file and follow the instructions in the wizard to install the utilities.

              Step 2 Connect the DWL-900AP to your computer via a cross-over cable. Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range to configure the DWL-900 through the SNMP utility.

              Windows 98/ME IP Configuration
              Windows 2000 IP Configuration
              Windows XP IP Configuration

              Step 3 Open the SNMP utility by clicking on start > programs (or all programs) > D-Link Wireless Access Point > SNMP Utility.



              Step 4 Click on the Magnifying Glass icon to find the DWL-900AP. When the Access Point appears in the white box, highlight it and click on the Computer Monitor icon.



              Step 5 When prompted for the password, type in public (all lower case). Select the Wireless Settings tab to change the wireless settings for the Access Point.



              Step 6 After you enter your settings, click Apply to save your settings.

              What is SSID?

              What channel should I use?

              How do I disable the SSID broadcast on my DWL-900AP?
              Model DWL-900AP
              Question How do I reset my DWL-900 Wireless Access Point/ Bridge to default settings?
              Answer The only way to reset the DWL-900 to default settings is to run the SNMP Utility.

              Step 1 Go to Start>Programs>D-Link Wireless Access Point>SNMP Utility.

              Step 2 Click Search and your DWL-900 will show up in list. Click on DWL-900 and click Setup.

              Step 3 If prompted for password, enter it.

              Step 4 Click on System tab.

              Step 5 Click Load Default button and this will reset the DWL-900 to factory settings.
              Model DWL-900AP
              Question How can I upload a list of authorized MAC addresses to my DWL-900AP?
              Answer For security purposes the DWL-900AP can block unauthorized users from connecting to your wireless network. Create a simple text file with Notepad and list the MAC addresses of the wireless clients you want to authorize. When creating the list, enter only the MAC address (without colons or dashes) and press Enter after every entry. Save as a .txt file.

              Step 1 Open the D-Link SNMP Utility for the DWL-900AP by clicking Start>Programs>D-Link Wireless Access Point>SNMP Utility.

              Step 2 Click Search to locate Access Point. When the Access Point appears, double-click it.

              Step 3 Enter password and click OK. The default password is public.

              Step 4 Click the Wireless Operation tab at the top of the window.

              Step 5 Click Advanced. The Wireless Advanced windows will appear.

              Step 6 At the bottom, check the Enable Auth. Table box. Click Load File and browse to the text file you created. Highlight it and click Open.

              Step 7 The MAC addresses should now be displayed in the list. Click Download to save the list.

              Step 8 Click OK to close the window and then click Apply to save the settings.

              When you go back into the SNMP utility, the list will be empty but will be active. Click Get to display the current list.
              Model DWL-900AP
              Question What access points will allow wireless bridging to the DWL-900AP in Bridging Mode and Client Mode?
              Answer The DWL-900AP can bridge (point to point or point to multipoint) to another DWL-900AP only. It will not work with a DWL-900AP+ due to chipset differences.

              When the DWL-900AP is set to Client mode, it will communicate with another DWL-900AP (AP mode) and a DWL-1000AP.

              The Client and Bridging features of this standalone multifunction device are not part of the WI-FI certification. Using these modes with products other than the ones listed above may not work.
              Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+revC
              Question What other access points can the DWL-900AP+ communicate with when in Bridge Mode?
              Answer When the DWL-900AP+ is in Bridge mode, it can only communicate with another D-Link DWL-900AP+.

              Note: We do not support connectivity to non D-Link products. Bridging, Client, and Repeater modes are not part of the Wi-Fi Certification.
              Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+revC
              Question How do I disable the SSID broadcast on my DWL-900AP+?
              Answer Step 1 Open your Internet browser and type the IP address of the DWL-900AP+ in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab at the top of the configuration page and then click the Performance button on the left side.

              Step 3 At the bottom of the Performance page, click on Disable next to the SSID Broadcast field.



              Step 4 Click on Apply. Wait about 15 seconds to allow the DWL-900AP+ to save the changes and then click on Continue.


            • If your wireless adapter is installed on a Windows XP machine, please click here.
              • Model DWL-900AP+ / DI-614+ / DI-614+_revB / DWL-900ap+_revC
              Question How do I configure the DWL-900AP+ to be a Wireless Client to the DI-614+?
              Answer Step 1 Log onto the DI-614+ configuration page (192.168.0.1 in your browser). Log in by entering your username into the login box (admin by default).

              Step 2 Select the Status tab. Under Device Info, locate the LAN MAC address (Ethernet MAC). This is the address you will enter into the configuration of the DWL-900AP+. Make sure you write it down correctly.

              Step 3 Click on the Home tab and select Wireless on the left pane. Write down the SSID.

              Step 4 Log into the configuration page of the DWL-900AP+ (192.168.0.50 in your browser). Log in by entering your username into the login box (admin by default).

              Step 5 Select the Advanced tab. Under Mode, select Wireless Client. In the Remote AP MAC box you will enter the LAN MAC address that you copied from the configuration of the DI-614+. When entering the MAC address, do not include colons (:) or dashes (-). Click on the Apply button to save your settings. Click Continue.

              Step 6 Click on the Home tab and select Wireless on the left pane. Enter the SSID as it is on the DI-614+ (case-sensitive). Click Apply and then Continue.

              Step 7 Turn the DI-614+ and the DWL-900AP+ off for a few seconds. Turn the DI-614+ on first, wait until the lights are steady, then turn the DWL-900AP+ back on.

              Step 8 The DI-614+ and the DWL-900AP+ should now be able to communicate wirelessly, if not, then verify the LAN MAC address you entered into the DWL-900AP+ configuration is correct.

              Note: When the DWL-900AP+ is in "client" mode, other wireless clients will not be able to connect to the DWL-900AP+.

              Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-2000AP / DWL-2000AP_revB / DWL-7000AP / DWL-7100AP
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DWL-2000AP, DWL-2100AP, DWL-7000AP, DWL-7100AP, and DWL-900AP+?
              Answer Please read before upgrading:

            • Upgrading firmware will reset the settings to default which means you will lose all your settings.
            • Do NOT upgrade firmware over a wireless connection. You may damage the access point.

              Step 1 Download the firmware and save the file to your computer. You may want to save the file to your desktop. Do not try to run or launch the file - it will not work.

              Download Firmware here.

              Step 2 If you are connecting the access point directly to your pc you will need a cross-over cable. Connecting to a switch or router you will use a straight through cable.

              WARNING: DO NOT upgrade the firmware with a wireless connection. You may damage the access point.

              Step 3 Open your web browser, enter the IP address of your access point (192.168.0.50) and click OK.

              Step 4 Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default). Click OK to enter the web configuration for the device.

              Step 5 Click on the Tools tab and then the Firmware button on the left side. Click on the Browse button and browse to the .bin or .tfp file you extracted in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click Open. Click Apply. It will take a few seconds for the upgrade to complete. Click on the Continue button.



              Step 6 After the access point reboots, close your web browser and reopen it. Enter 192.168.0.50 to reconnect with the web configuration. Enter username admin and again leave the password blank. Click OK. The firmware upgrade is now complete.

              Step 7 If you have problems with the web configuration at this point, unplug the power to the access point, wait 10 seconds, and plug back in. Repeat step 6. If this did not help, perform a hard reset on the access point. To perform a hard reset, use a paperclip and hold down the reset button on the back of the unit for 10 seconds while the device is powered on. Release it and the access point will reboot, the lights will blink, and then stabilize. Repeat Step 6.

              Step 8 You can now reconfigure the access point.
              • Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-2100AP / DWL-2200AP / DWL-2210AP / DWL-2700AP / DWL-7100AP / DWL-7200AP / DWL-7700AP
              Question What type of WPA Authentication will work with WDS?
              Answer WDS will work with WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK, and WPA-Auto-PSK.

              WDS will not work with WPA-EAP, WPA2-EAP, WPA-Auto-EAP.
              Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+_revC
              Question How do I change the wireless mode of my DWL-900AP+?
              Answer Note: This FAQ is for the DWL-900AP+, not the DWL-900AP.

              The DWL-900AP+ can be configured in five different modes:

              Access Point Mode
              Access Point Client Mode
              Wireless Bridge Mode
              Multi-Point Bridge Mode
              Repeater Mode

              Note: To use Repeater mode you must upgrade the firmware of the DWL-900AP+ to 2.50 or higher.

              Upgrade your firmware here.



              Access Point Mode


              The DWL-900AP+ is set to Access Point (AP) mode by default. Access Point mode will allow the DWL-900AP+ to communicate with wireless clients.

              Step 1 Using an Ethernet cable connect the DWL-900AP+ to your PC. Verify that the link light is lit on the DWL-900AP+.

              Step 2 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-900AP+ for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-900AP+ is 192.168.0.50 (set your computer to 192.168.0.3).

              Windows 98/ME
              Windows 2000
              Windows XP
              Macintosh

              Step 3 To begin configuring the DWL-900AP+ open a web browser and enter in the APīs default IP address (192.168.0.50). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).



              Step 4 Click on the Advanced tab and then click the Mode button. Select the Access Point radio button. Click Apply and then click Continue to save the changes.







              Wireless Client Mode


              AP Client or Wireless Client mode allows the DWL-900AP+ to become a wireless client to another AP or wireless router. Wireless adapters (clients) will not communicate with access points in AP Client or Wireless Client mode.

              Step 1 Log into the Access Point or Wireless Router that the DWL-900AP+ will be a wireless client to and obtain the LAN or Ethernet MAC address.



              Follow steps               1-3 from Access Point Mode

              Step 4 Click on the Advanced tab and then click the Mode button. Select the Access Point Client radio button.

              Step 5 Click on the Site Survey button and select the SSID of the Access Point or Wireless Router that the DWL-900AP+ is going to be client to. Click on the Connect button and then click Close to establish a connection.



              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the changes.



              Wireless Bridge Mode


              Wireless Bridge mode allows the Access Point to communicate with another Access Point capable of wireless bridging. A typical scenario for this selection is connecting two buildings through a wireless connection. However, be aware that compatibility between different manufacturers or chipsets may not always work.

              Note: It is strongly recommended that you use a DWL-900AP+ to communicate with another DWL-900AP+ when set to either of the Bridging modes.

              Record the Ethernet MAC addresses of both Access Points.

              Follow steps               1-3 from AP mode

              Step 4 Click on the Advanced tab and the Mode button. Select the Wireless Bridge radio button.

              Step 5 Type in the Ethernet MAC address from the other DWL-900AP+ in the Remote Bridge MAC field.

              Step 6 Click Apply and click Continue to save the changes.



              Multi-Point Bridge Mode


              Follow steps               1-3 from Access Point Mode

              Step 4 Click on the Advanced tab and the Mode button. Select the Multi-Point Bridge radio button. Click Apply and click Continue to save the changes.



              Repeater Mode


              As a Wireless Repeater, the Access Point extends the range of the wireless network by repeating the wireless signal of the remote AP (Access Point) or wireless router. The Ethernet MAC address of the remote AP is required for the Access Point to act as a wireless range extender.

              Download latest firmware here

              Step 1 From a wired computer, open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-900AP+ (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 Enter username (admin) and password.

              Step 3 Click on Advanced at the top and then click Mode on the left side.



              Step 4 Select Repeater and then enter the MAC address of the access point or wireless router you are connecting to next to Remote AP Mac. Click Apply and then click Continue.

              Note: When connecting to a wireless router, use the LAN (Ethernet) MAC address, not the wireless MAC address.

              Once the DWL-900AP+ is set to repeater mode, it becomes a transparent device and will no longer be able to be configured from a wireless connection. You must use a computer that is wired directly to the DWL-900AP+.

            • How do I upgrade the firmware on my DWL-900AP+?
            • What is an Access Point?
            • What can the DWL-900AP+ communicate with when set to Client or Repeater mode?
            • How do I configure the DWL-900AP+ to be a Wireless Client to the DI-614+?
            • How do I upgrade the firmware on my DWL-900AP+
              • Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+_revC
              Question How do I enable MAC address filters on my DWL-900AP+?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click the Advanced tab and then click Filters on the left side.

              Step 3 In the section MAC Filters, select the radio button for the mode you would like to use.

              • Disabled - Disables this feature and will allow all wireless clients to connect.
              • Allow - Blocks all clients except for what you enter in the list.
              • Deny - Allows all clients except for what you enter in the list.




              Step 4 Enter the Ethernet MAC address that you wish to Allow or Deny.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+_revC
              Question How do I change the data rate on my DWL-900AP+?
              Answer It is recommended to configure data rate on your wireless access point before your wireless adapters. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the data rate of the access point.

              Note: It is strongly recommended to keep this setting at its default value.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-900AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Performance on the left side.



              Step 4 Select a fixed speed from one of the radio buttons for the TX Rate.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+_revC
              Question How do I configure my DWL-900AP+?
              Answer Click on the links below for specific configuration instructions.

              Wireless Mode:

              Basic Configuration:

              Wireless Settings: Security Settings: Troubleshooting:
              Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+_revC
              Question How do I change the preamble on my DWL-900AP+?
              Answer It is recommended to configure the preamble on your wireless access point before your wireless adapters. You may need to set the preamble on all wireless clients.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-900AP+ by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Advanced tab and click Performance on the left hand side of the screen.



              Step 4 Select either Short or Long. The Preamble defines the length of the CRC block for communication between the wireless access point and the roaming wireless network adapters. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is a common technique for detecting data transmission errors.

              Note: High network traffic areas should use Short preamble.

              Step 5 Click Apply then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+_revC
              Question How do I configure DHCP server on my DWL-900AP+?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser. Enter the IP address of the DWL-900AP+ (default is 192.168.0.50) and press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Home tab and then click on DHCP to the left.



              Note: If you are connecting to a router or a DHCP server, the DHCP server on the DWL-900AP+ should be disabled.

              Step 4 By default, DHCP Server is set to Disabled. To enable it, click the Enabled radio button. To disable it, click the Disabled radio button.

              Step 5 To change the Starting and Ending IP Address, enter the new values in the corresponding text boxes. To change Lease Time select a value from the drop down box.

              Note: The value for Starting IP Address must be less than the value for Ending IP Address.

              Step 6 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+_revC
              Question How do I change the SSID on my DWL-900AP+?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab at the top and then click the Wireless button on the left side.

              Step 3 Next to SSID, type in a new SSID.

              The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.


            • How do I disable the SSID broadcast?
              • Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+_revC
              Question How do I change the channel on my DWL-900AP+?
              Answer In most cases, you only need to change the channel on the access point. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the channel of the access point.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the DWL-900AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left side.



              Step 4 Next to Channel, select the channel you would like to use from the drop-down menu. It is recommended to use Channel 1, 6, or 11. If you have 2.4GHz phones or experience interference, simply changing the channel may solve connection dropping issues.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+_revC
              Question How do I change the IP address on my DWL-900AP+?
              Answer To change or obtain an IP address automatically for the DWL-900AP follow the steps below:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab and then click LAN.



              Step 3 Click the Dynamic IP Address radio button if you want the access point to receive an IP address automatically from a DHCP server or router, otherwise change the IP address manually (Static IP Address). If you are connecting to a router, the Gateway and DNS IP address on the DWL-900AP+ should be the same as the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

              We strongly suggest using a static IP address. The IP address is not used for networking, only for configuration. Make sure the IP address is within the same IP range as your network.

              Step 4 Click the Apply button and click Continue to restart the access point.
              Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+_revC
              Question Which D-Link products can the DWL-900AP+ communicate with when set to repeater mode?
              Answer The DWL-900AP+ will repeat the wireless signal of:

              • DWL-800AP+
              • DWL-900AP
              • DWL-900AP+
              • DWL-1000AP
              • DWL-1000AP+
              • DWL-2000AP
              • DI-614+
              • DI-624 (revB)
              • DI-711
              • DI-713
              • DI-714
              • DI-764
              • DI-774
              Currently this unit will not repeat the DI-624 (revA and C), DI-713P, or DI-714P+.

              Unfortunately we can not guarantee compatibility with other manufacturerīs devices. Repeater mode is not part of the Wi-Fi certification and may not repeat devices other than those listed above.
              Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+_revC
              Question How do I change the password on my D-Link DWL-900AP+ Access Point?
              Answer You can change the password within the web-based configuration utility that is built-in to the DWL-900AP+.

              Step 1 Open your web browser. Enter the IP address of the DWL-900AP+ (default is 192.168.0.50) and press Enter.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Tools tab at the top.



              Step 4 Enter your new password and click Apply. After the DWL-900AP+ restarts, click Continue.

              What if I forgot my password?
              Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+_revC
              Question What is the site survey feature when setting up my DWL-900AP+ as a client?
              Answer With firmware version 2.20 and higher, weīve added a Site Survey feature which will display all available wireless networks.

              Download latest firmware here

              Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-900AP+ (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 Enter username (admin) and password.

              Step 3 Click on Advanced at the top and then click Mode on the left side.

              Step 4 Select Wireless Client and then click on Site Survey



              Step 5 Click on the radio button to the left of the wireless network you want to connect to. Click Connect.

              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue.

              Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+_revC
              Question How do I enable WEP encryption on my DWL-900AP+ wireless Access Point?
              Answer It is recommended to enable WEP encryption on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-900AP+ by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK. Select the Home tab and click Wireless on the left hand side of the screen



              Step 3 Select enabled next to the WEP radio buttons. For WEP Encryption select 64, 128, or 256-bit encryption. For the Key Type select HEX.

              Step 4 Select Key 1. In the box, enter a HEX key (a random encryption key that you make up). The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption. The Hex key must be exactly the same on all your wireless products.

            • 64-bit encryption 10 characters
            • 128-bit encryption 26 characters
            • 256-bit encryption 58 characters

              The encryption key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
            • What is WEP?
            • How do I enable encryption on my other D-Link products?
            • Where do I get the encryption key on my D-Link wireless device?
              • Model DWL-900AP+ / DWL-900AP+_revC
              Question How do I enable 4X mode on the DWL-900AP+?
              Answer Note: Be sure you have firmware version 2.52 or higher.

              Download DWL-900AP+ firmware here

              Step 1  Open your Internet browser and enter the IP address of the DWL-900AP+ in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50

              Step 2  At the login screen enter the username admin and no password.

              Step 3 Once you are logged in click on the Advanced tab and then click on the Performance button.

              Step 4 Scroll to the bottom of the Performance page and click Enabled next to 4X Mode.



              Step 5 After enabling 4X Mode click on Apply and then click on Continue



              4X Mode is now enabled on the DWL-900AP+. You must enable 4X on all your clients to get the higher throughput.
              Model DWL-900AP+_revC
              Question How do I enable WPA-PSK on my DWL-900AP+?
              Answer This FAQ is for the DWL-900AP+ Revision C (with firmware 3.07 or higher) only. Revisions A and B currently do not support WPA.

              It is recommended to configure WPA on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-900AP+ by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left hand side.



              Step 4 Select WPA-PSK using the radio buttons.

              Step 5 Enter a Passphrase. The passphrase or key is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. It can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless clients.

              Step 6 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.

              Make sure you enter the same exact WPA Passphrase on your wireless clients.
              Model DWL-900AP+_revC
              Question How do I set up WPA (RADIUS) on my DWL-900AP+ (rev.C)?
              Answer This FAQ is for revision C only. Revisions A and B do not offer WPA support.

              It is recommended to configure WPA on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-900AP+ by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left hand side.



              Step 4 Select WPA using the radio buttons.

              Step 5 Under 802.1X enter the IP Address, Port and Secret Key for RADIUS Server 1. Repeat for RADIUS Server 2 if applicable.

              Step 6 Click Apply and then Continue to save the settings.

              Click here to learn more about using RADIUS/WPA
              Model DWL-915+
              Question Where can I find support for my DWL-915+ wireless networking kit?
              Answer The DWL-915+ kit includes a DI-614+ wireless router and a DWL-650+ wireless cardbus adapter. Please search for either product for FAQs.

              Read here for drivers, manuals, and quick installation guides for the DWL-650+.

              Read here for firmware, manuals, and quick installation guides for the DI-614+.
              Model DWL-A520
              Question How do I install the DWL-A520 in Windows XP?
              Answer Please download the Quick Installation Guide to assist you with this installation process.

              Before you start, make sure to turn off your computer and unplug the power cord.

              Step 1 Remove cover to your computer. Install the DWL-A520 firmly into an available PCI slot. Secure the card with a screw and attach antenna. Replace the computerīs cover.

              Step 2 Plug in power cord and turn on computer.

              Step 3 The Found New Hardware Wizard screen will appear. Select Install from a list or a specific location (Advanced) and click Next.

              Step 4 Select Include this location in the search and then click Browse. Choose the CD-Rom drive (i.e. D:/) and click Next.

              Step 5 When the Windows Logo testing window appears, click Continue Anyway. Windows will then copy files.

              Step 6 Click Finish to complete installation.

              Do not install the LinkMon configuration utility. It may not work properly with the Wireless Zero Configuration utility that is built into Windows XP.
              Model DWL-A520
              Question What are the system requirements for the DWL-A520 wireless adapter?
              Answer The system requirements are as follows:

            • Windows 98 Second Edition, 2000, Me, and XP.
            • A desktop computer with an available 32-bit PCI slot.
            • An 300 MHz processor and 32 MB of memory.
            • An 802.11a Access Point (e.g., DWL-5000AP for Infrastructure Mode) or another 802.11a wireless adapter (e.g., DWL-A650 for laptops or another DWL-A520 for Ad-Hoc mode.)

              NOTE: This adapter will not work with Windows 95, 98 First Edition, or NT.
              • Model DWL-A520 / DWL-A650
              Question How do I enable Encryption on the DWL-A520 or DWL-A650 in Windows 2000?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless access point or router before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Windows 98 and ME users read here.
              Windows XP users read here.

              Step 1 Right-click on My Network Places and select Properties.

              Step 2 Right-click on the local area connection for the DWL-A520 or DWL-A650. Select Properties.



              Step 3 Click on the Configure button.



              Step 4 Select the Settings tab, highlight the network name, and click Modify. The default network name is Default.



              Step 5 Select the Security tab and put a check mark in the Enable Security box. In the drop down menu, under Shared Keys, select either 64, 128, or 152-bit encryption. Next to the First key enter in the encryption key that you entered on your wireless access point or router. The key is Hex, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters.



              Step 6 On the top right side, select First for the Default Encryption Key.

              Step 7 Click on the OK button to save the settings.

              How do I enable encryption on my D-Link products?
              Model DWL-A520 / DWL-A650
              Question How do I enable Encryption on the DWL-A520 and DWL-A650 in Windows 98SE or Windows ME?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Windows 2000 users read here.
              Windows XP users read here.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Step 1 Go to Start>Settings>Control Panel. Double-click on the 802.11a configuration icon.



              Step 2 Select the Settings tab, highlight the network name, and click Modify. The default network name is Default.

              Step 3 Select the Security tab and put a check mark in the Enable Security box. In the drop down menu, under shared keys, select either 64, 128, or 152-bit encryption. Under the first key type in the encryption key that was entered on your wireless access point or wireless router.

              The key is Hex, meaning 0-9 and A-F.

              Step 4 Click on the OK button to save the settings.
              Model DWL-A520 / DWL-A650
              Question Where is the WMI9x.exe file that is needed to run LinkMon on Windows 98 SE?
              Answer The WMI9x.exe file that is needed to install Linkmon is located at Microsoft.com.

              Note: LinkMon is not needed to operate or configure your wireless card.
              Model DWL-A650
              Question How do I install the DWL-A650 wireless adapter in Windows XP?
              Answer Please download the Quick Installation Guide to assist you with this installation process.

              Step 1 Turn on computer and insert the D-Link driver CD into CD-Rom. When the autorun screen appears, click Close.

              Step 2 Insert the DWL-A650 card into available Cardbus slot.

              Step 3 The Found New Hardware Wizard screen will appear. Select Install from a list or a specific location (Advanced) and click Next.

              Step 4 Select Include this location in the search and then click Browse. Choose the CD-Rom drive (i.e. D:/) and click Next.

              Step 5 When the Windows Logo testing window appears, click Continue Anyway. Windows will then copy files.

              Step 6 Click Finish to complete installation.

              Do not install the LinkMon configuration utility. It may not work properly with the Wireless Zero Configuration utility that is built into Windows XP.
              Model DWL-A650
              Question What are the system requirements for the DWL-A650?
              Answer The system requirements are as follows:

            • Windows 98 Second Edition, 2000, ME, and XP.
            • A laptop with an available 32-bit Cardbus PC Card slot.
            • At least a 300 MHz processor and 32 MB of memory.
            • An 802.11a Access Point (Infrastructure Mode) or another 802.11a wireless adapter (Ad-Hoc Mode).

              NOTE: This adapter will not work with Windows 95, 98 First Edition, or NT.
              • Model DWL-AB520
              Question How do I install the DWL-AB520 / DWL-AB650 in Windows 98SE, ME, 2000, and XP?
              Answer Note: It is very important that you install the D-Link software before you install the DWL-AB520 physically into the computer.

              Step 1 Without the wireless card physically in the computer insert the D-Link DWL-AB520 installation CD into your CD drive. When the install screen appears click on Install Drivers & Utility.

              Step 2 Click Next when the installation shield appears. Continue clicking on the Next button until you come to the install shield wizard complete page. Click on No, I will restart my computer later and click Finish.

              Step 3 Shut down your computer and unplug the power. Insert the DWL-AB520 in an available PCI slot.

              Step 4 Turn your computer on. When the Found New Wizard screen appears, select Install Software Automatically (Recommended) and then click Next.

              Step 5 When the Digital Signature not Found message appears (Windows XP) click on Continue Anyway (or Yes for Windows 2000). Click on finish when the drivers have completed the installation. Click Yes if the computer prompts you to reboot.
              Model DWL-AB520 / DWL-AB650
              Question How do I connect my DWL-AB650 / DWL-AB520 using the 2.32 drivers (or higher) to a wireless network?
              Answer The wireless utility for the DWL-AB520 and DWL-AB650 will change after installing version 2.32 and higher drivers.

              To configure your wireless settings please select one of the following:

            • Site Survey (Win98/Me/2000)
            • Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)
            • Windows XP SP2
            • Not Showing in Site Survey


              Site Survey

              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 2 Click Site Survey on the left side, select the SSID of your wireless network on the right side, and then click Configure.



              Step 3 Click OK.



              Step 4 Select your SSID in the Profile section and click Connect.




              Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)

              Step 1 Right-click the two computer monitors icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.

              Step 2 Click Advanced.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and click OK.



              Follow steps               1-4 in the Site Survey section.

              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP read here.


              Windows XP SP2

              Step 1 Right-click the wireless icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.





              Step 2 In the Wireless Network Connection window click Change advanced settings on the right side below Related Tasks.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings.



              Follow steps               1-4 in the Site Survey section.

              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP read here.


              If your wireless network is not showing in Site Survey

              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 2 Click Configuration on the left side.

              Step 3 Type the SSID of your wireless access point or router next to SSID. Next to Wireless Mode select Infrastructure and then click Apply to save your settings.

              • Model DWL-AB520 / DWL-AB650
              Question How do I enable encryption for the DWL-AB520 and DWL-AB650 using the 2.23(or higher) drivers?
              Answer Installing the 2.32 drivers for the DWL-AB520 and DWL-AB650 will update the look and feel of the wireless utility used to manage the card. If the utility for your DWL-AB650/520 looks different please update to the latest drivers.

              DWL-AB520 Drivers
              DWL-AB650 Drivers

              Step 1 Access the D-Link configuration by double-clicking on the bar graph icon in the system tray.

              Step 2 Select the Site Survey link from the left hand menu. Highlight the SSID of your wireless Access Point or wireless Router and click on the Configure button.



              Step 3 Change the Data Encryption to Enabled and change the Authentication Mode to Shared. Select 64, 128, 152 or 256-bit Encryption for the Key Length. The amount of characters you enter will depend on what you selected as the key length.

            • 64-bit 10 characters
            • 128-bit 26 characters
            • 152-bit 32 characters
            • 256-bit 58 characters

              Click OK to save the settings.





              What if I donīt see my wireless network in Site Survey?

              Step 1 Access the configuration by double-clicking on the bar graph icon in the system tray.

              Step 2 Select the Configuration link from the left hand menu.



              Step 3 Change the Data Encryption to Enabled and change the Authentication Mode to Shared. Select 64, 128, 152 or 256-bit for the Key Length. The amount of characters you enter will depend on what you selected as the key length.

            • 64-bit 10 characters
            • 128-bit 26 characters
            • 152-bit 32 characters
            • 256-bit 58 characters

              Click Apply to save the settings.



              • Model DWL-AG520 / DWL-AG650
              Question How do I connect my DWL-AG520/DWL-AG650 to a wireless network?
              Answer To configure your wireless settings please select one of following:

              Site Survey
              Windows XP (SP1)
              Windows XP (SP2)
              Not Showing in Site Survey



              Site Survey


              Step 1 Access the configuration by double-clicking on the bar graph icon in the system tray.

              Step 2 Select the Site Survey link from the left hand menu. Highlight the SSID of your wireless Access Point or Router and click on the Connect button.



              Step 3 Click OK



              Step 4 This will take you back to the Link Info window. From here you can view your link status.





              Windows XP


              Step 1 Right click on the two computer monitor icon in the system try and select View Available Wireless Networks.



              Step 2 Click on the Advanced button. Uncheck the Use Windows to configure my Wireless Networks box and click on the OK button.



              Follow steps               1-4 from Site Survey.

              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP read here



              Windows XP Service Pack 2


              Step 1 Left-click the monitor icon in the System Tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen by the clock) once.

              Step 2 In the Wireless Connection Status window click Properties.



              Step 3 Click the Wireless Networks tab.

              Step 4 Uncheck the Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings checkbox and click OK.



              Follow steps               1-4 from Site Survey.



              If your wireless network is not showing in Site Survey


              Step 1 Access the configuration by double-clicking on the bar graph icon in the system tray.

              Step 2 Select the Configuration link from the left hand menu. Type in the SSID of your access point or wireless router in the SSID field. Change the Wireless Mode to Infrastructure and then click on Apply to save your settings.



              Model DWL-AG530 / DWL-G630 / DWL-AG520 / DWL-G630_revB / DWL-G630_revC
              Question How do I configure WPA-PSK on my wireless card using the Microsoft XP Utility?
              Answer This FAQ is currently for the DWL-G630, DWL-AG520, and DWL-AG530 with the latest drivers.

              Note: Make sure to have all of the latest Windows Updates.

              Step 1 Click on the XP Networking icon to use the Zero Configuration utility. This will be located in the lower-right corner (system tray). In the lower-left of the window, click on the Advanced button.



              Step 2 Ensure that Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings is checked. Highlight the network you wish to connect to and click on the Configure button.



              Step 3 From the Network Authentication drop-down, select WPA-PSK. Under Data Encryption, select TKIP or AES. Enter your Network key and enter it again next to Confirm network key.



              Step 4 Click OK to save your settings. You will now see your wireless network under the Preferred Networks box. You should now be connected to your wireless network using WPA-PSK encryption.

              The key is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. The password can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless clients.
              Model DWL-AG660 / DWL-G630_revC / DWL-G650_revB / DI-624_revC
              Question What products have drivers that support Jumpstart?
              Answer The following products have Beta drivers that support Jumpstart:

              What is Jumpstart?
              Model DWL-G120
              Question Does the DWL-G120 work in Windows 98 or Windows ME?
              Answer The shipping drivers for the DWL-G120 will not work with Windows 98 or Windows ME. We have posted new drivers which will work with Windows 98 Second Edition and Me as the box states.

              Click here to Download drivers

              Note: This device will not work with Windows 95, 98 First Edition, or Macintosh.

              Linux users can download open source drivers at prism54.org. D-Link does not support these drivers. Use at your own risk.
              Model DWL-G120 / DWA-130 / DWL-G122 / DWL-G132 / WUA-1340 / WUA-2340 / DWA-142
              Question Why do I get a notification that states, “This device can perform faster”, when I connect my USB device to my Windows XP computer?
              Answer Ensure that the main-board and USB card that you are running has the most current drivers available. Also check to see if you are using XP Service Pack 2, as this corrects many USB 2.0 issues with Windows XP.
              Model DWL-G520 / DWL-G650 / DWL-650_revB
              Question How do I enable Encryption on the DWL-G520 and DWL-G650?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless router or access point before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Windows 98/ME/2000
              Windows XP
              Not Showing in Site Survey





              Windows 98/ME/2000


              Step 1 Open the D-Link AirPlus wireless utility by double-clicking on the bar graph icon in your system tray (lower-right corner of screen). Select Site Survey.

              Step 2 Highlight your SSID in the Available Networks Authentication for the auth. mode. Click Connect.

              Step 3 The Data Encryption box should be checked and greyed-out. If not, then enable encryption on your access point or wireless router first. Auth. Mode should be set to Shared Authentication. Under Key Length, select 64, 128, or 256-bits . Click on Default Key 1 and enter the Hex encryption key that was entered into the wireless router or access point. The key length will depend on the selection made under the key length. The key is HEX, meaning A-F and 0-9.

            • 64-bit 10 characters
            • 128-bit 26 characters
            • 256-bit 58 characters



              Step 4 Click on the OK button to save your settings.





              Windows XP


              Step 1 Right click on the two computer monitor icon in the system try and select View Available Wireless Networks.

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced button. Uncheck the Use Windows to configure my Wireless Networks box and click on the OK button.

              Follow steps 1-4 from the Windows 98SE/ME/2000 configuration.





              If your wireless network is not showing up under site survey


              Step 1 Open the D-Link AirPlus wireless utility by double-clicking on the bar graph icon and select Encryption.

              Step 2 Put a check in the Data Encryption box and select Shared Authentication in the auth. mode menu. Select 64, 128, or 254-bit encryption for the key length. Under key 1 type in the Hex encryption key that was entered into the wireless router/access point. The key length will depend on the selection made under the key length. The key is HEX, meaning A-F and 0-9.

            • 64-bit 10 characters
            • 128-bit 26 characters
            • 256-bit 52 characters



              Step 4 Click on the Apply button to save your settings.
              • Model DWL-G520 / DWL-G650 / DWL-G650_revB / DWL-G520_revB / DWL-G650_revC
              Question How do I connect my DWL-G520/DWL-G650 to a wireless network?
              Answer To configure your wireless settings please select one of the following:

            • Site Survey (Win98/Me/2000)
            • Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)
            • Windows XP SP2
            • Not Showing in Site Survey


              Site Survey

              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 2 Click Site Survey on the left side and select the SSID of your wireless access point or router on the right side and then click Connect.



              Step 3 Click OK.



              Step 4 You will be able to view your link status in the Link Info window.




              Windows XP SP1 (or no service pack)

              Step 1 Right-click the two computer monitors icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.

              Step 2 Click Advanced.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings and click OK.



              Follow steps               1-3 in the Site Survey section.

              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP read here.


              Windows XP SP2

              Step 1 Right-click the wireless icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock) and select View Available Wireless Networks.





              Step 2 In the Wireless Network Connection window click Change advanced settings on the right side below Related Tasks.



              Step 3 Uncheck Use Windows to configure my wireless network settings.



              Follow steps               1-3 in the Site Survey section.

              Note: If you are having problems configuring your wireless card in Windows XP read here.


              If your wireless network is not showing in Site Survey


              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the area in the lower right-hand corner of the screen, by the clock).



              Step 2 Click Configuration on the left side.

              Step 3 Type the SSID of your wireless access point or router next to SSID. Next to Wireless Mode select Infrastructure and then click Apply to save your settings.

              • Model DWL-G520 / DWL-G650_revB
              Question How do I install the WPA supplicant for my DWL-G520/G650 driver version 2.36?
              Answer After installing the Utility and Card per instructions with the 2.36 (or higher) drivers, you will need to install the Aegis software to use WPA.

              Download the Supplicant software here.

              Windows 98 Second Edition/ME

              Step 1 Download and extract the WPA supplicant.



              Step 2 Double-click the AegisI2.exe file to install the files necessary to support WPA.



              Step 3 You should see Protocol Binding Completed Successfully. Close the Utility by clicking the X in the upper-right of the window and restart your computer. After rebooting, you should now be able to use the WPA feature with your DWL-G520/G650 and your WPA-enabled Access Point/wireless router.





              Windows 2000/XP

              Step 1 Download and extract the WPA supplicant for the 2.36 driver.



              Step 2 Double-click the AegisI5.exe file to install the files necessary to support WPA.



              Step 3 You should see Protocol Binding Completed Successfully. Close the Utility by clicking Close and restart your computer. After rebooting, you should now be able to use the WPA feature with your DWL-G520/G650 and your WPA-enabled Access Point/wireless router.



              Model DWL-G520+ / DWL-G650+
              Question Where can I find support for the DWL-G520+ and DWL-G650+?
              Answer The DWL-G520+ and DWL-G650+ are not sold or supported in the United States. These adapters are different from the DWL-G520 and DWL-G650.

              Click here for D-Link locations

            • D-Link UK
            • D-Link Germany
            • D-Link Taiwan
              • Model DWL-G630 / DWL-G510 / DWL-G510_revB / DWL-G630_revB / DWL-G630_revC / DWL-G132 / DWL-122_revB / DWL-G122_revD / DWL-122
              Question How do I enable WEP Encryption on the Wireless Network Adapter.
              Answer Windows 98/ME/2000

              Step 1 Open the D-Link AirPlus G Wireless Utility by double-clicking on the bar graph icon in your system tray (lower-right corner of screen). Select Site Survey.

              Step 2 Highlight your SSID in the Available Networks Authentication for the authentication mode. Click Connect.

              Step 3 The Data Encryption box should be checked and grayed-out. If not, then enable encryption on your access point or wireless router first. Auth. Mode should be set to Shared Authentication. Under Key Length, select 64 or 128. Click on Default Key 1 and enter the Hex encryption key that was entered into the wireless router or access point. The key length will depend on the selection made under the key length. The key is HEX, meaning A-F and 0-9.

            • 64-bit 10 characters
            • 128-bit 26 characters

              Step 4 Click on the OK button to save your settings.


              Windows XP

              Step 1 Right-click on the two computer monitor icon in the system tray and select View Available Wireless Networks.

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced button. Uncheck the Use Windows to configure my Wireless Networks box and click on the OK button.

              Follow steps 1-4 from the Windows 98SE/ME/2000 configuration above.


              If your wireless network is not showing up under site survey:

              Step 1 Open the D-Link AirPlus G Wireless Utility by double-clicking on the bar graph icon and select Encryption.

              Step 2 Put a check in the Data Encryption box and select Shared Authentication in the auth. mode menu. Select 64 or 128 for the key length. Under key 1 type in the Hex encryption key that was entered into the wireless router or access point. The key length will depend on the selection made under the key length. The key is HEX, meaning A-F and 0-9.

            • 64-bit 10 characters
            • 128-bit 26 characters

              Step 4 Click on the Apply button to save your settings.
              • Model DWL-G630 / DWL-G630_revB / DWL-G630_revC
              Question Why wonīt the Power and Link lights light up on my DWL-G630?
              Answer Check to see if the DWL-G630 Wireless Cardbus Adapter is firmly inserted into the Cardbus slot of your laptop computer.

              If the wireless card is inserted firmly and the drivers are installed correctly, but the power and link lights still do not light up, please contact D-Link Tech Support at 1-877-453-5465 (free 24/7). Your adapter may be defective.
              Model DWL-G630 / DWL-G630_revB / DWL-G630_revC / DWL-G510 / DWL-G510_revB
              Question How do I install the DWL-G510/DWL-G630?
              Answer Note: Before you insert the DWL-G510/G630, you must first install the drivers and D-Link Wireless Utility from the installation CD that comes with the adapter.

              Step 1 Insert the installation CD that came with the DWL-G510/DWL-G630 into your CD-ROM drive. The setup program should be launched automatically.

              Step 2 Click Install Driver.



              Step 3 Please wait while the InstallShieldŪ Wizard prepares for setup.



              Step 4 When the Welcome to the InstallShieldŪ Wizard for D-Link AirPlus G Wireless LAN Adapter screen appears click Next.



              Step 5 By default setup will install to the default location: Local Disk:\Program Files\D-Link AirPlus G, where Local Disk represents the drive letter of your hard drive. To install to a different location click Browse and specify the location. Click Next.



              Step 6 Setup will now install to the location specified in Step 5.



              Step 7 When setup is complete select No, I will restart my computer manually and then click Finish.



              Step 8 Shut down your computer. Once off, insert the DWL-G510 into an available PCI slot on your computer or the DWL-G630 into an available PCMCIA slot on your laptop and then power on your computer. Once booted to Windows, the drivers will install automatically.

              Step 9 The two notifications below will popup in the system tray (the area by the clock in the lower right hand side of the screen):


              Found New Hardware - Ethernet Controller


              Found New Hardware - D-Link AirPlus G DWL-G630 Wireless Cardbus Adapter (or DWL-G510)

              Step 10 Next, the Found New Hardware Wizard window will appear. Select Install the software automatically (Recommended) using the radio buttons and then click Next.



              Step 11 The Please wait while the wizard searches... window will appear.



              Step 12 If the Device has not passes Windows™ logo testing window appears click Continue Anyway.



              Step 13 The Please wait while the wizard installs the software window will appear.



              Step 14 When the Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard window appears click Finish.



              Your adapter is now installed.


            • How do I enable WEP encryption?
            • How do I enable WPA-PSK in Windows XP?
              • Model DWL-G650_revB
              Question How do I enable WPA-PSK on my DWL-G650 (rev.B)?
              Answer This FAQ only applies to the DWL-G650 revision B with drivers 2.46 and higher. You do not need to download the WPA Supplicant software.

              It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless router or access point before your wireless network adapters.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Make sure you have the latest drivers for your DWL-G650. You can download the drivers at support.dlink.com/downloads.

              Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP

              Step 1 Open the D-Link Wireless utility by double-clicking on the bar graph icon in your system tray (lower-right corner of screen). Select Site Survey. Highlight your SSID in the Available Networks and click Connect.



              Step 2 Check the box next to WPA-PSK and click Config.



              Step 3 Type in your WPA Passphrase and click OK. The passphrase must be exactly the same as you entered it on your wireless router or access point.




            • What is WPA?
            • What Access Points/Routers support WPA?
              • Model DWL-G650_revB
              Question Can my DWL-G650 (revB) be used with LEAP?
              Answer The D-Link DWL-G650 revision B does not support LEAP, as it is a Cisco Proprietary security method. Downloading a third party application such as Meetinghouseīs AEGIS Client will allow the DWL-G650 revision B to authenticate with LEAP.

              Please visit http://www.mtghouse.com/products/aegisclient/index.shtml for more information on Meetinghouse’s AEGIS Client.

              Applications such as Meetinghouseīs AEGIS Client are 3rd party applications and are not supported by D-Link.
              Model DWL-G650_revC / DWL-G520_revB / DWL-G510_revB / DWL-G630_revD / DWL-G680 / DWL-G550 / WDA-1320 / WDA-2320 / DWA-520 / DWA-620 / WNA-1330 / WNA-2330 / DWL-AG530 / DWL-AG530 / DWL-AG660 / DWL-AG660
              Question Which network adapters have Windows Vista compatible drivers?
              Answer The following products have Beta Windows Vista compatible drivers:

              Click on the product name to download the driver.

              DWL-G122 Wireless USB Adapter
              DWL-G650 (rev.C) Wireless Cardbus Adapter
              DWL-G520 (rev.B) Wireless PCI Adapter
              DWL-G510 (rev.B) Wireless PCI Adapter
              DWL-G630 (rev.D) Wireless Cardbus Adapter
              DWL-G680 Wireless Cardbus Adapter
              DWL-G550 Wireless PCI Adapter
              WDA-1320 Desktop Adapter
              WDA-2320 Desktop Adapter
              DWA-520 Desktop Adapter
              DWA-620 Notebook Adapter
              WNA-1330 Notebook Adapter
              WNA-2330 Notebook Adapter
              DWL-AG530 Wireless PCI Adapter
              DWL-AG660 Wireless Cardbus Adapter
              DWA-556 Xtreme N PCI Express Desktop Adapter
              DWA-643 Xtreme N Notebook ExpressCard
              DWA-552 Xtreme N Desktop Adapter
              DWA-652 Xtreme N Notebook Adapter
              DWA-645 RangeBooster N 650 Notebook Adapter
              DWA-542 RangeBooster N Desktop Adapter
              DWA-642 RangeBooster N Notebook Adapter

              The following products currently do not have Beta Windows Vista compatible drivers:

              DWA-142 RangeBooster N USB Adapter
              DWL-G520M Wireless 108G MIMO Desktop Adapter
              DWL-G650M Super G with MIMO Wireless Notebook Adapter
              DWL-G132 AirPlus Xtreme G Wireless 108G USB Adapter
              WUA-2340 RangeBooster G USB Adapter
              Model DWL-G650M
              Question How do I connect the DWL-G650M to a wireless network?
              Answer Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the lower right-hand corner of the screen).

              D-Link Icon

              Note: Click here if you are unable to open the D-Link Wireless Utility.

              Step 2 Click SiteSurvey on the left side.

              Site Survey

              You should see your wireless network if it is in range of the adapter in the list of Available Networks. Select the network and click Connect.

              You will be connected to your Wireless Network automatically.

              Connected
              Model DWL-G650M
              Question How do I install the DWL-G650M in Windows XP?
              Answer Step 1 Insert the CD that came with the DWL-G650M into the CD-ROM drive. The Auto-Run splash screen will appear.

              Step 2 Click Install Drivers.

              Drivers

              Step 3 Click Next to continue.



              Step 4 Click Next to continue or Browse to change the installation directory.

              Destination Folder

              Note: It is recommended to use the default installation directory.

              Step 5 Select the Program Folder to which the Installation Wizard will add the program icons in the Start Menu. Click Next to continue.

              Program Icons

              Note: It is recommended to use the default directory.

              Step 6 Please wait while the Installation Wizard installs the files.

              Installing...

              Step 7 Click Finish to complete setup.

              Complete

              Step 8 Select No, I will restart my computer later and click Finish.

              Restart?

              Step 9 Click Start > Turn Off Computer.

              Shutdown

              Step 10 Click Turn Off.



              Step 11 Once the computer is turned off, firmly insert the DWL-G650M into an available PCMCIA slot.

              Step 12 Turn on the computer.

              Step 13 Once the computer is fully booted up the Found New Hardware Wizard will appear.

              Step 14 Select Install software automatically (Recommended) and click Next.

              Found New Hardware Wizard

              Step 15 The Found New Hardware Wizard will search for drivers for the DWL-G650M.

              Searching

              Step 16 Click Next to continue.

              Step 17 The Found New Hardware Wizard may find multiple instances of the driver files. Select the newer version of the Driver File and click Next to continue.

              Driver Selection

              Step 18 Since the drivers are not Digitally Signed, a prompt confirming the installation of the Drivers will appear. Click Continue Anyway.

              Prompt

              Step 19 The Found New Hardware Wizard will install the necessary files for the device.

              Installing Driver Files

              Step 20 The Found New Hardware Wizard will finish its installation tasks.

              Step 21 Click Finish to complete the hardware installation.

              Finished


              Related Links:

            • How do I connect the DWL-G650M to a wireless network?
              • Model DWL-G650M
              Question How do I connect to a wireless network using PEAP with MSChapv2 (WPA Enterprise)?
              Answer Step 1 Right-click the Wireless Connection Icon in the system tray (the double monitor icon in the lower right-hand corner of the screen) and click View Available Wireless Networks.

              Connection Icon

              Step 2 Click Advanced.

              Available Networks

              Step 3 In the Available networks section select your wireless network and click Configure.

              Configure

              Step 4 Next to Network Authentication select WPA (selected by default) and the appropriate Data Encryption.

              Security Settings

              Step 5 Click the Authentication tab.

              Step 6 Select Protected EAP (PEAP) next to EAP Type.

              Authentication

              Note: It is recommended leaving Authenticate as computer when computer information is available unchecked.

              Step 7 Click Properties below EAP Type.

              Step 8 Uncheck Validate server certificate and select Secured password (EAP MSCHAP-V2) below Select Authentication Method.

              Method

              Step 9 Click Configure next to Select Authentication Method.

              Step 10 In the EAP MSCHAPv2 Properties box uncheck Automatically use my Windows logon name and password (and domain if any). Click OK.

              MSCHAPv2 Properties

              Step 11 Windows will connect to the network automatically when the settings are saved. You will be prompted for credentials for the network. Click on the Wireless Network Connection... box to continue.

              Credentials

              Step 12 Enter the Username and Password (and domain if necessary). Click OK.

              Username and Password
              Model DWL-G650M
              Question How do I configure WPA-PSK on my DWL-G650M?
              Answer You must configure WPA-PSK on your wireless router or access point first before configuring your adapter.

              Click here for D-Link access point & wireless router configuration FAQs

              Step 1 Double-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the lower right-hand corner of the screen).

              D-Link Icon

              Click here if you cannot open the D-Link Wireless Utility.

              Step 2 Click SiteSurvey.

              Step 3 Select the wireless network and click Connect.

              Site Survey

              Step 4 Below Security select WPA-PSK and click Config.

              Connect

              Step 5 Enter the pre-shared key. The key is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. The password can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless devices.

              Security

              Step 6 Click OK and then click OK again.

              Step 7 The profile will be added, and you should connect automatically to the wireless network.

              Connected
              Model DWL-G650M
              Question How do I connect to a Wireless Network using WEP?
              Answer Step 1 Right-click the bar graph icon in the system tray (the lower right-hand corner of the screen).

              D-Link Icon

              Step 2 Click Site Survey, select your wireless network and then click Connect.

              Site Survey

              Step 3 Below Security select WEP and click Config. Enter the appropriate WEP key.

              Connect

              Step 4 Click OK and then click OK again.

              Security

              Step 5 The profile will be added, and should connect automatically to the wireless network.

              Connected
              Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I change the channel on my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer In most cases, you only need to change the channel on the access point. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the channel of the access point.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the DWL-G700AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left side.



              Step 4 Next to Channel, select the channel you would like to use from the drop-down menu. It is recommended to use Channel 1, 6, or 11. If you have 2.4GHz phones or experience interference, simply changing the channel may solve connection dropping issues.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I change the SSID on my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G700AP in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab at the top of the page then click Wireless to the left.

              Step 3 Next to SSID, type in a new SSID.

              The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I disable SSID broadcast on my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of the DWL-G700AP in the Address bar and press Enter. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50.

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Advanced tab and then click Performance on the left side.

              Step 4 Next to SSID Broadcast, select the Disabled radio button.



              Step 5 Click Apply to save your settings.
              Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I change the IP address on my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer To change or obtain an IP address automatically for the DWL-G700AP follow the steps below:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank). Click OK.

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab then click LAN to the left.



              Step 3 Select the Dynamic IP Address radio button next to LAN IP if you want the access point to receive an IP address automatically from a DHCP server or router, otherwise change the IP address manually (static).

              We strongly suggest using a static IP address. The IP address is not used for networking, only for configuration. Make sure the IP address is within the same IP range as your network.

              Step 4 Click the Apply button and click Continue to restart the access point.
              Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I change the data rate on my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer It is recommended to configure data rate on your wireless access point before your wireless adapters. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the data rate of the access point.

              Note: It is strongly recommended to keep this setting at Auto.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-G700AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (default is 192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Performance on the left side.



              Step 4 Select a fixed speed from the drop-down list next to TX Rates.

              Step 5 Click Apply then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I specify the (802.11g only) mode on my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Performance on the left side.



              Step 3 Next to Mode Setting select the G Mode radio button to only allow 802.11g wireless devices to connect to the access point, or select the Mix Mode radio button to allow both 802.11b and 802.11g wireless devices to connect to the access point.

              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer Please read before upgrading:

            • Upgrading firmware will reset the settings to default which means you will lose all your settings.
            • Do NOT upgrade firmware over a wireless connection. You may damage the access point.

              Step 1 Download the firmware and save the file to your computer. You may want to save the file to your desktop. Do not try to run or launch the file - it will not work.

              Click here to download the latest firmware

              Step 2 If you are connecting the access point directly to your PC you will need a cross-over cable. Connecting to a switch or router you will use a straight through cable.

              WARNING: DO NOT upgrade the firmware with a wireless connection. You may damage the access point.

              Step 3 Open your web browser, enter the IP address of your access point (default is 192.168.0.50) and press Enter.

              Step 4 Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default). Click OK to enter the web-based configuration for the device.

              Step 5 Click on the Tools tab then click Firmware Upgrade to the left. Under Firmware Upgrade click on the Browse button and browse to the .bin or .tfp file you downloaded in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click Open. Click Apply. It will take a few seconds for the upgrade to complete. Click on the Continue button.



              Step 6 After the access point reboots, close your web browser and reopen it. Enter the IP address of the access point (default is 192.168.0.50) to reconnect with the web-based configuration. Enter username admin and again leave the password blank. Click OK. The firmware upgrade is now complete.

              Step 7 If you have problems with the web-based configuration at this point, unplug the power to the access point, wait 10 seconds, and plug it back in. Repeat Step 6. If this did not help, perform a hard reset on the access point. To perform a hard reset, use a paperclip and hold down the reset button on the back of the unit for 10 seconds while the device is powered on. Release it and the access point will reboot, the lights will blink, and then stabilize. Repeat Step 6              .

              Step 8 You can now reconfigure the access point.
              • Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I enable MAC Filter on my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank). Click OK

              Step 2 Click the Advanced tab and then click Filters on the left side.

              Step 3 In the section MAC Filters, select the radio button for the mode you would like to use.
              • Disabled - Disables this feature and will allow all wireless clients to connect.
              • Allow - Blocks all clients except for what you enter in the list.
              • Deny - Allows all clients except for what you enter in the list.




              Step 4 Enter the Ethernet MAC address that you wish to Allow or Deny.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I configure DHCP server on my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser. Enter the IP address of the DWL-G700AP (default is 192.168.0.50) and press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Home tab and then click on DHCP to the left.



              Note: If you are connecting to a router or a DHCP server, the DHCP server on the DWL-G700AP should be disabled.

              Step 4 By default, DHCP Server is set to Disabled. To enable it, click the Enabled radio button. To disable it, click the Disabled radio button.

              Step 5 To change the Starting and Ending IP Address, enter the new values in the corresponding text boxes. To change Lease Time select a value from the drop down box.

              Note: The value for Starting IP Address must be less than the value for Ending IP Address.

              Step 6 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I view the activity log on my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.50. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click the Status tab at the top and then click Log to the left.



              This displays the activity log for your access point. The buttons located above the log can be used to perform certain actions.

              • First Page: View the first page of the log.
              • Last Page: View the last page of the log.
              • Previous: View the previous page of the log.
              • Next: View the next page of the log.
              • Clear: Clear (delete) the entire log.
              • Log Settings: Configure advanced options for the activity log.
              Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I enable WEP encryption on my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the access point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left side.

              Step 4 Click the Enabled radio button next to WEP.

              Step 5 Next to WEP Encryption, select the level of encryption (64 or 128 bit).

              Step 6 Next to Key Type, select HEX or ASCII. You will need to use the same key on all your wireless devices.

            • HEX - use 0-9 and A-F only.
            • ASCII - All numbers and letters.

              Step 7 You can enter up to 4 different keys. Select the key you want to use by clicking on the corresponding radio button.

              Step 8 Enter your encryption key. You make this up yourself. If you selected HEX, then enter a key made up of a combination of numbers (0-9) and letters (A-F). For example - A4572BCC19 (HEX).



              Step 9 Click Apply to save settings.

              Note: If you are configuring your access point from a wireless adapter, you will lose connectivity as soon as you click Apply. You must enable WEP on your adapter and enter the same exact key as you entered on your access point.
              • Model DWL-G700AP
              Question Where can I find the MAC address of my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer The MAC address of your access point is listed on the label located on the bottom of the access point. It is listed below the serial number.

              The MAC address can be obtained by logging into the web-based configuration of the access point. Follow the steps below for this method.

              Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by typing in the IP address of the access point (default is 192.168.0.50) in your web browser. The default username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK

              Step 2 Click on the Status tab at the top and then click Device Info to the left. The MAC Address is listed under Ethernet.

              Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I change the preamble on my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer It is recommended to configure the preamble on your wireless access point before your wireless adapters. You may need to set the preamble on all wireless clients.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-G700AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50 by default).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Select the Advanced tab and click Performance on the left hand side of the screen.



              Step 4 Select either the Short Preamble or Long Preamble radio button next to Preamble Type.

              Note: The Preamble defines the length of the CRC block for communication between the wireless access point and the roaming wireless network adapters. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is a common technique for detecting data transmission errors.

              Note: High network traffic areas should use Short preamble.

              Step 5 Click on the Apply button and then click on the Continue button to save your settings.
              Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I enable WPA-PSK on my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer It is recommended to configure WPA-PSK on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-G700AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left hand side.



              Step 4 Next to Authentication select WPA-PSK using the radio buttons.

              Step 5 Enter a Passphrase. The passphrase or key is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. It can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless clients.

              Step 6 Click on the Apply button then click on the Continue button to save your settings.

              Make sure you enter the same exact WPA-PSK Passphrase on your wireless clients.
              Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I set up WPA (Radius) on my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer It is recommended to configure WPA on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-G700AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (192.168.0.50).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Home tab and then click Wireless on the left hand side.



              Step 4 Next to Authentication select WPA using the radio buttons.

              Step 5 Under 802.1X enter the IP Address, Port and Secret Key for RADIUS Server 1. Repeat for RADIUS Server 2 if applicable.

              Step 6 Click Apply and then Continue to save the settings.
              Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I change the password on my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer You can change the password within the web-based configuration utility that is built-in to the DWL-G700AP.

              Step 1 Open your web browser. Enter the IP address of the DWL-G700AP (default is 192.168.0.50) and press Enter.

              Step 2 Enter the username admin (by default) and leave the password blank (nothing) and click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Tools tab at the top and then click Admin to the left.



              Step 4 Enter your new password and click Apply. After the DWL-G700AP restarts, click Continue.

              Note: You cannot change the username. The username will always be admin.
              Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I reset my DWL-G700AP back to factory default settings?
              Answer To perform a reset, please follow steps below:

              Step 1 With the unit on, place a paper clip into the hole on the back on the unit labeled Reset.

              Step 2 Hold paper clip down for 10 seconds and release.

              Note: Do not repower unit during this procedure.

              Step 3 The unit will reboot on its own. Once the WLAN light stops blinking, the unit is reset.

              Note: Resetting the router does not reset the firmware to an earlier version. It will change all settings back to factory defaults.
              Model DWL-G700AP
              Question How do I save/load the configuration file on my DWL-G700AP?
              Answer Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by typing in the IP address of the access point (default is 192.168.0.50) in your web browser. The default username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 2 Click on the Tools tab at the top of the page, and then click System to the left.



              Step 3 To save the configuration settings of your access point, click the Save button next to Save Settings to Local Hard Drive.

              To load a previously saved configuration file, click the Browse button, which is next to Load Settings From Local Hard Drive. Once you have located the file (config.bin) on your hard drive, click the Load button.

              Note: If the firmware on your access point has been upgraded/downgraded, do not load configuration files that were saved using a different version of firmware then you currently have installed. This will not work and could damage the unit.
              Model DWL-G710
              Question How do I reset my DWL-G710 to factory defaults?
              Answer Step 1 Locate the hole on the back of the DWL-G710 below the word RESET.



              Step 2 Using a paper clip, hold and press the Reset button for about 5 seconds and then release.

              Step 3 After the DWL-G710 reboots (this may take a few minutes) it will be reset to the factory default settings.
              Model DWL-G710
              Question What devices can the DWL-G710 repeat?
              Answer Below are devices that D-Link has successfully tested connecting to the DWL-G710. If your device is not on the list, it doesnīt mean that it wonīt work.

              Routers Firmware
              DI-514 (revB) 1.03
              DI-524 (revA) 1.05
              DI-524 (revC) 3.00
              DI-624 (revC3) 2.50
              DI-774 (revA1) 1.25
              DI-784 (revA1) 2.36
              DI-824VUP(revA1) 1.03
              CISCO Aironet 340 11mbps AP N/A
              Netgear Wireless Router MR814 4.09
              Access Points Firmware
              DWL-800AP+ (revA1) 2.00
              DWL-900AP+ (revC2) 3.07
              DWL-1000AP+ (revA1) 1.22
              DWL-2000AP (revA1) 1.58
              DWL-2000AP (revB1) 2.06
              DWL-2000AP (revC1) 3.13
              DWL-2100AP (revA2) 2.00
              DWL-2200AP (revA1) 1.00
              DWL-2700AP (revA1) 1.02
              DWL-7000AP (revA2) 1.06
              DWL-7100AP (revA1) 2.00
              DWL-7200AP (revA1) 1.00
              DWL-7700AP (revA1) 1.00
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I configure Filters on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer There below 4 filters can be configured on the DWL-G730AP in Router Mode:
              • IP Filters
              • URL Blocking
              • MAC Filters
              • Domain Blocking


                IP Filters

                IP filters block access to ports or a series of ports from an IP address on the local network (LAN). For example, if you did not want the computer with IP address 192.168.0.100 to access the Internet, then you would block that IP address from accessing port 80.

                Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

                Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

                Step 3 Click the Advanced tab then click Filters on the left.

                Step 4 Select the IP Filters radio button.



                Step 5 Select the Enabled radio button.

                Step 6 In the first field next to IP enter the IP address you want to filter access from. If you want this to apply to a range of IP addresses, then enter the ending IP address in the second field.

                Step 7 In the first field next to Port enter the port you want to block. To block a range of ports, enter the ending port number in the second field, then select the protocol type (TCP, UDP, or Both) from the drop-down list next to Protocol Type.

                Step 8 Next to schedule select the Always radio button to always deploy this filter, or select the From radio button to set a schedule using the time and day drop-down boxes below.

                Step 9 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the settings.


                URL Blocking

                URL Blocking is used to block web sites that contain certain keywords.

                Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

                Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

                Step 3 Click the Advanced tab then click Filters on the left.

                Step 4 Select the URL Blocking radio button.



                Step 5 Select the Enabled radio button.

                Step 6 In the text box below enter a keyword to block. To delete a keyword, select it from the box below the text box, and click the Delete button.

                Step 7 Click Apply to add the keyword to the list.


                MAC Filters

                MAC Filters allow you to allow or deny access to the LAN by specifying MAC addresses.

                Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

                Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

                Step 3 Click the Advanced tab then click Filters on the left.

                Step 4 Select MAC Filters using the radio buttons.



                Step 5 In the section MAC Filters, select the radio button for the mode you would like to use.

                • Disabled - Disables this feature and will allow all wireless clients to connect.
                • Allow - Blocks all clients except for what you enter in the list.
                • Deny - Allows all clients except for what you enter in the list.

                Step 6 Enter the name used to identify the entry next to Name.

                Step 7 Enter the Ethernet MAC address that you wish to Allow or Deny next to MAC Address.

                Step 8 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the settings.


                Domain Blocking

                Domain blocking lets you allow or deny access to certain websites.

                Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

                Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

                Step 3 Click the Advanced tab then click Filters on the left.

                Step 4 Select Domain Blocking using the radio buttons.



                Step 5 In the section Domain Blocking, select the radio button for the mode that you would like to use.

                • Disabled - Disable this feature and will allow all clients on the LAN to access any website.
                • Allow - Permits access to all websites except domains specified in the Blocked Domains section.
                • Deny - Allows access only to domain specified in the Permitted Domains section.

                Step 6 In the Permitted Domains section, enter a domain to permit.
                In the Blocked Domains section, enter a domain to block.

                - or

                To delete a keyword, select it and click the Delete button.

                Step 7 Click Apply to add the domain the list.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I save/load the configuration file on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click System.

              Step 4 The current system settings can be saved as a file onto the local hard drive. Click Save below Save Settings to Local Hard Drive and navigate to the location on your hard drive that you want to save the settings to.



              The saved configuration file can be loaded to the DWL-G730AP. To restore a configuration file, click Browse and navigate to the location where you saved the configuration file (config.bin). Left-click the file once to select it and then click Open. Click Load to load the configuration file.

              NOTE: DO NOT LOAD A CONFIGURATION FILE THAT WAS SAVED WITH A VERSION OF FIRMWARE OTHER THAN WHAT IS CURRENLTY INSTALLED ON YOUR DWL-G730AP. DOING SO COULD DAMAGE THE UNIT AND VOID THE WARRANTY.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I configure the time (NTP) on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer The time can be configured on the DWL-G730AP in Router Mode only.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Time.



              Step 4 Configure the following:

              • Time Zone - Select your time zone from the drop-down list.
              • Default NTP Server (Network Time Protocol) - Enter the domain name or IP address of the NTP time server that you would like to sync the time on the DWL-G730AP with. This field is optional.
              • Set the Time - To manually input the time enter values in these fields for the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second. Click Set Time.
              • Daylight Saving - To select daylight savings time manually, select Enabled or Disable and enter a start & end date.
              Step 5 Click Apply to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I configure DMZ on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer DMZ can be configured on the DWL-G730AP in Router Mode only.

              If you have a client PC that cannot run Internet applications properly from behind the DWL-G730AP, then you can set the client up for unrestricted Internet access. Allowing a computer to be exposed to the Internet can be useful for gaming and server purposes.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click DMZ.



              Step 4 Select Enabled to enable DMZ or Disabled to disable it.

              Step 5 Next to IP Address enter the IP address of the computer that you want to be in DMZ.

              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the settings.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer Please read before upgrading:

            • Upgrading firmware will reset the settings to default which means you will lose all your settings.
            • Do NOT upgrade firmware over a wireless connection. You may damage the DWL-G730AP.

              Step 1 Download the firmware and save the file to your computer. You may want to save the file to your desktop. Do not try to run or launch the file - it will not work.

              Click here to download firmware

              WARNING: DO NOT upgrade the firmware with a wireless connection. You may damage the DWL-G730AP. Also, doing so could void the warranty.

              Step 2 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 3 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 4 Click the Tools tab and then click Firmware to the left.



              Step 5 Below Firmware Upgrade click Browse... and navigate to the .bin or .tfp file you downloaded in Step 1. Left-click the file once to select it and then click Open.



              Step 6 Click Apply. It will take a few seconds for the upgrade to complete. Click Continue.

              Step 7 After the DWL-G730AP reboots, close your web browser and re-open it. Enter the IP address of the DWL-G730AP (default is 192.168.0.30) to reconnect to the web-based configuration. Enter username admin and again leave the password blank. Click OK.



              Step 8 Click on the Tools tab then click Firmware to the left. If next to Current Firmware Version the new version is displayed then the firmware upgrade is now complete. If the firmware version has not changed then start over again from Step 2.

              Step 9 If you have problems with the web-based configuration at this point, unplug the power to the DWL-G730AP, wait 10 seconds, and plug it back in. Repeat Step 7. If this did not help, perform a hard reset on the DWL-G730AP. To perform a hard reset, use a paperclip and hold down the reset button on the back of the unit for 10 seconds while the device is powered on. Release it and the DWL-G730AP will reboot, the lights will blink, and then stabilize. Repeat Step 7.

              Step 10 You can now reconfigure the DWL-G730AP.
              • Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I perform a factory reset on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer
              Reset Button

              If you have lost your password or are unable to login to the DWL-G730AP then it can be factory reset by doing the following:

              Step 1 With the unit on, place a paper clip into the hole on the back on the unit labeled Reset.

              Step 2 Hold paper clip down for 10 seconds and release.

              NOTE: DO NOT REPOWER UNIT DURING THIS PROCEDURE.



              Step 3 The unit will reboot on its own. Once the WLAN light stops blinking, the unit is reset.


              Web Configuration

              If you are able to login to the DWL-G730AP then you can perform a factory reset via the web-based configuration by doing the following:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click System to the left.

              Step 4 Below Restore to Factory Default Settings click Restore.



              Step 5 In the Restore to factory settings warning dialog box, click OK.



              NOTE: DO NOT REPOWER UNIT DURING THIS PROCEDURE.

              Step 6 The unit will reboot on its own. Once the WLAN light stops blinking, the unit is reset.

              Note: Resetting the DWL-G730AP does not reset the firmware to an earlier version. It will change all settings back to factory defaults.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I view traffic statistics on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Status tab and then click Stats to the left.



              The DWL-G730AP keeps statistics of traffic that passes through it. You are able to view the amount of packets that pass through the Ethernet and wireless portions of the network.

              In Router Mode you will be able to view traffic statistics for the WAN interface. Also in Router Mode click Refresh to view the latest statistics and Reset to reset the statistics.

              Note: The traffic counter will reset if the device is rebooted.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I configure Virtual Server on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer Virtual Server can be configured on the DWL-G730AP only in Router Mode.

              The DWL-G730AP can be configured as a virtual server so that remote users accessing Web or FTP services via the public IP address can be automatically redirected to local servers in the LAN (Local Area Network).

              Each virtual service that is created will be listed at the bottom of the screen in the Virtual Servers List. There are pre-defined virtual services already in the table. You may use them by enabling them and assigning the server IP to use that particular virtual service.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Virtual Server to the left.



              Step 4 Configure the following settings:

              • Using the radio buttons select Enabled to enable the Virtual Server entry or select Disabled to disable the entry.
              • Name - Enter a name to identify the Virtual Server entry.
              • Private IP - The LAN IP address of the computer that is running the service.
              • Protocol Type - Select the protocol used for the service from the drop-down list.
              • Private Port - The port number of the service running on the LAN.
              • Public Port - The port number of the service that will be accessed from the WAN side.
              • Schedule - The schedule of time when the virtual service will be enabled. Select Always using the radio buttons to allow the particular service to always be enabled. Select From using the radio buttons to select the time frame for the service to be enabled. If the system time is outside of the scheduled time, the service will be disabled.
              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I configure Applications on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer Applications can be configured on the DWL-G730AP in Router Mode.

              Some applications such as Internet gaming, video conferencing, Internet telephony and others require multiple port connections. These applications can cause difficulties working through NAT (Network Address Translation).

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Applications to the left.



              Step 4 Configure the following:

              • Name - Enter a name to identify the Special Application entry.
              • Trigger Port - This is the port used to trigger the application. It can either be a single port or a range of ports.
              • Trigger Type - Select the protocol used to trigger the special application from the drop-down list.
              • Public Port - This is the port number on the WAN side that will be used to access the application. You may define a single port or a range of ports.
              • Public Type - Select the protocol used for the special application from the drop-down list.
              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.

              Note: Only one PC can use each Application at a time.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I enable Remote Administration on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer Remote Administration can be configured on the DWL-G730AP in Router Mode.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Admin to the left.



              Step 4 Under Remote Administration select Enabled using the radio buttons to enable it or select Disabled to disable it.

              Step 5 Next to IP Address enter the WAN (public) IP address of the computer that you want to allow access or enter * to allow access from any WAN (public) IP address.

              Step 6 Select the port number from the drop-down menu you want to use.

              If the WAN (public) IP address of your DWL-G730AP is 10.0.0.1 and Remote Administration is enabled on port 8080 then you would type http://10.0.0.1:8080 in the address bar of your web browser to access the DWL-G730AP remotely.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I configure DHCP server on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer The DWL-G730AP has a built-in DHCP server. The DHCP server will automatically assign an IP address to the computers on the LAN/private network. Be sure to set your computers to be DHCP clients by setting their TCP/IP settings to Obtain An IP Address Automatically. Your computer will then pull an IP address automatically from the DWL-G730AP.

              DHCP server can be configured on the DWL-G730AP in the following modes:


              Access Point Mode

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click DHCP.



              Step 4 By default DHCP server is disabled. Select Enabled using the radio buttons to use the DWL-G730AP as a DHCP server. If enabled, enter the starting and ending IP address and select a lease time using the drop-down list next to Lease Time.



              Starting IP Address - The first IP address in the range that can be assigned to a device on the network.

              Ending IP Address - The last IP address in the range that can be assigned to a device on the network.

              Lease Time - The length of time that the DHCP function of the DWL-G730AP will automatically regenerate the IP addresses to the devices on the network.



              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.

              Note: Clients on the network that are receiving dynamic IP addresses will be listed in the DHCP Client Table.


              Router Mode


              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Home tab and then click DHCP.



              Step 4 Configure the following settings:

              • DHCP Server - Using the radio buttons select Enabled to use the built-in DHCP server or Disabled to use another DHCP server on the network.
              • Starting IP Address - The starting IP address for the DHCP serverīs assignment.
              • Ending IP Address - The ending IP address for the DHCP serverīs IP assignment.
              • Lease Time - The length of time for the IP lease.
              Static DHCP

              Static DHCP is used to allow the DHCP server to assign static IP addresses via specific MAC addresses.

              • Static DHCP - Using the radio buttons select Enabled to enable Static DHCP or Disabled to disable it.
              • Name - Enter a name to identify the device.
              • IP - Enter the last digits of the IP address that you want to statically assign.
              • MAC Address - Enter the MAC address of the computer that will be assigned the static IP address.
              • DHCP Client - Use the drop down list to view clients currently connected to the DWL-G730AP. To copy the MAC address into the MAC address section above, select the device from the drop-down list and then click Clone.
              Step 5 Click Apply to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I configure the wireless settings on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer You can configure wireless settings on the DWL-G730AP in the following modes:


              Access Point/Router Mode

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Home tab and then click Wireless to the left.



              Step 4 On the Wireless page you can configure the following settings:

              SSID (Service Set Identifier) - default is the default SSID. The SSID is a unique name that identifies a network. All devices on a network must share the same SSID in order to communicate on the network. It is recommended to change your SSID to something other than default.

              Channel - Channel 6 is the default channel. To change the channel, select a value (1-11) using the drop-down list next to Channel.

              In the 802.11g (2.4 GHz) standard there are 11 channels (US) to choose from, all but three of those channels are overlapping channels. Channels 1, 6, and 11 are the only non-overlapping channels. The channels can be changed to avoid interference from other wireless devices that run on the 2.4 GHz frequency range (I.E. 2.4 GHz cordless phones and X-10).

              Note: All D-Link 802.11g Wireless devices default to channel 6.

              Authentication:
              • Open System - Communicate across the network.
              • Shared Key - Limit communication only to those devices that share the same WEP settings.
              • WPA - Wi-Fi Protected Access in conjunction with a RADIUS server in your network. This option is not available in Router Mode.
              • WPA-PSK - Wi-Fi Protected Access without a RADIUS server.
              WEP - Select Enabled using the radio buttons to enable WEP encryption or Disabled using the radio buttons to disable WEP encryption.

              WEP Encryption Select 64Bit or 128Bit using the drop-down list.

              Key Type Select Hexadecimal or ASCII using the drop-down list.

              • Hexadecimal digits consist of the numbers 0-9 and the letters A-F. Best used if using with other brands of wireless products.
              • ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) is code that represents English letters as numbers from 0-127. You can use any character including (!@#$%*).
              Keys 1-4 - Input up to four encryption keys. Select one of these to be the active key using the radio buttons.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.


              Client Mode

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click Wireless to the left.



              Step 4 On the Wireless page you can configure the following settings:

              SSID (Service Set Identifier) - Enter the SSID of the wireless network or click Site Survey to view a list of available wireless networks.

              Channel - Channel 6 is the default channel. The channel must be the same as on the wireless network.

              Note: All D-Link 802.11g Wireless devices default to channel 6. The wireless adapters will automatically scan and match the wireless setting.

              Wireless Mode - Select Infrastructure using the radio buttons to connect to a wireless access point or router. Select Ad-hoc using the radio buttons to connect to a peer-to-peer network.

              Authentication - If the wireless network requires authentication select the correct method from the list below:
              • Open System - Communicate across the network.
              • Shared Key - Limit communication only to those devices that share the same WEP settings.
              • WPA-PSK - Wi-Fi Protected Access without a RADIUS server.
              WEP - If the wireless network requires encryption then click Enabled using the radio buttons. To disable encryption select Disabled using the radio buttons.

              WEP Encryption - If the wireless network requires encryption select the level of encryption from either 64Bit or 128Bit using the drop-down list.

              Key Type - Select Hexadecimal or ASCII using the drop-down list if the wireless network requires encryption.

              • Hexadecimal digits consist of the numbers 0-9 and the letters A-F. Best used if using with other brands of wireless products.
              • ASCII (American Standard Code for Information Interchange) is code that represents English letters as numbers from 0-127. You can use any character including (!@#$%*).
              Keys 1-4 - If the wireless network requires encryption enter the key in the correct text box and select the key as active using the radio buttons.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I configure WPA (RADIUS) on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer WPA can only be configured on the DWL-G730AP in AP (Access Point) mode.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click Wireless to the left.



              Step 4 Next to Authentication select WPA using the radio buttons.

              Step 5 Next to Radius Server 1 IP enter the IP address of the RADIUS server. Next to Port enter the port number of the RADIUS server. Next to Shared Secret enter the shared secret key.

              Repeat for Radius Server 2 if applicable.



              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I enable WPA-PSK on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click Wireless to the left.



              Step 4 Next to Authentication select WPA-PSK using the radio buttons.

              Step 5 Enter a key (passphrase). The key is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. The password can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless clients.



              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I configure the LAN settings on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer The LAN settings on the DWL-G730AP can be configured in the following modes:


              Access Point/Client Mode

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click LAN to the left.



              Step 4 Select Dynamic IP Address if you want the DWL-G730AP to receive an IP address automatically from a DHCP server or router.

              Select Static IP Address if your want to statically assign an IP address to the DWL-G730AP. Also, enter the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, and DNS server IP addresses.

              Note: We strongly suggest using a static IP address. The IP address is not used for networking, only for configuration.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.


              Router Mode

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click LAN to the left.



              Step 4 Configure the following settings:

              • IP Address - The IP address of the LAN interface. The default IP address is 192.168.0.30.
              • Subnet Mask - The subnet mask of the LAN interface. The default subnet mask is 255.255.255.0.
              • Local Domain - This field is optional. Enter in the local domain name.
              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I configure the performance settings on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Performance to the left.



              Step 4 Configure the following settings:

              Beacon Interval - Beacons are packets sent by an access point to synchronize a wireless network. 100 is the recommended value.

              RTS Threshold - This value should be left at the default value of 2432. If you encounter inconsistent data flow, only minor modifications to the value range between 256-2432 are recommended.

              Fragmentation - This value should be left at the default value of 2346. If you are experiencing high packet error rate, slightly increase your fragmentation threshold within the value range of 256-2346. Setting the fragmentation threshold too low may result in poor performance.

              DTM Interval (Delivery Traffic Indication Message) - Enter a value between 1-255 (default is 3). A DTIM is a countdown informing clients of the next window for listening to broadcast and multicast messages.

              TX Rates - Select the transmission rate for the network using the drop-down list. By default it is set to Auto. If clients are experiencing connection problems, lock down the TX rate.



              Mode Setting - Wireless networks will only transmit data at the speed of the slowest device on the network. To ensure max speed, select G Mode. Only 802.11G devices will be allowed to connect to the network. To allow both 802.11b and 802.11g devices to connect to the network, select Mix Mode using the radio buttons.

              Preamble Type - By default the preamble is set to Short Preamble. The preamble defines the length of the CRC block (Cyclic Redundancy Check) used in communication between the access point and the wireless network adapters. CRC is a common technique for detecting data transmission errors. High traffic networks should use the shorter preamble type. Otherwise, it is recommended to change the preamble to Long Preamble.

              Authentication (only available in Router Mode):

              • Open System - Allow all computers to communicate across the network.
              • Shared Key - Limit communication only to those devices that share the same WEP settings.
              • WPA-PSK - Wi-Fi protected access without a RADIUS server.
              SSID Broadcast (Service Set Identifier) - SSID is the name that identifies a wireless network. All devices on a network must use the same SSID to establish communication. If SSID broadcast is disabled the SSID will not be visible. The only way to connect is to manually enter the SSID on the device. When enabled devices can scan for the SSID and connect.

              Antenna Transmit Power - Limiting antenna power can be useful for security purposes.



              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I enable MAC Filtering on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer MAC filters can be configured on the DWL-G730AP in Access Point mode and Router mode.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Filters to the left.



              Step 4 Select the mode that you would like to use:

              • Disabled - Disables this feature and will allow all wireless clients to connect.
              • Allow - Blocks all clients except for what you enter in the list.
              • Deny - Allows all clients except for what you enter in the list.
              Step 5 Enter the Ethernet MAC address that you wish to Allow or Deny.

              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.

              Note: Make sure you enter the MAC address of the computer you are using to configure the DWL-G730AP first. If you enter a different MAC address first, you will lose connectivity once enabled.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I change the Admin and User password on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer
              Administrator Password

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Admin to the left.



              Step 4 Under the Administrator section enter a new password in the text field next to New Password.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new password.

              Note: You will be prompted to login after saving the new password.

              User Password

              The user login is only available in Router Mode.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Admin to the left.



              Step 4 Under the User section enter a new password in the text field next to New Password.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new password.

              Note: You will be prompted to login after saving the new password.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I configure the WAN settings on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer The WAN settings can be configured on the DWL-G730AP in Router Mode.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab and then click WAN to the left.

              Step 4 Choose one of the following connection types using the radio buttons:

              • Dynamic IP Address - Obtain an IP address automatically.



              • Static IP Address - If your ISP provided you with a static IP address choose this option.



              • PPPoE (Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet) - Most commonly used by DSL providers.



              • Other > PPTP - European use only.
              • Other > BigPond Cable - Australia use only.

              Host Name - The Host Name is optional but may be required by some ISPs. The default host name is the device name of the router and may be changed.

              MAC Address - The default MAC address is set to the WANīs physical interface MAC address on the router. It is not recommended that you change the default MAC address unless required by your ISP.

              Clone MAC Address - The default MAC address is set to the WANīs physical interface MAC address on the router. You can use the Clone MAC Address button to copy the MAC address of the Ethernet card on your computer and replace the WAN MAC address with the MAC address of your computer. It is not recommended that you change the default MAC address unless required by your ISP.

              Primary/Secondary DNS Address - Enter the primary DNS address. The secondary DNS address is optional.

              MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) - 1500 is the default MTU. Enter a new MTU value only if required by your ISP. Otherwise, do not change this setting.

              Step 5 Click Apply then click Continue to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I configure the Firewall on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer Firewall rules can be configured on the DWL-G730AP in Router Mode.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab and then click Firewall to the left.



              Step 4 Configure the following:

              • Select Enabled to enable the firewall rule or select Disabled to disable it.
              • Name - Enter a name to identify the firewall entry.
              • Action Select Allow to allow traffic to pass through or Deny to deny traffic to pass through.
              • Source - Specify source details:

                • Interface - From the drop-down list select the source interface (WAN, LAN, *).
                • IP Range Start - Enter the starting IP address.
                • IP Range End - Enter the ending IP address.

              • Destination - Specify destination details:

                • Interface - From the drop-down list select the destination interface (WAN, LAN, *).
                • IP Range Start - Enter the starting IP address.
                • IP Range End - Enter the ending IP address.
                • Protocol - Select the protocol (TCP, UDP, ICMP, *).
                • Port Range - Enter the starting and ending port numbers.

              • Schedule - Select Always to enable the firewall rule or select From to enable the firewall rule on a schedule.
              Step 5 Click Apply to add the new firewall rule.

              Note: Rules at the bottom of the Firewall Rules List have lower priority then those at the top of the list.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I configure the Misc. settings on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer The Misc. settings can be configured on the DWL-G730AP in Router Mode.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Misc. to the left.



              Step 4 You can configure the following features:

              • Ping Test - The ping test is used to send ping packets to test if another computer is on the Internet/network. Enter the IP address that you want to ping and then click Ping.
              • Restart Device - Click Reboot to restart the DWL-G730AP.
              • Block WAN Ping If you block WAN pings the WAN IP address of the DWL-G730AP will not respond to pings. Blocking pings may provide some extra security from hackers.
              • UPnP - To use the Universal Plug and Play feature select Enabled using the radio buttons. UPnP provides compatibility with networking equipment, software and peripherals of the over 400 vendors that cooperate in the Plug and Play forum.
              • Gaming Mode - Gaming mode allows a form of pass-through for certain Internet games. If you are using Xbox, Playstation 2, or a PC, make sure that you are using the latest firmware and Gaming Mode is enabled. If you are not using a gaming application it is recommended that you disable Gaming Mode.
              • VPN Pass-Through - The DWL-G730AP supports VPN (Virtual Private Network) pass-through for both PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) and IPSec (IP Security). Once VPN pass-through is enabled, there is no need to open up virtual services. Multiple VPN connections can be made though the DWL-G730AP. This is useful when you have many VPN clients on the LAN network.

                • PPTP Using the radio buttons select Enabled to enable PPTP or Disable to disable it.
                • IPSec Using the radio buttons select Enabled to enable IPSec or Disabled to disable it.

              • WAN select to 10/100 Mbps - Select the data rate (10Mbps, 100Mbps, 10/100Mbps Auto) using the radio buttons.
              • Dynamic DNS - Dynamic Domain Name System is a method of keeping a domain name linked to a changing IP address. This is a useful feature for dynamic Internet connections. Enter the settings for your DDNS provider.


              Step 5 Click Apply to save the new settings.
              Model DWL-G730AP
              Question How do I view the activity log on my DWL-G730AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G730AP in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Status tab and then click Log to the left.



              Step 4 This displays the activity log for your access point. The buttons located above the log can be used to perform certain actions.

              • First Page: View the first page of the log.
              • Last Page: View the last page of the log.
              • Previous: View the previous page of the log.
              • Next: View the next page of the log.
              • Clear: Clear (delete) the entire log.
              • Log Settings: Configure advanced settings for the log such as email notifications.
              Model DWL-G800AP
              Question Where can I find the MAC address of my DWL-G800AP?
              Answer The MAC address of your access point is listed on the label located on the bottom of the access point. It is listed below the serial number.
              Model DWL-G800AP
              Question How do I change the IP address on my DWL-G800AP?
              Answer To change or obtain an IP address automatically for the DWL-G800AP follow the steps below:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.30. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank). Click OK.

              Step 2 Click on the Network tab.



              Step 3 Select the Dynamic IP Address radio button next to LAN IP if you want the access point to receive an IP address automatically from a DHCP server or router, otherwise change the IP address manually (static).

              We strongly suggest using a static IP address. The IP address is not used for networking, only for configuration. Make sure the IP address is within the same IP range as your network.

              Step 4 Click the Apply button and click Continue to restart the access point.
              Model DWL-G800AP
              Question How do I change the data rate on my DWL-G800AP?
              Answer It is recommended to configure data rate on your wireless access point before your wireless adapters. Most wireless adapters will "find" your wireless network by the SSID you assigned to the access point, and then will automatically lock onto the data rate of the access point.

              Note: It is strongly recommended to keep this setting at Auto.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-G800AP by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the Access Point (default is 192.168.0.30).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Wireless tab.



              Step 4 Select a fixed speed from the drop down list next to TX Rates.

              Step 5 Click Apply then click Continue to save your settings.
              Model DWL-G800AP
              Question How do I configure WEP encryption on my DWL-G800AP?
              Answer Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the access point (192.168.0.30 by default).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Wireless tab.

              Step 4 Click the Enabled radio button next to WEP.

              Step 5 Next to WEP Encryption, select the level of encryption (64 or 128 bit).

              Step 6 Next to WEP Mode, select HEX or ASCII. You will need to use the same key on all your wireless devices.

            • HEX - use 0-9 and A-F only.
            • ASCII - All numbers and letters.

              Step 7 You can enter up to 4 different keys. Select the key you want to use by clicking on the corresponding radio button.

              Step 8 Enter your encryption key. You make this up yourself. If you selected HEX, then enter a key made up of a combination of numbers (0-9) and letters (A-F). For example - A4572BCC19 (HEX).



              Step 9 Click Apply to save settings.

              Note: If you are configuring your access point from a wireless adapter, you will lose connectivity as soon as you click Apply. You must enable WEP on your adapter and enter the same exact key as you entered on your access point.
              • Model DWL-G800AP
              Question How do I change the password on my DWL-G800AP?
              Answer You can change the password within the web-based configuration utility that is built-in to the DWL-G800AP.

              Step 1 Open your web browser. Enter the IP address of the DWL-G800AP (default is 192.168.0.30) and press Enter.

              Step 2 Enter the username admin (by default) and leave the password blank (nothing) and click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Admin tab at the top.



              Step 4 Enter your new password, and confirm it by re-typing it again in the Confirm Password field and click Apply. After the DWL-G800AP restarts, click Continue.

              Note: You cannot change the username. The username will always be admin.
              Model DWL-G800AP
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my DWL-G800AP?
              Answer Please read before upgrading:

            • Upgrading firmware will reset the settings to default which means you will lose all your settings.
            • Do NOT upgrade firmware over a wireless connection. You may damage the access point.

              Step 1 Download the firmware and save the file to your computer. You may want to save the file to your desktop. Do not try to run or launch the file - it will not work.

              Click here to download firmware

              Step 2 If you are connecting the access point directly to your PC you will need a cross-over cable. Connecting to a switch or router you will use a straight through cable.

              WARNING: DO NOT upgrade the firmware with a wireless connection. You may damage the access point.

              Step 3 Open your web browser, enter the IP address of your access point (default is 192.168.0.30) and press Enter.

              Step 4 Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default). Click OK to enter the web-based configuration for the device.

              Step 5 Click on the Admin tab. Under Firmware Upgrade click Browse and navigate to the .bin or .tfp file you downloaded in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click Open. Click Apply. It will take a few seconds for the upgrade to complete. Click on the Continue button.



              Step 6 After the access point reboots, close your web browser and reopen it. Enter the IP address of the access point (default is 192.168.0.30) to reconnect with the web-based configuration. Enter username admin and again leave the password blank. Click OK. The firmware upgrade is now complete.

              Step 7 If you have problems with the web-based configuration at this point, unplug the power to the access point, wait 10 seconds, and plug it back in. Repeat Step 6. If this did not help, perform a hard reset on the access point. To perform a hard reset, use a paperclip and hold down the reset button on the back of the unit for 10 seconds while the device is powered on. Release it and the access point will reboot, the lights will blink, and then stabilize. Repeat Step 6              .

              Step 8 You can now reconfigure the access point.
              • Model DWL-G800AP
              Question How do I save/load the configuration file of my DWL-G800AP?
              Answer Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by typing in the IP address of the access point (default is 192.168.0.30) in your web browser. The default username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 2 Click the Admin tab.



              Step 3 To save the configuration settings of your access point, click Save next to Save Settings to Local Hard Drive.

              To load a previously saved configuration file, click Browse..., next to Load Settings From Local Hard Drive. Once you have located the file (config.bin) on your hard drive, click Load.

              Note: If the firmware on your access point has been upgraded/downgraded, do not load configuration files that were saved using a different version of firmware then you currently have installed. This will not work and could damage the unit.
              Model DWL-G800AP
              Question What can the DWL-G800AP repeat?
              Answer
              Routers Firmware
              DI-624 (revC) 2.37 and higher
              DI-524 (revA) 1.05
              Access Points Firmware
              DWL-2000AP (revA) 1.56 and higher
              DWL-2000AP (revB) 2.06 and higher
              DWL-G800AP (revA) 1.02 and higher
              Model DWL-G800AP
              Question How do I change the SSID on my DWL-G800AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.30. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on Wireless.

              Step 3 Next to SSID, type in a new SSID.

              The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.



              Step 4 Click on Apply to save your settings.
              Model DWL-G800AP
              Question How do I change the channel on my DWL-G800AP?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.30. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on Wireless.

              Step 3 Select a new channel from the drop-down menu next to Channel.

              Step 4 Click Apply to save your settings.



              Note: If you cannot change the channel (only shows channel 6), you will need to disable Super G mode (with Turbo). Turbo mode actually uses parts of all channels which is what allows you to get faster speeds and more throughput.
              Model DWL-G800AP
              Question How do I enable Super G™ Mode on my DWL-G800AP Access Point?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the access point in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.30. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on Wireless.

              Step 3 Next to Super G, select the mode you would like to use from the drop-down menu.
              • Disabled
              • Super G without Turbo
              • Super G with Dynamic Turbo
              • Super G with Static Turbo
              What mode should I use?



              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue to save your settings.


            • What is Super G™?
              • Model DWL-G800AP
              Question How do I set my DWL-G800AP to repeater mode?
              Answer The DWL-G800AP is set to Repeater mode by default. As a wireless repeater, the DWL-G800AP extends the range of the wireless network by repeating the wireless signal of the remote AP (Access Point or Wireless Router).

              Step 1 Connect the DWL-G800AP to your PC using an Ethernet cable.

              Step 2 Your computer will need to be in the same IP address range of the DWL-G800AP for configuration. The default IP address of the DWL-G800AP is 192.168.0.30.

              Step 3 To begin configuring the DWL-G800AP open a web browser and enter in the APīs default IP address (192.168.0.30). The username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Step 4 Click on Wireless at the top. Click the radio button next to Repeater and then click on the Site Survey button to view all available wireless networks.



              Step 5 Select the SSID of the wireless router or Access Point that you want the DWL-G800AP to repeat and click on the Connect button. The unit will save changes and reboot. Click the Close button.



              Step 6 Remove the Ethernet cable from the LAN port of the DWL-G800AP.

              Note: Both devices may need to be power cycled in order to establish a connection. To power cycle, simply unplug the power for 10-15 seconds and plug back in.
              Model DWL-G810
              Question How do I configure WPA-PSK on my DWL-G810?
              Answer To use WPA-PSK, please upgrade to firmware version 2.13 or higher.

              Click here to upgrade your firmware.

              Step 1 Log into the web configuration of the DWL-G810 by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the DWL-G810 (default is 192.168.0.30). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Wireless tab.



              Step 4 Next to Authentication, select the WPA-PSK radio button.

              Step 5 Enter a Passphrase and re-type it in the space below. The passphrase or key is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. It can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces.

              Step 6 Click Apply then click Continue to save the changes.

              Make sure you enter the same exact WPA-PSK Passphrase on your wireless clients.
              Model DWL-G820
              Question How do I enable WEP encryption on my DWL-G820?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless access point before your wireless network adapters/bridges. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G820 in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.35. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Encryption on the left side.

              Step 3 Click on the Shared Key radio button. Next to Key Type, select Hex or ASCII. When using different brand wireless products, it is strongly suggested to use Hex.

              Step 4 Next to Key Size, select the level of encryption.

              Step 5 Next to Valid Key, select First. In the box, enter a HEX key (a random encryption key that you make up). The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption. The Hex key must be exactly the same on all your wireless products.

            • 64-bit encryption 10 characters
            • 128-bit encryption 26 characters
            • 152-bit encryption 32 characters

              The encryption key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters.



              Step 6 Click Apply to save your settings.

              Note: You will now need to use the same encryption key on all other wireless devices you wish to communicate on this wireless network.
              • Model DWL-G820
              Question How do I change the SSID on my DWL-G820?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G820 in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.35. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab at the top of the page then click Wireless to the left.

              Step 3 Next to SSID, type in the SSID of your access point or wireless router.

              The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.



              Step 4 Click Apply to save your settings.
              Model DWL-G820
              Question How do I enable WPA-PSK on my DWL-G820?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G820 in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.35. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab at the top of the page then click Encryption on the left.

              Step 3 Next to Authentication, click WPA-PSK.

              Step 4 Enter your WPA passphrase. This must be exactly the same as on your access point or wireless router. The passphrase is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. The password can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces.



              Step 5 Click Apply to save your settings.
              Model DWL-G820
              Question How do I enable Super G™ Mode on my DWL-G820?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the dwl-g820 in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.35. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then click on Performance on the left side.

              Step 3 Next to Super G, select the mode you would like to use from the drop-down menu.
              • Disabled
              • Super G without Turbo
              • Super G with Static Turbo
              • Super G with Dynamic Turbo
              What mode should I use?



              Step 4 Click Apply to save your settings.


            • What is Super G™?
              • Model DWL-G820
              Question How do I change the IP address on my DWL-G820?
              Answer Step 1 Open your web browser and type the IP address of the DWL-G820 in the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.35. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2 Click on the Home tab at the top of the page then click LAN on the left.

              Step 3 From the drop-down menu next to Get IP From, select the radio button for Dynamic IP Address if you want the access point to receive an IP address automatically from a DHCP server or router, otherwise change the IP address manually.

              We strongly suggest you use a Static (manual) IP address.



              When setting a static IP address, the IP address must be in the same range as your wireless router or access point. For example; if your router has an IP address of 192.168.1.1, then the DWL-G820 will have to have an IP address of 192.168.1.xxx, where xxx is between 2 and 254, but cannot be the same IP as another computer or device on your network. The Default Gateway is the IP address of your router (gateway).

              Step 4 Click Apply to save your settings. Once you change the IP address, you will need to enter the new IP address in your web browser to configure the unit.
              Model DWL-P100
              Question How do I install my DWL-P100?
              Answer
              1. Connect the cable from the PC/Hub/Switch to the Base Unit "LAN IN".

              2. Connect the Power Adapter to the Base Unit "DC 15V IN." The green PWR LED on the Base Unit should light up.

              3. Connect the cable from the Base Unit "LAN OUT" to the "LAN IN" of the Terminal Unit (max cable length up to 328ft/100m, as defined by IEEE 802.3).

              4. Connect an Ethernet cable from the Terminal Unit "LAN OUT" to the LAN port of the Wireless Access Point (AP).

              5. Connect the "DC 5V OUT" from the Terminal Unit to the DC 5V input port of the AP using the power cable provided. The green PWR LED of the Terminal Unit should light up.

              6. Operate the Wireless Access Point normally.
              Model DWL-P1012
              Question Does the DWL-P1012 come with a POE converter to separate power and data?
              Answer No. Although 802.3af is a standard and data connectors are usually RJ-45, power connectors vary quite a bit. You will need to check with the end devices manufacture for converter options if the end device is not POE ready (built-in or included converter).
              Model DWL-P200
              Question Can the DWL-P200 be used with outdoor devices?
              Answer No, the DWL-P200 can only be used with indoor devices. Using this device outside may cause issues and is not advised.
              Model DWS-1008
              Question Are there Pre-Configured template files available for download?
              Answer The following are Pre-Configured template files.

              Note: you will need to edit the fields that are in Red font to fit your network configurations.

              Use the following steps to load the files:

              Step 1 Backup your current configuration file if necessary.

              Step 2 At the your Command Line Interface prompt, run the following commands to reset the switch to factory defaults:

              DWS-1008# clear boot config

              DWS-1008# reset system force

              Step 3 Once the switch has been reset to factory defaults, reboot the switch and copy and paste the text from the edited file directly to the Command Line Interface. The file will then load and configure the switch automatically.

              Click on the following links to access the desired pre-configured template:

              Clear image file
              WPA/PSK image file
              WEP64 image file
              WEP128 image file





              DW804019.rel Clear image file

              set interface default ip dhcp-server disable
              set interface default ip dhcp-client enable
              set system name DLink-SW
              set system ip-address 192.168.50.20
              y
              set ip route default 192.168.50.1 1
              set system countrycode US
              set timezone arizona -7 0
              clear vlan 1 ports 1,2,3,4,5,6
              y
              set port type ap 1 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 2 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 3 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 4 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 5 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 6 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set service-profile DLink-sp
              set service-profile DLink-sp ssid-name DLinkClear
              set service-profile DLink-sp ssid-type clear
              set service-profile DLink-sp wpa-ie disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp auth-dot1x disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp cipher-tkip disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp cipher-ccmp disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp cipher-wep104 disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp cipher-wep40 disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp beacon enable
              set service-profile DLink-sp auth-psk disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp auth-fallthru last-resort
              set authentication last-resort ssid DLinkClear local
              set user last-resort-DLinkClear attr vlan-name default
              set radio-profile DLink-rp service-profile DLink-sp
              set radio-profile DLink-rp wmm disable
              set ap 1 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 2 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 3 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 4 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 5 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 6 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set interface 1 ip 192.168.50.20 255.255.255.0
              set ip telnet server enable
              y
              save config
              y


              DW804019.rel WPA/PSK image file

              set interface default ip dhcp-server disable
              set interface default ip dhcp-client enable
              set system name DLink-SW
              set system ip-address 192.168.50.20
              y
              set ip route default 192.168.50.1 1
              set system countrycode US
              set timezone arizona -7 0
              clear vlan 1 ports 1,2,3,4,5,6
              y
              set port type ap 1 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 2 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 3 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 4 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 5 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 6 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set service-profile DLink-sp
              set service-profile DLink-sp ssid-name DLinkpsk
              set service-profile DLink-sp ssid-type crypto
              set service-profile DLink-sp wpa-ie enable
              set service-profile DLink-sp auth-dot1x disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp auth-psk enable
              set service-profile DLink-sp cipher-wep40 disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp cipher-wep104 disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp beacon enable
              set service-profile DLink-sp wpa-ie enable
              set service-profile DLink-sp auth-fallthru last-resort
              set service-profile DLink-sp psk-phrase dlinkbnfp
              set authentication last-resort ssid DLinkpsk none
              set user last-resort-DLinkpsk attr vlan-name default
              set radio-profile DLink-rp service-profile DLink-sp
              set radio-profile DLink-rp wmm disable
              set ap 1 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 2 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 3 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 4 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 5 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 6 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set interface 1 ip 192.168.50.20 255.255.255.0
              save configuration
              y



              DW804019.rel WEP64 image file

              set interface default ip dhcp-server disable
              set interface default ip dhcp-client enable
              set system name DLink-SW
              set system ip-address 192.168.50.20
              y
              set ip route default 192.168.50.1 1
              set system countrycode US
              set timezone arizona -7 0
              clear vlan 1 ports 1,2,3,4,5,6
              y
              set port type ap 1 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 2 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 3 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 4 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 5 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 6 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set service-profile DLink-sp
              set service-profile DLink-sp ssid-name DLink64WEP
              set service-profile DLink-sp ssid-type crypto
              set service-profile DLink-sp wpa-ie disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp auth-dot1x disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp cipher-tkip disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp cipher-ccmp disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp cipher-wep104 disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp cipher-wep40 enable
              set service-profile DLink-sp beacon enable
              set service-profile DLink-sp auth-psk disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp wep key-index 1 key 1234567890
              set service-profile DLink-sp auth-fallthru last-resort
              set authentication last-resort ssid DLink64WEP none
              set user last-resort-DLink64WEP attr vlan-name default
              set radio-profile DLink-rp service-profile DLink-sp
              set radio-profile DLink-rp wmm disable
              set ap 1 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 2 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 3 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 4 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 5 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 6 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ip telnet server enable
              y
              set interface 1 ip 192.168.50.20 255.255.255.0
              save config
              y



              DW804019.rel WEP128 image file

              set interface default ip dhcp-server disable
              set interface default ip dhcp-client enable
              set system name DLink-SW
              set system ip-address 192.168.50.20
              y
              set ip route default 192.168.50.20 1
              set system countrycode US
              set timezone arizona -7 0
              clear vlan 1 ports 1,2,3,4,5,6
              y
              set port type ap 1 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 2 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 3 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 4 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 5 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set port type ap 6 model dwl-8220ap poe enable
              y
              set service-profile DLink-sp
              set service-profile DLink-sp ssid-name DLink128WEP
              set service-profile DLink-sp ssid-type crypto
              set service-profile DLink-sp wpa-ie disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp auth-dot1x disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp cipher-tkip disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp cipher-ccmp disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp cipher-wep104 enable
              set service-profile DLink-sp cipher-wep40 disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp beacon enable
              set service-profile DLink-sp auth-psk disable
              set service-profile DLink-sp wep key-index 1 key 12345678901234567890123456
              set service-profile DLink-sp auth-fallthru last-resort
              set authentication last-resort ssid DLink128WEP none
              set user last-resort-DLink128WEP attr vlan-name default
              set radio-profile DLink-rp service-profile DLink-sp
              set radio-profile DLink-rp wmm disable
              set ap 1 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 2 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 3 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 4 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 5 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ap 6 radio 1 radio-profile DLink-rp mode enable
              set ip telnet server enable
              y
              set interface 1 ip 192.168.50.20 255.255.255.0
              save config
              y
              Model DWS-1008
              Question How do I set a system IP and a DHCP interface on my switch?
              Answer Step 1: Open HyperTerminal and configure it for the Com port you are presently connected to, and use the following settings:

              Bits Per Second - 9600
              Data Bits - 8
              Parity - None
              Stop Bits - 1
              Flow Control - None

              Note: In the following steps, Console#, represents the command line prompt. If you have changed the name of your switch it will appear as the name, rather than console (ex DWS1008-01#).

              Step 2: Login to the switch.
              When prompted, enter the following information:
              Username - admin
              Password - (if you have not set a password leave this blank and press Enter)
              Console# - enable

              Step 3: Type the following command to pull DHCP from an Interface other than the switch (such as a Router or Server):
              Console# set interface default ip dhcp-server disable. Press Enter.
              success: change accepted.
              Console# set interface default ip dhcp-client enable. Press Enter.
              success: change accepted.

              Step 4: Type the following command to set the System IP on your switch:
              Console# set system ip-address 192.168.50.10
              success: change accepted.

              Step 5: Type the following command to set the Default Gateway on your switch:
              Console# set ip route default 192.168.50.1 1
              success: change accepted.

              Step 6: Type the following command to set the IP for Interface 1:
              Console# set interface 1 ip 192.168.50.10 255.255.255.0
              success: change accepted.

              Step 7: Type the command: show config to verify your results:
              (Console# show config)

              The results will then be displayed, similar to the list shown below:

              # Configuration nvgenīd at 2006-12-19 19:53:02
              # Image 4.0.19.0
              # Model DWS-1008
              # Last change occurred at 2006-12-19 19:19:07
              set ip route default 192.168.50.1 1
              set system name DWS-1008-9193B0
              set system ip-address 192.168.50.10
              set enablepass password b6b706525e1814394621eeb2a1c4d5803fcf
              set vlan 1 port 1
              set vlan 1 port 2
              set vlan 1 port 3
              set vlan 1 port 4
              set vlan 1 port 5
              set vlan 1 port 6
              set vlan 1 port 7
              set vlan 1 port 8
              set interface 1 ip 192.168.50.10 255.255.255.0
              DWS-1008-9193B0#
              Model DWS-1008
              Question How do I reset my switch back to facotry defaults?
              Answer Step 1 At the console prompt type the following command and press Enter:

              DWS-1008-9193B0# clear boot config
              success: Reset boot config to factory defaults.

              Step 2 Next at the console prompt type the following command and press Enter:

              DWS-1008-9193B0# reset system force
              Shutting down daemons...
              Shutting down filesystems...

              The switch will then reboot back to factory defaults.
              Model DWS-1008
              Question When I perform the command clear boot config to clear the boot image on Boot0, will it also clear the configurations I have made to my Boot1 image?
              Answer Yes! When clearing your boot config file for Boot0 it will also clear the boot file for the Boot1 image as well.

              Please back up any wanted configuration files on both the Boot0 as well as the Boot1 side before performing the clear boot config command on either of the boot images.
              Model DWS-1008
              Question How do I configure Hyperterminal so I can access the CLI and view the default settings on my DWS-1008?
              Answer Step 1: Connect a serial cable from your PC to the DWS-1008īs Console port, located on the front of the switch.

              Step 2: Open HyperTerminal from the Start Menu. It can be found at All Programs->Accessories->Communications->HyperTerminal.

              Step 3: Name the connection. The name can be anything, for example DWS-1008.

              Step 4: Select the Com Port on your PC that the console cable is currently connected to.

              Step 5: Configure you Port Settings as follows:
              • Bits per Second: 9600
              • Data Bits: 8
              • Parity: None
              • Stop Bits>: 1
              • Flow Control: None
              Step 6: Click on OK.

              Step 7: Verify that your scroll lock Light is off and then hit enter to verify you get the switch prompt. Your prompt should look like DWS-1008-9193B0>.

              Step 8: At the prompt type Enable and then hit enter.

              Step 9: You will be prompted for a password. There is no password by default so just hit enter.

              Step 8: Now your prompt will look like DWS-1008-9193B0#.

              Step 9: To view the switchīs default settings, type show switch and then hit enter at the prompt.
              Model DWS-1008
              Question What is the default IP address of the DWS-1008?
              Answer The default IP address of the DWS-1008 is 192.168.100.1.
              Model DWS-1008
              Question Does the DWS-1008 have a web based GUI?
              Answer No, the DWS-1008 can only be configured using the CLI by attaching a PC to the switch’s console port. After configuring the switch for SSH or Telnet access, you also can use these protocols to access the CLI.
              Model DWS-1008 / DWL-8220AP
              Question Can I use any other Wireless AP’s with my DWS-1008 other than the DWL-8220AP?
              Answer No, the DWL-8220AP is proprietary to the DWS-1008 wireless switch. The DWS-1008 will not work with any other model AP and the DWL-8220AP will not work with any other wireless switch.
              Model DWS-3227 / DWS-3227P / DWS-3250 / DXS-3227 / DXS-3227P / DXS-3250 / DXS-3326GSR / DXS-3350SR
              Question Why do I not see Default-gateway option on my DXS/DWS switch?
              Answer Your switch may be in Router Mode. To confirm this, please run the following command:

              Step 1 From the command prompt, enter the following command:

              Type: console# show system mode

              Feature State
              ---------- ----------
              Mode: Router
              Qos: Active


              In this case if you check your switchīs interface you will not see default gateway.

              Type: console# show ip interface
              Proxy ARP is disabled

              IP Address I/F Type Directed Broadcast
              -------------------- -------------------- -------------------- --------------------
              Step 2: To change to Switch mode please do the following (Please read all disclaimers carefully)

              Type: console# set system mode switch qos active

              Changing the switch working mode will *delete* the startup configuration file
              and reset the device right after that. It is highly recommended that you will
              backup it before changing the mode, continue ? (Y/N) Y
              Startup file was deleted

              Step 3: The system will reboot and come back in switch mode. Now will able to see default gateway option by doing the following.

              User Name: admin
              console# show system mode

              Feature State
              ---------- ----------
              Mode: Switch
              Qos: Active


              Type: console# show ip interface

              Gateway IP Address Activity status Type IP Address I/F Type
              ------------------------------ ------------------------------ ------------------------------ ------------------------------ ------------------------------


              Model DWS-3227 / DWS-3250 / DWS-3227P / DXS-3227 / DXS-3227P / DXS-3250
              Question How do I upload new a Boot Prom image and new Firmware while in stack mode?
              Answer You can upload a new Boot Image and/or new Firmware to your DWS/DXS-32xx switches in stacking mode all in one attempt.

              Please log in to the master switch and follow these instructions:

              Step 1 Please type the following command to upload the latest boot version.
              If you are already running the latest boot code please skip this step and upload the firmware.

              DES-32xx# copy tftp://{tftp server ip}/{boot file} unit://*/boot

              Please do not reboot the switch at this time

              Step 2 Please run the following command to upload the latest firmware.
              DES-32xx# copy tftp://{tftp server ip}/{image file} unit://*/image

              Remember to copy both boot and image files before rebooting the stack.( If applicable)
              Since firmware always gets uploaded on the non-active partition you need to run the
              following command for each switch.

              DES-32xx# boot system unit 8 image-2

              This is an example considering that this is 8th unit of the stack and non active
              image is 2.
              You need to run this command for every switch of the stack.
              Model DWS-3227 / DWS-3250 / DWS-3227P / DXS-3227 / DXS-3227P / DXS-3250
              Question Where do I purchase wireless keys for my switch?
              Answer Please contact your local D-Link reseller or the D-Link Sales department directly at 800-326-1688 extension 5434 for an additional license Key.
              Model DWS-3227 / DXS-3227 / DWS-3227P / DXS-3227P / DWS-3250 / DXS-3250
              Question Can I use Mozilla Firefox to Configure and Manage my switch?
              Answer No, You must use a fully updated copy of Internet Explorer version 6.0
              Model DWS-3227 / DXS-3227 / DWS-3227P / DXS-3227P / DWS-3250 / DXS-3250
              Question What do I do if I get an LTK_Failure message when trying to add my access point?
              Answer If you are configuring the Access Points from the GUI interface on the WLAN-Access Point Properties page you may see an LTK_Failure message when trying to enable your access point.

              Step 1: If you receive an LTK_Failure message, You will need to reset the unit. To do so, insert a paper clip into the reset hole on the back of your access point. Press and hold the button for a full 20 seconds to reset the access point and begin its firmware update.

              Step 2: As you monitor the CLI, after the reset, you will see the link go up and down twice and forward twice. There will then be a two to three minute pause before the firmware upgrade process begins.



              Note: If you interupt this process. you will continue to receive the LTK_Failure message.

              Step 3: Once the firmware upgrade process is complete, go to the WLAN-Access Point-Properties page of the GUI. Click on the Remove box, next to the Edit box of the access point.
              After doing this, monitor your CLI until the access point is rediscovered.



              Step 4: On the WLAN-Access Point-Properties page, click on the Edit box again to Enable the access point and enter in 16 1īs in the Ascii box of the Key configuration



              Step 5: After you have reset the AP and re-entered in the key code your screen should look as follows:

              Model DWS-3227 / DXS-3227 / DWS-3227P / DXS-3227P / DWS-3250 / DXS-3250
              Question How do I configure the System IP on my switch?
              Answer Step 1 Connect a Console Cable to the Console port on the front of the switch.

              Step 2 Open HyperTerminal and configure it for the Com port you are presently connected to and use the following settings:
              • Bits Per Second - 9600
              • Data Bits - 8
              • Parity - None
              • Stop Bits - 1
              • Flow Control - None
              Save your settings and press Enter twice to get your console prompt.

              example: console#

              Step 3 At the console prompt type the following command:

              console# configure and press Enter.

              The prompt will now appear as: console(config)#

              Step 4 At the config prompt type the following command:

              console(config)# interface vlan 1 and press Enter.

              console(config-if)#

              Step 5 At the config-if prompt type the following command:

              Note: This is an example IP/Subnet. Please change to match your IP scheme.

              console(config-if)# ip address 192.168.50.10 255.255.255.0 and press Enter.

              console(config-if)# Exit and press Enter.

              console(config)# Exit and press Enter.

              console#

              Step 6 To verify your settings, type the following command:

              console# show ip interface

              Note: this is an example response.
              Proxy ARP is disabled
              IP Address I/F Type Directed
              Broadcast
              192.168.50.10/24 vlan 1 Static disable
              console#
              Model DWS-3227 / DXS-3227 / DWS-3227P / DXS-3227P / DWS-3250 / DXS-3250
              Question How do I add an Access Point to my switch?
              Answer Note: This procedure should only be done with a Fully Updated Version of Internet Explorer.

              The following is a list of requirements:

            • The switch needs to have an IP set for interface VLAN1.
            • A DHCP server is required for this setup.
            • Another requirement is a CAPWAP address in WLAN menu.

              Step 1 Log into the switch, by entering the IP address into the address bar of the web browser.

              Step 2 Enter your Username and Password. Click OK to enter the Web management.



              Step 3 Click the WLAN tab. From the left side, under System, select Main.



              Step 4 Enter the CAPWAP IP address and click Submit.



              After adding the CAPWAP address it is required to save the settings and reload the switch.

              Step 5 Click on the System tab. Under File Management, select Copy files. Select the radio button next to Copy Configuration and click Submit.



              Step 6 When finished copying, you will see the message, Copy Finished. Select Close.



              Step 7 Click on the Reboot Menu and then click the Reboot button.

              Monitor the CLI until the switch has finished resetting.



              Step 8 Run the following command, in the CLI, to verify that the setting is correct:

              DES-32xx # show wlan

              Results:

              console# show wlan
              CAPWAP IP address: 192.168.50.5 (After reboot: 192.168.50.5)
              Country code: US
              TX power is on
              Station idle-timeout: 30 minutes
              console#

              Step 9 Once you have the wireless portion enabled and configured, you can connect your Access Point to the switch and turn on the power.

              If this is new AP it may take a few minutes to show up

              Run the following command, in the CLI, and press Enter. The results will show all the discovered Access Points.

              DES-32xx # show wlan aps

              In GUI mode it will show as Not Active.



              Step 10 In the WEB GUI Interface, under the WLAN tab, select Access Points from the left and choose Properties.



              Step 11 Click on the Edit icon and then check the Enable AP box.



              For the security key enter 16 alphanumeric characters (1-9 or a-z) in the ASCII box of the Key configuration and click on Submit. Close that window and click Submit again on the Properties screen. You will then see the Access Pointīs status as Active.



              Your Access Points should now get an IP address from the DHCP server. It is now ready for basic access and further configurations.

              Repeat the steps above to enable additional Access Points.
              • Model DWS-3227 / DXS-3227 / DWS-3227P / DXS-3227P / DWS-3250 / DXS3250
              Question How many Access Points can be configured per switch?
              Answer You can only configure 10 Access Points per switch.

              The DWS-3227/3227P/3250 comes with a 10 Access Point license.

              The DXS-3227/3227P/3250 requires the purchase of additional software to enable the wireless feature. Once enabled, the switch will support 10 Access Point (10 Access Point license included).

              Model DWS-3227 / DXS-3227 / DWS-3227P / DXS-3227P / DWS-3250 / DXS3250
              Question What is the maximum number of Access Points can I configure per switch?
              Answer You can configure a maximum of 50 access points per switch (with appropriate licenses), with Firmware version 1.0.1.109 or above.

              Note: If you have multiple switches in Stack Mode, the stack acts as one physical switch and will only support 10 Access Points. To add more Access Points, additional Licenses will be required (additional licenses sold seperately).

              You are also able to configure a maximum of 50 Access Points in Stack Mode.

              Your slave/backup switch will also require another License key to manage your access points if your master goes down.

              D-Link offers 25 and 50 User Licenses (sold seperately).

              Model DXS-3227
              Question How do I upgrade the DXS-3250/DXS-3227/DXS-3227P switch to a wireless switch?
              Answer You must first acquire the license key. Click here for information on acquiring a wireless key.

              Step 1 Save all your changes and reload the switch.

              Step 2 When you see the Auto boot in 2 seconds message, press Return or Esc to abort the boot process and enter prom.

              Here you will see the following options:

              Startup Menu
              [1] Download Software
              [2] Erase Flash File
              [3] Password Recovery Procedure
              [4] Enter Diagnostic Mode
              [5] Set Terminal Baud-Rate
              [6] Stack menu
              [7] License menu
              [8] Back

              Step 3 Select option # 7, License menu, and press Enter

              Here you will see the following options:

              License menu
              [1] Add license
              [2] Remove license
              [3] Show license
              [4] Back

              Step 4 Select option # 1, Add license, and press Enter.

              Step 5 Enter your license number and press Enter.

              The License number will be in the following format:
              N1-0013463CBACB-25-0-79109C235845B9A5 (This is an sample. it is not a working key)
              Key starts with N1 (all letters are capitalized).

              Step 6 After adding the key, select option #3, Show License, to confirm the key is entered correctly.

              Step 7 Select the back option until the POST process resumes.

              Now you are able to access the WLAN portion of the switch.
              Model DXS-3227 / DWS-3227 / DWS-3227P
              Question Which wireless access points are compatible with both the DXS/DWS-3227 and the DXS/DWS-3227P wireless switches?
              Answer The following access points are compatible with the DXS/DWS-3227 as well as the DXS/DWS-3227P wireless switches:
              • DWL-2130AP
              • DWL-2230AP
              • DWL-7130AP
              • DWL-7230AP
              • DWL-3230AP
              Model DXS-3250 / DWS-3250
              Question Which wireless access points are compatible with the DXS/DWS-3250 wireless switches?
              Answer The following access points are compatible with the DXS/DWS-3250 wireless switches:
              • DWL-2130AP
              • DWL-2230AP
              • DWL-7130AP
              • DWL-7230AP
              • DWL-3230AP
              Model EBR-2310
              Question How do I change the LAN IP address on the EBR-2310?
              Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the EBR-2310 into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Setup tab along the top and then click on Network Settings on the lefthand side.



              Step 4: Under Routing Settings, type in the routerīs new IP address and default subnet mask. The IP Address that is configured here is the IP Address that you use to access the Web-based management interface. If you change the IP Address here, you may need to adjust your PCīs network settings to access the network again.

              Step 5: Click on the Save Settings button to save your settings.
              Model EBR-2310
              Question How do I open ports for the EBR-2310?
              Answer To allow traffic from the internet to enter your local network, you will need to open up ports or the router will block the request.

              Because our routers use NAT (Network Address Translation), you can only open a specific port or ports to one computer at a time. For example: If you have 2 web servers on your network, you cannot open port 80 to both computers. You will need to configure 1 of the web servers to use port 81 (or any other non-80 port). Now you can open port 80 to the first computer and then open port 81 to the other computer.

              Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the EBR-2310 into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Advanced tab along the top and then click on Port Forwarding on the lefthand side.



              Step 4: Check the box beside the port forwarding rule you wish to use; doing so will save your virtual server entry when the Save Settings button is applied. Check the Application Name drop down menu for a list of pre-defined applications that you can select from. If you select one of the pre-defined applications, click on the arrow button next to the dropdown menu to auto-fill the appropriate fields.

              Step 5: Select your computer from the list of DHCP clients in the Computer Name drop down menu or manually enter the IP address of the computer you would like to open the specified port to.

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Step 6: Select the port or port range you desire. This feature allows you to open a range of ports to a computer on your network. To do so, enter the first port in the range you would like to open in the Start field and last port of the range in the End field. To open a single port using this feature, simply enter the same number in both the Start and End fields.

              Step 7: Click on the Save Settings button to save your changes.

              Model EBR-2310
              Question How do I enable DMZ on the EBR-2310?
              Answer The DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) provides you with an option to set a single computer on your network outside of the routerīs firewall. If you have a computer that cannot run internet applications successfully from behind the router then you can place the computer into the DMZ for unrestricted Internet access.

              Note: Putting a computer in the DMZ may expose that computer to a variety of security risks. Use of this option is only recommended as a last resort.

              Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the EBR-2310 into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Advanced tab at the top and then click on Firewall Settings on the lefthand side.



              Step 4: Click the box for Enable DMZ Host. Select your computer from the Computer Name list or enter the IP address manually.

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Step 5: Click on the Save Settings button to save your settings.

              Model EBR-2310
              Question How do I configure MAC filtering on the EBR-2310?
              Answer The MAC (Media Access Controller) Address filter option is used to control network access based on the MAC Address of the network adapter. A MAC address is a unique ID assigned by the manufacturer of the network adapter. This feature can be configured to ALLOW or DENY network/Internet access.

              Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the EBR-2310 into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Advanced tab along the top and then on Network Filter on the lefthand side.



              Step 4: From the Configure MAC Filtering drop down selection select your method of MAC filtering.
              • Turn MAC Filtering OFF
              • MAC Filtering ON and ALLOW computers listed to access the network.
              • MAC Filtering ON and DENY computers listed to access the network
              Step 5: Select your computer from the DHCP Client List dropdown or you can enter your computerīs MAC address manually.

              How do I find the MAC/Adapter Address in Windows NT, 2000 and XP?

              Step 6: Click Save Settings to save your settings.
              Model EBR-2310 / WBR-1310 / WBR-2310 / WBR-1310_revB / WBR-1310_revD
              Question How do I filter websites on my EBR/WBR series router?
              Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the EBR/WBR series router into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Advanced tab at the top and then click on Website Filter on the lefthand side.



              Step 4: From the Configure Website Filtering dropdown menu select the method you would like to configure website filtering. Create a list of websites that you would like the devices on your network to be allowed or denied access to. Keywords can be entered in this list in order to block any URL containing the keyword entered.
              • Turn Website filtering OFF
              • Turn Website filtering ON and ALLOW computers to ONLY these sites
              • Turn Website filtering ON and DENY computers to ONLY these sites
              Step 5: Click on Save Settings to save your settings.

              Model EBR-2310 / WBR-1310 / WBR-2310 / WBR-1310_revB / WBR-1310_revD
              Question How do I enable remote management on my EBR/WBR series router?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the EBR/WBR series router into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Tools tab at the top and then click on Admin on the lefthand side.



              Step 4: Check the box to Enable Remote Management. When enabling remote management, you can specify the IP address of the computer on the internet that you want to have access to your router or you can enter an asterisk (*) to allow access to any computer on the internet.

              Step 5: Select a port from the remote management dropdown menu.

              Step 6: Click on Save Settings to save your settings.

              Model EBR-2310_revB / EBR-2310
              Question How do I set an administrative password on my EBR series router?
              Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2: The default username is admin and no password (blank).

              Step 3: Click the Tools tab and then click Admin to the left.



              Step 4: Enter a new password in the Admin Password section.

              Step 5: Click Save Settings.

              D-Link suggests setting a user password to limit access to the device.

              Model Freedom Software by Zero Knowledge
              Question Where can I find more help on the Freedom Software by Zero Knowledge?
              Answer D-Link does not directly support third-party software shipped with its products. From our experience, the fastest way to resolve Freedom issues is by requesting support using the tech support web form at the following url:
              http://www.freedom.net/support/bug.html

              To ensure a fast response, make sure you answer all questions on the web form.

              NOTE: Using software that is not necessarily needed to operate a D-Link product is done at your own discretion.
              Model General
              Question What can I do if I did not recieve the software that was supposed to be included with the purchase of my D-Link product?
              Answer Contact the point of purchase in order to obtain missing or defective software disks.

              If the software was packaged with your device and is damaged or has been lost you can download the software from the manufacturer by clicking on the links below..

              Ulead VideoStudio 5.0 Trial

              Bundled with the DFW-500 and the DSB-V100.

              Midpoint Lite

              Proxy software bundled with the D-Link networking kits like the DFE-910 and the DHN-910.

              VideoWave/Photosuite

              This software is bundled with the DSC-350 and the DSB-C100.

              Please contact these sites for in-depth information and tutorials for these products.
              Model General
              Question What can I do if the point of purchase will not replace or provide me with the software disk(s) I should have recieved with my D-Link product ?
              Answer If the software was not packaged with your device, is damaged or has been lost you can download the software from the manufacturer by clicking on the links below.

              Ulead VideoStudio 5.0 Trial

              Bundled with the DFW-500 and the DSB-V100.

              Midpoint Lite

              Proxy software bundled with the D-Link networking kits like the DFE-910 and the DHN-910.

              VideoWave/Photosuite

              This software is bundled with the DSC-350 and the DSB-C100.

              Please contact these sites for in-depth information and tutorials for these products.
              Model General
              Question How do I share and access a shared printer in Windows XP?
              Answer Printer sharing allows you to print documents on a printer attached to a computer on your network. You can share a printer with all computers on your network instead of using a printer on each computer.

              Note: This FAQ does not apply to print servers.


              Sharing a Printer

              Step 1 Click Start > Printers and Faxes.



              Step 2 Right-click the printer that you want to share and then click Sharing.



              Step 3 In the My Printer Properties window select Share this printer using the radio buttons.



              Step 4 Next to Share name enter a name for the printer. The Share Name will be used to identify the printer on your network. Click OK.



              If the share name you entered is one that will not be accessible on MS-DOS workstations you will receive the below message:



              If there are no MS-DOS workstations on your network click Yes. Otherwise, click No and change the share name.

              Accessing a Shared Printer

              Step 1 Click Start > My Network Places.



              Step 2 Click View workgroup computers to the left.



              Step 3 Double-click the computer that has the shared printer you wish to access.



              Step 4 Right-click the printer and then click Connect.



              Step 5 Wait while your computer connects to the printer. Once it connects, setup is complete.
              Model General
              Question How do I create, access, and map shared drives/folders on my network in Windows XP?
              Answer File sharing allows you to view files on other computers in your network.

              For more information on file sharing in Windows XP go to http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;304040.

              Go to http://support.microsoft.com/default.aspx?scid=kb;en-us;301281&sd=tech for help with file sharing in Windows 2000.

              This FAQ will cover the following:
              Sharing Drives and Folders

              Step 1 Locate the folder or drive that you want to share and right-click it once and then click Sharing and Security.



              Step 2 Click If you understand the risk but still want to share the root of the drive, click here.



              Step 3 Under Network sharing and security click Share this folder on the network using the check box.



              Step 4 Next to Share name enter a name. This name will identify the share on the network.



              If the share name is too long you will receive the following message:



              If all computers on your network are running Windows 2000 and above click Yes. Otherwise, click No and enter a share name with fewer characters.

              If the share name contains invalid characters you will receive the following message:



              Remove the invalid characters in the share name.

              Step 5 If you want users to be able to modify files and folders click Allow network users to change my files using the checkbox. If you want users to have read-only access uncheck it using the checkbox.



              Step 6 Click OK to apply the new settings.



              Accessing Shared Drives and Folders

              Step 1 Click Start > My Network Places.



              Step 2 Click View workgroup computers to the left.



              Step 3 Locate the computer that has the share that you want to access and double-click it.



              Step 4 Locate the share that you want to access and double-click it.



              Step 5 You will now be able to access the files and folders on the share.



              Mapping Shared Drives and Folders

              When you map a share, it appears in My Computer as a disk drive. This allows you to easily access files and folders on shares.

              Step 1 Click Start > My Network Places.



              Step 2 Click View workgroup computers to the left.



              Step 3 Locate the computer that has the share that you want to access and double-click it.



              Step 4 Locate the share that you want to access. Right-click it once and then click Map Network Drive.



              Step 5 In the Map Network Drive window select the drive letter that you want to assign this share to using the drop-down list next to Drive.



              Step 6 Check Reconnect at logon using the checkbox.



              Step 7 Click Finish.

              The share will now be listed in My Computer.

              Model General
              Question How do I turn on printer sharing in Mac OS X 10.3?
              Answer Turning Printer Sharing on will allow users on your network to access printers attached to a computer.

              All printers listed in your Printer List are shared, whether they are connected directly to your computer or you access them over a network.

              Step 1 Open System Preferences and then click Sharing.

              Step 2 In the Services pane, select Printer Sharing and then click Start.
              Model General
              Question How do I enable Internet Connection Sharing in Windows XP?
              Answer Internet Connection Sharing will allow you to share your Internet connection with other computers on the network.

              Note: If you have a router or gateway, do not install ICS. The router/gateway will perform the same task as ICS.

              For more info on Internet Connection Sharing in Windows XP go to http://www.microsoft.com/windowsxp/using/networking/learnmore/ics.mspx.

              Step 1 Click Start > Control Panel.



              Step 2 In the Control Panel double-click Network Connections.



              Step 3 Right-click the connection that you want to share and then click Properties.



              Step 4 In the connection properties click the Advanced tab.



              Step 5 Click Allow other users to connect through this computerīs Internet connection using the check box. Leave Establish a dialup connection whenever a computer on my network attempts to access the Internet checked. Leave Allow other network users to control or disable the shared Internet connection checked if you want to give network users the rights to modify the connection. Otherwiser, uncheck it.



              Step 6 Click OK to apply the new settings.
              Model General
              Question How do I use the Network Setup Wizard in Windows XP?
              Answer Note: Please refer to http://www.homenethelp.com/ and http://www.microsoft.com/windows2000 for information about networking computers using Windows 2000, Me or 98SE.

              Step 1 Click Start > Control Panel > Network Connections.

              Step 2 In Network Connections select Create a new connection.



              Step 3 In the New Connection Wizard window click Next.



              Step 4 Select Setup a home or small office network and then click Next.



              Step 5 Click Finish to close the New Connection Wizard and start the Network Setup Wizard.



              Step 6 In the Network Setup Wizard window click Next.



              Step 7 Click Next.



              Step 8 If you have Internet Connection Sharing enabled, you will be asked if you want to use the shared connection. Select No, let me choose another way to connect to the Internet using the radio buttons. Then click Next.



              Step 9 Select This computer connects to the Internet through another computer on my network or through a residential gateway using the radio buttons. Then click Next.



              Step 10 Next to Computer description enter a description of your computer (optional). Next to Computer name enter a name. This will be used to identify your computer on the network. All computers on a network must have names but cannot have the same name. Click Next to continue.



              Step 11 Next to Workgroup name enter the name of your workgroup. A workgroup name identifies a group of computers on a network. All computers on your network should use the same workgroup name. Click Next.



              Step 12 The below screen will display the setting that you are about to apply. Click Next.



              Step 13 Please wait while the Network Setup Wizard applies the new settings.



              Step 14 Select Create a Network Setup Disk using the radio buttons. Click Next.



              Step 15 If you have more than one removable media drive you will be prompted to select the drive that you want to copy the files to. Left-click the drive once to select it. Click Next.



              Step 16 You will be prompted to insert a floppy disk. Insert the disk into the drive that you selected in Step 15. To format the disk or removable storage device click Format Disk. Click Next.



              Step 17 Wait while the Network Setup Wizard copies files.



              Step 18 Read the instructions on how to run the Network Setup Wizard on other computers on your network. When you are finished click Next.



              Step 19 Click Finish to close the Network Setup Wizard.



              Step 20 You will be prompted to restart your computer. Click Yes to restart now or No to restart later. Your computer must be restarted before the new changes will take effect.



              Step 21 Follow the instructions that you obtained in Step 18 and run the Network Setup Wizard on the other computers on your network.
              Model General
              Question What is BETA firmware?
              Answer Beta firmware is firmware that is released prior to final release for testing purposes only. Beta firmware is released so that customers may install it prior to its final release in order to provide valuable feedback which can help improve it.

              NOTE: Beta firmware is for testing purposes only and D-Link shall not be held liable for any damage or malfunction that may arise from use of BETA firmare. Firmware posted on this website is for products sold and supported in the United States only.
              Model General
              Question What are the different 802 standards?
              Answer 802

              IEEE 802 (IEEE Std. 802-2001) is a family of standards for peer-to-peer communication over a LAN. These technologies use a shared-medium, with information broadcast for all stations to receive. The basic communications capabilities provided are packet-based. The basic unit of transmission is a sequence of data octets (8-bits), which can be of any length within a range that is dependent on the type of LAN.

              Included in the 802 family of IEEE standards are definitions of bridging, management, and security protocols.

              802.1x

              IEEE 802.1x (IEEE Std. 802.1x-2001) is a standard for passing EAP packets over an 802.11 wireless network using a protocol called EAP Encapsulation Over LANs (EAPOL). It establishes a framework that supports multiple authentication methods. IEEE 802.1x authenticates users, not machines.

              802.2

              IEEE 802.2 (IEEE Std. 802.2.1998) defines the LLC layer for the 802 family of standards.

              802.3

              IEEE 802.3 (IEEE Std. 802.3-2002) defines the MAC layer for networks that use CSMA/CA. Ethernet is an example of such a network.

              802.11

              IEEE 802.11 (IEEE Std. 802.11-1999) is a medium access control (MAC) and physical layer (PHY) specification for wireless connectivity for fixed, portable, and moving stations within a local area. It uses direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) in the 2.4 GHz ISM band and supports raw data rates of 1 and 2Mbps. It was formally adopted in 1997 but has been mostly superseded by 802.11b.

              IEEE 802.11 is also used generically to refer to the family of IEEE standards for wireless local area networks.

              802.11b

              IEEE 802.11b (IEEE Std. 802.11b-1999) is an enhancement of the initial 802.11 PHY to include 5.5 Mbps and 11 Mbps data rates. It uses direct sequence spread spectrum (DSSS) or frequency hopping spread spectrum (FHSS) in the 2.4 GHz ISM band as well as complementary code keying (CCK) to provide the higher data rates. It supports data rates ranging from 1 to 11 Mbps.

              802.11e

              IEEE 802.11e is a developing IEEE standard for MAC enhancements to support QoS. It provides a mechanism to prioritize traffic within 802.11. It defines allowed changes in the Arbitration Interframe Space, a minimum and maximum Contention Window size, and the maximum length (in kĩsec) of a burst of data.

              IEEE 802.11e is still a draft IEEE standard (most recent version is D5.0, July 2003). A currently available subset of 802.11e is the Wireless Multimedia Enhancements (WME) standard.

              802.11f

              IEEE 802.11f (IEEE Std. 802.11f-2003) is a standard that defines the inter access point protocol (IAPP) for access points (wireless hubs) in an extended service set (ESS). The standard defines how access points communicate the associations and reassociations of their mobile stations.

              802.11g

              IEEE 802.11g (IEEE Std. 802.11g-2003) is a higher speed extension (up to 54 Mbps) to the 802.11b PHY, while operating in the 2.4 GHz band. It uses orthogonal frequency division multiplexing (OFDM). It supports data rates ranging from 1 to 54 Mbps.

              802.11i

              IEEE 802.11i is a developing IEEE standard for security in a wireless local area network (WLAN). It defines enhancements to the MAC Layer to counter the some of the weaknesses of WEP. 802.11i will incorporate 802.1x and stronger encryption techniques, such as Advanced Encryption Standard (AES).

              IEEE 802.11i is still a draft IEEE standard (most recent version is D5.0, August 2003). A currently available subset of 802.11i is the Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) standard.

              802.1Q

              IEEE 802.1Q is the IEEE standard for Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) specific to wireless technologies. (See http://www.ieee802.org/1/pages/802.1Q.html.) The standard addresses the problem of how to break large networks into smaller parts to prevent broadcast and multicast data traffic from consuming more bandwidth than is necessary. 802.11Q also provides for better security between segments of internal networks. The 802.1Q specification provides a standard method for inserting VLAN membership information into Ethernet frames.
              Model General
              Question How do I use the D-Link Knowledge Base?
              Answer The D-Link knowledge base is an up-to-date information database that contains troubleshooting information, configuration steps, and installation procedures for D-Link products.

              Step 1 On the left side, select the first part of the D-Link product (i.e. if the product is a DI-624 select DI) using the drop-down list with the text Select.



              Step 2 On the left side, select the second part of the D-Link product (i.e. if the product is a DI-624 select 624) using the drop down list with the text Select One....



              Step 3 On the left side, below the drop-down lists, click the Go button.



              Step 4 The Brain Tree, or list of folders, will be displayed for the product that you selected. Each product will have a thumbnail, or small picture, of the product. Left-click the product thumbnail once to visit the support page for that product.



              If there are a lot of folders for the product, then scroll bars will be present. To scroll up click . To scroll down click . To scroll to the left click . To scroll to the right click .

               
              Scrolled to top (left) and scrolled to bottom (right).


              FAQs are arranged into folders for easy navigation. To expand, or view, FAQs in a folder click the plus sign next to the folder that you wish to view FAQs in.



              Once the folder has been expanded you may view FAQs within that folder by clicking on the FAQ. To collapse, or close, the folder click the minus sign.



              The FAQ will then be displayed to the right.



              To print the FAQ click the printer icon at the top.

              If you would like to provide feedback on the FAQ select No using the radio buttons next to Was this information helpful? and type your comments in the text box below How can we improve it?. Click Submit to send your comments.



              Note: We do not reply to these comments. However, we do read them and use your suggestions to improve our site. If you would like to receive a response to a question please go to http://support.dlink.com/contact/ and select the appropriate department to contact.

              To select another product click Go to the bottom left side (or scroll down if applicable).

              Model General
              Question Are there Windows 64-bit drivers for my D-Link product?
              Answer Unfortunately, at this time there are no Windows 64-bit drivers.
              Model General
              Question What D-Link products have GPL Open Source code available for download?
              Answer In compliance with the General Public License, D-Link provides Open Source code for the following products. For a complete FTP folder listing of all products with GPL Open Source code, please visit ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/.

              For more information on Open Source, please visit http://www.opensource.org/.

              Product GPL Download
              DI-624M (updated 10-12-06) ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/DI-624M/
              DI-624S ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/DI-624S/
              DIR-130 ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/DIR-130/
              DIR-330 ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/DIR-330/
              DIR-450 ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/DIR-450/
              DSM-120 ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/DSM-120/
              DSM-320 ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/DSM-320/
              DSM-320RD ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/DSM-320RD/
              DSM-520 ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/DSM-520/
              DSM-602H ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/DSM-602H/
              DSM-604H ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/DSM-604H/
              DSM-G600_revA ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/DSMG-600_revA/
              DSM-G600_revB ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/DSMG-600_reB/
              DNS-323 ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/DNS-323/
              DWL-3150 ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/DWL-3150/
              KR-1 (updated 10-11-06) ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/KR1/
              VTA-VR ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/VTA-VR/
              VWR-VR ftp://ftp.dlink.com/GPL/VWR-VR/
              Model General
              Question What is 64-bit computing?
              Answer 32-bit refers to the number of bits (the smallest unit of information on a machine) that can be processed or transmitted in parallel, or the number of bits used for single element in a data format. The term when used in conjunction with a microprocessor indicates the width of the registers; a special high-speed storage area within the CPU. A 32-bit microprocessor can process data and memory addresses that are represented by 32 bits.

              64-bit therefore refers to a processor with registers that store 64-bit numbers. A generalization would be to suggest that 64-bit architecture would double the amount of data a CPU can process per clock cycle. Users would note a performance increase because a 64-bit CPU can handle more memory and larger files. One of the most attractive features of 64-bit processors is the amount of memory the system can support. 64-bit architecture will allow systems to address up to 1 terabyte (1000GB) of memory. In todayīs 32-bit desktop systems, you can have up to 4GB of RAM (provided your motherboard that can handle that much RAM), which is split between the applications and the operating system (OS).

              The majority of desktop computers today donīt even have 4GB of memory installed, and most small business and home desktop computer software do not require that much memory either. As more complex software and 3D games become available however, we could actually see this become a limitation, but for the average home user that is very far down the road indeed.

              Unfortunately, most benefits of a 64-bit CPU will go unnoticed without the key components of a 64-bit operating system and 64-bit software and drivers which are able to take advantage of 64-bit processor features. Additionally for the average home computer user, 32-bits is more than adequate computing power.

              When making the transition from 32-bit to 64-bit desktop PCs, users wonīt actually see Web browsers and word processing programs run faster. Benefits of 64-bit processors would be seen with more demanding applications such as video encoding, scientific research, searching massive databases; tasks where being able to load massive amounts of data into the systemīs memory is required.

              While talk of 64-bit architecture may make one think this is a new technology, 64-bit computing has been used over the past ten years in supercomputing and database management systems. Many companies and organizations with the need to access huge amounts of data have already made the transition to using 64-bit servers, since a 64-bit server can support a greater number of larger files and could effectively load large enterprise databases to into memory allowing for faster searches and data retrieval. Additionally, using a 64-bit server means organizations can support more simultaneous users on each server potentially removing the need for extra hardware as one 64-bit server could replace the use of several 32-bit servers on a network.

              It is in scientific and data management industries where the limitations of the 4GB memory of a 32-bit system have been reached and the need for 64-bit processing becomes apparent. Some of the major software developers in the database management systems business, such as Oracle and SQL Server, to name just two, offer 64-bit versions of their database management systems.

              While 64-bit servers were once used only by those organizations with massive amounts of data and big budgets, in the near future 64-bit enabled systems should be hitting the mainstream market. It is only a matter of time until 64-bit software and retail OS packages become available thereby making 64-bit computing an attractive solution for business and home computing needs.

              Source - www.webopedia.com
              Model General
              Question What D-Link products have drivers for Windows XP Professional x64 Edition?
              Answer There are no official drivers available for D-Link products that are compatible at this time.
              Model General
              Question How do I check what service pack is installed on my Windows XP or 2000 computer?
              Answer You can use any of the below methods to check what service pack is installed:

            • About Windows
            • System Properties


              About Windows

              Step 1 Click Start > Run.



              Step 2 In the Run dialog type winver and press Enter.



              Step 3 The Service Pack number will be displayed on the second line in the parenthesis next to the version number.




              System Properties

              Step 1 Press the Window and Pause/Break keys together on your keyboard.

              Step 2 The Service Pack number will be displayed on the General tab in the System section of the System Properties window.

              • Model General
              Question How do I share a directory or printer in UNIX?
              Answer
              File Sharing

              If you were going to share the directory /home/tmp as a share named TMP, enter:

              net share TMP=c:/home/tmp
              Note: replace c with the drive letter that the directory is on.

              Printer Sharing

              If you were going to share the printer hplaser as a share named LASER, enter:

              net share LASER=hplaser /print
              Model General Adapter
              Question Why canīt I use a PCI NIC on a VIA chipset motherboard?
              Answer Although the VIA chipset is an Intel compatible product, it needs a patch program to allow the operating system to enable and optimize its functions. The most important function that will effect the PCI NIC is IRQ Routing. This patch allows you to assing the correct IRQ to invoke the function of NIC. You can download the patch program from VIAīs web site:

              http://www.via.com.tw/drivers/
              Model General Adapters
              Question Why does 100Mbps NIC have worse performance than a 10Mbps?
              Answer If the NIC is not defective and can be installed correctly on the operating system, it could be a wiring problem. 10Mbps NICs have more tolerance to signal noise than 100Mbps. 10Mbps can use CAT3 or CAT5 wire to connect, but 100Mbps requires a higher quality CAT5 wire.
              Model General Adapters
              Question How do I know if my network adapter is working or not?
              Answer Look at the card itself. If your computer is up and running and connected to a switch, hub or another computer directly with a crossover cable and the light is illuminated next to where the cable is plugged into it, then that is a good indicator of whether or not the card is working.

              Another good way to test the card is to assign an IP address to the card in the TCP/IP properties for the card in the Network Properties control panel. After you assign the card an IP address and a subnet mask, you can use the ping utility from a DOS prompt to test the card. If you get four replies when pinging, it is another very good sign that the card is functioning properly.

              Using the Ping command

              Step 1 Open the MS-DOS program on your computer.

              Step 2 From the default location, enter the word ping, a space and then the IP address of your network card. Hit the Enter key on your keyboard.

              A response of four replies indicates that the network card is properly installed and that TCP/IP is correctly bound to the card.

              Model General Adapters
              Question Do D-Link's PCI Network cards support IRQ sharing?
              Answer Yes, D-Link's PCI cards support IRQ sharing. To share an interrupt number for PCI devices, the following requirements must be met:

              1. The motherboard and its BIOS must support shared interrupts
              2. Both PCI devices must be able to share an interrupt

              If any of these requirements are not met then the NIC or another PCI device will not work properly.
              Model General Adapters
              Question What are the 100BASE-TX and 100BASE-FX cabling standards?
              Answer 100BASE-TX: Fast Ethernet for Category 5 UTP
              Max. Segment length: 100m
              Cable type: Catrgory 5 UTP cable using 22 or 24 AWG unshielded twisted-pair wire with an impedance of 100 ohms.
              Connectors: AT&T 258A RJ-45 connection, EIA/TIA-568B standard.

              100BASE-FX: Fast Ethernet for Fiber Optic cabling
              Max. Segment length: For two switches and using multimode fiber. 412m is alowed. The number is able to increase to 2Km if the link is full-duplex. For repeater connection, the length actually is depending on the type and number of repeaters used. For example, 320m is the maximum network diameter of the repeated segment for one Class II repeater.
              Cable type: 100BASE-FX physical layer borrows from FDDI Physical Layer Dependent standard. It uses multimode (62.5/125um) fiber cabling.
              Connectors: SC, MIC and ST. The ST connector appears to be the most popular now because of lower cost.
              Model General Adapters
              Question Is Auto-Negotiation a standard?
              Answer Auto-Negotiation is a technology standard that defined by the IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-T Working Group for a mechanism to adapt multi-speed network devices. Currently, the Auto-Negotiation mechanism is defined in Clause 28 of the D5 draft of the ANSI/IEEE Std 802.3 MAC Parameters, Physical Layer, Medium Attachment Units and Repeater for 100 Mb/s Operation. This draft has been approved by the IEEE 802.3 Working Group.
              Model General Adapters
              Question How does Parallel Detection operate?
              Answer Auto-Negotiation passes the signals presently on the receiver to the 100BASE-TX and 100BASE-T4 Link Monitor functions. If Auto-Negotiation finds that exactly one Link Monitor function shows that the link is good, then it can connect that technology to the media. Note, however, that this function is only carried out for 10BASE-T, 10BASE-TX, and 100BASE-T4. Future multi-mode devices will use Auto-Negotiation as the basis of automatic mode switching.

              Auto-Negotiation incorporates a modified 10BASE-T Link Integrity Test function as interoperate properly with installed 10BASE-T devices. The modifications ensure that Auto-Negotiation can control the function such that 10BASE-T devices are always correctly detected.
              Model General Adapters
              Question How does Auto-Negotiation operate?
              Answer An Auto-Negotiation device advertises its abilities and detects the abilities of the remote device by Fast Link Pulse. Once Auto-Negotiation has received the link deviceīs abilities in this way and it receives acknowledgment that its abilities have also been received by the link device, Auto-Negotiation compares the two sets of abilities and decides which technology to connect. This decision is based upon a preagreed priority of technologies. Auto-Negotiation attaches the highest performance common technology to the medium and becomes transparent until the link goes down or is reset.
              Model General Adapters
              Question What is the priority hierarchy of Auto-Negotiation?
              Answer 1. 100BASE-TX Full Duplex
              2. 100BASE-T4
              3. 100BASE-TX
              4. 10BASE-T Full Duplex
              5. 10BASE-T
              Model General Adapters
              Question What is Auto-Negotiation?
              Answer Auto-Negotiation is a mechanism that takes control of the cable when a connection is established to a network device.

              Auto-Negotiation detects the various modes that exist in the device on the other end of the wire, and advertises it own abilities to automatically configure the highest performance mode of interoperation.

              Auto-Negotiation acts like a rotary switch that automatically switches to the correct technology, such as 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 100BASE-T4, or a corresponding Full Duplex mode. Once the highest performance common mode is determined, Auto-Negotiation passes control of the cable to the appropriate technology and becomes transparent until the connection is broken.

              Auto-Negotiation leverages the proven link function of 10BASE-T to provide robust operation over Category 3, 4, or 5 Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP.)
              Model General Adapters
              Question Do D-Link network adapters support Sun Solaris?
              Answer D-Link NICs do not support Sun Solaris, with the exception of the DFE-500TX and DE-220. The PNP function of DE-220 has to be disabled and assigned a Free IO and IRQ. In Solaris, you need to use an NE2000 compatible driver to install. The DFE-500TX uses the DEC chipset, which Solaris has built-in.
              Model General Adapters
              Question Which of D-Linkīs network adapters support the Wake-On-Lan function?
              Answer D-Link now has five NICs that support WOL:
            • DFE-500TX rev E1
            • DFE-530TX+
            • DFE-538TX
            • DFE-540TX
            • DFE-550TX

              What is Wake On Lan?
              • Model General Adapters
              Question Why canīt I ping any other computers on the network?
              Answer Please do the following check to verify the cause of this problem:

              1. In Control Panel -> System -> Device Manager -> Network Adapters, check the NIC status. If the NIC has Question mark or Yellow ī ! ī mark, please remove existing driver and re-install it.

              2. In Control Panel -> Network -> TCP/IP, select Properties -> IP Address, make sure the IP address setting and subnet mask are suitable for your network environment.

              Note: There are three classes of IP address;
                Class A (255.0.0.0)
                Class B (255.255.0.0)
                Class C (255.255.255.0)
              Model General Adapters
              Question What can I do if my network adapter will not install in Windows 95 or 98?
              Answer Step 1 Restart the PC and press the F8 key. Select Safe Mode prompt.

              Step 2 Execute the diagnostic program from the D-Link driver disk. If the diagnostic program canīt find your NIC, please shutdown your PC, remove and re-insert the NIC into the PCI slot.

              Step 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2. If the program finds the NIC, please run the diagnostic adapter function to test whether the NIC is defective or not.

              Step 4 Restart the PC and go into Windows. The NIC should be detected.
              Model General Adapters
              Question I intend to call D-Link technical support for help. Specifically, what technical information will the Network Engineer (NE) need from me?

              Answer For FREE, 24/7 tech support, please call 1-877-45DLink (453-5465).

              The Network Engineer (NE) will ask you for the model number of the product you are calling about. This is very important since D-Link manufactures and supports many products. For instance, if you are calling about a DHN-910 Network-in-a-Box starter kit, you should tell the NE that you have a DHN-910 kit and then, if necessary, narrow the focus to the particular component in the kit, such as the DHN-520 card or the MidPoint Lite Internet connection sharing software.

              Next, the NE may ask you for the name and version number of the operating system your computer (or computers) are running on, e.g., Windows 98 First Edition or Second Edition, or perhaps Windows 2000. Depending upon which product you are calling about, the NE may ask you for the brand name and model number of your computer. In some cases, the NE may even ask you how old your computer is, or what brand and model of microprocessor your computer contains, e.g., Intel Pentium III, Intel Celeron, AMD K-6, etc.

              Note: If you do not have all of this information, the NE will still be able to help you.
              Model General Adapters
              Question How do I know if I have a Cardbus controller on my laptop?
              Answer Some of our PCMCIA Network adapters require the laptop to have a 32-bit PCMCIA slot. You can check to see if your computer has a 32-bit Cardbus card slot from Device Manager.

              Win 95/98/Me:
              Step 1 Right-Click My Computer and select Properties

              Step 2 Select the Device Manager tab and expand PCMCIA Sockets by clicking the plus sign

              Step 3 There must be a listing for Cardbus or the PCMCIA slot is only 16-bit.


              Win 2000/XP:
              Step 1 Right-Click My Computer and select Properties

              Step 2 Select Hardware and then click on Device Manager.

              Step 3 Expand PCMCIA Adapters by clicking the plus sign

              Step 4 There must be a listing for Cardbus or the PCMCIA slot is only 16-bit.

              Make sure your laptop has the latest BIOS. Check with the manufacturer for the latest BIOS upgrade.

              What D-Link adapters are 32-bit?
              Model General Adapters
              Question Why wonīt my computer boot up after installing your network adapter?
              Answer Problem:

              The reason could be that your computer is experiencing an IRQ (Interrupt Request) conflict, meaning, after the network adapter was physically installed in your computer it may have been assigned an IRQ that was already in use by another device. PCI cards can share IRQs for the most part, however, network adapters usually cause conflicts when sharing IRQs with other devices.

              The network adapter and the other device both try to get the attention or "interrupt" the processor (CPU) at the same time. This "confuses" the processor, and may cause it to lock up (freeze) or keep the computer from booting all the way up.

              Solution:

              The simplest way to try to fix this problem is to shut down your computer, unplug the power cord and move the network adapter to a different, available slot inside your computer.

              Reconnect the power cable to your computer and restart.
              Model General Adapters
              Question Which D-Link network adapters are 16-bit (PCMCIA) and 32-bit (Cardbus)?
              Answer
              16-Bit Adapters 32-Bit Adapters
              DE-660CT DFE-660TX
              DFE-650TX DFE-680TX/TXD
              DFE-670TXD DFE-690TXD
              DWL-650 (rev. A-J, P) DWL-650 (rev. K-M)
              DWL-650+
              DWL-650H
              DWL-A650
              DWL-G650
              DWL-AG650
              DWL-AB650

              How do I know if I have a Cardbus controller?
              Model General Adapters
              Question When installing the drivers for a network adapter, my computer asks for the Windows 95/98/98se disk, I put the disk in but Windows cannot locate the files it needs. Where can I find these Windows files?
              Answer If your computer asks for files from the Windows disk, you can type in a few paths that may possibly help point Windows to the location of the files it needs. With the Windows disk in your computer, some of the possible paths to the system folder are:
              • d:\windows
              • d:\windows\system
              • d:\windows\options\cabs
              • d:\win98
              • d:\win98\system
              • d:\win98\options\cabs
              NOTE: d: is a common CD drive letter, yours may be different (e.g. e:\). Make sure to use the exact drive letter that is assigned to your computerīs CD drive. It is also possible to look on the c:\ drive as well using the same exact paths listed above.
              Model General Adapters
              Question What is Wake On Lan (WOL)?
              Answer Wake On LAN provides remote wake-up technology which enables systems to be remotely powered "on" for off hours tasks. A result of the Intel-IBM Advanced Manageability Alliance and part of the Wired for Management Baseline Specification, this technology helps save time on automated software installations, upgrades, disk backups and virus scans. Wake on LAN technology resides in a managed network adapter and on the system motherboard.

              Which of D-Linkīs NICs support the Wake-On-Lan function?

              Source
              Model General Adapters
              Question Why am I prompted during installation that the driver for my D-Link adapter is not digitally signed?
              Answer The drivers are compatible with Windows. The drivers are not digitally signed and certified by Microsoft to be guaranteed compatible with Windows. D-Link has tested and has determined that the drivers are compatible with Windows.

              Click Continue Anyway to install the drivers.




            • Click here for general information on Windows driver signing
            • Click here for information on WindowsŪ XP driver signing
            • Click here for information on WindowsŪ Server 2003 driver signing
              • Model General Adapters / General Routers / General Hubs / General Networking / General Switches / General USB / General Video / General Wireless
              Question Can I still return my D-Link product after I remove the UPC code?
              Answer If you remove the UPC code from the box for a rebate, most stores will not allow you to return, exchange, or refund the product. It is the job of the consumer to make sure the product is functioning while in the return period from the point of purchase and before removing the UPC code. If you remove the UPC code D-Link would still be happy to cover the product under the warranty, which does not include refunds or exchanges, only replacement units. Please take a look at the warranty information included in the manual with the D-Link product.
              Model General Adapters / General Wireless
              Question What Operating Systems support my AirPlus and AirPro Wireless Adapters?
              Answer
              D-Link AirPlus / AirPro Wireless Adapters
              Wireless Adapter Operating System Driver Version Installation Procedure
              802.11B+
              DWL-650+ Windows 98/ME/2000/XP 2.2B Software First
              DWL-520+ Windows 98/ME/2000/XP 2.2B Software First
              802.11A
              DWL-A650 Windows 98FE N/A No 98 First Edition Support
              DWL-A650 Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP 041102F Hardware First
              DWL-A520 Windows 98FE N/A No 98 First Edition Support
              DWL-A520 Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP 041102F Hardware First
              802.11A/B
              DWL-AB650 Windows 98FE N/A No 98 First Edition Support
              DWL-AB650 Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP 1.3 Software First
              DWL-AB520 Windows 98FE N/A No 98 First Edition Support
              DWL-AB520 Windows 98SE/ME/2000/XP 1.3 Software First
              Model General DSL
              Question What D-Link DSL products support RFC?
              Answer DSL-100D - supports RFC-1483, 1577, and 2364
              DSL-200 - supports RFC-1483 and 2364
              DSL-300 - supports RFC-1483
              DSL-500 - supports RFC-1483, 1577, 2364, and 2516
              Model General Gateway
              Question What is the default IP address of my D-Link Router?
              Answer
              D-Link Default IP Addresses
              Device IP Address Configuration Default Username Default Password
              DI-604 192.168.0.1 web based admin blank
              DI-614+ 192.168.0.1 web based admin blank
              DI-704 192.168.0.1 web based admin blank
              DI-704P 192.168.0.1 web based admin blank
              DI-707 192.168.0.1 web based admin blank
              DI-711b 192.168.0.1 web based admin blank
              DI-713 192.168.0.1 web based admin blank
              DI-713P 192.168.0.1 web based admin blank
              DI-714 192.168.0.1 web based admin blank
              DI-714P+ 192.168.0.1 web based admin blank
              DI-754 192.168.0.1 web based admin blank
              DI-764 192.168.0.1 web based admin blank
              DI-804 192.168.0.1 web based admin blank
              DI-804V 192.168.0.1 web based admin blank
              DFL-300 192.168.1.1 web based admin admin
              Model General Gateway
              Question Can I connect a hub or switch to my D-Link router to add more computers?
              Answer Yes. You can connect a hub or switch to any of the LAN ports to expand your network. Generally you will connect a straight-through cable from one of the LAN ports of the router to the uplink port of your hub and switch. If you do not have an uplink port, then use a cross-over cable. D-Link routers do not have an uplink port.

              Whatīs the difference between a crossover cable and a straight-through cable?
              Model General Gateway
              Question What is DMZ?
              Answer Demilitarized Zone:
              In computer networks, a DMZ (demilitarized zone) is a computer host or small network inserted as a neutral zone between a companyīs private network and the outside public network. It prevents outside users from getting direct access to a server that has company data. (The term comes from the geographic buffer zone that was set up between North Korea and South Korea following the UN police action in the early 1950s.) A DMZ is an optional and more secure approach to a firewall and effectively acts as a proxy server as well.

              In a typical DMZ configuration for a small company, a separate computer (or host in network terms) receives requests from users within the private network for access to Web sites or other companies accessible on the public network. The DMZ host then initiates sessions for these requests on the public network. However, the DMZ host is not able to initiate a session back into the private network. It can only forward packets that have already been requested.

              Users of the public network outside the company can access only the DMZ host. The DMZ may typically also have the companyīs Web pages so these could be served to the outside world. However, the DMZ provides access to no other company data. In the event that an outside user penetrated the DMZ hosts security, the Web pages might be corrupted but no other company information would be exposed. D-Link, a leading maker of routers, is one company that sells products designed for setting up a DMZ.

              How do I open DMZ host on my DI-704P (Silver Case) router?

              How do I open DMZ host on my DI-604, DI-614+, DI-754, DI-764, or DI-624 router?
              Model General Hubs
              Question Can I use an AUI cable to connect two Hubs together through their AUI ports?
              Answer No, you cannot link hubs through their AUI ports.
              Model General Hubs
              Question What is collision domain?
              Answer As defined by the IEEE 802.3 Standard, a single CSMA/CD network. If two or more MACs are within the same collision domain and both transmit at the same time, a collision will occur. MACs separated by a repeater are within the same collision domain. MACs separated by a bridge are within different collision domains.
              Model General Hubs
              Question What are the differences between Class-I and Class-II Hubs?
              Answer The two types of hubs are defined by the IEEE802.3u Standard for use in a Fast Ethernet collision domain. The major difference is that only one Class-I hub can be used in a collision domain, and up to two Class-II hubs can be used in a collision domain with uplink.
              Model General Linux
              Question Which D-Link network adapters are supported in Linux?
              Answer If you are just getting started with Linux, please visit the site below.

              JustLinux.com

              For a list of wireless adapters with Linux drivers, read here.

              Note:

              1. These modules are found on most new distributions of Linux.

              2. Most PCMCIA drivers are found in pcmcia_cs 3.1.24 which can be found at:

              http://www.scyld.com/network/ethercard.html

              3. DFE-530TX+ revision D1 and D2 must have the driver compiled from the floppy.


              4. In Red Hat 7.1 and 7.2 the tree to the modules is /lib/modules/2.4.**-**/drivers/net

              5. The D-Link DFE-538TX is not a D-Link US product. Please contact the D-Link office in the region of purchase for additional support.

              6. D-Link does not have any support for USB network adapters on a Linux platform.

              How to install the DFE-530TX+ in Red Hat 6.2 and 7.0.

              The following adapters have Linux support included on the shipping driver disk.
              • DE-528CT
              • DFE-500TX
              • DFE-530TX+
              • DFE-538TX
              • DFE-550TX
              Before you install, make sure the network card has been inserted in a PCI slot that supports bus mastering and that bus mastering has been enabled in the BIOS.

              The modules for the network adapters listed below are included in most distributions of Linux. The modules are located at /lib/modules/*.*.**-**/net, *.*.**-** being the kernel that you are currently using.

              Desktop Adapters                             *.*.**-** = Kernel version (ie: 2.2.12-20)

              D-Link Adapter Linux module Module Location
              DE-220 ne.o lib/modules/*.*.**/net
              DE-528CT ne2k-pci.o lib/modules/*.*.**/net
              DFE-500TX tulip.o lib/modules/*.*.**/net
              DFE-530TX via-rhine.o lib/modules/*.*.**/net
              DFE-530TX+ Rev. A, B, C rtl8139.o lib/modules/*.*.**/net
              DFE-530TX+ Rev. D1, D2 See Note Above lib/modules/*.*.**/net
              DFE-538TX rtl8139.o lib/modules/*.*.**/net
              DFE-540TX tulip.o lib/modules/*.*.**/net
              DFE-550TX dlh5x.c Compile from Driver Disk
              DFE-570TX tulip.o /lib/modules/*.*.**/net


              Portable Adapters                             *.*.**-** = Kernel version (ie: 2.2.12-20)

              D-Link Adapter Linux module Module Location
              DE-650 pcnet_cs.o lib/modules/*.*.**/pcmcia
              DFE-650 pcnet_cs.o lib/modules/*.*.**/pcmcia
              DFE-650TX pcmcia_cs.o lib/modules/*.*.**/pcmcia
              DFE-660TX tulip_cb.o lib/modules/*.*.**/pcmcia
              DFE-670TXD tulip_cb.o lib/modules/*.*.**/pcmcia


              Model General Multimedia
              Question Does D-Link support the DSC Pro 640 digital camera supplied by Earthlink?
              Answer No. D-Link does not make or support this camera. The camera is manufactured by Polaroid. Please contact Polaroid or Earthlink for support.
              Model General Networking
              Question What is MTU ?
              Answer A maximum transmission unit (MTU) is the largest size packet or frame, specified in octets (eight-bit bytes), that can be sent in a packet or frame-based network such as the Internet. The Internetīs Transmission Control Protocol uses the MTU to determine the maximum size of each packet in any transmission. Too large an MTU size may mean retransmissions if the packet encounters a router that canīt handle that large a packet. Too small an MTU size means relatively more header overhead and more acknowledgements that have to be sent and handled. Most computer operating systems provide a default MTU value that is suitable for most users. In general, Internet users should follow the advice of their Internet service provider (ISP) about whether to change the default value and what to change it to.

              In Windows 95, the default MTU was 1500 octets (eight-bit bytes), partly because this is the Ethernet standard MTU. The Internet de facto standard MTU is 576, but ISPs often suggest using 1500. If you frequently access Web sites that encounter routers with an MTU size of 576, you may want to change to that size. (Apparently some users find that changing the setting to 576 improves performance and others do not find any improvement.) The minimum value that an MTU can be set to is 68.

              For more recent Windows systems, the operating system is able to sense whether your connection should use 1500 or 576 and select the appropriate MTU for the connection.
              Model General Networking
              Question What is Stateful Packet Inspection?
              Answer When an IP packet arrives at the firewall, the firewall should decide to forward the packet to the internal network. To accomplish this the firewall looks to see what connections were open from the internal network. If the packet applies to the connection it will be allowed through, otherwise the IP packet will be rejected. This is called Stateful Packet Inspection.

              Stateful Packet Inspection
              Model General Networking
              Question What is a VPN?
              Answer Short for Virtual Private Network. A VPN allows two or more private networks to be connected publicly. This is done by creating a securely encrypted tunnel. This will allow users to exchange critical information remotely and a way to manage their network.

              How does a VPN work?
              Model General Networking
              Question What is IPSEC?
              Answer Short for IP Security. IPsec is a set of protocols that creates encrypted tunnels (VPN). IPsec provides confidentiality, integrity, and authenticity using two protocols. These protocols are authentication header (AH) and encapsulation security payload (ESP).

              IPSEC
              Model General Networking
              Question What is PPTP?
              Answer Point-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP) is the technology that creates a Virtual Private Network (VPN). PPTP is to insure that messages are transmitted from one private network to another. Users can dial into their corporate network via the Internet with PPTP.

              More on PPTP

              All of D-Linkīs routers have PPTP pass-through.
              Model General Networking
              Question How can I find the IP address of my computer?
              Answer To find the IP address of my computer, please click on your operating system for instructions.

            • Windows 95, 98, and ME
            • Windows 2000 and XP
            • Macintosh 8.x and 9.x
            • Macintosh OS X
            • Linux



              Windows 95, 98, and ME

              Step 1 Click on Start, then click on Run.

              Step 2 The Run Dialogue Box will appear. Type winipcfg in the window as shown then click OK.



              Step 3 The IP Configuration window will appear, displaying your Ethernet Adapter Information.
            • Select your adapter from the drop down menu.
            • If you do not see your adapter in the drop down menu, your adapter is not properly installed.



              Step 4 After selecting your adapter, it will display your IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

              Step 5 Click OK to close the IP Configuration window.



              Windows 2000 and XP

              Step 1 Click on Start and select Run.

              Step 2 Type cmd then click OK.



              Step 3 From the Command Prompt, enter ipconfig. It will return your IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.



              Step 4 Type exit to close the command prompt.



              Macintosh 8.x and 9.x

              Step 1 Click on the Apple Menu>Control Panels>TCP/IP.

              Step 2 Select your ethernet adapter from the Connect Via drop-down menu.

              Step 3 Under Setup, select Using DHCP Server from the Configure drop-down menu, if connecting to a router DHCP server. This is the most common setting when using a router. In this configuration, your computer will be automatically assigned an IP address by the router.

              Step 4 You must reboot your computer to "renew" your IP address.





              Macintosh OS X

              Step 1 Click on Apple Menu>System Preferences>Network>TCP/IP.






              Linux

              Step 1 At the command line type /sbin/ifconfig and you will get a listing of information. Your IP is shown after inet addr.



              • Model General Networking
              Question How can I share a drive or folder on my Windows 2000 machine?
              Answer To share a drive or folder on your Windows 2000 machine, please follow steps below.

              Step 1 From the desktop, double-click on the My Computer icon.



              Step 2 In our example we will share the entire C: drive. If you want to share a specific folder, then double-click on the drive and locate the folder. Right-click on the drive or folder and select Sharing.



              Step 3 The Properties window will appear. Click on New Share.



              Step 4 Enter a name for your share. This will not rename the folder or drive. Click Permissions.



              Step 5 By default, Windows 2000 will give Everyone full rights to your share. To add or remove users and groups, click the Add or Remove button. If you use specific users, remember that the other users will have to log in their computer with the same username as assigned to your share. Click OK 3 times to save your share.



              Step 6 When you are back at My Computer, you should now have a hand icon under the drive or folder indicating that it is shared.

              Model General Networking
              Question If I want my money back from a purchase of a D-Link product, where can I get a refund?
              Answer Unfortunately D-Link does not offer refunds for any reason. No exceptions. Please contact your point-of-purchase for their refund policy. Refer to the warranty information included with your product for details.

              Note: If you purchased a product from D-Link Shop, then call 1-866-400-9049 for customer service.
              Model General Networking
              Question How do I enable or disable my Windows XP Firewall?
              Answer Note: If you are connected behind a router, it is recommended that you disable this firewall.

              Step 1 Click Start and select Control Panel.



              Step 2 Select Network and Internet Connections.



              Step 3 Select Network Connections.



              Step 4 The Network Connections window will open. Right-click the network adapter that is connected to the internet and select Properties.



              Step 5 Click the Advanced tab. Check the Internet Connection Firewall checkbox and then click Settings. If you want to disable the firewall, then uncheck the box and click OK.



              Step 6 Select the Security Logging tab and make sure Log dropped packets is selected. This will log any dropped packets or attacks.



              Step 7 The ICMP tab allows you to allow/deny others the ability to ping your computer, among other options. To view a description of an option, highlight it and view the Description field at the bottom of the window.



              Step 8 The Services tab allows you to allow incoming ports to run applications. Common applications are a FTP server, web server, and programs such as MSN Messanger and PCAnywhere. To add a service not in the list, click Add at the bottom and enter the port information.



              Step 9 Click OK twice to save settings.

            • What port or ports do I have to open for my application to work with my firewall?
              • Model General Networking
              Question What are the different subnet classes?
              Answer Subnets are divided into classes. Each class contains a maximum number of IP addresses that can be assigned.

              IP Address Classes
              Class Address Range Allocation
              Class A 1-126.xx.xx.xx 16 million host network
              Class B 128-191.xx.xx.xx 65536 host network
              Class C 192-223.xx.xx.xx 256 host network
              Class D 224-239.xx.xx.xx Multicast
              Class E 240-255.xx.xx.xx Reserved
              Model General Networking
              Question How do I release/renew my IP address?
              Answer Select your operating system:



              Windows NT

              Step 1 Click Start > Run.

              Step 2 In the Run window type command and press Enter.

              Step 3 Type ipconfig /release to release the IP address and then press Enter.

              Step 4 Type ipconfig /renew to renew the IP address and then press Enter.

              Note: For a listing and explanation of other IP Configuration Utility commands type ipconfig /help and press Enter.



              Windows 95, 98, Me

              Step 1 Click Start > Run.

              Step 2 In the Run window type winipcfg and press Enter.

              Step 3 At the top of the IP Configuration Utility select your Ethernet adapter using the drop-down list.

              Step 4 At the bottom, click Release. The IP address should be 0.0.0.0 or 169.254.x.x. Click Renew. You should now receive a new IP address.

              Step 5 Click OK to close the window.



              Windows 2000, XP

              Step 1 Click Start > Run.

              Step 2 In the Run window type cmd and press Enter.

              Step 3 Type ipconfig /release to release the IP address and then press Enter.

              Step 4 Type ipconfig /renew to renew the IP address and then press Enter.

              Note: For a listing and explanation of other IP Configuration Utility commands type ipconfig /help and press Enter.
              Model General Networking
              Question How do I install Client for NetWare Networks and the LPR print utility on Windows 98?
              Answer Step 1 Go to Start>Settings>Control Panel and double-click on the Network icon.

              Step 2 In the Network control panel, click on the Add button.



              Step 3 The Select Network Component Type window will open. Select Client and click the Add button.




              Step 4 In the Select Network Client window, first select Microsoft under the Manufacturers window and then select Client for Netware Networks. Click OK. The window will close and bring you back to the Network control panel window. You may be prompted for the Windows CD. If so, browse to the Win98 folder on the Windows 98 CD. Highlight the Win 98 folder and click OK.


              Step 5 Now, add the LPR utility. Put the DP-313 CD into to your CD drive. The Network window should still be open but if you have closed this window you can open it again by going to Start>Settings>Control Panel and double-clicking on the Network icon.  Notice that Client for NetWare Networks has been added in the window of the Configuration tab. Click on the Add button in the Network to add the LPR utility from the DP-313 CD.

              Again select Client in the Select Network Component Type window and click the Add button.

              It doesnīt matter what is selected in the Select Network Client window because you will be installing LPR from the DP-313 CD. Click Have Disk.

              When the Install From Disk window comes up, click on the Browse button.

              When the Open window comes up, select your CD-ROM drive from the Drives: drop-down menu. Your CD-ROM drive can be identified by the drive letter with the disk-shaped icon. 
              Next, double-click on the lpr folder. Under the File name: window lpr.inf will be displayed verifying that the .inf file was found.
              Click OK.

              The Install from Disk window will open again. You can see that in the Copy manufacturerīs files from: window that E:\LPR, the correct folder is selected. Click OK.

              This will bring up the Select Network Client window again. This time click OK. This will bring you back to the Network control panel. Once back at the Network control panel, click OK to close it. Your computer will make some configuration changes and you will possibly be prompted for the Windows 98 CD. If so, browse to the Win98 folder on the CD and click OK. When prompted to Restart your computer now?, click Yes.

              If you followed this link to install the DP-313 wireless print server, you can continue the installation by clicking on the link below.

              This link will take you to the second section of installing the DP-313:

              Installing and Configuring PS-Admin

              Model General Networking
              Question I want to share my C:\ drive. How is that done?
              Answer Step 1 From the main desktop screen, double click on My Computer.

              Step 2 Right click on the drive you want to share (e.g. C:).

              Step 3 Click on the Sharing tab.

              Step 4 Click the Shared As radio button.

              Step 5 Click OK all the way back to the desktop screen. Your drive is now shared.

              For more information on networking please try the following links:


              Model General Networking
              Question What type of cable do I use?
              Answer The following connections require a Crossover Cable:
              Computer to Computer
              Computer to Uplink Port
              Computer to Access Point
              Computer to Print Server
              Computer/XBOX/PS2 to DWL-810
              Computer/XBOX/PS2 to DWL-900AP+
              Uplink Port to Uplink Port (hub/switch)
              Normal Port to Normal Port (hub/switch)

              The following connections require a Straight Cable:
              Computer to Residential Gateway/Router
              Computer to Normal Port (hub/switch)
              Access Point to Normal Port (hub/switch)
              Print Server to Normal Port (hub/switch)
              Uplink Port to Normal Port (hub/switch)

              Rule of Thumb:
              "If there is a link light, the cable is right."

              Whats the difference?
              Crossover Cable vs. Straight Cable
              Model General Networking
              Question What IP address can be used as "private"?
              Answer The following paregraph is quoted from RFC1918: Address Allocation for Private Internet:

              Private Address Space:

              The Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) has reserved the following three blocks of the IP address space for private internets:

                10.0.0.0 - 10.255.255.255 (10/8 prefix)
                172.16.0.0 - 172.31.255.255 (172.16/12 prefix)
                192.168.0.0 - 192.168.255.255 (192.168/16 prefix)

              You can select one of the IP address listed above. For example, you can use the 192.168.100.x/255.255.255.0 for your private use. Thatīs why DP602/802īs default IP address is 192.168.100.1.

              More Information on RFC1918: Address Allocation for Private Internets, visit http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1918.html
              Model General Networking
              Question What is NAT?
              Answer NAT stands for Network Address Translator. It is proposed and described in RFC-1631 and is used for solving the IP address depletion problem. Basically, each NAT box has a table consisting of pairs of local IP addresses and globally unique addresses, by which the box can "translate" the local IP addresses to global address and vice versa. Simply put, it is a method of connecting multiple computers to the Internet (or any other IP network) using one IP address.

              D-Linkīs broadband routers (ie: DI-604) support NAT. With proper configuration, multiple users can access the Internet using a single account via the NAT device.

              For more information on RFC-1631: The IP Network Address Translator (NAT), visit http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1631.html
              Model General Networking
              Question How do I connect two computers without buying a hub?
              Answer You can connect two computers directly to each other by using what is called a crossover cable. This type of cable can be readily purchased at most computer supply stores.

              Just connect your network cards directly with a crossover cable and configure your network.

              You can also connect 2 or more computers together using wireless adapters without an access point. You will need to set them to Ad-Hoc mode.

              Learn Networking basics here

              Whatīs the difference between a crossover cable and a straight cable?
              Model General Networking
              Question How do I create a network boot disk for installing applications over the wire?
              Answer NOTE: You will need the DOS drivers for your network adapter and access to a computer running Windows NT.

              Step 1 Open the īNetwork Client Administratorī in administrative tools on the NT computer. Create the Network Client Boot Disk, choosing any network card on the list.

              Step 2 In the NET directory on the boot disk you created, delete the existing DOS driver and copy your DOS driver to this directory.

              Step 3 Next edit the A:\NET\system.ini file. In the line [Network Drivers] locate the line īnetcard=ī and replace whatever is after the ī=ī sign with the file name of the driver you used in the previous step.

              Step 4 In the same directory where you found the DOS driver for your NIC there should also be a sample file called protocol.ini. This directory contains the driver name and any other commands necessary to initialize the NIC.

              Step 5 Edit the file A:\NET\protocol.ini by locating the stanza that contains the line īDriverName=ī and replace all of the lines in that stanza with the lines from the sample file. DO NOT CHANGE the [stanza name].
              Model General Networking
              Question What is polarity reversal?
              Answer A UTP cable consists of 4 pairs of twisted-pair cable, in which one pair of wiring is used to transmit data and one pair is used to receive data. To resist the disturbance, each pair send both "positive" and "negative" signals simultaneously, denoted as TX+ and TX-, as depicted below:

              1 TX+ ---> RX+ 3
              2 TX- ---> RX- 6
              3 RX+ <--- TX+ 1
              4
              5
              6 RX- <--- TX- 2
              7
              8

              Note that TX+ (1) connects to RX+ (3) and TX- (2) connects to RX-(6).

              If the cable is connected as the following way:
              2 TX- ---> RX+ 3
              1 TX+ ---> RX- 6

              We say it is polarity reversal, because the signal received from the other side is reversed.
              Model General Networking
              Question Why canīt I browse any computers on the network?
              Answer This FAQ is for Windows 95, 98, and Me only.

              Please perform the following procedure to correct the problem:

              Step 1 In Control Panel > System > Device Manager > Network Adapters, check the status of the network adapter. If the status is OK, go to step 2. If not, please remove the existing driver and re-install it.

              Step 2 In Control Panel > Network, check the protocol you installed. Is the protocol the same as other computers (I.E. NETBEUI)? If not, please change the protocol to match the other systems on the network.

              Step 3 In Control Panel > Network, click File and Print Sharing and select I want to be able to give other access to my files. The item File and Print Sharing for Microsoft Networks will be added into the list of network protocols.

              Step 4 Restart the PC, then you should be able to browse the other computers on the network.
              Model General Networking
              Question How do I extract or unzip files that I download from your Support site?
              Answer Note: If the file you are trying to extract has a .bin extention, the file is already unzipped.

              Download the latest version of WinZip at Winzip.com. You may use the evaluation version. Please check with WinZip for terms of use.

              Step 1 After installing WinZip, double-click on the file that you downloaded from our support site.



              Step 2 WinZip will open. Click I Agree.



              Step 3 The contents of the .ZIP file will be displayed. In our example, there are two. Click Extract at the top.



              Step 4 You will need to select the destination of the zipped files. Usually choose your C-Drive or select a folder. Make sure you select All Files under the heading Files on the left side. Also select Use Folder Names. When you have selected the destination location, click Extract.



              Step 5 The files will then copy to the destination location. Once there is a green dot in the lower right corner, the files are done extracting. You may now close WinZip.

              Note: The above files are just an example. The contents of your ZIP file may vary.
              Model General Networking
              Question How do I statically assign an IP address to my computer when using a D-Link router?
              Answer This FAQ will explain how to statically or manually enter your network settings for your computer when being used behind a D-Link router. Make sure you know the IP address of the router. By default, it is 192.168.0.1.

              Windows 98/ME
              Windows 2000
              Windows XP
              Macintosh


              Windows 98 and ME

              Step 1 From the desktop, right-click on the Network Neighborhood icon (Win ME - My Network Places) and select Properties.



              Highlight TCP/IP and click the Properties button. If you have more than 1 adapter, then there will be a TCP/IP "Binding" for each adapter. Highlight TCP/IP > (your network adapter) and then click Properties.



              Step 2 Click Specify an IP address.

              Enter in an IP address that is on the same subnet as the LAN IP address on your router. Example: If the routerīs LAN IP address is 192.168.0.1, make your IP address 192.168.0.X where X is a number between 2 and 99. Make sure that the number you choose is not in use on the network.

              Step 3 Click on the Gateway tab.



              Enter the LAN IP address of your router here (192.168.0.1). Click Add when finished.

              Step 4 Click on the DNS Configuration tab.



              Click Enable DNS. Type in a Host (can be any word). Under DNS server search order, enter the LAN IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Click Add.

              Step 5 Click OK twice. When prompted to reboot your computer, click Yes.

              After you reboot, the computer will now have a static, private IP address.


              Windows 2000

              Step 1 Right-click on My Network Places and select Properties.



              Step 2 Right-click on the Local Area Connection which represents your network card and select Properties.



              Highlight Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) and click Properties.


              Click Use the following IP address and enter an IP address that is on the same subnet as the LAN IP address on your router. Example: If the routerīs LAN IP address is 192.168.0.1, make your IP address 192.168.0.X where X is a number between 2 and 99. Make sure that the number you choose is not in use on the network.

              Set Default Gateway the same as the LAN IP address of your router (192.168.0.1).

              Set Primary DNS the same as the LAN IP address of your router (192.168.0.1).

              Secondary DNS is not needed or enter a DNS server from your ISP.

              Click OK twice. You may be asked if you want to reboot your computer. Click Yes.


              Windows XP

              Step 1
              Click on Start > Control Panel > Network and Internet Connections > Network connections.

              Step 2 See               Step 2 for Windows 2000 and continue from there.
              Model General Networking
              Question How can I disable UPnP™ on my computer?
              Answer
              Disable UPnP

              Select your operating system:

            • Windows Me
            • Windows XP


              Windows Me

              Step 1 Click Start > Settings > Control Panel.

              Step 2 Double-click Add/Remove Programs.

              Step 3 Click the Windows Setup tab and then double-click Communications.

              Step 4 Uncheck Universal Plug and Play.


              Windows XP

              Step 1 Click Start > Control Panel.



              Step 2 Double-click Add/Remove Programs.



              Step 3 Click Add/Remove Windows Components on the left side.



              Step 4 Please wait while the list of Windows Components loads.



              Step 5 Scroll down to Networking Services. Select Network Services and click Details.



              Step 6 Uncheck Universal Plug and Play and then click OK.

              • Model General Networking
              Question How do I find the serial number for my D-Link external device?
              Answer On each D-Link external device, a sticker has been placed which contains the serial number for that product.

              • Some examples of the sticker are shown below:


                DWL-120
                DWL-900AP

                DSB-H7

              • The circled series of numbers is the Serial number.
                Do not confuse the serial number with the MAC address which is a 12 digit hexadecimal number.

              • If your D-Link product is a network device, there will also be a MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is shown above as the Node ID on the DWL-120 and is represented by a seperate sticker on the DWL-900AP, underneth the serial number sticker.

                For more information on the MAC address, click here.


              If for some reason the sticker is missing or unreadable and your serial number is not attainable, you can use your MAC address for registration purposes. You can find the MAC address by using one of the diagnostics built into your operating system.

              • For instructions on how to find a MAC address for a networking device please click the relevant operating system below.

                Note: Only networking devices that can be assigned an IP address will have a MAC address.

                Windows NT, 2000, XP

                Windows 98, 98SE, ME

              Model General Networking
              Question How do I find the serial number for my D-Link internal device?
              Answer If you still have the box, there is a sticker on the box with the letters "S/N" and a number or a combination of letters and numbers. Please use this information as the serial number when registering your product.

              If you do not have the box, on each D-Link Internal device, a sticker has been placed which contains the serial number for that product.

              • An example of the sticker is shown below:


                DFE-530TX+

              • The circled series of letters and numbers is the serial number, the second string, on top of the serial number, is the MAC address. If your D-Link product is a network device, there will also be a MAC(Media Access Control) address sticker.

                For more information on the MAC address, click here.


              If your product is already installed in your computer and your serial number is not accessible, you can use your MAC address for registration purposes. You can find the MAC address by using one of the diagnostics built into your operating system.

              Model General Networking
              Question How do I find the serial number for my network card?
              Answer Step 1 On the bottom of each of D-Linkīs Notebook input devices, a sticker has been placed which contains the serial number information for that product.

              • An example of the sticker is shown below:


                DWL-650H



              • The circled series of numbers is the Serial number.
                Do not confuse the serial number with the MAC address which is a 12 digit hexadecimal number.

              • If your D-Link product is a network device, there will also be a MAC (Media Access Control) address. The MAC address is shown above as the Node ID and is represented by a seperate sticker (underneith the serial number sticker).

                For more information on the MAC address, click here.


              Step 2 If your Notebook product is already installed in your computer and your serial number is not accessible, you can use your MAC address for authentication purposes. You can find the MAC address by using one of the diagnostics built into your operating system.

              Model General Networking
              Question How do I find the serial number of my D-Link product?
              Answer For information on locating the serial number for your D-Link product, please select your device from the categories below:


              Or from this table.

              Wireless
              Broadband
              Adapters
              Multimedia
              USB
              Hubs/Switches
              EXTERNAL
            • Access Point
            • USB Adapter

            • Gateway
            • DSL / Cable     modem
            • Internet Server
            • Print Server

            • MP3 Audio Player
            • USB CD-R/RW
            • USB FM RADIO
            • Remote Webcam
            • USB TV Tuner
            • USB Digital Camera
            • USB Digital Capture
            • Digital Camera / Webcam
            • KVM switch

            • Home Phoneline     Network
            • Ethernet Adapter
            • USB hub
            • USB Fax/Modem
            • USB to Parallel     cable
            • USB to Serial cable
            • 15ī USB A to B     cable

            • Switch
            • Hub
              • INTERNAL
            • Network Card
            • WiFi Card
            • DSL / Cable     modem
            • Network card
            • Gigabit LAN     adapter

            • FIREWIRE PCI CARD
            • Home Phoneline     Network
            • USB PCI controller
              • NOTEBOOK / PDA
            • PDA Card
            • Network card
            • Modem

              • Simply select the category of your D-Link product for information on how to find the serial number.
              Model General Networking
              Question How do I use the System Restore feature in Windows XP?
              Answer Go to Start>All Programs>Accessories>System Tools>System Restore.

              To create a restore point:

              Step 1 Click Create a restore point.

              Step 2 Enter a description (Windows automatically will enter time and date to name).

              Step 3 Click Create.

              To restore to an earlier point:

              Step 1 Click Restore my computer to an earlier time.

              Step 2 Click Next and choose the time and date you want to restore.

              Step 3 Click Next. Read instructions and click Next to restore.
              Model General Networking
              Question Whatīs the difference between a crossover cable and a straight cable?
              Answer The wiring in crossover and straight cables are different. The two types of cable have different purposes for different LAN configurations. EIA/TIA 568A/568B define the wiring standards and allow for two different wiring color codes as illustrated in the following diagram.



              *The wires with colored backgrounds may have white stripes and may be denoted that way in diagrams found elsewhere.

              How to tell straight cable from a crossover cable:
              The main way to tell the difference between the two cable types is to compare the wiring order on the ends of the cable. If the wiring is the same on both sides, it is straight cable. If one side has opposite wiring, it is a crossover cable.

              All you need to remember to properly configure the cables is the pinout order of the two cable ends and the following rules:
              A straight-thru cable has identical ends
              A crossover cable has different ends

              It makes no functional difference which standard you follow for straight cable ends, as long as both ends are the same. You can start a crossover cable with either standard as long as the other end is the other standard. It makes no functional difference which end is which.

              The order in which you pin the cable is important. Using a pattern other than what is specified in the above diagram could cause connection problems.

              When to use a crossover cable and when to use a straight cable:
              Computer to Computer – Crossover
              Computer to an normal port on a Hub/Switch – Straight
              Computer to an uplink port on a Hub/Switch - Crossover
              Hub/Switch uplink port to another Hub/Switch uplink port – Crossover
              Hub/Switch uplink port to another Hub/Switch normal port - Straight
              Model General Networking
              Question How do I find my network adapters Serial Number or MAC Address?
              Answer
              Step 1. If your D-Link product is an external device, locate the information sticker on the case of the product(see below). If your product is an internal device go to Step 2.
              • The sticker should look similar to this:

                DWL-120

              • The first circled string of letters and numbers is the MAC address and the second string of just numbers is the Serial number. For authentication purposes either string can be used.
              Step 2. If your D-Link product is an internal Network Interface Card (NIC) or other internal device that is already installed in a computer, you can find the MAC address by using one of the diagnostics built into your operating system.


              If you came here from the Zero Knowledge Registration page, Click Here to go back.
              Model General Networking
              Question How do I find the MAC/Adapter Address in Windows NT, 2000 and XP?
              Answer
              Please follow the steps below to find the MAC (Media Access Control) address of your D-Link network adapter.
              Step 1 Click on Start, and then click on Run.



              Step 2 The Run dialogue box will appear. Type cmd in the window as shown below.



              Step 3 A DOS window will appear. This is also commonly called a Command Prompt.



              Step 4 Type ipconfig /all at the command prompt. Hit the Enter key.



              Step 5 This window will now display your networking information. The MAC Address is listed under the heading Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection: and listed as the Physical Address.

              In this example, the MAC Address is 00-50-BA-D1-BA-71, which is the Physical Address of the NIC (Network Interface Card) card.

              To close the window when you are finished, type exit at the command prompt and hit the Enter key.


              Model General Networking
              Question How do I find the MAC/Adapter Address in Windows 98 or Windows Me?
              Answer
              Please follow the steps below to find the MAC (Media Access Control) address of your D-Link network adapter.


              Step 1 Click on Start, then click on Run.



              Step 2 The Run Dialogue Box will appear. Type winipcfg in the window as shown.



              Step 3 The IP Configuration window will appear, displaying your Ethernet Adapter Information.
            • Select your adapter from the drop down menu.
            • If you do not see your adapter in the drop down menu, your adapter is not properly installed.



              • Step 4 The MAC address is listed as Adapter Address in the IP Configuration properties for Windows 98 and Windows Me. The MAC Address in this example is 00-50-BA-E9-1B-4D.

              Model General Networking
              Question What is a MAC address?
              Answer The MAC (Media Access Control) address is a networking deviceīs unique hardware number. This allows for networking devices to identify each other on the network, whether it be on a private LAN or on the Internet.

              The MAC address is a 12 digit Hexadecimal number;
            • A-F
            • 0-9

              Note: A Mac address can also be referred to as a Physical Address, Hardware Address or Ethernet Address.

            • How do I find the MAC/Adapter Address in Windows 98 or Windows Me?
            • How do I find the MAC/Adapter Address in Windows NT, 2000 and XP?
            • Macintosh
              • Model General Networking
              Question What is DHCP and what does it do?
              Answer Short for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, a communication protocol that dynamically or automatically assigns IP addresses to devices located on the network. With DHCP a device can have different IP address every time it connects to a network. DHCP also supports static and dynamic IP addresses on the same network.

              DHCP uses the concept of a "lease" or amount of time that a given IP address will be valid for a computer. The lease time can vary depending on how long a user is likely to require the Internet connection at a particular location. Itīs especially useful in education and other environments where users change frequently. Using very short leases, DHCP can dynamically reconfigure networks in which there are more computers than there are available IP addresses.

              Source - Techtarget.com
              Model General Networking
              Question How do I start the required services for UPnP™?
              Answer Microsoft only offers UPnP in Windows Me and XP.

              Step 1 Right-click on My Computer and click Manage.



              Step 2 Double-click on Services and Applications.



              Step 3 Double-click on Services.



              Step 4 In the right pane, locate the service named Universal Plug and Play Device Host. Right-click the service and select Properties.



              Step 5 Make sure that the Startup type is set to Automatic.



              Step 6 Click Start and then click on OK once the service has finished starting.



              Step 7 Locate the service named SSDP Discovery Service, right-click the service, and select Properties.



              Step 8 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for the SSDP Discovery Service.

              Model General Networking
              Question How do I find out the MAC address of my network adapter in Macintosh OS X?
              Answer Step 1 From the Apple Menu click on System Preferences.



              Step 2 In System Preferences, click on the Network icon.



              Step 3 The MAC address will appear at the bottom of the window as the Ethernet Address.



            • What is a MAC Address?
              • Model General Networking
              Question How do I use the ping utility in Macintosh OS X?
              Answer The ping utility is a great tool for troubleshooting the network. This tool is now built into Macintosh OS X.

              Step 1 Click on Go > Applications > Utilities.

              Step 2 Click on Network Utility and then click the Ping tab.

              Step 3 Enter in the IP address you wish to ping in the first field provided. You can either select an unlimited number of pings or send a specific number of pings, then click the ping button.

              Step 4 If you receive bytes from... then the destination IP address was successfully hit. If you receive request time out then the destination IP address was not successfully pinged. If you receive destination host unreachable then you are not in the same subnet as the destination address and you will need to change your IP address to communicate with the destination address.



              Note: The Network Utility also allows you to perform other tasks such as Netstat, Traceroute, and Port Scanning.
              Model General Networking
              Question How do I configure TCP/IP on my Mac OS X in use with my D-Link router?
              Answer Step 1 From the Apple Menu click on System Preferences.



              Step 2 In System Preferences, click on the Network icon.

              Step 3 Verify that the Show field in Network is set to Built-In Ethernet. If it is not click on the drop down menu and select Built-In Ethernet. Click on the TCP/IP tab.



              Note: If you have a DSL connection using PPPoE you may have to click on the PPPoE tab and uncheck Connect Using PPPoE then go to the TCP/IP tab.

              Step 4 Click the drop down menu in the Configure field and select Using DHCP. Leave the DHCP Client ID, Domain Name Servers, and Search Domains all blank.



              Step 5: Click on Apply Now. You should now be able to obtain an IP address from your D-Link Broadband Router. If you do not see an IP address, reboot your computer.
              Model General Networking
              Question What is QoS Packet Scheduler?
              Answer Note: This only effects LAN traffic and not Internet access speeds. Also, in order for this to work, QoS Packet Scheduler must be supported on both sides of the connection.

              QoS Packet Scheduler is a method of network bandwidth management that can monitor the importance of data packets and depending upon the priority of the packet, give it higher or lower priority or bandwidth levels.

              Normally, if your systemīs LAN cards do not support QoS Packet Scheduling, you donīt have to worry about it. But, if you want to disable it, you can change it by doing the following.

              Step 1 Go to Start>Run and type gpedit.msc.

              Step 2 Expand Administrative Templates under Computer Configuration Expand Network.

              Step 3 Click QoS Packet Scheduler.

              Step 4 You will find an entry in QoS Packet Scheduler called Limit Reservable Bandwidth. Double-click it, enable it, and set it to 0%.

              Note: This is not available in Windows XP Home Edition.


              For more information, go to http://www.microsoft.com/hwdev/tech/network/qos/default.asp and Microsoft support.
              Model General Networking
              Question Where can I find a list of IRQs on my Windows 2000 computer?
              Answer To find the list of IRQs and devices that are being used:

              Step 1 Right-click on My Computer and select Manage.



              Step 2 In the left pane, click System Information>Hardware Resources>IRQs.



              Step 3 In the right pane, click the header IRQ Number. This will list the IRQs in order.
              Model General Networking
              Question How can I find what Operating System version and service pack I have?
              Answer Step 1 Right-click on My Computer and select Properties.

              Step 2 Click on the General tab. On the right side of the window, it will display the version of Windows you are running as well as the version of service pack.

              Model General Networking
              Question Where can I find the Device Manager in Windows 2000 and XP?
              Answer Windows XP users read here.

              Windows 2000:

              Step 1 From the desktop, right-click on My Computer. Select Properties.



              Step 2 Click the Hardware tab and then click on Device Manager.



              Step 3 Click View and select Devices by Type. This will now list all devices that are installed in your computer.



              Windows XP:

              Note: If you have enabled Classic View, the steps above (Windows 2000) will be the same.

              Step 1 Click on Start>Control Panel>Performance and Maintenance.

              Step 2 Click on System. Click the Harware tab and then click on Device Manager.

              Step 3 Click View and select Devices by Type. This will now list all devices that are installed in your computer.
              Model General Networking
              Question How do I manually configure my IP address in Macintosh?
              Answer
              Macintosh OS 7.5 to Macintosh OS 9.2


              Step 1 Go to Apple > Control Panels > and down to TCP/IP.

              Step 2 In the connect via field select Ethernet built-in, select manually in the configure field.

              Step 3 Type in your IP address, subnet mask, router address, and name server address in the boxes provided. Close out of the window making sure to select ok to save your changes.



              Macintosh OS X


              Step 1 Go to Apple > System Preferences > double-click on either of the Network icons.

              Step 2 The first configure field should read Ethernet built-in. The configure field under the TCP/IP tab should be set manually.

              Step 3 Type in your IP address, subnet mask, router address, and name server addressī in the boxes provided. Close out of the window making sure to select save to save your changes.
              Model General Networking
              Question How do I enable UPnP™ on my computer?
              Answer
              Enable UPnP

              Select your operating system:

            • Windows Me
            • Windows XP


              Windows Me

              Step 1 Click Start > Settings > Control Panel.

              Step 2 Double-click Add/Remove Programs.

              Step 3 Click the Windows Setup tab and then double-click Communications.

              Step 4 Check Universal Plug and Play.


              Windows XP

              Step 1 Click Start > Control Panel.



              Step 2 Double-click Add/Remove Programs.



              Step 3 Click Add/Remove Windows Components on the left side.



              Step 4 Please wait while the list of Windows Components loads.



              Step 5 Scroll down to Networking Services. Select Network Services and click Details.



              Step 6 Check Universal Plug and Play and then click OK.

              • Model General Networking
              Question Can I connect my phone line to my D-Link networking product?
              Answer A telephone cable (RJ11) cannot be plugged into an Ethernet (RJ45) port, and vice versa.



              RJ11 (phone) Male Connector



              RJ45 (Ethernet) Male Connector
              Model General Networking / WDA-1320 / WDA-2320 / WNA-1330 / WNA-2330 / WUA-1340 / WUA-2340 / DWL-G122 / DWL-G650 / DWL-G630 / DWL-G520 / DWL-G510
              Question What is the difference between KBps and Kbps?
              Answer In data communications a Kilobit is one thousand bits. It is used to measure the amount of data transferred per second. Kilobits per second is shortened to kb/s, Kbps or kbps (as opposed to KBps, which is Kilobytes per second. Note the capitalization.) The lowercase b is commonly used to denote bits, while the uppercase B is used for bytes.

              1 kb/s = 1000 bits per second
              1 KB/s = 1024 bytes per second
              Model General Networking / WUA-2340 / DWL-AG132 / DWL-AG530 / DWL-AG660 / DWL-G120 / DWL-G122 / DWL-G132 / DWL-G510 / DWL-G520 / DWL-G520M / DWL-G550 / DWL-G630 / DWL-G650 / DWL-G650M / DWL-G680 / WDA-1320 / WDA-2320 / WNA-1330 / WNA-2330 / WUA-1340 / WUA-2340
              Question How do I statically assign an IP address, to my adapter, in Windows Vista?
              Answer Step 1 Click on the Windows logo, to open the Start menu.

              Step 2 Select Control Panel.



              Step 3 Select Network and Internet.



              Step 4 Select Network and Sharing Center.



              Step 5 From the left side, select Manage Network Connections.



              Step 6 Right click on the adapter you wish to assign the IP address to, and select Properties.



              Step 7 Highlight Internet Protocol and click Properties.



              Step 8 Select the radio button next to Use The Following IP Address and enter the desired IP address, Subnet Mask, and Default Gateway. When finished, press OK.



              Model General Print Server
              Question I'm having trouble printing through your print server with my Lexmark printer. How can I resolve this problem?
              Answer Some Lexmark printers will not work with print servers because they lack command interpreters. The command interpreter provides the printer with the functionality to work as a network printer, interpreting the messages from the networking protocols.

              These Lexmark printers have built-in command interpreters and can be used as network printers.
              1. Optra Color 45
              2. J-110 Inkjet
              3. All Lexmark Laser Printers except the E-210
              Lexmark printers that will NOT work with print servers since they do not have built-in command interpreters.
              1. All Z series printers
              2. X73
              3. X83
              4. E210 Laser
              5. 5x00
              6. 3200
              7. 7x00
              8. Any other new Lexmark printer without a command interpreter.
              Please contact Lexmark directly if you have any further questions about the functionality of their printers.

              Go to Lexmark support now.
              Model General Print Server
              Question Can my D-Link print server support the non-printing functions of my multifunction printer?
              Answer Unfortunaley no. Print servers can only share the printer function of your multifunction printer.
              Model General Printserver
              Question Why are documents not being printed correctly using LPR in Windows Server 2003?
              Answer If documents are not printed correctly in Windows Server 2003 this is due to a problem how LPR/LPD is implemented in Windows Server 2003. Please visit http://support.microsoft.com/kb/q150930 for more information.
              Model General Router
              Question Does D-Link provide an emulator (simulator) for my device?
              Answer Emulators are available for the following products:

              Device Firmware
              DBT-120

              N/A

              DCM-202

              1.0.1

              DCS-1000

              1.30

              DCS-1000W (rev A)

              1.30

              DCS-1000W (rev B)

              2.22

              DCS-2000

              1.07

              DCS-2100+

              1.05

              DCS-2100G

              1.00

              DCS-2120

              1.00

              DCS-3220

              1.00

              DCS-3220G

              1.00

              DCS-3420

              1.00

              DCS-5300

              1.02

              DCS-5300G

              1.00

              DCS-5300W

              1.03

              DCS-6620

              1.00

              DCS-900 (rev A)

              2.28

              DCS-900 (rev B)

              3.00

              DCS-900W

              2.20

              DCS-950

              1.03

              DCS-950G

              1.02

              DCS-G900

              1.00

              DES-1226G

              1.00

              DES-1250G

              1.00

              DES-6500

              1.01 B40

              DFL-1100

              1.30.00-PRE005

              DFL-200

              1.34

              DFL-700

              1.20.00

              DFL-80

              2.37

              DGL-3420

              1.00

              DGL-4100

              1.05

              DGL-4300

              1.05

              DGS-1216T

              1.00

              DGS-1224T

              1.00

              DGS-1248T

              1.00

              DGS-3224TGR

              3.01 B18

              DI-102

              1.1.0

              DI-514 (rev B)

              1.02

              DI-514 (rev C) 2.04
              DI-524 (rev A) 1.05
              DI-524 (rev C) 3.02
              DI-524 (rev D) 4.03
              DI-604 (rev A, B, & C) 2.20
              DI-604 (rev E) 3.51
              DI-614+ (rev A) 2.16
              DI-614+ (rev B) 3.43
              DI-624 (rev A & B) 1.28
              DI-624 (rev C) 2.70
              DI-624 (rev E) 5.00
              DI-624M 1.00
              DI-634M 2.00
              DI-704 (rev A) 2.55 B15
              DI-704P (rev B) 2.74
              DI-704UP 1.00
              DI-714P+ 1.31
              DI-724GU

              1.00

              DI-724U

              1.02

              DI-764 2.10
              DI-774 (rev A) 1.25
              DI-784 2.38
              DI-804HV 1.44
              DI-808HV

              1.43

              DI-824VUP 1.03
              DI-LB604

              1.01.03

              DIR-130

              1.00

              DIR-330

              1.00

              DIR-450

              1.01

              DIR-615

              1.00

              DIR-625

              1.09

              DIR-635

              1.07

              DIR-655

              1.02

              DIV-140

              1.00

              DNS-120 1.00
              DNS-323

              1.00

              DP-300U 1.20
              DP-301P+ 3.10
              DP-301U 1.20
              DP-311P 1.00
              DP-311U 2.00
              DP-G301

              1.30

              DP-G310 1.00
              DPG-2000W 1.10
              DPH-140S 1.00
              DPR-1260

              1.00

              DSA-3100 (rev B) 3.01
              DSA-3200 1.00
              DSA-5100 1.00
              DSD-150

              2.00

              DSL-2320B

              1I00

              DSL-G604T

              2.00

              DSM-604H 1.00m
              DSM-G600 (rev B)

              1.20

              DVG-1120M R2.0M19b
              DVG-3004S

              1.04

              DVG-5102S

              3.3.0-18

              DVG-G1402S

              1.02

              DVX-1000

              2.0.4

              DWL-1000AP+ 1.19
              DWL-1700AP 1.3.0
              DWL-1750 1.00
              DWL-2000AP (rev A) 1.00
              DWL-2000AP (rev B) 2.06
              DWL-2000AP (rev C) 3.13
              DWL-2100AP 2.00
              DWL-2200AP 1.00
              DWL-2210AP 1.0.2.8
              DWL-2700AP (rev A) 2.00
              DWL-2700AP (rev B) 3.00
              DWL-3200AP

              2.00

              DWL-700AP 1.00
              DWL-7000AP 1.03
              DWL-7100AP 2.00
              DWL-7200AP 1.01
              DWL-800AP+ 1.00
              DWL-810 1.60
              DWL-810+ 1.00
              DWL-900AP+ (rev A & B) 2.55
              DWL-900AP+ (rev C) 3.07 B1
              DWL-AG700AP 1.00
              DWL-G700AP 1.00
              DWL-G710 1.00
              DWL-G730AP 1.00
              DWL-G800AP 1.02
              DWL-G810 2.12
              DWL-G820 1.00
              DWL-G820 (rev B) 2.10
              DWL-P1012

              1.00

              DXS-3326GSR 3.00 B16
              EBR-2310

              1.01
              KR-1

              RK1.008
              VWR-VR

              1.00.3

              WBR-1310

              1.01

              WBR-2310

              1.03

              Model General Router
              Question How do I configure my router for Gnutella, Morpheus, LimeWire, and BearShare?
              Answer The following steps are for applications using the Gnutella P2P file sharing protocol including BearShare, Gnotella, Gnucleus, LimeWire, Phex, and SwapNut.

              In most cases, you do not have to configure anything on the router or on the software. If you are having problems, please follow steps below:

              Setup your application to connect behind NAT or a router.

              LimeWire:
              Click on Tools > Options > Advanced > Firewalls. Check Force IP, and in the box Address enter the WAN IP address of your router. Click OK to close the Options panel.

              Bearshare:
              Click on Setup > Configuration > Firewall Settings. Check the box Report the IP address for accepting connections and in the box enter the WAN IP address of your router. In the box Recommended Settings, click the button Reset... to apply the settings you have just entered. This will change various settings in other panels. Click OK to close the Setup panel.

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Enter the IP address of your router in a web browser (192.168.0.1).

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

              Step 3 Click on Advanced and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 4 Click Enabled and then enter a Name (limewire for example).

              Step 5 Enter the IP address of the computer you are running the application from in the Private IP box. Select Both for the Protocol Type.

              Step 6 Enter 6346 in the Private and Public Port boxes. Click Always under schedule or set a time range. Click Apply.





              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 6346
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run your application from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.







              For the DI-704, 704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 6346 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run your application from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.
              • Model General Router
              Question How do I configure my router to play Warcraft 3?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while hosting a game in Warcraft 3. To play a game, you do not have to configure your router.

              Note: If you want multiple computers from you LAN to play in the same game that you are hosting, then repeat the steps above and enter the IP addresses of the other computers. You will need to change ports within the Warcraft 3 software. Computer #2 can use port 6113 (both public and private), computer #3 can use 6114, and so on.

              Configure the Game Port information on each computer:

              Start Warcraft 3 on each computer, click Options > Gameplay. Scroll down and you should see Game Port. Enter the port number that you want to use. You will need open this port on the router using the steps below.

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
            • Click Enabled.
            • Enter a name (warcraft3).
            • Private IP - Enter the IP address of the computer you want to host the game.
            • Select Both for Protocol Type
            • Enter 6112 for both Private Port and Public Port
            • Click Always or set a schedule.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue.

              Note: If the screenshots above do not match your DI-604, then you have the European version of this router which D-Link USA does not support.




              For the DI-704P (revB) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the box next to Enable.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 6112.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to play Warcraft 3 from.
              • Click Always next to Schedule or enter the time frame that you want.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.






              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 6112 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Warcraft 3 from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and then click Reboot.

              • Model General Router
              Question How do I configure my router to use iVisit?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic.

              iVisit uses the following port:
            • 9940 (UDP)

              You will need the IP address of the computer you are running iVisit from.

              Click here if you do not know your IP address.

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              You will now create a Virtual Server entry:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create the rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (iVisit).
              • Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are running iVisit from.
              • Select UDP for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 9940 next to Private Port and Public Port.
              • Click Always or configure a schedule.


              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue.

              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of the router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 9940
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run iVisit from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.



              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 9940 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run iVisit from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and then click Reboot.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use my Xbox with XBConnect?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic.

              XBConnect uses the following port:
            • 8602 (TCP & UDP)

              You will need the IP address of the computer you are running XBConnect from.

              Click here if you do not know your IP address.

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              You will now create a Virtual Server entry:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create the rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (xbconnect).
              • Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are running XBConnect from.
              • Select Both for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 8602 next to Private Port and Public Port.
              • Click Always or configure a schedule.


              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue.

              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of the router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 8602
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run XBConnect from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.





              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 8602 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run XBConnect from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.

              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use SIPphone?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while using SIPphone.

              SIPphone uses the following ports:
            • 5004 (UDP)
            • 5060 (UDP)
              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP

              Click here to visit sipphone.com


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create the rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (SIPphone1).
              • Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer or the SIPphone device.
              • Select UDP for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 5004 next to Private Port and Public Port.
              • Click Always or configure a schedule.
              • Click Apply and then Continue.


              Step 3 Repeat steps 1-2 for the following:
              • Name - SIPphone2
              • Protocol Type - UDP
              • Public/Private Port - 5060


              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the box next to Enable.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 5004.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer or the SIPphone device.
              • Click Always next to Schedule or enter the time frame that you want.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.

              Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 & 4 and enter the same information except for the service port:

            • 5060



              For the DI-704, DI-704P (rev. A), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 5004 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer or the SIPphone device.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and then click Reboot.

              Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 & 4 and enter the same information except for the service port:

            • 5060
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to play World of Warcraft?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while playing World of Warcraft.

              World of Warcraft uses the following TCP ports:
            • 3724
            • 6112 (Blizzard Downloader)
            • 6881-6999 (Blizzard Downloader)

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-624M, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              You will now create a Virtual Server entry:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create the rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (WoW1).
              • Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are running World of Warcraft from.
              • Select TCP for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 3724 next to Private Port and Public Port.
              • Click Always or configure a schedule.
              • Click Apply and then Continue.


              Step 4 Repeat steps 2-3 using the following:
              • Name - WoW2
              • Protocol Type - TCP
              • Public/Private Port - 6112
              Step 5 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 6 Create a new firewall rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (WoW3).
              • Click Allow.
              • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
              • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running World of Warcraft from. Leave the second box empty. Under Protocol, select TCP. In the port range boxes, enter 6881 in the first box and 6999 in the second box.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.






              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the box next to Enable.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 3724.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to play World of Warcraft from.
              • Click Always next to Schedule or enter the time frame that you want.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.



              Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 two more times. Enter the same information except for the service ports:

            • 6112
            • 6881-6999 (enter as a range)



              For the DI-704, DI-704P (rev. A), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 3724 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run World of Warcraft from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.

              Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 two more times. Enter the same information except for the service ports:

            • 6112
            • 6881-6999 (enter as a range)
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I find the proper MTU size on my router?
              Answer To find the proper MTU Size, you’ll have to do a special ping of the destination you’re trying to go to. A destination could be another computer, or a URL.

              Step 1 Click on Start and then click Run.

              Step 2 Windows 95, 98, and ME users type in command (Windows NT, 2000, and XP users type in cmd) and press Enter (or click OK).

              Step 3 Once the window opens, you’ll need to do a special ping. Use the following syntax:

              ping [url] [-f] [-l] [MTU value]

              Example: ping yahoo.com -f -l 1472



              You should start at 1472 and work your way down by 10 each time. Once you get a reply, go up by 2 until you get a fragmented packet. Take that value and add 28 to the value to account for the various TCP/IP headers. For example, lets say that 1452 was the proper value, the actual MTU size would be 1480, which is the optimum for the network we’re working with (1452+28=1480).

              Once you find your MTU, you can now configure your router with the proper MTU size.

              Related Links:

            • What is MTU?
            • How do I change the MTU on my router?
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use iChat?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while using iChat.

              iChat uses the following ports:
            • 5060 (UDP)
            • 5190 (TCP) File Sharing
            • 16384-16403 (UDP) To video conference with other clients

              If you are using the Mac OS X Firewall, you may need to temporarily turn off the firewall in the Sharing preference pane on both computers.

              To use the Mac OS X Firewall, you must open the same ports as in the router:

              Step 1 Choose Apple menu > System Preferences.

              Step 2 Choose View > Sharing.

              Step 3 Click the Firewall tab.

              Step 4 Click New.

              Step 5 Choose Other from the Port Name pop-up menu.

              Step 6 In the Port Number, Range or Series field, type in: 5060, 16384-16403.

              Step 7 In the Description field type in: iChat AV

              Step 8 Click OK.

              Read here for file sharing configuration if using Mac OS X Firewall.

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 3 Create a new firewall rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (ichat1).
              • Click Allow.
              • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
              • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running iChat from. Leave the second box empty. Under Protocol, select UDP. In the port range boxes, enter 5060 in the first box and leave the second box empty.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue.

              Step 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 but name it ichat2 and open ports 16384-16403 (UDP).



              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.
              For File Sharing:

              Step 1 Click on Advanced and then Virtual Server.

              Step 2 Check Enabled to activate entry.

              Step 3 Enter a name for your virtual server entry (ichat3).

              Step 4 Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer on your local network that you want to allow the incoming service to.

              Step 5 Select TCP for Protocol Type.

              Step 6 Enter 5190 next to Private Port and Public Port.

              Step 7 Click Always or configure a schedule.

              Step 8 Click Apply and then Continue.





              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 16384-16403
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run iChat from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Repeat step 3 but open port 5060.

              Step 5 If you are file sharing, then repeat step 3 but open port 5190.

              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.





              For the DI-704, 704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 16384-16403 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run iChat from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.

              Step 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 but open 5060.

              Step 6 If you are file sharing, repeat steps 3 and 4 but open port 5190.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use mIRC?
              Answer Configure mIRC:

              Step 1 In the mIRC program, go to File > Options then select Local Info.

              Make sure that mIRC is reporting your routerīs EXTERNAL or WAN IP address. mIRC attempts to obtain your external IP address when you connect to an IRC server. If after you have connected to an IRC server, mIRC does not have your external IP address listed, you need to uncheck Local Host and IP Address and manually enter your external (WAN) IP address.

              Step 2 Go to File > Options and select Identd underneath Connect. Make sure that Enable Identd server is checked.

              Step 3 Go to File > Options and select Firewall underneath Connect. Make sure that Firewall support is set to None.

              Step 4 Go to File > Options and select Options underneath DCC. Change the DCC Ports: First to 2070 and Last to 2075.

              Configure Router

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP




              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 3 Create a new firewall rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (mirc1).
              • Click Allow.
              • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
              • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running mIRC from. Leave the second box empty.
              • Under Protocol, select TCP. In the port range boxes, enter 2070 in the first box and 2075 in the second box.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue to save settings.



              Step 5 Click on Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 6 Create a new rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a Name (mirc2).
              • Enter the IP address of your computer next to Private IP.
              • For Protocol Type, select TCP.
              • For Private and Public Port, enter 113.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.


              Step 7 Click Apply and then Continue to save settings.

              Step 8 Restart mIRC and verify that all the changes are in place. You have to click OK on each option screen for the changes to take effect.

              If the person you are trying to transfer files with is also behind a router, they must also configure their IRC client and router or you will have problems.




              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 2070-2075
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run mIRC from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.



              Step 5 Repeat Step 3 and 4 but open port 113.



              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 2070-2075 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run mIRC from.
              • Check the box under Enable.


              Step 4 Repeat Step 3 but open port 113.

              Note: If you are unable to enter a range, please upgrade to the latest firmware. You can download the firmware at our               Downloads page.

              Step 5 Click Save and the click Reboot.

              Note: NAT restricts opening the same port to multiple computers.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use ICQ File Transfer?
              Answer To use the file transfer feature in ICQ, you will need to configure your router as well as the ICQ software. The screenshots below are of ICQ 2003a.

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?


              If you are using ICQ Lite, there is not a way to specify the listening ports so all features may not work unless you enable DMZ on your router. Follow the router instructions below but use port 5190 instead of 20000-20019. To change this port in the ICQ Lite software, go to Main > Preferences and Security > Connection Settings. Click here to setup your router. Remember to use 5190 instead of 20000-20019.

              Setup ICQ:

              Step 1 Open your ICQ software and login.

              Step 2 Click on Main > Preferences > Connections > Server tab. Verify that the port is 5190. Under Proxy Settings, check Not Using Firewall.



              Step 3 Click on the User tab, click Not Using Proxy, click Use the Following TCP Listen Port for incoming event and enter from: 20000 To: 20019.

              If you want more than one computer to use ICQ at the same time, open ports 20020 - 20039 on computer#2, 20040-20059 on computer #3, etc and then open these ports on your router to the IP address of the computer (see below).



              Step 4 Click OK.

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the top and then click Applications on the left side.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (icqfiletransfer).
              • Enter 5190 in the first box next to Trigger Port. Leave the second box empty.
              • Select TCP for trigger type.
              • Enter 20000-20019 for Public Ports. This is for 1 user. For 2 users, enter 20000-20039. For more users, add 20 to the last number.
              • Select TCP for Public Type.


              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue to save settings.

              Note: If your DI-604 screens do not look like the screenshots above, then you have the European version of the router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (revB) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the top and then click Application on the left side.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 5190 in the box under Trigger.
              • Enter 20000-20019 for Incoming Ports. This is for 1 user. For 2 users, enter 20000-20039. For more users, add 20 to the last number.
              • Check the box under Enable.


              Step 4 Click Apply to save settings.



              For the DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711, DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Special App.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 5190 in the box under Trigger.
              • Enter 20000-20019 for Incoming Ports. This is for 1 user. For 2 users, enter 20000-20039. For more users, add 20 to the last number.
              • Check the box under Enable.


              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to play Americaīs Army?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while using Americaīs Army.

              Americaīs Army uses the following ports:
            • 1716-1718 (UDP)
            • 8777 (UDP)
            • 27900 (UDP)
            • 20045 (TCP)

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 3 Create a new firewall rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (army1).
              • Click Allow.
              • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
              • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running Americaīs Army from. Leave the second box empty. Under Protocol, select UDP. In the port range boxes, enter 1716 in the first box and 1718 in the second box.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.



              You will now create 3 Virtual Server entries:

              Step 1 Click on Advanced and then Virtual Server.

              Step 2 Create the rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (army2).
              • Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are running Americaīs Army from.
              • Select UDP for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 8777 next to Private Port and Public Port.
              • Click Always or configure a schedule.
              • Click Apply and then Continue.


              Step 3 Repeat steps 1-2 two more times for the following:
              • Name - army3
              • Protocol Type - UDP
              • Public/Private Port - 27900
              • Name - army4
              • Protocol Type - TCP
              • Public/Private Port - 20045
              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the box next to Enable.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 20045.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to play Americaīs Army from.
              • Click Always next to Schedule or enter the time frame that you want.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.



              Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 three more times. Enter the same information except for the service ports:

            • 1716-1718 (enter as a range)
            • 8777
            • 27900



              For the DI-704, DI-704P (rev. A), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 20045 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Americaīs Army from.
              • Check the box under Enable.




              Step 4 Click Save and then click Reboot.

              Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 three more times. Enter the same information except for the service ports:

            • 1716-1718 (enter as a range)
            • 8777
            • 27900
              • Model General Routers
              Question How can I use Gamespy behind my D-Link router?
              Answer Note: You may be required to open additional ports depending on the game you are playing. If the listed ports do not work, then enable DMZ on the router. If the program still does not work when in DMZ, then there is a software configuration problem. Please consult the software manufacturer for more information. Make sure you disable any software firewall such as Zone Alarm, Norton, Windows XP Firewall, or Black Ice.

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for the username and your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 You will create 2 entries.

              Step 4 Click Enabled and enter Settings:
              • Name - Gamespy1
              • Private IP - The IP address of your computer that you are running Gamespy from.
              • Protocol Type - Both
              • Private Port - 3783
              • Public Port - 3783
              • Schedule - Always.
              Click Apply and then continue.



              Step 5 Enter second entry:
            • Click Enabled
            • Name - Gamespy2
            • Private IP - The IP address of your computer that you are running Gamespy from.
            • Protocol Type - Both
            • Private Port - 6500
            • Public Port - 6500
            • Schedule - Always.

              Click Apply and then continue.






              For the DI-704P (revB) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the box next to Enable.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 3783.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are playing/hosting the game from.
              • Click Always next to Schedule or enter the time frame that you want.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.

              Step 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 but open port 6500.






              For DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P users:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 3783 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you are playing/hosting the game from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Repeat step 3 but open port 6500.

              Step 5 Click Save and then click Reboot.

              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use eMule?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while using eMule.

              eMule uses three ports*:
            • 4662 (TCP)
            • 4672 (UDP)
            • 4711 (TCP)

              Visit eMule here.

              * To prevent getting a low ID (Firewalled), open additional TCP ports between 4661 and 4665. Also, limit the number of connections in the eMule software. You may need to change the TCP Clientport to something other than 4662.


              Screenshot taken from v0.30e. It has not been altered (except for red arrow).

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP

              Unfortunately we do not support the European versions of the DSL-302G, DSL-502G, DWL-500 (gen2), or the DSL-504 (gen2) since they are not sold in the United States.


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
            • Click Enabled.
            • Enter a name (emule1).
            • Private IP - Enter the IP address of the computer you are running eMule from.
            • Select TCP for Protocol Type
            • Enter 4662 for both Private Port and Public Port
            • Click Always or set a schedule.

              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue.



              Step 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 but name it emule2, select UDP for Protocol Type, and enter 4672 for both Private Port and Public Port.

              Step 6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 but name it emule3, select TCP for Protocol Type, and enter 4711 for both Private Port and Public Port.

              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.


              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the enable box
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 4661-4665.
              • Next to Server IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run eMule from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              • Click Apply and then click Restart to save changes.
              Step 4 Repeat step 3 but enter 4672 for the service port.

              Step 5 Repeat step 3 but enter 4711 for the service port.

              Step 6 Click Save and then Restart.





              For the DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711, DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 4661-4665 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run eMule from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              • In the next box down, enter 4672 under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run eMule from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              • In the next box down, enter 4711 under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run eMule from.
              • Check the box under Enable.


              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.

              NOTE: If you can only enter a single port (not a range) and/or are limited to 10 entries, upgrade your firmware to the latest version at               support.dlink.com/downloads.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I disable or turn off the firewall on my router?
              Answer You cannot disable the firewall on the router. D-Link routers use NAT (Network Address Translation) which allows multiple hosts to share a single address and make many concurrent connections. All D-Link routers have a DMZ option which will open all incoming ports to a single computer on your local network.
            • What is NAT?
            • What is DMZ?
            • How do I open ports on my router?
            • How do I enable DMZ on my router?
              • Model General Routers
              Question How can I host a FTP server behind my router?
              Answer To host a FTP server behind a D-Link router, you must open ports 20 (TCP) and 21 (TCP) on your router and point to the computer that is running the FTP server software. Also, configure your FTP software to use Passive Mode. Users on the Internet must use the routerīs WAN IP address to access your FTP server and set their client software to Passive Mode.

              For the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604 (US only), DI-614+, DI-624, DI-704P(revC), DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, and DI-784:

              Step 1 Open a web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 3 Create a new firewall rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (ftp).
              • Click Allow.
              • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
              • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running your FTP server from. Leave the second box empty.
              • Under Protocol, select TCP. In the port range boxes, enter 20 in the first box and 21 in the second box.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.


              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue to save settings.
              Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to play Battlefield 1942?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while using Battlefield 1942.

              Battlefield 1942 uses the following port(s):
            • 14567 (UDP) Only required port

              If you want your server to be listed on Gamespy:
            • 14690 (UDP)
            • 22000 (UDP) (only for LAN games)
            • 23000-23009 (UDP)
            • 27900 (UDP) (Gamespy Master Server UDP Heartbeat)
            • 28900 (TCP) (Gamespy Master Server List Request)

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              You will now create a Virtual Server entry:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create the rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (battle1).
              • Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are running Battlefield 1942 from.
              • Select UDP for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 14567 next to Private Port and Public Port.
              • Click Always or configure a schedule.
              • Click Apply and then Continue.


              Step 4 Repeat steps 2-3 if listing on Gamespy using the following:
              • Name - game1
              • Protocol Type - UDP
              • Public/Private Port - 14690
              • Name - game2
              • Protocol Type - UDP
              • Public/Private Port - 22000
              • Name - game3
              • Protocol Type - UDP
              • Public/Private Port - 27900
              • Name - game4
              • Protocol Type - TCP
              • Public/Private Port - 28900
              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 3 Create a new firewall rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (battle2).
              • Click Allow.
              • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
              • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running Battlefield 1942 from. Leave the second box empty. Under Protocol, select UDP. In the port range boxes, enter 23000 in the first box and 23009 in the second box.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.



              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the box next to Enable.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 23000-23009.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to play Battlefield 1942 from.
              • Click Always next to Schedule or enter the time frame that you want.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.



              Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 four more times. Enter the same information except for the service ports:

            • 14567
            • 14690
            • 22000
            • 27900
            • 28900



              For the DI-704, DI-704P (rev. A), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 23000-23009 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Battlefield 1942 from.
              • Check the box under Enable.




              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.

              Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 four more times. Enter the same information except for the service ports:

            • 14567
            • 14690
            • 22000
            • 27900
            • 28900
            • For more information on Battlefield 1942, read here.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use BitTorrent, Azureus, and ABC (Another Bittorrent Client)?
              Answer You must open ports 6881-6999 (TCP) on your router to allow incoming traffic. If you are using a version of BitTorrent older than 3.2, then you only need to open ports 6881-6889.

              How do I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP

              D-Link USA does not support the European version of the DI-604, DSL-302G, DSL-500 (Gen2), DSL-502G, or DSL-504 (Gen2).


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              The following configuration will allow multiple computers behind the router use BitTorrent.

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Applications.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (BitTorrent).
              • Next to Trigger Port, enter 6881 in the first box and 6999 in the second box.
              • Next to Trigger Type, select TCP.
              • Next to Public Port, enter 6881-6999.
              • Next to Public Type, select TCP.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the box next to Enable.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 6881-6999.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to use BitTorrent from.
              • Click Always next to Schedule or enter the time frame that you want.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.







              For the DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default). If there is only one box, then enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Under Service Ports, enter 6881-6999.
              • Under Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to use BitTorrent from.
              • Click the enable box.
              Step 4 Click Save and then click Reboot (if prompted).



              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to play Starcraft or Diablo on Battle.net?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while hosting a game on Battle.net. To play a game, you do not have to configure your router.

              Battle.net uses port 6112 (TCP and UDP).

              Note: The steps below will work for Starcraft, Diablo, and Warcraft 3 (single user).

              Diablo 2 users click here

              You will not be able to use multiple computers behind your router and play Starcraft or Diablo on Battle.net at the same time. This is a limitation of the Battle.net servers. Diablo 2 will allow up to 4 users as long as the CD-Keys are unique and valid.

              Warcraft 3 does allow you to use multiple computers. Please skip steps below and click here for instructions.

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Applications.

              Step 3 Below Special Application List, click the Edit button (arrow #1) next to Battle.net. The entire line will turn yellow and the information will be filled out in the fields above. Click Enabled (arrow #2).



              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Applications on the left side.

              Step 3 Click on the drop-down box next to Popular Applications and select Battle.net.

              Step 4 Click on the drop-down box next to ID and select and ID that is open. Click Copy to and the information will appear. Click on the Enable box.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.







              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Special App.

              Step 3 Click on the drop-down box next to Popular Applications and select Battle.net.

              Step 4 Click on the drop-down box next to ID and select and ID that is open. Click Copy to and the information will appear. Click on the Enable box.

              Step 5 Click Save and the click Reboot

              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to play Diablo 2?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while playing Diablo 2.

              Diablo 2 uses the following UDP/TCP port(s):
            • 4000
            • 6112 - 6119

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              You will now create a Virtual Server entry:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create the rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (diablo2).
              • Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are running Diablo 2 from.
              • Select Both for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 4000 next to Private Port and Public Port.
              • Click Always or configure a schedule.
              • Click Apply and then Continue.


              Step 4 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 5 Create a new firewall rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (diablo1).
              • Click Allow.
              • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
              • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running Diablo 2 from. Leave the second box empty. Under Protocol, select *. In the port range boxes, enter 6112 in the first box and 6119 in the second box.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue.



              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Applications on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Under Trigger, enter 6112.
              • Under Incoming Ports, enter 6112-6119,4000 (no spaces).
              Step 4 Click on the Enable box.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.







              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Special App.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Under Trigger, enter 6112.
              • Under Incoming Ports, enter 6112-6119,4000 (no spaces).
              Step 4 Click on the Enable box.



              Step 5 Click Save and then click Reboot
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to play Midnight Club 2?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic.

              MC2 uses the following ports:
            • 27900-27901 (TCP)
            • 28910 (TCP)
            • 9741 (UDP)

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 3 Create a new firewall rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (midnight1)
              • Click Allow.
              • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
              • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running MC2 from. Leave the second box empty. Under Protocol, select TCP. In the port range boxes, enter 27900 in the first box and 27901 in the second box.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.


              You will now create 2 Virtual Server entries:

              Step 4 Click on Advanced and then Virtual Server.

              Step 5 Create the rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (midnight2).
              • Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are running MC2 from.
              • Select TCP for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 28910 next to Private Port and Public Port.
              • Click Always or configure a schedule.
              • Click Apply and then Continue.


              Step 6 Repeat steps 4-5 with the following:
              • Name - midnight3
              • Protocol Type - UDP
              • Public/Private Port - 9741
              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 27900-27901.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run MC2 from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Repeat step 3 but open port 28910.

              Step 5 Repeat step 3 but open port 9741.

              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.



              For the DI-704, 704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 27900-27901 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run MC2 from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.

              Step 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 but open 28910.

              Step 6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 but open port 9741.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use eDonkey?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while using eDonkey. Also, you will need the IP address of the computer you want to use eDonkey from.

              How do I find the IP address of my computer?

              eDonkey uses three ports (4 if using CLI). These are the default ports:
            • 4661 (TCP) To connect with a server
            • 4662 (TCP) To connect with other clients
            • 4665 (UDP) To communicate with servers other than the one you are connected to.
            • 4663 (TCP) *Used with the command line (CLI) client when it is configured to allow remote connections. This is the case when using a Graphical Interface (such as the Java Interface) with the client.

              To change the ports, please visit eDonkey2000.com for instructions.

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP

              Visit eDonkey here.



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 3 Create a new firewall rule:
            • Click Enabled.
            • Enter a name (edonkey).
            • Click Allow.
            • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
            • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running eDonkey from. Leave the second box empty. Under Protocol, select *. In the port range boxes, enter 4661 in the first box and then 4665 in the second box.
            • Click Always or set a schedule.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue.

              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 4661-4665
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run eDonkey from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.







              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 4661-4665 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run eDonkey from.
              • Check the box under Enable.


              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router for KaZaA and Grokster?
              Answer The following is for KaZaA, Grokster, and others using the FastTrack P2P file sharing system.

              In most cases, you do not have to configure anything on the router or on the Kazaa software. Make sure that you did not enable proxy/firewall in the KaZaA software and that you disable any firewall software (Zone Alarm, Black Ice, Norton). If you are having problems, please follow steps below:

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Enter the IP address of your router in a web browser (192.168.0.1).

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

              Step 3 Click on Advanced and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 4 Click Enabled and then enter a Name (kazaa for example).

              Step 5 Enter the IP address of the computer you are running KaZaA from in the Private IP box. Select TCP for the Protocol Type.

              Step 6 Enter 1214 in the Private and Public Port boxes. Click Always under schedule or set a time range. Click Apply.






              For the DI-704P (revB) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the box next to Enable.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 1214.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to use Kazaa from.
              • Click Always next to Schedule or enter the time frame that you want.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.






              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 1214 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Kazaa from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and then click Reboot.

              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to play SOCOM with my Playstation 2 and headset?
              Answer To allow you to play SOCOM and hear voice, you must open port 6869 to the IP address of your Playstation.

              SOCOM 2 users read here.

              For Playstation Networking help, please visit http://www.us.playstation.com/support.aspx?id=installation/networkadaptor/415013905.html#P41_5103.

              You will need to know the IP address of your PS2 to configure the D-Link router. Please click here for instructions on how to configure the network settings on your Playstation.

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Make sure you have the latest firmware for your router.

              How do I upgrade my firmware?

              Step 2 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click on Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 4 You will now create a new Virtual Server entry. Click Enabled and enter a name (socom). Enter the IP address of your Playstation for Private IP.

              Step 5 For Protocol Type select Both. Enter 6869 for both the Private Port and Public Port. Click Always. Click Apply to save changes and then Continue.



              Step 6 Restart SOCOM.

              DI-604 and DI-614+ users:

              Make sure Gaming Mode is Enabled. To verify, click on the Tools tab and then Misc on the left side. If it is disabled, then click Enabled. Click Apply and then Continue.




              For the DI-704P (revB) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the box next to Enable.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 6869.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of your Playstation.
              • Click Always next to Schedule or enter the time frame that you want.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.






              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 6869 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of your Playstation.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and then click Reboot.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I transfer files using AOL Instant Messenger (AIM) direct connect from behind my router?
              Answer NOTE: If you are experiencing problems when transfering files with AIM, make sure that you have the latest version of firmware on your router and the latest version of AIM.

              Below are screenshots of AIM 5.2 for Windows.

            • Download Latest Firmware here.
            • Download Latest Version of AIM here.

              Step 1 Verify that you are connected to the internet and sign on to AIM.

              Step 2 Click on My AIM, click Edit Options, and then select Edit Preferences.



              Step 3 Click on File Transfer and then click Firewall.



              Step 4 Select Outgoing, and AOL proxy server and click OK.



              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use PalTalk?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while using PalTalk. Also, you will need the IP address of the computer you want to use PalTalk from.

              How do I find the IP address of my computer?

              PalTalk uses four ports. The following are the default ports:
            • 2090 (TCP) File Transfer
            • 2090 (UDP) Voice Stream
            • 2091 (TCP) Video Listening Port
            • 2091 (UDP) Control Stream

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP

              Visit PalTalk.com here.



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 3 Create a new firewall rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (paltalk).
              • Click Allow.
              • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
              • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running PalTalk from. Leave the second box empty. Under Protocol, select *. In the port range boxes, enter 2090 in the first box and then 2091 in the second box.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue.



              Note: If the screenshot looks different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 2090-2091
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run PalTalk from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.







              For the DI-704, 704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 2090-2091 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run PalTalk from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use Shareaza?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while using Shareaza. In the Shareaza software, Click on Tools > Shareaza Settings > Connection (under Internet).

              Under Inbound Address, Select a port between 1028 and 65535 (default is 6346). Make sure Random is not checked. Under Options, check the box I can accept incoming connections.



            • Download the latest version of Shareaza here
            • How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP
            • DSL-500 (Gen2), DSL-504 (Gen2) (Both not supported in USA)



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Enter the IP address of your router in a web browser (192.168.0.1).

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

              Step 3 Click on Advanced and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 4 Click Enabled and then enter a Name (shareaza for example).

              Step 5 Enter the IP address of the computer you are running Shareaza from in the Private IP box. Select Both for the Protocol Type.

              Step 6 Enter 6346 in the Private and Public Port boxes. Click Always under schedule or set a time range. Click Apply.






              For the DI-704P (revB) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the box next to Enable.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 6346.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to use Shareaza from.
              • Click Always next to Schedule or enter the time frame that you want.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.






              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 6346 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Shareaza from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and then click Reboot.

              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use Piolet?
              Answer Please disable or uninstall any software firewalls on your computer.

              You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while using Piolet. In the Piolet software, Click on Settings in the lower-right corner.



              Click on Downloads on the left side. Below Firewall Options enter the port range you want to open. Use a port range between 1024 and 65525. In our example we are using ports 10240 - 20480. Click OK and then close Piolet completely. Once you configure your router, you can then restart Piolet. If you want 2 or more computers to use Piolet, select a different port range for each computer. You cannot forward the same port to more than one computer.


              Images taken from v1.05

            • Download the latest version of Piolet here
            • How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Enter the IP address of your router in a web browser (192.168.0.1).

              Step 2 Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

              Step 3 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 4 Create a new firewall rule:
            • Click Enabled.
            • Enter a name (piolet).
            • Click Allow.
            • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
            • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running Piolet from. Leave the second box empty. Under Protocol, select UDP. In the port range boxes, enter 10240 in the first box and then 20480 in the second box.
            • Click Always or set a schedule.
            • Click Apply and then click Continue.






              For the DI-704P (revB) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the box next to Enable.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 10240-20480.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to use Piolet from.
              • Click Always next to Schedule or enter the time frame that you want.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.






              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 10240-20480 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Piolet from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and then click Reboot.

              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my Playstation 2 to work with a D-Link router?
              Answer There are a few different ways to setup your Playstation 2Ū for networking. You can either configure through a game or by using the Network Adaptor Start-Up Disc. We strongly recommend using a static IP address (manual setup). Below are instructions using the Network Adaptor Start-Up Disc:

              Step 1 Verify your network settings. From a computer that is connected to the router and can connect to the Internet, check the TCP/IP settings.

              Write down the Subnet Mask (255.255.255.0) and Default Gateway (192.168.0.1). The default gateway address is the IP address of your router.

              How do I find my network settings?

              Step 2 Insert your Network Adaptor Start-Up Disc in your PS2.

              Step 3 At the main menu, select ISP Setup.

              Step 4 Select New Network Setting and then select Local Area Network.

              Step 5 Select Advanced Setup and then select Set Manual IP.

              Step 6 Enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask (same as you found in step 1), and Default Router (same as the Default Gateway found in step 1) for your connection.

              Your IP address must be in the same subnet as the router but cannot be used by another computer/network device. For example, D-Link routers use 192.168.0.1 and assign computers (DHCP) IP addresses between 192.168.0.100 and 192.168.0.199. Assign your PS2 an IP address outside that range (192.168.0.99).

              To edit the field, select the text entry field and press the X button. Use the up/down directional buttons to change the value and left/right to move between fields.

              Step 7 Press X to continue.

              Step 8 Manually enter the DNS servers. For Primary DNS, enter the IP address of your router (default gateway found in step 1). You do not have to enter a secondary DNS server since the router will resolve DNS but you may enter a DNS server from your ISP. Press X to continue.

              Step 9 Select Test Your Connection. If the test is successful, select Save and then enter a name for your settings (IE DLink). Press X to save.

              If the test is unsuccessful, then please visit http://www.us.playstation.com/Content/peripherals/SCPH-10281/productinfo/NAWizard_3_50.html to troubleshoot.

              Step 10 Your Playstation 2Ū is now configured. If you need to open ports (port forward) on your router, forward them to the IP address you assigned the Playstation.
              Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to play SOCOM 2 with my Playstation 2 and headset?
              Answer To allow you to play SOCOM 2 and hear voice, you must open ports 6000-6999 (UDP) to the IP address of your Playstation.

              For Playstation Networking help, please visit http://www.us.playstation.com/support.aspx?id=installation/networkadaptor/415013905.html#P41_5103.

              You will need to know the IP address of your PS2 to configure the D-Link router. Please click here for instructions on how to configure the network settings on your Playstation.

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Make sure you have the latest firmware for your router.

              How do I upgrade my firmware?

              Step 2 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab and then click on Firewall on the left side.

              Step 4 Create a new entry:
            • Click Enabled
            • Enter a name (socom2)
            • Next to Action, click Allow
            • Next to Source, select WAN from the drop-down box and enter * in the first box. Leave the second box empty.
            • Next to Destination, select LAN from the drop-down box.
            • Enter the IP address of your Playstation in the first box and leave the second box empty.
            • Select UDP for Protocol Type
            • Under Port Range, enter 6000 in the first box and enter 6999 in the second box.
            • Click Always or set a schedule.
            • Click Apply and then click Continue.



              Step 5 Restart SOCOM.

              DI-604, DI-614+, and DI-624 users:

              Make sure Gaming Mode is Enabled. To verify, click on the Tools tab and then Misc on the left side. If it is disabled, then click Enabled. Click Apply and then Continue. If you do not have this option, you must upgrade your firmware.

              If you have the European version of the DI-604, these instructions will not work since the interface is different than the North American version. Please contact a D-Link office near you on opening ports.




              For the DI-704P (revB) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then click Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the box next to Enable.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 6000-6999.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of your Playstation.
              • Click Always next to Schedule or enter the time frame that you want.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.




              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 6000-6999 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of your Playstation.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and then click Reboot.

              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use Overnet?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while using Overnet. Also, you will need the IP address of the computer you want to use Overnet from.

            • Visit eDonkey/Overnet here.
            • How do I find the IP address of my computer?

              Overnet uses two ports which you specify in the Overnet software.

              Step 1 Open your Overnet software. Click on Options.

              Step 2 Click on Network on the left side.

              Step 3 Choose a TCP port and an UDP port. Use numbers between 1024 - 65535. In our example we are using 4662 (TCP) and 6421 (UDP).



              Step 4 Click on Proxy and verify proxy is set to None.

              Step 5 Click OK to save settings.

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (overnet1).
              • For Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are running Overnet.
              • Select TCP for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 4662 for Private and Public Port.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.


              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue.

              Step 5 Repeat Step 3 with the following information:
              • Name - overnet2
              • Protocol Type - UDP
              • Private Port and Public Port - 6421
              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 4662
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Overnet from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.



              Step 5 Repeat Step 3 but enter port 6421.



              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 4662 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Overnet from.
              • Check the box under Enable.


              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.

              Step 5 Repeat Step 3 but enter port 6421.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to work with Steam?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while using Steam.

              Steam uses the following port(s):
              • 1200 (UDP)
              • 27000-27015 (UDP)
              • 27030-27039 (TCP)
            • How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create the rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (steam1).
              • Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are running Steam from.
              • Select UDP for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 1200 next to Private Port and Public Port.
              • Click Always or configure a schedule.
              • Click Apply and then Continue.


              Step 4 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 5 Create a new firewall rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (steam2).
              • Click Allow.
              • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
              • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running Steam from. Leave the second box empty. Under Protocol, select UDP. In the port range boxes, enter 27000 in the first box and 27015 in the second box.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              • Click Apply and then click Continue.


              Step 6 Repeat Step 5 with the same information except:
              • Name: Steam3
              • Protocol: TCP
              • Ports: 27030 in first box and 27039 in second box
              Step 7 Click Apply and then click Continue.

              * The Name of the rule must be different for each entry. You cannot have 2 or more rules with the same name.

              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the box next to Enable.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 27000-27015.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are running Steam from.
              • Click Always next to Schedule or enter the time frame that you want.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.

              Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 two more times. Enter the same information except for the service ports:

            • 27030-27039
            • 1200



              For the DI-704, DI-704P (rev. A), DI-707, DI-711, DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 27000-27015 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want are running Steam from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and then click Reboot.

              Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 two more times. Enter the same information except for the service ports:

            • 27030-27039
            • 1200
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to host Neverwinter Nights?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while hosting Neverwinter Nights.

              Neverwinter Nights uses the following ports:
            • 5120-5300 (UDP)
            • 6500 (UDP)
            • 27900 (UDP)
            • 28900 (UDP)

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create the rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (nwn1).
              • Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are running the game from.
              • Select UDP for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 6500 next to Private Port and Public Port.
              • Click Always or configure a schedule.
              • Click Apply and then Continue.


              Step 4 Repeat steps 2-3 two more times:
              • Name - nwn2
              • Protocol Type - UDP
              • Public/Private Port - 27900
              • Name - nwn3
              • Protocol Type - UDP
              • Public/Private Port - 28900
              Step 1 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 2 Create a new firewall rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (nwn4).
              • Click Allow.
              • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
              • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running NWN from. Leave the second box empty. Under Protocol, select UDP. In the port range boxes, enter 5120 in the first box and 5300 in the second box.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.



              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (revB) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the box next to Enable.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 5120-5300.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to play NWN from.
              • Click Always next to Schedule or enter the time frame that you want.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.



              Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 three more times. Enter the same information except for the service ports:

            • 6500
            • 27900
            • 28900



              For the DI-704, DI-704P (rev. A), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 5120-5300 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run NWN from.
              • Check the box under Enable.




              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.

              Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 three more times. Enter the same information except for the service ports:

            • 6500
            • 27900
            • 28900
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to play Medal of Honor?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while playing Medal of Honor. Also, you will need the IP address of the computer you are playing from.

              How do I find the IP address of my computer?

              Medal of Honor uses two ports:
            • 12203 (TCP)
            • 12204 (TCP)

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 3 Create a new firewall rule:
            • Click Enabled.
            • Enter a name (medalofhonor).
            • Click Allow.
            • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
            • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running Medal of Honor from. Leave the second box empty. Under Protocol, select TCP. In the port range boxes, enter 12203 in the first box and then 12204 in the second box.
            • Click Always or set a schedule.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue.

              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 12203-12204
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Medal of Honor from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.





              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 12203-12204 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Medal of Honor from.
              • Check the box under Enable.


              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to play Age of Mythology?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while playing Age of Mythology.

              AOM uses the following UDP port:
            • 2300

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              You will now create a Virtual Server entry:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create the rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (ageofmythology).
              • Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are running AOM from.
              • Select UDP for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 2300 next to Private Port and Public Port.
              • Click Always or configure a schedule.


              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue.

              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of the router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 2300
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run AOM from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.





              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 2300 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run AOM from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use Yahoo Messenger?
              Answer You may need to open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while using Yahoo Messenger. You can only open these ports to 1 computer. If you want to run Yahoo Messenger from multiple computers at the same time, you will need to modify Yahoo on the other computers to use different ports than what is listed below, and then open those ports on the router.

            • Click here for more information.
            • Click here for the latest version of Yahoo Messenger

              Yahoo Messenger uses the following ports:
            • 5000 (TCP - Chat)
            • 5001 (TCP - Chat)
            • 5055 (UDP - Phone)
            • 5100 (TCP - Webcam*)

              * Unfortunately the Super Webcam mode may not work behind any router. Please visit Yahoo Help for webcam and Super Webcam information.


              Click on the link below for setup instructions:
            • Chat Configuration
            • Webcam Configuration
            • Yahoo Phone Configuration
            • File Transfer Configuration



              For the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-704P (revC), DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, and DI-784:

              Chat Configuration:

              Step 1 Open your web browser such as Internet Explorer and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the top and then click Firewall on the left side.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (yahoo).
              • Click Allow.
              • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
              • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running Yahoo from. Leave the second box empty.
              • Under Protocol, select TCP. In the port range boxes, enter 5000 in the first box and 5001 in the second box.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue to save settings.






              Webcam Configuration:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (yahoocam).
              • For Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are using Yahoo from.
              • Select TCP for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 5100 for Private and Public Port.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue.



              Unfortunately the Super Webcam mode may not work behind any router. Please visit               Yahoo Help for webcam and Super Webcam information.



              Yahoo Phone Configuration:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (yahoophone).
              • For Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are using Yahoo from.
              • Select UDP for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 5055 for Private and Public Port.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.


              Step 4 Click Apply to save your settings.



              File Transfer Configuration:

              You must select a port to use. The default port is 80 but it is recommended to use a port between 1028 and 65545.

              Step 1 Open Yahoo Messenger and click Messenger > Preferences > File Transfer.

              Step 2 Next to Port Number to Use:, enter a port number you would like to use. You will enter this number in the router. We are using port 3477 as our example.



              Step 3 Click OK and close Yahoo Messenger.

              Step 4 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 5 Click on Advanced and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 6 Create a new entry:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (yahoofiletransfer).
              • For Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are using Yahoo from.
              • Select TCP for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 3477 for Private and Public Port.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.


              Step 7 Click Apply and then Continue.

              Step 8 You can now launch Yahoo Messenger and send/receive files.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use DC++?
              Answer Step 1 Open up DC++ and go to Settings. Select active mode and enter the port number that you want to open on the router (between 1024-65535). In our example we are using port 1416.

              Step 2 In the IP field, you need to enter the WAN or external IP address of your router (go to http://whatismyip.com/).

              Note: If you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP, it may change. Check your IP every now and then to make sure it is correct.

              Make sure you disable any firewall software. If you are using ZoneAlarm, you MUST uninstall ZoneAlarm completely. Disabling it will not work. There is a known issue using ZoneAlarm with DC++.

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then click on Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Create the rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (dc1).
              • Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are running DC++ from.
              • Select Both for Protocol Type.
              • Enter the port you chose in step 1 next to Private Port and Public Port.
              • Click Always or configure a schedule.
              • Click Apply and then Continue.





              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the enable box
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 1416.
              • Next to Server IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run DC++ from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              • Click Apply and then click Restart to save changes.
              Step 4 Click Save and then Restart.





              For the DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711, DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 1416 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run DC++ from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.

              If you get Connection Timeouts or no results when searching, your IP is likely to have changed. Update again as described above.

              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use Soulseek?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while using Soulseek.

              Soulseek uses two ports:
            • 2234
            • 5534

              Click here to visit Soulseek.


              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (Soulseek1).
              • Private IP - Enter the IP address of the computer you are running Soulseek from.
              • Select Both for Protocol Type
              • Enter 2234 for both Private Port and Public Port
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue.



              Step 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 but name it Soulseek2, select Both for Protocol Type, and enter 5534 for both Private Port and Public Port.

              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.


              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the enable box
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 2234.
              • Next to Server IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Soulseek from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              • Click Apply and then click Restart to save changes.
              Step 4 Repeat step 3 but enter 5534 for the service port.

              Step 5 Click Save and then Restart.





              For the DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711, DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 2234 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Soulseek from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              • In the next box down, enter 5534 under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Soulseek from.
              • Check the box under Enable.


              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.
              • Model General Routers
              Question Why does my router reboot every few minutes?
              Answer The problems you may experience with any D-Link or Non D-Link router:
              • The router seems to reboot consistently
              • The router takes a lot of time to respond
              • Internet transfer rates are down
              • Consistent wireless disconnections (wireless routers only)
              Possible source of the problem:
              Since the W32.Blaster Worm, many other variations of this worm have been found. Some of them are W32/Lovsan.worm and W32/Nachi.worm. These worms create a lot of ICMP traffic which may overload the router to eventually prevent it from communicating. Whether itīs the CPU or another component of the router that causes the failure, the problem can only be solved through the removal of this virus.

              Thereīs a tool provided by McAfee called Stinger. This tool will detect and remove the viruses that cause these problems. Please take a minute to read about this tools and itīs usage. You will need to run this tool on every single computer.

              Precautions to take when using the tool:

              D-Link is not and will not be held responsible for any problems cause to your operating system due to the utility supplied by McAfee. If you have any questions about this utility, please contact McAfee. Use at your own risk.

              The tool will wipe out unwanted worms/viruses, but because of the method of infection used by these worms/viruses is using the network combined with the RPC call vulnerability, we recommend you do as follow:
              Download the stinger tool and copy it to all computers. Because the stinger does not spread through the copy of files, you can copy this file on a disk and bring it to other computers:
              • Detach all computers from the network (This will prevent being infected again)
              • Once the process completed, connect the computer(s) to the router.
              • All Windows 2000/XP should be updated with the latest Microsoft updates. The updates fix the RPC call vulnerability
              Click this link to be directed to the Stinger tool page (Opens a new browser window)

              If your D-Link router is still experiencing strange behavior, please contact us.
              Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use Livve.com?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while using Livve.com. Also, you will need the IP address of the computer with your webcam.

              How do I find the IP address of my computer?

              Livve.com uses the following range of TCP and UDP Ports:
            • 8000-8999

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 3 Create a new firewall rule:
            • Click Enabled.
            • Enter a name (livve).
            • Click Allow.
            • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
            • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are using Livve.com from. Leave the second box empty. Under Protocol, select *. In the port range boxes, enter 8000 in the first box and then 8999 in the second box.
            • Click Always or set a schedule.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue.

              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 8000-8999
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to use Livve.com from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.







              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 8000-8999 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to use Livve.com from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to play Call of Duty?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while playing Call of Duty.

              Call of Duty uses the following ports:
            • 28960 (UDP/TCP)
            • 20500 (UDP)
            • 20510 (UDP)
              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create the rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (callofduty1).
              • Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are running Call of Duty from.
              • Select Both for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 28960 next to Private Port and Public Port.
              • Click Always or configure a schedule.
              • Click Apply and then Continue.


              Step 4 Repeat step 3 two more times for the following:
              • Name - callofduty2
              • Protocol Type - UDP
              • Public/Private Port - 20500
              • Name - callofduty3
              • Protocol Type - UDP
              • Public/Private Port - 20510
              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the box next to Enable.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 28960.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to play Call of Duty from.
              • Click Always next to Schedule or enter the time frame that you want.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.



              Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 two more times. Enter the same information except for the service ports:

            • 20500
            • 20510



              For the DI-704, DI-704P (rev. A), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 28960 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Call of Duty from.
              • Check the box under Enable.


              Step 4 Click Save and then click Reboot.

              Step 5 Repeat Steps 3 and 4 two more times. Enter the same information except for the service ports:

            • 20500
            • 20510
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to play Ghost Recon?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while playing Ghost Recon. Also, you will need the IP address of the computer you are playing from.

              How do I find the IP address of my computer?

              Ghost Recon uses three ports:
            • 2346
            • 2347
            • 2348

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 3 Create a new firewall rule:
            • Click Enabled.
            • Enter a name (Ghost Recon).
            • Click Allow.
            • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
            • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running Ghost Recon from. Leave the second box empty. Under Protocol, select *. In the port range boxes, enter 2346 in the first box and then 2348 in the second box.
            • Click Always or set a schedule.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue.

              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 2346-2348
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Ghost Recon from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.







              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 2346-2348 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Ghost Recon from.
              • Check the box under Enable.


              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to play Far Cry?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while playing Far Cry. Also, you will need the IP address of the computer you are playing from.

              How do I find the IP address of my computer?

              Far Cry uses two ports:
            • 49001
            • 49002

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 3 Create a new firewall rule:
            • Click Enabled.
            • Enter a name (Far Cry).
            • Click Allow.
            • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
            • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running Far Cry from. Leave the second box empty. Under Protocol, select *. In the port range boxes, enter 49001 in the first box and then 49002 in the second box.
            • Click Always or set a schedule.



              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue.

              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of your router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 49001-49002
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Far Cry from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.







              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 49001-49002 (no spaces) in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Far Cry from.
              • Check the box under Enable.


              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.

              Note: Depending on the firmware version, you may not be able to enter a range of ports. Create 2 entries - one for port 49001 and another one for port 49002.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to play Splinter Cell: Pandora Tomorrow?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while playing Splinter Cell: Pandora Tomorrow.

              Splinter Cell uses the following incoming ports:
            • 8888 (UDP)
            • 45001 (UDP)

              Make sure you have downloaded and installed the latest patches and you have disabled any software firewalls on your computer (Zone Alarm, Windows XP firewall, etc).

              Please visit http://support.ubi.com/Patches/ for the latest patches and game support.

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP


              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              You will now create 2 Virtual Server entries:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create the rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (Splinter Cell1).
              • Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are running Splinter Cell from.
              • Select UDP for Protocol Type.
              • Enter 8888 next to Private Port and Public Port.
              • Click Always or configure a schedule.


              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Continue.

              Step 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 but enter Splinter Cell2 for the name and open UDP port 45001.

              Note: If the screenshots look different (DI-604), then you have the European version of the router which D-Link USA does not support.



              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 8888
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Splinter Cell from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Repeat Step 3 but open port 45001.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.





              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 8888 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Splinter Cell from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              • Enter 45001 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Splinter Cell from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.
              • Model General Routers
              Question Why does my Leaktest program see OPEN ports through my gateway that should be closed by default?
              Answer The Leaktest is meant to test Software firewalls resident on a Windows PC by measuring whether or not an application on the PC can be run and connect to a server on the internet without being blocked by the PC firewall software.

              Because the Leaktest is indeed only an FTP session as a test, the DI-7xx by default allows the outbound traffic.

              This is not a risk in reality since a nondescriminate Trojan pointing to a specific hackerīs site would ultimately result in a DoS on the hacker himself if he just started sending it out preconfigured and active. Normally a hacker will scan ports for an installed Trojan to ultimately access it, the DI-7xx will block both the scan and the external access to the Trojan which will prevent it from becoming active in the first place.
              Model General Routers
              Question Why is the activity light blinking fast on my gateway?
              Answer At the time of this FAQ, the Code Red virus is running rampant. The @Home provider is experiencing widespread difficulties becuase of the virus and results in slow connetivity and non-functioning email. There is not a problem with the gateway, however, you may be able to resolve these difficulties by recycling the power on the gateway. If you still canīt connect, please call your cable company.
              Model General Routers
              Question I have a Hybrid WBR60-231B modem and Iīm having trouble making a connection with my ISP. Is there any fix for this?
              Answer Note: Unfortunately this modem will not work with our DI-704P or 713P.

              If you are using a PC:

              For the DI-704 and DI-707 you will need to use firmware version 253b6.

              Download DI-704 Firmware 253b6

              Download DI-707 Firmware 253b6

              For the DI-713 use firmware 253b9.

              Download DI-713 Firmware 253b9

              If you are using Mac or Linux operating system:

              However, for a Mac or Linux environment you will need to download the DI-704 and the DI-707 firmware version 253b6 .bin file.

              Download DI-704 Firmware 253b6.bin for Mac/Linux

              Download DI-707 Firmware 253b6.bin for Mac/Linux

              For the DI-713 use firmware 253b9.bin for Mac/Linux.

              Download DI-713 Firmware 253b9.bin for Mac/Linux

              Note: Firmware versions other than these will not work with this Hybrid modems
              Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my Mac to work with the D-Link gateways like the DI-704, DI-707, DI-713 and DI-713P?
              Answer Use the following settings in the TCP/IP control panel.

              Step 1 Go to the Apple Menu>Control Panels>TCP/IP.

              Step 2 From the Ethernet drop-down menu at the top of the control panel select Built-in if you have a built-in network card or Other if you have installed a network card in your computer.

              Step 3

              Configure : Using DHCP Server
              IP address : 192.168.0.xxx
              Router address : 192.168.0.1
              Subnet Mask : 255.255.255.0

              * If you are not getting an IP address from the residential gateway, you can configure the gateway manually.

              Connect Via :Ethernet-built-in
              Configure : Manually

              * You will now be in a screen that will allow you to enter in the settings manually.

              IP address: 192.168.0.12
              Router address: 192.168.0.1
              Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
              Name server : 192.168.0.1.
              Model General Routers
              Question Which D-Link routers support the Windows XP implementation of Universal Plug and Play or UPnP™?
              Answer The Windows XP implementation of UPnP will allow you to easily configure Internet applications through broadband routers. This implementation will automatically open the necessary ports in the router for that applicationīs specific port configuration.

              We currently support UPnP for the following routers:
              • DI-514
              • DI-524
              • DI-604
              • DI-614+
              • DI-624
              • DI-704P (revB - Firmware 2.70 and higher)
              • DI-704P (revC)
              • DI-707P
              • DI-713P (Firmware 2.60 and higher)
              • DI-714 (Firmware 5.02 and higher)
              • DI-714P+
              • DI-754 (Firmware 2.10 and higher)
              • DI-764 (Firmware 2.10 and higher)
              • DI-774
              • DI-784
              • DI-804 (Firmware 4.68 and higher)
              • DI-804V (Firmware 4.70 and higher)
              • DI-804HV
              • DI-824VUP
              Please check this FAQ for updated information related to when and if UPnP support will be available for our other routers not listed above.

              We currently do not support UPnP with the following products:
              DI-701, DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (rev A & B), DI-713, DSA-3100, DFL-80, and DFL-300.

            • Read more on UPnP here
              • Model General Routers
              Question What are Virtual Servers?
              Answer A Virtual Server is defined as a service port, and all requests to this port will be redirected to the computer specified by the server IP. For example, if you have an FTP Server (port 21) at 192.168.0.5, a Web server (port 80) at 192.168.0.6, and a VPN server at 192.168.0.7, then you need to specify the following virtual server mapping table:

              SERVER PORT SERVER IP ENABLE
              21 192.168.0.5
              80 192.168.0.6
              1723 192.168.0.7
              Model General Routers
              Question What is Firmware?
              Answer Software (programs or data) that has been written onto read-only memory (ROM). Firmware is a combination of software and hardware. ROMs, PROMs and EPROMs that have data or programs recorded on them are firmware.

              Source - Webopedia.com

              For the latest firmware for your D-Link product, please visit the Downloads page.
              Model General Routers
              Question Why wonīt my FTP Client work with my D-Link router?
              Answer Make sure your FTP client software is set to passive. For security reasons the D-Link router does not deal with an active FTP client. An active FTP client can allow a hacker masquerading as an FTP server to gain access to your computer. Please contact your FTP client software manufacturer to determine how to configure the client for passive rather than active.

              Note: You will not be able to use an active connection through most NAT routers.
              Model General Routers
              Question What is PPPoE?
              Answer PPPoE stands for Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet. It is a non-standard method of connecting to your ISP to gain an IP address. It relies upon a software client that is provided by the ISP. An IP address is required to gain a connection to the Internet.
              Model General Routers
              Question Does it matter if I use a Dynamic or Static IP address with my D-Link broadband router?
              Answer No. Computers with static or dynamic IP addresses will work with our routers. If statically assigning an IP, make sure the default gateway and the DNS server IP addresses are the same as the LAN IP address of the router (usually 192.168.0.1).

              How do I statically assign my Windows computer?
              Model General Routers
              Question What is a firewall?
              Answer A firewall is a system that is designed to prevent unauthorized access to private computers or networks. Firewalls can be implemented in hardware, like the DI-604, or software, like Zone Alarm. All data entering or leaving the computer must pass through the firewall. The purpose of a firewall is to allow the data you want to get through, like the web sites youīre looking at, or your email or the network games you are playing, while keeping hackers out.

              Routers use NAT which will act as a firewall. Some of the D-Link routers will have advanced firewall rules to have more control of the incoming and outgoing traffic. You cannot "turn the firewall off". A way to allow traffic in from the internet is to open ports or enable DMZ to allow all traffic to 1 computer.

              By default, all D-Link routers block all incoming ports.
              Model General Routers
              Question How do I set up Xbox Live? What routers can I use?
              Answer D-Link routers empower gamers to easily connect their Microsoft Xbox to network and experience lag-free online gaming. All you need is a D-Link router to go along with your broadband connection and Xbox Live subscription and you can go head to head with friends and adversaries from around the world.

              The D-Link DI-624 Wireless Broadband Router, DI-614+ Wireless Broadband Router, and the D-Link DI-604 Broadband Router have all passed the tests for compatibility with Microsoft Xbox Live with specific firmware. Just download the specific compatible firmware listed below to your D-Link router before connecting to Xbox Live.

            • Click here to upgrade your firmware.
            • Click here for router compatibility list.
            • Click here for Xbox Live setup instructions with a router.
            • For Xbox Live support, please visit http://www.xbox.com/LIVE/connect/default.htm.
              • Model General Routers
              Question Why do I receive a dtrap (18) error in my system log?
              Answer Entries in the system log such as, "dtrap(18) - needs breakpoint" indicate that the router blocked an unknown DHCP command. D-Link routers only handle DHCP "Discover", "Request", "Release", and "Decline" commands. If the router receives an unknown command type, it will log it as dtrap (18).
              Model General Routers
              Question How do I stealth port 113 on my D-Link router?
              Answer You can stealth ports on any D-Link router by forwarding traffic for a particular port to an invalid IP on your LAN.

              For example, if you want to stealth port 113, go to the Virtual Server from the web management on your router and map port 113 to 192.168.0.250, or another IP address not in use on your local network.

              Note: When stealthing port 113, certain programs like Mirc and ICQ may not work.

              For DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-704P (rev. B & C), DI-704UP, DI-707P, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, and DI-784:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your D-Link router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced on top and then click Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Make a new entry:
              • Click Enabled
              • Enter name (stealth113)
              • For Private IP, enter an IP address not on your network (ie 192.168.0.250)
              • Select TCP for Protocol Type
              • Enter 113 for both Private and Public Ports
              • Select Always
              • Click Apply and then Continue to save changes.



              Configuring the Virtual Server for different model routers
              DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-713P users click here
              Model General Routers
              Question How do I use NetMeeting with my D-Link Router?
              Answer Unlike most TCP/IP applications, NetMeeting uses DYNAMIC PORTS instead of STATIC PORTS. That means that each NetMeeting connection is somewhat different than the last. For instance, the HTTP web site application uses port 80. NetMeeting can use any of over 60,000 different ports.

              All broadband routers using (only) standard NAT and all internet sharing programs like Microsoft ICS that use (only) standard NAT will NOT work with NetMeeting or other h.323 software packages.

              The solution is to put the router in DMZ.

              What is DMZ?

              Click here to configure your router for DMZ

              Note: A few hardware manufacturers have taken it on themselves to actually provide H.323 compatibility. This is not an easy task since the router must search each incoming packet for signs that it might be a netmeeting packet. This is a whole lot more work than a router normally does and may actually be a weak point in the firewall. D-Link is not one of the manufacturers.

              To read more on this visit HomenetHelp.com

              What is NAT?

              Model General Routers
              Question What is Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)?
              Answer Coordinated Universal Time (abbreviated as UTC, and therefore often spelled out as Universal Time Coordinated and sometimes as Universal Coordinated Time) is the standard time common to every place in the world. Formerly and still widely called Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) and also World Time, UTC nominally reflects the mean solar time along the Earthīs prime meridian. (The prime meridian is 0° longitude in the 360 lines of longitude on Earth. There are 179 meridians toward the East and 179 toward the West. The 180th meridian is also called the International Date Line.) The prime meridian is arbitrarily based on the meridian that runs through the Greenwich Observatory outside of London, where the present system originated. The UTC is based on an atomic clock to which adjustments of a second (called a leap second) are sometimes made to allow for variations in the solar cycle.

              Source: whatis.com
              Model General Routers
              Question How do I use MSN Messenger with my D-Link router and UPnP™?
              Answer Microsoft only offers UPnP in Windows Me and XP. If you are not running UPnP or have Windows 98 or 2000, click here.

              NOTE: Make sure that you have MSN Messenger version 5.0 or higher and that you have the latest firmware version on your router.

            • Download the latest version of MSN Messenger here
            • Download latest firmware for your router here

              Step 1 Open MSN Messenger and sign in.

              Step 2 Right-click on My Network Places and click on Properties.



              Step 3 Right-click on Internet Connection and click on Properties.



              Step 4 Click on Settings and you will see entries for MSMSGS with port numbers and the IP address of your computer. These are the port numbers that MSN Messenger needs open for all of itīs functions to work properly. These entries are also applied to the router in order for the application to work properly from behind the firewall.



              Step 5 Access the router’s web configuration by entering the router’s IP address in your web browser. The default IP address is 192.168.0.1. Login using your password. The default username is admin and the password is blank.

              Help Accessing Web Management

              Step 6 Click the Advanced tab then click Firewall. You will see the same entries for MSMSGS that were in the settings of the Internet Connection.



              If you still experience problems or if the settings on your computer and router donīt appear as they do in this FAQ, make sure that UPnP is installed on your computer and that the service is started.


            • How do I enable UPnP on my computer?
            • How do I enable the required services for UPnP?
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to always stay connected to the Internet?
              Answer For DSL:

              Most DSL connections use PPPoE. When the gateway is configured for a PPPoE broadband service, there will be an Idle time field on the Setup page. Enter the value for Idle time as 0. This will allow the gateway to never Time Out, and always stay connected to the internet.

              For Cable:

              Most Cable Internet connections use a Dynamic IP address. On the Setup page of the web configuration, check the box for Renew IP Forever. When the lease time on your IP address is up, the gateway will automatically request a new IP address from the ISP.


              Use this configuration if you have a DI-804, DI-711 Rev D1, or DI-714:

              For DSL:

              The default Idle Time is set to 0. You can find this setting by selecting Basic Setup from the top of the page, then select ISP additional Settings. The Idle Time will say: No Idle Timeout

              For Cable:

              There is no setting to be made, the Gateway will automatically stay connected to the internet.
              Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to play Counter-Strike?
              Answer For normal play, Counter Strike will work without any special configuration. If you are hosting a game or running a server behind your D-Link router, you must open ports 27005 and 27015. To open ports, you will need to find the IP address of your computer.

              Steam users read here.

              How do I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP
            • DI-804, DI-804V, DI-711 (revB), DI-714



              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

              Step 2 Enter username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

              Step 3 Click on Advanced and then click Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 4 Create a new entry:
              • Click Enabled
              • Enter a name (counterstrike1)
              • Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer you are running Counter-Strike. The example shows 192.168.0.100.
              • Select UDP for Protocol Type
              • Enter 27005 for both Private and Public Port
              • Click on Always or set a schedule
              • Click Apply and then Continue to save settings.
              Repeat the steps above to create a second entry. Name it counterstrike2 and enter port 27015 (UDP).




              For the DI-704P (revB) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter 192.168.0.1 (the IP address of your D-Link router).

              Step 2 Enter your password and login.

              Step 3 At the bottom of the screen, click Advanced.

              Step 4 At the Virtual Server page, enter 27005, enter the last number of the IP address of the computer you want to host, and then check the box to enable.

              Step 5 Enter a second entry using port 27015.

              Step 6 Click Save and then click Reboot.




              For the DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 27005 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Counter-Strike from.
              • Check the box under Enable.


              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.

              Step 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 but open port 27015.


              For the DI-804, DI-804V, DI-711(revB), and DI-714:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter 192.168.0.1 (the IP address of your D-Link router).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced Settings. You may be prompted for your user name and password. Enter admin and click OK.

              Step 3 On the left side, click on Virtual Server.

              Step 4 Next to Internal IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to host. Next to Service, click the down-arrow and choose All (DMZ).

              Step 5 Click Submit.
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I configure my router to use pcAnywhere?
              Answer In order to connect to a pcAnywhere host that is behind a router, you must open the following ports:
              • 5631 (TCP)
              • 5632 (UDP)
              Note: If you are using a computer behind a router and connecting to a pcAnywhere host, you do not have to configure the router. If the host you are connecting to is behind a router, then that router must have the required ports (5631-5632) opened.

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P, DI-714P+, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P




              For the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, and DI-774:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click on Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Create a new rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a Name (pcanywhere1).
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run pcAnywhere from (host).
              • For Protocol Type, select TCP.
              • For Private and Public Port, enter 5631.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.




              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue to save settings.

              Step 5 Repeat Step 3 with the following:
              • Name: pcanywhere2
              • Protocol Type: UDP
              • Private and Public Port: 5632
              Step 6 Click Apply and then Continue to save settings.






              For the DI-704P (rev.B), DI-707P, DI-714P+, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 5631-5632
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run pcAnywhere from (host).
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.





              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 5631-5632 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run pcAnywhere from (host).
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.


              Please read the following FAQs found at Symantec.com:
            • How to remotely verify if a routerīs ports are open
            • How to use pcAnywhere with a Dynamic IP Address or Domain Naming Service
            • How to change the pcAnywhere IP ports (8.0 and 9.x)
            • How to change the pcAnywhere IP ports (10.x and 11.0)
              • Model General Routers
              Question How do I open ports on my D-Link router?
              Answer To allow traffic from the internet to enter your local network, you will need to open up ports or the router will block the request.

              Because our routers use NAT (Network Address Translation), you can only open a specific port or ports to one computer at a time. For example: If you have 2 web servers on your network, you cannot open port 80 to both computers. You will need to configure 1 of the web servers to use port 81. Now you can open port 80 to the first computer and then open port 81 to the other computer.

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-624M, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P, DI-714P+, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP
            • DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P
            • DI-711 (revB), DI-714, DI-804, and DI-804V
            • DFL-80 and DFL-300

              If you have the DSL-604+, DSL-614+, DSL-500 (Gen2), DSL-504 (Gen2), or DI-604 (European) router, please contact the D-Link office near you for support. D-Link USA does not support these products.
              Click here for International offices.




              For the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, and DI-784:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your D-Link router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab at the top and then click Virtual Server on the left side.



              Step 3 Check Enabled to activate entry.

              Step 4 Enter a name for your virtual server entry.

              Step 5 Next to Private IP, enter the IP address of the computer on your local network that you want to allow the incoming service to.

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Step 6 Choose Protocol Type - either TCP, UDP, or both. If you are not sure, select both.

              Step 7 Enter the port information next to Private Port and Public Port. The private and public ports are usually the same. The public port is the port seen from the WAN side, and the private port is the port being used by the application on the computer within your local network.

              Step 8 Enter the Schedule information.

              Step 9 Click Apply and then click Continue.

            • How do I open a range of ports?



              For DI-704P (rev.B), DI-707P, DI-714P+, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP users:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the box next to Enable.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter the port or range of ports you want to open.
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to open the port to.
              • Click Always next to Schedule or enter the time frame that you want.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.





              For DI-704, DI-704P (rev. A), DI-707, DI-711, DI-713, and DI-713P users:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter the port or range of ports you want to open in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to open the ports to.
              • Check the box under Enable.




              Step 4 Click Save and then click Reboot.

            • What is DMZ?
            • What is Virtual Server?
            • What port or ports do I have to open?
              • Model General Routers
              Question I am in the Illinois, Indiana, Kentucky area and I am not able to go online with Insight Communications cable service even though my D-Link Broadband Router is getting an IP address from the cable modem. How do I connect?
              Answer You may need to go online and register with Insight Communications. You can go to https://sas.r31.insightbb.com/ and follow the on screen instructions to register the MAC address of your new connection.
              Model General Routers / DI-707P_revC
              Question Why do I receive a low ID when using eMule through my D-Link router?
              Answer There are several reasons why this is happening. Most likely the reason is simply because you are behind a router or firewall and the correct ports are not open.

              Read here on opening ports for eMule.

              Read here for more information on ID.

              Source - http://www.emule-project.net/
              Model General Switches
              Question What is Blocking Vs. Non-Blocking switch architecture?
              Answer A switch has a backplane bandwidth and an number of ports running at the highest speed in full duplex. If the total bandwidth for all the ports is less than the switches backplane, it would be a non-blocking switch because there is enough bandwidth to carry all packets without delay. If the backplane is less than the total port bandwidth, it would be a blocking architecture.
              Model General Switches
              Question What is a Switch?
              Answer A switch connects all computer LAN connections into one device like a hub. Unlike hubs, switches can run at full-duplex mode. This means that the computer and switch can both transmit and receive simultaneously. The biggest difference between a switch and a hub is that when a computer transmits a digital signal to a hub, it’s then sent to all ports attached to that hub, whereas a switch will send it only to the specific port where the destination MAC address is located.
              Model General Switches
              Question What is the default IP address for D-Link Switches?
              Answer The default IP address for most D-Link switches is 10.90.90.90.
              Model General Switches
              Question What is IGMP Snooping?
              Answer Internet Group Membership Protocol Snooping (IGMP Snooping) is a protocol that operates on switches that allows them to dynamically learn about multicast traffic. IGMP Snooping, an industry standard, does what it implies: it snoops all traffic listening for IGMP packets. Once it sees an IGMP packet, it dynamically learns what MAC address the traffic is destined for, and what MAC address the traffic comes from. Once the switch knows the MAC address, it can look up in its table on what port to send the traffic to.
              Model General Switches
              Question Whatīs the difference between MAC-based VLAN and 802.1Q VLAN?
              Answer There are two major differences between MAC-based and 802.1Q VLAN:

            • The first point of difference is that a MAC-based VLAN is configured using MAC address, but 802.1Q VLAN uses assigned tag address to distinguish VLAN information.

            • The second difference is that a MAC-based VLAN is a traditional and proprietary-based VLAN, so interoperability is a problem. On the other hand 802.1Q VLAN, is an industry standard-based VLAN, which helps resolve any interoperability problems between difference vendors of LAN switches.
              • Model General Switches
              Question What is a VLAN?
              Answer Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) are a logical grouping of network users and resources connected to defined ports on the switch. A VLAN looks like, and is treated like, its own subnet. By using virtual LANs, you’re no longer confirmed to physical locations. A VLAN can be created by location, function, and department regardless of where the resources or users are located.
              Model General Switches
              Question What is Spanning-Tree Protocol 802.1d?
              Answer Spanning Tree Protocol was developed to prevent routing loops in a network. If a router, bridge, or switch has more than one path to the same destination, a routing problem could occur. STP achieves this by running the Spanning Tree algorithm, detecting the presence of multiple physical paths and logically disabling (blocking-stand by mode) one ore more of the redundant links. This guarantees that only one path between network devices will be active at given time. STP uses BPDU (Bridge Protocol Data Units), which are special multicast frames that are broadcast out by all the switches on the network. These frames contain all the of the vital topology information about each sender that is needed by the switch to maintain the Spanning Tree.
              Model General Switches
              Question What is Auto-Negotiation?
              Answer Auto-Negotiation is a mechanism that takes control of the cable when a connection is established to a network device. Auto-Negotiation detects the various modes that exist in the device on the other end of the wire, and advertises it own abilities to automatically configure the highest performance mode of interoperation. Auto-Negotiation acts like a rotary switch that automatically switches to the correct technology, such as 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, 100BASE-T4, or a corresponding Full Duplex mode. Once the highest performance common mode is determined, Auto-Negotiation passes control of the cable to the appropriate technology and becomes transparent until the connection is broken.
              Model General Switches
              Question What is a Broadcast Storm?
              Answer A Broadcast Storm is a network segment event which sends a broadcast packet in a perpetual loop until that segment becomes overloaded.
              Model General Switches
              Question How do I find the serial number of my D-Link Switch/Hub?
              Answer Step 1 On the bottom of each D-Link Switch/Hub, a sticker has been placed which
              contains the serial number information for that product.

              • An example of the sticker is shown below:

                DES-1009G

              • The circled series of numbers is the Serial number.

              Model General Switches
              Question What is Web-based Manangement?
              Answer A device (hubs, switches, routers, or wireless access points) with an embedded web-based (hypertext) interface allows users to manage the hub from anywhere on the network through a standard browser such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer. The web-browser acts as a universal access tool and can communicate directly with the device using HTTP protocol.

              To access your device, open your web browser and enter the IP address of the device (192.168.0.1 for example). Please refer to your manual or quick installation guide for the IP address.
              Model General Switches / DES-1024D / DES-1009G / DES-1026G / DES-105 / DES-108 / DES-1105 / DES-1108 / DES-1226G_revA / DES-1226G_revB / DES-3010FA/ DES-1228 / DES-1226P / DES-1250G / DES-1252 / DES-1316 / DES-1526 / DES-3010PA / DES-3010FA / DES-3226 / DES-3226L_revA / DES-3226L_revB / DES-3226SM / DES-3250TG / DES-3326 / DES-3326SRM / DES-3350SR / DES-3526DC /
              Question What is the difference between Store-and-Forward switching and Cut-Through switching?
              Answer Store-and-Forward: Store-and-Forward switching will wait until the entire frame has arrived prior to forwarding it. This method stores the entire frame in memory. Once the frame is in memory, the switch checks the destination address, source address, and the CRC. If no errors are present, the frame is forwarded to the appropriate port. This process ensures that the destination network is not affected by corrupted or truncated frames.

              Cut-Through: Cut-Through switching will begin forwarding the frame as soon as the destination address is identified. The difference between this and Store-and-Forward is that Store-and-Forward receives the whole frame before forwarding. Since frame errors cannot be detected by reading only the destination address, Cut-Through may impact network performance by forwarding corrupted or truncated frames. These bad frames can create broadcast storms wherein several devices on the network respond to the corrupted frames simultaneously.
              Model General Switches / DS-510P / DS-510S
              Question Where can I download the D-View 5.1 Trial Version?
              Answer Go to our FTP site and download 4 files - dview51_trial.zip, dview51_trial.z01 -.z03. Extract ONLY the dview51_trial.zip file.

              Note: D-Link Does Not Offer Free Technical Support On The Free Evaluation Versions of D-View. Free Technical Support Is Only Provided For D-View Standard and D-View Professional. For upgrade information please contact your authorized D-Link reseller.

              System Requirements:

              D-View 5.1 can be installed and operated on a computer that meets the following minimum requirements:

            • CPU: 550 MHz and above
            • DRAM: 256MB
            • Hard Drive Available space: 100MB
            • Ethernet Adapter: 10/100BASE-T
            • Operating System: Windows 2000 or Windows XP
            • Microsoft Access 2000
              • Model General USB
              Question Why donīt my USB devices work with Windows NT, even with the latest service packs?
              Answer The Windows NT operating system does not support USB. There are no patches or fixes for this. Windows 95 OSR2B provides minimal support for USB. However, if you want to use USB devices with full support from your operating system, it is recommended that you install a complete version, not an upgrade, of Windows 98 Second Edition, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP.
              Model General USB
              Question What are the benefits of USB?
              Answer USB makes it easier to add new peripherals. Windows 98 and Windows 95 R2 will automatically recognize devices when you plug them in.

              Quicker installation of new peripherals: You wonīt have to reboot during installation.

              Faster: Top USB data speed is around 100 times faster than the fastest serial connection.

              Greater Expandability: Using USB hubs you can connect up to 127 devices to your computer, not be limited to the number of serial ports, parallel ports, or IRQīs on your computer.

              Hot Swappable: Changing connected USB devices is as easy as changing a light bulb, just disconnect the old and plug in the new. No need to power down or fumble with drivers. They just plug and go!

              Eliminates need for external power supplies: fewer plugs to deal with, and lower cost peripherals.

              Meets OnNow industry initiative guidelines: will help to build a future where the computer will be able to better manage power consumption and more seamlessly integrate into our lives.

              Lower peripheral costs: will help drive down the cost of computer peripherals by eliminating external power supplies, allowing manufacturers to standardize their products to a single connector, creating a larger customer base by providing the same peripherals for Macs, PCs, and Portables, and reducing returns due to wrong connector types.
              Model General USB
              Question How Many USB hubs can I connect together?
              Answer In total you should only connect 5 tiers of USB hubs together. A tier is defined by the number of hubs a deviceīs signal must pass through before it reaches the host. For example, using the DSB-H4, D-Linkīs 4-port USB hub, you could connect a theoretical maximum of 341 hubs in five tiers, this would leave you with an incredible 1024 ports to connect USB devices! But you should only connect 127 devices together at any time.
              Do not add a 6th tier of USB Hubs. This would violate the hub cascading rules, and the signals from any devices attached may not function properly.
              Be careful of any compound devices when attaching USB hubs together, they count as tiers too.
              Model General USB
              Question What is a compound device?
              Answer Compound devices are defined as a combination of a USB function or functions with a USB hub. A good example would be a keyboard that has an additional USB port for a mouse to be attached. Even though the keyboard is a peripheral (a function), it is also a hub because you can attach another USB device to it. Effectively the keyboard has a hub inside.
              Model General USB
              Question What is the difference between self-powered and bus-powered USB hubs?
              Answer A self-powered hub plugs into an electrical outlet so that it is better able to provide connected devices with power. Only low power USB devices can be connected to a bus-powered hub (like mice and keyboards). A self-powered hub will allow you to safely connect other devices that require up to the full 500mA outlined in the USB specification. D-Link offers self-powered and user-selectable self- or bus-powered hubs.
              Model General USB
              Question What kind of cables do I use with USB?
              Answer USB cable will usually have both "A" type (downstream) and "B" type (upstream) connectors. Since the connectors have their own unique shape and size, this will prevent users from plugging cables in the wrong way. Unshielded USB cables running at 1.5Mb will have a maximum cable length of about 10ft (3 meters). Shielded USB cables running at 12MB will have a maximum cable length of about 16ft (5 meters). The difference between USB 1.1 and 2.0 is the data transfer speed, 12Mbps versus 480Mbps when using the USB 2.0 interface. The maximum length of a USB 2.0 cable is about 16 ft (5 meters).

              Note: To obtain USB 2.0 speeds, you MUST use a USB 2.0 cable.
              Model General USB
              Question Will Firewire™ (IEEE 1394) replace USB?
              Answer No. Although IEEE 1394 is a faster standard for connecting peripherals, it is also much more expensive as a technology. In the future both USB and Firewire™ will combine to meet the needs of computer users as complimentary technologies. Firewire™ will be used to connect high-speed video cameras, external hard-drives, and other devices that need more than 12Mb of bandwidth. USB will survive to support printers, scanners, joysticks, modems, keyboards, mice, and other lower speed devices. At approximately 100 times faster than today's serial ports, USB is in a strong position to give a greater level of speed to users at a much more attractive price.
              Model General USB
              Question Will USB replace Ethernet as an alternative for home networking?
              Answer No. Although USB is capable of providing a direct connection between multiple PCs, it is not intended as a replacement for networking. It has cable length limitation far shorter than Ethernet or Fast Ethernet at only 5 meters compared to 100 meters for Ethernet. USB networking schemes only connect a limited number of computers. Bandwidth in USB is shared among all connected devices. These are but a few of the issues that still make Ethernet a more desirable choice for home networking.
              Model General USB
              Question Do I have to replace my existing printer, modem, or other peripheral with a new one that supports USB?
              Answer No. D-Link manufacturers a number of converters that allow you to connect your existing serial or parallel port devices directly to USB.

              DSB-P36 - Converts a parallel device to USB.

              DSB-S25 - Converts a serial device to USB.

              DSB-H3SP - A 3 port USB hub with a serial and parallel port.
              Model General USB
              Question What is USB?
              Answer USB stands for Universal Serial Bus. It is a standard for connecting external devices to your computer quickly and easily. One of the nice things about USB is that power can be provided to the USB device through the USB cable. However, some devices such as printers need more power than the USB ports can provide, so those devices will have to use an external power source. USB also allows the device to be connected and removed from the PC without the need to shut -down the computer. USB 2.0 is the second generation standard that improves on USB 1.1 to provide faster and more reliable data transfers. USB 1.1īs speed of 12Mbps is extended to 480Mbps in USB 2.0. The improved speed and bandwidth opens up the possibility for newfound solutions such as external backup or data storage solutions, as well as digital audio and video solutions.

              One important feature of the USB 2.0 standard is that it is backward compliant with USB 1.0 and USB 1.1. This means that all of your current USB products will work with USB 2.0 adapters. Many USB products are widely available on the market and more are being developed for future release. Because of the high speed of the USB interface, a USB hub can be used to connect more than one USB device to one USB port at one time. The USB standard specifies that up to 127 devices can be connected to your computer.

              Helpful Tips
            • When connecting the USB cable to the computer, make sure that the USB cable is inserted securely.
            • Remember that when connecting USB 1.0 or USB 1.1 products into a USB 2.0 adapter, the USB 1x product will not work faster.
            • To ensure optimal performance when using USB 2.0 devices, use a USB 2.0 certified cable such as the DUB-C5AB.
              • Model General USB
              Question Why do I get a green question mark next to my USB device in Device Manager on my Windows ME computer?
              Answer Green question marks can occur with the following USB device classes: Keyboards, mice, and Universal Serial Bus (USB) hubs. USB printers usually do not directly exhibit this issue, and thus are not affected by green question marks. This indicates that an exact (device-specific) driver is not available, and that a compatible driver has been installed. This new feature was implemented so that you can use the device, even if an exact driver is not available. Even if a device contains a green question mark, most if not all of the features will function properly.

              Following the steps below will often remove the green marks:

              Step 1 Disconnect any extra USB peripherals connected to the computer, such as a scanner or printer.

              Step 2 Go to Start>Settings>Control Panel.

              Step 3 In Control Panel, double-click the System icon.

              Step 4 In the System Properties dialog box, click the Device Manager tab at the top of the window.

              Step 5 In the Device Manager window, double-click Universal Serial Bus controllers.

              Step 6 Listed under Universal Serial Bus controllers, locate and write down the name of the device with the green question mark beside it; this is commonly the Generic USB Hub. You will need this information to complete these steps.

              Step 7 Click to select the device that has the green question mark beside it, and then click Properties.

              Step 8 In the Properties dialog box, click the Driver tab at the top of the window, and then click Update Driver.

              Step 9 In the Update Device Driver Wizard dialog box, click Specify the location of the driver (Advanced), and then click Next.

              Step 10 In the Update Device Driver Wizard dialog box, click Display a list of all drivers in a specific location so you can select the driver you want, and then click Next.

              Step 11 In the Update Device Driver Wizard dialog box, verify that Show compatible hardware is selected. In the Models section, click to select the device name that was written down in Step 6, and then click Next.

              Step 12 If an Update Driver Warning dialog box appears, click Yes.

              Step 13 In the Update Device Driver Wizard dialog box, click Next, and then click Finish.

              Step 14 It may take a few seconds for the configuration to complete. You will now be back in the Properties dialog box, click Close.

              Step 15 Verify that the device no longer contains a green question mark. Follow this process for each device containing a green question mark.

              Resources for this article:

              Winbook Corp.

              Microsoft Knowledge Base
              Model General Video
              Question What do the terms CIF and QCIF mean in the product specifications for my device?
              Answer CIF = Common Intermediate Format and QCIF = Quarter-CIF

              Definitions:

              CIF is based on a progressively scanned format with 360 x 288 pixels/frame at 30 frames/sec, while QCIF uses 176 x 144 pixels/frame at 30 frames/sec. QCIF compatibility is required by the ITU H.261 videoconferencing standard, which mandates that all codecs must be able to operate with QCIF. In contrast, the higher quality CIF compatibility is optional.

              Usage:

              CIF is used primarily for videoconferencing, while QCIF is better suited for applications like desktop videophones.

              Note:

              This FAQ pertains to the following products: DSB-C100 Web Cam /w Clear Case, DSB-C100 Web Cam
              /w White Case, DSB-C300 Web Cam /w Clear Case, DSB-C300 Web Cam /w White Case, DSC-350F
              Dual-Mode Camera, DCS-1000 Internet Camera, DCS-1000W Wireless Internet Camera, DSB-V100 Video Capture Device, DSB-T100 Video Capture Device /w TV Tuner.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is Turbo Mode?
              Answer Turbo mode will allow transmission on 2 channels, which will improve data rate (up to 72 Mbps). This is proprietary to D-Link products. This setting must be the same on the access point and clients or you will not be able to communicate with each other.

              Turbo mode is only available with D-Linkīs 802.11a and 802.11g wireless products.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is IEEE 802.11 standard ?
              Answer The IEEE 802.11 specification is a wireless LAN standard developed by the IEEE committee in order to specify an "over the air" interface between a wireless client and a base station or Access Point, as well as among wireless clients. The IEEE created the specification but they do not certify equipment, WECA certifies wireless LAN products.

              Standard
              		 Frequency
              Speed
              Encryption
              802.11A 5.0 GHz Up to 72Mbps* 64, 128, and 152-bit
              802.11B 2.4 GHz Up to 11Mbps 64 and 128-bit
              802.11B+ 2.4 GHz Up to 22Mbps 64, 128, and 256-bit, WPA
              802.11G 2.4 GHz Up to 108Mbps** 64 and 128-bit, WPA
              Note: 802.11B+ is not an IEEE standard but is recognized as a seperate standard. Also known as Enhanced 802.11B.

              * With Turbo mode enabled
              ** With Super G enabled


            • What is WECA?
            • What is Turbo Mode?
            • What is Super G?
            • What is WEP?
            • What is WPA?
              • Model General Wireless
              Question Would the information be intercepted while transmitting on air?
              Answer WLAN features two-fold protection in security. On hardware side, as Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum technology, it has the inherent security feature of scrambling. On software side, WLAN series offer the encryption function (WEP) to enhance security and Access Control. Users can set it up depending on their needs.

            • What can interfere with my wireless connection?
            • What is WEP?
            • What is Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum?
              • Model General Wireless
              Question What is DSSS? What is FHSS? And what are their differences?
              Answer Frequency hopping spread spectrum (FHSS) uses a narrowband carrier that changes frequency in a pattern that is known to both transmitter and receiver. Properly synchronized, the net effect is to maintain a single logical channel. To an unintended receiver, FHSS appears to be short-duration impulse noise.

              Direct-sequence spread-spectrum (DSSS) generates a redundant bit pattern for each bit to be transmitted. This bit pattern is called a chip (or chipping code). The longer the chip, the greater the probability that the original data can be recovered. Even if one or more bits in the chip are damaged during transmission, statistical techniques embedded in the radio can recover the original data without the need for retransmission. To an unintended receiver, DSSS appears as low power wideband noise and is rejected (ignored) by most narrowband receivers. Most wireless LAN vendors have been adopting DSSS technology after considering the trade off between cost and performance, and so does D-Link.

              Would the information be intercepted while transmitting on air?
              WLAN features two-fold protection in security. On the hardware side, to an unintended receiver, DSSS appears as low power wideband noise and is rejected (ignored) by most narrowband receivers. On the software side, WLAN series offer the encryption function (WEP) to enhance security and Access Control. Users can set it up depending on their needs.

            • What is Spread Spectrum?
            • What could cause interference with my wireless connection?
              • Model General Wireless
              Question What is a Cell ?
              Answer A cell is an area where all wireless communication takes place.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is WEP?
              Answer WEP stands for Wired Equivalent Privacy. It is based on the IEEE 802.11 standard and uses the RC4 encryption algorithm. Enabling WEP allows you to increase security by encrypting data being transferred over your wireless network.

              When WEP encryption is enabled, there are up to four options*: 64-bit and 128-bit. 64-bit is the same as 40-bit WEP. The lower level of WEP encryption uses a 40-bit (10 character) "secret key" (set by the user), and a 24-bit "initialization vector" (not under user control). So lower level 40 and 64 bit WEP cards are equivalent in encryption strength and compatibility.

              * 802.11B supports 64 and 128-bit encryption, 802.11B+ (enhanced) supports 64, 128, and 256-bit encryption, 802.11G support 64 and 128-bit, and 802.11A supports 64, 128, and 152-bit encryption.

              Note: WEP does not stand for Wireless Encryption Protocol. Please read here for more information about WEP and security.
              http://www.wi-fi.org/opensection/secure_the_network_setup.asp



              How do I enable encryption on my wireless product?
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is Spread Spectrum ?
              Answer Spread Spectrum technology is a wideband radio frequency technique developed by the military for use in reliable, secure, mission-critical communications systems. And Spread-Spectrum is designed to trade off bandwidth efficiency for reliability, integrity, and security. In other words, more bandwidth is consumed than in the case of narrowband transmission, but the trade off produces a signal that is, in effect, louder and thus easier to detect, provided that the receiver knows the parameters of the spread-spectrum signal being broadcast. If a receiver is not tuned to the right frequency, a spread-spectrum signal looks like background noise. There are two main alternatives, Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) and Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FHSS).
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is ISM band ?
              Answer The FCC and their counterparts outside of the U.S. have set aside bandwidth for unlicensed use in the so-called ISM (Industrial, Scientific and Medical) band. Most wireless LANs operate in the ISM band. Spectrum in the vicinity of 2.4 GHz, in particular, is being made available worldwide. This presents a truly revolutionary opportunity to place convenient high-speed wireless capabilities in the hands of users around the globe.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is the maximum number of nodes which can be supported in Infrastructure mode? How about Ad-Hoc mode?
              Answer In theory, in Infrastructure mode, a maximum of 2048 wireless nodes can be supported. In ad-hoc mode, a maximum of 256 wireless nodes can be supported. Please keep in mind that ad-hoc mode has additional overhead and the more nodes which are used, the lower the amount of available bandwidth will be. For applications which are bandwidth intensive, such as games and multimedia, 6 to 8 nodes would be optimum in achieving adequate network performance.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is the maximum distance between station and access point?
              Answer The maximum distance is 300ft for indoor environment, and 900ft for outdoor environment.

            • What variables may cause my wireless product not to recieve signals at the maximum advertised distance?
            • Would the information be intercepted while transmitting on air?
              • Model General Wireless
              Question Which D-Link wireless adapters have Linux drivers available?
              Answer The following drivers are open source and in no way supported or endorsed by D-Link. Use at your own risk.

              Adapter Open Source Drivers
              DWL-520 (rev A, B, & E)

              Read Here

              DWL-520 (rev C)

              Read Here

              DWL-520 (rev D)

              Read Here

              DWL-650 (rev A-J3, & P)

              Read Here

              DWL-650 (rev K1)

              N/A

              DWL-650 (rev L1/L2)

              Read Here

              DWL-650 (rev M1)

              Read Here

              DWL-650H

              N/A

              DWL-520+

              Read Here

              DWL-650+

              Read Here

              DWL-G120 (rev A & B)

              Read Here

              DWL-G510

              N/A
              DWL-G520 (rev A & B)

              Read Here

              DWL-G630

              N/A

              DWL-G650 (rev A)

              Read Here

              DWL-G650 (rev B & C)

              Read Here

              DWL-A520/A650

              N/A

              DWL-AB520/AB650

              Read Here

              DWL-AG520/AG650

              Read Here

              DWL-120 (rev A-C)

              Read Here

              DWL-120 (rev D, E, & F)

              Read Here

              DWL-120+

              N/A

              DWL-122

              Read Here

              DCF-650W

              Read Here

              DCF-660W

              Read Here

              Model General Wireless
              Question What is BSS ID ?
              Answer A specific Ad hoc LAN is called a Basic Service Set (BSS). Computers in a BSS must be configured with the same BSS ID.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is WECA?
              Answer The Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance (WECA) was established in August 1999 to certify interoperability of Wireless Fidelity (802.11b High Rate) wireless LAN products and to promote Wi-Fi as the global standard for wireless LAN deployment across all market segments.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is Ad-hoc mode?
              Answer Set of 802.11b wireless stations that communicate directly with one another without using an access point or any connection to a wired network.



              What is Infrastructure?
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is ESS ID?
              Answer An Infrastructure configuration could also support roaming capability for mobile workers. More than one BSS can be configured as an Extended Service Set (ESS). Users within an ESS could roam freely between BSS’s while served a continuous connection to the network wireless stations and Access Points within an ESS. They must be configured with the same ESS ID and the same radio channel.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is Roaming? And how does it work?
              Answer Roaming is the ability of a portable computer user to communicate continuously while moving freely throughout an area greater than that covered by a single access point. Before using the roaming function, the workstation must make sure that it is the same channel number with the Access Point of dedicated coverage area.

              To achieve true seamless connectivity, the wireless LAN must incorporate a number of different functions. Each node and access point, for example, must always acknowledge receipt of each message. Each node must maintain contact with the wireless network even when not actually transmitting data.

              Achieving these functions simultaneously requires a dynamic RF networking technology that links access points and nodes. In such a system, the user‘s end node undertakes a search for the best possible access to the system. First, it evaluates such factors as signal strength and quality, as well as the message load currently being carried by each access point and the distance of each access point the wired backbone. Based on that information the node next selects the right access point and registers its address.

              Communications between end node and host computer can then be transmitted up and down the backbone. As the user moves on, the end nodes RF transmitter regularly checks the system to determine whether it is in touch with the original access point or whether it should seek a new one. When a node no longer receives acknowledgment from its original access point, it undertakes a new search. Upon finding a new access point, it then reregisters, and the communication process continues.

              For best results, setup your access points on different channels, but use the same SSID. If you are using WEP, then enter the same key on all the access points.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is Infrastructure?
              Answer Infrastructure: An 802.11 network in which wireless devices communicate with each other by first going through an Access Point (AP) or wireless router.



              What is Ad-Hoc?
              Model General Wireless
              Question How do I know if my wireless products are Wi-Fi certified?
              Answer To check if your wireless products are Wi-Fi Certified you can go to http://www.wi-fi.org/.

              Click here to see if your wireless product is Wi-Fi Certified
              Model General Wireless
              Question Does D-Link offer an antenna for the 802.11a, 5 GHZ wireless devices?
              Answer No. All 802.11a devices follow the FCC guidelines relating to UNII-1 and UNII-2 . This limits the 802.11a standard to indoor use. You are also allowed limited transmit power. Adding an antenna and/or power boosters may cause you to violate this Federal Law.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is EAP?
              Answer Short for Extensible Authentication Protocol, an extension to PPP (Point to Point Protocol). EAP is a general protocol for authentication that also supports multiple authentication methods, such as token cards, Kerberos, one-time passwords, certificates, public key authentication and smart cards. IEEE 802.1x specifies how EAP should be encapsulated in LAN frames.

              In wireless communications using EAP, a user requests connection to a WLAN through an AP, which then requests the identity of the user and transmits that identity to an authentication server such as RADIUS. The server asks the AP for proof of identity, which the AP gets from the user and then sends back to the server to complete the authentication.

              EAP is defined by RFC 2284

            • Source - www.zayetech.com
              • Model General Wireless
              Question Where do I get the encryption key on my D-Link wireless device?
              Answer You make up the key yourself. As a rule of thumb, always use Hex as your key type, especially if you are using a mixed environment with other manufacturerīs products.

              To make a key, simply use numbers between 0 and 9, and letters between A-F. For example, for a 64-bit encryption key, you will enter 10 characters for your key. Enter A137F8AD89. It is recommended not to use a repeated character such as 2222222222.

              Make sure you use the same exact key on all your wireless devices.

            • 64-bit - 10 characters
            • 128-bit - 26 characters
            • 152-bit - 32 characters
            • 256-bit - 58 characters

            • How do I enable Encryption on my D-Link wireless products?
            • What is WEP?
            • Iīm confused, some of the D-Link devices say they are using 40 bit encryption, others say they are using 128 bit and/or 64 bit. Are these encryption levels compatible with each other?
              • Model General Wireless
              Question What Operating Systems support my D-Link Air Wireless Adapters?
              Answer
              D-Link Air Wireless Adapters
              Wireless Adapter Operating System Driver Version Installation Procedure
              DWL-650 Windows 98/ME/2000 1737F Software First
              DWL-650 Windows XP 1737F Software First
              DWL-650H Windows 98/ME/2000 010402F Software First
              DWL-650H Windows XP 010402F Hardware First
              DWL-650K1 Windows 98/ME/2000/XP 2.0 Software First
              DWL-650L1 Windows 98/ME/2000/XP 3.0 Software First
              DWL-520 Windows 98/ME/2000 b2 Software First
              DWL-520 Windows XP 1737F Hardware First
              DWL-120 Windows 98/ME/2000 2.25_02 Software First
              DWL-120 Windows XP N/A No XP Support
              DWL-120A Windows 98/ME/2000 2.25b_02 Software First
              DWL-120A Windows XP 2.25b_02 Hardware First
              DWL-120D Windows 98/ME/2000 12502 Software First
              DWL-120E1 Windows 98/ME/2000/XP 1.01 Software First
              Model General Wireless
              Question I get an "Incompatible Version of RPC Stub" error when I try to install my D-Link Wireless card. What do I do?

              Answer Symptoms
              When a setup is launched, the following error message occurs:
              Error number: 0x80070725
              Description: Incompatible version of the RPC stub
              Product(s): InstallShield Professional 6.x, InstallShield Professional 7.x

              The error appears as the following image:





              Cause
              This error is caused by an incompatible version of a DLL that was installed on the system, such as Oleaut32.dll, Olepro32.dll, Asycfilt.dll, Stdole2.tlb. For example, version 3.50 of Oleaut32.dll is installed and used only by Windows XP and so causes this error if it is installed on a machine running any other operating system.

              Some users have resolved this issue with updates found at support.installshield.com



              Source = support.installshield.com
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is the default IP address of my D-Link Access Point or Camera?
              Answer
              D-Link default IP Addresses
              AP / Camera IP Address Configuration Default Username Default Password
              DWL-810 192.168.0.30 web based admin blank
              DWL-800AP+ 192.168.0.30 web based admin blank
              DWL-900AP 192.168.0.20 SNMP & USB N/A public
              DWL-900AP+ 192.168.0.50 web based admin blank
              DWL-1000AP N/A AP Manager N/A N/A
              DWL-1000AP+ 192.168.0.50 web Based admin blank
              DWL-5000AP 192.168.0.50 web based Admin blank
              DWL-6000AP 192.168.0.50 web based admin blank
              DCS-900 192.168.0.20 web based & IPView Lite admin blank
              DCS-900W 192.168.0.20 web based & IPView Lite admin blank
              DCS-1000 192.168.0.20 web based & IPView admin blank
              DCS-1000W 192.168.0.20 web based & IPView admin blank
              DCS-2000 N/A web-based & surveillance software admin N/A
              DCS-2100+ N/A web-based & surveillance software admin N/A
              Model General Wireless
              Question What channel should I use on my 802.11b Wireless devices?
              Answer In the 802.11b (2.4Ghz) standard there are 11 channels (US) to choose from, all but three of those channels are overlapping channels. Channels 1, 6, and 11 are the only non-overlapping channels. The channels can be changed to avoid interference from other wireless devices that run on the 2.4 Ghz frequency range (I.E. 2.4Ghz cordless phones and X-10).

              Note: All D-Link 802.11b Wireless devices default to channel 6.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is SSID?
              Answer SSID, or Service Set Identifier, is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (Access Points, Wireless Routers, and Wireless Network Adapters) must all have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. All D-Link Wireless devices have the default SSID of default, all lower case.

            • You can use up to 32 letters and/or numbers.
            • Do not use spaces, dashes, slashes, or other non-alphanumeric characters.
            • The SSID is CaSe-SenSiTiVe.

              it is recommended to change your SSID. Since the SSID is transmitted, do not use personal information. The SSID has nothing to do with security, it simply is a name for your wireless network.
              • Model General Wireless
              Question How do I enable WEP Encryption on my D-Link wireless products?
              Answer Please click on your product below for instructions for setting up WEP encryption.

              Adapters
              Access Points
              Wireless Routers

              802.11A

              802.11B

              802.11B+

               

              802.11G



              Security
              Any wireless network adapter coming within range of another 802.11b network adapter or access point can instantly connect and join the network unless WEP – Wired Equivelent Privacy – is enabled. WEP is secure enough for most homes and small business’. There are several flaws in WEP making it unusable for high security applications. At this point, it takes some serious hacking abilities to bust into a WEP enabled network so home users should not worry.

              WEP and Speed
              WEP will slow down your wireless network. Expect a 20-50% reduction in speed depending on the products you are using. The speed issue is the result of the added overhead to the data packets.

              Encryption keys
              Encryption comes in 64bit and 128bit key varieties. All your nodes must be at the same encryption level with the same key to operate. 40bit and 64bit encryption is the same thing, it’s just a matter of how the manufacturer decided to label the product.
              Model General Wireless
              Question How do I configure my Cisco Aironet wireless card with a D-Link router or access point?
              Answer If you are using the Cisco Aironet wireless utility, you will need to create a new profile for a connection to the D-Link router or access point. Use the same SSID that is set on the D-Link unit (default is the factory set SSID.) If you wish to use encryption, use a WEP key. Do not use LEAP. For information on Cisco Aironet configuration, please visit http://www.cisco.com/univercd/cc/td/doc/product/wireless/airo_350/350cards/windows/incfg/win_ch5.htm#xtocid3
              Model General Wireless
              Question Why is my wireless connection poor when I use a wireless adapter in my Compaq N600C or Armada M700 laptop?
              Answer The Compaq N600C and Compaq Armada M700 laptops use a magnesium alloy display enclosure and advanced composite bottom case which may degrade a wireless adapterīs signal.

              Model General Wireless
              Question What is Bluetooth?
              Answer Bluetooth refers to a short-range radio technology aimed at simplifying communications among Net devices and between devices and the Internet. It also aims to simplify data synchronization between Net devices and other computers.

              Products with Bluetooth technology must be qualified and pass interoperability testing by the Bluetooth Special Interest Group prior to release.

              The Bluetooth 1.0 specification consists of two documents: the Foundation Core, which provides design specifications, and the Foundation Profile, which provides interoperability guidelines.

              Bluetoothīs founding members include Ericsson, IBM, Intel, Nokia and Toshiba.

              Source - 802.11 Planet.

              Learn more about Bluetooth at Bluetooth.com.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is OFDM?
              Answer Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing, an FDM modulation technique for transmitting large amounts of digital data over a radio wave. OFDM basically splits the radio signal into multiple smaller sub-signals that are then transmitted simultaneously at different frequencies to the receiver. OFDM reduces the amount of crosstalk in signal transmissions. 802.11a and 802.11g WLAN technology uses OFDM.

              Source - 802.11 Planet
              Model General Wireless
              Question Will my wireless adapter or my DFE-530TX+ Ethernet adapter work with InnQuest RoomMaster software?
              Answer Unfortunately no. InnQuest has tested these products and they have caused data corruption with their software.

              Please visit the minimum requirements page at InnQuest for more information.

              InnQuest Software does not support non-standard cabling, including CAT-3, wiring through phone blocks, or RF-networks.

              Realtek, D-Link, Kingston, Linksys and generic network cards/hubs will corrupt data and are NOT supported.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What D-Link products are compatible with Super G™ and Super AG™?
              Answer The products below currently support Super G™ & Super AG™:

              Routers Download
              DI-624 (revB) Download
              DI-624 (revC) Download
              DI-784 Download
              Access Points Download
              DWL-2000AP (revA) Download
              DWL-2000AP (revB) Download
              DWL-2000AP (revC) Download
              DWL-2100AP Download
              DWL-7100AP Download
              DWL-G800AP Download
              DWL-G810 Download
              DWL-G820 Download
              Adapters Download
              DWL-G520 (revA) Download
              DWL-G520 (revB) Download
              DWL-G650 (revB) Download
              DWL-G650 (revC) Download
              DWL-AG530 Download
              DWL-AG660 Download


              Note: Unfortunately the DI-624 rev. A and the DWL-G650 rev. A will never support Super G Mode. These hardware revisions were developed on an earlier, unratified draft of the 802.11G specification. D-Link will not exchange for newer hardware revisions.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What D-Link wireless products currently have WPA/WPA-PSK security?
              Answer The following products currently support WPA and WPA-PSK. Click on the product for setup instructions.

              Product Driver/Firmware Version
              DI-514 (Rev B) 1.02 or higher
              DI-524 1.02 or higher
              DI-614+ (Rev B) 3.28 or higher
              DI-624 (Rev B) 1.25 or higher
              DI-624 (Rev C) 2.25 or higher
              DI-774 (Rev A) 1.25 or higher
              DI-774 (Rev B) 2.25 or higher
              DI-784 2.27 or higher
              DWL-900AP+ (Rev C) 3.07 or higher
              DWL-1000AP+ 1.19 B2 or higher
              DWL-2000AP (Rev A) 1.54 or higher
              DWL-2000AP (Rev B) 2.04 or higher
              DWL-2100AP 1.00 or higher
              DWL-2200AP 1.00 or higher
              DWL-2210AP 1.00 or higher
              DWL-2700AP 1.00 or higher
              DWL-7000AP 1.05 or higher
              DWL-7100AP 1.00u or higher
              DWL-G700AP 1.00 or higher
              DWL-120 (Rev F) 1.00 or higher
              DWL-520 (Rev E) 3.00.08 or higher
              DWL-650 (Rev P) 3.00.08 or higher
              DWL-650+ 3.06 or higher
              DWL-AG520 3.16 or higher
              DWL-AG530 1.00 or higher
              DWL-AG650 2.37 or higher
              DWL-AG660 1.00 or higher
              DWL-G120 1.10 or higher
              DWL-G520 (Rev A) 2.36 or higher
              DWL-G520 (Rev B) 3.00 or higher
              DWL-G630 1.00 or higher
              DWL-G650 (Rev A) 1.08 or higher
              DWL-G650 (Rev B) 2.36 or higher
              DWL-G650 (Rev C) 3.00 or higher
              DWL-G650M 1.00 or higher
              DWL-G730 1.00 or higher
              DWL-G810 2.13 or higher
              DWL-G820 1.00 or higher

              Download drivers and firmware here

              The revision is located on the label next to H/W:. If you do not know what revision you have, please visit our Products page and click on your product.
              Model General Wireless
              Question Why am I unable to send E-mail when using Microsoft Outlook through a VPN, while connected (via wireless) to my wireless router?

              Answer You may be experiencing problems with packet fragmentation. Here are a few configuration changes to try to correct the problem:
              • Make sure that you have the latest firmware/drivers for your wireless products.
              • If the wireless adapter was installed after the VPN installation, you may need to reinstall the VPN software.
              • Drop the MTU on the router to 1000. If this works, increase the MTU by 100 until you are not able to send, then revert back to the largest value that allows you to send e-mail through Outlook on a VPN connection.
              • Disable 4x Mode (DI-614+ and DI-714+ only). This can be done on the Advanced > Performance page of the DI-614+īs web-based configuration.
              • Lock the Tx rate to 11 Mbps on the router. This can be done on the Advanced > Performance page of the web-based configuration.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What are the 3 modes available when enabling Super G™ and Super A/G™?
              Answer The 3 Super G™ and Super A/G™ modes available for wireless routers and access points are:

              Super G without Turbo

              This mode will allow you to increase throughput but can only connect up to 54 Mbps. The technologies used are Dynamic Packet Bursting, Fast Frames, and Compression.

              Super G with Dynamic Turbo

              This mode will allow you to increase throughput and increase speeds up to 108 Mbps. This mode will allow non-Turbo devices to connect to the network. Unfortunately when non-Turbo devices are connected, Turbo will be disabled on the other devices, allowing only up to 54 Mbps. The technologies used are Dynamic Packet Bursting, Fast Frames, Compression, and Turbo.

              Note: This is the default setting for our access points and routers. If you have non-Super G products, you should disable Super G mode on your AP or router.

              Super G with Static Turbo

              Note: This mode is not available on newer versions of firmwares due to itīs lack of compliance with Wi-Fi Alliance standards.

              This mode will allow you to increase throughput and increase speeds up to 108 Mbps. This mode will not allow non-Turbo devices to connect at all. Only devices with Turbo mode enabled will be able to connect to the network. The technologies used are Dynamic Packet Bursting, Fast Frames, Compression, and Turbo.

              Note: Super G and Turbo mode devices will not affect your hard-wired (Ethernet) devices.
              Model General Wireless
              Question How can I connect to a computer behind my D-Link router using Windows XP Remote Desktop?
              Answer This FAQ is for the DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, and DI-784.

              Step 1 Verify the IP address of the computer you want to access.

              How do I find the IP address on my computer?

              Step 2 Access the routerīs web management by entering its IP address in the browser (192.168.0.1). Username is admin and the password is left blank.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab, then click the Virtual Server button.

              Step 4 Enter the following information:
            • Click Enabled
            • Private IP address: Enter the IP address of the computer you want to access.
            • Protocol Type: Select Both.
            • Public Port/Private Port: Enter 3389 in both the public and private port fields.
            • Schedule: Click Always.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then Continue.



              Step 6 To access the computer from the Internet, you must use the WAN IP address of the router, not the computer. To get the WAN IP address of the router, login as above and click on the Status tab.

              NAT does not allow forwarding the same service port to multiple computers.
              • Model General Wireless
              Question What is WPA?
              Answer WPA, or Wi-Fi Protected Access, is a Wi-Fi standard that was designed to improve the security features of WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy). The technology is designed to work with existing Wi-Fi products that have been enabled with WEP (i.e., as a software/firmware upgrade to existing hardware).

              The 2 major improvements over WEP:
            • Improved data encryption through the Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP). TKIP scrambles the keys using a hashing algorithm and, by adding an integrity-checking feature, ensures that the keys haven’t been tampered with.
            • User authentication, which is generally missing in WEP, through the extensible authentication protocol (EAP). WEP regulates access to a wireless network based on a computer’s hardware-specific MAC address, which is relatively simple to be sniffed out and stolen. EAP is built on a more secure public-key encryption system to ensure that only authorized network users can access the network.

              * It should be noted that WPA is an interim standard that will be replaced with the IEEE’s 802.11i standard upon its completion.

            • Source - Webopedia.com
            • Learn more about WPA here
            • What D-Link products currently support WPA?
              • Model General Wireless
              Question What is 4X mode?
              Answer 4X mode is a proprietary method of gaining increased throughput exclusive to the D-Link Airplus family.

              4X mode enables you to get up to 4 times actual throughput increase over 802.11b devices when using D-Link Airplus products that also support 4X mode.

              The 4X mode option is available with a driver upgrade for the DWL-650+ or DWL-520+ and a firmware upgrade for DWL-900AP+ and the DI-614+.

              Note: When upgrading firmware or drivers, 4X mode is enabled by default. If you are using non-4X adapters in your wireless network, performance will degrade if 4X is enabled.

            • How do I enable/disable 4x mode on my DI-614+?
            • How do I enable/disable 4x mode on my DWL-900AP+?
            • Download firmware here

              Note The DWL-900AP+ currently supports the 4X feature in Access Point mode only.

              4X mode will not be available for the following:
            • DI-711
            • DI-713P
            • DI-754
            • DI-764
            • DI-774
            • DI-784
            • DWL-900AP
            • DWL-1000AP
            • DWL-120 (A-E1)
            • DWL-650 (A-P)
            • DWL-650H
            • DWL-520 (A-E)
            • DWL-AB520/650
            • DWL-AG520/650
            • DWL-A520/650
            • DWl-G510/630
            • DWL-G520/650
            • DCF-660W

              • Model General Wireless
              Question Why canīt I connect my Windows XP machine to my wireless router or access point after I disabled the SSID Broadcast?
              Answer "When your Windows XP Service Pack 1 or 2-based Wireless Zero Configuration (WZC) client computer is in the proximity of two wireless access points, and one of the access points is broadcasting its Service Set Identifier (SSID) but the other is not, your computer always connects to the access point that is broadcasting its SSID. This occurs regardless of the preference order of the networks that are configured on the Preferred Networks list."

            • Click here for information regarding this issue from Microsoft.
            • Click here to learn more about the Wireless Zero Configuration.
              • Model General Wireless
              Question What is the CTS option on my D-Link XTreme G wireless device?
              Answer CTS Mode -  CTS (Clear To Send) is a function used to minimize collisions among wireless devices on a wireless local area network (WLAN). CTS will make sure the wireless network is clear before a wireless client attempts to send wireless data. Enabling CTS will add overhead and may lower wireless throughput.

              Settings
              Auto -  CTS will monitor the wireless network and automatically decide whether to implement CTS based on the amount of traffic and collisions that occur on the wireless network.

              Always -  CTS will always be used to make sure the wireless LAN is clear before sending data.

              None -  Typically used in a pure 802.11g environment. If CTS is set to None in a mixed mode environment populated by 802.11b clients, wireless collisions may occur frequently.

              If you have a mixed environment, both 802.11b and 802.11g clients, the recommended setting is Auto. Auto is the default setting.

              Note: If you are in a pure 802.11g environment (802.11g devices only), you can optimize the performance by setting the CTS to None.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What causes my wireless connection to be dropped every few minutes when using Windows XP?
              Answer Note: This issue was fixed with Service Pack 2.

              This behavior usually happens when your connection is configured to use 802.1x Authentication, but your current hardware does not support the feature. To disable the option, follow these steps:

              Step 1 Click on Start and then click Run

              Step 2 In the box, type ncpa.cpl and press Enter (or click the OK button).

              Step 3 The Network Connections screen will appear. Right-click the Wireless Network Connection and select Properties.

              Step 4 Click the Authentication tab.

              Note If there isnīt an Authentication tab, then please read Microsoftīs Knowledge Article #828940 for additional help.

              Step 5 The Authentication screen will open. Remove the check mark in Enable network access control using IEEE 802.1x option.



              Step 6 Click OK to close the window and close all other open windows. Reboot your computer and you should be able to connect to your wireless network.

              If restarting the computer doesnīt help, then please read Microsoft Knowledge Article #828940.
              Model General Wireless
              Question Will upgrading to 802.11g increase my Internet connection speed?
              Answer Upgrading to 802.11g will not increase the speed of your Internet connection. Most broadband (DSL, satellite, cable) Internet connections top out at about 1-5 Mbps. If your Internet connection download speed is 1.5 Mbps, then your will not be able to go faster then that speed. Upgrading to 802.11g will increase the speed of file transfers on an internal (private) network.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What are the Aniwzcs and Anio services for?
              Answer The Aniwzcs and Anio services that are running on your computer are for the WPA feature that is built-in to the D-Link Wireless Utility. These services must be running in conjunction with the D-Link Wireless Utility to allow WPA and WPA-PSK to work.
              Model General Wireless
              Question What devices can repeat the signal of my D-Link access point?
              Answer Select the image or model number of your D-Link access point below for a list of devices that can repeat your D-Link access point. Clicking the image/model number will expand/collapse the list.

              Note: Specific firmware (F/W) versions or revision number that appear above a model number relate to the access point and firmware and revision numbers that appear below a model number relate to the access point.


              DPG-2000W

              No info available.

              DWL-1000AP+
              DWL-1700AP

              No info available.

              DWL-2000AP Revision A

            • DWL-1000AP+
            • DWL-800AP+
            • DWL-900AP+

              F/W 1.56
            • DWL-7100AP

              F/W 1.56 & Higher
            • DWL-2100AP
            • DWL-G800AP

              RevA1 F/W 1.58
            • DWL-G710

              • DWL-2000AP Revision B

            • DWL-1000AP+
            • DWL-800AP+
            • DWL-900AP+

              F/W 2.06
            • DWL-7100AP

              F/W 2.06 & Higher
            • DWL-2100AP
            • DWL-G800AP

              RevB1 F/W 2.06
            • DWL-G710

              • DWL-2000AP Revision C

            • DWL-1000AP+
            • DWL-800AP+
            • DWL-900AP+

              F/W 3.10
            • DWL-7100AP

              F/W 3.10 & Higher
            • DWL-2100AP

              RevC1 F/W 3.13
            • DWL-G710

              • DWL-2100AP

              F/W 1.00
            • DWL-7100AP

              F/W 1.01 & Higher
            • DWL-2100AP

              RevA2 F/W 2.00
            • DWL-G710

              • DWL-2200AP

              RevA1 F/W 1.00
            • DWL-G710

              • DWL-2210AP

              No info available.

              DWL-2700AP

            • DWL-2700AP

              RevA1 F/W 1.02
            • DWL-G710

              • DWL-3200AP

              No info available.

              DWL-5000AP

              No info available.

              DWL-6000AP Revision A

              No info available.

              DWL-6000AP Revision B

              No info available.

              DWL-700AP

              No info available.

              DWL-7000AP

              RevA1
              F/W 1.04
            • DWL-7100AP

              F/W 1.04 & Higher
            • DWL-2100AP

              RevA2
              F/W 1.04
            • DWL-7100AP

              F/W 1.04 & Higher
            • DWL-2100AP

              F/W 1.06
            • DWL-G710

              • DWL-7100AP

              F/W 1.00u
            • DWL-7100AP

              F/W 1.00u & Higher
            • DWL-2100AP

              RevA1 F/W 2.00
            • DWL-G710

              • DWL-7200AP

              RevA1 F/W 1.00
            • DWL-G710

              • DWL-7700AP

              RevA1 F/W 1.00
            • DWL-G710

              • DWL-800AP+ Revision A

              DWL-800AP+ Revision B
              DWL-8200AP

              No info available.

              DWL-900AP+ Revision A
              DWL-900AP+ Revision B
              DWL-900AP+ Revision C

            • DWL-800AP+
            • DWL-900AP+

              RevC2 F/W 3.07
            • DWL-G710

              • DWL-AG700AP

              No info available.

              DWL-G700AP

              No info available.

              DWL-G730AP

              No info available.

              DWL-G800AP

              F/W 1.02 & Higher
            • DWL-2100AP
            • DWL-G800AP
              		•  
              Model General Wireless
              Question What is 802.11n?
              Answer 802.11n is a new standard for wide-area wireless networks. Throughput is expected to be 100 Mbit/s (even 250 Mbit/s in PHY level), and up to 4-5 times faster than 802.11g, and 50 times faster than 802.11b. As projected, 802.11n will also offer a better operating distance than current networks. The standardization progress is expected to be completed by the end of 2006.
              Model General Wireless / DWL-900AP
              Question What is WECA (WiFi Alliance)?
              Answer Wireless Ethernet Compatibility Alliance, an organization made up of leading wireless equipment and software providers with the mission of guaranteeing interoperability of Wi-Fi products and to promote Wi-Fi as the global wireless LAN standard across all markets. WECA recently changed their name to WiFi Alliance.

              Source - Webopedia.com

              Read more about Wi-Fi here

              Read more about wireless here.
              Model General Wireless / DWL-900AP+_revC / DWL-700AP / DWL-2100AP / DWL-7100AP / DWL-1000AP+
              Question What is an Access Point?
              Answer An access point is a bridging device for connecting a wired and wireless network together. Access points are typically wireless routers or stand-alone devices that plug into an Ethernet hub, switch, or router.



              Currently, D-Link offers several wireless access points and routers. Please visit our products page for more information.

              Wireless adapters should be set to Infrastructure Mode when connecting to an access point or wireless router.
              Model General Wireless / DWL-G520 / DWL-G650 / DWL-AG520 / DWL-AG650 / DWL-G630 / DWL-G510 / DWL-520D / DWL-520E
              Question Why am I receiving Error -1607: Unable to Install InstallShield Scripting Run Time when I install or uninstall my wireless utility?
              Answer This error message is a system-specific error and can be caused by a system-specific setting. The article below attempts to list all the possible steps that have known to resolve this error. Depending on your system, you may need to try some or all of the listed solutions.

              Please visit http://consumer.installshield.com/kb.asp?id=Q108340 for the solution/article.
              Model General-Router
              Question Can old configuration files be loaded after upgrading firmware?
              Answer No, configuration files only work for the firmware version they are saved in. New features may be added to the Routerīs interface, making the older configuration unusable.
              Model General-Router / General Wireless
              Question What devices can repeat the signal of my D-Link wireless router?
              Answer Select the image or model number of your D-Link router below for a list of devices that can repeat your D-Link router. Clicking the image/model number will expand/collapse the list.

              Note: Specific firmware (F/W) versions or revision number that appear above a model number relate to the router and firmware and revision numbers that appear below a model number relate to the repeater.


              DGL-4300

              WDS Mode
            • DGL-4300

              • DI-514 Rev A

              No info available.

              DI-514 Rev B

              Firmware 1.03
            • DWL-G710

              • DI-514 Rev C

              No info available.

              DI-524 Rev A

              DI-524 Rev C
              DI-614+ Rev A
              DI-614+ Rev B
              DI-624 Rev A

              Firmware 1.25
            • DWL-7100AP

              • DI-624 Rev B

              Firmware 1.28
            • DWL-7100AP

              F/W 1.28 & Higher
            • DWL-2100AP

              • DI-624 Rev C

            • DWL-7200AP
            • DWL-900AP+
            • DWL-G710

              Firmware 2.28
            • DWL-7100AP

              F/W 2.37 & Higher
            • DWL-G800AP

              Firmware 2.50
            • DWL-2100AP
              F/W 1.03, 2.00
            • DWL-2200AP
              F/W 1.00, 1.01

              RevC3 F/W 2.50
            • DWL-G710

              • DI-624M

              No info available.

              DI-624S

              No info available.

              DI-714P+
              DI-754

              No info available.

              DI-764
              DI-774 Rev A

            • DWL-900AP+

              F/W 1.25 & Higher
            • DWL-2100AP

              RevA1 F/W 1.25
            • DWL-G710

              • DI-774 Rev B
              DI-784

              RevA1 F/W 1.03
            • DWL-G710

              • DI-824VUP

              No info available.

              DSA-3200

              No info available.

              DWL-G730AP

              No info available.
              		     
              Model General-Routers
              Question Why do I have trouble hosting certain games and have connection problems with XBox Live?
              Answer If a Router/Firewall exists between your Xbox console and your high-speed modem, you may have to configure the firewall to allow network communication on specific network ports. The following ports must be available for Xbox Live to operate correctly:

            • UDP 88
            • UDP 3074
            • TCP 3074

              Note: These ports apply for Xbox Live only. Additional ports may be required to be opened, this is depending on the video game or application that is being used.

              For additional support and examples on how to properly open ports for your D-Link router, review the following FAQs:

              XBConnect
              XBox Support
              • Model General-Routers
              Question How do I perform MSN Messenger file transfers with my D-Link router?
              Answer You must open ports on your router to allow incoming traffic while performing file transfers. Make sure you close MSN Messenger before configuring your router.

              MSN Messenger uses the following ports:
            • 6891-6900 (TCP) - File Transfer

            • Click here to find the IP address of your computer?
            • Click here if you have Windows Me or XP and would like to enable UPnP
            • Click here to download the latest version of MSN Messenger


              Click on your router below for configuration steps:
            • DI-514, DI-524, DI-604, DI-614+, DI-624, DSL-604+
            • DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-714P+, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784
            • DI-704P (revB), DI-707P
            • DI-704P (revA), DI-704, DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, DI-713P
            • DI-804HV, DI-808HV, DI-824VUP




              For the DI-5xx, DI-6xx, DI-704P (revC), DI-704UP, DI-754, DI-764, DI-774, DI-784, DI-804HV, DI-808HV, and DI-824VUP:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (leave blank).

              Step 2 Click on Advanced and then click Firewall.

              Step 3 Create a new firewall rule:
              • Click Enabled.
              • Enter a name (MSN Messenger).
              • Click Allow.
              • Next to Source, select WAN under interface. In the first box, enter an *. Leave the second box empty.
              • Next to Destination, select LAN under interface. Enter the IP address of the computer you are running Messenger from. Leave the second box empty.
              • Under Protocol, select TCP. In the port range boxes, enter 6891 in the first box and 6900 in the second box.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then Continue to save settings.



              Step 5 Restart MSN Messenger.

              If the person you are trying to transfer files with is also behind a router, they must also configure their router for file transfers.






              For the DI-704P (rev.B) and DI-707P:

              Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1). Enter admin for your username and then your password (blank by default).

              Step 2 Click on the Advanced tab and then Virtual Server on the left side.

              Step 3 Enter the following information:
              • Check the Enable box.
              • Next to Service Ports, enter 6891-6900
              • Next to Service IP, enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Messenger from.
              • Click Always or set a schedule.
              Step 4 Click Apply and then click Restart to save your changes.



              For the DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711 (revA), DI-713, and DI-713P:

              Step 1 Open your web browser and enter the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1). Enter user name (admin) and your password (blank by default). If there is only 1 box, enter admin.

              Step 2 Click on Advanced at the bottom and then click Virtual Server.

              Step 3 Create a new entry:
              • Enter 6891-6900 in the box under Service Ports.
              • Enter the IP address of the computer you want to run Messenger from.
              • Check the box under Enable.
              Step 4 Click Save and the click Reboot.

              Note: If you are unable to enter a range, please upgrade to the latest firmware. You can download the firmware at our               Downloads page.

              • Model General-Routers
              Question Why do I get an 401 Unauthorized error when logging into my router?
              Answer You are receiving this error because the password you are typing in is incorrect. Remember that the password is case-sensitive.

              If you forgot your password, you must reset the unit back to factory default settings.

              Click here to reset your router
              Model General-Routers / DI-514 / DI-514_revC / DI-524 / DI-524_revC / DI-524_revD / DI-524_revE / DI-604 / DI-604_revE / DI-784 / DI-784_revB / DI-614 / DI-614 _revB / DI-624 / DI-624_revB / DI-624_revC / DI-624S / DI-714P
              Question How do I configure my router to work with a Cable modem connection?
              Answer This FAQ is for most satellite and cable connections (IE Adelphia, AT&T, CableOne, Cablevision, Charter, Cogeco, Comcast, Cox, DTG, Insight, KingWood, Knowlogy, MediaOne, Millenium, Optimum, RCN, RoadRunner, Rogers, and Shaw). These instructions will also work for DSL users that do not use PPPoE (AllTel, BellSouth, Coastal Utilities, Cyberonic, Empower, MSN, Qwest, Roseville, TC3Net, Telus, and Verizon).

            • Click here if you have a Static cable connection.
            • Click here if you have a DI-704, DI-704P (revA), DI-707, DI-711, DI-713, or DI-713P.

              Note: Please configure the router with the computer that was last connected directly to the cable modem. Also, you can only use the Ethernet port on your modem. If you were using the USB connection before using the router, then you must turn off your modem, disconnect the USB cable and connect an Ethernet cable to the WAN port on the router, and then turn the modem back on. In some cases, you may need to call your ISP to change connection types (USB to Ethernet).


              Step 1 Log into the web-based configuration by typing in the IP address of the router (default:192.168.0.1) in your web browser. The username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).

              Note: The address 192.168.0.1 is NOT on the Internet. The web-based configuration is built-in to the router.



              Step 2 Click the Home tab and click the WAN button. Dynamic IP Address is the default value, however, if Dynamic IP Address is not selected as the WAN type, select Dynamic IP Address by clicking on the radio button. Click Clone Mac Address. Click on Apply and then Continue to save the changes.



              Step 3 Power cycle the cable modem and router:
              • Turn the cable modem off (first)
              • Turn the router off
              • Leave them off for 2 minutes**
              • Turn the cable modem on (first)
              • Wait until you get a solid cable light on the cable modem
              • Turn the router on
              • Wait 30 seconds
              ** If you have a Motorola (Surf Board) modem, leave off for at least 5 minutes.

              Step 4 Follow step 1 and log back into the web configuration. Click the Status tab and click the Device Info button. If you do not have a public IP address under the WAN heading, click on DHCP Renew and then click Continue. It may take a few minutes to obtain an IP address.





              Static Cable Connection


              The instructions below are for users who were given a static IP address from their ISP (Cox Business, TDS DSL, PacBell Business, Interbaun, InReach, Inficad, FlashCom, DCAnet, and Cavalier).

              Step 1 Log into the web based configuration by typing in the IP address of the router (default:192.168.0.1) in your web browser. The username is admin (all lowercase) and the password is blank (nothing).



              Step 2 Click the Home tab and click the WAN button. Select the Static IP Address radio button and enter in your static settings obtained from the ISP in the fields provided.

              If you do not know your settings, you must contact your ISP.



              Step 3 Click on Apply and then click Continue to save the changes.

              Step 4 Click the Status tab and click the Device Info button. Your IP Address information will be displayed under the WAN heading.
              • Model General-Video
              Question What is an Internet camera?
              Answer An Internet Camera is a stand-alone system that connects directly to an Ethernet or Fast Ethernet network and supported by the wireless transmission based on the IEEE 802.11b and/or g standard. It is different from the conventional PC or web Camera. The Internet Camera is an all-in-one system with built-in CPU and web-based Graphic User Interface that can transmit high quality video images for monitoring, and it can be managed remotely, accessed and controlled from any PC/Notebook over an Intranet or Internet via a web browser.
              Model KR-1
              Question Why can’t I connect to the internet with the KR-1?
              Answer If you plug in the EV-DO card after power has been applied to the router it will not work.

              Check the blue LED on the card for card status. If the blue LED on the card does not blink after 2 minutes you must unplug power from the router, remove the card, and then re-insert it. Power the router back on and then wait. Once powered on, check to see if the blue LED is solid. If it is, the card is trying to connect to the cell tower for service. Sometimes this connection can take up to 3 or 4 minutes.
              Model KR-1
              Question How do I open a range of ports on the KR-1 using Firewall Rules?
              Answer You will need to get the IP address from your computer that you want to open ports to.

              Step 1: Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your D-Link router (192.168.0.1). Enter username (admin) and your password (blank by default).

              Step 2: Click on the Advanced tab at the top and then click on Firewall on the lefthand side.

              Step 3: Click on Enabled and type in a name for the new rule.

              Step 4: Choose WAN as the Source and enter a range of IP addresses out on the internet that you would like this rule applied to. If you would like this rule to allow all internet users to be able to access these ports then put an asterisk in the first box and leave the second box empty.

              Step 5: Select LAN as the Destination and enter the IP address of the computer on your local network that you want to allow the incoming service to. This will not work with a range of IP addresses.

              Step 6: Enter the port or range of ports that are required to be open for the incoming service.

              Step 7: Select Always for Schedule or specify a range of day and time that you would like this rule to be active.

              Step 8: Click on Apply and then click on Continue to save your settings.

              Because our routers use NAT (Network Address Translation), you can only open a specific port to one computer at a time. For example: If you have 2 web servers on your network, you cannot open port 80 to both computers. You will need to configure 1 of the web servers to use port 81. Now you can open port 80 to the first computer and then open port 81 to the other computer.
              Model KR-1
              Question How do I use the Special Applications feature on the KR-1?
              Answer Some applications require multiple connections, such as internet gaming, video conferencing, internet telephony, VPNs, and others. These applications have difficulties working through NAT (Network Address Translation). If you need to run applications that require multiple connections, specify the port normally associated with an application in the Trigger Port field, select the protocol type as TCP (Transmission Control Protocol, UDP (User Datagram Protocol), or both, then enter the public ports associated with the trigger port to open them for inbound traffic.

              Note: The trigger port is an outgoing port (from LAN to WAN) that the application will send out.

              Step 1: Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1).

              Step 2: Enter your username (admin) and password, if any.

              Step 3: Click on the Advanced tab and then click on Applications on the lefthand side.

              Step 4: Enter the following information for your special application:
              • Name - This is the name referencing the special application.
              • Trigger Port - This is the port used to trigger the application. It can be either a single port or a range of ports.
              • Trigger Type - This is the protocol used to trigger the special application.
              • Public Port - This is the port number on the WAN side that will be used to access the application. You may define a single port or a range of ports. You can use a comma to add multiple ports or port ranges.
              • Public Type - This is the protocol used for the special application.
              At the bottom of the screen, there are already defined well-known special applications. To use them, click on the edit icon and enable the service.
              Model KR-1
              Question Why can’t I establish a connection to my VPN server through the KR-1?
              Answer Some VPN clients, such as Cisco, Watchguard, Nortel, Sonicwall, and so forth, require special ports to be opened in the router’s firewall. The IPSec (IP Security) and PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol) passthrough settings allow VPN ports to be opened; these clients may require additional ports to operate correctly.

              The Kyocera KR-1 Mobile Router supports the following VPN passthrough parameters:
              • IPSec on port 500 UDP.
              • PPTP on port 1723 TCP.

              • Settings can be configured in the Tools > Misc menu of the Kyocera KR-1 Mobile Router’s Configuration Menu.
              Additionally, users may place up to one LAN host into the DMZ (Demilitarized Zone). The DMZ allows for a single IP to be outside the firewall. This may allow your VPN client to connect successfully.

              Although the DMZ feature may allow your VPN client to connect, it places the single IP outside the firewall, completely exposing the single IP to the WAN (wide area network). This may pose a security risk to your computer, and the entire LAN within the DMZ.
              Model KR-1
              Question How do I enable WEP Encryption on the KR1?
              Answer It is recommended to enable encryption on your wireless router before your wireless network adapters. Please establish wireless connectivity before enabling encryption.

              Note: Your network will slow down and wireless signal may degrade when enabling encryption due to the added overhead.

              Step 1: Log into the web configuration of the router by opening up a web browser and typing in the IP address of the router (192.168.0.1).

              Step 2: Enter your username (admin) and your password (blank by default). Click on OK. Click on the Basic tab and hen click on Wireless on the lefthand side.

              Step 3: Select Enable next to the WEP radio buttons. For WEP encryption select 64, or 128-bit encryption. For the Key type select HEX. If you have an option for Authentication type, select Shared Key.

              Step 4: Select Key 1. Enter a Hex encryption key that you make up. The length of the encryption key will depend on what you selected under WEP Encryption.
              • 64-bit encryption 10 characters
              • 128-bit encryption 26 characters
              The encryption key is HEX, meaning 0-9 and A-F are valid characters. For example, A4583DFF1A (64-bit HEX key).

              Step 5: Click on Apply then click on Continue to save your settings.

              Note: For client adapters, please refer to the manufacturerīs documentation on enabling encryption.
              Model KR-1
              Question How do I change the LAN IP address on the KR-1?
              Answer Step 1: Open your web browser and type the IP address of the wireless router into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2: The default username is admin and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Basic tab then click on LAN on the lefthand side.

              Step 4: Next to IP Address enter the new IP address you wish to assign. Next to Subnet Mask enter the correct subnet mask for the IP address entered. Enter a Local Domain Name if applicable.

              Step 5: Click on Apply and then click on Continue to save your settings.
              Model KR-1
              Question How do I configure the DMZ Host on the KR-1?
              Answer The DMZ feature allows you to forward all incoming ports to one computer on the local network. The DMZ, or Demilitarized Zone, will allow the specified computer to be exposed to the Internet. DMZ is useful when a certain application or game does not work through the firewall. The computer that is configured for DMZ will be completely vulnerable on the Internet, so it is suggested that you try opening ports from the Virtual Server or Firewall Settings before using DMZ.

              Note: You will need to know the IP address of the computer you want to use as the DMZ host.

              Step 1: Open your web browser and enter the IP address of your router into the address bar (192.168.0.1). Enter the username (admin) and your password (leave blank) and click on Ok.

              Step 2: Click on the Advanced tab and then click on DMZ on the lefthand side.

              Step 3: Click on Enable and type in the IP address of the computer you want to use as the DMZ host.

              Step 4: Click on Apply and then click on Continue to save your changes.
              Model KR-1
              Question How do I disable SSID broadcast on the KR1?
              Answer In a home network, the SSID broadcast feature is useful for identifying your network for ease of connectivity, but it can also leave you open to network intrusion. You should disable this feature to improve the security of your wireless network. You will need to manually configure your wireless clients with the same SSID as your access point or wireless router once SSID broadcast is disabled.

              Step 1: Open your Internet browser and type the IP address of the router into the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.1. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2: Click on the Advanced tab and then click on Performance on the lefthand side.

              Step 3: At the bottom of the Performance page, click on Disable next to the SSID Broadcast field.

              Step 4: Click on Apply and then click on Continue to save your changes.

              XP users click here.

              Note: The Site Survey feature on your wireless adapter will no longer work since the SSID is not being transmitted.
              Model KR-1
              Question How do I enable WPA-PSK on the KR-1?
              Answer Step 1: Open your web browser and type the IP address of the wireless router into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Basic tab and then click on Wireless on the lefthand side.

              Step 4: Select the WPA-PSK radio button under Authentication.

              Step 5: Enter a key (passphrase). The key is an alpha-numeric password between 8 and 63 characters long. The password can include symbols (!?*&_) and spaces. Make sure you enter this key exactly the same on all other wireless clients.

              Step 6: Click on Apply button then click on Continue to save your settings.

              Note: If you are configuring your router from a wireless adapter, you will lose connectivity as soon as you click Apply. You must enable WPA-PSK on your adapter and enter the same exact passphrase as you entered on your router.
              Model KR-1
              Question How do I upgrade firmware on the KR-1?
              Answer Note: Kyocera KR1 Mobile Router does not guarantee forward compatibility with Internet Explorer 7.0

              This only applies if firmware is available.

              Follow the directions below to upgrade the firmware for the Kyocera KR-1 router from any operating system including Windows, Linux, and Macintosh with a java-enabled web browser (Internet Explorer 6.0 or higher or Netscape Navigator 6.0 or higher).

              Please read before upgrading:
              • Upgrading firmware (in most cases) will reset all the settings to default which means you will lose all your settings (including your password).
              • You do not have to upgrade incrementally. You can upgrade directly to the newest version of firmware.
              • You cannot use the backup settings feature and apply it once newer firmware is loaded on the KR-1.
              • Do NOT upgrade firmware from a computer with a wireless connection. Use a computer that you can connect to the router using an ethernet cable. You may damage the router due to the increased packet loss with a wireless connection.


              Step 1: Download the latest firmware.

              Step 2: Once youīve downloaded the firmware, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1).

              Step 3: Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave the field blank). Click OK to enter the web configuration for the device.

              Step 4: Click on the Tools tab and then click on Firmware on the lefthand side. Click on the Browse button and browse to the .bix file you downloaded in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click Open.

              Step 5: Click on Apply. It may take a up to 30 seconds for the upgrade to complete. Then click on the Continue button. The firmware is now upgraded.
              Model KR-1
              Question What can I do if I forgot the password to the KR-1?
              Answer The following reset procedure will completely restore the default settings on your Kyocera device, including your password.

              Step 1: Locate the reset pinhole on the back of the unit.

              Step 2: With the unit powered on, press and hold the Reset button.

              Step 3: Hold the Reset button for about 10 seconds.

              Step 4: Release the Reset button.

              Step 5: The unit will reboot. Allow 20-30 seconds before reconnecting.

              Step 6: The device is now at factory defaults.

              Note: Do not recycle power during the reset procedure.

              The default user name for the Kyocera router is admin and the password is left blank.
              Model KR-1
              Question What variables may cause my wireless product not to receive signals at the maximum advertised distance?
              Answer Range is limited by the number of walls, ceilings, or other objects that the wireless signals must pass through. Typical ranges vary depending on the types of materials and background RF noise in your home or business. The key to maximizing range is to follow these basic principles:

              1. Keep the number of walls and ceilings to a minimum - Each wall or ceiling can rob your Kyocera Wireless product of 3-90 ft. of range. Position your Access Points, Residential Gateways, and computers so that the number of walls or ceilings is minimized.

              2. Be aware of the direct line between Access Points, Residential Gateways, and Computers - A wall that is 1.5 feet thick, at a 45 degree angle, appears to be almost 3 feet thick. At a 2-degree angle it looks over 42 feet thick! Try to make sure that the Access Point and Adapters are positioned so that the signal will travel straight through a wall or ceiling for better reception.

              3. Building Materials make a difference - A solid metal door or aluminum studs may have a negative effect on range. Try to position Access Points, Residential Gateways, and Computers so that the signal passes through drywall or open doorways and not other materials.

              4. Make sure that the antenna is positioned for best reception by using the software signal strength tools included with your product.

              5. Keep your product away (at least 3-6 feet) from electrical devices that generate RF noise, like microwaves, Monitors, electric motors, UPS units, etc.

              6. If you are using 2.4GHz cordless phones or X-10 (wireless products such as ceiling fans, lights, and home security systems), your wireless connection will degrade dramatically or drop completely. Anything using the 2.4Ghz frequency will interfere with your wireless network.

              For the average home, range should not be a problem. If you experience low or no signal strength in areas of your home that you wish to access, consider positioning the Access Point in a location directly between the Residential Gateways.
              Model KR-1
              Question How do I configure the KR-1 to use the Nortel Contivity VPN client?
              Answer Note: Nortel Contivity will work with the your Kyocera router, however its functionality depends on the authentication type (AH will not work), NAT compatibilty mode, and disabling keep alives on the server. Contact your Network Administrator to find out how your VPN is configured.

              Step 1: Verify that you are using the latest version of firmware on your router.

              Step 2: Login to the web management for your router by entering its IP address (192.168.0.1) into your web browser. The default username is admin, and the password is blank.

              Step 3: Click on the Advanced tab and then click on Virtual Server. There is a list of pre-defined Virtual Server Rules towards the bottom of the page. Find the IPSec Rule and click on the pen and paper icon to edit its settings. Enable the rule, enter the IP address of the computer attempting to connect to the VPN in the Private IP field, then click on Apply.

              Step 4: Create a new Virtual Server entry. Name this new virtual server NortelVPN. Enter the IP address of the computer attempting to connect to the VPN in the Private IP field. For the Protocol Type, select Both. Enter 9550 for both the Public and Private Ports. Set the Schedule to always, and then click on Apply.

              Step 5: Click on the Tools tab and then click on Misc on the lefthand side. Set IPSec Pass-through to Disable and then click on Apply.

              If the VPN Server is properly configured to work with clients behind NAT routers you should be able to connect to the VPN.
              Model KR-1
              Question How do I change the SSID on the KR-1?
              Answer Step 1: Open your web browser and type the IP address of the router into the address bar. The default IP address is 192.168.0.1. At the login, enter your username (admin) and password (default password is blank).

              Step 2: Click on the Basic tab and then click on Wireless on the lefthand side.

              Step 3: Next to SSID, type in the new SSID you wish to use.

              The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your Wireless Network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network. The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.

              Step 4: Click on Apply and then click on Continue to save your settings.
              Model KR-1
              Question How do I configure UPnP on the KR-1?
              Answer Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) allows discovery of UPnP enabled devices in a network environment. UPnP is only available on Windows Me and XP. If you are not using either operating system on any of your computers, or do not want to use UPnP, then it is recommended to disable UPnP on the router.

              Click here for more information on UPnP and itīs features.

              Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the wireless router into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Tools tab and then click on Misc. on the lefthand side.

              Step 4: Under the UPnP Settings section, select the Enabled radio button to enable UPnP on the wireless router, or select the Disabled radio button to disable it.

              Step 5: Click on Apply and then click on Continue to save your settings.
              Model KR-1
              Question What can I do if my KR-1 crashes and becomes inaccessible (if using Internet Explorer 6 or below)?
              Answer If your KR-1 crashes and you cannot log into the unit anymore, you may still be able to restore it to complete functionality. To do this, you will need to perform a crash recovery as detailed below.

              Important!!! – This process will not work with Internet Explorer 7. If you are using Internet Explorer 7, please click here to be directed to the appropriate FAQ.

              Note: Before you begin this process, make sure to disconnect any power or ethernet cables from the KR-1. Also, your EV-DO card and any USB cables should be removed.

              Step 1: Download the latest firmware. You can find the latest firmware for the KR-1 here.

              Step 2: Assign a static IP address to the NIC in the computer used for the firmware upgrade of 192.168.0.x (between .2-.25) with a gateway of 192.168.0.1.

              Step 3: Using the tip of a paperclip, press and hold the Reset button while simultaneously plugging in the power supply via the power adapter receptor.

              Step 4: Hold the Reset button for 10 seconds and then release it.

              Note: The Power LED will illuminate green and then the Status LED will blink green, indicating proper connections.

              Step 5: Connect the LAN cable to one of the four LAN ports. The LED of the LAN port you select will illuminate green.

              Step 6: Launch your web browser. An error message may appear. Disregard this message and continue with the steps below.

              Step 7: Enter 192.168.0.1 into the address bar of your web browser. A screen similar to the following should appear.



              Step 8: Click on Browse. A dialogue box will appear prompting you to select the latest firmware version. Select your desired firmware version (the file you downloaded at the start of this FAQ) and click on Open.

              Step 9: Click on Send to send the latest firmware to your Kyocera KR-1 mobile router.

              Note: Please do not click any buttons once the firmware download process has started. Doing so could disrupt the firmware download process and cause your Kyocera KR-1 mobile router to malfunction.

              Your Kyocera KR-1 mobile router and computer may not provide accurate indication of activity. An error screen may appear, but this is normal. Please be patient. The firmware recovery process will take about five to ten minutes. The firmware recovery is complete when the WLAN LED blinks green.

              Step 10: Once the firmware upgrade is complete, be sure to reset your computerīs IP settings to their previous state to function on your network.
              Model KR-1
              Question Which EVDO Phones and EVDO Cards are compatible with my KR-1?
              Answer The following is a list of compatible EVDO Phones and EVDO Cards:

              Note: The following list applies to firmware version RK1.010. and above.

              EVDO Cards
              Audiovox PC5220
              Audiovox PC5740
              Kyocera KPC 650
              Kyocera KPC 680
              Novatel S720
              Novatel U720
              Novatel Merlin V620
              Pantech PX500
              Sierra AC580

              EVDO Phones
              Kyocera KX18
              Samsung A890
              Samsung A920
              Samsung A900
              Sanyo 7500
              Model KR-1
              Question What can I do if my KR-1 crashes and becomes inaccessible (if using Internet Explorer 7)?
              Answer If your KR-1 crashes and you cannot log into the unit anymore, or if the router failed during normal firmware upgrade, you may still be able to restore it to complete functionality. To do this, you will need to perform a crash recovery as detailed below.

              Important!!! – This process should only be used if using Internet Explorer 7. If using any previous versions (IE6 or below), please click here to be directed to the appropriate FAQ.

              Note: Before you begin this process, make sure to disconnect any power or Ethernet cables from the KR-1. Also, your EV-DO card and any USB cables should be removed.

              Step 1: Download the latest firmware and the loader file named KR1-LDR-V1.02-B0007.bix.

              Step 2: Assign a static IP address to the NIC in the computer used for the firmware upgrade of 192.168.0.x (between .2-.25) with a gateway of 192.168.0.1.

              Step 3: Using the tip of a paperclip, press and hold the Reset button while simultaneously plugging in the power supply via the power adapter receptor.

              Step 4: Hold the Reset button for 10 seconds and then release it.

              Note: The Power LED will illuminate green and then the Status LED will blink green, indicating proper connections.

              Step 5: Connect the LAN cable to one of the four LAN ports. The LED of the LAN port you select will illuminate green.

              Step 6: Launch Internet Explorer. An error message may appear. Disregard this message and continue with the steps below.

              Step 7: Enter 192.168.0.1 into the address bar of Internet Explorer. A Firmware Upgrade screen should appear.



              Step 8: Click on Browse. A dialogue box will appear prompting you to select the latest firmware version. Select the loader file named KR1-LDR-V1.02-B0007.bix and click Open.

              Step 9: Click on Send to send the loader file to your Kyocera KR-1 mobile router.

              Note: One of the following two will occur after sending the loader file to your KR-1 router:

              (i) If the screen shows “Upgrade Successful,” the Status LED will illuminate amber. At this time, disconnect the power cable from the back of the router, and repeat Steps 3 and 4 above. Once done, continue on to Step 10 below.
              - OR -
              (ii) If an error message appears, disregard and wait for the router to reboot. Reboot is complete when the WLAN LED blinks green. After reboot, disconnect the power cable from the back of the router, and repeat Steps 3 and 4 above. Once done, continue on to Step 10 below.

              Step 10: Launch Internet Explorer. An error message may appear. Disregard this message and continue with the steps below.

              Step 11: Again, enter 192.168.0.1 into the address bar of Internet Explorer. You will be directed to the “Firmware Upgrade” screen again.

              Step 12: Click on Browse. A dialogue box will appear prompting you to select the latest firmware version. Select the firmware version that you downloaded at the start of this FAQ and click Open.

              Step 13: Click on Send to send the firmware to your Kyocera KR-1 mobile router.

              Note: Please do not click any buttons once the firmware download process has started. Doing so could disrupt the firmware download process and cause your Kyocera KR-1 mobile router to malfunction.

              Your Kyocera KR-1 mobile router and computer may not provide accurate indication of activity. An error screen may appear, but this is normal. Please be patient. The firmware recovery process may take approximately five to ten minutes. The firmware recovery is complete when the router reboots and the WLAN LED blinks green.

              Step 14: Once the firmware upgrade is complete, be sure to reset your computer’s IP settings to their previous state to function on your network.
              Model KVM-121 / KVM-221
              Question What are the hotkeys for my KVM-121 / KVM-221 series switches?
              Answer KVM Hot Key Menu

            • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + 1 : Switches to PC 1 only
            • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + 2 : Switches to PC 2 only
            • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + F1 : Switches to PC1 with audio signal synchronously.
            • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + F2 : Switches to PC2 with audio signal synchronously.
            • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + right arrow : Switches to next PC with audio signal synchronously.
            • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + left arrow : Switches to previous PC with audio signal synchronously.
            • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + B : Enable/Disable Beep.
            • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + M : Resets the mouse and keyboard.
            • Scroll Lock + Scroll Lock + S : Auto-Scan Mode automatically switches between computers every 10 seconds (Monitor Only)
            • Spacebar : Exits Auto Scan Mode.
              • Model KVM-121 / KVM-221
              Question What do I do if my keyboard is not working properly through the KVM-121/221?
              Answer If your keyboard is not functional, not detected, or there is a keyboard error on bootup, check the following:

            • Make sure that the keyboard is properly connected to the KVM-121/221. Check that the purple coated keyboard cable is securely plugged into the correct PS/2 keyboard port (purple colored) and not the PS/2 mouse port (green colored).

            • Verify that the keyboard works when plugged into the computer directly. You will have to shut down your computer first to do this.

            • Read you motherboard documentation and make sure that the PS/2 keyboardīs IRQ is enabled. This can be set for most computers in the BIOS setup.
            • Try using a different keyboard.
              • Model KVM-121 / KVM-221
              Question What do I do if my Audio is not functioning properly through the KVM-121/221?
              Answer If your audio is not functional properly check the following:

            • Make sure the speakers are correctly connected to the KVM-121/221. Check that the green coated audio cable is plugged into the correct audio jack (green colored).

            • Verify that the speaker works when plugged into the computer directly.

            • Try using a different set of speakers.
              • Model KVM-121, KVM-221
              Question What do I do if my mouse is not working properly through the KVM-121/221?
              Answer If your mouse is not functional, not detected, or there is a mouse error on boot-up, check the following:

            • Make sure that the mouse is correctly connected to the KVM-121/221. Check that the green coated mouse cable is plugged into the correct PS/2 mouse port (green colored) and not the PS/2 keyboard port (purple colored).

            • Verify that your mouse works when plugged into the computer directly. You will have to shut down your computer first to do this.

            • Read you motherboard documentation and make sure that the PS/2 mouseīs IRQ is enabled. This can be set for most computers in the BIOS setup.

            • Try a different mouse.

            • If the mouse movement is random when switching between computers, try shutting down your computer and rebooting.

            • Verify that your computer does not have more than one mouse driver installed (check your config.sys and autoexec.bat files for windows) and that you are using the latest mouse driver.

            • If a special mouse is used such as a cordless or scrolling mouse, make sure you use generic PS/2 mouse drivers. A non-standard PS/2 may have extensions on PS/2 protocol that are not supported by the KVM-121/KVM-221.

            • Do not move the mouse or press any mouse buttons when switching from one PC to another.

            • Try resetting the mouse by unplugging it from the KVM-121/221 for about 3 seconds and then reconnect.
              • Model KVM-410
              Question How do I remotely connect to my KVM-410, that is behind a router?
              Answer When connecting to a KVM-410 remotely, that is behind a router, you must open Port 9000 & 9002 in the firewall of the router.

              The default ports on the KVM-410 are 9000 for Windows Client and 9002 for Java Client applications.
              Model KVM-410
              Question What are the minimum hardware and system requirements for my KVM-410?
              Answer The Hardware and System requirements for operating KVM-410 are as follows:

            • Pentium 111 1GHZ processor or equivalent.
            • Screen resolution of 1024 x 768.
            • Browser must support 128 bit data encryption.
            • Broadband internet connection speed of at least 128kbps.
            • For the windows client, DirectX 7.0 or higher.
            • For the Java Client, Sunīs Java 2 (1.4 or higher).
            • For the log server you must have the Microsoft Jet OLEDB 4.0 or higher driver installed.
            • Only non-interlaced video signals at the following resolutions and refresh rates are supported.

              • Model KVM-410
              Question Where can I find the Windows/Java Client Application registration serial number?
              Answer The Windows/Java Client serial number, that is required for registration, can be found attached to the sleeve of the KVM-410 installation CD.
              Model MP-105
              Question How large of a smart media card I can use with the MP-105?
              Answer The MP-105 has 32MB of internal memory. You can use a 16MB or 32MB Smart Media Card to expand your players total memory. You cannot use a Smart Media Card larger than 32MB with the MP-105. Once you format the Smart Media Card with the MP-105, you may not be able to use it with any other device. The way the card is formated by the player is propriatary and may not be undone.

              Note: Songs encoded at 128kbs normally use about 1MB of memory per minute of music. So if your song is 4 minutes long, it will use 4MB of the playerīs memory.
              Model MP-105
              Question Can I record voice files with my MP-105?
              Answer No, the MP-105 does not support voice recording as stated on some of the packaging. It supports downloading and playback of MPeg1 Layer 3 (MP3) files. You cannot transfer songs from the player to back to your computer.
              Model MP-105
              Question Can I format memory in the MP-105 without it connected to the computer?
              Answer No. The MP-105 must be connected to the computer in order to initialize its internal memory.

              Note: You must Initialize the memory before using the player.

              Step 1 Open the MP-105 Manager software by clicking the Program Icon from your desktop, or launch it from your Start Menu.

              Step 2 Click the Initialize button on the right side of the menu.

              Step 3 Select High Quality to format the Internal (or External) memory, Click OK



              Step 4 Once finished you may transfer MP3s to your player.

              Model MP-105 / DMP-90
              Question How do I upload songs from my DMP-90 or MP-105 to my computer?
              Answer The DMP-90 and MP-105 are used to download songs from your computer to the player. You can not take songs from the player and transfer them back to a computer. The MP-105 as well as the DMP-90 are used to store and play MP3 files only.
              Model TM-G5240
              Question What if I am a Macintosh/Apple computer user?
              Answer The CD Wizard is not compatible with a Macintosh computer. Please refer to the userīs manual (pages 10-15) for detailed instructions on this installation.
              Model TM-G5240
              Question How do I run the CD if it does not autorun when inserted into my computerīs CD drive?
              Answer The autorun function of your CD drive may be disabled. Follow the steps below to manually launch the setup wizard:
              • Click on the Start Menu and select Run.
              • When the Run box appears, type in d:/Installation_Wizard.exe (where d is the drive letter of your CD drive).
              • Click on Ok or press the Enter key to run the setup wizard.
              Model TM-G5240
              Question My broadband modem has built-in wireless. How do I setup my TM-G5240 router to work with it?
              Answer Step 1: Run the TM-G5240 router CD and follow the cabling steps. If you have a separate wireless router, replace it and enter existing settings.

              Step 2: Create a new network name, different from that of the broadband modemīs.

              Step 3: Connect all additional cabled computers to the TM-G5240 router and connect laptops wirelessly as well.

              Note: You may experience better performance by setting a different channel or turning off the wireless router feature of your broadband modem.
              Model TM-G5240
              Question Why canīt I wirelessly connect to the router?
              Answer Step 1: Verify the wireless settings on your computer. Make sure the SSID and security settings are the same as on the router.

              Step 2: Change the channel on the router to reduce possible interference (for best results, use either channel 1,6, or 11).

              Step 3: Keep the router at least 3 feet away from electrical devices that generate radio frequency noise (such as cordless phones, microwaves, computer monitors, electric motors, UPS devices, etc.).

              Step 4: Place the router in the most central location in the house. Do not place the wireless router in a closet, cabinet, or garage.
              Model TM-G5240
              Question Why wonīt the telephone cable or coaxial cable connect to my router?
              Answer This router does not function as a modem. Additionally, dial-up internet access will not work with this service. You must have a broadband modem that is supported by your ISP. If you have broadband internet and a Windows PC, run the Installation CD included with this router.
              Model TM-G5240
              Question How can I modify my routerīs settings?
              Answer Login to your router as follows:

              Step 1: Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the router into the address bar (the default IP address is 192.168.0.1. If you have an additional modem or router, the IP address may have been changed to 192.168.24.1).

              Step 2: You will be prompted for your password. Leave the username blank and enter admin as your password (unless you have changed the administrative login, in which case use your current password).

              Note: Please refer to the manual on the CD-ROM included with your router before changing any of the routerīs settings.
              Model TM-G5240
              Question Why canīt I connect to the internet?
              Answer Step 1: Check that the routerīs lights are displaying correctly.
              • Power light is solid green.
              • Internet light is blinking green.
              • The numbered port (any port, 1-4) light that your computer is plugged into is blinking green (data activity) or solid (no activity, but has a good connection).
              Step 2: Confirm that all cables are correct and secure.
              • The modem is plugged into the Internet port of the router.
              • The computer is plugged into one of the numbered port 1-4.
              • The routerīs power adapter is plugged into an electrical outlet.
              Step 3: Power off all equipment (unplug if needed) and power on each device in the following order:
              • Broadband modem
              • Router
              • Computer
              Note: If you have a static WAN IP address, make sure that your computerīs internet settings are set to DHCP for the initial setup. Please refer to the manual for instructions on how to change IP settings.
              Model VDI-604
              Question How do I configure my VDI-604?
              Answer Click on the links below for specific configuration instructions.

              Connect to the Internet: Basic Configuration: Security: Advanced Features: Troubleshooting:
              Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do I configure DMZ on my VDI-604 or VDI-624?
              Answer The DMZ feature allows you to forward all incoming ports to one computer on the local network. The DMZ, or Demilitarized Zone, will allow the specified computer to be exposed to the Internet. DMZ is useful when a certain application or game does not work through the firewall. The computer that is configured for DMZ will be completely vulnerable on the Internet, so it is suggested that you try opening ports from the Virtual Server or Firewall settings before using DMZ.

              You will need to know the IP address of the computer you want to use as the DMZ host.

              How do I find the IP address of my computer?

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-604 or VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.05F/VDI-624 firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • VDI-604 firmware 1.07 Build 28/VDI-624 firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab at the top and then click DMZ on the left side.



              Step 4 Select Enabled and enter the IP address of the computer you want to use as a DMZ host.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the settings.
              • Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do I configure the time settings on my VDI-604 or VDI-624?
              Answer Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol that is used to synchronize computer clock times in a network of computers. In common with similar protocols, NTP uses Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) to synchronize computer clock times to a millisecond, and sometimes to a fraction of a millisecond. This feature is only available on the WAN port.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-604 or VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.05F/VDI-624 firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • VDI-604 firmware 1.07 Build 28/VDI-624 firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab at the top and then click Time on the left.



              Step 4 You will need to set the time zone corresponding to your location.

              Step 5 If you set the time manually, select the date/time and set Daylight Saving (if applicable), click Set Time, click Apply, and then click Continue.

              Step 6 If you have the IP of an NTP server, enter that IP address next to Default NTP Server box, click Apply and then click Continue.

              If you leave the box empty, the router will use its default NTP servers.

              Click here for a list of time servers
              • Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do I configure DDNS on my VDI-604 or VDI-624?
              Answer Dynamic DNS (Domain Name Service) is a method of keeping a domain name linked to a changing (dynamic) IP address. With most Cable and DSL connections, you are assigned a dynamic IP address and that address is used only for the duration of that specific connection. To properly configure the DDNS feature follow the steps below.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • Firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • Firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab at the top and then click DDNS on the left.



              Step 4 Next to DDNS select Enabled and configure the following:
              • Server Address - Select your DDNS service provider
              • Hostname - Enter your host name (i.e. myhost.dyndns.org)
              • Username - Enter your username
              • Password - Enter your password
              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              • Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question What is VCT?
              Answer The Virtual Cable Tester feature verifies the link status on each port. It will determine if link activity is active on each of the ports and also verify if the cable is faulty.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-604 or VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.05F/VDI-624 firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • VDI-604 firmware 1.07 Build 28/VDI-624 firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Tools tab at the top and then click Cable Test on the left side.



              Step 4 This will display the link status for each of the ports. Click More Info for detailed information about each port or Refresh to refresh the link status.
              • Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do I configure Gaming Mode on my VDI-604 or VDI-624?
              Answer Gaming Mode allows a form of pass-through for certain Internet games. If you are using XBOX, Playstation2, or a PC and have problems with your Internet games, make sure you are using the latest version of the firmware and that Gaming Mode is enabled.

              If you are not using an application that requires this type of pass-through, it is recommended that you disable Gaming Mode. Gaming Mode changes the way the gateway inspects the packets destined for your LAN and should be not used unless necessary.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-604 or VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.05F/VDI-624 firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • VDI-604 firmware 1.07 Build 28/VDI-624 firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab at the top and then click Misc. on the left.



              Step 4 Below Gaming Mode select Enabled or Disabled.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              • Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do I configure Static DHCP on my VDI-604 or VDI-624?
              Answer Static DHCP assigns a static IP address to a computer automatically via the DHCP server that is built-in to the router.

              NOTE: When creating a Static DHCP entry, the IP address that you choose to have assigned needs to be in the range of the DHCP scope. Entries created with IP addresses outside of this range will not work.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-604 or VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.05F/VDI-624 firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • VDI-604 firmware 1.07 Build 28/VDI-624 firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab at the top and then click DHCP on the left.



              Step 4 In the Static DHCP section select Enabled and configure the following:
              • Name - Enter a name to identify the computer
              • IP - Enter the IP address you would like this client to always obtain
              • DHCP Client - Select the computer that you would like this rule to apply to and then click Clone.
              Step 5 Click Apply.

              Note: Static DHCP clients will be listed below Static DHCP Client List.




            • How do I configure DHCP server on my VDI-604 or VDI-624?
            • How do I find the MAC/adapter address in Windows 98 or Windows Me?
            • How do I find the MAC/adapter address in Windows NT, 2000 and XP?
            • How do I find the MAC/adapter address in Macintosh?
              • Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do I configure the WAN settings on my VDI-604 or VDI-624?
              Answer The WAN settings should be configured by Verizon personnel only. If you reset the VDI-604 or VDI-624 to factory defaults, you will need to contact Verizon to reconfigure your WAN settings.
              Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do I enable Remote Management on my VDI-604 or VDI-624?
              Answer Remote Management allows the device to be configured through the WAN (Wide Area Network) port from the Internet using a web browser.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-604 or VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.05F/VDI-624 firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • VDI-604 firmware 1.07 Build 28/VDI-624 firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab at the top and then click Admin on the left.

              Step 4 Below Remote Management select Enabled to enable Remote Management. In the IP Address field enter the public IP address you wish to manage the router or * to allow all public IP addresses to manage the router. Select the remote management port next to Port.



              Step 5 Click on Apply and then click Continue to save the changes.

              To manage the router remotely you will need to type in the public IP address of the router in your web browser, along with the Port Number (separated by a colon) you selected in Step 4.

              Example: http://68.53.123.2:8080


            • What is my public IP address?
              • Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do I configure UPnP™ on my VDI-604 or VDI-624?
              Answer Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) allows discovery of UPnP enabled devices in a network environment. UPnP is only available on Windows Me and XP. If you are not using either operating system on any of your computers, or do not want to use UPnP, then it is recommended to disable UPnP on the router.

              Click here for more info on UPnP.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-604 or VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.05F/VDI-624 firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • VDI-604 firmware 1.07 Build 28/VDI-624 firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click Tools at the top and then click Misc. on the left.



              Step 4 Under the UPnP Settings section, select Enabled to enable UPnP, or select Disabled to disable it.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.


            • How do I enable UPnP on my computer?
            • How do I start the required services for UPnP?
              • Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do I configure DHCP server on my VDI-604 or VDI-624?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-604 or VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.05F/VDI-624 firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • VDI-604 firmware 1.07 Build 28/VDI-624 firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab at the top and then click DHCP on the left.



              Note: If you are connecting to a DHCP server, the DHCP server on the wireless router should be set to Disabled.

              Step 4 By default, DHCP Server is set to Enabled. To disable it, select Disabled. To enable it, select Enabled.

              Step 5 Enter the Starting IP Address and Ending IP Address. To change the lease time, select a value from the drop-down list next to Lease Time.

              Note: The value for Starting IP Address must be less than the value for Ending IP Address.

              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.


            • How do I configure Static DHCP on my VDI-604 or VDI-624?
              • Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do I open a range of ports on my VDI-604 or VDI-624 using firewall rules?
              Answer Step 1 You will need the IP address of the computer that you want to open ports to.

              How do I find the IP address of my computer?

              Step 2 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-604 or VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 3 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.05F/VDI-624 firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • VDI-604 firmware 1.07 Build 28/VDI-624 firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 4 Click the Advanced tab at the top and then click Firewall on the left.



              Step 5 Select Enabled and configure the following:
              • Name - Enter a name to identify the rule
              • Action - Select Allow
              • Source Interface - Select WAN
              • Source IP Range Start - Enter an IP address or * to allow this rule to apply to all incoming IP addresses. If you are opening this rule to a series of IP addresses, enter the first IP address in the range.
              • Source IP Range End - If you are opening this rule to a series of IP addresses, enter the last IP address in the range.
              • Destination Interface - Select LAN
              • Destination IP Range Start - Enter the IP address that you obtained in Step 1
              • Protocol - Select the protocol (TCP, UDP, or Both)
              • Port Range - Enter the starting and ending ports that you want to open
              • Schedule - Select Always to apply this rule all the time or Schedule to specify a schedule
              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue to apply the new rule.


            • What is DMZ?
            • What is Virtual Server?
              • Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do I downgrade to VDI firmware if I upgraded the firmware on my VDI-604 or VDI-624 to DI-604 or DI-624 firmware?
              Answer If you upgraded the firmware on your VDI-604 or VDI-624 to DI-604 or DI-624 firmware, you will need to downgrade to VDI firmware version 1.05F (VDI-604) or 2.39DDM (VDI-624), and then upgrade to the latest version of VDI firmware.

              Click here for step-by-step instructions on upgrading the firmware on your VDI-604 or VDI-624.
              Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do I find the MAC address on my VDI-604 or VDI-624?
              Answer The MAC address is listed on the label located on the bottom of the router, below the serial number.



              The LAN and WAN MAC address can be obtained by logging into the web-based configuration of the wireless router. Follow the steps below for this method.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-604 or VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.05F/VDI-624 firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • VDI-604 firmware 1.07 Build 28/VDI-624 firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Status tab at the top and then click Device Info on the left.

              This page will list the LAN and WAN MAC addresses.




            • What is a MAC address?
              • Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do I change the administrative/user password on my VDI-604 or VDI-624?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-604 or VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.05F/VDI-624 firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • VDI-604 firmware 1.07 Build 28/VDI-624 firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab at the top and then click Admin on the left.



              Step 4 To change the administrative password, enter a new password in the Admin section.

              To change the user password, enter a new password in the User section.

              Step 5 Click Apply then click Continue to save the settings.
              • Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do I change the LAN IP address on my VDI-604 or VDI-624?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-604 or VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.05F/VDI-624 firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • VDI-604 firmware 1.07 Build 28/VDI-624 firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Home tab at the top and then click LAN on the left.



              Step 4 Next to IP Address enter the new IP address. Next to Subnet Mask enter the correct subnet mask for the IP address entered. Enter a Local Domain Name (if applicable).

              Step 5 Below DNS Relay select Enabled to enable it or Disabled to disable it.

              When DNS relay is enabled, the router assigns the clients itīs IP address as their DNS server. The router accepts all of the DNS requests and then relays them to the real DNS servers on the Internet.

              When this option is disabled, the DNS servers assigned by the ISP are assigned to the clients and then any DNS requests are sent directly to the servers.

              Step 6 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the settings.
              • Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do configure the parental control feature on my VDI-604 or VDI-624?
              Answer The following types of parental control can be configured on the VDI-604/VDI-624:

            • Domain Blocking
            • URL Blocking


              Domain Blocking

              Domain Blocking will allow/deny access to certain websites.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-604 or VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.05F/VDI-624 firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • VDI-604 firmware 1.07 Build 28/VDI-624 firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab at the top and then click Parental Control on the left.



              Step 4 Below Parental Filters, select Domain Blocking.

              Step 5 Below Domain Blocking, select Allow users to access all domains except "Blocked Domains" to only allow to all websites except those listed or select Deny users to access all domains except "Permitted Domains" to only allow access to the websites listed.

              Step 6 Enter the website (i.e. disney.com) below the option you selected in Step 5 and then click Apply.


              URL Blocking

              URL Blocking will prohibit access to websites than contain certain words.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-604 or VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.05F/VDI-624 firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • VDI-604 firmware 1.07 Build 28/VDI-624 firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab at the top and then click Parental Control on the left.



              Step 4 Below Parental Filters, select URL Blocking.

              Step 5 Below URL Blocking, select Enabled, enter the word, and then click Apply.
              • Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do I reset my VDI-604 or VDI-624 to factory defaults?
              Answer The following reset procedure will completely restore the default settings on the VDI-604 and VDI-624.

              Note: If you do not remember your password, you will have to reset the router to factory defaults.

              Step 1 Locate the reset pinhole on the back of the unit.

              Step 2 With the unit powered on, press and hold the Reset button.

              Step 3 Hold the Reset button for about 10 seconds.

              Step 4 Release the Reset button.

              Step 5 The unit will reboot. Allow 20-30 seconds before reconnecting.

              Step 6 The device is now at factory defaults.

              Note: Do not recycle power during the reset procedure.

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.05F/VDI-624 firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.07 Build 28/VDI-624 firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Note: After resetting the router to factory defaults, you will need to contact Verizon to reconfigure your WAN settings.
              • Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question Why am I not able to login to the web-based configuration of my VDI-604 or VDI-624 after upgrading to the latest version of firmware?
              Answer If you upgraded from firmware version 1.05F on the VDI-604 or 2.39DDM on the VDI-624 to the latest version of firmware, the password has changed. The default username is still admin, but the default password is now password instead of blank (nothing).

              If you are still unable to access the web-based configuration, you will need to reset the unit to factory defaults. Click here for step-by-step instructions on resetting your VDI-604 or VDI-624 to factory defaults.
              Model VDI-604 / VDI-624
              Question How do I upgrade the firmware on my VDI-604 or VDI-624?
              Answer Step 1 Download the latest firmware.

            • Click here to download the latest firmware for the VDI-604
            • Click here to download the latest firmware for the VDI-624

              Step 2 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-604 or VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 3 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • VDI-604 firmware 1.05F/VDI-624 firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • VDI-604 firmware 1.07 Build 28/VDI-624 firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 4 Click on the Tools tab at the top and then click Firmware on the left side.



              Step 5 Click Browse and navigate to the .bin file you downloaded in Step 1. Select the file and then click Open.

              Step 6 Click Apply. It may take a up to 30 seconds for the firmware upgrade to complete.

              Step 7 When prompted click Continue. The firmware upgrade is now completed.

              Step 8 If you get a Page cannot be displayed or similar error after clicking Continue, close the web browser and re-open it. Repeat Step 2 to login to the web-based configuration.


            • Why am I not able to login to the web-based configuration of my VDI-604 or VDI-624 after upgrading to the latest version of firmware?
              • Model VDI-624
              Question How do I change the preamble on my VDI-624?
              Answer It is recommended to configure the preamble on your VDI-624 before your wireless adapters. You may need to set the preamble on all wireless clients.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • Firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • Firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab at the top and then click Performance on the left.



              Step 4 Select Short Preamble or Long Preamble next to Preamble Type. If you experience lock-ups when transferring large files, then select Short Preamble. You must also match your other wireless devices with the same preamble setting.

              Note: The preamble defines the length of the CRC block for communication between the wireless access point and the roaming wireless network adapters. CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is a common technique for detecting data transmission errors.

              High network traffic areas should use Short preamble.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              • Model VDI-624
              Question How do I enable Super G™ Mode on my VDI-624?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • Firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • Firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab at the top and then click Performance on the left.



              Step 4 Next to Super G Mode, select one of the following modes:
              • Disabled
              • Super G without Turbo
              • Super G with Dynamic Turbo
              • Super G with Static Turbo
              Which mode should I use?

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.


            • What is Super G Mode?
              • Model VDI-624
              Question What is Super G™ Mode?
              Answer Super G Mode is a group of performance enhancement features that increase the end user application throughput in an 802.11b/g network. These features include:
              • Dynamic Packet Bursting
              • Fast Frames
              • Hardware Compression and Encryption
              • Multi-channel 108 Mbps Turbo Mode
              These four capabilities operate independently to enhance the throughput of a network in different ways.

              Actual performance will vary according to the network environment, but the actual delivered performance should be significantly better than designs that implement any single performance feature, such as bursting-only. Super G are supported in chipsets that are fully interoperable with other 802.11a, b, or g products. The features operate transparently to the user, the network, and the operating system, providing increased network and device performance on demand. A wireless node can communicate on a link-by-link basis with both products that support and that do not support these features.

              Packet Bursting
              Packet bursting is a transmission technique supported by the draft 802.11e QoS specification. The advantage of packet bursting is that it can increase throughput when communicating with 802.11a, 802.11b, and 802.11g standards-compliant devices. Packet bursting increases the throughput of any 802.11b or 802.11g link by reducing the overhead associated with the wireless transmission. In a standard transmission, transmissions are separated by a Distributed Interframe Space (DIFS) time period, after which all products must contend for the wireless medium. After a successful data transmission, this process repeats. In a burst transmission, the interframe spacing is reduced and a new data frame is sent immediately. The overhead of contending for the medium and the interframe space is reduced.

              Fast Frames
              Fast frames, also referred to as dynamic transmit optimizations, enhance data throughput by increasing the number of bits sent per data frame and accelerating the timing of the data frame. Packet bursting enables more packets to be sent in a given amount of time by changing the transmission and contention algorithms. Fast frames operate by changing the algorithms that determine how the actual data frame is structured. The fast frames effect is additive to the packet bursting effect. Note that most others’ bursting implementations do not provide for fast frames. The fast frames technique is also based on the 802.11e draft standard and is permitted by the PLCP header compliance that is now required by all Wi-Fi testing. One component of fast frames is aggregating multiple packets within an 802.11 frame instead of sending only a single 1500 byte Ethernet packet within each 802.11 frame. This technique doubles the number of bits sent during each frame. Because fast frames function within existing timing parameters and do not interfere with frame spacing, timing, or contention window parameters, this technique scales better for more networks than bursting alone.

              Data Compression and Encryption
              Full hardware data compression and encryption engines are embedded in Super G/AG hardware. The hardware data compression engine implements the royalty-free Lempel Ziv algorithm that is used in popular programs such as Pkzip, Winzip, and the Windows OS. This engine compresses prior to transmission and decompresses it after reception. The obvious effect is to increase the data throughput of the compressed link. The less obvious one is that, because a compressed link requires less airtime to transmit its packet, the effective throughput of other links in the network is increased because they now have more airtime.

              Turbo Mode
              The multi-channel 108Mbps Turbo Mode capability operates by using the spectrum offered by two radio channels to overcome the RF physics limitations of Shannon’s Limit, which dictates the number of bits that may be transmitted per MHz of spectrum. The data rate doubling is the most obvious effect of using multiple radio channels. By providing an optional capability that uses multiple radio channels simultaneously, Super G Turbo mode can double the data rates offered by any single radio channel techniques. The multi-channel mode give multi-channel devices high bandwidth on demand, but also to check for and fall back to single-channel operation if necessary because of the presence of legacy devices.

              When Turbo mode is set to enabled, Channel 6 is used and cannot be changed to any other channels.

              Note: Ad-hoc is not currently supported in multi-channel mode.
                Dynamic Turbo
              • Backwards compatible with non-Turbo (legacy) devices
              • Turbo mode only enabled when all nodes on the wireless network is Super G with Turbo enabled
              • Occasionally drops down from Turbo mode to 11g mode to allow association of legacy devices.
              • Any wireless device on network not Turbo capable causes entire network not to be Turbo capable.

                Static Turbo
              • Not backwards compatible with non-Turbo (legacy) devices
              • Turbo mode is always on
              • Only Turbo mode devices can talk to each other, meaning all devices must be set to Turbo.

            • How do I enable Super G™ mode on my VDI-624?
            • What D-Link products are compatible with Super G™ and Super AG™?
              • Model VDI-624
              Question Why canīt I change the wireless channel on my VDI-624?
              Answer If you cannot change the wireless channel of your VDI-624 (set to channel 6), this means that Super G™ is enabled. Super G will always be set to channel 6 but it actually uses most of the channel range between 1 and 11, which allows increased bandwidth. If you do not want to use Super G, then disable it and this will allow you to use a specific channel.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • Firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • Firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab at the top and then click Performance on the left.



              Step 4 Next to Super G Mode, select Disabled.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              • Model VDI-624
              Question How do I configure the wireless security settings on my VDI-624?
              Answer The VDI-624 supports the following methods of wireless security:

            • WEP (Open/Shared Key)
            • WPA (RADIUS Server)
            • WPA-PSK (Pre-shared Key)


              WEP (Open/Shared Key)

              What is WEP?

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • Firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • Firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click Wireless on the left side.



              Step 4 Next to Authentication select Open System or Shared Key.
              • Open System - All wireless clients can communicate with each other
              • Shared Key - Only wireless clients with the same encryption key can communicate with each other
              Step 5 Configure the following:
              • WEP - Select Enabled
              • WEP Encryption - Select 64Bit or 128Bit
                • 64Bit - 10 characters
                • 128Bit - 26 characters
              • Key Type - Select HEX or ASCII
                • HEX - 0-9 and A-F are valid characters. For example, A4583DFF1A (64-bit HEX key).
                • ASCII - 128 decimal numbers ranging from zero through 127 assigned to letters, numbers, punctuation marks, and the most common special characters.
              • Key1-4 - Select one of the keys numbers (1-4) and enter the encryption key in that field. The encryption key must contain characters that reflect the Key Type that you selected.
              Step 6 Click Apply to save the encryption settings.


              WPA (RADIUS Server)

              What is WPA?

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • Firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • Firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click Wireless on the left side.



              Step 4 Below 802.1X configure the following:
              • RADIUS Server 1 IP - Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server
              • Port - Enter the port number of the RADIUS server (default is 1812)
              • Shared Secret - Enter the encryption key
              Repeat for RADIUS Server 2 if applicable.

              Step 5 Click Apply to save the encryption settings.


              WPA-PSK (Pre-shared Key)

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • Firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • Firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click Wireless on the left side.



              Step 4 Next to Authentication select WPA-PSK, enter the passphrase, and confirm it.

              Step 5 Click Apply to save the encryption settings.


            • How do I configure WPA-PSK on my wireless card using the Microsoft XP Utility?
            • How do I enable encryption on my D-Link adapters?
            • How do I enable encryption using Windows XPīs Wireless Zero Configuration utility?
            • Where do I get the encryption key on my D-Link wireless device?
              • Model VDI-624
              Question How do I configure my VDI-624?
              Answer Click on the links below for specific configuration instructions.

              Connect to the Internet: Basic Configuration: Security: Wireless Settings: Advanced Features: Troubleshooting:
              Model VDI-624
              Question How do I disable the wireless feature on my VDI-624?
              Answer It is recommended to disable the wireless feature of the VDI-624 if you are not connecting to it wireless.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • Firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • Firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click Wireless on the left side.



              Step 4 Next to Wireless Radio select Off.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              • Model VDI-624
              Question How do I disable SSID broadcast on my VDI-624?
              Answer In a home network, the SSID broadcast feature serves no useful purpose. You should disable this feature to improve the security of your wireless network. You will need to manually configure your wireless clients with the same SSID as your access point or wireless router.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • Firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • Firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Advanced tab at the top and then click Performance on the left side.



              Step 4 Next to SSID Broadcast select Disabled.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              • Model VDI-624
              Question How do I change the SSID on my VDI-624?
              Answer The SSID (Service Set Identifier) is the workgroup name of your wireless network. All devices (access points, wireless routers, and wireless adapters) must have the same SSID to communicate on the Wireless Network.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the VDI-624 in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username and password is listed below for your version of firmware:

            • Firmware 2.39DDM - The default username is admin and the default password is blank (nothing).
            • Firmware 2.43 Build 12 - The default username is admin and the default password is password.

              Click OK.

              Step 3 Click Wireless on the left side.



              Step 4 Next to SSID enter a new SSID.

              Note: The SSID can be up to 32 numbers, letters, spaces, and dashes. Also, the SSID is case-sensitive.

              Step 5 Click Apply and then click Continue to save the new settings.
              • Model VTA-VR
              Question How do I set a static IP for my VTA-VR?
              Answer Step 1 To access this utility, you need to obtain the IP address of the VTA.

              By default, the VTA telephone adapter automatically obtains an IP address from your DHCP enabled router or DHCP server. If you do not have DHCP enabled, the IP address will automatically be set to 192.168.15.254.

              Note: If you do have DHCP disabled, you must use a 192.168.15.x network or statically assign the IP address of a computer to 192.168.15.x (where x is between 1 and 253).

              Step 2 Open a web browser, such as Internet Explorer, and enter the IP address of the VTA adapter.

              Step 3 Enter user for the username and your password (default password is user) and then click the Login button.



              Note: It is recommended to change your password for security reasons.

              Step 4 Click the radio button, next to Static IP Address.

              Enter the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway address you would like to assign to the VTA, in the proper field.



              Note: The default gateway address must be the IP address of your router or gateway.
              Model WBR-1310
              Question I canīt connect to my wireless network, what are some basic troubleshooting steps to try?
              Answer The position of the antenna can affect signal strength and reliability. There is a cone-shaped zone of very little reception that eminates longitudinaly from each end of the dipole antenna. The effective signal eminates from the antenna in the shape of a torus or doughnut, with the antennaīs long axis through the hole of no signal.

              Move the antennas of the access point or wireless router into an L shape (one vertically, and one horizontally). Also try positioning the antennas horizontally or perpendicularly to the walls and floor. The click on the Refresh button on the Site Survey screen. If the computer still does not see the Access Point (or wireless router). Then try moving your Access Point closer to the Computer or vice-versa. Then click on the Refresh button again. If the computer does not see the Access Point still, then try moving the computer so it is not flush with the wall. Try moving the Access Point closer to the ceiling and further from the walls.

              Move or relocate all items away from the router that may cause interference with the wireless signal, such as mirrors, metal desks, fish tanks, air conditioners, refrigerators, stacks or rolls of paper, metal pipes or water heaters, metal screens or meshes, human bodies, solid wood, or other electronic equipment. Do not place the wireless router on a box of computer paper, or on a metal desk.

              Open the D-Link Wireless Utility, and select Site Survey. Select the Wireless Network you wish to connect to and then select the Connect button.

                If you still cannot get a wireless connection power cycle the network:
              1. Turn the Computer off
              2. Turn the Access Point (or wireless router) off
              3. Turn the Access Point on
              4. Wait 30 seconds
              5. Turn Computer back on
              If you do not see your configuration here please visit these other FAQs:

              How do I connect my DWL-520+/DWL-650+ to a wireless network?

              How do I configure the DWL-520+ and DWL-650+ using the Zero Configuration utility built into Windows XP?
              Model WBR-1310 / WBR-2310 / EBR-2310 / WBR-1310_revB / WBR-1310_revD
              Question How can I view the activity occuring on my EBR/WBR series router?
              Answer The activity log displays the activities occurring on the EBR/WBR series routers.

              Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the EBR/WBR series router into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Status tab at the top and then click on Logs on the lefthand side. From this screen, you will see all the activities occuring on your router.

              Model WBR-1310 / WBR-2310 / EBR-2310 / WBR-1310_revB / WBR-1310_revD
              Question How do I create schedules on my EBR/WBR series router?
              Answer The schedule configuration option is used to manage schedule rules for various firewall and parental control features. This will allow you to set a time restriction on when firewire filters will take effect.

              Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the EBR/WBR series router into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Tools tab at the top and then click on Schedule on the lefthand side.



              Step 4: Configure the following:
              • Name - Give your schedule a name
              • Day(s) - Check the box for All Week or select the desired time frame.
              • All Day 24hrs - Enabling this will have the rule active for a period of 24hrs.
              • Start and End time - If 24hrs is not checked you will need to configure your start and end time.
              Step 5: Click on Save Settings to save your configuration.
              Model WBR-1310 / WBR-2310 / EBR-2310 / WBR-1310_revB / WBR-1310_revD
              Question How do I upgrade my firmware on my EBR/WBR series router?
              Answer Step 1: Download the latest firmware.

              Click here for step-by-step instructions for downloading firmware.

              Step 2: Once youīve downloaded the firmware, open a web browser such as Internet Explorer or Netscape and enter the IP address of your router (192.168.0.1).

              Step 3: Enter your username (admin) and your password (leave the field blank). Click on OK to enter the web configuration for the device.

              Step 4: Click on the Tools tab and then click on Firmware on the lefthand side. Click on the Browse button and browse to the .bin (or .dlf) file you downloaded in Step 1. Highlight the file by clicking on it once and click on Open.



              Step 5: Click on Save Settings to upgrade firmware. It may take a up to 30 seconds for the upgrade to complete. Click on Continue when it appears. The firmware is now upgraded.



              To download the latest firmware, follow the instructions below:

              Step 1: Visit http://support.dlink.com. Select your product from the dropdown menu and then click on Go!.



              Step 2: You may be prompted to select a revision. The revision is listed on the bottom of the unit next to H/W:. Click on the revision that applies to you.

              Step 3: In the center of the screen, click on the Download Now button next to the firmware version you want.



              Step 4: Make sure you remember the name of the file. Click on Save.



              Step 5: Next to Save in, click the down-arrow and select Desktop. Click on Save. The file will be saved to your desktop.



              Step 6: Once the file is downloaded, click on Close. Do not open or try to run this file as your computer will not be able to do this.



              Step 7: Connect your computer to the device you want to upgrade (if not already connected).

              Click here to continue the upgrade procedure (continue with Step 2 at the top).
              Model WBR-1310 / WBR-2310 / WBR-1310_revB / WBR-1310_revD
              Question How do I enable WEP encryption on my WBR series router?
              Answer WEP is a good security measure to implement on your wireless network to keep intruders out. However, if your wireless adapter supports it WPA is a stronger form of encryption.

              You can find information on configuring your WBR router for WPA-PSK here

              Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the WBR series router into the address bar (default is http://192.168.0.1).

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Setup tab at the top and then click on Wireless Settings on the lefthand side.



              Step 4: From the Wireless Security Mode dropdown menu, select WEP encryption. WEP is the wireless encryption standard. To use it you must enter the same key(s) into the router and all wireless clients you wish to connect.

              For 64 bit keys you must enter 10 hex digits into each key box. For 128 bit keys you must enter 26 hex digits into each key box. A hex digit is either a number from 0 to 9 or a letter from A to F. For the most secure use of WEP set the authentication type to Shared Key when WEP is enabled.

              You may also enter any text string into a WEP key box, in which case it will be converted into a hexadecimal key using the ASCII values of the characters. A maximum of 5 text characters can be entered for 64 bit keys, and a maximum of 13 characters for 128 bit keys.

              Step 5: Click on Save Settings to save your settings.
              Model WBR-1310 / WBR-2310 / WBR-1310_revB / WBR-1310_revD
              Question How do I change the LAN IP address of a WBR series router?
              Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the WBR router into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Setup tab along the top and then click on Network Settings on the lefthand side.



              Step 4: Under Routing Settings, type in the routerīs new IP address and default subnet mask. The IP Address that is configured here is the IP Address that you use to access the Web-based management interface. If you change the IP Address here, you may need to adjust your PCīs network settings to access the network again.

              Step 5: Click on the Save Settings button to save your settings.
              Model WBR-1310 / WBR-2310 / WBR-1310_revB / WBR-1310_revD
              Question How do I open ports for a WBR series routers?
              Answer To allow traffic from the internet to enter your local network, you will need to open up ports or the router will block the request.

              Because our routers use NAT (Network Address Translation), you can only open a specific port or ports to one computer at a time. For example: If you have 2 web servers on your network, you cannot open port 80 to both computers. You will need to configure 1 of the web servers to use port 81 (or any other non-80 port). Now you can open port 80 to the first computer and then open port 81 to the other computer.

              Step 1 Open a web browser and type the IP address of the WBR router into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

              Step 2 The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3 Click on the Advanced tab along the top and then click on Port Forwarding on the lefthand side.



              Step 4 Check the box beside the port forwarding rule you wish to use; doing so will save your virtual server entry when the Save Settings button is applied. Check the Application Name drop down menu for a list of pre-defined applications that you can select from. If you select one of the pre-defined applications, click on the arrow button next to the dropdown menu to auto-fill the appropriate fields.

              Step 5 Select your computer from the list of DHCP clients in the Computer Name drop down menu or manually enter the IP address of the computer you would like to open the specified port to.

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Step 6 Select the port or port range you desire. This feature allows you to open a range of ports to a computer on your network. To do so, enter the first port in the range you would like to open in the Start field and last port of the range in the End field. To open a single port using this feature, simply enter the same number in both the Start and End fields.

              Step 7 Click on the Save Settings button to save your changes.

              Model WBR-1310 / WBR-2310 / WBR-1310_revB / WBR-1310_revD
              Question How do I configure MAC filtering on a WBR series router?
              Answer The MAC (Media Access Controller) Address filter option is used to control network access based on the MAC Address of the network adapter. A MAC address is a unique ID assigned by the manufacturer of the network adapter. This feature can be configured to ALLOW or DENY network/Internet access.

              Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the WBR series into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Advanced tab along the top and then on Network Filter on the lefthand side.



              Step 4: From the Configure MAC Filtering drop down selection select your method of MAC filtering.
              • Turn MAC Filtering OFF
              • MAC Filtering ON and ALLOW computers listed to access the network.
              • MAC Filtering ON and DENY computers listed to access the network
              Step 5: Select your computer from the DHCP Client List dropdown or you can enter your computerīs MAC address manually.

              How do I find the MAC/Adapter Address in Windows NT, 2000 and XP?

              Step 6: Click Save Settings to save your settings.
              Model WBR-1310 / WBR-2310 / WBR-1310_revB / WBR-1310_revD
              Question How do I enable DMZ on a WBR series router?
              Answer The DMZ (Demilitarized Zone) provides you with an option to set a single computer on your network outside of the routerīs firewall. If you have a computer that cannot run internet applications successfully from behind the router then you can place the computer into the DMZ for unrestricted Internet access.

              Note: Putting a computer in the DMZ may expose that computer to a variety of security risks. Use of this option is only recommended as a last resort.

              Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the WBR series router into the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1).

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Advanced tab at the top and then click on Firewall Settings on the lefthand side.



              Step 4: Click the box for Enable DMZ Host. Select your computer from the Computer Name list or enter the IP address manually.

              How can I find the IP address of my computer?

              Step 5: Click on the Save Settings button to save your settings.

              Model WBR-1310_revD / WBR-1310_revB / WBR-1310
              Question How do I set an administrative password on my WBR series router?
              Answer Step 1 Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2 The default username is admin and the password is blank (nothing). Click OK.

              Step 3 Click the Tools tab and then click Admin to the left.



              Step 4 To change the administrative password, enter a new password in the Admin Password section.

              Step 5 Click Save Settings to save the settings.
              Model WBR-2310
              Question How do I set an administrative password on my WBR series router?
              Answer Step 1: Open a web browser and enter the IP address of the router in the address bar (default is 192.168.0.1). Press Enter.

              Step 2: The default username is admin and no password (blank).

              Step 3: Click the Tools tab and then click Admin to the left.



              Step 4: Enter a new password in the Admin Password section.

              Step 5: Click Save Settings.

              D-Link suggests setting a user password to limit access to the device.

              Model WBR-2310 / WBR-1310 / WBR-1310_revB / WBR-1310_revD
              Question How do I enable WPA-PSK security on my WBR series router?
              Answer WPA is a strong form of wireless encryption, however not all wireless adapters support this feature. If your wireless adapter does not support WPA you will want to use WEP to secure your wireless network.

              You can find information on configuring your WBR router for WEP here

              Step 1: Open a web browser and type the IP address of the WBR series router into the address bar (default is http://192.168.0.1).

              Step 2: The default username is admin (all lower case) and the default password is blank (nothing). Click on OK.

              Step 3: Click on the Setup tab at the top and then click on Wireless Settings on the lefthand side.



              Step 4: Select the type of WPA encryption you would like to use with your wireless adapters from the Security Mode dropdown menu. Note: Your wireless adapters must support the form of WPA encryption you select.

              Step 5: In the WPA Personal section, configure the following:

              • Select the Cipher Type
              • Select the PSK or EAP
              • Enter your Passphrase
              • Re-Enter your Passphrase


              Step 6: Click the Save Settings button to save your settings.
              Model WUA-2340 / DWL-AG132 / DWL-AG530 / DWL-AG660 / DWL-G120 / DWL-G122 / DWL-G132 / DWL-G510 / DWL-G520 / DWL-G520M / DWL-G550 / DWL-G630 / DWL-G650 / DWL-G650M / DWL-G680 / WDA-1320 / WDA-2320 / WNA-1330 / WNA-2330 / WUA-1340 / WUA-2340
              Question How do I tell if my adapter is installed properly in Windows XP?
              Answer Step 1 Right click My Computer.

              Step 2 Select Manage

              Step 3 Click the Device Manager under the System Tools section in the left panel.

              Step 4 In the right panel, expand the Network Adapters section.

              Your adapter should show up by name. (ex D-Link DFE-530TX+)

              If there is a problem with installation, the device will display as an Ethernet Controller, Network Controller, Unknown device, or will not be listed at all.